Konica Bizhub Press C7000-C7000p-C70hc-C6000 PDF

SERVICE MANUAL
Date: 2011/04/22
Table of Contents
Revision List...........................................................................................................................................1
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 Ver. 2.0.......................................................................................................1
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 Ver. 3.0.......................................................................................................3
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING .....................................................................................A -1

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS.............................................................................................................A -1
1. OUTLINE....................................................................................................................................................................A -2
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE................................................................................................................................................A -3
3. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION.........................................................................A -4
3.1 Descriptions in the service manual...........................................................................................................................................A -4
3.2 Descriptions for safety and important warning items................................................................................................................A -4
4. SAFETY WARNINGS.................................................................................................................................................A -5
4.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.....................................A -5
4.1.1 Outline............................................................................................................................................................................A -5
4.1.2 Prohibited Actions..........................................................................................................................................................A -5
4.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION....................................................................................................................................................A -6
4.2.1 Outline............................................................................................................................................................................A -6
4.2.2 Power Cord Set or Power Plug......................................................................................................................................A -6
4.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE..................................................................................................A -7
4.3.1 Outline............................................................................................................................................................................A -7
4.3.2 Power Supply.................................................................................................................................................................A -7
4.3.3 Installation Requirements...............................................................................................................................................A -9
4.3.4 Servicing.......................................................................................................................................................................A -10
4.3.5 Fuse.............................................................................................................................................................................A -14
4.3.6 Used Batteries Precautions..........................................................................................................................................A -14
5. SAFETY INFORMATION.........................................................................................................................................A -16

5.1 IMPORTANT NOTICE............................................................................................................................................................A -16
5.2 INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE..................................................................................................................A -16
6. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT..............................................................................................A -24
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS ...............................................................................................B -1

1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL ........................................................................................................B -1
2. PRODUCT NAME .....................................................................................................................................................B -2
3. TRADEMARK ............................................................................................................................................................B -3
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES .............................................................................................................................B -3
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS ..............................................................................................................................................................B -3
4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS ......................................................................................................................B -4

5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION .......................................................................................................................................B -6
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................C -1

1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 ..........................................................................................................C -1
1.1 Type ........................................................................................................................................................................................C -1
1.2 Functions .................................................................................................................................................................................C -1
1.3 Paper .......................................................................................................................................................................................C -2
(1) Paper weight .....................................................................................................................................................................C -2
(2) Type of paper ....................................................................................................................................................................C -2
1.4 Recommended paper...............................................................................................................................................................C -2
1.4.1 Inch................................................................................................................................................................................C -2
1.4.2 Metric.............................................................................................................................................................................C -2
1.5 Materials ..................................................................................................................................................................................C -3
1.6 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................................................C -3
1.7 Machine data ...........................................................................................................................................................................C -4
1.8 Operating environment ............................................................................................................................................................C -4
1.9 Note regarding the specifications ............................................................................................................................................C -4
2. DF-622 ......................................................................................................................................................................C -5
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Type ........................................................................................................................................................................................C -5
Functions .................................................................................................................................................................................C -5
Type of paper ..........................................................................................................................................................................C -5
Machine data ...........................................................................................................................................................................C -5
Operating environment ............................................................................................................................................................C -5
Note regarding the specifications ............................................................................................................................................C -5
3. PF-602 ......................................................................................................................................................................C -6
3.1 Type ........................................................................................................................................................................................C -6
3.2 Functions .................................................................................................................................................................................C -6
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Type of paper ..........................................................................................................................................................................C -6

Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................................................C -6
Machine data ...........................................................................................................................................................................C -6
4. HT-504/505 ...............................................................................................................................................................C -7
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Type ........................................................................................................................................................................................C -7
Machine data ...........................................................................................................................................................................C -7
5. LU-202 ......................................................................................................................................................................C -8
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
Type ........................................................................................................................................................................................C -8
Functions .................................................................................................................................................................................C -8
Type of paper ..........................................................................................................................................................................C -8
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................................................C -8
Machine data ...........................................................................................................................................................................C -8
6. HT-503 ......................................................................................................................................................................C -9
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Type ........................................................................................................................................................................................C -9
Machine data ...........................................................................................................................................................................C -9
7. MB-504 ....................................................................................................................................................................C -10

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
Type ......................................................................................................................................................................................C -10

Functions ...............................................................................................................................................................................C -10
Type of paper ........................................................................................................................................................................C -10
Machine data .........................................................................................................................................................................C -10
Operating environment ..........................................................................................................................................................C -10
Note regarding the specifications ..........................................................................................................................................C -10
8. HD-514 ....................................................................................................................................................................C -11

8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
Type ......................................................................................................................................................................................C -11

Functions ...............................................................................................................................................................................C -11
Machine data .........................................................................................................................................................................C -11
9. PH-102 ....................................................................................................................................................................C -12

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
Type ......................................................................................................................................................................................C -12

Functions ...............................................................................................................................................................................C -12
Machine data .........................................................................................................................................................................C -12
10. RU-509 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -13

10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -13

Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -13
Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -13
Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -13
Operating environment ........................................................................................................................................................C -13
Note regarding the specifications ........................................................................................................................................C -13
11. HM-102 .................................................................................................................................................................C -14

11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -14

Function ...............................................................................................................................................................................C -14
Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -14
Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -14
12. FS-521 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -15

12.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -15
12.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -15
(1) Function...........................................................................................................................................................................C -15
(2) Number of staple sheets .................................................................................................................................................C -15
(3) Staple position ................................................................................................................................................................C -15
(4) Maximum tray capacity of the main tray .........................................................................................................................C -15
(5) Maximum tray capacity of the sub tray ...........................................................................................................................C -16
12.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -17
(1) Staple ..............................................................................................................................................................................C -17
12.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -17
12.5 Operating environment ........................................................................................................................................................C -17
ii
12.6 Note regarding the specifications ........................................................................................................................................C -17
13. FS-531 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -18

13.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -18
13.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -18
(1) Functions ........................................................................................................................................................................C -18
(2) Staple ..............................................................................................................................................................................C -18
(3) Maximum tray capacity ...................................................................................................................................................C -18
13.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -18
(1) Staple mode ....................................................................................................................................................................C -18
13.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -19
14. FS-612 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -20

14.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -20
14.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -20
(1) Function...........................................................................................................................................................................C -20
(2) Staple ..............................................................................................................................................................................C -20
(3) Folding ............................................................................................................................................................................C -20
(4) Maximum tray capacity*1.................................................................................................................................................C -20
14.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -21
(1) Staple mode ....................................................................................................................................................................C -21
(2) Saddle stitching mode ....................................................................................................................................................C -21
(3) Half-Fold mode ...............................................................................................................................................................C -21
(4) Tri-folding mode ..............................................................................................................................................................C -22
14.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -22
15. PK-512/513............................................................................................................................................................C -23

15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C -23
Functions..............................................................................................................................................................................C -23
Type of paper.......................................................................................................................................................................C -23
Machine data........................................................................................................................................................................C -23
16. PI-502 ....................................................................................................................................................................C -24

16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -24

Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -24
Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -24
Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -24
17. LS-505 ...................................................................................................................................................................C -25

17.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -25
17.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -25
(1) Function...........................................................................................................................................................................C -25
17.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -25
17.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -26
18. FD-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -27

18.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -27
18.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -27
(1) Function...........................................................................................................................................................................C -27
18.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -28
(1) Punching function ...........................................................................................................................................................C -28
(2) Folding functions .............................................................................................................................................................C -28
(3) PI functions .....................................................................................................................................................................C -28
18.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -29
19. SD-506 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -30

19.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -30
19.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -30
(1) Function...........................................................................................................................................................................C -30
19.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -30
iii
(1) Straight/sub tray mode ....................................................................................................................................................C -30

(2) Saddle stitching mode ....................................................................................................................................................C -30
(3) Trimming mode ...............................................................................................................................................................C -32
(4) Multi-center folding mode ...............................................................................................................................................C -32
(5) Overlap tri-folding mode .................................................................................................................................................C -33
19.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -33
20. PB-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -34

20.1 Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -34
20.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -34
(1) Function...........................................................................................................................................................................C -34
(2) Binding sheets ................................................................................................................................................................C -34
(4) Others .............................................................................................................................................................................C -34
20.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C -34
(1) Paper size .......................................................................................................................................................................C -34
(2) Paper weight ...................................................................................................................................................................C -35
20.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -35
21. IC-601 ...................................................................................................................................................................C -37

21.1
21.2
21.3
21.4
21.5
21.6
Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -37

Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C -37
Paper ...................................................................................................................................................................................C -37
Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C -37
22. RU-506...................................................................................................................................................................C -39

22.1
22.2
22.3
22.4
22.5
22.6
Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C -39
Functions..............................................................................................................................................................................C -39
Paper type............................................................................................................................................................................C -39
Machine data........................................................................................................................................................................C -39
23. GP-501...................................................................................................................................................................C -40

23.1
23.2
23.3
23.4
23.5
23.6
Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C -40
Modes of Operation..............................................................................................................................................................C -40
Machine data........................................................................................................................................................................C -40
Software...............................................................................................................................................................................C -40
Electronic..............................................................................................................................................................................C -40
Inputs....................................................................................................................................................................................C -40
(1) Media Input from Printer..................................................................................................................................................C -40
(2) Power...............................................................................................................................................................................C -41
23.7 Outputs.................................................................................................................................................................................C -41
23.8 Performance.........................................................................................................................................................................C -41
(1) Reliability.........................................................................................................................................................................C -41
23.9 Operation Environment, Storage, Transport........................................................................................................................C -41
23.10 Safety /Regulatory..............................................................................................................................................................C -41
(1) Safety Compliance...........................................................................................................................................................C -41
(2) Electromagnetic Compliance...........................................................................................................................................C -41
23.11 Appendix A.........................................................................................................................................................................C -42
23.12 Appendix B.........................................................................................................................................................................C -42
23.13 Appendix C.........................................................................................................................................................................C -43
23.14 Glossary of Terms..............................................................................................................................................................C -44
D OVERALL COMPOSITION .........................................................................................................D -1

1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................................................................D -1
1.1 System configuration................................................................................................................................................................D -1
1.2 Configuration for optional device..............................................................................................................................................D -2
1.2.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option ..............................................................................D -2
1.2.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option ....................................................................................D -2
2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................................D -4

3. PAPER PATH ...........................................................................................................................................................D -5
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM ..................................................................................................................................D -6
5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS ................................................................................................................................D -7
5.1 Image creation flow and functions ...........................................................................................................................................D -7
5.2 Charging process (Step 1) ......................................................................................................................................................D -7
iv
5.3 Laser exposure process (Step2)..............................................................................................................................................D -8

5.4 Developing process (Step 3) ...................................................................................................................................................D -8
5.5 Intermediate transfer process (Step 4) ....................................................................................................................................D -8
5.6 2nd transfer process (Step 5) ..................................................................................................................................................D -9
5.7 Separation process (Step 6) ....................................................................................................................................................D -9
5.8 Drum cleaning (Sub step 1) ...................................................................................................................................................D -10
5.9 Exposure before charging (Sub step 2) .................................................................................................................................D -10
5.10 Transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 3) .....................................................................................................................................D -10
5.11 2nd transfer roller /Lw cleaning (Sub step 4) .......................................................................................................................D -11
5.12 Toner collection (Sub step 5) ..............................................................................................................................................D -11
6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL ..............................................................................................................................D -13

7. PROCESS SPEED .................................................................................................................................................D -15
7.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc...................................................................................................................................D -15
7.2 bizhub PRESS C6000 ...........................................................................................................................................................D -15
E SERVICE TOOL ..........................................................................................................................E -1

1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 ..........................................................................................................E -1
1.1 Service material list .................................................................................................................................................................E -1
1.1.1 Service material list .......................................................................................................................................................E -1
1.2 Jig list .......................................................................................................................................................................................E -1
1.2.1 Jig list ............................................................................................................................................................................E -1
1.3 Mail remote notification system ...............................................................................................................................................E -2
1.3.1 Outline ...........................................................................................................................................................................E -2
1.3.2 Operating environment ..................................................................................................................................................E -3
1.3.3 Major functions ..............................................................................................................................................................E -3
1.3.4 Initial setting ..................................................................................................................................................................E -3
1.3.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system .......................................................................................E -6
1.3.6 Mail sending ..................................................................................................................................................................E -6
1.4 Job history list ..........................................................................................................................................................................E -6
1.4.1 Outline ...........................................................................................................................................................................E -6
1.4.2 Major functions ..............................................................................................................................................................E -6
1.4.3 Setting method ..............................................................................................................................................................E -7
1.5 Counter list acquisition using USB memory ..........................................................................................................................E -10
1.5.1 Outline .........................................................................................................................................................................E -10
1.5.2 List that can be acquired .............................................................................................................................................E -10
1.5.3 Acquisition method ......................................................................................................................................................E -10
1.6 Panel log ................................................................................................................................................................................E -11
1.6.1 Outline..........................................................................................................................................................................E -11
1.6.2 Log acquisition method ...............................................................................................................................................E -11
1.7 ORU-M Counter Rewrite .......................................................................................................................................................E -12
1.7.1 Load from external memory ........................................................................................................................................E -12
1.7.2 Store to external memory ............................................................................................................................................E -14
1.8 Management Tool ..................................................................................................................................................................E -15
1.8.1 Outline .........................................................................................................................................................................E -15
1.8.2 Installation of Management Tool .................................................................................................................................E -17
1.8.3 Starting up of Management Tool .................................................................................................................................E -18
1.8.4 Technician mode .........................................................................................................................................................E -21
1.8.5 Administrator mode .....................................................................................................................................................E -48
1.8.6 Various setting for the software ...................................................................................................................................E -54
1.8.7 Error message list .......................................................................................................................................................E -61
1.9 Acquisition of the controller log ..............................................................................................................................................E -62
1.9.1 Outline .........................................................................................................................................................................E -62
1.9.2 Preparation ..................................................................................................................................................................E -62
1.9.3 Procedure for acquisition .............................................................................................................................................E -63
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................F -1

1. MAINTENANCE ITEM ...............................................................................................................................................F -1
1.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 ........................................................................................................................F -1
1.1.1 Replacing procedure of the periodical replacement parts .............................................................................................F -1
1.1.2 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 50,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)) ............................................................F -1
1.1.3 Periodic maintenance 2 (Every 160,000 prints (C6000)) ...............................................................................................F -1
1.1.5 Periodic maintenance 2 (Every 200,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)) .....................................................................F -1
1.1.6 Periodic maintenance 3 (Every 220,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)) .....................................................................F -2
1.1.8 Periodic maintenance 4 (Every 340,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance 5 (Every 300,000 prints
(C6000)) ...................................................................................................................................................................................F -2
1.1.9 Periodic maintenance 5 (Every 350,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance 5 (Every 300,000 prints
(C6000)) ...................................................................................................................................................................................F -3
1.1.10 Periodic maintenance 6 (Every 400,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)) ........................................................F -3
1.1.11 Periodic maintenance 7 (Every 450,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)) ........................................................F -3

1.1.12 Periodic maintenance 8 (Every 600,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)) ...................................................................F -4
1.1.13 Periodic maintenance 8 (Every 600,000 prints (C6000)) .............................................................................................F -4
1.1.14 Periodic maintenance 9 (Every 700,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)) ...................................................................F -4
1.1.15 Periodic maintenance 9 (Every 900,000 prints (C6000)) .............................................................................................F -5
1.1.16 Periodic maintenance 10 (Every 900,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)) ......................................................F -5
1.1.17 Periodic maintenance 11 (Every 1,000,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)) ...................................................F -5
1.1.18 Periodic maintenance 12 (Every 1,020,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)) ..............................................................F -5
1.1.19 Periodic maintenance 13 (Every 1,050,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)) ..............................................................F -5
1.1.20 Periodic maintenance 14 (Every 1,400,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance 12 (Every 1,400,000
prints (C6000)) .........................................................................................................................................................................F -6
prints (C6000)) .........................................................................................................................................................................F -6
prints (C6000)) .........................................................................................................................................................................F -6
prints (C6000)) .........................................................................................................................................................................F -6
prints (C6000)) .........................................................................................................................................................................F -6
prints (C6000)) .........................................................................................................................................................................F -7
prints (C6000)) .........................................................................................................................................................................F -7
1.1.27 Spot replacement (Every 3,600,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)) ..............................................................F -7
1.2 DF-622 .....................................................................................................................................................................................F -7
1.2.1 Spotted replacement (Every 625,000 feeds) .................................................................................................................F -7
1.3 PF-602 .....................................................................................................................................................................................F -7
1.3.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 200,000 prints) .............................................................................................................F -7
1.3.3 Periodic maintenance 3 (Every 2,400,000 prints) ..........................................................................................................F -8
1.4 LU-202 .....................................................................................................................................................................................F -8
1.4.3 Periodic maintenance 3 (Every 2,400,000 prints) ..........................................................................................................F -9
1.5 RU-509/HM-102 .......................................................................................................................................................................F -9
1.5.3 Spotted replacement (Every 300,000 prints) .................................................................................................................F -9
1.5.4 Spotted replacement (Every 1,500,000 prints) ..............................................................................................................F -9
1.6 FS-521 .....................................................................................................................................................................................F -9
1.6.2 Periodic maintenance 2 (Every 3,000,000 prints) ........................................................................................................F -10
1.6.3 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 operations) .......................................................................................................F -10
1.6.4 Spotted replacement (Every 600,000 feeds) ...............................................................................................................F -10
1.7 FS-531 ...................................................................................................................................................................................F -10
1.7.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 200,000 prints) ...........................................................................................................F -10
1.7.2 Spotted replacement (Every 200,000 prints) ...............................................................................................................F -10
1.7.4 Spot replacement (Every 500,000 staples) .................................................................................................................F -11
1.8 FS-612 ...................................................................................................................................................................................F -11
1.8.4 Spot replacement (Every 200,000 staples) .................................................................................................................F -11
1.9 PI-502 ....................................................................................................................................................................................F -12
1.9.5 Spotted replacement (Every 1,000,000 feeds) ............................................................................................................F -12
1.10 LS-505 .................................................................................................................................................................................F -12
1.10.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 1,500,000 prints) ......................................................................................................F -12
1.11 FD-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................F -12
1.11.4 Spotted replacement (100,000 feeds) .......................................................................................................................F -13
1.11.5 Spotted replacement (Every 200,000 prints) .............................................................................................................F -13
1.12 SD-506 .................................................................................................................................................................................F -13
1.12.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 600,000 prints) .........................................................................................................F -13
vi
1.12.3 Spotted replacement (Every 18,900 cuts) .................................................................................................................F -14

1.12.4 Spotted replacement (Every 37,500 cuts) .................................................................................................................F -14
1.12.5 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 cuts) ...............................................................................................................F -14
1.12.6 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 times) .............................................................................................................F -14
1.12.8 Spotted replacement (Every 1,000,000 sets) ............................................................................................................F -14
1.13 PB-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................F -15
1.13.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 750,000 prints) .........................................................................................................F -15
1.13.3 Spotted replacement (Every 3,000,000 operations) ..................................................................................................F -16
1.13.4 Spotted replacement (Every 600,000 prints) .............................................................................................................F -16
1.13.5 Spotted replacement (Every 120 hours) ....................................................................................................................F -16
1.13.6 Spotted replacement (Every 240 hours) ....................................................................................................................F -16
1.13.7 Spotted replacement (Every 2000 hours) ..................................................................................................................F -16
1.14 RU-506.................................................................................................................................................................................F -16
1.14.1 Maintenance 1 (Every 600,000 prints)........................................................................................................................F -16
1.14.2 Spotted replacement (Every 5,000,000 operations)...................................................................................................F -16
1.15 GP-501.................................................................................................................................................................................F -17
1.15.3 Maintenance 3 (Every 3,000,000 prints).....................................................................................................................F -17
1.15.4 Maintenance 4 (Every 12,000,000 prints)...................................................................................................................F -17
1.15.5 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 punches).........................................................................................................F -18
1.15.6 Spotted replacement part (Every 4,000,000 cycle)....................................................................................................F -18
2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS LIST ............................................................................................................F -19

2.1 Periodical replacement parts .................................................................................................................................................F -19
2.2 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 ......................................................................................................................F -19
2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list (C7000/C7000P/C70hc) ..............................................................................................F -19
2.2.2 Periodically replaced parts list (C6000) .......................................................................................................................F -21
2.2.3 Spotted replacement parts list .....................................................................................................................................F -23
3. ORU-M PARTS .......................................................................................................................................................F -25

3.1 Life value of the ORU-M parts ...............................................................................................................................................F -25
(1) ORU-M corresponding parts ...........................................................................................................................................F -25
3.2 ORU-M parts list ....................................................................................................................................................................F -25
(1) ORU-M parts list ..............................................................................................................................................................F -25
3.3 ORU-M parts replacement timing ..........................................................................................................................................F -27
(1) ORU-M target unit life setting ..........................................................................................................................................F -27
(2) ORU-M warning icon display ...........................................................................................................................................F -27
3.4 Management of ORU-M parts counter ...................................................................................................................................F -27
(1) Counter display ...............................................................................................................................................................F -27
(2) Counter clear ...................................................................................................................................................................F -27
4. LIFE VALUE ............................................................................................................................................................F -28

4.1 Life value of materials/parts ...................................................................................................................................................F -28
4.2 Life value determining condition ............................................................................................................................................F -28
5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 ..............................F -29

5.1 External section .....................................................................................................................................................................F -29
5.1.1 Replacing the filter box, developing dust proof filter ....................................................................................................F -29
5.1.2 Replacing the dust proof filter on rear side ..................................................................................................................F -29
5.2 Write section ..........................................................................................................................................................................F -30
5.2.1 - Cleaning the dust proof glass ....................................................................................................................................F -30
5.3 Photo conductor section ........................................................................................................................................................F -31
5.3.1 Disassembling procedure of the process unit section .................................................................................................F -31
5.3.2 Opening /closing the toner supply door section. ..........................................................................................................F -32
5.3.3 Pulling out the process unit .........................................................................................................................................F -32
5.3.4 Replacing the drum cartridge ......................................................................................................................................F -32
5.4 Charging section ....................................................................................................................................................................F -33
5.4.1 Replace the charging corona. ......................................................................................................................................F -33
5.4.2 Replacing the charging dust proof filter .......................................................................................................................F -34
5.5 Intermediate transfer section .................................................................................................................................................F -35
5.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit ...................................................................................................F -35
5.5.2 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit .....................................................................................................................F -36
5.5.3 Replacing the belt cleaning blade ................................................................................................................................F -37
5.5.4 Replacing the toner collection sheet ............................................................................................................................F -37
5.5.5 Replacing the transfer belt separation claw .................................................................................................................F -38
5.5.6 Cleaning the intermediate transfer belt/rollers .............................................................................................................F -38
5.5.7 Replacing the first transfer roller and the transfer roller bearing. ................................................................................F -40
5.5.8 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Up ...........................................................................................................................F -41
5.5.9 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid (SD1) .....................................................................................................F -42
5.5.10 Replacing the separate discharging plate Assy .........................................................................................................F -42
vii
5.5.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Lw and the 2nd transfer earth plate Assy .............................................................F -43
5.6 Developing section ................................................................................................................................................................F -44
5.6.1 Replacing the developers /Y, /M, /C and /K .................................................................................................................F -44
5.6.2 Replacing the developing units /C, /M, /Y, and /K .......................................................................................................F -46
5.7 Toner collect box ...................................................................................................................................................................F -47
5.7.1 Replacing the toner collect box ...................................................................................................................................F -47
5.8 Paper feed section .................................................................................................................................................................F -48
5.8.1 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller rubber .....................................................................................F -48
5.8.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber ........................................................................................................................F -49
5.8.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch .................................................................................F -49
5.9 Vertical conveyance section ..................................................................................................................................................F -50
5.9.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (CL13) ...........................................................................................F -50
5.10 Registration section .............................................................................................................................................................F -51
5.10.1 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet ..................................................................................................................F -51
5.10.2 Replacing the registration roller .................................................................................................................................F -52
5.11 Duplex section .....................................................................................................................................................................F -54
5.11.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 (CL4) and /3 (CL5) ..................................................................F -54
5.11.2 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL2), /3 (CL3), ADU pre-registration clutch (CL18) ............F -56
5.12 Reverse/exit section ............................................................................................................................................................F -57
5.12.1 Replacing the reverse de-curler roller .......................................................................................................................F -57
5.12.2 Replacing the paper exit de-curler roller ....................................................................................................................F -57
5.13 Fusing section ......................................................................................................................................................................F -60
5.13.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit .........................................................................................................................F -60
5.13.2 Replacing the fusing drive gear /B, fusing duct assy .................................................................................................F -60
5.13.3 Replacing the fusing separation plate assy................................................................................................................F -63
5.13.4 Replacing the fusing drive gear /M ............................................................................................................................F -64
5.13.5 Replacing the fusing lamp assy /Up ..........................................................................................................................F -65
5.13.6 Replacing the fusing roller /2, fusing bearing /2, fusing drive gear /O .......................................................................F -66
5.13.7 Replacing the fusing belt, fusing roller /1, insulating sleeve /Up, fusing bearing /Up, belt regulating sleeve ............F -68
5.13.8 Replacing the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5) ...................................................................................................................F -69
5.13.9 Replacing the fusing roller /Lw, fusing bearing /Lw, insulating sleeve /Lw ................................................................F -71
5.13.10 Replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy /Lw (edge) .....................................................................................F -72
5.13.11 Replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy /Up (edge) .....................................................................................F -72
5.13.12 Replacing the fusing paper exit roller /Up ................................................................................................................F -73
5.13.13 Replacing the fusing regulating gear /A, fusing limiter ............................................................................................F -74
5.14 OT-502 .................................................................................................................................................................................F -75
5.14.1 Replacing the paper hold roller ..................................................................................................................................F -75
5.14.2 Replacing the paper exit roller ...................................................................................................................................F -75
5.14.3 Replacing the paper exit driven roller /2 ....................................................................................................................F -76
6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE DF-622 ...........................................................................................F -78

6.1 Precautions on maintenance .................................................................................................................................................F -78
6.2.1 Removing/reinstalling the paper feed unit ...................................................................................................................F -78
6.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller .................................................................................................F -79
6.2.3 Replacing the separation roller ....................................................................................................................................F -80
6.2.4 Cleaning the timing sensor (PS302) ............................................................................................................................F -81
6.2.5 Removing/reinstalling the registration roller cover .......................................................................................................F -82
6.2.6 Cleaning the registration roller .....................................................................................................................................F -82
6.2.7 Cleaning the registration sensor (PS301) ....................................................................................................................F -83
7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PF-602 ...........................................................................................F -84

7.2 Tray section ...........................................................................................................................................................................F -84
7.2.1 Precautions on maintenance of the tray section ..........................................................................................................F -84
7.2.2 Replacing the Pick-up rubber/paper feed roller ...........................................................................................................F -84
7.2.4 Replacing the paper feed clutch (CL1/CL4) and the separation clutch (CL2/CL5) ......................................................F -89
7.3 Conveyance section ..............................................................................................................................................................F -90
7.3.1 Replacing the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), and /3 (CL9) ..................................................................F -90
7.3.2 Replacing the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and pre-registration clutch (CL12) ........................F -91
8. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LU-202 ...........................................................................................F -93

8.1.1 Precautions on maintenance .......................................................................................................................................F -93
8.1.2 Cleaning/pre-registration roller ....................................................................................................................................F -93
8.1.3 Removing/installing paper feed roller Assy .................................................................................................................F -93
8.1.4 Replacing the paper feed roller/pick-up roller ..............................................................................................................F -93
8.1.6 Replacing paper feed clutch (CL101) /pre-registration clutch (CL102) .......................................................................F -95
9. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE MB-504 ..........................................................................................F -97

viii

9.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /BP and the paper feed roller rubber /BP ........................................................................F -97
9.2.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber /BP ..................................................................................................................F -98
9.2.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP (CL6) .................................................................................................................F -98
10. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-509/HM-102 ........................................................................F -100

10.1 Precautions on maintenance .............................................................................................................................................F -100
10.2 Output paper density detection section .............................................................................................................................F -100
10.2.1 Cleaning the shutter ................................................................................................................................................F -100
10.3 Humidification section (HM-102) ........................................................................................................................................F -100
10.3.1 Replacing the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt and the water feed roller ...............................................................F -100
10.3.2 Replacing the water feed filter .................................................................................................................................F -106
11. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-521 .......................................................................................F -108

11.2 Conveyance section ..........................................................................................................................................................F -108
11.2.1 Lubrication to bypass roller /Lw pressure release cam ...........................................................................................F -108
11.3 Stacker section ..................................................................................................................................................................F -108
11.3.1 Replacing the intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7) .......................................................................................F -108
11.3.2 Lubrication to worm gear and cam ..........................................................................................................................F -109
11.4 Stapler section ...................................................................................................................................................................F -109
11.4.1 Replacing the stapler assy ......................................................................................................................................F -109
11.4.2 Replacing the staples ..............................................................................................................................................F -113
11.4.3 Cleaning the cut staple box .....................................................................................................................................F -114
11.5 Main tray section ................................................................................................................................................................F -114
11.5.1 Replacing the paper exit roller .................................................................................................................................F -114
11.5.2 Replacing the paper exit opening solenoid assy (SD9) ...........................................................................................F -115

12.2.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller) .........................................................................................................F -118
12.2.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller) ................................................................................F -119
12.3.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller) .....................................................................................................F -119
12.3.2 Replacement of the cleaning plate Assy .................................................................................................................F -120
12.4.1 Replacing the stapler unit ........................................................................................................................................F -120

13.2.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller) .........................................................................................................F -122
13.2.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller) ................................................................................F -123
13.3.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller) .....................................................................................................F -123
13.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover ............................................................................................................F -124
13.4.2 Replacing the stapler unit ........................................................................................................................................F -124
14. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PI-502 ........................................................................................F -128

14.2 Paper feed section .............................................................................................................................................................F -128
14.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up and the paper feed roller /Up ................................................................................F -128
14.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller /Lw and the paper feed roller /Lw ................................................................................F -129
14.2.3 Replacing the separation roller /Up and the torque limiter /Up ................................................................................F -129
14.2.4 Replacing the separation roller /Lw and the torque limiter /Lw ................................................................................F -130
15. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LS-505 .......................................................................................F -131

15.2.1 Replacing the stacker tray up down motor (M1) ......................................................................................................F -131
15.2.2 Replacing the paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) ..........................................................................................................F -131
15.2.5 Replacing the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) .............................................................................................................F -135
16. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-503 .......................................................................................F -137

16.2.1 Replacing roller solenoids /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8) .......................................................................................................F -137
16.2.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) ...........................................................................................................................F -137
16.3 Punch section ....................................................................................................................................................................F -139
16.3.1 Replacing the punch unit .........................................................................................................................................F -139
16.3.2 Cleaning the punch shaft and the punch support board ..........................................................................................F -140
ix
16.3.3 Lubricating the punch drive section .........................................................................................................................F -140

16.4 Main tray section ................................................................................................................................................................F -141
16.4.1 Replacing the tray up down motor (M11) ................................................................................................................F -141
16.5 PI section ...........................................................................................................................................................................F -142
16.5.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper stage) ............................................................................................................F -142
16.5.2 Replacing the paper feed rubber (Upper stage) ......................................................................................................F -144
16.5.3 Replacing the separation rubber (upper stage) .......................................................................................................F -145
16.5.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage) ............................................................................................................F -146
16.5.5 Replacing the paper feed rubber (lower stage) .......................................................................................................F -147
16.5.6 Replacing the separation rubber (lower stage) ........................................................................................................F -148
17. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-506 ......................................................................................F -149

17.2 Right angle conveyance section ........................................................................................................................................F -149
17.2.1 Replacing the roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) ........................................................................................................F -149
17.2.3 Replacing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) ....................................................................................F -150
17.3 Saddle stitching section .....................................................................................................................................................F -155
17.3.1 Replacing the stapler assy ......................................................................................................................................F -155
17.3.2 Replacing the slope unit ..........................................................................................................................................F -158
17.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit .........................................................................................................................F -160
17.3.4 Replacing the saddle stitching unit ..........................................................................................................................F -162
17.4 Trimmer section .................................................................................................................................................................F -163
17.4.1 Removing/installing the trimmer paddle assy ..........................................................................................................F -163
17.4.2 Replacing the trimmer blade kit ...............................................................................................................................F -163
17.4.3 Replacing the trimmer board assy ...........................................................................................................................F -165
17.4.4 Replacing the trimming unit .....................................................................................................................................F -166
17.4.5 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32) ...............................................................................................................F -168
17.4.6 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31) ...............................................................................................................F -169
17.4.7 Lubrication to the trimmer unit .................................................................................................................................F -173
17.5 Bundle processing section .................................................................................................................................................F -174
17.5.1 Replacing the bundle press stage gear ...................................................................................................................F -174
17.5.2 Replacing the bundle press stage unit ....................................................................................................................F -176
18. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PB-503 .......................................................................................F -181

18.1 Sub compile (SC) section ..................................................................................................................................................F -181
18.1.1 Precautions on maintenance ...................................................................................................................................F -181
18.1.2 Replacing the switchback roller ...............................................................................................................................F -181
18.1.3 Replacing the SC switchback release motor (M13) and the one-way clutches /A and /B .......................................F -182
18.1.4 Replacing the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13) ....................................................................................................F -185
18.1.5 Replacing the FD alignment solenoid (SD11) .........................................................................................................F -186
18.1.6 Lubrication to the sub scan alignment plate shaft ...................................................................................................F -187
18.2 Cover paper table section ..................................................................................................................................................F -188
18.2.1 Precautions on maintenance ...................................................................................................................................F -188
18.2.2 Replacing the roller cutter blade assy .....................................................................................................................F -188
18.2.3 Cleaning the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate ..............................................................F -189
18.2.4 Lubrication to the cover paper alignment plate shaft ...............................................................................................F -190
18.3 Cover paper supply section ...............................................................................................................................................F -191
18.3.1 Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy ..........................................................F -191
18.3.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller .............................................................................................F -194
18.3.3 Replacing the separation roller ................................................................................................................................F -196
18.3.4 Replacing the cover paper feed clutch (CL71) and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72) ...............................F -196
18.4.1 Replacing the sub tray exit solenoid (SD4) .............................................................................................................F -197
18.5 Framework section ............................................................................................................................................................F -199
18.5.1 Replacing the exhaust filters /A and /B ....................................................................................................................F -199
18.6 Glue tank section ...............................................................................................................................................................F -200
18.6.1 Replacing the glue apply roller drive gear bearing ..................................................................................................F -200
18.6.2 Lubrication to the glue apply roller drive gear ..........................................................................................................F -202
18.6.3 Replacing the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) .........................................................................................................F -203
18.6.4 Replacing the glue tank assy ...................................................................................................................................F -203
18.7 Clamp section ....................................................................................................................................................................F -206
18.7.1 Lubrication to the clamp pressing board shaft .........................................................................................................F -206
18.8 Book stock section .............................................................................................................................................................F -206
18.8.1 Lubrication to the guide shafts /Rt and /Lt ...............................................................................................................F -206
19. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-506.......................................................................................F -208

19.1 Caution for maintenance procedure...................................................................................................................................F -208
19.2 Conveyance section...........................................................................................................................................................F -208
19.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt.........F -208
19.2.2 Replacing the conveyance pulley, the paper exit conveyance pulley.......................................................................F -209
19.2.3 Replacing the entrance roller /1, the bearing /K.......................................................................................................F -210
19.2.4 Replacing the entrance roller /2, the stacker entrance roller, the stacker entrance conveyance belt, the stacker
entrance roller pressure springs /Fr and /Rr, the bearing /K.................................................................................................F -211
19.2.5 Replacing the paper refeed roller, the merging section roller, the paper exit roller, the bearing /K..........................F -213
19.2.6 Replacing the straight gate.......................................................................................................................................F -216
19.2.7 Replacing the straight gate solenoid (SD1) and the straight gate spring.................................................................F -217
19.3 Stacker section...................................................................................................................................................................F -219
19.3.1 Replacing the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2)....................................................................................................F -219
19.3.2 Replacing the stack switching solenoid (SD3)..........................................................................................................F -220
19.3.3 Replacing the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4).....................................................................................F -221
20. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-501.......................................................................................F -223

20.1 Caution for maintenance procedure...................................................................................................................................F -223
20.2 DIE SET SERVICE.............................................................................................................................................................F -223
20.2.1 Die Set Service.........................................................................................................................................................F -223
20.2.2 Die Set Life Expectancy...........................................................................................................................................F -223
20.2.3 Die Set Components................................................................................................................................................F -223
20.2.4 Checking and Replacing the Die Set........................................................................................................................F -225
20.2.5 Checking and lubricating the Die Set pins and Die Set shoulder bolts.....................................................................F -225
20.2.6 Hole Alignment inspection........................................................................................................................................F -226
20.3 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION........................................................................................................................F -226
20.3.1 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION..............................................................................................................F -226
20.3.2 External Cleaning.....................................................................................................................................................F -227
20.3.3 Internal Cleaning......................................................................................................................................................F -227
20.3.4 Operational Inspection..............................................................................................................................................F -227
20.3.5 Internal Inspection....................................................................................................................................................F -227
20.3.6 Cleaning the base.....................................................................................................................................................F -227
20.3.7 Cleaning the Die guide.............................................................................................................................................F -228
20.3.8 Checking the Door Latch..........................................................................................................................................F -228
20.3.9 Cleaning and Checking the aligner paper path and panels......................................................................................F -229
20.3.10 Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller......................................................................................................F -229
20.3.11 Cleaning the Aligner (Green) Drive Belt.................................................................................................................F -230
20.3.12 Cleaning and Checking the Back Gauge Solenoid.................................................................................................F -230
20.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers................................................................................................................F -231
20.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers.......................................................................................................F -233
20.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive Rollers...............................................................................................................F -235
20.3.16 Checking the Aligner Latch.....................................................................................................................................F -235
20.3.17 Cleaning the Optical Sensors.................................................................................................................................F -236
20.3.18 Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Paper Path.....................................................................................................F -237
20.3.19 Cleaning and Checking the Punch Paper Path......................................................................................................F -238
20.3.20 Cleaning and Checking the Timing Belt.................................................................................................................F -238
20.3.21 Bypass panel..........................................................................................................................................................F -239
20.3.22 Bypass panel Removal...........................................................................................................................................F -239
20.3.23 Aligner panels.........................................................................................................................................................F -241
20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal...........................................................................................................................................F -241
20.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement............................................................................................................................F -242
20.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement..............................................................................................................................F -242
20.3.27 Cleaning and checking the energy drive roller.......................................................................................................F -247
20.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism...................................................................................................................F -247
20.3.29 Back Gauge Removal.............................................................................................................................................F -248
20.3.30 Solenoid Spring Replacement................................................................................................................................F -250
20.3.31 Back Gauge Paddle................................................................................................................................................F -251
20.3.32 Back Gauge Assembly Adjustment........................................................................................................................F -251
20.3.33 Punch module.........................................................................................................................................................F -251
20.3.34 Punch Module Removal.........................................................................................................................................F -252
20.3.35 Lubricating to the Punch Drive Cams.....................................................................................................................F -254
20.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement....................................................................................................................................F -254
20.3.37 Punch Module Brake Replacement and Adjustment..............................................................................................F -256
20.3.38 Punch Module Brake Replacement........................................................................................................................F -257
20.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment...........................................................................................................................F -257
20.3.40 Punch Module Motor Replacement........................................................................................................................F -257
20.3.41 Punch Module Motor Drive Belt Replacement........................................................................................................F -258
20.3.42 Punch Module Drive Roller Replacement...............................................................................................................F -258
20.3.43 Belt replacement.....................................................................................................................................................F -260
20.3.44 Tools.......................................................................................................................................................................F -260
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING .........................................................................................G -1
1. ITEMS NOT ALLOWED TO BE DISASSEMBLED ...................................................................................................G -1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Screw-lock applied screw ........................................................................................................................................................G -1

Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards .........................................................................................................................G -1
Precaution on removing the boards ........................................................................................................................................G -1
CCD unit ..................................................................................................................................................................................G -1
xi
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.4.1 Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited ...............................................................................................G -1

1.4.2 Reason of prohibition ....................................................................................................................................................G -1
Mirror unit/exposure unit .........................................................................................................................................................G -1
Writing unit cover ....................................................................................................................................................................G -2
1.6.1 Positions from which removing is prohibited .................................................................................................................G -2
Photo conductor section ..........................................................................................................................................................G -2
Intermediate transfer section ...................................................................................................................................................G -3
Fusing unit ...............................................................................................................................................................................G -3
2. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 ..........................................................................................................G -5

2.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts ............................................................................................................................G -5
2.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures ............................................................................................................................G -6
2.2.1 Rear cover /Up1, /Up2, /Lw ...........................................................................................................................................G -6
2.2.2 Left cover ......................................................................................................................................................................G -6
2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Up4, /Lw1, /Lw2 ...........................................................................................................G -6
2.2.4 Original glass assy ........................................................................................................................................................G -7
2.2.5 Upper cover /Fr, /Rt, /Lt, connector cover /Fr, /Rr, switch cover assy ..........................................................................G -8
2.2.6 Upper cover /Rr1, /Rr2 ................................................................................................................................................G -10
2.2.7 Main board unit ...........................................................................................................................................................G -10
2.2.8 CCD unit .....................................................................................................................................................................G -15
2.2.9 Exposure unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G -16
2.2.10 Exposure lamp ..........................................................................................................................................................G -18
2.2.11 Removing the scanner wire ......................................................................................................................................G -18
2.2.12 Reinstalling the scanner wire ....................................................................................................................................G -19
2.2.13 Writing unit ................................................................................................................................................................G -21
2.2.14 Process unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G -23
2.2.15 Image correction unit ................................................................................................................................................G -24
2.2.16 Belt collection pipe, Vertical conveyance pipe, Horizontal conveyance pipe ............................................................G -24
2.2.17 Duplex section ..........................................................................................................................................................G -31
2.2.18 Replacing the lock levers /1 and /2 ...........................................................................................................................G -32
2.2.19 Paper feed trays /1 to /3 ............................................................................................................................................G -33
2.2.20 Tray up/down wire .....................................................................................................................................................G -34
2.2.21 Fusing large/small recognition connector..................................................................................................................G -36
2.2.22 Temperature sensor /1 (TH1), thermostat /1 (TS1), /2 (TS2) ...................................................................................G -37
2.2.23 Temperature sensor /2 (TH2), thermostat /3 (TS3) ..................................................................................................G -38
2.2.24 OT .............................................................................................................................................................................G -40
3. DF-622 ....................................................................................................................................................................G -41

3.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts ..........................................................................................................................G -41
3.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures ..........................................................................................................................G -41
3.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling ..........................................................................................................G -41
3.2.2 DF ...............................................................................................................................................................................G -41
3.2.3 Front cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -42
3.2.4 Rear cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -42
3.2.5 Conveyance belt .........................................................................................................................................................G -42
4. PF-602 ....................................................................................................................................................................G -44

4.2.2 Right cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -44
4.2.3 Rear cover /Lt2 ...........................................................................................................................................................G -45
4.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt ..........................................................................................................................................G -45
4.2.5 Front door ...................................................................................................................................................................G -46
4.2.6 Tray .............................................................................................................................................................................G -46
4.2.7 Lift wire ........................................................................................................................................................................G -48
4.2.8 Paper lift motor/1 (M2) and /2 (M3) .............................................................................................................................G -53
4.2.9 Vertical conveyance unit .............................................................................................................................................G -54
4.2.10 Horizontal conveyance unit .......................................................................................................................................G -55
4.2.11 The multi feed detection board (MFDBR and S) .......................................................................................................G -56
5. LU-202 ....................................................................................................................................................................G -59

xii
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
Precautions on disassembling and assembling ..........................................................................................................G -59

Upper door ..................................................................................................................................................................G -59
The clutch cover ..........................................................................................................................................................G -59
The paper feed cover ..................................................................................................................................................G -59
Right cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -60
Front cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -60
Rear cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -61
Replacing the lift wire ..................................................................................................................................................G -61
Paper size VR (VR1) ...................................................................................................................................................G -69
6. RU-509/HM-102 ......................................................................................................................................................G -70

6.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled .............................................................................................................G -70
6.1.1 Color density sensor unit ............................................................................................................................................G -70
6.3.2 Front door ...................................................................................................................................................................G -71
6.3.3 Rear cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -71
6.3.4 Upper cover ................................................................................................................................................................G -72
6.3.5 Humidification unit .......................................................................................................................................................G -72
6.3.6 Water feed tank ...........................................................................................................................................................G -75
6.3.7 Pump motor (P1) .........................................................................................................................................................G -76
6.3.8 Color density sensor unit ............................................................................................................................................G -76
6.3.9 Shutter ........................................................................................................................................................................G -77
6.3.10 Note for replacing the board .....................................................................................................................................G -78
7. FS-521 ....................................................................................................................................................................G -79

7.2.2 Front door ...................................................................................................................................................................G -79
7.2.3 Sub tray .......................................................................................................................................................................G -80
7.2.4 Upper cover /1 ............................................................................................................................................................G -80
7.2.5 Upper cover /2 ............................................................................................................................................................G -81
7.2.6 Left cover /Fr ...............................................................................................................................................................G -82
7.2.7 Rear cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -82
7.2.8 Stacker unit .................................................................................................................................................................G -82
7.2.9 Main tray .....................................................................................................................................................................G -85
7.2.10 Lift wire ......................................................................................................................................................................G -85
7.2.11 Tray up down motor ..................................................................................................................................................G -89
7.2.12 Handling of the clogged stapler 1 .............................................................................................................................G -89
7.2.13 Handling of the clogged stapler 2 .............................................................................................................................G -89
7.2.14 Note for replacing the board .....................................................................................................................................G -90
8. FS-531 ....................................................................................................................................................................G -92

8.2.2 Upper cover /1 ............................................................................................................................................................G -92
8.2.3 Upper cover /2 ............................................................................................................................................................G -92
8.2.4 Front door ...................................................................................................................................................................G -93
8.2.5 Rear cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -93
8.2.6 Left cover ....................................................................................................................................................................G -93
8.2.7 Main tray .....................................................................................................................................................................G -93
8.2.8 Replacing the up/down wire ........................................................................................................................................G -94
8.2.9 Stacker unit .................................................................................................................................................................G -97
8.2.10 Paper exit opening unit .............................................................................................................................................G -99
8.2.11 Note for replacing the board ...................................................................................................................................G -100
9. FS-612 ..................................................................................................................................................................G -101

9.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled ...........................................................................................................G -101
9.1.1 Screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper .........................................................................................G -101
9.2 List of disassembling and assembling parts ........................................................................................................................G -101
9.3 Disassembling and assembling procedures ........................................................................................................................G -101
9.3.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling ........................................................................................................G -101
9.3.2 Upper cover /1 ..........................................................................................................................................................G -102
9.3.3 Upper cover /2 ..........................................................................................................................................................G -102
9.3.4 Front door .................................................................................................................................................................G -102
9.3.5 Rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................G -103
9.3.6 Left cover ..................................................................................................................................................................G -103
9.3.7 Main tray ...................................................................................................................................................................G -103
9.3.8 Replacing the up/down wire ......................................................................................................................................G -104
9.3.9 Stacker unit cover .....................................................................................................................................................G -107
xiii
9.3.10 Stacker unit .............................................................................................................................................................G -107

9.3.11 Paper exit opening unit ...........................................................................................................................................G -109
9.3.12 Note for replacing the board ...................................................................................................................................G -109
10. PK-512/513..........................................................................................................................................................G -111

10.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and adjusted..........................................................................................................G -111
10.1.1 Punch unit................................................................................................................................................................G -111
10.2 Disassembly/reassembly parts list.....................................................................................................................................G -111
10.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure..................................................................................................................................G -111
10.3.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling ......................................................................................................G -111
10.3.2 Punch unit................................................................................................................................................................G -111
11. PI-502 .................................................................................................................................................................G -113

11.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts ......................................................................................................................G -113
11.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures ......................................................................................................................G -113
11.2.2 Upper cover ............................................................................................................................................................G -113
11.2.3 Rear cover ..............................................................................................................................................................G -113
11.2.4 Operation panel cover .............................................................................................................................................G -113
12. LS-505 ................................................................................................................................................................G -114

12.2.2 Cover ......................................................................................................................................................................G -114
12.2.3 Replacing the stacker tray up/down wire ................................................................................................................G -116
12.2.4 Caution when setting models using toggle SW .......................................................................................................G -119
13. FD-503 ................................................................................................................................................................G -120

13.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled .........................................................................................................G -120
13.1.2 Folding/conveyance switching position adjustment section ....................................................................................G -120
13.3.1 Upper cover /Fr + PI cover /Fr ................................................................................................................................G -121
13.3.2 Upper cover /Rr + PI cover /Rr ................................................................................................................................G -121
13.3.3 Upper door ..............................................................................................................................................................G -122
13.3.4 Rear cover ..............................................................................................................................................................G -122
13.3.5 Left cover /Fr ...........................................................................................................................................................G -122
13.3.6 Left cover /Rr ..........................................................................................................................................................G -123
13.3.7 Paper exit stopper cover .........................................................................................................................................G -123
13.3.8 Right cover ..............................................................................................................................................................G -123
13.3.9 Left cover /Up ..........................................................................................................................................................G -124
13.3.10 Mount cover ..........................................................................................................................................................G -124
13.3.11 Front door .............................................................................................................................................................G -124
13.3.12 Cleaning the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) ...........................................................................................G -125
13.3.13 Cleaning the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) ............................................................................................G -126
13.3.14 Cleaning the 3rd folding roller ...............................................................................................................................G -126
13.3.15 Folding conveyance section ..................................................................................................................................G -127
13.3.16 Main tray up/down wire .........................................................................................................................................G -130
13.3.17 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) ....................................................................................G -135
13.3.18 Note for replacing the board .................................................................................................................................G -137
14. SD-506 ................................................................................................................................................................G -139

14.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled .........................................................................................................G -139
14.1.1 Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50), Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) ....................................................G -139
14.1.2 Trimmer completion sensor (PS62) ........................................................................................................................G -139
14.1.3 Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) ......................................................................................................................G -139
14.1.4 Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52), Trimmer press home sensor (PS53) ....................................................G -140
14.1.5 Trimmer press brake ...............................................................................................................................................G -141
14.1.6 Fixing screw of the trimmer press timing belt ..........................................................................................................G -141
14.3.2 Rear cover /Lt .........................................................................................................................................................G -142
14.3.3 Rear cover /Rt .........................................................................................................................................................G -142
14.3.4 Left cover ................................................................................................................................................................G -143
14.3.5 Upper cover /Fr .......................................................................................................................................................G -143
14.3.6 Upper cover /Rr3 .....................................................................................................................................................G -144
14.3.7 Sub tray cover .........................................................................................................................................................G -144
14.3.8 Front door /Lt ..........................................................................................................................................................G -145
14.3.9 Front door /Rt ..........................................................................................................................................................G -145
14.3.10 Folding unit ...........................................................................................................................................................G -146
14.3.11 Note for replacing the board .................................................................................................................................G -148
xiv
15. PB-503 ................................................................................................................................................................G -149

15.2.2 Front door ...............................................................................................................................................................G -150
15.2.3 Front cover ..............................................................................................................................................................G -151
15.2.4 Booklet door ............................................................................................................................................................G -152
15.2.5 Rear cover /Rt .........................................................................................................................................................G -152
15.2.6 Rear cover /Lt .........................................................................................................................................................G -153
15.2.7 Left cover ................................................................................................................................................................G -153
15.2.8 Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr ...........................................................................................................................G -154
15.2.9 Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr ...........................................................................................................................G -154
15.2.10 Pellet supply cover ................................................................................................................................................G -154
15.2.11 SC cover /Fr ..........................................................................................................................................................G -155
15.2.12 SC cover /Up .........................................................................................................................................................G -156
15.2.13 Upper cover /FrRt .................................................................................................................................................G -157
15.2.14 Upper cover /FrLt ..................................................................................................................................................G -157
15.2.15 Upper cover /RrRt .................................................................................................................................................G -157
15.2.16 Upper cover /RrLt ..................................................................................................................................................G -158
15.2.17 Upper cover /Md ...................................................................................................................................................G -158
15.2.18 Deodorant unit ......................................................................................................................................................G -158
15.2.19 Pellet supply unit ...................................................................................................................................................G -160
15.2.20 Glue tank unit ........................................................................................................................................................G -161
15.2.21 SC unit ..................................................................................................................................................................G -163
15.2.22 Clamp unit .............................................................................................................................................................G -165
15.2.23 PB left unit .............................................................................................................................................................G -166
15.2.24 Book lift wire ..........................................................................................................................................................G -169
15.2.25 Cart wire ................................................................................................................................................................G -172
15.2.26 Conveyance unit /Lw .............................................................................................................................................G -173
15.2.27 Relay conveyance unit ..........................................................................................................................................G -174
15.2.28 Cover paper tray ...................................................................................................................................................G -175
15.2.29 Cover paper lift wire ..............................................................................................................................................G -177
15.2.30 Binding mode procedure with manual operating function .....................................................................................G -180
15.2.31 Multi feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR) ...................................................................................G -181
16. IC-601 .................................................................................................................................................................G -184

16.2.2 Flow of disassembling the IC unit ...........................................................................................................................G -184
16.2.3 Box cover ................................................................................................................................................................G -184
16.2.4 SSD/HDD unit .........................................................................................................................................................G -185
16.2.5 HDD cooling fan (FM3) ...........................................................................................................................................G -187
16.2.6 DIMM (DIMM) .........................................................................................................................................................G -187
16.2.7 Video interface board (VIB) .....................................................................................................................................G -188
16.2.8 System control board (SCB) ...................................................................................................................................G -189
16.2.9 BOX ventilation fan (FM1) .......................................................................................................................................G -190
16.2.10 DC power supply (DCPS) .....................................................................................................................................G -190
17. RU-506.................................................................................................................................................................G -192

17.2.2 Front cover...............................................................................................................................................................G -192
17.2.3 Rear cover...............................................................................................................................................................G -193
17.2.4 Left cover.................................................................................................................................................................G -193
17.2.5 Note to keep in mind when replacing the board.......................................................................................................G -193
18. GP-501.................................................................................................................................................................G -195

18.1 Centering punched holes...................................................................................................................................................G -195
18.2 Door latch...........................................................................................................................................................................G -197
18.2.1 Door latch check......................................................................................................................................................G -197
18.2.2 Door Latch Adjustment............................................................................................................................................G -197
18.2.3 Door Latch and Switch Replacement.......................................................................................................................G -197
18.3 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service............................................................................................................................G -198
18.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service..................................................................................................................G -198
18.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer...................................................................................................................G -198
18.3.3 Removing the Rear Cover.......................................................................................................................................G -198
18.4 Leveling and aligning to the printer....................................................................................................................................G -198
(1) Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................G -199
(2) Tool Required................................................................................................................................................................G -199
(3) To level the punch:........................................................................................................................................................G -199
xv
19. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS...............................................................................................................G -200

19.1 Reinstalling the status indicator light .................................................................................................................................G -200
19.1.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................G -200
19.1.2 Connector ...............................................................................................................................................................G -200
19.1.3 Procedure ...............................................................................................................................................................G -201
19.2 Key counter (KCT) ............................................................................................................................................................G -202
19.2.1 Connector ...............................................................................................................................................................G -202
19.2.2 Procedure ...............................................................................................................................................................G -202
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION ........................................................................................................H -1
1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................H -1
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING ..............................................................................................................I -1
1. CHECKING BEFORE STARTING WORK ..................................................................................................................I -1
2. CHECKPOINTS WHEN CONDUCTING ON-SITE SERVICE ....................................................................................I -2
3. UTILITY ......................................................................................................................................................................I -3
3.1 List of utility menus ...................................................................................................................................................................I -3
3.2 Start/exit ....................................................................................................................................................................................I -5
3.2.1 Start method ...................................................................................................................................................................I -5
3.2.2 Exit method .....................................................................................................................................................................I -5
4. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS .................................................................................................................................I -6

4.1 Priority for Adjustment/Setting after replacing parts ..................................................................................................................I -6
5. SERVICE MODE ........................................................................................................................................................I -9

5.1 Service Mode List......................................................................................................................................................................I -9
5.2 Start/exit ..................................................................................................................................................................................I -11
5.2.1 Start method .................................................................................................................................................................I -11
5.2.2 Exit method ...................................................................................................................................................................I -12
5.3 Machine Adjustment................................................................................................................................................................I -12
5.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ..........................................................................................................I -12
5.3.2 Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ..................................................................................................................I -13
5.3.3 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ....................................................................................................................I -13
5.3.4 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ...................................................................................................................I -14
5.3.5 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ......................................................................................................I -14
5.3.6 Registration Loop Adj. (Printer Adjustment) .................................................................................................................I -15
5.3.7 Pre-registration Adj. (Printer Adjustment) .....................................................................................................................I -16
5.3.8 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ....................................................................................................................I -16
5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory) .........................................................I -17
5.3.10 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ......................................................................................................I -17
5.3.11 Color Registration Manual (Printer Adjustment) .........................................................................................................I -17
5.3.12 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PF) ................................................................................I -19
5.3.13 CD-Mag. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ...................................................................................................................I -20
5.3.14 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) .............................................................................................................I -21
5.3.15 Moire Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) .......................................................................................................................I -22
5.3.16 Recall Standard Data (Printer Adjustment) .................................................................................................................I -23
5.3.17 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment) ......................................................................................................I -23
5.3.18 Centering Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment) .............................................................................................................I -24
5.3.19 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment) ...............................................................................................................I -24
5.3.20 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scanner Adjustment) ......................................................................................................I -25
5.3.21 Recall Standard Data (Scanner Adjustment) ..............................................................................................................I -25
5.3.22 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment) .........................................................I -26
5.3.23 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment) .......................................................I -27
5.3.24 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)................................................I -28
5.3.25 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment) ........................................................I -29
5.3.26 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)................................................I -30
5.3.27 Printer Screen Gradation (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment) ............................................................I -31
5.3.28 Sharpness Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) ..............................................................................................................I -31
5.3.29 Contrast Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) ..................................................................................................................I -31
5.3.30 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level) ......................................................................I -32
5.3.31 Color Text Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level) ......................................................................I -32
5.3.32 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level) ......................................................................I -33
5.3.33 ACS Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) ........................................................................................................................I -33
5.3.34 AE(AES) Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) ...............................................................................I -34
5.3.35 Copy Density Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) ........................................................................I -34
5.3.36 Back. Removal (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) ........................................................................................I -34
5.3.37 Bleed Prevention (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) .....................................................................................I -35
5.3.38 Tone Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) .......................................................................................................................I -35
5.3.39 Recall Standard Data (Quality Adjustment) ................................................................................................................I -36
5.4 Process Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................................I -37
5.4.1 1st Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment) ....................................................................................................I -37
xvi
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.4.2 2nd Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment) ..................................................................................................I -37
5.4.3 HV Adj.(Separation AC) (High Voltage Adjustment) .....................................................................................................I -37
5.4.4 HV Adj. (Separation DC) (High Voltage Adjustment) ....................................................................................................I -37
5.4.5 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm (High Voltage Adjustment) ................................................................................................I -37
5.4.6 Blade Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ......................................................................................................I -37
5.4.7 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ................................................................................................I -37
5.4.8 Auto. Developer Charge (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ..............................................................................................I -38
5.4.9 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ...........................................................................................I -40
5.4.10 Initial Drum Rotation (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ..................................................................................................I -40
5.4.11 Toner Density Revert (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) .................................................................................................I -41
5.4.12 Toner Density Sensor Speed (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) .....................................................................................I -41
5.4.13 IDC Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm) .............................................................................................................I -41
5.4.14 Toner Density Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm) .............................................................................................I -41
5.4.15 Humidity/Temperature Output (Sensor Output Confirm) ............................................................................................I -42
5.4.16 Background Margin Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment) ..........................................................................................I -42
5.4.17 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment) ..............................................................................................I -43
5.4.18 Develop AC Frequency (Process Fine Adjustment) ...................................................................................................I -43
5.4.19 Toner Density Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment) ...................................................................................................I -43
5.4.20 Drum Small Rotation Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.) .................................................................................................I -44
5.4.21 Automatic Refresh Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.) .....................................................................................................I -44
5.4.22 Toner Density Sensor Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.) ...............................................................................................I -44
5.4.23 Recall Standard Data ..................................................................................................................................................I -45
System Setting ........................................................................................................................................................................I -45
5.5.1 Software DIPSW setting procedures ............................................................................................................................I -45
5.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list ..........................................................................................................................................I -46
5.5.3 Service Center TEL/FAX ..............................................................................................................................................I -62
5.5.4 M/C Serial Number Setting ...........................................................................................................................................I -62
5.5.5 Setup Date/Business Setting ........................................................................................................................................I -62
Counter/Data ...........................................................................................................................................................................I -63
5.6.1 Maintenance Counter ...................................................................................................................................................I -63
5.6.2 Data collection procedures ...........................................................................................................................................I -63
5.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/print) ..........................................................................................................................I -64
5.6.4 ADF Counter .................................................................................................................................................................I -65
5.6.5 Coverage Data History .................................................................................................................................................I -65
5.6.6 Paper JAM History ........................................................................................................................................................I -67
5.6.7 JAM/JAM Counter for Individual Section ......................................................................................................................I -67
5.6.8 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1) ....................................................................................................................................I -76
5.6.9 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2) ....................................................................................................................................I -81
5.6.10 SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec. .....................................................................................................................I -87
5.6.11 SC data of time series ................................................................................................................................................I -98
5.6.12 Maintenance Counter Reset (Maintenance History) ...................................................................................................I -98
5.6.13 Parts History in Time Series (Maintenance History) ...................................................................................................I -99
5.6.14 ORU-M Maintenance History .....................................................................................................................................I -99
5.6.15 Checking, setting and resetting procedure of the Special Parts Counter .................................................................I -101
5.6.16 Special Parts Counter ...............................................................................................................................................I -101
5.6.17 Voluntary Part Counter (Parts Counter) ....................................................................................................................I -110
5.6.18 Custom size counter threshold setting ......................................................................................................................I -111
State Confirmation ...............................................................................................................................................................I -111
5.7.1 I/O Check Mode ..........................................................................................................................................................I -111
5.7.2 Input check procedures ..............................................................................................................................................I -111
5.7.3 Output check procedures ............................................................................................................................................I -112
5.7.4 IO check mode list ......................................................................................................................................................I -112
5.7.5 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PI) .................................................................................I -155
5.7.6 Adjustment when replacing the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB) ............................................................I -157
5.7.7 FD, SD, FS and PB data EEPROM storage ...............................................................................................................I -159
5.7.8 Main body adjustment data NVRAM board storage ...................................................................................................I -159
5.7.9 Printer image processing board line memory check ...................................................................................................I -159
5.7.10 Hard disk check ........................................................................................................................................................I -159
5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure ..................................................................................................................................I -160
5.7.12 Replacing procedure of the write unit .......................................................................................................................I -160
ADF Adjustment.....................................................................................................................................................................I -161
5.8.1 ADF Original Size Adj. ................................................................................................................................................I -161
5.8.2 ADF Orig. Stop Position ..............................................................................................................................................I -161
5.8.3 ADF Sensor Adjustment .............................................................................................................................................I -161
5.8.4 ADF Registration Loop Adj .........................................................................................................................................I -162
Finisher Adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................................I -162
5.9.1 Staple Center Position (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) ....................................................................................I -162
5.9.2 Paper Width Adj.(Staple) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) ................................................................................I -163
5.9.3 Paper Width Adj.(Straight) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) ..............................................................................I -163
5.9.4 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) ............................................................................I -164
xvii
5.9.5 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) ...........................................................................I -164
5.9.6 Paper Width Adjustment (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.) ...................................................................................................I -165
5.9.7 Punch Vertical Position Adj. (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.) ..............................................................................................I -166
5.9.8 Half Fold Position Adjustment (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) .............................................................................................I -166
5.9.9 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ............................................................................................................I -167
5.9.10 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ........................................................................................................I -168
5.9.11 Double Parallel Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ..................................................................................................I -169
5.9.12 Z-Fold Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ...........................................................................................................I -169
5.9.13 Gate Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) .............................................................................................................I -170
5.9.14 Fold Registration Loop Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ...............................................................................................I -171
5.9.15 Multi Folder(PI) Adjustment ......................................................................................................................................I -172
5.9.16 Paper Width Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment) ........................................................................................................I -172
5.9.17 Paper Length Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment) .......................................................................................................I -172
5.9.18 Staple Center Position (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ...................................................................................................I -172
5.9.19 Staple Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ................................................................................................I -173
5.9.20 Staple Pitch Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ................................................................................................I -173
5.9.21 Half-Fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ...................................................................................................I -174
5.9.22 Tri-Fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) .....................................................................................................I -174
5.9.23 Fold Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ....................................................................................................I -175
5.9.24 Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) .....................................................................................................I -176
5.9.25 Trimmer Receiver Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ...................................................................................................I -176
5.9.26 Cover Trimming Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ....................................................................................................I -177
5.9.27 Cover Lead Edge Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) .................................................................................................I -177
5.9.28 Spine Corner form Pos. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ...............................................................................................I -178
5.9.29 Glue Start Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment) .......................................................................................................I -178
5.9.30 Glue Finish Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment) .....................................................................................................I -179
5.9.31 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment) .............................................................................................I -180
5.9.32 Sub Compile CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ........................................................................................I -181
5.9.33 Clamp CD Width Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment) .......................................................................................I -181
5.9.34 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ....................................................................................I -182
5.9.35 Clamp FD Position Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ...............................................................................................I -182
5.9.36 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment ............................................................................................................................I -183
5.9.37 Half-Fold Stopper Adj. ..............................................................................................................................................I -183
5.9.38 Vertical Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment) ................................................................................................................I -184
5.9.39 Horizontal Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment) ............................................................................................................I -184
5.9.40 Registration Adjustment (Punch Adjustment) ...........................................................................................................I -185
5.9.41 Paper Edge Detect Sensor (Punch Adjustment) ......................................................................................................I -185
5.9.42 Tri-Fold Adjustment ..................................................................................................................................................I -185
5.9.43 2 Position Staple Pitch ..............................................................................................................................................I -186
5.9.44 Post Inserter Tray Size .............................................................................................................................................I -187
5.9.45 Output Quantity Limit ................................................................................................................................................I -187
5.9.46 Curl Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................................I -187
5.9.47 Recall Standard Data ................................................................................................................................................I -188
5.10 Firmware Version ................................................................................................................................................................I -188
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -188
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -188
5.11 CS Remote Care .................................................................................................................................................................I -188
5.11.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................................................I -188
5.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using E-mail) ...............................................................................I -188
5.11.3 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using phone line modem) ............................................................I -191
5.11.4 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using WebDAV server) ................................................................I -191
5.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system .............................................I -194
5.11.6 Mail initial setting (In the case of the main body NIC) ...............................................................................................I -194
5.11.7 E-mail Initial Setting (In the case of controller NIC) ..................................................................................................I -195
5.11.8 http communication setting (In the case of the main body NIC) ...............................................................................I -195
5.11.9 http Communication Setting (In the case of controller NIC) ......................................................................................I -196
5.11.10 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care ......................................................................................I -196
5.11.11 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care .........................................................................................................I -196
5.11.12 Setup confirmation ..................................................................................................................................................I -203
5.11.13 Maintenance call .....................................................................................................................................................I -203
5.11.14 Center call from administrator .................................................................................................................................I -203
5.11.15 Confirm communication log ....................................................................................................................................I -203
5.11.16 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care ..............................................................................................................I -203
5.11.17 CS Remote Care error code list ..............................................................................................................................I -203
5.11.18 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................................................................................I -205
5.12 List Output ...........................................................................................................................................................................I -205
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -205
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -205
5.13 Test Mode ...........................................................................................................................................................................I -207
5.13.1 Running Test Mode ..................................................................................................................................................I -207
xviii
5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode ........................................................................................................................................I -207

5.13.3 Test Pattern No.11 Beam check ...............................................................................................................................I -207
5.13.4 Test Pattern No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern .......................................................................................................I -208
5.13.5 Test Pattern No.40 Image skew check pattern (Full-bleed print of Test Pattern No.16)...........................................I -208
5.13.6 Test Pattern No.49 RU color sensor gamma correction (Output paper density adjustment chart i1-iSis/i1-Pro) .....I -209
5.13.7 Test Pattern No.51 Gradation evaluation pattern (Main scan) .................................................................................I -209
5.13.8 Test Pattern No.52 Gradation evaluation pattern (Sub scan) ...................................................................................I -210
5.13.9 Test Pattern No.53 Overall halftone .........................................................................................................................I -210
5.13.10 Test Pattern No.54 Gradation evaluation pattern ...................................................................................................I -211
5.13.11 Test Pattern No.55 5% coverage ............................................................................................................................I -212
5.13.12 Test Pattern No.58 Stripe check pattern .................................................................................................................I -212
5.13.13 Test Pattern No.62 Uneven density check pattern .................................................................................................I -212
5.13.14 Test Pattern No.75 Density correction pattern i1-iSis XL .......................................................................................I -213
5.13.15 Test Pattern No.76 Density correction pattern i1-Pro (Type1/Type2) .....................................................................I -213
5.13.16 Test Pattern No.77 Density correction pattern Manual ...........................................................................................I -214
5.13.17 Test Pattern No.80 Print peculiarity evaluation pattern ..........................................................................................I -215
5.13.18 Test Pattern No.88 Chart file output .......................................................................................................................I -215
5.14 Setting Data ........................................................................................................................................................................I -216
5.14.1 Load from external memory ......................................................................................................................................I -216
5.14.2 Store to external memory .........................................................................................................................................I -217
5.15 Log Store ...........................................................................................................................................................................I -217
5.15.1 Log Store Setting ......................................................................................................................................................I -217
5.15.2 Execute Log Storing .................................................................................................................................................I -218
5.16 ORU-M Setting.....................................................................................................................................................................I -219
5.16.1 ORU-M object/Life setting..........................................................................................................................................I -219
5.16.2 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting...................................................................................................................................I -219
5.16.3 ORU-M Password Setting..........................................................................................................................................I -220
6. IC-601 SERVICE MODE ........................................................................................................................................I -221

6.1 IC Service Mode List..............................................................................................................................................................I -221
6.2 Start/exit of Service Mode .....................................................................................................................................................I -221
6.2.1 Method to activate IC service mode ...........................................................................................................................I -221
6.2.2 Method to exit IC service mode ..................................................................................................................................I -221
6.3 System Setting ......................................................................................................................................................................I -221
6.3.1 IC software DIPSW setting procedures ......................................................................................................................I -221
6.3.2 IC software DIPSW list ...............................................................................................................................................I -222
6.4 Firmware Version ..................................................................................................................................................................I -222
(1) Functions ........................................................................................................................................................................I -222
(2) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -222
(3) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -222
6.5 Firmware Version Up.............................................................................................................................................................I -223
6.5.1 ISW outline .................................................................................................................................................................I -223
6.5.2 Method of the USB memory ISW ................................................................................................................................I -223
6.5.3 Method of Internet ISW ...............................................................................................................................................I -226
6.5.4 ISW error list ...............................................................................................................................................................I -231
6.6 IC HDD Format .....................................................................................................................................................................I -232
(1) Functions ........................................................................................................................................................................I -232
(2) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -232
(3) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -232
6.7 CSV File Import/Export .........................................................................................................................................................I -232
6.7.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................I -232
6.7.2 Procedure....................................................................................................................................................................I -232
6.8 Font Backup ..........................................................................................................................................................................I -234
6.8.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................I -234
6.8.2 Preparation of backup/restore ....................................................................................................................................I -234
6.8.3 Backup method ...........................................................................................................................................................I -235
6.8.4 Method to restore ........................................................................................................................................................I -235
6.9 Log File Check ......................................................................................................................................................................I -236
(1) Function...........................................................................................................................................................................I -236
(2) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -236
(3) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -236
7. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY SETTING ........................................................................................................I -238

7.1 CE/Administrator Security Setting List ..................................................................................................................................I -238
7.2 Start/exit ................................................................................................................................................................................I -238
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -238
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -238
7.3 CE Authentication .................................................................................................................................................................I -238
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -238
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -238
7.4 CE Auth. Password ...............................................................................................................................................................I -238
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -238
xix
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -238

7.5 Admin. Authentication ...........................................................................................................................................................I -239
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -239
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -239
7.6 Administrator Password ........................................................................................................................................................I -239
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -239
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -239
8. FEE COLLECTION SETTING ................................................................................................................................I -240

8.1 Fee Collection Setting List.....................................................................................................................................................I -240
8.2 Start/exit ................................................................................................................................................................................I -240
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -240
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -240
8.3 Management Function ..........................................................................................................................................................I -240
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -240
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -240
8.4 Billing Coefficient Setting ......................................................................................................................................................I -240
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -240
(2) Functions ........................................................................................................................................................................I -240
(3) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -240
9. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD ......................................................................................................................................I -241

9.1 Process Adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................................I -241
9.1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................I -241
9.1.2 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front) .................................................................................................................................I -241
9.1.3 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back) .................................................................................................................................I -241
9.1.4 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Front)...................................................................................................................................I -241
9.1.5 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Back)...................................................................................................................................I -242
9.1.6 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Front) ..................................................................................................................................I -242
9.1.7 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Back) ...................................................................................................................................I -242
9.1.8 Separation AC ............................................................................................................................................................I -243
9.1.9 Separation AC ............................................................................................................................................................I -243
9.1.10 Separation DC(Front) ...............................................................................................................................................I -244
9.1.11 Separation DC(Back) ................................................................................................................................................I -244
9.1.12 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Idling) ...............................................................................................................I -245
9.1.13 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Printing) ............................................................................................................I -245
9.1.14 Temperature of fusing lower roller (Idling) ................................................................................................................I -246
9.1.15 Temperature of fusing lower roller (Printing) ............................................................................................................I -246
9.1.16 Temperature to turn OFF the upper edge heater forcibly / Paper width: less than 261mm ......................................I -247
9.1.17 Temperature to turn OFF the upper edge heater forcibly / Paper width: 261mm or more ........................................I -247
9.1.18 Speed Down .............................................................................................................................................................I -248
9.1.19 2nd transfer pressure ................................................................................................................................................I -248
9.1.20 CPM Down ................................................................................................................................................................I -248
9.1.21 Fusing Air Separation Air Level Setting ....................................................................................................................I -248
10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 ....................................................I -249

10.1 Centering adjustment of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 .........................................................................................................I -249
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -249
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -249
10.2 Separation pressure adjustment of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 ........................................................................................I -249
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -249
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -249
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-622 ................................................................................................................I -250

11.1 Hinge angle adjustment (70 degrees and 40 degrees) .......................................................................................................I -250
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -250
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -250
11.2 Hinge angle adjustment (90 degrees) .................................................................................................................................I -250
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -250
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -250
12. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PF-602 ................................................................................................................I -251

12.1 Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment ..............................................................................................................................I -251
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -251
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -251
12.2 Pick-up roller height adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................I -252
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -252
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -252
12.3 Separation pressure adjustment .........................................................................................................................................I -254
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -254
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -254
12.4 Lift plate horizontal adjustment ...........................................................................................................................................I -254
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -254
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -254
xx
12.5 Horizontal adjustment .........................................................................................................................................................I -255

(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -255
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -255
13. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LU-202 ................................................................................................................I -257

13.1 Separation pressure adjustment .........................................................................................................................................I -257
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -257
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -257
13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal adjustment ..................................................................................................................................I -257
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -257
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -258
13.3 Paper centering adjustment ................................................................................................................................................I -258
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -258
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -259
13.4 Paper skew adjustment .......................................................................................................................................................I -259
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -259
(2) Preparation .....................................................................................................................................................................I -259
(3) Adjustment procedure of all the paper skew regularly ...................................................................................................I -260
(4) Adjustment procedure of each paper skew irregularly ...................................................................................................I -260
13.5 (Maximum) Paper feed height adjustment ..........................................................................................................................I -260
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -260
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -261
13.6 Pick-up roller separation adjustment ...................................................................................................................................I -261
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -261
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -262
14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MB-504 ...............................................................................................................I -263

14.1 Paper feed roller /BP load adjustment ................................................................................................................................I -263
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -263
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -263
14.2 (Maximum) Paper feed height adjustment (bypass) ...........................................................................................................I -263
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -263
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -263
14.3 Pick-up shift amount adjustment (bypass) ..........................................................................................................................I -263
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -263
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -264
15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-509 ................................................................................................................I -265

15.1 Height adjustment ...............................................................................................................................................................I -265
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -265
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -265
15.2 Position adjustment of the shutter solenoid (SD5)...............................................................................................................I -265
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -265
(2) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -266
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-521 ................................................................................................................I -267

16.1 Adjusting the flat-stapling stopper position .........................................................................................................................I -267
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -267
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -267
16.2 Adjusting the alignment plate position ................................................................................................................................I -268
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -268
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -269
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -270
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -270

17.1 Adjustment the bypass gate ................................................................................................................................................I -271
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -271
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -271
17.2 Adjusting the shift position ..................................................................................................................................................I -272
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -272
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -272
17.3 Adjusting the paper exit opening solenoid ..........................................................................................................................I -272
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -272
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -273
17.4 Adjusting the mounting position of the paper exit arm ........................................................................................................I -274
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -274
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -274
17.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Up ................................................................................................I -275
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -275
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -275
17.6 Staple position adjustment ..................................................................................................................................................I -276
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -276
xxi
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -276

18.1 Adjustment the bypass gate ................................................................................................................................................I -278
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -278
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -278
18.2 Adjusting the shift position ..................................................................................................................................................I -279
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -279
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -279
18.3 Adjusting the paper exit opening solenoid ..........................................................................................................................I -279
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -279
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -280
18.4 Adjusting the mounting position of the paper exit arm ........................................................................................................I -281
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -281
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -281
18.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Up ................................................................................................I -282
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -282
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -282
18.6 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Lw ................................................................................................I -283
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -283
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -283
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -284
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -284
18.8 Staple position adjustment (Saddle stitching) .....................................................................................................................I -285
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -285
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -285
18.9 Staple up/down position adjustment ...................................................................................................................................I -286
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -286
(2) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -286
18.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment ........................................................................................................................................I -287
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -287
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -288
18.11 Folding pressure adjustment .............................................................................................................................................I -288
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -288
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -289
18.12 Tri-folding position adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................I -289
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -289
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -289
19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-512/513 .........................................................................................................I -290

19.1 Punch hole position skew adjustment .................................................................................................................................I -290
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -290
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -290
20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PI-502 .................................................................................................................I -291

20.1 PI tilt adjustment (When PK is connected) ..........................................................................................................................I -291
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -291
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -291
21. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LS-505 ................................................................................................................I -292

21.1 Adjusting the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) ......................................................................................................................I -292
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -292
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -292
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -292
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -292
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -292
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -293
21.4 Adjusting the job partition solenoid (SD2) ...........................................................................................................................I -293
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -293
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -293
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -293
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -294
21.6 Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment .........................................................................................................................I -294
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -294
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -294
22. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FD-503 ................................................................................................................I -296

22.1 Roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position adjustment ................................................................I -296
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -296
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -296
xxii
22.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment .......................................................................................................I -296
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -296
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -297
22.3 Punch Centering Adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................I -297
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -297
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -297
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -298
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -298
22.5 Paper feed control gear position adjustment (PI tray) .........................................................................................................I -298
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -298
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -298
22.6 Paper feed pick-up volume adjustment (PI tray) .................................................................................................................I -299
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -299
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -299
23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-506 ................................................................................................................I -300

(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -300
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -300
23.2 Folding skew adjustment ....................................................................................................................................................I -300
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -300
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -300
23.3 Second folding position stabilization adjustment ................................................................................................................I -301
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -301
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -301
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -302
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -302
(3) Adjustment Procedure /1 ................................................................................................................................................I -302
(4) Adjustment Procedure /2 ................................................................................................................................................I -303
23.5 Stapler position adjustment .................................................................................................................................................I -303
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -303
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -303
23.6 Tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher ......................................................................................................................................I -304
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -304
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -304
23.7 Roller cutter skew adjustment .............................................................................................................................................I -305
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -305
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -306
23.8 Trimming adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................................I -306
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -306
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -307
24. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PB-503 ................................................................................................................I -308

24.1 Clamp sub scan direction alignment adjustment ................................................................................................................I -308
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -308
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -308
24.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment ..............................................................................................................I -308
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -308
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -309
24.3 Pellet supply arm angle adjustment ....................................................................................................................................I -309
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -309
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -309
24.4 Glue apply roller gap adjustment ........................................................................................................................................I -310
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -310
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -310
24.5 Cover paper glue gap adjustment .......................................................................................................................................I -310
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -310
(2) Gap adjustment procedure in thin coat mode ................................................................................................................I -311
(3) Gap adjustment procedure in thick coat mode ...............................................................................................................I -311
24.6 Glue tank movement rail tilt adjustment ..............................................................................................................................I -312
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -312
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -312
24.7 Cover paper folding plate nipping adjustment .....................................................................................................................I -312
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -312
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -313
24.8 Cover paper folding plate parallel adjustment .....................................................................................................................I -313
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -313
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -313
24.9 Cover paper table up down belt adjustment .......................................................................................................................I -314
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -314
xxiii
(2) Check point ....................................................................................................................................................................I -314

(3) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -315
24.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment ..........................................................................................................................I -315
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -315
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -316
24.11 Cover paper cutting skew adjustment ...............................................................................................................................I -316
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -316
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -316
24.12 Cover paper table positioning ...........................................................................................................................................I -317
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -317
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -317
24.13 Cover paper tray pick-up adjustment ................................................................................................................................I -317
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -317
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -318
24.14 Cover paper tray pick-up roller height adjustment ............................................................................................................I -319
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -319
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -320
24.15 Cover paper tray separation pressure adjustment ............................................................................................................I -321
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -321
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -322
24.16 Cover paper tray Centering Adjustment ............................................................................................................................I -322
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -322
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -322
24.17 Cover paper tray lift plate horizontal adjustment ...............................................................................................................I -322
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -322
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -323
24.18 Height adjustment .............................................................................................................................................................I -325
(1) Usage .............................................................................................................................................................................I -325
(2) Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................I -326
25. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-506.................................................................................................................I -327

25.1 Straight gate solenoid (SD1) position adjustment................................................................................................................I -327
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -327
(2) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -327
25.2 Position adjustment of the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2)............................................................................................I -327
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -327
(2) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -328
25.3 Position adjustment of the stack switching solenoid (SD3)..................................................................................................I -328
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -328
(2) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -329
25.4 Position adjustment of the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4).............................................................................I -329
(1) Usage..............................................................................................................................................................................I -329
(2) Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................I -330
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE.......................................................................................................J -1
1. OUTLINE ...................................................................................................................................................................J -1
1.1 Precautions on rewriting the firmware ......................................................................................................................................J -1
(1) ISW execution procedures ................................................................................................................................................J -1
(2) DIPSW and toggle SW setting on the boards ....................................................................................................................J -1
(3) Connecting short connector when rewriting firmware ........................................................................................................J -1
(4) Checksum check ...............................................................................................................................................................J -1
1.2 Firmware data flow ...................................................................................................................................................................J -1
1.3 Main body setting for ISW ........................................................................................................................................................J -1
(1) Type of setting ...................................................................................................................................................................J -1
(2) When in the version up of the program .............................................................................................................................J -2
(3) When writing new firmware (When replacing board and rewriting firmware failed) ...........................................................J -2
1.4 Type .........................................................................................................................................................................................J -2
(1) USB MEMORY ISW ..........................................................................................................................................................J -2
(2) Internet ISW .......................................................................................................................................................................J -2
2. ISWTRNS_G ..............................................................................................................................................................J -3
2.1 Specifications ...........................................................................................................................................................................J -3
2.1.1 ISWTrns_G (PC software) .............................................................................................................................................J -3
2.2 Installation of the ISWTrns_G ..................................................................................................................................................J -3
(1) Procedure ..........................................................................................................................................................................J -3
2.3 Usage of the ISWTrns_G .........................................................................................................................................................J -5
2.3.1 Firmware checksum check ............................................................................................................................................J -5
2.4 Error list ....................................................................................................................................................................................J -5
(1) ISWTrns_G error list ..........................................................................................................................................................J -5
(2) ISWTrns_G troubleshooting ..............................................................................................................................................J -6
3. USB MEMORY ISW....................................................................................................................................................J -7

3.1 Usage of the USB memory ISW ...............................................................................................................................................J -7
xxiv
(1) Board to be rewritten and firmware ...................................................................................................................................J -7

(2) Procedure ..........................................................................................................................................................................J -7
3.2 Boot USB memory ISW ..........................................................................................................................................................J -10
(1) Board to be rewritten and firmware .................................................................................................................................J -10
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................J -11
3.3 Error list ..................................................................................................................................................................................J -11
(1) Overall control board firmware abnormality .....................................................................................................................J -11
(2) Error list ...........................................................................................................................................................................J -11
4. INTERNET ISW .......................................................................................................................................................J -13

4.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................................................J -13
4.2 Operating environment ...........................................................................................................................................................J -13
4.3 Initial setting ...........................................................................................................................................................................J -13
(1) Setting from the operation panel .....................................................................................................................................J -13
(2) Setting from the Web browser .........................................................................................................................................J -13
4.4 Internet ISW using the Web Utilities .......................................................................................................................................J -16
(1) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................J -16
4.5 Usage precautions .................................................................................................................................................................J -18
4.5.1 Notice to administrator .................................................................................................................................................J -18
4.5.2 Power cut during writing ...............................................................................................................................................J -18
4.6 Internet ISW using the operation panel ..................................................................................................................................J -18
(1) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................J -18
(2) Main body error list ..........................................................................................................................................................J -21
4.7 Authentication of the proxy server in Internet ISW .................................................................................................................J -21
(1) Proxy server ....................................................................................................................................................................J -21
(2) Authentication of the proxy server ...................................................................................................................................J -21
(3) Authentication type of the proxy server and the command list ........................................................................................J -21
(4) Remark ............................................................................................................................................................................J -22
K TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................K -1
1. JAM INDICATION .....................................................................................................................................................K -1
1.1 Jam code list ............................................................................................................................................................................K -1
2. MALFUNCTION CODE ...........................................................................................................................................K -19

2.1 Trouble reset method ............................................................................................................................................................K -19
2.2 Function to detach defective sections ...................................................................................................................................K -19
(1) User operation ................................................................................................................................................................K -19
(2) DIPSW setting .................................................................................................................................................................K -19
2.3 Malfunction code list ..............................................................................................................................................................K -19
2.4 Malfunction code caused by connector disconnection ..........................................................................................................K -78
2.4.1 bizhub PRESS C7000 .................................................................................................................................................K -78
2.5 Solution 1 (C-0001_0300) .....................................................................................................................................................K -81
2.5.1 C-0001 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -81
2.5.2 C-0002 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -82
2.5.3 C-0003 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -82
2.5.4 C-0101 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -82
2.5.5 C-0102 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -83
2.5.6 C-0103 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -83
2.5.7 C-0201 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -84
2.5.8 C-0202 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -84
2.5.9 C-0203 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -85
2.5.10 C-0204 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -85
2.5.11 C-0205 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -85
2.5.12 C-0208 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -86
2.5.13 C-0209 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -86
2.5.14 C-0211 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -86
2.5.15 C-0212 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -87
2.5.16 C-0213 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -87
2.6 Solution 2 (C-0301_0400) .....................................................................................................................................................K -88
2.6.1 C-0301*........................................................................................................................................................................K -88
2.6.2 C-0302*........................................................................................................................................................................K -88
2.6.3 C-0303 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -88
2.6.4 C-0304*........................................................................................................................................................................K -89
2.6.5 C-0305*........................................................................................................................................................................K -89
2.6.6 C-0306 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -89
2.6.7 C-0307 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -90
2.6.8 C-0308 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -90
2.6.9 C-0309 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -90
2.6.10 C-0310 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -91
2.6.11 C-0311 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -91
2.6.12 C-0312 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -91
2.6.13 C-0313 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -92
xxv
2.6.14 C-0314 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -92

2.6.15 C-0315 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -92
2.6.16 C-0316 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -93
2.6.17 C-0317 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -93
2.6.18 C-0318 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -93
2.6.19 C-0320 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -94
2.6.20 C-0321 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -94
2.6.21 C-0322 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -94
2.6.22 C-0323*......................................................................................................................................................................K -95
2.6.23 C-0324*......................................................................................................................................................................K -95
2.7 Solution 3 (C-0401_0500) .....................................................................................................................................................K -95
2.7.1 C-0401 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -95
2.7.2 C-0402 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -96
2.7.3 C-0403 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -96
2.7.4 C-0404 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -96
2.7.5 C-0405 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -97
2.7.6 C-0406 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -97
2.7.7 C-0407 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -97
2.7.8 C-0408 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -98
2.7.9 C-0409 .........................................................................................................................................................................K -98
2.7.10 C-0410 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -98
2.7.11 C-0411 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -99
2.7.12 C-0412 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -99
2.7.13 C-0413 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -100
2.7.14 C-0414 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -100
2.7.15 C-0415 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -101
2.7.16 C-0416 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -101
2.7.17 C-0417 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -102
2.7.18 C-0418 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -102
2.8 Solution 4 (C-1001_1126) ...................................................................................................................................................K -103
2.8.1 C-1005 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -103
2.8.2 C-1006 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -103
2.8.3 C-1007 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -103
2.8.4 C-1009 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -104
2.8.5 C-1010 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -104
2.8.6 C-1011 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -104
2.8.7 C-1012........................................................................................................................................................................K -105
2.8.8 C-1013 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -105
2.8.9 C-1014........................................................................................................................................................................K -105
2.8.10 C-1101 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -106
2.8.11 C-1102 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -106
2.8.12 C-1102 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -107
2.8.13 C-1103 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -107
2.8.14 C-1103 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -107
2.8.15 C-1104 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -108
2.8.16 C-1104 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -108
2.8.17 C-1105 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -109
2.8.18 C-1105 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -109
2.8.19 C-1106 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -109
2.8.20 C-1106 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -110
2.8.21 C-1107 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -110
2.8.22 C-1107 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -111
2.8.23 C-1108 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -111
2.8.24 C-1108 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -112
2.8.25 C-1109 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -112
2.8.26 C-1109 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -112
2.8.27 C-1110 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -113
2.8.28 C-1110 (FS-531/612) ..............................................................................................................................................K -113
2.8.29 C-1111 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -113
2.8.30 C-1112 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -114
2.8.31 C-1113 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -114
2.8.32 C-1113 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -115
2.8.33 C-1114 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -115
2.8.34 C-1115 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -115
2.8.35 C-1116 (FS-612) .....................................................................................................................................................K -116
2.8.36 C-1124 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -116
2.8.37 C-1125 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -117
2.8.38 C-1126 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -117
2.9 Solution 5 (C-1127_1230) ...................................................................................................................................................K -118
2.9.1 C-1127 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -118
xxvi
2.9.2 C-1132 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -118

2.9.3 C-1137 (FS-531/612) ................................................................................................................................................K -118
2.9.4 C-1140 (FS-521) .......................................................................................................................................................K -119
2.9.5 C-1141 (FS-521) .......................................................................................................................................................K -119
2.9.6 C-1142 (FS-521) .......................................................................................................................................................K -120
2.9.7 C-1143 (FS-521) .......................................................................................................................................................K -120
2.9.8 C-1144 (FS-521) .......................................................................................................................................................K -121
2.9.9 C-1145 (FS-521) .......................................................................................................................................................K -121
2.9.10 C-1146 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -121
2.9.11 C-1147 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -122
2.9.12 C-1148 (FS-521) .....................................................................................................................................................K -122
2.9.13 C-1201 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -123
2.9.14 C-1202 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -123
2.9.15 C-1203 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -124
2.9.16 C-1204 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -124
2.9.17 C-1205 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -125
2.9.18 C-1206 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -125
2.9.19 C-1211 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -125
2.9.20 C-1212 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -126
2.9.21 C-1213 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -126
2.9.22 C-1214 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -127
2.9.23 C-1215 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -127
2.9.24 C-1216 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -127
2.9.25 C-1221 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -128
2.9.26 C-1222 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -128
2.9.27 C-1223 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -129
2.9.28 C-1224 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -129
2.9.29 C-1225 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -129
2.9.30 C-1226 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -130
2.9.31 C-1227 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -130
2.9.32 C-1228 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -131
2.9.33 C-1229 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -131
2.9.34 C-1230 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -132
2.10 Solution 6 (C-1231_1270) .................................................................................................................................................K -132
2.10.1 C-1231 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -132
2.10.2 C-1232 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -132
2.10.3 C-1233 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -133
2.10.4 C-1234 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -133
2.10.5 C-1235 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -134
2.10.6 C-1241 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -134
2.10.7 C-1242 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -134
2.10.8 C-1243 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -135
2.10.9 C-1244 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -135
2.10.10 C-1245 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -136
2.10.11 C-1246 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -136
2.10.12 C-1247 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -137
2.10.13 C-1248 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -137
2.10.14 C-1249 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -138
2.10.15 C-1250 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -138
2.10.16 C-1251 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -139
2.10.17 C-1252 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -139
2.10.18 C-1253 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -140
2.10.19 C-1254 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -140
2.10.20 C-1255 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -141
2.10.21 C-1256 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -141
2.10.22 C-1257 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -142
2.10.23 C-1258 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -142
2.10.24 C-1259 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -143
2.10.25 C-1260 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -143
2.10.26 C-1261 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -144
2.10.27 C-1262 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -144
2.10.28 C-1263 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -144
2.10.29 C-1264 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -145
2.10.30 C-1265 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -145
2.10.31 C-1266 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -146
2.10.32 C-1267 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -146
2.10.33 C-1268 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -147
2.10.34 C-1269 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -147
2.10.35 C-1270 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -147
2.11 Solution 7 (C-1271_1400) .................................................................................................................................................K -148
xxvii
2.11.1 C-1271 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -148

2.11.2 C-1272 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -148
2.11.3 C-1273 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -149
2.11.4 C-1275 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -149
2.11.5 C-1281......................................................................................................................................................................K -149
2.11.6 C-1282......................................................................................................................................................................K -150
2.11.7 C-1290 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -150
2.11.8 C-1291 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -151
2.11.9 C-1292 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -151
2.11.10 C-1293 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -151
2.11.11 C-1294 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -152
2.11.12 C-1295 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -152
2.11.13 C-1296 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -153
2.11.14 C-1297 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -153
2.11.15 C-1298 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -153
2.11.16 C-1299 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -154
2.11.17 C-1301 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -154
2.11.18 C-1302 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -154
2.11.19 C-1303 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -155
2.11.20 C-1304 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -155
2.11.21 C-1305 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -155
2.11.22 C-1306 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -156
2.11.23 C-1307 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -156
2.11.24 C-1308 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -156
2.11.25 C-1309 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -157
2.11.26 C-1310 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -157
2.11.27 C-1311 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -157
2.11.28 C-1330 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -158
2.11.29 C-1331 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -158
2.11.30 C-1332 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -158
2.11.31 C-1333 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -159
2.11.32 C-1334 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -159
2.11.33 C-1341....................................................................................................................................................................K -160
2.11.34 C-1342....................................................................................................................................................................K -160
2.11.35 C-1351 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -160
2.11.36 C-1352 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -161
2.11.37 C-1353 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -161
2.11.38 C-1354 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -161
2.11.39 C-1355 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -162
2.11.40 C-1356 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -162
2.11.41 C-1357 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -162
2.11.42 C-1358 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -163
2.11.43 C-1359 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -163
2.11.44 C-1360 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -164
2.11.45 C-1361 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -164
2.11.46 C-1364 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -164
2.12 Solution 8 (C-1401_1500) .................................................................................................................................................K -165
2.12.1 C-1402 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -165
2.12.2 C-1403 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -165
2.12.3 C-1404 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -165
2.12.4 C-1406 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -166
2.12.5 C-1407 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -166
2.12.6 C-1408......................................................................................................................................................................K -166
2.12.7 C-1411 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -167
2.12.8 C-1431 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -167
2.12.9 C-1432 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -167
2.12.10 C-1433 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -168
2.12.11 C-1435 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -168
2.12.12 C-1436 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -168
2.12.13 C-1437 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -169
2.12.14 C-1438 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -169
2.12.15 C-1439....................................................................................................................................................................K -169
2.12.16 C-1440 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -170
2.12.17 C-1441 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -170
2.12.18 C-1451 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -170
2.12.19 C-1452 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -171
2.12.20 C-1454 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -171
2.12.21 C-1455 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -171
2.12.22 C-1456....................................................................................................................................................................K -172
2.13 Solution 9 (C-1501_1539) .................................................................................................................................................K -172
xxviii
2.13.1 C-1501 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -172

2.13.2 C-1502 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -172
2.13.3 C-1504 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -173
2.13.4 C-1505 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -173
2.13.5 C-1506 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -173
2.13.6 C-1507 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -174
2.13.7 C-1508 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -174
2.13.8 C-1509 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -175
2.13.9 C-1510 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -175
2.13.10 C-1511 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -175
2.13.11 C-1512 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -176
2.13.12 C-1513 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -176
2.13.13 C-1514 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -177
2.13.14 C-1515 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -177
2.13.15 C-1516 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -177
2.13.16 C-1517 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -178
2.13.17 C-1518 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -178
2.13.18 C-1519 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -179
2.13.19 C-1520 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -179
2.13.20 C-1521 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -179
2.13.21 C-1522 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -180
2.13.22 C-1523 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -180
2.13.23 C-1524 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -181
2.13.24 C-1525 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -181
2.13.25 C-1526 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -182
2.13.26 C-1527 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -182
2.13.27 C-1528 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -182
2.13.28 C-1530 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -183
2.13.29 C-1531 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -183
2.13.30 C-1532 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -184
2.13.31 C-1534 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -184
2.13.32 C-1537 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -184
2.13.33 C-1538 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -185
2.14 Solution 10 (C-1540_1567) ...............................................................................................................................................K -185
2.14.1 C-1540 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -185
2.14.2 C-1541 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -186
2.14.3 C-1542 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -186
2.14.4 C-1543 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -187
2.14.5 C-1544 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -187
2.14.6 C-1545 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -188
2.14.7 C-1546 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -188
2.14.8 C-1547 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -189
2.14.9 C-1548 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -189
2.14.10 C-1549 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -190
2.14.11 C-1550 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -190
2.14.12 C-1551 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -191
2.14.13 C-1552 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -191
2.14.14 C-1553 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -192
2.14.15 C-1554 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -192
2.14.16 C-1555 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -193
2.14.17 C-1556 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -193
2.14.18 C-1557 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -194
2.14.19 C-1558 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -194
2.14.20 C-1559 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -195
2.14.21 C-1560 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -195
2.14.22 C-1561 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -196
2.14.23 C-1562 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -196
2.14.24 C-1565 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -197
2.14.25 C-1566 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -197
2.14.26 C-1567 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -197
2.15 Solution 11 (C-2001_2400) ...............................................................................................................................................K -198
2.15.1 C-2001 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -198
2.15.2 C-2003 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -198
2.15.3 C-2004 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -199
2.15.4 C-2006 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -199
2.15.5 C-2201*....................................................................................................................................................................K -199
2.15.6 C-2202*....................................................................................................................................................................K -200
2.15.7 C-2203*....................................................................................................................................................................K -200
2.15.8 C-2204*....................................................................................................................................................................K -200
2.15.9 C-2220 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -201
xxix
2.15.10 C-2221 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -201

2.15.11 C-2222 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -201
2.15.12 C-2223 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -202
2.15.13 C-2231*..................................................................................................................................................................K -202
2.15.14 C-2232*..................................................................................................................................................................K -203
2.15.15 C-2233*..................................................................................................................................................................K -203
2.15.16 C-2234*..................................................................................................................................................................K -204
2.15.17 C-2241*..................................................................................................................................................................K -204
2.15.18 C-2242*..................................................................................................................................................................K -204
2.15.19 C-2243*..................................................................................................................................................................K -205
2.15.20 C-2244*..................................................................................................................................................................K -205
2.15.21 C-2301 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -206
2.15.22 C-2302*..................................................................................................................................................................K -206
2.15.23 C-2303*..................................................................................................................................................................K -206
2.15.24 C-2304*..................................................................................................................................................................K -207
2.15.25 C-2305*..................................................................................................................................................................K -207
2.15.26 C-2306*..................................................................................................................................................................K -207
2.16 Solution 12 (C-2401_2500) ...............................................................................................................................................K -208
2.16.1 C-2401 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -208
2.16.2 C-2402 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -208
2.16.3 C-2403 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -208
2.16.4 C-2404 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -209
2.16.5 C-2411 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -209
2.16.6 C-2412 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -209
2.16.7 C-2413 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -210
2.16.8 C-2414 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -210
2.16.9 C-2421 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -210
2.16.10 C-2422 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -211
2.16.11 C-2423 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -211
2.16.12 C-2424 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -212
2.16.13 C-2431 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -212
2.16.14 C-2432 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -212
2.16.15 C-2433 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -213
2.16.16 C-2434 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -213
2.16.17 C-2441 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -214
2.16.18 C-2442 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -214
2.16.19 C-2443 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -214
2.16.20 C-2444 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -215
2.16.21 C-2451 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -215
2.16.22 C-2452 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -216
2.16.23 C-2453 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -216
2.16.24 C-2454 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -217
2.16.25 C-2470 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -217
2.17 Solution 13 (C-2701_2800) ...............................................................................................................................................K -217
2.17.1 C-2701 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -217
2.17.2 C-2702 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -218
2.17.3 C-2703 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -218
2.17.4 C-2704 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -218
2.17.5 C-2711 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -219
2.17.6 C-2712 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -219
2.17.7 C-2713 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -220
2.17.8 C-2714 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -220
2.17.9 C-2720 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -220
2.17.10 C-2721 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -221
2.18 Solution 14 (C-2801_3000) ...............................................................................................................................................K -221
2.18.1 C-2801 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -221
2.18.2 C-2802 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -222
2.18.3 C-2803 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -222
2.18.4 C-2804 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -222
2.18.5 C-2811 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -223
2.18.6 C-2812 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -223
2.18.7 C-2813 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -224
2.18.8 C-2814 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -224
2.18.9 C-2821 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -224
2.18.10 C-2822 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -225
2.18.11 C-2823 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -225
2.18.12 C-2824 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -226
2.18.13 C-2831 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -226
2.18.14 C-2832 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -226
2.18.15 C-2833 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -227
xxx
2.18.16 C-2834 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -227

2.18.17 C-2840 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -228
2.18.18 C-2841 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -228
2.19 Solution 15 (C-3001_3500) ...............................................................................................................................................K -229
2.19.1 C-3101 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -229
2.19.2 C-3102 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -229
2.19.3 C-3103 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -229
2.19.4 C-3301*....................................................................................................................................................................K -230
2.19.5 C-3302*....................................................................................................................................................................K -230
2.19.6 C-3303 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -231
2.19.7 C-3304 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -231
2.20 Solution 16 (C-3501_4000) ...............................................................................................................................................K -231
2.20.1 C-3501*....................................................................................................................................................................K -231
2.20.2 C-3502*....................................................................................................................................................................K -232
2.20.3 C-3503*....................................................................................................................................................................K -232
2.20.4 C-3504*....................................................................................................................................................................K -233
2.20.5 C-3505*....................................................................................................................................................................K -233
2.20.6 C-3506*....................................................................................................................................................................K -234
2.20.7 C-3508*....................................................................................................................................................................K -234
2.20.8 C-3509*....................................................................................................................................................................K -235
2.20.9 C-3801*....................................................................................................................................................................K -235
2.20.10 C-3802*..................................................................................................................................................................K -236
2.20.11 C-3803*..................................................................................................................................................................K -237
2.20.12 C-3804*..................................................................................................................................................................K -237
2.20.13 C-3805*..................................................................................................................................................................K -238
2.20.14 C-3806*..................................................................................................................................................................K -238
2.20.15 C-3901*..................................................................................................................................................................K -239
2.20.16 C-3902*..................................................................................................................................................................K -239
2.20.17 C-3903*..................................................................................................................................................................K -240
2.20.18 C-3904*..................................................................................................................................................................K -241
2.20.19 C-3905*..................................................................................................................................................................K -241
2.20.20 C-3906*..................................................................................................................................................................K -242
2.20.21 C-3907*..................................................................................................................................................................K -242
2.20.22 C-3908*..................................................................................................................................................................K -243
2.20.23 C-3909*..................................................................................................................................................................K -243
2.20.24 C-3910*..................................................................................................................................................................K -244
2.20.25 C-3911*..................................................................................................................................................................K -245
2.20.26 C-3912*..................................................................................................................................................................K -245
2.20.27 C-3913*..................................................................................................................................................................K -246
2.20.28 C-3914*..................................................................................................................................................................K -246
2.20.29 C-3915*..................................................................................................................................................................K -247
2.21 Solution 17 (C-4001_5000) ...............................................................................................................................................K -247
2.21.1 C-4101 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -247
2.21.2 C-4102 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -247
2.21.3 C-4103 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -248
2.21.4 C-4104 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -248
2.21.5 C-4111 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -248
2.21.6 C-4112 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -249
2.21.7 C-4113 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -249
2.21.8 C-4114 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -249
2.21.9 C-4120 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -250
2.21.10 C-4301 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -250
2.21.11 C-4501 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -250
2.21.12 C-4502 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -251
2.21.13 C-4503 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -251
2.21.14 C-4504 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -251
2.21.15 C-4511 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -252
2.21.16 C-4512 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -252
2.21.17 C-4513 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -252
2.21.18 C-4514 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -253
2.21.19 C-4520 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -253
2.21.20 C-4521 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -253
2.21.21 C-4522 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -254
2.21.22 C-4545 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -254
2.21.23 C-4546 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -255
2.21.24 C-4547 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -255
2.21.25 C-4548 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -255
2.21.26 C-4601 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -255
2.21.27 C-4602 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -256
2.21.28 C-4603 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -256
xxxi
2.21.29 C-4604 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -257

2.21.30 C-4621 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -257
2.21.31 C-4622 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -258
2.21.32 C-4623 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -258
2.21.33 C-4624 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -259
2.21.34 C-4631 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -259
2.21.35 C-4632 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -260
2.21.36 C-4633 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -260
2.21.37 C-4634 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -260
2.21.38 C-4651 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -261
2.21.39 C-4652 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -261
2.21.40 C-4653 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -262
2.21.41 C-4654 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -262
2.21.42 C-4661 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -263
2.21.43 C-4662 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -263
2.21.44 C-4663 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -264
2.21.45 C-4701 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -264
2.21.46 C-4702 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -264
2.21.47 C-4703 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -265
2.21.48 C-4705 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -265
2.21.49 C-4706 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -265
2.21.50 C-4708 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -266
2.21.51 C-4709 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -266
2.21.52 C-4713 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -266
2.21.53 C-4714 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -267
2.21.54 C-4715 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -267
2.21.55 C-4716 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -267
2.21.56 C-4717 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -268
2.21.57 C-4718 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -268
2.21.58 C-4719 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -268
2.21.59 C-4720 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -269
2.21.60 C-4721 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -269
2.21.61 C-4722 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -269
2.21.62 C-4723 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -270
2.21.63 C-4724 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -270
2.21.64 C-4725 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -270
2.21.65 C-4840 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -271
2.21.66 C-4850*..................................................................................................................................................................K -271
2.22 Solution 18 (C-5001_6000) ...............................................................................................................................................K -271
2.22.1 C-5001 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -271
2.22.2 C-5002 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -272
2.22.3 C-5003 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -272
2.22.4 C-5004 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -272
2.22.5 C-5005 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -273
2.22.6 C-5010 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -273
2.22.7 C-5301 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -273
2.22.8 C-5302 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -274
2.22.9 C-5303 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -274
2.22.10 C-5304 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -274
2.22.11 C-5305 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -275
2.23 Solution 19 (C-6001_7000) ...............................................................................................................................................K -275
2.23.1 C-6101 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -275
2.23.2 C-6102 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -276
2.23.3 C-6301 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -276
2.23.4 C-6701 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -276
2.23.5 C-6702 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -277
2.23.6 C-6703 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -277
2.23.7 C-6704 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -277
2.23.8 C-6705 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -278
2.23.9 C-6706 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -278
2.23.10 C-6707 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -278
2.23.11 C-6708 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -279
2.23.12 C-6709 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -279
2.23.13 C-6710 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -280
2.23.14 C-6711 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -280
2.23.15 C-6712 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -280
2.23.16 C-6713 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -281
2.23.17 C-6714 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -281
2.23.18 C-6715 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -281
2.23.19 C-6716 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -281
xxxii
2.23.20 C-6717 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -282

2.23.21 C-6720 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -282
2.23.22 C-6721 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -282
2.23.23 C-6722 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -283
2.23.24 C-6723 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -283
2.23.25 C-6724 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -283
2.23.26 C-6725 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -284
2.23.27 C-6801 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -284
2.24 Solution 20 (C-7001_9999) ...............................................................................................................................................K -285
2.24.1 C-7001 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -285
2.24.2 C-8001 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -285
2.24.3 C-8101 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -285
2.24.4 C-8102 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -285
2.24.5 C-8103 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -286
2.24.6 C-8401 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -286
2.24.7 C-8402 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -287
2.24.8 C-8403 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -287
2.24.9 C-8404 .....................................................................................................................................................................K -287
2.24.10 C-8405 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -288
2.24.11 C-8406 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -288
2.24.12 C-8407 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -288
2.25 Solution 20 (C-C001_C200) ..............................................................................................................................................K -288
2.25.1 C-C101 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -288
2.25.2 C-C102 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -289
2.25.3 C-C103 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -289
2.25.4 C-C104 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -290
2.25.5 C-C106 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -290
2.25.6 C-C107 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -290
2.25.7 C-C108 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -291
2.25.8 C-C109 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -291
2.25.9 C-C111 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -291
2.25.10 C-C112 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -292
2.25.11 C-C113 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -292
2.25.12 C-C114 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -292
2.25.13 C-C116 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -293
2.25.14 C-C117...................................................................................................................................................................K -293
2.25.15 C-C118...................................................................................................................................................................K -293
2.25.16 C-C119 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -294
2.25.17 C-C120 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -294
2.26 Solution 22 (C-C201_E100) ..............................................................................................................................................K -294
2.26.1 C-D0E0 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -294
2.26.2 C-D0E1 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -295
2.26.3 C-D0E2 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -295
2.26.4 C-D0E3 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -295
2.26.5 C-D0E4 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -296
2.26.6 C-D0E5 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -296
2.26.7 C-D0E6 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -297
2.26.8 C-D0E7 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -297
2.26.9 C-D0E8 ....................................................................................................................................................................K -297
2.26.10 C-D0EF .................................................................................................................................................................K -298
2.26.11 C-D0F0 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -298
2.26.12 C-DC## .................................................................................................................................................................K -298
2.26.13 C-E001 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -299
2.26.14 C-E002 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -299
2.26.15 C-E003 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -300
2.26.16 C-E004 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -300
2.26.17 C-E005 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -300
2.26.18 C-E006 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -301
2.26.19 C-E007 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -301
2.26.20 C-E008 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -301
2.26.21 C-E009 ..................................................................................................................................................................K -302
3. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE ...................................................................K -303

3.1 The power of main body does not turn ON ..........................................................................................................................K -303
3.1.1 Turn ON the main power switch but the power LED of the operation panel does not light up in red ........................K -303
3.1.2 Turn ON the main power switch and the sub power switch, but the touch panel does not display anything ............K -303
3.1.3 Turn ON the sub power switch but the power LED does not switch from red to green .............................................K -303
3.2 The power is not supplied to DF ..........................................................................................................................................K -304
3.3 The power is not supplied to the paper feed option .............................................................................................................K -304
3.3.1 PF-602 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -304
3.3.2 LU-202 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -304
xxxiii
3.4 The power is not supplied to the finishing option .................................................................................................................K -305
3.4.1 RU-509 ......................................................................................................................................................................K -305
3.4.2 LS-505 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -305
3.4.3 FD-503 ......................................................................................................................................................................K -305
3.4.4 FS-521 .......................................................................................................................................................................K -306
3.4.5 FS-531 /FS-612 .........................................................................................................................................................K -306
3.4.6 SD-506 ......................................................................................................................................................................K -306
3.4.7 PB-503 ......................................................................................................................................................................K -307
4. IMAGE TROUBLE .................................................................................................................................................K -308

4.1 Initial check point .................................................................................................................................................................K -308
4.1.1 Initial check items ......................................................................................................................................................K -308
4.2 Printer system procedure ....................................................................................................................................................K -309
4.2.1 Printer system: White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in sub scan direction ...........................................K -309
4.2.2 Printer system : White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in main scan direction ........................................K -311
4.2.3 Printer system: Image memory, Size memory ..........................................................................................................K -312
4.2.4 Printer system: Uneven density in sub scan direction ...............................................................................................K -313
4.2.5 Printer system: Uneven density in main scan direction .............................................................................................K -315
4.2.6 Printer system: Light density (ID lowering) ................................................................................................................K -317
4.2.7 Printer system: Pitch unevenness .............................................................................................................................K -319
4.2.8 Printer system: Gray background ..............................................................................................................................K -320
4.2.9 Printer system: Void areas, White spots ...................................................................................................................K -321
4.2.10 Printer system : Color spots ....................................................................................................................................K -323
4.2.11 Printer system: Moire ..............................................................................................................................................K -324
4.2.12 Printer system: Gradation error ...............................................................................................................................K -325
4.2.13 Printer system: Image blurring ................................................................................................................................K -326
4.2.14 Printer system: Color reproducibility error ...............................................................................................................K -327
4.2.15 Printer system: Color registration error ...................................................................................................................K -328
4.2.16 Printer system: Brush effect, Image bleeding ..........................................................................................................K -329
4.2.17 Printer system: Inky backside ..................................................................................................................................K -330
4.2.18 Printer system: Poor fusing performance, Offset ....................................................................................................K -331
4.2.19 Printer system: Blank print, Black print ....................................................................................................................K -331
4.2.20 Printer system: Uneven gloss, Rough gloss ............................................................................................................K -332
4.2.21 Printer system: Darker at trailing edge of paper ......................................................................................................K -332
4.2.22 Printer system: Ripple unevenness (solid section of red and blue) .........................................................................K -333
4.2.23 Printer system: Image erasure at trailing edge of thick paper .................................................................................K -333
4.3 Scanner system procedure ..................................................................................................................................................K -334
4.3.1 Scanner system: White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in sub scan direction ........................................K -334
4.3.2 Scanner system: White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in main scan direction ......................................K -335
4.3.3 Scanner system: Color spots ....................................................................................................................................K -336
4.3.4 Scanner system: Gray background ...........................................................................................................................K -336
4.3.5 Scanner system: Blurred image, brush effect ...........................................................................................................K -337
4.3.6 Scanner system: Color registration error, out of synchronization (Stripe in main scan direction) .............................K -337
4.3.7 Scanner system: Moire ..............................................................................................................................................K -338
4.3.8 Scanner system: Leaning image ...............................................................................................................................K -338
4.3.9 Scanner system: Image distortion..............................................................................................................................K -339
4.3.10 Scanner system: Low image density, Rough image ...............................................................................................K -339
4.3.11 Scanner system: ACS malfunction ..........................................................................................................................K -340
4.3.12 Scanner system: Blank copy, black copy ................................................................................................................K -340
4.3.13 Scanner system: Image abnormality .......................................................................................................................K -341
4.3.14 Scanner system: Uneven density ............................................................................................................................K -341
4.3.15 Scanner system: Faulty density difference between original and copy output ........................................................K -342
4.3.16 Scanner system: Tone difference between original and copy output ......................................................................K -343
5. TROUBLESHOOTING (IC-601).............................................................................................................................K -345

5.1 IC malfunction code list .......................................................................................................................................................K -345
5.2 IC solution ............................................................................................................................................................................K -345
5.2.1 C-00-001 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -345
5.2.2 C-00-002 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -346
5.2.3 C-00-003 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -346
5.2.4 C-00-004 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -346
5.2.5 C-00-005 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -347
5.2.6 C-00-010 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -347
5.2.7 C-00-011 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -347
5.2.8 C-00-012 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -348
5.2.9 C-00-013 ...................................................................................................................................................................K -348
5.2.10 C-00-014 .................................................................................................................................................................K -348
5.2.11 C-00-015 .................................................................................................................................................................K -349
5.2.12 C-00-017 .................................................................................................................................................................K -349
5.2.13 C-00-020 .................................................................................................................................................................K -349
5.2.14 C-00-021 .................................................................................................................................................................K -349
5.2.15 C-30-003 .................................................................................................................................................................K -350
xxxiv
6. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP)...................................................................................................................................K -351

6.1 TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501)..........................................................................................................................................K -351
6.2 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................................................K -351
6.2.1 Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................................................................K -351
6.2.2 General.......................................................................................................................................................................K -351
6.2.3 Back Gauge................................................................................................................................................................K -352
6.2.4 Die Set........................................................................................................................................................................K -352
6.3 Initial Service Action.............................................................................................................................................................K -352
6.3.1 Initial Service Action...................................................................................................................................................K -352
6.4 Mis-Feed Service Action.......................................................................................................................................................K -353
6.4.1 Mis-Feed Service Action............................................................................................................................................K -353
6.5 Final Service Action..............................................................................................................................................................K -355
6.5.1 Final Service Action....................................................................................................................................................K -355
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ...............................................................................L -1

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING .....................................................................................................................................L -1
1.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 .........................................................................................................................L -1
1.1.1 Main body rear side 1 ....................................................................................................................................................L -1
1.1.5 Main body right side .......................................................................................................................................................L -3
1.1.6 Main body left side .........................................................................................................................................................L -3
1.1.7 Main body upper surface ...............................................................................................................................................L -4
1.1.8 Main body front side ......................................................................................................................................................L -4
1.1.9 Write section ..................................................................................................................................................................L -5
1.1.10 Process unit .................................................................................................................................................................L -5
1.1.11 Developing section ......................................................................................................................................................L -6
1.1.12 Image correction unit section .......................................................................................................................................L -6
1.1.13 Toner supply section ....................................................................................................................................................L -6
1.1.14 Paper feed tray ............................................................................................................................................................L -7
1.1.15 Vertical conveyance section ........................................................................................................................................L -8
1.1.16 Duplex section 1 ..........................................................................................................................................................L -8
1.1.17 Duplex section 2 ..........................................................................................................................................................L -9
1.1.18 Fusing section1 ............................................................................................................................................................L -9
1.1.19 Fusing section2 ..........................................................................................................................................................L -10
1.1.20 Operation panel section .............................................................................................................................................L -10
1.1.21 OT ..............................................................................................................................................................................L -11
1.1.22 HD-514 ......................................................................................................................................................................L -11
1.2 DF-622 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -12
1.3 PF-602/HT-504/505 ...............................................................................................................................................................L -12
1.3.1 Configuration front side ................................................................................................................................................L -12
1.3.2 Configuration rear side ................................................................................................................................................L -13
1.3.3 Vertical conveyance section ........................................................................................................................................L -13
1.3.4 Horizontal conveyance section ....................................................................................................................................L -14
1.3.5 Tray section 1 ..............................................................................................................................................................L -14
1.3.6 Tray section2 ...............................................................................................................................................................L -15
1.4 LU-202/HT-503 ......................................................................................................................................................................L -16
1.4.1 Paper feed/up/down section ........................................................................................................................................L -16
1.4.2 Inside the machine .......................................................................................................................................................L -16
1.4.3 HT-503 .........................................................................................................................................................................L -17
1.5 MB-504 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L -17
1.5.1 Paper feed section .......................................................................................................................................................L -17
1.5.2 Tray section .................................................................................................................................................................L -17
1.6 RU-509/HM-102 .....................................................................................................................................................................L -18
1.6.1 Right side .....................................................................................................................................................................L -18
1.6.2 Left-side view ...............................................................................................................................................................L -19
1.6.3 Rear side 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................L -20
1.6.4 Rear side2 ...................................................................................................................................................................L -21
1.6.5 Humidification section front side ..................................................................................................................................L -22
1.6.6 Humidification section rear side ...................................................................................................................................L -22
1.6.7 Output paper density detection section .......................................................................................................................L -23
1.7 FS-521 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -24
1.7.1 Rear side 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................L -24
1.7.2 Rear side2 ...................................................................................................................................................................L -24
1.7.3 Front side .....................................................................................................................................................................L -25
1.7.4 Stacker inside 1 ...........................................................................................................................................................L -25
1.7.5 Stacker inside2 ............................................................................................................................................................L -26
1.7.6 Stapler .........................................................................................................................................................................L -26
1.7.7 Paper exit alignment ....................................................................................................................................................L -27
xxxv
1.8 FS-531 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -27

1.8.1 Front side .....................................................................................................................................................................L -27
1.8.2 Rear side .....................................................................................................................................................................L -28
1.8.3 Stacker section rear side .............................................................................................................................................L -28
1.8.4 Stapler section .............................................................................................................................................................L -29
1.9 FS-612 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -29
1.9.1 Front side .....................................................................................................................................................................L -29
1.9.2 Rear side .....................................................................................................................................................................L -30
1.9.3 Folding section .............................................................................................................................................................L -30
1.9.4 Stapler section .............................................................................................................................................................L -31
1.10 PK-512/513 ..........................................................................................................................................................................L -31
1.11 PI-502 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L -32
1.12 LS-505 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -32
1.12.1 Front side ...................................................................................................................................................................L -32
1.12.2 Upper surface ............................................................................................................................................................L -33
1.12.3 Rear side ...................................................................................................................................................................L -33
1.12.4 Shift unit .....................................................................................................................................................................L -34
1.13 FD-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -34
1.13.1 Conveyance section front side/right side ...................................................................................................................L -34
1.13.2 Major boards in the power source section .................................................................................................................L -35
1.13.3 Conveyance section rear side/left side ......................................................................................................................L -35
1.13.4 PI rear side ................................................................................................................................................................L -36
1.13.5 PI upper surface ........................................................................................................................................................L -36
1.13.6 PI lower tray ...............................................................................................................................................................L -36
1.13.7 Punch section ............................................................................................................................................................L -37
1.13.8 Folding unit front side/right side .................................................................................................................................L -37
1.13.9 Folding unit rear side/left side ....................................................................................................................................L -38
1.14 SD-506 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -38
1.14.1 Horizontal conveyance section ..................................................................................................................................L -38
1.14.2 Right angle conveyance section ................................................................................................................................L -39
1.14.3 Folding section ...........................................................................................................................................................L -39
1.14.4 Saddle stitching section .............................................................................................................................................L -42
1.14.5 Bundle processing section .........................................................................................................................................L -44
1.14.6 Trimmer section .........................................................................................................................................................L -45
1.14.7 Left-side view .............................................................................................................................................................L -46
1.14.8 Front side ...................................................................................................................................................................L -46
1.14.9 Rear side ...................................................................................................................................................................L -47
1.15 PB-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -47
1.15.1 SC section .................................................................................................................................................................L -47
1.15.2 Clamp section ............................................................................................................................................................L -48
1.15.3 Pellet supply section ..................................................................................................................................................L -49
1.15.4 Glue tank section .......................................................................................................................................................L -50
1.15.5 Cover paper supply section .......................................................................................................................................L -51
1.15.6 Cover paper table section ..........................................................................................................................................L -52
1.15.7 Book stock section .....................................................................................................................................................L -53
1.15.8 Conveyance section and framework section .............................................................................................................L -54
1.15.9 Relay conveyance section .........................................................................................................................................L -56
1.16 IC-601 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L -57
1.17 RU-506..................................................................................................................................................................................L -57
1.17.1 Stacker section (front side).........................................................................................................................................L -57
1.17.2 Stacker section (front side).........................................................................................................................................L -57
1.17.3 Rear side....................................................................................................................................................................L -58
1.18 GP-501..................................................................................................................................................................................L -59
1.18.1 Rear side 1/Right side 1.............................................................................................................................................L -59
1.18.2 Rear side 2/Left side...................................................................................................................................................L -59
1.18.3 Right side 2.................................................................................................................................................................L -60
1.18.4 Front side....................................................................................................................................................................L -60
1.18.5 Bypass conveyance section.......................................................................................................................................L -60
1.18.6 Punch conveyance section.........................................................................................................................................L -61
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING IN BOARD .....................................................................................................L -63

2.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 .......................................................................................................................L -63
2.1.1 Color registration board /Fr, /Rr (CRB/Fr, /Rr) .............................................................................................................L -63
2.1.2 High voltage unit /1 (HV1) ............................................................................................................................................L -63
2.1.3 High voltage unit /2 (HV2) ............................................................................................................................................L -64
2.1.4 DC power supply /1 (DCPS1) ......................................................................................................................................L -64
2.1.5 DC power supply /2 (DCPS2) ......................................................................................................................................L -64
2.1.6 AC drive board (ACDB) ...............................................................................................................................................L -65
2.1.7 Toner supply drive board (TSDB) ................................................................................................................................L -65
2.1.8 Conveyance drive board (CDB) ...................................................................................................................................L -65
2.1.9 Printer control board (PRCB) .......................................................................................................................................L -66
xxxvi
2.1.10 Overall control board (OACB) ....................................................................................................................................L -67

2.1.11 Fusing control board /1 (FUSCB1) (Only for Europe) ................................................................................................L -67
2.1.12 Fusing control board /2 (FUSCB2) (Only for Europe) ................................................................................................L -67
2.1.13 CCD board (CCDB) ...................................................................................................................................................L -68
2.1.14 Printer image processing board (PRIPB) ...................................................................................................................L -68
2.1.15 Scanner image processing board (SCIPB) ................................................................................................................L -68
2.1.16 Memory control board /1 (MCB1) ..............................................................................................................................L -69
2.1.17 NVRAM board (NRB) .................................................................................................................................................L -69
2.1.18 Relay board /U (RBU) ................................................................................................................................................L -69
2.1.19 Scanner drive board (SCDB) .....................................................................................................................................L -70
2.1.20 Scanner inverter board (S_INVB) ..............................................................................................................................L -70
2.1.21 Operation board /1 .....................................................................................................................................................L -70
2.1.24 Operation inverter ......................................................................................................................................................L -72
2.1.25 LCD board (LCDB) ....................................................................................................................................................L -72
2.1.26 Memory control board /P (MCB/P) .............................................................................................................................L -72
2.2 DF-622 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -73
2.2.1 DF control board (DFCB) .............................................................................................................................................L -73
2.2.2 Size sensor board (SSB) .............................................................................................................................................L -73
2.3 PF-602/HT-504/505 ...............................................................................................................................................................L -73
2.3.1 PF drive board (PFDB) ................................................................................................................................................L -73
2.4 LU-202/HT-503 ......................................................................................................................................................................L -74
2.4.1 LU drive board (LUDB) ................................................................................................................................................L -74
2.4.2 AC drive board (ACDB) ...............................................................................................................................................L -74
2.5 RU-509/HM-102 .....................................................................................................................................................................L -74
2.5.1 RU control board (RUCB).............................................................................................................................................L -74
2.5.2 HM drive board (HMDB) ..............................................................................................................................................L -75
2.5.3 DC power supply (DCPS) ............................................................................................................................................L -75
2.5.4 Color density detection board /Y, /M, /C, /K (CDDBY, CDDBM, CDDBC, CDDBK) ....................................................L -75
2.5.5 Color density control board (CDCB) ............................................................................................................................L -76
2.5.6 Color density relay board (CDRLB) .............................................................................................................................L -76
2.5.7 Jam indication board (JAMIB) ......................................................................................................................................L -76
2.6 FS-521 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -77
2.6.1 FNS control board (FNSCB) ........................................................................................................................................L -77
2.6.2 FNS drive board (FNSDB) ...........................................................................................................................................L -77
2.6.3 Stapler board (STB) .....................................................................................................................................................L -77
2.6.4 Operation board (OB) ..................................................................................................................................................L -78
2.6.5 Jam indication board (JAMIB) ......................................................................................................................................L -78
2.7 FS-531 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -78
2.7.2 Relay board (RB) .........................................................................................................................................................L -78
2.8 FS-612 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L -79
2.8.2 Relay board (RB) .........................................................................................................................................................L -79
2.9 PK-512/513.............................................................................................................................................................................L -79
2.9.1 Punch drive board (PDB)..............................................................................................................................................L -79
2.9.2 Paper size sensor board...............................................................................................................................................L -79
2.10 PI-502 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L -80
2.10.1 PI drive board (PIDB) .................................................................................................................................................L -80
2.10.2 PI operation board (PIOB) .........................................................................................................................................L -80
2.11 LS-505 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -80
2.11.1 LS control board (LSCB) ............................................................................................................................................L -80
2.11.2 Relay board /1 (RLB/1) ..............................................................................................................................................L -80
2.11.3 Relay board /2 (RLB/2) ..............................................................................................................................................L -80
2.11.4 DC power supply (DCPS) ..........................................................................................................................................L -81
2.11.5 Relay board (RLB) .....................................................................................................................................................L -81
2.12 FD-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -81
2.12.1 FD control board (FDCB) ...........................................................................................................................................L -81
2.12.2 Punch drive board (PDB) ...........................................................................................................................................L -82
2.12.3 Folding drive board (FDB) .........................................................................................................................................L -82
2.12.4 PI drive board (PIDB) .................................................................................................................................................L -82
2.12.5 FD operation board (FDOB) ......................................................................................................................................L -83
2.12.6 Jam indication board (JAMIB) ....................................................................................................................................L -83
2.12.7 DC power supply (DCPS) ..........................................................................................................................................L -83
2.12.8 Multi feed detection board /1, /2 (MFDB1, 2) .............................................................................................................L -83
2.13 SD-506 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -84
2.13.1 SD control board (SDCB) ..........................................................................................................................................L -84
2.13.2 SD drive board (SDDB) .............................................................................................................................................L -84
2.13.3 SD drive board /2 (SDDB/2) ......................................................................................................................................L -85
xxxvii
2.13.4 DC power supply /1 (DCPS1) ....................................................................................................................................L -85

2.13.7 Jam indication board /1 (JAMIB/1) .............................................................................................................................L -85
2.13.8 Jam indication board /2 (JAMIB/2) .............................................................................................................................L -86
2.14 PB-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -86
2.14.1 PB control board (PBCB) ...........................................................................................................................................L -86
2.14.2 AC drive board (ACDB) .............................................................................................................................................L -86
2.14.3 PB drive board /1 (PBDB1) ........................................................................................................................................L -87
2.14.6 Jam indication board /1 (JAMB1) ...............................................................................................................................L -88
2.14.7 Jam indication board /2 (JAMB2) ...............................................................................................................................L -88
2.14.8 Manual operation board (OB1) ..................................................................................................................................L -88
2.14.9 Booklet stock operation board (OB2) .........................................................................................................................L -88
2.14.10 DC power supply /1 (DCPU/1) .................................................................................................................................L -88
2.15 IC-601 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L -90
2.15.1 System control board (SCB) ......................................................................................................................................L -90
2.15.2 Video interface board (VIB) .......................................................................................................................................L -90
2.16 RU-506..................................................................................................................................................................................L -90
2.16.1 RU control board (RUCB)...........................................................................................................................................L -90
2.16.2 Jam indication board (JAMIB).....................................................................................................................................L -91
2.17 GP-501..................................................................................................................................................................................L -91
2.17.1 Punch Controller PCB.................................................................................................................................................L -91
3. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ...........................................................................................................L -92

3.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000........................................................................................................................L -92
3.1.1 Main body front side.....................................................................................................................................................L -92
3.1.2 Main body upper surface..............................................................................................................................................L -93
3.1.3 Main body right side -1.................................................................................................................................................L -93
3.1.4 Main body right side -2.................................................................................................................................................L -94
3.1.5 Main body left side -1....................................................................................................................................................L -94
3.1.6 Main body left side -2....................................................................................................................................................L -95
3.1.7 Main body rear side -1..................................................................................................................................................L -95
3.1.8 Main body rear side -2..................................................................................................................................................L -96
3.1.9 Process unit..................................................................................................................................................................L -96
3.1.10 Duplex section............................................................................................................................................................L -97
3.1.11 Fusing unit..................................................................................................................................................................L -97
3.1.12 Tray.............................................................................................................................................................................L -98
3.1.13 HD-514.......................................................................................................................................................................L -99
3.2 SD-506 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -100
3.2.1 Right side ...................................................................................................................................................................L -100
3.2.2 Left side .....................................................................................................................................................................L -101
3.2.3 Rear side-1 ................................................................................................................................................................L -102
3.2.4 Rear side-2 ................................................................................................................................................................L -102
3.2.5 Folding section ...........................................................................................................................................................L -103
3.2.6 Saddle stitching section-1 ..........................................................................................................................................L -104
3.2.7 Saddle stitching section-2 ..........................................................................................................................................L -104
3.3 PB-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................L -105
3.3.1 Rear side-1 ................................................................................................................................................................L -105
3.3.2 Rear side 2 ................................................................................................................................................................L -106
3.3.3 Rear side 3 ................................................................................................................................................................L -107
3.3.4 Rear side 4 ................................................................................................................................................................L -108
3.3.5 Rear side 5 ................................................................................................................................................................L -109
3.3.6 Front side ...................................................................................................................................................................L -110
3.3.7 Sub compile (SC) section ..........................................................................................................................................L -110
3.3.8 Clamp section ............................................................................................................................................................L -111
3.3.9 Cover paper supply section .......................................................................................................................................L -111
3.3.10 Cover paper table section ........................................................................................................................................L -112
3.3.11 Book stock section ...................................................................................................................................................L -112
3.3.12 Conveyance section ................................................................................................................................................L -113
3.3.13 Pellet supply section ................................................................................................................................................L -113
3.3.14 Relay conveyance section .......................................................................................................................................L -113
M TIMING CHART..........................................................................................................................M -1
1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 .........................................................................................................M -1
1.1 Time chart when turning ON the power (in the morning) ........................................................................................................M -1
xxxviii
1.2 Time chart when turning ON the power (not in the morning) ..................................................................................................M -2
1.3 Full color, full size, DF 1-sided 2 sheets of original, duplex print, paper tray 1 paper feed .....................................................M -3
2. DF-622 ......................................................................................................................................................................M -4
2.1 Timing chart of the simplex mode (Reverse exit) ....................................................................................................................M -4
2.1.1 Operation condition .......................................................................................................................................................M -4
2.1.2 Timing chart ..................................................................................................................................................................M -4
2.2 Timing chart of the duplex mode .............................................................................................................................................M -4
2.2.2 Timing chart ..................................................................................................................................................................M -5
3. PF-602 ......................................................................................................................................................................M -6
3.1 Tray5, A4, 2 sheets of original ................................................................................................................................................M -6
4. LU-202 ......................................................................................................................................................................M -7
4.1 A4, simplex, 2 sheets ..............................................................................................................................................................M -7
4.2 A3, simplex, 2 sheets ..............................................................................................................................................................M -7
5. RU-509/HM-102 ........................................................................................................................................................M -8
5.1 Timing chart of the humidifier OFF mode (bypass conveyance) ............................................................................................M -8
5.1.2 Timing chart ..................................................................................................................................................................M -8
5.2 Timing chart of the humidification mode .................................................................................................................................M -8
5.2.2 Timing chart ..................................................................................................................................................................M -8
6. FS-521 ......................................................................................................................................................................M -9
6.1 Timing chart of the sort mode .................................................................................................................................................M -9
6.1.2 Timing chart ..................................................................................................................................................................M -9
6.2 Timing chart of the sub tray mode ..........................................................................................................................................M -9
6.2.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -10
6.3 Timing chart of the staple mode ............................................................................................................................................M -10
6.3.1 Operation condition .....................................................................................................................................................M -10
6.3.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -11
7. FS-531 ....................................................................................................................................................................M -12

7.1 Timing chart of the sort mode ...............................................................................................................................................M -12
7.1.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -12
7.2 Timing chart of the flat-stapling mode ...................................................................................................................................M -12
7.2.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -13
8. FS-612 ....................................................................................................................................................................M -14

8.1 Timing chart of the sort mode ...............................................................................................................................................M -14
8.1.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -14
8.2 Timing chart of the flat-stapling mode ...................................................................................................................................M -14
8.2.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -15
8.3 Timing chart of the saddle stitching mode ............................................................................................................................M -15
8.3.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -16
8.4 Timing chart of the tri-folding mode ......................................................................................................................................M -16
8.4.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................M -17
9. PK-512.....................................................................................................................................................................M -18
9.1 Punch, 2 flat stitching staples, A4, 2 originals, 3 copies, Single side.....................................................................................M -18
10. PK-513...................................................................................................................................................................M -19

10.1 Punch, 2 flat stitching staples, A4, 2 originals, 3 copies, Single side...................................................................................M -19
11. PI-502 ...................................................................................................................................................................M -20

11.1 Timing chart of the PI automatic paper feed mode .............................................................................................................M -20
11.1.1 Operation condition ...................................................................................................................................................M -20
11.1.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -20
12. LS-505 ..................................................................................................................................................................M -21

12.1 Timing chart of the straight mode .......................................................................................................................................M -21
12.1.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -21
12.2 Timing chart of the shift mode .............................................................................................................................................M -21
12.2.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -22
12.3 Timing chart of the sub tray mode ......................................................................................................................................M -22
xxxix

12.3.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -23
12.4 Timing chart of the coupling mode ......................................................................................................................................M -23
12.4.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -24
13. FD-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................M -25

13.1 Timing chart of the letter fold-in mode ................................................................................................................................M -25
13.1.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -25
13.2 Timing chart of the letter fold-out mode ..............................................................................................................................M -25
13.2.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -26
13.3 Timing chart of the double parallel mode ............................................................................................................................M -26
13.3.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -27
13.4 Timing chart of the half-folding mode ..................................................................................................................................M -27
13.4.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -28
13.5 Timing chart of the gate fold mode .....................................................................................................................................M -28
13.5.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -29
13.6 Timing chart of the Z-fold mode ..........................................................................................................................................M -29
13.6.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -30
13.7 Timing chart of the PI cover paper insertion mode .............................................................................................................M -30
13.7.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -31
13.8 Timing chart of the punch mode .........................................................................................................................................M -31
13.8.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -32
14. SD-506 ..................................................................................................................................................................M -33

14.1 Timing chart of the straight mode .......................................................................................................................................M -33
14.1.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -33
14.2 Timing chart of the sub tray mode ......................................................................................................................................M -33
14.2.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -34
14.3 Timing chart of the overlap tri-folding mode ........................................................................................................................M -34
14.3.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -35
14.4 Timing chart of the saddle stitching (trimmer) mode ...........................................................................................................M -36
14.4.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -37
15. PB-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................M -39

15.1 Timing chart of the sub tray paper exit mode ......................................................................................................................M -39
15.1.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -39
15.2 Timing chart of the perfect binding mode (PB cover paper supply) ....................................................................................M -39
15.2.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -40
15.3 Timing chart of the perfect binding mode (Main body cover paper supply) ........................................................................M -40
15.3.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -41
15.4 Timing chart of the relay conveyance mode .......................................................................................................................M -41
15.4.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -42
16. RU-506..................................................................................................................................................................M -43

16.1 Timing chart of the punch mode (GP-501)...........................................................................................................................M -43
16.1.2 Timing chart ..............................................................................................................................................................M -43
N WIRING DIAGRAM .....................................................................................................................N -1

1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 ..........................................................................................................N -1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 (1/3).................................................................................................................N -1

bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 (2/3).................................................................................................................N -1
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 (3/3) ................................................................................................................N -1
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 (1/3-1) ............................................................................................................N -1
xl
1.7 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 (1/3-4) ............................................................................................................N -1

1.10 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 (2/3-3) ..........................................................................................................N -1
2. DF-622 ......................................................................................................................................................................N -2
3. PF-602 ......................................................................................................................................................................N -3
4. LU-202 ......................................................................................................................................................................N -4
5. RU-509/HM-102 ........................................................................................................................................................N -5
6. FS-521 ......................................................................................................................................................................N -6
7. FS-531 ......................................................................................................................................................................N -7
8. FS-612 ......................................................................................................................................................................N -8
9. PK-512/513................................................................................................................................................................N -9
10. PI-502 ....................................................................................................................................................................N -10
11. LS-505 ...................................................................................................................................................................N -11
12. FD-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................N -12
13. SD-506 ..................................................................................................................................................................N -13
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
SD-506 ................................................................................................................................................................................N -13

SD-506 (1/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -13
SD-506 (2/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -13
SD-506 (3/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -13
SD-506 (4/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -13
14. PB-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................N -14

14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
PB-503 ................................................................................................................................................................................N -14

PB-503 (1/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -14
PB-503 (2/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -14
PB-503 (3/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -14
PB-503 (4/4) ........................................................................................................................................................................N -14
15. IC-601 ...................................................................................................................................................................N -15

16. RU-506...................................................................................................................................................................N -16
17. GP-501...................................................................................................................................................................N -17
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 ...............................O -1

1. INTERFACE SECTION..............................................................................................................................................O -1
1.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................O -1
1.1.1 Main body right side ......................................................................................................................................................O -1
1.1.2 Main body upper side ....................................................................................................................................................O -1
2. SCANNER SECTION................................................................................................................................................O -2
2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................O -2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................O -2
2.3 Operation ................................................................................................................................................................................O -2
2.3.1 Control when the sub power is turned ON ....................................................................................................................O -2
2.3.2 Control when the start button is turned ON ...................................................................................................................O -3
2.3.3 Original reading area ....................................................................................................................................................O -5
2.3.4 Original size detection control .......................................................................................................................................O -5
2.3.5 AE/ACS control .............................................................................................................................................................O -6
2.3.6 Image processing ..........................................................................................................................................................O -6
3. WRITING SECTION..................................................................................................................................................O -7
3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................O -7
3.2 Operation ................................................................................................................................................................................O -8
3.2.1 Exposure path ...............................................................................................................................................................O -8
3.2.2 Writing control ...............................................................................................................................................................O -8
3.2.3 Writing area ...................................................................................................................................................................O -9
3.2.4 Color registration control ...............................................................................................................................................O -9
3.2.5 Front/back sides skew correction in main scan direction ............................................................................................O -12
3.2.6 Back side magnification adjustment in sub scan direction ..........................................................................................O -12
3.2.7 Image stabilization control ..........................................................................................................................................O -12
4. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION...........................................................................................................................O -13

4.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................O -13
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................O -13
4.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................O -13
xli
4.3.1 Erase lamp (EL) control ..............................................................................................................................................O -13

5. CHARGING SECTION.............................................................................................................................................O -15

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................O -15
5.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................O -15
5.2.1 Charging control ..........................................................................................................................................................O -15
6. DEVELOPING SECTION.........................................................................................................................................O -16

6.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................O -16
6.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................O -16
6.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................O -16
6.3.1 Developer conveyance ...............................................................................................................................................O -16
6.3.2 Developing bias control ...............................................................................................................................................O -17
6.3.3 Developing suction control ..........................................................................................................................................O -17
6.3.4 Developing cooling control ..........................................................................................................................................O -17
6.3.5 Toner density detection control ...................................................................................................................................O -18
7. TONER SUPPLY SECTION....................................................................................................................................O -19

7.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................O -19
7.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................O -20
7.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................O -20
7.3.1 Toner conveyance control ...........................................................................................................................................O -20
7.3.2 Remaining toner amount detection control .................................................................................................................O -20
7.3.3 Stop control of printing without toner ..........................................................................................................................O -21
8. INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER SECTION.................................................................................................................O -22

8.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................O -22
8.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................O -23
8.2.1 Transfer belt conveyance /pressure drive ...................................................................................................................O -23
8.2.2 2nd transfer pressure/release mechanism ..................................................................................................................O -23
8.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................O -24
8.3.1 1st transfer roller pressure/release mechanism ..........................................................................................................O -24
8.3.2 1st transfer control ......................................................................................................................................................O -24
8.3.3 2nd transfer mechanism .............................................................................................................................................O -24
8.3.4 2nd transfer control .....................................................................................................................................................O -25
8.3.5 Image correction unit shutter mechanism ...................................................................................................................O -25
8.3.6 Belt cleaning blade curling-up prevention control .......................................................................................................O -25
8.3.7 Belt filming prevention control .....................................................................................................................................O -25
9. TONER COLLECTION SECTION...........................................................................................................................O -26

9.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................O -26
9.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................O -27
9.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................O -27
9.3.1 Toner collection control ...............................................................................................................................................O -27
9.3.2 Detection control of the toner collection box ...............................................................................................................O -27
9.3.3 Toner collection box full detection control ...................................................................................................................O -27
10. PAPER FEED SECTION.......................................................................................................................................O -28

10.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -28
10.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................O -28
10.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -29
10.3.1 Up/down control ........................................................................................................................................................O -29
10.3.2 Paper size detection control ......................................................................................................................................O -29
10.3.3 Paper feed control .....................................................................................................................................................O -30
10.3.4 Remaining paper detection control ...........................................................................................................................O -32
11. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION..................................................................................................................O -33

11.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -33
11.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................O -33
11.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -33
11.3.1 Vertical conveyance control ......................................................................................................................................O -33
12. REGISTRATION SECTION...................................................................................................................................O -34

12.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -34
12.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................O -34
12.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -34
12.3.1 Loop control ..............................................................................................................................................................O -34
12.3.2 Registration operation ...............................................................................................................................................O -35
12.3.3 Paper leading edge timing adjustment control ..........................................................................................................O -35
12.3.4 Registration speed control ........................................................................................................................................O -35
13. FUSING SECTION................................................................................................................................................O -36

13.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -36
13.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................O -36
xlii
13.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -36

13.3.1 Fusing roller drive control ..........................................................................................................................................O -36
13.3.2 Pressure/release control ...........................................................................................................................................O -37
13.3.3 Fusing temperature control .......................................................................................................................................O -38
13.3.4 Malfunction protection................................................................................................................................................O -38
13.3.5 Fusing roller /Lw cooling control ...............................................................................................................................O -39
13.3.6 Fusing recovery control..............................................................................................................................................O -39
13.3.7 Fusing air separation control......................................................................................................................................O -39
14. DUPLEX SECTION................................................................................................................................................O -41

14.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -41
14.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................O -41
14.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -41
14.3.1 Paper reverse control ................................................................................................................................................O -41
14.3.2 ADU conveyance control ..........................................................................................................................................O -43
14.3.3 Back side centering correction control ......................................................................................................................O -43
15. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION....................................................................................................................................O -44

15.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -44
15.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................O -44
15.2.1 Reverse/exit drive .....................................................................................................................................................O -44
15.2.2 Paper exit drive/OT-502 drive ...................................................................................................................................O -45
15.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -45
15.3.1 Conveyance control ..................................................................................................................................................O -45
15.3.2 Reverse/exit timing control ........................................................................................................................................O -46
15.3.3 Paper exit de-curler roller pressure control ...............................................................................................................O -47
15.3.4 Reverse de-curler roller rotation control ....................................................................................................................O -47
15.3.5 Paper exit full detection control .................................................................................................................................O -48
16. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL.....................................................................................................................O -49

16.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................................O -49
16.1.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................O -49
16.1.2 Image stabilization control when the power switch (SW2) is ON ..............................................................................O -49
16.1.3 Image stabilization batch correction control ..............................................................................................................O -49
16.1.4 Stabilization control between images ........................................................................................................................O -49
16.1.5 Other image stabilization controls .............................................................................................................................O -50
16.2 Image stabilization control when the power switch (SW2) is ON ........................................................................................O -50
16.2.1 Image stabilization control flow with SW2 ON ..........................................................................................................O -50
16.2.2 Drum rotation control ................................................................................................................................................O -50
16.2.3 Environmental decision control .................................................................................................................................O -50
16.2.4 Color registration control ...........................................................................................................................................O -50
16.3 Image stabilization batch correction control.........................................................................................................................O -51
16.3.1 Image stabilization batch correction control operation flow ......................................................................................O -51
16.3.2 TCR sensor process speed adjustment ....................................................................................................................O -51
16.3.3 Base line correction ..................................................................................................................................................O -51
16.3.4 Maximum density correction .....................................................................................................................................O -52
16.3.5 V0 correction .............................................................................................................................................................O -52
16.3.6 Dot diameter correction .............................................................................................................................................O -52
16.3.7 Gamma correction ....................................................................................................................................................O -52
16.4 Stabilization control between images...................................................................................................................................O -52
16.4.1 Image stabilization control between images operation flow ......................................................................................O -52
16.4.2 Dot diameter correction between images .................................................................................................................O -52
16.4.3 Stabilization priority periodic adjustment ...................................................................................................................O -53
16.4.4 Short gamma correction ............................................................................................................................................O -53
16.5 Other image stabilization controls .......................................................................................................................................O -53
16.5.1 Pre-agitation when left unused .................................................................................................................................O -53
17. IMAGE PROCESSING SECTION ........................................................................................................................O -54

17.1 Image processing in the scanner section ............................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.1 Image processing flow in the scanner section ..........................................................................................................O -54
17.1.2 Photoelectric conversion ...........................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.3 A/D conversion ..........................................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.4 Shading correction ....................................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.5 RGB gap correction ..................................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.6 Chroma aberration correction ...................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.7 Gradation adjustment ................................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.8 Area discrimination ...................................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.9 Image distinction .......................................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.10 ACS processing ......................................................................................................................................................O -54
17.1.11 Magnification processing ........................................................................................................................................O -55
17.1.12 AE control ...............................................................................................................................................................O -55
17.1.13 Color conversion .....................................................................................................................................................O -55
17.2 Image processing in the write section .................................................................................................................................O -55
xliii
17.2.1 Image processing flow in the write section ...............................................................................................................O -55

17.2.2 Image compressing (Image controller) .....................................................................................................................O -55
17.2.3 Image compressing (Scanner) ..................................................................................................................................O -55
17.2.4 DRAM, HDD ..............................................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.5 Image expansion (Scanner) ......................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.6 Cell average (Scanner) .............................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.7 Image expansion (Image controller) .........................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.8 Noise addition ...........................................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.9 Skeletonization/Outline letter emphasis ....................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.10 Smoothing (Scanner) ..............................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.11 Outline emphasis ....................................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.12 Density balance ......................................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.13 Gradation correction gamma ..................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.14 Screen processing ..................................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.15 Delay control between drums .................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.16 PWM gamma ..........................................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.17 PWN conversion .....................................................................................................................................................O -56
17.2.18 Write unit /Y, /M, /C, /K ...........................................................................................................................................O -56
18. POWER SOURCE SECTION................................................................................................................................O -57

18.1 Operating parts with the connection of the power cord .......................................................................................................O -57
18.1.1 Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................O -57
18.1.2 Operation ..................................................................................................................................................................O -57
18.2 Operating parts with the main power switch (SW1) ON ......................................................................................................O -57
18.2.1 Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................O -57
18.2.2 Operation ..................................................................................................................................................................O -57
18.3 Operating parts with the sub power switch (SW2) ON ........................................................................................................O -58
18.3.1 Configuration..............................................................................................................................................................O -58
18.3.2 Operation...................................................................................................................................................................O -58
18.4 Power cord ..........................................................................................................................................................................O -58
18.4.1 Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................O -58
18.5 Operating parts with the dehumidification heater switch (SW3) ON ...................................................................................O -59
18.5.1 Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................O -59
18.5.2 Operation ..................................................................................................................................................................O -59
19. FAN CONTROL.....................................................................................................................................................O -60

19.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -60
19.2 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -60
19.2.1 Power supply cooling fans /1 (FM1), /3 (FM3), and /4 (FM4) control.........................................................................O -60
19.2.2 Scanner cooling fan (FM2) control.............................................................................................................................O -60
19.2.3 IPB fans /1 (FM5) and /2 (FM6) control.....................................................................................................................O -60
19.2.4 Fusing separation fans /1 (FM7), /2 (FM8), and /3 (FM9) control..............................................................................O -61
19.2.5 Fusing belt ventilation fan (FM10) control .................................................................................................................O -61
19.2.6 Transfer belt fan (FM11) control ...............................................................................................................................O -61
19.2.7 Drum fans /1 (FM12) and /2 (FM13) control .............................................................................................................O -61
19.2.8 Tucking fans /1 (FM26), and /3 (FM28) control .........................................................................................................O -61
19.2.9 Deodorization fan (FM36) control .............................................................................................................................O -61
19.2.10 Fusing ventilation fan (FM37) control ......................................................................................................................O -62
19.2.11 Developing fans /1 (FM45) and /2 (FM46) control ..................................................................................................O -62
19.2.12 Main body fan (FM47) control .................................................................................................................................O -62
19.2.13 Charge intake fan (FM48) control ...........................................................................................................................O -62
19.2.14 Paper exit cooling fans /1 (FM61), /2 (FM62), and /3 (FM63) control .....................................................................O -62
19.2.15 Fusing cooling fan (FM65) control ..........................................................................................................................O -62
19.2.16 ADU cooling fan /1 (FM66) control ..........................................................................................................................O -63
19.2.17 ADU cooling fan /2 (FM67) control ..........................................................................................................................O -63
19.2.18 HDD unit cooling fans /1 (FM81) and /2 (FM82) control (option) ............................................................................O -63
20. COUNTER CONTROL...........................................................................................................................................O -64

20.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................O -64
20.2 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................O -64
21. ACS CONTROL.....................................................................................................................................................O -65

21.1 Switching from color mode to black and white mode ..........................................................................................................O -65
21.1.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................O -65
21.1.2 Sequence of switching from color mode to black and white mode ...........................................................................O -65
21.1.3 Sequence of switching from black and white mode to color mode ...........................................................................O -65
21.2 Count at ACS ......................................................................................................................................................................O -65
21.2.1 Black and white mode (1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C released) ..................................................................................O -65
21.2.2 Color mode (1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C, /K pressed) ..............................................................................................O -65
22. AUTHENTICATION UNIT......................................................................................................................................O -66

22.1 Authentication unit (IC card type: AU-201)...........................................................................................................................O -66
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-622 .......................................................................................PA -1

xliv
1. OUTLINE.................................................................................................................................................................PA -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PA -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PA -1
1.2.1 Simplex mode .............................................................................................................................................................PA -1
1.2.2 Duplex mode ...............................................................................................................................................................PA -1
2. PAPER FEED SECTION.........................................................................................................................................PA -3

2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PA -3
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PA -3
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PA -3
2.3.1 Original feed control ....................................................................................................................................................PA -3
2.3.2 Original size detection .................................................................................................................................................PA -5
2.3.3 Original empty detection .............................................................................................................................................PA -5
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION.......................................................................................................................................PA -6
3.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PA -6
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PA -6
3.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PA -6
3.3.1 Original scan and conveyance control ........................................................................................................................PA -6
4. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION....................................................................................................................................PA -10

4.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PA -10
4.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PA -10
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PA -10
4.3.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................PA -10
4.3.2 Paper exit control ......................................................................................................................................................PA -11
4.3.3 Reverse conveyance control .....................................................................................................................................PA -13
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-602/HT-504/505 ....................................................................PB -1

1. OUTLINE.................................................................................................................................................................PB -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PB -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PB -2
2. PAPER FEED SUCTION SECTION........................................................................................................................PB -3

2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PB -3
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PB -4
2.2.1 Tray lift drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PB -4
2.2.2 Paper feed drive ..........................................................................................................................................................PB -4
2.2.3 Pick-up drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PB -5
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PB -5
2.3.1 Up/down control ..........................................................................................................................................................PB -5
2.3.2 Size detection control ..................................................................................................................................................PB -6
2.3.3 Pick-up mechanism .....................................................................................................................................................PB -7
2.3.4 Separation mechanism ...............................................................................................................................................PB -7
2.3.5 Air assist mechanism ..................................................................................................................................................PB -8
2.3.6 Paper empty detection control ....................................................................................................................................PB -9
2.3.7 Remaining paper detection control .............................................................................................................................PB -9
2.3.8 Tray lock control ..........................................................................................................................................................PB -9
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION.....................................................................................................................................PB -11

3.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PB -11
3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PB -12
3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PB -12
3.3.1 Pre-registration control ..............................................................................................................................................PB -12
3.3.2 Conveyance control ..................................................................................................................................................PB -12
3.3.3 Multi feed detection control .......................................................................................................................................PB -13
3.3.4 Mis-centering detection control .................................................................................................................................PB -13
4. OTHERS................................................................................................................................................................PB -14
4.1 Dehumidification heater control ...........................................................................................................................................PB -14
4.2 Tray damper mechanism ....................................................................................................................................................PB -14
4.3 Main body assist mechanism ..............................................................................................................................................PB -14
4.3.1 Filter replacement assy retaining mechanism ...........................................................................................................PB -14
4.3.2 Filter replacement assy ventilation mechanism ........................................................................................................PB -15
4.3.3 Environment temperature detection assist mechanism ............................................................................................PB -15
5. HT-504/505 (OPTIONAL) .....................................................................................................................................PB -16

5.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PB -16
5.2 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PB -16
5.2.1 Dehumidifier fan heater control .................................................................................................................................PB -16
PC THEORY OF OPERATION LU-202/HT-503 ..........................................................................PC -1

1. OUTLINE.................................................................................................................................................................PC -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PC -1
1.2 Paper path ............................................................................................................................................................................PC -1
xlv
2. PAPER FEED SECTION ........................................................................................................................................PC -2

2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PC -2
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PC -2
2.2.1 Paper feed drive .........................................................................................................................................................PC -2
2.2.2 Pick-up drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PC -3
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PC -3
2.3.1 Paper feed control ......................................................................................................................................................PC -3
2.3.2 Paper empty detection control ....................................................................................................................................PC -6
2.3.3 Remaining paper detection control .............................................................................................................................PC -6
2.3.4 Size detection control .................................................................................................................................................PC -7
2.3.5 Mis-centering detection control ...................................................................................................................................PC -8
3. UP/DOWN SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................PC -10

3.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PC -10
3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PC -10
3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PC -11
3.3.1 Up/down control ........................................................................................................................................................PC -11
4. OTHERS................................................................................................................................................................PC -12
4.1 Dehumidification heater control ..........................................................................................................................................PC -12
4.2 Interlock switch control ........................................................................................................................................................PC -12
5. HT-503 (OPTIONAL) ............................................................................................................................................PC -13

5.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PC -13
5.2 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PC -13
5.2.1 Dehumidifier fan heater control .................................................................................................................................PC -13
PD THEORY OF OPERATION MB-504 ......................................................................................PD -1

1. OUTLINE.................................................................................................................................................................PD -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PD -1
1.2 Paper path ............................................................................................................................................................................PD -1
2. PAPER FEED SECTION.........................................................................................................................................PD -2

2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PD -2
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PD -2
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PD -2
2.3.1 Up/down control ..........................................................................................................................................................PD -2
2.3.2 Paper size detection control .......................................................................................................................................PD -3
2.3.3 Paper feed control ......................................................................................................................................................PD -3
2.3.4 Paper empty control ....................................................................................................................................................PD -4
2.3.5 Remaining paper detection control .............................................................................................................................PD -4
PE THEORY OF OPERATION RU-509/HM-102 .........................................................................PE -1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PE -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PE -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PE -2
1.2.1 Straight conveyance/de-curler conveyance/humidification conveyance mode ...........................................................PE -2
2. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION .................................................................................................................PE -3

2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PE -3
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PE -3
2.2.1 Conveyance drive .......................................................................................................................................................PE -3
2.2.2 Humidification section gate drive ................................................................................................................................PE -4
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PE -4
2.3.1 Conveyance control ....................................................................................................................................................PE -4
2.3.2 Humidification section gate control .............................................................................................................................PE -5
3. DE-CURLER SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................PE -7

3.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PE -7
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PE -8
3.2.1 De-curler section conveyance drive ............................................................................................................................PE -8
3.2.2 De-curler gates /1 and /2 drive ....................................................................................................................................PE -9
3.2.3 De-curlers /3 and /4 pressure drive .............................................................................................................................PE -9
3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PE -10
3.3.1 Outline of de-curler ...................................................................................................................................................PE -10
3.3.2 De-curler section conveyance control .......................................................................................................................PE -13
3.3.3 De-curlers /1 and /2 control .......................................................................................................................................PE -14
3.3.4 De-curlers /3 and /4 control .......................................................................................................................................PE -14
4. OUTPUT PAPER DENSITY DETECTION SECTION ...........................................................................................PE -15

4.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PE -15
4.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PE -16
4.2.1 Conveyance drive .....................................................................................................................................................PE -16
4.2.2 Shutter drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PE -16
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PE -17
xlvi
4.3.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................PE -17

4.3.2 Output paper density detection section .....................................................................................................................PE -19
5. PAPER EXIT SECTION ........................................................................................................................................PE -20

5.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PE -21
5.2.1 Paper exit conveyance drive .....................................................................................................................................PE -21
5.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PE -22
5.3.1 Paper exit conveyance control ..................................................................................................................................PE -22
6. HUMIDIFICATION SECTION (HM-102) ...............................................................................................................PE -25

6.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PE -26
6.2.1 Humidification section entrance conveyance drive ...................................................................................................PE -26
6.2.2 Humidification section conveyance drive ..................................................................................................................PE -26
6.2.3 Humidification roller pressure drive (HM-101) ..........................................................................................................PE -27
6.2.4 Water feed pump drive ..............................................................................................................................................PE -27
6.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PE -27
6.3.1 Outline of humidification section ...............................................................................................................................PE -27
6.3.2 Humidification section conveyance control ...............................................................................................................PE -28
6.3.3 Humidification roller / water feed roller pressure control ...........................................................................................PE -29
6.3.4 Water feed control .....................................................................................................................................................PE -32
7. OTHER CONTROLS ............................................................................................................................................PE -34

7.1 Fan control ..........................................................................................................................................................................PE -34
7.1.1 Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................PE -34
7.1.2 Control ......................................................................................................................................................................PE -34
7.2 Door detection control .........................................................................................................................................................PE -35
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-521 ........................................................................................PF -1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PF -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PF -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PF -2
2. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION .........................................................................................................................PF -3

2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PF -3
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PF -3
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PF -4
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching ........................................................................................................................................PF -4
2.3.2 Bypass roller /Lw pressure release control .................................................................................................................PF -4
3. SUB TRAY SECTION .............................................................................................................................................PF -7

3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PF -7
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PF -7
(1) Sub tray paper full detection control ...............................................................................................................................PF -7
(2) Conveyance speed switching control .............................................................................................................................PF -7
4. STACKER SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................PF -9

4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PF -9
4.2.1 Stacker entrance roller/paddle drive ...........................................................................................................................PF -9
4.2.2 Stack assist plate/rear stopper drive .........................................................................................................................PF -10
4.2.3 Intermediate roller/paper exit arm drive ....................................................................................................................PF -10
4.2.4 Alignment drive .........................................................................................................................................................PF -11
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PF -11
4.3.1 Stacker conveyance speed control ...........................................................................................................................PF -11
4.3.2 Stacker entrance roller control ..................................................................................................................................PF -11
4.3.3 Intermediate roller control .........................................................................................................................................PF -12
4.3.4 Stack assist control ...................................................................................................................................................PF -13
4.3.5 Rear stopper control ..................................................................................................................................................PF -14
4.3.6 Alignment control ......................................................................................................................................................PF -14
4.3.7 Stacker paper exit .....................................................................................................................................................PF -15
5. STAPLER SECTION .............................................................................................................................................PF -16

5.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PF -16
5.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PF -16
5.2.1 Stapler movement/rotation ........................................................................................................................................PF -16
5.2.2 Stapler .......................................................................................................................................................................PF -17
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PF -17
5.3.1 Stapler movement control .........................................................................................................................................PF -17
5.3.2 Staple control ............................................................................................................................................................PF -17
6. MAIN TRAY SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................PF -21

6.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PF -21
6.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PF -22
xlvii
6.2.1 Tray up/down drive ....................................................................................................................................................PF -22

6.2.2 Main tray paper exit drive ..........................................................................................................................................PF -22
6.2.3 Paper exit opening drive ...........................................................................................................................................PF -23
6.2.4 Paper exit alignment plate drive ................................................................................................................................PF -23
6.2.5 Paper exit alignment plate retraction drive ................................................................................................................PF -24
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PF -24
6.3.1 Paper exit opening control ........................................................................................................................................PF -24
6.3.2 Paper press arm control ............................................................................................................................................PF -25
6.3.3 Main tray up/down control .........................................................................................................................................PF -26
6.3.4 Paper exit alignment control ......................................................................................................................................PF -27
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-531 .......................................................................................PG -1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PG -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PG -1
1.2 Paper path ............................................................................................................................................................................PG -2
1.2.1 None sort/sort/group mode .........................................................................................................................................PG -2
1.2.2 Sub tray mode ............................................................................................................................................................PG -2
1.2.3 Staple mode ...............................................................................................................................................................PG -3
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION .....................................................................................................................................PG -4

2.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PG -4
2.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PG -5
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PG -5
2.3.1 Punch registration control (Only when PK is installed) ...............................................................................................PG -5
2.3.2 FS conveyance control ...............................................................................................................................................PG -6
2.3.3 Gate drive control .......................................................................................................................................................PG -6
2.3.4 Bypass gate control ....................................................................................................................................................PG -7
2.3.5 Shift control .................................................................................................................................................................PG -8
2.3.6 Paper exit roller control ...............................................................................................................................................PG -9
2.3.7 Paper exit opening solenoid control ...........................................................................................................................PG -9
2.3.8 Paper exit opening control ........................................................................................................................................PG -10
2.3.9 Sub tray paper exit control ........................................................................................................................................PG -10
3. MAIN TRAY SECTION .........................................................................................................................................PG -12

3.1 Configuration ......................................................................................................................................................................PG -12
3.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PG -12
3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PG -13
3.3.1 Tray up down control ................................................................................................................................................PG -13
4. STACKER SECTION ............................................................................................................................................PG -15

4.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PG -15
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PG -16
4.3.1 Alignment control ......................................................................................................................................................PG -16
4.3.2 Stopper control .........................................................................................................................................................PG -16
4.3.3 Stacker entrance conveyance control ......................................................................................................................PG -16
4.3.4 Stacker paper exit control .........................................................................................................................................PG -18
5. STAPLER SECTION ............................................................................................................................................PG -19

5.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PG -19
5.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PG -19
5.3.1 Stapler movement control .........................................................................................................................................PG -19
5.3.2 Stapler control ..........................................................................................................................................................PG -20
PH THEORY OF OPERATION FS-612 .......................................................................................PH -1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PH -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PH -1
1.2 Paper path ............................................................................................................................................................................PH -2
1.2.1 None sort/sort/group mode .........................................................................................................................................PH -2
1.2.2 Sub tray mode ............................................................................................................................................................PH -2
1.2.3 Staple mode ................................................................................................................................................................PH -3
1.2.4 Center folding/saddle stitching mode ..........................................................................................................................PH -3
1.2.5 Tri-folding mode ..........................................................................................................................................................PH -4
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION ......................................................................................................................................PH -5

2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PH -5
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PH -6
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PH -6
2.3.1 Punch registration control (Only when PK is installed) ...............................................................................................PH -6
2.3.2 FS conveyance control ...............................................................................................................................................PH -7
2.3.3 Gate drive control .......................................................................................................................................................PH -7
2.3.4 Bypass gate control ....................................................................................................................................................PH -8
2.3.5 Shift control .................................................................................................................................................................PH -9
xlviii
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
Paper exit roller control .............................................................................................................................................PH -10

Paper exit opening solenoid control ..........................................................................................................................PH -10
Paper exit opening control ........................................................................................................................................PH -11
Sub tray paper exit control ........................................................................................................................................PH -12
3. MAIN TRAY SECTION .........................................................................................................................................PH -13

3.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PH -13
3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PH -13
3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PH -14
3.3.1 Tray up down control ................................................................................................................................................PH -14
4. STACKER SECTION ............................................................................................................................................PH -16

4.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PH -17
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PH -17
4.3.1 Alignment /Up control ...............................................................................................................................................PH -17
4.3.2 Alignment /Lw control ...............................................................................................................................................PH -18
4.3.3 Stopper control .........................................................................................................................................................PH -18
4.3.4 Stacker entrance conveyance control .......................................................................................................................PH -20
4.3.5 Stacker paper exit control .........................................................................................................................................PH -22
5. STAPLER SECTION ............................................................................................................................................PH -24

5.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PH -24
5.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PH -25
5.3.1 Stapler movement control .........................................................................................................................................PH -25
5.3.2 Stapler control ...........................................................................................................................................................PH -26
6. HALF-FOLDING/SADDLE-STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING SECTION ......................................................................PH -28

6.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PH -28
6.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PH -29
6.3.1 Folding knife control ..................................................................................................................................................PH -29
6.3.2 Folding conveyance control ......................................................................................................................................PH -29
6.3.3 Tri-folding gate control ..............................................................................................................................................PH -30
PI THEORY OF OPERATION PK-512/513......................................................................................PI-1

1. OUTLINE....................................................................................................................................................................PI-1
1.1 Unit configuration......................................................................................................................................................................PI-1
1.2 Paper path................................................................................................................................................................................PI-1
2. PUNCH SECTION......................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2.1 Composition..............................................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2.2 Drive.........................................................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2.2.1 Punch shift drive.............................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2.2.2 Punch drive....................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
2.3 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................PI-5
2.3.1 Punch standby position movement control.....................................................................................................................PI-5
2.3.2 Punch position correction control...................................................................................................................................PI-5
2.3.3 Punch control.................................................................................................................................................................PI-6
3. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION.............................................................................................................................PI-9

3.1 Composition..............................................................................................................................................................................PI-9
3.2 Drive.........................................................................................................................................................................................PI-9
3.3 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................PI-9
3.3.1 Punch scraps box control...............................................................................................................................................PI-9
PJ THEORY OF OPERATION PI-502 ..........................................................................................PJ -1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PJ -1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PJ -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PJ -1
1.2.1 Automatic sheet feed (Online operation) .....................................................................................................................PJ -1
1.2.2 Manual sheet feed (Offline operation) .........................................................................................................................PJ -1
2. PAPER FEED SECTION .........................................................................................................................................PJ -2

2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PJ -2
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PJ -2
2.2.1 Paper feed drive ..........................................................................................................................................................PJ -2
2.2.2 Tray lift drive ................................................................................................................................................................PJ -3
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PJ -3
2.3.1 Tray lift mechanism .....................................................................................................................................................PJ -3
2.3.2 Pick-up mechanism .....................................................................................................................................................PJ -3
2.3.3 Separation mechanism ................................................................................................................................................PJ -4
2.3.4 Registration control ......................................................................................................................................................PJ -4
2.3.5 Paper size detection control ........................................................................................................................................PJ -4
xlix
PK THEORY OF OPERATION LS-505 ........................................................................................PK -1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PK -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PK -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PK -2
2. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION ..................................................................................................................PK -3

2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PK -3
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PK -3
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PK -3
2.3.1 Door open/close mechanism ......................................................................................................................................PK -3
2.3.2 Jam release lever lock mechanism .............................................................................................................................PK -3
3. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION .................................................................................................................PK -4

3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PK -4
3.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PK -4
3.3.1 Path switching .............................................................................................................................................................PK -4
3.3.2 Conveyance line speed control ...................................................................................................................................PK -6
3.3.3 Paper cooling mechanism ...........................................................................................................................................PK -6
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION ......................................................................................................................................PK -7

4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PK -8
4.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive .........................................................................................................................................PK -8
4.2.2 Stacker tray conveyance drive (M3 reverse) ..............................................................................................................PK -8
4.2.3 Sub tray conveyance drive (M3 forward) ....................................................................................................................PK -9
4.2.4 Coupling conveyance/grip belt/paper press arm drive ................................................................................................PK -9
4.2.5 Stacker tray up down drive .......................................................................................................................................PK -10
4.2.6 Shift unit/alignment plate drive ..................................................................................................................................PK -10
4.2.7 Rear stopper/job partition plate drive ........................................................................................................................PK -11
4.2.8 Front stopper/paper press arm drive .........................................................................................................................PK -11
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PK -11
4.3.1 Stacker tray conveyance ...........................................................................................................................................PK -11
4.3.2 Coupling conveyance ................................................................................................................................................PK -16
4.3.3 Sub tray conveyance ................................................................................................................................................PK -16
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 ........................................................................................PL -1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PL -1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PL -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PL -2
(1) Straight mode ..................................................................................................................................................................PL -2
(2) Sub tray mode .................................................................................................................................................................PL -3
(3) Punch mode (L and S sizes) ...........................................................................................................................................PL -4
(4) Z-Fold mode ....................................................................................................................................................................PL -5
(5) Letter fold-out mode ........................................................................................................................................................PL -6
(6) Tri-Fold-in/double parallel mode .....................................................................................................................................PL -7
(7) Gate fold mode ...............................................................................................................................................................PL -8
(8) Half-Fold mode ...............................................................................................................................................................PL -9
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION ....................................................................................................................................PL -10

2.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PL -10
2.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PL -11
2.2.1 Conveyance drive ......................................................................................................................................................PL -11
2.2.2 Gate drive ..................................................................................................................................................................PL -12
2.2.3 Alignment drive ..........................................................................................................................................................PL -12
2.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PL -13
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching .......................................................................................................................................PL -13
2.3.2 Conveyance line speed control .................................................................................................................................PL -15
2.3.3 Alignment control .......................................................................................................................................................PL -15
2.3.4 Gap recovery control .................................................................................................................................................PL -16
3. PUNCH SECTION .................................................................................................................................................PL -18

3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PL -18
3.2.1 Rear registration drive ...............................................................................................................................................PL -18
3.2.2 Punch drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PL -19
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PL -19
(1) Punch control ................................................................................................................................................................PL -19
(2) Punch hole switching control ........................................................................................................................................PL -19
(3) Punch-hole scraps box control ......................................................................................................................................PL -19
4. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................................................................................................PL -20

4.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PL -20
4.2.1 Conveyance drive ......................................................................................................................................................PL -20

4.2.2 Folding drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PL -21
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PL -21
4.3.1 Registration control ...................................................................................................................................................PL -21
4.3.2 Conveyance path switching .......................................................................................................................................PL -22
4.3.3 1st folding control ......................................................................................................................................................PL -22
4.3.4 2nd folding control .....................................................................................................................................................PL -23
4.3.5 3rd folding control ......................................................................................................................................................PL -25
5. MAIN TRAY SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................PL -27

5.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PL -28
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PL -28
5.3.1 Main tray up/down control .........................................................................................................................................PL -28
6. SUB TRAY SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................PL -30

6.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PL -30
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PL -30
6.3.1 Sub tray full-status detection control .........................................................................................................................PL -30
6.3.2 Line speed switching .................................................................................................................................................PL -31
7. PI SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................................PL -32

7.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PL -32
7.2.1 Tray lift drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PL -32
7.2.2 Paper feed drive ........................................................................................................................................................PL -33
7.2.3 Pick-up drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PL -33
7.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PL -33
7.3.1 Size detection control ................................................................................................................................................PL -33
7.3.2 Up/down control ........................................................................................................................................................PL -34
7.3.3 Pick-up mechanism ...................................................................................................................................................PL -34
7.3.4 Separation mechanism ..............................................................................................................................................PL -35
7.3.5 Multi feed detection control .......................................................................................................................................PL -36
7.3.6 Paper empty detection control ...................................................................................................................................PL -36
PM THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506 ......................................................................................PM -1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PM -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PM -1
1.2 Paper path ............................................................................................................................................................................PM -2
(1) Coupling exit/subtray exit mode .....................................................................................................................................PM -2
(2) Overlap tri-folding mode .................................................................................................................................................PM -2
(3) Center folding/saddle stitching mode .............................................................................................................................PM -3
2. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION .............................................................................................................PM -5

2.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PM -5
2.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PM -5
2.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive ........................................................................................................................................PM -5
2.2.2 Horizontal conveyance drive ......................................................................................................................................PM -5
2.2.3 Gate drive/sub tray pressure release drive ................................................................................................................PM -6
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PM -6
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching control ............................................................................................................................PM -6
2.3.2 Conveyance line speed switch control .......................................................................................................................PM -6
2.3.3 Sub tray paper exit control .........................................................................................................................................PM -7
2.3.4 Sub tray paper full detection control ...........................................................................................................................PM -7
3. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION ............................................................................................................PM -8

3.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PM -8
3.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PM -8
3.2.1 Right angle conveyance drive/alignment drive ...........................................................................................................PM -8
3.2.2 Overlap drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PM -9
3.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PM -9
3.3.1 Paper overlap control .................................................................................................................................................PM -9
3.3.2 Alignment control ......................................................................................................................................................PM -11
3.3.3 Right angle conveyance control ...............................................................................................................................PM -12
4. FOLDING SECTION ............................................................................................................................................PM -14

4.1 Configuration ......................................................................................................................................................................PM -14
4.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PM -14
4.2.1 Folding entrance drive ..............................................................................................................................................PM -14
4.2.2 Folding conveyance drive .........................................................................................................................................PM -15
4.2.3 Folding blade drive ...................................................................................................................................................PM -15
4.2.4 Folding main scan alignment drive ...........................................................................................................................PM -16
4.2.5 Folding sub scan alignment/center folding exit drive ................................................................................................PM -16
4.2.6 Guide shaft drive ......................................................................................................................................................PM -17
li
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PM -17

4.3.1 Folding entrance conveyance control .......................................................................................................................PM -17
4.3.2 Folding main scan alignment control ........................................................................................................................PM -18
4.3.3 Folding control ..........................................................................................................................................................PM -19
4.3.4 Folding sub scan alignment control ..........................................................................................................................PM -22
4.3.5 Guide shaft control ...................................................................................................................................................PM -23
5. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION ..........................................................................................................................PM -25

5.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PM -25
5.2.1 Saddle stitching alignment drive ...............................................................................................................................PM -25
5.2.2 Saddle stitching hold drive .......................................................................................................................................PM -26
5.2.3 Clincher up down drive .............................................................................................................................................PM -26
5.2.4 Stapler/clincher movement drive ..............................................................................................................................PM -27
5.2.5 Stapler/clincher drive ................................................................................................................................................PM -27
5.2.6 Bundle arm rotation drive .........................................................................................................................................PM -28
5.2.7 Bundle arm movement drive ....................................................................................................................................PM -28
5.2.8 Bundle arm assist drive ............................................................................................................................................PM -29
5.2.9 Bundle clip drive .......................................................................................................................................................PM -29
5.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PM -29
5.3.1 Saddle stitching alignment control ............................................................................................................................PM -29
5.3.2 Stapler/clincher movement control ...........................................................................................................................PM -30
5.3.3 Saddle stitching hold control ....................................................................................................................................PM -31
5.3.4 Clincher up down control ..........................................................................................................................................PM -32
5.3.5 Stapler control ..........................................................................................................................................................PM -34
5.3.6 Bundle arm control ...................................................................................................................................................PM -35
5.3.7 Bundle arm assist control .........................................................................................................................................PM -38
5.3.8 Bundle clip control ....................................................................................................................................................PM -39
6. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION .....................................................................................................................PM -43

6.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PM -43
6.2.1 Bundle press stage lift drive .....................................................................................................................................PM -43
6.2.2 Bundle press movement drive ..................................................................................................................................PM -44
6.2.3 Bundle registration drive ...........................................................................................................................................PM -44
6.2.4 Bundle press drive ....................................................................................................................................................PM -45
6.2.5 Bundle exit drive .......................................................................................................................................................PM -45
6.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PM -46
6.3.1 Bundle press stage up down control ........................................................................................................................PM -46
6.3.2 Bundle press movement control ...............................................................................................................................PM -48
6.3.3 Bundle press control .................................................................................................................................................PM -49
6.3.4 Bundle registration control ........................................................................................................................................PM -51
6.3.5 Bundle exit control ....................................................................................................................................................PM -52
7. TRIMMER SECTION ............................................................................................................................................PM -57

7.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PM -57
7.2.1 Trimmer press drive .................................................................................................................................................PM -57
7.2.2 Trimmer blade drive .................................................................................................................................................PM -57
7.2.3 Trimmer board drive .................................................................................................................................................PM -59
7.2.4 Paddle drive .............................................................................................................................................................PM -59
7.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PM -59
7.3.1 Trimmer press control ..............................................................................................................................................PM -59
7.3.2 Trimmer blade control ..............................................................................................................................................PM -61
7.3.3 Trimmer board control ..............................................................................................................................................PM -63
7.3.4 Trimmer paddle control ............................................................................................................................................PM -63
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 .......................................................................................PN -1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PN -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PN -1
1.2 Paper path ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -2
1.2.1 Sub tray exit ................................................................................................................................................................PN -2
1.2.2 Perfect binding mode ..................................................................................................................................................PN -2
1.2.3 Relay conveyance mode ............................................................................................................................................PN -4
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION ......................................................................................................................................PN -5

2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PN -5
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PN -6
2.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive/Intermediate conveyance drive/Cover paper conveyance drive .....................................PN -6
2.2.2 Entrance gate drive/Bypass gate drive/Sub tray gate drive/Sub tray exit and separation drive .................................PN -6
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PN -7
2.3.1 Gate control ................................................................................................................................................................PN -7
2.3.2 Entrance conveyance control .....................................................................................................................................PN -8
lii
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
Intermediate conveyance control ................................................................................................................................PN -9

Cover paper conveyance control ................................................................................................................................PN -9
Sub tray paper exit release control .............................................................................................................................PN -9
Sub tray full-status detection control ...........................................................................................................................PN -9
Cover paper multi feed detection control ....................................................................................................................PN -9
3. SUB COMPILE (SC) SECTION ............................................................................................................................PN -11

3.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PN -11
3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PN -12
3.2.1 SC entrance conveyance drive/Switchback conveyance drive/Paper bundle conveyance drive .............................PN -12
3.2.2 Switchback release drive ..........................................................................................................................................PN -12
3.2.3 SC roller release drive/Clamp entrance release drive ..............................................................................................PN -13
3.2.4 Clamp entrance movement drive ..............................................................................................................................PN -13
3.2.5 SC main scan alignment drive ..................................................................................................................................PN -14
3.2.6 Sub scan alignment drive .........................................................................................................................................PN -14
3.2.7 SC stopper drive/SC pressure arm drive/Straight gate drive ....................................................................................PN -14
3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -15
3.3.1 SC section operation overview .................................................................................................................................PN -15
3.3.2 Gate control of the relay conveyance .......................................................................................................................PN -17
3.3.3 SC entrance conveyance control ..............................................................................................................................PN -17
3.3.4 SC switchback conveyance control ..........................................................................................................................PN -17
3.3.5 SC main scan alignment control ...............................................................................................................................PN -20
3.3.6 Sub scan alignment control ......................................................................................................................................PN -21
3.3.7 SC paper bundle conveyance control .......................................................................................................................PN -22
3.3.8 Clamp entrance movement control ...........................................................................................................................PN -23
3.3.9 SC stopper control ....................................................................................................................................................PN -23
3.3.10 SC pressure arm control .........................................................................................................................................PN -24
4. CLAMP SECTION ................................................................................................................................................PN -25

4.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PN -25
4.2.1 Clamp drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PN -25
4.2.2 Clamp rotation drive ..................................................................................................................................................PN -26
4.2.3 Clamp alignment drive ..............................................................................................................................................PN -26
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -26
4.3.1 Clamp alignment control ...........................................................................................................................................PN -26
4.3.2 Clamp control ............................................................................................................................................................PN -27
4.3.3 Clamp rotation control ...............................................................................................................................................PN -28
4.3.4 Book thickness detection control ..............................................................................................................................PN -32
5. PELLET SUPPLY SECTION ................................................................................................................................PN -33

5.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PN -33
5.2.1 Pellet supply drive .....................................................................................................................................................PN -33
5.2.2 Pellet supply arm drive .............................................................................................................................................PN -34
5.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -34
5.3.1 Pellet supply operation overview ..............................................................................................................................PN -34
5.3.2 Pellet supply arm control ..........................................................................................................................................PN -35
5.3.3 Pellet supply amount control .....................................................................................................................................PN -36
5.3.4 Pellet remaining amount detection control ................................................................................................................PN -38
5.3.5 Pellet supply door opening/closing detection control ................................................................................................PN -38
6. GLUE TANK SECTION ........................................................................................................................................PN -39

6.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PN -39
6.2.1 Drive .........................................................................................................................................................................PN -39
6.2.2 Glue apply roller drive ...............................................................................................................................................PN -40
6.2.3 Tank up drive ............................................................................................................................................................PN -40
6.2.4 Cover paper glue lifting drive ....................................................................................................................................PN -40
6.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -41
6.3.1 Glue tank unit movement control ..............................................................................................................................PN -41
6.3.2 Glue apply roller control ............................................................................................................................................PN -41
6.3.3 Glue tank lifting control .............................................................................................................................................PN -42
6.3.4 Cover paper glue control ..........................................................................................................................................PN -43
6.3.5 Glue temperature control ..........................................................................................................................................PN -44
7. COVER PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ....................................................................................................................PN -46

7.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PN -46
7.2.1 Cover paper tray lift drive ..........................................................................................................................................PN -46
7.2.2 Paper feed drive .......................................................................................................................................................PN -47
7.2.3 Pick-up drive .............................................................................................................................................................PN -47
7.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -48
7.3.1 Up/down control ........................................................................................................................................................PN -48
liii
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.3.7
Pick-up mechanism ..................................................................................................................................................PN -49

Separation mechanism .............................................................................................................................................PN -49
Paper feed mechanism .............................................................................................................................................PN -50
Air assist mechanism ................................................................................................................................................PN -50
Cover paper empty detection control ........................................................................................................................PN -50
Paper feed assist plate .............................................................................................................................................PN -50
8. COVER PAPER TABLE SECTION ......................................................................................................................PN -52

8.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PN -53
8.2.1 Cover paper table up down/Fr and /Rr drive .............................................................................................................PN -53
8.2.2 Cover paper alignment drive .....................................................................................................................................PN -53
8.2.3 Cover paper conveyance drive .................................................................................................................................PN -54
8.2.4 Book exit drive ..........................................................................................................................................................PN -54
8.2.5 Cover paper folding plate /Rt and /Lt drive ...............................................................................................................PN -54
8.2.6 Cover paper conveyance arm /Rr and /Lt drive ........................................................................................................PN -55
8.2.7 Cover paper lift drive .................................................................................................................................................PN -55
8.2.8 Cutter drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PN -55
8.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -55
8.3.1 Cover paper table section operation overview ..........................................................................................................PN -55
8.3.2 Cover paper conveyance control ..............................................................................................................................PN -59
8.3.3 Cover paper trimming control ...................................................................................................................................PN -60
8.3.4 Cover paper alignment drive .....................................................................................................................................PN -60
8.3.5 Cover paper table up down control ...........................................................................................................................PN -62
8.3.6 Cover paper folding plate control ..............................................................................................................................PN -63
8.3.7 Cover paper conveyance arm control .......................................................................................................................PN -65
8.3.8 Cover paper lifting (supporting) control .....................................................................................................................PN -67
8.3.9 Book paper exit control .............................................................................................................................................PN -67
8.3.10 Waste paper control ................................................................................................................................................PN -68
9. BOOK STOCK SECTION .....................................................................................................................................PN -69

9.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PN -69
9.2.1 Book conveyance drive .............................................................................................................................................PN -69
9.2.2 Book conveyance belt drive ......................................................................................................................................PN -70
9.2.3 Book conveyance up down drive ..............................................................................................................................PN -70
9.2.4 Book movement drive ...............................................................................................................................................PN -71
9.2.5 Book stopper drive ....................................................................................................................................................PN -71
9.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PN -71
9.3.1 Book stock section operation overview .....................................................................................................................PN -71
9.3.2 Book conveyance and movement control .................................................................................................................PN -72
9.3.3 Book conveyance belt control ...................................................................................................................................PN -74
9.3.4 Book conveyance up down control ...........................................................................................................................PN -74
9.3.5 Book movement control ............................................................................................................................................PN -75
9.3.6 Book stopper control .................................................................................................................................................PN -76
9.3.7 Book full status detection control ..............................................................................................................................PN -76
10. RELAY CONVEYANCE SECTION .....................................................................................................................PN -77

10.1 Configuration .....................................................................................................................................................................PN -77
10.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................................................................................PN -77
10.2.1 Relay conveyance roller drive / Relay paper exit roller drive ..................................................................................PN -77
10.3 Operation ..........................................................................................................................................................................PN -78
10.3.1 Relay conveyance control .......................................................................................................................................PN -78
11. OTHERS .............................................................................................................................................................PN -79

11.1 Fan control ........................................................................................................................................................................PN -79
11.1.1 .................................................................................................................................................................................PN -79
11.2 Door opening/closing control ............................................................................................................................................PN -79
PO THEORY OF OPERATION IC-601 ........................................................................................PO -1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PO -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PO -1
2. INTERFACE SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................PO -2

2.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PO -2
2.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PO -2
2.2.1 Interface outline ..........................................................................................................................................................PO -2
3. SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION .............................................................................................................................PO -3

3.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PO -3
3.2.1 Outline of system control section ................................................................................................................................PO -3
4. VIDEO INTERFACE SECTION ..............................................................................................................................PO -4

liv
4.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PO -4

4.2.1 Outline of video interface section ...............................................................................................................................PO -4
5. SSD/HDD SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................PO -5

5.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PO -5
5.2.1 SSD/HDD section overview ........................................................................................................................................PO -5
6. POWER SOURCE SECTION .................................................................................................................................PO -6

6.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PO -6
6.2.1 Power source supply ..................................................................................................................................................PO -6
PP THEORY OF OPERATION RU-506..........................................................................................PP-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PP-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PP-1
1.2 Paper path...............................................................................................................................................................................PP-2
1.2.1 Straight conveyance.....................................................................................................................................................PP-2
1.2.2 Reverse/exit conveyance..............................................................................................................................................PP-3
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PP-4
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PP-4
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PP-4
2.2.1 Conveyance drive.........................................................................................................................................................PP-4
2.2.2 Straight gate drive.........................................................................................................................................................PP-5
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PP-5
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching operation..........................................................................................................................PP-5
2.3.2 Conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................PP-5
3. STACKER SECTION................................................................................................................................................PP-8
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PP-8
3.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PP-9
3.2.1 Stacker exit shutter drive..............................................................................................................................................PP-9
3.2.2 Stack switching drive..................................................................................................................................................PP-10
3.2.3 Stacker entrance guide plate drive.............................................................................................................................PP-10
3.2.4 Alignment drive...........................................................................................................................................................PP-11
3.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PP-11
3.3.1 Alignment control........................................................................................................................................................PP-11
3.3.2 Reverse/exit control....................................................................................................................................................PP-12
3.3.3 Stack assist fan control...............................................................................................................................................PP-14
PQ THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501.........................................................................................PQ-1

1. PREFACE.................................................................................................................................................................PQ-1
1.1 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................................................PQ-1
1.1.1 Setting the Right Expectations.....................................................................................................................................PQ-1
1.2 PRODUCT POSITIONING.....................................................................................................................................................PQ-1
1.3 LONG EDGE FEED (LEF) ONLY...........................................................................................................................................PQ-1
2. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PQ-2
2.1 Unit configuration diagram......................................................................................................................................................PQ-2
2.2 Paper path..............................................................................................................................................................................PQ-3
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION.......................................................................................................................................PQ-4
3.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PQ-4
4. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION..................................................................................................................................PQ-5
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Punch conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................PQ-5

Punch operation......................................................................................................................................................................PQ-6
Chip tray control......................................................................................................................................................................PQ-7
Bypass conveyance control....................................................................................................................................................PQ-7
5. PUNCH MODULE....................................................................................................................................................PQ-9
5.1 Tools Required.......................................................................................................................................................................PQ-9
5.2 Procedure...............................................................................................................................................................................PQ-9
lv
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
Revision List > bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 Ver. 2.0
Revision List
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 Ver. 2.0
Issue data:2010/12
No.
Title
Descriptions of revision
Addition of C70hc as a machine name
B.2. PRODUCT NAME
Addition of Microsoft Windows 7
C.1.2 Functions
Correction of the custom paper size due to a specification change
C.1.5 Materials
Addition of information of C70hc
C.1.6 Maintenance
Addition of information of C70hc, correction of error in writing
C.1.7 Machine data
Correction of the power consumption and weight due to a specification

change
C.12.2 Functions
Correction of error about the FS-521 paper size
C.18.2 Functions
Correction of error about the FD-503 paper size
C.19.3 Type of paper
Correction of error about the SD-506 paper size
10
C.23.12 Appendix B
Addition of information of the DS-507/514
11
D.1.1 System configuration
Addition of information of the IC-413, DS-507/514
12
D.1.2 Configuration for optional device
Addition of information about the configuration for optional device
13
E.1.8.6 Various setting for the software
Correction of error in writing
14
F.1.1.8 Periodic maintenance 4 (Every 340,000 prints

(C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance 5
(Every 300,000 prints (C6000))
Addition of information of C70hc
15
F.1.1.16 Periodic maintenance 10 (Every 900,000 prints Correction of error in writing

(C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000))
16
F.1.6.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 600,000 prints)
Addition of lacked information
17
F.2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list (C7000/C7000P/

C70hc)
Addition of information of C70hc / Correction of errors in writing
18
F.2.2.2 Periodically replaced parts list (C6000)
19
F.3.4 Management of ORU-M parts counter
Addition of information due to addition of "ORU-M Password Setting"
20
F.11.5.2 Replacing the paper exit opening solenoid

assy (SD9)
21
F.17.4.6 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31)
Addition/correction of information due to the change of installation position of

the SD-506 trimmer blade motor (M31)
22
F.17.4.7 Lubrication to the trimmer unit

23
F.18.1.2 Replacing the switchback roller
24
G.2.2.13 Writing unit
Addition of information for installing the writing unit
25
G.2.2.21 Fusing large/small recognition connector
Addition of the removal procedure for the fusing large/small recognition

connector of the fusing unit
26
G.14.1.3 Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66)

27
I.3.1 List of utility menus
Addition of items to the Utility list
28
I.5.1 Service Mode List
Addition of items to the Service Mode list
29
I.5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment Correction of the usage of Skew Initial Position Memory in Service Mode
- Writing Initial Pos. Memory)
30
I.5.3.10 Cross Direction Initial Pos. (Printer Adjustment

- Writing Initial Pos. Memory)
Deletion of item
31
I.5.3.24 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU) (Quality

Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
Addition of "Printer Gamma Offset Auto." to Service Mode
32
I.5.3.26 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU) (Quality

Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
Addition of "Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU)" to Service Mode
33
I.5.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list
Addition of the following DIPSW

DIPSW11-1, DIPSW14-4, DIPSW37-0/1/2/3
34
Addition/correction of the following software DIPSW

DIPSW3-0, DIPSW12-4, DIPSW13-7 , DIPSW14-2/3, DIPSW15-2,
DIPSW19-5, DIPSW27-1/2, DIPSW29-2
35
Deletion of the following software DIPSW

DIPSW35-2/3/4/5
36
I.5.5.5 Setup Date/Business Setting
Correction of information in "Setup Date/Business Setting" in Service Mode
37
I.5.6.16 Special Parts Counter
38
I.5.7.4 IO check mode list
Deletion of I/O check code 99-04
39
I.5.9.26 Cover Trimming Adj. (Perfect Binder

Adjustment)
40
I.5.9.27 Cover Lead Edge Adj. (Perfect Binder

Adjustment)
41
I.5.9.28 Spine Corner form Pos. (Perfect Binder

Adjustment)
42
I.5.9.29 Glue Start Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment)
43
I.5.9.30 Glue Finish Position (Perfect Binder

Adjustment)
44
GlueFormationFinishPos. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)
45
I.5.9.31 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder

Adjustment)
46
I.5.9.32 Sub Compile CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder

Adjustment)
47
I.5.9.33 Clamp CD Width Adjustment (Perfect Binder

Adjustment)
48
I.5.9.34 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder

Adjustment)
49
I.5.9.35 Clamp FD Position Adj. (Perfect Binder

Adjustment)
50
I.5.10 Firmware Version
Addition of information about the function to enhance security
51
I.5.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care

(When using E-mail)
Addition of information of the IC-413
52
I.5.11.4 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care

(When using WebDAV server)
Addition of information of the IC-413 / Addition of the procedure for setting

Heart Beat function
53
I.5.11.11 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care
Addition of information to the DIPSW list of CSRC
54
I.5.13.5 Test Pattern No.40 Image skew check pattern

(Full-bleed print of Test Pattern No.16)
Addition of Test Pattern No.40
55
I.5.15.2 Execute Log Storing
56
I.5.16.2 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting
Addition of "ORU-M Life Threshold Setting" to Service Mode
57
I.5.16.3 ORU-M Password Setting
Addition of "ORU-M Password Setting" to Service Mode
58
I.6.5.2 Caution before ISW
Deletion of item
59
I.6.5.2 Method of the USB memory ISW
Correction of the procedure for upgrading the IC-601 firmware version
60
I.6.5.3 Method of Internet ISW
Correction of the procedure for upgrading the IC-601 firmware version
61
I.6.5.4 ISW error list
Correction of errors in the IC-601 ISW error list
62
I.7.1 CE/Administrator Security Setting List
Addition of information about the function to enhance security
63
I.15.2 Position adjustment of the shutter solenoid (SD5) Addition of the method for adjusting the shutter solenoid to RU-509
mechanical adjustment
64
I.18.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment

plate /Up
65
K.1.1 Jam code list
Addition of the RU-506 jam code
66
K.2.1 Trouble reset method
Addition of information to the trouble reset method after the occurrence of

malfunction code
67
K.2.3 Malfunction code list
Addition of information due to the change of trouble reset method after the
occurrence of malfunction code / Addition of the RU-509 shutter solenoid
(SD5) to the estimated abnormal parts of C-1297
68
L.1.1.8 Main body front side
69
L.1.1.13 Toner supply section
70
L.1.14.6 Trimmer section

71
M.16.1 Timing chart of the duplex mode
Deletion of the RU-506 time chart
72
N.13.1 SD-506

73
N.13.5 SD-506 (4/4)

74
O.1.1.1 Main body right side
Addition of information of the IC-413
75
O.7.1 Configuration
76
O.16.5.1 Charge potential automatic adjustment
Deletion of item
77
PM.7.2.2 Trimmer blade drive

78
PM.7.3.2 Trimmer blade control

79
PN.9.3.7 Book full status detection control
bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 Ver. 3.0

Date of issue: December 2010
No.
Title
Descriptions of revision
C.1.2 Functions
C.11.3 Type of paper
Addition of color paper to the unusable type of paper in humidifier ON mode
C.12.2 Functions
C.18.2 Functions
C.21. IC-601
Addition of C8000
E.1.8.1 Outline
Addition of compliant OS for Management Tool

(C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000))
Correction of the part number

(C7000/C7000P/C70hc))

(C6000))
10

(C7000/C7000P/C70hc))
11
F.1.1.23 Periodic maintenance 17 (Every 2,400,000

prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance
15 (Every 2,400,000 prints (C6000))
12
F.2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list (C7000/C7000P/

C70hc)
13
F.2.2.2 Periodically replaced parts list (C6000)
14
F.5.3.4 Replacing the drum cartridge
Correction of Note for replacing the drum cartridge
15
F.5.4.1 Replace the charging corona.
Addition/correction of Note for replacing the charging corona
16
F.5.6.2 Replacing the developing units /C, /M, /Y, and /

K
Correction of Note for replacing the developing unit
17
F.5.8.1 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed

roller rubber
Correction of the maintenance cycle
18
F.5.8.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber
19
F.5.8.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the preregistration clutch

20
F.5.13.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit
21
I.3.1 List of utility menus
Deletion of GlueFormationFinishPos. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

22
I.4. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
Addition of the adjustment item required after replacing the board of DF
23
Addition/correction of the following software DIPSW

DIPSW12-6, DIPSW13-5, DIPSW13-6, DIPSW17-7, DIPSW33-6,
DIPSW37-5, DIPSW37-6, DIPSW37-7, DIPSW40-2, DIPSW40-3,
DIPSW40-4
24
I.5.7.4 IO check mode list
Addition of the following I/O check code

99-92, 99-93
25
I.5.8.1 ADF Original Size Adj.
Addition of Note
26
I.5.9.31 GlueFormationFinishPos. (Perfect Binder

Adjustment)
Deletion of item
27
I.6. IC-601 Service Mode
Correction/addition of information related to C-601
28
I.15.2 Position adjustment of the shutter solenoid (SD5) Correction of error in writing
29
K.2.3 Malfunction code list
Addition/correction of the following malfunction code

C-1355, C-D0E0, C-D0E1, C-D0E2, C-D0E3, C-D0E4, C-D0E5, C-D0E6, CD0E7, C- D0E8
30
L.1.1.4 Main body rear side 4
31
L.3.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
Addition of the relay connector layout drawing of the main body
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING > SAFETY AND

IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them
before doing service work.
A -1
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING > 1. OUTLINE
1. OUTLINE
Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them
before doing service work.
A -2
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING > 2. IMPORTANT NOTICE
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the
risk of damage to the product, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the
KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBTtrained service
technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the
information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the
product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the
course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the
product properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
A -3
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING > 3. DESCRIPTION

ITEMS FOR DANGER, W...
3. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

AND CAUTION
3.1 Descriptions in the service manual
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions " DANGER", " WARNING", and "
CAUTION" is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury
WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble and property damage
3.2 Descriptions for safety and important warning items

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier.
:Prohibition when using the copier.
:Direction when using the copier.
General precaution
Electric hazard
High temperature
General prohibition
Do not touch with

wet hand
Do not disassemble
General instruction
Unplug
Ground/Earth
A -4
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING > 4. SAFETY WARNINGS
4. SAFETY WARNINGS
4.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA
BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
4.1.1 Outline
Konica Minolta brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved
through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at
proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high
risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly
prohibited. The points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind
this policy.
4.1.2 Prohibited Actions

WARNING
Using any cables or power cord not specified
by KMBT.
Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by
KMBT. Safety will not be assured, leading to a
risk of fire and injury.
Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse
terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or
similar object.
Disabling relay functions (such as wedging
paper between relay contacts)
Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety
circuits, etc.) Safety will not be assured,
leading to a risk of fire and injury.
Making any modification to the product unless
instructed by KMBT.
Using parts not specified by KMBT
A -5
4.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION

4.2.1 Outline
In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used
in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach
appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.
4.2.2 Power Cord Set or Power Plug

WARNING
Use power supply cord set which meets the
following criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration
intended for the connection to wall outlet
appropriate for the product's rated
voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding,
and
- provided with three-conductor cable
having enough current capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory
requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or
electric shock.
Attach power plug which meets the following
criteria:
- having configuration intended for the
connection to wall outlet appropriate for
the product's rated voltage and current,
and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding,
and
- meets regulatory requirements for the
area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the
product connecting to inadequate power
supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric
shock.
A -6
AC230V
AC208V
240V
Conductors in the power cable must be

connected to terminals of the plug according
to the following order:
- Black or Brown:L (line)
- White or Light Blue:N (neutral)
- Green/Yellow:PE (earth)
Wrong connection may cancel safeguards
within the product, and results in fire or
electric shock.
4.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

4.3.1 Outline
Konica Minolta brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and CE from the risk of
injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and
eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety
checks.
4.3.2 Power Supply

Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
Check that mains voltage is as specified.
Connection to wrong voltage supply may
result in fire or electric shock.
Connect power plug directly into wall outlet
having same configuration as the plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product
connecting to inadequate power supply
(voltage, current capacity, grounding),
and may result in fire or electric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available,
advice the customer to contact qualified
electrician for the installation.
Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall
outlet with a capacity greater than the
maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall
outlet, fire may result.
If two or more power cords can be plugged
into the wall outlet, the total load must not
exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall
outlet, fire may result.
A -7
?V
kw
Make sure the power cord is plugged in the

wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and the risk of
fire.
Check whether the product is grounded
properly.
If current leakage occurs in an
ungrounded product, you may suffer
electric shock while operating the
product. Connect power plug to
grounded wall outlet.
Check whether the product is grounded
properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded
product, you may suffer electric shock while
operating the product. Connect power plug to
grounded wall outlet.
Power Plug and Cord

WARNING
When using the power cord set (inlet type)
that came with this product, make sure the
connector is securely inserted in the inlet of
the product.
When securing measure is provided,
secure the cord with the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not
connected to the product securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
Check whether the power cord is not stepped
on or pinched by a table and so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to
a risk of fire.
Check whether the power cord is damaged.
Check whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is
damaged, replace with a new power
cord or cord set (with plug and
connector on each end) specified by
KMBT.
Using the damaged power cord may
result in fire or electric shock.
A -8
Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

Overheating may occur there, leading to
a risk of fire.
Check whether dust is collected around the
power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet
without removing dust may result in fire.
Do not insert the power plug into the wall
outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
When unplugging the power cord, grasp the
plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a
risk of fire and electric shock.
Wiring
WARNING
Never use multi-plug adapters to plug
multiple power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
When an extension cord is required, use a
specified one. Current that can flow in the
extension cord is limited, so using a too long
extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with
the cable taken up. Fire may result.
4.3.3 Installation Requirements

Prohibited Installation Places
WARNING
Do not place the product near flammable
materials or volatile materials that may catch
fire.
A risk of fire exists.
Do not place the product in a place exposed
to water such as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
A -9
When not Using the Product for a long time

WARNING
When the product is not used over an
extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and
outlet may cause fire.
Ventilation
CAUTION
The product generates ozone gas during
operation, but it will not be harmful to the
human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the
following cases, ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly
ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the
same time
Fixing
CAUTION
Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In case of an earthquake and so on, the
product may slide, leading to a injury.
4.3.4 Servicing
Inspection before Servicing
CAUTION
Before conducting an inspection, read all
relevant documentation (service manual,
technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the
inspection following the prescribed procedure
in safety clothes, using only the prescribed
tools.
A -10
Do not make any adjustment not described

in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not
used, the product may break and a risk
of injury or fire exists.
Before conducting an inspection, be sure to
disconnect the power plugs from the product
and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the
wall outlet, some units are still powered
even if the POWER switch is turned
OFF. Arisk of electric shock exists.
The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burnt.
Work Performed with the Product Powered On

WARNING
Take every care when making adjustments
or performing an operation check with the
product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an
operation check with the external cover
detached, you may touch live or highvoltage parts or you may be caught in
moving gears or the timing belt, leading
to a risk of injury.
Take every care when servicing with the
external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum
unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
When taking a report of problems from a
user, check each part and repair properly.
A risk of product trouble, injury, and fire
exists.
Check the exterior and frame for edges,
burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
A -11
Do not allow any metal parts such as clips,

staples, and screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and
cause electric shock or fire.
Check wiring for squeezing and any other
damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of
electric shock or fire.
Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust
from electrical parts and electrode units such
as a charging corona unit.
product trouble or fire.
Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for
any damage.
Check electrode units such as a charging
corona unit for deterioration and sign of
leakage.
trouble or fire.
Before disassembling or adjusting the write
unit (P/H unit) incorporating a laser, make
sure that the power cord has been
disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye,
leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do
not supply power with the write unit shifted
from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye,
leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
When replacing a lithium battery, replace it
with a new lithium battery specified in the
Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used
lithium battery using the method specified by
local authority.
Improper replacement can cause
explosion.
After replacing a part to which AC voltage is
applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp),
be sure to check the installation state.
Check the interlock switch and actuator for
loosening and check whether the interlock
functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you
may receive an electric shock or be
A -12
injured when you insert your hand in the

product (e.g., for clearing paper jam).
Make sure the wiring cannot come into
contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other
pointed parts.
Make sure that all screws, components,
wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed
for safety check and maintenance have been
reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors,
pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock,
and fire exists.
Handling of Consumables
WARNING
Toner and developer are not harmful
substances, but care must be taken not to
breathe excessive amounts or let the
substances come into contact with eyes, etc.
It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse
with plenty of water immediately. When
symptoms are noticeable, consult a
physician.
Never throw the used cartridge and toner into
fire.
You may be burned due to dust
explosion.
Handling of Service Materials

CAUTION
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Isopropyl alcohol and acetone are highly
flammable and must be handled with
care. A risk of fire exists.
Do not replace the cover or turn the product
ON before any solvent remnants on the
cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
A -13
Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time

and take care not to spill any liquid. If this
happens, immediately wipe it off.
When using any solvent, ventilate the room
well.
Breathing large quantities of organic
solvents can lead to discomfort.
4.3.5 Fuse
Fuse
CAUTION
CAUTION
Double pole / neutral fusing
ATTENTION
Double ple / Fusible sur le neutre
4.3.6 Used Batteries Precautions

Handling of batteries
CAUTION
ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.
Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mme type ou dun type quivalent
recommand par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant.
Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren.
Finland, Sweden
VAROlTUS
A -14
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.

Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av
apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
A -15
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING > 5. SAFETY

INFORMATION
5. SAFETY INFORMATION
5.1 IMPORTANT NOTICE
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug
Administration implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976.
Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
This copier is certified as a "Class 1" laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according
to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this
copier is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam
cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
5.2 INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine. When accessing
these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns
and electric shock.
A -16

INFORMATION
(Fusing unit)
A -17

INFORMATION
(Duplex section Upper surface)

DO NOT put your hand between
the main body and duplex section;
otherwise you may be injured.
A -18

INFORMATION
(Rear side)
(Toner supply section)
CAUTION
Do not open the cover
during energization
since the light source of
laser is inside.
A -19

INFORMATION
Do not open the cover for

10 minutes after turning
OFF the power switch.
There is a possibility of
electrical shock caused by
charging voltage.
CAUTION
Electric Shock from Storged Charge

on Capacitors! Do not touch power
supply unit for 10min.
after shutting off the machine.
(DF rear side)
(LU-202)
CAUTION
To avoid any unexpected
injury, DO NOT put your hand
into the holes (3 places) on
the bottom plate of the LU.
A -20

INFORMATION
(PB-503)
CAUTION
The paste tank
unit is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
(FS-531/612)
CAUTION
To avoid injury, DO NOT
put your hand on top of
the printed sheets.
Be sure to hold both
sides of the printed
sheets when removing
them, and DO NOT leave
your hand on the printed
sheets while the primary
(main) tray goes up.
A -21

INFORMATION
(SD-506)
WARNING
Do not touch the edge of the
trimmer blade.
You get injured.
(RU-509)
WARNING
Do not open the cover for
50 minutes after turning
OFF the power switch.
There is a possibility of
electrical shock caused by
charging voltage.
A -22

INFORMATION
(GP-501)
WARNING
This safety message you could
get an electrical shock because
disconnecting power from this
section does not cut off power
from adjacent sections of the
machine.
WARNING
This safety message means
that you might get seriously
hurt or killed if you open the
product and expose yourself to
hazardous voltage. NEVER
remove the screwed on covers.
ALWAYS refer service
requirements to qualified
service personnel.
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any
caution label to keep yourself away from. Do not remove caution labels. And also,
when the caution label is peeled off or soiled and cannot be seen clearly, replace it
with a new caution label.
A -23
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING > 6. MEASURES TO

TAKE IN CASE OF AN ...
6. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take
emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation
must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through
direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations specified by
every distributor.
A -24
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 1. PRECAUTION ON

HANDLING THIS MANUAL
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS

1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL
Be sure to maintain the confidentiality of this manual.
Mishandling of this manual may make you face punishment according to the laws.
B -1
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 2. PRODUCT NAME
2. PRODUCT NAME
In this manual, each product is indicated as following names.
(1) bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000*1:
Copier or Main body
(2) Microsoft Windows 95:
Windows 95
Microsoft Windows 98:
Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me:
Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0:
Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP:
Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista:
Windows Vista
Windows 7
The combination of above OS:
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP
Windows 95 /98/Me / NT /2000/XP
*1 This Service Manual is also applicable to bizhub PRO C7000/C7000P/C6000 and ineo+ 7000/6000.
B -2
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 3. TRADEMARK
3. TRADEMARK
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES
The indicated company and product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of each company.
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS

KONICA MINOLTA and KONICA MINOLTA logo are the registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC..
bizhub and bizhub PRESS are the registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC..
2010 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
B -3
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND

SIGNALS
4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS

Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many.
Classification
Sensor
Load symbol
PS
Ex. of signal name

IN
Description
Sensor detection signal
PS
Door PS1
SIG
102 PS
Solenoid
SD
24V
Power to drive the solenoid
DRV
Drive signal
SOL
Clutch
CL
24V
Power to drive the clutch
DRV
Drive signal
SOL
Motor
24V
Power to drive the motor
CONT
Drive signal
DRV1
Drive signals of two kinds
DRV2
D1
D2
_U
Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
_V
_W
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1
D2
Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds

Motor, phases A and B control signals
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV
DRV B
DRV
A
/A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL
PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD
PLL lock signal
FR
Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD
Motor lock abnormality
BLK
Drive brake signal
P/S
Power/stop
S/S
Operating load start/stop signal
SS
Fan
FM
CW/CCW, F/R
Rotational direction switching signal
ENB
Effective signal
TEMP_ER
Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
24V
Power to drive the fan motor
CONT, DRIVE
Drive signal
HL
Speed control signal (2 speeds)
EM, Lock, LCK, FEM
Detection signal
Others
TH1.S, ANG
Analog signal
Ground
SG, S.GND, S_GND
Signal ground
B -4
Serial
communication
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND

SIGNALS
PG, P.GND
Power ground
DCD
Data carrier detection
SIN
Serial input
SOUT
Serial output
DTR
Data terminal operation available
GND
Signal ground (earth)
DSR, DSET
Data set ready
RTS
Transmission request signal
CTS
Consent transmission signal
RI
Ring indicator
TXD
Serial transmission data
RXD
Serial reception data
B -5
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION
5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION

When the direction in which paper is fed is in parallel with the longer side of paper, the paper feed direction like this is referred to as the
longitudinal feed.
And the paper feed direction that is perpendicular to the longitudinal feed is referred to as the transverse feed.
When specifying the longitudinal feed, "S (abbreviation for Short Edge Feeding)" is added to the paper size. For the transverse feed, no specific
notation is employed.
However, when only the longitudinal feed is specified for one and the same paper size with no specification made for the transverse feed, "S" is
not added even when being fed longitudinally.
<Example>
Paper size
Feed direction
A4
Transverse feed
A4
Longitudinal feed
A4S
Longitudinal feed
A3
A3
Notation
B -6
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub PRESS C7000/

C7000P/C70hc/C6000
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
1.1 Type
Type
Console type (floor-mounted type)
Copying method
4-coupled drum tandem laser electrostatic method
Original stand
Fixed
Original alignment
Left rear standard
Photo conductor type
OPC
Writing type
8-beam laser scanning type
Tray capacity
3 trays (500 sheets x 3, 80g/m2)

MB-504 (Multi bypass, 250 sheets, 80g/m2)*1 *2
PF-602 (3000 sheets x 2, 80g/m2)*1
LU-202 (2500 sheets x 80g/m2)*1
*1 MB-504, PF-602, LU-202 is option.

*2 PF-602 is not available when MB-504 is installed.
1.2 Functions
Original
Sheet, book, solid object
Max. original size
A3 or 11 x 17 (Custom paper: Max. 303mm x 438mm)
Copy size
Tray 1, 2, 3
SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, ISOB5S,
A5S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14,
8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Max. 330.2 x 487.7mm, Min. 139.7 x 182 mm)
Bypass (Option, MB-504)
SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S,
ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S, Postcard
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14,
8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 330.2 x 487.7mm, Min. 100 x 148 mm)
ADU
SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S,
ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S, Postcard
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11,
8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 330.2 x 487.7mm, Min. 100 x 148 mm)
Fixed magnification
x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.414, x 1.224, x 1.154,

x 0.866, x 0.816, x 0.707, x 0.500
Zoom magnification
x 0.250 to x 4.000 (each 0.001 step)
Copy magnification
Warm-up time
450 sec. or less
First copy out time

(C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
Color
7.6 seconds or less (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Black and white
First copy out time

(C6000)
Color
Black and white
Continuous copy speed

(C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
Color
70 sheets/min. (8 1/2 x 11), 71 sheets/min. (A4)
Black and white
70 sheets/min. (8 1/2 x 11), 71 sheets/min. (A4)
Continuous copy speed

(C6000)
Color
60 sheets/min. (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Black and white
60 sheets/min. (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Continuous copy count
Up to 9,999 sheets
Resolution
Scan
Main scan: 600dpi

Sub scan: 600dpi
C -1

C7000P/C70hc/C6000

Writing
Main Scan: 1200dpi (equivalent to 3600dpi)

Sub scan: 1200dpi
Standard memory
384MB x 6
Extended memory (HD-514)
160GB or more (SATA) x 6
Number of originals to be stored:

Reference
(C7000, C6000)
Full color
Interface section
RJ45 Ethernet, Serial port (RS232-C, USB-Type Ax3), Connector for printer controller
7 sheets (A3) HD-514 is not connected

4300 sheets (A3) HD-514 is connected
1.3 Paper
(1) Paper weight
Weight that can be fed
Weight that can be exited
Tray 1, 2, 3
64g/m2 to 256g/m2*1(plain paper, fine paper, color paper)

81g/m2 to 256g/m2*1 (coated paper)
MB-504
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 (plain paper, fine paper, color paper)

81g/m2 to 300g/m2 (coated paper)
Simplex straight paper exit
64g/m2 to 300g/m2
Simplex reverse/exit
64g/m2 to 300g/m2
ADU
64g/m2 to 300g/m2
*1 For paper size A4 or smaller than 8 1/2 x 11, it is 209 g/m2.
(2) Type of paper

Type of paper
Plain
Tray 1, 2, 3
MB-504
LU-202
PF-602
Fine
Color
*3
*3
*4
Coated GL, ML, GO, MO

*1 *2
Postcard
Label
OHP sheet*5
Tab Paper *6
: Can be fed, : Can be fed only per 1 sheet, -: Cannot be fed

(Coated type) G: Gloss, M: Matte, L: Laser, O: Offset
*1 Paper less than 80g/m2 is not guaranteed.
*2 HT-503, 504/505 (option) is required for humidity 50% or more.
*3 It is supposed to feed single sheet from tray or MB-504.
*4 LU-202 is when the postcard kit is mounted.
*5 The quality is not guaranteed.
*6 Set direction is specified. Only for simplex.
1.4 Recommended paper

1.4.1 Inch
Paper type
Plain
Product name*1
Hammermill Tidal MP (75g/m2)
Fine
Color
Hammermill Color Copy Photo White (105g/m2)

Hammermill Color Copy Cover (163g/ m2, 216g/m2)
Coated-GL
Coated-GO
Hammermill Color Copy Glossy (120g/m2)

Kromekote Laser High Gloss C2S 90lb Book (133g/m2)
Coated-ML
Coated-MO
1.4.2 Metric
Paper type
Plain
Product name*1
Profi (80g/m2)
Original (80g/m2)
C -2

C7000P/C70hc/C6000

Fine
Color
Mondi Color Copy (90g/m2, 100g/m2, 120g/m2, 160g/m2, 200g/m2, 220g/m2, 250g/m2, 280g/m2, 300g/
m2)
Coated-GL
Coated-GO
Mondi Color Copy Coated Silk (135g/m2, 170g/m2, 200g/m2, 250g/m2)

Mondi Color Copy Coated Glossy (135g/m2, 170g/m2, 200g/m2, 250g/m2)
Coated-ML
Coated-MO
1.5 Materials
Parts name
Useful life
Name
Toner bottle /Y
31,000 prints*1
TN616Y*6
TN617Y*7
Toner bottle /M
31,000 prints*1
TN616M*6
TN617M*7
Toner bottle /C
31,000 prints*1
TN616C*6
TN617C*7
Toner bottle /K
41,500 prints*1
TN616K*6
TN617K*7
Drum cartridge
220,000 prints*2
180,000 prints*3
DU-104
(102 km of drum drive distance or

130 km of lubricant applying roller
drive distance)*4
Developer /Y
DV610Y
340,000 prints*2
300,000 prints*3
(Drive distance 200km)*4
Developer /M
DV610M*6
DV611M*7
340,000 prints*2
300,000 prints*3
Developer /C
DV610C*6
DV611C*7
340,000 prints*2
300,000 prints*3
Developer /K
DV610K
340,000 prints*2
300,000 prints*3
Toner collect box
50,000 prints*5
A03UR702##
*1 A4 original at each color 5% coverage.

*2 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*3 C6000
*4 The actual life is decided by the useful life or drive distance whichever comes earlier.
*5 The actual life is detected automatically by the sensor.
*6 C7000/C7000P/C6000
*7 C70hc
1.6 Maintenance
Maintenance
cycle
Every 50,000 prints
Ave. number of
prints*4
Inch: 55,000 per month*1

Metric: 50,000 per month*1
Max. number of
prints*4
Q zone*5
330,000 per
month*1*3
280,000 per
month*2
11,000 per
day*1*3
9,350 per day*2
C -3

C7000P/C70hc/C6000

B, C zone*5
150,000 per
month
8,500 per day
A zone*5
100,000 per
month
5,000 per day
*1 C7000/C7000P
*2 C6000
*3 C70hc
*4 The print number is a total of black and white, single color, and full color.
*5 The zones mean the temp&humidity range indicated in the following graph.
Humidity (%RH)
80
70
60
40
30
20
10
10
18 20
23
30
Temperature (C)
1.7 Machine data

Power source
Inch: AC208V to 240V 21A, 60Hz

Metric: AC220V to AC240V 19A, 50Hz/60Hz
Power consumption
Inch: 5,100W or less (main body only)

Metric: 4,600W or less (main body only)
Dimensions
Main body + OC-506
760 (W) x 992.7 (D) x 1,075.6 (H*1)mm
Main body + DF-622 + LU-202 +

FS-612
2,150 (W) x 992.7 (D) x 1,478.2 (H*2)mm
Weight
Approx. 353kg (C7000/C6000)

Approx. 333kg (C7000P/C70hc)
*1 The operation panel section is not included.

*2 The operation panel section is included.
1.8 Operating environment

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity
10% to 80%RH (with no condensation)
1.9 Note regarding the specifications

Note
The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
C -4
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 2. DF-622
2. DF-622
2.1 Type
Type
Belt conveyance type original auto feeder
2.2 Functions
Original size
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, B6S

11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Max. original size
297mm x 431.8mm
Min. original size
128mm x 139.7mm
Various sizes of paper can be accommodated
2.3 Type of paper

Type of paper
Plain paper
Simplex 35g/m2 to 210g/m2

Duplex 50g/m2 to 210g/m2
However, paper 49g/m2 or less is conveyed in the thin paper mode
and paper 129g/m2 is conveyed in the thick paper mode.
Special paper
Paper curl amount
Same as plain paper. However, paper feed and conveyance

performance are not guaranteed.
The paper feed environment is Q-zone only.
Recycled paper, coarse paper, thermal paper, binding holed paper,
custom paper, paper with smooth surface (coated paper), paper
with rough surface (letter head), and paper with folds
Following types of special paper cannot be used.
OHP film, blueprint master, label paper, offset master, bonded
original, high-quality paper of less than 35g/m2 or 211g/m2 or more
Up to 10mm with 5 originals overlapped one another

[1]
a
15sat1c001na
a Curing: 10 mm or less
[1] Original
Maximum tray capacity
100 sheets (80g/m2 paper)
Scan speed
(A4, 81/2 x 11)
Color: 40sheets/min. or more

Black-and-white : 40sheets/min. or more
Scanning system
After the original that is conveyed on the belt stops, the scanner moves and scans the original.
2.4 Machine data

Power source
DC24/5V (supplied from the main body via PF)
Power consumption
Maximum 60W or less
Dimensions
588 (W) x 531 (D) x 135 (H) mm (excluding the paper feed tray)
Weight
Approx. 14.5kg

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -5
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 3. PF-602
3. PF-602
3.1 Type
Type
Front loading type two-tray paper feeder
3.2 Functions
Number of trays
Two trays (All trays universal)
6,000 sheets (80 g/m2 standard paper) = 3,000 sheets x 2 trays
3.3 Type of paper

Paper size
SRA3, A3, B4,ISOB4,SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5,ISOB5*1,B5S,ISOB5S,A5*1,A5S, B6S,ISOB6S*1,A6S

*1,Postcard*1
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17,9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tray /4: Custom paper (Max. 330 x 487mm, Min. 100 x 182 mm)
Tray /5: Custom paper (Max. 330 x 487mm, Min. 100 x 148 mm)
Applicable paper
Plain paper, high quality paper, coated paper
Paper weight
Tray /4
64g/m2 to 256g/m2
Tray /5
64g/m2 to 300g/m2
*1 Paper feed available only from tray /5
3.4 Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
Same as the main body.
3.5 Machine data

Power source
24/12/5VDC, 200 to 240VAC (supplied both from the main body)
Maximum power consumption
DC: 90W or less, AC: 100W or less
Dimensions
947 (W) x 750 (D) x 1045 (H) mm
Weight
Approx. 170kg

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -6
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 4. HT-504/505
4. HT-504/505
4.1 Type
Type
Fan heater type dehumidifier
4.2 Machine data

Power source
24/5VDC, 200 to 240VAC (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions
Dehumidifier fan heater unit: 197 (W) x 82 (D) x 293 (H) mm

Power source unit: 121 (W) x 80 (D) x 160 (H) mm
Weight
Dehumidifier fan heater unit: 1.5kg (per 1unit)

Power supply unit: 0.9 kg

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -7
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 5. LU-202
5. LU-202
5.1 Type
Type
Side mount type large volume paper feed unit
5.2 Functions
2500 sheets (80 g/m 2)*1
*1 Stacked height 275 mm
5.3 Type of paper

Paper size
SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, Postcard*1
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S
8K, 16K
Custom paper (Max. 330 x 487mm, Min. 210 x 182mm)*1
Applicable paper
Plain paper, high quality paper, coated paper

64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *1
*1 Postcard is option kit support

*2 Available types of paper weighing 300 g/m2 are limited to specific types.
5.4 Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
5.5 Machine data

Power source
24/12/5VDC, 200 to 240VAC (supplied both from the main body)
DC: 70W or less, AC: 50W or less (not including HT-503)
Dimensions
710 (W) x 639 (D) x 477 (H) mm
Weight
Approx. 42kg

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -8
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 6. HT-503
6. HT-503
6.1 Type
Type
Fan heater type dehumidifier
6.2 Machine data

Power source
24/5VDC, 200 to 240VAC (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions
Dehumidifier fan heater unit: 293 (W) x 82 (D) x 197 (H) mm

Power source unit: 121 (W) x 80 (D) x 160 (H) mm
Weight
Dehumidifier fan heater unit : 1.5kg

Power supply unit: 0.9 kg

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -9
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 7. MB-504
7. MB-504
7.1 Type
Type
Bypass paper feed unit
7.2 Functions
250 sheets (80g/m 2for paper)
7.3 Type of paper

Original size
SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6,
Postcard
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 330 x 487mm, Min. 100 x 148mm)
Applicable paper
Plain, Fine, Color, Coated
Paper weight
64g/m2 to 300g/m2
7.4 Machine data

Power source
DC24/5V (supplied from the main body)
Power consumption
Maximum 28W or less
Dimensions
488 (W) x 617 (D) x 303 (H) mm
Weight
Approx. 4.6kg

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -10
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 8. HD-514
8. HD-514
8.1 Type
Type
External hard disk kit
8.2 Functions
Function
Scanning image memory

Storage of image data
Storage of image data header file
Storage of thumbnail data for preview
Job edit*2
Storage of job history
Storage of log data
* The installation of PF-705 and PH-101 is necessary.*1
* The installation of PH-102 is necessary.*2
HDD specifications
3.5-inch, SATA 160GB (Raw: 150GB, file system (FAT32: 10 GB) x 6 (Y, M, C, K, A and P)
Raw (150GB)
Unformatted
Number of originals recorded

(RawHDD)
Y / M /C / K
Storage of image data, scanning

image memory
Storage of image data header file
Storage of thumbnail data for

preview, storage of job history
File system (10GB)

FAT32
Y / M /C / K
Not used
Storage of log data
Job history setting data
Full color
4,300 sheets
Conditions
Black and white/Single Color
8,600 sheets
Conditions
*1 C8000 only
*2 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
8.3 Machine data

Power source
24/5VDC (supplied from the main body)
100W or less
Weight
Approx. 15kg
Original: KM#101 chart /A3 (color)

Density: Standard
Mode: Text/Photo, Full Size

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -11
Original: The Institute of Image

Electronics Engineers of Japan
FAX#4 chart /A4
Density: Standard
Mode: Text/Photo, Full Size
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 9. PH-102
9. PH-102
9.1 Type
Type
Board kit for image preview
9.2 Functions
Functions
Thumbnail data creation of HDD Store job

Preview of thumbnail data
Job edit
* The installation of HD-514 is necessary.
9.3 Machine data

Power source
3.3VDC (supplied from the main body)
8W or less
Dimensions
200 (W) x 120 (D) x 30 (H) mm
Weight
Approx. 0.2kg

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -12
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 10. RU-509
10. RU-509
10.1 Type
Type
Relay conveyance device with paper cooling/de-curler function
10.2 Functions
De-curler conveyance mode
Reduces paper curl and conveys at an accelerating rate with post treatment linear velocity.
In the straight conveyance mode
Feed without the de-curl process and conveys at an accelerating rate with post treatment linear velocity.
Humidifier conveyance mode
Executes humidification of HM-102 (option) and conveys at an accelerating rate with post treatment linear
velocity.
Output paper density adjustment

mode
Measures the color density of the density patch printed on paper and feeds back to the image stabilization
control of the main body.
10.3 Type of paper

Paper size
SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S,
Postcard
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Type of paper
Paper weight
64g/m2 to 300g/m2
Allowed curl
60mm or less
10.4 Machine data

Power source
100VAC (Japan), 120VAC (North America), 220VAC to 240VAC (Europe)/5VDC (supplied from the main
body)
700W or less
Dimensions
410 (W) x 735 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
Weight
Approx. 60kg

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -13
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 11. HM-102
11. HM-102
11.1 Type
Type
Paper humidifier kit
11.2 Function
Functions
Humidifies the both sides of paper to adjust curling.
Tank capacity
20L (equivalent to approx. 100,000 copies)
11.3 Type of paper

Paper size
SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S,
Postcard
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Type of paper
Same as the main body (except for the coated paper)
Paper weight
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *1
*1 In humidifier ON mode, the coated paper/color paper under 135g/m2 is unusable.
11.4 Machine data

Power source
24/5VDC (supplied from RU-509)
Dimensions
Humidifier section: 194 (W) x 492 (D) x 83 (H) mm

Water feed tank section: 339 (W) x 646 (D) x 246 (H) mm
Weight
Approx. 30kg

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -14
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 12. FS-521
12. FS-521
12.1 Type
Type
Staple-cut type multi-staple device
12.2 Functions
(1) Function
Straight mode
Exited into the main tray with no processing made.
Shift mode
Exited into the main tray after being shifted.
Sub tray mode
Exits paper to the sub tray without any process.
Staple mode
Exited into the main tray after being flat-stapled.
Subset staple mode
Bundles of flat-stapled sheets of paper and single sheets of paper being exited at random into the main
tray.
(2) Number of staple sheets

The maximum number of staple sheets is decided according to either conditions which is met first, the combination condition of the paper
type/the paper length/the number of sheets for every range of paper weight, or the combination condition of the booklet length/the booklet
thickness.
Combination condition of the paper weight/the paper type/the paper length and the number of sheets for every range of paper weight
Number of staple sheets
Paper not coated
Coated paper/color paper
Paper weight (g/m2)
Less than 400mm
400mm or more
Less than 400mm
400mm or more
50 to 71
100
50
35
35
72 to 81
100
50
35
35
82 to 91
100
50
35
35
92 to 130
50
50
30
30
131 to 161
40
40
25
25
162 to 216
25
25
20
20
217 to 244
25
25
15
15
Combination condition of the booklet length/the booklet thickness

Length (mm)
Booklet thickness (mm)
219 or less
23 or less
220 or more
20 or less
(3) Staple position

Staple position
1 in the back (45 degrees), 1 in the front, 2 in center
(4) Maximum tray capacity of the main tray

Straight/Shift mode
Large size:
A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*1 *3 *5 *11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, SRA3, SRA4, SRA4S,
13 x 19 *2*3*6*11, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K *2*3 *7 *11
Wide paper *1 (Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Small size:
A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*1 *3 *5 *11, JISB5S*4, ISOB5S*3 *5 *11, 9 x 11*1*3*11,

81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 16K*2*3 *7 *11 16KS*2*3 *7 *11
Minimum size:
A5, A5S*2*3*11, 51/2 x 81/2S*2*3*6*11
Others:
Tab paper *8 *9 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x
81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size
paper*12
1200/1200P/1051
Minimum 148 (128)mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm
C6501/C6501P/C65hc
Minimum 148 (128)mm x 148mm, Maximum 324 (330)mm x 463 (483)mm
C8000
C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/

m2 *1,
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2*11,
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3)
Paper weight (g/m2)
Tray capacity (sheets)

Large size
Small size
Minimum size
40 to 71
500
750
100
72 to 81
1500
3000 (1500) *10
750
C -15

82 to 91
1000
2000 (1500) *10
500
92 to 130
750
1500
400
500
1000
250
131 to 161
350
162 to 216
Staple mode
217 to 300
375
750
200
301 to 350
250
500
100
Number of sets of staple sheet

m2 *1,
2 to 9
64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *2 *3*11)
Number of sets
150 (paper length: 182mm to 364mm)
75 (paper length: other than 182mm to 364mm)
10 to 20
50
21 to 30
30
31 to 40
25
41 to 50
20
51 to 60
15
61 to 100
10
*1 1200/1200P/1051 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 C8000 only
*4 Default for North America (C8000/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only)
*5 Default for Europe
*6 Straight mode only
*7 For China/Taiwan only (C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only)
*8 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not warranty.
*9 For C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*10 ( ) when shifted
*11 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*12 () when in straight mode
(5) Maximum tray capacity of the sub tray

200 sheets (20 sheets for Z-Folding/40 sheets for center folding)
m2 *1*3, 64g/m2 to 300g/m2

*2*11,
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *4)
SRA3, A3, JISB4 *5, ISOB4 *1 *4 *6 *11, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5 *5, ISOB5 *1 *4 *6 *11, JISB5S *5, ISOB5S*4 *6 *11, A5, A5S *2
*4*11, JISB6S *2 *4 *5 *11, ISOB6S*4 *6 *11, A6S *2*4*11, 13 x 19 *2*4*11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11 *1*4*11, 81/ x 14, 81/ x 11, 81/ x
2
2
2
11S, 51/2 x 81/2*1*4, 51/2 x 81/2S *2*4*11, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K *2*4 *7 *11, 16K *2*4 *7 *11, 16KS *2*4 *7 *11,
Post card
Wide paper *1 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x
463mm)
Tab paper *8 *9 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper
1200/1200P/1051
Minimum 95mm x 139mm*10, Maximum 324mm x 463mm
C6501/C6501P/C65hc
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 487mm
C8000
C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
*1 1200/1200P/1051 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 Loading paper weight 49g/m2 or less is not warranty
*4 C8000 only
*9 C8000 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*10 95mm x 133mm when post pocessing with FS only
*11 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
C -16
12.3 Type of paper

(1) Staple
Paper size
SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5 *2*3*5*9, JISB5S*1,
ISOB5S*2*5*9, A5, 8K *4*5*6*9, 16K*4*5*6*9
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3*5*9, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*3*5, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13,
81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *7*8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Maximum
324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper
Applicable paper
Paper weight
Main tray
1200/1200P/1051
C6501/C6501P/C65hc
C8000
C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3, 64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4 *5*9
Paper curl amount
[1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curl amount: 20mm or less (50g/m2 to 90g/m2), 10mm or less (91g/m2 to 300g/m2)
[1] 5 sheets
*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*5 C8000 only
*9 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
12.4 Machine data

Power source
110VA
Weight
Approx. 80kg
Dimensions
When the main tray is pulled out:

915 (W) x 723 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
When the main tray is set in:
798 (W) x 723 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
When the main tray is removed:
544 (W) x 723 (D) x 1020 (H) mm

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -17
13. FS-531
13.1 Type
Type
Staple device
13.2 Functions
(1) Functions
Non-sort mode
Sort/group mode
Executes shifting operation for each copy and exits to the main tray
Sub tray mode
Staple mode
Exits to the main tray after being flat-stapled
(2) Staple
Maximum flat stapling sheets
64g/m2 to 80g/m2: 50 sheets (Plain, Fine, Color), 40 sheets (Coated)

81g/m2 to 105g/m2: 40 sheets (Plain), 30 sheets (Fine, Color), 25 sheets (Coated)
106g/m2 to 135g/m2: 30 sheets (Plain, Fine), 25 sheets (Color), 20 sheets (Coated)
136g/m2 to 209g/m2: 20 sheets (Plain, Fine), 15 sheets (Color)
Within the range of the above number, up to 200g/m2: 2 sheets can be inserted.
Staple position
Corner stapling
Parallel or diagonal depending on

paper size
2 staplings
Center spreading 162mm pitch
(3) Maximum tray capacity

Main tray
(Paper weight 80g/m2)
Non-sort mode,
Sort/group mode
3000 sheets (A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x
11S, 16K, 16KS)
1500 sheets (SRA3 *1, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4 *1, SRA4S, 12 x 18,
11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13, 8K)
500 sheets (A5, A5S *1, B6S *1, ISOB6S*1, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S *1)
Tab paper *2 (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 314 x 458mm, Minimum *3 182 x 148 mm)
Staple mode
Sub tray
1000 sheets
Staple sheet
Length in the sub

scan direction:
150mm to 417mm
Other than left
2 to 9
100 sets
50 sets
10 to 20
50 sets
50 sets
21 to 30
30 sets
30 sets
31 to 40
25 sets
25 sets
41 to 50
20 sets
20 sets
100 sheets (SRA3, A3, B4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, B6S, A6S, Postcard, 13 x 19, 12
x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 8 1/2S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13,
8K, 16K, 16KS)
Tab paper *2 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330 x 487 mm, Minimum 100 x 148 mm)
*1 Non-sort mode only

*3 128mm x 148mm in non-sort mode
13.3 Type of paper

(1) Staple mode
Paper size
A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper *1 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 314 x 458 mm, Minimum 182 x 148 mm)
Applicable paper
Paper weight
60g/m2 to 209g/m2
C -18
Paper curl amount
[1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curing: 10 mm or less (However, paper reverse set and curl adjustment may be applied for paper with
curl 5mm or more)
[1] 5 sheets
13.4 Machine data

Power source
80W or less
Dimensions

790.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
674.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
Weight
Approx. 60kg

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -19
14. FS-612
14.1 Type
Type
Multi-folding, multi-stapling device
14.2 Functions
(1) Function
Non-sort mode
Sort/group mode
Executes shifting operation for each copy and exits to the main tray
Sub tray mode
Staple mode
Exits to the main tray after being flat-stapled
Saddle stitching mode
After folding and stapling on the center of paper, folds the paper in the middle and exits to the booklet
tray
Half-Fold mode
Folds the paper in the middle and exits to the booklet tray
Tri-folding mode
Folds the paper twice and exits to the booklet tray
Punch mode *1
Executes punching operation and exits paper to the main tray or the sub tray
PI mode *2
Feeds the sheet
*1 When PK (option) is mounted. The combination with the non-sort mode, sort/group mode, and staple mode is available.
*2 When PI (option) is mounted. Manual stapling and manual punching are available.
(2) Staple
Maximum flat stapling sheets
Plain
Fine
Color
Coat
64g/m2 to 80g/m2
50 sheets
50 sheets
30 sheets
30 sheets
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
30 sheets
30 sheets
16 sheets
16 sheets
Within the range of the above number, up to 200g/m2: 2 sheets can be inserted.
Staple position
Parallel in front/45 degrees in back Slant:1 point Center:2 points
Maximum saddle stitching sheets
Plain
Fine
Color
Coat
64g/m2 to 80g/m2
20 sheets
20 sheets
20 sheets
20 sheets
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
20 sheets
20 sheets
16 sheets
16 sheets
Within the range of the above number, up to 200g/m2: 1 sheet can be inserted.
Staple position
Changeable (128mm to 160mm)
(3) Folding
Maximum center fold
64g/m2 to 105g/m2: 3 sheets
Maximum tri-folding
64g/m2 to 105g/m2: 1 sheet
(4) Maximum tray capacity*1

Main tray
m2)
Non-sort mode,
Sort/group mode
Staple
Mode
2,500 sheets
A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S,
16K, 16KS
1500 sheets
SRA3 *2, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2
x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K
500 sheets
A5, A5S *2, B6S *2, ISOB6S *2, 51/2 x 81/2 *2*5, 51/2 x 81/2 S *2
Tab paper *3 (A4, 81/ x 11)
2
Custom paper*4
C8000
Minimum 182 (128) mm x 148 (140) mm,
Maximum 314 mm x 458 mm
C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
Minimum 182 (128) mm x 148 mm,
Maximum 314 mm x 458 mm
Staple sheet
Length in the sub

scan direction:
418mm or more
Length in the sub

scan direction:
417mm or less
2 to 9
50 sets
100 sets
10 to 20
50 sets
50 sets
21 to 30
30 sets
30 sets
C -20
Booklet tray
m2)
Sub tray
m2)

31 to 40
25 sets
25 sets
41 to 50
20 sets
20 sets
Length in the sub scan direction: 299 mm or less: 15 sets with 5

sheets
Other than the above: 20 sets with 5 sheets
Folding mode
Length in the sub scan direction: 299 mm or less: 25 sets with 3

sheets folding
Other than the above: 33 sets with 3 sheets folding
Tri-folding mode
50 sets with 1 sheet folding
100 sheets
SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S,
A6S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 8 1/2*5,
51/2 x 8 1/2S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Postcard
Tab paper *3 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330 x 487 mm, Minimum 100 x 140 mm*5, 100 x 148 mm*6)
*1 The capacity is counted with 80g/m2 paper.

*2 Non-sort mode only
*4 ( ) When in non-sort mode
*5 C8000 only
*6 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
14.3 Type of paper

(1) Staple mode
Paper size
A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*2
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper *1 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 314 x 458 mm, Minimum 182 x 140 mm*2, Minimum 182 x 148 mm*3)
Applicable paper
Paper weight
64g/m2 to 105g/m2
Paper curl amount
[1]
15kjt1c001na
[1] 5 sheets
*2 C8000 only
*3 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
(2) Saddle stitching mode

Paper size
A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K
Applicable paper
Paper weight
64g/m2 to 105g/m2
(3) Half-Fold mode

Paper size
A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K
Applicable paper
Paper weight
64g/m2 to 105g/m2
C -21
(4) Tri-folding mode

Paper size
A4S
81/2 x 11S
16KS
Applicable paper
Paper weight
64g/m2 to 105g/m2
14.4 Machine data

Power source
80W or less
Dimensions

790.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
674.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
Weight
65kg

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -22
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 15. PK-512/513
15. PK-512/513
15.1 Type
Type
FS-integrated type punching operation device
15.2 Functions
Punching method
Stops and punches every paper
No. of holes
PK-512: 2 holes/3 holes (inch) or 2 holes/4 holes (metric)

PK-513: 4 holes
Hole diameter
6.5 mm (2 holes/4 holes),
8.0 mm (3 holes)
Hole pitch
PK-512: 80 mm (2 holes/4 holes), 108 mm (3 holes)

PK-513: 21, 70, 21 mm
Supported mode
Punch mode, straight mode
Applicable post processing mode
Sort, group, staple
15.3 Type of paper

Type of paper
PK-512 (2 holes) (A3, B4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K, 16K, 16KS)
PK-512 (3 holes/4 holes) (A3, B4, A4, B5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 8K, 16K)
PK-513 (A3, B4, A4, B5)
Applicable paper
Plain paper, high quality paper, color paper, coated paper (same as the main body)
Paper weight
60g/m2 to 128g/m2
Punch prohibited paper
Label paper, tab paper, transparency film, 2nd base paper, holed paper, and the other paper that may
interfere with the operation of the punch unit or the punch blade.
Paper curling
[1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curling (10 mm or less)

[1] 5 sheets
15.4 Machine data

Power source
24/5V DC (supply from the main body)
40 W or less
Dimensions
130 (W) x 470 (D) x 115 (H) mm
Weight
Approx. 3 kg

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -23
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 16. PI-502
16. PI-502
16.1 Type
Type
Torque limiter separation type sheet feeding device
16.2 Functions
Automatic sheet feeding
(Online operation)
Feeds the sheet to FS automatically under the instruction from the main body.
Manual sheet feeding

(Offline operation)
Feeds the sheet to FS under the instruction from the operation panel of PI.
The following 5 types can be selected for the post processing mode.
1 staple/back mode
2 staples (flat-stapling) mode
Punch mode (when PK-512/513 is installed on FS)
Tri-folding mode
Note
The tray /Lw only supports the manual sheet feeding.
16.3 Type of paper

Paper size
Tray /Up
A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5

81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 216mm x 297mm, Min. 182mm x 139mm)
Tray /Lw
A3, B4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 330mm x 483mm, Min. 182mm x 140mm)
Type of paper
Plain, Recycle, Color, Special, Coated, Fine
Paper weight
50g/m2 to 200g/m2
Capacity
Tray /Up, /Lw
200 sheets (80 g/m2) or 30 mm or less in height
Paper curl amount

[1]
15jft1c001na
[1] 5 sheets
16.4 Machine data

Power source
30W or less
Dimensions
511 (W) x 620 (D) x 220 (H) mm
Weight
Approx. 10.5kg

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -24
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 17. LS-505
17. LS-505
17.1 Type
Type
Conveyance method
Grip conveyance type horizontal stacker

Entrance conveyance
Roller conveyance method
Stacker tray conveyance
Grip conveyance method
Sub tray conveyance
Roller conveyance method
Coupling conveyance
Roller conveyance
Alignment method
Movable alignment lever (stacker tray only)
Method of stacking
Horizontal stacking
Mixed stacking is unavailable (stacker tray only)
Shifting method
Conveyance direction shift
Shift amount: 20mm (stacker tray only) *1
*1 The use of the shift is unavailable with tab paper.
17.2 Functions
(1) Function
Stacker tray non-sort mode
Exited into the stacker tray with no processing made.
Sub tray mode
Stacker tray sort mode
Executes shifting operation (20mm) and exits paper to the stacker tray *1
Coupling mode
Conveys paper to the succeeding device without any process.
*1 The use of the shift is unavailable with tab paper.

Stacker tray
5,000 sheets
SRA3, A3, JISB4 *1, ISOB4 *2 *3 *4 *6, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S
13 x 19*3 *4 *5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11 *3 *4 *6, 81/2 x 14, 81/2
x 11, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4 *5 *6 *7, 16K *4 *5 *6 *7
3,000 sheets
Coated paper (Sub-scan direction is 380mm or longer)
2,000 sheets
JISB5 *1, ISOB5 *2 *3 *4 *6, A5, 51/2 x 81/2*3 *4 *5
Sub tray
Straight paper exit: 200 sheets

Z-Folding paper: 20 sheets
Half-folding paper: 40 sheets

*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*6 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
17.3 Type of paper

Paper size
Stacker tray
SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *5 *11, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S,

JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *5 *11, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S*3 *5 *11, A5
13 x 19*4 *5 *11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *5 *11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x
11, 81/2x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*3 *5, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8
x 13, 8K*4 *5 *11, 16K*4 *5 *11
Wide paper *3(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x
18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2x 81/2W, Max.
324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *7*8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper
Max. 324mm x 463mm, Min. 210mm x 148mm *3
Max. 483mm x 210mm, Min. 148mm x 2mm *4*5*11
C -25
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 17. LS-505
Sub tray
SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *5 *11, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S,

JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *5 *11, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S *2 *3 *5 *11, A5,
A5S*4 *5 *11, JISB6S*1*4 *5 *11, ISOB6S*2 *5 *11, A6S*4 *5 *11
13 x 19*4 *5 *11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *5 *11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x
11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*3 *5, 51/2 x 81/2S*4 *5 *11, 81/2 x 13,
81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K*4 *5 *6 *11, 16K*4 *5 *6 *11,
16KS*4 *5 *6 *11
18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max.
324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *8 *9 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Postcard
Custom size paper
Max. 330mm x 487mm, Min. 100mm x 148mm *4*11
Paper weight
Stacker tray
50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3
64g/m2 to 256g/m2 *4 *5*11
Sub tray
40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3*10

64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *4 *11
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *5

*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*5 C8000 only
*7 1 to 15 tab (4 tab and 10 tab are unavailable.) The use of the shift is unavailable with tab paper.
*8 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 is A4 and 81/2 x 11 only
*11 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
17.4 Machine data

Power source
100VAC to 240VAC, 5VDC (supplied from the main body) *1
143W or less
Weight
Approx. 110kg
Dimensions
785 (W) x 723 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
*1 C8000/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000: Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -26
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 18. FD-503
18. FD-503
18.1 Type
Type
Multi-folding device with punch and PI functions
18.2 Functions
(1) Function
Normal paper exit function
Transfer paper exited from the main body is exited into the main tray/sub tray.
Punching function
Transfer paper that is exited by the main body or fed to the PI is punched for each sheet of paper and
exited into the main tray.
Folding functions
Transfer paper that is exited from the main body or fed to the PI is handled for folding (either one of the
following: Z-Fold, Letter fold-out, Letter fold-in, Double parallel fold, Gate fold, and folding) for each
sheet of paper, and exited into the sub tray/main tray (The Z-Fold exit to the main tray while in the FS
connection is limited only to B4, A3, 8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17, 12 x 18 and 8K.)
PI insertion function
PI tray paper is inserted in the transfer paper exited from the main body.
Manual mode
PI tray paper is punched, folded and stapled, and then exited into the sub tray/main tray. (The stapling
function is available only when the staple unit is connected to the downstream of the FD.)

Main tray
2500 sheets:
A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*1 *3 *5 *11, JISB5S*4, ISOB5S*3 *5 *11

9 x 11*1 *3 *11, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
16K*2 *3 *6 *11, 16KS*2 *3 *6 *11
1500 sheets:
SRA3, A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*1 *3 *5 *11, SRA4, SRA4S

13 x 19*2 *3 *11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*2*3 *6 *11
500 sheets:
A5, A5S*2*3 *11, JISB6S*2 *3 *4 *11, ISOB6S*3 *5 *11, 51/2 x

81/2*1*3, 51/2 x 81/2S*2*3 *11
Others:
Tab paper *7*8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/m2

*1,
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2 *11,
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3)
18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max.

324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper
Minimum 95mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm*1

Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 483mm*2 *11
Sub tray
(with folder tray)
Folding type:
Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, Double parallel, Gate
Paper size:
A3, B4, ISOB4*1 *3 *11, A4S, SRA4S,

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, 8K*2 *3 *6 *11
Custom size paper (Maximum 305mm x 458mm, Minimum 210mm x
279mm)
Paper weight:
Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out

50g/m2 to 130g/m2 *1,
64g/m2 to 130g/m2 *2 *3 *11
Double parallel, Gate
50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *1,
64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2 *3 *11
Tray capacity of folding paper
30 sets or more
(for all types of folding with 80g/m2 paper)*9
Sub tray
(without folder tray)
Tray capacity: 200 sheets
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/m2

*1*10,
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2 *11,
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3)
C -27
SRA3, A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*1 *3 *5 *11, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*1*3 *5*11, JISB5S*4,
ISOB5S *3 *5 *11, A5, A5S*2 *3 *11, JISB6S*2 *3 *4 *5 *11, ISOB6S *3 *11, A6S*2 *3 *11
13 x 19*2 *3*11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*1 *3*11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*1 *3,
51/2 x 81/2S*2 *3*11
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Tab paper *7 *8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2)
Wide paper *1(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Postcard
Custom size paper

Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 483mm*2 *11
*1 1200/1200P/1051 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 C8000 only
*8 C8000 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*9 Paper is stacked in the exiting sequence.
*11 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
18.3 Type of paper

(1) Punching function
Paper size
2-hole:
SRA3*1, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9, SRA4S*1, A4, A4S,

JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *4 *9, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S *2 *4 *9, A5, A5S *4
*5 *9
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *9, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2*3 *4
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*4*5 *6 *9, 16K*4*5 *6 *9, 16KS*4*5 *6 *9
Tab paper *7(A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
3-hole:
SRA3*1, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9, A4, JISB5*1 *2, ISOB5*3 *4

*9,
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *9, 81/2 x 11,
8K*4 *5 *6 *9, 16K*4 *5 *6 *9
Tab paper *7(A3, A4, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S, Max. 324mm x
463mm)
Applicable paper
Plain paper, tab paper
Paper weight
50g/m2 to 216g/m2(2 sheets overlap mode: 50g/m2 to 91g/m2)*3,

64g/m2 to 216g/m2 *4 *5 *9
(2) Folding functions

Paper size
A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9, SRA4S, A4S

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K*4*5 *6 *9
Custom size paper (Maximum 305mm x 458mm, Minimum 210mm x 279mm)
Applicable paper
Plain paper
Paper weight
Half-Fold, Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Foldout, Z-Fold
50g/m2 to 130g/m2 *3,

64g/m2 to 130g/m2*4 *5 *9
Double parallel, Gate
50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *3,

64g/m2 to 91g/m2*4 *5 *9
(3) PI functions
Paper size
SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5S*2*3*4, JISB5S*1, A5
C -28
13 x 19*4*5 *9, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3*4 *9, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2 *3 *4,
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*4*5 *6 *9, 16K*4*5 *6 *9, 16KS*4*5 *6 *9
Custom size paper *8
1200/1200P/1051
C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
C8000
Applicable paper
Plain, Recycle, Fine, Special
Paper weight
50g/m2 to 300g/m2
500 sheets (80g/m2) x 2 trays

*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*8 When using as the cover in perfect binding mode (Minimum 182mm x 279mm, Maximum 307mm x 483mm)
*9 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
18.4 Machine data

Power source
180VA or less
Dimensions
400 (W) x 723 (D) x 1231 (H)mm (The main tray is not included in the width)
Weight
Approx. 130kg
*1 C8000 /C6501 /C6501P /C65hc /C7000 /C7000P/C70hc/C6000 : Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -29
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 19. SD-506
19. SD-506
19.1 Type
Type
Saddle stitching unit with fore-edge trimming and multi-folding function
19.2 Functions
(1) Function
Sub tray paper exit mode
Exit paper to the sub tray without any process.
Coupling paper exit mode
Convey paper to the succeeding device without any process.
Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding/saddle stitching operation.
Saddle stitching trimming mode
Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding/saddle stitching/trimming operation.
Multi-center folding mode
Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding on 1 or more sheets of paper.
Multi-center folding trimming

mode
Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding and the trimming operation on 1 or more sheets
of paper.
Overlap tri-folding mode
Exit paper to the tri-folding tray after the letter folding operation on 1 or more sheets of paper.

Sub tray
200 sheets
Z-Folding
20 sheets
Center folding
40 sheets
Folding & Stapling/trimming

Mode
Stitching sheets
Set
2 to 10
50 or more
11 to 20
30 or more
21 to 40
20 or more
41 to 50
15 or more
Bundle exit tray
Tri-folding paper exit tray
Multi-center folding mode
30 sets
Overlap tri-folding mode
20 sets
19.3 Type of paper

(1) Straight/sub tray mode
Paper size
SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *10, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *4 *10,
JISB5S*1, ISOB5S*2 *4 *10, A5, A5S *4 *5 *10, B6S *4 *5 *10, ISOB56*4 *10, A6S *4 *5 *10
13 x 19 *4 *5 *10, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *10, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*3 *4,
51/2 x 81/2S*4 *5 *10
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*4 *5 *6 *10, 16K*4 *5 *6 *10, 16KS*4 *5 *6 *10
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *7 *8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x
463mm)
Postcard
Custom size paper
Minimum 95mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm *3

Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum.330mm x 483mm*5*10
Minimum 100mm x 140mm, Maximum 330mm x 487mm *4
Paper weight
40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3*9

64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *5 *10
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *4

*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*8 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*10 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
(2) Saddle stitching mode

Paper size
SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4*8, SRA4S, A4S, B5S
C -30
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S

81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4 *5 *6 *8, 16KS *4 *5 *6 *8
Wide paper *3(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Paper weight
50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3, 64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4 *5 *8
Maximum saddle stitching sheets Plain, coated
Fine
Paper weight
Sheet
Plain paper
Coated *4 *5 *8
50g/m2 to 81g/
m2
50 *7
30 *7
82g/m2 to 91g/
m2
30 *7
15 *7
92g/m2 to
130g/m2
20 *7
10 *7
131g/m2 to
161g/m2
15 *7
5 *7
162g/m2 to
209g/m2
10
210g/m2 to
244g/m2
Paper brand
55kg (64g/m2)
70kg (81.4g/m2)
KIMMARI V
50 sheets
50 sheets
RAICHO FINE
KANABISHI
OK PRINCE
NEW NPi
50 sheets
30 sheets
POD PRINCE
FINE
SHIRAOI
Staple position
Automatically adjusted according to the paper size (90mm to 165mm)
[1]
[2]
15ant1c006na
[1] = [Paper Size] /2 2mm

[2] = [Paper Size] /4 2mm
Folding height
[1]
15ant1c011na
Stitching sheets
[1] Folding height

A3
12 x 18
11 x 17
(401mm or
more)
B4
81/2 x 14
(301mm to
400mm)
A4S
81/2 x 11S
(261mm to
300mm)
B5S
(260mm or
less)
2 to 5
35mm or less
40mm or less
45mm or less
Not defined
6 to 15
45mm or less
50mm or less
Not defined
16 to 30
50mm or less
55mm or less
31 to 50
60mm or less
65mm or less
(The above information is applied when paper weight is 64g/m2 and no thick cover is not used.)
C -31
*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*7 1 sheet can be switched to thick paper (200g/m2)
*8 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
(3) Trimming mode

Paper size
SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *7, SRA4S, A4S, B5S

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4 *5 *6 *7, 16KS *4 *5 *6 *7
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4SW, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Paper weight
50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3
64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4 *5 *7
Maximum trimming sheets
50 sheets (80g/m2) or 49 sheets (80g/m2) + 1 sheet (200g/m2)

(The above is the number of the printed paper before folding. The number of fore-edge (after folding) is
double.)

*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*7 C7000/C7000 /C70hc/C6000 only
(4) Multi-center folding mode

Paper size
SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *7, SRA4S, A4S, B5S

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4*5 *6 *7, 16KS *4*5 *6 *7
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4SW, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Paper weight
50g/m2 to 244g/m2*3, 64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4*5 *7
Maximum overlap folding sheets
Paper weight
Sheet
50g/m2 to 81g/m2
5 sheets
82g/m2 to 130g/m2
3 sheets
131g/m2 to 244g/m2
2 sheets
Folding precision (for 1 sheet)

[1]
15ant1c009na
[1] = [Paper Size] /2 1.5mm
[1]
15ant1c008na
[1] = 1.5mm or less

*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
C -32
*7 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
(5) Overlap tri-folding mode

Paper size
A4S, 81/2 x 11S
Paper weight
50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *1, 64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2 *3 *4
Maximum overlap folding sheets
Paper weight
Sheet
50g/m2 to 81g/m2
5 sheets
82g/m2 to 91g/m2
3 sheets
Folding precision (for 1 sheet)
Paper size
[1]
[2]
[3]
A4S
97.5 4mm
102.0 4mm
1.5mm or less
81/2 x 11S
91.6 4mm
96.1 4mm
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15ant1c010na
*1 1200/1200P/1051 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 C8000 only
*4 C7000/C7000 /C70hc/C6000 only
19.4 Machine data

Power source
270W
Weight
280kg
Dimensions
When the bundle output tray is stored:

1,170 (W) x 775 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
When the bundle output tray is pulled out
1,170 (W) x 1,441 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
*1 C8000/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000: Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body.

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -33
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 20. PB-503
20. PB-503
20.1 Type
Type
Simplified perfect binding machine (Consoled hot-melt type)
20.2 Functions
(1) Function
Perfect binding mode
Automatically binds and stocks in a book stock section.
Sub tray mode
Exits paper to the sub tray without any process
Relay conveyance mode
Exits paper to the option (FS-521) on the subsequent stage without any process
(2) Binding sheets

Binding sheets
Binding sheets with Z-Fold

sheets*1
Min. thickness
10 sheets
Max. thickness
Plain: 300 sheets or 30mm

Color/Coated: 150 sheets or 15mm
Simplex printing
Number of Z-Fold
sheets
Number of Inserted
sheets
Binding sheets*1
Duplex printing
Simplex/duplex mixed printing

(printer function)
Max. number of
unfold sheets
Max. number of
sheets
Total
1 sheet
200 sheets
201 sheets
2 sheets
150 sheets
152 sheets
Number of Z-Fold
sheets
Number of Inserted
sheets
Max. number of
unfold sheets
Max. number of
sheets
Total
1 sheet
200 sheets
201 sheets
2 sheets
150 sheets
152 sheets
3 sheets
100 sheets
103 sheets
4 sheets
50 sheets
54 sheets
When 1 or more unfold sheets is single-sided, the specification is the

same as the simplex print.
When the z-folded sheet is single-sided, the specification is the same
as the duplex print.
*1 The limit of the total number of sheets can be released by switching DIPSW30-5 from 0 (default) to 1.

Book stock section
PB cover paper tray*3
Maximum 11 books *1 x 2 rows *2 (book thickness: 30mm)

10 sheets to 30 sheets book
50 sets
35 books or until the upper limit is detected.
Until the upper limit is detected
1000 sheets (82g/m2)

500 sheets (216g/m2)
Sub tray
200 sheets (80g/m2)
*1 The available number of books may decrease due to curls of papers.

*2 When books have been stacked up to the limit at the first row, the first stack is automatically moved to the second row on the cart, and
piling books at the first row continues.
*3 Cover paper supply is selectable from PB cover paper tray, main body tray, PI or PI-PFU (1200/1200P/1051 only).
(4) Others
Warm-up time
Approx. 20 minutes
Cover trimming
Selectable from Trim/Not trim.
20.3 Type of paper

(1) Paper size
Inside paper:
A4, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*5*9, A5, A5S*3*9, 81/2 x 11, 51/2 x

81/2*3*9, 51/2 x 81/2S*3*9, 16K*3*4*9
Custom size paper (Maximum 307 (W) x 221 (L) mm,
Minimum 139 (W) x 210 (L) mm)
Z-fold size (A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9, A4S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S,
8K*3*4*9)
C -34
Cover:
Sub tray mode
Maximum 307mm x 472mm, Minimum 139mm x 279mm

Vertical (main scan direction) Same size as the inside paper.
Horizontal (sub scan direction) Wide size L mm
L= book size in the sub scan direction x 2 + book thickness (book
spine) + 5mm (for trimming)
SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*5*9, JISB5S*1,
ISOB5S*2*3*9, A5, A5S*3*9, B6S*3*9, ISOB6S*3*9, A6S*3*9, 8K*3*4*9, 16K*3*4*9, 16KS*3*4*9
13 x 19*3*9, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2*3*5, 51/2 x 81/2S*3*9
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 460mm)
Custom size: Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3*9, 324mm x 463mm*5
Minimum 100mm x 140mm*3, 100mm x 148mm*9, 95mm x 139mm *5
*6*7
Finite tab paper
: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
Postcard
Relay conveyance mode *8
Paper which can be used by the subsequent option (FS-521)

Large size:
SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9, SRA4, SRA4S

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 13 x 19*3*9, 8K*3*4*9
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Wide paper *5 (Max. 324mm x 460mm)
Small size:
A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*5*9, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S*2*3*9,

16K*3*4*9, 16KS*3*9
9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
Minimum size:
A5, A5S*3*9, JISB6S*1*3*9, ISOB6S*2*3*9, 51/2 x 81/2*3*5, 51/2 x

81/2S*3*9
Others:
Finite tab paper *6*7: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
Custom size paper:
Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3*9, 324mm x 463mm*5
Minimum 100mm x 140mm*3, 100mm x 148mm*9, 95mm x 139mm
*5
(2) Paper weight

Sub tray mode
Inside paper:
64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2
64g/m2 to 105g/m2*1*6
Cover:
82g/m2 to 216g/m2*2
81g/m2 to 209g/m2*1*6
40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *2
64g/m2 to 350g/m2*1
64g/m2 to 300g/m2*6
Relay conveyance mode
40g/m2 to 350g/m2*2
64g/m2 to 350g/m2*1
64g/m2 to 300g/m2*6

*3 C8000 only
*5 1200/1200P/1051 only
*8 Paper can be fed only when the FS-521 is connected as the subsequent stage of the PB-503
*9 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
20.4 Machine data

Power source
100VAC 50/60Hz common

5VDC (supplied from the main body)
Power consumption
1000W or less
Weight
Approx. 270kg
C -35

Dimensions
1,360 (W) x 1,223 (H) x 775 (D) mm

Binding section
740 (W) x 1,223 (H) x 775 (D) mm
Book stock section

Relay conveyance section
620 (W) x 1,020 (H) x 753 (D) mm

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -36
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 21. IC-601
21. IC-601
21.1 Type
Type
Built-in type to the engine (option) (The installation of HD-514 and PH-101 *1 or PH-102 *2 are
necessary.)
*1 In case of C8000
*2 In case of C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
21.2 Functions
Resolution:
Print: 1200 x 1200dpi, 600 x 600dpi

Scan: 200 x 200dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 x 600dpi
Gradation:
8bit/256 Gradation, 1bit/2 Gradation
Printable Area:
Same as the main body
Number of Print:
1 to 9999
Continuous Print Speed:
A4: 71ppm (C7000/ C7000P/C70hc), 60ppm (C6000), 80ppm (C8000)

8 1/2 x 11: 70ppm (C7000/ C7000P/C70hc), 60ppm (C6000), 80ppm (C8000)
Page-description Language:
Post Script3 (3019), PDF direct print (PDF Ver.1.7), TIFF direct print (TIFF Ver.6 compliance), PPML(Ver.
2.1), PCL5c compatible, PCL XL (PCL6 Ver.3) compatible, XPS (Ver.1 compliance)
Printer Driver:
PS PPD
Windows 2000 /XP /Server2003 /Vista /Server2008 /7 *1
Linux CUPS
PS Plug-In
Windows2000 /XP /Server2003 /Vista /Server2008 /7 *1
MacOSX 10.4 /10.5 (PPC/Intel), 10.6 (Intel)
XPS
Windows Vista /Server2008 /7 *1
Printing Method:
Pserver (IPX/SPX), LPD/LPR (TCP/IP), IPP (TCP/IP), Apple Talk (Ether Talk), Bonjour(TCP/IP), Web
service printing(TCP/IP), NPrinter /RPrinter (IPX/SPX), Raw Port (TCP/IP)
Compliant Web Browser:
Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 6 or later is recommended*2 (Java Script ON)

Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (Java Script ON, cookie ON)
Netscape Navigator Ver. 7.02 or later (Java Script ON, cookie ON)
Flash Player Ver. 7.0 or later (when viewing in Flash)
*1 XP /Server2003 /Vista /Server2008 /7 includes 64bit.

*2 When using Internet Explorer Ver. 5.5, it is necessary to install Microsoft XML Parser (MSXML) 3.x.
21.3 Paper
Paper size
Applicable paper
Paper weight
21.4 Machine data

CPU
Intel Core2Duo E7400 2.8GHz
Memory
4GB (Standard)
SSD
2GB x 1 (SATA)
HDD
250GB x 2 (SATA)
Power source
100-240V, 50/60Hz
Host Interface:
Ethernet, USB
Network Interface:
RJ-45 Ethernet (1000BASE-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Network status display LED
10BASE-T
LED1: OFF
LED1: Yellow
100BASE-TX
LED1: Green
LED1: Yellow
1000BASE-T
LED1: Orange
LED1: Yellow

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity
C -37
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 21. IC-601

Note
C -38
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 22. RU-506
22. RU-506
22.1 Type
Type
Paper conveyance unit with paper overlap and reverse functions
22.2 Functions
Double sheets reverse/exit
conveyance mode *1
Reverses 2 sheets of paper exited from the main body, PI-PFU *2 or GP-501 and conveys to finishing unit.
Single sheet reverse/exit

conveyance mode
Reverses a single sheet of paper exited from the main body, PI-PFU *2 or GP-501 and conveys to
finishing unit.
Straight conveyance mode
Conveys papers exited from the main body, PI-PFU *2 or GP-501 to finishing unit without any process.
*1 1200/1200P only
*2 1200/1200P/1051 only
22.3 Paper type

Paper size
SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*4*9, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*4*9, JISB5S*1,
ISOB5S*2*3*4*9, A5, A5S *4*5*9, JISB6S *1 *4*5*9, ISOB6S*2 *4 *9, A6S *4*5*9, 13 x 19*4*5*9, 12 x 18,
11 x 17, 9 x 11*3*4*9, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2 *3*4, 51/2 x 81/2S *4*5*9, 81/2 x 13,
81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K *4*5*6*9, 16K *4*5*6*9, 16KS *4*5*6*9
Wide paper*3 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper (Max. 324mm x 463mm*3, Max. 324mm x 487mm*5, Max. 330mm x 487mm*4*9, Min.
95mm x 133mm)
Tab paper*7 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x
463mm*3, Max. 324mm x 487mm*5)
Paper type
Plain, Fine, Coat, recycled paper: same as the main body.
Paper weight
40g/ m2 to 350g/ m2 *3,64g/ m2 to 300g/ m2 *5*9

2 pages reverse/exit conveyance mode *8
40g/ m2 to 216g/ m2

*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*7 C8000 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*8 1200/1200P only
*9 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
22.4 Machine data

Power source
24/5V DC (supplied from the main body)
63VA or less
Dimensions
350 (W) x 775 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
Weight
Approx. 45 kg

Temperature
10C to 30C
Humidity

Note
C -39
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 23. GP-501
23. GP-501
23.1 Type
Type
Multi-hole punch unit for ring binding
23.2 Modes of Operation

Bypass mode
The paper moves straight from the printer to the finisher without passing through the punch module. In this
mode the paper in not punched.
Punch mode with Punch
The paper moves from printer to the punch module where it gets punched and then is routed to the
finisher.
23.3 Machine data

Punch unit size
12 (305mm) W x 40 (1016mm) H x 30.5 (775mm) D
Weight
170 lbs (80kg) unpackaged,

270 lbs (123kg) packaged (Pallet, Carton, PKG Inserts)
Color
Top Cover . Orca Black, Lower covers . Cuttle Gray
AC Power Supply to GP-501
External power cord according to market destination.
DC 5V Supply to GP-501
Supplied by system to PCB contained within GP-501
System Power Supply Lines
GP-501 Internal Lead-Through

On upstream side: Wiring with connectors through cover-recess.
On downstream side: Lock-style connector panel on left side cover.
23.4 Software
Communication method
i) Start-stop synchronization style, full duplex.

ii) 1 Start Bit, 8bit Data length, 1 Parity Bit, 1 Stop bit. Max Frame Length: 128 byte
iii) Hard flow control (CTS/RTS).
iv) Baud rate:
[Standard] 19200 bps
[ISW=Log file Transmissions] 78000 bps
Communication Content
According Interface Specification (See also Appendix B)
23.5 Electronic
Required signals to UP &
Downstream connected units
RXD, RTS, CTS, TXD
23.6 Inputs
(1) Media Input from Printer
Alignment/ skew variance at pick
up
Center justified
Line speed
290 to 1250 mm/s (Fixed speeds within this range)
Speed variance at pick up

Sheet frequency
4mm
2%
120 ppm maximum
(a) For Punching

Paper weight
20lb bond - 80lb cover

Plain Paper: 75gsm - 216gsm
Other Paper: 120gsm - 216gsm
Exception ProClick: LTR & A4 Limited to 200gsm
Paper type
See appendix C
Maximum Sheet size
Letter configuration
279 x 216mm
A4 configuration
297 x 210mm
(b) For Bypass

Paper weight
16lb bond - 93lb cover

64gsm - 350gsm
Paper type
Coated, Pre-printed, High Quality, Plain, Book, Color, Rough, Post Card, Label, OHP, Index
Transparency weight
5 -10 mil (0.127mm to 0.254mm)
Maximum bypass sheet size
13 x 24.8 (330 x 630mm)
Minimum bypass sheet size
3.74 x 5.47 (95 x 139mm)
C -40
(2) Power
Supply
GP-501 individual power supply and power cord required.
Configurations by market
See table below.
Machine
Market
Voltage (V)
US, Canada
115 +10/-15 %
Europe, Australia
220-240 +10/-15 %
Current (A)
Frequency (Hz)
60
81/2 x 11
1.8
50
A4
23.7 Outputs
Alignment/ skew at delivery
2mm or less for the pick up position
Speed variance at delivery
1% compared to speed variance at pick up
Chip tray capacity
2500 cycles (based on punched sheet count)
23.8 Performance
Punch accuracy
Hole size
2%
Alignment
0.5mm
Back gauge depth
0.3mm
(1) Reliability
MCBJ: Punch
1 in 15,000 (20lb bond)
MCBJ: Bypass
1 in 65,000 (20lb bond)
23.9 Operation Environment, Storage, Transport

Normal Operation Temperature
10 deg C 30 deg C
Normal Operation Humidity
10% - 80%
Storage Temperature
-10 deg C 40 deg C
Storage Humidity
10% - 80%
23.10 Safety /Regulatory

Noise emissions (measured to
ISO7779)
Punch
Maximum of 78dBA (punching 216gsm cover)
Bypass
Maximum of 70dBA
(1) Safety Compliance

UL & CSA standards
CAN/USA-C22.2 No. 60950-01

UL60950-1 First Edition
TUV standards
IEC 60950-1:2001
EN60950-1:2001
(2) Electromagnetic Compliance

EMC standards
EN55024:1998 Amendments A1:2001 & A2:2003

EN61000-3-2:2000
EN61000-3-3:1995 Amendment A1:2001
EN55022:1998 Amendments A1:2000 & A2:2003
EN61000-4-2, EN61000-4-4, EN61000-4-5, EN61000-4-6, EN61000-4-11
FCC standards
Class B
Part 15, Subpart B, Section A 15.107A &15.109a
C -41
Paper size
23.11 Appendix A
Figure 1.1 Front
Figure 1.2 Entrance
23.12 Appendix B
No.
Model
Die set type
# Pins
Pinshape
DS-501
Ring Binder
3Hole
Round
DS-502
Plastic Bind
Cerlox
19
Rect.
DS-503
WireBind 3:1
Square
32
Square
DS-504
WireBind 2:1
Rectangular
21
Rect.
DS-505
Color Coil
44
Round
C -42
Hole size
(WxH or D)
Paper size
8mm
(0.316")
81/2 x 11
8mm x 2.9mm
(0.313" x
0.116")
81/2 x 11
4mm x 4mm
(0.156" x
0.156")
81/2 x 11
6.4mm x 5.4mm 81/ x 11

2
(0.250" x
0.214")
4.4mm
(0.174")
81/2 x 11
Label artwork
DS-506
VeloBind
11
Round
3.2mm
(0.125")
81/2 x 11
DS-507
ProClick
32
Rect.
5mm x 5.5mm
(0.197" x
0.217")
81/2 x 11
DS-508
Ring Binder 4
Hole
Round
8mm
(0.316")
A4
DS-509
Plastic Bind
Cerlox
21
Rect.
8mm x 2.9mm
(0.313" x
0.116")
A4
10
DS-510
WireBind 3:1
Round
34
Round
4.4mm
(0.174")
A4
11
DS-511
WireBind 2:1
Round
23
Round
6.38mm
(0.251")
A4
12
DS-512
Color Coil
47
Round
4.4mm
(0.174")
A4
13
DS-513
VeloBind
12
Round
3.2mm
(0.125")
A4
14
DS-514
ProClick
34
Rect.
5mm x 5.5mm
(0.197" x
0.217")
A4
15
DS-515
Ring Binder 2
Hole
Round
8mm
(0.316")
A4
16
DS-516
Plastic Bind
Cerlox
20
Rect.
8mm x 2.9mm
(0.313" x
0.116")
A4
17
DS-517
WireBind 2:1
Rectangular
(Australia)
23
Rect.
6.4mm x 5.4mm A4
(0.250" x
0.214")
18
DS-518
WireBind 3:1
Square
(Australia)
34
Square
4mm x 4mm
(0.156" x
0.156")
A4
23.13 Appendix C
Paper Type for Punching
Destination
(1) US
Paper Name
Weight (g/m2)
120
Q-Zone
Hammermill Tidal MP
75
All
Hammermill Fore MP
75
All
Color Copy (Mondi) *1
120
Q-Zone
Wausau Exact Gloss Coated

(C1S) *1
215
Q-Zone
Hammermill Color Copy Cover *1
(2) EU
Punch *2
Hammermill Color Copy Paper Photo White
163
Q-Zone
216
Q-Zone
Color Copy (Mondi) *1
160
Q-Zone
Konica Minolta Original
80
All
Konica Minolta Profi
80
All
Mondi BIO TOP 3 extra
80
All
Mondi Color Copy
200
Q-Zone
*1 For only C6501/C6501P/C65hc

*2 Q-Zone: Guaranteed only in Q-zone
All: Guaranteed in all environments
*Refer to the below graph
C -43
Humidity (%RH)
80
70
60
B
40
30
20
10
10
18 20
23
30
Temperature (C)
23.14 Glossary of Terms

These terms are common to the punch and bindery industry.
Cerlox
The trade name GBC uses for its Plastic Binding
Color coil
A plastic coil that looks like a spring which is threaded through round holes punched in the document then
the ends are cut off and crimped. The holes are either 4:1 or 5:1 (4 holes per inch or 5 holes per inch).
This type of bind lays flat and even folds around for easy handling of the document.
Flush-cut covers
Covers stock that is the same size as the paper contents and has round corners.
Plastic binding
The name used to describe GBC's most common binding method.

The 19 and 21 rectangular hole, Plastic Comb type.
ProClick
A plastic element that snaps together. This style requires holes that appear to be the same as Twin Loop
but are actually slightly larger.
The larger holes enable correct operation of the ProClick Pronto finishing devise.
Tabbing (hanging chad)
Tabbing or hanging chad is when a hole is not punched cleanly through the material leaving a piece of
paper hanging from the edge.
This condition occurs when a die set is worn and will usually result in miss-feeds.
Twin loop
Looped wire element that is feed into square or round holes in the document in a similar fashion to Plastic
Binding. The holes are either 2:1 or 3:1 (2 holes per inch or 3 holes per inch). It is then squeezed together
or crimped to create an attractive bind that lays flat.
Velobind
A heat seal plastic bind that is best known for it's security and it's attractive look. The one draw-back for
VeloBind is that it is not a layflat bind style. It is most often used in the Legal market for it's security
feature.
C -44
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
D OVERALL COMPOSITION
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.1 System configuration
[26]
[27]
[30]
[2]
[29]
[31]
[13]
[25]
[3]
[28]
[14]
[4]
[32]
[24]
[1]
[23]
[5]
[22]
[15]
[6]
[12]
[18]
[11]
[17]
[7]
[10]
[8]
[16]
[21]
[18]
[9]
[20]
[17]
[19]
[1]
Main body
[2]
Dehumidifier heater (HT-503)
[3]
Large capacity paper feed unit (LU-202)
[4]
Large capacity paper feed unit (PF-602)*4
[5]
Dehumidifier heater (HT-504/505)
[6]
Multi bypass paper feed unit (MB-504)
[7]
Preview kit (PH-102)*2 *3
[8]
Hard disk (HD-514)*2 *3
[9]
Image controller (IC-306)
[10]
Image controller (IC-307)
[11]
Image controller (IC-601) *3
[12]
Image controller (IC-413)*6
[13]
Output tray (OT-502)
[14]
Relay conveyance unit (RU-509)
[15]
Humidification unit (HM-102)
[16]
Finisher (Flat staple 50-sheet type) (FS-531)
[17]
Punch kit (PK-512/513)
[18]
Post inserter (PI-502)
[19]
Finisher (Saddle stitch type) (FS-612)
[20]
Perfect binder (PB-503)
[21]
Saddle stitch unit (SD-506)
[22]
Large capacity stacker handcart (LC-501)
[23]
Large capacity stacker (LS-505)
[24]
Folding unit (FD-503)
[25]
Finisher (Flat staple 100-sheet type) (FS-521)
[26]
Relay unit (RU-506)
[27]
Multi-hole punch unit (GP-501)
[28]
Die set (DS-***)*5
[29]
Original cover (OC-506) *1
[30]
Reverse automatic document feeder (DF-622) *1
[31]
Authentication unit (AU-201), Key counter
[32]
Working table (WT-508)*4
*1 Select one of OC-506 or DF-622. However, it is not for C7000P/70hc since they dont have a scanner and DF function.
*2 PH-102 and HD-514 can be used by mounting as a set.
*3 PH-102 and HD-514 have to be mounted for connecting IC-601.
*4 WT-508 can not be installed when connecting PF-602.
*5 Selectable arbitrarily in accordance with the number and shape of pins.
*6 It is not for C70hc.
Model
Paper size
The number of pins
D -1
Shape of pin
DS-501
81/2 x 11
Round
DS-502
81/2 x 11
19
Rectangle
DS-503
81/2 x 11
32
Square
DS-504
81/2 x 11
21
Rectangle
DS-505
81/2 x 11
44
Round
DS-506
81/2 x 11
11
Round
DS-507
81/2 x 11
32
Rectangle
DS-508
A4
Round
DS-509
A4
21
Rectangle
DS-510
A4
34
Round
DS-511
A4
23
Round
DS-512
A4
47
Round
DS-513
A4
12
Round
DS-514
A4
34
Rectangle
DS-515
A4
Round
DS-516
A4
20
Rectangle
DS-517
A4
23
Square
DS-518
A4
34
Square
1.2 Configuration for optional device

Note
The combination except as mentioned in the following is prohibited.
IC-306/307/413/601 are available with all combinations.
The options can be connected each other. However, be sure to take note of the AC connection mode.
When using the C7000P/C70hc, the installation of the image controller (IC-XXX) is required.
1.2.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option
Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option
AC power to be connected to
MB-504
Main body
LU-202*1
Main body
PF-602*2
Main body
Main body
LU-202*1
MB-504
*1 HT-503 can be connected arbitrarily to LU-202.

*2 HT-504/505 can be connected arbitrarily to PF-602.
1.2.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option
Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option
AC power to be connected
to
Main body
RU-509*1
FD-503
Main body
RU-509*1
FD-503
LS-505
External (RU-509/FD-503/
LS-505)
Main body
RU-509*1
FD-503
SD-506
SD-506)
Main body
RU-509*1
FD-503
FS-521
External (PF-509/FD-503)
Main body
RU-509*1
FD-503
PB-503
PB-503)
Main body
RU-509*1
FD-503
LS-505
SD-506
LS-505/SD-506)
Main body
RU-509*1
FD-503
LS-505
FS-521
LS-505)
Main body
RU-509*1
FD-503
LS-505
PB-503
LS-505/PB-503)
Main body
RU-509*1
FD-503
SD-506
FS-521
SD-506)
10
Main body
RU-509*1
FD-503
SD-506
PB-503
SD-506/PB-503)
11
Main body
RU-509*1
PB-503
FS-521
SD-506/PB-503)
FD-503
SD-506
D -2
External (PF-509/FD-503)
12
Main body
RU-509*1
FD-503
PB-503
FS-521
PB-503)
13
Main body
RU-509*1
FD-503
LS-505
LS-505
LS-505)
14
Main body
RU-509*1
15
Main body
RU-509*1
LS-505
SD-506
External (RU-509/LS-505/
SD-506)
16
Main body
RU-509*1
LS-505
FS-521
External (RU-509/LS-505)
17
Main body
RU-509*1
LS-505
PB-503
PB-503)
18
Main body
RU-509*1
LS-505
SD-506
FS-521
SD-506)
19
Main body
RU-509*1
LS-505
SD-506
PB-503
SD-506/PB-503)
20
Main body
RU-509*1
LS-505
PB-503
FS-521
PB-503)
21
Main body
RU-509*1
LS-505
22
Main body
RU-509*1
LS-505
LS-505
SD-506
SD-506)
23
Main body
RU-509*1
LS-505
LS-505
FS-521
24
Main body
RU-509*1
LS-505
LS-505
PB-503
PB-503)
25
Main body
RU-509*1
26
Main body
RU-509*1
SD-506
FS-521
External (RU-509/SD-506)
27
Main body
RU-509*1
SD-506
PB-503
External (RU-509/SD-506/
PB-503)
28
Main body
RU-509*1
SD-506
29
Main body
RU-509*1
FS-521
External (RU-509)
30
Main body
RU-509*1
PB-503
External (RU-509/PB-503)
31
Main body
RU-509*1
32
Main body
RU-509*1
33
Main body
RU-509*1
GP-501
RU-506
FD-503
FS-521
GP-501)
34
Main body
RU-509*1
GP-501
RU-506
LS-505
FS-521
GP-501)
35
Main body
RU-509*1
GP-501
RU-506
SD-506
FS-521
GP-501)
36
Main body
RU-509*1
GP-501
RU-506
PB-503
FS-521
External (RU-509/PB-503/
GP-501)
37
Main body
RU-509*1
GP-501
RU-506
LS-505
PB-503
PB-503/GP-501)
38
Main body
39
Main body
RU-509*1 *3
FS-531*2 *3
External (RU-509)
40
Main body
RU-509*1 *3
FS-612*2 *3
External (RU-509)
LS-505
LS-505
SD-506
External (RU-509/SD-506)
PB-503
PB-503
FS-521
FS-521
GP-501
RU-506
*1 HM-102 can be connected arbitrarily to RU-509.

*2 PK-512/513 and PI-502 can be connected arbitrarily to FS-531/612.
*3 It is selectable to connect FS-531/612 to the main body directly or via RU-509.
D -3
External (RU-509/PB-503)
FS-521
OT-502
PB-503)
External (RU-509/GP-501)
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 2. MAIN BODY UNIT

CONFIGURATION
2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION

[17]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[10]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[1]
Scanner section
[2]
Toner supply section
[3]
Write section
[4]
Developing section
[5]
Vertical conveyance section
[6]
Toner collection section
[7]
Charging section
[8]
Registration section
[9]
Paper feed section
[10]
Duplex section
[11]
Reverse/exit section
[12]
OT-502 (option)
[13]
Fusing section
[14]
Intermediate transfer section
[15]
DF-622 (option)
[16]
Photo conductor section
[17]
Operation panel section
D -4
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 3. PAPER PATH
3. PAPER PATH
[12]
[13]
[11]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[1]
Paper feed (common)
[2]
Bypass tray paper feed
[3]
PF paper feed, LU paper feed
[4]
Vertical conveyance
[5]
Tray 3 paper feed
[6]
Tray 2 paper feed
[7]
Tray 1 paper feed
[8]
ADU conveyance
[9]
Reversing conveyance
[10]
Reversing exit
[11]
Paper exit (common)
[12]
Straight paper exit
[13]
Transfer/fusing conveyance
D -5
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM

CCD
HDD
SCIPB MCB/H
HDD
USB Serial
I/F I/F
MCB/P MCB/H
OB
MCB
NRB
RBU
LAN
I/F
HDD
OACB
FM
IC
PRIPB
Write
Section
DCPS
FS
FS
FD
LS
SD
PB
PF
LU
DF
RU
HV
M FM MC SD PS
PRCB
ACDB
Fusing
Unit
CDB
M FM MC SD PS
[6]
[5]
[4]
MB
[3]
SCDB
TSDB
M FM PS
M FM MC PS
[2]
[1]
[1]
SATA
[2]
Individual signal line
[3]
Other bus
[4]
UART bus
[5]
Clock-synchronized serial bus
[6]
Image bus
Board name
Purpose of board
ISW target
Overall control board (OACB)
Overall condition control
Target
Memory control board /1 (MCB1)
Image memory (DRAM+HDD option) control
Non-target
Printer image processing board (PRIPB)
Image processing control for writing
Non-target
Printer control board (PRCB)
Load control of such as motor, fan, clutch, solenoid and sensor
Target
Scanner image processing board (SCIPB)
Scanner image processing board
Non-target
Memory control board /H (MCB/H)
I/F control of HDD option (option)
Non-target
Memory control board /P (MCB/P)
Image memory for thumbnail (DRAM+HDD option) control (option)
Non-target
D -6
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS
5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS

5.1 Image creation flow and functions
Step
Process
Functions
Step 1
Charging process
Forms a charge layer on the photo conductor drum.
Step 2
Laser exposure process
Forms an electrostatic latent image on the photo

conductor drum.
Step 3
Developing process
Makes the electrostatic latent image to the visible image.
Step 4
Intermediatetransfer process
Forms an image by compositing the monochromatic

(YMCK) visible image on each photo conductor drum on
the transfer belt.
Step 5
2nd transfer process
Transfers the image on the transfer belt to paper.
Step 6
Separation process
Separates paper after the toner transfer from the

transfer belt.
Sub step 1
Drum cleaning
Removes the toner on the photo conductor drum

afterthe intermediatetransfer.
Sub step 2
Exposure before charging
Removes the potential remains on the photo conductor

drum after the drum cleaning.
Sub step 3
Transfer belt cleaning
Removes the toner on the intermediate transfer belt

after the 2nd transfer.
Sub step 4
2nd transfer roller /Lw cleaning
Removes the toner on the 2nd transfer roller /Lw after

the 2nd transfer.
Sub step 5
Toner collection
Collect the toner removed by drum cleaning and transfer

belt cleaning. (Not displayed in the following picture.)
[1]
[11]
Step 3
[2]
Sub step 3
[12]
[4] [3]
Step 2
Step 4
Step 1
Sub step 1
[10]
Sub step 2
[9]
[8]
Step 6
[5]
[6]
[7]
Step 5 / Sub step 4
a03ut2c002ca
[1]
Developing unit
[2]
Writing unit
[3]
Charging corona
[4]
Erase lamp (EL)
[5]
Paper
[6]
2nd transfer roller /Lw
[7]
Discharge section
[8]
2nd transfer roller /Up
[9]
Transfer belt
[10]
Blade (drum cleaning)
[11]
Blade (Transfer belt cleaning)
[12]
Drum
5.2 Charging process (Step 1)

Applies the high DC voltage (negative) to the charging corona with gold coated tungsten wire, and charges the negative charge to the drum by
discharging of wire. The charging corona has the charger control plate, and it makes the charge on the surface of the drum even. The
photoconductor is prepared for 4 colors (YMCK).
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a03ut2c003ca
[1]
Drum
[2]
Charge (negative)
[3]
Charging corona
[4]
Charger control plate
D -7
5.3 Laser exposure process (Step2)

The charge on the photo conductor drum has a characteristic that it is neutralized and disappears when the light is exposed. With this
characteristic, creates an image on the photo conductor drum by exposing the laser beam to the image area. This image is called an
electrostatic latent image. The laser beam which is exposed to each of YMCK drum corresponds to the color data disassembled into 4 at the
image processing section.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
a03ut2c004ca
[1]
Writing unit
[2]
Laser beam
[3]
Neutralized section
[4]
Charge (negative)
5.4 Developing process (Step 3)

The non-image points of the electrostatic latent image on the drum is charged negatively while the image points are neutralized. As the toner is
negatively charged, it is attracted to the image points on the drum and as a result, a visible toner image is created on the drum. This operation is
referred to as "development."
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
a03ut2c005ca
[1]
Drum
[2]
Charge (negative)
[3]
Toner (negative)
[4]
Developing roller
5.5 Intermediate transfer process (Step 4)

The toner on each of the Y, M, C and K photoconductor drums are transferred to the intermediate transfer belt and composed on it. This toner
transfer from the drums to the intermediate belt is referred to as "intermediate transfer" and it is performed in order of Y, M, C, K.
At intermediate transfer, a positive high DC voltage bias is applied to the 1st transfer roller provided on the back surface of the intermediate
transfer belt. This makes the intermediate transfer belt surface have a positive potential higher than that of the each drum surface so that the
toner on the drums are attracted to the transfer belt.
D -8

[3]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
a03ut2c006ca
[1]
Drum /Y
[2]
1st transfer roller /Y
[3]
Intermediate transfer belt
[4]
Toner /Y
[5]
Charge (negative)
[6]
Drum /M
[7]
1st transfer roller /M
[8]
Toner /M
5.6 2nd transfer process (Step 5)

The operation to transfer the image composed of four colors on the transfer belt to the paper is referred to as 2nd transfer. At 2nd transfer, the
2nd transfer roller /Lw which is mounted on the bottom part of the transfer belt conveys the paper while pressing it against the transfer belt. At
this time, the 2nd transfer roller /Up on the back side of the transfer belt is applied a DC bias (negative) at high voltage, and the electric field is
produced between the 2nd transfer roller /Up and the 2nd transfer roller /Lw mounted inside the 2nd transfer belt. It moves the toner on the
transfer belt onto the paper.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
a03ut2c007ca
[1]
Transfer belt
[2]
Paper
[3]
[4]
5.7 Separation process (Step 6)

At 2nd transfer, the paper on which is being transfered is negatively charged by the 2nd transfer roller /Up. It causes the paper and the
intermediate transfer belt to attract each other and the paper sticks to the intermediate transfer belt. The operation to separate that sticked paper
is referred to as "separation."
Sepatration is performed by applying the AC and DC biases at high voltage to the discharge section. This operation neutralizes the charges of
the paper and the inetemediate transfer belt.
D -9
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a03ut2c008ca
[1]
Transfer belt
[2]
Paper
[3]
[4]
Discharge section
5.8 Drum cleaning (Sub step 1)

After the intermediate transfer, a small amount of toner remains on the drum. The process to remove that toner is referred to as "drum cleaning."
Drum cleaning is conducted by scraping the toner adhering to the drum with the edge of the urethane rubber plate which is called blade.
[1]
[3]
[2]
a03ut2c009ca
[1]
Drum
[2]
[3]
Remaining toner
Cleaning blade
5.9 Exposure before charging (Sub step 2)

After completion of drum cleaning, no toner remains but a subtle potential remains on the drum surface. With this condition, the charging for the
next print is not performed normally. Therefore, the exposure which is different from the laser exposure is perfomed to neutralize the potential on
the drum surface completely. This process is reffered to as "exposure before charging."
This machine uses the erase lamp (EL) for this process.
[1]
[3]
[2]
a03ut2c010ca
[1]
Drum
[2]
[3]
Remained electric charge
Erase lamp (EL)
5.10 Transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 3)

After the 2nd transfer, a small amount of toner remains on the transfer belt. The process to remove that toner is referred to as transfer belt
cleaning.
Transfer belt cleaning is conducted by scraping the toner adhering to the intermediate transfer belt with the edge of the urethane rubber plate
which is called blade.
D -10

[3]

[1]
[2]
a03ut2c011ca
[1]
Transfer belt
[2]
[3]
Cleaning blade
Remaining toner
5.11 2nd transfer roller /Lw cleaning (Sub step 4)

The 2nd transfer roller /Lw gets dirty because the toner on the transfer belt contacts it directly.
For this reason, high voltage positive and negative DC biases are applied to the 2nd transfer roller /Up one after the other to move the toner on
the 2nd transfer roller /Lw to the transfer belt side. The toner which is moved to the transfer belt is cleaned by the transfer belt cleaning
described on the preceding paragraph.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
a03ut2c012ca
[1]
Transfer belt
[2]
[3]
[4]
When DC bias (positive) is applied
[5]
When DC bias (negative) is applied
5.12 Toner collection (Sub step 5)

The toner removed at the drum cleaning section and the transfer belt cleaning section is collected to the toner collection box via the toner
collection screw.
[3]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
a03ut2c013ca
D -11
[1]
Toner collection box
[2]
Transfer belt toner collection port
[3]
Drum /Y toner collection port
[4]
Drum /M toner collection port
[5]
Drum /C toner collection port
[6]
Drum /K toner collection port
D -12
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL
6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL

The image creation is conducted in the order of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black, but the start of the image creation control is when the
drum motor /K (M17) turns ON [1].
After M17 turns ON, the drum motor /Y (M14) [2], /M (M15) [3], /C (M16) [4] turns ON in this order.
The timing to turn ON the erase lamp, charging corona, and developing bias (DC) of each color is when each motor turns ON.
The timing [5] to turn ON the developing motor depends on the time difference with the writing start timing [6] and has been registered in
advance.
The timing to turn ON [6]/OFF [8] the writing operation is based on the ON/OFF timing of the developing bias (AC) and the 1st transfer.
The timing to turn OFF [11] the last writing operation is based on the OFF timing of the developing motor and the toner supply motor.
The timing to turn OFF [12] the last 1st transfer is based on the OFF timing of the charging corona.
When the charging corona turns OFF [15], the developing bias (DC), eraser lamp, and drum motor turn OFF based on this and the image
creation process of yellow to the drum completed.
According to the image creation process of yellow, each image creation of magenta, cyan, and black to the drum is performed.
Along with the image creation to each drum, the 1st transfer pressure release motor (M19) and the 2nd transfer pressure release motor
(M34) turns ON.
When M19 presses the transfer belt to the full color position, the base signal for the 2nd transfer V_TOP is output [7].
By the transfer belt being pressed, the intermediate transfer from each drum to the transfer belt is performed in the order.
The separation (HV2) turns ON [9] after a specified time since the base signal V_TOP turns ON.
After another specified time, the 2nd transfer (HV2) turns ON [10] and the 2nd transfer from the transfer belt to the paper is performed. At
this point, the bias turns OFF [10] and the 2nd transfer cleaning is ended forcibly.
The 2nd transfer ends after a specified time since the last developing bias /K (AC) turns OFF [13].
Once M19 starts releasing the transfer belt [14], the bias turns ON [16] after a specified time to perform the 2nd transfer cleaning.
[1][2] [3] [4]
[5] [6]
[8]
[7]
[9]
[11] [12]
[15]
Drum motor/Y (M14)

Developing motor/Y (M20)
Toner supply motor/Y (M49)
Erase lamp/Y (EL/Y)
Charging corona/Y (HV1)
Writing unit/Y
Developing bias/Y (DC)(HV1)
Developing bias/Y (AC) (HV1)
1st transfer/Y (HV2)
Drum motor/M (M15)
Developing motor/M (M21)
Toner supply motor/M (M50)
Erase lamp/M (EL/M)
Charging corona/M (HV1)
Writing unit/M
Developing bias/M (DC) (HV1)
Developing bias/M (AC) (HV1)
1st transfer/M (HV2)
Drum motor/C (M16)
Developing motor/C (M22)
Toner supply motor/C (M51)
Erase lamp/C (EL/C)
Charging corona/C (HV1)
Writing unit/C
Developing bias/C (DC) (HV1)
Developing bias/C (AC) (HV1)
1st transfer/C (HV2)
Drum motor/K (M17)
Developing motor/K (M23)
Toner supply motor/K (M52)
Erase lamp/K (EL/K)
Charging corona/K (HV1)
Writing unit/K
Developing bias/K (DC) (HV1)
Developing bias/K (AC) (HV1)
1st transfer/K (HV/2)
Belt motor (M18)
1st transfer pressure release motor (M19)

2nd transfer pressure release motor (M34)
2nd transfer CONT
Bias (HV2)
2nd transfer (HV2)
Separation (HV2)
[10]
[13]
[14]
[16]
[1]
M17 ON
[2]
M14 ON
[3]
M15 ON
[4]
M16 ON
[5]
M20 ON
[6]
Writing started (1st sheet)
[7]
V_TOP signal created
[8]
Writing ended (1st sheet)
[9]
Separation ON
[10]
2nd transfer started
[11]
Writing ended (last)
[12]
1st transfer /Y ended (last)
[13]
Developing bias /K (AC) OFF (last)
[14]
Transfer belt release operation started
D -13

[15]
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL
Charging corona /Y OFF
[16]
D -14
2nd transfer cleaning started
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 7. PROCESS SPEED
7. PROCESS SPEED
7.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc
Corresponding to the combination of the number of the stacked sheets and the coating of the output image, this machine has 5 types of the
process speed.
Each of the high speed and middle speed has 2 types of process speed. The types are switched automatically depending on the environment
temperature.
Plain No gloss
Environment temperature
Paper weight
64g/m2 to 105g/m2
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
136g/m2 to 209g/m2
Plain Glossed
17 C or more
Less than 17 C
17 C or more
Less than 17 C
315mm/s (High1)
300mm/s (High2)
225mm/s (Middle1)
208mm/s (Middle2)
300mm/s (High2), 225mm/s (Middle1), or 208mm/s

(Middle2)
* Set by user speed setting
225mm/s (Middle1)
210g/m2 to 300g/m2
208mm/s (Middle2)
150mm/s (Low)
Coated No gloss
Environment temperature
Paper weight
17 C or more
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
136g/m2 to 209g/m2
Coated Glossed
Less than 17 C
64g/m2 to 80g/m2
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
150mm/s (Low)
17 C or more
Less than 17 C
315mm/s (High1)
300mm/s (High2)
300mm/s (High2), 225mm/s (Middle1), or 208mm/s

(Middle2)
225mm/s (Middle1)
210g/m2 to 300g/m2
225mm/s (Middle1)
208mm/s (Middle2)
150mm/s (Low)
208mm/s (Middle2)
150mm/s (Low)
7.2 bizhub PRESS C6000

Corresponding to the combination of the number of the stacked sheets and the coating of the output image, this machine has 3 types of the
process speed.
Plain No gloss
Plain Glossed
64g/m2 to 105g/m2
Paper weight
300mm/s (High2)
208mm/s (Middle2)
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
300mm/s (High2) or 208mm/s (Middle2)

150mm/s (Low)
136g/m2 to 209g/m2
208mm/s (Middle2)
210g/m2 to 300g/m2
150mm/s (Low)
Paper weight
Coated No gloss
Coated Glossed
64g/m2 to 80g/m2
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
300mm/s (High2)
208mm/s (Middle2)
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
300mm/s (High2) or 208mm/s (Middle2)

150mm/s (Low)
136g/m2 to 209g/m2
208mm/s (Middle2)
210g/m2 to 300g/m2
150mm/s (Low)
D -15
E SERVICE TOOL > 1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
E SERVICE TOOL
1.1 Service material list
1.1.1 Service material list
Parts Number
000V-16-0
Name
Shape
Remark
200ml
Isopropyl alcohol
Drum cleaner
50gaf2c142na
000V-17-0
Roller cleaner
200ml
Acetone
50gaf2c142na
000V-19-0
Setting powder
25g
50gaf2c143na
000V-18-1
10pcs/1 pack
Cleaning pad
50gaf2c144na
65AA-9920
Hydro-wipe
10pcs/1 pack
8050fs3005
00GR00260
Multemp FF-RM
25g
50gaf2c145na
00GR00020
25g
Plas guard No.2
50gaf2c145na
00GR00220
25g
Molykote EM-30L
50gaf2c145na
A0N9PP67##
Magnalube-G Teflon Grease
0.75 oz
1.2 Jig list

1.2.1 Jig list
Parts Number
A03UPJG2##
Name
Shape
Remark
Quantity: 1
Thermostat jig /UF

a03uf2c135na
A03UPJG3##
Quantity: 1
Thermostat jig /L
a03uf2c159na
A03UPJG1##
Thermostat jig /UC
Quantity: 1
a03uf2c160na
7050K0020
Optics unit positioning jig
Quantity: 2
8050fs3011
00M6-2-00
Door switch jig
Quantity: 1
8050fs3012
E -1

Parts Number
9J06PJP1##
Name
Shape
Remark
Quantity: 1
Color chart (A3)

8050fs3005
9J06PJP2##
Color chart (11 x 17)
Quantity: 1
8050fs3005
4040PJP1##
Test chart (A3)
Quantity: 1
Black and white
8050fs3005
4040PJP2##
Test chart (11 x 17)
Quantity: 1
Black and white
8050fs3005
120A9711#
Adjustment chart
Quantity: 1
For DF
8050fs3005
65AA-991#
Quantity: 1
For multi feed detection
Fusing adjustment paper (16 sheets/A3)

8050fs3005
00VC-2-00
Drum cover
Quantity: 4
8050fs3017
00VD-1000
Quantity: 1
Blower brush
8050fs3018
56UAPJG0##
Quantity: 1
Multimeter
8050fs3019
13QEJG010
Stapler positioning jig
Quantity: 1
For FS-612
8050fs3022
A1DURX01##
Developer ejection jig
Quantity: 1
Management Tool
Quantity: 1
Application for ORU-M Use for
managing the counter information
of the unit.
A0H2RX00##
Trimmer unit support board
Quantity: 1
For SD
1.3 Mail remote notification system

1.3.1 Outline
"Mail remote notification system" is a system that allows you to obtain a list print which can be output by the main body using the Internet mail
(E-mail).
E -2
Using this system dispenses not only with printing the list on paper but also visiting the users. Send an E-mail with a simple keyword to the main
body to receive the list prints from the main body by E-mail.
1.3.2 Operating environment

In order to use the functions of "Mail remote notification system", the following conditions must be met. The operation of the functions is
available while in jams, SC, and a low power mode. Under the condition that the main body is not operating, an E-mail sent to the main body
does not get lost but is handled when the main body is activated again.
1. The main body has a server that can receive an E-mail using POP3 or IMAP protocol.
2. The copier has a mail server that can send an E-mail using SMTP protocol.
3. In the following 4 cases, "Mail remote notification system" does not operate in the main body.
When the main power switch (SW1) is OFF
When the sub power switch (SW2) is ON
The copier is in the auto shut-off mode.
When the "Enhance Security Mode" is set to ON (the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.)
1.3.3 Major functions

Sending a mail with a simple keyword allows you to use the following functions.
1. The list print information of the main body you want to obtain can be received by E-mail.
List prints that can be obtained are the following 11 lists.
Mode Memory List
User Management List
Font Pattern List
Machine Management List
Adjustment Data List
Use Management List
Counter List
Coverage Data List
Parameter List
Communication Log List
Audit Log Report
2. The counter list can be checked by cell phone.
3. A password used for certification of mail can be changed.
4. Directions for use of "Mail remote notification system" can be received by e-mail.
To use the preceding functions, send a mail with a simple keyword (command).
For details of the command, refer to "E.1.3.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system."
1.3.4 Initial setting

To use "Mail remote notification system", register the network parameter on the main body and the account on the mail server.
(1) Setting from the operation panel

Set the IP address of the copier from the operation panel to connect the copier to the network. When this setting has been already made,
proceed to "E.1.3.4.(2) Setting from the Web browser."
(a) Procedure
1. Press [Utility/Counter] on the operation panel.
2. Press [03 Machine Manager Setting].
3. Press [05 Network Setting].
4. Press [01 Machine NIC Setting].
5. Enter "IP Address," "Subnet Mask," and "Gateway Address."
6. Restart the main body.
Note
The system administrator normally assigns the IP address of the copier. For details, contact the system administrator.
(2) Setting from the Web browser

Enter the setting of the mail server from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, make preparations of a PC that can be connected to the
network.
Note
No space is available in all items to be set. The following characters cannot be used for setting an E-mail address.
()<>;:[]
When an improper entry or setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to make corrections following the error massage. When
not correcting the error, program download error occurs.
(a) Procedure
1. Start up the Web browser.
When the proxy is set on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web.
For particulars, contact the network administrator. Be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
2. Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "(1) Setting from the operation panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the copier main body, "Main page" is displayed.
E -3
3. "Main page screen"

Click [Extension for maintenance].
4. Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK."
User name: ce (small letter, cannot be changed)
Password: CE Enter the password. (Default:"9279272")
5. "Extension for maintenance screen"

Click [E-mail Initial Setting].
6. "E-mail Initial Setting screen"
E -4
Setting item
Details
Enable E-mail notification
When using the mail remote notification system, select "ON." Default is "OFF."
Time difference
The time at which a mail was sent out is calculated based on this value. For time difference setting,
enter the difference from the standard time UTC in the range from -1200 (- 12 hour 00 minute) to
+1200 (-12 hour 00 minute). When no value is entered, +0000 (UTC) is set. (Example: In the case
of Japan, enter + 900.)
Sending mail
(SMTP) server
Set the Host Name or IP address of the SMTP server.

When using SSL, check in the "Enable SSL."
SMTP port number
Set the port Number of the SMTP server. For default, 25 is set.
Sending mail (SMTP) server

time out
Set the time-out of the SMTP connection. Default is for 5 minutes.
Interval between fetching mails
The interval of the main body checking the receiving mail server to see if a mail is newly received.
(An interval can be specified in the range from 1 minute to 60 minutes.) Taking into consideration
the load on the network, this is set at the interval of 10 minutes.
Receiving mail server
Set the Host Name or IP address of the receiving mail server.

When using SSL, check in the "Enable SSL."
Kind of mail spool
Select either of POP3 and IMAP. For default, [POP3] is selected.
POP3 (IMAP)
port number
Select "Enable default" when using 110 for POP3, and 143 for IMAP. When using other than the
default, select "Custom" and enter a port number to use.
User name on the server
Enter an account name assigned to the main body by the receiving mail server.
Password
Enter a password to the account name above.
E-mail Address for Machine

Address
Enter the mail address of the main body its own. The address is normally "mail account
name@incoming mail server name."
Nickname
Enter a nickname that is added to the title (subject) of a mail sent from the main body. No entry
causes no problem.
CE password
Enter a password that is added to the title (subject) of a mail sent to the main body. The main body
uses this password for security check.
Also Notice to the administrator
Not transfer: Default

only illegal mail: When a mail received by the main body does not match with the password
above, or when the mail size is in excess of a fixed size (10k bytes), transfer the mail.
all mails: Transfer all mails that use "Mail remote notification system."
Administrator E-mail address
When "only illegal mail" or "all mails" is selected, enter an E-mail address for transfer.
Announce delay time in replay

mail
Choose whether to indicate in the mail the interval (the amount of time required) from the time when
a mail is sent to the main body to the time when the main body receives it. Default is "No."
Enable POP (IMAP) before

SMTP Authentication
After authentication is made by the mail receiving server, a selection is made to decide whether to
send out the mail or not. For default, "Send" is selected.
Retry polling when the machine

is busy
POP poling option in machine busy state. For default, "Send" is selected.
Enable SMTP Authentication
Input the User name and the password when using it. Default is "No."
7. After completion of entry, click [Apply].

8. Conduct the mail sending/receiving test.
E -5
Click "Test" and a sending test and a receiving test are conducted collectively to check to see if a test mail sent is correctly
received.
When a test failed, recheck the set items following the error message.
Sending test
A mail sending test is made on the SMTP server. A test mail is sent to "E-mail Address for Machine"
set in Step6.
Receiving test
A receiving test is made on the incoming mail server. A test mail is received from "E-mail Address
for Machine" set in Step6.
1.3.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system

For commands for communications with the main body and the details of options, refer to the following table.
Command
Option
GETLOG
CHPASS
HELP
Description
Minimum input
Send back a mail with the information specified in the option.
ModeMemory
Send back [Mode Memory List] by mail.
UserSetting
Send back [User Management List] by mail.
FontPattern
Send back [Font Pattern List] by mail.
Management
Send back [Machine Management List] by mail.
Adjustment
Sent back [Adjustment Data List] by mail.
UserManagement
Send back [Use Management List] by mail.
Counter
Send back [Counter List] by mail.
CoverageData
Send back [Coverage Data List] by mail.
Cov
CommunicationLog
Send back [Communication Log List] by mail.
Co
Audit Log
Send back [Audit Log List] by mail.
Au
ALL
Send back all preceding items by mail.
AL
Not specified
Edit the [Counter List] to display it on cell phone and send

back.
[OldPasswd] [NewPasswd]
Change a password to be used for certification of a mail.
[OldPasswd]
Specify a password that is currently used.
[NewPasswd]
Specify a new password.
Not specified
Send a help mail that describes the operating instructions of

the not specified commands above.
F
Ma
A
UseM
C
1.3.6 Mail sending

A command (option) printed on the mail is not case sensitive and can be identified from the minimum input listed on the preceding table.
Note
Mail software can be used without discrimination by OS and a hand-held device or a free mail using browser.
Use the mail software in the text mode. The HTML mail is not available.
For the mail software, as a condition for reception, 128 characters or more are recommended as the maximum number of
characters displayed in a line.
One or more spaces or TAB are required between a command and an option that are written in the mail. The line break is not
available.
Enter all the commands that are written in the mail in one-byte alphanumeric characters (ASCII characters). When any other
characters are used, an error message "No command found" is sent back.
Start a command written in the mail from the line head with not space. When there is a space or TAB found at the line head, the
line is ignored.
The maximum number of commands available in a mail is 10. Commands exceeding 10 are ignored.
Avoid attaching a file to a mail to send to the main body. When the attached file size is large, the main body handles that mail as a
nuisance mail.
Avoid adding a signature to a mail to send to the main body. The copier handles a signature on a mail as a command and send
back an error mail.
In the case the power is shut off while the main body is sending a mail or the main body is printing the list print, the same mail can
be sent back twice.
The main body can receive up to 5 mails from the mail server at the same time. The main body can receive up to mails from the
mail server at the same time.
1.4 Job history list

1.4.1 Outline
"Job History List" is the function to refer to the output history of the copier by using Web browser. The job history displayed on the operation
panel is stored in the memory and deleted when the SW2 is turned OFF. However, with this function, the job history is stored in the optional
hard disk unit (HD-514) so that the users can refer it even after the SW2 is turned OFF.
1.4.2 Major functions

The job history list allows you to use the following functions.
Displaying and downloading of job history by 100 data.
E -6
Saving of the job history up to 1 million (The number of histories to save is selectable from 100,000, 500,000 or 1 million. Select 0 to turn
OFF the job history utility.)
Up to 10 types (A to J) of setting files can be imported from the CE page.
The contents displayed can be changed for each of the 10 setting files (A to J)
Note
The history data displayed on the output history list of the main body when the job is completed is stored in HD-514. Therefore the
data is not stored in case the job is stopped, proof is output or jam is caused.
Sending history of the scanned information (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB, for example) is not saved
The history data is stored only in /P of HD-514. Therefore, if the hard disk of /P is damaged, the data does not recover.
1.4.3 Setting method

When using the Job history list in the initialization, the 4 items of job history are displayed. However by importing the customized setting file,
other items can be displayed. For the information about getting this setting file and the editor commands, contact the Support section of the
authorized distributor.
The following are the display items of job history in the initialization
No
Job Number
Mode
Date
(1) Setting from the touch panel

Set the IP address of the copier from the touch panel to connect the copier to the network.
When this setting has been already made, proceed to "E.1.4.3.(2) Setting from the Web browser" .
(a) Procedure
1. Select [Utility/Counter] button on the touch panel.
2. Press [03 Administrator Setting].
Note

Input the setting on the web browser to import the setting file to the copier. In order to use the Web browser, make preparations of the PC that
can be introduced into the network.
(a) Procedure
When the proxy is set on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web. For particulars, contact the
network administrator. Be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
2. Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "E.1.4.3.(1) Setting from the touch panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the copier main body, "Main page" is displayed.
E -7

4. Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK."
Password: CE Enter the password. (Default:"9279272")
5. Enter the service mode.

Note
When the copier is not in service mode, the setting of [Machine setting data Import/Export] is unavailable.
Click [Machine setting data Import/Export]
7. "Machine setting data Import/Export screen"

Click each symbol (A to J) displayed on [Import datatype change] -[Web setting]
Note
The setting file imported to A is displayed on "Administrator Setting screen" in initial setting, therefore selecting A is
recommended.
When the preparation of the setting file is completed, the following message is displayed. Click [Browse] key, and specify the setting
file.
E -8
Note
The setting file does not need to be named [joblogA.html]. The settings are saved in the main body with names of
joblogA.html to joblogJ.html.
Click [OK].

When the import is completed correctly, the following message is displayed. Turn on and off the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
Note
To enable the setting data, turn the SW2 OFF and ON again and initialize the HDD-514.
Access the Web Utility after the initialization of main body/options is completed. The imported setting files may not take
effect when accessing the Web Utility soon after the OFF/ON of SW2.
Click [Administrator Setting].
12. Enter the user name and the administrator password on "Administrator Setting Log in" page, and click "OK".
User name: admin (small letter, cannot be changed)
Password: Enter the password of the administrator of the copier
Note
They differ from the login user name and the password for the Extension for maintenance
13. "Administrator Setting screen"
Click [Job History List].
14. "Job History List screen"
Change the URL in the address bar to the letter from A to J that has imported the customized file to update the page.
Example
E -9
Before: http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=A
After: http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=B
Note
In case the customized file is imported to "B".
15. "Job History List screen"
Click [JobHistory list].
Note
This operation sets the customized item number in order.
The address bar displays "http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi" after the click.
(b) In case the writing of the setting file fails

When the writing of the setting file fails, the following message is displayed. In this case, conduct the following procedure to see if the hard
disk HD-514 has malfunction and requires the replacement or not.
1. Conduct the step 1 to step10 of the procedure (a) to see if the import of the setting file is normally completed. When the import of the
setting file fails after conducting these processes, conduct the step4 and the following steps.
"Service Mode menu screen"
Press [05 State Confirmation].
Press [01 I/O Check Mode].
3. [I/O Check Mode screen]
Enter "99" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "99-00" is displayed on the message display area.
4. Press the Access button.
5. Enter "03" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "99-03" is displayed on the message display area.
6. Press the start button.
Press the Start button to perform the HDD bad sectors check and recovery again when "NG" is displayed.
When OK appears, conduct the step1 to step10 of the procedure (1) to see if the import of the setting file is normally completed. If the
writing of the setting file fails after conducting these processes, the trouble of the HD-514 is considerable. Replace it with new one.
Note
When replacing the HD-514, execute "Utility" - "Administrator Setting" - "Security Setting" - "HDD Management Setting" "HDD Restore/Backup". (Only when the customer has backed up data)
The job history data is not restored by executing "HDD Restore/Backup."
1.5 Counter list acquisition using USB memory

1.5.1 Outline
By connecting the USB memory to the service port, the counter list information can be saved in the USB memory in the text file format.
1.5.2 List that can be acquired

1. Counter list
2. Mode Memory List
3. User setting list
4. User setting list
5. Audit log report
6. Machine Management List
7. Adjustment Data List
8. Coverage data list
9. Maintenance History
Note
When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, the Parameter List and the Communication Log List are also stored.
When setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, the ORU-M Maintenance History is also stored.
1.5.3 Acquisition method

(1) Preparation:
1. Set the service port device setting to [ON].
2. Connect the USB memory to the service port.
(2) Procedure
2. Press [Details Counter].
3. "Details Counter List screen"
Press [HELP] - [Utility/Counter] -[Check Job Setting] on the operation panel.
4. After the following message appears, remove the USB memory.
E -10
Note
Do not remove the USB memory before the message disappears. The data is being output to the file while the message is
displayed. If the USB memory is removed while the message is displayed, the file cannot be saved properly.
ORU-M Maintenance History is output to the file only when DIPSW15-0 is ON.
(3) File storage location

The list print data file is saved to the root directory in the USB memory.
(4) File name

The file name is defined as follows. When the same file name exists, it is overwritten with new data.
listprint + Machine type + destination code + Serial No. Year_Date_Time.txt
Ex: listprintA1RF001123456_20100107_1010.txt
1.6 Panel log

1.6.1 Outline
The "Panel log" is a function to display the operation history of the main body operation panel and the hard key using Web browser. Because
the panel log is stored in the memory of the main body, it is deleted when the sub power switch (SW) is turned OFF. However when "I.5.15 Log
Store" in the service mode is set to "ON", the log is stored in the optional hard disk unit (HD-514) or the USB memory at the time SC occurs. At
this time the panel log is also stored, which helps troubleshooting.
Items recorded: Touch panel operation, hard key operation
Items not recorded: Mouse operation, external key board operation
Maximum storable number: 1024 (deleted by power OFF)
In security mode: The panel log reference is unavailable as the main body NIC network cannot be connected.
Note
The log data is stored only in /A of HD-514. Therefore, if the /A of the hard disk is damaged, the data does not recover.
1.6.2 Log acquisition method

There are 2 methods for storing and using the panel log data.
Download from Web Utilities to a computer (manual store)
HDD automatic log store function (auto store)
(1) Download from Web Utilities

1. Display the panel log from the Web Utilities.
2. "Panel log screen"
The following 7 panel log items are displayed.
E -11
No.: Recorded number (up to 1024)

scrcode: Screen code at the time it is operated
kind: Operation kind (hard key or panel pressed)
detail: Detailed information when it is pressed
mean: Key type pressed
time: Time it pressed
3. Click "download" to download it to the computer.
File type: Tab-delimited text file
(2) HDD automatic log store function

For details on the HDD automatic log store function, refer to I.5.15 Log Store.
Note
The panel log which can be acquired with the HDD automatic log store function is in the JSON format (JavaScript). For details
on analysis method of this panel log, contact the Support section of the authorized distributor.
1.7 ORU-M Counter Rewrite

1.7.1 Load from external memory
(1) Outline
Read the counter data written by Management Tool from the USB memory and write it to the main body. To reduce the down-time, it can be
executed even during printing.
The counter data for the spare unit (not in use) is written in the main body. The target unit is the fusing unit and the intermediate transfer unit.
Note
This function is available only when DIPSW 15-0 is set to ON.
(2) Preparation:
Connect the USB memory to the service port.
Note
When the counter data file is created in the folder combination mode of Management Tool, save the counter data file in the
following folder configuration of the USB memory.
C7000
ORU_DATA
E -12
This is the counter data file name.

[Main Body Serial Number]_ORU_DATA.bin
(3) Procedure
1. Be sure that the ordinary operation screen *1 is displayed.
Press [Utility/Counter] button.
2. "Utility screen"
On the Operation panel, press the following buttons.
10C69
3. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite menu screen"
Press [01 Read from external memory].
Note
If the USB memory is not connected to the connection port, the error message appears not to go on to the file selection
screen.
4. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite <From External> screen"
Press [Next] or [Back] to select the file to be read and press [OK].
Note
By pressing [Limit], only the file corresponded to the serial number of the machine appears.
5. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite <From External> (item selection) screen"

After selecting [Intermediate Trans.]/[Fusing] in "Load Item", check the counter value with []/[] and press [Store selected items].
Press [Store all items] to read the counter data of both of the intermediate transfer unit and the fusing unit.
6. "Pop-up screen"
Press [Yes] to start reading the counter data.
E -13
Note
Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) until the reading file completes.
7. "Pop-up screen"
Confirm the message "Completed data loading from external memory" and press [OK].
*1 Default is [MACHINE] screen.
1.7.2 Store to external memory

(1) Functions
Transfers the counter data of the fusing unit and the intermediate transfer unit from the main body to the USB memory. The saved data can
be used in Management Tool.
Note
This function is available only when DIPSW 15-0 is set to ON.
(2) Preparation:
Connect the USB memory to the service port.
Note
Be sure to create a folder as shown below beforehand.
C7000
ORU_DATA
(3) Procedure
2. "Utility screen"
10C69
3. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite menu screen"
Press [02 Store to external memory].
4. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite <To External> screen"
Press [Start Storing].
Note
When the USB memory is not connected to the connection port, an error message appears.
Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) until the storing file completes.
5. "Pop-up screen"
A pop-up screen appears after saving completes. Check the file name and press [OK].
E -14
6. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite <To External> screen"

Confirm that the screen returns to "ORU-M Counter Rewrite <To External> screen", disconnect the USB memory from the service port.
1.8 Management Tool

1.8.1 Outline
"Management Tool" is a software to read and reset the parts counter information of the unit.
(1) Operating environment

The following shows the hardware requirements of the Management Tool.
Applicable OS
Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4 or later versions)

Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 3 or later versions)
Windows Vista (32bit/64bit) Home Premium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate (Service Pack
2 or later versions)
Windows 7 (32bit/64bit) Home Premium/Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (Service Pack
1 or later versions)
CPU
Conform to OS recommended environment
Hard disk space
100MB or more
Memory space
Conform to OS recommended environment
Web browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver.6.0 (Service Pack 1 or later versions)
Library
Windows 2000 & Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0

Windows XP & Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)
Windows Vista & Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)
Windows 7 & Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)
Display
At resolution of 800 x 600 (SVGA) or more

16 bits color or more
Applicable machine
bizhub PRESS C8000

bizhub PRESS C7000
bizhub PRESS C6000
Note
Compliant OS may be limited depending on the RFID tag reader/writer.
(2) RFID tag reader/writer

Management Tool uses the RFID tag reader/writer for reading and writing the PFID tag. The following shows the corresponding RFID tag
reader/writer.
"TMRF-1-U001" (Tamura Corporation)
"TWN3" (Elatec Vertriebs GmbH)
Applicable mode USB
: Transparent Virtual COM Port
V24: Transparent Operation
Note
The driver for the RFID tag reader-writer needs to be installed to the computer beforehand.
"TMRF-1-U001" (Tamura Corporation)
TmRfid USB driver (Windows 2000/XP)
Vista/7 dedicated USB driver(Windows Vista/7)
E -15
"TWN3" (Elatec Vertriebs GmbH)

TWN Serial Port driver (Windows XP)
The following shows the setting the port of the TWN Serial Port driver.
Item
Value
bit/sec
9600
Data bit
Parity
None
Stop bit
Flow control
None
(3) Main functions

The following shows the main functions of the Management Tool.
Reading/writing RFID tag of unit (bizhub PRESS C8000)
The part information is read from the RFID tag of the unit and displayed on the screen. Select the part whose counter information is reset
and write the reset information on the IC tag.
Reading/writing data file of unit (bizhub PRESS C7000/6000)
Reads out the part information from the data file of the unit output from the device and displays it on the screen. Select a part whose
counter information is reset on the screen, and write the reset information to the data file. (Support to read/write automatically from the
USB memory.)
Work log management
The counter information and the counter reset information caught from the replacement work are saved automatically as a log.
On the work log display, the information can be sorted by the read or reset date and searched by the term such as the customer or the
technician who executed the replacement. Therefore, the previous works can be checked.
Output of work information with CSV file
Outputs the work information and work log when replacing in the CSV format file.
Printing work information
Prints out the work information and work log when replacing.
Association of the user information and the device
The user information can be associated with the device.
Export/Import
The work log, user information, and technician information can be exported to the file. Also, the exported file can be imported.
Serial number setting (bizhub PRESS C8000)
When replacing the tag due to the breakage, new RFID tag can be recognized to the machine.
Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub PRESS C8000)
The initial value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor can be registered.
Option
Set each setting of Management Tool.
Log in mode
E -16
To use the Management Tool, login is required.

2 modes are provided for log in; "Administrator mode" and "Technician mode."
[Administrator mode]
Mode when log in as administrator.
[Technician mode]
Mode when log in as technician. The administrator registers the technician.
The operable function differs depending on the log in mode.
No.
Function name
Administrator mode
Technician mode
Replacement work
No
Yes
Work log
Yes
Yes
Register user
Yes
Yes
Register technician
Yes
No
SetPersonal
No
Yes
Administrator Setting
Yes
No
Unit Serial Number Setting
No
Yes
Intermediate transfer steering sensor information

setting
No
Yes
Option
No
Yes
10
Version
Yes
Yes
Yes: operable, No: inoperable
1.8.2 Installation of Management Tool

(1) Installation method
Install the Management Tool in the following steps.
Note
Log on with the user name which has the Administrator authority to install.
If any application is running on the computer (including anti-virus program), close it.
Check that "Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)" has been installed on the computer before the installation.
Installation steps
1. Double click the installation program "Setup.exe."
2. Select the language and click [OK].
3. Continue the installation following the instructions on screen.

Note
Product key input
The Management Tool installer displays the screen to input the product key during installation.
E -17
The installation continues when the input product key is proper.
(2) Items to be installed

Once the Management Tool is installed, the following items are registered on the Start menu and the desk top.
Items to be registered for start menu
Program
Readme
Manual
Items to be registered on desktop
Shortcut of program
Note
The "Readme" of the Start menu can be set not to be installed.
Select "Custom" on the set up type and check the items to be installed.
Whether to create the shortcut of the program registered on the desktop can be selected when installing.
(3) Uninstallation
There are following 2 ways to uninstall the Management Tool.
Use "Add or Remove Programs" ("Add or Remove Programs" for Windows2000, "Programs and Features" for Windows Vista/7).
Execute "Setup.exe" again.
Note
The user information and the data information (Work log, User information, and Technician information) are saved in the
following folder separately from Management Tool.
2000/XP:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\KONICA MINOLTA\Management Tool\
Vista/7:
C:\Users\Public\Documents\KONICA MINOLTA\Management Tool\
Since those information cannot be deleted by uninstalling, delete them manually.
When reinstalling it without deleting those information, the Management Tool can be started with the information before
uninstallation.
When uninstalling the Management Tool, all Management Tool programs need to be closed.
1.8.3 Starting up of Management Tool

(1) Start
There are following 2 ways to start the Management Tool.
Start from the Start menu of Windows
Click Windows "Start" button - "All Programs" ("Programs" for Windows2000) - "KONICAMINOLTA" - "Management Tool" - "Management
Tool."
Start from the shortcut icon on the desktop
Double click "KONICA MINOLTA Management Tool" icon created on the desktop.
The login screen appears when it starts.
Note
Whether to create the "KONICA MINOLTA Management Tool" icon or not can be selected when installing.
E -18
(2) The login screen

The login screen appears when the Management Tool starts. Select the login mode and enter the required information to log in.
(a) At 1st time of startup
The administrator password has not been set right after the installation. Set the administrator password when the password setting screen
appears after clicking [OK] button.
E -19
(b) At normal startup
For the replacement work, log in in the technician mode. Select [Registered technician name] and enter the required information to log in.
Note
The image at the top of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.8.6.(4) Image setting)
When no technician has been registered, the registered technician name cannot be selected.
For details of registering technician, E.1.8.5.(2) Register technician.
E -20
(3) Operation screen
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Menu bar
[2]
Navigation
[3]
Operation area
[4]
Login user
1. Menu bar
Specify each function of the Management Tool. (Refer to E.1.8.6 Various setting for the software)
2. Navigation
[1]
[1]
[2]
Path
[2]
Image
Path
The transition of screens from the top screen is displayed as the path.
Image
The image can be customized. (Refer to: E.1.8.6.(4) Image setting)
3. Login user
The current login user is displayed.
4. Operation area
The operation panel based on the purpose is displayed.
(4) End
There are following 2 ways to exit the Management Tool.
Click [Exit] button on the login screen or the top screen
Select [Exit] from [File] menu
Click [x] (close) button on the upper right corner of the screen
Shut down or log off the computer
1.8.4 Technician mode

The operation procedures when logging in as an registered technician is described below.
To execute this mode, register the technician information in the administrator mode. (Refer to E.1.8.5.(2) Register technician)
E -21
(1) Top screen
When logging in successfully, the top screen is displayed.

To perform unit parts replacement, click "Replacement work" button. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(2) Replacement work)
To check the work log, click "WorkLog" button. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(3) Work log)
To register the customer information, click "RegisterUser" button. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(4) Register user)
To change the password or edit the memo, click "Set personal info" button. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(5) SetPersonal)
Note
The image at the left of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.8.6.(4) Image setting)
(2) Replacement work

Perform unit parts replacement.
(a) Type of replacement

Depending on the machine type, the form and media of data differ.
Management Tool is applied to the following machines.
bizhub PRESS C8000
bizhub PRESS C7000/6000
(b) bizhub PRESS C8000 replacement procedure

1. Click "Replacement work" on the top screen.
Or select "Replacement work" in "Tool" menu.
When the RFID tag reader is not recognized, the process does not proceed to step 2. Check that the RFID tag reader is correctly
connected.
2. A screen to select machine type appears.
E -22
Select "bizhub PRESS C8000" and click [OK] button.

Proceed to step 3.
connected.
3. When the unit read screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
E -23
4. When read successfully, the unit information screen is displayed.

The units read are listed on the left of the screen as buttons.
5. Select the parts to reset the counted value from the unit information read.
Note
When selecting the intermediate transfer belt of the intermediate transfer unit, the intermediate transfer belt information
screen is displayed.
Be sure to input the reflectance value which is written on the belt.
6. Click "Reset count".

When the count reset screen is displayed, contact the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
E -24
7. When count reset is done successfully, the unit information screen is updated.
8. When canceling the count reset, Click "Undo reset count."
E -25
When the canceling count reset screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader. The count information returns to the
condition when it was read.
9. To read information of another unit, click "Read another."

Return to step 3.
Note
Information of up to 10 units can be read at a time of each replacement work.
When reading information of more than 10 units, exit the replacement work once and select "Replacement work " on the
top screen again.
While in replacement work, the Management Tool cannot be exited.
To exit the Management Tool, exit the replacement work.
(c) bizhub PRESS C7000/6000 replacement procedure

Note
Depending on the saving destination of the cooperated counter data, there are 2 modes for the replacement on the bizhub
PRESS C7000/6000.
USB cooperation mode:
Execute the counter reset directly to the counter data read from the main body to the USB memory with the "Save to
External Memory" of ORU-M (Refer to E.1.7.2 Store to external memory).
Folder cooperation mode:
Move the counter data read from the main body to the USB memory to the folder of the client PC once and execute the
counter reset to the counter data in the folder with the "Save to External Memory" of ORU-M (Refer to E.1.7.2 Store to
external memory).
It is activated in the mode of the previous replacement, but the mode can be selected with "Option" (Refer to E.1.8.4.(8)
Option). (Default is USB cooperation mode.)
1. Click "Replacement work" on the top screen.
Or select "Replacement work" in "Tool" menu.
2. A screen to select machine type appears.
E -26
Select "bizhub PRESS C7000/6000" and click [OK] button.

Proceed to step 3.
Note
When it is activated in the USB cooperation mode and the USB memory in which the data file is saved cannot be
recognized, the following warning appears. Select [Yes] to activate in the folder cooperation mode.
3. Once the reading the data file of the USB memory or the folder completes, the writing screen appears. The read files are shown in a list
on the center of the screen.
E -27
Note
When it is activated in the folder cooperation mode, it cooperates with the folder of the previous replacement.
4. Select the data file which includes the unit to be replaced from the read data files and click "Select parts".
Note
The unit with "blank" is the target unit of the replacement.
The display of the unit column shows the condition of the unit.
Blank:
Unit whose part information is exported from the device (target to replace)
Completed editing:
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been selected, or whose unit serial number has been set
Already written.:
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been written in the data file
Already imported the device.:
Unit whose part information has been imported to the device
For the unit with "Already imported the device." on the column, the part to be reset the count cannot be selected.
5. Once the reading of unit completes, the part selection screen appears.
E -28
The units read are listed on the left of the screen as buttons.
6. Select the unit to replace, select the part to reset the count, and then click "Back to writing screen".
On the parts selecting screen, the unit serial number (alphanumeric characters in 16-digit) can be input.
Blank is also available when the serial number is not needed.
Conduct the same operation to all units to be replaced.

Note
Writing to data file is not executed by clicking the "Back to writing screen" on the parts selecting screen. Writing to the
data file is executed on the writing screen. For details, refer to the steps 7 and the later.
The input unit serial number is reflected when you return to the writing screen. The display is not updated during inputting
the number. The serial number displayed on the button on the left of the screen and the unit/machine information shows
the old information before inputting the number.
7. Writing screen appears.
Confirm that the unit with part selected is "Completed editing".
E -29
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 to all data files which include the unit to be replaced.
9. Click "Write" button.
Note
Click "Reference" button of the writing screen and select the folder to switch to the folder cooperate mode.
In the next replacement, it is activated in the mode of the previous replacement.
This mode can be switched with "Option" (Refer to E.1.8.4.(8) Option).
10. A writing confirmation message appears and "Completed editing" unit is written in the data file of the USB memory or the PC folder.
Then, the replacement completes.
In the USB cooperate mode, once the replacement completes, the USB memory can be removed safely.
* Pop-up screen in the USB cooperation mode
E -30
* Pop-up screen in the folder cooperation mode
Note
Be sure not to disconnect the USB memory until the writing completes since it takes time to complete writing to the USB
memory in the USB cooperation mode.
When the USB memory failed to be removed safely, writing to data file may not complete properly. Confirm that no other
program uses the USB memory and write to the data file again.
In the folder cooperate mode, be careful not to mistake the import data when cooperating with the C7000/6000 main body.
While in replacement work, the Management Tool cannot be exited.
To exit the Management Tool, exit the replacement work.
(d) Backup file (bizhub PRESS C7000/6000)

In the replacement of the bizhub PRESS C7000/6000, back up the data file at writing to the data file.
Machine
Management Tool
Management Tool
Machine
Import
Read
Output
Read
Output
Write
Writing
folder
Write
Backup
Backup
Backup
folder
The backup file is created during writing

and saved until next writing.
Note
If the wrong information is written with Management Tool, take back the backup file to the writing folder to recover the
information.
When several writings are executed to 1 data file, the data to be recovered is the data file which written before the last writing.
For the backup file in the USB cooperation mode, a backup folder is created automatically and saved in the ORU-DATA folder.
For the backup file in the folder cooperation mode, a backup folder is created automatically and saved in the folder that is the
same as the data file.
(e) Associating customers

When the device serial number and the user information are properly associated, the user information is displayed on the operation
information automatically.
When not set, " (No User Setting)" is displayed.
To modify the association between the unit read and the user, conduct the following procedures.
Click "Change" to display the user setting screen.
Select the desired user setting and click [OK].
E -31
The user setting of the work information is changed.

Note
For details on user registration, refer to E.1.8.4.(4) Register user.
(f) Export the csv format file

The detailed information of the unit currently displayed is exported in CSV format.
1. Specify the location to store the file.
E -32
2. Click [Save].
The CSV file is exported to the specified location.
For details on CSV format, refer to E.1.8.6.(6) Export CSV.
(g) Printing the report

The detailed information of the unit currently displayed can be printed as report.
1. The print dialog is displayed.
2. Click [OK].
The report is printed.
For details on print layout, refer to E.1.8.6.(7) Print Report.
(3) Work log

The work conditions of previous replacement work can be checked.
(a) Procedures to display the work log list

1. Click "Work log" on the top screen.
Or select "Work log" in "Tool" menu.
2. The work log referring method selection screen appears.
To display the work log by selecting the user, click "Select user."
Proceed to step 3.
To display the work log by selecting the technician, click "Select technician."
Proceed to step 4.
To display all the work log, click "All."
Proceed to step 5.
E -33
3. The "Select user" screen appears.
Select the user to check the work log, and click "OK."
Proceed to step 5.
4. The "Select technician" screen appears.
E -34
Select the technician to check the work log, and click "OK."
Proceed to step 5.
5. The work log list is displayed.
On the work log list, filtering by conditions or sorting displayed items is available.
Select the work log information to check its detail, export as CSV or print report.
E -35
For the display filter, the displayed contents differs depending on the display method selected on the work log reference method in step
2.
When selecting "Select user":
When selecting "Select technician":
Note
The items can be sorted in descending/ascending order by clicking the item name of the work log list. The mark
indicates that the current display is in ascending order. Click it to change in descending order.
On the work log list screen, the items to be displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set list view". (Refer to
E.1.8.6.(5) Set list view)
Click [Export CSV] to export the work log information currently selected in CSV format. (Refer to E.1.8.6.(6) Export CSV)
Click [Print] to print the report of the work log information currently selected. (Refer to E.1.8.6.(7) Print Report)
(b) Detailed information

The detailed information of the replacement work log selected on the work log list is displayed.
Change the user to be associated or edit the work information memo.
E -36
Note
Click [Back] or [Next] to switch the work log displayed.
Click [Export CSV] to export the work log information currently displayed in CSV format. (Refer to E.1.8.6.(6) Export CSV)
Click [Print] to print the report of the work log information currently displayed. (Refer to E.1.8.6.(7) Print Report)
For details on user association, refer to E.1.8.4.(2).(e) Associating customers.
(c) Import
Import the work log which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the work log file to import.
E -37
2. Click [Open].
3. The password input screen is displayed.
Enter the password set on the work log file when it was exported.
4. Click [OK].
The work log file is imported.
Note
Use one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols for password.
The work log information already exists is not imported.
The invalid work log information is skipped and the import process continues.
The work log exported by other computer also can be imported. However it happens that the work log information is
overlapped.
(d) Export
Export the work log collectively.
E -38
2. Click [Save].
3. The password input screen is displayed.
Set the password on the export file.
4. Click [OK].
The export of the work log starts.
Note
The password set on the export file is required when importing it.
The file format "Work log file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is stored in other
format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(4) Register user

Register, edit or delete the user information.
(a) User list

Click [RegisterUser] on the top screen.
Or select "RegisterUser" in "Tool" menu.
E -39
Note
The items can be sorted in descending/ascending order by clicking the item name of the user information list. The mark
On the user information list screen, the items to be displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set list view".
(Refer to E.1.8.6.(5) Set list view)
(b) Initial registration

Register the user information.
E -40
1. Click [New] on the user list screen.

2. The registration screen is displayed.
3. Enter "User name."
Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
4. Select "Type of business."
5. Enter the following items if necessary.
Enter "User code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter "User ID." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter "User office location name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
Enter "User office location code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter "Contact person name." Use 0 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
Enter "Contact person ID no." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter "Contact telephone." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Register "Machine list".
Enter "Machine serial number to add." Use 1 to 13 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols. Click "Add" to add it to
"Machine list."
Select and click the serial number to delete from "Machine list".
Enter "Remark."
6. Click [Register].
The entered user information is registered and the next user information can be registered.
Note
Register the serial number of the machine of the user to "Machine list" so that the user information is automatically
associated when reading unit information while in the replacement work.
(c) Edit
Edit a registered user information.
1. Edit the items to be changed.
For entering each items, refer to E.1.8.4.(4).(b) Initial registration.
2. Click [OK].
The edited result is reflected to the user information.
(d) Import
Import the user information which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the user information file to import.
E -41
2. Click [Open].
The user information file is imported.
Note
The user information already exists is not imported.
(e) Export
Export the user information collectively.
2. Click [Save].
E -42
The export of the user information starts.

Note
The file format "User Information file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is stored in
other format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(5) SetPersonal
Change the password of login technician or edit the comment.
(a) Password Change

1. Click "Password change."
The password change screen is displayed. The password can be changed at this time.
E -43
2. Click [OK].
The new Password is set.
Note
(6) Serial number setting (bizhub PRESS C8000)

The unit serial number is written in the RFID tag.
Note
When replacing the RFID tag because of such as physical damage, the new RFID tag can be recognized by the unit.
(a) Procedures of the unit serial number setting

1. Select "Unit Serial Number" from "Tool" menu.
connected.
2. The wizard starts up and the unit serial number input screen is displayed.
Enter the unit serial number and click "Write."
E -44
Note
Serial number setting initializes the RFID tag data.
The initialized data cannot be restored.
3. When the RFID tag write in screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
4. When writing is completed, the result screen is displayed.
E -45
(7) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub PRESS C8000)
The initial value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor is written to the RFID tag.
(a) Procedures of the intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting

1. Select "Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting" from "Tool" menu.
Note
When the RFID tag reader is not recognized, the process does not proceed to step 2. Check that the RFID tag reader is
correctly connected.
2. Wizard is activated and the intermediate transfer steering sensor information input screen appears.
E -46
Input the intermediate transfer steering sensor information and click "Write".
3. When the RFID tag write in screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
Note
Touch the RFID tag in which the data of the intermediate transfer unit is saved.
4. When writing is completed, the result screen is displayed.
E -47
(8) Option
Set each setting of Management Tool.
(a) Display a confirmation message when selecting a part to be replaced of the bizhub PRESS C7000/6000.
Select whether to display the message to confirm the target unit after selecting the part at the replacement of the bizhub PRESS
C7000/6000.
(b) Locate the data file of the bizhub PRESS C7000/6000 in the USB memory.
Set the activation mode of the replacement of the bizhub PRESS C7000/6000.
When the box is checked, the replacement is activated in USB memory cooperation mode.
When the box is not checked, the replacement is activated in folder cooperation mode.
1.8.5 Administrator mode

Set the required information of the Management Tool.
E -48
(1) Top screen
When logging in successfully, the top screen is displayed.

To check the work log, click "WorkLog" button. (Refer to E.1.8.5.(3) Administrator Setting)
To register the customer information, click "RegisterUser" button. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(4) Register user)
To register a technician, click "RegisterTech" button. (Refer to E.1.8.5.(2) Register technician)
To change the administrator password, click "Admin.setting" button. (Refer to E.1.8.5.(3) Administrator Setting)
(2) Register technician

Register, edit or delete the technician information.
(a) Technician list

Click [RegisterTech] on the top screen.
Or select "RegisterTech" in "Tool" menu.
E -49
Note
The items can be sorted in descending/ascending order by clicking the item name of the technician information list. The mark
On the technician information list screen, the items to be displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set View".
(Refer to E.1.8.6.(5) Set list view)
(b) Initial registration

Register a new technician information.
The items with "*" must be filled.
E -50
1. Enter "Technician name."

2. Enter "Password" and "Password (confirmation)."
3. Enter "Country."
4. Enter "Company name."
5. Enter the following items if necessary.
Enter "Technician code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter "Company code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter "Service office name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
Enter "Service office code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
"Generate a password"
By clicking "Generate a password", a password is generated automatically.
Click "Set password" to set the password automatically generated to the "Password" and "Password (confirmation)." Click "Copy" to
copy the password automatically generated to the clipboard.
6. Click [Register].
The entered technician information is registered and the next technician information can be registered.
Note
Registration No. is determined automatically.
(c) Edit
Edit a registered technician information.
E -51
1. Edit the items to be changed.

Edit "Technician name." Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
Edit "Technician code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Edit "Country." Use 1 to 128 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
Edit "Company." Use 1 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
Edit "Company code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Edit "Service office name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
Edit "Service office code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
2. Click [OK].
The edited result is reflected to the technician information.
(d) Import
Import the technician information which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the technician information file to import.
E -52
2. Click [Open].
The technician information file is imported.
Note
The technician information already exists is not imported.
(e) Export
Export the technician information collectively.
2. Click [Save].
E -53
The export of the technician information starts.

Note
The file format "Technician Information file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is
stored in other format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(3) Administrator Setting

Change the administrator password.
1. Enter the current password and the new password.

2. Click [OK].
The new Password is set.
Note
1.8.6 Various setting for the software

(1) File menu
(a) Import
Work log
Select "Work log" from "Import" in the "File" menu to load the work log which has been exported with the Management Tool. (Refer to E.
1.8.4.(3).(c) Import)
Note
It is available only from the top screen or the Work log screen.
User information
Select "User information" from "Import" in the "File" menu to load the user information which has been exported with the Management
Tool. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(4).(d) Import)
Note
It is available only from the top screen or the Register user screen.
Technician information
Select "Technician information" from "Import" in the "File" menu to load the technician information which has been exported with the
Management Tool. (Refer to E.1.8.5.(2).(d) Import)
Note
This menu is displayed when logging in as an administrator.
It is available only from the top screen or the Technician information screen.
E -54
(b) Export
Work log
Select "Work log" from "Export" in the "File" menu to store the collective work log as a file. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(3).(d) Export)
Note
It is available only from the top screen or the Work log screen.
User information
Select "User information" from "Export" in the "File" menu to store the collective user information as a file. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(4).(e)
Export)
Note
It is available only from the top screen or the Register user screen.
Technician information
Select "Technician information" from "Export" in the "File" menu to store the collective user information as a file. (Refer to E.1.8.5.(2).(e)
Export)
Note
It is available only from the top screen or the Register technician screen.
(2) Tool menu

The functions in "Tool" are available only from the top screen.
(a) Replacement work

Select "Replacement work" in "Tool" menu to perform unit parts replacement. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(2) Replacement work)
Note
This menu is displayed when logging in to the technician mode.
(b) Work log

Select "Work log" from "Tool" to check the work log. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(3) Work log)
(c) Register user

Select "Register user" in "Tool" menu to check, register, edit, or delete user information. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(4) Register user)
(d) SetPersonal
Select "Set personal info" in "Tool" menu to change the password of login technician or edit comments. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(5) SetPersonal)
Note
(e) Unit Serial Number Setting

Select "Unit Serial Number" from "Tool" menu to write the unit serial number in the RFID tag. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(6) Serial number setting
(bizhub PRESS C8000))
Note
(f) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting

The default value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor can be written in the RFID tag by selecting "Intermediate transfer steering
sensor information setting" from "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(7) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub PRESS
C8000))
Note
(g) Option
Each item of Management Tool can be set by selecting "Option" from "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.8.4.(8) Option)
Note
(h) Register technician

Select "Register technician" in "Tool" menu to check, register, edit, or delete technician information. (Refer to E.1.8.5.(2) Register
technician)
Note
(i) Administrator Setting

Select "Administrator Setting" in "Tool" menu to change the password of administrator. (Refer to E.1.8.5.(3) Administrator Setting)
Note
E -55
(3) Help menu

(a) Version
Select "Version" in the "Help" menu to display version information of the Management Tool.
Note
The image at the top of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.8.6.(4) Image setting)
(4) Image setting

(a) Navigation
"70 x 40 (pixels)" image display area of is provided in the navigation view area. An image to be displayed here can be customized by users.
Item
Description
Supported file type
GIF, JPG, JPEG, BMP, PNG
Image size
Image size is arbitrary. *1
Display method
Custom image to be displayed is enlarged or reduced to the area size (70 x 40).
File Name
Navigation. (extension*2)
Stored location
(Install directory)\Images
Remark
When a file exists, a custom image is displayed. *3
*1 70 x 40 (pixels) size is recommended.

*2 For extension, refer to "Supported file type."
When a file does not exist, a default image shown above is displayed.
(b) Log in screen

"480 x 90 (pixels)" image display area of is provided on the login screen.
An image to be displayed here can be customized by users.
Item
Description
Supported file type
Image size
Display method
File Name
Login.(extension*2)
Stored location
Remark

(c) Top screen

"350 x 365 (pixels)*1" image display area of is provided on the login screen (when the main window size is 800 x 600*2). An image to be
displayed here can be customized by users.
E -56
Item
Supported file type
Description
Image size
Display method
File Name
TopMenu.(extension*3)
Stored location
Remark

*2 Image size (350 x 365) is default value. The image is displayed by enlarged or reduced in accordance with the window size.
(d) Version information screen

"460 x 150 (pixels)" image display area of is provided on the version information screen.
An image to be displayed here can be customized by users.
Item
Description
Supported file type
Image size
E -57
Display method
File Name
Version.(extension*2)
Stored location
Remark

(5) Set list view

The items to be displayed and the display width can be changed.
1. Click [Set list view].
2. The set list view screen is displayed.
The items to be displayed differs among screens.
The figure below is the work log set list view screen.
3. Set show/hide of items by checking in the list.

Items with check are displayed.
The setting can be changed by clicking [Show]/[Hide] on the right of the screen.
4. Set other conditions if necessary.
Selected column width: Specify the display width by entering desired value. It can be specified by 0 to 999.
[Top] :Item display order is moved to top.
[Bottom] :Item display order is moved to bottom.
5. Click [OK].
The set list view is updated.
(6) Export CSV

The format of the CSV file exported by the Management Tool is as follows.
Output items
Common information (Replacement work information)
No
Item
Description
User name
The user name associated to replacement work is exported.
Type of business (user)
The type of business associated to replacement work is exported.
User code
The user code associated to replacement work is exported.
User ID
The user ID associated to replacement work is exported.
E -58
User office location name (user)
The user office location name associated to replacement work is exported.
User office location code (user)
The user office location code associated to replacement work is exported.
Contact person name (user)
The contact person name associated to replacement work is exported.
Contact person ID no. (user)
The contact person ID no. associated to replacement work is exported.
Contact telephone (user)
The contact telephone associated to replacement work is exported.
10
Technician name
The name of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
11
Technician code
The code of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
12
Country (technician)
The country of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
13
Company name (technician)
The company name of the technician who performed replacement work is

exported.
14
Company code (technician)
The company code of the technician who performed replacement work is

exported.
15
Service office name (technician)
The service office name of the technician who performed replacement work is
exported.
16
Service office code (technician)
The service office code of the technician who performed replacement work is
exported.
17
Machine name
Export the device name.
18
Main Body Serial Number
The serial number of the main body is exported.
19
Unit type
The unit type is exported.
20
Unit Serial Number
The serial number of the unit is exported.
21
Replacement Count
The number of times of unit replacement is exported.
22
Unit removal date
The date of unit removal is exported.
23
Count read date
The date when the unit RFID tag is read is exported.
24
Count reset date
The date when the count is reset is exported.
25
The last undo reset date
The last date when undoing reset is exported.
26
Number of parts
The number of parts in the unit is exported.
Part Information (for each part)

27
No
Assigned from 1 automatically.
28
Replace
The replaced parts are outputted as "Changed."
29
Parts name
The parts name is exported.
30
Parts No.
The parts number is exported.
31
Quantity
The quantity of parts is exported.
32
Count
The count value of parts is exported.
33
Life cycle
The life cycle value of parts is exported.
34
Supplement 1
When the unit type is "intermediate transfer unit" and the parts is "intermediate
transfer belt" with count reset, "intermediate transfer belt characteristic value
(front)" is exported.
35
Supplement 2
When the unit type is "intermediate transfer unit" and the parts is "intermediate
transfer belt" with count reset, "intermediate transfer belt characteristic value
(rear)" is exported.
Note
Break character is "," (comma).
Each item is enclosed in " " (double quotation marks).
When no data exist, only " " (double quotation marks) is outputted.
File format
The header (item name) is created on first row of the file.
For the subsequent rows, each parts information is outputted per one line.
For example, when the unit has 15 parts in it, 15 rows are outputted per replacement work.
E -59
1st row
Header row (exports the item name)
2nd row
Replacement work 1 - part (1)
3rd row
4th row
5th row
N of replaced parts
per replacement work
(7) Print Report

Details on the replacement work can be printed as replacement report.
Print layout
E -60
1.8.7 Error message list

An error message may appear while Management Tool is operating.
The description of error and its error code are displayed.
E -61
The error codes and countermeasures are shown below. Follow the countermeasures shown below.
Error code
Countermeasures
400-402, 500, 501, 600, 700, 2005-2008,

Retry.
2030-2044, 2100-2109, 2130-2140, 2151-2160,
2170-2187, 2194-2196, 2200-2209, 2230-2240,
2251-2260, 2270-2280, 2290-2297, 2303-2329,
2331-2343, 2346-2358, 2362, 2363, 2367,
2405, 2409, 2411, 2500-2509, 2516, 2517,
2520-2523, 2762-2766, 2781-2798, 3000-3006,
3008-3014, 3100, 3101
2402, 2403, 2410, 2411, 5001-5010, 5200-5208
Check the RFID tag and retry.

Note
When the same error occurs even after retrying, remove the RFID tag reader/writer
from a computer once and insert it again, then reboot the Management Tool.
When the same error still occurs, contact an administrator.
2400, 2406-2408, 5100-5106
Check whether the RFID tag reader/writer is connected to a computer correctly.
102, 111-113, 800-802, 854, 855, 860-868,

880-884, 2090-2096, 2600-2611, 2622-2633,
2636-2644, 2710-2720, 3000-3006
Reinstall the Management Tool.
2100-2121, 2151-2160, 2170-2180, 2200-2221,

2251-2260, 2270-2280, 2303-2319, 2322-2329,
2331-2345, 2359, 2731, 2760, 2761
The file is not supported.
100
Non-compliant OS is used.
803-808, 914, 915, 950, 951, 2401, 2404,

2721-2723, 2730, 2732-2759, 2767-2775, 5102,
5201
Reboot the Management Tool.
2510-2515
Check the printing environment.
1.9 Acquisition of the controller log

1.9.1 Outline
When there occurs an abnormal condition with respect to the image controller, acquisition of the controller log allows you to expect a location
where an error has occurred.
USB memory is used for this acquisition. There are the following two procedures for log acquisition: "Controller defective log" and "Controller
capture."
(1) Acquisition of the controller defective log

It is possible to collect log data in the USB memory just before a defective condition occurs.
Used when no defective condition recurs or it occurs less frequently.
Note
The acquisition of print data is restricted only to 10 jobs just before the USB memory is inserted with [Spool setting] set to
[Enable].
(2) Acquisition of the controller capture

Jobs can be collected after the USB memory is connected. This is used when a defective condition can be reproduced easily.
1.9.2 Preparation
(1) USB memory
USB memory with a form (thin) that can be connected to the service port (Serial TypeA) provided on the IC system control board (SCB),
or USB memory provided with an extension cable when a direct connection is not available due to its form.
USB memory that has been formatted in FAT or FAT 32 form.
USB memory with a capacity larger than 64 Mbyte, when used for the acquisition of defective log.
When used for capture acquisition, the larger the capacity of the USB memory, the greater the number of data that can be obtained.
(The number of data that can be obtained depends on the print size of the original and the capacity of the USB memory. )
(2) Key files for log acquisition

Key file for acquisition of the defective log of the controller: showalllog
Key file for acquisition of the controller capture: getcapture
Note
Obtain a key file from KMBT.
Be sure to store only one of "showalllog" or "getcapture" key file in the USB memory.
E -62
If both of the key files are stored in the USB memory, the defective log/capture is not acquired properly.
(3) Setting of the controller

Make settings of [MACHINE]-[Controller]-[05 Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP] --> "Enable" on the operation panel of the main body.
When the spool setting is changed, be sure to turn off and on the main power switch (SW1).
1.9.3 Procedure for acquisition

(1) Procedure of acquisition of the controller defective log
1. Store the key file for acquisition of the controller defective log (showalllog) in the USB memory with empty space.
Note
A key file cannot be created. So, be sure to obtain one from KMBT.
2. Connect the USB memory to the service port (Serial Type A) provided on the IC system control board (SCB).
3. Wait until the ''Machine condition'' key or ''Controller setting'' key of the panel display stops blinking.
Also, wait until the access lamp of the USB memory stops flashing.
The data acquisition normally completes in about 15 seconds after the lamp stops flashing.
Note
While the defective log is being collected, ''Machine condition'' key or ''Controller setting'' key normally keeps blinking, but it
does not blink when there is a communication error between the controller and the main body.
When there occurs a communication error, check the access lamp of the USB memory.
4. Check to see if the name of a log file obtained is shown in the upper left section of the screen when the following buttons are pressed
down on the operation panel: [Service Mode]-[Controller Setting]-[99 log file]. (IPLog_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.log)
Note
You cannot check when there occurs a communication error between the controller and the main body.
5. Disconnect the USB memory to the service port (Serial Type A) provided on the IC system control board (SCB).
6. Check to see if there is an IPLog_yyyymmddhhmmss.log file obtained on the day in the USB memory, and then copy all the files stored to
the PC.
Files to be obtained
IPLog_yyyymmddhhmmss.log: Controller log
XXXXX.spl: Print data
Note
Several files other than the above are stored depending on the condition.
Be sure to turn the main power switch (SW1) OFF and ON after removing the USB memory from the service port.
If it is not turned OFF and ON, there will be no guarantee for its proper operation after the log acquisition is completed.
7. Compress the files copied to the PC to send to KMBT.
(2) Procedure of acquisition of the controller capture

1. Obtain a key file for acquisition of controller capture from KMBT.
Create a key file in the other way. (A key file can be created from a Notepad.)
*Key file format: The <> section is edited.
2.
3.
4.
5.
HDDorUSB,<type>
<type>=USB: Saved in the USB memory inserted.
MIO,<switch>,<count>
<switch>=ON: Obtained
<switch>=OFF: Not obtained
<count>=1 to : Number of files obtained
(Overwritten with a number specified and deleted
in the order of the older files when out of
memory.)
NET,<switch>,<count>
Same as above
PDL,<switch>,<count>
Same as above
*MIO: Data received from the network

*NET: Data analyzed with PrintJobAnalyzer
*PDL: Data analyzed with PJLParser
Example)
HDDorUSB, USB
MIO, ON, 30 (In the case of collecting 30)
Copy a key file for acquisition of an edited controller capture (getcapture) in the USB memory with empty space.
Connect the USB memory to the service port (Serial Type A) provided on the IC system control board (SCB).
About after waiting for 20 seconds, check to see if the access lamp of the USB memory stops flashing.
Continue printing until there occurs any problems you want to obtain.
Note
Print speed gets slower than usual according to the contents of acquisition (or the contents of the key file).
6. Check to see if the access lamp of the USB memory stops flashing, and then remove the USB memory from the service port (Serial Type
A) provided on the IC system control board (SCB).
7. Check to see if there are files obtained on the day in the USB memory, and then copy all the files stored to the PC.
Files to be obtained with switch=ON
MIO_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.txt
NET_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.txt
PDL_ yyyymmdd_hhmmss.txt
E -63
8. Compress the files copied to the PC to send to KMBT.
E -64
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 1. MAINTENANCE ITEM
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
1. MAINTENANCE ITEM
1.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
1.1.1 Replacing procedure of the periodical replacement parts
Note
For the replacement procedure of the periodically replaced parts, refer to F.5 Periodical maintenance procedure bizhub PRESS
C7000/C7000P/C6000.
1.1.2 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 50,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000))

No.
Unit classification
Toner collection
section
Description
Toner collect box

A03UR702##
Quan
Implementation classification
tity Cleani Check Lubric Repla
ng
ation
ce
1
Materials
Tools used
The sensor detects its full
automatically
1.1.3 Periodic maintenance 2 (Every 160,000 prints (C6000))

No.
Unit classification
Photo conductor
section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Charging corona /Y
A1DUR713##
Charging corona /M
A1DUR713##
Charging corona /C
A1DUR713##
Charging corona /K
A1DUR713##
Materials
Tools used
Actual replacement cycle: 70
hours charging
Execute the cleaning when it is
dirty.

No.
Unit classification
Photo conductor
section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Drum cartridge /Y
DU-104
Drum cartridge /M
DU-104
Drum cartridge /C
DU-104
Drum cartridge /K
DU-104
Materials
Tools used
Replace it once for every
180,000 prints, drum drive
distance 102km or the lubricant
apply roller drive distance
130km, whichever is earlier
1.1.5 Periodic maintenance 2 (Every 200,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))

No.
Unit classification
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
External section
Dust proof glass /Y, /M, /C, /K
Photo conductor
section
Charging corona /Y
A1DUR713##
Charging corona /M
A1DUR713##
Charging corona /C
A1DUR713##
Charging corona /K
A1DUR713##
Duplex section
ADU conveyance rollers
Photo conductor
section
Charging dust proof filter
Registration cleaning sheet
Paper feed section
Paper feed roller rubber
Separation roller rubber
Pick-up roller
Intermediate conveyance roller /1
Vertical conveyance
section
F -1
Materials
Tools used
Hydro-wipe
Actual replacement cycle: 70
hours charging
Execute the cleaning when it is
dirty.
Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
Scanner section
Scanner unit (glass, mirror) (C7000

only)
Bypass paper feed

section
MB-504
Output tray section

OT-502
Paper holding roller

65AA4849##
Exit roller
A0438907##
Paper exit driven roller /2

65AA4818##
10
()
Pick-up roller
Hydro-wipe

No.
Unit classification
Photo conductor
section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Drum cartridge /Y
DU-104
Drum cartridge /M
DU-104
Drum cartridge /C
DU-104
Drum cartridge /K
DU-104
Materials
Tools used
180,000 prints, drum drive
distance 102km or the lubricant
apply roller drive distance

No.
Unit classification
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Materials
Tools used
External section
Dust proof glass /Y, /M, /C, /K
Hydro-wipe
Duplex section
ADU conveyance rollers
Photo conductor
section
Registration Cleaning Sheet
Paper feed section
Pick-up roller
Vertical conveyance
section
Scanner section
Scanner unit (glass, mirror)
Bypass paper feed

section
MB-504
Output tray section

OT-502

65AA4849##
Exit roller
A0438907##

65AA4818##
()
Pick-up roller
Hydro-wipe
1.1.8 Periodic maintenance 4 (Every 340,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance 5 (Every 300,000
prints (C6000))
No.
Unit classification
Developing section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Developer /Y
DV610Y
Developer /M
DV610M (C7000/C7000P/C6000)
DV611M (C70hc)
Developer /C
DV610C (C7000/C7000P/C6000)
DV611C (C70hc)
F -2
Materials
Tools used
340,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/
C70hc)/300,000 prints (C6000)
or the developing roller drive
distance 200km, whichever is
earlier
Developer /K
DV610K
Developing unit /Y
Developing unit /M
Developing unit /C
Developing unit /K
Hydro-wipe/isopropyl alcohol
1.1.9 Periodic maintenance 5 (Every 350,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance 5 (Every 300,000
prints (C6000))
No.
Unit classification
Description
Fusing section
Fusing separation plate assy

A1DUR74H##
Intermediate transfer Belt drive roller

section
1st transfer pressure roller /Y, /M, /
C, /K
Quan
ng
ation
ce
1
Materials
Tools used
Hydro-wipe/isopropyl alcohol
Tension roller
Belt driven roller /Up (3 rollers)
Belt driven roller /Lw

A03U5042##
Toner collection sheet

A1DUR71C##
Transfer belt cleaning blade

A03U5530##

A03U5012##

A03U5012##
1st transfer roller /C

A03U5012##
1st transfer roller /K

A03U5004##

65AA2611##

65AA4501##
Separation discharging plate assy

A1DUR738##
350,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/

C70hc)/300,000 prints (C6000)
or the transfer belt cleaning
blade drive distance 164km,
whichever is earlier

No.
Unit classification
Paper feed section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Paper feed roller rubber /1, /2, /3

25SA4096##
Separation roller rubber /1, /2, /3

25SA4096##
Reverse de-curler roller

A03U8605##
Reverse gate
Materials
Tools used
Actual replacement cycle:
125,000 feeds

No.
Unit classification
Fusing section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Fusing paper exit roller /Lw

Fusing paper exit roller /Up
A03U7225##
F -3
Materials
Tools used
Fusing Belt
A03U7205##
Fusing roller /Lw

A03U7203##
Fusing bearing /Up
Multemp FF-RM
Fusing bearing /Lw

26NA5371##
Fusing bearing /2
Heat insulating sleeve /Up
Heat insulating sleeve /Lw

A03U7227##
Fusing drive gear /O

A03U8095##
Fusing drive gear /B
Fusing paper exit roller /1
Fusing paper exit roller /2

No.
Unit classification
External section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Filter box
A1DUR703##
Dust proof filter on rear side

A1DUR707##
Developing dust proof filter

A1DUR709##
Photo conductor
section

A1DUR711##
Fusing section
Fusing limiter
65AA5365##
Fusing regulating gear /A

65AA7747##
Registration cleaning sheet assy

A1DUR73B##
Materials
Tools used
Replace the dust proof filter on

rear side and the developing
dust proof filter at the same time
Multemp FF-RM

No.
Unit classification
External section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Filter box
A1DUR703##

A1DUR707##

A1DUR709##
Photo conductor
section

A1DUR711##
Fusing section
Fusing limiter
65AA5365##

65AA7747##
Intermediate transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit

section
A1DUR71B##
Replace the dust proof filter on

rear side and the developing
dust proof filter at the same time
Transfer belt separation claw

A1DUR719##

A1DUR73B##
Materials
Tools used
Multemp FF-RM

No.
1
Unit
classification
Intermediate
transfer
section
Description
Quantity
Cleaning
Transfer belt cleaning unit

A1DUR71B##
Check
Lubrication
Replace
F -4
Materials
Tools used

A1DUR719##

No.
Unit classification
Developing section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Developing unit /Y
A1DUR70X##
Developing unit /M
A1DUR70X##
Developing unit /C
A1DUR74K##
Developing unit /K
A1DUR72S##
Intermediate transfer 2nd transfer earth plate assy

section
A1DUR737##
Materials
Tools used
900,000 prints or the developing
roller drive distance 600km,
whichever is earlier

No.
Unit classification
Fusing section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Materials
Tools used
Fusing roller /1
A03U7201##
Fusing roller /2
A03U7202##
Fusing bearing /Up

A1UD7235##
Fusing bearing /2
56UA7507##
Belt regulating sleeve

A03U7250##

A03U7295##

A03U8082##
Multemp FF-RM
Fusing drive gear /M

A03U8093##
Multemp FF-RM
1.1.17 Periodic maintenance 11 (Every 1,000,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000))

No.
1
Unit
classification
Reverse/exit
section
Description
Quantity
Cleaning
Paper exit de-curler roller

A03U8926##
Guide plate /Up
Check
Lubrication
Replace
Materials
Tools used
Cleaning pad/isopropyl
alcohol
1.1.18 Periodic maintenance 12 (Every 1,020,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))

No.
Unit classification
Developing section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Developing unit /Y
A1DUR70X##
Developing unit /M
A1DUR70X##
Developing unit /C
A1DUR74K##
Developing unit /K
A1DUR72S##
Materials
Tools used
1,020,000 prints or the
developing roller drive distance
1.1.19 Periodic maintenance 13 (Every 1,050,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))

No.
Unit classification
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
F -5
Materials
Tools used

1
Intermediate transfer 2nd transfer earth plate assy

section
A1DUR737##

1
1.1.20 Periodic maintenance 14 (Every 1,400,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc))/Periodic maintenance 12 (Every

1,400,000 prints (C6000))
No.
Unit classification
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Intermediate transfer Belt separation claw solenoid

section
26NA8251##
Registration roller
A1DUR73A##
Bypass paper feed

section
MB-504
Paper feed roller rubber /BP

25SA4096##
Separation roller rubber /BP

25SA4096##
Materials
Tools used

125,000 feeds

1,800,000 prints (C6000))
No.
Unit classification
Fusing section
Description
Fusing duct assy

A1DUR721##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
1
Materials
Tools used

2,000,000 prints (C6000))
No.
Unit classification
Duplex section
Vertical conveyance
section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Intermediate conveyance clutch /2

56AA8201##

56AA8201##

56AA8201##
Materials
Tools used

2,400,000 prints (C6000))
No.
Unit classification
Fusing section
Paper feed section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Fusing lamp assy /Up

A1DUM31A## (Japan)
A1DUM31E## (North America)
A1DUM31F## (Europe)
Fusing temperature sensor assy /Up

(edge)
A1DUR720##
Fusing temperature sensor assy /Lw

(edge)
A1DUR71W##
Pick-up roller
A1DUR71J##
Materials
Tools used

800,000 feeds

2,700,000 prints (C6000))
No.
Unit classification
Fusing section
Description
Fusing heater lamp /4

A03UM32A## (Japan)
A03UM32E## (North America)
A03UM32F## (Europe)
Quan
ng
ation
ce
1
F -6
Materials
Tools used

3,000,000 prints (C6000))
No.
Unit classification
Description
Intermediate transfer Transfer Roller Bearing

section
65AA2638##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
8
Materials
Tools used

4,000,000 prints (C6000))
No.
Unit classification
Paper feed section
MB-504
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Materials
Tools used
Paper feed clutch /1

56AA8201##

2,000,000 feeds

56AA8201##

56AA8201##
Pre-registration clutch /1
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
Pick-up roller /BP

A21ER703##

800,000 feeds
Paper feed clutch /BP

56AA8201##

2,000,000 feeds
1.1.27 Spot replacement (Every 3,600,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000))

No.
Unit classification
Duplex section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
ADU conveyance clutch /1

A03UM201##
ADU transport clutch /2

A03UM201##

A03UM201##
ADU pre-registration clutch

A03UM201##
Materials
Tools used
1.2 DF-622
1.2.1 Spotted replacement (Every 625,000 feeds)
No.
Unit classification
Paper feed section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Pick-up roller
13YH4064##
Paper feed roller

13YH4039##
Separation roller
20AJ4015##
Materials
Tools used
1.3 PF-602
1.3.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 200,000 prints)
No.
Unit classification
Paper feed section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Pick-up rubber
Paper feed roller
F -7
Materials
Tools used
Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Conveyance section
Separation roller
PF separation gear section
Vertical conveyance roller /1
Horizontal conveyance roller /1
()
Alcohol/cleaning pad/multemp
FF-RM

No.
Unit classification
Paper feed section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Pick-up rubber
A03X5652##
Paper feed roller

A03X5653##
Separation roller
A03X5654##
Materials
Tools used
300,000 feeds
1.3.3 Periodic maintenance 3 (Every 2,400,000 prints)

No.
Unit classification
Paper feed section
Conveyance section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Paper feed clutch

56AA8201##
Separation clutch
56AA8201##
Vertical conveyance clutch /1

56AA8201##

56AA8201##

56AA8201##
Horizontal conveyance clutch /1

56AA8201##

56AA8201##
Pre-registration clutch
56AA8201##
Materials
Tools used
2,000,000 feeds
1.4 LU-202
No.
Unit classification
Paper feed section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Pick-up roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Pre-registration roller
Paper dust removing brush
LU separation gear
Materials
Tools used
()
Alcohol/cleaning pad/multemp
FF-RM

No.
Unit classification
Paper feed section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Pick-up roller
A03X5652##
Paper feed roller

A03X5653##
Separation roller
A03X5654##
F -8
Materials
Tools used
300,000 feeds

No.
Unit classification
Paper feed section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Paper feed clutch

56AA8201##
56AA8201##
Materials
Tools used
2,000,000 feeds
1.5 RU-509/HM-102
No.
Unit classification
Entrance
conveyance section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Entrance sensor
De-curler entrance sensor
Output paper density Color density detection timing sensor

detection section
Paper exit section
HM-102
Paper exit conveyance sensor
Paper exit sensor
Humidification section entrance

sensor
Humidification section conveyance

roller
Water feed roller
Materials
Tools used
Blower brush
Humidification roller /Rt

A1TU5001##
Humidification roller /Lt

A1TU5002##

No.
Unit classification
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Output paper density Shutter

detection section
Materials
Tools used
Blower brush
1.5.3 Spotted replacement (Every 300,000 prints)

No.
Unit classification
HM-102
Description
Water feed filter

A1TU5215##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
1
Materials
Tools used
1.5.4 Spotted replacement (Every 1,500,000 prints)

No.
Unit classification
HM-102
Description
Water feed roller

A1TU5003##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
2
Materials
Tools used
1.6 FS-521
No.
Unit classification
Preparation
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Original through check
Materials
Tools used
Removing from the main body

Removing the rear cover
2
Main tray section
Cleaning of each sensor
F -9
Blower brush
Stacker section
Blower brush
Conveyance section
Cleaning of the paper dust removing

brush
Vacuum cleaner/blower brush
Stapler section
Staple scraps box cleaning
Post-process
Installing the rear cover
Final check
Installing to the main body

Cleaning of the cover

No.
Unit classification
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Materials
Tools used
Conveyance section
Bypass roller /Lw pressure release

cam
Molykote EM-30L
Stacker section
Worm gear, cam
Molykote EM-30L
1.6.3 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 operations)

No.
Unit classification
Stapler section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Stapler unit /Fr

A0GYA735##
Stapler unit /Rr

A0GYA736##
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
Main tray section
Description
Paper exit roller /A

122H4825##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
8
Materials
Tools used
1.7 FS-531
No.
Unit classification
Conveyance section
Stacker section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Shift roller motor
Paper exit opening motor
Bypass gate solenoid
Paper assist roller

(sponge roller)
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
Main tray section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce

(sponge roller)
122H4825##
Paper exit roller /B

(sponge roller)
A04D8904##
Intermediate conveyance roller

(sponge roller)
13QE4531##
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
Description
Quan
tity
F -10
Materials
Tools used

Cleani Check
ng
Stacker section
Lubric
ation
Repla
ce
Paper assist roller

(sponge roller)
20AK4210##
Cleaning plate assy

A07RA741##
1.7.4 Spot replacement (Every 500,000 staples)

No.
Unit classification
Stapler section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Stapler unit /Fr

A07RA735##
Stapler unit /Rr

A07RA736##
Materials
Tools used
1.8 FS-612
No.
Unit classification
Conveyance section
Stacker section
Folding section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Shift roller motor
Paper assist roller

(sponge roller)
Folding knife motor
Tri-folding gate solenoid
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
Main tray section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce

(sponge roller)
122H4825##
Paper exit roller /B

(sponge roller)
A04D8904##

(sponge roller)
13QE4531##
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
Stacker section
Description
Paper assist roller

(sponge roller)
20AK4210##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
1
Materials
Tools used
1.8.4 Spot replacement (Every 200,000 staples)

No.
Unit classification
Stapler section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Stapler unit /Fr

15JM-501##
Stapler unit /Rr

15JM-501##
F -11
Materials
Tools used
1.9 PI-502
No.
Unit classification
Paper feed section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Pick-up roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
Paper feed section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Paper feed roller

13QNR705##
Separation roller
13QNR704##
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
Paper feed section
Description
Pick-up roller
50BAR701##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
2
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
Paper feed section
Description
Torque limiter
13QN4073##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
2
Materials
Tools used
1.9.5 Spotted replacement (Every 1,000,000 feeds)

No.
Unit classification
Paper feed section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Paper feed clutch /Up

13QN8201##
Paper feed clutch /Lw

13QN8201##
Materials
Tools used
1.10 LS-505
No.
Unit classification
Description
Preparation
Conveyance section
Final check
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Materials
Tools used
Blower brush
1.11 FD-503
No.
Unit classification
Preparation
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Removing the punch unit

Removing from RU
F -12
Materials
Tools used

2
Punch section
Post-process
Final check
Punch shaft and the punch support

board
Punch drive section
Molykote EM-30L
Installing the punch unit

Installing to RU

No.
Unit classification
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
PI section
Tray up/down
section
Punch section
Conveyance section
Final check
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
Final check
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Materials
Tools used
1.11.4 Spotted replacement (100,000 feeds)

No.
Unit classification
PI section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Paper feed rubber

50BAR702##
Separation rubber
13QNR704##
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
PI section
Description
Pick-up rubber
50BAR701##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
6
Materials
Tools used
1.12 SD-506
No.
Unit classification
Preparation
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Materials
Tools used
Removing the rear cover

Removing the unit
2
Right angle
conveyance section
Folding section
Right angle conveyance sensor /1
Right angle conveyance sensor /2
Right angle conveyance roller /1
Folding main scan alignment home

sensor /Fr1
Folding main scan alignment home

sensor /Fr2
Folding entrance roller /1
F -13
Blower brush
Blower brush
Saddle stitching
section
Saddle stitching paper sensor
Bundle sensor /1
Bundle processing
section
Bundle sensor /2
Trimmer section
Trimmer scraps full sensor
Actuator
Post-process
Final check
Installing the unit
Blower brush
Installing the rear cover

No.
Unit classification
Trimmer section
Description
Paper holding screw

A0H26621##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
2
Materials
Tools used
Molykote EM-30L
Actual lubrication cycle:37,500
cuts
1.12.3 Spotted replacement (Every 18,900 cuts)

No.
Unit classification
Trimmer section
Description
Trimmer board assy

A0H2B622#
Quan
ng
ation
ce
1
Materials
Tools used
18,900 cuts

No.
Unit classification
Trimmer section
Description
Trimmer blade kit

A0H2R901##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
1
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
Trimmer section
Description
Trimmer press motor (M32)

A0H2M101##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
1
Materials
Tools used
1.12.6 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 times)

No.
Unit classification
Bundle processing
section
Description
Bundle press stage gear

15AN7719##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
1
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
Trimmer section
Description
Trimmer blade motor (M31)

A0H2M102##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
1
Materials
Tools used
1.12.8 Spotted replacement (Every 1,000,000 sets)

No.
Unit classification
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
F -14
Materials
Tools used

1
Saddle stitching
section
Stapler assy
15AN-550##

2
1.13 PB-503
No.
Unit classification
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Preparation
Conveyance section
Entrance sensor
SC entrance sensor
Sub tray conveyance roller
Entrance conveyance roller
Cover paper conveyance roller
Glue tank section
Glue tank
Up/down forming
section
Cover paper folding plate
*2
Book spine backing plate
*2
Book exit belt /Rr
Book exit belt /Fr
Cover paper conveyance roller /Rt
Cover paper conveyance roller /Ft
Cover paper table entrance roller
Blower brush
*1
Glue supply section
Blower brush
Book stock section
*3
Pellet hopper
Booklet load limit sensor
Booklet upper limit LED
Booklet sensor /1, /2
Cover paper tray

section
SC section
*4
Book conveyance belt /Fr
Book movement belt
Paper dust removing roller
Conveyance roller
Switchback assist roller /Rr
Switchback assist roller /Fr
Clamp section
Blower brush
10
Relay conveyance
section
Paper reference plate

Clamp pressure plate shaft
Plas guard No.2

Sub scan alignment plate slide shaft

9
Plas guard No.2

Blower brush
Guide shaft /Rt, /Lt

Book conveyance belt /Rr
Tweezers, cleaning pad,

Multemp FF-RM
Tweezers, cleaning pad
Cover paper alignment plate shaft

5
Materials
Tools used
*5
Relay conveyance roller /1, /2, /3, /

4, /5
Relay paper exit roller /1, /2
Relay conveyance entrance sensor
Relay conveyance intermediate

sensor
Relay conveyance exit sensor
11
Book stock section
Book movement belt /2
12
Final check
Plas guard No.2

Blower brush
*1 Lubricate to the glue apply roller motor drive connecting gear.

*2 Cleaning of the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate is an abbreviated cleaning. Remove adhered glue as necessary.
*3 Lubricate to the cover paper alignment plate shaft.
*4 Lubricate to the guide shafts /Rt and /Lt.
*5 Lubricate to the clamp pressing board shaft.
F -15

No.
Unit classification
Cutter section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Roller cutter blade assy

A0756230##
Materials
Tools used
1.13.3 Spotted replacement (Every 3,000,000 operations)

No.
Unit classification
Sub tray section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Sub tray paper exit solenoid (SD4)

15ANR714##
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
SC section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Switchback roller
13GQ4519##
Materials
Tools used
1.13.5 Spotted replacement (Every 120 hours)

No.
Unit classification
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Fan unit section
Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4)

27LA8051##
Deodorant unit
Exhaust filter /A
A15X3017##
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
Deodorant unit
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Exhaust filter /B
A15X3018##
Materials
Tools used

No.
Unit classification
Glue tank section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Glue tank assy

A15XA36A## (100V)
A15XA36E## (120V)
A15XA36F## (240V)
Materials
Tools used
1.14 RU-506
1.14.1 Maintenance 1 (Every 600,000 prints)
No.
Unit classification
Description
Preparation
Conveyance section
Final check
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Materials
Tools used
Blower brush
Drum cleaner/cleaning pad
1.14.2 Spotted replacement (Every 5,000,000 operations)

No.
Unit classification
Conveyance section
Description
Straight gate solenoid (SD1)
Quan
ng
ation
ce
1
F -16
Materials
Tools used
A0GER709##
Stacker section
Straight gate spring

15AG4587##
Stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2)

A0GER700##
Stack switching solenoid (SD3)

A0GER701##
Stacker entrance guide plate

solenoid (SD4)
A0GER702##
1.15 GP-501
No.
Unit classification
Punch section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Materials
Tools used
3-IN-ONE (WD-40Company)
Actual lubrication count: 50,000
punches
This maintenance to be done by
user.
Die Set Pins

No.
Unit classification
Punch section
Description
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Materials
Tools used
Magnalube-G
TeflonGreaseActual lubrication
count:
200,000 punches
This maintenance to be done by
user.
Die Set Shoulder Bolts
1.15.3 Maintenance 3 (Every 3,000,000 prints)

No.
Unit classification
Description
Preparation

GP removement, Front door open
Bypass conveyance
section
Paper Path, Bypass
Punch conveyance
section
Latching Mechanisms aligner
Quan
ng
ation
ce
Aligner Idler Rollers
Roller energy drive
Optical Sensors
Timing Belts
Idler Rollers
Drive Rollers
Back Gauge mechanism
12
Die Guide
13
Paper Path, Punch
Base
6
7
8
Bypass/Punch
conveyance section
9
10
11
14
Punch section
External section
15
Door Closing Latch
16
Post-process
Front door close, GP connected
17
Final check
18
Alcohol
Paper Path, Aligner panels
Materials
Tools used
Alcohol
Blower brush
Alcohol
Blower brush/
vacuum cleaner
Vacuum cleaner
Alcohol
Vacuum cleaner
Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning
pad
1.15.4 Maintenance 4 (Every 12,000,000 prints)

No.
Unit classification
Description
Quan
tity
F -17
Materials
Tools used

Cleani Check
ng
Punch conveyance
section
Aligner Idler Roller Assembly
Belt Aligner (Green)
Punch section
Punch drive cams
Lubric
ation
Repla
ce
Alcohol
Magnalube-G Teflon Grease

Actual lubrication count:
3,000,000 punches
1.15.5 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 punches)

No.
Unit classification
Punch section
Description
Die Set
Quan
ng
ation
ce
1
Materials
Tools used
Replacement is recommended if
hanging chips are usually
generated.
1.15.6 Spotted replacement part (Every 4,000,000 cycle)

No.
Unit classification
Punch section
Description
Back Gauge Mechanism

A0N9PP59##
Quan
ng
ation
ce
1
F -18
Materials
Tools used
Actual replacement count:
4,000,000 punches
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED

PARTS LIST
2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS LIST

2.1 Periodical replacement parts
Note
For the replacement procedure of the periodically replaced parts, refer to F.5 Periodical maintenance procedure bizhub PRESS
C7000/C7000P/C6000 to F.18 Periodical maintenance procedure PB-503.
The parts count No. given in the following table represents the number of the special parts count in the service mode.

2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
(1) Main body
No.
Classification
Parts No.
Quantity
Actual
replacement
cycle
Parts count No.
Filter box
Note
The ozone filter is included in this
filter.
A1DUR703##
600,000 3
A1DUR707##
600,000 4
A1DUR709##
600,000 5
Drum cartridge /Y
DU-104
F.4 Life value 21, 22
4
5
External section
Parts name
Photo conductor
section
Drum cartridge /M
DU-104
Drum cartridge /C
DU-104
Drum cartridge /K
DU-104
Charging corona /Y
A1DUR713##
Charging corona /M
A1DUR713##
10
Charging corona /C
A1DUR713##
11
Charging corona /K
A1DUR713##
12
A1DUR711##
600,000 6
A03U5530##
13
14
Intermediate transfer Transfer belt cleaning blade

section
A03U5012##
350,000 63
15
A03U5012##
350,000 64
16
A03U5012##
350,000 65
17
A03U5004##
350,000 66
18
65AA2611##
350,000 67
19
65AA4501##
350,000 71
20
A03U5042##
350,000 58
21
A1DUR71C##
350,000 60
22
A1DUR738##
350,000 72
23
A1DUR71B##
700,000 59
24
Transfer Belt Separation Claw
A1DUR719##
700,000 68
25
2nd transfer earth plate assy
A1DUR737##
1,050,000 73
26
Belt separation claw solenoid
26NA8251##
1,400,000 70
27
Transfer Roller Bearing
65AA2638##
3,000,000 69
Developer /Y
DV610Y
29
Developer /M
DV610M (C7000/
C7000P)
DV611M (C70hc)
30
Developer /C
DV610C (C7000/
C7000P)
DV611C (C70hc)
31
Developer /K
DV610K
32
Developing unit /Y
A1DUR70X##
1,020,000 49, 50
33
Developing unit /M
A1DUR70X##
1,020,000 51, 52
34
Developing unit /C
A1DUR74K##
1,020,000 53, 54
35
Developing unit /K
A1DUR72S##
Toner collect box
A03UR702##
28
Developing section
36
Toner collection
section
37
Paper feed section
1,020,000 55, 56
F.4 Life value 1
Paper feed roller rubber /1
25SA4096##
125,000 105
38
25SA4096##
125,000 106
39
25SA4096##
125,000 107
40
Separation roller rubber /1
25SA4096##
125,000 105
41
25SA4096##
125,000 106
F -19

PARTS LIST
42
25SA4096##
125,000 107
43
Pick-up roller /1
A1DUR71J##
800,000 109
44
Pick-up roller /2
A1DUR71J##
800,000 110
45
Pick-up roller /3
A1DUR71J##
800,000 111
46
56AA8201##
2,000,000 113
47
56AA8201##
2,000,000 114
48
56AA8201##
2,000,000 115
49
56AA8201##
2,000,000 117
50
56AA8201##
2,000,000 118
51
56AA8201##
2,000,000 119
56AA8201##
2,000,000 120
A1DUR73B##
600,000 123
Registration roller
A1DUR73A##
1,400,000 124
56AA8201##
2,000,000 121
2,000,000 122
52
Vertical conveyance
section
53
54
55
Duplex section
56
57
58
59
Fusing section

56AA8201##
A03U8605##
400,000 125
A03U8926##
1,000,000 126
A1DUR74H##
350,000 136
60
A03U8095##
450,000 94
61
A03U7225##
450,000 86
62
Fusing Belt
A03U7205##
450,000 84
63
Fusing roller /Lw
A03U7203##
450,000 83
64
A03U7227##
450,000 90
65
Fusing bearing /Lw
26NA5371##
450,000 89
66
Fusing limiter
65AA5365##
600,000 87
67
65AA7747##
600,000 95
68
A03U8082##
900,000 92
69
Fusing roller /1
A03U7201##
900,000 91
70
Fusing roller /2
A03U7202##
900,000 82
71
Fusing bearing /Up
A1UD7235##
900,000 93
72
Fusing bearing /2
56UA7507##
900,000 97
73
A03U7250##
900,000 85
74
A03U7295##
900,000 88
75
76
Fusing duct assy
77
A03U8093##
900,000 98
A1DUR721##
1,800,000 96
A1DUM31A##
(Japan)
A1DUM31E##
(North America)
A1DUM31F##
(Europe)
2,400,000 99
78
A03UM32A##
(Japan)
A03UM32E## (North
America)
A03UM32F##
(Europe)
2,700,000 100
79

(edge)
A1DUR720##
2,400,000 101
80

(edge)
A1DUR71W##
2,400,000 102
25SA4096##
125,000 108
125,000
81
MB-504
82
25SA4096##
83
Pick-up roller /BP
A21ER703##
800,000 112
84
56AA8201##
2,000,000 116
85
65AA4849##
200,000 144
86
OT-502
Exit roller
A0438907##
200,000 142
87
65AA4818##
200,000 143
F -20

PARTS LIST
(2) Option
No.
Classification
PF-602
Parts name
Parts No.
Quantity
Actual
replacement
cycle
Parts count No.
Pick-up rubber
A03X5652##
300,000 162, 166
Paper feed roller
A03X5653##
300,000 163, 167
Separation roller
A03X5654##
56AA8201##
2,000,000 164
56AA8201##
2,000,000 168
Separation clutch /1
56AA8201##
2,000,000 165
56AA8201##
2,000,000 169
56AA8201##
2,000,000 170
300,000
56AA8201##
2,000,000 171
10
56AA8201##
2,000,000 172
11
56AA8201##
2,000,000 174
12
56AA8201##
2,000,000 175
13
56AA8201##
2,000,000 173
Pick-up roller
A03X5652##
300,000 149
15
Paper feed roller
A03X5653##
300,000 150
16
Separation roller
A03X5654##
17
Paper feed clutch
56AA8201##
2,000,000 151
56AA8201##
2,000,000 152
A1TU5001##
300,000 322
A1TU5002##
300,000 323
14
LU-202
18
19
HM-102
20
300,000
2.2.2 Periodically replaced parts list (C6000)

(1) Main body
No.
Classification
Parts name
Parts No.
Quantity
Actual
replacement
cycle
Parts count No.
Filter box
Note
The ozone filter is included in this
filter.
A1DUR703##
600,000 3
A1DUR707##
600,000 4
A1DUR709##
600,000 5
Drum cartridge /Y
DU-104
Drum cartridge /M
DU-104
Drum cartridge /C
DU-104
Drum cartridge /K
DU-104
Charging corona /Y
A1DUR713##
Charging corona /M
A1DUR713##
10
Charging corona /C
A1DUR713##
11
Charging corona /K
A1DUR713##
A1DUR711##
600,000 6
A03U5530##
4
5
12
13
14
External section
Photo conductor
section
Intermediate transfer Transfer belt cleaning blade

section
A03U5012##
300,000 63
15
A03U5012##
300,000 64
16
A03U5012##
300,000 65
17
A03U5004##
300,000 66
18
65AA2611##
300,000 67
19
65AA4501##
300,000 71
20
A03U5042##
300,000 58
21
A1DUR71C##
300,000 60
22
A1DUR738##
300,000 72
23
A1DUR71B##
600,000 59
24
A1DUR719##
600,000 68
25
A1DUR737##
900,000 73
26
Belt separation claw solenoid
26NA8251##
1,400,000 70
27
65AA2638##
3,000,000 69
F -21

28
Developing section

PARTS LIST
Developer /Y
DV610Y
29
Developer /M
DV610M
30
Developer /C
DV610C
31
Developer /K
DV610K
32
Developing unit /Y
A1DUR70X##
900,000 49, 50
33
Developing unit /M
A1DUR70X##
900,000 51, 52
34
Developing unit /C
A1DUR74K##
900,000 53, 54
35
Developing unit /K
A1DUR72S##
Toner collect box
A03UR702##
36
Toner collection
section
37
Paper feed section
900,000 55, 56
F.4 Life value 1
25SA4096##
125,000 105
38
25SA4096##
125,000 106
39
25SA4096##
125,000 107
40
25SA4096##
125,000 105
41
25SA4096##
125,000 106
42
25SA4096##
125,000 107
43
Pick-up roller /1
A1DUR71J##
800,000 109
44
Pick-up roller /2
A1DUR71J##
800,000 110
45
Pick-up roller /3
A1DUR71J##
800,000 111
46
56AA8201##
2,000,000 113
47
56AA8201##
2,000,000 114
48
56AA8201##
2,000,000 115
49
56AA8201##
2,000,000 117
50
56AA8201##
2,000,000 118
51
56AA8201##
2,000,000 119
56AA8201##
2,000,000 120
A1DUR73B##
600,000 123
Registration roller
A1DUR73A##
1,400,000 124
52
Vertical conveyance
section
53
54
55
Duplex section
56
57
58
59
56AA8201##
2,000,000 121
56AA8201##
2,000,000 122
A03U8605##
400,000 125

Fusing section
A03U8926##
1,000,000 126
A1DUR74H##
300,000 136
60
A03U8095##
450,000 94
61
A03U7225##
450,000 86
62
Fusing Belt
A03U7205##
450,000 84
63
Fusing roller /Lw
A03U7203##
450,000 83
64
A03U7227##
450,000 90
65
Fusing bearing /Lw
26NA5371##
450,000 89
66
Fusing limiter
65AA5365##
600,000 87
67
65AA7747##
600,000 95
68
A03U8082##
900,000 92
69
Fusing roller /1
A03U7201##
900,000 91
70
Fusing roller /2
A03U7202##
900,000 82
71
Fusing bearing /Up
A1UD7235##
900,000 93
72
Fusing bearing /2
56UA7507##
900,000 97
73
A03U7250##
900,000 85
74
A03U7295##
900,000 88
75
A03U8093##
900,000 98
76
Fusing duct assy
A1DUR721##
1,800,000 96
77
A1DUM31A##
(Japan)
A1DUM31E##
(North America)
A1DUM31F##
(Europe)
2,400,000 99
F -22

PARTS LIST

78
79
80
81
2,700,000 100

(edge)
A1DUR720##
2,400,000 101

(edge)
A1DUR71W##
2,400,000 102
25SA4096##
125,000 108
82
25SA4096##
125,000
83
Pick-up roller /BP
A21ER703##
800,000 112
84
56AA8201##
2,000,000 116
85
MB-504
A03UM32A##
(Japan)
A03UM32E## (North
America)
A03UM32F##
(Europe)
65AA4849##
200,000 144
86
OT-502
Exit roller
A0438907##
200,000 142
87
65AA4818##
200,000 143
(2) Option
No.
Classification
PF-602
Parts name
Parts No.
Quantity
Actual
replacement
cycle
Parts count No.
Pick-up rubber
A03X5652##
300,000 162, 166
Paper feed roller
A03X5653##
300,000 163, 167
Separation roller
A03X5654##
56AA8201##
2,000,000 164
56AA8201##
2,000,000 168
56AA8201##
2,000,000 165
56AA8201##
2,000,000 169
56AA8201##
2,000,000 170
300,000
56AA8201##
2,000,000 171
10
56AA8201##
2,000,000 172
11
56AA8201##
2,000,000 174
12
56AA8201##
2,000,000 175
13
56AA8201##
2,000,000 173
Pick-up roller
A03X5652##
300,000 149
15
Paper feed roller
A03X5653##
300,000 150
16
Separation roller
A03X5654##
17
Paper feed clutch
56AA8201##
2,000,000 151
56AA8201##
2,000,000 152
A1TU5001##
300,000 322
A1TU5002##
300,000 323
14
LU-202
18
19
HM-102
20
300,000
2.2.3 Spotted replacement parts list

(1) Main body
No.
Classification
Duplex section
Parts name
Parts No.
Quantity
Actual
replacement
cycle
Parts count No.
A03UM201##
3,600,000 127
A03UM201##
3,600,000 128
A03UM201##
3,600,000 129
A03UM201##
3,600,000 130
(2) Option
No.
Classification
Parts No.
Quantity
Actual
replacement
cycle
Parts count No.
DF pick-up roller
13YH4064##
625,000 288
Paper feed roller
13YH4039##
625,000 289
Separation roller
20AJ4015##
625,000 290
Water feed roller
A1TU5003##
1,500,000 324
DF-622
Parts name
HM-102
F -23

PARTS LIST

5
Water feed filter
A1TU5215##
300,000 325
Stapler unit /Fr
A0GYA735##
500,000 193
Stapler unit /Rr
A0GYA736##
500,000 194
Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller)
122H4825##
600,000 196
FS-521
122H4825##
200,000 255
10
Paper exit roller /B (sponge roller)
A04D8904##
200,000 256
11
Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge

roller)
13QE4531##
200,000 257
12
Paper assist roller (sponge roller)
20AK4210##
400,000 258
13
Cleaning plate assy
A07RA741##
400,000 276
14
Stapler unit /Fr
A07RA735##
500,000 274
15
Stapler unit /Rr
A07RA736##
500,000 275
122H4825##
200,000 255
17
A04D8904##
200,000 256
18
Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge

roller)
13QE4531##
200,000 257
19
20AK4210##
400,000 258
20
Stapler unit /Fr
15JM-501##
200,000 248
21
Stapler unit /Rr
15JM-501##
200,000 249
Paper feed roller
13QNR705##
100,000 265,270
23
Separation roller
13QNR704##
100,000 266,271
24
Pick-up roller
50BAR701##
200,000 264,269
25
Torque limiter
13QN4073##
26
Paper feed clutch /Up
13QN8201##
1,000,000 263
Paper feed clutch /Lw
13QN8201##
1,000,000 268
Separation rubber
13QNR704##
100,000 202, 205
29
Paper feed rubber
50BAR702##
100,000 203, 206
30
Pick-up rubber
50BAR701##
200,000 201, 204
Trimmer board assy
A0H2B622##
32
Trimmer blade kit
A0H2R901##
37,500 229
33
15AN7719##
500,000 242
34
A0H2M101##
500,000 231
35
A0H2M102##
36
Stapler assy
15AN-550##
16
22
FS-531
FS-612
PI-502
27
28
31
37
FD-503
SD-506
PB-503
600,000 267,272
18,900 230
850,000 232
1,000,000 234, 235
A0756230##
100,000 304
13GQ4519##
600,000 299
27LA8051##
750,000 -
15ANR714##
3,000,000 295
41
Exhaust filter /A
A15X3017##
120 hours 305
42
Exhaust filter /B
A15X3018##
240 hours 306
43
Glue tank assy

(100V)
(120V)
(240V)
A15XA36A##
A15XA36E##
A15XA36F##
2,000 hours 308
38
Switchback roller
39
40
44
A0GER709##
5,000,000 -
45
RU-506
A0GER700##
5,000,000 -
46
A0GER701##
5,000,000 -
47
Stacker entrance guide plate solenoid

(SD4)
A0GER702##
5,000,000 -
Straight gate spring
15AG4587##
5,000,000 -
48
49
50
GP-501
Die Set
DS-5##
Back Gauge mechanism
A0N9PP59##
F -24
500,000 1
4,000,000 317
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 3. ORU-M PARTS
3. ORU-M PARTS
3.1 Life value of the ORU-M parts
(1) ORU-M corresponding parts
ORU-M stands for "Operator Replaceable Unit Management." This function displays the steps/adjustment setting methods and manages
data when the educated user replaces the parts.
This function is enabled by installing the prescribed option and setting DIPSW15-0 to 1. For ORU-M corresponding parts, some parts
provided as an assy of parts larger than those parts replaced normally by the CE so that the user can easily conduct the part replacement
operation.
3.2 ORU-M parts list

(1) ORU-M parts list
The Allow/Restrict of the ORU-M parts can be set on I.5.16.1 ORU-M object/Life setting individually.
Parts No.
Target of ORU-M
Detection of
connector
disconnection
57
Intermediate transfer
unit
Provided
49
Developing unit /Y
51
Detection of
RFID
connection
Required adjustment
Life
(Standard)
Life
Life
(Lower limit) (Upper
limit)*1
None
Blade Setting Mode (for

intermediate transfer)
Belt Line Speed
Adjustment
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
300,000
prints
66%
(200,000
prints)
333%
(1,000,000
prints)
Provided
None
Auto. Developer Charge

Toner Density Sensor Init.
(Y)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Printer Gamma Offset
Auto.
600km
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
Developing unit /M
Provided
None

(M)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
600km
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
53
Developing unit /C
Provided
None

(C)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
600km
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
55
Developing unit /K
Provided
None

(K)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
600km
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
41,42
Developer /Y
None
None

Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
200km
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
43,44
Developer /M
None
None

Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
200km
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
45,46
Developer /C
None
None

Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
200km
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
47,48
Developer /K
None
None

200km
50%
120%
F -25

Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
81
Fusing unit
Provided
None
21,22
Drum unit /Y
23,24
Drum unit /M
25,26
(Standard x
0.5)
(Standard x
1.2)
None
450,000
prints
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
102 km of
drum drive
distance or
130 km of
lubricant
applying
roller drive
distance
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
80%
(130km)
113%
(180km)
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
102 km of
drum drive
distance or
130 km of
lubricant
applying
roller drive
distance
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
80%
(130km)
113%
(180km)
Drum unit /C
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
102 km of
drum drive
distance or
130 km of
lubricant
applying
roller drive
distance
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
80%
(130km)
113%
(180km)
27,28
Drum unit /K
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
102 km of
drum drive
distance or
130 km of
lubricant
applying
roller drive
distance
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
80%
(130km)
113%
(180km)
13,14
Charging corona /Y
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
70h
57%
(40h)
143%
(100h)
15,16
Charging corona /M
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
70h
57%
(40h)
143%
(100h)
17,18
Charging corona /C
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
70h
57%
(40h)
143%
(100h)
19,20
Charging corona /K
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
70h
57%
(40h)
143%
(100h)
Dust proof filter /A
None
600,000
prints
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
Dust proof filter /B
None
600,000
prints
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
Dust proof filter /3
None
600,000
prints
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
F -26
Charging dust proof

filter
None
600,000
prints
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
109
Paper feed roller (Tray

1)
None
800,000
prints
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
110

2)
None
800,000
prints
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
111

3)
None
800,000
prints
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
105
Feed/Separation
rubber (Tray1)
None
125,000
prints
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
106
Feed/Separation
rubber (Tray2)
None
125,000
prints
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
107
Feed/Separation
rubber (Tray3)
None
125,000
prints
50%
(Standard x
0.5)
120%
(Standard x
1.2)
* The performance of the life upper limit is not guaranteed. It is within the range that can be set by CE according to the demand of customer.
3.3 ORU-M parts replacement timing

(1) ORU-M target unit life setting
The life of the ORU-M target unit can be set individually on I.5.16.1 ORU-M object/Life setting of Service Mode. Set the life with percent.
(2) ORU-M warning icon display

When the life of the ORU-M target unit strays and the following conditions are met, the ORU-M warning icon appears on the Machine Screen.
ORU-M function is enabled
Allowed byI.5.16.1 ORU-M object/Life setting
3.4 Management of ORU-M parts counter

(1) Counter display
By pressing [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] on the Utility screen, the ORU-M target part counter appears.
Note
By setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] appears on the Utility screen.
The content which appears on [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] reflects the setting of I.5.16.1 ORU-M object/Life setting.
By seting DIPSW37-0 to 1, a password can be set for [ORU-M(Unit Replace)].
(2) Counter clear

When the user replaces the ORU-M target parts in the ORU-M replacement work mode.
F -27
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 4. LIFE VALUE
4. LIFE VALUE
4.1 Life value of materials/parts
Parts name
Replacement cycle
Actual Life/Verification method
Drum cartridge
Equivalent to 220,000 prints

(C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
(C6000)
When one of 102 km of drum drive distance or 130 km of lubricant

applying roller drive distance reaches.
Shows whichever is closer the end of its parts life in percentage on
Details Counter of the user screen. (100% is the end of life)
Developer

(C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
(C6000)
Developing roller drive distance is 200km.

On the user screen, the life counter shows the remaining life with
percentage. (100% is the end of life)
Toner collect box assy
When the waste toner full sensor (PS52) detects the waste toner full.
Charging corona

(C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
(C6000)
Energization time of the charging corona is 70 hours.

Dust proof filter /A
Changes depending on the coverage, developing roller drive

distance, and temperature/humidity.

(C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
(C6000)
Transfer belt cleaning blade drive distance is 164 km.

4.2 Life value determining condition

The replacement cycles (number of prints) are values calculated based on the actual life of parts when printing is made under the conditions
listed in the table below. Since the idle running time (when not creating an image) of each part can vary widely depending on the print mode, the
actual life cycle may become different between the parts whose replacement cycle (number of sheets) are the same.
Item
Description
Printing method
Full color 6 copies intermittently
Paper size
A4
Coverage
5% coverage for each color
Environmental temp/humidity
Q zone
F -28
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

PROCEDURE bizh...
5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000

5.1 External section
5.1.1 Replacing the filter box, developing dust proof filter
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
Filter box: Every 600,000 prints
Developing dust proof filter: Every 600,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[3]
1. Loosen the screw [1], and then remove the filter cover /Rt1 [2].
2. Release the lock [3], and then remove the filter cover /Rt2 [4].
[1]
[2]
[4]
3. Remove the filter box [1].
[1]
[3]
[1]
4. Remove the label [2] of the filter box [1], and then close the toner
suction inlet [3] with this label.
Note
Make sure to close the toner suction inlet with the label to
prevent the the toner in the filter box from scattering.
[2]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
5. Release the stopper [4] from the notch [2] of the filter cover /Rt2 [1]
by pushing the frame [3], and then remove the developing dust
proof filter [5].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
7. After replacing the filter box, developing dust proof filter, conduct
the following steps.
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.3 for the filter box, counter
reset of the parts counter No.5 for the developing dust proof filter
[5]
5.1.2 Replacing the dust proof filter on rear side

Dust proof filter on rear side: Every 600,000 prints
F -29

PROCEDURE bizh...
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1], and then remove the filter cover /Rr [2].
[1]
[2]
2. Release 2 locks [1], and then remove the dust proof filter on rear
side [3] from the filter cover /Rr [2].
Note
When reinstalling the dust proof filter on rear side, be
careful for the direction so that the filter is not on the rib
[4] of the filter cover /Rr.
[1]

4. After replacing the dust proof filter on rear side, conduct the
following steps.
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.4
[4]
[2]
[3]
5.2 Write section

5.2.1 - Cleaning the dust proof glass
(1) Periodically cleaned parts/cycle
Dust proof glasses /Y, /M, /C and /K: Every 200,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[5]
1. Open the toner supply unit. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening /closing the
toner supply door section.)
2. Remove the dust proof glasses /Y [1], /M [2], /C [3], and /K [4] by
pulling them out.
Note
After the installation, be sure to check that the partial
horizontal magnification adjustment knobs /Y, /M, and /C
[5], 1 each, are securely fixed.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
F -30

PROCEDURE bizh...
3. Clean the glass [2] of each dust proof glass [1] with hydro-wipe.
[1]
[2]
5.3 Photo conductor section

5.3.1 Disassembling procedure of the process unit section
Open the toner supply section
Open the fan cover /Fr
Pull out the process unit
Remove the charging corona
Remove the intermediate transfer unit
Remove the drum cartridge
Remove the developing unit
Remove the process unit
Remove the image correction unit
F -31

PROCEDURE bizh...
5.3.2 Opening /closing the toner supply door section.

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Loosen the screws [2] and [3], and then release the lock lever [4]
in the direction of the arrow to open the toner supply section [5].
Note
Do not press the toner supply door section when it is
open. The shape of the hinge on the toner supply door
section may change.
When closing the toner supply door section, tighten the
screws for about 2 turns with hands and then use the
driver because the screw top may clinch.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
3. When closing the toner supply door section, follow the opening
steps in reverse.
a03uf2c037ca
5.3.3 Pulling out the process unit

Note
To prevent the main body from falling, the process unit and the duplex section cannot be pulled out at the same time.
Be sure to put the duplex section in the main body before pulling out the process unit.
When the process cannot be pulled out, check to see whether the lock levers /1 and /2 are distorted and replace them if necessary.
(Refer to G.2.2.18 Replacing the lock levers /1 and /2)
1. Open the toner supply door section. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening /
closing the toner supply door section.)
2. Loosen the screw [1], and then open the fan cover /Fr [2].
[1]
[2]
a03uf2c039ca
3. Push the mount handle /Lt [1] and the process mount handle /Rt [2]
inward together to unlock the process unit [3], and pull out the
process unit [3] by holding the handles.
[3]
[2]
[1]
a03uf2c040ca
5.3.4 Replacing the drum cartridge

Drum cartridge
: Every 220,000 prints (actual replacement cycle:102 km of drum drive distance, or 130 km of roller drive distance after lubrication,
whichever comes first)*1
: Every 180,000 prints (actual replacement cycle:102 km of drum drive distance, or 130 km of roller drive distance after lubrication,
whichever comes first)*2
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000
F -32

PROCEDURE bizh...
(2) Procedure
Note
The product installs 4 drum cartridges one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. They are common parts.Do not use a
once-used drum cartridge for another cartridge even they are common parts, or the old remaining toner and the new toner mix
up and the print quality degrade.
1. Pull out the process unit. (Refer to F.5.3.3 Pulling out the process
unit)
2. Removethe intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.5.1 Removing/
reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit)
3. Lift up the both edges [2] of the drum stay /Up [1], grab the edges,
and remove the drum unit /Y [3].
4. Remove the drum cartridge /M [4], the drum cartridge /C [5] and
[2]
the drum cartridge /K [6] in the same manner as step 3.
[1]
[7]
[8]
Note
When reinstalling each drum cartridge, be sure to check
that the both edges of the cartridge are fitted in the groove
of the drum attachment blocks /Fr [7] and /Rr [8]. (Drum
attachment blocks /Fr [7] and /Rr [8] shown in the picture
are for the yellow drum cartridge. Install magenta, cyan,
and black drum cartridges in the same manner.)
When reinstalling the drum cartridge /K [6], be careful not
to entangle the sheet [9].
Be careful not to touch or damage the drum photo
conductor section with bare hands.
When leaving drum cartridge, be sure to spread a sheet
over the cartridge to protect from light, and put them in a
dark place.
[5]
[6]
[9]
[4]
[3]
a03uf2c005ca
5. Apply setting powder uniformly to both sides of the drum, and turn
around both ends of the drum with fingers in the arrow-marked
direction until no more setting power is visible.
Note
Be sure to turn around the drum with the outer flanges [4]
of the edge [3]. Do not touch the image area.
Be sure to turn around in the allow direction [2]. Be
careful not to turn around in the reverse direction,
otherwise the blade gets damaged.
[2]
[1]

7. After replacing the drum cartridge, conduct the following items.
- Cleaning the dust-proof glass (Refer to F.5.2.1 - Cleaning the
dust proof glass)
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.21, No.22 for drum
cartridge /Y, No.23, No.24 for drum unit /M, No.25, No.26 for drum
unit /C, No.27, No.28 for drum unit /K
- Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Refer to I.5.3.10 Color Registration
Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
- Color Registration Manual (Refer to I.5.3.11 Color Registration
Manual (Printer Adjustment))
- Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Refer to I.5.4.7 Gamma
Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
[3]
[4]
a0u0t3c001ca
5.4 Charging section

5.4.1 Replace the charging corona.
Charging corona
: 200,000 prints or 70 hours drive, whichever is earlier*1
: 160,000 prints or 70 hours drive, whichever is earlier*2
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000
(2) Procedure
Note
The product installs 4 charging coronas one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. They are common parts. Do not use a
once-used charging corona for another color even they are common parts, or the old remaining toner and the new toner mix up
and the print quality degrade.
F -33
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5]

PROCEDURE bizh...
2. Push down the lever [2] of the charging corona [1] to the right, and
then pull it out [3] to remove.
Note
Push the charging corona [1] gently in the direction to the
upper left [4] after installing the charging corona. This
operation makes the distance appropriate between the
drum unit and the charging corona. Be careful not to push
hard, otherwise the charging corona becomes deformed.
When reinstalling the charging corona [1], be sure to
insert it until the lock [5] can be seen. When the charging
corona is not inserted properly, the image troubles occur.
4. After replacing the charging corona, conduct the following items.
- Cleaning the dust proof glass (Refer to F.5.2.1 - Cleaning the
dust proof glass)
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.13, No.14 for charging
corona /Y, No.15, No.16 for charging corona /M, No.17, No.18 for
charging corona /C, No.19, No.20 for charging corona /K
a0u0t3c002ca
5.4.2 Replacing the charging dust proof filter

Charging dust proof filter :Every 600,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[3]
[2]
[1]

2. Remove the charging dust proof filter [3] from the charging suction
Assy [2] which is provided inside the toner supply door section [1].
4. After replacing the charging dust-proof filters, conduct the following
steps.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.6
8050ma3074
F -34

PROCEDURE bizh...
5.5 Intermediate transfer section

5.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit
(1) Procedure
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
unit)
2. Remove 1 each of the screw [1].
3. Loosen 2 each of the screws [2].
4. Turn the belt positioning shaft [3] counterclockwise, and remove
the shaft.
a03uf2c041ca
[3]
[1]
5. Remove the supporting rod [3] from the charging suction Assy [2]
which is provided inside the toner supply unit [1].
Note
The supporting rod is the assist rod to stand the removed
intermediate transfer unit independently. Be sure to
prepare it in advance when removing the intermediate
transfer unit.
[2]
8050ma3044
[1]
6. Lift up the handles [1] and remove the intermediate transfer unit
[2].
Note
Be careful not to touch or damage the transfer belt [3] with
bare hands.
The handle of the intermediate transfer unit should be
held by its ends with both hands.
[2]
[3]
a03uf2c042ca
7. Set the supporting rod [2] to the intermediate transfer unit [1] and
let the unit stand independently.
Note
Do not turn the transfer belt when assisting the unit with
the supporting rod.
[2]
[1]
8050ma3046
F -35

PROCEDURE bizh...
Note
When installing the intermediate transfer unit [1], be sure
to rotate the cam [3] clockwise until it stops before the
operation.
When installing the intermediate transfer unit, install the
guide pins [2] which is provided 2 each on the front and
back sides in accordance with the transfer supporting
block /Fr [4] and the transfer supporting block /Rr [5].
Also, be careful not to contact the intermediate transfer
unit with the drum.
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
a03uf2c043ca
5.5.2 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit

: every 700,000 prints*1
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000
(2) Procedure
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050ma3048

2. Holding the transfer belt cleaning unit [1], remove the 2 screws [2],
and remove the transfer belt cleaning unit.
Note
Handle the belt cleaner unit gently when removing the
unit. The toner accumulated in between the toner guide
roller of the transfer belt cleaning unit and the
intermediate transfer belt cleaning blade may spill. It is
normal if the toner is accumulated because the toner is
used to grind the belt surface. If the toner is spilled over
the separation claw unit, remove and clean the unit.
The transfer belt cleaning unit consists of the belt
cleaning roller unit and the following components:
Transfer belt cleaning blade: 1
Spring: 2
C-clip: 2
Blade support shaft: 1
Toner collection sheet: 1
Toner collection sheet /2: 1
Spring: 3
Before installing the transfer belt cleaning unit, apply
setting powder to the part [3] on the intermediate transfer
belt. After applying setting powder, rotate the intermediate
transfer belt to brush all setting powder off.
When installing the transfer belt cleaning unit, insert the
guides at the both bottom ends of the transfer belt
cleaning unit in the pins of the intermediate transfer unit
and tighten the screws.
F -36

PROCEDURE bizh...
4. After replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit, conduct the following
steps.
Counter reset of the parts counters No.59, 60, 61 and 62
5.5.3 Replacing the belt cleaning blade

Belt cleaning blade
: Every 350,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Drive distance 164km) *1
: Every 300,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Drive distance 164km) *2
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000
(2) Procedure
[4]
[3]
1. Removethe transfer belt cleaning unit. (Refer to F.5.5.2 Replacing

the transfer belt cleaning unit)
2. Remove 2 springs [1].
3. Remove the C-clip [2], and then pull out the blade fulcrum shaft [3]
to remove the belt cleaning blade [4].
Note
When reinstalling the transfer belt cleaning unit, apply the
setting powder to entire surface of the transfer belt to
which the transfer belt cleaning unit is attached.
Take extra care not to touch or damage the blade of the
belt cleaning blade [4]. After applying setting powder,
rotate the transfer belt to brush all setting powder off.
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3049

5. After replacing the belt cleaning blade, conduct the following items
in order.
Counter reset of the parts counters No.61 and 62
- Blade Setting Mode (Refer to I.5.4.6 Blade Setting Mode (Drum
Peculiarity Adjustment))
5.5.4 Replacing the toner collection sheet

: every 350,000 prints *1
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the toner collection sheet /2 [2]
and then remove the toner collection sheet [3].
Note
Do not bend or damage the PET sheet of the toner
collection sheet.
4. After replacing the toner collection sheet, conduct the following
items.
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050ma3159
F -37

PROCEDURE bizh...
5.5.5 Replacing the transfer belt separation claw

*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000
(2) Procedure
[3]
[4]

2. Remove the screw [1] and remove the separation claw unit [2].
Note
Be careful not to touch or damage the intermediate
transfer belt [3] with bare hands.
When installing the separation claw unit, apply the setting
powder on half a round [4] of the intermediate transfer belt
[3]. After applying setting powder, rotate the intermediate
transfer belt to brush all setting powder off.
[2]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3050
3. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove 3 transfer belt

separation claws [2].
5. After replacing the transfer belt separation claw, conduct the
following items.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3051
5.5.6 Cleaning the intermediate transfer belt/rollers

*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000

Roller in the intermediate transfer unit
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000
F -38

PROCEDURE bizh...
(3) Procedure
[1]

3. Removethe separation claw unit. (Refer to F.5.5.5 Replacing the
transfer belt separation claw)
[1]
8050ma3053
[2]
[3] [6]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[12]
[11]
5. Have the intermediate transfer unit [1] stand with its front side
facing down.
6. Remove screw [2] to release the fixing of the handle [3].
7. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the shaft stopper [5].
8. Remove the screw [6] and then remove the tension plate /Rr [7].
9. Remove two screws [8] and then remove the high voltage power
feed color /Rr [9].
10. Remove the C clip [10] and then remove the bearing [11].
11. Remove the transfer belt [12] by pulling it straight up.
[1]
[8]
[10]
[9]
8050ma3054
F -39

PROCEDURE bizh...
12. Clean the 1st transfer pressure rollers /Y [1], /M [2], /C [3], /K [4],
tension roller [5], belt driven roller /Lw [6], belt drive roller [7], and
belt driven roller /Up [8], [9], [10] with isopropyl alcohol.
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[6]
[7]
[10]
[9]
8050ma3152
Note
When installing the tension plate /Rr, be sure to convey
the projection of the plate as shown in the picture. Also,
when tightening the screw, be sure not to pinch the black
sheet.
When installing the C clip, be sure to lift the shaft to fix
the clip to the groove on the shaft.
When installing the transfer belt, be sure that the side
noted as ''UP SIDE'' at the back side of the transfer belt
edge is placing upward.
Hold the transfer belt by its both ends within 10 mm from
the edge, and do not touch other areas.
Be careful not to touch or damage the transfer belt with
bare hands.
Before installing the transfer belt cleaning unit, apply the
setting powder to entire surface of the transfer belt to
which the transfer belt cleaning unit is attached. After
applying setting powder, rotate the transfer belt to brush
all setting powder off.
14. After replacing the intermediate transfer belt, conduct the following
items.
dust proof glass)
- Blade Setting Mode (Refer to I.5.4.6 Blade Setting Mode (Drum
- Belt Line Speed Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.8 Belt Line Speed Adj.
(Printer Adjustment))
5.5.7 Replacing the first transfer roller and the transfer roller bearing.
F -40

PROCEDURE bizh...

1st transfer roller
Transfer roller bearing: Every 3,000,000 prints
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (Refer to F.5.5.6 Cleaning
the intermediate transfer belt/rollers)
2. Place the intermediate transfer unit as shown in the picture.
3. Remove the C-clip [1].
4. Remove the bearing [2] and slide the stopper /4 [3] to release the
tip of the transfer release arm [4].
5. Slide and remove the 1st transfer roller /K [6].
6. Remove the 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M and /C [5], 1 each.
Note
Never touch the roller of the 1st transfer roller. When
handling the 1st transfer roller, always grasp it by its
metal shaft.
When installing the first transfer roller, be sure that the
shaft surface with groves faces toward you.
When installing the 1st transfer roller, confirm that the
cables are securely fastened and the plastic films on the
cables are not twisted. If the cables are not fastened,
correct by pressing the cables against the metal frame
side. If the plastic films are twisted, move the films to the
center of the cables.
[5]
[4] [3]
[3] [4]
[6]
[1]
[2]
a0u0t3c003ca
7. Remove 2 claws [7] each, and remove 8 transfer roller bearings.

Note
Be careful not to lose the springs when removing the
transfer roller bearings.
Be careful not to brake the claw [7].
[8]
[7]
[9]
[8]

9. When replacing the first transfer roller and the transfer roller
bearing, conduct the following steps
dust proof glass)
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.63 for the first transfer
roller /Y, No.64 for /M, No.65 for /C, No.66 for /K and No.69 for
transfer roller bearing.
[8]
a0u0t3c004ca
5.5.8 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Up

*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000
F -41

PROCEDURE bizh...
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (Refer to F.5.5.6 Cleaning
the intermediate transfer belt/rollers)
2. Lift the 2nd transfer roller /Up [1] upward temporarily, and remove
the roller obliquely downward.
Note
Fixing of the 2nd transfer roller /Up is released after the
high voltage power feed color /Rr is removed when
removing the transfer belt.
Never touch the roller of the 2nd transfer roller /Up. When
handling the 2nd transfer roller /Up, always grasp it by its
metal shaft.
When installing the 2nd roller /Up, place the surface with
the depression on the shaft edge down.
[2]
[1]
3. Remove 2 bearings [2] from the 2nd transfer roller /Up [1].
5. After replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Up, conduct the following
item.
[2]
[1]
8050ma3056
5.5.9 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid (SD1)

(1) Periodically replaced parts /cycle
Belt separation claw solenoid (SD1): Every 1,400,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.5.1 Removing/
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
3. Remove the screw [2] and then release the cable [4] from the
cable clamp [3].
4. Remove 2 screws [5], and then remove the belt separation claw
solenoid (SD1) [6].
Note
After installing the solenoid lever, check if the shaft of
SD1 slides smoothly.
[6]
[1]
[5]

6. After replacing the belt separation claw solenoid (SD1), conduct
the following items.
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
5.5.10 Replacing the separate discharging plate Assy

Separate discharging plate Assy
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000
F -42

PROCEDURE bizh...
(2) Procedure
2. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.11.1 Replacing the
intermediate conveyance clutches /2 (CL4) and /3 (CL5))
3. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Removing/reinstalling
the fusing unit)
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the fixing cover [2].
Note
When reinstalling the fixing cover, be sure to align the
projection [3] with the positioning hole [4].
[2]
[1]
[3] [4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
8050ma3088
5. Remove 2 separate attaching screws [1].

6. Lift up the separate discharging plate Assy [2] to remove the faston
[3] and then remove the separate discharging plate Assy.
Note
Pull out the faston cover part straightly to remove the
faston from the separate discharging plate Assy.
When connecting the faston to the separate discharging
plate Assy, be sure that the cables of the faston cover is
facing inside.
When installing the separate discharging plate Assy, fix
the separate attaching screw of the front side first, and
then slide the positioning.
8. After replacing the separate discharging plate Assy, conduct the
following steps.
5.5.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Lw and the 2nd transfer earth plate Assy
: every 1,050,000 prints*1
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000
F -43

PROCEDURE bizh...
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the separate discharging plate Assy. (Refer to F.5.5.10
Replacing the separate discharging plate Assy)
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the 2nd transfer earth
plate Assy [2].
3. Remove C-clips [3] 1 each.
4. Slide each bearing [4] to the outer side and remove the second
transfer roller /Lw.
Note
Be careful not to touch the parts other than shaft part of
the second transfer roller /Lw.
When installing the 2nd transfer roller /Lw, be sure to
install it with the depression side on the roller shaft facing
towards the machine. (Be sure that no depression is on
the side contacting with the 2nd transfer earth Assy.)
[5]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[4]
[3]

6. When replacing the second transfer roller /Lw and the second
transfer earth Assy, conduct the following steps
- Counter clear the parts counter No.71 for the second transfer
roller /Lw and No.73 for the 2nd transfer earth plate Assy.
[2]
5.6 Developing section

5.6.1 Replacing the developers /Y, /M, /C and /K
Developer /Y, /M, /C, /K
:340,000 prints or 200km drive, whichever is earlier*1
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000
(2) Developer ejection procedures

[1]
[2]
[4]
[1]
1. Open the toner supply section. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening /closing

the toner supply door section.)
2. Loosen 2 screws [1], and then remove the developer charge plate
[2].
3. Loosen 2 screws [3], and then remove the developer charge
funnel /L [4].
4. Loosen 2 screws [5], and then remove the rotation jig [6].
Note
Use the developer charge plate and developer charge
funnel /L for charging new developer.
[3]
[5]
[6]
[2]
5. Remove the developing unit. (Refer to F.5.6.2 Replacing the

developing units /C, /M, /Y, and /K)
6. Repeat the following steps 7 and 8 to exit the developer of each
color.
Note
Do not remove the cover of the developer unit [1] and the
toner inlet [2] when ejecting the developer.
F -44

[1]
[2]
[1]

PROCEDURE bizh...
7. Install the rotation jig [1] to the coupling [2] on the agitator screw
side and turn in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
Never turn the coupling in the direction other than the
specified herein.
8. Install the rotation jig to the coupling [1] on the developing roller
side and turn in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
Never turn the coupling in the direction other than the
specified herein.
When replacing the developer, be sure to conduct "Toner
Density Sensor Init." in Service Mode.
(Refer to I.5.4.9 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum
9. Install all of the developer units which have ejected the developer
to the process unit.
Note
Be sure to charge the developer while the process unit is
set to the main body.
(3) Developer charging procedures

1. Remove the upper cover /Fr. (Refer to G.2.2.5 Upper cover /Fr, /
Rt, /Lt, connector cover /Fr, /Rr, switch cover assy)
2. Insert the developer charge plate [1] into the shoulder screw [2]
and install it by sliding.
Note
The shoulder screws are on the top of each developing
unit.
3. Install the developer charge funnel /L [2] aligning with the groove
of the developer charge plate [1].
Note
Be sure to install the leading edge of the developer charge
funnel /L to the toner supply opening of the developing
unit.
4. Install the included developer charge funnel /U [1] to the developer

charge funnel /L [2].
Note
Be sure to use the developer charge funnel /U that is
included in each developer. Reuse is prohibited.
F -45

PROCEDURE bizh...
5. Charge new developer [1] into the developer charge funnel /U [2].
6. Remove the developer charge funnel /U [1] and the developer

charge funnel /L [2].
7. Pull out the developer charge plate [1] from the shoulder screw [2]
and then slide it to remove.
8. Repeat the steps 2 to 7 to charge the developer to the other
developer units.
9. Reinstall the parts after that following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
After replacing the developer, be sure to clean each dust
proof glass. (Refer to F.5.2.1 - Cleaning the dust proof
glass)
10. After replacing the developers /Y, /M, /C and /K, conduct the
following items.
- Counter reset of the parts counters No.41, 42 for the developer /
Y, No.43, 44 for /M, No.45, 46 for /C,and No.47, 48 for /K.
- Toner Density Sensor Init. (Refer to I.5.4.9 Toner Density Sensor
Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Refer to I.5.3.23 Printer Gamma
Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment))
5.6.2 Replacing the developing units /C, /M, /Y, and /K

Developing units /C, /M, /Y, and /K
:1,020,000 prints or 600km drive, whichever is earlier*1
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000
(2) Procedure
Note
Be careful not to fold the teflon sheet applied on the top cover of the developing unit on the developing roller side.
When cleaning the developing unit, be sure to use a hydro wipe set as a CE tool. Using paper or cloth other than hydro wipe
causes a white line on the image because of the dust and lint stuck in the developing regulation plate of the developing unit.
4 developing units are provided; one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. Each developing unit is common part. Yellow
and magenta are common parts. Do not use a once-used developing unit for another color even they are common parts, or the
old remaining toner and the new toner mix up and the print quality degrade.
F -46

PROCEDURE bizh...
unit)
3. Remove the screws [1], 3 each, and then remove the developing
pressure material [2] by sliding the upside of it.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
a03uf2c050ca
4. Remove the connecter [1], 1 each, and then remove the

developing unit /C, /M, /Y [2] and /K [3] in a backward way.
Note
Attach individual label which is bundled in the unit, to the
developing unit other than black.
After the installation, be sure to check that the partial
horizontal magnification adjustment knobs /Y, /M, and /C,
1 each, are securely fixed. (Refer to F.5.2.1 - Cleaning the
dust proof glass)
[1]
[3]
[2]
6. After replacing the developing units /Y, /M. /C and /K, conduct the
following steps.
- Counter reset of the parts counters No.49 and 50 for the
developing unit /Y, No.51 and 52 for /M, No.53 and 54 for /C, and
No.55 and 56 for /K.
5.7 Toner collect box

5.7.1 Replacing the toner collect box
Toner collect box: Every 50,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Open the toner collection door [1] and then pull out the toner
collect box [2].
[1]
[2]
a03uf2c051ca
F -47

PROCEDURE bizh...
2. Remove the label [1] from the toner collect box [2] and then cover
the entrance of the toner collect box [3].
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3008
5.8 Paper feed section

5.8.1 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller rubber
Pick-up roller: Every 2,400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 800,000 feeds)
Paper feed roller rubber: Every 400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 125,000 feeds)
* Be sure to replace the paper feed roller rubber together with the separation roller rubber at the same time.
(2) Procedure
Note
Since the configurations of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 are the same, the following shows the steps of the paper feed tray /1.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.
2. Remove 2 C-clips [2] and slide outward the bearings [2] to remove
the paper feed roller assy /Up [3].
Note
When reinstalling the paper feed roller assy, check that
there is no foreign objects such as grease on each roller.
[3]
[2]
[6]
[5] [1]
3. Remove the bearing [1].

4. Remove the C-clip [2] and remove the pick-up roller [3].
Note
When reinstalling the pick-up roller, be sure to set it with
its arrow-marked side [4] on the C-clip side [2].
5. Remove the C-clip [5] and remove the paper feed roller [6].
Note
When reinstalling the paper feed roller, be sure to set it
with its arrow-marked side [7] on the C-clip side [5].
[4]
6. Remove the paper feed roller rubber [8] from the paper feed roller.
Note
When reinstalling the paper feed rubber, be sure to set it
with its paint-marked side [9] on the arrow-marked side
[7].
[7]

8. After replacing the pick-up roller and paper feed roller rubber,
conduct the following steps.
[9]
[8]
a03uf2c055ca
F -48

PROCEDURE bizh...
Counter reset of the parts counter No.109 for the pick-up roller
paper feed tray /1, No.110 for the paper feed tray /2, No111 for the
paper feed tray /3.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.105 for the paper feed roller
rubber paper feed tray /1, No.106 for the paper feed tray /2, No107
for the paper feed tray /3.
5.8.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber

Separation roller rubber: Every 400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: 125,000 feeds)
* Replace the separation roller rubber at the same timing as the paper feed roller rubber.
(2) Procedure
Note
1. Remove the paper feed roller assy. (Refer to F.5.10.1 Replacing
[4]
[8] [7] [3]
[6]
the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller rubber)
2. Set the paper size guide [1] to the minimum width.
3. Loosen the screw [2], and while holding up the paper lift plate [3],
remove the paper stopper plate [4] by putting up a part [5] of it and
pulling out to the Fr side [6].
4. Remove the C-clip [7] and remove the separation roller [8].
Note
When reinstalling the paper feed roller, check that there is
no foreign objects such as grease on each roller.
[9]
[10]
[8]
[1]
[5]
[2]
5. Remove the separation roller rubber [9] from the separation roller
[8].
Note
When reinstalling the separation roller rubber, be sure to
set it with its paint-marked side [10] on the C-clip side [7].
7. After replacing the separation roller rubber, conduct the following
item.
For the separation roller rubber: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.105 for tray /1, No.106 for tray /2, No.107 for tray /3.
5.8.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch
Paper feed clutches /1, /2, /3 : Every 4,000,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: 2,000,000 prints)
Pre-registration clutches /1, /2, /3 : Every 4,000,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: 2,000,000 prints)
(2) Procedure
Note
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1 [1].
2. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the paper feed unit cover [3].
[2]
[3]
[2] [3]
[1]
[3]
a03uf2c052ca
F -49

PROCEDURE bizh...

[5]
[3]
[2]

4. Remove the screw [2] and loosen the fixing shaft screw [3].
5. Slide the paper feed unit [4] to the rear side and then bring it
upward Disconnect the connector [5] and remove the paper feed
unit [4].
[1]
[4]
[9] [10]
[4]
[3]

7. Remove the C-clip [2] and remove the paper feed clutch [3].
Note
When reinstalling paper feed clutch, be sure to align each
stopper [5] to each guide [5].
[1]

9. Remove the C-clip [7] and remove the pre-registration clutch [8].
Note
When reinstalling pre-registration clutch, be sure to align
each stopper [9] to each guide [10].
[8]
[7]
[6] [5]
[2]
11. After replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration
clutch, conduct the following item.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.113, 114, 115 for the paper
feed clutch /1, /2, /3
Counter reset of the parts counter No.117, 118, 119 for the preregistration clutch /1, /2, /3
a03uf2c057ca
5.9 Vertical conveyance section

5.9.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (CL13)
Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (CL13): Every 2,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
1. Remove the right covers /Lw1, /Lw2 and /Up4. (Refer to G.2.2.3
Right cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Up4, /Lw1, /Lw2)
2. Pull out the paper feed tray /[1], /2 [2], and /1[3].
3. Remove 3 screws [4] and then remove the right cover /Lw3 [5].
Note
Remove the right cover /Lw1 to install LU and PF. Remove
the right cover /Lw1 and /Up4 to install MB. (Refer to G.
2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Up4, /Lw1, /Lw2)
[1]
F -50

PROCEDURE bizh...
4. Push up the hooks [1] on the right and left to separate the bypass
up down cover [2] from the vertical conveyance section [3].
Note
Conduct this steps only when MB is connected.
[1]
[2] [2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
a03uf2c064ca
5. Remove 7 screws [1].

6. Pull out the vertical conveyance section [2] and disconnect the
connecter [3] to remove the vertical conveyance section [2].
Note
When installing the vertical conveyance section, be sure
to close the vertical conveyance door first and fix the
screws.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[8]
[4] [3]

8. Remove the E-ring [2] and then remove the spacer [3] and the
gear [4].
9. Remove the C-clip [5] and then remove the intermediate
conveyance clutch /1 (CL13) [6].
Note
When reinstalling CL13, be sure to align each stopper [7]
to each guide [8].
[2]
[5]
[1]
11. After replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (CL13),
conduct the following items.
a03uf2c066ca
5.10 Registration section

5.10.1 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet
Registration cleaning sheet assy: Every 600,000 prints
F -51

PROCEDURE bizh...
(2) Procedure
[1]
[3]

3. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the cover [2].
4. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the registration cleaning sheet
assy[4].
6. After replacing the registration cleaning sheet assy, conduct the
following steps.
[2]
[4]
[3]
a03uf2c067ca
5.10.2 Replacing the registration roller

Registration roller: Every 1,400,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[5]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[3]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[6]
[8]
1. Remove the registration cleaning sheet assy. (Refer to F.5.10.1

Replacing the registration cleaning sheet)
2. Remove the duplex section cover /Rt, duplex section release lever,
and duplex section cover /Lt. (Refer to F.5.11.1 Replacing the
3. Remove the fixing cover. (Refer to F.5.5.10 Replacing the
separate discharging plate Assy)
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the gear cover [2].
5. Disconnect the connector [3], and then release the wiring harness
from 2 clamps.
6. Remove the C-clips [4], 1 each, and remove the bearings [5] on
the front and the back, 1 each.
7. Remove 2 screws [6], and then remove the registration unit [7].
Note
When removing the registration unit [7], open the
conveyance guide plate /Up [8] and move the registration
unit to the back side of the duplex section, and then
remove it pulling out the shaft on the front from the panel
of the duplex section.
When reinstalling the registration unit, be careful not to
damage the paper feed side of the guide plate.
[4]
8050ma3208
F -52

PROCEDURE bizh...
8. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the registration gear [2] and the
pin [3].
Note
When reinstalling the registration gear [2], be sure to
reinstall the pin [3].
[5]

10. Remove 2 E-rings [5] and 2 bearings [6].
[6]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[6]
8050ma3209
11. Release the hook [2] of the spring [1], and then remove the
registration roller [3].
Note
When reinstalling the spring [1], be sure to set it at its
original position.
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3210
F -53

PROCEDURE bizh...
12. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the spacers /1 [3] and /2
[4], registration regulation plate [5], spring [6], torque limiter [7],
and pin /A [8] from the registration roller [2].
Note
When reinstalling the registration regulation plate, be sure
to set the projection [10] of the torque limiter to the detent
hole [9].
[2]
14. After replacing the registration roller, conduct the following items.
[1]
[10]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[9]
[8]
8050ma3211
5.11 Duplex section

5.11.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 (CL4) and /3 (CL5)
F -54

PROCEDURE bizh...
(2) Procedure
[3]
[1]

2. While releasing the lock [2], push the lever [1] that pulls out the
duplex section down in the counterclockwise direction and remove
the duplex section [3].
Note
The process unit and the duplex section cannot be pulled
out at the same time to prevent the main body from falling.
When pulling out the duplex section, return the process
unit to the main body in advance.
When the duplex section cannot be pulled out, check to
see whether the lock levers /1 and /2 are distorted and
replace them if necessary. (Refer to G.2.2.18 Replacing the
lock levers /1 and /2)
[2]
[4]
[1]

the fusing unit)
4. Remove 3 screws [3] and screw [2].
Note
Screw [2] is attached from underneath the duplex section
cover /Rt [3].
5. Pull out the duplex section cover /Rt [3] halfway and disconnect
two connectors [4] to remove the cover.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[3]
6. Open the jam release lever [1].

7. Remove the screw [2], and pull out the duplex section pull out
lever [3].
8. Remove 2 screws [4] and remove the duplex section cover /Lt [5].
[2]
[3]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a03uf2c069ca

Note
(When reinstalling CL4, be sure to align each stopper [4]
to each guide [5].
Note
(When reinstalling CL5, be sure to align each stopper [9]
to each guide [10].
The picture shows the case when the MB is connected.
F -55

PROCEDURE bizh...
14. After replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (CL4)and /3
(CL5), conduct the following items.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.121 for the intermediate
conveyance clutch /2 (CL4) and No.122 for /3 (CL5)
5.11.2 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL2), /3 (CL3), ADU pre-registration clutch (CL18)
(1) Spotted replaced parts/cycle
ADU conveyance clutch /1 (CL1): Every 3,600,000 prints

ADU pre-registration clutch (CL18): Every 3,600,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[4]
[5] [2]
[1]
[7] [11] [6] [9] [8]
[3]
[10]

the fusing unit)
4. Remove the duplex section covers /Rt and /Lt. (Refer to F.5.11.1
Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 (CL4) and /3
(CL5))
6. Remove the C-clip [2], and then remove the ADU conveyance
clutch /1 (CL1) [3].
Note
When reinstalling CL1, be sure to align each stopper [4] to
each guide [5].
7. Remove the screw [6], and then remove the stay [7].
clutch /2 (CL2) [10].
Note
When reinstalling the stay [7], be sure to set it at the
position to keep the stopper [11] of CL2.
[2]

11. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the ADU lock solenoid unit
[3].
clutch /3 (CL3) [6].
Note
When reinstalling CL3, be sure to align each stopper [7] to
each guide [8].
[1]
[3]

15. Remove the C-clip [10], and then remove the ADU pre-registration
clutch (CL18) [11].
Note
When reinstalling CL18, be sure to align each stopper [12]
to each guide [13].
[4]
[6]
[13]
[9]
17. After replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL2)
and /3 (CL3) and the ADU pre-registration clutch (CL18), conduct
the following item.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.127 for the ADU conveyance
clutch /1 (CL1), No.128 for the ADU conveyance clutch /2 (CL2),
No.129 for the ADU conveyance clutch /3 (CL3), and No.130 for
the ADU pre-registration clutch (CL18).
[10]
[8]
[7] [5] [12] [11]
F -56

PROCEDURE bizh...
5.12 Reverse/exit section

5.12.1 Replacing the reverse de-curler roller
Reverse de-curler roller :every 400,000 prints
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
4. Release the hooks [3] of the spring from the screw [2] to remove
the screws [2] and [4].
5. Remove the paper exit guide plate /4 Assy [5].
[5]
[1]
[2] [3] [4]

8050ma3096
[11] [10]
[9]
[13]
[12]
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
[8] [7]
[6]
[14]
[5]
[4] [3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3097
5.12.2 Replacing the paper exit de-curler roller

Paper exit de-curler roller:Every 1,000,000 prints
F -57
Remove the screw [1], and remove the knob [2].

Remove the paper exit plate /Fr [3] and the spring [4].
Remove 2 screws [5] and remove the bearing [6].
Remove the E ring [7] and then remove the spacer [8], bearing [9],
and paper exit installation plate /Rr [10].
Remove the spring [11] and then remove the spacer [12].
Remove the bearing [13] and then remove the reverse de-curler
roller.
Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
After replacing the reverse de-curler roller, conduct the following
steps.

PROCEDURE bizh...
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the left cover. (Refer to G.2.2.2 Left cover)
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].
[2]
[1]
5. Lower the front side [2] of the paper exit unit [1], and then remove
the paper exit unit while paying attention not to hit the frame [4]
with the pin [3].
Note
When reinstalling the paper exit unit, be sure to insert the
pin [5] to the frame first.
[2]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
6. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the reinforcing plate /Lt [2].
[2]
F -58

[8]

PROCEDURE bizh...
7. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
When reinstalling the gear [2], be sure to set it with its
arrow-marked side [3] on the E-ring side [1].
[3]
8. Remove the E-ring [4] and remove the gear [5].

Note
When reinstalling the gear [7], be sure to set it with its
arrow-marked side [8] on the E-ring side [6].
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[2]
10. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the bearing [2].
11. Remove the E-ring [3] and remove the bearing [4].
12. Remove the paper exit de-curler roller [5].
[5]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
F -59

PROCEDURE bizh...
13. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and remove 2 bearings [2].
15. After replacing the paper exit de-curler roller, conduct the following
items.
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
a03uf2c075ca
5.13 Fusing section

5.13.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit
Note
The fusing section is extremely hot immediately after turning OFF the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of
the main body. To prevent burn injuries, be sure to start operations when the temperature cools down sufficiently.
(1) Procedure
[5]

3. Open the paper reverse/exit section [1].
4. Loosen the screw [2].
5. Slide the fusing unit [3] to the front once, and then lift it to remove.
Note
When reinstalling the fusing unit, align the projection [5]
of the fusing unit to the guide [4] of the duplex section.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5.13.2 Replacing the fusing drive gear /B, fusing duct assy
Fusing drive gear /B: Every 900,000 prints
Fusing duct assy: Every 1,800,000 prints
F -60

PROCEDURE bizh...
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]

the fusing unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the connector cover [2].
Note
When reinstalling the connector cover, be sure to set the
projection [3] to the hole [4] of the fusing unit.
[3]
[4]
3.
4.
5.
6.
[2]
[3]
Disconnect the connector [1].

Remove the screw [2], and then remove the knob [3].
Loosen the screw [4].
Remove 2 screws [5], and then remove the fusing cover /Fr [6].
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the fusing cover /Rr [2].
[1]
F -61

[3]
[4]

9. Remove 2 screws [2] to release the fixing of the connector
mounting bracket [3].
Note
Depending on the cables [4], keep the connection between
the connector mounting bracket and the fusing drive assy
[5].
[2]
[5]

PROCEDURE bizh...
[1]
[6]
[5]
10. Remove the screw [1], and then release the fixation of the fusing
duct /2 assy [2].
11. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the sensor positioning
plate assy [4].
Note
When removing the fusing drive assy, be sure to check
that the fixing of the fusing duct /2 assy is already
released. Removing the fusing drive assy without
releasing the fixing of the fusing duct /2 assy may damage
the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5).
12. Remove 4 screws [5], and then remove the fusing drive assy [6].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[5]
[4]
13. Remove the fusing drive gear /B [1].

Note
When installing new fusing drive gear /B, be sure to apply
multemp FF-RM inside and outside of the gear.
When reinstalling the fusing drive gear /B, be careful for
the direction of depression [2].
[1]
[2]
F -62

PROCEDURE bizh...
14. Pull and remove the fusing duct /2 assy [1] from the fusing duct /3
assy [2].
16. After replacing the fusing drive gear /B and the fusing duct assy,
conduct the following items.
- For fusing drive gear /B: Counter reset of the parts counter No.
92, for fusing duct assy: Counter reset of the parts counter No.96
[2]
[1]
5.13.3 Replacing the fusing separation plate assy

: Every 350,000 prints*1
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc
*2 C6000
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing cover /Rr. (Refer to F.5.13.2 Replacing the
fusing drive gear /B, fusing duct assy)
Note
When reinstalling the fusing cover /Rr, be sure to release
the pressure by rotating the knob [1] counterclockwise.
[1]
3. Open the fusing paper exit plate assy [2], and press the fusing
roller by rotating the knob [1] counterclockwise.
[2]
[1]
F -63
5. Remove 2 springs [1], and remove the fusing separation plate assy
[2] in the direction of the arrow.
[2]
[1]

PROCEDURE bizh...
[1]
6. Note to keep in mind when reinstalling the item

Note
When reinstalling the spring [1], be sure to use the spring
hook [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
7. Note to keep in mind when reinstalling the item

Note
When reinstalling the fusing separation plate assy, be
sure to check that the fusing separation plate assy [1]
touches the metal frame [2].
9. After replacing the fusing separation plate assy, conduct the
following step.
5.13.4 Replacing the fusing drive gear /M

Fusing drive gear /M: Every 900,000 prints
F -64

PROCEDURE bizh...
(2) Procedure
[3] [2]
[1]

the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing drive assy. (Refer to F.5.13.2 Replacing the
3. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the spacer [2] and the
fusing drive gear /M [3].
Note
When reinstalling the fusing drive gear /M, be careful for
the direction of the arrow-mark [4].
When reinstalling the fusing drive gear /M, be sure to
apply multemp FF-RM to the gear.
[4]
4. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the spacer [2] and the
fusing drive gear /M [3].
6. - After replacing the fusing drive gear /M, conduct the following
items.
5.13.5 Replacing the fusing lamp assy /Up

Fusing lamp assy /Up: Every 2,400,000 prints
Note
The fusing lamp assy /Up consists of the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2), /2 (L3) and /3 (L4).
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
3. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the fusing duct /5 assy [2].
Note
When reinstalling the fusing duct /5 assy, be sure to set
the edge [3] of the duct to the hole [5] of the retaining
plate /2 [4].
Or, it may damage the fusing heater lamp.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[1]

5. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the fusing power supply
plate /Up assy [3].
Note
The fusing power supply plate /Up assy is with the cables
[4].
a03uf2c014ca
F -65

[4]
[3]
[5]
[2]

PROCEDURE bizh...
6. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the heater support plate /
Rr [2].
Note
When reinstalling the heater support plate /Rr, be sure to
set the projection [5] of the fusing lamp /Up [4] to the slit
[3].
[1]

8. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the heater support plate /
Fr [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
a03uf2c016ca
9. Remove the fusing lamp assy /Up [1].

Note
Be careful for the direction to pull out the fusing lamp
assy /Up.
Never touch the lamp section of the fusing lamp assy /Up
with bare hands.
11. - After replacing the fusing lamp assy /Up, conduct the following
item.
[1]
5.13.6 Replacing the fusing roller /2, fusing bearing /2, fusing drive gear /O
Fusing roller /2: Every 900,000 prints
Fusing bearing /2: Every 900,000 prints
Fusing drive gear /O: Every 450,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1]
[1]

the fusing unit)
3. Remove the fusing lamp assy /Up. (Refer to F.5.13.5 Replacing
the fusing lamp assy /Up)
4. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the fusing cover /Up assy
[2].
[2]
F -66

PROCEDURE bizh...
5. Prepare the removed fusing drive assy [1].
6. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove 2 fusing jigs [3].
[2]
[1]
7. Insert the fusing jigs [2], 1 each, to 2 slits, and then release the
pressure of the fusing belt [3].
8. Remove 3 screws [4], and then remove the roller mounting plate
[5].
9. Remove the fusing bearing [6].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[2]
[1]
10. Cover the fusing belt [1] with the hydro wipe [2].
Note
Never touch the fusing belt with bare hands.
11. Insert the screw driver [4] into the fusing roller /2 assy [3], and then
remove the fusing roller /2 assy while pressing the fusing belt.
Note
When pulling out the fusing roller /2 assy, be careful not
to contact it to the hole [5] of the frame.
[5]
[3]
[4]
F -67

[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]

PROCEDURE bizh...
12. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the fusing drive gear /O
[2].
Note
When reinstalling the fusing drive gear /O, be sure to set it
with its arrow-marked side [3] on the fusing bearing side
[4].
When reinstalling the fusing drive gear /O, be sure to
apply multemp FF-RM to the gear.
13. Remove the fusing bearing /2 [4] from the fusing roller /2 assy [5].
15. After replacing the fusing roller /2, fusing bearing /2, fusing drive
gear /O, conduct the following item.
- For fusing roller /2: Counter reset of the parts counter No.82, for
fusing bearing /2: Counter reset of the parts counter No.97, for
fusing drive gear /O: Counter reset of the parts counter No.94
[5]
a03uf2c022ca
5.13.7 Replacing the fusing belt, fusing roller /1, insulating sleeve /Up, fusing bearing /Up, belt regulating sleeve
Fusing belt: Every 450,000 prints

Fusing roller /1: Every 900,000 prints
Insulating sleeve /Up: Every 900,000 prints
Fusing bearing /Up: Every 900,000 prints
Belt regulating sleeve: Every 900,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4] [5]

the fusing unit)
3. Remove the fusing lamp assy /Up. (Refer to F.5.13.5 Replacing
the fusing lamp assy /Up)
4. Remove the fusing roller /2 assy. (Refer to F.5.13.6 Replacing the
fusing roller /2, fusing bearing /2, fusing drive gear /O)
5. Remove the O-ring [1], 1 each.
6. Remove the insulating sleeve /Up [2], 1 each, and then remove the
fusing bearing /Up [3], 1 each.
Note
When installing the insulating sleeve /Up, be sure to apply
multemp FF-RM to the contact area of the fusing bearing /
Up and the fusing roller /1 assy [4].
7. Remove the fusing roller /1 assy [4] and the fusing belt [5].
Note
Never touch the roller surface of the fusing roller /1 assy
and the area other than the edges of the fusing belt with
bare hands.
[3]
[2]
[1]
F -68
8. Remove the fusing belt [2] from the fusing roller /1 assy [1].
Note
Be sure to set the side with the lot number [3] on the rear
side.
Be careful not to adhere the developer to inside the fusing
belt and the surface of the fusing roller /1 assy. Adhered
developer may cause the image trouble.
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]

PROCEDURE bizh...
a03uf2c024ca
[2]
[2]
[1]
9. Remove the O-rings [1], 1 each, and then remove 2 belt regulating
sleeves [2].
Note
Never touch the roller surface of the fusing roller /1 [3].
Be sure to spread the hydro wipe [4] when putting down
the fusing roller /1 to prevent the developer adhesion.
11. After replacing the fusing belt, fusing roller /1, insulating sleeve /
Up, fusing bearing /Up, and belt regulating sleeve, conduct the
following item.
- For fusing belt: Counter reset of the parts counter No.84, for
fusing roller/1: Counter reset of the parts counter No.91, for
insulating sleeve /Up: Counter reset of the parts counter No.88, for
fusing bearing /Up: Counter reset of the parts counter No.93, for
belt regulating sleeve: Counter reset of the parts counter No.85
[4]
[3]
a03uf2c025ca
5.13.8 Replacing the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5)

Fusing heater lamp /4 (L5): Every 2,700,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2]

the fusing unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the fusing entrance guide
plate [2].
[1]
F -69

PROCEDURE bizh...
[1]
5. Prepare the packaging box [1] for the fusing roller /Lw.
6. Open the fusing main body /Up assy [2], and support it with the
packaging box [1] for the fusing roller /Lw.
Note
Be sure to support the fusing unit with the packaging box
for the fusing roller /Lw since the fusing main body /Up
assy is heavy.
[2]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[6]
[2]

8. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the fusing duct /3 assy [3]
and the fusing duct /4 assy [4].
Note
When reinstalling the fusing duct /3 assy and the fusing
duct /4 assy, be sure to set the edge [5] of the fusing
duct /4 assy to the hole [6] of the fusing duct /3 assy.
Or, it may damage the fusing heater lamp.
[1]
[4]
[3]
9. Remove the fusing duct /5 assy. (Refer to F.5.13.5 Replacing the

fusing lamp assy /Up)
10. Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the fusing heater
lamp /4 (L5) [2].
Note
Be careful not to touch the lamp section of the fusing
heater lamp /4 (L5) with bare hands.
When reinstalling the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5), be sure to
put the wiring harness on rear side.
[2]
[1]
a03uf2c029ca
12. After replacing the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5), conduct the
following item.
F -70

PROCEDURE bizh...
5.13.9 Replacing the fusing roller /Lw, fusing bearing /Lw, insulating sleeve /Lw
Fusing roller /Lw: Every 450,000 prints
Fusing bearing /Lw: Every 450,000 prints
Insulating sleeve /Lw: Every 450,000 prints
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
3. Remove the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5). (Refer to F.5.13.8
Replacing the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5))
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the assist block /Rr assy
[2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
5. Open the fusing paper exit plate assy [1].

6. Loosen the screw [2] once, and then retighten it to the position
where the fusing separation plate assy [3] is open to make it the
stopper.
7. Remove the C-ring [4], and then remove the insulating sleeve /Lw
[5] and the fusing bearing /Lw [6].
Note
When reinstalling the insulating sleeve, be sure to apply
multemp FF-RM to the contact area with the fusing roller /
Lw.
8. Remove the screw [7], and then remove the support plate /1 [8].
9. Remove the fusing roller /Lw assy [9].
[1]
[6] [5]
[9]
[4]
[7]
[8]
10. Remove the C-ring [1] and the gear [2].
[1]
[2]
a03uf2c032ca
F -71

PROCEDURE bizh...
11. Remove the C-ring [1], and then remove the insulating sleeve /Lw
[2] and the fusing bearing /Lw [3].
Note
When reinstalling the fusing roller /Lw [4] and the
insulating sleeve, be sure to apply multemp FF-RM to the
contact area.
[2] [3]
[1]
a03uf2c033ca
13. After replacing the fusing roller /Lw, fusing bearing /Lw, and the
insulating sleeve /Lw, conduct the following item.
- For fusing roller /Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter No.83, for
fusing bearing /Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter No.89, for
insulating sleeve /Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter No.90
5.13.10 Replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy /Lw (edge)

Fusing temperature sensor assy /Lw (edge): Every 2,400,000 prints
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing entrance guide plate. (Refer to F.5.13.8
4. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the fusing temperature
sensor assy /Lw (edge) [3].
6. After replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy /Lw (edge),
conduct the following item.
[1]
[3]
[2]
a03uf2c034ca
5.13.11 Replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy /Up (edge)

Fusing temperature sensor assy /Up (edge): Every 2,400,000 prints
F -72

PROCEDURE bizh...
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]

the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing covers /Fr and /Rr. (Refer to F.5.13.2
Replacing the fusing drive gear /B, fusing duct assy)
3. Remove the fusing cover /Up assy. (Refer to F.5.13.6 Replacing
the fusing roller /2, fusing bearing /2, fusing drive gear /O)
4. Remove the screw [1], and then loosen the screw [2] to remove
the cover [3].
Note
The screw [2] cannot be removed fully. Be sure to check
that the screw [2] is loosen enough to be separated from
the cover [3].
5. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 3 cable clamps
[2].
7. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the fusing temperature
sensor assy /Up (edge) [5].
9. After replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy /Up (edge),
[3]
5.13.12 Replacing the fusing paper exit roller /Up

Fusing paper exit roller /Up: Every 450,000 prints
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
2. Open the fusing paper exit plate assy [1], and then lock it with the
screw driver [2].
3. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the duct assy [4].
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
F -73

[3]
[4]
4. Remove 2 E-rings [1].

5. Slide the shaft [2] in the direction of the arrow [3], and then remove
2 fusing paper exit rollers /Up [4].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
a03uf2c048ca
6. Remove the bearings [2], 2 each, from the fusing paper exit roller /
Up [1].
8. After replacing the fusing paper exit roller /Up, conduct the
following item.
[1]
[2]

PROCEDURE bizh...
a03uf2c049ca
5.13.13 Replacing the fusing regulating gear /A, fusing limiter

Fusing regulating gear /A: Every 600,000 prints
Fusing limiter: Every 600,000 prints
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
2. Put it on the flat table gently with the paper feed side down.
3. Remove the E-ring [1].
[1]
[2]
8050ma3144
4. Slide the shaft [1] to the rear side, and then pull it out while sliding
the flat cut section [2] of the shaft in the notch of the panel.
[1]
8050ma3145
F -74

PROCEDURE bizh...
[1]
8050ma3146
6. Remove the fusing regulating gear /A [1] and the fusing limiter [2].
Note
Be careful not to loose the pin [4] which is set in the shaft
[3].
8. - After replacing the fusing regulating gear /A and the fusing limiter,
- For fusing regulating gear /A: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.95, for fusing limiter: Counter reset of the parts counter No.87
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3147
5.14 OT-502
5.14.1 Replacing the paper hold roller
Paper hold roller: Every 200,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove OT-502. (Refer to G.2.2.24 OT)
2. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 2 paper hold
roller assy [2].
[1]
[2]
a03uf2c076ca
3. After removing the E-ring [1], pull out the shaft [2], and then
remove the paper hold roller [3].
4. Remove the paper hold roller from the other paper hold roller assy
following Step 3.
6. After replacing the paper hold roller, conduct the following item.
[2]
[3]
[1]
a03uf2c077ca
5.14.2 Replacing the paper exit roller

Paper exit roller: Every 200,000 prints
F -75

PROCEDURE bizh...
(2) Procedure
Note
When reinstalling the gear, be sure to set it with its arrowmarked side [3] on the E-ring side [1].
[3]
[2]
[1]
a03uf2c123ca
3. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and then remove the bearing [2].

4. Remove the E-ring [3] and the bearing [4].
5. Remove 3 screws [5], and then remove the paper exit roller
mounting plate /Rr [6] and the paper exit roller [7].
7. After replacing the paper exit roller, conduct the following item.
[2]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[4]
a03uf2c124ca
5.14.3 Replacing the paper exit driven roller /2

Paper exit driven roller /2: Every 200,000 prints
F -76

PROCEDURE bizh...
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove the 4 roller
holders [2].
3. Remove 2 paper exit driven roller assy [4] from the springs [3], 2
each.
[4]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[1]
a03uf2c078ca
4. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the bearing [2] and the
paper exit driven roller /1 [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
a03uf2c079ca

6. Remove 2 E-rings [2], and then remove the first paper exit driven
roller /2 [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
a03uf2c080ca
7. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and then remove the second paper exit
driven roller /2 [2].
8. Remove 2 paper exit driven rollers /2 from the other paper exit
driven roller assy following Steps 4 to 7.
10. After replacing the paper exit driven roller /2, conduct the following
item.
[1]
[2]
a03uf2c081ca
F -77

PROCEDURE DF-6...
6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE DF-622

6.1 Precautions on maintenance
CAUTION
Be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.

6.2.1 Removing/reinstalling the paper feed unit
(1) Procedure
[2]
[5] [1] [4]
1. Open the paper feed cover [1].

2. Release 2 locks [2].
3. While pushing the paper feed unit [3] to the paper feed cover side
[1], turn the paper feed guide [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5]
to remove it to the upper side.
Note
When reinstalling the paper feed guide, be sure to set 3
claws [6] of the paper feed guide to the mounting holes
[7].
When reinstalling the paper feed guide, be sure to reinstall
so that the no paper detection actuator [8] comes out from
the paper feed guide [4].
[2]
[3]
[5]
[8]
[6]
[7]
a052f2c001ca
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the bearing plate [2].
5. Remove 2 C-clips [3].
6. Move 2 bearings [4] inward to remove the paper feed unit [5].
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[3]
a052f2c002ca
F -78

PROCEDURE DF-6...

[4]
[3]
[2]

Note
When removing the paper feed unit, be careful not to
damage the arm [2] with the shaft [1].
When reinstalling the unit, be sure to check that the arm
[2] is on the shaft [1].
When reinstalling the unit, be sure to set the claw [3]
under the cover plate section [4].
[1]
a052f2c003ca
6.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller
Paper feed roller
: Spot replacement (actual replacement cycle: every 625,000 feeds)
Pick-up roller
(2) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the paper feed unit (Refer to F.6.2.1 Removing/

reinstalling the paper feed unit)
[2]
a052f2c004ca
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
4. Push the gear [1] in the arrow-marked direction [2] to remove the
pin [3]. Then, remove the gear [1] and the belt [4] in the arrowmarked direction [5].
[2]
a052f2c005ca
[1]
[2]
5. Remove the C-clip [1], remove the gear [2] and then remove the
pin [3].
Note
Note that the pin [3] drops when the gear [2] is removed.
[3]
a052f2c006ca
[1]
[2]
6. Remove the arm [1] and remove the pin [2].

Note
Note that the pin [2] drops when the arm [1] is removed.
a052f2c007ca
F -79

[2]
[3]

PROCEDURE DF-6...
7. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the pick-up roller assy [3] from
the paper feed roller assy [2].
[1]
a052f2c008ca
[1]
[2]
8. Remove the C-clip [1] and then pull out the paper feed roller [2]
from the shaft to replace.
Note
When reinstalling the paper feed roller, be sure to reinstall
so that the side with arrow mark [3] faces to the gear [4].
[4]
[3]
a052f2c009ca
[2]

Note
Note that the pin [2] drops when the C-clip [1] is removed.
[3]
10. Remove the pin [2] and remove the pick-up roller [3].
Note
Note that the pin [5] drops when the C-clip [4] is removed.
[4]
12. Remove the pin [5] and remove the pick-up roller [6].
14. After replacing the pick-up roller and paper feed roller, conduct the
following steps.
- For pick up roller: Counter reset of the parts counter No.288
- For the paper feed roller: Counter reset of the parts counter No.
289
[1]
[6]
[5]
a052f2c010ca
6.2.3 Replacing the separation roller

Separation roller
F -80

PROCEDURE DF-6...
(2) Procedure
2. Release the claw lock [2] of the separation unit cover to the inside
to remove.
[2]
[1]
[2]
a052f2c011ca
3. Hold the edges of the roller shaft and pull up the separation roller
[1].
[1]
a052f2c012ca
4. Remove the separation unit [1] to replace.

6. After replacing the separation roller, conduct the following item.
[1]
a052f2c013ca
6.2.4 Cleaning the timing sensor (PS302)

Timing sensor (PS302)
: Every 300,000 prints
F -81

PROCEDURE DF-6...
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
[4] [5]
[3]
[2]
1. Fix the hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. (Refer to I.11.2

Hinge angle adjustment (90 degrees))
2. Open the DF [1] vertically.
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then open the metal plate [3] in the
arrow-marked direction [4].
Note
Note that each of 2 screws is different type.
4. Clean the timing sensor (PS32) with a blower brush from the hole
[5].
a052f2c014ca
6.2.5 Removing/reinstalling the registration roller cover

2. Raise the paper feed tray [2] straight up.
3. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the registration roller cover
[4].
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a052f2c015ca
6.2.6 Cleaning the registration roller

Registration roller
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the registration roller cover. (Refer to F.6.2.5 Removing/
reinstalling the registration roller cover)
2. Wipe 3 registration rollers [1] with the cleaning pad soaked in the
drum cleaner.
[1]
a052f2c016ca
F -82

PROCEDURE DF-6...
6.2.7 Cleaning the registration sensor (PS301)

Registration sensor (PS301)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the registration roller cover. (Refer to F.6.2.5 Removing/
reinstalling the registration roller cover)
2. Clean the registration sensor (PS301) [2] with the blower brush.
[1]
a052f2c017ca
F -83

PROCEDURE PF-6...
7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PF-602

CAUTION
7.2 Tray section

7.2.1 Precautions on maintenance of the tray section
Note
The replacement procedures for the pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and the separation roller in tray/4 are the same for those in
tray/5.
The explanation here is made by the example of tray/4.
After the installation is completed, rotate the pick-up roller in the paper feed direction (clockwise as seen from the front side) to
see if the paper feed roller rotates smoothly.
The rotation is restricted only in the paper feed direction (clockwise as seen from the front side) and be careful not to rotate the
roller counterclockwise.
The orientation of the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy in the main unit differs from that of the rollers in the PF.
7.2.2 Replacing the Pick-up rubber/paper feed roller

Pick-up rubber
: Every 600,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 feed)
Paper feed roller
(2) Procedure
Note
The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar of the paper
feed roller has a one-way mechanism inside, be sure not to mix up these two rollers.
[3]
2. Open the vertical conveyance unit guide plate [2] (Tray/4 only).
[4]
3. Insert a screwdriver or a similar tool into the hole [3], lift up the tray
lock lever [4] slightly, and pull out the tray [5].
[2]
[1]
[5]
a03xf2c001ca
F -84

PROCEDURE PF-6...
4. Check point when pulling out the tray
Note
Do not pull out tray [1] all the way. Hold tray [1] so that the
stopper [3] on the left side of the tray pushed in, and make
the pick-up holder assy [2] placed horizontally (paper feed
position).
[3]
[2]
[1]
a03xf2c002ca
[8]
[7]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[4]
[1]
5. Rotate the pick-up roller [1] in the direction of the arrow (clockwise
as seen from the front side) and bring the coupling [2] to the
lengthwise direction.
Note
Be sure not to rotate the pick-up roller against the
direction of the arrow forcibly, as the roller is designed
not to rotate in that direction.
7. Remove the bearing/Fr [4].
8. Move the bearing/Rr [5] to the rear side.
Note
When installing the bearing, hold down the metal plate [6]
of the pick-up roller assy slightly, and insert the flat part
[7] of the bearing /Rr [5] while keeping it horizontally into
the notch [8] of the metal plate. Then, insert the bearing /
Fr [4] in the same manner.
[5]
a03xt3c001ca
F -85

PROCEDURE PF-6...
9. Hold the pick-up roller assy [1] by hand and lift and tilt the paper
feed roller [3] so that it rotates on the shaft [2] of the pick-up roller
to remove it from the notch of the bearing [4] and the coupling [5].
Note
When removing the pick-up roller assy [1], be careful not
to damage the sensor [6] with the metal plate.
[6]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a03xt3c002ca
10. Remove the pick-up roller shaft [2] from the arm [1] of the paper
feed guide plate and then remove the pick-up roller assembly [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
a03xt3c003ca
[1]
[3]
[2]
11. Remove the C-clip [1], pull out the shaft [2], and remove the pickup roller [3].
12. Remove the pick-up rubber from the pick-up roller.
13. Replace the pick-up rubber.
a03xt3c004ca
F -86

[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[5]

PROCEDURE PF-6...
14. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the bearing [2].
15. Slide the bearing [3] and remove the paper feed roller [4] together
with the shaft [5].
a03xf2c007cb
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
16. Remove the actuator [2] from the shaft [1].

17. Remove the C-clip [3] and pull out the paper feed roller [4] from the
collar [5].
[5]
a03xf2c008cb
[2]
[1]
a03xf2c009ca
18. Replace the paper feed roller.

Note
The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper
feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar
[1] of the paper feed roller has a one-way mechanism
inside while the collar [2] of the separation roller has no
oneway mechanism, be sure not to mix up these two
rollers.
20. After replacing the pick-up rubber and paper feed roller, conduct
the following steps.
- For the pick-up rubber of the tray /4: Counter reset of the parts
counter No.162, tray /5: No.166
- For the paper feed roller of the tray /4: Counter reset of the parts

Separation roller
(2) Procedure
Note
The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar of the paper
feed roller has a one-way mechanism inside, be sure not to mix up these two rollers.
F -87

[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]

PROCEDURE PF-6...
[5]
a03xf2c010ca

5. Disengage the coupling pin [4] from the joint [5] while pressing
down the metal plate [3] of the separation roller assy [2], and
remove the separation roller assy [2].
Note
When installing the separation roller assy, press down the
metal plate [3] of the separation roller assy [2] and engage
the coupling pin [4] to the joint [5].
[3]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[1]
a03xf2c011ca
[2]
[3]
[1]
6. Remove the C-clip [1] of the separation roller assy and remove the
separation roller [3] together with the shaft [2].
a03xf2c012cb
F -88

[1]
[4]
[3]
[6]

PROCEDURE PF-6...
7. Pull out the gear [2], the collar [3] and the separation roller [4] from
the shaft [1] to the arrow-marked direction, and remove them.
8. Replace the separation roller [4].
Note
The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper
feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar
[5] of the paper feed roller has a one-way mechanism
inside while the collar [6] of the separation roller has no
oneway mechanism, be sure not to mix up these two
rollers.
[2]
- For the separation roller of the tray /4: Counter reset of the parts
[5]
a03xf2c013cb
7.2.4 Replacing the paper feed clutch (CL1/CL4) and the separation clutch (CL2/CL5)
Note
The replacement procedures for the paper feed clutch and the separation clutch in tray/4 are the same for those in tray/5. The
explanation here is made by the example of tray/5.

Paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), /2 (CL4)
: Every 2,400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,000,000 feed)
Separation clutch/1 (CL2), /2 (CL5)
: Every 2,400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,000,000 feed)
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
1. Remove the stopper and pull out the tray. (Refer to G.4.2.6 Tray)
2. Remove two screws [1], bend the stopper [2] in the direction of the
arrow, and remove the paper feed cover [3].
Note
For easier operation, lift up the under part [4] of the cover
when installing the paper feed cover [3].
When installing the paper feed cover [3], be sure to insert
the tab [6] into the hole [5] of the metal plate.
[3]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
a03xf2c014ca
F -89

[3]
3. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].

4. Remove the two C-clips [2], and remove the paper feed clutch
(CL1/CL4) [3] and the separation clutch (CL2/CL5) [4].
Note
When installing the clutch, be sure to engage the stopper
[5] of the clutch with the projection [6] of the metal plate.
[4]
[2]
[5] [6]

PROCEDURE PF-6...
[5]
[2]
[6] [1]

6. After replacing the paper feed clutches /1 (CL1) and /2 (CL4) and
the separation clutches /1 (CL2) and /2 (CL5), conduct the
following steps.
- For the paper feed clutches /1 (CL1) and /2 (CL4) of the tray /4:
Counter reset of the parts counter No.164, tray /5: No.168
- For the separation clutches /1 (CL2) and /2 (CL5) of the tray /4:
Counter reset of the parts counter No.165, tray /5: No.169
[1]
a03xf2c015ca
7.3 Conveyance section

7.3.1 Replacing the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), and /3 (CL9)
Vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), and /3 (CL9)
Every 2,400,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 2,000,000 feed)
(2) Procedure
[2]
1. Remove the following parts.

Rear cover /Rt (Refer to G.4.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt)
Rear cover /Lt (Refer to G.4.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt)
Rear cover /Lt (Refer to G.4.2.3 Rear cover /Lt2)
2. Remove the four screws [1] and remove the gear mounting plate
[2].
[1]
a03xf2c016ca
F -90

[6]
[7]

PROCEDURE PF-6...
4. Remove the three screws [2] and the three wire binding covers [3].
Note
When installing the wire binding [4], pass the binding
through the hole in the wire binding cover [3].
[8]
5. Remove the three C-clips [5] and remove the vertical conveyance
clutch/1 (MC7) [6], /2 (MC8) [7], and /3 (MC9) [8].
[5]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
a03xf2c017ca

Note
[1] of the clutch with the projection [2] of the metal plate.
[1]
7. After replacing the vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL7), /2 (CL8)

and /3 (CL9), conduct the following items.
For the vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL7): Counter reset of the
parts counter No.170
[2]
a03xf2c018ca
7.3.2 Replacing the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and pre-registration clutch (CL12)
Horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and pre-registration clutch (CL12)
Every 2,400,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 2,000,000 feed)
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]

Rear cover /Lt1 (Refer to G.4.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt)
Rear cover /Lt (Refer to G.4.2.3 Rear cover /Lt2)
[2].
a03xf2c019ca
F -91

[1]
[4]
[3]
[10]
[9]

PROCEDURE PF-6...
4. Remove the three screws [2] and the three wire binding covers [3].
Note
When installing the wire binding [4], pass the binding
through the hole in the wire binding cover [3].
[2]
5. Remove the three C-clips [5] and remove the horizontal

conveyance clutch/1 (CL10) [6], /2 (CL11) [7], and the preregistration clutch (CL12) [8].
Note
When installing the clutches, be sure to match the
stoppers [9] with the cutout of the rear panel [10].
[9] of the clutch with the pin [11].
[5]
[6]
[8]
[1]
[4]
[7]
[11]

7. After replacing the horizontal conveyance clutches /1 (CL10), /2
(CL11) and the pre-registration clutch (CL12), conduct the
following item.
For the horizontal conveyance clutch /1 (CL10): Counter reset of
the parts counter No.174.
- For the horizontal conveyance clutch /2 (CL11): Counter reset of
the parts counter No.175.
For the pre-registration clutch (CL12): Counter reset of the parts
counter No.173.
[2]
[3]
[9]
[5]
a03xf2c020ca
F -92

PROCEDURE LU-2...
8. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LU-202

8.1.1 Precautions on maintenance
CAUTION
8.1.2 Cleaning/pre-registration roller

: Actual cleaning cycle : Every 200,000 prints *1
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
*2 C5501
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
[3]
1. Remove the upper door. (Refer to G.5.2.2 Upper door)

2. Remove the paper feed cover. (Refer to G.5.2.4 The paper feed
cover)
3. Remove the 2 screws [1] and remove the paper dust cleaner brush
[2].
4. Clean the paper dust removing brush [2] and the pre-registration
roller [3].
a03wf2c001ca
8.1.3 Removing/installing paper feed roller Assy

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] [5] [10]
[6]
[7]
[9][4][2][1]
[6] [8]
a03wf2c002ca

cover)
3. Remove the 2 C-clips [1], and slide the 2 bearings [2] outward.
4. After rotating the paper feed roller assy [5] to the position free from
upper limit sensor (PS109) [3] and the paper empty sensor
(PS108) [4], remove the coupling [8] while avoiding notch [6] and
the arm [7] of paper feed guide plate, and remove the paper feed
roller assy [5].
Note
When removing/installing, be careful not to damage the
upper limit sensor (PS109) [3] and the paper empty sensor
(PS108) [4].
When installing, make sure that the arm [9] is underneath
the lever [10].
8.1.4 Replacing the paper feed roller/pick-up roller

Paper feed roller
: Every 600,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 300,000 feed)
Pick-up roller
F -93

PROCEDURE LU-2...
(2) Procedure
[2]
1. Remove the paper feed roller assy. (Refer to F.8.1.3 Removing/

installing paper feed roller Assy)
2. Turn over the paper feed roller assy.
4. Remove the 2 C-clips [2], and remove the coupling bearing [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
a03wf2c003cb
[5]
[1]
5. Slide the coupling bearing [1] and remove the mounting bracket
[2].
6. Remove the C-clip [3] and remove the paper feed roller [4].
Note
Be sure to reinstall in the same direction with the
removing direction.
7. Remove the pick-up roller [5].
[3]
[4]
a03wf2c004cb
[2]
[1]
8. Remove the collar [2] from the pick-up roller [1].

10. After replacing the paper feed roller and the pick-up roller, conduct
the following item.
- For paper feed roller: Counter reset of the parts counter No.150.
- For pick up roller: Counter reset of the parts counter No.149
a03wf2c005cb

Separation roller
(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
[2]
[1]
a03wf2c006ca
F -94

PROCEDURE LU-2...
3. Remove the 2 screws [1], pull out the front side while pressing
down the separation roller [2], remove the coupling [3], and
remove the separation roller assy [4].
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[1]
[3]
a03wf2c007ca

5. Rotate the shaft to match its D-shape end with the D-cut of the
metal plate [2], and remove the separation roller [3].
Note
When removing/installing, be careful not to damage the
protection sheet [4].
[4]
[2]
[1]
[1]
a03wf2c008cb
[2]
6. Remove the separation roller [1] from the collar [2].

Note
Be sure to insert the claw [4] of the gear [3] to the hole[5]
of the separation roller [1] in securely.
Be careful not to let any grease spill or drip on the
separation roller.
For the separation roller: Counter reset of the parts counter No.150
[3]
[1]
[5]
[4]
a03wf2c009cb
8.1.6 Replacing paper feed clutch (CL101) /pre-registration clutch (CL102)

Paper feed clutch (CL101)
: Every 2,400,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 2,000,000 feed)
Pre-registration clutch (CL102)
: Every 2,400,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 2,000,000 feed)
F -95

PROCEDURE LU-2...
(2) Procedure
[2]
[3]
[5]
[6] [7] [5]
[4]
[2]
1. Remove the clutch cover. (Refer to G.5.2.3 The clutch cover)

3. Remove the 2 C-clips [2] and remove the paper feed clutch
(MC101) [3], and remove the pre-registration clutch [4].
Note
When installing, be sure to insert the stoppers [5] of the
clutches over the screw [6] and the metal plate [7].
5. After replacing the paper feed clutch (CL101) and the preregistration clutch (CL102), conduct the following item.
For the paper feed clutch (CL101): Counter reset of the parts
counter No.151
For the paper feed clutch (CL102): Counter reset of the parts
counter No.152
[1]
a03wf2c010ca
F -96

PROCEDURE MB-5...
9. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE MB-504

CAUTION

9.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /BP and the paper feed roller rubber /BP
Pick-up roller /BP: Every 4,000,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 800,000 feeds)
Paper feed roller rubber /BP: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 125,000 feeds)
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the paper feed solenoid
cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
a03uf2c058ca
[2]
[3]
[4]

4. Remove the bearing [2], and then remove the paper feed roller unit
[3].
[1]
8050ma3076
[3]
5. Check point when reinstalling the paper feed roller unit

Note
When reinstalling the paper feed roller unit [1], be sure to
set the actuator section [2] to the detection section of the
paper empty sensor /BP (PS47) [3].
When reinstalling the paper feed roller unit [1], be sure to
contact the leading edge of the lift lever [4] on the paper
feed side to the inside the plate of the paper feed roller
unit [1].
[2]
[1]
8050ma3079
[2]
6. Remove the C-clip [1], pull out the shaft [2], and remove the pickup roller assy [3].
7. Remove the pick-up roller /BP [4] from the pick-up roller assy [3].
[3]
[4]
[1]
8050ma3077
F -97

[4]

PROCEDURE MB-5...
8. Remove the paper feed roller assy [2] from the shaft [1].
9. Remove the paper feed roller rubber /BP [3] from the paper feed
roller assy [2].
Note
When reinstalling the paper feed roller rubber /BP, be sure
to set it with its paint-marked side [4] on the gear side [5].
11. After replacing the pick-up roller /BP and paper feed roller rubber /
BP, conduct the following items.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.112 for the pick-up roller /
BP, Counter reset of the parts counter No.108 for the paper feed
roller rubber /BP
[2]
[3]
[5]
[1]
a03uf2c059ca
9.2.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber /BP

Separation roller rubber /BP: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: 125,000 feeds)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the pick-up roller /BP and the paper feed roller assy.
(Refer to F.9.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /BP and the paper
feed roller rubber /BP)
3. Remove the C-clip [2], pull out the shaft [3], and remove the
separation roller assy [4].
4. Remove the separation roller rubber /BP [5] from the separation
roller assy.
Note
When reinstalling the separation roller rubber /BP, be sure
to set it with its paint-marked side [6] on the gear side [7].
[6]
[5]

6. After replacing the separation roller rubber /BP, conduct the
following item.
[3] [2] [4]
[1]
[7]
a03uf2c060ca
9.2.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP (CL6)

Paper feed clutch /BP (CL6): Every 4,000,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,000,000 feeds)
(2) Procedure
[3]
[1]

3. Remove the duplex section covers /Rt and /Lt. (Refer to F.5.11.1
Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 (CL4) and /3
(CL5))
5. Remove the C-clip [2] and remove the paper feed clutch /BP (CL6)
[3].
[2]
8050ma3082
F -98

[3]
[1]

PROCEDURE MB-5...
Note
When reinstalling CL6 [1], be sure to align each stopper
[2] to each guide [3].
7. After replacing the paper feed clutch /BP (CL6), conduct the
following items.
[2]
a03uf2c062ca
F -99
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 10. PERIODICAL

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-...
10. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-509/HM-102

CAUTION
10.2 Output paper density detection section

10.2.1 Cleaning the shutter
Shutter: Every 600,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2]
[1]
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the shutter cover [2].
2. Loosen 2 screws [1] and then remove the shutter stopper [2] in the
arrow-marked direction.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
3. Pull out the shutter [1] and clean the correction plate [2] with a
blower brush.
Note
Be careful that the shutter [3] falls down when it is pulled
out too much.
10.3 Humidification section (HM-102)

10.3.1 Replacing the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt and the water feed roller
(1) Periodically replaced parts/Spotted replaced parts/cycle
: every 300,000 prints
: every 300,000 prints
Water feed roller
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 1,500,000 prints)
F -100

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the wire and then open the front door at the maximum.
(Refer to G.6.3.2 Front door)
2. Remove the screw [1] and remove the humidification unit cover [2].
3. Pull out the humidification unit [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[8]
[7]
[1]
4.
5.
6.
7.
[6]
[2]
[3]
[4]
F -101
Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the connector cover /Lt [2].
Remove the screw [3] and then disconnect the connector [4].
Remove the C-clip [5].
Open the open/close plate /Lt assy [6] and remove in the arrowmarked direction [7].
Note
When reinstalling the open/close plate /Lt assy [6], be sure
to hit the open/close plate /Lt assy [6] to the E-ring [8].


[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[4]
[7]
8. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the connector cover /Rt
[2].
9. Release the clamp [3] and then disconnect the connector [4].
12. Open the open/close plate /Rt assy [7] and remove in the arrowmarked direction [8].
Note
When reinstalling the open/close plate /Rt assy [7], be
sure to hit the open/close plate /Rt assy [7] to the E-ring
[9].
[9]

14. Remove the humidification roller assy [2].
[1]
[2]
F -102

15. Check point when reinstalling the humidification roller assy

Note
When reinstalling the humidification roller assy, be sure to
set the projections [1] of the pressure release cam so that
they hit the pressure rollers [2] beforehand. (Execute this
setting to all 4 places.)
When reinstalling the humidification roller assy, be sure to
turn the gear so that the projection [3] of the gear aligns
with the notch [4] beforehand.
When reinstalling the humidification roller assy, be sure
not to mis-align the positions of the projections of the
humidification pressure cam [1] and the gear [3].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[4]
F -103


[8] [7]
[12]
[6]
[5] [3]
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Put the humidification roller assy with bottom-up.

Remove 2 C-clips [1], and remove 2 gears [2].
Remove the C-clip [3], and remove the gear [5] with 2 bearings [4].
Remove the spacer [6].
Remove the C-clip [7], and remove the gear [8]
Remove the C-clip [9], and remove the gear [10] and the spacer
[11].
22. Remove the gear [12].
[11] [10] [9] [4]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F -104

[8]
[6]
[5]
[11]
[12]
23. Remove 2 C-clips [1], and then remove the humidification pressure
cams /FrRt [2] and /FrLt [3] and 2 bearings [4].
24. Remove the C-clips [5], and then remove the humidification
pressure cam /RrLt [6].
25. Remove the humidification pressure cam /RrRt [7] and 2 bearings
[8].
26. Remove the humidification rollers /Rt [9] and /Lt [10] in the arrowmarked direction [11].
Note
Remove the control roller [12] releasing to outside.
[7]
[10]
[9]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[3]
27. Check point when reinstalling the humidification rollers/Rt [1] and /
Lt [2]
Note
When reinstalling the humidification rollers /Rt [1] and /Lt
[2], be sure to note the following points.
The humidification roller /Rt is longer than the
humidification roller /Lt.
The side with the groove [3] on the roller shaft comes to
the front side.
Never touch the roller surface with bare hands.
[2]
F -105

[4]
[5]
28. Remove the C-clips [1], pressure rollers [2], and bearings [3], 4
each.
29. Remove 2 water feed rollers [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5].
Note
When reinstalling the water feed roller, never touch the
roller surface with bare hands.
[6]
[2]
[3]
[1]
31. After replacing the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt and the water
feed roller, conduct the following items.
For humidification roller /Rt: Counter reset of the parts counter No.
322
For humidification roller /Lt: Counter reset of the parts counter No.
323
For water feed roller: Counter reset of the parts counter No.324
Note
When reinstalling the pressure roller, be sure to set so
that the bearing [1] comes inside.
[1]
10.3.2 Replacing the water feed filter

Water feed filter: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 300,000 prints)
(2) Procedure
[2]
1. Open the front door.

2. Remove the screw [1] and then pull out the water feed tank [2].
[1]
F -106


[1]
[2]
[1]
3. Remove 3 screws [1] and open the filter cap [2].
4. Remove the water feed filter [1].

6. After replacing the water feed filter, conduct the following item.
F -107

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-...
11. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-521

CAUTION

11.2.1 Lubrication to bypass roller /Lw pressure release cam
(1) Periodic lubrication parts/Cycle
Bypass roller /Lw pressure release cam
: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Lubricate to 2 bypass roller /Lw pressure release cams [1].
(Molykote EM-30L)
Note
Lubricate to the arc of the bypass roller /Lw pressure
release cam [1].
[1]
a0gyt3c013ca
11.3 Stacker section

11.3.1 Replacing the intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)
(1) Periodically replaced parts/Spotted replaced parts/Cycle
Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)
: Every 5,200,000 prints*1
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,400,000 operations) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000
(2) Procedure
[3]
[2]
[1]
1. Open the front door and pull out the stacker unit.
2. Remove the screw [1] and 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover
[3].
a0gyt3c001ca
F -108


[6]
[5]
[1]
3. Disconnect the connector [1] and 2 screws [2], and then remove
the intermediate roller release solenoid [3] to the allowed direction
[4].
Note
When installing it, insert the pin of the plunger [5] to the
groove [6] on the resin.
When installing it, install with the screw [2] so that the
stroke A of the plunger gets to the standard value.
Standard value: A = 5.0mm to 6.0mm
[2]
[3] [4]
a0gyt3c002ca
11.3.2 Lubrication to worm gear and cam

Warm gear and cam: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the stacker unit [1] and lubricate to the cam [2] and all over
around the worm gear [3]. (Molykote EM-30L)
[1]
[3]
[2]
a0gyt3c014ca
11.4 Stapler section

11.4.1 Replacing the stapler assy
Stapler assy /Fr
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 staples)
Stapler assy /Rr
(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler assy

CAUTION
After moving the stapler, be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
Note
Be careful not to get your hand caught in the opening [1] of the stapler assy.
Pressing the staple side [2] and/or the clinch side [3] cause the opening [1] to close unexpectedly. It is very difficult to open the
opening by hand once it has closed. So, be careful not to close it.
When holding the stapler assy, be sure to hold it at both ends of the cam shaft [4].
F -109


[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
fs503fs2030c
[2]
[1]
1. Select 2 sheets A4 originals with 1-staple at the upper right corner,

make a print and then move the stapler to the stapling position.
2. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch
(SW1) of the main body and unplug the power plug from the power
outlet.
4. Remove the screw [1] of the wire [2].
a0gyt3c015ca
5. Remove the stapler cartridges /Fr [1] and /Rr [2].

6. Remove the screws [3], 1 each, of the stoppers provided in front
and rear and pull further out the stacker unit.
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
fs503fs2005c
F -110

(3) Stapler assy /Fr

[2]
1. Conduct "F.11.4.1.(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler

assy."
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the stacker entrance roller
mounting plate /Fr [2].
[1]
[1]
fs503fs2031c
[2]
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ground [2] and the
metal fitting [3].
[3]
[1]
fs503fs2032c
[7]
[6]
4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and remove the wire binding band [2].
5. Remove 1 screw [3] and raise the lower section of the stapler assy
mounting plate [4] a little to remove it from the notch [5]. Slide the
upper notch [6] to the lower side to release it from the pin [7] and
then remove the stapler assy /Fr [8] together with the mounting
plate [4].
7. After replacing the stapler assy /Fr, conduct the following item.
For fusing roller assy: Counter reset of the parts counter No.193
[8]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fs503fs2033c
(4) Stapler assy /Rr

[1]
1. Conduct "F.11.4.1.(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler

assy."
Note
The following steps are the removal steps using a short
driver. When using a driver of a regular length, removal of
the stapler assy /Rr is available only when the stapler
assy /Fr has been already removed. When using a regular
length driver, be sure to remove the stapler assy /Fr in
advance by following the steps given in "F.11.4.1.(3)
Stapler assy /Fr."
[2]
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the stacker entrance roller
mounting plate /Rr [2].
[1]
fs503fs2034c
F -111


[2]
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ground [2] and the
metal fitting [3].
[3]
[1]
fs503fs2035c
[6]
[2]
[1]
4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and remove 2 wire binding bands [2].

5. In the same procedure as the step 5 of the stapler /Fr, remove the
screw [3] and raise the lower portion of the stapler mounting plate
[4] a little to remove it from the notch [5]. Slide it to the lower side
and remove the stapler /Rr [6] together with the mounting plate [4].
7. After replacing the stapler assy /Rr, conduct the following item.
For stapler assy /Rr: Counter reset of the parts counter No.194
[4]
[3]
[5]
1050fs2036c
(5) Replacing the stapler assy

1. Conduct the following operations.
F.11.4.1.(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler assy
F.11.4.1.(3) Stapler assy /Fr
F.11.4.1.(4) Stapler assy /Rr
2. Remove 3 screws [1] together with the stapler assys /Fr and Rr,
and then remove the cut staple duct [2].
[1]
[2]
fs503fs2012c
[1]
3. Remove 4 screws [1] together with the stapler assys /Fr and Rr,
and then remove the bracket [3] from the stapler [2].
Note
Take note that the brackets for the stapler assys /Fr and /
Rr are different in the position where the wire binding
band is attached.
[3]
[2]
fs503fs2013c
F -112


[2]
[1]
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the stapler guide block [2].
fs503fs2063c
(6) Checking of the stapler guide seal

Note
The pasting of the stapler guide seal is limited only to the stapler assy /Rr.
1. Conduct the following operations.
[1]
F.11.4.1.(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler assy
F.11.4.1.(4) Stapler assy /Rr
F.11.4.1.(5) Replacing the stapler assy
2. The stapler guide seal [2] must be pasted on the clincher side [1]
of the new stapler assy /Rr.
Note
Be sure to align the end line [3] on the clincher side [1]
with the bend line of the stapler guide seal [2] and paste it
with no slippage (tolerance: 0.5mm).
Be sure to check the guide seal to ensure it is not
damaged or soiled.
[3]
[2]
fs503fs2064c
11.4.2 Replacing the staples

Staple cartridge
: Every 5,000 staples
(2) Procedure
2. Pull the stapler cartridge knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction to
remove it.
[1]
fs503fs2001c
F -113


[2]
[1]
[3]
3. Hold the knob [2] of the cover [1] and open it.
4. Rotate and wind up carefully the remaining refill staples [3] to the
arrow-marked direction [4] and take it out.
Note
Be careful when handling the refill staples since they are
apt to break away.
[4]
fs503fs2043c
5. With the refill staples [1] set as shown in the drawing, place them
gently in the pocket [2] of the stapler cartridge.
[2]
[1]
fs503fs2044c
6. Feed the refill staples [1] by hand to the arrow-marked direction [2]
and get the tip of the refill staples near to the stapling position [3].
New refill staples are attached with a lead sheet.
Note
The tip of the refill staples can be pulled up to the stapling
position by this lead sheet.
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
7. Close the cover [4].

fs503fs2045c
11.4.3 Cleaning the cut staple box

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1] and pull out the cut staple box [2].
[1]
[2]
fs503fs2037c
11.5 Main tray section

11.5.1 Replacing the paper exit roller
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 600,000 feeds)*3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
CAUTION
After having lowered the main tray, be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
Note
When replacing the paper exit rollers /A (sponge roller), be sure to replace all 4 pairs of rollers (8 rollers in all).
F -114

(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the sub power switch (SW2), lower the main tray [1]
blocking the light of the tray upper limit sensor (PS16) [2] during up
and down operation of the main tray, and then turn OFF the main
power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2) of the main
body.
2. Unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
[2]
[1]
a0gyt3c003ca
3. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller [1] and remove
the sponge roller [1] by prizing it open.
[1]
fs503fs2003c
4. With each of the depressions [1] of a new sponge roller and the
shaft brought together, press the sponge roller until it clicks to fit it
in securely.
5. After replacing the paper exit roller /A (sponge roller), conduct the
following item.
[1]
[1]
fs503fs2004c
11.5.2 Replacing the paper exit opening solenoid assy (SD9)

Paper exit opening solenoid assy (SD9)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,400,000 operations) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000
F -115

(2) Procedure
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the upper cover /1. (Refer to G.7.2.4 Upper cover /1)
Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.7.2.7 Rear cover)
Remove 3 screws [1].
Remove the wiring harness from 6 wiring harness guides [2] and
slide the board mounting plate [3] backward.
Note
Be sure not to break the wiring harness when moving the
board mounting plate [3].
a0gyt3c004ca
[6] [7]
[5]

6. Remove the G-ring [2] and then remove the arm [3] from the pin
[4].
Note
Be sure to install the G-ring [2] to the position about 2mm
away from the arm [3] so that the arm is free to move.
Since the pin [4] does not have a groove, be sure to check
that the G-ring is fixed securely so that it does not come
of from the pin.
7. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the paper exit opening
solenoid assy (SD9) [6] together with the mounting plate [7].
[4]
[2]
[3]
a0gyt3c005ca
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the paper exit opening
solenoid assy (SD9) [3] from the mounting plate [2].
Note
Be sure to check that the stroke of the plunger is the
standard value A.
Standard value A = 5mm 0.5mm
[3]
A
[1]
[2]
a0gyt3c007ca
F -116

10. Standard value when reinstalling the paper exit opening solenoid
unit
Note
Hold the paper exit opening solenoid (SD9) temporally
with screws and lower the mounting plate of the paper exit
opening solenoid assy once, then slide it upward to
tighten it fully at the position where the paper press arm
[1] starts moving and protrudes for the standard value
from the paper stopper plate [2].
Standard value A = -0.5mm to +0.5mm
[2]
[1]
a0gyt3c006ca
F -117


CAUTION

12.2.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 200,000 prints)
Note
When replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller), be sure to replace 3 sets of the paper exit rollers /A (6 all) and 2 sets of the
paper exit rollers /B (4 all) at a time.
(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
(SW2) of the main body.
2. Push up the actuator [1] of the main tray upper limit sensor (PS2)
with fingers and down the main tray [2].
3. Turn OFF SW1 and SW2 of the main body, and unplug the power
plug.
[1]
[2]
15vlf2c001na
4. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller and remove the
sponge roller by prizing it open.
[1]
15jkf2c002na
F -118

in securely.
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.255, No.256
[1]
[1]
15jkf2c003na
12.2.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)

Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)
Note
When replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller), be sure to replace both of 2 sets (4 all) at a time.
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the bearing [2] and then remove the
shaft [3] of the intermediate roller.
[2]
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c004na
[1]
15jkf2c005na
in securely.
Note
When reinstalling, check that the pin on the rear side of
the intermediate conveyance roller shaft is inserted into
the groove on the receiver side securely.
[1]
[1]
15jkf2c006na

12.3.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller)
F -119

(2) Procedure
[2]
1.
2.
3.
4.
[1]
Open the front door.

Pull out the stacker unit.
Remove the C-clip [2] and then remove the paper assist roller [1].
15jkf2c007na
12.3.2 Replacement of the cleaning plate Assy

Cleaning plate Assy
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
[1]

Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the cleaning plate Assy [2].
[2]
a0drf2c001ca

12.4.1 Replacing the stapler unit
(1) Spotted replaced parts/Cycle
Stapler unit
Note
Be sure not to move the stapler unit in the horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it causes the timing belt tooth skipping.
(2) Procedure
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
1.
2.
3.
4.
15jkf2c008na
F -120

Remove the cartridge from the stapler.
Remove 2 screws [2] from the stapler stand /Fr [1], and then
remove the stapler stand /Fr [1].
Note
When the screw hole for the screw [2] is too loose, the
screw hole [3] can be used.
When reinstalling it, be careful not to damage the pet [4].

5. Remove the connector cover [1], and then disconnect 2

connectors [2].
6. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the ground [4].
[4]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c009nb
7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the stapler stand /Fr [2]
from the stapler /Fr [3].
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c010na
[1]
8. Repeat the steps 4 to 7 to remove the stapler /Rr [1].

15jkf2c011na
F -121


CAUTION

13.2.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller)
Note
When replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller), be sure to replace 3 sets of the paper exit rollers /A (6 all) and 2 sets of the
paper exit rollers /B (4 all) at a time.
(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
(SW2) of the main body.
3. Turn OFF SW1 and SW2 of the main body, and unplug the power
plug.
[1]
[2]
15vlf2c001na
[1]
15jkf2c002na
F -122

in securely.
[1]
[1]
15jkf2c003na
13.2.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)

Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)
Note
When replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller), be sure to replace both of 2 sets (4 all) at a time.
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the bearing [2] and then remove the
shaft [3] of the intermediate roller.
[2]
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c004na
[1]
15jkf2c005na
in securely.
Note
When reinstalling, check that the pin on the rear side of
the intermediate conveyance roller shaft is inserted into
the groove on the receiver side securely.
[1]
[1]
15jkf2c006na

13.3.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller)
F -123

(2) Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit.
3. Open the paper assist section [1] and then lift the paper assist
roller [2].
4. Remove the C-clip [3] and then remove the paper assist roller [2].
[1]
[3]
[2]
15jmf2c001na

13.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover
CAUTION
Pulling out the stacker unit while removing the FS from the main body causes falling of the FS and is at risk of injury.
(1) Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
[1]
15jmf2c002na
3. Remove 2 screws [1] provided on the rail stopper, and then pull
out the stacker unit [2] further.
Note
To prevent the falling of the FS, put something [3] under
the pulled out stacker unit for balancing.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
15jmf2c003na
4. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the stapler unit cover [2].
[1]
[2]
15jmf2c004na
13.4.2 Replacing the stapler unit

Note
The stapler unit consists of the clincher section and the stapler section.
F -124

Be sure not to move the clincher section and the stapler section in the horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it causes the
timing belt tooth skipping.
After installing, be sure to perform the staple up/down position adjustment. (Refer to I.18.9 Staple up/down position adjustment)

Stapler unit
(2) Procedure
[2]
[1]
1. Enter the service mode and select [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check
Mode]. Perform the output code 72-32 : Stapler movement motor
(M11) (A4,1-stapling position). Then turn OFF the main body.
3. Pull out the stacker unit and remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer
to F.13.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover)
4. Disconnect the connector [1], remove the screw [2] and then
remove the flat stitching stopper release unit /Fr [3].
5. Enter the service mode and select [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check
Mode]. Perform the output code 72-31, and then turn OFF the
main body.
[3]
15jmf2c005na
6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the ground [2] and the
clamp [3].
7. Remove 4 screws [4] to remove the clincher /Fr [5], and then
remove the connector [6].
[5]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
15jmf2c006na
[2]
[1]
[3]
8. Remove the screw [1] and remove the flat stitching stopper release
unit /Rr [2].
9. Disconnect the connector [3] at the rear side of the flat stitching
stopper release unit /Rr [2] and remove the wiring harness from
the clamp [4].
[4]
15jmf2c007na
F -125

10. Remove 4 screws [4] of the clincher /Rr [1] and then remove the
ground [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
15jmf2c008na
11. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the ball bearing bracket [2].
Then rotate the clincher /Rr so that it comes to the position easily
removed and disconnect the connector [4].
Note
Be careful not to lose the ball bearing retaining spring [5]
and the ball.
[3]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[2]
15jmf2c009na
12. Remove the cartridge from the stapler.

13. Remove 4 screws [2] of the stapler /Fr [1], and remove the screw
[3] of the ground cable. Then put out the stapler /Fr [1] and
disconnect the connector [4].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
15jmf2c010na
14. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the mounting plate [3] from the
stapler /Fr [2].
[1]
[3]
[2]
15jmf2c011na
15. Remove 2 screws [3] of the sensor cover [2] of the stapler /Rr [1]
After that remove the screw [4] of the ground cable and then
Note
When reinstalling the sensor cover [2], be sure to set it so
that the wiring harness does not interfere the stapler
rotation home sensor (PS13) [7] or it is not nipped by the
gear.
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[6]
15jmf2c012na
F -126

16. Remove 4 screws [1] to remove the stapler /Rr [2], and then
Note
When removing the stapler /Rr [2], be careful not to
damage PS13 [4].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
15jmf2c013na
17. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the mounting plate [3] from the
stapler /Rr [2].
Counter reset of the parts counters No.248 and No.249
[3]
[1]
[2]
15jmf2c014na
F -127

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PI-...
14. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PI-502

CAUTION

14.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up and the paper feed roller /Up
Pick-up roller /Up
: Every 1,000,000 prints*1 (Actual replacement cycle: every 200,000 feeds*2)
Paper feed roller /Up
: Every 600,000 prints*1 (Actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 feeds*2)
*1 The periodical replacement is C6501/C6501P/C65hc only.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000.
(2) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.11.2.2 Upper cover)

2. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and slide outward the bearings [2] at the left
and right to remove the paper feed roller assy /Up [3].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
15jff2c001na
3. Remove the bearing [1] and remove the actuator [2].
[1]
[2]
a04hf2c001ca
4. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove 2 bearings [2].

[2]
[1]
a04hf2c002ca
F -128


6. Slide 2 roller shafts [2] in the arrow-marked direction and remove
the pick-up roller /Up [3] and the paper feed roller /Up [4].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to set them so that the blue
surfaces of the one-way clutches of the pick-up roller and
the paper feed roller come to the front side.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[2]
a04hf2c003ca
[5]
7. Remove the pick-up roller [1] and the paper feed roller [2] from the
one-way clutches [3] and [4].
Note
When reinstalling the pick-up roller [1], insert the one-way
clutch [3] from the notch [5] side with its projection [6]
fitted to the notch [5] of the pick-up roller.
When reinstalling the paper feed roller [2], insert the oneway clutch [4] with its projection [8] fitted to the notch [7]
of the paper feed roller.
[1]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[6]

a04hf2c004ca
14.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller /Lw and the paper feed roller /Lw
Pick-up roller /Lw
: Every 1,000,000 prints*1 (actual replacement cycle: every 200,000 feeds) *2
Paper feed roller /Lw
: Every 600,000 prints*1 (actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 feeds) *2
(2) Procedure
[1]
1. Pull the release lever [1] and open the upper door [2].
2. Perform steps 2 to 7 of "F.14.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up
and the paper feed roller /Up."
Counter reset of the parts counter No.269, No.270
[2]
15jff2c004na
14.2.3 Replacing the separation roller /Up and the torque limiter /Up
Separation roller /Up
: Every 600,000 prints*1 (actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 feeds*2)
Torque limiter /Up
: Every 3,000,000 prints*1 (actual replacement cycle: every 600,000 feeds*2)
F -129

(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 C-clips [2] and slide outward the bearings [2] at the left
and right to remove the paper feed roller assy /Up [3].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
15jff2c005na
3. Release the hooks on the right and left, and then remove the
separation roller assy /Up [2] by lifting it up.
[2]
[1]
[1]
15jff2c006na
4. Remove the C-clip [1] from the separation roller assy /Up and then
remove the separation roller /Up [2] and the torque limiter /Up [3].
Note
Be sure to install the separation roller /Up with its 2
notches [4] on the front and fitted to the projections [5].
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
15jff2c007na
14.2.4 Replacing the separation roller /Lw and the torque limiter /Lw
Separation roller /Lw
: Every 600,000 prints*1 (actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 feeds*2)
Torque limiter /Lw
: Every 3,000,000 prints*1 (actual replacement cycle: every 600,000 feeds*2)
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
1. Pull the release lever [1] and open the upper door [2].
2. Perform steps 2, 3 and 4 of "F.14.2.3 Replacing the separation
roller /Up and the torque limiter /Up."
Counter reset of the parts counter No.271, No.272
15jff2c008na
F -130

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LS-...
15. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LS-505

CAUTION

15.2.1 Replacing the stacker tray up down motor (M1)
Stacker tray up down motor (M1)
: Every 1,500,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 feeds *2)
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200/1200P/1051.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C8000.
(2) Procedure
[3]
[1]
[2]
1.
2.
3.
4.
[4]
[5]
ls502fs2001c
[5]
[4]
[1]
Remove the rear cover /Lw. (Refer to G.12.2.2 Cover)

Disconnect 2 connectors [1].
Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the sensor mounting plate [3].
Remove 4 screws [4] and remove the stacker tray up down motor
(M1) [5].
5. Check point when reinstalling the stacker tray up down motor (M1)
Note
When reinstalling the stacker tray up down motor (M1), be
sure to check that the belt [2] has been engaged with the
gear [1], and then engage it with the gear [3] before
fastening the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [4].
When the belt [2] is not horizontally attached between the
gear [1] and the gear [3], make adjustments by rotating the
encoder [5] counterclockwise.
[3]
[2]
ls502fs2002c
[2]
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the motor mounting plate [3]
from the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [2].
[3]
[1]
ls502fs2003c
15.2.2 Replacing the paper press solenoid /3 (SD8)

Paper press solenoid /3 (SD8)
F -131

(2) Procedure
Note
When conducting this operation, be sure to bring the stacker tray down to the bottom in advance.
2. Slide the guide rail [2] in the arrow-marked direction and release
[2]
the fixing.
2
Note
In this step, be careful not to release the fixing on the rear
1
guide rail [3].
[3]
[1]
ls502fs2004c
[1]
3. Slant the shift unit [1] to the front side so that you can see the
upper surface of it.
Note
Be sure to slide the shift unit about 10cm to the right in
advance.
Be careful that the belt [2] does not get pushed down by
the bottom of the shift unit.
4. Release the cable stopper [3] and remove the ribbon cable [5] from
the connector [4].
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3]
ls502fs2005c
[1]
[3]
5. How to handle the ribbon cable

Note
Slide the lock [2] of the connector [1] for the ribbon cable
in the arrow-marked direction and remove the ribbon
cable [3].
When reinstalling the ribbon cable, slide the lock in the
reverse direction after inserting the cable.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
ls502fs2006c
F -132


7. Slide the guide rail [2] in the arrow-marked direction and release
the fixing.
8. Remove the belt [5] from the stopper section [4] of the shift unit [3].
[4]
[5]
[3]
2
[2]
1
[1]
ls502fs2007c
9. Check point when reinstalling the belt

Note
When attaching the belt [2] to the stopper section [1], slide
the shift unit [3] in the arrow-marked direction and engage
the stopper section with the belt.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
ls502fs2008c
[1]
10. Remove the shift unit [2] through the clearance between the belts
[1].
Note
When removing the conveyance unit [2], be careful that
the edge stoppers [3] and the paper pressure arms /3 [4]
do not contact the belt [1].
[4]
[2]
[4]
[3]
ls502fs2009c
F -133


13. Rotate the wire saddle [5] in the arrow-marked direction and
remove it.
14. Remove 3 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid /3 assy
[4].
[1]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[3] [2]
ls502fs2010c
[1]
15. Check point when reinstalling the paper press solenoid/3 assy
Note
When reinstalling the paper press solenoid /3 assy, be
sure to insert the pin [2] of the shaft into the slit section
[1] at the tip of the solenoid.
[2]
ls502fs2011c
16. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the solenoid mounting plate [3]
from the paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) [2].
[3]
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2012c

F -134

(2) Procedure
[3]
1.
2.
3.
4.
[4]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[1]
a0h1t3c001ca
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the solenoid mounting plate [3]
from the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) [2].
[1]
[3]
Remove the front covers /Up and /Lw. (Refer to G.12.2.2 Cover)
Remove the spring [2].
Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid /1 assy
[4].
Note
When reinstalling the paper press solenoid /1 assy, be
sure to insert the actuator [6] provided at the tip of the
shaft into the slit section [5] at the tip of the solenoid.
[2]
a0h1t3c002ca

(2) Procedure
[2]
[6]
[5]
1.
2.
3.
4.
[3]
Remove the front covers /Up and /Lw. (Refer to G.12.2.2 Cover)
Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid /2
(SD7) [4].
Note
When reinstalling the paper press solenoid /2 (SD7), be
sure to insert the actuator [6] provided at the tip of the
shaft into the slit section [5] at the tip of the solenoid.

[1]
[4]
ls502fs2033c
15.2.5 Replacing the rear stopper solenoid (SD3)

Rear stopper solenoid (SD3)
F -135

(2) Procedure
[5]
[6]
1.
2.
3.
4.
[2]
[3]
[4]
Remove the rear cover /Lw. (Refer to G.12.2.2 Cover)

Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the rear stopper solenoid (SD3)
[4].
Note
When reinstalling the rear stopper solenoid (SD3), be sure
to insert the actuator [6] provided at the tip of the shaft
into the slit section [5] at the tip of the solenoid.

[1]
ls502fs2016c
F -136

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-...
16. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-503

CAUTION

16.2.1 Replacing roller solenoids /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8)
Roller solenoid /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8)
: Every 10,500,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 punches *2)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the cord support board /A
[2].
2. Remove the hook of the spring [3] from the shaft [4].
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
fd501fs2001c
[1]
[2]

4. Remove each of 2 screws [2] and then remove the roller
solenoids /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8) [3].
6. Make adjustments of the installation position. (Refer to I.22.1
Roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position
adjustment)
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2002c
16.2.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18)

2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18)
F -137

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.13.3.4 Rear cover)
2. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harnesses
from the 7 wiring harness guides [3] of the coupling arm /Rr [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
fd501fs2047c
[1]
[3]
[4]

4. Remove the shaft [2] and separate the coupling arm /Fr [3] and the
coupling arm /Rr [4].
[2]
fd501fs2048c
[1]
5. Open the front door [1] and then remove the screw [2].
6. Pull out the folding unit [3].
[2]
[3]
a0h0t3c004ca
F -138

7. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, from the left and right rails
and pull further out the folding conveyance section.
[1]
[1]
fd501fs2049c
8. Open the guide plate [1].

9. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the wiring mounting cover
[3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a0h0t3c005ca
[1]

11. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the 2nd folding roller
solenoid (SD18) [3].
13. Make adjustments of the installation position. (Refer to I.22.2 2nd
folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment)
a0h0t3c006ca
16.3 Punch section

16.3.1 Replacing the punch unit
Punch unit
F -139

(2) Procedure
[1]
[3]
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the punch unit [3].
[2]
fd501fs2003c
16.3.2 Cleaning the punch shaft and the punch support board
Punch shaft
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual cleaning count: Every 1,000,000 punches) *1
: Every 750,000 prints *2
: Every 1,500,000 prints *3
Punch support board
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual cleaning count: Every 1,000,000 punches) *1
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[1]
[3]

3. Remove the punch unit [3].
[2]
fd501fs2003c
4. Remove the plastic stopper [1], and remove the pin [2].
5. Remove the punch shaft [3], and clean the periphery. (Drum
cleaner/Cleaning pad)
[2]
[1]
[3]
a0h0t3c001ca
6. Clean the inner periphery of the hole [2] of the punch support
board [1]. (Isopropyl alcohol/Cleaning pad)
[2]
[1]
a0h0t3c002ca
16.3.3 Lubricating the punch drive section

(1) Periodically lubricated parts/cycle
Punch drive section
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 1,000,000 punches) *1
F -140


*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[1]
[3]

3. Remove the punch unit [3].
[2]
fd501fs2003c
4. Lubricate 2 stopper cams [1] and 8 gears [2]. (Molykote EM-30L)
[1]
[2]
a0h0t3c003ca
16.4 Main tray section

16.4.1 Replacing the tray up down motor (M11)
Tray up down motor (M11)
: Every 5,200,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 prints) *1
: Every 10,500,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 prints) *2
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 prints) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000
(2) Procedure
Note
Be sure to remove the tray up down motor (M11) while supporting the up/down stay with your hands.
F -141

1. Remove the rear cover (refer to G.13.3.4 Rear cover) and the left
cover /Rr (refer to G.13.3.6 Left cover /Rr).
2. Open the front door and pull out the folding unit.
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the tray up down motor
(M11) [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
fd501fs2005c
16.5 PI section
16.5.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper stage)
Pick-up rubber
: Every 5,200,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 200,000 feeds)*1
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[1]

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the protective cover [2].
[2]
fd501fs2006c
[1]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[2]

4. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the pick-up unit /Up [3].
Note
The rear side of the shaft is inserted into the coupling [4].
Be sure to remove the pick-up unit /Up [3] from the front
side.
Be careful not to damage 2 actuators [5] of the pick-up
unit /Up.
fd501fs2007c
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
5. Remove the hook of the spring [1] from the mounting plate [2].
6. Remove 2 C-clips [3] and then remove the shaft [4].
fd501fs2008c
F -142


[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]

8. Remove the shaft fixing piece [2], and then remove the shaft [3]
from the mounting plate [4].
fd501fs2009c
[1]
fd501fs2010c
[1]
[2]
10. Remove the spacer [1] and the belt restriction plate [2].
fd501fs2011c
[1]
[2] [3]
11. Remove the belt [3] from the gears [2] and [4], and then remove
the gears [2] and [4] and the pin [5] from the pick-up roller shaft [4].
[4]
[5]
fd501fs2012c
12. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [1] to the front side, and remove the
pick-up roller assy [2].
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2013c
13. Remove the pick-up roller [1] and replace the pick-up rubber [2].
Note
Be sure to install the pick-up roller so that the one-way
clutch [3] (blue) is on the front side.
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2014c
F -143


[4]
[2]
14.
15.
16.
17.
Remove the C-clip [1].

Remove the E-ring [2].
Remove the belt restriction plate [3].
Remove the belt [4] from the gear [5], and then remove the gear
[5] and the pin [6] from the pick-up roller shaft [7].
18. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [7] to the rear side, and remove the
pick-up roller assy [8].
19. Remove the pick-up roller and replace the pick-up rubber.
Note
[7]
[3] [5] [6]
[8] [9] [1]
fd501fs2015c
[3]
[4]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[8]

21. Remove the belt restriction plate [2].
22. Remove the belt [3] from the gear [4], and then remove the gear
[4] and the pin [5] from the pick-up roller shaft [6].
23. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [6] from the rear side, and remove
the pick-up roller assy [7].
24. Remove the pick-up roller and replace the pick-up rubber.
Note
[1]
fd501fs2016c
16.5.2 Replacing the paper feed rubber (Upper stage)

Paper feed rubber
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -144

(2) Procedure
[8]
[7]
[3]
[4]
1. Perform steps 1 to 8 of "F.16.5.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber

(Upper stage)" and remove the pick-up roller unit.
3. Remove the belt restriction plate [2].
4. Remove the spacer [3].
5. Remove the belt [4].
6. Remove the gear [5] and the pin [6].
7. Remove the gear [7] and the pin [8].
[1]
[6] [5]
[2]
fd501fs2017c
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
8. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove the entire paper feed arm
[2] from the paper feed shaft [3].
fd501fs2018c
[3]
[2]
[1]
9.
10.
11.
12.

Remove the actuator [2].
Remove 2 C-clips [4].
fd501fs2019c
[3]
[2]
[1]
13. Remove the paper feed arm [1].

14. Remove the spacer [2].
15. Remove the paper feed roller assy [3].
fd501fs2020c
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2021c
16. Remove the paper feed roller [1] and replace the paper feed
rubber [2].
Note
16.5.3 Replacing the separation rubber (upper stage)

Separation rubber
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
F -145


*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[6]
fd501fs2022c

(Upper stage)" and remove the pick-up unit /Up.
3. Remove 2 bearings [2].
4. Remove the C-clip [3] and then remove the entire roller shaft from
the mounting plate while pressing the separation roller assy [4]
against the front gear [5].
Note
Pins are employed on the inside of the separation roller
assy [4] and the gear [5] respectively. When removing
them, be careful that these pins do not get lost. With the
C-clip [6] on the front side of the gear left as it is, pressing
the roller onto the gear prevents the pins from dropping
off.
5. Remove the separation roller rubber [1] from the separation roller
[2] and replace it.
[2]
fd501fs2023c
16.5.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)

Pick-up rubber
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
Note
A shaft fixing screw is inserted when removing the PI tray /Up. Be sure to remove this shaft fixing screw from the PI tray /Up
after completion of the replacement of the pick-up roller /Lw. Operating the machine with the shaft fixing screw inserted to the
PI tray /Up damage to the PI section.
1. Make sure that the PI lift plate /Up [1] has come down fully. If it has
[2]
[3]
not come down completely, conduct the I/O check (output) (PI/Up:
70-11, PI/Lw: 70-13) in the service mode.
(Upper stage)" to remove the pick-up unit /Up.
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the paper feed stopper
plate /Up [3].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2024c
F -146

[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
4. Remove the shaft fixing screw [1] and insert it in the shaft fixing
hole [2].
Note
Be sure to turn the shaft fixing screw [1] until its stem
section disappears completely.
After completion of the replacement of the pick-up rubber
(lower stage), be sure to remove the shaft fixing screw [1]
from the position [2] and get it back to the position [1].
Operating the machine with the shaft fixing screw inserted
to the position [2] damage to the PI section.
fd501fs2025c
[1]
[4]
5. Remove the spring [2] hooked between the separation roller unit
[1] and the PI tray /Up [3].
7. Remove 4 screws [4] and then remove the PI tray /Up [3].
Note
When removing the PI tray /Up [2], be sure to pull it
diagonally up to the left.
[2]
fd501fs2026c
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]

9. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the pick-up unit /Lw [3].
10. For the subsequent operations, conduct the pick-up rubber (upper
stage) (steps 4 to 25). (Refer to F.16.5.1 Replacing the pick-up
rubber (Upper stage))
11. Replace it with a new pick-up rubber.
Note
When installing the PI tray /Up, be sure to remove the
shaft fixing screw and get it back to the original position.
fd501fs2027c
16.5.5 Replacing the paper feed rubber (lower stage)

Paper feed rubber
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Perform steps 1 to 9 of "F.16.5.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)."
2. The subsequent operations are the same as the operations for the paper feed rubber (upper stage). (Refer to F.16.5.2 Replacing the
paper feed rubber (Upper stage))
3. Reinstall a new paper feed rubber following the removal steps in reverse.
F -147

16.5.6 Replacing the separation rubber (lower stage)

Separation rubber
: Every 2,250,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 feeds) *2
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000
(2) Procedure
(Lower stage)."
2. Remove the 4 screws [1] and then remove the paper feed stopper
plate /2 [2].
3. For the subsequent operations, conduct the separation rubber
(upper stage) (steps 2 to 6). (Refer to F.16.5.3 Replacing the
separation rubber (upper stage)
4. Replace it with a new separation rubber.
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2028c
F -148

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-...
17. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-506

CAUTION
17.2 Right angle conveyance section

17.2.1 Replacing the roller release solenoid /1 (SD5)
Roller release solenoid /1 (SD5)
: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (actual replacement cycle: every 5,000,000 operations *2)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove SD from the main body.
[2]
[1]
15anf2c028na
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[6]

4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the roller release solenoid /
1 (SD5) [3].
Note
When installing the solenoid, make sure that the pin [5] is
hitched to the plunger [4].
Install it with the wiring harness [6] located on the guide
plate side.
[1]
15anf2c029na
5. With the plunger [1] pulled, temporarily hold the new roller release
solenoid /1 and adjust the position so that the clearance "a"
between the roller [3] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value,
and then fully tighten the screws.
Standard value "a": 0mm to 0.5mm
7. After replacing the roller release solenoid /1 (SD5), conduct the
following item.
[2]
a
[3]
[1]
15anf2c030nb

: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: every 5,000,000 operations *2)
F -149


(2) Procedure
[1]
1. Open the front door /Rt.

[2]
15anf2c031na

2 (SD6) [3].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to check that the pin [5] has
been inserted into the hole on the plunger [4].
plate side.
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3] [4] [5]

15anf2c032na
5. With the plunger [1] pulled, temporarily hold the new roller release
solenoid /2 and adjust the position so that the clearance "a"
between the roller [3] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value,
and then fully tighten the screws.
Standard value "a": 0mm to 0.5mm
[2]
a
[3]
[1]
15anf2c033nb
17.2.3 Replacing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)

Right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front door /Rt and then remove the screw [1].
2. Remove the rear cover /Rt. (Refer to G.14.3.3 Rear cover /Rt)
3. Remove the hex wrench (short, #2.5) from the trimmer section.
(Refer to F.17.4.2 Replacing the trimmer blade kit)
[1]
15anf2c057na
F -150


[3]
[2] [1]
4. Remove the E-ring [1] and the pulley [2] and then remove the belt
[3].
[4]
15anf2c058na
6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the stopper [2].
[2]
[1]
15anf2c059nb
[4]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[6]
8. Pull the spring [3] in the arrow-marked direction [4] and release it,
and then open the right angle conveyance guide plate [5].
Note
When reinstalling the spring [3], hook the long arm [6] on
the position between the frame and the E-ring [7] of the
jam release handle shaft and insert the tip of the short arm
[3] into the hole [8].
[3]
[7]
[5]
15anf2c130ca
F -151


[1]
[3]
[3]
9. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the entrance conveyance

unit [2].
Note
When reinstalling, press it against 2 positioning pins [3]
and then tighten the screw [1].
[1]
[1]
[2]
15anf2c060na
[1]
10. Check point when reinstalling the entrance conveyance unit

Note
As the positioning pin [1] has anti-drop grooves, be sure
to insert it fully before tightening the screw.
[2]
a0h2t3c043ca
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]

12. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the entrance gate solenoid
[3] and the plunger [4].
a0h2t3c044ca
F -152

13. Standard value when reinstalling the entrance gate solenoid

Note
When reinstalling, be sure to set in the following
conditions before tightening the screw [4]; with the
plunger of the entrance gate solenoid not pulled, the gap
between the entrance gate [1] and the guide plate [2] is at
a standard value "a", and with the plunger of the entrance
gate solenoid pulled, the gap between the entrance gate
[1] and the guide plate [3] is at a standard value "b".
Standard value
a: 2.0mm 0.3mm
b: 5.0mm 0.5mm
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
a0h2t3c051ca
[6] [5]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]

16. Remove 2 screws [3] and pull out the arm [4] from the shaft [5] in
the arrow-marked direction [6]. Then remove the right angle
conveyance gate solenoid assy [7].
Note
When reinstalling, press the arm [4] against the D-cut of
the shaft [5] and then tighten the screws [2].
[7]
a0h2t3c045ca
[1]
[4]
17. Standard value when reinstalling the right angle conveyance gate
solenoid assy
Note
With the plunger [1] pulled, adjust the position so that the
clearance "a" between the right angle conveyance gate [3]
and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value "a", and then
fully tighten the screws [4].
Standard value a: 4.8mm 0.5mm
[3]
[2]
a
a0h2t3c052ca
F -153

[7]
[2]
[4]
[3]
18. Remove 2 screws [1], mounting plate [2], arm [3], plunger [4], and
the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) [5].
Note
When installing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid,
make sure that the wires [6] are located on the other side
of the hole [7] in the mounting plate [2].
[1]
[5]
[6]
a0h2t3c046ca

(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
1. Open the front doors /Rt and /Lt.

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the cover [2].
15anf2c157ca
[2]
[6]
[3]
[4]

3 (SD7) [3].
Note
When installing the solenoid, make sure that the pin [5] is
hitched to the plunger [4].
plate side.
[1]
[5]
15anf2c158ca
F -154

[1]
5. Slightly tighten the new roller release solenoid/3 with the plunger
[1] pulled, adjust the position so that the gap between the paper
feed surface [2] of the guide plate and the roller surface [3] falls
within the standard value, and secure the roller release solenoid/3.
Standard value "a": 1.3mm to 1.8mm
7. After replacing the roller release solenoid /3 (SD7), conduct the
following item.
[3]
[2]
a
15anf2c159ca
17.3 Saddle stitching section

17.3.1 Replacing the stapler assy
(1) Periodically replaced parts /Spotted replaced parts /Cycle
Stapler Assy
: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 1,000,000 staples) *2
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200/1200P/1051
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the front door /Lt. (Refer to G.14.3.8 Front door /Lt)
2. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.14.3.2 Rear cover /Lt)
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] from the back side of the stapler, and
release the wires on the stapler side from the clamps.
[1]
15anf2c034na
[3]
4. Pull out the saddle stitching unit. (Refer to F.17.3.3 Pulling out the
saddle stitching unit)
5. Tilt the bundle arm [1] to the front.
6. Remove the staple cartridges [2] to the front.
Note
When moving the stapler Assy, be sure to move them by
rotating the rotating knob [3] to prevent the belt tooth from
skipping. Otherwise, it causes the belt tooth skipping.
[2]
[1]
15anf2c035na
7. Remove 2 screws [1] on each stapler.

8. Move the staplers /Lt [2] and /Rt [3] forward, and then remove the
pins [4], 2 for each, from each 2 holes [5] on each stapler. Then
remove the staplers /Lt and /Rt downward.
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
a0h2t3c047ca
F -155

9. Check point when removing/reinstalling the stapler /Lt

Note
When removing/reinstalling the stapler /Lt, be sure not to
bend the guide sheet [6].
[6]
a0h2t3c048ca
[1]
10. Remove the screw [1] and remove the sensor cover [2].
[2]
15anf2c038na

Note
When reinstalling the saddle stitching unit, be careful not
to let the connector [1] make contact with the main body.
[3]
12. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the saddle stitching guide
plate [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
15anf2c039na
13. Remove 2 screws [1] each and then remove 2 connector covers
[2].
Note
When removing the connector covers, while lifting up the
clinchers /Lt [3] and /Rt [4].
[4]
[1]
[1]
[2]
15anf2c040na
F -156


[5]
[4]
14. Remove each 1 screws [1] and then remove the ground [2].
Note
When installing the grounds, fasten it with screws letting
the wiring harness on the lower side.
[6]
15. Remove each of 1 connectors [3].

16. Remove 2 screws [4] each, and then remove the clinchers /Lt [5]
and /Rt [6].
Note
When installing the clinchers, slide them down as far as
they go, and secure them with screws.
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
15anf2c041na
17. Disconnect the connector [1] and then remove the wiring harness
[3] from the clincher [2].
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
15anf2c042na
Note
When reinstalling the wiring harness [4], be sure to wire
the wiring harness to the guide (white) side [5] of the
clincher as shown in figure [6].
Do not route the wiring harness to the rear side as shown
in the figure [7]. or the wiring harness may break at the
clincher operation.
[5]
19. Adjust the mounting position of the staplers and the clinchers.
(Refer to F.17.3.1.(3) Procedure for adjusting the mounting
position)
20. After replacing the stapler Assy, conduct the following steps.
[6]
[7]
15anf2c043na
F -157

(3) Procedure for adjusting the mounting position

[7]
[7]
[11]
[4]
[6]
[11]
[10]
[8]
[9]
a
[5]
1. Rotate the screw [1] clockwise until clicked to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the staplers [3] and lock the clinchers [2], and then
check the step edges [4] of the staplers are aligned with the edges
[5] of the clincher in the sub scan direction [6].
Standard value: 0 0.5mm
2. When the value is not within the standard value, loosen 2 screws
[7] each and move the staplers in the sub scan direction for
adjustment while rotating the screw [1] counterclockwise to make
the clinchers [2] and the stapler [3] closer, and then tighten the
screws [7].
3. Tighten the screw [1] clockwise until it clicks to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the stapler [3] and lock it. Make sure that the
standard surface of the stapler [8] is located in rear side in main
scan direction [10] compared to the inside plate inner surface [9] of
the clincher.
Standard value "a": 0.2mm to 0.3mm
4. When the value is not within the standard value, loosen 2 screws
[11] each and move the staplers in the main scan direction for
adjustment while rotating the screw [1] counterclockwise to make
the clinchers [2] and the stapler [3] closer, and then tighten the
screws [11].
Note
After the reinstallation, perform the saddle stitching and
check that the stapling is performed without problem.
After the adjustment, be sure to perform the adjustment
between the fold line position and the staple position, and
tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher.
(Refer to I.23.4 Staple position adjustment), (Refer to I.23.6
Tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher)
Section A
[3]
[2]
[1]
15anf2c063nc
17.3.2 Replacing the slope unit

Slope unit
: Spot replacement (actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 copies) *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the motor cover [2].
[2]
[1]
15anf2c018na
F -158


[1]
15anf2c019na
3. Holding the bundle arms [1] on both sides in the vicinity of the
fulcrum shaft [2], push them to the rear simultaneously and move
the bundle arms [1] approximately 30mm.
Note
When rotating the bundle arm [1] manually, be sure to
rotate it gently with both hands because the bundle arm is
driven simultaneously by the belts on both sides.
Otherwise, it causes the belt tooth skipping.
Never rotate the bundle arm [1] by holding its tip. Be sure
to rotate it by holding the bundle arm [1] in the vicinity of
the fulcrum shaft [2]. It causes the deformation.
[2]
[1]
[2]
15anf2c020na
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and 2 screws [3] of the slope unit [1] from the
bottom and top respectively, and then remove the slope unit [1].
Note
When reinstalling the slope, be sure to align 2 positioning
projections [4].
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
15anf2c022na
F -159

17.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door /Lt. (Refer to G.14.3.8 Front door /Lt)
2. Remove the slope unit. (Refer to F.17.3.2 Replacing the slope unit)
3. Remove the wire [1] from the screw [2].
Note
When remove the 2nd wire [1], support the horizontal
conveyance guide plate /Lt [3] with your hand so that it
does not fall down.
[2]
[1]
[3]
15anf2c014na
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
4. Slide 2 pins [1] to the arrow-marked direction and hook into the
notches [2] to release the horizontal conveyance guide plate /Lt
[3], and then remove the guide plate.
Note
When reinstalling the horizontal conveyance guide plate /
Lt [3], align the positions of the shafts [4], and then
displace the pins [1] from the notches.
[1]
[4]
15anf2c015na
5. Remove the screw [1], move the wiring harness cover [4] to the
rear, unplug the pin [2] from the hole [3], and then remove the
wiring harness cover [4].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
15anf2c016na
F -160


[1]
15anf2c017na
7. Remove the screw [1].
[1]
15anf2c069na
[1]
[6]
[1]
8. Holding the bundle arms [1] on both sides in the vicinity of the
fulcrum shaft [2], gently move them to the inside [3], and then
remove the guide shaft [4] from the hole of the shock absorbing
guide [5].
Note
When narrowing the space between the bundle arms [1],
be sure to move them gently and simultaneously.
When reinstalling them, be sure to check that the guide
shaft [4] has been inserted into the shock absorbing hole
[5].
9. Rotate the bundle arms [1] to the guide plate [6] on the stapler
side.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[1]
15anf2c021na
F -161


[1]
[2]
10. Remove the 6 screws (with 1 washer each) [1], and then hold the
shafts [2] to pull out the saddle stitching unit [3].
Note
When pull out the saddle stitching unit, be sure not to
snap the wiring harness of the removed connector contact
with SD.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
15anf2c024nb
17.3.4 Replacing the saddle stitching unit

CAUTION
Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the saddle stitching unit is heavy.

Saddle stitch unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 copies) *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
[3]
[4]
[5]
1. Pull out the saddle stitching unit. (Refer to F.17.3.3 Pulling out the
saddle stitching unit)
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and the screw [2], and remove the saddle
stitching unit [5] with 2 people by holding the shafts [3] and [4]
while lift up the shaft [3] slightly and shift the saddle stitching unit
to the front side.
Note
Be sure to hold the saddle stitching unit at the shafts [3]
and [4].
When reinstalling the saddle stitching unit, check that the
unit is surely placed on the rails [6] before releasing the
unit.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[1]
15anf2c025na
F -162

17.4 Trimmer section

17.4.1 Removing/installing the trimmer paddle assy
(1) Procedure
Rear cover /Lt (Refer to G.14.3.2 Rear cover /Lt)
2. Store the trimmer scraps box completely in the SD.
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the trimmer scraps guide [2].
Note
When installing the trimmer scraps guide, be sure that the
trimmer scraps box is stored completely in the SD, and
the trimmer scraps guide [2] is fully stretched. If you
stretch the trimmer scraps guide with the trimmer scraps
box has not stored completely, the trimmer scraps guide
gets broken during operation.
[1]
[2]
a0h2t3c009ca
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the trimmer paddle assy [2].
[1]
[2]
a0h2t3c010ca
17.4.2 Replacing the trimmer blade kit

WARNING
Pay extra caution when holding the trimmer blade [1]. Never touch the edge [2] of the blade. You get injured.
Remove the blade cover only at the replacement. Otherwise, never remove the cover. You get injured.
Dispose the used trimmer blade as specified by the local authority.
[2]
[1]
a0h2t3c011ca

Trimmer blade kit
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 37,500 cuts) *1
: Every 1,500,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 37,500 cuts) *2
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 37,500 cuts) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -163

(2) Procedure
[3]
1. Move the trimmer board to the release position.

Note
Move the trimmer board to the trimmer press upper limit
sensor (PS52) by the output check code ""71-56" in the I/O
check mode in the service mode.
[2] [1]
2. Turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and the main power switch
outlet.
4. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.17.4.1 Removing/
installing the trimmer paddle assy)
6. Loosen the screws [2] and [3].
WARNING
Do not loosen the screws [2] and [3] too much, or the
trimmer blade drops during the operation. Keep the
loosening amount of the screws [2] and [3] to a minimum
requirement for removing the trimmer blade [4].
[6]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[1]
a0h2t3c012ca
7. Hold the screws [2] and [3] and slightly lift the screw [3] side. Then
move the trimmer blade [4] in the arrow-marked direction [6] to pull
out from the hole [5], and remove it.
8. Put the trimmer blade [4] at a safe place with no fear of falling
down.
WARNING
Pay extra caution when handling the trimmer blade [4].
Never touch the edge [7] of the blade. You get injured.
9. Insert the #2.5 hex wrench [2] onto the mounting slit [1] of the
trimmer blade, and then slide it from right [3] to left [4] (viewed
from the operator) to clean the trimmer scraps.
Note
Conduct the cleaning with the #2.5 hex wrench which is
one-step thinner than the hex wrench #3 used for the
installation screws of the trimmer blade. Using #3 causes
the deformation of the mounting slit.
To change the direction of the hex wrench, remove the
wrench once and reinsert it again.
The bottom of the slit of the left side [4] (viewed from the
operator) is curved in the same manner as the blade [5].
Be sure to scrape the trimmer scraps.
[2]
[5]
10. Clean the mounting slit [1] of the trimmer blade with the blower
brush.
[4]
[3]
a0h2t3c013ca
11. Put a new trimmer blade [1] on the floor and insert 2 new screws
about half and a bit length of them [3] into the marked side [2].
WARNING
Be sure to insert the screws [3] enough to hold the
trimmer blade, otherwise the trimmer blade falls down
during the operation.
Note
Install the brand-new screws [3] that are shipped with the
trimmer blade kit.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
a0h2t3c014ca
12. Remove the blade cover [4] of the new trimmer blade kit and put
that cover on the old trimmer blade.
F -164

13. Insert the trimmer blade to the hole [3] by holding 2 screws [2].
Then insert 2 screws [2] to the screw grooves [4].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[4]
a0h2t3c015ca
[1][2]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[3]
[5]
14. Tighten the new screw [1] temporarily. Then press 2 screws [1]
and [2] downward [3] until the trimmer blade [4] contacts the
bottom, and then press it to the right side [5] (viewed from the
operator).
15. Tighten 2 screws [1] and [2] with the #3 hex wrench [6].
WARNING
When tightening 2 screws [1] and [2], tighten them
temporarily with the torque that bends the tip of the #3
hex wrench [6] approximately 5 degrees [7], and then fully
tighten them with the strong torque that bends it
approximately 15 degrees [8].
Note
Be sure to check and clear the foreign object that
obstacles the operation of the trimmer blade.
Note
After replacing the trimmer blade, perform the saddle
stitch with trimming and check that the trimming is
performed without problem.
17. After replacing the trimmer blade kit, conduct the following steps.
[2]
[1]
a0h2t3c016ca
17.4.3 Replacing the trimmer board assy

Trimmer board assy
: Every 600,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 18,900 cuts) *1
: Every 750,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 18,900 cuts) *2
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 18,900 cuts) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -165

(2) Procedure
[7]
1. Move the trimmer board to the release position.

Note
By the output check code "71-97" in the I/O check mode in
the service mode, move the trimmer press board to the
position where the trimmer board is released.
[1]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[2]
outlet.
4. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.17.4.1 Removing/
installing the trimmer paddle assy)
5. Remove the trimmer board assy [1] by pulling it horizontally to the
back side.
Note
When reinstalling it, aligning the slit [2] of the trimmer
board assy [1] with the pin [3] and insert it between the
trimmer press plate [4] and the hold plate [5].
When inserting it, be careful not to bend the guide sheet
[6].
When pushing it into the machine, be sure to insert it
horizontally by pushing the movement arm receiver [7].
a0h2t3c017ca
6. Clean the bottom surface of the actuator [1] and the top surface [2]
of the trimmer blade retaining plate which contacts to the bottom
surface.
Note
When the trimmer scraps remain or the cleaning is not
conducted properly, the trimmer completion timing differs
and a trimming fault occurs.
[1]
[2]
a0h2t3c067ca

8. Reset the trimmer board solenoid operation counter.
Note
Reset the trimmer board solenoid operation counter by
the output check code "71-95" of the I/O check mode of
the service mode.
If the counter is not reset, the trimmer board solenoid
operating timing after the trimmer board is replaced
becomes faster than specified timing (700/500/300 times
of trimming). (In the first operation only)
After replacing the trimmer board, perform the saddle
stitch with trimming and check that the trimming is
performed without problem.
9. After replacing the trimmer board assy, conduct the following item.
17.4.4 Replacing the trimming unit

CAUTION
Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the trimmer unit is heavy.

Trimmer unit
: Spot replacement (actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 cuts) *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000
F -166

(2) Procedure for pulling out the trimmer unit

[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]

Rear cover /Rt (Refer to G.14.3.3 Rear cover /Rt)
Left cover (Refer to G.14.3.4 Left cover)
Trimmer paddle assy (Refer to F.17.4.1 Removing/installing
the trimmer paddle assy)
2. Remove each 4 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove 2
fixing plates [2].
a0h2t3c018ca
[2]
[1]
[2]

Note
When reinstalling it, be careful not to nip the wiring
harness with the metal plate.
5. Pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until the stoppers [4] and
[5] touch to the anti-drop brackets [6] and [7] by holding the
configuration parts [3] of the trimmer unit.
[5] [7]
[6] [4]
[3]
a0h2t3c019ca
(3) Removing/reinstalling the trimmer unit

1. Conduct by the step 4 of the procedure for pulling out the trimmer
unit (Refer to F.17.4.4.(2) Procedure for pulling out the trimmer
unit)
DANGER:
Be sure not to pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until
the stopper is removed. If the stopper is removed while the
trimmer unit is pulled out to the back side, the trimmer unit
drops.
[1]
2. Disconnect 5 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harness

from the wiring harness clamp.
[1]
a0h2t3c020ca
F -167


[1]
[3]
[2]
3. Remove each 2 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove the
stoppers /1 [2] and /2 [3].
4. Pull out the trimmer unit [4] to the back side by holding the
configuration parts [5].
Note
Remove or reinstall the trimmer unit [4] by lifting it slightly
to avoid the projection for preventing falling off [6] on the
trimmer unit plate.
Be sure not to hold the position that is easily damaged
like the electrical parts.
CAUTION
Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because
the trimmer unit is heavy.
[1]

6. After replacing the trimmer unit, conduct the following item.
[5]
[4]
[5]
[6]
a0h2t3c021ca
17.4.5 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32)

: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 cuts *2)
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[2]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[2]
1. Pull out the trimmer unit. (Refer to F.17.4.4 Replacing the trimming
unit)
3. Loosen 4 screws [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to tighten 4 screws [2] after
making the tension of the spring [3] over the mounting
plate [4].
4. Remove 4 screws [6] with keeping the trimmer press motor (M32)
[5], and then remove it from the belt [7].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put the trimmer press
motor (M32) [5] into the round hole [8].
[7]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[1]
a0h2t3c022ca
F -168


[1]
5. Loosen the screw [1] and then remove the gear [2] from the
trimmer press motor (M32) [3].
7. After replacing the trimmer press motor (M32), conduct the
following items.
[2]
[3]
a0h2t3c023ca
17.4.6 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31)

*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure (previous trimmer unit)

[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]

Trimmer scraps guide (Refer to F.17.4.1 Removing/installing
the trimmer paddle assy)
2. Remove each 4 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove 2
fixing plates [2].
a0h2t3c018ca
[2]
[1]
3. Remove 2 screws [1] of the jig for supporting trimmer unit and then
remove the anti-drop bracket [2].
F -169


[4]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[1]
4. Align the edge of the jig for supporting trimmer unit [1] with the
corner [4] of the trimmer unit based on the hole [2] of the jig for
supporting trimmer unit [1].

Note
harness with the metal plate.
6. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the stopper [3].
7. Reinstall the anti-drop bracket [5] with 2 screws [4] which have
been removed in step 3.
DANGER:
Be sure not to pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until
the stopper [3] is removed. If the stopper is removed while the
trimmer unit is pulled out to the back side, the trimmer unit
drops.
[4]
[6]
[5]
[6]
F -170

9. Disconnect 5 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harness

[1]
[1]
a0h2t3c020ca
[3]
[4]
[1]
10. Pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until the stoppers [3]
touch to the anti-drop brackets [4] by holding the lower edges [2] of
the trimmer unit [1].
Note
Be sure not to hold the position that is easily damaged
like the electrical parts.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
11. Hold the lower right [2] of the trimmer unit [1], turn it around the
engaging [3] of the stopper and the anti-drop bracket, and then put
the trimmer unit [1] on the jig for supporting trimmer unit [4].
[4]
[1]
a0h2t3c024ca
F -171


[1] [2]
13. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the trimmer blade motor
(M31) [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to set so that the wiring
harness [3] comes in the position as shown in the picture.
[1]
[3]
a0h2t3c025ca
[2]
14. Check point when reinstalling the trimmer blade motor (M31)
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to insert the D-cut [1] of the
shaft on the trimmer blade motor (M31) into the D-cut hole
[2] of the planetary gear.
[1]
a0h2t3c026ca
[2]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[1]
15. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the mounting bracket [3]
from the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure that the label [4] is in the
same direction as the slotted hole [5] on the mounting
bracket [3].
17. After replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31), conduct the
following item.
[1]
a0h2t3c027ca
(3) Procedure (new trimmer unit)

[1]
[1]
[3]
3. Loosen 3 screws [1] and then remove the trimmer blade motor
(M31) [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to set so that the wiring
harness [3] comes in the position as shown in the picture.
[2]
F -172


[2]
4. Check point when reinstalling the trimmer blade motor (M31)

Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to insert the D-cut [1] of the
shaft on the trimmer blade motor (M31) into the D-cut hole
[2] of the planetary gear.
[1]
a0h2t3c026ca
[2]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[1]
5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the mounting bracket [3]
from the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure that the label [4] is in the
same direction as the slotted hole [5] on the mounting
bracket [3].
7. After replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31), conduct the
following item.
[1]
a0h2t3c027ca
17.4.7 Lubrication to the trimmer unit

(1) Periodic lubrication parts/cycle
Paper holding screw
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 37,500 cuts) *1
: Every 1,500,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 37,500 cuts) *2*3
Drive gear /3, /4
: Every 20,250,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 500,000 cuts) *2
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure (previous trimmer unit)

[3]
1.
2.
3.
4.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a0h2t3c060ca
F -173
Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.14.3.2 Rear cover /Lt)
Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the paper holding screw [1].
Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the drive gears /3 [2] and /4 [3].
Note
When applying the grease, be careful not to spill the
grease to other parts.

(3) Procedure (new trimmer unit)

1. Pull out the trimmer unit. (Refer to F.17.4.4.(2) Procedure for
pulling out the trimmer unit)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the paper holding screw [1].
3. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the drive gears /3 [2] and /4 [3].
Note
When applying the grease, be careful not to spill the
grease to other parts.
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
17.5 Bundle processing section

17.5.1 Replacing the bundle press stage gear
: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 set (number of set of sheets exited to the bundle tray) *2)
*2 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000spotted replaced cycle
F -174

(2) Procedure
2. Rotate the jam cleaning knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction
until it stops.
Note
When the jam cleaning knob [1] stops, be sure to check
that the bundle registration plate [2] comes to the upper
position [3] after the bundle press stage goes down and
the tension of the wire [4] is released.
Be sure not to rotate the jam cleaning knob too much.
[2]
3. Remove the E-ring [5] and move the gear [8] to the back side after
moving the bearings [6] and [7].
[8]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[1]
[6]
[5]
a0h2t3c028ca
[2]
[3]
[1]

5. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the bundle press stage up
down motor (M24).
Note
Be careful not to lose the pin [3] as it drops off when
removing the gear [2].
a0h2t3c029ca
6. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the bundle press stage
gear [2] and 2 bearings [3] on both sides of the gear.
Note
After replacing the bundle press stage gear [2], be sure to
apply plas guard No.2 to the gear.
8. After replacing the bundle press stage gear, conduct the following
items.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a0h2t3c030ca
F -175

17.5.2 Replacing the bundle press stage unit

Bundle press stage unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 copies (number of set of sheets exited to the bundle tray)) *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
Trimmer unit (Refer to F.17.4.4 Replacing the trimming unit)
2. Rotate the jam cleaning knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction
until it stops.
Note
When the jam cleaning knob [1] stops, be sure to check
that the bundle registration plate [2] comes to the upper
position [3] after the bundle press stage goes down and
the tension of the wire [4] is released.
Be sure not to rotate the jam cleaning knob too much.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
a0h2t3c031ca

4. Remove the wiring harness [2] from the clamp [3], and then pull it
out from the hole [4] by following the arrow.
Note
harness [2] with the trimmer unit plate [5].
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
a0h2t3c032ca
F -176


[1] [2]
5. Remove 1 each of the screws at 2 places and remove 1 each of

the up-down wire [2], and then take it out to the front side of the
machine from the trimmer unit plate [3] by following the arrow.
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to lubricate Molykote EM-30L
to each 2 shafts [4].
[4]
6. Remove 8 screws [5] and then remove the trimmer unit plate [3].
Note
Be careful not to damage the trimmer scraps guide [6].
When reinstalling it, be sure to align the projection [7].
[7]
[3]
[5][6][5]
a0h2t3c033ca
[3]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[1]
[2]
7. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the wiring harness [2]
from clamp [3], and then take it out from the hole [4] of the metal
plate to the arrow-marked direction.
8. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the bracket [6].
9. Remove 2 screws [7] and then remove the guide plate [8].
[4]
[8]
a0h2t3c034ca
F -177


[1]
[3]

11. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the bundle registration
motor (M12) [3].
13. Remove 4 screws [5] and then remove the bundle press
movement motor (M17) [6].
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a0h2t3c035ca
[1]
[4]
[5]
[2]
14. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear [2] and the pin
[3].
[6].
[3]
[6]
a0h2t3c036ca
F -178


[2]
[6]
[3]
16. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

17. Cut the wire binding bands [2] and [3] and remove the wiring
harness [4].
Note
Be sure to let the wire binding bands [2] and [3] into the
shaft hole [5] and install the wire retaining band [6] on the
[2] side between the bands [2] and [3].
[4]
[5]
[1]
[7]
[5][10]
[6]
a0h2t3c037ca
[2]
[3]
[4]
18. Pull out the bundle paper exit tray [1].

19. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the wire mounting plate /Lt
[3].
Note
Since the wire /Lt [4] has the tension of the spring, be sure
to remove 2 screws [2] with keeping the wire mounting
plate /Lt [3] and lift it up until the tension is released, and
then take it off gently.
20. Loosen the screws [5] and pull the wire mounting plate /Rt [6]
downward to move it to the opposite side of the shaft [7], and then
remove it to the space between the side plate [8] and the timing
belt [9].
Note
Since the wire /Rt [10] has the tension of the spring, be
sure to lift up the wire mounting plate /Rt [6] until the
tension is released, and then take it off gently.
[8]
[9]
[1]
a0h2t3c038ca
21. Check point when reinstalling the wire

Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put the wire [1] on 2
pulleys [2].
[1]
[2]
a0h2t3c039ca
F -179

22. Push the bundle paper exit tray [1] fully to the back.
23. Remove 2 E-rings [2] and then remove 2 bearings [3] and the drive
shaft [4].
24. Remove 2 E-rings [5] and then remove the bearings [6].
[6]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
a0h2t3c040ca
25. While keep holding the bundle paper exit assist roller [1]
horizontally, push the bundle press stage unit [3] to the back with
holding the shaft [2] to release the roller pin [4] of the bundle paper
exit assist roller arm from the regulation bracket [5]. After the
release, put down the bundle paper exit assist roller [1] gently.
Note
Once the roller pin [4] of the bundle paper exit assist roller
arm is removed from the regulation bracket [5], the bundle
paper exit assist roller drops off. Therefore, be sure to
hold with hands.
When reinstalling, be sure to put the roller pin [4] under
the regulation bracket [5].
[1]
[5]
[4]
a0h2t3c041ca
26. Pull out the bundle paper exit tray [1] to about half.
Note
If the bundle paper exit tray [1] is pulled out too much, the
bundle press stage unit [2] drops off from the tray.
[4]
27. Pull out the bundle press stage unit [2] to the position in the picture
with holding the bundle press section [3]. Then, pull it out more to
the back with paying attention to the contacting places [5], [6], and
[7] on the right side, and remove the arm [8].
Note
After the installation, be sure to check that the bundle
press stage unit goes up and down horizontally by
rotating the jam cleaning knob.
[2]
[3]
[8]
[1]
[5]
[6]
[7]
a0h2t3c042ca
F -180

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PB-...
18. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PB-503

18.1 Sub compile (SC) section
CAUTION
Be sure to unplug the power plug of the PB from the power outlet.
Make sure to unplug the power code of the main body from the power outlet when it is connected to the main body.
18.1.2 Replacing the switchback roller

Switchback roller
Every 750,000 prints*1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 600,000 prints)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 600,000 prints)*2
*1 1200/1200P/1051
*2 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[6]
[7]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[8]
1. Open the upper door [1] to open the SC door [2]. Then close the
upper door [1].
Note
To keep the SC door open, insert a screwdriver into the
hole [3]. Be sure to remove the screwdriver when closing
the sub clamp door, or the cover gets damaged.
[5]
[2]
[1]
2. Remove the 2 C-clips [4], and slide the 2 bearings [5] into the
inside.
Note
Before removing the C-clips, be sure to spread a sheet of
paper and so on under the switchback roller assy to
prevent the C-clips from dropping into inside of the
machine.
3. Release the pulley [7] from the belt [6] gently, and remove the
switchback roller assy [8].
a075f2c001ca
[2]
4. Check point when reinstalling the switchback roller assy

Note
After reinstalling the switchback roller assy, use a mirror
to check that the belt [1] is properly looped over the pulley
[2] without any slackness. If the belt has comes off the
pulley, remove the SC cover /Up to correct that. (Refer to
G.15.2.12 SC cover /Up)
[1]
a075f2c002ca
F -181


[9]
[4]
[3]
[8]
[6]
5. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the roller [2] and the pin [3].
Note
Be sure to install the bearing [4] so that its collar faces
toward the switchback roller.
7. Remove the E-ring [5], slide the switchback roller [8] in the
direction of the arrow [6] (toward the pulley) and remove the pin
[7]. Then remove the switchback roller [8] in the direction of the
arrow [9].
Note
After replacing the parts, be sure to conduct the counter
reset of parts counter No.299.
[5]
[7]
[2]
[1]
a075f2c003ca
18.1.3 Replacing the SC switchback release motor (M13) and the one-way clutches /A and /B
SC switchback release motor (M13)
: Every 6,000,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 3,000,000 prints *2)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 750,000 prints*2)
One-way clutch /B
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 6,000,000 prints*2)
One-way clutch /A
: Every 12,000,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 6,000,000 cuts *2)
*1 Periodical replacement only for 1200/1200P/1051. C8000 is not supported.
(2) Procedure
[2]
[3]
1. Remove the SC cover /Up. (Refer to G.15.2.12 SC cover /Up)

2. Open the upper door [1] to open the SC door [2] and set the paper
[3].
3. Close the SC door [2].
Note
Before removing the C-clips, be sure to spread a sheet of
paper under the switchback roller assy to prevent the Cclips from dropping into the machine inside.
[1]
a0v9t3c020ca
F -182

[2]
[3]
[4]
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the switchback cam [2].
Note
The switchback cam [2] is tensioned by the spring [4] via
the switchback arm [3]. When removing the screw [1], the
switchback arm [3] is pulled by the spring [4] and the
switchback cam [2] moves. At this time, be careful not to
drop the screw [1].
[1]
a0v9t3c021ca
[2]
5. Check point when reinstalling the switchback cam

Note
When reinstalling the switchback cam [2], be sure to
install it following the positional relation with the actuator
[2] as shown in the picture.
[1]
a0v9t3c022ca
[1]
[3]
[2]
6. Remove 2 E-rings [1] and remove 2 bearings [2].

a0v9t3c023ca
8. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and remove the wiring harness from 2

wiring harness clamps [2].
[1]
[2]
a0v9t3c024ca
F -183

9. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the SC switchback release

motor assy [2].
[1]
[2]
a0v9t3c025ca
10. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the SC switchback release

motor [2].
[1]
[2]
a0v9t3c026ca
11. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the one-way clutch /B [2].
[2]
[1]
a0v9t3c027ca
12. Check point when reinstalling the one-way clutch /B

Note
When reinstalling the one-way clutch /B [1], be sure to
install it in the direction shown in the picture.
[1]
a0v9t3c028ca
[4]
[3]
[1]
13. Remove the screw [1] and remove the pressure cam [2].
14. Remove the E-ring [3] and remove the one-way clutch /A [4].
Note
[2]
a0v9t3c029ca
F -184


[2]
16. Check point when reinstalling the pressure cam

Note
When reinstalling the pressure cam [1], be sure to install it
following the positional relation with the actuator [2] as
shown in the picture.
[1]
a0v9t3c030ca
17. Check point when reinstalling the one-way clutch /A

Note
When reinstalling the one-way clutch /A [1], be sure to
install it in the direction shown in the picture.
[1]
a0v9t3c033ca
18. Standard value when reinstalling the SC switchback release motor

assy
Note
When reinstalling the SC switchback release motor assy,
be sure to set so that the distances "a" and "b" become
same value.
Standard value: The difference of distances "a" and "b" =
0.2mm or less
a0v9t3c004ca
18.1.4 Replacing the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)

SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)
(2) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the SC unit. (Refer to G.15.2.21 SC unit)

Note
When putting down the SC unit, be sure not to pin the
wiring harness under it.
Put the SC unit on a table so that the bottom surface of
the sub scan alignment unit [1] does not contact the floor.
2. Pull out the sub scan alignment unit [1] in the arrow-marked
direction.
a0v9t3c005ca
F -185


4. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the SC pressure arm solenoid
(SD13) [3].
Note
[1]
[3]
[2]
a0v9t3c006ca
6. Standard value when reinstalling the SC pressure arm solenoid

(SD13)
Note
When reinstalling the SC pressure arm solenoid, adjust
the position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard
value with the plunger [1] pulled, and then fix with the
screw [2].
Standard value: a = 16.4 1mm
[1]
[2]
a0v9t3c007ca
18.1.5 Replacing the FD alignment solenoid (SD11)

FD alignment solenoid (SD11)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the SC unit. (Refer to G.15.2.21 SC unit)
Note
When putting down the SC unit, be sure not to pin the
wiring harness under it.
Put the SC unit on a table so that the bottom surface of
the sub scan alignment unit [1] does not contact the floor.
[1]
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the SC door [2].
[3]
[2]
a0v9t3c008ca
F -186


[2]
[3]
3. Put the SC unit with the FD alignment solenoid assy [4] faced up.
Note
Put the SC unit on a table so that the SC switchback
release motor assy [3] does not contact the floor.
[4]

5. Remove 2 screws [3] and pull out 2 shafts, and then remove the
sub scan alignment plate [2].
[1]
a0v9t3c009ca
6. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the sub scan alignment arm [2].
7. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the screw [4], and then
remove the FD alignment solenoid assy [5].
Note
When removing the FD alignment solenoid assy, be
careful not to drop the pin.
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a0v9t3c010ca
[1]
[4]
8. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the mounting plate [2], and then
remove the FD alignment solenoid (SD11) [3].
Note
When reinstalling the FD alignment solenoid, adjust the
position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard value
with the plunger [4] pulled.
Standard value: a = 17.5 0.5mm
[2]
[3]
a0v9t3c011ca

Note
a0v9t3c012ca
18.1.6 Lubrication to the sub scan alignment plate shaft

Sub scan alignment plate shaft
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -187

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.15.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Remove the upper cover /Md. (Refer to G.15.2.17 Upper cover /
Md)
3. Pull out the clamp unit [1].
4. Apply plas guard No.2 to the 4 sub scan alignment plate shafts [2].
[2]
[1]
a15xt3c001ca
18.2 Cover paper table section

CAUTION
The glue tank unit is extremely hot right after turning OFF the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of the main
body. To prevent burn injuries, leave the unit until it cools enough before performing the maintenance work.
Note
Before performing the maintenance work, be sure to carry out the initial operation so that each part/unit is at the home position.
18.2.2 Replacing the roller cutter blade assy

*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000.
F -188

(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
1. Remove the PB from the main body.

2. Remove the conveyance unit /Lw. (Refer to G.15.2.26
Conveyance unit /Lw)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and the roller cutter blade assy [2]. Then
Note
Pull out the cover paper waste box before removing the
roller cutter assy.
When reinstalling the roller cutter assy, be sure to route
the wire binding [4] under the cutter motor (M50) [5].
Push the roller cutter blade assy [2] against the metal
plate [6] to reinstall the assy.
Note
[6]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[3]
a075f2c007ca
18.2.3 Cleaning the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate
Cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -189

(2) Simplified cleaning procedure

1. Carry out the I/O check in service mode in the order of following
output check code, and turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and
the main power switch (SW1) with the cover paper folding plate
opened.
"77-55", "77-45", "77-58", "77-61"
2. Clean the cover paper folding plate [1] and the book spine backing
plate [2].
[1]
[2]
a075f2c004cb
18.2.4 Lubrication to the cover paper alignment plate shaft

Cover paper alignment plate shaft
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -190

(2) Procedure
1. Turn the knob [1] to move the cover paper alignment plate inward.
2. Apply plas guard No.2 to the 4 cover paper alignment plate shafts
[2].
Note
Apply plas guard No.2 to the outside of the cover paper
alignment plate bearing on both sides.
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
a075f2c094ca
18.3 Cover paper supply section

18.3.1 Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy
(1) Procedure
[2]

2. Unlock the cover paper tray [3] by slightly pushing up the cover
paper tray lock lever [2] with a screwdriver or a similar tool, and
pull out the cover paper tray [3].
[1]
[3]
a15xt3c002ca
F -191


[2]
[3]
3. Turn the pick-up roller [1] in the direction of the arrow

(counterclockwise as seen from the front side) to make the
coupling [2] upright.
Note
Be sure not to rotate the pick-up roller [1] against the
direction of the arrow (clockwise) forcibly, as the roller is
not designed to rotate in that direction.
[1]
a075f2c009ca
[2]
[2]
[5]
[1]
5. Remove the bearing /Fr [1].

6. Move the bearing /Rr [2] to the rear side.
Note
When reinstalling them, insert the bearing /Rr [2] into the
notch [5] on the metal frame while keeping on the level the
flat face [4] of the bearing, and slightly pressing down the
metal frame [3] of the pick-up roller assy. Then insert the
bearing /Fr [1] in the same manner.
[4]
[3]
a075f2c010ca
F -192


[1]
[5]
7. Hold the pick-up roller assy [1] by hand and lift and tilt the paper
feed roller [3] so that it rotates on the shaft [2] of the pick-up roller
to remove it from the notch of the bearing [4] and the coupling [5].
Note
When removing the pick-up roller assy [1], be careful not
to damage the sensor [7] with the metal frame [6].
[4]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[7]
a075f2c011ca
8. Remove the pick-up roller shaft [2] from the arm [1] of the paper
feed guide plate and then remove the pick-up roller assembly [3].
Note
After installing the pick-up roller assy, rotate the pick-up
roller counterclockwise as seen from the front side.
Make sure the paper feed roller and the belt rotate
smoothly.
The pick-up roller rotates in counterclockwise direction
only. Be sure not to rotate it in the opposite direction.
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075f2c081ca
F -193

10. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the entrance guide plate
[2].
[1]
[2]
a075f2c012ca
[1]
a075f2c013ca
12. Open the frame [1] of the separation roller assy in the direction of
the arrow, and remove the coupling pin [2] on the rear side from
the joint [3]. Then remove the separation roller assy [4].
Note
When reinstalling, make sure to engage the coupling pin
[2] with the joint [3].
When reinstalling the separation roller assy [4], fasten it
with the screws while pressing it down.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
a075f2c014ca
18.3.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller
Pick-up roller
Paper feed roller
F -194


*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
Note
The outward appearance of the collar is identical for the paper feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar of the
paper feed roller has a one-way mechanism on the inside while the collar of the separation roller does not. Be careful not to
confuse one with the other.
1. Remove the pick-up roller assembly. (Refer to F.18.3.1 Removing/
[4]
[2]
[1]
reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] of the pick-up roller assy.
3. Slide 2 bearings [2] and remove the pick-up roller [3] together with
the shaft [4].
[3]
a075f2c015ca
[2]
[1]
[4]
4. Remove the bearing [1] and pull out the pick-up roller [2] from the
shaft [3].
5. Remove the pick-up roller [2] from the collar [4].
6. Replace the pick-up roller.
[3]
a075f2c082ca
[1]
[4] [5]
[2]
[2]
7. Remove the C-clip [1] and pull out the bearing /Fr [2] from the shaft
[3].
8. Move the bearing /Rr [4] and remove the paper feed roller [5]
together with the shaft [3].
[3] a075f2c086ca
[1]

10. Pull out the paper feed roller [3] from the collar [2].
11. Replace the pick-up roller [3].
[3]
a075f2c087ca
[2]
[1]
Note
There is no big difference in appearance between the 2
collars (one for the paper feed roller, and the other one is
for the separation roller). However, they are different in
the inside. The collar [1] for the paper feed roller has a
one-way mechanism in it, and the other one [2] does not.
Make sure to attach them correctly.
Note
reset of parts counters No.240 and No. 241.
a075f2c016ca
F -195


Separation roller
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
[3]
1. Remove the separation roller assy. (Refer to F.18.3.1 Removing/

reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the separation roller [3] together
with the shaft [2].
[2]
[1]
a075f2c017ca
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[1]
[5]
3. Pull out the gear [2], the collar [3] and the separation roller [4] from
the shaft [1] in the direction of the arrow.
4. Replace the separation roller [4].
Note
There is no big difference in appearance between the 2
collars (one for the paper feed roller, and the other one is
for the separation roller). However, they are different in
the inside. The collar [5] for the paper feed roller has a
one-way mechanism in it, and the other one [6] does not.
Make sure to attach them correctly.
a075f2c018ca
18.3.4 Replacing the cover paper feed clutch (CL71) and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72)
Cover paper feed clutch (CL71)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 3,000,000 feeds)*1
Cover paper separation clutch (CL72)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 3,000,000 feeds)*1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
F -196

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the stopper screws, 1 each, attached on the right and left
rails of the cover paper tray and pull out the tray. (Refer to G.
15.2.28 Cover paper tray)
2. Remove the 5 screws [1] and remove the clutch cover [2].
[1]
[2]
a075f2c019ca
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5] [6]

4. Remove the C-clips [2], 1 each, and remove the cover paper feed
clutch (CL71) [3] and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72) [4].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to insert the stopper [5] of the
clutch over the tab [6] of the metal frame.
Note
[5]
[6]
[1]
a075f2c020ca

18.4.1 Replacing the sub tray exit solenoid (SD4)
: Every 10,500,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 3,000,000 prints *2)
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000.
F -197

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PB from the main body.
3. Remove the upper cover /FrRt. (Refer to G.15.2.13 Upper cover /
FrRt)
4. Remove the upper cover /RrRt. (Refer to G.15.2.15 Upper cover /
RrRt)
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the metal frame [2].
7. Remove 6 screws [3] and disconnect the connectors [4] and [5].
9. Remove the screws of 3 knobs [7] and remove the knobs.
11. Remove 6 screws [8] and remove the conveyance unit [11].
Note
Put the conveyance unit on a table so that the paper
entrance guide does not contact the floor.
[7]
[4]
[10]
[6]
[11]
[9]
[8]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[3]
a0v9t3c013ca
12. Loosen the screws [1], 2 each, on the upper cover /Rt, and remove
the upper cover /Rt.
[2]
a0v9t3c014ca

14. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the sub tray exit solenoid assy
[3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
a0v9t3c015ca
F -198

[1]
15. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the sub tray exit solenoid assy
(SD4) [2].
Note
[2]
a0v9t3c016ca
[1]
[2]
17. Standard 1 value when reinstalling the sub tray exit solenoid assy
(SD4)
Note
When reinstalling the sub tray exit solenoid, adjust the
position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard value
with the plunger [2] pulled.
Standard value: a = 3.7 0.5mm
a0v9t3c017ca
18. Standard 2 value when reinstalling the sub tray exit solenoid assy
(SD4)
Note
While pulling the plunger of the sub tray exit solenoid,
adjust the position so that the distance "a" (the distance
between the paper exit roller and the paper exit driven
roller) obtains a standard value.
Standard value: a = 0 1.5mm
a0v9t3c018ca
19. Check point when reinstalling the conveyance unit

Note
After reinstalling the conveyance unit, check the points
"a" shown in the picture, to see that the conveyance unit
does not contact the upper door. When they are in
contact, loosen 4 fixing screws on the upper cover /Rt and
adjust the position so that the upper door and the upper
cover /Rt does not come in contact.
a0v9t3c019ca
18.5 Framework section

18.5.1 Replacing the exhaust filters /A and /B
Exhaust filter /A
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 120 hours of rotation of glue apply roller)*1
Exhaust filter /B
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 240 hours of rotation of glue apply roller)*1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -199

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the exhaust filter assy [1].
[1]
a15xt3c003ca
[2]
2. Pull the filter holding lever [1] in the arrow-marked direction, and
then remove 2 exhaust filters /A [2].
[1]
a15xt3c004ca
3. Reverse the exhaust filter assy and slide the exhaust filter /B [1] in
the arrow-marked direction to remove it.
Note
[1]
a15xt3c005ca
18.6 Glue tank section

18.6.1 Replacing the glue apply roller drive gear bearing
Glue apply roller drive gear bearing
: Every 30,000,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 6,000 hours)*2
F -200

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the glue tank unit. (Refer to G.15.2.20 Glue tank unit)
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the tank cover /Lt [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
a15xt3c006ca
[1]
3. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the gear cover [3] from the notch
[2].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to put the gear cover edge [3]
into the notch [2].
a15xt3c007ca
4. Remove the 4 screws [1].

Note
projections [2].
[1]
[2]
a15xt3c008ca
F -201


[1]
[5]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
5. Remove 2 E-ring [1].

6. Pull up the glue tank assy by holding the shaft [2], and remove the
glue apply roller drive gears /1 [3] and /2 [4] and the bearings [5], 2
for each.
a15xt3c009ca
18.6.2 Lubrication to the glue apply roller drive gear

Glue apply roller drive gear
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
1. Open the front door and move the glue tank unit [1] frontward.
Note
When moving the glue tank unit, be sure to hold it by the
metal frame [2] on the right side of the unit.
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the gear cover [4].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to put the edge of the gear
cover [4] under the notch [5] of the glue tank side.
[5]
[4]
[3]
a15xt3c010ca
F -202


[2]
3. Apply the multemp FF-RM to the Glue apply roller drive gear [2].
[1]
a15xt3c011ca
18.6.3 Replacing the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4)

: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 120 hours) *2
*1 1200/1200P/1051
*2 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
[1]
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the pellet supply cooling fan
(M4) [3].
Note
When reinstalling the pellet supply cooling fan (M4) [3], be
sure to reinstall it to the same direction as shown in the
picture.
Be sure not to nip the wiring harness.
[3]
[2]
8050ma3141
18.6.4 Replacing the glue tank assy

Glue tank assy
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,000 hours) *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
F -203

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the glue tank unit. (Refer to G.15.2.20 Glue tank unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wiring mounting cover
[2].
[1]
[2]
a15xt3c012ca
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the glue thread cut plate
[2].
4. Remove 6 screws [3] and remove the tank cover /Lt [4].
5. Remove 4 screws [5] and remove the tank cover /Rt [6].
Note
When reinstalling it, reinstall it so that the curved part
comes top.
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[5]
a15xt3c013ca
F -204


[1]
[3]
6. Disconnect 4 connectors [2] of the translucent wiring harnesses of

the temperature sensor.
Note
When reconnecting the connector, check the color of the
connector and the number label [3] on the wiring harness,
and connect each connector to the corresponding wiring
harness.
[2]
Number
Color
White
Blue
Yellow
Black
7. Remove the connector [4] from the metal frame [5].

Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to set the metal wiring
harness [6] toward the metal plate side [7].
8. Remove the square saddle [8] from the metal frame [7] and put the
connector [4] to the inside of the glue tank unit.
[8]
[7] [2]
[6] [4] [5]

[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
a15xt3c014ca
9. Remove the wiring harness [1] from the 4 wire saddles [2].
[2]
a15xt3c015ca
10. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the glue tank assy [1].
Note
projections [3].
[2]
[3]
a15xt3c016ca
F -205


[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to set it with 2 springs [1] put
on the pin [3] on the bottom of the glue tank assy and on
the projection [4] of the glue tank unit.
After replacing the parts, be sure to conduct the glue
apply roller gap adjustment. (Refer to I.24.4 Glue apply
roller gap adjustment)
a15xt3c017ca
18.7 Clamp section

18.7.1 Lubrication to the clamp pressing board shaft
Clamp pressure plate shaft
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the clamp unit.
2. Apply the plas guard No.2 to 2 positions on the clamp pressing
board shaft [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
a075f2c122ca
18.8 Book stock section

18.8.1 Lubrication to the guide shafts /Rt and /Lt
Guide shaft /Rt, /Lt
F -206


*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Apply the plas guard No.2 to 4 positions on 4 positions [1] on the
guide shafts /Rt and /Lt.
[1]
a15xt3c067ca
F -207

19. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-506

19.1 Caution for maintenance procedure
CAUTION
Be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

19.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt
Entrance conveyance motor (M1), Paper exit motor (M2)
Entrance conveyance belt, Paper exit conveyance belt
*1 1200/1200P/1051
(2) Procedure of removing the entrance conveyance motor assy, Procedure of replacing the entrance conveyance
belt
[3]

3. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the entrance conveyance
motor assy [3] and the entrance conveyance belt [4].
Note
When reinstalling, temporary tighten 3 screws [2] and
apply tension to the entrance conveyance belt [4] by own
weight of the entrance conveyance motor [3]. Then tighten
3 screws [2].
[4]
4. Reinstall the parts by following the removal steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
[2]
a0get3c001ca
(3) Procedure of removing the paper exit conveyance motor assy and replacing the paper exit conveyance belt
[3] [5]
[6]
[4]
1. Remove the rear cover. G.17.2.3 Rear cover)

2. Disconnect the connector [1] and then remove the wiring harness
3. Remove the straight gate spring [3].
4. Remove 3 screws [4] and then remove the paper exit motor assy
[5] and the paper exit conveyance belt [6].
Note
When reinstalling, temporary tighten 3 screws [4] and
apply tension to the paper exit conveyance belt [6] by own
weight of the paper exit motor assy. Then tighten 3 screws
[4].
[4]
[1]
[2]
a0get3c002ca
F -208

(4) Replacing procedure of the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the paper exit motor (M2)
[2]
1. Remove the entrance conveyance motor assy and the paper exit
motor assy.
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the mounting bracket [2].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to put the connector [3], be
sure to install it in the direction shown in the picture.
[1]
[1]
[3]
a0get3c003ca
[3]
[4]
[2]
3. Loosen 2 screws [1] to remove the pulley gear [2]. Then remove
the entrance conveyance motor (M1) and the paper exit motor
(M2) [3].
Note
When reinstalling, insert the pin [5] to the shallower
groove [4] until it comes in contact, and then tighten 2
screws [1].
[5]
[1]
a0get3c004ca
19.2.2 Replacing the conveyance pulley, the paper exit conveyance pulley
Conveyance pulley, Paper exit conveyance pulley
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F -209

(2) Procedure
[2]
[3]
[1]

Rear cover (Refer to G.17.2.3 Rear cover)
Entrance conveyance motor, Entrance conveyance belt, Paper
exit motor, Paper exit conveyance belt (Refer to F.19.2.1
Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the paper exit
motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt)
2. Remove the screws [1], 2 for each of 4 places, 4 conveyance
pulleys [2], and 4 pulley guides [3].
3. Remove the E-ring [4], the paper exit conveyance pulley [5] and
the pulley guide [6].
Note
Reinstall the paper exit conveyance pulley [5] with the
gear inside.
[5]
[4]
[6]
a0get3c005ca
19.2.3 Replacing the entrance roller /1, the bearing /K

Entrance roller /1, Bearing /K
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F -210

(2) Procedure
[1]
[3]

Entrance conveyance motor, Entrance conveyance belt (Refer
to F.19.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1),
the paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt)
Conveyance pulley /1 of the entrance pulley. (Refer to F.19.2.2
Replacing the conveyance pulley, the paper exit conveyance
pulley)
3. Remove the screws [2], 2 for each position, and then remove the
E-rings [3], and the bearings /K [4], 1 for each.
Note
When reinstalling the bearing /K [4], be sure to set so that
the notch of the bearing /K comes in the position [5] as
To prevent the notch from opening, when tighten the
screws [2], 2 for each, in counterclockwise order.
When reinstalling the bearing /K [4], be sure to apply the
Molykote EM-30L on all over around the spring pins [6] on
front and rear of the shaft.
[5] [4]
[2]
4. Remove the pick-up roller /1 [7].

[3]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[2]
[6]
a0get3c006ca
19.2.4 Replacing the entrance roller /2, the stacker entrance roller, the stacker entrance conveyance belt, the stacker
entrance roller pressure springs /Fr and /Rr, the bearing /K
Entrance roller /2, Stacker entrance roller
Stacker entrance conveyance belt
Stacker entrance roller pressure springs /Fr and /Rr, Bearing /K
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F -211

(2) Procedure
[1]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
a0get3c007ca
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]

Rear cover(Refer to G.17.2.3 Rear cover)
Entrance conveyance motor/entrance conveyance belt (Refer
to F.19.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1),
the paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt)
Conveyance pulley of the entrance roller /2 (Refer to F.19.2.2
Replacing the conveyance pulley, the paper exit conveyance
pulley)
2. Remove the stacker entrance roller pressure springs /Fr [1] and /
Rr [2].
3. Remove the screws [3], 2 for each position, and then remove 2
coupling brackets [4].
Note
When reinstalling, push the stacker entrance roller assy
[5] against the coupling receiver bracket [6] and then
install the coupling bracket [4].
4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the knob [2].
6. Remove the screws [2], 2 for each front and rear sides, and then
remove the E-rings [3] and the bearings /K [4], 1 for each.
Note
7. Remove the stacker entrance roller assy [9].
[9]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[8]
a0get3c008ca
F -212


[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[4]
E-rings [2] and the bearings /K [3], 1 for each.
Note
[4]
9. Remove the stacker entrance roller[5].

Note
When reinstalling, be sure to set so that the flange section
[6] of the pulley comes in the direction shown in the
picture.
[6]
[5]
a0get3c009ca
[1]
[1]
[4] [3] [2]
[2] [3] [4]
E-rings [2], 1 each. Then slide the bearings [3], 1 for each.
Note
When reinstalling the bearing [3], be sure to set so that
the notch of the bearing comes in the position [4] as
11. Remove the entrance roller /2 [5] and the stacker entrance
conveyance belt [6] from the bracket [7].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to set so that the flange section
[8] of the pulley comes in the direction shown in the
picture.
[6]
[8]
[5] [7]
a0get3c010ca
19.2.5 Replacing the paper refeed roller, the merging section roller, the paper exit roller, the bearing /K
Paper refeed roller, Merging section roller, Paper exit roller, Bearing /K
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F -213

(2) Procedure
[2]
[4]
[3]
[7]
[1]
[8]
[6]
[7]

Front door(Refer to G.17.2.2 Front cover)
Rear cover(Refer to G.17.2.3 Rear cover)
Left cover(Refer to G.17.2.4 Left cover)
Paper exit motor, Paper exit conveyance belt (Refer to F.
19.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the
paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt)
Conveyance pulleys of the paper refeed roller, the merging
section roller and the paper exit roller
2. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the screw [2]. Then remove the
FD alignment belt [3] from the pulley [4].
Note
When reinstalling the FD alignment belt [3], be sure to
insert it to the pulleys [4] and [5], and place it under the
tension of the spring [6] and then tighten the screw [1].
3. Remove 4 screws [7] and the pulley fixing plate [8].
[5]
a0get3c011ca
F -214


[6]
[5]
[4]
4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the knob [2].

5. Remove the screws [3], 2 for each of 3 positions, and then remove
the E-rings [4] and the bearings /K [5], 1 for each.
Note
[3]
[2]
[1]
[7]
a0get3c012ca
F -215


[5]
[4]
[3]
6. Remove 2 E-rings [1].

7. Remove the screws [2], 2 for each of 3 positions, and then remove
the E-rings [3], and the bearings /K [4], 1 for each.
Note
When reinstalling the bearing /K [4], be sure to apply
[2]
[1]
[6]
a0get3c013ca
[2]
8. Remove the paper exit roller [1], the merging section roller [1] and
the paper refeed roller [3].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to set each roller in the
following conditions; the paper exit roller [1] with the side
which has a step on the top of the shaft faced rear, the
merging section roller [2] with its screw hole faced rear
and the paper refeed roller [3] with its D-cut faced
front.
[1]

[3]
a0get3c014ca
19.2.6 Replacing the straight gate

Straight gate
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F -216

(2) Procedure
[7]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[1]
1. Remove the Rear cover(Refer to G.17.2.3 Rear cover)

3. Remove the C-clip [2] and remove the straight gate solenoid arm
[3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and remove the straight gate solenoid arm
[5].
5. Remove the E-ring [6] and then remove the bearing [7].
[3]
a0get3c015ca
6. Open the straight conveyance guide plate [1].

7. Remove the E-ring [2] and remove the bearing [3] and the straight
gate [4].
[4]
[3]
[2]
a0get3c016ca
19.2.7 Replacing the straight gate solenoid (SD1) and the straight gate spring
Replacing the straight gate solenoid (SD1) and the straight gate spring
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 5,000,000 operations)
F -217

(2) Procedure
[6]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[1]
a0get3c020ca
[1]
[3] [4]
[6]
[1]

3. Remove the C-clip [2] and remove the straight gate solenoid arm
[3].
4. Remove the connector [4].
5. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the straight gate solenoid
assy [6].
[2]
Note
When reinstalling the parts, be sure to fix the straight gate
solenoid assy so that the leading edge [1] of the straight
gate without pulling the plunger comes to upper than the
guide plate [2] and the leading edge [3] of the straight gate
with pulling the plunger comes to lower than the guide
plate [4] after installing the straight gate spring.
[2]
a0get3c021ca
[3]
6. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the mounting bracket [2] and the
plunger [3]. Then, remove the straight gate solenoid (SD2) [4].
Note
When reinstalling this part, be sure to install it so that the
wiring harness [5] is on the side of the screw hole [6] of
the mounting bracket [2].
[5]
[4]
a0get3c022ca
F -218


19.3.1 Replacing the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2)
(2) Procedure
[4]

2. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the stacker exit shutter arm [2].
Then remove the plunger [3].
Note
Be careful that the plunger [3] falls down when removing
the C-clip [1].
[6]

4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the stacker exit shutter
solenoid assy [6].
[5]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a0get3c023ca
Note
When reinstalling the parts, be sure to fix the stacker exit
shutter solenoid assy so that the leading edge [3] of the
stacker exit shutter [2] comes to the inner area [6] of the
folding part of the guide plate [5] on the refeed roller [4]
when pulling the plunger of the stacker exit shutter
solenoid (SD2) to which the stacker exit shutter arm [1] is
connected.
Check it from the opening [7].
[2]
[3] [6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[7]
a0get3c024ca
F -219


[1]
[2]
[5]
5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the stacker exit shutter
solenoid (SD2) [3] from the mounting bracket [2].
Note
[4]
[3]
a0get3c025ca
19.3.2 Replacing the stack switching solenoid (SD3)

(2) Procedure
[4]
[6]
[5] [2]
[3]
[1]
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the Rear cover(Refer to G.17.2.3 Rear cover)

Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the stack switching arm [2].
Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the plunger [5] and the
stack switching solenoid assy [6].
a0get3c026ca
[2]
Note
When reinstalling the parts, be sure to fix the stack
switching solenoid assy so that the driven roller [2]
touches with the refeed roller [3] when not pulling the
plunger [1] of the stack switching solenoid (SD3), and
when pulling it, the gap between them is larger than the
standard value "a".
Standard value "a"
:The gap between the driven roller [2] and the re-feed
roller [3] is 2mm or more.
[3]
[1]
[4]
a0get3c027ca
F -220


[2]
[1]
5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the stack switching

solenoid (SD3) [3] from the mounting bracket [2].
Note
[3]
[5]
[4]
a0get3c028ca
19.3.3 Replacing the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4)

Stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4)
(2) Procedure
[4]
[3]
[2]
[5]

2. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the stacker entrance guide
plate arm [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the stacker entrance guide
plate solenoid assy [5].
[1]
a0get3c029ca
F -221


[5]
[6]
[2]
Note
When reinstalling the parts, be sure to fix the stacker
entrance guide plate solenoid assy at the position where
the roller [4] installed to the drive shaft [3] of the solenoid
starts pushing the mounting bracket [6] of the stacker
entrance roller [5] with the plunger [1] touching with the
mounting bracket [2].
[4]
[3]
[1]
[7] a0get3c030ca
[6]
[2]
5. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the mounting bracket [2] and the
plunger [3]. Then, remove the stacker entrance guide plate
solenoid (SD4) [3].
Note
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
a0get3c031ca
F -222

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-...
20. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-501

20.1 Caution for maintenance procedure
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR SAFTY
These symbols are used in this documentation alert you to danger or important information.
WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious Injury.
WARNING:
Risk of electrical shock. This warning statement indicates situations where there is a risk of death by electric
shock.
CAUTION:
This notice indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Certain components in this product are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
This section contains cleaning and maintenance procedures.

CAUTION
GP-501 uses screws of inch standard. Therefore, do not mix them with other products (metric standard screws). Otherwise, the
screw hole is damaged.
20.2 DIE SET SERVICE

20.2.1 Die Set Service
The Die Set assembly is not serviceable other than inspection and periodic lubrication. The one exception is the felt pad on the Twin Loop Die
Set can be replaced. If a Die Set is at its end of life, it will tend to cause mis-feeds due to hanging chips. This is a result of die plate wear, and
not pin wear, which cannot be corrected. When this occurs, the Die Set should be replaced with a new one.
20.2.2 Die Set Life Expectancy

The GP-501 Punch Die Sets have a minimum life expectancy of 500K cycles (sheets of paper punched). With periodic lubrication and optimum
paper types, life can exceed this number. Variables that affect life expectancy:
Failure to follow the lubrication schedule or using the incorrect lubricant.
Variety and types of paper being punched
Cover stocks being punched
Length of the average job
Other environmental conditions
20.2.3 Die Set Components

(1) Die Set Types
The GP-501 Punch uses two types of Die Sets.
Type
Description
Felt Pad Retainer Assembly
Felt oiler pad on one side (with magnet and retaining DS-501, 503, 504, 506, 508, 510, 511, 513, 515,
plate)
517, 518
Bindery Style
Encircled Felt Oiler Pad
Felt oiler pad surrounds the punch pins
DS-502, 505, 507, 509, 512, 514, 516
(2) Serviceable Components
Shoulder bolt and spring [1]

Punch pins [2]
Felt pad [3]
Floating pressure bar spring (not shown).
(3) Felt Pad Retaining Assembly

The twin loop Die Set has a removable felt pad assembly. The felt pad [1] provides lubrication to the punch pins under normal usage and
helps keep them clean. The magnet [2] and retainer [3] keeps the felt pad in place during normal handling and operation.
F -223

Note
The felt pad assembly on the Twin Loop Die Set is the only assembly that can be replaced.
(4) Reassembling the Felt Pad Assembly

The felt pad assembly consists of the felt pad [1], magnet [2], and retainer [3].
(a) To assemble the felt pad retaining assembly:

1. Lay the die assembly on a table so that the open side of the top
bar is facing up.
2. Lay the felt pad [1] along the punch pins so that it spans all pins.
3. If the pad needs oil, apply it along the full length of the pad.
4. Insert the magnet [2] into the retainer [3].
5. Place the magnet and retainer [1] over the pad [2] and lightly
press them against the pad and the Die Set base. Make sure the
assembly is sitting on the base [3] and that the felt pad is against
the punch pins [4].
F -224

(5) Floating Pressure Bar Spring Replacement
Some Die Sets use springs to hold the top plate above the pressure bar [1]. Detentes in the top plate hold the springs in place [2]. Ensure all
springs are in place.
(a) To replace pressure bar springs:

1. Compress the spring and insert between the top bar and pressure bar.
2. Use a flat screwdriver to position the spring so that the detent holds it in place.
3. Compress the top bar to ensure it moves freely and that it returns.
20.2.4 Checking and Replacing the Die Set

(1) Periodically Checked and replaced parts/Spotted Checked and replaced parts/cycle
Dieset
: Every 2,000,000 prints*1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 punches*2) *3
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000.
*3 Replace as needed. Replacement is recommended if hanging chips are usually generated.
(2) Procedure
Set the Die Set on a table and press the top plate straight down at both ends [1] at the same time and look for a smooth operation. The top
plate and pins should retract fully when you release.
Reinstall the Die Set into the punch and run several sheets of the customers paper through the punch. Inspect the holes.
Holes should be clean and even with no tearing or frayed edges.
Holes should be punched completely, leaving no chip attached.
Holes should be straight (no skew) and evenly spaced from the edge of the paper and aligned.
20.2.5 Checking and lubricating the Die Set pins and Die Set shoulder bolts
(1) Periodically Checked and lubricated parts/cycle
Die Set pins
: Every 200,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 50,000 punches) *1
: Every 210,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 50,000 punches) *2
Die Set Shoulder bolts
: Every 800,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 200,000 Punches) *1
: Every 750,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 200,000 Punches) *2
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 C8000
(2) Procedure
Inspect the punch pins for signs of wear or mis-alignment. Periodic lubrication extends the life of the Die Sets.
The customer or operator can perform this maintenance between technician inspections.
F -225

(3) To lubricate Die Set pins:

Lubricate with 3-IN-ONE oil (high quality machine oil).
Apply oil lightly along the length of the pad [1], but do not over saturate.
Do not use spray lubricants because they tend to dry up quickly and leave a sticky residue.
For the felt pad retaining assembly instructions, refer to F.20.2.3 Die Set Components.
(4) To lubricate shoulder bolts:

Lubricate the shoulder bolts and springs [2] using a brush to apply Magnalube-G Teflon Grease.
Make sure the grease coats the bolts.
20.2.6 Hole Alignment inspection

Inspect the hole alignment on the customers punched paper. Fold the punched sheet of paper in half [1] and the punched holes should be
aligned evenly along the edge and centered between the ends [2]. If the punched holes are not aligned, then the Die Set cradle must be
adjusted. For adjustment procedures.
20.3 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION

20.3.1 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION
If operating properly, the GP-501 will punch the same types of copy paper and cover materials handled by the copier and run at the same
speed. Hole quality will vary between different grades of paper.
The following maintenance should be performed according to the schedule.
(1) Table 3.2 Maintenance Schedule

Description
Qty.
Part Number
Period
Check
Clean
Lubricate
Replace
Materials, Tools
Used
Aligner belt
(green belt)
12,000K
prints
a soft cloth and

alcohol
Aligner idler
roller assembly
12,000K
prints
a soft cloth and

alcohol
Aligner idler
rollers
3,000K
prints
a so ft cloth and
alcohol
Aligner latching
mechanisms
3,000K
prints
Back gauge
solenoid
3,000K
prints
F -226
Blower brush/
vacuum cleaner


Back gauge
mechanism
A0N9PP59##
4,000K
prints
Base
3,000K
prints
Vacuum
cleaner
Die guide
3,000K
prints
Vacuum
cleaner
Die set
500K
prints
Punch die (pins)
50K
prints
Oil
3-IN-ONE
(WD-40
Company)
Die set shoulder

bolts
200K
prints
Grease
Magnalube-G
Teflon Grease
Door closing
latch
3,000K
prints
Drive rollers
3,000K
prints
a so ft cloth and
alcohol
Idler rollers
3,000K
prints
a so ft cloth and
alcohol
Optical sensors
3,000K
prints
Blower brush
Paper path,
Aligner Panels
3,000K
prints
a so ft cloth and
alcohol
Paper path,
bypass
3,000K
prints
a so ft cloth and
alcohol
Paper path,
punch
3,000K
prints
a so ft cloth and
alcohol
Punch drive
cams
3,000K
prints
Roller energy
drive
3,000K
prints
a so ft cloth and
alcohol
Timing belts
3,000K
prints
a so ft cloth and
alcohol
Grease
Magnalube-G
Teflon Grease
20.3.2 External Cleaning

The cover may be cleaned with a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water.
Do not use chemical cleaners or solvents as these may have a harmful effect. Use detergent sparingly to avoid contact with electrical
components.
WARNING:
Make sure you disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before cleaning. Failure to observe this warning could result
in death or serious Injury.
20.3.3 Internal Cleaning

Occasionally remove the covers and remove paper dust and chips. Paper dust can accumulate throughout the punch including around the
motors and other electrical components. Use a vacuum cleaner if possible. A small paintbrush can also be used but extreme care should be
used around electrical components.
Non-electrical components may be cleaned with alcohol, an approved cleaner, or a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water.
Rollers can be cleaned with alcohol.
WARNING:
Make sure you disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before cleaning. Failure to observe this warning could result
in death or serious Injury.
20.3.4 Operational Inspection

Make sure the punch operates smoothly and produces the desired holes in the customers paper.
20.3.5 Internal Inspection

Whenever the cover has been removed for corrective maintenance, visually inspect for defects and problems such as damaged components,
loose screws or nuts, abraded wire insulation, loose terminals, etc. Correct any problems before returning the machine to service.
20.3.6 Cleaning the base

Base
(2) Procedure
Chips and paper dust falls to the bottom of the punch. Clean with a vacuum cleaner each time the machine is serviced. The customer can
also do this between the technicians visits.
F -227

(3) Chip Bin

Remove the Chip bin tray and empty. Vacuum out paper chips and dust from the Chip bin [1], especially at the back around the chip tray
switch.
20.3.7 Cleaning the Die guide

Die guide
(2) Procedure
Remove the Die Set and clean the guide [1] with a vacuum cleaner.
20.3.8 Checking the Door Latch

The door latch must hold the door closed and ensure that the switch activation tab is depressing the door switch [1]. The switch tab [2] should
press the switch button just so that it is close to bottoming.
(1) Periodically checked parts/cycle

Door latch
: Every 3,000,000 prints.
(2) Procedure
Ensure latch holds door closed.
Ensure switch is activated when the door is closed.
To adjust the door latch. (Refer to G.18.2.1 Door latch check)
F -228

20.3.9 Cleaning and Checking the aligner paper path and panels
(1) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/cycle
Aligner paper path and panels
(2) Procedure
Inspect for worn or damaged parts. Clean with alcohol, an approved cleaner, or a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water as
needed.
(3) To clean the Aligner Panels:

1. Lift the Aligner latches to open panels.
2. Clean surfaces [1].
3. Clean paper alignment channels [2].
20.3.10 Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller

(1) Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller
Aligner idler rollers press the paper against the green drive belts and align the paper for punching and exiting. To replace the idler rollers.
(Refer to F.20.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement)
(a) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/cycle

Aligner Idler Roller
(b) Procedure
Make sure the aligner rollers are clean.
Ensure that the idler rollers maintain pressure against the green drive belt.
Inspect for bent or damaged parts.
WARNING:
Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from power and retain the power cord in your possession for your safety. Failure to observe
this warning could result in death or serious Injury.
(c) To inspect the aligner idler rollers:

1. Press the top of each rollers bracket [1]. The roller should move
away from the green belt drive and then when released, they
spring back into place.
F -229

2. Ensure the torsion springs [1] are hooked over the bracket [2].
(d) To clean idler rollers:

1. Clean the idler rollers with a soft cloth and alcohol.
2. Inspect the idler rollers for wear patterns or groves. Surface should be evenly textured and clean.
20.3.11 Cleaning the Aligner (Green) Drive Belt

Aligner (Green) Drive Belt
: Every 12,000,000 prints. *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
Ensure the Aligner Drive Belts are clean.
Inspect for frayed edges and wear.
(3) To clean the Aligner Drive Belts:

1. Clean Green Drive Belt [1] with a plastic scouring pad.
2. Use the drive knob [2] to turn the belt.
Figure 3.16 Cleaning Green Drive Belt.
To adjust or replace the Aligner Drive Belt. (Refer to F.20.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement)
20.3.12 Cleaning and Checking the Back Gauge Solenoid

Back Gauge Solenoid
(2) Procedure
1. Inspect and ensure the Back Gauge solenoid linkage moves freely. Press linkage down and release [1]. Linkage should return.
2. Clean out the solenoid and surrounding area with a vacuum cleaner and canned air [2]. Make sure the solenoid is clean and dry.
Note
Do not apply lubricants to the solenoid or linkage.
To remove and repair the back gauge. (Refer to F.20.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism, F.20.3.29 Back Gauge Removal)
F -230

20.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers

Idler rollers
(2) Procedure
Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the bypass [1] or the punch [2].
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface. Where practical, remove the roller
assembly to clean [3].
Please see the reference page about the mainteinence procedure of each roller.
Bypass Idler roller [3]. (Refer to F.20.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers)
Punch Idler roller [4]. (Refer to F.20.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers)
(3) Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Idler Rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the bypass. Rollers can usually be serviced without removing the
bypass panel.
1. Separate the punch from the printer.
2. Disconnect the power.
3. Lift the retaining spring over the end of the idler roller shaft. The illustration shows moving the spring [1] on the bypass plate, which has
been removed from the machine for clarity.
4. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
5. Clean the idler rollers with a soft cloth and alcohol.
6. Ensure the rollers turn freely on the shaft.
7. To install idler roller assemblies reverse the steps.
F -231

Installation Note:
Make sure the flat surface of the bushing aligns in the fork.
Rollers are non-directional so it does not matter which end goes in each fork.
After the assembly is in place, gently pull the assembly outward and release to ensure it moves freely in the fork.
(4) Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the GP-501 Punch. Most can be serviced without disassembling punch
components. Unplug unit and separate from the printer. (Refer to G.18.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer).
Also remove two side panels as described in F.20.3.22 Bypass panel Removal and F.20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal
(a) Procedure
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves [1],[2]. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface.
Replace per the maintenance schedule.
Note
Pull out the chip bin to access the idler roller [2]
Use the drive knob [1] to turn the rollers to continue inspection and cleaning.
F -232

To remove the Punch Idler rollers:

1. Lift the retaining spring [1] over the end of the idler roller shaft.
2. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing
the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
Installation Note:
20.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the GP-501 Punch. Most can be serviced without disassembling punch
components. Unplug unit and separate from the printer. (Refer to G.18.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer).
Also remove two side panels as described in F.20.3.22 Bypass panel Removal and F.20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal
(1) Procedure
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves [1],[2]. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface.
Replace per the maintenance schedule.
Note
Pull out the chip bin to access the idler roller [2]
F -233

Use the drive knob [1] to turn the rollers to continue inspection and cleaning.
(2) To remove the Punch Idler rollers:

1. Lift the retaining spring [1] over the end of the idler roller shaft.
2. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing
the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
Installation Note:
F -234

20.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive Rollers

Drive rollers are located opposite the idler rollers.

Drive rollers
(2) Procedure
Inspect for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and not glazed.
Some drive rollers are not easily accessible. Those that are [1], should be inspected and cleaned when the idler rollers are removed. Where
practical, make sure the rollers are clean. Clean with a soft cloth and alcohol. Refer to also F.20.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers.
20.3.16 Checking the Aligner Latch

Latches [1] on both sides of the punch hold the Aligner Panels in place, which in turn keeps even pressure on the idler rollers.

Aligner Latch
(2) Procedure
Inspect the latches for worn or damaged parts.
Open and close the latches and ensure they lock into place when closed.
Ensure the nylon wheel [2] turns freely on its bearing and that it aligns with its locking.
F -235

20.3.17 Cleaning the Optical Sensors

Optical Sensors
(2) Procedure
Inspect and clean Optical Sensors [1] per the maintenance schedule or as needed.
(3) Supplies Needed

Canned air or vacuum cleaner
F -236

Use canned air to blow the debris off each sensor. The illustration shows examples of three sensors [1].
20.3.18 Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Paper Path

Bypass paper path
(2) Procedure
Inspect the Bypass panel [1], rollers [2], and entrance guide [3] for wear, damage, and obstructions.
Inspect the rollers for wear patterns or groves. The surface should be rough and even. Make sure the rollers are clean. Clean rollers with
a soft cloth and alcohol. (Refer to F.20.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers, F.20.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive Rollers)
Raise the panel and ensure the magnet holds it in open [4]. Inspect the path for obstructions. Clean as needed.
Close the panel and check that it is flat and that paper will pass under it.
Ensure the bypass diverter moves freely and returns to the bypass position.
F -237

20.3.19 Cleaning and Checking the Punch Paper Path

Punch Paper path
(2) Procedure
Inspect the entire paper path through the punch. Look for wear, damage, and obstructions.
Inspect the rollers for wear patterns or groves.
Open the Aligner Panels [1] and U-channel [2] and make sure there are no obstructions.
Confirm that the latch [3] holds the U-channel tightly in place. Re-shape it if necessary.
Clean as needed.
20.3.20 Cleaning and Checking the Timing Belt

Timing Belt
(2) Procedure
Inspect all timing belts [1], [2] for wear, missing teeth, frayed edges, and cracks. For replacement, refer to F.20.3.43 Belt replacement.
F -238

Check for proper deflection of belts. The belts should be slightly loose with approximately 1/4 (6.35mm) deflection [1]. Belts that are too loose
will not drive properly and belts that are too tight can wear out prematurely or damage their driven components. Five belts [2] have tensioners,
it is these five belts that should be checked.
20.3.21 Bypass panel

(1) Tools Needed
Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" nut driver
Flat bladed screwdriver
Needle nose pliers
(2) Procedure
Separate the punch from the printer and remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.18.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer, G.18.3.3
Removing the Rear Cover)
20.3.22 Bypass panel Removal

(1) To remove the Bypass panel:
1. If removing the Bypass panel, remove the side panel cover by
removing the 4 screws [1].
F -239

2. Disconnect the grounding strap by removing the screw [1] on the

exit side of the bypass.
3. Unplug the exit side connector [2] at the rear frame.
4. Disconnect the connectors [1] of Enter sensor (S1) and Bypass

sensor (S8).
5. From the rear of the punch, remove one of the E-rings [1] from the
Bypass shaft.
6. From the side of the punch, slide the shaft towards the end of the
shaft [1] without the E-Ring [2] until the other end of the shaft
clears the nylon bushing and bracket.
7. Lift the opposite end of the shaft [3] and slide it out of the Bypass
panel in the opposite direction of the removed E-Ring [4].
Installation Note
Make sure the nylon bushing is installed so that it
protrudes through the mounting bracket of the rear frame
into the Bypass panel [5].
F -240

8. Rotate the rear of Bypass panel [1] so that it extends past the
entrance side of the punch [2].
9. Remove the Bypass panel.

10. To install the Bypass panel, reverse the steps.
Installation Note
Position the Bypass panel so that it is outside the shaft
mounting brackets. The nylon bushings go through the
mounting brackets [1], into the Bypass panel [2].
20.3.23 Aligner panels

The entrance side Aligner panel positions the paper in the Back Gauge for punching. The exit side Aligner panel positions the paper for the
finisher. Prior to servicing the Aligner Panels, separate the GP-501 Punch from the printer. (Refer to G.18.3.2 Separating the Punch From the
Printer).
20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal

Removing the Aligner panels provides access to the paper path and the Aligner Green Drive Belt. The procedure is the same for the entrance
and exit Aligner panels except that the exit side has a docking plate which must be removed first.
(1) To remove the Aligner panel:

1. If removing the exit side Aligner panel, remove the side panel
cover by removing the 6 screws [1].
Note
The rest of the steps are the same for both Aligner panels.
2. Release the Aligner latch [1].

3. Remove the E-clips from both ends of the Aligner shaft [2].
4. Remove the shaft nylon bushings [3]
F -241

5. Slide the shaft out the front of the punch.

6. Remove aligner latch stop by removing screws [1].
7. Unhook the tension spring from the panel [1].

8. Remove the Aligner panel [2] out the front of the punch.
9. Reverse the steps to install the Aligner panel.
20.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement

(1) Tools Required
Flat head screw driver
Needle nose plyers
(2) Procedure
1. Pull off E-Clips [1]
2. Remove the pins [2]. During removal of pins hold on to spring with
fingers.
3. Completely remove the springs [3] and then slide roller assembly
[4] down and then out.
Note
Aligner rollers must be moved downwards. Hence all the
rollers need to be removed.
20.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement

(1) Procedure
Before replacing the green drive belts, remove the Aligner panels. (Refer to F.20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal) Then follow the procedures
below for the entrance side or exit side green drive belt service.
(2) Tools Required
Phillips screw driver

Nut drivers, 1/4 and 5/16"
Hex wrenches, 5/64 and 9/64"
Snap ring pliers
E-Ring tool
Twelve inch metal ruler or similar straight edge
CAUTION
Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from power and retain the power cord in your possession for your safety. Failure to observe
this caution can result in injury.
Note
Empty the paper chip bin and replace it. This makes it easier to find small parts that you may drop into the bin.
F -242

(3) Paper Entrance Side Green Drive Belt Replacement

1. Disconnect the enter sensor (S1) wire from the side frame [1].
2. Remove the 4 screws that secure the front paper chute [1] to
remove the entrance guide [2].
3. To remove the GP2 aligner latch [1], do the following:

1. Unhook the spring of the GP2 aligner latch on the right end.
2. Remove only one (the one closest to the frame) of the E-rings
of the GP2 aligner latch on the left end (front Door side).
3. Push the GP2 aligner latch in toward the front door until it
clears the rear frame.
4. Pull the entire GP2 aligner latch, door latch out and set it
aside.
4. To remove Entrance Idler Aligner panel [2] assembly. (Refer to F.
20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal)
5. Remove the fan [7] that prevents access to the flexible cable. To
remove it simply pull it off the shaft.
6. Remove the flexible cable using a hex wrench.
7. Remove the 2 screws [3]
8. Loosen screw from the solenoid link.
9. Remove the solenoid assembly [5] and link from the Diverter
Shaft[6], leave it hanging.
F -243

10. Remove the 2 E-Rings of the Entrance Diverter assembly, slide

the Diverter out and set it aside.
11. To remove the Entrance Drive Aligner assembly [7], which is the
large sheet metal assembly that actually contains the green drive
belt and Aligner.
1. Remove the 6 Screws that secure the face of this assembly.
2. Remove the 2 screws that secure this assembly from the side
frame.
3. Disconnect the sensor connector [8]
4. Pull and walk the entire sheet metal assembly of the Paper
Guide Aligner assembly up and outward. You can grab the
assembly at the roller cut out with your fingers.
CAUTION
As you pull the assembly out, disconnect the sensor
harness behind the assembly as soon as you are able
to reach it. Failure to observe this notice may damage
the wiring.
12. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by removing
the 4 screws [1].
CAUTION
Leave the Flex Shaft [2] attached.
(4) Green Drive Belt Assembly

1. Stretch the new Belt [3] onto the Aligner Roller assembly, green side out. Rotate the Flex Shaft [2] to confirm that the belt tracks properly.
2. Slide the Aligner into place, loosely attach the 4 Pan Head Screws with the 4 Lock Washers.
1. Check that the metal surface of the Aligner Roller assembly is flush with the Sheet Metal surface of the Paper Guide. A 12" metal ruler
works well to check this adjustment. Slip the ruler under the green drive belt and press it flat against the two surfaces.
2. Adjust the Aligner and snug the screws when perfectly flush.
Note
The green drive belt should look like the drawing shown in Figure 3.35.
3. As a double check, hold the entire Paper Guide assembly up so that you can visually inspect the alignment between the sheet metal
surface and the metal surface of the Aligner. The green drive belt should appear to be even or parallel, and just floating above the
surface of the sheet metal.
3. To install the Paper Guide assembly into the GP-501 Punch:
1. As you slide the Paper Guide assembly into place,
- Hook up the Sensor Harness to the Sensor on the back.
- Lift it up slightly to clear the lower Transition Paper Guide.
- Be sure to clear the Sensor Bracket at the top left.
- Be sure that the Flex Coupling Shaft is sticking out of the rear
of the GP-501 Punch properly.
2. Visually check all around the mounting area of the Paper
Guide assembly and that the Sensor Harness is properly
connected.
3. Loosely secure it in place with 3 screws on the left and 3 on
the right.
4. Loosely install the 2 top screws.
5. Once all 8 mounting screws have been properly started you
have good alignment. You may now go back and tighten the
screws until they are snug.
4. Install the Flexible Shaft.
5. Install the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide (item 7) with Idler
Roller 4 Screws. Start all 4 screws, (2 on front and 2 on back) then
tighten.
6. Connect the Sensor Wire Harness at the top rear of the Exit Paper
Guide.
7. Install the GP2 Shaft back into place by inserting it first into the
front, then the back.
8. Close the GP2 Flipper Latch.

Repeat the test of rotating the pulleys to ensure smooth rotation of the Idler Rollers.
9. Attach the GP2 Shaft Spring.
10. Install the front E-Ring to secure GP2.
(5) Entrance Aligner Panel Installation

To install the Idler Aligner panel, refer to F.20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal. Then insert the punch into the printer and finisher and connect the
power cord.
1. Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:
1. Run10 copies in bypass mode.
F -244


2. Run 1 sheet in punch mode.
3. Run 10 sheets in punch mode.
4. Run 100 sheets in punch mode.
(a) Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Run 10 copies in bypass mode.

Run 1 sheet in punch mode.
Run 10 sheets in punch mode.
(6) Paper Entrance and Exit Side Green Drive Belt Replacement
1. To remove the GP6 Flipper (C), Door Latch:
1. Remove only one (the one closest to the frame) of the E-Rings
of the GP6 Flipper on the right end (front door side).
2. Push the GP6 Flipper in toward the front door until it clears the
rear frame.
3. Pull the entire GP6 Flipper, door latch out and set it aside.
2. To remove the Rear Aligner, Idler Paper Guide assembly:

1. Remove 2 E-Rings from the Pivot Shaft.
2. Slide the Shaft all the way out through the front of the GP-501
Punch.
3. Remove the 2 nylon bearings.
4. Remove and set aside the Rear Aligner, Idler Paper Guide
assembly.
3. To remove the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide assembly:
1. Remove the 4 screws (2 rear and 2 front) of the curved sheet
metal Exit Paper Guide assembly.
2. Unplug the sensor.
3. Pull the entire sheet metal Exit Paper Guide assembly out, set
aside.
4. To remove the Rear, Drive Side, and Paper Guide Aligner
assembly. This is the large sheet metal assembly within the
GP-501 Punch that contains the green drive belt Aligner.
CAUTION
Walk the Belt off of the Aligner Pulley at the rear.
1. Remove the 2 screws that hold the block to the frame. The
Coupler is loose and the rear panel will come out.
2. Remove the 6 screws that secure the face of this assembly.
3. Remove the 2 screws that secure this assembly from the top.
4. Pull and walk the entire sheet metal assembly of the Paper
Guide Aligner up and outward. You can grab the assembly at
the roller cut out with your fingers.
CAUTION
Handle the helical coupling carefully. It is very
delicate.
Note
In order to access these screws, you must first remove
the Die Set storage shelf and the cable shield attached
to the Die storage shelf at the paper entrance side.
Moving the Die Storage shelf aside will enable better
access to the 2 screws with a short Phillips screw
driver.
CAUTION
As you do this, disconnect the sensor harness behind
the assembly as soon as you are able to reach it.
Failure to do this can damage the unit.
5. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by
removing the 4 screws (S).
CAUTION
Leave the Flex Shaft (FS) attached.
F -245

6. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by

removing the 4 screws.
CAUTION
Leave the Coupler attached.
(7) Green Drive Belt Assembly

1. Stretch the new green drive belt onto the Aligner Roller assembly,
green side out.
Take care when handling the Aligner Roller assembly so as
not to damage the Flex Coupling.
Rotate the shaft to confirm that the belt tracks properly.
2. Slide the Aligner into place, loosely attach the 4 pan head screws
with the 4 lock washers.
Check that the metal surface of the Aligner Roller assembly is
flush with the sheet metal surface of the Paper Guide. A 12" metal
ruler works well to check this adjustment. Slip the ruler under the
green drive belt and press it flat against the two surfaces. Adjust
the Aligner and snug the screws when perfectly flush.
The green drive belt should look like the drawing shown in Figure
3.41.
To ensure proper assembly, hold the entire Paper Guide assembly
up so that you can visually inspect the alignment between the
sheet metal surface and the metal surface of the Aligner. The
green drive belt should appear to be even and just floating above
the surface of the sheet metal.
3. To install the Paper Guide assembly into the GP-501 Punch:

1. As you slide the Paper Guide assembly into place:
- Hook up the Sensor Harness to the Sensor on the back.
- Lift it up slightly to clear the lower Transition Paper Guide.
- Be sure to clear the sensor bracket at the top left.
- Be sure that the Flex Coupling shaft is sticking out of the rear
of the GP-501 Punch properly.
2. Visually check all around the mounting area of the Paper
Guide assembly and that the sensor harness is properly
connected.
3. Loosely secure it in place with 3 screws on the left and 3 on
the right.
4. Loosely install the 2 top screws.
5. Once all 8 mounting screws have been properly started go
back and tighten the screws until they are snug.
CAUTION
Do not over tighten the 2 screws on top.
4. Install the 2 screws to secure the bearing block for the pulley
arrangement at the rear of the GP-501 Punch. Press the block to
the top of the punch before tightening.
5. Install the pulley and belt onto the pulley block. Once properly
aligned, check belt and pulley movement. Tighten the set screw.
6. Install the Die Set storage rack with 3 screws front and 3 screws
back. Remember to attach the ground strap at the middle screw on
the rear (belt side). Start each screw to achieve proper alignment,
then go back over each screw and tighten it.
7. Install the Cable Guard on top of the Die Set storage rack (2
Screws).
8. Install the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide with Idler Roller 4
screws.
9. Start all 4 screws, (2 on front and 2 on back) then tighten.
10. Connect the sensor wire harness at the top rear of the Exit Paper
Guide.
F -246

11. To install the Idler Aligner Paper Guide:

1. Hold it loosely in place.
2. Press the nylon flange bearings into place, through both
pieces of sheet metal, with the flange to the inside.
3. Slide the shaft through the front of the machine, while holding
the nylon flange bearing in place.
4. Secure with 2 E-rings on the inside of the bearing.
5. Inspect by pressing in on the bottom area of the sheet metal
for:
- A slight deflection of each Idler Roller as you press.
- As you press, you can turn the pulleys at the rear of the
GP-501 Punch and see the Idler Rollers rotate smoothly.
12. Bend the small metal tab back into place.
13. Install the GP6 shaft back into place by inserting it first into the
front, then the back.
14. Close the GP6 Flipper Latch.
Repeat the test of rotating the pulleys to ensure smooth rotation of
the Idler Rollers.
15. Attach the GP6 shaft spring.
16. Install the front E-Ring to secure GP6.
(8) Aligner Panel Installation

To install the Idler Aligner panel, refer to F.20.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal. Then insert the punch into the main body and finisher and connect
the power cord.
(a) Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Run 10 copies in bypass mode.

Run 1 sheet in punch mode.
20.3.27 Cleaning and checking the energy drive roller

(1) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/ cycle
Energy drive rollers
: 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
Reference Figure 3.44 Energy Roller as you perform this procedure.
1. Without disconnecting either retaining spring [1], roll one of them
gently to one side to release the Energy Drive Roller shaft from its
mounting bracket.
2. Lift the shaft [2] from the mounting bracket.
3. Using a clean cloth and alcohol, clean the surfaces of the rollers
[3] to remove any paper dust or toner that may have accumulated
over time.
4. Reverse steps 2 & 1 above to replace the shaft into the holder.
5. Ensure the flats of the bearings are seated properly in the
mounting brackets.
6. Ensure the springs are straight on the bearing to apply sufficient
force for the rollers to turn when you rotate the knob at the front of
the machine.
20.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism

The Back Gauge assembly pauses the paper just as the edge has entered the die set. Working properly, the sheet will pause only long enough
for the holes to be punched correctly. The Back Gauge assembly also controls the paper chad falling into the chad bin, significantly reducing the
amount of chad that could flow through the paper path. Some chad falls outside the chad bin and should be cleaned up with a vacuum cleaner
during each servicing.
WARNING
Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before removing the Back Gauge assembly.
Failure to observe this warning can result in severe injury or death and damage the punch.
(1) Periodically replaced parts/Spotted replaced parts/cycle

Back gauge mechanism
: Every 16,000,000 prints*1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 4,000,000 punches*2)
F -247


(2) Procedure
Remove Back Gauge assembly to clean and service the solenoid or to replace the Back Gauge. Also allows the removal of the Punch
Module.
To repair or replace the Back Gauge, separate the GP-501 Punch from the printer and finisher and then remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.
18.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service)
(3) Tools Required

Phillips screw driver or 1/4" nut driver
Note
20.3.29 Back Gauge Removal

(1) To remove the Back Gauge assembly:
1. Turn the Punch Cycle knob [1] so that the punch drive indicator [2]
lines up the position indicator [3].
2. Remove the Die Set and Chip Bin.

3. Remove the two Die Set Chip Brush bracket screws [1].
4. On the rear of the punch, unplug the drive punch flag sensor
connector [1].
5. Remove the 2 Die Set Adjustment Bracket screws [2] and pull the
bracket aside [3].
F -248

6. Remove the 2 Back Gauge rear mounting screws [1].
7. Disconnect the Back Gauge connector from the Punch Controller

PCB [1].
8. Cut wire harness ties as needed to free the solenoid wires.

9. Cut the 2 harness ties on the entrance side of the punch.
10. Remove the grommet from the frame [1].

Note
If you are not replacing the Back Gauge or are removing it
for access to the Punch Module, it is not necessary to pull
the wire through the hole in the frame. The Back Gauge
can be set aside.
11. Feed the connector through the hole in the frame and the grommet
separately [2].
12. Remove one top screw [1] of chip tray full sensor bracket [2] and
pivot the bracket down.
F -249

13. Gently slide the Back Gauge assembly to the rear of the punch [1]
so that it extends through the slot [2] and clears the wiring harness
[3].
CAUTION
Do not damage the wires in the wiring harness. Failure to
observe this precaution may damage the wiring.
14. Make sure the left end of the Back Gauge clears the opening on
the front of the punch [1] and pull it out [2] while sliding it to
towards the front.
15. Remove the Back Gauge and rail as an assembly.

16. To install the Back Gauge, reverse these steps.
17. After replacing the Back gauge mechanism, conduct the following
item.
(2) Testing
(a) To test the Back Gauge:
1. Install a Die Set.
2. Rotate the punch drive knob to ensure the drive and cams turn easily.
3. Test for proper hole alignment to the paper edge by doing the following.
a. Run 1 page at a time.
b. Run 2 pages at a time.
c. Run 5 pages at a time.
d. Run 10 pages at a time.
e. Run 50 pages at a time.
20.3.30 Solenoid Spring Replacement

(1) Procedure
Removal of spring [1] and [2] Grasp the loop of the spring with needle nose plyers and then pull them off the shaft.
Removal of spring [3] Grasp the loop of the spring with needle nose plyers and then pull them off the sheet metal part.
F -250

20.3.31 Back Gauge Paddle

(1) Procedure
First remove Back gauge assembly as described in "F.20.3.29 Back Gauge Removal".
Deep or angled deep punches may be caused by a broken weld on the Paddle shaft [1]. Inspect the Paddle and press down on it while
holding the linkage to keep the linkage from moving. If the paddle [2] moves, replace the Back Gauge assembly.
20.3.32 Back Gauge Assembly Adjustment

The Back Gauge can be adjusted up and down for optimum operation for specific Die Sets.
The Back Gauge should be at its highest position for VeloBind or PB Die Sets. If it is not, the Back Gauge Paddle may not completely close the
paper path gap. This can result in paper (especially with excessive curl) slipping through the gap created by the Paddle and the top plate of the
Die Set. This causes a deep punch.
Initially, move the assembly to its highest position and then adjust accordingly after testing each Die Set.
Ensure it is easy to insert and remove three hole Die Sets. If the Die Set is too tight, evenly lower the Back Gauge slightly to achieve the
tightness required, while still retaining the PB and VeloBind functionality mentioned above.
(1) To adjust the Back Gauge:

1. Loosen the 3 phillips head screws [1].
2. Move the entire assembly [2] upward or downward as needed
while keeping it even.
3. While holding the assembly up, tighten the 3 screws.
(2) Testing
(a) To test the Back Gauge adjustment:
1. Run a few sheets of paper and check for skew with each Die Set.
2. Adjust the Back Gauge as needed and re-test.
3. Run 200 to 500 sheets of paper and check for mis-feeding, deep
punching, and skew.
20.3.33 Punch module

(1) Tools Required
Hex wrench, 5/64"
NOTE
(2) Procedure
Remove the module to lubricate the cams, or to service or replace the following components.
Punch motor
F -251

Drive motor belt

Punch module brake
Cams
Flexible drive coupling
Punch Module drive rollers
The clutch can be replaced without removing the module. (Refer to F.20.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement).
WARNING
20.3.34 Punch Module Removal

The Back Gauge assembly must be removed before removing the Punch Module. (Refer to F.20.3.29 Back Gauge Removal).
(1) To remove the Punch Module:

1. Remove the Back Gauge assembly.
2. Use a 5/64 hex wrench to remove the Punch Cycle knob [1].
3. Remove the 4 Punch Module retaining screws [1] from the front
panel.
4. Release the cable ties on the left wiring harness [1] to free the
Punch Module wiring. Remove the connector from flag sensor [2].
Remove harness from brake and clutch as per image below.
F -252

5. Remove the belts in the following order.

1. Remove the bottom left and right vertical belts [1] by walking
the belts over the pulleys.
2. Remove the 4 power supply screws [5].
3. Loosen the belt idler rollers [2] and remove the upper vertical
belt [3].
4. Remove the bottom triangular belt [4] after loosening the
respective tensioner.
6. Remove the two rear Punch Module screws [1].
7. Cut wire harness ties as needed to release the punch wiring.

8. Unplug the punch connector [1] from the control board.
F -253

9. Carefully slide the Punch Module out the back of the punch.
Ensure that the wiring harness does not get caught or prevent
removal of the module.
20.3.35 Lubricating to the Punch Drive Cams

(1) Periodically lubricated parts/cycle
Punch drive cams
: Every 12,000,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 3,000,000 punches)*1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
Back gauge and rail needs to be removed for accessing punch module cams. refer to F.20.3.29 Back Gauge Removal for removing back
gauge. Use brush for reach to cams for further cleaning operation.
Installation Note
Make sure the wires on the rear of the punch are not obstructing the Die Set or Chip Bin.
20.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace if Punch clutch is malfunctioning.
Note
The Punch clutch can be removed without removing the Punch Module.
(2) Tools Required

Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" nut driver
Hex wrench, 5/64"
F -254

(3) To remove the clutch:

1. Unplug the punch flag sensor (S9) connector [1].
2. Slide the fan [1] off the shaft.
3. Remove the lower drive belt [1].
4. Loosen the 2 pulley socket head set screws [1].

5. Remove the pulley and its shaft key [2].
F -255

6. Remove the 2 clutch bracket screws [1].

Installation Note
When installing the clutch bracket, ensure that the fork of
the clutch engages the tab on the bracket [2].
7. Loosen the 2 clutch socket head set screws [1], slide the Punch
clutch [2] off the shaft, and remove the shaft key [3].
Installation Note
When installing the Punch clutch, be sure to install the
shaft key. Press the Punch clutch against the drive gear
plate. While pressing the clutch against the plate, tighten
the 2 set screws. The assembly does not require a gap
between the Punch clutch and clutch plate.
8. Cut wire ties as needed and unplug the clutch connector [1] from
the Punch Controller PCB.
9. Slide the back portion of the clutch [1] off the shaft.
The motor drive belt [2] can be removed at the same time.
10. To install the clutch, reverse these steps.
20.3.37 Punch Module Brake Replacement and Adjustment

(1) Procedure
To replace the Punch module brake, first remove the clutch and related drives. (Refer to F.20.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement). The Punch
module brake must be adjusted while on drive shaft. To adjust the Punch module brake. (Refer to F.20.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment)
(2) Tools Needed
Feeler gauge, 0.0001" (0.00254 mm)

Hex wrenches, 0.05" and 3/32"
Flat blade screwdriver
Pliers
F -256

20.3.38 Punch Module Brake Replacement

(1) To replace the Punch module brake
1. Remove the 4 socket head set screws [1].
2. Loosen the 2 set screws [2] until the brake pad [3] slides freely on
the shaft.
Installation Note
When installing the Punch module brake, ensure that the 2
set screws engage the flats on the shaft. To adjust the
Punch module brake. (Refer to F.20.3.39 Punch Module
Brake Adjustment)
3. Remove the E-Ring at the opposite end of the shaft [1].

4. Slide the shaft [2] out of the bearing bracket, away from the clutch
end.
5. Slide the Punch module brake assembly off the shaft.
6. To install the Punch module brake assembly, reverse these steps.
20.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment

(1) Procedure
The Punch module brake can be adjusted without removing the Punch module brake from the shaft. The gap between the brake and the pad
is 0.0001" (0.00254 mm) .
(2) To adjust the Punch module brake

1. Loosen the 2 set screws [1] until the brake pad slides freely on the
shaft.
2. Use a 0.0001" (0.00254 mm) feeler gauge to set the gap between the brake and the brake pad.
3. Tighten the 2 set screws and check the gap.
20.3.40 Punch Module Motor Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace motor when it malfunctions.
F -257

(2) To replace the Punch Module motor:

1. Cut any wire ties as necessary to release the motor wires.
2. Unplug motor wire connections from the capacitor [1].
3. Remove the metal spring clip [1] from the fan and slide the fan [2]
off the shaft.
Installation Note
When installing the fan, be sure to align the flat of the fan
hub with the flat on the shaft. Also, make sure the hub and
spring clip are facing away from the motor.
4. Loosen the 2 socket head set screws[1] on the pulley and slide the
pulley and belt off the shaft.
5. Remove the motor mounting 4 nuts [2].
6. To install the motor, reverse these steps.
20.3.41 Punch Module Motor Drive Belt Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace the belt when it is frayed, missing teeth, or worn out.
(2) To replace the Punch Module drive belts:

1. With the fan removed from the shaft, work the belt [1] off the clutch
gear [2].
2. Install a new belt by looping it over the motor pulley and then work
it onto the clutch gear.
The belt requires no adjustment. It should have slight deflection
when pressed.
20.3.42 Punch Module Drive Roller Replacement

(1) Procedure
Inspect for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and not glazed.Clean with a soft cloth and alcohol.
(2) Tools Required

Flat bladed screwdriver
F -258

Needle nose pliers

With the Punch Module out of the machine, the punch entrance side [1] and exit [2] drive rollers can be cleaned or replaced.
(3) To clean the punch entrance drive rollers:

1. Remove the idler roller assembly [1].
2. Rotate and clean the drive rollers [2].
(4) To replace the punch entrance drive rollers:

1. Unplug the sensor [1].
2. Remove the 2 screws at the ends of the idler roller assembly [2].
3. Remove the 2 screws at the ends of the drive roller assembly [3].
4. Remove the E-Ring at the end of the drive roller shaft [1].
5. Slide the drive roller shaft and bracket towards the opposite end of
the Punch Module so that the end of the shaft clears the bearing at
the end where you removed the E- Ring [1].
6. Lift the drive roller and bracket out of the Punch Module.
(5) To clean the punch exit drive rollers:

1. Move one retaining spring [1] to the side and then remove the idler
roller assembly [2].
2. Rotate and clean the drive rollers [2].
F -259

(6) To replace the punch exit drive rollers:

1. Move one retaining spring [1] to the side and then remove the idler
roller assembly [2].
2. Remove the 2 screws at each end of the idler roller assembly [3].
3. Remove the E-Ring [4] at the end of the drive roller shaft.
4. Slide the drive roller shaft and bracket towards the opposite end of
the Punch Module so that the end of the shaft clears the bearing at
the end where you removed the E-Ring [4].
5. Lift the drive roller and bracket out of the Punch Module [5].
6. Remove the sensor [6].
7. To install the drive roller, reverse these steps.
20.3.43 Belt replacement

(1) To replace belts:
1. Loosen the screws of the 3 belt idlers [1].
Installation Note
When setting the belt tension, adjust the belt idlers so that
the belt has approximately 1/4" (6.35mm) of deflection.
2. Remove the belts in order as follows
3. To install and adjust the tension of the belts, reverse these steps.
20.3.44 Tools
Tools (needs to be reviewed by Engineering for current design accuracy)
Tools recommended for service of the GP-501 Punch:
(1) Standard Measure Tools (English as opposed to metric)

Open end ignition wrench - 1/4" (required only for chad kit installation)
Phillips screwdriver or 1/4 and 5/16" nut drivers
Hex wrenches, 3/32", 5/64", and 9/64"
(2) Other Recommended Tools and Supplies

Needle nose pliers
Wire cutters
F -260


Screw driver, flat head, small
Supply of wire tie wraps
F -261
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 1. ITEMS NOT ALLOWED

TO BE DISASSEMB...
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING
1. ITEMS NOT ALLOWED TO BE DISASSEMBLED
1.1 Screw-lock applied screw
Note
The screw-lock is applied as a prevention of screw looseness.
The screw-lock is applied to the screws which have a risk of loosening with the oscillation and load during using and shipment.
When loosening or removing the screw which has been applied the screw-lock, be sure to apply the screw-lock again after
tightening the screw.
1.2 Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards

Note
Do not change the volume of the boards whose adjustment procedures are not indicated.
1.3 Precaution on removing the boards

CAUTION
When removing the boards, check the safety and important warning items and then remove the boards following the removal
procedure.
The removal procedures from the connector and the board support are omitted.
Be sure to use the body earth when touching the element on the board by necessity.
For the prevention of electric shock, do not touch the DC power supply /1 of the main body for 50 minutes after turning OFF the
power switch.
There is a possibility of electrical shock caused by charging voltage.
power switch.
power switch.
power switch.
For the prevention of electric shock, do not touch the DC power supply of the RU for 50 minutes after turning OFF the power
switch.
1.4 CCD unit

1.4.1 Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited
8 screws for assembling CCD unit
4 attaching screws of the lens reference plate assembly
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a03uf2c125ca
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed
[3] CCD unit
[4] Lens reference plate assembly
1.4.2 Reason of prohibition

The accuracy of the CCD unit is guaranteed as a unit, and if disassembled, its accuracy is not guaranteed. Accordingly, removing screws that
lead up to the disassembly of the CCD unit is not allowed.
The lens reference plate assembly acts as the basis for the installation position of the CCD unit. Removing this assembly causes the
displacement of the optical axis of the CCD unit. So, be sure not to remove the attaching screws of the lens reference plate assembly.
1.5 Mirror unit/exposure unit

Installation positions of the mirror unit and the exposure unit
G -1

TO BE DISASSEMB...
[1]
[2]
a03uf2c126ca
[1] Exposure unit
[2] Mirror unit

The distance between the mirror unit and the exposure unit affects the magnifications of the original to be read in the sub scan direction.
Therefore, adjusting the installation positions of the mirror unit and the exposure unit arbitrarily is not allowed. However, when the exposure unit
and the scanner wire have been removed, these parts must be reinstalled using the optics unit positioning jig.
1.6 Writing unit cover

1.6.1 Positions from which removing is prohibited
4 mounting screws of the writing unit cover
[1]
[2]
[1]
Screws not allowed to be removed
[2]
Writing unit cover

The inside of the writing unit is the laser path. Once dust comes into the inside by opening the cover, it prevents the laser path. Therefore, do
not remove the screw of the writing unit cover.
1.7 Photo conductor section

1 screw of the stopper plate /Fr on the drum cartridge
1 screw of the stopper plate /Rr on the drum cartridge
G -2

TO BE DISASSEMB...
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5]
a03uf2c129ca
[2] Stopper plate /Fr
[4] Stopper plate /Rr
[5] Drum cartridge

The distance between the drum and developing roller is adjusted by the installation positions of the guides /Fr and /Rr. Therefore, do not remove
the screws of the guides /Fr and /Rr.
1.8 Intermediate transfer section

1 fixing screw of the tension adjusting plate
[2]
[1]
[3]
a03uf2c130ca
[2] Belt
[3] Tension adjusting plate

Strength of the belt stretch is adjusted by tension adjusting plate. Therefore, do not remove the screws of the tension adjusting plate.
1.9 Fusing unit

2 screws of the pressure roller arm /Fr
2 screws of the pressure roller arm /Rr
G -3

[4]
[3]

TO BE DISASSEMB...
[2]
[1]
a03uf2c131ca
[2] Pressure roller arm /Fr
[4] Pressure roller arm /Rr

The pressure roller arms /Fr and /Rr adjust the mounting position of the fusing belt. Therefore, do not remove the screws of the pressure roller
arms /Fr and /Rr.
G -4
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 2. bizhub PRESS C7000/

C7000P/C70hc/C...

2.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts
Note
This list shows the explanation of the disassembly and reassembly of the parts which are considered necessary to replace (other
than periodically replaced parts). However, these parts except for the covers do not require to be disassembled while in normal
service operations.
For the method of replacing the periodically replaced parts, refer to "G.2.2.1 Rear cover /Up1, /Up2, /Lw" to "G.2.2.24 OT."
No.
1
Section
Cover
Parts name
Rear cover /Up1
Rear cover /Up2
Rear cover /Lw
Left cover
Right cover /Up1
Right cover /Up2
Right cover /Up3
Right cover /Up4
Right cover /Lw1
10
Right cover /Lw2
11
Original glass assy
12
Upper cover /Fr
13
Upper cover /Rt
14
Upper cover / Lt
15
Connector cover /Fr
16
Connector cover /Rr
17
Switch cover assy
18
Upper cover /Rr1
19
Upper cover /Rr2
20
21
Main board unit

Scanner section
CCD unit
22
Exposure unit
23
Exposure lamp
24
Scanner wire (remove)
25
Scanner wire (install)
26
Write section
Writing unit
27
Process section
Process unit
28
29
Image correction unit

Toner collection section
30
Vertical conveyance pipe
31
32
Horizontal conveyance pipe

Duplex section
33
Lock lever /2
Paper feed section
36
37
Duplex section
Lock lever /1
34
35
Belt collection pipe
Original feed tray

Tray up/down wire
Fusing section
Temperature sensor /1 (TH1)
38
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
39
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
40
41
42
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
OT
OT
G -5

C7000P/C70hc/C...
2.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures

2.2.1 Rear cover /Up1, /Up2, /Lw
(1) Procedure
[1]
[1] [2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[3]
1. Remove the filter cover /Rr. (Refer to F.5.1.2 Replacing the dust
proof filter on rear side)
2. Remove 12 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Up1 [2].
3. Remove 5 screws [3], and then remove the rear cover /Up2 [4].
4. Remove 9 screws [5] and then remove the rear cover /Lw [6].
[5]
[4]
[6]
[5]
2.2.2 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[3]

2. Remove 9 screws [2] and then remove the left cover [3].
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Up4, /Lw1, /Lw2

(1) Procedure
[2]
1. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the right cover /Lw1 [2].
2. Open the toner collection door [3].
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
G -6

[1]
[5]
[7] [3]
[2]
[4]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
4. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the right cover /Up4 [2].
6. Remove the filter cover /Rt1. (Refer to F.5.1.1 Replacing the filter
box, developing dust proof filter)
[6]
[1]
[2]
2.2.4 Original glass assy

(1) Procedure
[1]
[5]
[2]
[6]
[10]
[4]
[3]
a03uf2c086ca

Note
As the original glass assy consists of the original glass [7]
with the original positioning plate /Lt [8] attached, be sure
to remove it by holding the specified positions [9] and
[10].
Lifting up of the original positioning plate /Lt causes the
double-stick tape to come off.
[7]
[8]
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the original positioning

plate /Rr [2].
2. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the scanner cover /Rt [4].
3. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the original glass assy [6].
[9]
a03uf2c087ca
G -7

C7000P/C70hc/C...
2.2.5 Upper cover /Fr, /Rt, /Lt, connector cover /Fr, /Rr, switch cover assy
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the original glass assy. (Refer to G.2.2.4 Original glass
assy)
2. Open the toner supply section. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening /closing
the toner supply door section.)
3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the scanner cover /Fr2 [2].
4. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the scanner cover /Fr1 [4].
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
5. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the upper cover /Fr [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
6. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the connector cover /Rr
[2].
7. Loosen 3 screws [3], and then remove the connector cover /Fr [4].
[3]
G -8

[1] [2]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
8. Remove 2 screw caps [1].
9. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the upper cover /Rt [3].
[3]

11. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the upper cover /Lt [3].
[1] [2]
[1]
[3]
[3]

13. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the switch cover assy [3].
[2]
G -9

C7000P/C70hc/C...
2.2.6 Upper cover /Rr1, /Rr2

(1) Procedure
[6]
[2]
[4] [5]
1. Remove the filter cover /Rr. (Refer to F.5.1.2 Replacing the dust
proof filter on rear side)
3. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the upper cover /Rr1 [3].
4. Remove the connector cover /Rr. (Refer to G.2.2.5 Upper cover /
Fr, /Rt, /Lt, connector cover /Fr, /Rr, switch cover assy)
6. Remove 2 screws [5], and then remove the upper cover /Rr2 [6].
[3]
[1] [2]
2.2.7 Main board unit

(1) Procedure
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
1. Remove the rear covers /Up1, /Up2, and /Lw. (Refer to G.2.2.1
Rear cover /Up1, /Up2, /Lw)
2. Remove the right cover /Up3. (Refer to G.2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /
Up2, /Up3, /Up4, /Lw1, /Lw2)
3. Remove the upper covers /Rr1 and /Rr2. (Refer to G.2.2.6 Upper
cover /Rr1, /Rr2)
[1]
[2]
[1]
5. Remove 23 screws [1], and then remove the shield cover /Up [2].
[1]
G -10

[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
7. Remove 25 screws [2], and then remove the shield cover /Lw [3].
[2]
8. Remove 7 screws [1], and then remove the cable stay /Up [2].
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[4]
9. Turn the lock lever [1] downward to release the lock and then pull
out the ribbon cable [2].
Note
When reinstalling the ribbon cable, push down the lock
lever and insert the ribbon cable fully to the connector so
that its conductor side comes opposite side of the lock
lever.
After that, return the lock lever to its original position and
lock the ribbon cable.
10. Remove 2 cable clamps [3].
11. Remove 4 screws [4], and then remove the cable stay /Lw [5].
[1]
[2]
G -11

[1]
12. Remove 7 screws [1], and then remove the shield plate [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
[2]
13. Disconnect 9 connectors [2] and the relay connector [3] which are
connected to the over all control board (OACB) [1].
14. Disconnect the connector [5] which is connected to the memory
control board /1 (MCB1) [4].
[5] [4]
[1]
15. Disconnect 10 connectors [2] which are connected to the printer

image processing board (PRIPB) [1].
[2]
G -12
16. Pull out all cables of disconnected connectors to the outside of the
main board unit.
Note
Pull out the cable of CN215 [1] from the opening [3] after
removing the core [2].
[3]
[1]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
[2]
17. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the corner guard [2].
18. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the cover mounting
bracket [4].
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
19. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the cable clamp mounting
bracket [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
G -13

[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
20. Remove 9 screws [1], and then disconnect 3 connectors [2] to
remove the printer image processing board (PRIPB) [3].
[3]
21. Remove 11 screws [1] and remove the main board cover /Lw [2].
[1]
[1]
22. Remove 15 screws [1] and remove the main board unit [2] in the
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
G -14

[1]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
23. Check point when removing the main board unit
Note
Release the clamp, turn to the arrow direction and pout
the main board unit [1] because it is connected with the
shield [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
24. Remove 26 screws [1], and then remove the shield cover /Rr [2].
Note
The main board unit can be removed from the main body
by removing the shield cover /Rr.
Be sure to put the removed shield cover /Rr against the
side of the main body with the cable connected.
[1]
[2]
[1]
2.2.8 CCD unit

(1)
assy)
3. Remove 9 screws [2] and then remove the CCD cover [3].
4. Remove the screws [4] and then remove the ribbon cable cover
[5].
[4]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[2]
8050ma3141
5. Turn the lock lever [1] downward to release the lock and then pull
out the ribbon cable [2].
Note
When reinstalling the ribbon cable, push down the lock
lever and insert the ribbon cable fully to the connector so
that its conductor side comes opposite side of the lock
lever.
After that, return the lock lever to its original position and
lock the ribbon cable.
[1]
[2]
a03uf2c098ca
G -15

[1]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
6. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the CCD unit [2].
Note
Never remove any screw other than it. When removed,
various optical adjustments which are not available in the
field are required.
Never touch the lens or it causes the faulty image
[2]
[2]
a03uf2c099ca
2.2.9 Exposure unit

(1) Procedure for removal
[3]

assy)
2. Remove the upper covers /Fr, /Rt, /Lt. (Refer to G.2.2.5 Upper
cover /Fr, /Rt, /Lt, connector cover /Fr, /Rr, switch cover assy)
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the front cover /Up [2].
Note
When reinstalling the front cover /Up, be sure to set the
projection [3] to the hole [4] of the main body frame.
[4]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
4. Remove the screws [1], 4 each, and then remove 2 upper cover
mounting brackets [2].
[1]
G -16

[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[4]
[2]
5. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 2 wire holders
[2].
6. Rotate the exposure unit [3] while keeping it horizontally and then
pull it out upward to put on the scanner frame [4].
a03uf2c101ca

8. Remove the screw [2] and then release the cable [4] from the cord
holder [3].
9. Remove the exposure unit [5].
[1]
[2]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
[3]
[5]
a03uf2c102ca
(2) Procedure for reinstallation

[5]
[4]
[4]
[5]
1. Set the exposure unit [1] to the main body.

2. Move the V-mirror unit [2] to the paper exit side and then insert the
optics unit positioning jigs [3] from the front side and pass each of
them through the exposure unit [1] and the V-mirror unit [2].
Note
When reinstalling the exposure unit, use the optics unit
positioning jig.
3. Fix the exposure unit with the screw [4] and the wire holder [5], 1
each.
4. Remove 2 optics unit positioning jigs [3].
5. Be sure that the following reinstallation of the parts follows the
removal steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
[3]
a03uf2c103ca
G -17

C7000P/C70hc/C...
2.2.10 Exposure lamp

(1) Procedure
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
1. Remove the exposure unit. (Refer to G.2.2.9 Exposure unit)

2. Cut the wiring harness band [1] to release the fixation of the cable
[2].
3. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the HP detection plate [4].
4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the exposure lamp (L1) [6].
[5]
[6]
[5]
a03uf2c104ca
2.2.11 Removing the scanner wire

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the exposure unit. (Refer to G.2.2.9 Exposure unit)
2. Loosen the screws [1], 1 each, and release the fixing of 2 spring
fixing plates [2].
[2]
[1]
a03uf2c105ca
G -18
[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[9]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
3. Remove the wire terminal [3] of the scanner wire /Rr [2] from the
spring fixing plate [1] and then remove the scanner wire /Rr [2]
from the pulley /3 [4], outside of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the
pulley /2 [6] in order.
4. Remove the metal ball [8] of the scanner wire /Rr [2] from the wire
stopper [7] and then remove the scanner wire /Rr [2] from the
inside of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /1 [9] in order.
5. Remove the scanner wire /Rr [2] from the drive pulley [10].
6. Following the steps 3 to 5, remove the scanner wire /Fr [11].
Note
Be sure to install the scanner wires /Fr and the /Rr
symmetrically.
[10]
[2]
[2]
[7] [8]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[11]
2.2.12 Reinstalling the scanner wire

(1) Procedure
1. Move the V-mirror unit [1] to the paper exit side and then insert the
optics unit positioning jig [2] from the front side and pass it through
the V-mirror unit [1].
Note
Be careful not to damage the mirror with the jig.
When reinstalling the scanner wire, be sure to fix the Vmirror unit with the optics unit positioning jig.
[1]
[2]
G -19

[6] [5]
2. Drop the metal ball [3] in between the scanner wire /Fr [1] and /Rr
[2] into the installation hole of the drive pulley [4]. With this hole as
a starting point, wind the wire 3.5 turns [5] outwards and 3.5 turns
[6] inwards.
Note
The same wire is used for the scanner wires /Fr and /Rr.
Be sure to wind each scanner wire with its wire terminal
outside, and its metal ball [7] inside.
Be sure to wind each scanner wire so that its both ends
comes out from the bottom of the drive pulley.
Wind each scanner wire on the drive pulley thickly and be
careful not to overlap each wire.
[1]
[4]
[3]
[7]
[8]
[8]
[4]
3. After winding the scanner wires /Fr [1] and /Rr [2], fix each wire
with the tape [8] so that they do not come off.
[5] [6]
[2]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
[4]
[3]
[7]
8050ma3026
4. Pass the metal ball [3] side (inside) of the scanner wire /Rr [2]
which is winded on the drive pulley [1] through the pulley /1 [4] and
inside of the V-mirror pulley [5] in order, and then hook the metal
ball [3] on the wire stopper [6].
5. Pass the wire terminal side [7] (outside) of the scanner wire /Rr [2]
which is winded on the drive pulley [1] through the pulley /2 [8],
outside of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /3 [9] in order, and
then hook the wire terminal [7] on the spring fixing plate [10].
6. Following the steps 4 to 5, install the scanner wire /Fr [11].
[9]
[10]
[2]
[5]
[4] [6]
[3]
FRONT
[2]
[7] [8]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[11]
8050ma3027
G -20
7. Tighten the screws [1], 1 each, and fix 2 spring fixing plates [2].
[2]
[1]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
a03uf2c105ca
2.2.13 Writing unit

WARNING
Do not execute energization while the writing unit is misaligned from the regular installation position.
Never remove the cover of the writing unit while in energization. The laser beam threatens vision.
Note
Never remove the cover of the writing unit. Also, never loosen the screw.
When removing the writing unit, be sure not to touch the dust-proof glass. (Not to contaminate the glass)
Never remove the writing unit for 2 minutes after the main power switch (SW1) turns OFF.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the right covers /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Lw1, and /Lw2. (Refer
to G.2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Up4, /Lw1, /Lw2)
3. Remove 10 screws [2], and then remove the fan mounting plate /
Rt [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
G -21

[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[3]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the writing pressure plate
[2].
Note
When removing the writing pressure plate, be sure to put
your thumbs on the edge of the arrow-marked slit [3] and
support the writing pressure plate with the other fingers to
lift. Not to get injured, be sure to hold the specified
positions.
When reinstalling the writing pressure plate, be sure to
check that the screw section [5] of each writing unit is on
the arm [4] before pressing.
When the writing pressure plate cannot be inserted to the
proper position at reinstalling it, be sure to check that the
writing unit is inserted straight.
After inserting each writing unit, be sure to press its rear
edges to check if it is fully inserted.
5. Remove the connectors [1], 4 each, and then remove the writing
units /Y [2], /M [3], /C [4], and /K [5].
Note
When reinstalling the writing units, be sure to check that
each of them is inserted straight.
7. After replacing the writing unit /K, conduct the following item.
dust proof glass)
- Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
(Refer to I.5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment Writing Initial Pos. Memory))
- I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement) (Refer to I.5.7.1 I/O Check Mode)
- CD-Mag. Skew Adj. (Refer to I.5.3.13 CD-Mag. Skew Adj.
- Restart Timing Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.1 Restart Timing
Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
- Beam Pitch Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.14 Beam Pitch Adjustment
- Moire Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.15 Moire Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment))
8. After replacing the writing units /Y, /M, /C, conduct the following
item.
dust proof glass)
- Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
(Refer to I.5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment Writing Initial Pos. Memory))
- I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement) (Refer to I.5.7.1 I/O Check Mode)
G -22

C7000P/C70hc/C...
- Beam Pitch Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.14 Beam Pitch Adjustment
- Moire Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.15 Moire Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment))
2.2.14 Process unit

(1) Procedure
[4]
[5]
[2]
[8]
[1]
[6]
1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.5.1 Removing/

Remove all drum cartridges. (Refer to F.5.3.4 Replacing the drum
cartridge)
2. Remove all developing units. (Refer to F.5.6.2 Replacing the
developing units /C, /M, /Y, and /K)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] on each stapler.
Note
Be sure to remove the intermediate transfer unit, drum
cartridge, and developing unit before removing the
process unit.
Do not remove the black screw.
4. Push back the process unit [6] until the screw [5] can be seen from
each hole [4] of the guide rails /Lt [2] and /Rt [3].
5. Remove the screw [5], 1 each.
Note
[6]
[1]
[10]
6. Pull out the process unit [6] again, and then remove it from the
guide rails /Lt [2] and /Rt [3] as shown below.
The projection [7] on the guide rail /Lt is set in the notch [8] of the
process unit. The notch of the process unit is on the projection [9]
of the guide rail /Rt. Therefore, remove the process unit from the
guide rail /Lt first by displacing a little. Then, remove the process
unit from the guide rail /Rt by lifting it up.
[7]
[9]
[3]
[5]
[4]
a03uf2c110ca
G -23

C7000P/C70hc/C...
2.2.15 Image correction unit

(1) Procedure
[4]
[2]
1. Remove the process unit. (Refer to G.2.2.14 Process unit)

3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the image correction unit
assy [3].
Note
When removing the image correction unit, be sure to
remove the process unit in advance.
When removing the image correction unit, be careful not
to touch and stress the drum drive shaft [4] of each color.
[3]
[1]
[4]
8050ma3071
2.2.16 Belt collection pipe, Vertical conveyance pipe, Horizontal conveyance pipe
(1) Procedure
Note
Clean the inside of the pipe following the steps when SC code C-0101 (paper feed motor abnormality) or C-2220 (transfer belt
motor abnormality) occurs.
1. Remove the process unit. (Refer to G.2.2.14 Process unit)
2. Turn the duplex section release lever [2] counterclockwise while
unlocking the lock [1].
3. Hold the duplex section release lever, pull out the duplex section
while unlocking the lock [3].
Note
In order to prevent rollover accidents, safety feature of the
product does not allow to pull out the duplex section
without unlocking the lock [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
a03uf2c111ca
4. In order to prevent waste toner dropping, put a piece of paper [2]

right under the horizontal conveyance pipe /1 [1].
[2]
[1]
8050ma3192
G -24

C7000P/C70hc/C...
5. Remove 7 screws [1], and then loosen the screw [2].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3193
G -25

C7000P/C70hc/C...
6. Hold the belt waste toner inlet [1] and the drum /K waste toner inlet
[2] with both hands, and then remove the belt collection pipe [3]
and the vertical conveyance pipes /1 [4], /2 [5], /3 [6], and /4 [7]
being connected.
Note
When removing the belt collection pipe and the vertical
conveyance pipe, be sure to tilt the belt waste toner inlet
side frontward.
When reinstalling them, be sure to align the projections
on the rear side of each inlet to the main body.
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[2]
[3]
8050ma3194
[2]
7. Remove the toner collection pipe [2] from the vertical conveyance
pipe /1 [1], and then pull out the toner oscillating plate [3].
[1]
8050ma3195
G -26
8. Check point when reinstalling the toner collection pipe

Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to check that the toner
oscillating plate moves up and down by rotating the gear
[5] after inserting the pin [2] of the toner collection pipe [1]
into the drive hole [4] of the toner oscillating plate [3].
[2]
[4]
[3]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
[1]
[5]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3196
[5] [1]
9. Remove the toner collection pipe /2 [2] from the toner collection
pipe /1 [1]
11. Remove the toner collection screw [5] from the toner collection
pipe /1.
12. Clean the waste toner in the toner collection pipes /1 and /2.
Note
Be careful not to loose the sponges [6] and [7] when
cleaning the toner collection pipe /2.
[6] [7]
[4]
[3]
8050ma3197
G -27

[4]
[6]
[3] [6]
[2]
[6]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[3]
13. Separate the vertical conveyance pipes /1 [1], /2 [2], /3 [3] and /4
[4], remove each inlet cap [5], and then clean the waste toner in
each vertical conveyance pipe.
Note
Be careful not to loose 4 sponges [6] when cleaning the
vertical conveyance pipes.
When reinstalling each inlet cap, be sure to set the
depression [7] to the salient [8] of the vertical conveyance
pipe.
[1]
[8]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
[7]
8050ma3198
14. Remove the rear covers /Up1, /Up2, and /Lw. (Refer to G.2.2.1
Rear cover /Up1, /Up2, /Lw)
15. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the flywheel /C [2].
16. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the flywheel /K [4].
[1]
[4]
17. Remove the toner collection box. (Refer to F.5.7.1 Replacing the
toner collect box)
18. Remove the main board unit. (Refer to G.2.2.7 Main board unit)
19. Put a piece of paper [3] under the connecting section of the
horizontal conveyance pipe /1 [1] and the horizontal conveyance
pipe assembly [2].
Note
Waste toner may spill out when removing the horizontal
conveyance pipe /2 from the horizontal conveyance pipe /
1. In order to prevent waste toner dropping in the
machine, be sure to put a piece of paper.
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050ma3200
G -28

C7000P/C70hc/C...
20. Remove 2 screws [1], and then pull out the horizontal conveyance
pipe assembly [3] from the horizontal conveyance pipe /1 [2].
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[4][5]
8050ma3201
[1]
[3]

Note
When reinstalling the gear, be sure to align the D-cut [4] of
the screw [3] with the D-cut [5] of the gear.
8050ma3202
G -29

Note
When reinstalling the bearing, be sure to align it with the
detent [3] of the horizontal conveyance pipe assembly [2].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3203
23. Pull out the screw [2] from the horizontal conveyance pipe
assembly [1].
Note
A spacer [3] is inserted on the gear mounting side of the
screw. When reinstalling it, be sure to insert the spacer.
[1]
[2]
[3]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
8050ma3204
G -30
24. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the horizontal conveyance
pipe /4 [2].
25. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the horizontal conveyance
pipe /3 [4].
26. Clean the waste toner in the horizontal conveyance pipes /2 [5], /3
[4] and /4 [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
[4]
[4]
[5]
[5]
[3]
8050ma3205
27. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the horizontal conveyance
pipe /1 [2].
28. Clean the waste toner in the horizontal conveyance pipe /1.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3206
2.2.17 Duplex section

(1) Procedure
the fusing unit)
4. Remove the duplex section cover /Rt, duplex section release lever,
and duplex section cover /Lt. (Refer to F.5.11.1 Replacing the
5. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the paper feed solenoid
cover [2].
Note
Conduct this step when the MB is mounted.
[1]
[2]
[1]
a03uf2c058ca
G -31

C7000P/C70hc/C...
7. Remove the screw [2], and then release the fixation of the wiring
harness assy of the duplex section [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050ma3085
[1]
[9]
[1]
[7]

9. Remove the screws [2].
10. Push back the duplex section [6] so that each screw [5] can be
seen from the hole [4] of the guide rail /Lt [3], and then remove the
screws [5], 1 each.
Note
[9]
[8]
[10]
11. Pull out the duplex section [6] again, and then move the guide pin
[8] of the guide rail /Rt [7] to the avoidance position of the slotted
hole [9].
12. Remove the duplex section [6] from the guide rails /Rt [7] and /Lt
[3].
Note
When removing the duplex section, be sure to remove
with 2 people; one on the paper feed side and the other on
the paper exit side.
When removing the duplex section, the person on the
paper exit side holds the handle /Rt [10] of the duplex
section.
When removing the duplex section, the person on the
paper exit side holds the stay [11].
[4]
[5]
[11]
[2]
[3]
[6]
a03uf2c112ca
2.2.18 Replacing the lock levers /1 and /2

Note
The main body has a risk of falling down when the process unit and the duplex section are pulled out at the same time. The lock
levers /1 and /2 are provided to prevent the main body from falling down. The process unit and the duplex section cannot be
pulled out at the same time with the levers.
When the process unit or the duplex section cannot be pulled out independently, it has a possibility that the lock levers /1 and /2
are deformed by a wrong operation. In that case, the levers need to be replaced.
Since the lock levers /1 and /2 are not the target parts of the routine maintenance, they are installed not to be replaced. Therefore,
the replacement has to be conducted under the indirect vision. Replace the parts following the installation positions of each part
on the pictures.
G -32

C7000P/C70hc/C...
(1) Procedure
[6]
[3]

2. While unlocking the release lever of the duplex section, turn the
duplex section release lever counterclockwise and pull out ADU
until the screw [1] can be reached. (Refer to F.5.11.1 Replacing
the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 (CL4) and /3 (CL5))
Note
Depending on the deformed condition of the lock levers /1
[2] and /2 [3], ADU cannot be pulled out smoothly.
However, keep enough space to access the screw [1] by
pressing the levers.
[5]
[5]
Note
When reinstalling the stopper [4], be sure to align the
projection [5] with the positioning hole [6].
[1] [2]
[4]
[2]
[3]
5. Remove the ring [8] and then remove the lock lever /2 [3].
6. Remove the spring [9] from the lock lever /2 [3].
Note
When replacing, be careful about the installation direction
of the spring [9] and the installation position of the hook.
[7]
[1]
[3]
[8]
[9]
[12]
[10]
4. Once the stopper [4] is removed, the lock levers /1 [2] and /2 [3]
are deactivated. Then, pull out only ADU [7] furthermore.
WARNING
Do not pull out the process unit since it has a risk of
falling down the main body.
[11]
7. Remove 3 screws [10] and then remove the lever enforcing plate
[11].
8. Remove the E-ring [12] and then remove the lock lever /1 [2].
9. Remove the spring [13] from the lock lever /1 [2].
Note
When replacing, be careful about the installation direction
of the spring [13] and the installation position of the hook.
[13]
[2]
8050ma3220
2.2.19 Paper feed trays /1 to /3

(1) Procedure
Note
G -33

2. Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to F.5.10.1 Replacing the pickup roller and the paper feed roller rubber)
3. Remove 4 screws [1] and then lift the paper feed tray /1 [2] to
remove.
[1]
[1]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
[2]
8050ma3162
2.2.20 Tray up/down wire

Wire length
Up/down wire /A, /C: 531mm
Up/down wire /B, /D: 160mm
(1) How to unfasten a wire

Note
[8] [7]
[5]
[6]
[1]
2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove the paper feed tray /1.
4. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the wire cover /FR [2].
5. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the wire cover /FL [4].
6. Remove 3 screws [5], and then remove the wire cover /RR [6].
7. Remove 2 screws [7], and then remove the wire cover /RL [8].
[4]
[3]
[2]
a03uf2c119ca
G -34

[7]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[8]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[15]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[20]
[16]
[14] [13]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
9. Move the drive pulley [2] inward and then remove the wires /C [3]
and /D [4].
10. After removing the E-ring [5], remove the pulley [6], and then
release the wires /C [3] and /D [4] from the wire regulation cover
[7].
11. Remove the screw [8] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1,
and then remove the wire /D [4].
release the wire /C [3] from the wire regulation cover [11].
13. Remove 1 screw [12] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1,
and then remove the wire /C [3].
15. Move the drive pulley [14] inward and then remove the wires /A
[15] and /B [16].
release the wires /A [15] and /B [16] from the wire regulation cover
[19].
17. Remove the screw [20] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1,
and then remove the wire /B [16].
release the wire /A [15] from the wire regulation cover [23].
19. Remove 1 screw [24] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1,
and then remove the wire /A [15].
[23] [22]
[21]
[15]
[24]
[11]
[10]
[3]
[9]
[12]
8050ma3168
(2) How to string a wire

Note
G -35
[12]
[11]
[4]
[3]
[13]
[8]
[10]
[9]
[16]
[14] [15]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
1. From the bottom of the paper feed tray, install the wire /C [3] to the
wire fixing shaft [2] with 1 screw [1].
2. Wind the wire /C [3] around the pulley [4], insert it into the shaft [6]
with the wire regulation cover [5], and then fix them with 1 E-ring
[7].
3. From the bottom of the paper feed tray, install the wire /D [10] to
the wire fixing shaft [9] with 1 screw [8].
4. Wind the wires /C [3] and /D [10] around the pulley [11], insert it
into the shaft [13] with the wire regulation cover [12], and then fix
them with 1 E-ring [14].
Note
Wind the wires around the pulley [11] so that the wire /C
[3] comes to the outside and the wire /D [10] comes to the
inside.
[17]
5. Insert the wires /C [3] and /D [10] into the up/down drive shaft [14],
move the drive pulley [15] outward, and then fix them with 1 E-ring
[16].
Note
Insert the wires into the up/down drive shaft [14] so that
the wire /C [3] comes to the outside and the wire /D [10]
comes to the inside.
[18]
6. Install the wires /A [17] and /B [18] following the steps 1 to 5.

Note
After re-stretching the wire, turn the up/down drive shaft
manually to check that the up/down plate moves
smoothly.
[17]
[5]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3169
2.2.21 Fusing large/small recognition connector

2 fusing units can be used depending on condition to reduce faulty images (fusing lines) that occur when performing large size print after small
size print.
The fusing unit is recognized by the Fusing large/small recognition connector. The fusing unit that is connected to that connector is recognized
as for the large size print.
Note
When using 2 fusing units, DIPSW5-0 is required to be set to 1.
When using 2 fusing units, ORU-M function cannot be used.
G -36

C7000P/C70hc/C...
(1) Procedure
[1]

the fusing unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then open the joint section [2] in the
3. Remove the connector cover [3] and then remove the Fusing
large/small recognition connector [4].
[2]
[4]
[3]
2.2.22 Temperature sensor /1 (TH1), thermostat /1 (TS1), /2 (TS2)

the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing covers /Fr and /Rr. (Refer to F.5.13.2
Replacing the fusing drive gear /B, fusing duct assy)
3. Remove the fusing cover /Up assy. (Refer to F.5.13.6 Replacing
the fusing roller /2, fusing bearing /2, fusing drive gear /O)
4. Remove the cover. (Refer to F.5.13.11 Replacing the fusing
temperature sensor assy /Up (edge))
[2].
7. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the temperature sensor /1
(TH1) [5].
[1]
[2] [2]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[2].
9. Remove the fastons [3], 2 each.
Note
Be sure to remove the faston by holding its base. Never
pull out it by holding the wiring harness.
[4]
10. Remove the screws [4], 2 each, and remove the thermostats /1
(TS1) [5] and /2 (TS2) [6].
[1] [3]
[6]
[1]
[3]
[5]
[1]
a03uf2c114ca

Note
Be sure to adjust the position of the thermostats /1 (TS1) and /2 (TS2) with the thermostat jigs /UC and /UF before securing
them. Be sure to apply Screw-lock to the screw that has been fixed.
Be sure to make the position adjustments when the fusing roller is cold.
G -37

[6]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[2]
[3]
a03uf2c120ca
[1]
[2]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
1. Fasten tentatively TS1 [1] and TS2 [2] with the screws [3], 2 each.
2. Reinstall the fastons [1], 2 each, to the TS1 and TS2.
3. Insert the thermostat jigs /UC [7] and /UF [6] between TS1 and the
fusing belt [5].
4. Adjust the position of TS1 so that the gap amount between TS1
and the fusing belt becomes equal to the thickness of the
thermostat jigs /UC and /UF, and then secure it with the screw [3].
5. Secure TS2 by following steps 3 to 4.
Note
Be sure to make the distance between TS1/TS2 and the
fusing belt (distance "a") equal to the thickness of the
thermostat jigs /UC and /UF.
Standard value (UC): a = 1.2 0.2mm
Standard value (UF): a = 1.8 0.2mm
6. Apply Screw-lock to 4 screws [3].
7. How to handle the thermostat jigs /UC and /UF
[1] Adjustment part
[2] The part must not be inserted between the thermostat and the
fusing belt.
[3] The part must be inserted between the thermostat and the
fusing belt.
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a03uf2c136ca
2.2.23 Temperature sensor /2 (TH2), thermostat /3 (TS3)

[3]
[2]

the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing entrance guide plate. (Refer to F.5.13.8
4. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the temperature sensor /2
(TH2) [3].
Note
When reinstalling TH2, be sure to check that the wiring
harness does not touch the fusing roller /Lw [4].
[4]
[1]
a03uf2c115ca
G -38

[4]
[3]
[5]

C7000P/C70hc/C...
5. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the sensor mounting
bracket [2].
6. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the cable clamp [4].
7. Remove 2 fastons [5].
Note
Be sure to remove the faston by holding its base. Never
pull out it by holding the wiring harness.
[7]
8. Remove 2 screws [6] and remove the thermostat /3 (TS3) [7].
[2]
[1]
[6]

Note
Be sure to adjust the position of the thermostat /3 (TS3) with the thermostat jig /L before securing them. Be sure to apply Screwlock to the screw that has been fixed.
Be sure to make the position adjustments when the fusing roller /Lw is cold.
1. Fasten tentatively TS3 [1] with 2 screws [2].
[4]
[5]
[1]
2. Reinstall 2 fastons [3] to TS3.
3. Insert the thermostat jig /L [5] between TS3 and the fusing roller /
Lw [4].
4. Adjust the position of TS3 so that the gap amount between TS3
and the fusing roller /Lw becomes equal to the thickness of the
thermostat jig /L, and then secure it with the screw [2].
Note
Be sure to make the distance between TS3 and the fusing
roller /Lw (distance "a") equal to the thickness of the
thermostat jig /L.
Standard value: a = 3 0.2mm
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5. Apply screw-lock to 2 screws [2].

Note
When reinstalling TS3, be sure to check that the wiring
harness does not touch the fusing roller /Lw.
6. How to handle the thermostat jig /L

[1] Adjustment part
[2] The part must not be inserted between the thermostat and the
fusing roller /Lw
[3] The part must be inserted between the thermostat and the
fusing roller /Lw
[3]
a03uf2c137ca
G -39

C7000P/C70hc/C...
2.2.24 OT
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the left cover. (Refer to G.2.2.2 Left cover)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the OT cover.
[1]
[2]
[1]
a03uf2c117ca

4. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the OT cover [3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a03uf2c118ca
G -40
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 3. DF-622
3. DF-622
No.
Section
Parts name
Main body
DF main body
Cover section
Front cover
3
4
Rear cover
Conveyance section
Conveyance belt unit

3.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling
CAUTION
3.2.2 DF
Note
Before the removal operation, be sure to secure the DF hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. When removing any parts from
the scanner section with the DF opened, be sure to secure the hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. Without this operation, it
deforms the metal frame in the DF installation section.
(1) Procedure
2. Secure 2 hinge adjustment brackets [2] at 90 degrees. There are 2
types of the bracket installed in the DF; one for 70 degrees and the
other for 40 degrees, and they can be distinguished by the
scratched number on each surface.
For 70 degrees: Loosen 4 screws [3] and move 2 brackets [2]
downward, and then secure them with 4 screws [3] again.
For 40 degrees: Remove 4 screws [3] and move 2 brackets [2]
upside down, and then secure them with 4 screws [3] again.
[2]
[3]
[3]
[1]

5. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the metal frame [4].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a052f2c019ca
G -41

6. While supporting the DF [1], release 2 stoppers [2] from the holes
[3] and lift to remove.
Note
The DF has a risk of falling backward when 2 stoppers [2]
are released. Therefore, be sure to support them.
[1]

Note
After reinstalling the DF, conduct "ADF Orig. Stop
Position" in the Service Mode.
[2]
[2]
[3]
[3]
a052f2c020ca
3.2.3 Front cover

(1) Procedure
[6]
[7]
[5] [3]
[1]
[4]

2. Open the DF [1] and then remove 2 screws [2].
3. Close the DF [1] and then open the paper feed cover [3] and the
paper exit cover [4].
Note
Be careful for closing the DF [1] since the front cover [5] is
not fixed.
Since the paper exit cover gets damaged, do not open the
DF [1] while opening the paper exit cover.
4. Remove the front cover [5] while lifting it up a little so that the claw
[6] comes out from the hole [7].
[2]
a052f2c021ca
3.2.4 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
[3] [1]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2]
1. Open the paper feed cover [1] and the paper exit cover [2].
3. Tilt the rear cover [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5] and remove
it upward.
a052f2c022ca
3.2.5 Conveyance belt

Note
Do not touch, scratch, and crease the belt roller. When touching, sure to hold the positions within 20mm from the edges in the sub
scan direction.
G -42
(1) Procedure
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]

3. Slide 2 stoppers [3] inside of the conveyance belt unit [2] upper
section to the right to remove.
4. Pull out the upper section of the conveyance belt unit in the arrowmarked direction [4], and then remove it upward.
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to insert the drive coupling
belt [5] in the conveyance belt unit.
[5]
a052f2c023ca
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then pull up the roller section.

7. Remove the conveyance belt.
[1]
[1]
a052f2c024ca
G -43
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 4. PF-602
4. PF-602
No.
1
Section
Parts name
Cover
Right cover
Rear cover /Lt2
Rear cover /Lt21, /Rt
4
5
Front door
Tray section
Tray
Lift wire
7
8
Paper lift motor /1 (M2) and /2 (M3)

Conveyance section
Vertical conveyance unit
Horizontal conveyance unit
10
Multi feed detection board /S (MFDBS and /S)

Note
4.2.2 Right cover

(1) Procedure
[2]
1. Remove the four screws [1] and remove the right cover fixing plate
[2].
[1]
a03xf2c021ca
2. Remove the 13 screws [1] and then remove the right cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
a03xf2c022ca
[1]

Note
When installing the right cover, be sure to match the metal
plate [2] on the lower part of the PF main unit with the
groove [1] on the right cover.
[2]
a03xf2c023ca
G -44
4.2.3 Rear cover /Lt2

(1) Procedure
[2]
1. Remove the nine screws [1] and remove the rear cover/Lt2 [2].
[1]
[1]
a03xf2c024ca
[1]

Note
When installing the rear cover/Lt2, be sure to match the
metal plate [2] of the lower part of the PF main unit with
the groove [1] of the rear cover.
[2]
a03xf2c025ca
4.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt

(1) Procedure
[3]
[4]
[3]
[3]
1. Remove the rear cover /Lt2. (Refer to G.4.2.3 Rear cover /Lt2)
2. Remove the six screws [1] and remove the rear cover/Lt1 [2].
3. Remove the eleven screws [3] and remove the rear cover/Rt1 [4].
[1]
[2]
a03xf2c026ca
[2]

Note
When installing the rear cover/Rt, be sure to match the
metal plate [2] on the lower part of the PF main unit with
the groove [1] on the rear cover.
[1]
a03xf2c028ca
G -45
4.2.5 Front door

(1) Procedure
[2]

2. Remove the screws [2].
3. Remove the two screws [3] and the mounting plate [4], and
remove the front door [1] releasing it from the pin [5].
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a03xf2c030ca
4.2.6 Tray
Note
Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the try unit is heavy.
Be sure to pull out the trays one at a time. Do not pull out the two trays at a time or the PF may topple over.
Note
The removal and installation procedures of tray/4 is the same for those of tray/5. The explanation here is made by the example of
tray/4.
When raising up the tray, be sure to hold it at the specified positions. Holding it at positions other than those positions specified
damage the tray, thus resulting in a paper feed jam.
G -46
(1) Procedure
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]

[5]
a03xf2c031ca
4. Remove the cushion/3 [1].

5. Remove the three screws [2] and remove the upper cover/1 [3].
Note
When replacing the cushion/3, also replace the doublesided tape that secure the cushion/ 3 with a new one.
[1]
[3]
[2]
a03xf2c060ca
6. Remove the three screws [1] on the right side of the tray and
remove the rail stopper [2].
7. Pull the tray [3] further out.
[3]
[2]
[1]
a03xf2c032ca
G -47

[1]

8. Remove the six screws [1], three each on the left and right rails,
hold the tray [2] by the specified positions [5], and remove it
straight up.
Note
When reinstalling the tray, make sure that the four knobs
[3] on the rails are properly fitted in the notches [4] of the
tray.
When raising up the tray, be sure to hold it at the specified
positions [5] and raise it up with 2 persons. Do not hold
the part indicated with [6] as the part can easily become
deformed, which adversely affects paper feed resulting in
a paper jam.
[2]
a03xf2c034ca
[1]

Note
When installing tray/4, make sure not to let the lower part
[1] of the tray cover contact the rail [2].
[2]
a03xf2c034ca
4.2.7 Lift wire

Note
The removing/installing procedure of the lift wire is the same for tray/4 and tray/5.
(1) Procedure
[2]
1. Press the down button [1] to let the lift plate [2] go down to the
bottom of the tray.
[1]
a03xf2c035ca
G -48
[3]

2. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.4.2.6 Tray)
3. Loosen the three screws [1], and remove the three screws [2].
4. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the front cover [4] of the
tray.
[4]
[1]
[2]
a03xf2c036cb
5. Check point when reinstalling the tray

Note
The front cover of tray/4 has the ancillary cover [1],
whereas that of tray/5 does not. When installing the front
covers of each tray, make sure not to mix them up.
[1]
a03xf2c037ca
[1]
6. Remove the nine screws [1] and remove the cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
a03xf2c061ca
G -49

7. Check point when reinstalling the cover
Note
When installing the cover [1], make sure to fasten the gear
[3] and the spring [4] with the plate [2] of the tray-down
stopper.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
a03xf2c062ca

9. Slide the bearing [2].
[1]
[2]
a03xf2c063ca
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
10. Slide the pulley/Fr1 [1] and /Fr2 [2], and pull out the wire ends of
the lift wire/Fr1 [3] and /Fr2 [4] from each hole of the shaft [5].
Note
The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire /Fr2 [3], must be
inserted into the shaft hole near the frame of the cover
paper tray. The shaft hole near the center of the tray is
used for the shorter wire/Fr2 [3].
When installing the pulley, raise the lift plate slightly to
give slack to the wire, insert the wire ends one at a time
into the shaft hole, and secure them with the pulley/Fr1 [1]
and / Fr2 [2]. The wires can be inserted easily in this way.
When installing the pulley, be sure to fasten the pulley/Fr1
[1] in advance, and then install the pulley/Fr2 [2].
[5]
a03xf2c064ca
G -50

[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[5]
[4]

11. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and then remove the wire cover
[2].
12. Remove the wires /Fr1 [4] and /Fr2 [5] from the pulley [3].
Note
When installing the wires, make sure that the wires are
properly routed inside the wire covers [2] and are not
crossed each other.
[4]
a03xf2c040ca
[3]
13. Pull out the wire ends [4] of the wire/Fr1 [2] and / Fr2 [3] through
the lift plate arm [1].
Note
When pulling out the wire, pull it out carefully so as not to
damage it with sharp metal edges.
[2]
[1]
[4]
a03xf2c041ca
G -51

[1]
a03xf2c065ca
[1]
15. Remove the lift wire/Rr1 [1] and /Rr2 [2] in the same manner as
step 10 to 13.
Note
After completion of installation, check the lift plate to see
if it is horizontal.
[2]
a03xf2c042ca
G -52
4.2.8 Paper lift motor/1 (M2) and /2 (M3)

(1) Procedure
[1]
[5]
[1]
[2]

Rear cover /Lt1 (Refer to G.4.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt)
Rear cover /Lt2 (Refer to G.4.2.3 Rear cover /Lt2)
[2].
3. Remove each of 1 connectors [3].
4. Remove the six screws [4], and remove the paper lift motor assy/1
[5] and /2 [6] toward the rear of the main unit.
[6]
[4]
[3]
a03xf2c043ca
[3]
[1]

[2]
a03xf2c044ca
[2]
[1]
7. Remove the three screws [1] and remove the paper lift motor cover
[2].
a03xf2c045ca
G -53

[2]

8. Remove the two screws [1] and remove the paper lift motor/1 (M2)
[2] and /2 (M3) [2].
[1]
a03xf2c046ca
4.2.9 Vertical conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
[1]
[2]
1. Remove PF from the main body.

2. Remove the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), / 2 (CL8), and /3
(CL9) (Refer to F.7.3.1 Replacing the vertical conveyance clutch/1
(CL7), /2 (CL8), and /3 (CL9))
3. Remove the front door. (Refer to G.4.2.5 Front door)
4. Remove the two screws [1] and remove the vent duct [2].
5. Remove the two screws [3] and remove the cover [4].
[3]
[4]
a03xf2c047ca
[1]
[7]
[1]
6. Loosen the screw [1], and release the filter replacement assy
retaining mechanism stopper [2].
7. Remove the E-ring [3], pull the shaft [4] toward you, and pull out
the shaft [4] through the hole [6] in the connector cover [5].
8. Release the lock [7] of the wire clamp and press it in toward the
rear panel.
9. Remove the two screws [8] and remove the connector cover [5].
[8]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[5]
[6]
a03xf3c048ca
G -54

11. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the vertical conveyance
unit [2].
Note
When installing the vertical conveyance unit [2], be sure
that the two tabs [3] on the vertical conveyance unit are
fitted in the holes [4] in the PF main unit.
[1]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
a03xf2c050ca
4.2.10 Horizontal conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the vertical conveyance unit. (Refer to G.4.2.9 Vertical
conveyance unit)
2. Remove the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and
the pre-registration clutch (CL12). (Refer to F.7.3.2 Replacing the
horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and preregistration clutch (CL12))
3. Disconnect the two connectors [1] and release the wires from the
clamps.
[1]
a03xf2c051ca
G -55

[1]
a03xf2c052ca

6. Loosen the two screws [2] and remove the horizontal conveyance
unit [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
a03xf2c053ca
[2]
[1]

Note
When installing the horizontal conveyance unit, make sure
that the pin [2] is fitted in the notch [1] of the unit.
a03xf2c054ca
4.2.11 The multi feed detection board (MFDBR and S)

Note
When replacing the multi feed detection board /S (MFDBS), be sure to replace the multi feed detection board /R (MFDBR) at the
same time.
When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment when replacing multi feed detection board
(MFDBR, MFDBS). (Refer to I.5.3.12 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PF))
G -56
(1) Procedure
[1]
[7]
[1]
1. Loosen the screw [1], and release the filter replacement assy
retaining mechanism stopper [2].
2. Remove the E-ring [3], pull the shaft [4] toward you, and pull out
the shaft [4] through the hole [6] in the connector cover [5].
3. Release the lock [7] of the wire clamp and press it in toward the
rear panel.
4. Remove the two screws [8] and remove the connector cover [5].
[8]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[6]
a03xf3c048ca
[1]
[2]

6. Open the jam precessing lever PF5 [2], and remove the cover [3].
[3]
a03xf2c056ca
[2]
[1]

8. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the multi feed detection
board /R (MFDBR) [3].
[3]
a03xf2c057ca
G -57
9. Remove the screw [1], slide the cover [2] in the direction of the
arrow, and remove the cover downward.
Note
When installing the cover, be sure to insert the tab [3] on
the cover into the hole of the horizontal conveyance unit
[4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
a03xf3c058ca
[1]
[2]

11. Remove 2 screws [2], then remove the multi feed detection board /
S (MFDBS) [3].
[3]
a03xf2c059ca
G -58
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 5. LU-202
5. LU-202
No.
Section
Parts name
Cover section
Upper door
Clutch cover
Paper feed cover
Right cover
Front cover
Rear cover
Up/down section
Replacing the lift wire
Paper feed section
The paper size VR (VR1)

Note
5.2.2 Upper door

(1) Procedure
[1]
[7]
[2]
1. Open the upper door [1].

2. Remove the hook [3] of spring [2] from the paper feed guide plate
[4].
Note
When attaching the spring, be sure to put its hook through
the hole on the plate from the outside.
3. Remove the 2 screws [5], slide the door [1] in the direction of the
arrow [6], and remove it while tilting it in the direction of the arrow
[7].
[5]
[4] [3] [5] [6]
a03wf2c011ca
5.2.3 The clutch cover

(1) Procedure
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]

2. Remove the 4 screws [2] and then remove the clutch cover [3].
a03wf2c012ca
5.2.4 The paper feed cover

(1) Procedure
[3]
[2]
[1]

2. Remove the 2 screws [1] and the 2 screws [2], and remove the
paper feed cover [3].
a03wf2c013ca
G -59

5.2.5 Right cover

(1) Procedure
[1]

2. Remove the 4 screws [2] and remove the right cover [3].
[3]
[2]
a03wf2c014ca
5.2.6 Front cover

(1) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
a03wf2c015ca
G -60
Open the upper door.

Remove the right cover. (Refer to G.5.2.5 Right cover)
Open the front door [1] and remove the 5 screws [2].
Close the front door [1], and remove the front cover [3].
5.2.7 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
[2]
[1]
[1]

2. Remove the right cover. (Refer to G.5.2.5 Right cover)
3. Remove the 18 screws [1] and remove the rear cover [2] with the
clutch cover [3].
Note
When the HT (option) is installed, remove the 4 screws [4].
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[4]
a03wf2c016ca
5.2.8 Replacing the lift wire

Note
When HT-503 (option) is installed, remove it before operation.
Be sure to press the tray down switch (SW100) while charging to lower the paper lift plate to the bottom before operation.
Remove the lift wire in the order of "G.5.2.8.(1) Removing/installing the paper feed motor assy" "G.5.2.8.(2) Removing/installing
the paper lift drive section" "G.5.2.8.(3) Removing/reinstalling the lift wire". Reinstall the lift wire following the removal steps in
reverse. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
After replacing the lift wire, carry out the paper lift plate horizontal adjustment. (Refer to I.13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal
adjustment)
There are 6 lift wires; /Fr1 [2], /Fr2 [3], /Fr3 [4], /Rr1 [5], /Rr2 [6], and /Rr3 [7]. All of them are wound on the pulleys attached to the
drive shaft [1] as shown. The 4 lift wires; Fr2, Fr3, Rr2, Rr3 are the same in length, and are referred to as drive wire/A which lifts
the paper lift plate [8]. The other 2 lift wires; /Fr1 and /Rr1 are different in length and attached to the spring/Fr [9] and the spring/Rr
[10] as shown. The /Fr1 and /Rr1, referred to as assist wire/C and /D respectively, pull the paper lift plate downward to stabilize the
plate.
Drive wire/A (1450 mm) :lift wire/Fr2 [3], /Fr3 [4], Rr2 [6], /Rr3 [7]
Assist wire/C (1240 mm) :lift wire/Fr1 [2]
Assist wire/D (820mm) :lift wire/Rr1 [5]
Attach the cylindrical-shaped end [11] of the wire to the drive shaft, and attach the other ball shaped end [12] to the metal plate or
the spring.
[8]
[10]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[11]
[4]
FRONT
[9]
[1]
[12]
[3]
a03wf2c017ca
[2]
[1]
Drive shaft
[2]
Lift wire/Fr1
[3]
Lift wire/Fr2
[4]
Lift wire/Fr3
[5]
Lift wire/Rr1
[6]
Lift wire/Rr2
[7]
Lift wire/Rr3
[8]
Paper lift plate
[9]
Spring/Fr
[10]
Spring/Rr
G -61
(1) Removing/installing the paper feed motor assy

[1]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the LU from the main body.

Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.5.2.6 Front cover)
Remove the paper feed clutch (CL101) [1] and pre-registration
clutch (CL102) [2]. (Refer to F.8.1.6 Replacing paper feed clutch
(CL101) /pre-registration clutch (CL102)
6. Remove the 2 screws [3] and remove the duct [4].
[2]
[3]
[4]
a03wf2c018ca
[1]
[2]
[12] [11] [6]
[3]
[4]
7. Remove the wire binding [1] from the saddle [2].

9. Loosen the screw [4] 1 or 2 turns.
Note
Do not loosen the screw [4] too much. Loosening the
screw too much may damage the clearance sponge [5].
10. Push the lower part of the bulkhead plate [6] a few millimeters in
the direction of the arrow [7], then while avoiding actuator [8], push
the tab [9] to remove the lower limit sensor (PS101) [10].
Note
When removing/installing PS101, be careful not to damage
it.
When installing, make sure that the tab [9] is securely
inserted.
[3]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[3]
[10]
11. Slide the upper part of the bulkhead plate [5] in the direction of the
arrow [11], and tilt it until it comes off from the metal plate [12].
[9]
a03wf2c019ca
[6]
[3]
[4]
[6] [8]
12. Remove the 3 connectors [1] and remove the wire binding [2] from
the saddle.
15. Remove the 2 screws [6] and remove the paper feed motor assy
[7] in the direction of the arrow [8].
Note
The screws [6] are shoulder screws. Make sure to properly
attach the screws so that the metal plate is fitted securely.
[5]
[1]
[2] [7]
[5]
a03wf2c020ca
G -62
(2) Removing/installing the paper lift drive section

[2]
[1]
1.
2.
3.
4.
[4]
[3]

Remove the screw [1], and remove the sensor cover [2].
Remove the 5 connectors [3] and remove the wire binding [4].
a03wf2c021ca

6. Remove the 3 screws [3] and the 2 screws [4].
Note
[3]
7. Remove the metal plate [5] and the bearing [6].

Note
When installing the bearing [6], install it from the inner
side of the metal plate [5].
[2]
[1]
[6]
[5] [4]
a03wf2c022ca
[1]
8. Remove the positioning gear [1].

Note
When installing the gear [1] with the paper lift plate
located at its lowest position, align the edge surface of the
actuator [3] of the remaining paper detection gear [2] with
the surface [5] of the remaining paper sensor/4 (PS105)
[4].
Make sure to attach the gear [1] in the correct direction.
[2]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a03wf2c023ca
G -63

[3].
10. Remove the E-ring [4], then remove the gear [5] and the outer/
inner bearings [6].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[6]
[4]
[5]
a03wf2c024ca
[3].
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a03wf2c025ca
[3]
13. Remove the 4 screws [1] and the 2 screws [2], and remove the
paper lift drive section [3].
Note
Be careful not to damage the clearance sponge [4].
[2]
[1]
[4]
a03wf2c026ca
G -64
(3) Removing/reinstalling the lift wire

[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
1. Remove the paper feed motor assy. (Refer to G.5.2.8.(1)

Removing/installing the paper feed motor assy)
2. Remove the paper lift drive section. (Refer to G.5.2.8.(2)
Removing/installing the paper lift drive section)
3. Release the hook [2] of the spring/Rr [1] provided at the back, and
remove the ball shaped wire end [3].
4. Remove the lift wire/Rr1 [7] from the pulley [4], [5] and [6].
5. Remove the E-ring [8] and the pulley [9], and then remove the lift
wire/Rr1 [7].
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[2] [5] [4]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[6]
[9]
a03wf2c027ca
[10]
[1]
6. Check point when reinstalling the lift wire/Rr1

Note
When installing the lift wire/Rr1 [1], insert the cylindricalshaped end of the wire [3] into the hole of the drive shaft
[2], and insert the pulley [5] letting the wire through the
cutout [4], and then wind the wire 7 turns clockwise [6]
(from the panel [7] side to outward [8]) in a single layer.
When installing the lift wire/Rr1, be sure that the lift wire/
Rr2 [9] and /Rr3 [10] are not on either side edge of the
pulley, and the lift wire/Rr1 [1] is wound 1 turn at the panel
side [7].
[7]
[6]
a03wf2c028ca
G -65

[4]
[6] [7]
[1] [2] [3]
[5]
[8]

7. Release the hook [2] of the spring/Fr [1] provided at the front, and
remove the ball shaped wire end [3].
8. Remove the lift wire/Fr1 [6] from the pulley [4] and [5].
9. Remove the E-ring [7] and the pulley [8], and then remove the lift
wire/Fr1 [6].
a03wf2c029ca
[5]
[7]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[10] [9]
[1]
[8] [6]
10. Check point when reinstalling the lift wire/Fr1

Note
When installing the lift wire/Fr1 [1], insert the cylindricalshaped end of the wire [3] into the hole of the drive shaft
[2], and insert the pulley [5] letting the wire through the
cutout [4], and then wind the wire 7 turns
counterclockwise [6] (from the panel [7] side to outward
[8]) in a single layer.
Before Installing the lift wire/Fr1, rotate the shaft
counterclockwise to prevent the lift wire/Fr2 [9] and Fr3
[10] from getting loose.
Be sure to check that the wires are not loosened and are
not on either side edges of the pulleys.
a03wf2c030ca
G -66

[11]
[10]

11. Remove the E-ring [1] and the pulley [2], and then pull out the wire
end [3].
12. Remove the lift wire/Fr2 [4] from the pulley [5], [6] and [7].
Note
When removing the wire from the pulley [5], [6] and [7],
pull the wire out from the convex portion [8] of the wire
cover [9], then slide the wire cover.
[12]
13. Remove the screw [10], and remove the wire protective cover [11].
14. Remove the ball shaped wire end [12] by pulling it straight up, and
remove the lift wire/Fr2 [4].
Note
When removing/installing the lift wire, be careful not to
damage it with the metal plate.
[9]
[5]
[8]
[4] [6]
[5]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a03wf2c031ca
[8]
15. Remove the 2 E-rings [1] and pulley [2], and remove the lift wire/
Fr3 [3].
16. In the same manner as Step 12, remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3] from
the pulley [4], [5] and [6].
17. In the same manner as Steps 13 and 14, remove the screw [7] and
the wire cover [8], and remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3].
[7]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
a03wf2c032ca
G -67

[7]
[8]
[5]
[4]
[1]
18. Remove the E-ring [1] provided at the back and the pulley [2], and
remove the lift wire/Rr2 [3].
19. In the same manner as Step 12, remove the lift wire/Rr2 [3] from
the wire protective cover [8], and remove the lift wire/Rr2 [3].
Note
After installing the lift wire, make sure that the lift wire
does not contact with the metal plates or some other
parts.
[3] [6]
[2]
[7]
a03wf2c033ca
21. Remove the 2 E-rings [1] and pulley [2], and remove the lift wire/
Rr3 [3].
22. In the same manner as Step 12, remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3] from
the wire protective cover [8], and remove the lift wire/Rr3 [3].
Note
After installing the lift wire, make sure that the lift wire
does not contact with the metal plates or some other
parts.
[8]
[5]
Note
After installing, carry out the paper lift plate horizontal
adjustment. (Refer to I.13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal
adjustment)
[6]
[3] [4]
[1] [2]
a03wf2c034ca
G -68
5.2.9 Paper size VR (VR1)

[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
1. Remove the paper from LU and close the upper door.

2. Turn on the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
(SW2) of the main body. After the paper lift plate stops at its
uppermost position (listen to the sound of the paper lift motor to
figure out the stop status), turn off the both switches.
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the guide plate /Fr [1] and 2 screws [4] of
the guide plate /Rr [3], and widen the guide plates /Fr, /Rr to the
max. width.
5. Remove 3 screws [5] of the paper size VR (VR1) and remove the
VR1.
[5]
a03wf2c035ca

[1]
1. Widen the guide plates /Fr [1], /Rr [2] to the max. width.
2. Adjust the engagement of the gears of paper size VR (VR1) and
detection plate /Rr so that the holes [3] and [4] are aligned. Then
tighten the screw [5].
3. After installing, set the paper in LU and check that the paper size is
properly detected.
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
a03wf2c036ca
G -69
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 6. RU-509/HM-102
6. RU-509/HM-102
6.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled
6.1.1 Color density sensor unit
(1) Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited
Mounting screws of the color density detection boards /Y, /M, /C, /K, 2 each
[2]
[1]
[1]
Screws not allowed to be removed
[2]
Color density sensor unit
(2) Reason of prohibition

The color density detection board detects the color density by the light reflected off the paper. When its position is moved, the density read
value changes.
Do not change the mounting position of the color density detection board. Misaligning the position has a risk of detecting the color density
improperly.

No.
1
Section
Cover
Rear cover
3
4
Upper cover
Humidification section (HM-102)
Pump motor (P1)

Conveyance section
8
9
Humidification unit
Water feed tank
6
7
Parts name
Front door

Shutter
Others
RU control board (RUCB)

CAUTION
G -70
6.3.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1], remove the screw [2] and then remove the
wire [3].
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to set so that the wire [3]
becomes level.
[3]
2. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the door support bracket [5]
and the front door [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
The front door [1] is heavy. Support it securely when
removing it.
[2]

Note
When reinstalling, check that the front door [1] closes
securely.
[1]
[4]
[5]
6.3.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
1. Remove the 8 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2].
[1]
G -71
6.3.4 Upper cover

(1) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
[1]
[2]

Remove the upper cover [3].
[3]
6.3.5 Humidification unit

(1) Procedure
3. Pull out the humidification unit [2].
[1]
[2]
G -72

4. Release 4 clamps [1].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
5. Cut off the connection of the pipes [3] and [4] while pressing the
brackets [1] and [2].
Note
Discharge water inside the cut pipe [4] to proper
container, otherwise water leaks when cutting off the
connection of the pipe [4].
[4]
G -73

6.
7.
8.
9.
[1]
Remove 2 connectors [1] from the board.

Remove the relay connector [2].
Remove the screw [3] and then remove the ground.
Remove the screw [4] and then cut off the connecting arm.
[2]
[3]
[4]
10. Remove 4 screws [1] from the right and left rails.
11. Remove the humidification unit [2].
Note
When removing the humidification unit [2], never hold the
parts easily deformed such as Jam clearing lever.
When reinstalling the humidification unit [2], be sure to fit
the groove on the left side of the unit [3] to the rail [4]
before putting the entire unit on the rail.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
G -74

Note
When putting down the humidification unit, put a support
board or something under it not to damage the clamp [1]
or the pipe [2].
[2]
[1]
6.3.6 Water feed tank

(1) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
[5]
Open the front door. (Refer to G.6.3.2 Front door)

Release the wiring harness from all clamps [2].
Note
Be sure to put the removed connector in the water feed
tank tray [3].
5. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the stopper [5].
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
6. Pull out the humidification unit and remove 2 pipes. (Refer to G.

6.3.5 Humidification unit)
7. Pull out the water feed tank. (Refer to F.10.3.2 Replacing the water
feed filter)
Note
Be sure to put the pipe to the left [1] beforehand so that it
does not get stuck inside.
8. Put the humidification unit to the original position.
Note
Be sure to pull out the water feed tank before putting back
the humidification unit so that the pipe does not get stuck
inside.
9. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the water feed tank [3].
[2]
Note
When reinstalling the water feed tank, be sure to set the
positioning [1] hole to the projection of the water feed tank
tray.
[1]
G -75
6.3.7 Pump motor (P1)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the wire and then open the front door at the maximum.
(Refer to G.6.3.2 Front door)
3. Pull out the humidification unit.
4. Remove the pipe [2] in the arrow-marked direction while pressing
the bracket [1].
5. Release the pipe from the clamp [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
6. Pull out the water feed tank.

7. Remove 7 screws [1] to release the clamp.
Note
Adjust the positions of the water feed tank and
humidification unit so that the connecting arm [2] does
not bother when removing the screw [1].
[2]
[1]
[6] [1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
8. Remove the screw [1] to release the clamp.

9. Remove the clamp to release the wiring harness and then
10. Push the bracket [3] to remove the pipe [4].
11. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the pump motor (P1) [6].
[4]
6.3.8 Color density sensor unit

Note
When replacing the color density sensor unit, replace the shutter at the same time.
G -76
(1) Procedure
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the color density sensor
unit [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]

Note
When reinstalling the unit, be sure to set the projection of
the mounting plate in the hole [3] of the unit by pressing
the color sensor unit while pulling the shutter [1] in the
arrow-marked direction [2].
[3]
[2]
[1]
6.3.9 Shutter
(1) Procedure
[3]
[1]
1.
2.
3.
4.
[2]
G -77
Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.6.3.4 Upper cover)

Loosen 2 screws [1] and then remove the stopper [2].
Pull out the shutter [3] in the arrow-marked direction to remove.
6.3.10 Note for replacing the board

(1) Procedure
CAUTION
When the RU control board (RUCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC33).
1. Install EEPROM (IC33) of the old control board [1] to the new
control board [2].
Note
Be sure to install the "A" sections of the EEPROM (IC33)
in the same direction.
After replacing the RU control board (RUCB), conduct
rewriting of the firmware.
(Refer to J. Rewriting of firmware)
[1]
[2]
G -78
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 7. FS-521
7. FS-521
No.
1
Section
Parts name
Cover
Front door
Sub tray
Upper cover /1
Upper cover /2
Left cover /Fr
Rear cover
Stacker section
Stacker unit
Main tray section
Main tray
Lift wire
10
11
Tray up down motor

Stapler section
Handling of the clogged stapler 1
12
Handling of the clogged stapler 2

CAUTION
7.2.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
[2]
1. Open the front door, remove the screw [1] and then remove the
wire [2] of the door.
[1]
a0gyt3c015ca
and the front door [3].
Note
The front door is heavy. Support it securely when
removing it.
[1]
[3]
[2]
fs503fs2046c
G -79
7.2.3 Sub tray

(1) Procedure
1. Rotate the sub tray [1] in the arrowed direction [2] and remove the
ball catch [3] from the ball [4].
2. Press the front and rear sections of the sub tray [1] in the arrowed
direction [5] to make it curve a little, and detach the attaching hole
[6] from the pin [7] to remove the sub tray [1].
[7]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fs503fs2047c
7.2.4 Upper cover /1

(1) Procedure
[2]
[3]
1. Remove the sub tray.

2. Remove 6 screws [1] and the connector [2] and then remove the
upper cover /1 [3].
Note
When the front door support section [4] is hard to remove,
slide the upper cover /1 [3] a little to the front side and
remove it while lifting it up.
[1]
[4]
[1]
a0gyt3c008ca
G -80

(1) Procedure
body.
[2]
[1]
a0gyt3c003ca
3. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and then remove the paper exit
alignment plates /Fr [2] and /Rr [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
a0gyt3c009ca
4. Hold the installation section [1] of the paper exit alignment plate
and move inward.
Note
Do not hold the rack [2] to move.
[1]
5. Remove each 1 screw [3] and then remove each 1 cover [4].
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[2]
a0gyt3c010ca
[1]
[2]
6. Hold the installation section [1] of the paper exit alignment plate
and move outward to fit it to the notch holes [2].
Note
Do not hold the rack [3] to move.
7. Remove 4 screws [4] and then remove upper cover /2 [5].
[4]
[3]
[5] [4]
a0gyt3c011ca
G -81
7.2.6 Left cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
1. Loosen 1 screw [1].
2. Remove 1 screw [2], slant the upper section of the left cover /Fr [3]
and remove it while lifting it up.
[2]
[3]
[1]
fs503fs2050c
7.2.7 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the rear cover [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to hook the rear cover to 2
catches [3] provided at the lower section.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
fs503fs2051c
7.2.8 Stacker unit

CAUTION
Be sure to conduct this operation with 2 people.
(1) Procedure
[2]
[1]

2. Open the front door, remove the screw [1] and then remove the
wire [2] of the door.
a0gyt3c015ca
G -82

4. Remove each cables from 4 wiring harness guides [2].
5. Remove the E-ring [3] and the shaft [4], and cut off the coupling
arm [5].
[1]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a0gyt3c012ca
6. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, provided on the rails in

front and rear, pull the stacker unit further out.
[1]
[1]
fs503fs2061c
G -83

7. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, provided on the rails in front and
rear.
8. Lift up the stacker section [2] at the specified positions [3], release
the hook of the rail [4] from the hole [6] and remove the stacker
section [2].
CAUTION
Be careful of your posture when removing it. Be sure to
conduct this operation with 2 people so that you do not
suffer backache.
Note
When lifting up the stacker section, be sure to hold it at
the specified positions [3]. Holding other positions such
as the roller shaft may damage to these positions.
[3]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]

Note
When reinstalling the stacker section to the rail [4], be
sure to check that the hooks [5] provided at 2 locations in
front and rear, 4 locations in all, get into the attaching
holes [6] securely.
[3]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
fs503fs2041c
[3]
[1]
[2]
10. Check point when reinstalling the stacker section

Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to pull out the rail [1] fully
and fasten it with the stopper screw [2] tentatively. Fix the
rail in the rear with tape [3] so that the rail does not move
and contract. It allows you to conduct the operation
smoothly.
fs503fs2042c
G -84
7.2.9 Main tray

CAUTION
(1) Procedure
body.
[2]
[1]
a0gyt3c003ca

4. Lift up the main tray [2] to unhook the up/down stay [3], and
remove the main tray [2].
[2]
[3]
[1]
fs503fs2017c
7.2.10 Lift wire

Note
The following replacement procedure of the lift wire shows the steps taken on the rear side. The figuration and the winding of
wires on the front side are symmetrical to those on the rear side.
The brackets of the lift wire are stamped with "F" on the front side and "R" on the rear side. Be careful not to confuse one with the
other.
(1) Procedure
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
1. Bring the main tray down to the bottom. (Refer to G.7.2.9 Main
tray)
Main tray (Refer to G.7.2.9 Main tray)
Left cover /Fr (Refer to G.7.2.6 Left cover /Fr)
Front door (Refer to G.7.2.2 Front door)
3. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and then remove the tray stay
covers /Fr [2] and /Rr [3].
fs503fs2038c
G -85

4. Disconnect the connector [1], remove 6 screws [2], and then
remove the gear box [4] together with the tray up down motor [3].
Remove the gear box [4] together with the motor [3].
CAUTION
When the gear box is removed, the main tray falls down.
So, be sure to support the tray by hand when removing
the gear box.
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
fs503fs2018c
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire mounting plate [3]
of the lift wire /Rr [2] from the lift stay [4].
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
fs503fs2019c
6. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the belt tensioner [1].

[1]
[2]
fs503fs2020c
G -86
[5]

7. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear [2] and the lift
pulley /Lw [3] to remove the lift wire /Rr [4].
Note
When removing the gear [2] and the lift pulley /Lw [3], be
careful not to drop the pin [5].
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
fs503fs2021c
[3]
[4]
[2]
8. Tentatively fasten the wire mounting plate [2] of the new lift wire /
Rr [1] to the lift stay [3] with the 2 screws [4].
Note
Be sure to install the lift wires placing the shorter one
below the longer one.
9. Fasten the new lift wire /Rr [1] with the wire end [6] of the lift
pulley /Lw [5] and insert it into the shaft. Rotate the lift pulley /Lw
[5] and wind it 6 turns clockwise from inside to outside around the
lift pulley /Lw [5] with no slack, and then insert the lift pulley /Lw [5]
fully deep into the shaft so that it coincides with the pin [7].
[1]
[5]
[7]
[6]
fs503fs2022c
10. With the lift wire /Rr [1] hooked to the lift pulley /Up [2], wind it 2
turns counterclockwise from inside to outside around the lift
pulley /Lw [3] with no slack and then fasten it with the wire end [4].
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
fs503fs2023c
G -87

11. Insert the pin [1] and the gear [2] into the shaft, and fasten them
with the E-ring [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
fs503fs2024c
[1]
12. Use a tension gauge or a spring balance to pull the belt tensioner
[1] with a specified force A and tighten it up 2 screws [2].
Specified value: A = 2.5kg 0.1kg
[2]
fs503fs2025c
[4] [5]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[5]
fs503fs2026c
13. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire mounting plate [1] on the front
side, press down the lift stay [3] to bring it to a horizontal position,
and tighten up 2 screws [5] of the wire mounting plate [4] on the
rear side and 2 screws [2] on the front side, that is, 4 screws in all.
Note
Check to see if the lift stay [3] is kept in a horizontal
position. If it is on the slant, an unnecessary load may be
applied onto the gear, thus damaging it.
Note
When reinstalling the covers, be sure to rotate the tray up/
down motor counterclockwise as seen from above to raise
the lift stay about 12cm before installing each cover. Since
the lift stay comes down lower than the normal operating
range due to the lift gear box being removed, it is
inevitably necessary to raise the lift stay to install it
without the left cover /Fr and the rear cover hitting against
the up/down stay.
G -88
7.2.11 Tray up down motor

(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the rear cover.

2. Disconnect the connector [1], remove 4 screws [2] and then
remove the tray up down motor [3].
Note
When reinstalling it, make sure that the belt [4] is set
correctly to the gears [5] and [6].
[3]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[5]
fs503fs2027c
7.2.12 Handling of the clogged stapler 1

(1) Procedure
[1]
[3]
[2]
fs503fs2052c
1. Remove the stapler cartridge.

Note
When the stapler cartridge cannot be removed, conduct
the initial operation by turning ON and OFF the sub power
switch (SW2) of the main body.
When the stapler cartridge cannot be removed by the
initial operation, conduct "G.7.2.13 Handling of the
clogged stapler 2 ".
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the release button [1] and open the staple cover [2].
Remove the unnecessary staples [3].
Close the staple cover [2].
7.2.13 Handling of the clogged stapler 2

(1) Procedure
CAUTION
Be careful not to get your hand caught in the opening [1] of the stapler assy. Pressing the staple side [2] and/or the clinch side
[3] cause the opening [1] to close unexpectedly. It is very difficult to open the opening by hand once it has closed. So, be careful
not to close it. When holding the stapler assy, be sure to hold it at both ends of the cam shaft [4].
When conducting the operation, be sure to wear protective gloves.
When conducting the operation, be careful not to get the glove or your hand caught in the gear.
G -89

[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
fs503fs2053c
[3]
1. Remove the stapler assy. (Refer to F.11.4.1 Replacing the stapler

assy)
2. Remove 2 nuts [1] and then remove the clinch protective plates /1
[2] and /2 [3].
[2]
[1]
fs503fs2054c
[3]
[2]
3. Remove the clogged staples.

Note
When reinstalling it, place the holes [2] of 2 clinch metal
fittings [1] one upon the other so that the tip [3] of the
clinch presser is engaged to the depression [4] of the
clinch metal fitting.
[4]
[1]
fs503fs2055c
[5]
[6]
[4]
4. When the clogged staples cannot be removed, rotate the gear [1]
of the stapler motor shaft and the gear [2] that comes into contact
the motor gear to open the opening [5] until the pin [3] at the tip of
the stapling arm comes to the bottom of the slit [4].
CAUTION
Considerable force is required to rotate the gear. Be sure
to wear gloves not to get injured.
Note
The gear can be rotated in the easier direction.
[3]
[2]
[1]
fs503fs2056c
5. Remove the stapler cartridge [6] Remove the unnecessary staples

from the stapler cartridge. (Refer to G.7.2.12 Handling of the
clogged stapler 1)

CAUTION
When the FNS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
G -90

control board [2].
Note
Setting of the SW3 [3] has to be the same as the setting of
the old FNSCB. (Refer to L.2.6.1 FNS control board
(FNSCB))
After replacing the FNS control board (FNSCB), conduct
[1]
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2077c
2. Check point when reinstalling the EEPROM (IC68)

Note
Be sure to install the "A" sections of the EEPROM (IC68) in
the same direction.
fd501fs2078c
G -91
8. FS-531
No.
Section
Parts name
Cover
Upper cover /1
Upper cover /2
Front door
Rear cover
Left cover
Main tray section
Main tray
Up/down wire
Stacker section
Stacker unit
Conveyance section
Paper exit opening unit

CAUTION

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 caps [1].
2. Open the front door [2], remove 5 screws [3] and then remove the
upper cover /1 [4].
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[3]
15jkf2c012na

Note
When the PI (option) is installed, remove it.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover /1. (Refer to G.8.2.2 Upper cover /1)
3. Remove 2 screws [2], pull out the sub tray [3], and then remove
the upper cover /2 [4].
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c013na
G -92
8.2.4 Front door

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [3] of the lower hinge plate [2] and then remove
the front door [1].
[3]
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c034na
8.2.5 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to set the notch [3] of the rear
cover to the projection [4] of the frame.
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
15jkf2c035nb
8.2.6 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c036na
8.2.7 Main tray

CAUTION
G -93
(1) Procedure
2. Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
outlet.
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c014na
3. Remove 2 screws [1] from the main tray.

[2]
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c015na
8.2.8 Replacing the up/down wire

CAUTION
When the tray up down motor is removed, the main tray falls. Therefore, remove the motor while holding the tray with hand.
Note
The following procedure for replacing the wire shows the examples on the rear side. The figuration and the winding of wires on
the front side are symmetrical to those on the rear side.
When installing the up/down wire, be sure to check the engraved marks "F" on the front side and "R" on the rear side of the wire
bracket.
(1) Procedure
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]

2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the reinforcing bracket [2]. Then,
remove the wiring harness from 3 clamps [3] and disconnect the
connector [4].
15jmf2c015na
G -94

[2]
[1]

3. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the up down motor assy [2].
CAUTION
When the up down motor assy is removed, the main tray
falls. Therefore, remove the up down motor assy while
holding the tray with hand.
15jkf2c017na
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire bracket [3] of the
up/down wire [2] on the rear from the up/down stay [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
15jkf2c018na
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c019na
G -95

6. Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], and up/down pulley /Lw [3], and
then remove the up/down wire [4].
Note
When removing the up/down pulley /Lw, be careful not to
drop 2 pins [5].
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c020na
7. Temporarily tighten the wire bracket [1] of a new up/down wire [4]
to the up/down stay [2] with 2 screws [3].
Note
When installing the up/down wire [4], the shorter one [5]
faces down and the longer one [6] faces up.
[6]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[5]
15jkf2c021na
8. Fasten the up/down wire end with the wire end hole inside of the
up/down pulley /Lw [1]. Through the notch [2] and wind 5 turns
from inside to outside with no slack. Then, insert the up/down
pulley /L [1] in the shaft aligning with pin [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
15jkf2c022na
[2]
[1]
[4]
9. Insert the wire winded up/down pulley [1] in the shaft so that the
pin [3] in which the shaft [2] has been inserted fits in the groove of
the pulley.
[3]
15vlf2c009na
G -96

10. Hook the up/down wire on the up/down pulley /Up [1] and wind the
wire 2 turns around the up/down pulley /Lw [2] from inside to
outside with no slack. Then, through the notch of outside and
fasten with the wire end hole [3].
Note
Be sure not to overlap the short up/down wire (first
winded) and the longer up/down wire (latter winded) on
the up/down pulley /Up.
[1]
[3]
[2]
15jkf2c023na
[1]
[2]
[3]
15jkf2c024na
[1] with a specified force A [3] and tighten 2 screws [2].
Specified value [3]: A = 2.5kg 0.25kg
[3]
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c025na
[2]
[1]
13. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire bracket [1] on the front to push
down the up/down stay [3]. Then, tighten 4 screws [5] and [2] on
the rear and front in a horizontal position.
Note
Be sure to check that the up/down stay [3] is in a
horizontal position. When the stay is aslant, the main tray
up down motor (M3) or gear is overloaded and has a risk
of damage.
[3]
[4]
[5]
15jkf2c026na
8.2.9 Stacker unit

CAUTION
Be sure to conduct this operation with more than 2 people.
Be sure to unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
G -97
(1) Procedure
Booklet tray
2. Separate the FS from the main body.
4. Remove 2 connectors (CN22, CN23) [2] from the relay board (RB)
[1] on the rear of the stacker unit.
5. Remove the wiring harness from 3 clamps [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
a0drf2c002ca
6. Remove the C-clip [1] and the shaft [2], and then separate the
coupling arm [3].
[1]
[3]
a0drf2c003ca
Note
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
15vlf2c012na
G -98

8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then lift the stacker unit [2] to remove it
from the guide rail [3].
Note
Be careful of your posture when removing it so that you
do not suffer backache.
[4]
[3]
[5]

Note
When reinstalling the stacker unit [2] to the guide rail [3],
check that the hook [4] is securely fit in the installation
hole [5].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[4]
15vlf2c013na
8.2.10 Paper exit opening unit

(1) Procedure
Upper cover /1 or PI (option) (Refer to G.8.2.2 Upper cover /1)
Upper cover /2 (Refer to G.8.2.3 Upper cover /2)
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the main paper exit
opening cover [2].
[2]
[1]
15vlf2c014na
3. Remove the screw [3] of the paper exit opening open/close link [2]
on the paper exit opening unit [1].
[2]
[3]
[1]
15jkf2c031na
G -99

[4]
[1]
4. Remove 1 camp [1], fixing screw [2] of the earth cord. 2

connectors [3], and 3 screws [4] of the clamp.
[2]
[3]
15jkf2c032na
5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2], 1 each on back and
front, and then remove the paper exit opening unit [3].
[1] [2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
15jkf2c033na

CAUTION
When the FS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC10).
control board [2].
[1]
[2]
a04df2e001ca

Note
the same direction.
After replacing the FS control board (FSCB), conduct rewriting
of the firmware.
fd501fs2078c
G -100
9. FS-612
9.1.1 Screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper
(1) Positions from which removing is prohibited
1 screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper
[1]
15jmf2c017na
[1]
Screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper
Note
For ease of understand, the position of the folding stopper is shown lower than the actual position in the illustration.

Adjust the tilt of the holding stopper on the slide shaft side of the holding stopper. (Refer to I.18.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment) Do not
loosen the screws not allowed to be removed on the holding stopper. Loosening those screws changes the tilt of the holding stopper and
misaligns the adjusting standard of the slide shaft.

No.
1
Section
Cover
Parts name
Upper cover /1
Upper cover /2
Front door
Rear cover
5
6
Left cover
Main tray section
7
8
Up/down wire
Stacker section
9
10
Main tray
Stacker unit cover
Stacker unit
Conveyance section

CAUTION
G -101

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 caps [1].
2. Open the front door [2], remove 5 screws [3] and then remove the
upper cover /1 [4].
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[3]
15jkf2c012na

Note
When the PI (option) is installed, remove it.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover /1. (Refer to G.9.3.2 Upper cover /1)
3. Remove 2 screws [2], pull out the sub tray [3], and then remove
the upper cover /2 [4].
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c013na
9.3.4 Front door

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [3] of the lower hinge plate [2] and then remove
the front door [1].
[3]
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c034na
G -102
9.3.5 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to set the notch [3] of the rear
cover to the projection [4] of the frame.
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
15jkf2c035nb
9.3.6 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c036na
9.3.7 Main tray

CAUTION
(1) Procedure
2. Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
outlet.
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c014na
G -103

3. Remove 2 screws [1] from the main tray.
[2]
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c015na
9.3.8 Replacing the up/down wire

CAUTION
When the tray up down motor is removed, the main tray falls. Therefore, remove the motor while holding the tray with hand.
Note
The following procedure for replacing the wire shows the examples on the rear side. The figuration and the winding of wires on
the front side are symmetrical to those on the rear side.
When installing the up/down wire, be sure to check the engraved marks "F" on the front side and "R" on the rear side of the wire
bracket.
(1) Procedure
[3]
[2]
[2]

2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the reinforcing bracket [2]. Then,
remove the wiring harness from 3 clamps [3] and disconnect the
connector [4].
[4]
[1]
15jmf2c015na
[1]
3. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the up down motor assy [2].
CAUTION
When the up down motor assy is removed, the main tray
falls. Therefore, remove the up down motor assy while
holding the tray with hand.
15jkf2c017na
G -104

4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire bracket [3] of the
up/down wire [2] on the rear from the up/down stay [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
15jkf2c018na
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c019na
6. Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], and up/down pulley /Lw [3], and
then remove the up/down wire [4].
Note
When removing the up/down pulley /Lw, be careful not to
drop 2 pins [5].
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c020na
G -105

7. Temporarily tighten the wire bracket [1] of a new up/down wire [4]
to the up/down stay [2] with 2 screws [3].
Note
When installing the up/down wire [4], the shorter one [5]
faces down and the longer one [6] faces up.
[6]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[5]
15jkf2c021na
8. Fasten the up/down wire end with the wire end hole inside of the
up/down pulley /Lw [1]. Through the notch [2] and wind 5 turns
from inside to outside with no slack. Then, insert the up/down
pulley /L [1] in the shaft aligning with pin [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
15jkf2c022na
[2]
[1]
[4]
9. Insert the wire winded up/down pulley [1] in the shaft so that the
pin [3] in which the shaft [2] has been inserted fits in the groove of
the pulley.
[3]
15vlf2c009na
10. Hook the up/down wire on the up/down pulley /Up [1] and wind the
wire 2 turns around the up/down pulley /Lw [2] from inside to
outside with no slack. Then, through the notch of outside and
fasten with the wire end hole [3].
Note
Be sure not to overlap the short up/down wire (first
winded) and the longer up/down wire (latter winded) on
the up/down pulley /Up.
[1]
[3]
[2]
15jkf2c023na
G -106

[1]
[2]
[3]
15jkf2c024na
[1] with a specified force A [3] and tighten 2 screws [2].
Specified value [3]: A = 2.5kg 0.25kg
[3]
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c025na
[2]
[1]
13. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire bracket [1] on the front to push
down the up/down stay [3]. Then, tighten 4 screws [5] and [2] on
the rear and front in a horizontal position.
Note
Be sure to check that the up/down stay [3] is in a
horizontal position. When the stay is aslant, the main tray
up down motor (M3) or gear is overloaded and has a risk
of damage.
[3]
[4]
[5]
15jkf2c026na
9.3.9 Stacker unit cover

(1) Procedure
[2]
[1]

2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the stacker unit cover [2].
15jmf2c016na
9.3.10 Stacker unit

CAUTION
Be sure to conduct this operation with more than 2 people.
G -107
Be sure to unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
(1) Procedure
[1]

Booklet tray
2. Separate the FS from the main body.
4. Remove 3 connectors (CN22, CN23, CN24) [1] from the relay
board (RB) [2] on the rear of the stacker unit.
5. Remove the wiring harness from 4 clamps [3].
[2]
[3]
a04df2c001ca
[2]
6. Remove the C-clip [1] and the shaft [2], and then separate the
coupling arm [3].
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c028na
Note
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c029na
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then lift the stacker unit [2] to remove it
from the guide rail [3].
Note
Be careful of your posture when removing it so that you
do not suffer backache.
[4]
[3]
[5]

Note
When reinstalling the stacker unit [2] to the guide rail [3],
check that the hook [4] is securely fit in the installation
hole [5].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
15jkf2c030na
G -108
9.3.11 Paper exit opening unit

(1) Procedure
Upper cover /1 or PI (option) (Refer to G.9.3.2 Upper cover /1)
Upper cover /2 (Refer to G.9.3.3 Upper cover /2)
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the main paper exit
opening cover [2].
[2]
[1]
15vlf2c014na
3. Remove the screw [3] of the paper exit opening open/close link [2]
on the paper exit opening unit [1].
[2]
[3]
[1]
15jkf2c031na
[4]
[1]
4. Remove 1 camp [1], fixing screw [2] of the earth cord. 2

connectors [3], and 3 screws [4] of the clamp.
[2]
[3]
15jkf2c032na
5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2], 1 each on back and
front, and then remove the paper exit opening unit [3].
[1] [2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
15jkf2c033na

CAUTION
When the FS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC10).
G -109

control board [2].
[1]
[2]
a04df2e001ca

Note
the same direction.
After replacing the FS control board (FSCB), conduct rewriting
of the firmware.
fd501fs2078c
G -110
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 10. PK-512/513
10. PK-512/513
10.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and adjusted
10.1.1 Punch unit
(1) Parts not allowed to be removed
Never loosen the following screws.
[1]
[2]
15kjf2c001na
[1]
Punch unit
[2]
Screw not allowed to be removed
(2) Reason
The specified performance cannot be retained if the screw is loosened.
10.2 Disassembly/reassembly parts list

No.
1
Section
Part name
Punch unit
Punch unit
10.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure

CAUTION
10.3.2 Punch unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the punch scraps box [1].
[1]
15kjf2c002na
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the punch drive board
cover [1].
[1]
[2]
15kjf2c003na
G -111

[3]
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 10. PK-512/513

3. Remove the 2 clamps [1].
4. Disconnect 2 connectors [3] and the relay connector [4] from the
punch drive board (PDB) [2].
[4]
[1]
[2]
15kjf2c004nb
5. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the punch unit cover [1].
[1]
[2]
15kjf2c005na
[3]

7. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the punch unit [3] from FS.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
15kjf2c006na
[1]
8. Reinstall the above parts by following the removal steps in reverse.

Note
When reinstalling the punch drive board (PDB), attach the
board supports of the punch drive board (PDB) at 4
positions [1] in the figure.
15kjf2c007na
G -112
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 11. PI-502
11. PI-502
No.
Section
Parts name
Cover
Upper cover
Rear cover
Operation panel cover

CAUTION
11.2.2 Upper cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the cap [2] of the upper cover [1].
2. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove upper cover [1].
[3]
[2]
[1]
15jff2c009na
11.2.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
[3]
[4]
Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.11.2.2 Upper cover)

Remove the screw [1] and then remove the connector cover [2].
Remove 3 screws [3] and then remove the rear cover [4].
[1]
[2]
[3]
15jff2c010na
11.2.4 Operation panel cover

(1) Procedure
[2]
[3]

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the relay connector [2], and then remove
the operation panel assy [3].
[1]
15jff2c011na
G -113
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 12. LS-505
12. LS-505
No.
Section
Parts name
Cover
Cover
Conveyance section
Stacker tray up/down wire

CAUTION
12.2.2 Cover
(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover /Up [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[5]
ls502fs2034c
G -114

[1]

4. Remove 5 screws [1] and move the front cover /Up [2] to the upper
side.
5. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the front cover /Up [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
ls502fs2035c
6. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 3 knobs [2].
8. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the front cover /Lw [5].
[3]
[5]
[4]
[4]
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2036c
9. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove upper cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
ls502fs2037c
G -115

11. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the front door [1].
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2038c
12.2.3 Replacing the stacker tray up/down wire

Note
When conducting this operation, be sure to set the stacker tray at the home position (the upper most position) in advance.
(1) Procedure
[3]
[1]
[2]
1.
2.
3.
4.
[4]
[5]
ls502fs2001c
[5]
[4]
[1]
5. Check point when reinstalling the stacker tray up down motor (M1)
Note
When reinstalling the stacker tray up down motor (M1), be
sure to check that the belt [2] has been engaged with the
gear [1], and then engage it with the gear [3] before
fastening the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [4].
When the belt [2] is not horizontally attached between the
gear [1] and the gear [3], make adjustments by rotating the
encoder [5] counterclockwise.
[3]
[2]
Remove the rear covers /Up and /Lw. (Refer to G.12.2.2 Cover)
Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the sensor mounting plate [3].
Remove 4 screws [4] and remove the stacker tray up down motor
(M1) [5].
ls502fs2002c
G -116
[2]

6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the motor mounting plate [3]
from the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [2].
[3]
[1]
ls502fs2003c
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
7. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove the pulley covers [2],
1 each.
ls501f2c001a
8. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove the pulley covers [2],
1 each.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
ls501f2c002a
G -117

[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5]

9. Remove the screw [1] and remove the wire retaining bracket [2].
10. Remove 4 screws [3] and remove the pulley assy [4].
11. Remove the hexagon socket screw [6] and remove the tip [7] of
the wire /1 [5].
Note
On the paper exit side, loosen 4 screws [3], bring down
the pulley assy [4] and release the tension of the wire /2
[5] before starting the operation.
When reinstalling it, the positions of the pulley assy on
the paper feed side and the paper exit side become
important. Be sure to check the marked position in
advance of the pulley assy on the paper exit side.
[7]
[6]
ls501f2c003a
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
12. Release the winding of the wire /1 [2] from the pulley [1].
13. Remove the E-ring [3] and then remove the pulley [1] from the
shaft [4].
ls502fs2027c
14. Remove the wire retaining bracket [2] from the wire /1 [1].
Note
When installing the wire retaining bracket [2], install it to
the wire /1 [1] so that the bracket comes to the rear side.
[1]
[2]
ls501f2c004a
[1]
[2]
15. Remove the wire /1 [2] from the pulley [1].

16. Reinstall a new wire /1 following the preceding steps 6 to 12 in
reverse.
ls502fs2028c
G -118
17. Check point 1 when reinstalling the wire

Note
When 2 wires at both sides are removed at the same time,
the stacker tray comes down. So, be sure to replace the
wires one at a time (The remaining wire holds the stacker
tray in place.)
When attaching the pulley to the shaft, be sure to align the
groove [1] of the pulley with the pin [2] that has been
inserted into the shaft.
Be sure to set up it with the bead set portion [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
ls502fs2029c

Note
When winding the wire around the pulley, be sure to wind
it 8 turns [3] so that the direction of drawing-out [1] comes
to the rear panel side [2].
The direction of drawing-out of the wire /1 is symmetrical
to that of the wire /2.
[2]
[3]
ls502fs2030c

Note
When fixing the pulley assy [1] on the paper exit side, be
sure to fix it at the same position as it was removed from.
20. Replace the wire /2 with a new one following the preceding steps 6
to 13.
21. Reinstall other parts following the steps 1 to 6 in reverse.
[1]
ls501f2c005a
12.2.4 Caution when setting models using toggle SW

CAUTION
When using C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, be sure to set the toggle switch on the
connector connection of the left side of the LS to SYS2 [1].
[1]
G -119
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 13. FD-503
13. FD-503
CAUTION
13.1.2 Folding/conveyance switching position adjustment section

Note
Be sure to avoid removing or loosening the screws [1], [2], and [3] of the folding/conveyance switching position adjustment
section provided on the front of the folding conveyance unit. The adjustment scale marked on the folding conveyance frame are
used in the factory.
[1]
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2079c

No.
1
Section
Cover section
Parts name
Upper cover /Fr + PI cover /Fr
Upper cover /Rr + PI cover /Rr
Upper door
Rear cover
Left cover /Fr
Left cover /Rr
Paper exit stopper cover
Right cover
Left cover /Up
10
Mount cover
11
12
Front door
Folding conveyance section
2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)
13
3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)
14
3rd folding roller
15
16
Main tray section
Main tray up/down wire
17
PI section
Multi feed detection board /1, /2
G -120

13.3.1 Upper cover /Fr + PI cover /Fr
(1) Procedure
1. Open the upper door [1] and the front door [2].
2. Remove 3 screws [3], pull out the PI cover /Fr [5] to the front side
while raising it together with the upper cover /Fr [4].
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2029c
3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the PI cover /Fr [3]
together with the upper cover /Fr [2].
[1]
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2030c
13.3.2 Upper cover /Rr + PI cover /Rr

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 3 screws [2] and pull out the PI cover /Rr [4] to the rear
side while raising it together with the upper cover /Rr [3].
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2031c
G -121
13.3.3 Upper door

(1) Procedure
[1]
[5]
1. Remove the upper cover /Fr, the PI cover /Fr, the upper cover /Rr
and the PI cover /Rr.
2. Close the upper door [1].
3. Remove the E-ring [2] and then remove the bearing [4] of the
upper door open/close shaft [3].
4. With the bearing [5] shifted to the front side, remove the upper
door [1].
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2032c
13.3.4 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2033c
13.3.5 Left cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the left cover /Fr [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2034c
G -122
13.3.6 Left cover /Rr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the left cover /Rr [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2035c
13.3.7 Paper exit stopper cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the paper exit stopper
cover [2].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2036c
13.3.8 Right cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the right cover [2].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2037c
G -123
13.3.9 Left cover /Up

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover /Fr, the PI cover /Fr, the upper cover /Rr
and the PI cover /Rr.
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the left cover /Up [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2038c
13.3.10 Mount cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 3 screws [2] of the handle and then remove the handle.
3. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the mount cover [4].
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2039c
13.3.11 Front door

Note
When removing the front door, be sure to support it so that it does not fall down.
G -124
(1) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the front door [1].

Remove the screws [2].
Remove the mount cover [3].
Remove 3 screws [4] while pushing up the front door so that it
does not fall down, and then remove the support plate [5].
5. Remove the front door [1].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
fd501fs2040c
13.3.12 Cleaning the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
13.3.11 Front door)
2. Open the guide plates [1] and [2].
3. Clean the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2041c
G -125
13.3.13 Cleaning the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)

(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
13.3.11 Front door)
2. Remove the screw [1] and turn over the sensor mounting plate [2].
[2]
fd501fs2042c
3. Clean the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) [1].

[1]
fd501fs2043c
13.3.14 Cleaning the 3rd folding roller

(1) Procedure
[2]
[1]
[5]
1. Open the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
13.3.11 Front door)
2. Remove the stand cover. (Refer to G.13.3.10 Mount cover)
3. The 2 springs [2] are hooked to the shaft [1]. Remove them from
the shaft [1].
4. Remove the screw [3] and then remove 2 springs [2], the support
plate [4] and the guide plate [5].
[4]
[3]
fd501fs2044c
G -126

5. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the guide plate [2].
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2045c
6. Clean the 3rd folding roller [1].
[1]
fd501fs2046c
13.3.15 Folding conveyance section

CAUTION
The folding conveyance section is heavy. Be sure to conduct this operation with 2 people.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and the rear cover.
2. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harnesses
from the 7 wiring harness guides [3] of the coupling arm /Rr [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
fd501fs2047c
[1]
[3]
[4]

4. Remove the shaft [2] and separate the coupling arm /Fr [3] and the
coupling arm /Rr [4].
[2]
fd501fs2048c
G -127
5. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, from the left and right rails
and pull further out the folding conveyance section.
[1]
[1]
fd501fs2049c
6. Remove screws [1], 3 each, from the left and right rails.
[1]
[1]
fd501fs2050c
G -128
[3]
[1]

7. Hold the folding conveyance section [3] at the specified places [1]
and [2] and remove it while lifting it up.
CAUTION
Be careful of your posture when removing it. Be sure to
conduct this operation with 2 people so that you do not
suffer backache.
Note
When lifting up the folding conveyance section, be sure to
hold the shaft at the places [1] and [2]. Holding it at other
places such as the roller shaft or the guide plate may
cause deformation to these places.
[2]
fd501fs2051c
[1]
[2]
8. Stand the folding conveyance section [1] upright when it has been
removed, or lay it down on the right-side [2].
Note
Be careful not to lay it with the left side [3] down. The
guide plate may get deformed.
[3]
fd501fs2052c
[2]
[1]
9. Check point when reinstalling the folding conveyance section

Note
When installing the folding conveyance section, make
sure that all 4 hooks [1] of the rails have engaged the
attaching holes [2] of the folding conveyance section.
The top should be attached by pushing it to the right to
engage the upper rail and the bottom pushed to the left to
engage the lower rail.
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2053c
G -129
[2]
[1]
[3]

Note
When installing the folding conveyance section, pull out
the rail further than the length of the stopper [1]. Use the
stopper screw [2] to fasten it tentatively at its fully pulledout position and fix the rail on the opposite side with tape
[3]. It prevents the rail from moving to inside for an easy
and smooth operation.
fd501fs2054c
13.3.16 Main tray up/down wire

(1) Procedure
[1]
[2]
1. Check point when removing/reinstalling the main tray up/down

wire.
Note
The following procedure for replacing the up/down wire
shows the examples on the rear side. The figuration and
the winding of wires on the front side are symmetrical to
those on the rear side.
There are 2 types of up/down wires provided, one [1] on
the front side and the other [3] on the rear side. Be sure to
use the wire with the correct wire mounting plate direction
when installing it. The direction of the wire mounting plate
distinguished between these 2 wires when the shorter
wire [2] is placed under the longer wire.
Left cover /Fr (Refer to G.13.3.5 Left cover /Fr)
Left cover /Rr (Refer to G.13.3.6 Left cover /Rr)
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2056c
G -130
[3]
[1]

3. Remove 2 connectors [1] and 5 screws [2], and then remove the
gear box [4] together with the up down motor (M11) [3].
CAUTION
When the gear box is removed, the up/down stay may fall
down. So, when removing the gear box, be sure to
support the stay with your hands.
[4]
[2]
fd501fs2057c
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire mounting plate [3]
of the up/down wire /Rr [2] from the up/down stay [4].
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
fd501fs2058c
G -131

[5]
[5]
[4]
[6]

5. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear [3] together with
the 2 bearings [2].
6. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the gear [6] together with
the 2 bearings [5].
[9].
Note
When removing the gear [8], be careful not to drop the pin
[9].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[7]
[9]
[8]
fd501fs2059c
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2060c
G -132

9. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the up/down pulley /RrLw
[2] and the pin [3].
Note
When removing the up/down pulley /RrLw [2], be careful
not to drop the pin [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2061c
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
10. Temporarily tighten the wire mounting plate [2] of a new up/down
wire /Rr [1] to the up/down stay [3] with 2 screws [4].
Note
Install the up/down wires placing the shorter wire below
the longer one with the wire supporting part of the
mounting plate outside.
There are 2 types of up/down wires, one for the front side
and the other for the rear side, but these 2 wires are
different in the direction of the wire mounting plates. Be
sure to use a wire that fits in with the direction of a wire
mounting plate.
fd501fs2062c
[2]
[1]
11. Fasten the new up/down wire /Rr [1] with the wire end [3] provided
on the inside of the up/down pulley /RrLw [2] and insert it into the
shaft [6]. Rotate the up/down pulley /RrLw [2] and wind it 5.5 turns
clockwise from inside to outside around the up/down pulley with no
slack, and then insert the up/down pulley /RrLw [2] fully onto the
shaft so that it coincides with the pin [4] and fasten it with the Ering [5]. If the angle does not coincide with the pin [4], move up
and down the front side of the up/down tray to change the angle of
the shaft [6].
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
fd501fs2063c
G -133

12. Hook up the up/down wire /Rr [1] onto the up/down pulley /RrUp
[3] through the relay pulley /Rr [2].
[3]
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2064c
13. Wind the up/down wire /Rr [1] 2 turns counterclockwise from inside
to outside around the up/down pulley /RrLw [2] with no slack and
fasten it with the wire end [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2065c
14. The route along which the up/down wire /Rr passes
The route along which the up/down wire /Rr passes is, on the
whole, as shown in the drawing left.
fd501fs2066c
G -134

15. Use a tension gauge or spring balance to pull up the wire tensioner
[1] upward with a designated force "A," and fasten it with the 3
screws [2].
Specified value: A = 2.5kg 0.25kg
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2067c
16. Reinstall the 3 gears [1] following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
fd501fs2068c
[4]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[2]
17. With the up/down stay [1] held in a horizontal position, tighten the
2 screws [3] of the wire mounting plate [2].
Note
Move the up/down stay up and down and check to see if it
moves smoothly. If it does not move smoothly, adjust it
again so that it becomes horizontal.
Check the up/down wire [4] if it gets behind the actuator
plate [5]. If it gets behind the douser, an unnecessary load
is applied to the up/down wire [4] when the up/down stay
[1] goes up.
fd501fs2069c
13.3.17 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2)

Note
When replacing the multi-feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1), be sure to replace the multi-feed detection board /2 (MFDB/2) at the
same time.
When the multi-feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing multi-feed detection board (PI).
(Refer to I.5.7.5 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PI))
G -135
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the multi-feed detection
board /1 (MFDB/1) cover [2].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2070c

board /1 (MFDB/1) [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2071c
4. Open the front door and then open the conveyance guide plate /2
[1] in the upper right direction.
[1]
fd501fs2072c

6. Remove the wiring harness of the multi-feed detection board /1
(MFDB/1) from the wiring harness guide [2].
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2073c
G -136
7. Turn around the conveyance guide plate /2 assy [1] inside the
machine and pull it to the outside.
board /2 cover [3].
Note
When turning it around, or when disassembling or
reassembling it, be careful not to damage the wiring
harness.
[2]
[1]
[3]
fd501fs2074c

board /2 (MFDB/2) [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
a0h0t3c007ca
(2) Note for installing the multi-feed detection boards /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2)
The multi-feed detection boards /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) are
installed on the same type board. Be careful not to confuse one
with the other when installing them.
Be sure to confirm the marking on the board when installing it.
Multi-feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) [1]: 15AG
Multi-feed detection board /2 (MFDB/2) [2]: 56UA
The connector shape is different for the multi-feed detection
boards /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2). So, even if it is installed, the
connector cannot be connected.
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2076c

Note
When the FD control board (FDCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
G -137

control board [2].
Note
Be sure to set the SW3 [3] same as the old FDCB. (Refer to
L.2.12.1 FD control board (FDCB))
[1]
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2077c

Note
the same direction.
After replacing the FD control board (FDCB), conduct rewriting
of the firmware.
fd501fs2078c
G -138
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 14. SD-506
14. SD-506
14.1.1 Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50), Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
1 fixing screw of the mounting plate on each trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) and trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
a0h2t3c061ca
[1]
Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed
[2]
Mounting plate
[3]
Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
[4]
[5]
Mounting plate
[6]
Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50)

The trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) detects the home position of the trimmer blade. Once the home position is out of alignment, the
trimmer blade gets out from the trimmer press plate. It prevents paper from entering to the trimmer section and causes the trimming error
or damages the trimmer blade retaining plate. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS50.
The trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) detects the upper limit of the trimmer blade after the completion of the trimming. Once the
upper limit detection is out of alignment, the paper fails to be trimmed because the trimmer blade stops before the completion or the
trimmer blade and the trimmer board get damaged because the trimmer blade cuts in the trimmer board deeply. Therefore, be sure not to
change the installation position of PS51.
14.1.2 Trimmer completion sensor (PS62)

1 fixing screw of the trimmer completion sensor (PS62) mounting plate
[3]
[2]
[1]
a0h2t3c062ca
[1]
Mounting plate
[2]
[3]
Trimmer completion sensor (PS62)

The trimmer completion sensor (PS62) detects the completion of the trimming. Once the trimmer completion timing is out of alignment, the
paper fails to be trimmed or the trimmer blade and the trimmer board get damaged because the trimmer blade cuts in the trimmer board
deeply. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS50.
14.1.3 Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66)

1 fixing screw of the wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) mounting plate
G -139
(a) Previous trimmer unit
[3]
[2]
[1]
a0h2t3c063ca
[1]
Mounting plate
[2]
[3]
Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66)
(b) New trimmer unit
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Mounting plate

The wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) detects the slack of the winding wire on the trimmer blade. Once the detection position is out of
alignment, the wire is removed from the winding pulley and damages the trimmer unit. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation
position of PS66.
14.1.4 Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52), Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
1 fixing screw of the trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) mounting plate
1 fixing screw of the trimmer press home sensor (PS53) actuator
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[1]
a0h2t3c064ca
[1]
[2]
Actuator
[3]
Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
[4]
Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)
G -140

[5]
[6]
Mounting plate

The trimmer press home sensor (PS53) detects the home position of the trimmer press plate. Once the home position is out of alignment,
the opening is not opened enough for the paper. It causes the trimming error by preventing paper from entering to the trimming section.
Therefore, be sure not to change the position of the actuator of PS53.
The trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) detects the upper limit of the trimmer press. Once the upper limit position is out of alignment,
the opening is not opened enough for the paper. It causes the trimming error by preventing paper from entering to the trimming section, or
the opening is not enough for replacing the trimmer blade. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS52.
14.1.5 Trimmer press brake

1 gap adjusting screw of the trimmer press brake
[2]
[1]
[1]
a0h2t3c065ca
Trimmer press brake
[2]

The trimmer press brake pushes the timing belt and prevents the trimmer press motor (M32) from rotating too much which caused by the
inertia of the trimmer press board. Once the gap between the trimmer press brake and the timing belt changes, it damages the timing belt
or disables the brake. Therefore, be sure not to adjust the gap adjusting screw of the trimmer press brake.
14.1.6 Fixing screw of the trimmer press timing belt

All screws which fix the driving system of the trimmer press
[1]
[2]
a0h2t3c066ca
[1]
Screws not allowed to be adjusted/removed (all screws

shown in the picture)
[2]
Screws allowed to be removed

The paper holding screw on right and left drives the trimmer press plate through the timing belt. Once the part such as gear of the driving
system is removed, the parallelism of the trimmer press plate is not guaranteed because of the belt tooth skipping. Therefore, be sure not
to remove the attaching screw of the cover which fixes the driving system and the bearing fixing screw.

No.
1
Section
Cover
Parts name
Rear cover /Lt
Rear cover /Rt
Left cover
Upper cover /Fr
G -141
Upper cover /Rr3
Sub tray cover
Front door /Lt
Front door /Rt
Folding section
Folding unit

CAUTION
14.3.2 Rear cover /Lt

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Lt [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
15anf2c002na
14.3.3 Rear cover /Rt

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Rt [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
15anf2c003na
G -142
14.3.4 Left cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 7 screws [1], slide the bottom of the left cover [2] to the
outside, and remove it to the bottom.
[1]
[2]
[1]
15anf2c004na
14.3.5 Upper cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
[3]
1. Open the front doors /Rt and /Lt.

2. Remove the 5 screws [1] on the front, 2 screws [2], 1 screw [3] on
the left, and 3 screws [4] under the cover.
3. Loosen a screw [5].
4. Lift up and remove the upper cover /Fr [6].
Note
When removing the upper cover /Fr [6], pull the screw [5]
to the front to so that the tip of the screw does not catch
the upper cover /Fr [6].
[2]
[1]

[6]
[4]
[5]
15anf2c005nb
G -143
14.3.6 Upper cover /Rr3

(1) Procedure
[1]
1.
2.
3.
4.
[2]
Remove 2 screw caps [1] and then remove 2 screws [2].
Loosen the screw [4] and then remove the upper cover /Rr3 [5].
Note
When removing the upper cover /Rr3 [5], pull the screw [4]
to the front so that the tip of the screw does not catch the
upper cover /Rr3 [5].
[5]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[3]
15anf2c006na
14.3.7 Sub tray cover

(1) Procedure
[2]
[3]
[3] [1]
1. Remove the upper cover /Fr. (Refer to G.14.3.5 Upper cover /Fr)
2. Remove the upper cover /Rr3. (Refer to G.14.3.6 Upper cover /
Rr3)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and 4 screws [2], and then remove the sub
tray cover [3].
Note
When reinstalling the sub tray cover [3], pull the screw [4]
to the outside.
[2]
[4]
[1]
15anf2c007na
G -144
14.3.8 Front door /Lt

(1) Procedure
[6]
[5]
1. Open the front door /Lt [1].

2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the front door stopper /Lt
[3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4] and remove the fulcrum [6] by sliding the
hinge [5] upward, and then remove the front door /Lt [1].
Note
Support the front door /Lt [1] with your hand so that it
does not fall down when removing the screw [4].
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
15anf2c008na
14.3.9 Front door /Rt

(1) Procedure
[5]
[4]
[6]
1. Open the front door /Rt [1].

2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the front door stopper /Rt
[3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], remove the fulcrum [6] by sliding the hinge
[5] upward, and then remove the front door /Rt [1].
Note
Support the front door /Rt [1] with your hand so that it
does not fall down when removing the screw [4].
[2]
[3]
[1]
15anf2c009na
G -145
14.3.10 Folding unit

CAUTION
Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the folding unit is heavy.
(1) Procedure
[5]
[4]
1. Remove the front door /Rt. (Refer to G.14.3.9 Front door /Rt)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and 2 clamps [2] from the rear of the folding
unit.
Note
Be sure not to let the clamps [2] fall down.
[2]
4. Remove the screw [3] and the ground [4].

6. Remove the clamp and fall drop the wiring harness [7] from the
hole [6] on the wiring harness guide.
[3]
[1]
[6]
[7]
[1]
15anf2c010na
7. Pull out the folding unit.

8. Pull out the folding unit. Remove 2 screws [1], separate the notch
[2] from the hole [3] and remove the lower cover /2 [4].
9. Loosen the screw [5], remove the 2 screws [6] and remove the
lower cover /1 [7].
10. Remove 2 screws [8], separate the notch [10] from the shaft [9]
and remove the lower cover /3 [11].
[8] [11]
[2] [9] [10] [3]
[1]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[5]
15anf2c011na
G -146

11. Check point when reinstalling the lower cover /3.
Note
Install the lower cover /3 [11] between 2 pins [2] of the
shaft [1]. If it is installed at an improper position, other
parts are damaged in storing the folding unit.
[1]
[2]
15anf2c071na
12. Remove 4 screws [1], and then lift up and remove the folding unit
[2] with 2 people.
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to align the positioning pin [3]
with the hole.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
15anf2c012na
[7]
[5]
[8]
[6]
Note
When holding the folding unit, be sure to hold the shafts
[4] at front and rear or the upper top of the side plate [5].
Never hold the jam release lever [6] or the handle [7]. They
get damaged.
When placing the folding unit, place it on the table to
avoid the guide plate [8] on the front being contacted with
the floor because it is projected from the bottom of the
unit.
[4]
15anf2c013na
G -147

Note
When the SD control board (SDCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
1. Remove the EEPROM (IC68) from the old SD control board (SDCB)
[1] and install it into the new SD control board (SDCB) [2].
Note
the same direction.
Be sure to set the SW3 [3] as the same as the settings of
the old SDCB. (Refer to L.2.13.1 SD control board (SDCB))
After replacing the SD control board (SDCB), conduct
[1]
[2]
[3]
a0g6f3c053ca
G -148
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 15. PB-503
15. PB-503
No.
1
Section
Cover
Parts name
Front door
Front cover
Booklet door
Rear cover /Rt
Rear cover /Lt
Left cover
Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr
Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr
Pellet supply cover
10
SC cover /Fr
11
SC cover /Up
12
Upper cover /FrRt
13
Upper cover /FrLt
14
Upper cover /RrRt
15
Upper cover /RrLt
16
Upper cover /Md
17
Others
Deodorant unit
18
Pellet supply section
Pellet supply unit
19
Glue tank section
Glue tank unit
20
SC section
SC unit
21
Clamp section
Clamp unit
22
Others
PB left unit
23
Book stock section
Book lift wire
24
Cart wire
25
Conveyance section
Conveyance unit /Lw
26
Relay conveyance unit
27
Cover paper supply section
Cover paper tray
28
Cover paper lift wire

CAUTION
G -149
15.2.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]

2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the wire [3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the front door [1] from the
lower pin [6] with the mounting bracket [5] attaching to the front
door [1].
Note
When reinstalling the wire [3], tighten the screw at the
position in the picture. (In order to prevent the wire from
contacting with the tab.)
[1]
[6]
a15xt3c018ca
G -150
15.2.3 Front cover

(1) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the front door. (Refer to G.15.2.2 Front door)

Lift the lever [1] and pull out the cover paper tray.
Release the notches [3] at 2 positions from the screws [4] and pull
out the projection [5] from the hole [6], and then remove the front
cover [7].
[6]
[5]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[1]
a15xt3c019ca
G -151
15.2.4 Booklet door

(1) Procedure
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[2]
1. Open the booklet door [1].

2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the wire [3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the booklet door [1] from
the lower pin [6] with the mounting bracket [5] attaching to the
booklet door [1].
4. Remove the mounting bracket [5] from the booklet door [1].
a15xt3c020ca
15.2.5 Rear cover /Rt

(1) Procedure
[1]
[2]
1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.15.2.18 Deodorant unit)

2. Remove 9 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Rt [2].
Note
When installing the rear cover, make sure to attach the
metal plates [3] to the bottom of the rear cover.
[3]
a15xt3c021ca
G -152
15.2.6 Rear cover /Lt

(1) Procedure
[3]

2. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Lt [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to set it with the projection [3]
put into the notch of the upper cover /RrLt [4], and with its
bottom [5] put on the metal frame [6].
[4]

[1]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[6]
a15xt3c022ca
15.2.7 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[2]
[1]
[3]

a15xt3c023ca
G -153
15.2.8 Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
[2]
[1]
1. Open the relay conveyance door.

2. Remove 2 screws[1] and remove the relay conveyance gear
cover /Fr [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put the claw of the plate in
the hole of the relay conveyance gear cover /Fr.
a15xt3c024ca
15.2.9 Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the relay conveyance gear
cover /Rr [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put it in the hole of the
relay conveyance gear cover /Rr.
[2]
[1]
a15xt3c025ca
15.2.10 Pellet supply cover

(1) Procedure
RrRt)
3. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover /Rr. (Refer to G.15.2.9
Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr)
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the magnet catch /Rr [2].
[1]
[2]
a15xt3c026ca
G -154

7. Open the pellet supply door [3]. Remove the pellet supply cover [5]
in the arrow-marked direction [6] carefully so as not to damage the
wire harness [4].
Note
When removing/installing the glue supply cover, be
careful not to cut or damage the wire binding [4].
[4]
[5]
[6] [3]
[2]
[1]
a15xt3c027ca
15.2.11 SC cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover /Fr. (Refer to G.15.2.8
Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the magnet catch /Fr [2].
[2]
[1]
a15xt3c028ca
G -155

[4]
[3]

3. Remove the screw [1] and remove the SC cover /Fr [2] to the
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put 2 claws on the upper
side [3] into the holes [4], and put the claw on the lower
side [5] to the inside of the metal frame.
[2]
[1]
[6]
[5]
a15xt3c029ca
15.2.12 SC cover /Up

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the pellet supply cover. (Refer to G.15.2.19 Pellet supply
unit)
2. Remove the SC cover /Fr. (Refer to G.15.2.11 SC cover /Fr)
3. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the SC cover /Up [3] in the
arrow-marked direction [4] while slightly lifting up the circled part
[2].
[1]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
a15xt3c030ca
G -156
15.2.13 Upper cover /FrRt

(1) Procedure
[4]
[2]
[1]
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.15.2.23 PB left unit)

Open the upper door [1].
Pull the left part of the upper cover /FrRt [3] in the arrow-marked
direction [4]. Then release the cover from the projection [5] and
disconnect it from the connector [6].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put the connector [6] under
the upper cover /FrRt [3] properly so as not to let the
cables get caught between the cover and the frame.

[3]
[6]
[5]
a15xt3c031ca
15.2.14 Upper cover /FrLt

(1) Procedure
[5]
[4]

2. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover /Fr. (Refer to G.15.2.8
Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr)
5. Remove the screw [2] and release the wire [3].
6. Remove 7 screws [4] and then remove the upper cover /FrLt [5].
Note
harness [6].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[6] a15xt3c032ca
15.2.15 Upper cover /RrRt

(1) Procedure
[1]

2. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the upper cover /RrRt [3].
[3]
[2]
a15xt3c033ca
G -157
15.2.16 Upper cover /RrLt

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover /Rr. (Refer to G.15.2.9
Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr)
4. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover /RrLt [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
a15xt3c034ca
15.2.17 Upper cover /Md

(1) Procedure
[1]

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover /Md [2].
[2]
a15xt3c035ca
15.2.18 Deodorant unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the exhaust filter assy [1].
[1]
a15xt3c003ca
G -158

[2]
[1]
[4]

2. Remove 3 screws [1] and lean the deodorant unit [2]. Disconnect
the connector [3] and then remove the deodorant unit [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put 2 claws [2] in the holes
[5].
[5]
[3]
a15xt3c036ca

Note
Connecting the loop connector [1] to the connector [2]
enables the operational check with no error indication
without connecting the deodorant unit. After the
operation, be sure to remove the loop connector [1] and
put it inside [4] of the rear cover /Lt [3].
After installing it, be sure to check that the deodorant
fans /1 (FM97) and /2 (FM98) of the deodorant unit are
rotating.
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
a15xt3c037ca
G -159
15.2.19 Pellet supply unit

(1) Procedure
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the pellet supply cover. (Refer to G.15.2.10 Pellet supply
cover)
a15xt3c045ca
G -160

[2]
[3]
[1]

6. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the pellet supply unit [3] upward.
Note
When removing the unit, be careful not to spill the pellet.
[2]
a15xt3c046ca
15.2.20 Glue tank unit

CAUTION
The glue tank unit is extremely hot right after turning OFF the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of the main
body. To prevent burn injuries, leave the unit until it cools enough before performing the maintenance work.
G -161
(1) Procedure
RrRt)
3. Remove the screw [1], disconnect 2 connectors [2], and then
remove the suction unit [3].
5. Remove the C-clip [5] and pull out the pin [6] straight up to release
the coupling arm [7].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6] [7]
a15xt3c047ca
[2]
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then uncouple the belt coupling bracket
[2].
[1]
a075f2c119ca
G -162

[2]
[2]

7. Pull out the glue tank unit [1] and remove 4 screws [2].
Note
When moving the glue tank unit, be sure to hold it by the
metal frame [3] on the right side of the unit.
When removing the screw [2], be careful to avoid injury
from sharp metal edges around the screw.
8. Further pull out the glue tank unit [1].
9. Remove the roller [5] from the rail [4] and remove the glue tank
unit.
Note
After installing the glue tank unit, make a test print and
binding to check that no glue is squeezed out of the top
and bottom edges of the created book and no pages come
off the cover when opening the book.
[4]
[5] [1]
[3]
a15xt3c048ca
Note
Never loosen or tighten the 2 screws because they are
keeping the levelness and vertical position of the glue
tank unit.
[1]
a15xt3c049ca
15.2.21 SC unit
(1) Procedure
[2]
[1]

2. Remove the upper cover /Md. (Refer to G.15.2.17 Upper cover /
Md)
3. Remove the pellet supply unit. (Refer to G.15.2.19 Pellet supply
unit)
4. Remove the SC cover /Up. (Refer to G.15.2.12 SC cover /Up)
5. Remove the upper cover /FrRt. (Refer to G.15.2.13 Upper cover /
FrRt)
6. Disconnect 5 relay connectors [1].
7. Remove the wire binding [3] from the SC unit [2] by releasing the
wire binding from the saddles.
[3]
a15xt3c050ca
G -163

8. Remove 6 screws[1].
9. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the wire [3] and the knob [4].
Then remove the belt [5].
Note
After installing the belt [5], check that the lug belt is
properly engaging with the pulleys with no slack and
turns smoothly when the knob is turned.
[1]
10. Hold the metal frames [6] on the rear and front side of the unit, and
remove the SC unit [7] to the arrowed direction.
[6]
[7]
[1]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a15xt3c051ca
Note
When the SC unit [1] is removed, the lock arm [2] is
released from the stopper [3]. Therefore, when installing
the SC unit, be sure to put the lock arm [2] under the
stopper [3] while lifting and tilting the unit in the direction
of the arrow [4].
[2]
[4] [3]
[1]
a075f2c042ca
G -164
15.2.22 Clamp unit

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the pellet supply unit. (Refer to G.15.2.19 Pellet supply
unit)
4. Remove the E-ring [2] and pull out the pin [3] downward to release
the coupling arm [4].
5. Release the wiring harness [5] between the connector [1] and the
coupling arm [4] from the saddles.
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[5]
a15xt3c052ca
G -165

[2]
6. Pull out the clamp unit [1] carefully watching the wire binding and
the coupling arm on the rear of the unit.
7. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the lock bracket [3].
9. While lifting the clamp unit [1] by holding its left and right metal
frames [5], release the 4 notches [6] from the hooks [7] and
remove the clamp unit.
Note
When reinstalling the clamp unit, make sure that the 4
hooks [7] are properly fitted in the notches [6] of the unit.
[3]
[5]
[4]
Note
After installing the clamp unit, make a test print and
binding to check that the cover and inside papers are
neatly aligned without skewing.
[1]
[6]
[7]
a15xt3c053ca
15.2.23 PB left unit

(1) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
[1]
[1]
a15xt3c054ca
G -166
Remove the rear cover /Rt. (Refer to G.15.2.5 Rear cover /Rt)
Remove the front door. (Refer to G.15.2.2 Front door)
Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.15.2.3 Front cover)
Remove 2 screws (with washer) [1].

[1]
a15xt3c055ca
[1]
a15xt3c056ca
[1]
a15xt3c057ca
G -167

9. Remove the screws [1] at 2 positions, 2 each.
Note
As the screw [1] is longer than other screws, be careful
when reinstalling.
[1]
a15xt3c058ca
10. Remove the clamps [1] at 4 positions.
[1]
[1]
a15xt3c059ca
G -168

[2]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[3]

11. Rotate the PB left unit [2] around the wiring harness section [1] on
the rear side to remove it from the PB right unit [3].
Note
The PB left unit [2] is rotated up to about 90 degrees.
When rotating the PB left unit [2], be sure to rotate it
around the wiring harness section [1] and be careful not
to damage the wiring harness.
When reinstalling it, put the bottom of the PB left unit [5]
on the brackets [4] on the lower side and then put the pins
[6] on the upper side into the holes [7].
[5]
[4]
a15xt3c060ca
15.2.24 Book lift wire

(1) Procedure
[3]
1. Carry out the I/O check in service mode in the following order of
output check code, and turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and
the main power switch (SW1) after moving the carriage section to
its lowest position.
"77-55", "77-45", "77-58", "77-61"
2. Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.15.2.3 Front cover)
4. Release the wiring harness [1] from the saddles and remove 2
screws [2] and then remove the wiring harness bracket [3].
[1]
[2]
a15xt3c066ca
G -169

[2]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[5]

5. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the 4 mounting brackets [2] on
the front and rear of the book stock unit.
Note
When reinstalling, route the book lift wires /Fr [3] and /Rr
[4] between 2 screws and 1 screw [1], and secure them
with the mounting brackets [2].
6. Loosen the 2 screws [6] of the tension bracket /Fr [5].
Note
When installing the tension bracket /Fr [5], be sure to
tighten the screws [6] while pulling the bracket downward
by the specified tension.
Standard value: 5kgf
[6]
7. Loosen the 2 screws [8] of the tension bracket /Rr [7].

Note
When installing the tension bracket /Rr [7], be sure to
tighten the screws [8] while pulling the bracket downward
by the specified tension.
Standard value: 5kgf
[4]
[1]
[1]
[8]
[7]
[2]
a15xt3c038ca
G -170

8. Remove the E-ring [1], pulley [2], pin [3], and the wire end [4].
Then remove the book lift wire/Fr [5].
Note
Install the book lift wire/Fr [5] as following. Route the wire
so that it comes out of the lower right [6] of the pulley [2].
Loop the wire over the pulley [7], then loop it over the [8],
[9], [10] pulleys in that order. Then wind the wire 6 times
counterclockwise [11] over the pulley [2], and put the wire
end [4] into the pulley.
[11]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[10]
a15xt3c039ca
[5]
[3]
9. Remove the E-ring [1], then remove the washers [2] and [3], spring
[4], and gear [5].
10. Remove the coupling [6] and the pin [7].
[2]
[4]
[1]
[6]
[7]
a15xt3c040ca
G -171
[4]
[2] [1]

11. Remove the E-ring [1], pulley [2], pin [3], and the wire end [4].
Then remove the book lift wire/Rr [5].
Note
Install the book lift wire/Rr [5] as following. Route the wire
so that it comes out of the lower left [6] of the pulley [2].
Loop the wire over the pulley [7], then loop it over the [8],
[9], [10] pulleys in that order. Then wind the wire 6 times
counterclockwise [11] over the pulley [2], and put the wire
end [4] into the pulley.
[3]
[5]
[11]
[7]
[5]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[10]
a15xt3c041ca
15.2.25 Cart wire

(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the mounting plate /Rr [2].
Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to open the registration
plates /Fr [3] and /Rr [4] fully and then install the mounting
plate /Rr [2].
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[7]
[5]
2. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the mounting plate /Fr [6].
Note
When reinstalling it, temporarily hold the mounting plate /
Fr [6] and hook the tension gauge on the hole [7]. Then
pull it in the arrow-marked direction [8] with the standard
value and then fully tighten it.
Standard value: 1 to 1.5kgf
Check that the wires are not crossed or they do not
contact metal frame.
[6]
a15xt3c061ca
G -172

[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[5]
[6]

3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the mounting metal fitting /
Rr [2].
4. Remove the wire [3] from the pulley [4] and release it from the
saddles [5].
Note
When installing the wire [3] on the pulley [4], be sure to
hook it on the pulley [6] with the mounting plate /Rr on the
upper side.
5. Remove the screw [7] and remove the mounting metal fitting /Fr
[8].
6. Remove the wire [9] from the pulley [10] and release it from the
saddles [11].
Note
When installing the wire [9] on the pulley [10], be sure to
hook it on the pulley [12] with the mounting plate /Rr on
the upper side.
[10]
[7]
[8]
[11]
[9]
[12]
a15xt3c062ca
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
7. Remove the screw [1] and release the wire.

Note
When reinstalling it, be sure to put the edge part [3]
between the projections [4].
a15xt3c063ca
15.2.26 Conveyance unit /Lw

(1) Procedure
[7]
[5] [7]
[4]
[4]
1. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and release the wire binding from 6

saddles.
2. Remove the screw [2] and slide the coupling [3] into the arrowmarked direction.
4. Release the conveyance unit /Lw [6] from the hooks [5] and
remove the unit.
Note
When reinstalling, be sure to align it to the projection [7].
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075f2c063ca
G -173
15.2.27 Relay conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]

2. Remove the upper cover /FrLt. (Refer to G.15.2.14 Upper cover /
FrLt)
3. Remove the upper cover /RrLt. (Refer to G.15.2.16 Upper cover /
RrLt)
5. Remove the E-rings [1] at 2 positions and remove the spacer [2],
and then release the arm [3].
Note
When releasing the arm [3], the conveyance guide plate
[4] falls. Hold it by hand during operation.
6. Put down the conveyance guide plate [4].
[5]
a15xt3c064ca
9. Remove the relay conveyance unit [3] by holding 2 shafts [2].
Note
When removing the relay conveyance unit [3], insert a thin
driver into the hole [5] so that the relay conveyance door
[4] does not close. When moving down the relay
conveyance door [4] lower than the horizontal position,
the gear [6] comes off from the dumper gear [7] and the
dumper adjustment is misaligned.
[6]
[7]
[5] [4] [2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
a15xt3c065ca
G -174
15.2.28 Cover paper tray

CAUTION
As the cover paper tray is heavy, be sure to perform the following work with 2 people.
Note
When lifting the cover paper tray, be sure to hold it by the specified positions. Holding it at positions other than those positions
specified damage the tray, thus resulting in a paper feed jam.
(1) Procedure
2. Unlock the cover paper tray [3] by slightly pushing up the cover
paper tray lock lever [2] with a screwdriver or a similar tool, and
pull out the cover paper tray [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
a15xt3c042ca
3. Remove the 2 stopper screws [2], 1 for each right and left rail [1]
and further pull out the cover paper tray.
[2]
[1]
a075f2c065ca
G -175

4. Remove 4 screws [1], 2 for each left and right rail, hold the cover
paper tray [2] by the specified positions [5], and remove it straight
up.
Note
When installing the cover paper tray, make sure that the 4
knobs [3] on the rails are properly fitted in the notches [4]
of the cover paper tray.
When lifting the cover paper tray, be sure to hold the
specified positions [5] by 2 people. Do not hold the part
indicated with [6] as the part can easily become deformed,
which adversely affects paper feed resulting in a paper
jam.
[5]
[1]
[6] [2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[5]
[4]
a075f2c066ca
G -176
15.2.29 Cover paper lift wire

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the cover paper tray. (Refer to G.15.2.28 Cover paper
tray)
3. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the cover paper tray
front cover [3].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
a075f2c067ca
[5]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
4. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the knob [2] and the belt [3].
5. Remove 6 screws[4] and remove the gear cover [5].
a075f2c068ca
[1]
a075f2c069ca
G -177

[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
7. Slide the pulley [1], and pull out the wire ends of the lift wire /Fr1
[2] and /Fr2 [3] from each hole of the shaft [4].
Note
The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire /Fr2 [3], must be
inserted into the shaft hole near the frame of the cover
paper tray. The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire/Fr2
[3], must be inserted into the shaft hole near the frame of
the cover paper tray.
When installing the pulley, lift the cover paper lift plate
slightly to give slack to the wires and insert the wire ends
one by one into the shaft holes. Then secure them with
the pulley [1].
a075f2c070ca
[2]
[5]
8. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and then remove the wire cover
[2].
9. Remove the cover paper lift wires/Fr1 [4] and /Fr2 [5] from each
pulley [3].
Note
When installing the wires, make sure that the wires are
properly routed inside the wire covers [2] and are not
crossed each other.
a075f2c071ca
10. Pull out each wire end [2] through each hole of the cover paper lift
plate arm [1].
Note
When pulling out the wire, pull it out carefully so as not to
damage it with sharp metal edges.
[2]
[1]
a075f2c072ca
G -178

11. Remove 6 screws[1] and remove the gear cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
a075f2c073ca
[3]

Note
When removing the gear [2], be careful not to drop and
lose the bearing [3].
[2]
[1]
a075f2c074ca
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
a075f2c075ca

Note
When removing the gear [2], be careful not to drop the
bearing [3].
[1]
[3]
13. Remove the bearing [1] and the E-ring [2], and then remove the
gear [3].
Note
When removing the gear [3], be careful not to drop the
pin[4].
[2]
a075f2c076ca
G -179

[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]

Note
When removing the gear [2], be careful not to drop and
lose the pin [3].
a075f2c077ca

17. Pull out the cover paper lift wire/Rr1 [2] and /Rr2 [3] from the shaft
holes in the same manner as step7.
[3]
a075f2c078ca
[2]
[3]
18. Remove the cover paper lift wire/Rr1 [1] and /Rr2 [2] in the same
manner as step8 to step10.
Note
When pulling out the wire end [3] of the cover paper lift
wire /Rr2 [2], lift the cover paper lift plate until the cover
paper lift plate arm [4] appears.
The wire /Fr is gray in color and the wire /Rr is black.
When the installation is completed, make sure that the lift
plate is horizontal.
[1]
[4]
a075f2c079ca
15.2.30 Binding mode procedure with manual operating function

When a problem occurs at the clamp section or the cover paper table section, the binding can be checked with the manual operation.
Note
Disconnect the connector (CN5) on the PB control board (PBCB) after the check. (Manual operation forbidden state)
G -180
(1) Procedure
2. Connect the connector [2] to the connector (CN5) [1] on the PB
control board (PBCB).
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
a15xt3c043ca
[3]
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the button /1 [1].

Open the front door and pull out the clamp unit.
Set the inside paper to the clamp unit.
Adjust the clamp alignment plates /Fr and /Rr to the inside paper
edge on the shorter side by hand.
7. Press the button /2 [2].
8. Set the clamp unit.
Note
Set the clamp unit gently. Setting it roundly causes the
misalignment of inside papers widening the clamp
alignment plate.
9. Close the front door.
10. Press the button /3 [3].
Note
Disconnect the connector (CN5) on the PB control board
(PBCB) after the check.
a15xt3c044ca
15.2.31 Multi feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR)

Note
When replacing the multi-feed detection board /S (MFDBS), be sure to replace the multi-feed detection board /R (MFDBR) at the
same time.
When the multi-feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing multi-feed detection board. (Refer
to I.5.7.6 Adjustment when replacing the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB))
G -181
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the conveyance unit /Lw [1]. (Refer to G.15.2.26
Conveyance unit /Lw)
2. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover of the multi-feed
detection board /S (MFDBS) [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
a075f2c095ca

4. Remove 2 screws [2], then remove the multi-feed detection board /
S (MFDBS) [3].
[2]
[3]
a075f2c096ca
5. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover of the multi-feed
detection board /R (MFDBR) [2].
[1]
[2]
a075f2c097ca
G -182

[1]

board /R (MFDBR) [3].
[2]
[3]
a075f2c098ca
(2) Note for installing the multi-feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR)
The multi-feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR) are
installed on the same type board. Be careful not to confuse one
with the other when installing them.
Be sure to confirm the marking on the board when installing it.
Multi-feed detection board /S (MFDBS) [1]: 56UA
Multi-feed detection board /R (MFDBR) [2]: 15AG
The connector shape is different for the multi-feed detection
boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR). So, even if it is installed, the
connector cannot be connected.
[2]
[1]
a075f2c099ca
G -183
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 16. IC-601
16. IC-601
No.
Parts name
Box cover
SSD/HDD unit
HDD cooling fan (FM3)
DIMM (DIMM)
Video interface board (VIB)
System control board (SCB)
BOX ventilation fan (FM1)
DC power supply (DCPS)

Note
16.2.2 Flow of disassembling the IC unit

Box cover
SSD/HDD
unit
DIMM
(DIMM)
Video interface board

(VIB)
BOX ventilation fan

(FM1)
DC power supply
(DCPS)
System control board

(SCB)
HDD cooling
fan (FM3)
16.2.3 Box cover

(1) Procedure
[1]
[1]
[4]
[1]
1. Remove 11 screws [1], release 2 claws [2] from the holes [3], and
then remove the box cover [4].
[2]
[3]
G -184
16.2.4 SSD/HDD unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the box cover. (Refer to G.16.2.3 Box cover)
2. Disconnect the connectors [1] and [2], 3 each.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[2]
3. Check point 1 when reinstalling the connectors.

Note
When reconnecting 3 connectors [1], [2], and [3], be sure
to connect the connector [1] that of the wire which has 1
connector to the SSD (SSD) [4], and connect the
connectors that of the wire which has 2 connectors; the
connector on the midpoint [2] to the HDD/1 (HDD1) [5] and
connector on the leading edge [3] to the HDD/2 (HDD2) [6].
[3]
[5]
[6]
[6] [4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
4. Check point 2 when reinstalling the connectors.

Note
When reconnecting the signal connectors, be sure to
connect the connector [1] of the grey wiring harness to
SSD [2]. In the case of 2 red wiring harness of the system
control board, connect the connector of CN2104 [3] to
HDD1 [4], and connector of CN2105 [5] to HDD2 [6].
In the case of the grey wiring harness, be sure to connect
the side without latch to SSD.
[5]
[1]
5. Remove 2 wiring harness clamps [1].
G -185

[2]
[3]
[5]
[5]
[1]
[1]
[2]
6. Remove 6 screws [1], slide the unit in the direction of the arrow to
release the projection [2] from the hole [3], and then remove the
SSD/HDD unit [4].
Note
When reinstalling the unit, be sure to align each position
of the projection [5].
[5]
[5] [4]
7. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the SSD assy [3] from the
HDD assy [2].
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
8. Remove 4 screws [1], remove the mounting plates /Rt [2] and /Lt
[3], and then remove the SSD [4].
Note
When reinstalling the SSD, be sure to set the mounting
plates /Rt [2] and /Lt [3] in correct direction.
[3]
[4]
[2]
G -186
16.2.5 HDD cooling fan (FM3)

(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the SSD/HDD unit. (Refer to G.16.2.4 SSD/HDD unit)

2. Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove 2 wiring harness
clamps [2].
3. Remove 4 screws [3], and then remove the HDD cooling fan (FM3)
[4].
Note
When reinstalling the fan, be sure to set it so that the label
[5] faces inside the machine.
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
16.2.6 DIMM (DIMM)

(1) Procedure
[3]
[4]
[2]

2. Push down 2 stoppers [2] on both edges of the memory slot A [1]
to release the lock, and then remove the DIMM [3] in the direction
of the arrow.
3. Remove the DIMM [4] of the memory slot B in the same manner.
[1]
[4]
[3]
Note
When removing/reinstalling the DIMM, be sure not to
touch the parts on the memory board.
When reinstalling the DIMM, be sure to push down the
DIMM into the slot groove [3] so that the groove [1] of the
DIMM fits to the projection [2] of the slot until it clicks.
Then, check that the leading edge [4] of the stopper is set
in the groove [5] of the DIMM.
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
G -187
16.2.7 Video interface board (VIB)

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 6 wiring harness clamps [1].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

5. Lift the power supply side [3] of the fan mounting plate [2] in the
direction of arrow and remove it while paying attention not to catch
the wiring harness [4].
Note
When reinstalling the board, be sure not to damage the
wiring harness [4] with the fan mounting plate [2].
If it is hard to remove the fan mounting plate [2], remove
the SSD/HDD unit. (Refer to G.16.2.4 SSD/HDD unit)
[1]
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and 4 screws [2], and then remove the
connector cover [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
G -188
[4]
[1]

7. Remove 3 screws [1] and 5 screws [2], and then remove the video
interface board (VIB) [3].
Note
When reinstalling the board, be sure to push the circled
area [4] marked "PUSH" to connect VIB and the system
control board (SCB) securely before securing with screws.
[2]
[3] [1]
[2]
16.2.8 System control board (SCB)

(1) Procedure
[1]
[3]
[4]
1. Remove the video interface board (VIB). (Refer to G.16.2.7 Video

interface board (VIB))
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and 1 screw [2].
3. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the connector cover [4].
Note
When reinstalling the connector cover, be sure to set the
claw [5] into the hole [6].
[2]
[6]
[5]
[7]
[6] [1]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[9]
[5]

5. Disconnect the connectors [2], [3], and [4].
Note
Be sure to reconnect the connectors [2], [3], and [4]
correctly. Reconnect the connector [2] to the SSD (SSD)
on the top, connector [3] to the HDD/1 (HDD1) on the
middle, and connector [4] to the HDD/2 (HDD2) on the
bottom of the SSD/HDD unit.
6. Remove 5 screws [5] and 6 screws [6].
7. Pull the edge [8] of the system control board (SCD) [7] which is the
other side of the interface connector slightly, slide the board in the
direction of the arrow to release the connector section from the Lshape metal frame [9], and then remove the board.
Note
When removing/reinstalling the board, be careful not to
damage the bottom of SCB.
Be sure to hold the edge of SCB and not to touch the
electronic parts on the board.
G -189

[3] [6]

Note
When reinstalling the board, set the connector [2] under
the L-shape metal frame [1].
When the screw hole positions do not fit, push the box
side plate [3] outward and push SCB [4] against the plate
to align the screw hole positions. Then, tighten 2 screws
[5] and [6] temporarily to tighten the other screws.
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
16.2.9 BOX ventilation fan (FM1)

(1) Procedure
[2]
[4]
[1]
[5]

2. Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove 3 wiring harness
clamps [2].
3. Remove 4 screws [3], and then remove the BOX ventilation fan [4].
[3]
16.2.10 DC power supply (DCPS)

(1) Procedure
[1]
G -190

3. Remove the 8 screws [1], and then remove the DC power supply
(DCPS) [2].
[2]
[1] [1]
G -191
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 17. RU-506
17. RU-506
No.
1
Section
Part name
Cover
Front cover
Rear cover
Left cover

CAUTION
17.2.2 Front cover

(1) Procedure
[1]
[3]
[2]
1. Open the front door [1] and remove the screw [2] and release the
wire [3].
and the front door [1].
Note
The front door [1] is heavy. Support it securely when
removing it.
[4]
[5]
[4]
a0get3c017ca
G -192
17.2.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
[1]
[2]
[1]
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover.

a0get3c018ca
17.2.4 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[1]
[2]
a0get3c032ca
17.2.5 Note to keep in mind when replacing the board

CAUTION
When the RU control board (RUCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC19).
1. Remove the EEPROM (IC19) from the old RU control board [1] and install it into the new RU control board [2].
G -193

Note
When the RU control board (RUCB) is replaced, be sure to
replace the EEPROM (IC19). Install EEPROM (IC19) of the
old control board [1] to the new control board [2].
[1]
[2]
a0get2c033ca
Note
Be sure to install the "A" sections of EEPROM (IC19) in the
same direction.
a04jf2c017ca
G -194
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 18. GP-501
18. GP-501
18.1 Centering punched holes
Die Set Position Cradle Adjustment, The die set position cradle is set in the factory; however, because of the punched-hole spacing on the PB
die sets, there is a minimal amount of paper on each edge of the punched paper. The die set position cradle may have to be fine adjusted to
center the punched-hole pattern in the paper. Listed below are the step-by-step instructions to adjust the die set to the proper position.
1. The punched-hole alignment must be checked on a piece of
punched paper. Fold the punched sheet of paper in half [1] and the
[1]
punched-holes should be aligned evenly along the edge and
[2]
centered between the ends [2]. If the punched-holes are not
aligned, then the die set cradle must be adjusted to align the
punched holes.
Note
The paper path is always constant, if the holes are not
centered, you must adjust the die set cradle.
2. The two back covers on the GP-501 Punch must be removed to
access the die set position cradle [1]. (Refer to G.18.3.3 Removing
the Rear Cover.)
3. Before adjusting the die set position cradle, you must first note what
direction the die set cradle [1] must move.
G -195

4. Loosen the lock-down screw [1].
5. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, turn the adjustment screw [2]
clockwise or counter-clockwise to move the die set position cradle.
6. Observe the punched paper. If the punched-holes are too close to

the rear of the machine, then you must turn the adjustment screw
counter-clockwise [1].
7. If the punched-holes are too close to the front of the machine, then
you must turn the adjustment screw clockwise [1].
Note
Seven full turns of the adjustment screw result in a 1/4"
(6.35 mm) change in the punched hole position.
8. Before tightening the lock-down screw [1], tilt or bias the assembly
towards the bottom of the machine [2] and tighten the lock-down
screw. This will ensure positive engagement between the locking
lever and the die set.
9. Run a test sample of punched paper and recheck paper alignment.
Re-adjust if necessary.
G -196
18.2 Door latch

18.2.1 Door latch check
(1) Procedure
1. Ensure the door latch holds the door closed and that the activating
bracket tab [1] depresses the door switch [2]. The tab should press
the switch button just so that it is close to bottoming out.
18.2.2 Door Latch Adjustment

(1) To adjust the door latch:
2. Loosen the two adjustment screws [1] on the door latch.
3. Do one of the following.
To move the door in, move the latch towards the front of the
door.
To move the door out, move the latch away from the front of
the door.
4. Tighten the 2 screws [1] and close the door.
5. Test its operation.
18.2.3 Door Latch and Switch Replacement

(1) To replace the door latch:
G -197
(2) To replace the door switch:

3. Unplug connectors from switch [2].
18.3 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service

18.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service
Most service requires that the GP-501 Punch be separated from the printer and finisher and the rear cover be removed.
WARNING
Disconnect the unit from power and maintain the cord in your possession. Failure to observe this warning can result in injury or
electrical shock.
(1) Procedure
Unplug the unit from power.
Disconnect the communication cable
Empty Chip Bin
18.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer

Follow the instructions as described in Installation Manual.
18.3.3 Removing the Rear Cover

Separate the punch from the printer and finisher first. (Refer to G.18.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer.)
Note
It is not necessary nor recommended that you remove the top cover.
(1) Procedure
(2) Tool Required
Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" hex head nut driver
(3) To remove the rear cover:

1. Remove the 5 screws on the entrance side [1] and remove the 6
rear cover screws [2].
2. Slide the cover out from under the top cover. Do not remove the
top cover.
18.4 Leveling and aligning to the printer

The punch must be level and in line with the printer and finisher. If the printer and GP-501 Punch are moved or relocated, the system must be
re-leveled.
G -198
Note
It is important that the punch is not twisted or skewed. It must be level front to back and side to side.
(1) Procedure
Raise or lower the GP-501 Punchs castors to level it.
(2) Tool Required

2 3/8" open ended wrenches
Level
(3) To level the punch:

1. Remove the rear cover and put the punch back in line with the
printer and finisher.
2. Place the level on a flat surface of the top [1] and determine which
castor needs adjustment.
3. Loosen the locking nut [1] of the castor.

4. From below the frame and at the top of the castor [2], adjust the
height of the castor as needed.
5. Check the level and adjust as necessary.
6. Tighten the locking nut [1].
7. Ensure punch is level and in line with main body and finisher.
8. Install rear cover.
G -199
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 19. COMMERCIALLY

AVAILABLE PARTS
19. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS

19.1 Reinstalling the status indicator light
19.1.1 Configuration
[2]
[1]
[1]
Screws (2)
[2]
Status indicator light
19.1.2 Connector
(1) Connector position
[1]
[1]
CN495
(2) Connector specifications

Connector
Pin
Number
Signal name
Description
Output timing
495
PAT1_DR
Light ON signal
PAT2_DR
L signal output while

in the scanning or
printing operation
PAT3_DR
L signal output when

an abnormal stop
occurs due to jams,
error codes, no paper,
or no toner
PAT4_DR

the toner supply
message is displayed

the printing available
Type of signal
Open collector
24V
24V DC source
At all times
24V, 500mA
GND
Ground
G -200

AVAILABLE PARTS
19.1.3 Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover /Rr2. (Refer to G.2.2.6 Upper cover /Rr1, /
Rr2)
2. Remove the cable pull out cover [2] of the upper cover /Rr2 [1].
[1]
[2]
a03uf2c147ca
3. Remove the right cover /Up3. (Refer to G.2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /
Up2, /Up3, /Up4, /Lw1, /Lw2)
4. Insert the cable [2] of the status indicator light from the upper side of
the main board unit [1].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[2]
a03uf2c148ca
5. Connect the connector [2] of the status indicator light to CN495 [1].
Note
Pull out the cable [3] to the position where it does not
contact with the flywheel [5] of the scanner motor (M1) [4].
[5]
[3]
a03uf2c149ca
6. Install the right cover /Up3 [1] and the upper cover /Rr2 [2].
Note
Pull out the cable [3] of the status indicator light from the
cable pull out cover [4] of the upper cover /Rr2.
[6]
[2]
7. Install the status indicator light [6] with 2 screws [5].

[4] [1]
[6]
[5]
[3]
a03uf2c150ca
G -201

AVAILABLE PARTS
19.2 Key counter (KCT)

19.2.1 Connector
[2]
[1]
[1]
CN493
[2]
Jumper connector (CN494)
19.2.2 Procedure
1. Remove the key counter cover [2] of the upper cover /Rr2 [1], and connect to the inside connector.
[1]
[2]
G -202
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION

PROCEDURES
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION
1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES
The descriptions of the cleaning and the lubrication are mentioned in the maintenance section of each device.
H -1
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 1. CHECKING BEFORE STARTING

WORK
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
1. CHECKING BEFORE STARTING WORK
When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary to check first the following:
1. Are the power supply and voltage secured in accordance with the specifications?
2. Is the power supply properly grounded?
3. Is any equipment that repeatedly consumes a lot of electricity connected to the same power supply? (for example: Electric noise sources
such as elevator and air conditioner)
4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the machine?
High temperature and high humidity, direct sunlight, air ventilation, and so on.
Levelness of the location on which the machine is installed.
5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original itself?
6. Is density selected properly?
7. Is the original glass stained?
8. Is proper paper used for copy?
9. Are copy consumables replaced with new ones at their life? (for example: Developer, drum, cleaning blade, and so on)
10. Is toner filled?
I -1
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 2. CHECKPOINTS WHEN

CONDUCTING ON-SITE SERVI...
2. CHECKPOINTS WHEN CONDUCTING ON-SITE SERVICE

When repairing the machine, be sure to pay due attention to the following items.
1. Be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet. Also, when operating the machine with the power supplied, be careful of the scan of
the exposure unit and be sure not to get caught by the gear.
2. The fusing section is hot. Be careful not to get burned for handling it.
3. The developing unit is magnetized strongly. Be careful not to bring a watch and instrument near to the unit.
4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.
5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare hands.
I -2
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY
3. UTILITY
3.1 List of utility menus
This machine is provided with setting menu for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set with this mode is stored in NVRAM board (NRB).
Note
For details on the utility, refer to "User's guide."
01 Scan Address Register
01 Address Edit
02 E-mail Title Setting
03 E-mail Text Setting
02 User Setting
01 System Setting
01 Language Setting
02 Unit Setting
03 Feed Tray Setting
01 Paper Setting
02 Auto Tray Selection Setting
03 Type Selection for Auto Paper
04 Dehumidify Fan Heater Setting
04 Reset Setting
01 Auto Reset Setting
02 Job Reset Setting
05 Default Screen Setting
07 Set Zoom Ratio Setting
07 Power Save Setting
08 Date/Time Setting
09 Operation/Info.Sound Setting
01 Volume Setting
02 Info. Sound Item Setting
10 Key Response Time
11 Shortcut Key Register
01 Application Setting
02 Quality Adjustment (copy)
03 Quality Adjustment (scan)
04 Quality Adjustment Area Setting
05 Output Setting
12 Service Port Device Setting
02 Initial Setting
01 Copy Initial Setting
02 Scan Initial Setting
03 Common Setting
04 Copy Setting
05 Scan Setting
06 Printer Setting
01 Gray Text Outline
07 Image Quality Setting
01 Screen
02 Screen Initial Setting
03 Original Density Shift
04 ACS Adjustment
08 Password Change
03 Administrator Setting
01 System Setting
01 Power Save Setting
02 Date/Time Setting
03 Weekly Timer Setting
01 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting
02 Time Setting
03 Date Setting
04 Select Time for Power Save
05 Password Non-Business Hours
04 Restrict User Access
01 Lock/Delete Mode Memory
01 Copy Mode Memory
02 Scan Mode Memory
02 Change Restrict Setting
03 Scan Restrict Setting
04 Sample Print Restrict
05 Expert Adjustment
01 AES Level Adjustment
02 Erase Correction
01 Non-Image Area Erase
02 ADF Frame Erase
03 Printer Adjustment
01 Restart Timing Adjustment
02 Centering Adjustment
03 FD-Mag. Adjustment
I -3
04 CD-Mag. Adjustment
05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
06 Registration Loop Adj.
07 Pre-registration Adjustment
04 Finisher Adjustment*1
01 Staple Finisher Adjustment
01 Staple Center Position
02 Paper Width Adj.(Staple)
03 Paper Width Adj.(Straight)
04 Exit Guide Center pos. Adj
05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.
02 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.
01 Paper Width Adjustment
02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.
03 Multi Folder(Fold) Adj.
01 Half-Fold Position Adj.
02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.
03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.
04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.
05 Z-Fold Position Adj.
06 Gate Position Adj.
04 Multi Folder(PI) Adjustment*2
05 Stacker Adjustment
02 Paper Length Adjustment
06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.
02 Staple Paper Width Adj.
03 Staple Pitch Adjustment
05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.
06 Fold Paper Width Adj.
07 Trimming Adjustment
07 Perfect Binder Adjustment
01 Cover Trimming Adj.
02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.
03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.
04 Glue Start Position
05 Glue Finish Position
06 Temperature Adjustment
07 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.
08 Clamp CD Width Adjustment
09 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.
10 Clamp FD Position Adj.
Relay Stacker Adjustment*2
01 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment
02 Half-Fold Stopper Adjustment
03 Punch Adjustment
01 Vertical Position Adj.
02 Horizontal Position Adj.
03 Registration Adjustment
04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment
04 Tri-Fold Adjustment
05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.
06 Post Inserter Tray Size
07 Output Quantity Limit
08 Curl Adjustment*4
05 Scan Adjustment
06 Process Adjustment
01 Front & Back Density
02 Toner Density Sensor Speed
03 Maximum Density Adjustment
04 FD Line Reduction Mode
07 Quality Adjustment
01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
04 Stabilization Adj. Setting
05 Custom Screen
06 Controller Image Comp. Set
07 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU)
08 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj (RU)
I -4
08 Execute Adjust Operation

06 List/Counter
07 Size Setting
01 Original Glass Original Size Search
02 ADF Original Size Search
03 Original Glass Small Size
04 K Size
05 ADF/Original Glass Priority Setting
08 Perfect Binder Setting
01 Usable Paper Weight Select
02 Paper Count Limit for PB
03 Unfitting Cover Stop Setting
09 Operation Screen Customize
01 Font Weight Setting
02 Copy Screen Customize Set
03 Scan Screen Customize Set
02 Administrator Registration
03 Scan Address Register
01 Address Edit
02 E-mail Title Setting
03 E-mail Text Setting
04 User Auth./Account Track
01 Authentication Method
02 User Authentication Set
01 Management Setting
02 User Registration
03 User Counter
03 Account Track
01 Account Track Registration
02 Account Track Counter
04 Print without Authentication
05 Network Setting
01 Machine NIC Setting
02 E-mail Initial Setting
03 http Communication Setting
04 Web LCD Setting
06 Common Setting
07 Copy Setting
08 Scan Setting
09 System Connection
01 Administrator Call
10 Security Setting
01 Administrator Password
02 HDD Management Setting
01 HDD Lock Password
02 Delete Temporary Data Setting
03 Delete All Data Setting
04 Delete hold Job
05 Delete HDD Job
06 HDD Restore/Backup
01 HDD Backup
02 HDD Restore
03 Enhanced Security Mode
04 Touch Panel Adjustment
*1 Adjustment for the connected option (FS-521, FD-503, LS-505, SD-506, RU-509 PB-503 or RU-506) is available.
*2 Unable to select any time.
*3 Adjustment for the connected option (FS-531, FS-612, PK-512/513 or PI-502) is available.
*4 Cannot be selected when RU-509 is connected
3.2 Start/exit
3.2.1 Start method
2. "Utility screen"
Utility screen is displayed.
*1 Default is [Machine Screen].
3.2.2 Exit method

1. "Utility screen"
Press [Exit] to go back to the ordinary operation screen.
2. The new settings become effective.
I -5
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 4. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
4. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

4.1 Priority for Adjustment/Setting after replacing parts
Conduct the following adjustment on the items list in this order when replacing the parts on the list. Proper operation/image quality is not
guaranteed without conducting those adjustment after the parts replacement.
Note
When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the OACB being damaged, be sure to use the NVRAM board (NRB) that
was installed on the damaged OACB on the new OACB. Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor if it is
considered that NRB is also damaged.
The NVRAM board (NRB) stores various adjustment data, setting data and counter data. Therefore, when replacing the NRB,
perform all adjustments and settings, and be sure to replace the parts for control correction (Drum, developer, cleaning blade).
For details, contact the service manager of the authorized distributor.
When replacing a board due to PB control board (PBCB), SD control board (SDCB), FD control board (FDCB), RU control board
(RUCB) or FNS control board (FNSCB) being damaged, be sure to use the non-volatile memory (EEPROM) that was installed on
the damaged control board on the new control board. Install the new EEPROM and perform all adjustments for the PB, SD, FD, RU
or FS if it is considered that the EEPROM is also damaged.
Classification
Replacement parts/Others
Description
After PM Implementation
PM cycle setting counter reset
Drum
Drum cartridge /Y, M, C, K
(Refer to F.5.3.4 Replacing (Refer to F.5.3.4 Replacing the drum
the drum cartridge)
cartridge)
Setting powder application

Dust proof glass cleaning (write unit)
Initial Drum Rotation
Special Parts Counter (Reset)
Color Registration Auto.Adj.
Color Registration Manual
Gamma Automatic Adjustment
Development
Developers /Y, /M, /C and /K
(Refer to F.5.6.1 Replacing (Refer to F.5.6.1 Replacing the developers /
the developers /Y, /M, /C
Y, /M, /C and /K)
and /K)
Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)

TonerDenditySensorInit.Auto
Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
(Refer to F.5.5
section

(Refer to F.5.5.6 Cleaning the intermediate
transfer belt/rollers)
Transfer unit installation direction (with UPSIDE mark in rear)

Blade setting mode
Belt Line Speed Adj.
Color Registration Auto.

(Refer to F.5.5.3 Replacing the belt cleaning
blade)
1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K

(Refer to F.5.5.7 Replacing the first transfer
roller and the transfer roller bearing.)
1st transfer roller installation direction (groove on the shaft is on

the front side)
Blade setting mode


(Refer to F.5.5.8 Replacing the 2nd transfer
roller /Up)
2nd transfer roller installation direction (depression on the shaft

edge surface is on the front side)

(Refer to F.5.5.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer
roller /Lw and the 2nd transfer earth plate
Assy)
2nd transfer roller /Lw installation direction (depression on the

shaft edge surface is in the rear)

Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
Color registration sensors /Fr (PS8) and /Rr

(PS9)

Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
Belt Line Speed Adjustment
Color Registration Auto.Adj.
I -6

Total process mount
Drum cartridge, developer, intermediate

transfer belt, transfer belt cleaning blade

Setting powder application (to drum and intermediate transfer
belt)
Initial Drum Rotation
TonerDenditySensorInit.Auto
Blade Setting Mode (Intermediate transfer)
Belt Line Speed Adj.
Scanner
CCD unit
(Refer to G.2.2.8 CCD unit)
CD-Mag. Adjustment
Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
Scan exposure/V-mirror unit

(Refer to G.2.2.9 Exposure unit)
Mirror unit positioning (require the jigs)

Write
(Refer to G.2.2.13 Writing
unit)
Exposure lamp (L1)

(Refer to G.2.2.10 Exposure lamp)
Original glass
(Refer to G.2.2.4 Original glass assy)
Writing unit /K
(Refer to G.2.2.13 Writing unit)

Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement)
CD-Mag. Skew Adj.
Restart Timing Adjustment
Beam Pitch Adjustment
Moire Adjustment
Writing unit /Y, /M, /C


Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement)
Beam Pitch Adjustment
Moire Adjustment
Dust-proof glass /Y, /M, /C, /K

Charging
(Refer to F.5.4.1 Replace
the charging corona.)
Developers /Y, /M, /C and /K

(Refer to F.5.4.1 Replace the charging
corona.)
Fusing
(Refer to F.5.13 Fusing
section)
Fusing belt
(Refer to F.5.13.7 Replacing the fusing belt,
fusing roller /1, insulating sleeve /Up, fusing
bearing /Up, belt regulating sleeve)
Fusing belt installation position (with lot number on the rear side)

Fusing heater lamp /4 (L5)

Installation direction of the fusing heater lamp (colored wiring
(Refer to F.5.13.8 Replacing the fusing heater harness comes to the front)
lamp /4 (L5))
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
(Refer to G.2.2.22 Temperature sensor /1
(TH1), thermostat /1 (TS1), /2 (TS2))
Adjust the position by the thermostat positioning jig /UF (require

the jig)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
(TH1), thermostat /1 (TS1), /2 (TS2))
Adjust the position by the thermostat positioning jig /UC (require

the jig)
I -7
Boards
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
(TH2), thermostat /3 (TS3))
Adjust the position by the thermostat positioning jig /L (require

the jig)
NVRAM board (NRB) replacement

Rewriting of firmware
Machine NIC setting
Software DIPSW setting
Printer Screen Gradation
Hard disk /Y, M, C, K, A, P (HDD/Y, /M, /C, /

K, /A, /P)
I/O Check Mode (Replacing procedure of the hard disk)
PF-602
Multi feed detection board (MFDBS, MFDBR)

(Refer to G.4.2.11 The multi feed detection
board (MFDBR and S))
Multi feed detection board adjustment
DF-622
DF control board (DFCB)
ADF Sensor Adjustment

ADF Original Size Adj.
ADF Orig. Stop Position
RU-509
Original registration sensor (PS301)
Original reverse sensor (PS305)
Original exit sensor (PS306)
EEPROM replacement
FS-521
FNS control board (FNSCB)
DIPSW setting of the boards

EEPROM replacement
FS-531/612
EEPROM replacement
PK-512/513
LS-505
Stapler unit
Stapler positioning (require the jigs)

* FS-531 does not require the adjustment.
Punch drive board (PDB)
Paper Edge Detect Sensor
Paper size sensor (PS305)
Paper Edge Detect Sensor
LS control board (LSCB)
Toggle switch setting

Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment
Paper width adjustment
Paper length adjustment
FD-503
FD control board (FDCB)

EEPROM replacement
SD-506
Multi feed detection board (MFDB)
PI drive board (PIDB)
SD control board (SDCB)

EEPROM replacement
PB-503
Trimmer board assy

(Refer to F.17.4.3 Replacing the trimmer
board assy)
I/O Check Mode (trimmer board solenoid operation counter

reset)
PB control board (PBCB)

EEPROM replacement
Multi feed detection board (MFDBS, MFDBR)
I -8
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. SERVICE MODE
5. SERVICE MODE
5.1 Service Mode List
This machine is provided with a service mode for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set with this mode is stored in NVRAM board
(NRB).
01 Machine Adjustment
01 Printer Adjustment
04 CD-Mag. Adjustment
05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
06 Registration Loop Adj.
07 Pre-registration Adjustment
08 Belt Line Speed Adj.
09 Writing Initial Pos. Memory
01 Skew Initial Position Memory
10 Color Registration Auto.Adj.
11 Color Registration Manual
12 PFU Dfeed Detect Adj.
13 CD-Mag. Skew Adj.
14 Beam Pitch Adjustment
15 Moire Adjustment
16 Recall Standard Data
02 Scan Adjustment
04 Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
03 Quality Adjustment
01 Printer Gamma Adjustment
01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
04 Printer Screen Gradation
05 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU)
06 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj (RU)
02 Sharpness Adjustment
03 Contrast Adjustment
04 Image Distinction Level
01 Dot Detect Adjustment
02 Color Text Adjustment
03 Dot/Text Area Adjustment
05 ACS Adjustment
06 Density Adjustment
01 AE(AES) Adjustment
02 Copy Density Adjustment
03 BackgroundRemoval
04 Bleed Prevention
07 Tone Adjustment
01 Red
02 Green
03 Blue
02 Process adjustment
01 High Voltage Adjustment
01 1st Transfer Manual Adj.
02 2nd Transfer Manual Adj.
03 HV Adj.(Separation AC)
04 HV Adj. (Separation DC)
05 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm
02 Drum Peculiarity Adjustment
01 Blade setting mode
02 Gamma Automatic Adjustment
03 Auto. Developer Charge
04 Toner Density Sensor Init.
05 Initial Drum Rotation
06 Toner Density Revert
07 Toner Density Sensor Speed
03 Sensor Output Confirm
01 IDC Sensor Output
02 Toner Density Sensor Output
03 Humidity/Temperature Output
04 Process Fine Adjustment
01 Background Margin Fine Adj.
02 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.
I -9
03 Develop AC Frequency
04 Toner Density Fine Adj.
05 Interval/Quantity Adj.
01 Drum Small Rotation Interval
02 Automatic Refresh Interval
03 Toner Density Sensor Interval
03 System Setting
01 Software DIPSW Setting
02 Service Center TEL/FAX
03 Serial Number Setting
04 Setup Date/Business Setting
04 Counter/Data
01 Maintenance Counter
02 Data collection
01 Total Counter/Each Paper Size
02 Paper Size Counter(Copy)
03 Paper Size Counter(Printer)
04 ADF Counter
05 Coverage Data History
06 Time series jam data
07 JAM Counter
08 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)
08 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)
10 SC Counter
11 JAM Counter Individual Sec.
12 SC Count Individual Sec.
13 SC data of time series
14 Maintenance History
01 Maintenance Counter Reset
02 Parts History in Time Series
15 ORU-M Maintenance History
03 Parts Counter
01 Special Parts Counter
02 Voluntary Part Counter
05 State Confirmation
01 I/O Check Mode
06 ADF Adjustment
01 ADF Original Size Adj.
02 ADF Orig. Stop Position
03 ADF Sensor Adjustment
04 ADF Registration Loop Adj.
01 Staple Finisher Adjustment
01 Stapling center position adjustment
02 Paper Width Adj.(Staple)
03 Paper Width Adj.(Straight)
04 Exit Guide Center pos. Adj
05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.
02 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.
01 Paper width adjustment
02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.
01 2-Hole Punch
02 3-Hole Punch
03 Multi Folder(Fold) Adj.
02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.
03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.
04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.
05 Z-Fold Position Adj.
06 Gate Position Adj.
07 Fold Registration Loop Adj.
04 Multi Folder(PI) Adjustment*2
05 Stacker Adjustment
02 Paper Length Adjustment
06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.
02 Staple Paper Width Adj.
03 Staple Pitch Adjustment
05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.
06 Fold Paper Width Adj.
07 Trimming Adjustment
08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.
07 Perfect Binder Adjustment
01 Cover Trimming Adj.
I -10
02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.

03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.
04 Glue Start Position
05 Glue Finish Position
06 Temperature Adjustment
07 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.
08 Clamp CD Width Adjustment
09 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.
10 Clamp FD Position Adj.
08 Relay Stacker Adjustment*2
01 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment
02 Half-Fold Stopper Adjustment
03 Punch Adjustment
01 Vertical Position Adj.
02 Horizontal Position Adj.
03 Registration Adjustment
04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment
04 Tri-Fold Adjustment
05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.
06 Post Inserter Tray Size
07 Output Quantity Limit
08 Curl Adjustment
08 Firmware Version
01 Firmware Version
09 CS Remote Care
01 CS Remote Care
01 E-mail
02 Modem
10 List Output
Coverage data list
Parameter List
Font Pattern
Communication log list
Maintenance History
ORU-M Maintenance History
Memory Dump List
11 Test Mode
01 Running Test Mode
02 Test Pattern Output Mode
12 ISW
01 ISW
13 Setting Data
01 Load from External Memory
02 Store to External Memory
14 Log Store
01 Log Store Setting
02 Execute Log Storing
15 ORU-M Setting
01 ORU-M object/Life setting
02 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting screen
03 ORU-M Password Setting
*1 Adjustment for the connected option (FS-521, FD-503, LS-505, SD-506, RU-509 PB-503 or RU-506) is available.
*2 Unable to select any time.
*3 Adjustment for the connected option (FS-531, FS-612, PK-512/513 or PI-502) is available.
5.2 Start/exit
5.2.1 Start method
You can access the service mode while the power is both turned ON and OFF.
In either way, the started service mode is the same, but how to exit differs.
NOTE
If you leave the site with the Service Mode setting screen being displayed, unauthorized changes could occur for any set values.
When you finish the setting of Service Mode, or if you have to leave the site by necessity when the Service Mode has been set, be
sure to press [Exit] to the basic screen.
(1) Start-up from power ON

2. "Utility screen"
Stop 0 0 Stop 0 1
I -11
When the CE password has been set, entering the password is required to enter the service mode.
3. "Service Mode Menu screen"
The service mode appears.
(2) Start-up from power OFF

1. While pressing [Utility/Counter] button, turn ON the sub power switch (SW2).
The service mode appears.
5.2.2 Exit method

Exit methods differ according to the condition of power switch, ON or OFF.
(1) When the power is ON

1. "Service Mode menu screen"
Press [Exit] to back to "Utility screen".
(2) When the power is OFF

Turn OFF the SW2.
2. After the reboot, the new settings become effective.
5.3 Machine Adjustment

5.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the image position on the paper in the sub scan direction by changing the restart timing of the registration roller.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image leading edge timing of the printer.
Note
Be sure the Scanner FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.3 FD-Mag.
(3) Procedure
Press [01 Machine Adjustment].
2. "Machine Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Printer Adjustment].
3. "Printer Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Restart Timing Adjustment].
4. "Restart Timing Adjustment screen"
Press [] or [] to select the item to be adjusted and press [Print Mode].
This adjustment is available for each paper tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (large or small) and paper type (plain paper or thick paper)
respectively.
Note
Large size: Paper size 300mm or more in the sub scan direction
Small size: Paper size less than 300mm in the sub scan direction
Paper thickness: Paper weight 106g/m2 or more
5. "PRINT MODE screen"
Set the print setting according to the selected item and press the start button to output the test pattern (No.16).
6. Check the image leading edge timing.
20
57gaf3c007na
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Exit PrintMode].
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [Set].
Setting Range
: -60 (short) to +60 (long)
I -12
1 step = 0.1mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
5.3.2 Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the image writing position by changing the laser writing timing.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image centering in the printer main scan direction.
Note
Be sure the Printer CD-Mag. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.4 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Centering Adjustment].
4. "Centering Adjustment screen"
This adjustment is available for each paper feed tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (common, large size, small size or 8 1/2 x 5 1/2 (tray
1 to 3)) and paper size (plain paper or thick paper) respectively.
Note
6. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction, and measure how much the left and right lines misalign from
each other.
Standard value: within 1.5mm
Setting range: -40 (image in front) to +40 (image in back)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.3 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the image magnification by changing the speed of the polygon motor.
(2) Usage
This adjustment changes the speed of the polygon motor and adjusts the image magnification.
Note
Note that there are 2 following types of method for the printer magnification adjustment in the sub scan direction.
1. FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment when the magnification in sub-scanning direction has changed because of the worn registration
roller or paper shrinkage by heat.
2. Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment under the conditions not mentioned above.
Magnification adjustment on back side in sub-scanning direction is not reflected to the image in default. When adjusting the
magnification on back side, enter "User Setting - Common Setting" in "Utility" and turn the "Back Side Magnification Adj." to
[ON]. However, since the polygon motor speed is switched for back side, the print speed is reduced up to 3/4.
(3) Preparation
Be sure the Registroller line speed adj. is completed.
(4) Procedure
Press [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].
4. "FD-Mag. Adjustment screen"
Select the item to be adjusted and press [Print Mode].
This adjustment can be performed for both sides at a time (all trays) or for back side (each tray).
I -13
Select A3 paper and press Start key to output the test pattern (No. 16).
6. Check the magnification in the sub scan direction.
Standard value
: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)
: 205.7 1mm or less
205.7 1
57gaf3c003na
Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Range
Printer FD-Mag. (both sides at a time): -100 (short) to +100 (long)
Other than the above: -80 (short) to +20 (long)
1 step = 0.01%
9. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [Set].
5.3.4 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes the magnification in image processing prior to the laser exposure.
(2) Usage
Adjust the magnification in main scanning direction.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 CD-Mag. Adjustment].
4. "CD-Mag. Adjustment screen"
This adjustment can be performed for both sides at a time (all trays) or for back side (each tray).
6. Check the magnification in the main scan direction.
Standard value
: 190 1mm or less
190
57gaf3c004na
Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting range: -100 (short) to +100 (long)
1 step = 0.01%
5.3.5 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the image erasure amount of the leading edge.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the image erasure (deleted) amount of the leading edge is not within the standard value.
I -14
Note
This adjustment method is for C7000/C6000 (copier version). C7000P/C70hc (printer version) does not have the adjustment
method.
(3) Preparation
Be sure the printer FD-Mag. Adjustment has been adjusted.
(4) Procedure
Press [05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment].
4. "Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Set the test chart to the original glass, choose a paper A3 or 11x17, and press Start key.
6. Check the leading edge erasure amount.
Standard value "a": 4 mm or less
a
57gaf3c029nb
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Exit Print Mode].
8. "Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen"
Setting Range
: -20 (narrower) to +40 (wider)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.6 Registration Loop Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration roller section.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration section.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Registration Loop Adj.].
4. "Registration Loop Adj. screen"
This adjustment can be performed for feed tray (trays, ADU), paper size (large, small, 150 mm or less of width), and paper type (plain
paper, thick paper).
Note
6. If the problem is not solved, press [Exit PrintMode].
7. "Registration Loop Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
8. Repeat the steps 4 to 7 until an appropriate value is obtained.
I -15
5.3.7 Pre-registration Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the paper loop amount in the pre-registration roller section.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the pre-registration section.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Pre-registration Adj.].
4. "Pre-registration Adj. screen"
This adjustment can be performed for feed tray (trays, ADU), paper size (large, small) and papaer weight (thick paper).
Note
7. "Pre-registration Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.8 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes line speed of the transfer belt.
(2) Usage
Adjust the magnification in sub-scanning direction.
Note
Note that there are 2 following types of method for the printer magnification adjustment in the sub scan direction.
1. FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment when the magnification in sub-scanning direction has changed because of the worn registration
roller or paper shrinkage by heat.
2. Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment under the conditions not mentioned above.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Belt Line Speed Adj.].
4. "Belt Line Speed Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Standard value
: 205.7 1mm or less
205.7 1
57gaf3c003na
8. "Belt Line Speed Adj. screen"
I -16
1 step = 0.01%
Note
Setting range is available from -100 to +100, but the optimum value is from -5 to -35. An error code may occur by entering
the value that is not within the optimum value.
5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)
(1) Functions
Store the initial position of the skew adjustment mechanism of the write unit in the NVRAM board (NRB).
(2) Usage
Execute only when the write unit is replaced to the new one.
(3) Procedure
Press [09 Writing Initial Pos. Memory].
4. "Writing Initial Pos. Memory screen"
Press [01 Skew Initial Position Memory].
5. "Skew Initial Position Memory screen"
Select the color of the replaced write unit and press [Start].
5.3.10 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Functions
The color registration misalignment of Y, M, and C of the main scan, sub scan, horizontal (main scanning direction magnification), skew and
partial horizontal (main scanning direction partial magnification) are automatically adjusted referring to K as standard.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is a color registration error.
Note
Perform this adjustment when the malfunction code C-4520 occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [10 Color Registration Auto.Adj.].
4. "Color Registration Auto.Adj. screen"
Press [Start].
5. The color registration adjustment starts and a message "Completed" is shown in about 2 minutes. If the error message appears, perform
an error correction referring to the below.
Error 1: It does not converge within the standard value.
The patch density may be too light. Check around the drum unit and perform the Gamma Automatic Adjustment. Then conduct this
adjustment again.
Error 2: The difference of the color registration is too much.
Check the installation position of the write unit.
Output the test pattern to check the image density. When the image density is abnormal, perform the gamma automatic adjustment.
Error 3: Other
The other malfunction other than the auto color registration adjustment may occur. Restart the main body in the normal mode to check
for malfunction code.
6. "Color Registration Auto.Adj. screen"
Misalignment amounts of Y, M, and C of "Main Scan", "Sub Scan", "Horizontal", and "Skew" relative to K are displayed on the panel.
(unit: pixel)
Intermediate transfer belt speed and the drum speed (new set value, old set value, result) are displayed.
5.3.11 Color Registration Manual (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Measure the misalignment amount of Y, M, and C relative to K of "Main Scan", Mag.(ALL) (whole magnification in main scanning), "Mag.
(PART)" (partial magnification in main scanning), "Sub Scan", "Incline" (skew), and "Scan Bend" (main scanning), and adjust Mag.(PART)
manually.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is a color registration error.
Note
This adjustment is for C7000/C6000 (copier version). It does not work for C7000P/C70hc (printer version). Perform ''Color
registration automatic adjustment (Printer adjustment)'' for C7000P/C70hc (printer version).
I -17
Be sure the Printer CD-Mag. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.4 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment))
Be sure the Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.10 Color Registration
(3) Procedure
Press [11 Color Registration Manual].
4. "Color Registration Manual screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. "Print Mode screen"
Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
Place the outputted test pattern [1] on the original glass securely against the original positioning plate /Lt [2] and the original positioning
plate /Rr [3], and close the DF or platen cover.
Note
When placing the test pattern onto the original glass, be sure to take care of the setting direction (with printing face down)
and position.
Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C, K) in the [Test Pattern Output Mode] is set to 255. If not, it will cause an error.
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1011
6. Press [Print Mode].

Press [Start] to scan the test pattern using the scanner.
7. Shows the misalignment amount of Y, M, and C relative to K of "Main Scan", "Mag.(ALL)" (whole magnification in main scanning), "Mag.
(PART)" (partial magnification in main scanning), Sub Scan, "Incline" (skew), and "Scan Bend" (main scanning) at "Rest" section on the
touch panel. (unit: pixel)
8. Make sure that "OK" is displayed for all the items. If the value is out of standard, "NG" and an error code will appear.
If "NG" appears for "Main Scan", "Mag.(ALL)", "Sub Scan", or "Incline", perform the Color Registration Auto.Adj. again.
Error code
Description
Cause
Error 1
Cannot detect the chart pattern
Chart misplacement
Error 2
The chart is placed upside down
Chart misplacement
Error 3
Different chart is placed
Error 4
Adjustment impossible
Software bug
Error 5
Value is out of standard
Readjust
Error 6
Non-volatile data abnormality
Check the installation position of the

NVRAM board
Error 7
Accessing to unassigned memory
Software bug
Error 8
Memory-related error
Software bug
Error 9
Program error
Software bug
Error 10
Chart is skewed
Chart misplacement
Error 11
Image header information read error
Software bug
Error 12
Parameter setting error
Software bug
Error 13
Measurement error
Chart misplacement or chart failure
I -18
9. If "NG" appears for "Main Scan", "Mag.(ALL)", or "Mag.(PART)", open the toner supply section and loosen 2 screws [1] located beside the
developing unit of a color from which an "NG" is displayed, and slide the adjusting plate [2] up and down to adjust the "Mag.(PART)"
(partial magnification in main scanning).
Moving the adjusting plate [2] upward increases the "Rest" of the "Mag.(PART)" (positive) and moving the plate downward reduces the
"Rest" (negative).
Adjustment guideline
Move the adjusting plate [2] by referring to the "Rest" of "Mag (PART)" (unit: pixel) displayed at the touch panel. The scale of the
adjusting plate [2] changes the "Rest" approx. 0.5 pixel per notch.
[2]
[1]
10. Press [Return] to return to [Printer Adjustment Menu] screen.

11. Perform the Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) (Refer to I.5.3.10 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
5.3.12 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PF)
(1) Function
Adjust the ultrasonic sensor sensitivity of the multi feed detection boards (MFDBR, MFDBS).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when replacing the PF multi feed detection board (MFDTB) or the PF drive board (PFDB). Adjust it when multi feed is
not detected properly due to specific types of paper (such as thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness, and thick paper).
Note
The multi feed detection board /S and /R are adjusted in the manufacturing process as a pair of upper and lower. Be sure to
replace them as a pair.
Adjustment error occurs because of the temperature of the sensor surface. Make the adjustment at a temperature close to the
environment in which the copier is actually used (20C to 30C). (In case you brought a new part from outdoors, make the
adjustment after the temperature of the sensor surface and the room temperature become the same)
(3) Procedure
3. "Printer Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [12 PFU Dfeed Detect Adj.].
4. Open the front door [1] of the PF, and open the jam processing guides PF2 [2] and PF5 [3] in the horizontal conveyance section.
[1]
[3]
[2]
a03uf3c025ca
I -19
5. Insert a sheet of paper [1] (part No. 65AA-991#, fusing adjustment paper, 16 sheets/A3) while turning the knob PF4 [2], and close the jam
processing guides PF2 [3] and PF5 [4]. (When there isnt paper [1], use 200g/m2 to 300g/m2 paper.)
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
a03uf3c026ca
6. "PFU Dfeed Detect Adj. screen"

Press [Start].
7. If the multi feed detection adjustment is normally completed, "Completed" is displayed. If abnormally completed, "Error" is displayed.
When the error message is displayed, repeat steps 4 to 6.
Note
When an error occurs, the adjustment data is not written but the data before the adjustment still remains.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Pull out the paper inserted in step 5.

Turn ON the sub power switch and enter the I/O check mode.
Press the Access button.
Insert a sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2), and confirm that "0" is displayed on the input check
display.
14. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all) that customer mainly uses, and confirm that "1" is displayed on the input check display.
15. Pull out the inserted papers, and install the parts removed.
5.3.13 CD-Mag. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the CY2 lens in the write unit /K and corrects the image distortion of K in main scanning direction.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is a skew in the main scan direction.
Note
Image distortion of K in main scanning direction cannot be corrected by the Color registration adjustment. (Adjusts YMC only.)
Image distortion of K in main scanning direction can also be changed by conducting [Chart Adjustment] of [Both Side Adj.] in
the User Mode.
(3) Procedure
Press [13 CD-Mag. Skew Adj.].
4. "CD-Mag. Skew Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Note
When the Start key is pressed, CY2 lenses of YMCK are adjusted and the Color registration adjustment (for approx. 2
minutes) is automatically started. When the adjustment is completed, test pattern (No.16) will be printed.
6. Check the skew in main scanning direction.
Standard value: 0.3% or less (difference between 280mm diagonal lines "a. b" is 0.84 mm or less)
a03uf3c001ca
8. "CD-Mag. Skew Adj. screen"
I -20

Setting range: -30 to +30
1 step = 0.01mm
5.3.14 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the beam pitches of LD1 to LD8 by changing the write clock.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment after replacing the write unit.
Note
Be sure that the "I.5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)" and "I.5.3.10 Color
Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment)" have been adjusted in advance.
Be sure to set the current value of the "I.5.3.15 Moire Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)" to 0 before conducting this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [14 Beam Pitch Adjustment].
4. "Beam Pitch Adjustment screen"
Confirm that the current value of [Y] is "0".
When it is other than 0, enter "0" through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Set all the current values for each color to "0" in the same way and press [Print Mode].
Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper (105g/m2 or less) and press the Start key.
6. Check the beam pitch misalignment on the 3rd column of the test chart.
The outputted charts shows in descending order the conditions with the values +10, +5, 0, -5 and -10 to/from the current value of each
colors.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Current +10
[2]
Current +5
[3]
Current
[4]
Current -5
[5]
Current -10
7. When the moires on the top and bottom are even or there is no moire [1], or the white thin line and the black thin line on the left and right
are even or there is no thin line [4]: No need to adjust.
When the moire on the bottom is strong [2] or when the white thin line appears on the left side and the black one on the right side [5]:
Adjust in "+" direction.
When the moire on the top is strong [3] or when the black thin line appears on the left side and the white one on the right side [6]: Adjust
in "-" direction.
I -21
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
The moires on the top and bottom are even or there is

no moire
[2]
The moires on the bottom is strong
[3]
The moires on the top is strong
[4]
The white thin line and the black thin line on the left and
right are even or there is no thin line
[5]
The white thin line appears on the left side and the
black one on the right side
[6]
The black thin line appears on the left side and the
white one on the right side
8. If there are any abnormalities, press [Exit PrintMode].

9. "Beam Pitch Adjustment screen"
5.3.15 Moire Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Prevent moire by lowering the laser powers of LD1 and LD8 to absorb the changes of the beam pitch interval in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Note
Be sure to complete I.5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory), I.5.3.10 Color
Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment), and I.5.3.14 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) before this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [15 Moire Adjustment].
4. "Moire Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper (105g/m2 or less) and press the Start key.
6. Check the moire.
Check the moire of each color on the 3rd column of the chart.
I -22
[1]
7. If there are any moires, press [Exit PrintMode].

8. "Moire Adjustment screen"
Setting range: 0 to 5
5.3.16 Recall Standard Data (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Reset the adjustment values of the printer adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
(2) Usage
The same adjustment table is changed since some parts of the printer adjustment can be changed by the user. Therefore, conduct this
adjustment when the adjustment values cannot be initialized because of the erroneous operation by the user.
Note
Adjustment data of "Color Registration Auto.", "Color Registration Manual", "PFU Dfeed detect Adj.", and "CD-Mag. Skew Adj."
are not restored.
(3) Procedure
Press [16 Recall Standard Data].
4. "Recall Standard Data screen"
Press [Factory Initial Data] or [Installation Initial Data].
Note
Selecting [Factory Initial Data] recalls the factory initial data.
Selecting [Installation initial data] recalls the adjustment values stored when code "91-00" of the I/O check mode was
conducted.
5. Press [Yes] to restore standard data.
Press [No] to cancel the operation.
5.3.17 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment)

(1) Functions
This adjustment changes read start timing when scanning original in sub-scanning direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image leading edge timing when scanning in platen mode.
Note
Be sure the "Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)" has been adjusted before performing this adjustment. (Refer to I.
5.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
method.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Scan Adjustment].
I -23
3. "Scan Adjustment Menu screen"

Press [01 Restart Timing Adjustment].
4. [Restart Timing Adjustment screen]
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the scan image leading edge timing.
Setting range: -10 (Image Fast) to +20 (Image Slow)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.18 Centering Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the image miss-centering in the main scan direction when scanning from the original glass and DF.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove an image miss-centering in the main scan direction when scanning from the original glass and DF.
Note
Be sure the Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.2 Centering Adjustment
method.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Centering Adjustment].
5. "Copy screen"
When you select [ADF Centering-Front] or [ADF Centering-Back], set the "Adjustment chart" on the DF, select A3 or 11 X 17 paper and
press Start key.
When you select [Orig. Glass Centering], set the "Test chart" on the original glass, select A3 or 11 X 17 paper and press Start key.
6. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction, and measure how much the left and right lines misalign from
each other.
Standard value
: within 0mm 1.5mm (Original Glass mode)
: within 0mm 2.0mm (DF mode)
Setting range: -30 (image in front) to +30 (image in back)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.19 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the magnification in sub-scanning direction in original grass mode and DF mode. This adjustment changes scan speed.
(2) Usage
Adjust the magnification in sub-scanning direction in original grass mode and DF mode.
Note
This adjustment is for C7000/C6000 (copier version). C7000P/C70hc (printer version) does not has the adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].
Press [Print Mode].
I -24
Standard value
: 200 1mm or less
200
57gaf3c005na
1 step = 0.05%
5.3.20 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scanner Adjustment)

Note
In this adjustment, use the special chart and gradation data. Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor for acquiring these items.
(1) Functions
Conduct the gradation correction of the scanner.
(2) Usage
When color reproduction is in a poor condition, usually conduct the "Gamma Automatic Adj." of the "Process Adjustment".
Conduct this adjustment if color reproduction is in a poor condition (especially in a high light area) after replacing the CCD unit, exposure lamp
(L1), original glass or each scanner mirror.
CAUTION
Scanner gradation (gamma) has been adjusted for each machine at factory. Please note that the scanner gradation data is
overwritten to the average value if the [Reset Adj. Data] in the "Scan Gradation screen" is pressed.
Once [Adj. data reset] is pressed, previous data cannot be restored.
Note
(3) Procedure
1. After replacing the part(s), set a "Color chart" on the original glass, A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press Start key.
Note
Press the hard key on the operation panel, not the soft key on the touch panel.
2. Check if there is no image background or problem in color balance.
3. If there is abnormality, enter Service mode.
Press [04 Scan Gradation/Color Adj.].
7. "Scan Gradation/Color Adj. screen"
Press [Reset Adj. Data].
CAUTION
Scanner gradation (gamma) has been adjusted for each machine at factory. Please note that the scanner gradation data is
overwritten to the average value if the [Reset Adj. Data] in the "Scan Gradation screen" is pressed.
Once [Adj. data reset] is pressed, previous data cannot be restored.
8. Press the [YES] key to overwrite the scanner gradation data to average value.
Press [No] to cancel the operation and return to the previous screen.
5.3.21 Recall Standard Data (Scanner Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Restore the scan adjustment set values to factory initial data or installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Therefore, conduct this adjustment when the adjustment values cannot be initialized because of the erroneous operation by the user or CE.
Note
Performing Recall Standard Data in Scanner Adjustment also restores the settings of "Image Distinction Level -Dot Detect
Adjustment", "ACS Adjustment" and "Density Adjustment -AE(AES) Adjustment" in Quality Adj.
I -25
(3) Procedure
Note
conducted.
5.3.22 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Functions
Adjust the gradation and the background density in a high light area by changing the printer gamma curve.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the color reproduction varies depending on the screen selected in the copy mode.
Note
Be sure the Gamma Automatic Adjustment has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.4.7 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum
Normally, adjust the printer gamma on C7000/C6000 (copier version) with "I.5.3.23 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality
Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)"
Only perform this adjustment when you want to make fine adjustments of the printer gamma or for C7000P/C70hc (printer
version).
This adjustment is not need to be conducted when conducting "Output Paper Density Adj."
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Quality Adjustment].
3. "Quality Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Printer Gamma Adjustment].
4. "Printer Gamma Adjustment screen"
Press [01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj].
5. "Printer Gamma Offset Adj. screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the screen you want to adjust.
Note
Line1, Line2, Dot1, Dot2, and Stochastic correspond to the screen names in user mode.
Contone is a screen used in the character section of Line1, Line2, Dot1, and Dot2.
Contone does not require the adjustment.
7. Set the A4 or 8 1/ x 11 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
2
8. Check the printed test pattern.
Make sure that the high light density starting section of C and K is uniform, and even between the gray reference lines [1].
[1]
Y
M
C
K
8050fs1015
9. If they are not even, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Printer Gamma Offset Adj. screen"
Press the button of a color (C or K) to adjust, enter a value through the numeric button and press [SET].
Setting range: -128 (light) to +127 (dark)
12. Take notice of the gray gradation pattern [1] created in C, M and Y, make sure that the gray balance at the square marks line [2] and [3] is
the same.
I -26
Y
M
C
K
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4] [2]
[3]
8050fs1016
13. If the gray balance is not the same, press the color (Y or M) to adjust, enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting range: -128 (light) to +127 (dark)
How to match the gray balance
Take notice of the gray block [4] made up of 49 patches created in C, M and Y.
In the 49 patches, M gets darker toward right, and Y gets darker downward. C remains unchanged.
The patch [5] at the center is the same color as the gray [2]. The patches [6] positioned at the 4 corners of the patch [5] is the same
color as the gray [3].
Out of the 49 patches, select a gray of the same gray balance as the gray [6].
Example:
When a patch on the lower right side is more suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust M and Y in the darker direction.
When a patch on the upper left side is more suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust M and Y in the lighter direction.
2
5.3.23 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Functions
Adjust the gradation and the background density in a high light area automatically by changing the printer gamma curve.
(2) Usage
Note
When conducting this adjustment, be sure to use plain paper or color copy paper. Otherwise, the adjustment is not conducted
properly because the color of the test pattern varies depending on the paper color.
To adjust the printer gamma, perform this adjustment. When a fine adjustment of the printer gamma is required, perform "I.
5.3.22 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)."
This adjutsment is for C7000/C6000 (copier version). For C7000P/C70hc (printer version), adjust with "I.5.3.22 Printer Gamma
Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)".
(3) Procedure
Press [01 Printer Gamma Adjustment]
Press [02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.].
5. "Printer Gamma Offset Auto. screen"
Note
The adjustable screens are the same as the ones in Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
The printer gamma offset value of each YMCK displayed are the current values, and they are linked with the "Printer Gamma
Offset Adj." values.
6. Press [Readjust]. To readjust, press [Yes], and press [No] to cancel the operation.
Note
When the gradation in high light area is way off, press [Reset Adj. Data] to reset the printer gamma offset value to 0, then
press [Readjust].
Set A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper and press Start key to print a test pattern.
Returns to the adjustment screen automatically when test pattern is printed.
Place the outputted test pattern [1] on the original glass securely against the original positioning plate/Lt [3] and the original positioning
plate/Rr [4].
Note
Set the test pattern so that the green triangular mark [2] comes to the left side. (printed side face down)
I -27

[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
a03uf3c030ca
10. Place 10 sheets of copy paper (white) on top of the test pattern and close the DF or the platen cover.
Note
Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gamma cannot be corrected properly.
11. Press [Start].
12. The test pattern is scanned and the current YMCK values are updated.
Note
Since the scanned result at the first scan is not examined, a "Completed" message does not appear after the first scan.
The quality examination of the value is made from the second scan. Make sure to repeat steps 8 to 11 several times until the
message "Completed normally" appears.
Press [Print Mode].
14. Perform the steps 8 to 11.
15. Confirm that the message "Completed normally" appears.
If message other than "Completed normally" is displayed, repeat steps 13 to 14.
5.3.24 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the gradation and the background density in a high light area automatically by changing the printer gamma curve.
(2) Usage
Note
Be sure to confirm that each set value of Y, M, C and K from [11 Test Mode] - [02 Test Pattern Output Mode] is not "0" in
advance. If any of the set value Y, M, C or K is "0", proper adjustment is not available.
Do not use colored paper or embossed paper for this adjustment. When using colored paper or embossed paper, this
adjustment is not performed properly.
To adjust the printer gamma, perform this adjustment. When a fine adjustment of the printer gamma is required, perform "I.
5.3.22 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)."
This adjustment is available when RU-508 or RU-509 is connected.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU)].
Note
The printer gamma offset value of each YMCK displayed are the current values, and they are linked with the "Printer Gamma
Offset Adj." values.
6. Press [Readjust]. To readjust, press [Yes], and press [No] to cancel the operation.
Note
When the gradation in high light area is way off, press [Reset Adj. Data] to reset the printer gamma offset value to 0, then
press [Readjust].
Select the paper tray. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
I -28
Note
Each set of test patterns to measure the color and to check result is outputted in twice.
The color of the test pattern is measured and the current YMCK values are updated.
Confirm that the message "Completed normally" appears.
10. When a message other than "Completed normally", an error code is displayed for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following
and repeat steps 7 to 9.
Error code
Error
Countermeasures
Error 5
Standard value cannot be obtained.

(Readjust)
Readjust
Error 14
Startup is out of the adjustment standard
Readjust
Error 18
Output paper sensor value abnormality
Readjust or replace the output paper

density sensor
5.3.25 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Functions
The printer gamma correction that is performed automatically on regular basis uses IDC sensor to read the pattern on the transfer belt.
Therefore the correction may be inaccurate depending on the characteristic changes of IDC sensor. This adjustment uses the scanner to
correct the IDC sensor, enabling precise printer gamma correction.
(2) Usage
When a poor color reproduction results even after the "Gamma Automatic Adjustment" of the "Process Adjustment", conduct this adjustment
to correct gradation.
Note
When conducting this adjustment, be sure to use plain paper or color copy paper. Otherwise, the adjustment is not conducted
properly because the color of the test pattern varies depending on the paper color.
To reset the data to factory default, press [Reset Adj. Data]. Press [Yes] to reset the printer gamma sensor adjustment to the
factory default data, and [No] to keep the current data.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj].
5. "Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. screen"
Select the screen to be adjusted.
Note
2
8. "Place output image on original glass...screen"
Place the outputted test pattern [1] on the original glass securely against the original positioning plate/Lt [3] and the original positioning
plate/Rr [4].
Note
Set the test pattern so that the green triangular mark [2] comes to the left side. (printed side face down)
I -29

[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1017
9. Place 10 sheets of copy paper (white) on top of the test pattern and close the DF or the platen cover.
Note
Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gamma cannot be corrected properly.
10. Press [Start].
11. If the chart is scanned and it is normal, the gamma sensor adjustment will be carried out, printer gamma correction is executed and
"Completed" message will be displayed.
12. When an abnormality occurs, an error code is displayed for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following and repeat steps 6 to
11.
Error code
Error
Descriptions
Error 1
A crossmark cannot be detected
Chart misplacement
Error 2
The chart is placed upside down
Chart misplacement
Error 3
Different chart is placed
Error 4
Adjustment impossible
Software bug
Error 5
Value is out of standard
Readjust
Error 6
Non-volatile data abnormality
Check the installation position of the

NVRAM board
Error 7
Accessing to unassigned memory
Software bug
Error 8
Memory-related error
Software bug
Error 9
Program error
Software bug
Error 10
Chart is skewed
Chart misplacement
Error 11
Image header information read error
Software bug
Error 12
RGB data abnormalities
Chart is different, or software bug
Error 13
Parameter setting error
Software bug
Error 31
Sensor value error
Readjust
Error 51
Regression calculation error
Readjust
Error 52
Sequential number overflow
Software bug
Error 53
Regression order error
Software bug
Error 54
Select screen information error
Software bug
Error 55
Color information error
Software bug
5.3.26 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
The printer gamma correction that is performed automatically on regular basis uses IDC sensor to read the pattern on the transfer belt.
Therefore the correction may be inaccurate depending on the characteristic changes of IDC sensor. This adjustment corrects the IDC sensor
using the color value measured by the output paper color density sensor of RU-508 or RU-509 to perform precise printer gamma correction.
(2) Usage
When a poor color reproduction results even after the "Gamma Automatic Adjustment" of the "Process Adjustment", conduct this adjustment
to correct gradation.
Note
Be sure to confirm that each set value of Y, M, C and K from [11 Test Mode] - [02 Test Pattern Output Mode] is not "0" in
advance. If any of the set value Y, M, C or K is "0", proper adjustment is not available.
Do not use colored paper or embossed paper for this adjustment. When using colored paper or embossed paper, this
adjustment is not performed properly.
To reset the data to factory default, press [Reset Adj. Data]. Press [Yes] to reset the printer gamma sensor adjustment to the
factory default data, and [No] to keep the current data.
I -30
This adjustment is available when RU-508 or RU-509 is connected.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj (RU)].
5. "Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. screen"
Select the screen to be adjusted.
Note
7. Select the paper tray. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
8. If the test pattern is measured and it is normal, the gamma sensor adjustment will be carried out, printer gamma correction is executed
and "Completed" message will be displayed.
9. When an abnormality occurs, an error code is displayed for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following and repeat steps 6 to
8.
Error code
Error
Countermeasures
Error 4
Input sensor value abnormality
Check the size of the test pattern, check the

output paper density sensor
Error 31
Acquired sensor value abnormality

(gradation reverse)
Readjust
Error 51
Regression calculation error
Readjust
5.3.27 Printer Screen Gradation (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust tone jump (in which gradation is not continuous).
(2) Usage
This adjustment is not necessary in the field.
5.3.28 Sharpness Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Conduct the sharpness adjustment or, this is carried out when moire reproduced.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the sharpness adjustment in user mode.
Note
This adjustment reflects only to the scanned image.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Sharpness Adjustment].
4. "Sharpness Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place a "Color chart" on the original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press Start key.
6. Press [Exit PrintMode].
7. Enter a value through the numeric buttons if necessary, and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (soft/less moire) to +5 (sharp/more moire)
5.3.29 Contrast Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the contrast.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the contrast adjustment in user mode.
I -31
Note
This adjustment is for C7000/6000 (copier version). C7000P/C70hc (printer version) does not have the adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Contrast Adjustment].
4. "Contrast Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place a "Color chart" on the original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press Start key.
Setting range: -5 (contrast increase) to +5 (contrast decrease)
5.3.30 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Functions
Adjust the threshold value of original image distinction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the the dot distinction result differs from the original.
Note
The scanned original is judged to text, picture, dot, or colored text by the image processing. The screen to be used is decided
according to the result.
Use this adjustment for raising the judgment precision of the original on which the area is misjudged.
To widen the judgment area of the picture, adjust it in the user mode.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Image Distinction Level].
4. "Image Distinction Level screen"
Press [01 Dot Detect Adjustment].
5. "Dot Detect Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select A3 paper, set the original to be adjusted on the original glass, and press the start button.
7. Dot detection pattern is outputted.
This output pattern shows how the original image is judged.
Cyan section: Distinguished as dot
White part: Judged as picture
Black section: Distinguished as black text
Magenta section: Distinguished as colored text
9. "Dot Detect Adjustment screen"
Select the color to adjust, enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (dot area decrease) to +5 (dot area increase)
5.3.31 Color Text Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Functions
Adjust the color text distinction threshold value of the original image.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the color text distinction function in user mode.
Note
I -32
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Color Text Adjustment].
5. "Color Text Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
7. Color text detect pattern will be printed.
9. "Color Text Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric buttons if necessary, and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (color text area decrease) to +5 (color text area increase)
5.3.32 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Functions
Adjust the dot distinction and text distinction threshold values of the original image.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the text photo distinction function in user mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Dot/Text area adjustment].
5. "Dot/Text Area Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
7. Dot/Text detection pattern is outputted.
Cyan section: Distinguished as dot
White part: Judged as picture
9. "Dot/Text Area Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -5 (dot area increase/text area decrease) to +5 (dot area decrease/text area increase)
5.3.33 ACS Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the color/black and white distinction threshold value.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when ACS (Automatic color selection) function does not work properly.
Note
(3) Procedure
I -33

Press [05 ACS Adjustment].
4. "Place original and touch [Scan] screen"
Place an original that the ACS does not work properly on the original glass and press [Scan].
5. Next to the "Judge:", the result "Color" or "Black" will be displayed.
Setting range: -5 (black) to +5 (color)
5.3.34 AE(AES) Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Functions
This adjustment moves the printer gamma curve in parallel with shade direction without changing form to adjust the copy density.
(2) Usage
Adjust to change the center value selected in automatic copy density function in user mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Density Adjustment].
4. "Density Adjustment screen"
Press [01 AE(AES) Adjustment].
5. "AE(AES) Adjustment screen"
Place an original to change the AES density on the original glass and press [Scan].
6. Next to the "Result:", the numeric value will be displayed.
7. If the "RESULT" is other than 0, enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
(e.g.: If the "Result" is 2, input -2). )
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the result becomes 0.
5.3.35 Copy Density Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Functions
(2) Usage
Adjust the density for copying.
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the "Density Shift" in user mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Copy Density Adjustment].
5. "Copy Density Adjustment screen"
Press [] or [] to select the item to adjust.
Select the mode to adjust, select A3 or 11 X 17 paper, place a "Color chart" on the original glass, and press Start key.
9. "Copy Density Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -5 (light) to 5 +(dark)
5.3.36 Back. Removal (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Functions
I -34
(2) Usage
Adjust the background density (density of highlighted area) for copying.
In user mode only a batch adjustment is enabled. Therefore, it is impossible to perform adjustment respectively for original settings or color
modes.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Background Removal].
5. "Background Removal screen"
Select the mode to adjust, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, place a "Test chart" on the original glass, and press Start key.
9. "Background Removal screen"
5.3.37 Bleed Prevention (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Functions
(2) Usage
Adjust the density of see-through image on back side of paper (density for shadow area) for copying.
In user mode only a batch adjustment is enabled. Therefore, it is impossible to perform adjustment respectively for original settings or color
modes.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Bleed Prevention].
5. "Bleed Prevention screen"
Select the mode to adjust, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, place a "Test chart" on the original glass, and press Start key.
9. "Bleed Prevention screen"
Setting range: -5 (light) to 0
5.3.38 Tone Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Conduct the tone adjustment of red, green or blue.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value for the "Tone Adjustment" in the user mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Adjust the density of each color; red, green and blue.
I -35
(a) Red
Press [07 Tone Adjustment].
4. "Tone Adjustment screen"
Press [01 Red].
5. "Red screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, place a "Color chart" on the original glass, and press Start key.
(b) Green
Press [02 Green].
5. "Green screen"
Press [Print Mode].
(c) Blue
Press [03 Blue].
5. "Blue screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5.3.39 Recall Standard Data (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Restore the quality adjustment set values to factory initial data or installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the various change by CE.
Note
Adjustment data of "Scan Gradation/Color Adj." is not restored.
The settings of "Image Distinction Level -Dot Detect Adjustment", "ACS Adjustment" and "Density Adjustment -AE(AES)
Adjustment" are not restored by performing Recall Standard Data in Quality Adj.
(3) Procedure
Note
I -36
conducted.
5.4 Process Adjustment

5.4.1 1st Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)
Do not conduct this adjustment in the field.
5.4.2 2nd Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)

5.4.3 HV Adj.(Separation AC) (High Voltage Adjustment)

5.4.4 HV Adj. (Separation DC) (High Voltage Adjustment)

5.4.5 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm (High Voltage Adjustment)

5.4.6 Blade Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Cleaning after attaching toner on the transfer belt prevents damage to the transfer belt and the cleaning blade.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the intermediate transfer belt and the cleaning blade.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Process Adjustment].
2. "Process Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.].
3. "Drum Peculiarity Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Blade Setting Mode].
4. "Blade Setting Mode screen"
Press [Intermediate Transfer Belt]. It completes in about 15 seconds then the message of completion appears on the screen.
5.4.7 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Functions
The maximum density correction, V0 correction, Vm correction, and gamma correction are executed all at once for each line speed and
quality mode.
Note
The gamma automatic adjustment has 8 adjustments (0 to 7) but be sure to execute only "0" in the field.
"1 to 7" is the adjustment for each quality mode and "0" includes all of them.
(2) Usage
Executes the image stabilization control that is executed automatically and periodically on arbitrary timing.
Executes before color calibration of the controller.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Gamma Automatic Adj.].
4. "Gamma Automatic Adj. screen"
Press [Start]. It completes in about 3.5 minutes then the charger DC bias value for each process speed (line speed 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) and each
color (Y, M, C, K) appears, and then the message of completion appears on the screen.
Note
The gamma automatic adjustment has 8 adjustments but be sure to execute only "0" in the field.
"Gamma Automatic Adj. 0": Executes Dmax adjustment, dot diameter adjustment, and gamma adjustment to all screens.
"Gamma Automatic Adj. 1 to 7": Executes the image stabilization control adjustment to each screen.
An error code is displayed when there is any trouble. Correct the error following the list below.
Error 1: Unable to execute gamma correction because of the gamma sensor output abnormality. When the error occurs, it is
controlled by using the previous correction value.
I -37
5.4.8 Auto. Developer Charge (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Puts the developer automatically into the developing unit.
(2) Usage
Use when putting in new developer automatically.
Note
After replacing developer, do not execute printing without carrying out this adjustment.
Otherwise, a proper image density cannot be obtained, and the developers need to be replaced.
Be sure not to open the cover of the developing unit. Dust in the unit causes the image trouble.
(3) Procedure
1. Open the toner supply door section. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening /closing the toner supply door section.)
2. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the upper cover /Fr [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Pull out the support stick [1].

4. Loosen 2 screws [2], and then remove the developer charge plate [3].
5. Loosen 2 screws [4], and then remove the developer charge funnel /Lw [5].
[2]
[5]
[3]
[1]
[4]
a03uf3c013ca
6. Install the developer charge plate [2] to the shoulder screw [1] on top of the developing unit to which the developer is charged.
I -38

[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
a03uf3c014ca
7. Install the developer charge funnel /Lw [2] to the developer charge plate [1].
Note
Be sure to install the leading edge of the developer charge funnel /Lw [2] to the toner supply opening [3] of the developing
unit.
[3]
[2]
[1]
a03uf3c015ca
8. Install the developer charge funnel /Up [2] that is included in the developer to the developer charge funnel /Lw [1].
Note
The developer charge funnel /Up [2] is included in the developer, so be sure not to reuse it.
I -39

[2]
[1]
a03uf3c016ca

Press [03 Auto. Developer Charge].
13. "Auto. Developer Charge screen"
Select the color of developer.
14. Press [Start] and then put new developer to the developer charge funnel /Up.
15. Confirm that the charge of developer is completed and then press [Cancel].
16. When charging another developer, repeat the steps 3 to 12.
17. Press [Return] to back to "Drum Peculiarity Adj. screen."
18. Replace the parts that have been installed.
19. Execute "TonerDensitySensorInit.Auto screen." (Refer to I.5.4.9 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
5.4.9 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Measure developer permeability in the developing unit with TCR sensor, memorize the input voltage obtained when the TCR sensor output
voltage became the standard value to the NVRAM board (NRB).
(2) Usage
Carry out this adjustment after new developer is charged, and adjust the standard toner concentration of the developer.
Note
After replacing developer, do not execute printing without carrying out this adjustment. Otherwise, a proper image density
cannot be obtained, and the developers need to be replaced.
The value displayed after the adjustment is a TCR sensor control voltage (input voltage) expressed in 8 bit.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Toner Density Sensor Init.].
4. "TonerDensitySensorInit.Auto screen"
Select the color of a developer that has been newly charged and then press the [Start].
5. A message "Completed" is displayed.
5.4.10 Initial Drum Rotation (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Functions
This operation rotates the drum at low speed to lubricate by the Lubricant applying roller it to protect the drum and the cleaning blade.
(2) Usage
Conduct this operation after replacing the drum cartridge.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Initial Drum Rotation].
4. "Initial Drum Rotation screen"
Press [Start]. It completes in about 10 seconds then the message of completion appears on the screen.
I -40
5.4.11 Toner Density Revert (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Supply toner automatically up to the standard value for the developing unit, whose output value of the TCR sensor is more than the standard
value (low toner density).
Note
When the toner density is high, set the test pattern density of the target color to 128 (set the density of other colors to 0), output
10 sheets of test pattern No.1, and check the toner density again.
(2) Usage
Recover to the normal toner density when the toner density of each color is low.
When SC that alerts low toner density occurs, recover the toner density with this recovery mode (start up the service mode).
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Toner Density Revert].
4. "Toner Density Revert screen"
Select the color(s) whose density needs to be recovered.
5. Press [Start] to supply toner to the developing unit with lower than the standard density value. When the toner concentration reaches to
the standard value, the main body stops.
Note
The output value and the state (ON/OFF) on the touch panel are corresponding to the TCR sensor output value (0V to 5V
analog display) and the state (ON/OFF) of toner supply operation.
5.4.12 Toner Density Sensor Speed (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Readjust the toner density control voltage in line speed 1 (315mm/s), line speed 3 (225mm/s), line speed 4 (207.7mm/s) and line speed 5
(150mm/s).
Note
Adjust the line speed 1, 3, 4 and 5 in C7000/C7000P/C70hc.
Adjust the line speed 4 and 5 in C6000.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when an error (image background, toner scatter) is caused by the unstable toner density at line speed 1 (315mm/s),
line speed 3 (225mm/s, line speed 4(207.7mm/s) and line speed 5 (150mm/s).
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Toner Density Sensor Speed].
4. "Toner Density Sensor Speed screen"
Press [Start].
It stops automatically after completion of the adjustment.
Note
The output value on the touch panel is corresponding to the TCR sensor output value (8bits).
5.4.13 IDC Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

Measure uncharged potential of the transfer belt by the IDC sensors (IDCS), and check the baseline controlled voltage for the maximum density
correction. (8 bit display)
5.4.14 Toner Density Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Functions
Displays the output voltage of the TCR sensor with the analog value (v).
(2) Usage
Check the toner density level in the developer for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Sensor Output Confirm].
I -41
3. "Sensor Output Confirm screen"

Press [02 Toner Density Sensor Output].
4. "Toner Density Sensor Output screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the process speed (line speed 1: 315mm/s, line speed 2: 300mm/s, line speed 3: 225mm/s, line speed
4: 207.7mm/s, line speed 5: 150mm/s) to be checked.
Note
In C7000/C7000P/C70hc, line speed 1, line speed 2, line speed 3, line speed 4, and line speed 5 can be checked.
In C6000, line speed 2, line speed 4, and line speed 5 can be checked.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select the color to be checked.

Press [Start] to display the output value of the selected items.
Press [STOP] to end the check.
When checking another line speed, repeat steps 4 to 7.
5.4.15 Humidity/Temperature Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Functions
Check the output of the temperature/humidity sensor on the main body/option.
(2) Usage
Check the temperature/humidity inside the machine.
Check the detecting condition of each sensor for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Sensor Output Confirm].
3. "Sensor Output Confirm screen"
Press [03 Humidity/Temperature Output].
4. "Humidity/Temperature Output screen"
Press [Start] to display the humidity and temperature value of the items below.
Humidity/Temperature sensor 1: Temp/humidity sensor /1 (TEM/HUM1)
Humidity/Temperature sensor 2: Temp/humidity sensor /2 (TEM/HUM2)
Fus. Roller Center Temp.Sensor: Fusing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)
Fus. Roller Edge Temp. Sensor: Fusing temperature sensor /3 (TH3)
Fus.UnderBeltCenterTemp.Sensor: Fusing temperature sensor /2 (TH2)
5. Press [STOP] to end the check.
5.4.16 Background Margin Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change potential difference between the charging potential and the developing bias.
Image background: Increase the covered margin.
White spot image/carrier damages to the drum and blade: Decrease the covered margin.
Note
Do not perform this adjustment when there is no problem. Unnecessary adjustment may cause image failure (image
background, white spot image) or damages to the drum and the cleaning blade.
There are several adjustment to reduce the image background. As a priority of adjustment, adjust in the following order.
1) Develop AC Frequency
2) Covered Margin Fine Adj.
3) Toner Density Fine Adj.
The covered margin is changed by the gamma automatic adjustment after changing the setting. (Refer to I.5.4.7 Gamma
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when image background, white spots image, or carrier scattering occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Process Fine Adjustment].
3. "Process Fine Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Covered Margin Fine Adj.].
4. "Covered Margin Fine Adj. screen"
Select the color(s) to be adjusted and enter the adjustment value with the numeric buttons, and press [SET].
Adjustment range: -5 (carrier scattering /white spot image caused by carrier prevention) to +5 (image background prevention)
1 step = 6V
Note
Take care that carrier scattering/white spot image caused by carrier prevention and image background prevention are trade
off. When either of them is improved, the other is worsened.
5. Press [Default] to restore the default settings.
I -42
5.4.17 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the developing AC bias.
Up the developing AC bias: Improve the developing ability.
Down the developing AC bias: Reduce the carrier scattering.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when noisy image, white spots image, or low developing ability occurs.
Note
After changing the set value, conduct the auto gamma adjustment. (Refer to I.5.4.7 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity
Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.].
4. "Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. screen"
Adjustment range: -5 (noisy image prevention) to +5 (improve developing ability)
1 step = 0.1kV
5.4.18 Develop AC Frequency (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change frequency of the developing AC bias to inhibit the image background, graininess, or the darker at trailing edge of the paper.
(2) Usage
Increasing the frequency of the developing AC bias improves the image background and graininess.
Lowering the frequency of the developing AC bias improves the darker at trailing edge of the paper.
Note
Take care that "image background/graininess" and "the darker at trailing edge of the paper" are trade off. When either of them is
improved, the other is worsened.
After changing the set value, conduct the auto gamma adjustment. (Refer to I.5.4.7 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity
Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Develop AC Frequency].
4. "Develop AC Frequency screen"
Adjustment range: -5 (improve reproducibility of outline characters on a colored background) to +5 (image background prevention)
1 step = 0.3kHz
5.4.19 Toner Density Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Change the TCR sensor control voltage.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when image background, toner scattering, carrier scattering, or white spot caused by carrier occurs.
Note
To reflect the change immediately, conduct the toner refresh mode (Machine Screen - Adjustment - Execute Adjust Operation)
and the gamma automatic adjustment. (Refer to I.5.4.7 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
I -43

Press [04 Toner Density Fine Adj.].
4. "Toner Density Fine Adj. screen"
Adjustment range: -5 (image background, toner scattering prevention) to +5 (carrier scattering, white spot caused by carrier prevention)
1 step = 0.1%
5.4.20 Drum Small Rotation Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)

(1) Function
Change interval of low humidity environment correction control (rotates drums periodically).
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when image failures caused by a uneven drum charging potential (that occurs easily with low humidity) occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Interval/Quantity Adj.].
3. "Interval/Quantity Adj. Menu screen"
Press [01 Drum Small Rotation Interval].
4. "Drum Small Rotation Interval screen"
Enter the adjustment value with the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Adjustment range: +1 to +5
1 step = 1 minute
5.4.21 Automatic Refresh Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)

(1) Function
Set the execution intervals and the toner consumption amount of the toner refresh mode*.
* Checks the average of print coverage for each color with each specific drive distance of the developing roller /K and consumes a certain
amount of toner for the color that the density is lower than 5% converted in A4 size after completion of printing.
(Toner refresh required time: About 2.5 minutes)
(2) Usage
Change the setting when rough image, overflow toner, or white spot occurs on the low coverage printing (5% or lower for each color in A4
size).
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Automatic Refresh Interval].
4. "Automatic Refresh Interval screen"
Specify the settings of each adjustment item, "Execution existence", "Execution frequency" and "Refresh quantity", and press [OK]
to enable the new settings.
"Execution existence": [OFF], [ON]
"Execution frequency":
[small] - Equivalent to A4 continuous 1,000 prints
[middle] - Equivalent to A4 continuous 500 prints
[large] - Equivalent to A4 continuous 330 prints
"Refresh quantity":
[small] - Equivalent to A3 solid 3 sheets
[middle] - Equivalent to A3 solid 5 sheets
[large] - Equivalent to A3 solid 8 sheets
Note
The execution frequency varies depending on the environmental temperature and print mode.
5. Press [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
5.4.22 Toner Density Sensor Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)

(1) Functions
Change the correction interval of the TCR sensor control voltage at line speed 1 (315mm/s), line speed 3 (225mm/s), line speed 4 (207.7mm/
s), line speed 5 (150mm/s).
Execute automatically for every specified drive distance of the developing roller /K.
Note
In C7000/C7000P/C70hc, change the correction interval of the line speed 1, line speed 3, line speed 4, line speed 5.
I -44
In C6000, change the correction interval of the line speed 4 and line speed 5.
(2) Usage
This adjustment does not affect the productivity. Therefore, do not set it to the direction to widen the interval.
When there is a claim that the stabilization control between jobs is too much, set it to the direction to widen the interval. However, since the
interval of the toner density correction control gets extended at line speed 1 (315mm/s), line speed 3 (225mm/s), line speed 4 (207.7mm/s),
line speed 5 (150mm/s), the density variation tends to occur.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Toner Dens. Sensor Interval].
4. "Toner Dens. Sensor Interval screen"
Select an interval and press [OK].
5. Press [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
5.4.23 Recall Standard Data

(1) Functions
Reset the adjustment values of the process adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
Note
Items that can be recalled
1st Transfer Manual Adj.
2nd Transfer Manual Adj.
HV Adj.(Separation AC)
HV Adj.(Separation DC)
Charge potential automatic adjustment
LD Bias Adjustment
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the change by CE.
(3) Procedure
Note
conducted.
5.5 System Setting

5.5.1 Software DIPSW setting procedures
(1) OUTLINE
Set the software DIPSW.
Note
Do not change any switch not described in the service manual.
(2) Procedure
Press [03 System Setting].
2. "System Setting Menu screen"
Press [01 Software DIPSW Setting].
3. "Software switch setting mode screen"
Press [] / [] or numeric buttons after pressing the "DIPSW number" and "Bit number" buttons.
4. Press [On (1)] or [Off (0)] to set the selected bit number ON/OFF.
I -45
(3) Software DIPSW setting screen
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
DIPSW data (indicates the 8bit values of the selected

DIPSW numbers in hexadecimals from 00 to FF.)
[2]
DIPSW number
[3]
Bit number (0 to 7)
[4]
Bit data: 1:ON, 0:OFF
[5]
Numeric buttons
[6]
5.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Set value
Display of process adjustment on user screen
Inch
Metric
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Note display when fusing JAM occurs

Displays the handling for the fusing JAM on
"Paper Setting" screen - [Change IndividualSet].
To enable this setting, enable DIPSW1-0
Process adjustment user screen display.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Print stop method after displaying toner supply

or waste toner full display
(Decide the copier operation when detecting no
toner or waste toner full.)
Stops after ejecting paper in the

machine: 1-3=0, 1-2=0
Stops at a break between copy
set: 1-3=0, 1-2=1
Stops at the end of the current
job: 1-3=1, 1-2=0
Does not stop: 1-3=1, 1-2=1
Printing prohibition when the maintenance count

is reached
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Number of allowed print quantity after reaching

the maintenance count
6
7
Default setting
Japan
1,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=0, 1-5=0

2,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=0, 1-5=1
3,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=0
4,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=1
5,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=0
1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=1
1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=1, 1-5=0
1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=1, 1-5=1
Hard disk drive connection recognition
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: 1: -
2
3
4
5
Adjustment value combination ratio in the

density balance adjustment
Set the combination (merging) ratio of
adjustment value when registering the profile
that has been registered on "Machine Screen" "Adjustment" - "Density Balance Adjustment".
This setting changes the color/gradation
drastically because of the change of engine
process element. Use this setting to change the
ratio for merging the profile.
Note
I -46
5:5 = new:old adjustment value:

2-6=0, 2-5=0
2-6=0, 2-5=1
2-6=1, 2-5=0
2-6=1, 2-5=1

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Set value
Merging the profile is available between the

data whose conditions; "Screen", "Paper
Type", and "Weight" are matched.
Polygon motor rotation speed switchover

Polygon motor rotation speed switchover is
available to reduce the operation sound during
idling.
The default setting keeps the speed of previous
print.
Inch
Metric
0: Speed when printing

completes
1: 2/3 speed
0: 1: -
Malfunction code latch (C1540 to 1562, 3501 to

3916)
0: Unlatched
1: Latched
Reverse de-curler roller preliminary rotation
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: 1: -
The maximum stacking capacity selection in

small-size (longer side 250mm to 319mm) of
FS-521 in shift mode
The maximum stacking capacity of the main tray
can be changed from 1500 to 3000 in FS-521
shift mode.
0: Stops at the tray middle

position sensor (PS6) (loading
1500 sheets)
1: Stops at the tray lower limit
sensor (PS3) (loading 3000
sheets)
I/O check mode output15 memory clear
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Carrying over the job for next day

Switches the function of carrying over the job for
next day
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Air assist shutter control (PF)
0: Enabled
1:Disabled
Paper exit de-curler roller pressure setting /1
0: Normal
1: For moisturized paper
0: 1: -
3
4
Paper exit de-curler roller pressure setting /2
0: Normal
1: For crease at leading edge in
duplex printing
APS when change magnification
0: Enabled
1:Disabled
0: 1: -
7
5
Default setting
Japan
For fusing unit per size

0: Disabled
Set this setting for using the fusing unit per size
1: Enabled
when paper edge scratches occur on the image.
The fusing unit A/B is recognized with the short
connector on the fusing side and can be counted
per fusing unit.
Note
When this setting is enabled, ORU-M
cannot be used.
0: 1: -
2
3
4
Fusing jam blank paper cleaning

To clean the toner on the fusing belt, a screen to
select whether to feed blank paper or not
appears on the touch panel at printing after the
fusing related jam process.
The blank paper is output to the tray other than
during printing.
0: Enabled
1:Disabled
0: 1: -
Life message display timing of the dust proof

filter /1
0: 180,000 prints: near life

(200,000 prints: life)
1: 200,000 prints: near life
(220,000 prints: life)
I -47

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Set value
Inch
Metric
Print at reaching life of the dust proof filter /1
0: Allow
1:Restrict
Faulty part isolation: FD-fold, punch function
Faulty part isolation: FD main tray paper exit
0: Normal
1: Unusable
Faulty part isolation: FD post insert function
Faulty part isolation: FS staple function
Faulty part isolation: FS main tray paper exit
Faulty part isolation: FS
Faulty part isolation: LS main tray paper exit

(1st)
Faulty part isolation: LS main tray paper exit

(2nd)
Faulty part isolation: SD saddle stitch
Faulty part isolation: SD multi-center fold
Faulty part isolation: SD multi-tri-fold
Faulty part isolation: SD trimming
Faulty part isolation: SD-tandem conveyance,

sub tray paper exit
Faulty part isolation: PB cover paper insertion
Faulty part isolation: PB binder function
Faulty part isolation: PB
0: 1: -
Default setting
Japan
For JAM in the reverse paper exit section

Prevents paper from overlapping when JAM
occurs on the thin paper, 81/2 x 11 size paper in
the reverse paper exit section by increasing the
reversing speed.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (jam prevention)
0: 1: -
Custom size counter threshold setting

When setting the DIPSW to 1, the custom size
threshold of the counter per size can be set. Set
the threshold from "Service Mode" - "04
Counter/Data" - "Custom Counter Threshold
Set."
Note
When this setting is set to "1", it may be
counted twice even when the paper length in
the sub scan direction is shorter than the
value set in DIPSW33-2, 3 TC double count
size setting.
0: Not display
1: Display
0: 1: -
Copy quantity limit
No limit: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,

9-4=0
1 sheet: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
3 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
5 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
9 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=0
10 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
20 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
30 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
5
6
I -48

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Set value
10
Inch
Metric
50 sheets: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,

9-4=0
99 sheets: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=0
No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
0: 1: -
Hard disk image memory
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: 1: -
3
4
11
Default setting
Japan
Custom size tolerance setting
0: 2mm
1: 10mm
Image rotation for the custom size paper and

large size paper
0: Rotate
1: Not rotate
0: 1: -
0
1
Productivity down during toner supplying

operation
Toner empty may be indicated right after
replacing the toner bottle.It occurs when the
toner is not supplied to the toner hopper due to
the low fluidity of the toner in the toner bottle.
When this problem occurs, set the setting to 1 to
prevent the toner empty indication with the toner
bottle not empty.
Note
When this setting is set to 1, it performs the
toner bottle rotation operation (toner
supplying operation to the toner hopper)
longer time than usual control. At this time,
the paper interval is widened to reduce the
productivity.
0: Normal toner supplying

operation (productivity not
reduced during toner supplying
operation
1: Extended toner supplying
operation (productivity reduced
during toner supplying
operation
SD multi-center folding number limit
0: Enabled
1:Disabled (up to 50 sheets)
Automatic restart of the job under suspension
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: 1: -
I -49

DIPSW
12
Bit
Function
Set value
Inch
Metric
Thick BK Mode setting

0: Disabled
Reduces the banding which occurs on 230mm
1: Enabled
away from the paper leading edge at printing the
B/W half tone image on thick paper.
Set this setting to "1" to display "Thick BK Mode"
on the User Setting/Administrator Setting so that
the user can turn ON/OFF the banding reduce
mode.
When the mode is set to ON, the 1st transfer
roller of each YMC color is pressed at printing in
B/W mode and operates in color mode.
Note
Use only thick paper on which the banding
occurs.
Since it operates in color mode even for the
print in B/W mode, the total counter is
counted as B/W and the maintenance
counter is counted as color. (Developing of
YMC is not executed but the agitation of the
developing unit is executed. Therefore, the
life of the developer is shorten.)
Toner scattering or color image trouble may
occur when a color print is executed after
using this mode for the continuous print with
1000 sheets of paper or more.
Automatic paper supply
Jam code display
Counter per mode (2)
0: No.1 to No.9 Not display the

count per color mode
1: No.1 to No.9 Display the
count per color mode
OFF setting of auto low power and auto shut off
0: One is possible
1: Both are possible
0: 1: -
0: 1: -
0: 1: -
13
Default setting
Japan
Erratic pagination detection

0: Disabled
Setting this setting to 1 detects the erratic
1: Enabled
pagination during job and the print operation is
stopped. The following patterns can be detected;
page missing, page switching, page disordering,
page overlapping, and mis-inserted number of
blank page.
Konica Minolta logo when power switch is turned 0: Enabled

ON
1:Disabled
Faulty part isolation: Multi-punch function (GP)
Faulty part isolation: PB-503 subsequent stage

FNS
Faulty part isolation: RU-509 humidifier function
Faulty part isolation: RU-509 color sensor unit
0: Normal
1: Unusable
0: 1: -
I -50

DIPSW
14
Bit
Function
Set value
Output paper density adjustment exit tray

switchover for the test pattern
This switch is for switching the sub tray on which
the test pattern of the output paper density
adjustment is ejected. When the output paper
density adjustment is performed while the sub
tray is set as the tray for the normal paper, the
normal paper and the test pattern are mixed on
the sub tray. When this setting is set to "1", the
test pattern is ejected on the sub tray other than
that for the normal paper. This setting is also
applied to the sample print and the needless tab
exit.
Note
When this setting is set to "1", the
productivity is reduced.
Both of the normal paper and needless
paper are ejected on the same sub tray even
after setting this setting to "1", when there is
no other way but to eject on the same sub
tray.
Black-and-white quality adjustment of Network

scanner
The purpose of this setting is to improve the
gradation of black-and-white 2-value scan.
When this setting is set to "1", the error diffusion
operation is performed in the black-and-white
mode of the Network scanner. "Quality Adj." in
"Scan Settings" can be adjusted.
Note
The setting to "1" is valid only when IC-601
is connected. When the other controller is
connected, do not set this setting to "1".
When this setting is set to "1", the
recognition rate of OCR is decreased.
Flat-staple jam recovery operation setting

When the staple jam in FS-521 occurs and the
paper remaining inside the stacker is removed
by the operator, the missing pages or uneven
stapling occurs. To prevent the missing pages or
uneven stapling, set this setting to 1 to display
an additional message for jam cleaning.
Default setting
Japan
Inch
Metric
0: Page recovery
1: Copy recovery
Recall previous job when reserving next job

The setting condition for copy can be kept for
the next job by "Pre-Job Recall."
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Utility counter display switchover
0: Normal display
1: Counter display per size
Printer 1200dpi compression mode

Standard compression (image
Use this mode when image deterioration occurs
area resolution priority): 14-3=0,
14-2=0 (Controller image
on the border of the image area or jaggy occurs
on the outlines of the letters or lines of the image
compression setting:
area.
[Standard], [Resolution Priority])
By setting to the standard compression (image
Antialiasing compression
(image area resolution priority):
area resolution priority): 14-3=0, 14-2=0, the
14-3=0, 14-2=1 (not used)
image area is also processed in 1200dpi.
(Controller image compression
Note
setting: "Anti-aliasing",
This setting is associated with "Utility" "Resolution Priority")
"Administrator Setting" - "System Setting" "Expert Adjustment"- "Image Quality Setting Standard compression (image
"- "06 Controller Image Comp. Set"
"Standard", "Gradation Priority")
(image area gradation priority):
14-3=1, 14-2=1 (Controller
image compression setting:
"Anti-aliasing", "Gradation
Priority")
I -51
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Set value
15
Inch
Metric

[Standard], [Resolution Priority])
(image area resolution priority):
14-3=0, 14-2=1 (Controller
"Anti-aliasing", "Resolution
Priority")
"Standard", "Gradation Priority")
(image area gradation priority):
14-3=1, 14-2=1 (Controller
"Anti-aliasing", "Gradation
Priority")
For copitrak
Set to 1 when connecting the billing
management device from copitrak. The interface
specification is as follows.
RS232C
Baud rate 9600
Bits 8
No parity
No flow control
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
ISO Metric mode
0: JIS
1:ISO
HDD Encryption button display

Displays [Encrypt] button with [HDD Store]
button on [JOB LIST] - [Hold Job] screen.
Set this setting enabled to encrypt the hold job
stored in HDD.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
CSRC used NIC
0:Controller NIC
1:Main body NIC
ORU-M operator release setting
0: ORU-M unavailable
1: ORU-M available
0: 1: -
PM life display
0: Enabled
1:Disabled
Finishing option alarm stop

Select the alarm stop condition. Alarm stop
means to detect the next function.
FD/FS/LS tray lower limit, FD/FS/LS/SD tray
paper full, FD/PK punch scraps full, FS staple
scraps full, SD trimming scraps full
Stops immediately after

detection: 15-4=0, 15-3=0
Stops at a break between print
set after detection: 15-4=0,
15-3=1
Does not stop while printing:
15-4=1, 15-3=0
Does not stop while printing:
15-4=1, 15-3=1
CS Remote Care recognition
Address reset after scanning
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
LDAP function
Use this function to search E-mail address using
LDAP server.
When setting to 1 (enabled), "LDAP Search"
button is displayed from "Scanner" - "E-mail" "Search" and enables the E-mail address
search.
(Need to turn ON/OFF the main body after
changing the setting.)
Scanner magnification setting
Box name input in Japanese
16
Default setting
Japan
0: 1: -
I -52

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Set value
Inch
Metric
Utility menu mode installation date display
0: Enabled
1:Disabled
Dehumidification heater temperature control

(LU/PF)
With LU/PF option dehumidifier heater is
connected, this switch is used to set control
temperature when dehumidifier fan heater
control is set to [Compulsive ON] in the Utility
mode.
Environment temperature + 6
C: 16-6=0, 16-5=0
C: 16-6=0, 16-5=1
Environment temperature +10
C: 16-6=1, 16-5=0
C: 16-6=1, 16-5=1
ORU-M developing unit counter setting

User can enter the life counter (distance and
quantity) of the developing unit.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: 1: -
Brightness level 80: 17-6=0,

17-5=0, 17-4=0
Brightness level 40 (weakest):
17-6=0, 17-5=0, 17-4=1
17-5=1, 17-4=0
17-5=1, 17-4=1
17-5=0, 17-4=0
17-5=0, 17-4=1
17-5=1, 17-4=0
Brightness level 255
(strongest): 17-6=1, 17-5=1,
17-4=1
Default change for the tray humidifier setting

Switch the default of humidifier ON and OFF
(which is set automatically based on the paper
type) for the plain or fine paper through the
paper setting of the tray.
0: ON
1: OFF
Faulty part isolation: Tray /1
0: Normal
1: Unusable
Faulty part isolation: Tray /4 (LU)
Print during dehumidification heater temperature

control (LU/PF)
0: Restrict
1: Allow
Faulty part isolation: FS center folding, saddle

stitch
0: Normal
1: Unusable
Faulty part isolation: PI
5
6
19
Japan
Density selection at scanning tab paper

(Set the background optical density at scanning
tab paper.)
18
Default setting
17
Faulty part isolation: HDD
0: 1: -
Fusing upper and lower roller temperature

selection
Change the standard control temperature of
fusing. Decrease temperature against paper
curling or waving and increase temperature
against insufficient fusing or fusing winding jam.
2
3
Multi-feed detection (PF)
-30 C: 19-3=0, 19-2=0, 19-1=0

-20 C: 19-3=0, 19-2=0, 19-1=1
-10 C: 19-3=0, 19-2=1, 19-1=0
Standard: 19-3=0, 19-2=1,
19-1=1
Upper roller standard, lower
roller +10 C: 19-3=1, 19-2=0,
19-1=0
Standard: 19-3=1, 19-2=0,
19-1=1
Standard: 19-3=1, 19-2=1,
19-1=0
Standard: 19-3=1, 19-2=1,
19-1=1
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
I -53

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Set value
Inch
Metric
Faulty part isolation: PK
0: Normal
1: Unusable
Developing motor stop control during printing
Normal (automatic switchover):

19-7=0, 19-6=0
Rotation at 1/4 speed when
image is not developed:
19-7=0, 19-6=1
OFF when image is not
developed: 19-7=1, 19-6=0
Normal (automatic switchover):
19-7=1, 19-6=1
20
Group staple
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Image scanning area with image shift
0: Normal
1: Original priority
Total page number standard in stamp mode
0: Based on original
1: Based on transfer paper
0: 1: -
4
5
Curl adjustment setting after auto reset

Reset the value of "Paper Setting" - "Curl
Adjustment" to 0 at auto reset and set whether
to reset the humidifier setting to default or not.
Note
The default (ON/OFF) of the humidifier
setting differs depending on the paper type
and weight.
0: Not reset
1: Reset
0: 1: -
7
21
PB perfect binding limit number switchover
0: Fine/Color/Coated table
1: Plain table
PB warm-up control switchover (effective by

power OFF/ON after the setting change)
0: Warm-up during power ON

1: No warm-up during power
ON
PB heater control switchover (effective by power

OFF/ON after the setting change)
0: Heater turns OFF

automatically in 1 minute after
finishing perfect binding.
1: Heater does not turn OFF
automatically in 1 minute after
finishing perfect binding.
257 to 300g/m2 paper exit with its face up
0: Restrict
1: Allow
0: 1: -
22
Machine NIC setting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Number of punch holes (effective by power OFF/

ON after the setting change)
Change the prohibition control by paper size,
which differs depending on the number of punch
holes. Also change the number of holes on the
punch hole select screen of user mode.
2-Hole: 22-2=0, 22-1=0

2/3-hole switchover: 22-2=0,
22-1=1
2/4-hole switchover Swedish 4holes: 22-2=1, 22-1=0
-: 22-2=1, 22-1=1
Image position for the custom size original

(when using DF)
0: Based on user selection

1: Based on APS at DF
Power save key function
0: Enabled
1:Disabled
SD trimming board adjustment display
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Operation when staple empty of FS
0:Staple supply request

1: Selecting between staple
supply or staple release
0: 1: -
23
Default setting
Japan
I -54

DIPSW
24
Bit
Function
Set value
Default setting
Inch
Metric
Operation when stores the maximum hold job

100 hold jobs can be stored at maximum. This
function sets the operation when 100 jobs are
stored.
0: Not delete automatically

(restrict to receive copier/printer
hold job)
1: Delete the oldest hold job
and receive new job
Precision of the color registration automatic

correction (during printing)
Change the accuracy of color registration
correction that is performed periodically during
printing. If fine is selected, the registration
accuracy improves by approx. 0.5 pixels, but the
correction time takes 2 minutes longer.
0: Normal
1: Fine
Control of the color registration automatic

correction (periodical correction)
Down time while in the continuous printing is
reduced by disable the color registration
correction that is performed periodically. (Color
registration correction when the fusing
temperature is lower than the specified
temperature at power ON is not omitted.)
0: Enabled
1:Disabled
Color registration automatic correction in main

scan direction (periodical correction)
The color registration correction that is
performed periodically can be disabled in the
main scan direction only. This is used
temporarily when there is a registration error
along the main scan as a result of a trouble
around the transfer belt unit, or when isolating
faulty part.
Gamma correction (IC)
FS-521 rear side staple angle (effective by

0: 45 degrees diagonal
1:Parallel
Punch auto switching (PK/FD) (effective by

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Simple-gamma correction counter reset
0: Reset when print job is

started
1: Not reset when print job is
started
Image stabilization control during idling

Switches the image stabilization control during
idling.
When the environmental humidity during idling
reaches the specified level while this setting is
disabled, the image stabilization control is
executed before starting next job.
Since the image stabilization control is executed
at starting job after idling, there is a waiting time
at this point.
While this setting is enabled, the image
stabilization control is executed when the
environmental humidity during idling reaches the
specified level.
Since the image stabilization control is executed
when the environmental humidity during idling
reaches the specified level, there is fewer
waiting time at starting printing. However, since
the number of executing the image stabilization
control increases under the environment with
large humidity gap, the lives of the developer
and drum are shorten.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Image stabilization control
0: Enabled
1:Disabled
I -55
Japan

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Set value
Inch
Metric
Image stabilization priority periodic adjustment

0: Enabled
When [Stability] is selected from "Utility" 1: Disabled
"Quality Adjustment" - [04 Stabilization Adj.
Setting] and the color and image density are
largely changed before and after the image
stabilization control between jobs, change the
setting to disabled.
When this setting is set to disabled and
[Stability] is selected, the job is stopped and the
image stabilization control is not executed on the
continuous printing.
Developing preparatory rotation after long time

idling
Enable this setting when the image density is
not stable after long time idling.
Select one of the developing preparatory
rotation after long time idling from 3 patterns to
set. However, the more the number of the
preparatory rotation is, the shorter the lives of
the developer and drum are.
Not execute: 24-5=0, 24-4=0

Every 1 hour during idling:
24-5=0, 24-4=1
At starting printing after idling
for more than 1 hour: 24-5=1,
24-4=0
-: 24-5=1, 24-4=1
0: 1: -
6
7
25
3
4
26
Default setting
Color registration automatic correction control

Change the timing of periodical color registration
correction control or disable the correction.
Enabled: Correction is performed by suspending
print at specified print.
Disable: Correction is omitted temporarily to
reduce down time when the machine cannot be
used with malfunction code related to the IDC
sensor.
No performed during printing: Correction that is
performed by suspending print at every specified
print is performed after the print job to reduce
down time.
Enabled: 25-4=0, 25-3=0

Disabled: 25-4=0, 25-3=1
No performed during printing:
25-4=1, 25-3=0
-: 25-4=1, 25-3=1
Japan
Precision of the color registration automatic

0: Normal
correction
1: Speed priority
Change the accuracy of color registration
correction that is performed automatically. If
speed preference is selected, the correction time
can be shorten. Correction time of "speed
preference" is approx. 30 seconds.
0: 1: -
Dehumidification heater
0: Enabled
1:Disabled
Trigger judgment of the color registration

automatic correction
Set the standard to judge the timing to execute
the color registration correction.
0: Process mount temperature

(Execute the color registration
correction when the process
mount temperature changes
more than the specified level
from the previous correction.)
1: Number of print pages

(Execute the color registration
correction after printing
specified pages from the
previous correction.)
I -56

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Set value
Drum speed automatic adjustment

Execute "Color Registration Auto.Adj." from
"Service Mode" - "Machine Adjustment" "Printer Adjustment" to adjust the drum speed to
the proper speed for the intermediate transfer
belt speed automatically before the color
registration automatic adjustment.
Set this setting disabled when a trouble occurs
in the drum speed automatic adjustment or the
color registration automatic adjustment.
Note
Do not disable this setting normally.
Inch
Metric
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: 1: -
Multi-feed detection (PI/FD) (effective by power

OFF/ON after the setting change)
0: Enabled
1:Disabled
Printer auto centering correction (LU/PF)
Printer auto centering correction (ADU)
0: 1: -
7
27
Default setting
Japan
0
1
Band creation control for drum cleaning

As the default setting, the toner band is created
on specified paper intervals to prevent lines in
the sub scan direction under a high temperature
environment.
NOTE
When the lines in the sub scan direction
occur on the half tone image to factors other
than the high temperature environments, set
this setting to "Create under any
environment" to prevent the lines in the sub
scan direction. However, the productivity is
reduced.
The productivity is improved by setting this
setting to "Not create" when the image
quality does not matter.
When setting to "Create under any
environment", cleaning fault may occur
under the low humidity environment.
The effect is not seen right after changing
the setting. Therefore, print around 500
sheets (A4) after changing the setting.
This setting is associated with "Utility" "Administrator Setting" - "System Setting" "Expert Adjustment"- "Process Setting "- "04
FD Line Reduction Mode"
I -57
Create under high temperature

environment: 27-2=0, 27-1=0
Create under high temperature
environment and normal
temperature environment:
27-2=0, 27-1=1
Create under any environment:
27-2=1, 27-1=0
Not create: 27-2=1, 27-1=1

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Set value
Band creation control for drum cleaning

As the default setting, the toner band is created
on specified paper intervals to prevent lines in
the sub scan direction under a high temperature
environment.
NOTE
When the lines in the sub scan direction
occur on the half tone image to factors other
than the high temperature environments, set
this setting to "Create under any
environment" to prevent the lines in the sub
scan direction. However, the productivity is
reduced.
The productivity is improved by setting this
setting to "Not create" when the image
quality does not matter.
When setting to "Create under any
environment", cleaning fault may occur
under the low humidity environment.
The effect is not seen right after changing
the setting. Therefore, print around 500
sheets (A4) after changing the setting.
This setting is associated with "Utility" "Administrator Setting" - "System Setting" "Expert Adjustment"- "Process Setting "- "04
FD Line Reduction Mode"
Fusing separation fan abnormality detection

Enables the main body temporarily when a fan
abnormality of the fusing separation fans /1
(FM7), /2 (FM8) and /3 (FM9) occurs.
Note
Set this setting disabled to activate the
machine without rotating the fan when an
error code related to FM7, FM8, FM9 occurs.
Therefore, a wrapping jam in the fusing
section may occur.
Inch
Metric
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0: 1: -
28
29
Default switch on the ticket edit screen

Set the default to be reflected from "Paper
Setting" - "Paper Type" on the job ticket edit
screen.
0: Current Sheet
1: All Sheet
LS main tray paper exit limit switchover
0: Limit by weight
1: 5000 sheets uniformly
0: 1: -
Inclusion of proof copy to the set copy quantity
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: 1: -
30
Default setting
Japan
PB perfect binding minimum number of the

inside paper
0: Follow the setting of the

Utility menu
1: 6 sheets (81g/m2 or more)
0: 1: -
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
1
Restriction of the display of the service mode

"List output"
I -58

DIPSW
Bit
2
Function
Set value
0: 1: -
3
4
0: Enabled
1:Disabled
0: 1: -
0
1
SRA4, SRA3 main tray paper exit of FS-612
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Z-fold max. paper exit capacity: FS-521 main

tray
Z-fold, center-fold max paper exit capacity: FD
main tray
Set the max stacking capacity of paper which is
Z-folded or center-folded by FD on the FS or FD
main tray during continuous printing. If folding
performance is poor and causing paper jam or
dropping from tray, reduce the max. stacking
capacity of folded paper using this switch.
(effective by power OFF/ON after the setting
change)
50 sheets: 31-3=0, 31-2=0

40 sheets: 31-3=0, 31-2=1
30 sheets: 31-3=1, 31-2=0
20 sheets: 31-3=1, 31-2=1
FS-521 Z-fold + Staple number limit

Set the max number of FS-521 Staple Z-folded
paper included in 50 sheets (A3 size).
5 sheets: 31-5=0, 31-4=0

8 sheets: 31-5=0, 31-4=1
10 sheets: 31-5=1, 31-4=0
3 sheets: 31-5=1, 31-4=1
0: 1: -
7
0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: 1: -
Contone output of solid text (IC)
Inner trapping (IC)
33
Metric
PB perfect binding limit (includes Z-Fold)
32
Inch
7
31
Default setting
Japan
0: 1 count
1: 2 count
TC black and white large size count method

Set the count number to the double count size
paper which is set with DIPSW33-2/3 in black
and white printing.
TC color large size count method

Set the count number to the double count size
paper which is set with DIPSW33-2/3 in color
printing.
TC double count size setting

Set the threshold of the double count size in the
sub scan direction.
Paper whose length in the sub scan direction is
more than the specified length is counted as the
double count size with the combination of
DIPSW33-2 and DIPSW33-3.
330mm or more in the sub scan

direction: 33-3=0, 33-2=0
direction (except for the U.S):
33-3=0, 33-2=1
direction (the U.S): 33-3=1,
33-2=0
All size is counted as small
size: 33-3=1, 33-2=1
0: 1: -
Counter display when charge counter setting is

set
When this setting is set to "1", the counter items
other than "Billing Total Counter" are not
displayed on the "Utility" screen.
Note
This setting is valid when the DIPSW33-7=1.
0: Display items other than

Billing Total Counter
1: Display Billing Total Counter
only
Charge count setting

When setting this setting to 1, "Total Counter" in
the utility mode is changed to "Billing Total
Counter."
0:Disabled
1: Enabled (displays "Billing
Total Counter")
4
5
I -59

DIPSW
Bit
34
Function
Set value
Inch
Metric
0: Normal
1: Unusable
0: 1: -
0: 1: -
35
Faulty part isolation: Tray /4 (PF)
Faulty part isolation: Tray /5 (PF)
36
MB-504 Connection recognition
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: 1: -
37
Default setting
Japan
ORU-M password authentication setting

Activate the password authentication to enter
the ORU-M mode.
0: password authentication
invalid
1: password authentication
valid
ORU-M print mode display setting

Set whether to display the sample output button
on the ORU-M mode.
0: Display
1: Not display
ORU-M replace reason input setting

Set whether to input the reason when replacing
the parts in the ORU-M mode.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
ORU-M printer gamma offset adjustment priority

setting
Perform the printer gamma offset adjustment
after completion of the replacement of the
developing unit or developer in the ORU-M
mode. This setting set the printer gamma offset
automatic adjustment method with both RU and
the scanner connected.
NOTE
The priority of the adjustments varies
depending on whether the Scanner and RU
are connected.
When the RU is connected while the
scanner is not, RU automatic adjustment is
performed.
When RU is not connected while the
scanner is connected, the scanner automatic
adjustment is performed.
When neither RU nor Scanner is connected,
manual adjustment is selected.
0: Scanner automatic
adjustment priority
1: RU automatic adjustment
priority
0: 1: -
Output the hold job for specified number

This setting displays the pop-up screen to input
the number of set when outputting the hold job.
With this setting, the number of sets to be output
can be changed.
0: OFF
1: ON
I -60

DIPSW
38
Bit
Function

Set value
Inch
Metric
Output paper density adjustment Dmax display

When this setting is set to "1", "Adj. data History"
button is displayed on the "Output Paper Density
Manual Adj. screen". The history of Dmax value
for each color measured in the output paper
density manual adjustment is displayed by
selecting paper from the list and pressing the
"Adj. data History" button. Up to the last 10
Dmax values are displayed in order from the
newest.
Output paper density adjustment plain paper

compliant on the default paper category table
This setting improves the accuracy for the
gradation correction when the default correction
value is selected in the output paper density
adjustment with plain paper. When this setting is
set to "1", the sensitivity for Cyan and Magenta
is corrected.
0: 1: -
39
40
Default setting
Japan
Overwrite all HDD data

SW to allow all HDD data to be deleted when
throwing the machine away.
Note
Setting this mode to "1" and executing the
following step disable the machine.
Therefore, do not execute the steps except
when throwing the machine away.
"Utility" - "03 Administrator Setting" - "10
Security Setting" - "02 HDD Management
Setting" - "03 Delete All Data Setting" "Execute Deletion" on "Mode 1" to "Mode 8"
0: Enabled
1:Disabled
IP scanner allow setting without key counter

This setting allows to use the scanning function
without key counter inserted.
0: Restrict
1: Allow
Alert send setting without key counter

0: Send
This setting does not allow Alert to be sent to the 1: Send only when Printer
setting is set
client machine even when the vendor machine is
not Ready.
I -61

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Set value
Default setting
Japan
Inch
Metric
0: Send
IC-601 custom size name sending
1: Not send
Set the method to send the profile from the
engine to IC-601, when the custom size paper
profile name is registered in ColorCentro.
When this setting is set to "0", "Paper Profile
Name + Custom Size Name" is sent to IC-601.
In case the other Custom Size Name has been
registered, the Paper Profile Name is not applied
even when the paper profile matches.
When this setting is set to "1", the Custom Size
Name is not given and only "Paper Profile
Name" is sent to IC-601.
Therefore, even when the custom size that has
been registered differs, if the Paper Profile
Name matches, the paper profile is applied.
0: 1: -
6
7
5.5.3 Service Center TEL/FAX

(1) Usage
Register telephone and fax numbers of a service center that will be displayed in help information or when a malfunction occurs.
(2) Procedure
Press [02 Service Center TEL/FAX].
3. "Service Center TEL/FAX setting screen"
Press either [Service Center TEL (16)] or [Service Center FAX (16)] to be set.
4. Enter the telephone number or fax number you register through the numeric buttons.
Note
When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure to use hyphen (-) to fill up the blanks.
5. Press [OK] to register the data.
Press [Cancel] to cancel updating.
5.5.4 M/C Serial Number Setting

(1) Usage
Set and display the serial number of the main body and options.
Note
The serial number of the main body cannot be changed.
(2) Procedure
Press [03 M/C Serial Number Setting].
3. "Serial Number Setting screen"
Select the option, then a keyboard screen appears. Enter a serial number using the alphanumeric buttons.
4. Press [OK] to register the data.
5.5.5 Setup Date/Business Setting

(1) Usage
Set the starting date of the total counter that is displayed on the utility mode and the type of business of the client that is notified by the CSRC.
When setting the DIPSW 16-4 to 1, the starting date of the total counter is not displayed.
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Setup Date/Business Setting].
3. "Setup Date/Type of Business Setting screen"
Select the type of business. Not to specify the type of business, select [Unknown].
4. "Setup Date/Type of Business Setting screen"
Enter an installation date with the numeric buttons. Press [Set] to highlight the Year/Month/Date to be entered.
5. Press [OK] to update data.
I -62
5.6 Counter/Data
5.6.1 Maintenance Counter
(1) Outline
Set or reset the maintenance counter cycle.
Note
The maintenance cycle can be set either paper count (quantity) or travel distance (m) of the developing roller /K (distance).
"Quantity" is selected by default.
The count condition of the maintenance counter is as follows.
Note
The count condition cannot be changed.
Standard size
Small size (1 count)
SRA4S : 320mm
8.25 x 13 : 330mm
8 x 13 : 330mm
8.5 x 13 : 330mm
8.125 x 13.25 : 336mm
Custom size
Counted as large size with the threshold of 338mm (13.307 inches) or more
(2) Counter reset

After the maintenance is completed, reset the maintenance count using this mode.
Note
Be sure to reset the maintenance counter after the periodic maintenance (every 340,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc)/every
300,000 prints (C6000)).
Otherwise, the periodic check alert message and icon do not disappear.
(a) Procedure
Press [04 Counter /Data]
2. "Counter/Data Menu screen"
Press [01 Maintenance Counter].
3. "Maintenance Counter screen"
Press [Counter Clear] to reset the maintenance counter.
4. "Reset confirm screen"
Press [Yes] to reset the counter.
The counter is reset, and the start date is automatically inputted.
Press [No] to cancel.
(3) Maintenance cycle setting

Set the maintenance counter.
Note
The maintenance counter is predetermined. Be sure not to change the count value normally. Default is 340,000 sheets (C7000/
C7000P/C70hc), 300,000 sheets (C6000).
(a) Procedure
Press [01 Maintenance Counter].
Enter high digits of the cycle with the numeric buttons.
Press [OK] to register the data.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
5.6.2 Data collection procedures

Display the counter/data of the main body shown below on the touch panel.
The counter/data also can be checked through the CS Remote Care, list output and the mail remote notification system.
Paper Size Counter(Total)
Paper Size Counter(Copy)
Paper Size Counter(Printer)
ADF Counter
Coverage Data History
Time series jam data
JAM Counter
Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)
Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)
SC Counter
JAM Counter Individual Sec.
I -63
SC Count Individual Sec.

SC data of time series
Maintenance History
Maintenance Counter Reset
Parts History in Time Series
(1) Procedure
Press [02 Collecting Data].
3. "Collecting Data Menu screen"
Press the counter/data item to check.
4. "Counter/Data screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the pages.
Note
[Counter Clear] is displayed on each screen of [Jam Counter Individual Sec.] and [SC Counter Individual Sec.]
"Count Reset screen" appears when [Counter Clear] is pressed. Press [Yes] to reset the sectional count. Press [No] to
cancel the count reset.
Resetting these data when visiting customers for maintenance enables to check the number of jam and malfunction counted
after the last visit.
On the individual confirmation screens of [ORU-M Maintenance History] select the item to check and press [Information
View] to check the information of the selected item.
5.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/print)

Confirm the number of printings of each paper size.
Note
Maximum count: 99,999,999
1 count is made for paper of all types regardless of the paper size.
No.
CSRC parameter
01
P1
00
Others
Paper Size
02
P1
01
A3
03
P1
02
A4
04
P1
03
A5
05
P1
04
A6
06
P1
05
B4
07
P1
06
B5
08
P1
07
B6
09
P1
08
12 x 18
10
P1
09
11 x 17
11
P1
0A
8.5 x 14
12
P1
0B
8.5 x 11
13
P1
0C
7.25 x 10.5
14
P1
0D
5.5 x 8.5
15
P1
0E
F4
16
P1
0F
Post card
17
P1
10
46
18
P1
11
8K
19
P1
12
16K
20
P1
13
Long paper
21
P1
14
A2
22
P1
15
SRA3
23
P1
16
SRA4
24
P1
17
13 x 19
25
P1
18
Inf. 1 (***mm)
Remark
*** changes depending on the setting value.

Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction: 196 mm or less*
26
P1
19
Inf. 2 (***mm)

27
P1
1A
Inf. 3 (***mm)

28
P1
1B
Inf. 4 (***mm)

29
P1
1C
Inf. 5
Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction: 391mm to 487mm
I -64
* When DIPSW 8-7 is 0. When DIPSW8-7 is 1, it depends on the setting of I.5.6.18 Custom size counter threshold setting.
5.6.4 ADF Counter

Confirm the number of originals fed in each DF mode.
Note
No.01 and No.02 counter do not double count with other counters.
1 count for single-sided, 2 counts for double-sided.
No.
CSRC parameter
Item
Remark
01
F0
00
N of originals fed in ADF mode (single side)
02
F0
01
N of originals fed in ADF mode (double side)
03
F0
02
N of originals fed in RDH mode
Not used
04
F0
03
N of originals fed in RRDH mode
Not used
05
F0
04
N of originals fed in LDF mode
Not used
06
F0
05
N of originals fed in CFF mode
Not used
07
F0
06
N of single-sided SDF original fed
Not used
08
F0
07
N of mix originals fed in ADF mode (single side)
09
F0
08
N of mix originals fed in ADF mode (double side)
10
F0
09
N of originals fed in 2in1 mode
11
F0
0A
N of 1-sided Z-folded original fed
12
F0
0B
N of 2-sided Z-folded original fed
13
F0
0C
N of 2-sided SDF original fed
Not used
Not used
5.6.5 Coverage Data History

Confirm the average coverage of 5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of Y, M, C and K.
Note
This coverage is a calculated value based on the colored area and the transfer paper area, and is different from the toner
consumption when actually printed.
Up to 30 most recent coverage data are stored and deleted in chronological order.
No.
CSRC parameter
Printer counter
01
V0
00
B/W accumulated coverage rate
02
V0
01
B/W section 1 coverage rate
03
V0
02
04
V0
03
05
V0
04
06
V0
05
07
V0
06
08
V0
07
09
V0
08
10
V0
09
11
V0
0A
12
V0
0B
13
V0
0C
14
V0
0D
15
V0
0E
16
V0
0F
17
V0
10
18
V0
11
19
V0
12
20
V0
13
21
V0
14
22
V0
15
23
V0
16
24
V0
17
25
V0
18
26
V0
19
27
V0
1A
28
V0
1B
29
V0
1C
30
V0
1D
31
V0
1E
I -65
Coverage (%)
(00.0 to 99.9)

No.
CSRC parameter

Printer counter
32
V0
1F
33
V0
20
Yellow accumulated coverage rate
34
V0
21
Yellow section 1 coverage rate
35
V0
22
36
V0
23
37
V0
24
38
V0
25
39
V0
26
40
V0
27
41
V0
28
42
V0
29
43
V0
2A
44
V0
2B
45
V0
2C
46
V0
2D
47
V0
2E
48
V0
2F
49
V0
30
50
V0
31
51
V0
32
52
V0
33
53
V0
34
54
V0
35
55
V0
36
56
V0
37
57
V0
38
58
V0
39
59
V0
3A
60
V0
3B
61
V0
3C
62
V0
3D
63
V0
3E
64
V0
3F
65
V0
40
Magenta accumulated coverage rate
66
V0
41
Magenta section 1 coverage rate
67
V0
42
68
V0
43
69
V0
44
70
V0
45
71
V0
46
72
V0
47
73
V0
48
74
V0
49
75
V0
4A
76
V0
4B
77
V0
4C
78
V0
4D
79
V0
4E
80
V0
4F
81
V0
50
82
V0
51
83
V0
52
84
V0
53
85
V0
54
86
V0
55
87
V0
56
88
V0
57
89
V0
58
I -66
Coverage (%)

No.
CSRC parameter

Printer counter
90
V0
59
91
V0
5A
92
V0
5B
93
V0
5C
94
V0
5D
95
V0
5E
96
V0
5F
97
V0
60
Cyan accumulated coverage rate
98
V0
61
Cyan section 1 coverage rate
99
V0
62
100
V0
63
101
V0
64
102
V0
65
103
V0
66
104
V0
67
105
V0
68
106
V0
69
107
V0
6A
108
V0
6B
109
V0
6C
110
V0
6D
111
V0
6E
112
V0
6F
113
V0
70
114
V0
71
115
V0
72
116
V0
73
117
V0
74
118
V0
75
119
V0
76
120
V0
77
121
V0
78
122
V0
79
123
V0
7A
124
V0
7B
125
V0
7C
126
V0
7D
127
V0
7E
128
V0
7F
Coverage (%)
5.6.6 Paper JAM History

With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible to confirm jam code, total count, date of occurrence, time of occurrence, tray, paper size,
and magnification.
5.6.7 JAM/JAM Counter for Individual Section

Confirm the number of jam occurrences for each jam code. (Except idling JAM)
Note
Maximum count: 999,999
(The stationary jam is not included in the count.)
Jam code is displayed on the user mode screen when changing the DIPSW11-7 to 1.
No.
CSRC
Parameter
Item
Jam code
001
J0
00
J-1001
002
J0
01
J-1002
003
J0
02
J-1003
004
J0
03
J-1051
005
J0
04
J-1101
006
J0
05
J-1151
007
J0
06
J-1201
008
J0
07
J-1251
I -67

No.
CSRC
Parameter
009
J0
08
J-1301
010
J0
09
J-1351
011
J0
0A
J-1501
012
J0
0B
J-1502
013
J0
0C
J-1551
014
J0
0D
J-1552
015
J0
0E
J-1601
016
J0
0F
J-1602
017
J0
10
J-1603
018
J0
11
J-1604
019
J0
12
J-1605
020
J0
13
J-1606
021
J0
14
J-1607
022
J0
15
J-1608
023
J0
16
J-1609
024
J0
17
J-1610
025
J0
18
J-1651
026
J0
19
J-1652
027
J0
1A
J-1653
028
J0
1B
J-1654
029
J0
1C
J-1655
030
J0
1D
J-1656
031
J0
1E
J-1657
032
J0
1F
J-1658
033
J0
20
J-1701
034
J0
21
J-1702
035
J0
22
J-1703
036
J0
23
J-1704
037
J0
24
J-1705
038
J0
25
J-1706
039
J0
26
J-1707
040
J0
27
J-1708
041
J0
28
J-1709
042
J0
29
J-1710
043
J0
2A
J-1751
044
J0
2B
J-1752
045
J0
2C
J-1753
046
J0
2D
J-1754
047
J0
2E
J-1901
048
J0
2F
J-1902
049
J0
30
J-1903
050
J0
31
J-3201
051
J0
32
J-3202
052
J0
33
J-3203
053
J0
34
J-3204
054
J0
35
J-3252
055
J0
36
J-3206
056
J0
37
J-3207
057
J0
38
J-3209
058
J0
39
J-3251
059
J0
3A
J-3252
060
J0
3B
J-3253
061
J0
3C
J-3254
062
J0
3D
J-5101
063
J0
3E
J-9201
064
J0
3F
J-9202
065
J0
40
J-9251
Item
Jam code
I -68

No.
CSRC
Parameter
066
J0
41
J-9252
067
J0
42
J-9301
068
J0
43
J-9351
069
J0
44
J-9401
070
J0
45
J-9451
071
J0
46
J-6101
072
J0
47
J-6102
073
J0
48
J-6103
074
J0
49
J-6201
075
J0
4A
J-6203
076
J0
4B
J-6206
077
J0
4C
J-6209
078
J0
4D
J-6301
079
J0
4E
J-6304
080
J0
4F
J-6305
081
J0
50
J-6501
082
J0
51
J-6502
083
J0
52
J-6504
084
J0
53
J-6508
085
J0
54
J-7101
086
J0
55
J-7103
087
J0
56
J-7105
088
J0
57
J-7106
089
J0
58
J-7107
090
J0
59
Item
Jam code
091
J0
5A
J-7217
092
J0
5B
J-7218
093
J0
5C
J-7219
094
J0
5D
J-7220
095
J0
5E
J-7221
096
J0
5F
J-7222
097
J0
60
J-7223
098
J0
61
J-7224
099
J0
62
J-7225
100
J0
63
J-7226
101
J0
64
J-7228
102
J0
65
J-7229
103
J0
66
J-7230
104
J0
67
J-7235
105
J0
68
J-7243
106
J0
69
J-7248
107
J0
6A
J-7249
108
J0
6B
J-7250
109
J0
6C
J-7251
110
J0
6D
J-7281
111
J0
6E
J-7282
112
J0
6F
J-7283
113
J0
70
J-7290
114
J0
71
J-7401
115
J0
72
J-7402
116
J0
73
J-7403
117
J0
74
J-7404
118
J0
75
J-7405
119
J0
76
J-7406
120
J0
77
J-7407
121
J0
78
J-7408
122
J0
79
J-7409
I -69

No.
CSRC
Parameter
123
J0
7A
J-7410
124
J0
7B
J-7411
125
J0
7C
J-7412
126
J0
7D
J-7660
127
J0
7E
J-7661
128
J0
7F
J-7662
129
J0
80
J-7663
130
J0
81
J-7664
131
J0
82
J-7665
132
J0
83
J-7666
133
J0
84
J-7667
134
J0
85
J-7668
135
J0
86
J-7669
136
J0
87
J-7670
137
J0
88
J-7671
138
J0
89
J-7672
139
J0
8A
J-7673
140
J0
8B
J-7674
141
J0
8C
Item
Jam code
142
J0
8D
J-7676
143
J0
8E
J-7677
144
J0
8F
J-7678
145
J0
90
J-7679
146
J0
91
J-7680
147
J0
92
148
J0
93
J-7682
149
J0
94
J-7683
150
J0
95
J-7684
151
J0
96
J-7685
152
J0
97
J-7686
153
J0
98
J-7687
154
J0
99
J-7688
155
J0
9A
J-7689
156
J0
9B
J-7690
157
J0
9C
J-7691
158
J0
9D
J-7692
159
J0
9E
J-7693
160
J0
9F
J-7696
161
J0
A0
J-7697
162
J0
A1
J-7698
163
J0
A2
J-7108
164
J0
A3
J-7501
165
J0
A4
J-7502
166
J0
A5
J-7503
167
J0
A6
J-7504
168
J0
A7
J-7505
169
J0
A8
J-7506
170
J0
A9
J-7507
171
J0
AA
J-7508
172
J0
AB
J-7509
173
J0
AC
J-7510
174
J0
AD
J-7511
175
J0
AE
J-7512
176
J0
AF
J-7513
177
J0
B0
J-7514
178
J0
B1
J-7515
179
J0
B2
J-7516
I -70

No.
CSRC
Parameter
180
J0
B3
J-7517
181
J0
B4
J-7518
182
J0
B5
J-7519
183
J0
B6
J-7520
184
J0
B7
J-7521
185
J0
B8
J-7522
186
J0
B9
J-7523
187
J0
BA
J-7524
188
J0
BB
J-7540
189
J0
BC
J-7541
190
J0
BD
J-7542
191
J0
BE
J-7543
192
J0
BF
J-7561
193
J0
C0
J-7562
194
J0
C1
J-7563
195
J0
C2
J-7564
196
J0
C3
J-7565
197
J0
C4
J-7566
198
J0
C5
J-7567
199
J0
C6
J-7568
200
J0
C7
J-7569
201
J0
C8
J-7570
202
J0
C9
J-7571
203
J0
CA
J-7572
204
J0
CB
J-7573
205
J0
CC
J-7574
206
J0
CD
J-7575
207
J0
CE
J-7576
208
J0
CF
J-7577
209
J0
D0
J-7578
210
J0
D1
J-7579
211
J0
D2
J-7580
212
J0
D3
J-7581
213
J0
D4
J-7582
214
J0
D5
J-7583
215
J0
D6
J-7584
216
J0
D7
J-7585
217
J0
D8
J-3101
218
J0
D9
J-3102
219
J0
DA
J-3151
220
J0
DB
J-3152
221
J0
DC
J-7590
222
J0
DD
J-7591
223
J0
DE
J-7592
224
J0
DF
J-7593
225
J0
E0
J-7594
226
J0
E1
J-7595
227
J0
E2
J-7596
228
J0
E3
J-7597
229
J0
E4
J-7109
230
J0
E5
J-7530
231
J0
E6
J-7531
232
J0
E7
J-7532
233
J0
E8
J-7533
234
J0
E9
J-7535
235
J0
EA
J-7102
236
J0
EB
J-7675
Item
Jam code
I -71

No.
CSRC
Parameter
237
J0
EC
J-7681
238
J0
ED
J-7694
239
J0
EE
J-7695
240
J0
EF
J-1611
241
J0
F0
J-7550
242
J0
F1
J-7551
243
J0
F2
J-7552
244
J0
F3
J-7553
245
J0
F4
J-7554
246
J0
F5
J-7555
247
J0
F6
J-7556
248
J0
F7
J-7110
249
J0
F8
J-7557
250
J0
F9
J-7558
251
J0
FA
252
J0
FB
253
J0
FC
254
J0
FD
255
J0
FE
256
J0
FF
257
J1
00
258
J1
01
259
J1
02
260
J1
03
261
J1
04
262
J1
05
263
J1
06
264
J1
07
265
J1
08
266
J1
09
267
J1
0A
268
J1
0B
269
J1
0C
270
J1
0D
271
J1
0E
272
J1
0F
273
J1
10
274
J1
11
275
J1
12
276
J1
13
277
J1
14
278
J1
15
279
J1
16
280
J1
17
281
J1
18
282
J1
19
283
J1
1A
284
J1
1B
285
J1
1C
286
J1
1D
287
J1
1E
288
J1
1F
289
J1
20
290
J1
21
291
J1
22
292
J1
23
293
J1
24
Item
Jam code
I -72

No.
CSRC
Parameter
Item
Jam code
294
J1
25
295
J1
26
296
J1
27
297
J1
28
298
J1
29
299
J1
2A
300
J1
2B
301
J1
2C
302
J1
2D
303
J1
2E
304
J1
2F
305
J1
30
306
J1
31
307
J1
32
308
J1
33
309
J1
34
310
J1
35
311
J1
36
312
J1
37
313
J1
38
314
J1
39
315
J1
3A
316
J1
3B
317
J1
3C
318
J1
3D
319
J1
3E
320
J1
3F
321
J1
40
322
J1
41
323
J1
42
324
J1
43
325
J1
44
326
J1
45
327
J1
46
328
J1
47
329
J1
48
330
J1
49
331
J1
4A
332
J1
4B
333
J1
4C
334
J1
4D
335
J1
4E
336
J1
4F
337
J1
50
338
J1
51
339
J1
52
340
J1
53
341
J1
54
342
J1
55
343
J1
56
344
J1
57
345
J1
58
346
J1
59
347
J1
5A
348
J1
5B
349
J1
5C
350
J1
5D
I -73

No.
CSRC
Parameter
Item
Jam code
351
J1
5E
352
J1
5F
353
J1
60
354
J1
61
355
J1
62
356
J1
63
357
J1
64
358
J1
65
359
J1
66
360
J1
67
361
J1
68
362
J1
69
363
J1
6A
364
J1
6B
365
J1
6C
366
J1
6D
367
J1
6E
368
J1
6F
369
J1
70
370
J1
71
371
J1
72
372
J1
73
373
J1
74
374
J1
75
375
J1
76
376
J1
77
377
J1
78
378
J1
79
379
J1
7A
380
J1
7B
381
J1
7C
382
J1
7D
383
J1
7E
384
J1
7F
385
J1
80
386
J1
81
387
J1
82
388
J1
83
389
J1
84
390
J1
85
391
J1
86
392
J1
87
393
J1
88
394
J1
89
395
J1
8A
396
J1
8B
397
J1
8C
398
J1
8D
399
J1
8E
400
J1
8F
401
J1
90
402
J1
91
403
J1
92
404
J1
93
405
J1
94
406
J1
95
407
J1
96
I -74

No.
CSRC
Parameter
Item
Jam code
408
J1
97
409
J1
98
410
J1
99
411
J1
9A
412
J1
9B
413
J1
9C
414
J1
9D
415
J1
9E
416
J1
9F
417
J1
A0
418
J1
A1
419
J1
A2
420
J1
A3
421
J1
A4
422
J1
A5
423
J1
A6
424
J1
A7
425
J1
A8
426
J1
A9
427
J1
AA
428
J1
AB
429
J1
AC
430
J1
AD
431
J1
AE
432
J1
AF
433
J1
B0
434
J1
B1
435
J1
B2
436
J1
B3
437
J1
B4
438
J1
B5
439
J1
B6
440
J1
B7
441
J1
B8
442
J1
B9
443
J1
BA
444
J1
BB
445
J1
BC
446
J1
BD
447
J1
BE
448
J1
BF
449
J1
C0
450
J1
C1
451
J1
C2
452
J1
C3
453
J1
C4
454
J1
C5
455
J1
C6
456
J1
C7
457
J1
C8
458
J1
C9
459
J1
CA
460
J1
CB
461
J1
CC
462
J1
CD
463
J1
CE
464
J1
CF
I -75

No.
CSRC
Parameter
Item
Jam code
465
J1
D0
466
J1
D1
467
J1
D2
468
J1
D3
469
J1
D4
470
J1
D5
471
J1
D6
472
J1
D7
473
J1
D8
474
J1
D9
475
J1
DA
476
J1
DB
477
J1
DC
478
J1
DD
479
J1
DE
480
J1
DF
481
J1
E0
482
J1
E1
483
J1
E2
484
J1
E3
485
J1
E4
486
J1
E5
487
J1
E6
488
J1
E7
489
J1
E8
490
J1
E9
491
J1
EA
492
J1
EB
493
J1
EC
494
J1
ED
495
J1
EE
496
J1
EF
497
J1
F0
498
J1
F1
499
J1
F2
500
J1
F3
501
J1
F4
502
J1
F5
503
J1
F6
504
J1
F7
505
J1
F8
506
J1
F9
507
J1
FA
508
J1
FB
509
J1
FC
510
J1
FD
511
J1
FE
512
J1
FF
5.6.8 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)

Confirm the status of use of each copy mode.
Note
No.
001
CSRC
Parameter
F1
00
Item
Count conditions
1 1 Mode
Scans 1-side and outputs 1-side (Counts by number

of output side)
I -76

No.
CSRC
Parameter

Item
Count conditions
002
F1
01
1 2 Mode
Scans 1-side and outputs 2-sides (Counts by

number of output side)
003
F1
02
2 1 Mode
Scans 2-sides and outputs 1-side (Counts by

004
F1
03
2 2 Mode
Scans 2-sides and outputs 2-sides (Counts by

005
F1
04
ADF1>1 mode
ADF scans 1-side and outputs 1-side (Counts by

006
F1
05
ADF1>2 mode
ADF scans 2-sides and outputs 2-sides (Counts by

007
F1
06
Mixed original mode
Counts by number of output side
008
F1
07
Tab original mode
009
F1
08
Z-Folded original mode
010
F1
09
LEF:Portrait/SEF:Landscape(Reg.)
011
F1
0A
LEF:Landscape/SEF:Portrait(Reg.)
012
F1
0B
LEF:Portrait/SEF:Landscape(Rev.)
013
F1
0C
LEF:Landscape/SEF:Portrait(Rev.)
014
F1
0D
Original Type: Text/Photo
015
F1
0E
Original Type: Text
016
F1
0F
Original Type: Photo
017
F1
10
Original Type: Map
018
F1
11
Custom Size Original
019
F1
12
Corner Staple(Left)
Specifies 1 stapling position (upper left) (Counts by

number of stapling)
020
F1
13
Corner Staple(Right)
Specifies 1 stapling position (upper right) (Counts by

number of stapling)
021
F1
14
2 Position Staple(Left)
Specifies 2 stapling positions (left bind) (Counts by

number of stapling)
022
F1
15
2 Position Staple(Top)
Specifies 2 stapling positions (top bind) (Counts by

number of stapling)
023
F1
16
Right & Left Bind
Folding direction is left or right (Counts by number of

output side)
024
F1
17
2 Position Staple(Right)
Specifies 2 stapling positions (right bind) (Counts by

number of stapling)
025
F1
18
Top Bind
Folding direction is upper (Counts by number of

output side)
026
F1
19
Tri-Fold
Counts by number of folding
027
F1
1A
Folding & Stapling
028
F1
1B
Stacker5000 sheets full alarm
LS 1st tandem or 2nd tandem 5000 sheets full alarm

is ON
029
F1
1C
Group
Group and offset no output (Counts by number of

output side)
030
F1
1D
Offset Group
Group and offset output (Counts by number of

output side)
031
F1
1E
Sort
Sort and no offset (Counts by number of output side)
032
F1
1F
Offset Sort
Sort and offset (Counts by number of output side)
033
F1
20
Face down
034
F1
21
Face up
035
F1
22
1 to N
036
F1
23
N to 1
037
F1
24
038
F1
25
Post inserter
Cover Sheet Specify
039
F1
26
Trim
Counts by number of trimming
040
F1
27
Real Size Copy
Axial magnification 1.000, lateral magnification 1.000

(Counts by number of output side)
041
F1
28
Preset magnification E4
Specifies preset magnification (A5 A3) (Counts by

042
F1
29
Specifies preset magnification (A3 A3/B5 B4)

043
F1
2A
Specifies preset magnification (A4 B4) (Counts by

I -77

No.
CSRC
Parameter

Item
Count conditions
044
F1
2B
Specifies preset magnification (B4 A3/B5 A4)

045
F1
2C
Preset magnification R4
Specifies preset magnification (A4 B5/A3 B4)

046
F1
2D
Specifies preset magnification (B4 A4) (Counts by

047
F1
2E
Specifies preset magnification (A3 A4/B4 B5)

048
F1
2F
Specifies preset magnification (A3 A5) (Counts by

049
F1
30
Preset Zoom 1
050
F1
31
Preset Zoom 2
051
F1
32
Preset Zoom 3
052
F1
33
Zoom
053
F1
34
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom
054
F1
35
Maximum ZOOM
055
F1
36
Minimum ZOOM
056
F1
37
APS
057
F1
38
AMS
058
F1
39
AES
059
F1
3A
Preset Density 1
060
F1
3B
Preset Density 2
061
F1
3C
Interrupt Copy
062
F1
3D
Cancel Automatic Image Rotation
063
F1
3E
064
F1
3F
065
F1
40
Combine
066
F1
41
Booklet
Counts by number of output copy
067
F1
42
Adhesive Binding
Counts by number of output copy
068
F1
43
069
F1
44
070
F1
45
071
F1
46
072
F1
47
073
F1
48
074
F1
49
075
F1
4A
076
F1
4B
Image Repeat
077
F1
4C
Frame erasure
078
F1
4D
Center Erase
079
F1
4E
Centering
080
F1
4F
All-image area
081
F1
50
Image shift
082
F1
51
083
F1
52
084
F1
53
085
F1
54
086
F1
55
Date/Time
Stamp-Date/Time (Counts by number of output side)
087
F1
56
Page
Stamp/Page No. (Counts by number of output side)
088
F1
57
Numbering
Stamp Numbering (Counts by number of output

side)
089
F1
58
Set quantity 1
090
F1
59
Set Quantity 2 - 5
091
F1
5A
Set Quantity 6 - 10
092
F1
5B
Set quantity 11 or more
093
F1
5C
Time while power remote 1 is On
Count up by periodic timer
094
F1
5D
095
F1
5E
096
F1
5F
I -78

No.
CSRC
Parameter

Item
Count conditions
097
F1
60
Time During Low Power Mode
Time in the LOW-POWER mode. (unit: min.)
098
F1
61
Time During Warm Up
Time during which the fusing heater is ON with

UNREADY status. (unit: min.)
099
F1
62
Time during which the front door is open
Time during which the front door is open. (unit: min.)
100
F1
63
Ope.Time in 1side Straight Exit
101
F1
64
Ope.Time in 1side Reverse Exit
102
F1
65
Operation Time in 2side Print
Accumulation of time from the start of print to the

end of print. 1 count per second. (unit: sec.) (Down
time due to jam omitted)
103
F1
66
Operation time in ADF mode
Accumulation of time during which DF is operating.

(unit: min.)
104
F1
67
Morning Correction Counter
Counts 1 per image stabilization control.
105
F1
68
Time during APS sensor On
Time during which the APS sensor is ON. (unit: min.)
106
F1
69
107
F1
6A
108
F1
6B
N of Fold & Staple Used Jobs
1 count when Folding & Stapling job starts
109
F1
6C
Fold & Staple Tri-Fold Full
1 count for each ON of fold & staple tri-fold full alarm
110
F1
6D
N of ADF NF occurred
Number of DF no feed detection
111
F1
6E
N of ADF special error 1 occurred
Number of wrong detections of original size
112
F1
6F
Number of wrong detections of next original

information
113
F1
70
Number of errors in size for which mixed size mode

is not allowed
114
F1
71
N of Scanner Scanned
Counts 1 for pressing start button in the platen mode
115
F1
72
N of Electrode Cleaned
When conducting the electrode cleaning
116
F1
73
N of Memory Overflow
Total count of No.124, 125, 126 and the number of

occurrences of HDD reading over flow.
117
F1
74
N of Fusing Alarm Occurred
Fusing alarm is ON
118
F1
75
N of No Toner Stop Occurred
All 4 colors
119
F1
76
N of AGC retry
When AGC retry occurs
120
F1
77
N of Sub Scan Beam Correct Error
When the sub scan beam correct error occurs
121
F1
78
N of Mis-Centering Correct Error
When the centering correction time out error occurs
122
F1
79
N of ADF distortion adjust error
When the ADF skew correction time out occurs
123
F1
7A
N of ADF distortion data error
When the ADF skew correction error occurs
124
F1
7B
Compression Memory Overflow
Compression Memory Overflow
125
F1
7C
Page Memory Overflow(Scan)
When the scan memory overflow occurs
126
F1
7D
Page Memory Overflow (print)
When the print memory overflow occurs
127
F1
7E
FNS Alarm(Main Tray)
Counts for each ON of finisher main tray alarm
128
F1
7F
FNS Alarm(Staple)
Counts for each ON of finisher staple alarm
129
F1
80
Saddle Stitcher Scrap Box Full
Counts for each ON of saddle stitcher scrap box full

alarm
130
F1
81
N of ADF special error4 occurred
Ready timeout error
131
F1
82
132
F1
83
133
F1
84
134
F1
85
135
F1
86
136
F1
87
137
F1
88
Saddle Stitcher Staple Alarm
138
F1
89
139
F1
8A
140
F1
8B
141
F1
8C
142
F1
8D
143
F1
8E
Hole-Punch
144
F1
8F
Z-Folding
Counts by number of paper exit (except for GP-501)
145
F1
90
Multi-Folder trash full alarm
146
F1
91
Hold Job Number(Copy)
Counts by number of each job
147
F1
92
Hold + Output Job Number(Copy)
148
F1
93
Hold Job Number(Print)
149
F1
94
Hold + Output Job Number(Print)
Counts for each ON of saddle stitcher staple alarm
I -79

No.
CSRC
Parameter

Item
150
F1
95
Hold Output Job Number
151
F1
96
Hold Output Job Number(Delete)
152
F1
97
HDD Store JOB (Hold HDD Store)
153
F1
98
HDD Store JOB read Print JOB
154
F1
99
HDD Store JOB read Hold JOB
155
F1
9A
HDD Store JOB read Print + Hold JOB
156
F1
9B
157
F1
9C
158
F1
9D
159
F1
9E
160
F1
9F
161
F1
A0
162
F1
A1
163
F1
A2
164
F1
A3
165
F1
A4
166
F1
A5
167
F1
A6
168
F1
A7
169
F1
A8
170
F1
A9
171
F1
AA
172
F1
AB
173
F1
AC
174
F1
AD
175
F1
AE
176
F1
AF
177
F1
B0
178
F1
B1
179
F1
B2
180
F1
B3
181
F1
B4
182
F1
B5
183
F1
B6
184
F1
B7
185
F1
B8
186
F1
B9
187
F1
BA
188
F1
BB
189
F1
BC
Perfect Bind(Cover Blank)
190
F1
BD
Perfect Bind(Cover Print 1-in-1)
191
F1
BE
192
F1
BF
193
F1
C0
Perfect Binder Cover Tray mode
194
F1
C1
Perfect Bind Set Number
195
F1
C2
Perfect Bind Set(Cover Trim)
196
F1
C3
Perfect Bind Set(Cover Non-Trim)
197
F1
C4
Perfect Binder Sub Tray output
198
F1
C5
Perfect Binder SubCompile output
199
F1
C6
Perfect Binder Cover Tray pull-out
200
F1
C7
Perfect Binder Front Door open
201
F1
C8
Stacker Cover of Perfect Binder open
202
F1
C9
203
F1
CA
204
F1
CB
205
F1
CC
206
F1
CD
Count conditions
Counts on each mode
Counts by number of copy
Counts by number of exit paper

Counts by number of time
I -80

No.
CSRC
Parameter

Item
Count conditions
207
F1
CE
208
F1
CF
209
F1
D0
210
F1
D1
211
F1
D2
212
F1
D3
213
F1
D4
214
F1
D5
215
F1
D6
216
F1
D7
217
F1
D8
Sample Paper Counter
218
F1
D9
Printer Sample Print Sheets
219
F1
DA
Printer Sample Print Sheets (Large)
220
F1
DB
221
F1
DC
222
F1
DD
Job Unit Offset Job Number
223
F1
DE
Set Offset Job Number
224
F1
DF
Page Offset Job Number
225
F1
E0
1Set+Page Offset Job Number
226
F1
E1
Continued Job for Next Day
Counts by number of execution time
227
F1
E2
Corner Crop Mark setting
228
F1
E3
Center Crop Mark setting
229
F1
E4
Tab Paper Used Job Number
Number of tab paper exiting is 1 or more
230
F1
E5
Needless Tab Paper Exit Job
Number of needless tab paper exiting is 1 or more
231
F1
E6
Ticket Edit Counter
Ticket Edit start
232
F1
E7
Sample Output Number
Sample output in ticket edit
233
F1
E8
600dpi Print Counter
234
F1
E9
Multi-Punch
GP punch number (Counts by number of output

side) (not used)
235
F1
EA
236
F1
EB
237
F1
EC
238
F1
ED
239
F1
EE
240
F1
EF
241
F1
F0
242
F1
F1
243
F1
F2
244
F1
F3
245
F1
F4
246
F1
F5
247
F1
F6
248
F1
F7
249
F1
F8
250
F1
F9
251
F1
FA
252
F1
FB
253
F1
FC
254
F1
FD
255
F1
FE
256
F1
FF
Same count as total counter
Counts by number of each job
5.6.9 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)

Confirm the status of use of each copy mode.
Note
I -81

No.
CSRC
parameter
001
F2
00
002
F2
003
F2
004

Item
Count conditions
ACS
Auto color specification, DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by

01
Full color
DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
02
Black
F2
03
Single Color(Y)
005
F2
04
Single Color(M)
006
F2
05
Single Color(C)
007
F2
06
Single Color(R)
008
F2
07
Single Color(G)
009
F2
08
Single Color(B)
010
F2
09
ADF Thick
011
F2
0A
ADF Thin
012
F2
0B
Image Type: Printed
013
F2
0C
Image Type: Photo Paper
014
F2
0D
Image Type: Copied
015
F2
0E
Image Type: Inkjet
016
F2
0F
Bleed Prevention
017
F2
10
Screen: Auto
018
F2
11
Screen: Line1
019
F2
12
Screen: Line2
020
F2
13
Screen: Dot1
021
F2
14
Screen: Dot2
022
F2
15
Screen: Stochastic
023
F2
16
Glossy
024
F2
17
Density Shift
Not used
025
F2
18
BackgroundRemoval
Quality AdjustmentBackground Removal other than

0 specification (Counts by number of output side)
026
F2
19
Red
Quality Adjustment Red other than 0 specification

027
F2
1A
Green
Quality Adjustment Green other than 0 specification

028
F2
1B
Blue
Quality Adjustment Blue other than 0 specification

029
F2
1C
Hue Adjustment
Quality Adjustment Hue other than 0 specification

030
F2
1D
Saturation Adjustment
Quality Adjustment Saturation other than 0

specification (Counts by number of output side)
031
F2
1E
Brightness Adjustment
Quality Adjustment Brightness other than 0

032
F2
1F
Color Balance Adjustment
Quality AdjustmentColor Balance Adjustment other

than 0 specification to any of YMCK adjustment
value (Counts by number of output side)
033
F2
20
Sharpness Adjustment
Quality Adjustment Sharpness other than 0

034
F2
21
Contrast Adjustment
Quality Adjustment Contrast other than 0

035
F2
22
Image Distinction Level
Quality Adjustment Image Distinction other than 0

specification to one of Text Photo or Color (Counts
by number of output side)
036
F2
23
Paper Type: Plain
037
F2
24
Paper Type: Coated-ML
038
F2
25
Paper Type: Colored Paper
Not used
039
F2
26
Paper Type: Fine
040
F2
27
Paper Type: Coated-GL
041
F2
28
Paper Type: Tab Paper
042
F2
29
Paper Type: Color Specific
043
F2
2A
Paper Type: Coated-GO
044
F2
2B
Paper Type: Coated-MO
045
F2
2C
Paper Weight: 1
Weight Setting 64g/m2 to 74g/m2 (Counts by

I -82

No.
CSRC
parameter

Item
Count conditions
046
F2
2D
Paper Weight: 2

047
F2
2E
Paper Weight: 3

048
F2
2F
Paper Weight: 4

049
F2
30
Paper Weight: 5

050
F2
31
Paper Weight: 6

051
F2
32
Paper Weight: 7

052
F2
33
Paper Weight: 8

053
F2
34
Paper Weight: 9

054
F2
35
Main Tray: Face Up
Output to FS/FD main tray and face is face up

055
F2
36
N of No Toner Stop Occurred(Y)
Stop by no toner
056
F2
37
N of No Toner Stop Occurred(M)
Stop by no toner
057
F2
38
N of No Toner Stop Occurred(C)
Stop by no toner
058
F2
39
N of No Toner Stop Occurred(K)
Stop by no toner
059
F2
3A
N of Toner Recovery Box Full
Detect toner recovery box full
060
F2
3B
N of Color Registration Adj.
Time up of 60 seconds timer
061
F2
3C
N of Auto Stability Control
062
F2
3D
063
F2
3E
064
F2
3F
065
F2
40
OFF Mode Time
066
F2
41
067
F2
42
068
F2
43
Polygon Motor Operation Time
069
F2
44
Develop Motor Ope. Time(Color)
070
F2
45
Develop Motor Ope. Time(Black)
071
F2
46
ON Time of PCL(Color)
072
F2
47
ON Time of PCL(Black)
073
F2
48
Operation Time in Scanner Mode
074
F2
49
Time While Power(ADF)
075
F2
4A
076
F2
4B
077
F2
4C
078
F2
4D
Auto Y Toner Refresh Mode Count
079
F2
4E
Auto M Toner Refresh Mode Count
080
F2
4F
Auto C Toner Refresh Mode Count
081
F2
50
Auto K Toner Refresh Mode Count
082
F2
51
N of 4 Toner Refresh Performed
083
F2
52
N of MC Toner Refresh Performed
084
F2
53
085
F2
54
086
F2
55
087
F2
56
088
F2
57
Right/Left binding originals
089
F2
58
Upper binding originals
090
F2
59
Inside print multi tri-fold
Counts by number of tri-folding
091
F2
5A
Outside Print Multi Tri-Fold
092
F2
5B
Inside Print Tri-Fold-in
093
F2
5C
Outside Print Tri-Fold-in
094
F2
5D
Inside Print Tri-Fold-out
Not used
I -83

No.
CSRC
parameter

Item
Count conditions
095
F2
5E
Outside Print Tri-Fold-out
096
F2
5F
Inside Print Double Parallel
Counts by number of double parallel folding
097
F2
60
Outside Print Double Parallel
Counts by number of double parallel folding
098
F2
61
Inside Print Gate Fold
Counts by number of gate folding
099
F2
62
Outside Print Gate Fold
Counts by number of gate folding
100
F2
63
Multi Half Fold
Counts by number of multi half folding
101
F2
64
Inside Print Half-Fold
Counts by number of half folding
102
F2
65
Outside Print Half-Fold
Counts by number of half folding
103
F2
66
Main Tray Output
104
F2
67
Stacker Tray Output
105
F2
68
Stacker Pile Allow
106
F2
69
Fold & Staple Tray Output
107
F2
6A
Tri-Fold Tray Output
108
F2
6B
Folding Sub Tray Output
109
F2
6C
Stacker Sub Tray Output
110
F2
6D
Fold & Staple Sub Tray Output
111
F2
6E
Staple Finisher Sub Tray Output
112
F2
6F
Main Tray Output Job
Count for each output setting
113
F2
70
Stacker Tray Output Job
114
F2
71
Fold & Staple Output Job No.
115
F2
72
Tri-Fold Tray Output Job No.
116
F2
73
Fold Sub Tray Job
117
F2
74
Stacker Sub Tray Job
118
F2
75
Fold & Staple Sub Tray Job
119
F2
76
Staple Finisher Sub Tray Job
120
F2
77
Multi Half Fold Job
121
F2
78
Inside Print Half-Fold Job
122
F2
79
Outside Print Half-Fold Job
123
F2
7A
124
F2
7B
125
F2
7C
126
F2
7D
127
F2
7E
128
F2
7F
129
F2
80
130
F2
81
131
F2
82
132
F2
83
133
F2
84
134
F2
85
135
F2
86
Post Inserter Count
Count by the number of insert of post inserter
136
F2
87
Number of Perfect Bind (Copy) job
Perfect Bind and Copy job
137
F2
88
Number of Perfect Bind (Printer) job
Perfect Bind and Printer JOB
138
F2
89
Color Density Control
Count by paper exit of Output Paper Density Adj.
139
F2
8A
Color Density Control (L Size)
Count by large size paper exit of Output Paper

Density Adj.
140
F2
8B
141
F2
8C
S.M.A.R.T(Y) Start/Stop Count
Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/Y rotates/

stops.
142
F2
8D
S.M.A.R.T(Y) Load Cycle Count
Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/Y

retracts.
143
F2
8E
S.M.A.R.T(Y) Reallocated Count
144
F2
8F
S.M.A.R.T(Y) Power On Hours
145
F2
90
S.M.A.R.T(M) Start/Stop Count
Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/M

rotates/stops.
146
F2
91
S.M.A.R.T(M) Load Cycle Count
Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/M

retracts.
147
F2
92
S.M.A.R.T(M) Reallocated Count
I -84

No.
CSRC
parameter

Item
Count conditions
148
F2
93
S.M.A.R.T(M) Power On Hours
149
F2
94
S.M.A.R.T(C) Start/Stop Count
Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/C

rotates/stops.
150
F2
95
S.M.A.R.T(C) Load Cycle Count
Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/C

retracts.
151
F2
96
S.M.A.R.T(C) Reallocated Count
152
F2
97
S.M.A.R.T(C) Power On Hours
153
F2
98
S.M.A.R.T(K) Start/Stop Count
Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/K rotates/

stops.
154
F2
99
S.M.A.R.T(K) Load Cycle Count
Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/K

retracts.
155
F2
9A
S.M.A.R.T(K) Reallocated Count
156
F2
9B
S.M.A.R.T(K) Power On Hours
157
F2
9C
S.M.A.R.T(A) Start/Stop Count
Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/A rotates/

stops.
158
F2
9D
S.M.A.R.T(A) Load Cycle Count
Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/A

retracts.
159
F2
9E
S.M.A.R.T(A) Reallocated Count
160
F2
9F
S.M.A.R.T(A) Power On Hours
161
F2
A0
S.M.A.R.T(P) Start/Stop Count
Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/P rotates/

stops.
162
F2
A1
S.M.A.R.T(P) Load Cycle Count
Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/P

retracts.
163
F2
A2
S.M.A.R.T(P) Reallocated Count
164
F2
A3
S.M.A.R.T(P) Power On Hours
165
F2
A4
166
F2
A5
167
F2
A6
168
F2
A7
169
F2
A8
170
F2
A9
171
F2
AA
172
F2
AB
173
F2
AC
174
F2
AD
175
F2
AE
176
F2
AF
177
F2
B0
178
F2
B1
179
F2
B2
180
F2
B3
181
F2
B4
182
F2
B5
183
F2
B6
184
F2
B7
185
F2
B8
186
F2
B9
187
F2
BA
188
F2
BB
189
F2
BC
190
F2
BD
191
F2
BE
192
F2
BF
193
F2
C0
194
F2
C1
195
F2
C2
196
F2
C3
197
F2
C4
198
F2
C5
I -85

No.
CSRC
parameter

Item
199
F2
C6
200
F2
C7
201
F2
C8
202
F2
C9
203
F2
CA
204
F2
CB
205
F2
CC
206
F2
CD
207
F2
CE
208
F2
CF
209
F2
D0
210
F2
D1
211
F2
D2
212
F2
D3
213
F2
D4
214
F2
D5
215
F2
D6
216
F2
D7
217
F2
D8
218
F2
D9
219
F2
DA
220
F2
DB
221
F2
DC
222
F2
DD
223
F2
DE
224
F2
DF
225
F2
E0
226
F2
E1
227
F2
E2
228
F2
E3
229
F2
E4
230
F2
E5
231
F2
E6
232
F2
E7
233
F2
E8
234
F2
E9
235
F2
EA
236
F2
EB
237
F2
EC
238
F2
ED
239
F2
EE
240
F2
EF
241
F2
F0
242
F2
F1
243
F2
F2
244
F2
F3
245
F2
F4
256
F2
F5
247
F2
F6
248
F2
F7
249
F2
F8
250
F2
F9
251
F2
FA
252
F2
FB
253
F2
FC
254
F2
FD
255
F2
FE
Count conditions
I -86

No.
256
CSRC
parameter
F2
FF

Item
Count conditions
5.6.10 SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec.

SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec.
Note
When the service mode DIPSW 3-1 is 1 (Latched), C35## to C39## are not counted.
No.
CSRC
Parameter
Item
(SC Code)
001
E0
00
C-0001
002
E0
01
C-0002
003
E0
02
C-0003
004
E0
03
C-0101
005
E0
04
C-0102
006
E0
05
C-0103
007
E0
06
C-0201
008
E0
07
C-0202
009
E0
08
C-0203
010
E0
09
C-0204
011
E0
0A
C-0205
012
E0
0B
C-0208
013
E0
0C
C-0209
014
E0
0D
C-0211
015
E0
0E
C-0212
016
E0
0F
C-0213
017
E0
10
C-0301
018
E0
11
C-0302
019
E0
12
C-0303
020
E0
13
C-0304
021
E0
14
C-0305
022
E0
15
C-0306
023
E0
16
C-0307
024
E0
17
C-0308
025
E0
18
C-0309
026
E0
19
C-0310
027
E0
1A
C-0311
028
E0
1B
C-0312
029
E0
1C
C-0313
030
E0
1D
C-0314
031
E0
1E
C-0315
032
E0
1F
C-0316
033
E0
20
C-0317
034
E0
21
C-0318
035
E0
22
C-0319
036
E0
23
C-0320
037
E0
24
C-0321
038
E0
25
C-0401
039
E0
26
C-0402
040
E0
27
C-0403
041
E0
28
C-0404
042
E0
29
C-0405
043
E0
2A
C-0406
044
E0
2B
C-0407
045
E0
2C
C-0408
046
E0
2D
C-0409
047
E0
2E
C-0410
048
E0
2F
C-0411
049
E0
30
C-0412
I -87

No.

CSRC
Parameter
Item
(SC Code)
050
E0
31
C-0413
051
E0
32
C-0414
052
E0
33
C-0415
053
E0
34
C-0416
054
E0
35
C-0417
055
E0
36
C-0418
056
E0
37
C-1005
057
E0
38
C-1006
058
E0
39
C-1007
059
E0
3A
C-1008
060
E0
3B
C-1101
061
E0
3C
C-1102
062
E0
3D
C-1103
063
E0
3E
C-1104
064
E0
3F
C-1105
065
E0
40
C-1106
066
E0
41
C-1107
067
E0
42
C-1108
068
E0
43
C-1109
069
E0
44
C-1110
070
E0
45
C-1111
071
E0
46
C-1112
072
E0
47
C-1113
073
E0
48
C-1114
074
E0
49
C-1115
075
E0
4A
C-1116
076
E0
4B
C-1124
077
E0
4C
C-1125
078
E0
4D
C-1126
079
E0
4E
C-1127
080
E0
4F
C-1132
081
E0
50
C-1137
082
E0
51
C-1138
083
E0
52
084
E0
53
C-1140
085
E0
54
C-1141
086
E0
55
C-1142
087
E0
56
C-1143
088
E0
57
C-1201
089
E0
58
C-1202
090
E0
59
C-1203
091
E0
5A
C-1204
092
E0
5B
C-1205
093
E0
5C
C-1206
094
E0
5D
C-1211
095
E0
5E
C-1212
096
E0
5F
C-1213
097
E0
60
C-1214
098
E0
61
C-1215
099
E0
62
C-1216
100
E0
63
C-1221
101
E0
64
C-1222
102
E0
65
C-1223
103
E0
66
C-1224
104
E0
67
C-1225
105
E0
68
C-1226
106
E0
69
C-1227
I -88

No.

CSRC
Parameter
Item
(SC Code)
107
E0
6A
C-1228
108
E0
6B
C-1229
109
E0
6C
C-1230
110
E0
6D
C-1231
111
E0
6E
C-1232
112
E0
6F
C-1233
113
E0
70
C-1234
114
E0
71
C-1235
115
E0
72
C-1241
116
E0
73
C-1242
117
E0
74
C-1243
118
E0
75
C-1244
119
E0
76
C-1245
120
E0
77
C-1246
121
E0
78
C-1247
122
E0
79
C-1248
123
E0
7A
C-1249
124
E0
7B
C-1250
125
E0
7C
C-1251
126
E0
7D
C-1252
127
E0
7E
C-1253
128
E0
7F
C-1254
129
E0
80
C-1255
130
E0
81
C-1256
131
E0
82
C-1257
132
E0
83
C-1258
133
E0
84
C-1259
134
E0
85
C-1260
135
E0
86
C-1261
136
E0
87
C-1262
137
E0
88
C-1263
138
E0
89
C-1264
139
E0
8A
C-1265
140
E0
8B
C-1266
141
E0
8C
C-1267
142
E0
8D
C-1268
143
E0
8E
C-1269
144
E0
8F
C-1270
145
E0
90
C-1271
146
E0
91
C-1301
147
E0
92
C-1302
148
E0
93
C-1303
149
E0
94
C-1304
150
E0
95
C-1305
151
E0
96
C-1306
152
E0
97
C-1307
153
E0
98
C-1308
154
E0
99
C-1309
155
E0
9A
C-1310
156
E0
9B
C-1311
157
E0
9C
C-1321
158
E0
9D
C-1322
159
E0
9E
C-1323
160
E0
9F
C-1324
161
E0
A0
C-1325
162
E0
A1
C-1402
163
E0
A2
C-1403
I -89

No.

CSRC
Parameter
Item
(SC Code)
164
E0
A3
C-1404
165
E0
A4
C-1405
166
E0
A5
C-1411
167
E0
A6
C-1431
168
E0
A7
C-1432
169
E0
A8
C-1433
170
E0
A9
C-1434
171
E0
AA
C-1451
172
E0
AB
C-1452
173
E0
AC
C-1453
174
E0
AD
C-2001
175
E0
AE
C-2002
176
E0
AF
C-2003
177
E0
B0
C-2004
178
E0
B1
C-2005
179
E0
B2
C-2006
180
E0
B3
C-2201
181
E0
B4
C-2202
182
E0
B5
C-2203
183
E0
B6
C-2204
184
E0
B7
C-2211
185
E0
B8
C-2212
186
E0
B9
C-2213
187
E0
BA
C-2214
188
E0
BB
C-2220
189
E0
BC
C-2221
190
E0
BD
C-2222
191
E0
BE
C-2301
192
E0
BF
C-2302
193
E0
C0
C-2303
194
E0
C1
C-2304
195
E0
C2
C-2401
196
E0
C3
C-2402
197
E0
C4
C-2403
198
E0
C5
C-2404
199
E0
C6
C-2411
200
E0
C7
C-2412
201
E0
C8
C-2413
202
E0
C9
C-2414
203
E0
CA
C-2421
204
E0
CB
C-2422
205
E0
CC
C-2423
206
E0
CD
C-2424
207
E0
CE
C-2431
208
E0
CF
C-2432
209
E0
D0
C-2433
210
E0
D1
C-2434
211
E0
D2
C-2441
212
E0
D3
C-2442
213
E0
D4
C-2443
214
E0
D5
C-2444
215
E0
D6
C-2451
216
E0
D7
C-2452
217
E0
D8
C-2453
218
E0
D9
C-2454
219
E0
DA
C-2461
220
E0
DB
C-2462
I -90

No.

CSRC
Parameter
Item
(SC Code)
221
E0
DC
C-2463
222
E0
DD
C-2464
223
E0
DE
C-2470
224
E0
DF
C-2701
225
E0
E0
C-2702
226
E0
E1
C-2703
227
E0
E2
C-2704
228
E0
E3
C-2711
229
E0
E4
C-2712
230
E0
E5
C-2713
231
E0
E6
C-2714
232
E0
E7
C-2720
233
E0
E8
C-2721
234
E0
E9
C-2801
235
E0
EA
C-2802
236
E0
EB
C-2803
237
E0
EC
C-2804
238
E0
ED
C-2811
239
E0
EE
C-2812
240
E0
EF
C-2813
241
E0
F0
C-2814
242
E0
F1
C-2821
243
E0
F2
C-2822
244
E0
F3
C-2823
245
E0
F4
C-2824
246
E0
F5
C-2831
247
E0
F6
C-2832
248
E0
F7
C-2833
249
E0
F8
C-2834
250
E0
F9
C-2840
251
E0
FA
C-2841
252
E0
FB
C-3101
253
E0
FC
C-3102
254
E0
FD
C-3103
255
E0
FE
C-3104
256
E0
FF
C-3301
257
E1
00
C-3302
258
E1
01
C-3303
259
E1
02
C-3501
260
E1
03
C-3502
261
E1
04
C-3503
262
E1
05
C-3504
263
E1
06
C-3505
264
E1
07
C-3506
265
E1
08
266
E1
09
C-3508
267
E1
0A
C-3801
268
E1
0B
C-3802
269
E1
0C
C-3803
270
E1
0D
C-3804
271
E1
0E
C-3805
272
E1
0F
C-3806
273
E1
10
C-3901
274
E1
11
C-3902
275
E1
12
C-3903
276
E1
13
C-3904
277
E1
14
C-3905
I -91

No.

CSRC
Parameter
Item
(SC Code)
278
E1
15
C-3906
279
E1
16
C-3907
280
E1
17
C-3908
281
E1
18
C-3909
282
E1
19
C-3910
283
E1
1A
C-3911
284
E1
1B
C-3912
285
E1
1C
C-3913
286
E1
1D
C-3914
287
E1
1E
C-3915
288
E1
1F
C-3916
289
E1
20
C-4101
290
E1
21
C-4102
291
E1
22
C-4103
292
E1
23
C-4104
293
E1
24
C-4111
294
E1
25
C-4112
295
E1
26
C-4113
296
E1
27
C-4114
297
E1
28
C-4120
298
E1
29
C-4301
299
E1
2A
C-4501
300
E1
2B
C-4502
301
E1
2C
C-4503
302
E1
2D
C-4504
303
E1
2E
C-4511
304
E1
2F
C-4512
305
E1
30
C-4513
306
E1
31
C-4514
307
E1
32
C-4520
308
E1
33
C-4521
309
E1
34
C-4522
310
E1
35
C-4701
311
E1
36
C-4702
312
E1
37
C-4703
313
E1
38
C-4705
314
E1
39
C-4706
315
E1
3A
C-4708
316
E1
3B
C-4709
317
E1
3C
318
E1
3D
319
E1
3E
C-4713
320
E1
3F
C-4714
321
E1
40
C-4715
322
E1
41
C-4716
323
E1
42
C-4717
324
E1
43
C-4718
325
E1
44
C-4719
326
E1
45
C-4720
327
E1
46
C-4721
328
E1
47
C-4722
329
E1
48
C-4723
330
E1
49
C-4724
331
E1
4A
C-4725
332
E1
4B
C-4840
333
E1
4C
C-4850
334
E1
4D
C-5001
I -92

No.

CSRC
Parameter
Item
(SC Code)
335
E1
4E
C-5002
336
E1
4F
C-5003
337
E1
50
C-5004
338
E1
51
C-5005
339
E1
52
C-5010
340
E1
53
341
E1
54
C-5301
342
E1
55
C-5302
343
E1
56
C-5303
344
E1
57
C-6101
345
E1
58
C-6102
346
E1
59
C-6301
347
E1
5A
C-6701
348
E1
5B
C-6702
349
E1
5C
C-6703
350
E1
5D
C-6704
351
E1
5E
C-6705
352
E1
5F
C-6706
353
E1
60
C-6707
354
E1
61
C-6708
355
E1
62
C-6709
356
E1
63
C-6710
357
E1
64
C-6711
358
E1
65
C-6712
359
E1
66
C-6713
360
E1
67
C-6714
361
E1
68
C-6715
362
E1
69
C-6716
363
E1
6A
C-6717
364
E1
6B
C-6718
365
E1
6C
C-6719
366
E1
6D
C-6720
367
E1
6E
C-6721
368
E1
6F
C-6722
369
E1
70
C-6723
370
E1
71
C-6724
371
E1
72
C-6725
372
E1
73
C-6801
373
E1
74
C-7001
374
E1
75
C-8001
375
E1
76
C-8101
376
E1
77
C-8102
377
E1
78
C-8103
378
E1
79
C-8401
379
E1
7A
C-8402
380
E1
7B
C-8403
381
E1
7C
C-8404
382
E1
7D
C-8405
383
E1
7E
C-8406
384
E1
7F
C-8407
385
E1
80
C-C101
386
E1
81
C-C102
387
E1
82
C-C103
388
E1
83
C-C104
389
E1
84
C-C106
390
E1
85
C-C107
391
E1
86
C-C108
I -93

No.

CSRC
Parameter
Item
(SC Code)
392
E1
87
C-C109
393
E1
88
C-C111
394
E1
89
C-C112
395
E1
8A
C-C113
396
E1
8B
C-C114
397
E1
8C
C-C115
398
E1
8D
C-C120
399
E1
8E
C-D0E0
400
E1
8F
C-D0E1
401
E1
90
C-D0E2
402
E1
91
C-D0E3
403
E1
92
C-D0E4
404
E1
93
C-D0E5
405
E1
94
C-D0E6
406
E1
95
C-D0E7
407
E1
96
C-D0E8
408
E1
97
409
E1
98
410
E1
99
411
E1
9A
412
E1
9B
413
E1
9C
414
E1
9D
415
E1
9E
C-D0F0
416
E1
9F
C-E001
417
E1
A0
C-E002
418
E1
A1
C-E003
419
E1
A2
C-E004
420
E1
A3
C-E005
421
E1
A4
C-E006
422
E1
A5
C-E007
423
E1
A6
C-0322
424
E1
A7
C-2851
425
E1
A8
C-2852
426
E1
A9
C-2853
427
E1
AA
C-2861
428
E1
AB
C-2862
429
E1
AC
C-2863
430
E1
AD
C-2871
431
E1
AE
C-2872
432
E1
AF
C-2873
433
E1
B0
C-1009
434
E1
B1
C-1010
435
E1
B2
C-1011
436
E1
B3
C-1330
437
E1
B4
C-1331
438
E1
B5
C-1332
439
E1
B6
C-1333
440
E1
B7
C-1334
441
E1
B8
C-1406
442
E1
B9
C-1435
443
E1
BA
C-1436
444
E1
BB
C-1437
445
E1
BC
C-1454
446
E1
BD
C-1501
447
E1
BE
C-1502
448
E1
BF
C-1504
I -94

No.

CSRC
Parameter
Item
(SC Code)
449
E1
C0
C-1505
450
E1
C1
C-1506
451
E1
C2
C-1507
452
E1
C3
C-1508
453
E1
C4
C-1509
454
E1
C5
C-1510
455
E1
C6
C-1511
456
E1
C7
C-1512
457
E1
C8
C-1513
458
E1
C9
C-1514
459
E1
CA
C-1515
460
E1
CB
C-1516
461
E1
CC
C-1517
462
E1
CD
C-1518
463
E1
CE
C-1519
464
E1
CF
C-1520
465
E1
D0
C-1521
466
E1
D1
C-1522
467
E1
D2
C-1523
468
E1
D3
C-1524
469
E1
D4
C-1525
470
E1
D5
C-1526
471
E1
D6
C-1527
472
E1
D7
C-1528
473
E1
D8
C-1530
474
E1
D9
C-1531
475
E1
DA
C-1532
476
E1
DB
C-1534
477
E1
DC
C-1537
478
E1
DD
C-1538
479
E1
DE
C-1540
480
E1
DF
C-1541
481
E1
E0
C-1542
482
E1
E1
C-1543
483
E1
E2
C-1544
484
E1
E3
C-1545
485
E1
E4
C-1546
486
E1
E5
C-1547
487
E1
E6
C-1548
488
E1
E7
C-1549
489
E1
E8
C-1550
490
E1
E9
C-1551
491
E1
EA
C-1552
492
E1
EB
C-1553
493
E1
EC
C-1554
494
E1
ED
C-1555
495
E1
EE
C-1556
496
E1
EF
C-1557
497
E1
F0
C-1558
498
E1
F1
C-1559
499
E1
F2
C-1560
500
E1
F3
C-1561
501
E1
F4
C-1562
502
E1
F5
C-C116
503
E1
F6
504
E1
F7
C-1144
505
E1
F8
C-1145
I -95

No.

CSRC
Parameter
Item
(SC Code)
506
E1
F9
C-1146
507
E1
FA
C-1147
508
E1
FB
C-1148
509
E1
FC
C-1272
510
E1
FD
C-1273
511
E1
FE
C-1274
512
E1
FF
C-1275
513
E2
00
C-1012
514
E2
01
C-C117
515
E2
02
C-1014
516
E2
03
C-1281
517
E2
04
C-1282
518
E2
05
C-1341
519
E2
06
C-1342
520
E2
07
C-1408
521
E2
08
C-1439
522
E2
09
C-1456
523
E2
0A
C-1499
524
E2
0B
525
E2
0C
C-1565
526
E2
0D
C-1566
527
E2
0E
C-C118
528
E2
0F
C-1013
529
E2
10
C-1290
530
E2
11
C-1291
531
E2
12
C-1292
532
E2
13
C-1293
533
E2
14
C-1294
534
E2
15
C-1295
535
E2
16
C-1351
536
E2
17
C-1352
537
E2
18
C-1353
538
E2
19
C-1354
539
E2
1A
C-1355
540
E2
1B
C-1356
541
E2
1C
C-1357
542
E2
1D
C-1358
543
E2
1E
C-1359
544
E2
1F
C-1360
545
E2
20
C-1361
546
E2
21
C-1362
547
E2
22
C-1407
548
E2
23
C-1438
549
E2
24
C-1455
550
E2
25
C-C119
551
E2
26
C-5304
552
E2
27
C-E008
553
E2
28
554
E2
29
555
E2
2A
556
E2
2B
557
E2
2C
558
E2
2D
559
E2
2E
560
E2
2F
561
E2
30
562
E2
31
I -96

No.

CSRC
Parameter
Item
(SC Code)
563
E2
32
564
E2
33
565
E2
34
566
E2
35
567
E2
36
568
E2
37
569
E2
38
570
E2
39
571
E2
3A
572
E2
3B
573
E2
3C
574
E2
3D
575
E2
3E
576
E2
3F
577
E2
40
578
E2
41
579
E2
42
580
E2
43
581
E2
44
582
E2
45
583
E2
46
584
E2
47
585
E2
48
586
E2
49
587
E2
4A
588
E2
4B
589
E2
4C
590
E2
4D
591
E2
4E
592
E2
4F
593
E2
50
594
E2
51
595
E2
52
596
E2
53
597
E2
54
598
E2
55
599
E2
56
600
E2
57
601
E2
58
602
E2
59
603
E2
5A
604
E2
5B
605
E2
5C
606
E2
5D
607
E2
5E
608
E2
5F
609
E2
60
610
E2
61
611
E2
62
612
E2
63
613
E2
64
614
E2
65
615
E2
66
616
E2
67
617
E2
68
618
E2
69
619
E2
6A
I -97

No.

CSRC
Parameter
Item
(SC Code)
620
E2
6B
621
E2
6C
622
E2
6D
623
E2
6E
624
E2
6F
625
E2
70
626
E2
71
627
E2
72
628
E2
73
629
E2
74
630
E2
75
631
E2
76
632
E2
77
633
E2
78
634
E2
79
635
E2
7A
636
E2
7B
637
E2
7C
638
E2
7D
639
E2
7E
640
E2
7F
5.6.11 SC data of time series

For the latest 20 items of error codes, check the SC Code, Total Counter, Date, Time, Machine (00: Idling, 01: Scan, 02: Print, 03: Scan/Print).
5.6.12 Maintenance Counter Reset (Maintenance History)

(1) Usage
Check the maintenance frequency.
(2) Specifications
The latest 10 items of the maintenance counter reset history is displayed.
Item
Reset Date
Maintenance Counter
Maintenance Limit Data
Counter Average
Counter Reset Count
(3) Confirmation steps of Maintenance Counter Reset

Press [14 Maintenance History].
2. "Maintenance History screen"
Press [01 Maintenance Counter Reset].
3. "Maintenance Counter Reset screen"
Check the maintenance counter reset history.
I -98
5.6.13 Parts History in Time Series (Maintenance History)

(1) Usage
Check the maintenance frequency for respective parts.
(2) Specifications
The latest 50 items of the maintenance counter reset history is displayed.
Item
No.
(Number of the special parts counter)
Parts Name
P/N
Counter/Limit
Replacement Count
ORU
(The mark "*" means that the part is replaced in the ORU-M mode. )
(3) Confirmation steps of Parts History in Time Series

Press [14 Maintenance History].
2. "Maintenance History screen"
Press [02 Parts History in Time Series].
3. "Parts History in Time Series screen"
Check the special parts counter reset history.
5.6.14 ORU-M Maintenance History

(1) Usage
Check the frequency of unit replacement, then predict the timing of replacing the ORU-M target part and collect each type of information.
I -99
(2) Specifications
Item
Information of ORU-M maintenance history:
Unit replacing Start/End date and time, Downtime (m), Total Counter, End Status (Normal, error)
Information of each ORU-M maintenance unit:
Parts Name, P/N, Serial Number, Life Cycle, Replacement Count, Replace Reason (Periodical Replacement, Image Trouble, Transport
Trouble/JAM)
Information of total ORU-M maintenance:
Maintenance Count, Replace Unit Number, Downtime Average
Maximum storable number
The data of the latest 125 replacements of the ORU-M corresponding unit are stored.
When one of the ORU-M counters is reset, up to 125 data including the latest replacement date and the replaced unit information are
stored.
Example
When replacing 4 units at a maintenance, the data of latest 25 maintenances can be stored.
(Maintenance date (1 item to be stored) + 4 units replaced (4 items to be stored) = 5 items to be stored
With this function, the following items can be checked.
Name of replaced unit
Part No. (P/N)
Life cycle
Replacement Count
Replace Reason (PM, CM (image quality), CM (machine broken))
The down time of the latest 50 units are stored.
Measures the length of time from when entering the ORU-M replacement screen to when exiting it.
Up to 50 data (time taken for replacement and replacement date) of each ORU-M corresponding unit are stored. The data older than that
are stored as averaged value.
(3) ORU=M maintenance history check procedures

1. "ORU-M Maintenance History screen"
Check the ORU maintenance history.
[1]
[1]
[2]
Information of ORU-M total maintenance history:
[2]
ORU-M maintenance history information
2. To check the object unit of each maintenance, select the maintenance to display and then press [Information View].
3. "Information View screen"
Check the maintenance of each unit.
I -100
5.6.15 Checking, setting and resetting procedure of the Special Parts Counter
Displays the counter of the target part.
When the target part is replaced, reset the counter of that part to manage the service history.
(1) Checking, setting and resetting procedure

Press [03 Parts Counter].
3. "Parts Counter Menu screen"
Press [01 Special Parts Counter].
4. "Special Parts Counter screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the pages and check the counter.
5. To reset the counter, press [] or [] to select the target item.
6. Press [Counter Clear].
Press [No] to cancel and return to "Special Parts Counter screen"
5.6.16 Special Parts Counter

Note
Be sure to reset the parts counter after replacing any parts listed below. Otherwise, image failure or jam may occur.
1. Dust proof filter /1 assy: No.003 Dust proof filter /A (right)
2. Charging coronas /Y, /M, /C, and /K: No.013 to 020 Charging coronas /Y, /M, /C and /K
3. Drum cartridges /Y, /M, /C and /K: No.021 to 028 Drum cartridges /Y, /M, /C and /K
4. Developers /Y, /M, /C and /K: No.041 to 048 Developers /Y, /M, /C and /K
5. Belt cleaner blade: No.061, 062 Belt cleaning blade
6. 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K: No.063 to 066 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K
When the counter exceeds the limit, the color of the character changes into red.
No.
CSRC
parameter
001
Z1
00
002
Z1
01
Parts name
Toner Recovery Box
Parts No.
A1DUA635
Count conditions
*1
The waste toner full sensor (PS52) detects the
limit automatically.
003
Z1
02
Dust-proof Filter/A(Right)(%)
A1DUA112
004
Z1
03
Dust-proof Filter/B(Rear)(%)
A1DUA168
Counted for each color with the combination of

print coverage, drive distance of the developing
roller, humidity, and so on. Shows the count in
percentage with respect to the end of its parts
life.
The counters No.003 and 004 are reset
simultaneously.
005
Z1
04
Dust-proof Filter/3(Right)(%)
A1DU1230
006
Z1
05
Charging Dust-proof Filter
A1DUA444
007
Z1
06
008
Z1
07
*1
009
Z1
08
010
Z1
09
011
Z1
0A
I -101

Parts name
No.
CSRC
parameter
Parts No.
012
Z1
0B
013
Z1
0C
Charging Corona/Y(Page)
A1DUA460
*2
When counting by number of pages
Resetting this counter also resets No.014.
014
Z1
0D
Charging Corona/Y(Time %)
A1DUA460
Counts the charging time and shows the count in

life.
015
Z1
0E
Charging Corona/M(Page)
A1DUA460
*2
016
Z1
0F
Charging Corona/M(Time %)
A1DUA460

life.
017
Z1
10
Charging Corona/C(Page)
A1DUA460
*2
018
Z1
11
Charging Corona/C(Time %)
A1DUA460

life.
019
Z1
12
Charging Corona/K(Page)
A1DUA460
*1
020
Z1
13
Charging Corona/K(Time %)
A1DUA460

life.
021
Z1
14
Drum Cartridge/Y(Page)
A1DUA330
*2
022
Z1
15
Drum Cartridge/Y(Distance %)
A1DUA330
Compares the drive distance of the drum with

that of the Lubricant applying roller and shows
the larger count number in percentage with
respect to the end of its parts life.
023
Z1
16
Drum Cartridge/M(Page)
A1DUA330
*2
024
Z1
17
Drum Cartridge/M(Distance %)
A1DUA330

025
Z1
18
Drum Cartridge/C(Page)
A1DUA330
*2
026
Z1
19
Drum Cartridge/C(Distance %)
A1DUA330

027
Z1
1A
Drum Cartridge/K(Page)
A1DUA330
*1
028
Z1
1B
Drum Cartridge/K(Distance %)
A1DUA330

029
Z1
1C
030
Z1
1D
031
Z1
1E
032
Z1
1F
033
Z1
20
034
Z1
21
035
Z1
22
Count conditions
I -102

No.
CSRC
parameter
036
Z1
037
Z1
038
Parts name
Parts No.
Count conditions
23
24
Z1
25
039
Z1
26
040
Z1
27
041
Z1
28
Developer/Y (Page)
A1U9T700
*2
042
Z1
29
Developer/Y(Distance %)
A1U9T700
Counts the drive distance of the developing roller

and shows the count in percentage with respect
to the end of its parts life.
043
Z1
2A
Developer/M (Page)
A1U9T800
*2
044
Z1
2B
Developer/M(Distance %)
A1U9T800

045
Z1
2C
Developer/C (Page)
A1U9T900
*2
046
Z1
2D
Developer/C(Distance %)
A1U9T900

047
Z1
2E
Developer/K (Page)
A1U9T600
*1
048
Z1
2F
Developer/K(Distance %)
A1U9T600

049
Z1
30
Developing Unit/Y(Page)
A1DUA370
*2
When counting by number of pages.
050
Z1
31
Developing Unit/Y(Distance %)
A1DUA370
Counts the travel distance and shows the count

in percentage with respect to the end of its parts
life.
051
Z1
32
Developing Unit/M(Page)
A1DUA370
*2
052
Z1
33
Developing Unit/M(Distance %)
A1DUA370

life.
053
Z1
34
Developing Unit/C(Page)
A1DUB380
*2
054
Z1
35
Developing Unit/C(Distance %)
A1DUB380

life.
055
Z1
36
Developing Unit/K(Page)
A1DUB390
*1
056
Z1
37
Developing Unit/K(Distance %)
A1DUB390

life.
057
Z1
38
Intermediate Transfer Unit
A1DUA500
*1
058
Z1
39
Intermediate Transfer Belt
A03U5042
*1
059
Z1
3A
Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit
A1DUA530
*1
Resetting this counter also resets No.060 to 062
and No.69.
060
Z1
3B
Toner Recovery Sheet
A1DUA532
*1
I -103

Parts name
No.
CSRC
parameter
Parts No.
Count conditions
061
Z1
3C
Belt Cleaning Blade(Page)
A03U5530
*1
062
Z1
3D
Belt Cleaning Blade(Distance %)
A03U5530
Counts the drive distance of the transfer belt and

shows the count in percentage with respect to
the end of its parts life.
*2
063
Z1
3E
1st Transfer Roller/Y
A03U5012
064
Z1
3F
1st Transfer Roller/M
A03U5012
065
Z1
40
1st Transfer Roller/C
A03U5012
066
Z1
41
1st Transfer Roller/K
A03U5004
*1
067
Z1
42
2nd Transfer Roller/U
65AA2611
*1
The nonvolatile powered time and the slide
distance are reset simultaneously.
068
Z1
43
A1DUA518
*1
069
Z1
44
65AA2638
*1
070
Z1
45
Separation Claw Solenoid
26NA8251
1 count for each paper exit in the single side

mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
071
Z1
46
2nd Transfer Roller/L
65AA4501
*1
072
Z1
47
Separation Discharging Unit
A1DUB527
*1
073
Z1
48
Transfer Earth Plate Unit
A1DUB526

074
Z1
49
075
Z1
4A
076
Z1
4B
077
Z1
4C
078
Z1
4D
079
Z1
4E
080
Z1
4F
081
Z1
50
Fusing Unit
Japan A1DUA72A
North America A1DUA72E
Europe A1DUA72F
*1
082
Z1
51
Fusing Roller/2
A03U7202
*1
083
Z1
52
Fusing Roller/L
A03U7203
*1
084
Z1
53
Fusing Belt
A03U7205
*1
085
Z1
54
Belt Regulating Sleeve
A03U7250
*1
086
Z1
55
Paper Exit Roller/Up
A03U7225

087
Z1
56
Fusing Limiter
65AA5365
*1
088
Z1
57
Insulating Sleeve/U
A03U7295
*1
089
Z1
58
Fusing Bearing/L
26NA5371
*1
090
Z1
59
Insulating Sleeve/L
A03U7227
*1
091
Z1
5A
Fusing Roller/1
A03U7201
*1
092
Z1
5B
Fusing Drive Gear/B
A03U8082
*1
093
Z1
5C
Fusing Bearing/1
A03U8078
*1
094
Z1
5D
Fusing Drive Gear/O
A03U8095
*1
095
Z1
5E
Fusing Regulating Gear
65AA7747
*1
096
Z1
5F
Fusing Duct Assy
A1DUA782
*1
097
Z1
60
Fusing Bearing/2
56UA7507
*1
098
Z1
61
Fusing Drive Gear/M
A03U8093
*1
099
Z1
62
Fusing Lamp/U
A1DUM31A (Japan)
A1DUM31E (North
America)
A1DUM31F (Europe)
*1
100
Z1
63
Fusing Lamp/L
A03UM32A (Japan)
A03UM32E (North
America)
A03UM32F (Europe)
*1
101
Z1
64
Fusing Temp. Sensor/U
A1DUA767
*1
102
Z1
65
Fusing Temp. Sensor/L
A1DUA737
*1
103
Z1
66
Center Fusing Temp. Sensor/U
65AA8801
*1
104
Z1
67
Center Fusing Temp. Sensor/L
65AA8802
*1
I -104

Parts name
No.
CSRC
parameter
Parts No.
Count conditions
105
Z1
68
Feed/Separation Rubber(Tray1)
25SA4096
1 count for each paper exit from Tray1
106
Z1
69
25SA4096
107
Z1
6A
25SA4096
108
Z1
6B
Feed/Separation Rubber(By-pass) 25SA4096
1 count for each paper exit from bypass
109
Z1
6C
Paper Feed Roller(Tray1)
A1DUA567
110
Z1
6D
A1DUA567
111
Z1
6E
A1DUA567
112
Z1
6F
Paper Feed Roller(By-pass)
A21EB614
113
Z1
70
Paper Feed Clutch(Tray1)
56AA8201
114
Z1
71
56AA8201
115
Z1
72
56AA8201
116
Z1
73
Paper Feed Clutch(By-pass)
56AA8201
117
Z1
74
Pre-regist. Clutch(Tray1)
56AA8201
118
Z1
75
56AA8201
119
Z1
76
56AA8201
120
Z1
77
Intermediate Transport Clutch/1
56AA8201
1 count for each paper exit from Tray2 or Tray3
121
Z1
78
56AA8201

mode, 1 count in the double side mode.
122
Z1
79
56AA8201

mode, 1 count in the double side mode.
123
Z1
7A
Registration Cleaning Sheet
A1DUB711

124
Z1
7B
Registration Roller
A1DUB710

125
Z1
7C
Decurler Roller
A03U8605

126
Z1
7D
Paper Exit Decurler Roller
A03U8926
1 count for each paper exit.
127
Z1
7E
ADU Transport Clutch/1
A03UM201
1 count for each paper exit in the duplex mode

(Not counted in the simplex mode)
128
Z1
7F
A03UM201

129
Z1
80
A03UM201

130
Z1
81
ADU Pre-regist. Clutch
A03UM201

131
Z1
82
Exposure ON Time
A03UM301
Accumulation of time lamp is on. 1 count per

second. (unit: min.)
132
Z1
83
Main Power Switch
55GA8601
1 count each time the main power switch turns

ON the power.
133
Z1
84
Sub Power Switch
A03UM601
1 count each time the sub power switch turns

OFF the power.
134
Z1
85
Door Switch
40AA8501
1 count each time the front door is opened.
135
Z1
86
Toner Supply Door Switch
13GG-802
1 count each time the front door is opened.
136
Z1
87
Fusing Separation Plate Assy
A1DUA741
137
Z1
88
138
Z1
89
139
Z1
8A
140
Z1
8B
141
Z1
8C
142
Z1
8D
Paper Exit Roller
A0438907
1 count for each paper exit (when OT-502 is

installed)
143
Z1
8E
Paper Exit Guide Roller/2
65AA4818

installed)
144
Z1
8F
Paper Holding Roller
65AA4849

installed)
145
Z1
90
146
Z1
91
147
Z1
92
148
Z1
93
*1
149
Z1
94
LCT Paper Feed Roller
A03X5652
1 count for each paper exit from LU
150
Z1
95
LCT Feed/Rev Roller
A03X5653/5654
I -105

No.
CSRC
parameter
Parts name

Parts No.
Count conditions
151
Z1
96
LCT Feed Clutch
56AA8201
152
Z1
97
LCT Pre-regist. Clutch
56AA8201
153
Z1
98
154
Z1
99
155
Z1
9A
156
Z1
9B
157
Z1
9C
158
Z1
9D
159
Z1
9E
160
Z1
9F
161
Z1
A0
162
Z1
A1
PFU Paper Feed Roller(Tray4)
A03X5652
1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4.
163
Z1
A2
PFU Feed/Rev Roller(Tray4)
A03X5653/5654
164
Z1
A3
PFU Feed Clutch(Tray4)
56AA8201
165
Z1
A4
PFU Reverse Clutch(Tray4)
56AA8201
166
Z1
A5
PFU Paper Feed Roller(Tray5)
A03X5652
167
Z1
A6
PFU Feed/Rev Roller(Tray5)
A03X5653/5654
168
Z1
A7
PFU Feed Clutch(Tray5)
56AA8201
169
Z1
A8
PFU Reverse Clutch(Tray5)
56AA8201
170
Z1
A9
PFU Vert. Trans. Clutch/1
56AA8201
171
Z1
AA
56AA8201
172
Z1
AB
56AA8201
173
Z1
AC
PFU Pre-regist. Clutch
56AA8201
1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4 or

Tray5
174
Z1
AD
PFU Horiz. Transport Clutch/1
56AA8201

Tray5
175
Z1
AE
PFU Horiz. Transport Clutch/2
56AA8201

Tray5
176
Z1
AF
177
Z1
B0
178
Z1
B1
179
Z1
B2
180
Z1
B3
181
Z1
B4
182
Z1
B5
183
Z1
B6
184
Z1
B7
185
Z1
B8
186
Z1
B9
187
Z1
BA
188
Z1
BB
189
Z1
BC
190
Z1
BD
191
Z1
BE
192
Z1
BF
193
Z1
C0
FS Staple/Front
15AA4222
1 count for each paper exit in either of the 1staple at front or the 2-staple mode.
194
Z1
C1
FS Staple/Back
15AA-450
1 count for each paper exit in either of the 1staple at rear or the 2-staple mode.
195
Z1
C2
FS Solenoid/A
56QA8251
1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort mode

and the sort mode.
196
Z1
C3
FS Paper Exit Roller/A
122H4825
1 count for each paper exit in the sort, non-sort

or staple mode.
197
Z1
C4
198
Z1
C5
199
Z1
C6
200
Z1
C7
201
Z1
C8
FD Feed Roller/A Top
50BA-574
202
Z1
C9
FD Reverse Rubber/Top
13QN-443
I -106
Counts the paper feed from PI tray /Up.

Parts name
No.
CSRC
parameter
Parts No.
Count conditions
203
Z1
CA
FD Feed Roller/B Top
50BA-575
204
Z1
CB
FD Feed Roller/A Low
50BA-574
205
Z1
CC
FD Reverse Rubber/Low
13QN-443
206
Z1
CD
FD Feed Roller/B Low
56BA-575
207
Z1
CE
FD Punch Motor Assy
15AG-573
1 count for each paper exit in the punch mode.
208
Z1
CF
FD Solenoid/A(Release1)
56QA8251
1 count for each paper exit in the punch or

folding mode (all size).
209
Z1
D0
FD Solenoid/A(Release2)
56QA8251
1) 1 count for each paper exit in the folding mode

(all size)
2) 1 count for each paper exit in the punch mode
(paper length 220mm or larger).
210
Z1
D1
FD Motor Assy(Up/Down Motor)
129U-108
211
Z1
D2
212
Z1
D3
213
Z1
D4
214
Z1
D5
215
Z1
D6
LS1 Solenoid (Lead)
15AV8252
1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and

sort mode (all size).
216
Z1
D7
LS1 Solenoid (Resr)
15AV8253

217
Z1
D8
LS1 Solenoid (Center)
15AV8251

sort mode (Length 295mm or more and Width
226mm or more).
218
Z1
D9
LS1 Solenoid (Curl)
15AV8255

and the sort mode.
219
Z1
DA
LS1 UP/Down Motor
15AV8003
Counts operation number of times of the stacker

tray up down motor.
220
Z1
DB
LS2 Solenoid (Lead)
15AV8252

221
Z1
DC
LS2 Solenoid (Resr)
15AV8253

222
Z1
DD
LS2 Solenoid (Center)
15AV8251

sort mode (Length 295mm or more and Width
226mm or more).
223
Z1
DE
LS2 Solenoid (Curl)
15AV8255

and the sort mode.
224
Z1
DF
LS2 UP/Down Motor
15AV8003
Counts operation number of times of the stacker

tray up down motor.
225
Z1
E0
226
Z1
E1
227
Z1
E2
228
Z1
E3
229
Z1
E4
SD Trimmer Edge
A0H2R901
1 count for each booklet exit completion in the

trimming mode.
Counts when new trimming unit is mounted.
230
Z1
E5
SD Trimmer Receiver
A0H2B622

trimming mode.
231
Z1
E6
SD Trimmer Press Drive Motor
A0H2M101

trimming mode.
232
Z1
E7
SD Trimmer Edge Drive Motor
A0H2M102

trimming mode.
233
Z1
E8
SD Paper Cutter Unit
A0H2A620

trimming mode.
1 count for each paper exit in the saddle stitch
mode.
Counts when either new trimming unit or
previous trimming unit is mounted.
Counts the paper feed from PI tray /Lw.
1 count for each paper exit to the main tray.
234
Z1
E9
SD Staple/Right
15AN-550
235
Z1
EA
SD Staple/Left
15AN-550
236
Z1
EB
SD Trimmer Edge
15AN-570
237
Z1
EC
SD Trimmer Receiver
15AN5282
238
Z1
ED
SD Trimmer Edge Drive Motor
15AN8002
I -107

trimming mode.
Counts when previous trimming unit is mounted.

No.
CSRC
parameter
Parts name

Parts No.
Count conditions
239
Z1
EE
SD Transport Solenoid
15AN8251
240
Z1
EF
SD Solenoid
13QE8251
1 count for each paper exit to the folding section.

Counts when either new trimming unit or
previous trimming unit is mounted.
241
Z1
F0
SD FNS Solenoid
12QR8252
1 count for each paper exit to the stacker.

Counts when new or previous trimming unit is
mounted.
242
Z1
F1
SD Gear/B
15AN7719
1 count for each time the bundle up/down section

goes up (PS45/ON).
Counts when new or previous trimming unit is
mounted.
243
Z1
F2
SD Paper Adjusting Unit
15AN5092
1 count for each trimming.

Counts when previous trimming unit is mounted.
244
Z1
F3
245
Z1
F4
246
Z1
F5
247
Z1
F6
248
Z1
F7
FNS Stapler/F
15JM-501
249
Z1
F8
FNS Stapler/R
15JM-501
250
Z1
F9
FNS Shift Motor
12QR-361
1 count each time an even number of print is

exited in the sort mode.
251
Z1
FA
FNS Exit Opening Motor
12QR-361
1 count for each starting job for the size A4S and
81/2 x 11S, and 1count at exiting these size in
staple mode.
252
Z1
FB
FNS Folding Knife Motor
13QJ-502
1 count for each paper exit in the saddle stitch/

half-fold/tri-fold mode.
253
Z1
FC
Bypass Gate Solenoid
12QR-263
1 count for each paper exit for the A4, B5, 81/2 x
11 and 16K sizes in the staple mode.
254
Z1
FD
Tri-Folding Gate SD
12QR-263
1 count for each paper exit in the tri-folding

mode.
1 count for each paper exit to the FNS main tray.
1 count for each paper exit in the staple mode.
1 count for each exit in the 1-staple at front/2staples/saddle stitching mode.
255
Z1
FE
FNS Paper Exit Roller/A
122H4825
256
Z1
FF
FNS Paper Exit Roller/B
A04D8904
257
Z7
00
FNS Transport Roller/4
13QE4531
1 count for each paper exit in the staple/saddle

stitch/half-fold/tri-fold mode.
258
Z7
01
FNS Paper Transport Roller/A
20AK4210
1 count for each paper exit in the staple/saddle

stitch/half-fold/tri-fold mode.
259
Z7
02
260
Z7
03
261
Z7
04
262
Z7
05
263
Z7
06
PI Conveyance Clutch/U
13QN8201
264
Z7
07
PI Feed Roller/A/U
50BA-574
265
Z7
08
PI Feed Roller/B/U
13QN-446
266
Z7
09
PI Reverse Roller/U
13QN-443
267
Z7
0A
PI Torque Limiter/U
13QN4073
1 count for each PI upper paper feed.
268
Z7
0B
PI Conveyance Clutch/L
13QN8201
269
Z7
0C
PI Feed Roller/A/L
50BA-574
270
Z7
0D
PI Feed Roller/B/L
50BA-575
271
Z7
0E
PI Reverse Roller/L
13QN-443
272
Z7
0F
PI Torque Limiter/L
13QN4073
273
Z7
10
274
Z7
11
STAPLE ASSY/FRONT
A07RA735
1 count for each paper exit in the 1-staple at

front/2-staples mode (FS-531)
275
Z7
12
STAPLE ASSY/REAR
A07RA736
1 count for each paper exit in the 1-staple in rear/

2-staples mode (FS-531)
276
Z7
13
FNS Cleaning Plate Assy
A07RA741
1 count for each paper exit in the staple mode

(FS-531)
277
Z7
14
278
Z7
15
279
Z7
16
280
Z7
17
281
Z7
18
PK Punching Unit(2-Hole)
1 count for each PI lower paper feed.
A04E0Y0
I -108
Number of punching by PK

Parts name
No.
CSRC
parameter
Parts No.
Count conditions
282
Z7
19
PK Punching Unit(2/3,2/4-Hole)
A04F0Y1
A04F0Y0
283
Z7
1A
PK Punching Unit(4-Hole)
A04G0G0
284
Z7
1B
285
Z7
1C
286
Z7
1D
287
Z7
1E
288
Z7
1F
ADF Paper Feed Roller
13YH4064
289
Z7
20
ADF Feed Roller
13YH4039
290
Z7
21
ADF Separation Roller
291
Z7
22
292
Z7
23
293
Z7
24
294
Z7
25
295
Z7
26
PB Sub Tray Exit SD
56QA8251
1 count for each paper exit to the PB sub tray.
296
Z7
27
PB SB Separate Motor
13GQ8005
297
Z7
28
PB Sub Compile FD SD
15AA8251
1 count for each paper stack on the PB stacking

section.
298
Z7
29
PB Clump Press(Top) SD
15AA8251
Only A04F0Y0 is displayed.
20AJ4015
299
Z7
2A
PB Exit Roller/A
13GQ4519
1 count for each paper exit from PB
300
Z7
2B
PB Tray Feed Roller
55VA-464
301
Z7
2C
PB Tray Trans./Rev Roller
55VA-463
1 count for each book exit in PB tray cover

mode.
302
Z7
2D
PB Tray Feed Clutch
56AA8201
303
Z7
2E
PB Tray Handle Clutch
56AA8201
304
Z7
2F
PB Cutter/Assy
A0756230
1 count for each book exit when cover paper

trimming is set.
1 count for each paper exit from PB
305
Z7
30
PB Filter/1
A0753724
306
Z7
31
PB Filter/2
A0753724
307
Z7
32
PB Path SW Solenoid
56QA8251
1 count for each book exit in other than PB tray

cover mode.
308
Z7
33
PB Melt Tank Assy
A075A39A/39E/39F
Time during which tank applying roller rotates. 1

count per an hour.
309
Z7
34
310
Z7
35
311
Z7
36
312
Z7
37
313
Z7
38
GP Aligner Idler Roller Assembly
A0N9PA01
1 count for each paper exit in multi-punch mode.
314
Z7
39
GP Bypass Assembly
A0N9PA02
1 count for each paper exit.
315
Z7
3A
GP Roller Energy Drive
A0N9PA03

316
Z7
3B
GP Belt Aligner (Green)
A0N9PA04
317
Z7
3C
GP Back Gauge Mechanism
A0N9PA05
318
Z7
3D
319
Z7
3E
320
Z7
3F
321
Z7
40
322
Z7
41
HM Supply Roller/1
A1TU5001
1 count per page.
323
Z7
42
HM Supply Roller/2
A1TU5002
1 count per page.
324
Z7
43
HM Supply Roller/3
A1TU5003
1 count for each sheet with the humidification

ON.
325
Z7
44
HM Filter
A1TU5215

ON.
326
Z7
45
HM Motor/P
A1TUM201

ON.
*1 Count in all color modes

Small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode.
Large size: 2 counts for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 4 counts in the duplex mode.
*2 Count only in the full color mode.
Small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode.
Large size: 2 counts for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 4 counts in the duplex mode.
Note
For details on the paper size to be counted or setting of the count condition, refer to "I.5.6.1 Maintenance Counter"
I -109
5.6.17 Voluntary Part Counter (Parts Counter)

Used to control the service history of each part not registered as a special part.
For 30 data from No. 01 up to 30, confirm and reset of the name, P/N (parts number), limit value and print count.
Take 1 count for each print page of all paper exits with no discrimination made by paper size.
When the counter exceeds the limit, the color of the character changes into red.
(1) Set/Check procedure

Press [02 Voluntary Part Counter].
4. "Voluntary Part Counter screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the pages, and press [] or [] to select the data number.
5. Select either [Parts Name Setting], [P/N Setting], or [Limit Setting].
6. Enter the data to set or change.
[Parts Name]: Enter the part name. (8 digits)
[P/N]: Enter the part number. (9 digits)
[Limit]: Enter the limit value. (8 digits)
7. Press [OK] to update data.
(2) Reset procedure

Press [04 Counter/Data]
2. "Counter/Data screen"
Press [02 Voluntary Part Counter].
4. "Voluntary Part Counter screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the pages, and press [] or [] to select the item to set or check.
5. Press [Counter Clear].
Press [No] to cancel and return to "Voluntary Part Counter screen."
(3) Relationship between data number and CSRC parameter

No.
Parts Name
P/N
Counter
LIMIT
Installation date
CSRC parameter
(Z4)
CSRC parameter
(Z3)
CSRC parameter
(G0)
CSRC parameter
(H0)
CSRC parameter
(H3)
001
00
00
00
00
00
002
01
01
01
01
01
003
02
02
02
02
02
004
03
03
03
03
03
005
04
04
04
04
04
006
05
05
05
05
05
007
06
06
06
06
06
008
07
07
07
07
07
009
08
08
08
08
08
010
09
09
09
09
09
011
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
012
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
013
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
014
0D
0D
0D
0D
0D
015
0E
0E
0E
0E
0E
016
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
017
10
10
10
10
10
018
11
11
11
11
11
019
12
12
12
12
12
020
13
13
13
13
13
021
14
14
14
14
14
022
15
15
15
15
15
023
16
16
16
16
16
024
17
17
17
17
17
025
18
18
18
18
18
026
19
19
19
19
19
I -110
027
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
028
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
029
1C
1C
1C
1C
1C
030
1D
1D
1D
1D
1D
5.6.18 Custom size counter threshold setting

(1) OUTLINE
Set the custom size paper length threshold in the sub scan direction for "I.5.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/print)"
Note
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Custom Counter Threshold Set].
3. "Custom Size Counter Threshold Setting screen"
Select the custom size to be set.
[Infinite1]: "Inf. 1" on the Paper Size Counter.
Note
The value larger than that of [Infinite4] by 1mm up to 487mm is assigned to "Inf. 5".
Be sure to set the values as followings.
Infinite1<Infinite2<Infinite3<Infinite4
Setting range: 0 to 487
1 step = 1mm
5. Press [Cancel] to reset the setting to default.
5.7
State Confirmation
5.7.1 I/O Check Mode

(1) OUTLINE
This mode provide self-diagnostic functions (input/output check function) to check the condition of input (checking the each signal to sensors)
and output (checking and adjustment of the load operation).
(2) "I/O Check Mode screen"
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Input check
[2]
Output check
[3]
I/O check code
[4]
Multi-code
5.7.2 Input check procedures

(1) Usage
Check input condition of each signal to the sensors.
I -111
(2) Procedure
2. "State Confirmation menu screen"
3. "I/O Check Mode screen"
Enter an input check code with the numeric buttons.
4. To use multi-mode, press [High/Low]. *
5. Enter the multi-code with the numeric keys.
6. The condition of the sensor (000/001 etc.) is displayed in the message box "IN".
7. When executing another input check, repeat steps 3 to 6.
* The Access button of the hard key can be used.
5.7.3 Output check procedures

(1) Usage
Load operations can be checked and adjusted (output check) using this output check.
(2) Procedure
2. "State Confirmation menu screen"
3. "I/O Check Mode screen"
Enter an input check code with the numeric buttons.
4. To use multi-mode, press [High/Low]. *1
5. Enter the multi-code with the numeric keys.
6. Press [Start]. *2
The load specified operates.
7. Press [Stop]. *2
The load specified completes.
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 to perform the other load or signal output check.
*1 The Access button of the hard key can be used.
*2 The start key and the stop key of the hard key can be used.
5.7.4 IO check mode list

Co
de
0
Mul
ti Classific
ation
0
Input check
Symb
ol
High
TEM/
voltage, HUMS
analog
signal
Name
Temp/humidity sensor
(Internal humidity)
(Humidity in the PF when
the PF is connected)
Output check
Display and
signal source
Display of
humidity (%)
TEM/ Temp/humidity sensor

Display of
HUMS (Internal temperature)
temperature (C)
(Temperature in the PF
when the PF is connected)
TEM/ Temp/humidity sensor /2

HUMS (Process mount humidity)
2
Humidity
indication (%)
TEM/ Temp/humidity sensor /2

HUMS (Process mount
2
temperature)
Display of
temperature (C)
TEMS
1
Display of
temperature (C)
Registration temperature
sensor
0
3
6
9
12
13
14
High
PZS/Y Remaining toner sensor /Y
voltage,
analog PZS/M Remaining toner sensor /M
signal
PZS/C Remaining toner sensor /C
000: No toner
001: Toner
000: No toner
001: Toner
000: No toner
001: Toner
I -112
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
High
L1
voltage,
analog
signal
Name
Exposure lamp
High
voltage,
analog
signal
M53,
CL14
Toner bottle motor, toner

bottle clutch /Y
M53,
CL15

bottle clutch /M
High
voltage,
analog
signal
M53,
CL16

bottle clutch /C
M53,
CL17

bottle clutch /K
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
15
PZS/K Remaining toner sensor /K
000: No toner
001: Toner
16
PS60
Waste toner door sensor
000: No box
001: Box
17
PS52
Waste toner full sensor
000: Empty
001: Full
Name
Display and
signal source
11
Name
Restrictive
conditions
High voltage unit /1

(Charger /Y)
Do not use in
the field.

(Charger /M)
Do not use in
the field.
HV1

(Charger /C)
Do not use in
the field.
HV1

(Charger /K)
Do not use in
the field.
HV2
High voltage unit /2 (1st

transfer /Y)
Do not use in
the field.
HV2

transfer /M)
Do not use in
the field.
HV2

transfer /C)
Do not use in
the field.
HV2

transfer /K)
Do not use in
the field.
HV2

transfer /Y, /M, /C, /K)
Do not use in
the field.
HV2

transfer /K)
Do not use in
the field.
HV2

(Separation)
Do not use in
the field.
HV2

(Separation: for
measuring)
Do not use in
the field.
IDCS
IDC sensor output voltage
0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
PS8,
PS9
Color registration sensor

output voltage
0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
IDCS
IDC sensor output voltage
0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
PS8,
PS9
Color registration sensor
0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
0
1
12
Symb
ol
High
HV1
voltage,
analog HV1
signal
Classific
ation
Paper
PS31
feed,
conveya PS37
nce
Paper empty sensor /1
000: No paper
001: Paper
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS43
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS47
Paper empty sensor /BP
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS108 Paper empty sensor (LU)
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS3

(PF)
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS11

(PF)
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS32
Paper near empty sensor /

1
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS38

2
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS44

3
000: No paper
001: Paper
I -113

Co
de
13
14
15
16
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
PS102 Remaining paper sensor /1 Remaining

/
to /4 (LU)
display (0 to
PS103
100%)
/
PS104
/
PS105
VR2
Remaining paper VR /1
(PF)
Remaining
display (0 to
100%)
VR4
Remaining paper VR /2
(PF)
Remaining
display (0 to
100%)
PS33
Paper size sensor /Fr1
000: ON
001: OFF
PS34
Paper size sensor /Rr1
000: ON
001: OFF
PS39
000: ON
001: OFF
PS40
000: ON
001: OFF
PS45
000: ON
001: OFF
PS46
000: ON
001: OFF
PS48
Paper size sensor /BP1
000: ON
001: OFF
PS49
Paper size sensor /BP2
000: ON
001: OFF
PS5
Paper size sensor /Rt1

(PF)
000: ON
001: OFF
PS6
Paper size sensor /Lt1

(PF)
000: ON
001: OFF
10
PS13
Paper size sensor /Rt2

(PF)
000: ON
001: OFF
11
PS14
Paper size sensor /Lt2

(PF)
000: ON
001: OFF
12
PS110 Paper size sensor /Rr (LU)
000: ON
001: OFF
13
PS111 Paper size sensor /Fr (LU)
000: ON
001: OFF
VR1
Paper size VR/1
Display of AD
VR2
Paper size VR/2
Display of AD
VR3
Paper size VR/3
Display of AD
VR4
Paper size VR/BP
Display of AD
VR1
Paper size VR /1 (PF)
Display of AD
VR3
Paper size VR /2 (PF)
Display of AD
VR1
Paper size VR (LU)
Display of AD
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
High
voltage,
analog
signal
-
98
PS30
Paper
feed,
conveya
nce
Upper limit sensor /1
000: Other
than upper
limit
I -114
Name
Restrictive
conditions
CSRC/collecting data
counter clear
Not reset when

DIPSW3-6 is
OFF
Mode memory clear
Not reset when

DIPSW3-6 is
OFF
CSRC memory
initialization
Use when
setting CSRC
Not reset when
DIPSW3-6 is
OFF

Co
de
18
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
001: Upper
limit
PS36
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
PS42
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
PS25
Upper limit sensor/BP
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
PS109 Upper limit sensor/lower

/
limit sensor (LU)
PS101
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
PS1
Upper limit sensor /1 (PF)
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
PS9
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
PS65
ADU centering sensor
Display top 8 bit

out of 16bit
PS1
Centering sensor (LU)
Display top 8 bit

out of 16bit
PS25
Centering sensor (PF)
000: Normal
001: Multi
feed
19
0
1
20
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
High
PS65
voltage,
analog PS1
signal
PS25
Name
ADU centering sensor

Centering sensor (LU)
0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
Centering sensor (PF)
0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
MFDB Multi feed detection

S,
board /S, /R (PF)
MFDB
R
Paper
PS29
feed,
conveya PS35
nce
Paper feed sensor /1
000: No paper
001: Paper
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS41
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS26
Paper feed sensor/BP
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS106 Paper feed sensor (LU)
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS2
Paper feed sensor /1(PF)
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS10
Paper feed sensor /2(PF)
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS107 Pre-registration sensor

(LU)
PS23
ADU pre-registration
sensor
PS61
ADU conveyance sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS27
Intermediate conveyance
sensor /1
000: No paper
001: Paper
SD7
000: No paper Paper
feed,
001: Paper
000: No paper conveya SD8
nce
001: Paper
I -115
SD9
Restrictive
conditions
Pick-up solenoid /1
Pick-up solenoid /2
Pick-up solenoid /3

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
4
Input check
Symb
ol
PS28
Name
sensor /2
5
6
7
21
Paper
PS22
feed,
conveya PS50
nce
Registration sensor
Output check
Display and
signal source
vertical conveyance
sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS13
Paper exit sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS19
Reverse/exit sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
10
PS21
ADU reverse sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
11
PS12
Paper exit full sensor
000: Other
than full
001: Full
12
PS20
ADU stop sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
13
PS62
Decurler sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
SD5
Paper
CL7
feed,
CL9
conveya
CL11
nce
CL6
2
4
23
Symb
ol
Name
SD5
Pick-up solenoid/BP
000: No paper Paper
feed,
001: Paper
conveya SD100 Pick-up solenoid (LU)
nce
SD1
Pick-up solenoid /1 (PF)
000: No paper
001: Paper
22
Classific
ation
Pick-up solenoid /2 (PF)

Paper feed clutch/BP
CL101 Paper feed clutch (LU)
CL1
Paper feed clutch /1 (PF)
CL4
Paper feed clutch /2 (PF)
CL8
CL10
CL12
CL102 Pre-registration clutch (LU)
M38
Paper lift motor /1
M39
Paper lift motor /2
M40
Paper lift motor /3
M35
Paper lift motor /BP (down)
M35
Paper lift motor /BP (up)

Paper
/
limit sensor (LU)
feed,
conveya PS101
nce
000: Other
than upper
limit/lower limit
001: Upper
limit
002: Lower
limit
M100
Paper lift motor (LU: down)

/
limit sensor (LU)
PS101
000: Other
than upper
limit/lower limit
001: Upper
limit
002: Lower
limit
M100
Paper lift motor (LU: up)
PS1
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
M2
Paper lift motor /1 (PF)
PS9
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
M3
Paper lift motor /2 (PF)
I -116
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
24
25
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Output check
Display and
signal source
Name
Symb
ol
Name
2nd transfer pressure
release motor
M34

release motor (Pressure
position 1)
M34

release motor (Pressure
position 2)
M34

release motor
PS24
Paper
PS18
feed,
conveya PS51
nce
2nd transfer HP sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
Front door sensor
000: Close
001: Open
M30
Registration motor
(315mm/s)
Vertical conveyance door

sensor
000: Close
001: Open
M30
Registration motor
(300mm/s)
PS54
Toner supply door open/

close sensor
000: Close
001: Open
M30
Registration motor
(225mm/s)
PS14
Toner supply unit open/

close sensor
000: Close
001: Open
M30
Registration motor
(207.7mm/s)
M30
Registration motor
(150mm/s)
Interlock switch /2 (LU)
000: OFF
001: ON
M30
Registration motor (Paper

feed line speed)
Interlock switch /1 (LU)
000: OFF
001: ON
M30
Registration motor (Hard

timer ON: 1/1 speed)
M31
Loop motor (315mm/s)
M31
M31
M31
Loop motor (207.7mm/s)
Paper
M31
feed,
M31
conveya
nce
M31
5
6
Paper
MS2
feed,
conveya MS1
nce
SW10
0
Tray down switch (LU)
000: OFF
001: ON
PS22
Registration sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS23
Front door open/close

sensor (PF)
000: Close
001: Open
10
PS21
Horizontal conveyance
door sensor /1 (PF)
000: Close
001: Open
11
PS24

sensor (PF)
000: Close
001: Open
12
PS22
door sensor /2 (PF)
000: Close
001: Open
5
6
27
Classific
ation
M34
26
Paper
M33
feed,
conveya M33
nce

Loop motor (ADU line
speed)
Loop motor (Paper feed
line speed/LU)
Reverse/exit motor (F
rotation: 1000mm/s)
Reverse/exit motor (R
rotation: 315mm/s)
M33
rotation: 300mm/s)
M33
rotation: 225mm/s)
M33
rotation: 207.7mm/s)
M33
rotation: 150mm/s)
M33
rotation: 1050mm/s)
10
M55
Decurler motor (F rotation:

1000mm/s)
I -117
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Name
M55
Decurler motor (R rotation:

315mm/s)
12
M55

300mm/s)
13
M55

225mm/s)
14
M55

207.7mm/s)
15
M55

150mm/s)
16
M55

1050mm/s)
20
M54
Paper exit motor (F

rotation: 1000mm/s)
21
M54
Paper exit motor (F

rotation: 315mm/s)
22
M54
Paper exit motor (F

rotation: 300mm/s)
23
M54
Paper exit motor (F

rotation: 225mm/s)
24
M54
Paper
feed,
conveya M54
nce
31
29
Symb
ol
11
25
28
Classific
ation
Paper
PS10
feed,
conveya
nce
Paper exit pressure sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
Paper
M54
feed,
conveya
nce
Paper exit motor (F

rotation: 207.7mm/s)
Paper exit motor (F
rotation: 150mm/s)
Paper exit motor (R
rotation: continuous)
32
M54
Paper exit motor (R

rotation: home position)
33
M54
Paper exit motor (R

rotation: weak pressure)
34
M54
Paper exit motor (R

rotation: middle pressure)
35
M54
Paper exit motor (R

rotation: strong pressure)
M41
Paper feed motor
M1
Paper feed motor (LU)
M1
Paper feed motor (PF)
CL13
clutch /1
CL4
clutch /2
CL5
clutch /3
SD1
Belt separation claw

solenoid
FM1,
FM2
Paper feed assist fan /Fr, /

Rr (LU)
SD4
Tray lock solenoid /1 (PF)
FM3,
FM4
Paper feed assist fan /

Fr12, /Rr12 (Tray4) (PF)
FM1,
FM2

FM7,
FM8

10
FM5,
FM6

CL12
Pre-registration clutch (PF)
11
Paper
SD1
feed,
conveya
nce
Paper
feed,
PS20
Belt separation claw

solenoid
Pre-registration sensor
(PF)
000: Not set

001: Set
000: No paper
001: Paper
I -118
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific Symb
ation
ol
12 conveya PS18
nce
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
sensor /1 (PF)
000: No paper
001: Paper
CL7
Vertical conveyance
clutch /1 (PF)
PS17
Vertical conveyance
sensor /1 (PF)
000: No paper
001: Paper
CL8
Vertical conveyance
clutch /2 (PF)
14
PS27
Vertical conveyance
sensor /2 (PF)
000: No paper
001: Paper
CL9
Vertical conveyance
clutch /3 (PF)
15
PS26
Vertical conveyance
sensor /3 (PF)
000: No paper
001: Paper
CL10
clutch /1 (PF)
16
PS19
sensor /2 (PF)
000: No paper
001: Paper
CL11
clutch /2 (PF)
17
SD2,
SD3
Shutter solenoid /Fr1,

shutter solenoid /Rr1 (PF)
19
SD6,
SD7
Shutter solenoid /Fr2,

shutter solenoid /Rr2 (PF)
21
SD4
22
SD8
23
CL2
Separation clutch /1 (PF)
24
CL5
Separation clutch /2 (PF)
25
FM9,
FM10
Ventilation fan /1,

ventilation fan /2 (PF)
Paper
TEMS
feed,
/1
conveya
nce
TEMS
/2
Temperature sensor /1 (In

the tray) (PF)
Display of
temperature (C)
DH3,
Fan heater /Up,
FM11, dehumidifier fan /1, /2 (HT)
FM12

the tray) (PF)
Display of
temperature (C)
DH4,
Fan heater /Lw,
FM13, dehumidifier fan /3, /4 (HT)
FM14
TEMS
1

the tray) (LU)
Display of
temperature (C)
HTR1
PS1
Scanner home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
PS3
APS sensor /1
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS4
APS sensor /2
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS2
APS timing sensor
000: Close
001: Open
28
30
32
Input check
13
26
30
Optics
Dehumidifier heater /1,

temperature control tray
33C, heating pipe 70C
(Tray4) (LU)
Paper
M70
feed,
conveya M71
nce
Polygon motor /Y (1/1

rotation)
M72
Polygon motor /C (1/1

rotation)
M73
Polygon motor /K (1/1

rotation)
M70,
M71,
M72,
M73
Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /

K (1/1 rotation)
M70
Polygon motor /Y (Rotate

at adjustment value)
M71
Polygon motor /M (Rotate

M72
Polygon motor /C (Rotate

M73
Polygon motor /K (Rotate

M70,
M71,
M72,
M73
Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /

K (Rotate at adjustment
value)
I -119
Polygon motor /M (1/1

rotation)
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
33
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
INDEX Index board /C

B/C
000: Normal
001: Abnormal
INDEX Index board /Y

B/Y
INDEX Index board /M

B/M
000: Normal
001: Abnormal
INDEX Index board /M

B/M
INDEX Index board /Y

B/Y
000: Normal
001: Abnormal
INDEX Index board /C

B/C
INDEX Index board /K

B/K
000: Normal
001: Abnormal
INDEX Index board /K

B/K
INDEX Index board /C, /M, /Y, /K

B/C, /
M, /
Y, /K
000: Normal
001: Abnormal
if any of the
color is found
INDEX Index board /Y, /M, /C, /K

B/Y, /
M, /
C, /K
Optics
Restrictive
conditions
34
Shading correction
operation
36
PS8
Color registration sensor /

Fr
0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
PS9
Color registration sensor /

Rr
0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
LD alarm measurement
LD alarm value
can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
list output.
91
LD1/2 alarm data clear /Y
LD alarm value
can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
list output.
92
LD1/2 alarm data clear /M
LD alarm value
can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
list output.
93
LD1/2 alarm data clear /C
LD alarm value
can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
list output.
94
LD1/2 alarm data clear /K
LD alarm value
can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
list output.
99
LD1/2 alarm data clear /

Y, /M, /C, /K
LD alarm value
can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
list output.
M1
Scanner motor
(Reciprocating driver 1)
11 x 17,
Magnification
100%, 1
scanning
M1
Scanner motor
11 x 17,
Magnification
100%,
Continuous
scanning
M1
Scanner motor
11 x 17,
Magnification
400%,
Continuous
scanning
37
38
I -120

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Symb
ol
Name
Restrictive
conditions
M1
Scanner motor
11 x 17,
Magnification
50%,
Continuous
scanning
M1
Scanner motor
81/2 x 11,
Magnification
100%,
Continuous
scanning
M1
Scanner motor (Home

position search)
M1
Scanner motor (Back scan

position move)
M1
Scanner motor (Back scan

ACS operation + scan
operation)
M14
Drum motor /Y (315mm/s)
M14
M14
M14
Drum motor /Y (207.7mm/

s)
M14
M15
Drum motor /M (315mm/s)
M15
M15
M15
Drum motor /M (207.7mm/

s)
Optics
PS1
Scanner home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
Main
body
42
Classific
ation
41
M15
10
M16
Drum motor /C (315mm/s)
11
M16
12
M16
13
M16
Drum motor /C (207.7mm/

s)
14
M16
15
M17
Drum motor /K (315mm/s)
15
M17
17
M17
18
M17
Drum motor /K (207.7mm/

s)
19
M17
20
M18
Belt motor (315mm/s)
21
M18
Transfer belt motor

(300mm/s)
22
M18
Transfer belt motor

(225mm/s)
23
M18
Belt motor (207.7mm/s)
24
M18
Belt motor (150mm/s)
FM2
Scanner cooling fan
FM1
Power supply cooling fan /

1
FM37
Fusing ventilation fan
FM48
Charge intake fan
FM47
Main body fan
FM45, Developing fan /1, /2

FM46
10
FM26, Tucking fan /1, /3

FM28
I -121

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
FM12, Drum fan /1, /2

FM13
14
FM11
15
FM61, Paper exit fan /1, /2, /3

62, 63
17
FM66
ADU cooling fan /1
19
FM36
Deodorization fan (High

speed rotation)
Main
body
FM36
Deodorization fan (Low

speed rotation)
21
Main
body
FM10
Fusing belt ventilation

fan(High speed rotation)
22
Main
body
FM10

fan(Low speed rotation)
23
Main
body
FM65
Fusing cooling fan
25
LU
FM3,
FM4
Dehumidifier fan /1, /2

(High speed rotation) (LU)
FM3,
FM4
Dehumidifier fan /1, /2

(Low speed rotation) (LU)
PF
28
FM11, Dehumidifier fan /1, /2 (PF)

FM12
FM13, Dehumidifier fan /3, /4 (PF)
FM14
29
Main
body
FM67
ADU cooling fan /2
FM7,
FM8,
FM9
Fusing separation fan /1, /

2, /3
32
FM5,
FM6
IPB fan /1, /2
33
FM81, HDD unit cooling fan /1, /2

FM82
TCT1
Total counter /1
TCT2
Total counter /2
KCT
Key counter
31
Restrictive
conditions
Transfer belt fan
20
27
45
Name
12
26
43
Symb
ol
Main
body
TH1
Temperature sensor /1
(Center of fusing upper
heat roller)
Display of
temperature (C)
L2, L3, Turn ON fusing heater

L4, L5 lamp /1, /2, /3, /4
simultaneously
Temperature
detection of the
center of fusing
upper heat roller
TH3
Display of
(Edge of fusing upper heat temperature (C)
roller)

L4, L5 lamp /1, /2, /3, /4
simultaneously
Temperature
detection of the
edge of fusing
upper heat roller
TH2
(Center of fusing lower
pressure roller)
Display of
temperature (C)

L4, L5 lamp /1, /2, /3, /4
simultaneously
Temperature
detection of the
center of fusing
lower pressure
roller
TH4
(Edge of fusing lower
pressure roller)
Display of
temperature (C)

L4, L5 lamp /1, /2, /3, /4
simultaneously
Temperature
detection of the
edge of fusing
lower pressure
roller
TH1
(Non-contact sensor
correction of the fusing
upper roller)
Display of
temperature (C)

L4, L5 lamp /1, /2, /3, /4
simultaneously
Non-contact
sensor of the
fusing upper
roller
TH2
(Non-contact sensor
correction of the fusing
upper roller)
Display of
temperature (C)

L4, L5 lamp /1, /2, /3, /4
simultaneously
Non-contact
sensor of the
fusing lower
roller
TH1
Detected temperature at
Display of
center of fusing upper heat temperature (C)
roller (While idling)

L4, L5 lamp /1, /2, /3, /4
simultaneously
Proper
temperature at
idle (at warming
up)
I -122

Co
de
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
11
TH1
Display of
center of fusing upper heat temperature (C)
roller (While ON under the
prescribed temperature)
L2,
TH1
Temperature control of the 0-255 is

fusing heater lamp /1
displayed on
"Input check"
Turn ON with
temperature
lower than a
prescribed level
12
TH3
edge of fusing upper heat
roller (While ON under the
prescribed temperature)
L3,
TH3

displayed on
"Input check"
Turn ON with
temperature
lower than a
prescribed level
L4,
TH1

displayed on
"Input check"
Turn ON with
temperature
lower than a
prescribed level
L5,
TH2

displayed on
"Input check"
Turn ON with
temperature
lower than a
prescribed level
Name
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Display of
temperature (C)
13
14
Main
body
TH2
center of fusing lower
pressure roller (While ON
under the prescribed
temperature)
Display of
temperature (C)
Symb
ol
Name
46
LD1/2 Laser emission

timing adjustment (main
scanning)
47
M29
Fusing motor (F rotation:

315mm/s)
M29

300mm/s)
M29

225mm/s)
M29

207.7mm/s)
M29

150mm/s)
M29
Fusing motor (R rotation:

pressure release operation
ON, rotate constantly)
Main
body
4
5
Main
body
Main
body
PS16
Fusing release home

sensor (Pressure release
operation ON)
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
PS16
Fusing release home

sensor (Pressure position
move)
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M29

pressure position move)
PS16
Fusing release home

sensor (Release position
move)
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M29

release position move)
Main
body
M29
Fusing motor (Pressure

continuous rotation:
315mm/s)
Main
body
M29

300mm/s)
10
M29

225mm/s)
11
M29

207.7mm/s)
I -123
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
48
50
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Output check
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
12
Main
body
M29
14
Main
body
M29,
Fusing roller press (ON all
L2, L3, heaters at the same time)
L4, L5
Name
Display and
signal source
Name
150mm/s)
M19
1st transfer pressure

release motor (Rotate
constantly)
M19

release motor (Stop at
release position)
M19

black and white mode
pressure position)
M19

color mode pressure
position)
Developing motor /Y
(315mm/s)
Peculiar M20
function
s
M20
M20
Developing motor /Y
(225mm/s)
Peculiar M20
function
s
M20
Developing motor /Y
(207.7mm/s)
Developing motor /M
(315mm/s)
Peculiar M21
function
s
M21
M21
Developing motor /M
(225mm/s)
Peculiar M21
function
s
M21
Developing motor /M
(207.7mm/s)
Developing motor /C
(315mm/s)
11
Peculiar M22
function
s
M22
12
M22
Developing motor /C
(225mm/s)
13
Peculiar M22
function
s
M22
Developing motor /C
(207.7mm/s)
Main
body
PS15
1st transfer HP sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
4
5
9
10
14
15
Developing motor /Y
(300mm/s)
Developing motor /Y
(150mm/s)
Developing motor /M
(300mm/s)
Developing motor /M
(150mm/s)
Developing motor /C
(300mm/s)
Developing motor /C
(150mm/s)
Developing motor /K
(315mm/s)
16
Peculiar M23
function
s
M23
17
M23
Developing motor /K
(225mm/s)
18
Peculiar M23
function
s
M23
Developing motor /K
(207.7mm/s)
19
20
Peculiar TCRS
function /Y
s
TCR sensor /Y output

value
0 to 255
Peculiar M20
function
s
I -124
Developing motor /K
(300mm/s)
Developing motor /K
(150mm/s)
Developing unit rotation of
Y
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
21
TCRS
/M
TCR sensor /M output

value
0 to 255
M21

M
22
TCRS
/C
TCR sensor /C output

value
0 to 255
M22

C
23
TCRS
/K
TCR sensor /K output

value
0 to 255
M23

BK
24
M20,
M21,
M22

YMC
25
M20,
M21,
M22,
M23

all colors
EL /Y
Erase lamp /Y
EL /M
Erase lamp /M
EL /C
Erase lamp /C
EL /K
Erase lamp /K
M49
Toner supply motor /Y
M50
Toner supply motor /M
M51
Toner supply motor /C
M52
Toner supply motor /K
12
CL14
Toner bottle clutch /Y
13
CL15
Toner bottle clutch /M
14
CL16
Toner bottle clutch /C
15
CL17
Toner bottle clutch /K
55
SD2
Color registration shutter

solenoid
SD3
IDC shutter solenoid
56
Status indicator lamp (PAT

1 ON)

2 ON)

3 ON)

4 ON)
51
54
58
Peculiar TCRS
function /Y
s
TCRS
/M
TCR sensor /Y control

voltage
0 to 255
TCRS
/Y
TCR sensor /Y
TCR sensor /M control

voltage
0 to 255
TCRS
/M
TCR sensor /M
TCRS
/C
TCR sensor /C control

voltage
0 to 255
TCRS
/C
TCR sensor /C
TCRS
/K
TCR sensor /K control

voltage
0 to 255
TCRS
/K
TCR sensor /K
59
60
Peculiar function
s
Fusing unit identification

signal
001: Normal
unit (CN131B
unconnected)
002: User unit
(CN131B
connected)
Main
body
Fusing loop sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
Peculiar PS17
function
s
Fusing paper exit sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
DF
PS64
PS304 No paper sensor
000: No paper DF
001: Paper
M301
Paper feed motor

(Forward: 300mm/sec)
PS301 Registration sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M301
Paper feed motor

PS302 Timing sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M301
Paper feed motor

PS305 Reverse sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M301
Paper feed motor

(Reverse: 300mm/sec)
I -125
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Name
PS306 Paper exit sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M301
Paper feed motor

PS303 Paper feed cover sensor
000: Close
001: Open
M301
Paper feed motor

PS308 Tray open/close sensor
000: Open
001: Close
M302
Paper feed motor

PS307 Paper exit cover sensor
000: Close
001: Open
M302
Paper feed motor

RS
000: Close
001: Open
M302
Paper feed motor

10
M302
Paper feed motor

11
M302
Paper feed motor

12
M302
Paper feed motor

13
M303
Reverse/paper exit motor

14
M303

15
M303

16
M303

17
M303

18
M303

19
SD302 Reverse solenoid
20
SD301 Exit solenoid
ADF open/close switch
21
69
Symb
ol
CL301 Registration clutch
SD1
Humidification section gate

solenoid
SD2
De-curler gate solenoid /1
SD3
De-curler gate solenoid /2
M10
Humidification section
roller pressure motor /Lt
(home position search)
M10
Humidification roller
pressure home sensor /Lt
(Press)
RU-509
RU-509
Humidifier unit set signal

(DIPSW 4)
000: ON
001: OFF
Subsequent stage
connection detection
000:
Connected
001: Not
connected
RU-509
HM-102 connection
detection
000: Not
connected
001:
Connected
RU-509
RU-509 connection
detection
000: Not
connected
001:
Connected
Water tank full sensor
000: Other
than full
001: Full
10
15
RU-509
16
PS1
Entrance sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M1
Entrance conveyance
motor (400mm/s)
18
PS2
De-curler entrance sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M2
motor (400mm/s)
19
PS3
Color density detection

timing sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M4
Paper exit motor

(1000mm/s)
17
Restrictive
conditions
RU-509
I -126
Enabled after
conducting
home position
search (69-15)

Co
de
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
20
PS4
Paper exit conveyance

sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M5
De-curler pressure motor

21
PS5
De-curler pressure home

sensor /Lw
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
M5
De-curler pressure motor /

Lw
22
PS6
De-curler pressure home

sensor /Up
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M6

Up (home position search)
23
M6

Up
25
FM1,
FM2,
FM3
Entrance paper fan /1, /2, /

3
26
FM4,
FM5
Ventilation assist fan /1, /2
27
FM15, Entrance paper fan /4, /5, /

FM16, 6
FM17
28
FM18, Entrance paper fan /7, /8, /

FM19, 9
FM20
Name
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
29
30
Symb
ol
FM21
RU-509
SW1
Door switch
Name
M3
De-curler conveyance
motor (400mm/s)
entrance sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M7
entrance conveyance
motor (400mm/s)
34
PS8
Water tank empty sensor
000: No water
001: Water
P1
Pump motor
35
PS9
roller pressure home
sensor /Rt
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M9
roller pressure motor /Rt
36
PS10
roller pressure home
sensor /Lt
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M9
roller pressure motor/Rt
(Press)
M8
conveyance motor
(400mm/s)
FM6,
FM7,
FM8
paper fan /1, /2, /3
37
40
PS12
Paper exit sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
41
RU-509
44
49
FM9,
FM10, paper fan /4, /5, /6
FM11
CDDB Color density detection
Y
board /Y (LED OFF)
Display top 8 bit

out of 16bit
I -127
Enabled after
conducting
home position
search (69-22)
Ventilation assist fan /3
PS7
RU-509
Enabled after
conducting
home position
search (69-20)
JAMIB Jam indication board
000: Open
001: Close
31
33
Restrictive
conditions
CDLE
DY,
CDLE
DM,
CDLE
DC,
CDLE
DK
Color density LED/Y, Color

density LED/M, Color
density LED/C, Color
density LED/K
Enabled after
conducting
home position
search (69-35)

Co
de
70
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
50

M
board /M (LED OFF)
Display top 8 bit

out of 16bit
51

C
board /M (LED OFF)
Display top 8 bit

out of 16bit
52

K
board /K (LED OFF)
Display top 8 bit

out of 16bit
53

Y
board /Y (LED ON)
Display top 8 bit

out of 16bit
54

M
board /M (LED ON)
Display top 8 bit

out of 16bit
55

C
board /C (CDDBC)
Display top 8 bit

out of 16bit
56

K
board /K (LED ON)
Display top 8 bit

out of 16bit
PS1
FD entrance sensor
PS4
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
SD5
Shutter solenoid
FD
000: Paper
001: No paper
M1
Entrance conveyance
motor
PI exit sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M2
Punch conveyance motor
PS5
Punch conveyance sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M3
motor
PS7
Main tray folding paper full

sensor
000: Full
001: Other
than full
M4
1st folding motor (F

rotation)
PS8
2 holes punch home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M4
1st folding motor (R

rotation)
PS9
3 holes/4 holes home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M5
2nd folding motor (F

rotation)
PS10
Alignment plate home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M5
2nd folding motor (R

rotation)
PS11
Punch registration home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M6
3rd folding motor (F

rotation)
PS12
Punch scraps box set

sensor
000: Not set

001: Set
M6
3rd folding motor (R

rotation)
10
PS13
sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M7
PI conveyance motor
11
PS16
Sub tray exit sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M8
Paper lift motor /Up (down)
12
PS17
Sub tray paper full sensor
000: Full
001: Other
than full
M8
Paper lift motor /Up (up)
13
PS18
Main tray paper exit

sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M9
Paper lift motor /Lw (down)
14
PS20
Main tray upper limit

sensor
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
M9
Paper lift motor /Lw (up)
15
PS22
Main tray lower limit

sensor
000: Other
than lower
limit
001: Lower
limit
M17
Main tray exit motor
16
PS23
Main tray empty sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
FD
I -128
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
17
PS26
Punch scraps full sensor
000: Full
001: Other
than full
M10
Punch motor (3 holes)
PS2
Folding exit sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M10
Punch motor (2 holes)
23
CN90
Main tray connection

recognition (CN90
connection)
000:
Connected
001:
Unconnected
M11
Tray up down motor (home

position search)
24
PS51
1st folding conveyance

sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M12
Alignment motor (home

position search)
25
PS52
Folding entrance sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
26
PS53
2nd folding conveyance

sensor
FD
000: Paper
001: No paper
M13
Punch registration motor
27
PS54
3rd folding conveyance

sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M14
1st folding release motor

(conveyance position
move)
28
PS55
1st folding cam home

sensor
000: Pressure
001: Release
M14
1st folding release motor

(folding position move)
29
PS56
2nd folding cam home

sensor
000: Pressure
001: Release
M15
2nd folding release motor

move)
30
PS57
3rd folding cam home

sensor
000: Pressure
001: Release
M15
2nd folding release motor

31
PS58
S size conveyance sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M16
3rd folding release motor

move)
32
PS6
Punch registration sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M16
3rd folding release motor

33
FDOB
Staple selection switch
000: ON
001: OFF
34
FDOB
Punch selection switch
000: ON
001: OFF
35
FDOB
Folding selection switch
000: ON
001: OFF
36
FDOB
Start/Stop switch
000: ON
001: OFF
37
FDOB
Multi feed function select

switch
000: ON
001: OFF
39
PS46
Sub tray folding paper full

sensor
000: Other
than full
001: Full
40
PS31
PI conveyance sensor /Up
000: No paper
001: Paper
41
PS37
PI conveyance sensor /Lw
000: No paper
001: Paper
42
PS32
PI upper limit sensor /Up
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
43
PS33
PI paper empty sensor /Up
000: Other
than full
001: Full
44
PS34
PI lift plate home sensor /

Up
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
Name
Display and
signal source
21
22
Classific
ation
FD
FD
I -129
Symb
ol
Name
Restrictive
conditions
ON: Folding
position OFF:
Conveyance
position
ON: Folding
position OFF:
Conveyance
position
ON: Folding
position OFF:
Conveyance
position

Co
de
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
45
PS35
L size sensor /Up
000: Paper
001: No paper
46
PS36
S size sensor /Up
000: Paper
001: No paper
48
PS38
PI upper limit sensor /Lw
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
49
PS39
PI paper empty sensor /Lw
000: Other
than full
001: Full
50
PS40
PI lift plate home sensor /

Lw
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
51
PS41
L size sensor /Lw
000: Paper
001: No paper
52
PS42
S size sensor /Lw
000: Paper
001: No paper
53
PS43
PI cover open/close
sensor
000: Open
001: Close
54
PS44
PI paper set sensor /Up
000: Paper
001: No paper
55
PS45
PI paper set sensor /Lw
000: Paper
001: No paper
61
PS47
PI max paper size sensor /

Up
FD
000: Paper
001: No paper
SD1
Entrance gate solenoid
62
PS48
PI max paper size sensor /

Lw
000: Paper
001: No paper
SD3
S size gate solenoid
SD4
L size gate solenoid
FD connection detection
signal
000: Not
connected
001:
Connected
SD5
Roller solenoid /1
65
SD6
Roller solenoid /2
66
SD7
Roller solenoid /3
67
SD8
Roller solenoid /4
68
SD9
Sub tray gate solenoid
69
SD12
Paper exit solenoid
70
SD13
PI pick-up solenoid /Up
71
SD14
PI pick-up solenoid /Lw
72
SD15
Folding gate solenoid
74
SD18
2nd folding roller solenoid
75
CL1
PI registration clutch /Up
76
CL2
PI registration clutch /Lw
82
MFDB Multi feed detection

1
board /1 (CLK output)
89
FDOB
90
JAMIB Jam indication board (lit all

LEDs)
Name
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
63
64
71
FD
Symb
ol
Name
FD operation board (lit all

LEDs)
PS1
Entrance sensor
000: No paper SD
001: Paper
M1
Entrance conveyance
motor
PS2
sensor /1
000: No paper
001: Paper
M2
motor
PS3
sensor /2
000: No paper
001: Paper
M3
Folding entrance motor
PS4
Horizontal conveyance exit

sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M4
Folding conveyance motor

(F rotation)
PS5
Right angle conveyance

sensor /1
000: Paper
001: No paper
M4

(R rotation)
SD
I -130
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
PS6

sensor /2
000: Paper
001: No paper
M6

motor
PS7
Folding sensor /1
000: Paper
001: No paper
M29
Stapler motor /Rt (1 staple)
PS8
Folding passage sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M30
Stapler motor /Lt (1 staple)
PS17
Overlap home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M5
Bundle exit motor
10
PS18
Folding main scan

alignment home sensor /
Fr1
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
M8
Folding sub scan

alignment exit motor
11
PS49
Folding main scan

Fr2
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
12
PS20
1st folding blade home

sensor /1
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
13
PS21

sensor /2
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
14
PS22
2nd folding blade home

sensor /1
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
15
PS23

sensor /2
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
16
PS24
Folding exit home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
17
PS9
Tri-folding exit sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
18
PS10
Tri-folding paper full

sensor
000: Full
001: Other
than full
19
PS11
000: No paper
001: Paper
20
PS12
000: Full
001: Other
than full
21
PS44
Folding sensor /2
SD
000: Paper
001: No paper
M5
Bundle exit motor (home

position search)
22
PS19
Folding main scan

000: Other
alignment home sensor /Rr
than home
position
001: Home
position
23
PS46
Guide shaft home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
I -131
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Name
M7
Folding main scan

alignment motor /Fr (home
position search)
25
M7
Folding main scan

alignment motor /Fr
(alignment)
27
M8
Folding sub scan

29
M9
Saddle stitching alignment

motor /Rt (home position
search)
30
M9

motor /Rt (inward
movement)
31
M10
Bundle arm motor (home

position search)
32
M10
Bundle arm motor (inward

movement)
24
HS2/
HS4
Clincher start sensors /

Rt, /Lt
SD
000: Clinch
001: No clinch
Symb
ol
PS13
Saddle stitching paper

sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M11
Bundle clip motor (home

position search)
34
PS14
Bundle sensor /1
000: Paper
001: No paper
M12
Bundle registration motor

35
PS15
Bundle sensor /2
000: Paper
001: No paper
M13
Overlap motor (home

position search)
36
PS16
Bundle registration plate

home sensor
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
M14
Folding main scan

alignment motor /Rr (home
position search)
37
PS25
Stapler movement home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M14
Folding main scan

alignment motor /Rr
(forward movement)
38
PS26
Clincher up down home

sensor
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
39
PS27
Saddle stitching press

home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M15
Stapler movement motor

40
PS28

home sensor /Rt
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M15

(staple position movement)
41
PS29

home sensor /Lt
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M16

motor /Lt (home position
search)
42
PS33
Bundle clip upper limit

sensor
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
M16

motor /Lt (inward
movement)
33
SD
I -132
SD
Restrictive
conditions
Enabled after
conducting
home position
search (71-24)
Enabled after
conducting
home position
search (71-29)
Enabled after
conducting
home position
search (71-31)
After conducting
home position
search (71-36)

Co
de
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
43
PS30
Bundle clip lower limit

sensor
000: Other
than lower
limit
001: Lower
limit
M17
Bundle press movement

motor (home position
search)
44
PS32
Bundle arm home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M18
1st folding blade motor

45
PS31
Bundle arm rotation home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M19
2nd folding blade motor

46
PS34
Bundle registration home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M20
Clincher up down motor

47
PS35
Bundle press stage up

down home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M20

(stapling)
48
PS45

down limit sensor
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
M21

search)
49
PS37
Bundle press home sensor
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
M22
Bundle arm rotation motor

50
PS47
Bundle press lower limit

sensor
000: Lower
limit
001: Other
than lower
limit
M23
Bundle press motor (home

position search)
51
PS48
Scraps press home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M24

down motor (home
position search)
52
PS40
Scraps box set sensor
000: Not set

001: Set
M25
Guide shaft motor (home

position search)
53
PS41
Trimmer scraps full sensor
000: Full
001: Other
than full
M31
Trimmer blade motor

54
PS36

home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M31
Trimmer blade motor

(trimming position)
55
PS38
Bundle arm assist home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M32
Trimmer press motor

56
PS39
Bundle arm assist upper

limit sensor
000: Upper
limit
001: Other
than upper
limit
M32
Trimmer press motor

(upper limit search)
57
SW1
Staple empty switch /Rt
000: Staple
001: No staple
M32
Trimmer press motor

(pressing)
Name
Display and
signal source
I -133
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
Restrictive
conditions
Enabled after
conducting
home position
search (71-55)

Co
de
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
58
SW2
Staple empty switch /Lt
000: Staple
001: No staple
M32
Trimmer press motor

(movement to trimmer
board release position)
59
HS1
Stapler home sensor /Rt
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
M10
Bundle arm motor (inward

movement)
60
HS3
Stapler home sensor /Lt
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
M23
Bundle press motor

(pressing)
61
PS50
Trimmer blade home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M24

down motor (up)
62
PS51
Trimmer blade upper limit

sensor
000: Upper
limit
001: Other
than upper
limit
M24

down motor (home
position search for the
bundle registration plate)
63
PS52
Trimmer press upper limit

sensor
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
M26
Bundle arm assist motor

64
PS53
Trimmer press home

sensor
000: Other
than lower
limit
001: Lower
limit
65
PS42
Front door sensor /Rt
000: Close
001: Open
M33
Trimmer paddle motor

(forward rotation)
66
PS43
Front door sensor /Lt
000: Close
001: Open
M33

(reverse rotation)
67
PS54
Bundle sensor /4
000: No paper
001: Paper
68
PS55
Trimmer registration
sensor
000: Other
than
registration
position
001:
Registration
position
69
PS56
Folding sub scan

alignment home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
70
PS57
Bundle exit sensor /2
000: Paper
001: No paper
71
PS58
Bundle tray set sensor
000: Set
001: Not set
SD1
72
PS59
Trimmer board
replacement sensor
000: Not
replace
001: replace
SD2

gate solenoid
SD3
gate solenoid
SD4
Roller release solenoid /4
SD5

(roller press)
SD5

(roller release)
Name
Display and
signal source
73
74
75
SD
PS61
Bundle tray paper full

sensor
000: Other
than full
001: Full
76
I -134
Classific
ation
SD
SD
Symb
ol
Name
Restrictive
conditions
Enabled after
conducting
home position
search (71-55)

Co
de
Input check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
77
PS60
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Name
SD6
78
SD7

(roller press)
79
SD7

(roller release)
80
SD8
Folding unit lock solenoid

(lock)
SD8
Folding unit lock solenoid

(release)
SD11
Trimmer board solenoid

(ON once)
81
SD
SD
PS62
Folding entrance sensor
Trimmer completion
sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
000: Other
than complete
001: Complete
82
83
SD
84
PS66
Wire slack prevention

sensor
000: Without
slack
001: With
slack
SD11

(ON twice)
New trimming unit

connection detection
000:
Connected
001: Not
connected
SD12
Brake solenoid
86
CL1
Tri-folding exit clutch
87
FM1
Scraps removal fan motor
88
SD
FNS connection detection

signal
SD
JAMIB Jam indication board (LED

/2
ON)
95

operation counter reset
96
Set of trimming operation
97
M32
Trimmer press motor

(Move the trimmer board
replace position after
home position search)
98
M32,
SD11
Trimmer board forced

movement (Turn ON SD11
after the trimmer press
motor moves to the
trimmer board replacement
position)
M1
Conveyance motor
(1000mm/sec)
FS-521
Restrictive
conditions
000: Not
connected
001:
Connected
90
72
Symb
ol
PS35
Rear stopper home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
PS33
Intermediate roller home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
PS32
Stack assist home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
PS14
Stapler rotation home

sensor
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
I -135
FS-521
Reset after
replace the
trimmer board

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
FS-521
M3
Tray up down motor (home

position search)
M3
Tray up down motor (lower

limit move)
M22
Alignment motor /Fr (home

position search)
Name
Restrictive
conditions
PS11

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
PS34
Staple scraps box set

sensor
000: Not set

001: Set
PS30
000: Full
001: Other
than full
PS1
000: No paper
001: Paper
PS5
Stacker entrance sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
10
PS4
FNS entrance sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
11
PS15
Counter reset sensor
000: Other
than reset
001: Reset
12
PS12
Paper exit home sensor
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
M22
Alignment motor /Fr (A4S

standby position move)
Available only
from the home
position
13
PS10

sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M22

position move)
Available only
from A4S
position
14
PS3
Tray lower limit sensor
000: Other
than lower
limit
001: Lower
limit
M22

Available only
after the
alignment
operation
15
PS39
Paper empty sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M7

(800mm/sec)
M7

(205mm/sec)
16
FS-521
FS-521
17
PS47
Staple ready sensor/Fr
000: Ready
001: Other
than ready
M8

22
PS43
Cartridge set sensor /Fr
000: Cartridge
001: No
cartridge
M8

(full opening: approx. 55)
23
PS45
Staple empty sensor /Fr
000: Staple
001: No staple
M8

Available only
(half opening: approx. 44) from the home
position
24
PS41
Stapler home sensor /Fr
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
M8

(small opening: approx.
27)
25
PS46
Staple ready sensor/Rr
000: Ready
001: Other
than ready
26
PS42
Cartridge set sensor /Rr
000: Cartridge FS-521

001: No
cartridge
M31
Stapler motor /Fr (needles

out, empty staple)
27
PS44
Staple empty sensor /Rr
000: Staple
001: No staple
M31
Stapler motor /Fr (staple)
28
PS40
Stapler home sensor /Rr
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
M30
Stapler motor /Rr (needles

out, empty staple)
M30
Stapler motor /Rr (staple)
21
FS-521
29
I -136
Available only
from the home
position
Available only
from the home
position
Available after
initialization
Available after
initialization

Co
de
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
30
PS20
Stacker empty sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
31
PS9
Paper exit arm home

sensor
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
32
MS1
Door switch
33
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
FS-521
M4,
M11
Stapler rotation motor,

000: Close
001: Open
M4,
M11

(1 stapling position
movement in A4 size)
PS31
Alignment home sensor /Fr 000: Other

than home
position
001: Home
position
M16
Stacker entrance roller

release motor (home
position search)
34
PS8
Alignment home sensor /

Rr
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M16

release motor (pressing
release position move)
35
PS6
Tray middle position

sensor
000: No tray
001: Tray
36
PS13
Bypass roller release

home sensor
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
FS-521
M13
Stacker entrance motor

(1000mm/sec)
37
PS16
Tray upper limit sensor
000: Tray
001: No tray
38
PS19
Paper exit alignment plate

home sensor /Rr
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
39
PS18

home sensor /Fr
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
40

signal
000: Not
connected
001:
Connected
41
OB
Operation board (Pause

button)
000: ON
001: OFF
FS-521
M26
Rear stopper motor (home

position search)
42
PS24

retraction home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M26
Rear stopper motor

(stopper release)
43
PS17
Tray quarter position

sensor
000: No tray
001: Tray
44
PS23

release home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
FS-521
Name
Display and
signal source
46
FS-521
Name
SD5
Bypass solenoid
47
SD2
Gate solenoid
48
SD9
Paper exit opening

solenoid (ON/OFF)
49
SD7
Intermediate roller release

solenoid
51
M24
Stack assist guide motor

I -137
Restrictive
conditions
Available only
from the home
position

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
Restrictive
conditions
52
M24

(assist position move)
56
M25
Intermediate roller open

close motor (home position
search)
57
M25
Intermediate roller open

close motor (reserve
position move)
Available only
from the home
position
61
M23
Paper exit arm motor

Available after
conducting
intermediate
roller open/close
motor shelter
position (72-57)
62
M23

(800mm/sec)
Available after
conducting
intermediate
roller open/close
motor shelter
position (72-57)
63
M23

(400mm/sec)
Available after
conducting
intermediate
roller open/close
motor shelter
position (72-57)
66
M6
Sub tray exit motor

(1000mm/sec)
67
M18

retraction motor (home
position search)
68
M18

retraction motor
(Alignment position move)
71
M5
Alignment motor /Rr (home

position search)
72
M5
Alignment motor /Rr (A4S

Available only
from the home
position
73
M5

position move)
Available only
from A4S
position
74
M5

Available only
after the
alignment
operation
75
OB
Operation board (LED ON)
76
M2
Paddle motor (ON/OFF)
77
JAMIB Jam indication board

(illuminate all LEDs)
78
M5,
M22
Alignment motor /Rr, /Fr

79
M5,
M22

(A4S standby position
move)
Available only
from the home
position
80
M5,
M22

(A4S position move)
Available only
from A4S
position
81
M12

search)
82
M12

motor (strong pressing
position move)
I -138
Available only
from the home
position
Available only
from the home
position

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
Restrictive
conditions
83
M12

move)
Available only
from strong
pressing position
84
M12

motor (pressing release
position move)
Available only
from the home
position
85
M12

move)
Available only
from pressing
release position
86
M14
Paper exit alignment

motor /Rr (home position
search)
87
M14

motor /Rr (A4S standby
position move)
88
M14

motor /Rr (Move from A4S
standby position to
alignment position)
Available only
from A4S
standby position
89
M14

motor /Rr (Move from A4S
alignment position to
standby position)
Available only
from A4S
alignment
position
90
M15

motor /Fr (home position
search)
91
M15

motor /Fr (A4S standby
position move)
92
M15

motor /Fr (Move from A4S
standby position to
alignment position)
Available only
from A4S
standby position
93
M15

motor /Fr (Move from A4S
alignment position to
standby position)
Available only
from A4S
alignment
position
94
M8

(home position move
(close))
94
M5
Alignment motor /Rr (home

position move)
94
M22
Alignment motor /Fr (home

position move)
94
M14

motor /Rr (home position
move)
94
M15

motor /Fr (home position
move)
94
M18

retraction motor (home
position move)
95
M8

(opening big)
95
M5
Alignment motor /Rr (A4

straight standby position
move)
95
M22
Alignment motor /Fr (A4

straight standby position
move)
95
M14

motor /Rr (A4 straight
95
M15

motor /Fr (A4 straight
I -139

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
95
M18

retraction motor (Move
from home position to
alignment position)
95
M3
Tray up down motor

(paper exit alignment plate
avoiding operation (from
down to up))
95
SD9
Paper exit opening

solenoid ON
96
M5
Alignment motor /Rr (A4

straight alignment position
move)
96
M22
Alignment motor /Fr (A4

straight alignment position
move)
96
M14

motor /Rr (A4 straight
alignment position move)
96
M15

motor /Fr (A4 straight
alignment position move)
98
FS-521
FS connection detection
000: Not
connected
001:
Connected
FS-531/ PS1
612
000: No paper FS-531/ M1

612
001: Paper
PS4
FNS entrance sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
PS19
000: Other
than full
001: Full
PS12
000: Close
position
001: Other
than close
position
PS16
Gate home sensor
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
PS6

sensor
000: No paper FS-531/ M3

612
001: Paper
Main tray up down motor

PS18
Shift roller home sensor
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
M3

(lower limit move)
M3

(a few sheet up down
movement in staple mode)
M4
Clincher rotation motor

FS-531/ M5
612
Alignment motor /Up

FS-531/ M2
612
10
FS-531/ PS3
612

sensor
000: Other
than lower
limit
001: Lower
limit
11
12
FS-531/ PS2
612

sensor
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
I -140
FS-612
M5
Restrictive
conditions
FNS Conveyance motor

(667mm/sec)
Shift roller motor (home

position search)
Alignment motor /Up (A4S

Available only
from the home
position

Co
de
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
13
PS7
Stapler paper exit upper

limit sensor
000: Upper
limit
001: Other
than upper
limit
M5
Alignment motor /Up

(alignment operation)
Available only
from the A4
position
14
PS15
Counter reset sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M5
Alignment motor /Up

(standby position move)
Available only
after the
alignment
operation
M7
Stapler roller motor (staple

mode)
M7
Paper exit roller motor

(folding mode)
Name
Display and
signal source
16
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
17
FS-531/ PS5
612
Stacker entrance sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
18
PS8

Up
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
19
PS9
Paper exit belt home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
20
PS11

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
PS13

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
FS-531/ M8
612

22
PS14
Clincher rotation home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M8

(opening moved: in A4S
stapling mode)
23
FS-531/ PS20
612
Stacker empty sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
21
FS-612
24
MS1
Door switch
000: Close
001: Open
25
PS31
Stapler motor home

sensor /Fr
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
26
PS30
Stapler motor home

sensor /Rr
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
27
SW4
Staple empty switch /Fr
000: Staple
001: No staple
M14
Stapler motor /Fr (stapling

operation performed)
28
SW2
Staple empty switch /Rr
000: Staple
001: No staple
M9
Stapler motor /Rr (initial

29
SW4
Staple empty switch /Fr

(U-shaped staple)
000: Staple
001: No staple
M9
Stapler motor /Rr (stapling

30
SW2
Staple empty switch /Rr

(U-shaped staple)
000: Staple
001: No staple
31
SW3
Cartridge set switch /Fr

000: Cartridge FS-531/ M11,
612
M4
001: No
cartridge
(FS-61 (home position search)
2 only)
32
SW1
Cartridge set switch /Rr
000: Cartridge
001: No
cartridge
I -141
FS-531/ M14
612
Stapler motor /Fr (initial

M11,
Stapler movement motor,
M4
(FS-61 (A4, 1 staple position)
2 only)
Restrictive
conditions
Available only
from the home
position

Co
de
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
35
PS33
Clincher motor home

sensor /Fr
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
PS32
Clincher motor home

sensor /Rr
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
FS-612
36
Name
Display and
signal source
38
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
FS-531/ M13
612
Stacker entrance motor

(670mm/sec)
FS-612
M6
Stapler rotation motor

M16
Alignment motor /Lw

39
PS22
Folding knife home sensor
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
M18
Saddle stitching stopper

search)
42
PS23

home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M18

motor (A4S stopper
release)
43
PS24

Lw
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M19
Folding knife motor (1

cycle performed)
44
PS25
Folding paper exit sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M20
Folding transfer motor

(high speed forward
rotation)
45
PS26
Folding pass-through
sensor
000: No paper FS-531/ SD4

612
001: Paper
46
PS29
Folding full sensor
000: Other
than full
001: Full
41
FS-612
SD5
47
FS-612
48
FS-531/ SD51
612
49
FS-531/ PS201 Paper pass-through

612
sensor /Up (PI)
50
PS206 Paper pass-through

sensor /Lw (PI)
000: No paper FS-612

001: Paper
SD6
SD7,
SD8
FS-531/ M21
612
55
M12
FS-531/ PS301 Punch home sensor (PK)
612
Tri-folding gate solenoid

Paper assist solenoid
Flat stitching stopper
release solenoid /Fr, /Rr
000: No paper
001: Paper
53
57
Paper exit opening

solenoid
Sub tray exit motor

(667mm/sec)
Gate motor (position
search)
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
58
PS306 Punch encoder sensor

(PK)
000:
Transparent
001: Light
blocked
59
PS302 Punch scraps box full

sensor (PK)
000: Full
001: Other
than full
60
PS304 Punch scraps box set

sensor (PK)
000: Not set

001: Set
61
PS303 Punch shift home sensor

(PK)
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
I -142
FS-531/ M51
612
Paper assist motor (F

rotation)
Restrictive
conditions
Available only
from the home
position

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
62
PS305 Paper size sensor swing

(edge detection 5) (PK)
000: No paper
001: Paper
63

000: No paper
001: Paper
64

000: No paper
001: Paper
65

000: No paper FS-531/ M302

612
001: Paper
66

000: No paper
001: Paper
Name
Punch shift motor (home

position search) (PK)
M302
Punch shift motor (PK)
69
M301
Punch motor (home

position search) (PK)
70
M301
Punch motor (2-hole PK

punch execute)
73
FS-531/ PS202 Paper empty sensor /Up

612
(PI)
000: Paper
001: No paper
74
PS203 Paper set sensor /Up (PI)
000: Paper
001: No paper
75
PS205 Tray upper limit sensor /Up 000: Upper

(Upper tray) (PI)
limit
001: Other
than upper
limit
76
PS204 Tray lower limit sensor /Up

(Upper tray) (PI)
000: Lower
limit
001: Other
than lower
limit
77
PIOB
Sheet feeder manual start/

clear switch
000: ON
001: OFF
78
PIOB
Sheet feeder manual

punch button switch (PI)
000: ON
001: OFF
79
PIOB
Sheet feeder manual

function selection button
switch (PI)
000: ON
001: OFF
80
MS20
1
Upper door open/close

switch (PI)
000: Close
001: Open
81
PS207 Paper empty sensor /Lw

(PI)
000: Paper
001: No paper
82
PS212 Paper set sensor /Lw (PI)
000: Paper
001: No paper
83
PS209 Tray upper limit sensor /Lw 000: Other

(Lower tray) (PI)
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
84
PS210 Tray lower limit sensor /Lw

(Lower tray) (PI)
000: Other
than lower
limit
001: Lower
limit
85
FS-531/ M203
612
Conveyance motor
(667mm/sec) (PI)
CL201 Conveyance clutch /Up

(PI)
CL202 Conveyance clutch /Lw

(PI)
M201
Tray lift motor /Up (move

down: home position
search)
87
M201
Tray lift motor /Up (move

up) (PI)
88
M202
Tray lift motor /Lw (move

down: home position
search) (PI)
89
M202
Tray lift motor /Lw (move

up) (PI)
90
SD201 Pick-up solenoid /Up (PI)
91
SD202 Pick-up solenoid /Lw (PI)
92
CL203 Registration clutch (PI)
86
FS-531/ PS208 L size sensor /Lw (PI)

612
000: Paper
001: No paper
I -143
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
96
Input check
Symb
ol
FS-531/ 612
Name
signal
Output check
Display and
signal source
Symb
ol
FS-531/ 612
LS (1st PS4
tandem)
Name
000: Not
connected
001:
Connected
99
73
Classific
ation
Paperless running mode
Entrance sensor
000: No paper LS (1st M2

tandem)
001: Paper
Conveyance motor
PS10
000: No paper
001: Paper
M2
Conveyance motor
PS7
Conveyance sensor /1
000: No paper
001: Paper
M3
Sub tray exit motor
PS16
000: No paper
001: Paper
M3
Sub tray exit motor
PS17
000: No paper
001: Paper
M6
Coupling conveyance
motor
PS18
Coupling exit sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
M6
Coupling conveyance
motor
PS6
Paper empty sensor
000: Full
001: Other
than full
M4
Grip conveyance motor
PS3
Stacker tray upper limit

sensor
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
M4
PS13
2,000 sheets stacked

sensor
000: OFF
001: ON
M7
Alignment motor (initial

operation)
10
PS19
Paper detection sensor
000: OFF
001: ON
M7
Alignment motor
11
PS14

sensor
000: OFF
001: ON
M5
Shift unit motor (home

position search)
12
PS9
Sub tray full sensor
000: Other
than full
001: Full
M5
Shift unit motor
13
PS1
Stacker tray set sensor
000: Not set

001: Set
M1
Stacker tray up down

motor (down)
14
RS1
Hand cart reset switch
000: Not set

001: Set
M1

motor (up)
15
PS15
Stacker tray arm release

sensor
000: OFF
001: ON
SD1
1st gate solenoid
16
TOB
Paper exit switch
000: OFF
001: ON
SD10
2nd gate solenoid
17
MS1
Front door switch
000: Close
001: Open
SD9
Front stopper solenoid
18
RS2
JAM door switch
000: Close
001: Open
SD3
Rear stopper solenoid
19
PS8
Sub tray door sensor
000: Close
001: Open
SD8
Paper press arm solenoid /

3
20
MS2

switch
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
SD6

1
21
MS3
Stacker tray lower limit

switch
000: Other
than lower
limit
001: Lower
limit
SD4
Front door lock solenoid
22
PS12
Alignment home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
SD11
Tandem conveyance lock

solenoid
I -144
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
23
PS11
Shift unit home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
SD2
Job partition solenoid
24
PS5
Grip conveyance home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
SD7
Paper press solenoid /2
25
FM1,
FM2,
FM3,
FM6
Paper cooling fan motor /

Fr, Paper cooling fan
motor /Mi, Paper cooling
fan motor /1, /2
26
FM5

Rr
32
74
LS (1st tandem)
Name

signal
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
000: Not
connected
001:
Connected
LS (2nd M2
tandem) M2
Conveyance motor
2
3
M3
Sub tray exit motor
M3
Sub tray exit motor
M6
Coupling conveyance
motor
M6
Coupling conveyance
motor
M4
M4
Conveyance motor

sensor
000: OFF
001: ON
M7
Alignment motor (initial

operation)
PS19
Paper detection sensor
000: OFF
001: ON
M7
Alignment motor
11
PS14

sensor
000: OFF
001: ON
M5
Shift unit motor (home

position search)
12
PS9
000: Other
than full
001: Full
M5
Shift unit motor
13
PS1
Stacker tray set sensor
000: Not set

001: Set
M1

motor (down)
14
RS1
Hand cart reset switch
000: Not set

001: Set
M1

motor (up)
15
PS15
Stacker tray arm release

sensor
000: OFF
001: ON
SD1
1st gate solenoid
16
TOB
Paper exit switch
000: OFF
001: ON
SD10
2nd gate solenoid
17
MS1
Front door switch
000: Close
001: Open
SD9
Front stopper solenoid
18
RS2
JAM door switch
000: Close
001: Open
SD3
Rear stopper solenoid
19
PS8
Sub tray door sensor
000: Close
001: Open
SD8

3
20
MS2

switch
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
SD6

1
21
MS3

switch
000: Other
than lower
limit
001: Lower
limit
SD4
LS (2nd PS13
tandem)
10
I -145
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
75
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
22
PS12
Alignment home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
SD11
Tandem conveyance lock

solenoid
23
PS11
Shift unit home sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
SD2
Job partition solenoid
24
PS5
Grip conveyance home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
SD7
Paper press solenoid /2
25
FM1,
FM2,
FM3,
FM6

Fr, Paper cooling fan
motor /Mi, Paper cooling
fan motor /1, /2
26
FM5

Rr
Name
Display and
signal source
32
LS (2nd tandem)

signal
000: Not
connected
001:
Connected
07
RU -506 PS5
Stacker jam sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
21
Classific
ation
SD1
Straight gate solenoid
SD2
Stacker exit shutter

solenoid
23
SD3
Stack switching solenoid
24
SD4
Stacker entrance guide

plate solenoid
M1
Entrance conveyance
motor
M4
CD alignment motor (home

position move)
M2
Paper exit motor
M3
FD alignment motor (home

position move)
FM2
Stack assist fan /Rr
FM1
Stack assist fan /Fr
RU -506 PS1
Entrance sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
40
000: Not
connected
001:
Connected
42
PS4
CD alignment plate home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
43
PS2
Paper exit sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
44
PS6
Entrance jam sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
46
PS3
FD alignment plate home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
Interlock switch
000: ON
001: OFF
RU-506
RU-506
47
49
RU -506 MS1
52
RU-506
90
77
Name
22
29
RU-506
Symb
ol
JAMIB JAM indicator board (lit all

LEDs)
PS1
Entrance sensor
PB
000: Paper
001: No paper
M1
Entrance conveyance
motor
PS2
SC entrance sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M2
motor
PS3
Cover paper entrance

sensor
000: No paper
001: Paper
SD1
PB
I -146
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
PS4
000: No paper
001: Paper
SD2
PS5
000: Full
001: Other
than full
SD3
Sub tray gate solenoid
SD4
Sub tray exit solenoid
M11
SC entrance conveyance
motor
Restrictive
conditions
PS12
SC switchback arm
pressure detection sensor
000: Press
001: Release
M12
SC switchback
conveyance motor (F
rotation)
PS13
SC switchback spring
pressure detection sensor
000: Release
001: Press
M12
SC switchback
conveyance motor (R
rotation)
10
PS14
SC alignment HP sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M13
SC switchback release
search)
11
PS16
SC paper detection sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M13
motor (High pressing
position move)
12
PS17
SC roller release sensor
000: Release
001: Press
M13
motor (Low pressing
position move)
13
PS18
Clamp entrance movement 000: Other

HP sensor
than home
position
001: Home
position
M15
SC alignment motor (home

position search)
14
PS19
Clamp entrance roller

release sensor
000: Release
001: Press
M15
SC alignment motor (A4

15
PS21
Clamp alignment HP
sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M15
SC alignment motor
(alignment)
16
PS22
Clamp HP sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M17
SC bundle conveyance
motor
17
PS23
Clamp pressure sensor
000: Release
001: Press
M18
SC roller release motor

18
PS24
Clamp rotation HP sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M18

(movement to the pressing
position)
19
PS25
Clamp rotation pressure

sensor
000: Release
001: Press
M19
Clamp entrance movement

search)
20
PS26
Cover paper table upper

limit sensor /Fr
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
M19
Clamp entrance movement The following

motor (movement to the
adjustments
entrance position)
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-19
2. 77-29
3. 77-31
4. 77-32
21
PS27
Cover paper table upper

limit sensor /Rr
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
M20

release motor (home
position search)
PB
I -147
77-13 must have

been performed
in advance.

Co
de
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
22
PS28
Clamp paper sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M20

release motor (pressing
position move)
23
PS29
Booklet thickness sensor
000: Not
detected
001: Detected
SD11
FD alignment solenoid
24
SD12
SC stopper solenoid
25
SD13
SC pressure arm solenoid
Name
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
Restrictive
conditions
PS33
Glue tank HP sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M21
Clamp alignment motor

27
PS36
Pellet supply remaining

sensor
000: Pellet
001: No pellet
M21

(A4 standby position
move)
28
PS37
Pellet supply passage

sensor
000: Detected
001: Not
detected
M21

(alignment)
29
PS38
Pellet supply arm upper

limit sensor
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
M22
Clamp motor (home

position search)
30
PS39
Pellet supply arm home

sensor
000: Other
than lower
limit
001: Lower
limit
M22
Clamp motor (movement

to the clamp position)
31
M32
Glue apply roller motor
000: Abnormal
001: Normal
M23
Clamp rotation motor

77-19 must have

been performed
in advance.
32
PS3
Paper exit sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M23

(movement to the compile
position)
77-19 must have

been performed
in advance.
33
PS41
Cover paper alignment HP

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
SD91
Straight gate solenoid
34
PS42
Cover paper conveyance

arm HP sensor /Rt
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M31
Glue tank movement

search)
The following
adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
35
PS43

arm HP sensor /Lt
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M31
Glue tank movement

motor (tank forward
movement)
The following
adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-51
36
PS44
Cover paper switchback

sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M31
Glue tank movement

motor (tank backward
movement)
The following
adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-35
2. 77-55
3. 77-29
4. 77-34
5. 77-49
6. 77-51
26
PB
I -148

Co
de
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
37
PS45
Cover paper sensor /Rt
000: Paper
001: No paper
M32
38
PS46
Cover paper sensor /Lt
000: Paper
001: No paper
SD31
Glue tank up solenoid /1
39
PS47
Cover paper table HP

sensor /Fr
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
SD32
Cover paper glue up

solenoid
40
PS53
Cover paper table HP

sensor /Rr
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
H1
Glue tank heater
41
PS48

HP sensor /Rt
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
H2
Glue apply roller heater
42
PS49

HP sensor /Lt
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
43
PS50

encoder sensor
000: Not
detected
001: Detected
M34
Pellet supply arm motor

44
PS51

position sensor
000: Not at
the reference
position
001: At the
reference
position
M34

(movement to the supply
position)
The following
adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
45
PS52
Cover paper folding

pressure sensor
000: Release
001: Press
M41
Cover paper alignment

search)
77-55 must have

been performed
in advance.
46
SW41
Cutter home sensor
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
M41

The following
motor (A3 standby position adjustments
move)
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-57
4. 77-60
47
SW42
Cutter home sensor
000: Home
position
001: Other
than home
position
M41

motor (alignment)
The following
adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-57
4. 77-60
5. 77-46
48
MS2
Front door switch
000: Open
001: Close
M42
Booklet exit motor
77-55 must have

been performed
in advance.
49
PS57
Booklet door sensor
000: Open
001: Close
M43

arm motor /Rt (home
position search)
The following
adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
Name
Display and
signal source
I -149
Classific
ation
PB
Symb
ol
Name
Restrictive
conditions
Be sure that the
warm-up
completes.

Co
de
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
50
PS61
Booklet end sensor
000: Not
detected
001: Detected
M43

arm motor /Rt (roller
pressure)
The following
adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
51
PS62

belt movement HP sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M44

arm motor /Lt (home
position search)
The following
adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
52
PS63
Cover paper belt home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M44

arm motor /Lt (roller
pressure)
The following
adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-51
53
PS64
Cover paper belt lower

limit sensor
000: Other
than lower
limit
001: Lower
limit
M45

motor (F rotation)
77-55 must have

been performed
in advance.
54
PS65
Booklet load limit sensor
000: Upper
limit
001: Other
than upper
limit
M45

motor (R rotation)
77-55 must have

been performed
in advance.
55
PS66
Booklet sensor /1
000: Paper
001: No paper
M46,
M47
Cover paper table up down

motor /Fr, /Rr (home
position search)
56
PS67
Booklet sensor /2
000: Paper
001: No paper
M46,
M47
Cover paper table up down The following

motor /Fr, /Rr (book spine adjustments
corner creation)
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-50
6. 77-51
7. 77-52
8. 77-19
9. 77-31
10. 77-30
11. 77-32
12. 77-45
13. 77-58
14. 77-61
57
PS68
Booklet stopper HP sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
M48
Cover paper folding

motor /Rt (home position
search)
77-55 must have

been performed
in advance.
58
PS69
Cart set sensor
000: Not set

001: Set
M48
Cover paper folding

motor /Rt (movement to
the open position)
The following
adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
Name
Display and
signal source
I -150
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
Restrictive
conditions

Co
de
Input check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
59
OB/2
Booklet stock operation

board
60
61
SW1
Upper door switch /1
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
Restrictive
conditions
M48
Cover paper folding

motor /Rt (movement to
the close position)
The following
adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-58
M49
Cover paper folding

motor /Lt (home position
search)
77-55 must have

been performed
in advance.
M49
Cover paper folding

The following
motor /Lt (movement to the adjustments
open position)
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
62
M50
Cutter motor (home

position search)
77-55 must have

been performed
in advance.
63
M50
Cutter motor (cut position

movement)
77-55 must have

been performed
in advance.
SD41
Cover paper lift solenoid
The following
adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-57
000: SW ON
001: SW OFF
000: Close
001: Open
64
PBCB
PB connection detection
signal
000: Not
connected
001:
Connected
65
Cover paper tray set

detection signal
000: Set
001: Not set
PS71
Cover paper empty sensor
PB
000: Paper
001: No paper
67
power plug connection

detection signal
000: Power
detected
001:
M61
Cover paper belt motor
68
PS74
Cover paper tray upper

limit sensor
000: Other
than upper
limit
001: Upper
limit
M62
Cover paper belt

movement motor (home
position search)
69
PS75

sensor /1
000: Paper
001: No paper
M62
Cover paper belt

movement motor (A4
70
PS76

sensor /2
000: Paper
001: No paper
M62
Cover paper belt

movement motor (book
stock alignment)
71
PS77

sensor /3
000: Paper
001: No paper
M63
Cover paper belt up down

search: upper limit)
72
PS78

sensor /4
000: Paper
001: No paper
M63
Cover paper belt up down

motor (movement to the
lower position)
73
PS79

sensor /5
000: Paper
001: No paper
M64
Booklet movement motor
74
PS80
Waste box full sensor
000: Full
001: Other
than full
M65
Booklet stopper motor

66
PB
I -151
77-68 must have

been performed
in advance.
The following
adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1.77-68
2.77-69

Co
de
Input check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
75
PS81
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Name
M65
Booklet stopper motor (A4

76
M73
Cover paper tray lift motor
77
M74
Cover paper feed motor
78
SD71
Cover paper pick up

solenoid
Waste box set sensor
000: Not set

001: Set
79
78
Symb
ol
SD72
Cover paper tray solenoid
80
PS82
Cover paper tray knob

sensor
000: Release
001: Lock
M71
Cover paper tray fan /1
81
TH2
Glue tank temperature

sensor /Up
0 to 255
M72
82
TH3

sensor /Md
0 to 255
MC71
Cover paper feed clutch
83
TH4

sensor /Lw
0 to 255
MC72
Cover paper separation

clutch
84
TH1
Glue apply roller

temperature sensor
0 to 255
SD80

(locked)
85
OB1
Manual operation board
000: Glue
apply SW ON
001: Glue
apply SW OFF
SD80

(released)
86
OB1
000:
Alignment SW
ON
001:
Alignment SW
OFF
M80
Exhaust fan /1
87
OB1
000: Start SW
ON
001: Start SW
OFF
Multi feed clock output

signal
88
MS1
Pellet supply door switch
000: Open
001: Close
JAMIB Jam indication board /1, /2

/1
(all the lights on)
JAMIB
/2
89
TH1
Glue apply roller

temperature sensor (high
temperature abnormality)
000: Normal
001: Abnormal
OB/1

(all the lights on)
90
TH1
Glue apply roller

temperature sensor (lowtemperature abnormality)
000: Normal
001: Abnormal
M4,
M81
Exhaust fan /2
Pellet supply cooling fan
91
TH2

sensor /Up (high
000: Normal
001: Abnormal
SD61
Booklet door lock solenoid

(lock)
92
TH2

sensor /Up (lowtemperature abnormality)
000: Normal
001: Abnormal
SD61
Booklet door lock solenoid

(release)
93
TH3

sensor /Md (high
000: Normal
001: Abnormal
94
TH3

sensor /Md (lowtemperature abnormality)
000: Normal
001: Abnormal
95
TH

sensor /Lw (high
000: Normal
001: Abnormal
M71,
M72,
M73,
M74,
SD71,
SD72,
MC71,
MC72
Cover paper feed

operation for the
adjustment of the multi
feed detection board
96
TH

sensor /Lw (lowtemperature abnormality)
000: Normal
001: Abnormal
All initial operation
S1
Enter sensor
000 : No
Paper
Entrance stepper motor
01
GP
I -152
GP
Restrictive
conditions
77-74 must have
been performed
in advance.
77-96 must have

been performed
in advance.

Co
de
79
Input check
Output check
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Symb
ol
02
S2
Stepper 1 speed sensor
000 : No
Paper
001 : Paper
Exit stepper motor
03
S3
Punch module sensor
000 : No
Paper
001 : Paper
Transport motor
04
S5
Back Gauge sensor
000 : No
Paper
001 : Paper
Punch motor
05
S6
Stepper 2 speed sensor
000 : No
Paper
001 : Paper
Divert solenoid
06
S7
Exit sensor
000 : No
Paper
001 : Paper
Backstop solenoid
07
S8
Bypass sensor
000 : No
Paper
001 : Paper
Punch brake
08
S9
Punch flag sensor
000 : Home
position
001 : Punch
operation
Punch clutch
09
Chip tray switch
000 : Set
001 : Not set
Punch stepper motor

punch operation
10
Die set swtich
000 : Set
001 : Not set
11
Door switch
000 : Close
001 : Open
13
S4
U-channel sensor
000 : No
paper
001 : Paper
16
GP connection detected
000 : Not
connected
001 :
Connected
PS91
Relay conveyance
intermediate sensor
PB
000: Paper
001: No paper
M92
Relay conveyance motor

(1000mm/s)
PS92
Relay conveyance door

sensor
000: Open
001: Close
M91
Relay conveyance exit

motor (1000mm/s)
PS93
Relay conveyance
entrance sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
OB2
Booklet stock operation

board (JAM display LED
ON)
PS94

sensor
000: Paper
001: No paper
M33
Pellet supply pipe motor

M33

(upper limit position move)
PB
Name
Display and
signal source
001 : Paper
Classific
ation
PS96
Pellet supply pipe home

sensor
000: Other
than home
position
001: Home
position
PS95
Pellet supply pipe upper

limit sensor
000: Not
detected
001: Detected
ADU
Symb
ol
Name
80
SD4
Paper exit solenoid
81
CL1
CL2
CL18
I -153
Restrictive
conditions
The following
adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-44
5. 79-05

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Classific
ation
Symb
ol
Name
CL3
82
SD10
ADU gate solenoid
84
M32
ADU reverse motor

(315mm/s) (F rotation)
M32
ADU reverse motor

M32
ADU reverse motor

M32
ADU reverse motor

(207.7mm/s) (F rotation)
M32
ADU reverse motor

M32
ADU reverse motor

M32
ADU reverse motor

(688.54mm/s) (R rotation)
M32
ADU reverse motor

(1000mm/s) (R rotation)
M57
ADU loop motor (315mm/

s) (F rotation)
M57

s) (F rotation)
M57

s) (F rotation)
M57

s) (F rotation)
M57

s) (F rotation)
M57

s) (F rotation)
M57
ADU loop motor

(688.54mm/s) (R rotation)
M57

s) (R rotation)
85
90
Adjustm ent/
special
mode
Adjustm
ent/
special
mode
91
92
Adjustm ent/
special mode
93
94
96
97
98
Restrictive
conditions
Finishing option
adjustment data EEPROM
storage
Perform after
adjustment FD,
SD, FS (FS-521)
Charg
e
count
clear
Main body adjustment data Perform after
NVRAM board storage
installation
NVRAM board data reset
Cannot adjust in
the field
Finishing option
adjustment data EEPROM
storage (factory initial
data)
Cannot be
operated in the
field. FD, SD, FS
(FS-521)
Adjustment value list

display
Operation panel all lit
Main body adjustment data Cannot adjust in

NVRAM board storage
the field
(initial data)
Image memory (DRAM)

capacity check (1 color)
Image memory (DRAM) /Y

check
Image memory (DRAM) /M

check
Image memory (DRAM) /C

check
I -154

Co
de
Mul
ti Classific
ation
Input check
Symb
ol
Name
Output check
Display and
signal source
Symb
ol
Name
Image memory (DRAM) /K

check
Adjustm ent/
special mode
Image memory (DRAM) /A

check
Image processing board

line memory (SDRAM) /Y
check
Adjustm ent/
special
mode
-

line memory (SDRAM) /C
check

line memory (SDRAM) /K
check
HDD/
Y, /
M, /
C, /K
Hard disk capacity (1

color)
HDD/
Y, /
M, /
C, /K
Hard disk remaining

capacity
HDD/
Y, /
M, /
C, /K
Hard disk bad sectors

check
5
6
99
Classific
ation
Restrictive
conditions
Image memory (DRAM) /P

check

line memory (SDRAM) /M
check
5.7.5 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PI)
(1) Usage
When the multi-feed detection board (MFDB) of PI or PI drive board is replaced, conduct this adjustment.
Also, perform this adjustment when multi feed of special paper (thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness, thick paper) cannot be detected
properly.
Note
The multi-feed detection board /1 and /2 are adjusted in the manufacturing process as a pair of upper and lower. Be sure to
replace them as a pair.
environment in which the copier is actually used (20 C to 30 C).
(In the case you brought a new part from outdoors, make the adjustment after the temperature of the sensor surface and the
room temperature become the same)
(2) Procedure
1. Replace the multi-feed detection board /1, /2. (Refer to G.13.3.17 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2))
2. Check the stamp letter [1] placed on the multi-feed detection boards /1 and /2, and rotate the rotary switch [2] on the PI drive board
(PIDB) as shown in the following table.
Stamp letter
Rotary switch
Note
The rotary switch5 is not used.
I -155
[1]
[2]
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
a03uf3c027ca
Enter the I/O check mode.

Press the Access button.
Open the FD upper door and front door to turn the jam clearing knob [1]. Insert 1 sheet of paper [2] (P/N 65AA-991#, fusing adjustment
paper, 16 sheets/A3) between the multi-feed detection boards /1 and /2 [3] (200g/m/2 to 300g/m2 paper can also be used).
Note
Turn the jam clearing knob until the paper hits the roller [4], thus confirming that the paper is between the multi-feed
detection board /1 and /2.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
a03uf3c028ca
8. Press the Start key to activate the output check mode. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following positions of the PIDB.
+ terminal: test pin Number TP51 (GAIN) [1]
- terminal: test pin Number TP11 (SGND) [2]
Range: DC 20V
Note
Because the FD is powered, do not drop any metal material on the board, or do not connect the tester pin to an irrelevant
terminal.
It causes the board to short circuit and be damaged.
I -156
VR2
LED1
[1]
[2]
a03uf3c029ca
9. In the PIDB volume (VR2), set power voltage to the standard value.
Standard value: 8.0 0.2V
10. Press the Stop key and pull out the paper inserted in step 4.
11. Insert 1 sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2), and confirm that the LED of PIDB (LED1) turns ON.
LED ON: No multi-feed (0 or 1 sheet of paper)
LED OFF: Multi-feed (2 sheets of paper)
12. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all), that customer mainly uses, and check that the LED turns OFF.
13. If there is a detection error, return to step7 to conduct the adjustment again. In step9, set power voltage to the value1.0V lower than the
previous adjustment.
14. Repeat the steps 10 to 13 until detection error is resolved.
15. Pull out the inserted papers, and install the parts removed.
5.7.6 Adjustment when replacing the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB)
(1) Usage
When the cover paper multi feed detection board of PB or the PB control board (PBCB) is replaced, conduct this adjustment.
Also, perform this adjustment when multi-feed of special paper (thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness, thick paper) cannot be detected
properly.
Note
The multi-feed detection board /S and /R are adjusted in the manufacturing process as a pair. Be sure to replace them as a pair.
environment in which the copier is actually used (20 C to 30 C).
(In the case you brought a new part from outdoors, make the adjustment after the temperature of the sensor surface and the
room temperature become the same)
(2) Procedure
1. Replace the multi-feed detection boards /S and /R. (Refer to G.15.2.31 Multi feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR))
2. Check the stamp letter [1] placed on the cover paper multi-feed detection boards /S and /R, and rotate the rotary switch [2] on the PBCB
as shown in the following table.
Stamp letter
Rotary switch
I -157
[1]
[2]
564Af3c001cb
3. Insert 1 sheet of paper (P/N 65AA-9910, fusing adjustment paper, 16 sheets/A3) in the cover paper tray of the PB.
(200 to 300g/m2 paper can also be used.)
4. Select the output check code "77-96" of the I/O check mode in the service mode.
5. Press the Start key.
Perform the all initializing operation.
6. After the operations, press the Stop key.
7. Select the output check code "77-95" of the I/O check mode in the service mode.
The paper is fed from the cover paper tray and stops at the conveyance section.
Note
Confirm that the paper is between the multi-feed detection boards /1 and /2.
9. After the operations, press the Stop key.
10. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following positions of the PBCB.
+ terminal: test pin Number TP28 (GAIN) [1]
- terminal: test pin Number TP24 (AGND) [2]
Range: DC 20V
Note
Because the PB is powered, do not drop any metal material on the board, or do not connect the tester pin to an irrelevant
terminal.
It causes the board to short circuit and be damaged.
[1]
VR4
[2]
564Af3c002cd
11. In the PBCB volume (VR4), set power voltage to the standard value.
Standard value: 8.0 0.1V
12. Pull out the paper inserted in step 8.
13. Insert 1 sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2), and confirm that the LED of PBCB (LED1) turns
14.
15.
16.
17.
ON.
LED ON: No multi-feed (0 or 1 sheet of paper)
LED OFF: Multi-feed (2 sheets of paper)
Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all), that customer mainly uses, and check that the LED turns OFF.
If there is a detection error, return to step 3 to conduct the adjustment again. In step11, set power voltage to the value 1.0V lower than the
previous adjustment.
Repeat steps 3 to 14 until detection error is resolved.
Pull out the inserted papers, and install the parts removed.
I -158
5.7.7 FD, SD, FS and PB data EEPROM storage

(1) Usage
Adjustment data of FD, SD, FS and PB which are adjusted in the field are backed up to the nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) of FD control
board (FDCB), SD control board (SDCB), FNSCB (FNS control board) and PB control board (PBCB). When necessary, it can be recalled by
selecting [Installation Initial Data] in Recall Standard Data (Finisher adjustment data) in the Service Mode.
Note
Only 1 type of data can be backed up. When backed up again, data is overwritten.
When several units of FS, SD, FD and PB are connected, the data is backed up to all EEPROMs.
To back up the data of 1 option respectively, connect only the target option to the main body.
(2) Procedure
1. Enter the I/O check mode.
2. Enter "90" with the numeric keys.
Confirm that "90-00" is displayed on the message display area.
4. "NOW" is displayed while in the back-up. When completed, "FIN" is displayed and the current finisher adjustment data is backed up in the
EEPROM.
5.7.8 Main body adjustment data NVRAM board storage

(1) Usage
Adjustment data of the main body which are adjusted in the field are backed up to the NVRAM board (NRB). When necessary, it can be
recalled by selecting [Installation Initial Data] in Recall Standard Data (Machine Adjustment data), (Process Adjustment data).
Note
Only 1 type of data can be backed up. When backed up again, data is overwritten.
(2) Procedure
4. "NOW" is displayed while in the back-up. Then when it completes, "FIN" is displayed and the current machine adjustment data and the
process adjustment data are backed up in the NRB.
5.7.9 Printer image processing board line memory check

(1) Usage
When the image of a particular color is misaligned in the sub scan direction and a notable image trouble occurs, check whether there is any
abnormality on the line memory of the printer image processing board (PRIPB).
(2) Procedure
3. Press the Access key.
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric keys.
Check that "98-##" (## represent multi-code number) is displayed in the message display area.
Multi-Code 06: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check /Y
Multi-Code 07: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check /M
Multi-Code 08: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check /C
Multi-Code 09: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check /K
During the operation-"NOW" is displayed
The operation succeeded - "OK" is displayed
The operation failed - "NG" is displayed
When "NG" is displayed, replace PRIPB.
5.7.10 Hard disk check

(1) Usage
Check the total capacity and remaining capacity of image memory area of the copier hard disk (HDD).
(2) Procedure
3. Press the Access key.
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric keys.
Check that "99-##" (## represent multi-code number) is displayed in the message display area.
Multi-Code01: HDD image memory area capacity check
Multi-Code02: HDD image memory area remaining capacity check
Capacity check: Capacity of HDD image memory area is displayed.
Remaining capacity check: Remaining capacity of HDD image memory area is displayed.
I -159
The remaining capacity of the channel which shows the smallest value among C, M, Y, K, A and P is displayed.
5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure

(1) Usage
When an error code related to the copier hard disk (C-D0E0 to D0F0) occurs, perform this adjustment.
(2) Procedure
3. Press [High/Low].
The bad sectors check and recovery are performed on the hard disks /C, /M, Y, /K, /A and /P (HDD/C, /M, /Y, /K, /A, /P).
During the operation-"NOW" is displayed. when the check and recovery are completed, the result is displayed.
The operation succeeded - "OK" is displayed
The operation failed - "NG" is displayed
When "NG" is displayed, press the Start key to perform the bad sectors check and recovery again.
6. When "NG is displayed again, remove the HDD with abnormality and replace with the new one.
Note
The abnormal HDD can be determined according to the malfunction code. (C-D0E3 Y, C-D0E4 M, C-D0E5 C, C-D0E6 K, C-D0E7 A,
C-D0E8 P)
7. Note
When the customer has backed up the HDD data, restore it by conducting the following procedure.
"Utility menu" - Administrator Setting" - Security Setting" - HDD Management Setting" - "HDD Restore/Backup" - "HDD Restore"
The message "All data on HDD will be cleared Start restore Yes/No ?" is displayed.
Press [Yes].
Note
Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW1).
Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW2).
When the password is set in the enhanced security mode and 1 to 5 HDDs have any trouble, all 6 HDDs must be replaced.
Procedure: Remove the HDD turn OFF the enhanced security mode replace 6 HDDs
9. Turn OFF and ON the sub power switch (SW2).
Note
Otherwise, C-D0E0 is displayed.
Turning OFF and ON the main power switch (SW1) at this time causes HDD breakdown. Be sure to turn OFF and ON the sub
power switch (SW2) to start up the user mode.
5.7.12 Replacing procedure of the write unit

(1) Usage
(2) Procedure
Press [05 State Confirmation] and then press [01 I/O Check Mode].
3. Perform the LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear corresponding to the color of the replaced write unit.
"Output check"
37-91: LD1 to LD-8 alarm data clear /Y
37-92: LD1 to LD-8 alarm data clear /M
37-93: LD1 to LD-8 alarm data clear /C
37-94: LD1 to LD-8 alarm data clear /K
4. Perform the LD alarm measurement by 37-00 of "Output check"
37-00: LD alarm measurement
Note
The LD alarm data (laser power of the laser diode) can be checked by the "Adjustment Data List" in the "List output."
The value displayed for "Default" on the adjustment data list is a value of when 37-00 is performed after LD alarm clear by
37-9*.
"000" is normally displayed on the "Setting" on the adjustment data list. When performing 37-00 in the field, the LD alarm
data measured result is displayed, and is overwritten each time 37-00 is performed.
The value of the LD alarm level decreases with the deterioration of the laser diode.
Steps 1 to 3 are the procedures for history management at replacing the write unit.
I -160
5.8 ADF Adjustment

5.8.1 ADF Original Size Adj.
(1) Functions
Adjust the output value of the variable resistance type sensor which detects the original size.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the original size detection of DF does not work properly.
Note
The size of paper used for the adjustment differs depending on the destination. For the adjustment, be sure to use the paper of
proper size shown on the touch panel.
(3) Procedure
1. "Service Mode screen"
Press [06 ADF Adjustment].
2. "ADF adjustment mode menu screen"
Press [01 ADF Original Size Adj.].
3. "ADF Original Size Adj. screen"
Press [A4].
4. Load A4 (for metric destination) paper on the DF and press [Start].
Press [B6S].
7. Load B6S (for metric destination) paper on the DF and press [Start].
Press [A4S].
10. Load A4S (for metric destination) paper on the DF and press [Start].
11. After a message "Completed" is displayed, press [COPY].
12. Make sure the original size is properly detected.
5.8.2 ADF Orig. Stop Position

(1) Functions
This adjustment changes read start timing when scanning original in sub scanning direction of DF.
(2) Usage
Adjust the read start timing when scanning original in sub scanning direction of DF.
Note
Be sure the "Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)" has been adjusted before performing this adjustment. (Refer to I.
5.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
Be sure the "Restart Timing Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment)" has been adjusted before performing this adjustment. (Refer to
I.5.3.17 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [02 ADF Orig. Stop Position].
3. "ADF Orig. Stop Position screen"
Set the copy settings (original setting and mode) according to the item to be adjusted, load an "Adjustment chart" on the DF, select A3
paper, and press the Start key.
5. Check the image leading edge timing.
Standard value: within 1.5mm
7. "ADF Orig. Stop Position screen"
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [<<SET].
Setting range: -14 (image faster) to +14 (image slower)
1 step = 0.5mm
5.8.3 ADF Sensor Adjustment

(1) Functions
Adjust the sensitivity of the reflective type sensor.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a malfunction (JAM display does not disappear despite no paper JAM) occurs in the reflective type sensors.
Note
I -161
(3) Preparation
Clean each of the reflective sensors of DF.
(4) Procedure
Press [03 ADF Sensor Adjustment].
3. "ADF Sensor Adjustment screen"
Close the DF cover and press [Start].
The DF sensor sensitivity is automatically adjusted, and the message of completion appears.
4. Press [Copy] and check that the sensor is operating properly.
5. If the sensor still malfunctions, press [Service Mode] and repeat steps 3 to 5.
5.8.4 ADF Registration Loop Adj

(1) Functions
Adjust the original loop amount at the DF registration roller section.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration section.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [04 ADF Registration Loop Adj.].
3. "ADF Registration Loop Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
4. "Copy screen"
Set an "Adjustment chart" in the DF, select A3 paper, and press the Start key.
6. "ADF Registration Loop Adj. screen"
Setting range: -7 (smaller) to +7 (larger)
1 step = 0.5mm
5.9 Finisher Adjustment

5.9.1 Staple Center Position (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the center position of the staple while in stapling by FS.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the center position of the staple is not within the standard value by FS.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Finisher Adjustment].
2. "Finisher Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Staple Finisher Position Adjustment].
3. "Staple Finisher Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Staple Center Position].
4. "Stapling Center Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
6. Fold the output page in half in main-scanning direction, and measure the gap "a" between the center line of the print and the staple
center.
Standard value: a = 3mm
[1]
a
[2]
a03uf3c018ca
I -162

[1]
Paper center
[2]
Staple center
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting range: -20 (in front) to +20 (in back)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.2 Paper Width Adj.(Staple) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the stacker plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is an uneven binding in a bundle of paper in staple mode by the FS-521.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Paper Width Adj.(Staple)].
4. "Paper Width Adj.(Staple) screen"
Press [] or [] to select the paper size to be adjusted.
6. Set paper in size to be adjusted on the tray and press the Start key to output test pattern (No.16).
7. Open the front door of the FS and pull out the stacker.
Note
If the length of the paper is longer than 239mm in sub-scanning direction, the paper edge comes out from the stacker. In that
case, remove the paper through the paper opening section before pulling out the stacker, and reload the paper in the
stacker.
8. Measure the gap between the paper in the stacker and the alignment plate.
9. When the value is not within the standard value, close the front door and press [Exit PrintMode].
10. "Paper Width Adj.(Staple) screen"
Setting range: -20 (wider) to +20 (narrower)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.3 Paper Width Adj.(Straight) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the interval between the stacker plates while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust an uneven paper stack (main scanning direction) on the main tray in non-staple mode by the FS-521.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Paper Width Adj.(Straight)].
4. "Paper Width adjustment (Straight) screen"
7. Open the front door of the FS and pull out the stacker.
Note
If the length of the paper is longer than 239mm in sub-scanning direction, the paper edge comes out from the stacker. In that
case, remove the paper through the paper opening section before pulling out the stacker, and reload the paper in the
stacker.
8. Measure the gap between the paper in the stacker and the alignment plate.
Standard value: 0.1mm to 1mm
9. When the value is not within the standard value, close the front door and press [Exit PrintMode].
10. "Paper Width adjustment (Straight) screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
I -163
5.9.4 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the center position of the paper exit alignment plate while in paper exit alignment.
(2) Usage
Note
This adjustment is effective only for paper more than 182mm width (B5S) in the main scan direction in straight exit, or paper
more than 210mm width (A4) in shift exit. This adjustment is invalid for paper of minimum size (A5S, B6S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S) since it
does not operate the paper exit alignment.
"Paper Width Adjustment (Straight) (Staple Finisher Position Adj.)" must have been done in advance.
Adjust in conjunction with "Exit Guide Paper Width Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adj.)" since the misalignment of the paper
width causes uneven paper stack.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj.].
4. "Exit Guide Unit Center Position Adj. screen"
Select the item to be adjusted of small-size or large-size.
The following items are selectable for each small-size and large-size.
Straight: Adjust the center position of the paper exit alignment plate in straight mode.
Shift in front: Adjust the center position of the paper exit alignment plate in shifting in front
Shift in back: Adjust the center position of the paper exit alignment plate in shifting in back
Note
Large size: Sub scan direction of paper is more than 298mm
Small size: Sub scan direction of paper is less than 297mm
6. Select the paper size according to the item to be adjusted and press the Start key to output some test pattern (No.16).
7. Check the misalignment "a" of the stacked paper.
a
a0u0f3c003ca
Note
Check the misalignment between exit paper and the exit alignment plate under the operation as a reference for the
adjustment.
With too much adjustment, paper gets touch with the exit alignment plate in exiting paper, so be sure to check the alignment
operation.
Be sure to adjust in the position where the fixed side of alignment plate has no improper gap and no stress in the case of
the shift adjustment.
8. To adjust the center position of the exit adjustment plate, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Exit Guide Unit Center Position Adj. screen"
Setting range: -50 (to front) to +50 (to back)
1 step = 0.1mm
Note
Enter the same value to both large size and small size for straight adjustment.
The input value of the straight does not reflect the value of the shift.
5.9.5 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the interval between the exit alignment plates (front and back) while in paper exit alignment.
I -164
(2) Usage
Note
This adjustment is effective only for paper more than 182mm width (B5S) in the main scan direction in straight exit, or paper
more than 210mm width (A4) in shift exit. This adjustment is invalid for paper of minimum size (A5S, B6S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S) since it
does not operate the paper exit alignment.
"Paper Width Adjustment (Straight) (Staple Finisher Position Adj.)" must have been done in advance.
Adjust in conjunction with "Exit Guide Paper Width (Stapler Position Adj.)" since the center misalignment of the exit alignment
plate causes uneven paper stack.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.].
4. "Exit Guide Unit Paper Width Adjustment screen"
6. Select the paper size according to the item to be adjusted and press the Start key to output some test pattern (No.16).
7. Check the misalignment "a" of the stacked paper.
a
a0u0f3c003ca
Note
Check the misalignment between exit paper and the exit alignment plate under the operation as a reference for the
adjustment.
Too narrow adjustment causes uneven paper exit in the sub scan direction.
8. To adjust the position of the exit adjustment plate, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Exit Guide Unit Paper Width Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
Adjustment standard value (at the alignment operation): Paper width 0mm to +1mm
5.9.6 Paper Width Adjustment (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjusts the position of the alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust the misalignment of punch holes for punching by FD.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.].
3. "Multi Folder(Punch) Adj. menu screen"
Press [01 Paper Width Adjustment].
4. "Paper Width Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Note
Large size: Sub scan direction of paper is more than 298mm
Small size: Sub scan direction of paper is less than 297mm
5. Set paper you want to adjust in the tray, the number of copies is set to 10 and press the Start key.
6. Check the diameter of the through-hole when the ejected paper is stacked.
Holes
Standard value (mm)
2-Holes
5.0 or larger
3-Holes
6.5 or larger
I -165
9. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [<<SET].
Setting range: -20 (narrower) to +20 (wider)
1 step = 0.1mm
Note
When the alignment plate is wider than an appropriate position, the punch centering is displaced, and when too narrow, the
punch holes are apt to disperse.
5.9.7 Punch Vertical Position Adj. (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the position of the punch holes made by the FD in sub scanning direction.
2-hole or 3-hole is selectable.
Adjust in conjunction with "Center Adjustment (Staple Finisher Position Adj.)".
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.].
Press [02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.].
4. "Punch hole select menu screen"
Select [01 2-Hole Punch] or [02 3-Hole Punch].
5. "Punch Vertical Position Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
7. Check the distance "a" from the outputted paper leading edge to the punch holes center position.
Holes
Standard value "a"

(mm)
2-Holes
10.5 4.0
3-Holes
9.5 4
fs503fs3013c
9. "Punch Vertical Position Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
12. To configure other punch hole/paper size, repeat steps 4 to 11.
5.9.8 Half Fold Position Adjustment (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper stop position when folding paper.
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold position on the half fold mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
I -166

Press [03 Multi Folder(Fold) Adj.].
3. "Multi Folder (Fold) adj. menu screen"
Press [01 Half-Fold Position Adj.].
4. "Half-Fold Position Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the outputted paper.
Standard value "a": = 1.5mm
a
fs503fs3014c
1 step = 0.1mm
If there is the misalignment given in the step 6, enter a set value on the positive side.
5.9.9 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the tri-fold-in mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.].
4. "Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper.
Paper size
Standard value (mm)

a 1.5
b 1.5
A3
139.0
142.0
B4
120.3
123.3
A4S
98.0
101.0
SRA4S
105.7
108.7
12 x 18
151.4
154.4
11 x 17
142.9
145.9
81/2 x 14
117.5
120.5
81/2 x 11S
92.1
95.1
8K
129.0
132.0
b
a
[1]
[2]
a03uf3c019ca
[1]
First fold
[2]
8. "Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. screen"
9. Press [Single Fold].
Setting range: -50 (shorter) to +50 (longer)
I -167
Double fold
1 step = 0.1mm
The dimension "a" in the step 6 gets larger when the set value is moved to the positive side and gets smaller when moved to the
negative side.
11. Press [Double Fold].
1 step = 0.1mm
The dimension "b" in the step 6 gets larger when the set value is moved to the positive side and gets smaller when moved to the
negative side.
5.9.10 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the tri-fold-out mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.].
4. "Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Paper size
Standard value (mm)

a 1.5
b 1.5
A3
282.0
144.0
B4
243.7
123.3
A4S
199.0
101.0
SRA4S
214.3
108.7
12 x 18
306.8
156.4
11 x 17
289.9
147.9
81/2 x 14
238.1
120.5
81/2 x 11S
187.3
95.1
8K
262.0
134.0
[1]
a
[2]
a03uf3c020ca
[1]
First fold
[2]
Double fold
8. "Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
14. To configure other paper size, repeat steps 4 to 13.
I -168
5.9.11 Double Parallel Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the double parallel mode by the FD.
Note
When adjusting both the single fold and the double fold, be sure to start with the single fold.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.].
4. "Double Parallel Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Paper size
Standard value (mm)

a 1.5
b 1.5
A3
208.5
103.8
B4
180.5
89.8
A4S
147.0
73.0
SRA4S
158.5
78.8
12 x 18
227.1
113.1
11 x 17
214.4
106.7
81/2 x 14
176.3
87.7
81/2 x 11S
138.2
68.6
8K
193.5
96.3
b
[1]
a
[2]
a03uf3c021ca
[1]
First fold
[2]
Double fold
8. "Double Parallel Pos. Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
5.9.12 Z-Fold Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the z-fold mode by the FD.
Note
When adjusting both the single fold and the double fold, be sure to start with the single fold.
I -169
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Z-Fold Position Adj.].
4. "Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Paper size
Standard value (mm)

a 1.5
b 1.5
A3
105.5
108.5
B4
91.5
94.5
A4S
74.8
77.8
SRA4S
80.5
83.5
12 x 18
114.8
117.8
11 x 17
108.5
111.5
81/2 x 14
94.0
81/2 x 11S
70.4
73.4
8K
98.0
101.0
[2]
[1]
a03uf3c022ca
1 14
2
[1]
a
a03uf3c031ca
[1]
First fold
[2]
Double fold
8. "Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
5.9.13 Gate Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjusts the fold position on the gate fold mode by the FD.
Note
When adjusting the single fold, the double fold and the triple fold, be sure to conduct the single fold, the double fold and the
triple fold in this order.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Gate Position Adj.].
I -170
4. "Gate Position Adj. screen"

Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the length of 2 places indicated with "a", "b" and "c".
Paper size
Standard value (mm)

a 1.5
b 1.5
c 1.5
A3
103.5
213.0
106.5
B4
89.5
185.0
92.5
A4S
72.8
151.5
75.8
SRA4S
78.5
163.0
81.5
12 x 18
112.8
231.6
115.8
11 x 17
106.5
218.9
109.5
81/2 x 14
87.4
180.8
90.4
81/2 x 11S
68.4
142.7
71.4
8K
96.0
198.0
99.0
b
a
[1]
[2]
c
[3]
a03uf3c023ca
[1]
First fold
[2]
Double fold
[3]
Triple Fold
8. "Gate Position Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
13. Press [Triple Fold].
1 step = 0.1mm
The dimension "c" in the step 6 gets larger when the set value is moved to the positive side and gets smaller when moved to the
negative side.
5.9.14 Fold Registration Loop Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold registration loop amount.
(2) Usage
Adjust paper loop amount at the FD registration roller to correct paper skew, wrinkle, or paper jam at the roller.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Fold Registration Loop Adj.].
4. "Fold Registration Loop Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
7. "Fold Registration Loop Adj. screen"
I -171

1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.15 Multi Folder(PI) Adjustment

5.9.16 Paper Width Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a paper exit mis-alignment occurs in the main scan direction of the LS stacker tray.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Stacker Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Paper Width Adjustment].
Press [Print Mode].
6. If there are any uneven paper stack, press [Exit PrintMode].
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.17 Paper Length Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the lead edge stopper position.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a paper exit mis-alignment occurs in the sub scan direction of the LS stacker tray.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Stacker Adjustment menu screen"
Press [02 Paper Length Adjustment].
4. "Paper Length Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. If there are any uneven paper stack, press [Exit PrintMode].
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.18 Staple Center Position (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust the staple center position for the saddle stitch mode by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.].
3. "Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj. menu screen"
Press [01 Staple Center Position].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment between the staplecenter and the paper center.
I -172
Standard value "a": = 2mm
a
fs503fs3300c
Setting range: -20 (right) to +20 (left)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.19 Staple Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the saddle stitching alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust an uneven binding in a bundle of paper in saddle stitch mode by the SD.
Note
Make sure that the folding skew adjustment of the mechanical adjustment has been completed.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Staple Paper Width Adj.].
4. "Staple Paper Width Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check to see if the bundle of papers is misaligned (a: a misalignment occurs when the paper width setting is larger than the paper width)
and if the bundle is curved (b: the curve occurs when the paper width setting is smaller than the paper width).
Standard value "a": 1.0mm or less
a
fs503fs3012c
8. "Staple Paper Width Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.20 Staple Pitch Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the staple intervals for the saddle stitch mode by the SD.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple intervals of the saddle stitching by SD are not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
I -173

Press [03 Staple Pitch Adjustment].
4. "Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the interval "a" between the staples against the paper size "b."
Standard value: a = b/2 2mm
a
b
fs503fs3011c
1 step = 1.0mm
There are restrictions of setting range for each size of paper. Minimum value is determined based on the stapler movable range and
the maximum value is determined so that the saddle stitching alignment plate and stapler do not interfere with each other.
B5S: Setting is not possible (fixed to 91 mm)
B4: -20 to +20 mm (108.5 to 148.5 mm)
A4S: -14 to +14 mm (91 to 119 mm)
A3: -20 to +16.5 mm (128.5 to 165 mm)
5.9.21 Half-Fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold position on the multi-half fold mode by the SD.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of half folding by SD is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Half-Fold Position Adj.].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the outputted paper.
Standard value "a": 1.5mm or less
a
fs503fs3014c
1 step = 0.1mm
If there is the misalignment given in the step 6, enter a set value on the positive side.
5.9.22 Tri-Fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold positions on the multi-tri-fold-in mode by the SD.
I -174
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of multi-tri-folding by SD is not within the standard value.
Note
When adjusting both the single fold and the double fold, be sure to start with the double fold.
The position of the single fold is based on the leading edge of paper and the position of the double fold is based on the position
of the single fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step 7 varies when either position of the single fold and the double fold is
changed.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.].
4. "Tri-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Paper size
Standard value (mm)

a
A4S
97.5 2.0
102.0 2.
81/2 x 11S
91.6 2.0
96.1 2.0
[2]
[1]
fs503fs3015c
[1]
First fold
[2]
Double fold
8. "Tri-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Select the size of paper to be adjusted.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
The dimension "a" in the step 6 gets smaller when the set value is moved to the positive side and gets larger when moved to the
negative side.
5.9.23 Fold Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the alignment width while in alignment (sub scan direction).
(2) Usage
When there is an uneven edge found with the bundle paper at the folding or multi-tri-folding mode by SD, conduct this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Fold Paper Width Adj.].
4. "Fold Paper Width Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Set the paper of the paper size to be adjusted. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
6. Check the printed pages for misalignment.
a: When the paper width setting is set to wider than the actual paper width, misalignment occurs randomly.
b: When the paper width setting is set to narrower than the actual paper width, misalignment occurs in 1 direction.
I -175
fs503fs3302c
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.24 Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Change the registration position of the book for trimming.
(2) Usage
Adjust the misalignment in the trimmed fore-edge or the excess trimming by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Trimming Adjustment].
4. "Trimming Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the trimming distance "a" on the cover paper.
Standard value "a": 2mm or more
Note
Trimming distance less than 2mm causes trimming fault.
a
fs503fs3301c
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.25 Trimmer Receiver Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the shift interval and the move pitch of the trimmer board.
(2) Usage
Adjust the poor trimming (for example, fluff on the cut end) in the trimming by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.].
I -176
4. "Trimmer Receiver Adjustment Menu screen"

Select the options for "Trimmer Count" (number of cuts counted until the trimmer board moves) and "Move Pitch" (travel distance of the
trimmer board when it moves).
5. Press [Execute Compulsive Movement] to move the trimmer board manually.
5.9.26 Cover Trimming Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the trimming position of the right-side edge of the cover paper.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the trimming position on the leading edge of the right cover does not fit to the leading edge of the left cover.
Note
In order to align the leading edges on the left and right covers, perform I.5.9.27 Cover Lead Edge Adj. (Perfect Binder
Adjustment) first.
(3) Procedure
2. [Finisher Adjustment menu screen]
Press [07 Perfect Binder Adjustment].
3. "Perfect Binder Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Cover Trimming Adj.].
4. "Cover Trimming Adjustment screen"
Press [Perfect Binder Tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray to be adjusted.
6. Select the paper type and press the start button to make test prints and carry out perfect binding.
7. Check the cover of the created book if its right-side edge and left-side edge align with each other.
[3]
[2]
[1]
Trimming position
[2]
Right cover paper
[1]
1050fs3357c
[3]
Left cover paper
8. To adjust the position of the trimming position of the right cover paper, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Cover Trimming Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -128 (reduces the trimming amount) to +127 (enlarges the trimming amount)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.27 Cover Lead Edge Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Sets the length that the left side of cover paper exceeds the length (width) of inside pages.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the length that the left side of cover paper exceeds the length (width) of inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.].
4. "Cover Lead Edge Adj. screen"
Press [PB Tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray to be adjusted.
5. Press [] or [] to select the paper size of cover paper.
Select the size of paper from the following options.
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
51/2 x 81/2S
Custom (220mm to 379mm)
I -177

Note
Above paper sizes are book (the inside pages) finished sizes.
8. Check that the width of the left cover paper is longer than the width of the inside pages by specified amount.
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
1050fs3358c
[1]
Body
[4]
Length differential
[2]
Right cover paper
[5]
Edge of the left cover paper
[3]
Left cover paper
9. To change the width of the left cover paper, press [Exit PrintMode].
10. "Cover Lead Edge Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.28 Spine Corner form Pos. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the corner folding position of the cover paper.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the spine corner form position is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.].
4. "Spine Corner Forming Pos. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check that the corner edges of the cover paper are created uniformly in the main scan direction.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
1050fs3359c
[1]
Right cover paper
[3]
Cover paper
[2]
Main scan direction
[4]
Left cover paper
7. When the corner edges of the cover paper are not created uniformly, press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Spine Corner Forming Pos. screen"
Select one of [Up/Down Forward Adj.] or [Up/Down Rear Adj.].
Setting range: -128 (down) to +127 (up)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.29 Glue Start Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the start position for applying glue to inside pages.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the start position for applying glue to inside pages is not adequate.
I -178
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Glue Start Position].
4. "Glue Start Position screen"
Press [Ahead] and select "Glue Start Position."
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
51/2 x 81/2S
Note
[Back] does not require the adjustment.
8. Check that the glue applying start position to the inside pages is appropriate.
[3]
[1]
[2]
1050fs3360c
[1]
Start position for frontward applying
[3]
[2]
Start position for backward applying
[4]
Body
9. To adjust the start position, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Glue Start Position screen"
Setting range: -128 (earlier) to +127 (later)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.30 Glue Finish Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the position to finish applying glue.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the completion position for applying glue to inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Glue Finish Position].
4. "Glue Finish Position screen"
Press [Ahead] or [Back] to select which finish position, for applying during forward movement or backward movement, to be adjusted.
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
I -179
A5S
51/2 x 81/2S
Note
8. Check that the glue applying start position to the inside pages is appropriate.
[3]
[1]
[2]
1050fs3361c
[1]
Finish position for backward applying
[3]
[2]
Finish position for frontward applying
[4]
Body
9. To adjust the finish position, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Glue Finish Position screen"
Setting range: -128 (earlier) to +127 (later)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.31 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Sets the temperatures to be detected by the glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1), the glue tank temperature sensor/Up (TH2), the glue
tank temperature sensor/Md (TH3), and the glue tank temperature sensor/Lw (TH4) provided in the glue tank.
(2) Usage
Adjust it when the applied glue does not harden or when the cover paper easily comes unglued.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Temperature Adjustment].
4. "Temperature Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check that the glue applied has dried appropriately.
7. To adjust the dryness of the glue, press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Temperature Adjustment screen"
Select the option of which the temperature is set.
The following options are provided.
Metal tank - Top
Metal tank - Mid
Metal tank - Low
Glue apply roller
Metal tank - Top
Setting range: 128 C to 136 C
Default: 132 C
Metal tank - Mid
Setting range: 140 C to +145 C
Default: 145 C
Metal tank - Low
Default: 185 C
Glue apply roller
Default: 165 C
I -180
5.9.32 Sub Compile CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when aligning in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the main scan direction is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.].
4. "Sub Compile CD Width Adj. screen"
Press [] or [] to select the paper size.
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
Note
5. "Sub Compile CD Width Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
6. Create multiple books in normal copy mode, and check the alignment of the second and later book.
Change set value set in Step5 until a properly aligned book is created.
5.9.33 Clamp CD Width Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when aligning in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the main scan direction is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Clamp CD Width Adjustment].
4. "Clamp CD Width Adjustment screen"
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
Note
5. "Clamp CD Width Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
6. Create multiple books in normal copy mode, and check the alignment of the second and later book.
I -181
Change set value set in Step5 until a properly aligned book is created.
5.9.34 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the positional relation in the main scan direction between the cover paper and the inside pages.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the positional relation in the main scan direction between the cover paper and the inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [09 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.].
4. "Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjustment screen"
Press [Perfect Binder Tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray to be adjusted.
7. Check if the relation between the main scan position of the cover and that of the inside pages are appropriate.
8. To adjust the relation of their main-scanning positions, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.35 Clamp FD Position Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when aligning in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the sub scan direction is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [10 Clamp FD Position Adj.].
4. "Clamp FD Position Adjustment screen"
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
51/2 x 81/2S
Note
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Press [Print Mode].

Select the paper type and press the start button to make test prints and carry out perfect binding.
Check if the sub scan direction of all the inside pages are properly aligned.
To adjust the alignment width in sub-scanning direction of the inside pages, press [Exit PrintMode].
"Clamp FD Position Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
Note
If the setting is too wide, pages are misplaced in sub scan direction.
If the setting is too narrow, mark of the FD alignment plate appears.
I -182
5.9.36 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the staple position in the sub scan direction while in the saddle stitching.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple position of the saddle stitching by FS-612 is not within the standard value.
Note
Be sure the " Half Fold Stopper Adj." (refer to I.5.9.37 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.) have been adjusted before performing this
adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [01 Saddle Stitcher Stopper].
3. "Saddle Stitcher Stopper screen"
6. Check the saddle stitching staple position of the output paper.
15sjf3c100na
8. "Saddle Stitcher Stopper screen"
Setting range: -128 (down) to +127 (up)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.37 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.

(1) Function
Adjust the folding position while in the half folding and saddle stitching.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of half folding and saddle stitching by FS-612 is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.].
3. "Half-Fold Stopper Adj. screen"
6. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the output paper.
15sjf3c101na
8. "Half-Fold Stopper Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
If there is the misalignment given in the step 6, enter a set value on the negative side.
I -183
5.9.38 Vertical Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the main scan direction is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Punch Adjustment].
3. "Punch Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Vertical Position Adj.].
4. "Punch Adjustment <Vertical Position Adjustment> screen"
7. Fold the output paper in half in the main scan direction, and measure the gap "a" between the center line of the print and the center of the
punch hole.
[1]
a
[2]
15knf3c002nb
[1]
Center of the paper
[2]
Center of the punch hole
8. "Punch Adjustment <Vertical Position Adjustment> screen"

Setting range: -50 (to front) to +50 (to back)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.39 Horizontal Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the sub scan direction is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Horizontal Position Adj.].
4. "Punch Adjustment <Horizontal Position Adjustment> screen"
Select [PI Tray] or [Main Body Tray], and press [Print Mode].
5. Set paper in the tray or PI, and press Start to print the test pattern (No. 16).
6. Check the punch position "a" of the output paper in the sub scan direction.
Standard value a: 10.5mm 5.0mm
15knf3c001nb
I -184
7. "Punch Adjustment <Horizontal Position Adjustment> screen"

1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.40 Registration Adjustment (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the registration loop amount of punching to adjust the paper skew.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch hole of the punch kit (PK) is not straight.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Registration Adjustment].
4. "Punch Adjustment <Registration Adjustment> screen"
5. Set paper in the tray or PI, and press Start to print the test pattern (No. 16).
7. "Punch Adjustment <Registration Adjustment> screen"
Setting range: -20 (larger) to +20 (smaller)
1 step = 0.8mm
5.9.41 Paper Edge Detect Sensor (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the sensitivity of the paper size sensor automatically to detect the paper edge as the standard of the punch hole properly.
(2) Usage
Adjust the sensitivity of the sensor after replacing the punch drive board (PDB) or the paper size sensor (PS305).
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment].
4. "Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment screen"
Press [Start].
5. A message "Completed" is displayed when the adjustment is finished successfully.
5.9.42 Tri-Fold Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the 1st folding position of the multi tri-folding mode.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the 1st folding position of the multi-tri-folding by FS-612 is not within the standard value.
Note
The 2nd folding position (dimension "b") is mechanically adjusted. (Refer to I.18.12 Tri-folding position adjustment)
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Tri-Fold Adjustment].
3. "Tri-Fold Adjustment screen"
Select the paper size to be adjusted and press [Print Mode].
5. Check "a" on the outputted paper.
Paper size
Standard value (mm)

a
A4S
95 2
b
101 2
c
101 2
I -185

81/2 x 11S
89 2
95 2

95 2
c
a
[1]
b
[1]
15sjf3c102na
First fold
7. "Tri-Fold Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -128 (larger) to +127 (smaller)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.43 2 Position Staple Pitch

(1) Function
Change the stop position of the stapler unit to adjust the staple interval.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple intervals of the saddle stitching and flat stapling by FS-612 are not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.].
3. "2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
Press [Fold&Staple] or [Staple].
5. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
6. Check the staple pitch of the output paper.
Standard value a: 128mm 6mm
[1] Staple
[2] Folding & Stapling
15sjf3c103na
[1]
a
15sjf3c104na
[2]
8. "2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
Setting range: +128 (narrower) to +160 (wider)
1 step = 1mm
I -186
5.9.44 Post Inserter Tray Size

(1) Function
Adjust the detection size of the PI tray.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper size is not correctly detected at the cover sheet tray of the PI.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Post Inserter Tray Size].
3. "Post Inserter Tray Size screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous], select the upper or lower tray, and press [A4S] or [81/2 x 11S].
4. Load A4S paper in the selected tray of PI and press [Start]. (When you selected [81/ x 11S] in step 3, load 81/ x 11S paper in the tray.)
2
2
6. When adjusting another tray, repeat the steps 3 to 5.
7. Exit the service mode, and check if paper size set in the PI is correctly detected.
5.9.45 Output Quantity Limit

(1) Functions
Set the maximum number of sheets for stapling, saddle stitching, multi half fold, and multi tri-fold of the FS-531 and FS-612.
(2) Usage
Change the max. setting when the staples are buckled or paper folded is not enough.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Output Quantity Limit].
3. "Output Quantity Limit screen"
Enter the maximum number of sheets for each item with the numeric buttons and press [<<SET].
5.9.46 Curl Adjustment

(1) Function
Changes the pressure of the paper exit de-curler roller of the main body to adjust the paper curl amount.
(2) Usage
To set the setting to adjust the paper curl amount of the FS-612 and FS-531.
Conduct this adjustment when the paper leading edge buckling of the 1st folding or the misalignment of ejected paper because of the paper
curl occurs depending on the paper type while the tri-folding is selected.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Curl Adjustment].
3. "Curl Adjustment setting screen"
With the setting button of each item, select the pressure of the paper exit de-curler roller of the main body from "+2, +1, 0".
Note
The curling direction changes depending on the paper type, weight, humidification, and set direction in the tray. Therefore, be
sure to check the condition of ejected paper and adjust the setting.
See the following as the guide.
1. Face up paper exit
"Simplex (Tri-Fold 64-80 g/m2: Inside Print)":
When the leading edge of the 1st fold paper is buckled with the default "+2", set it to "+1" or "0".
"Simplex (Tri-Fold 81-105 g/m2: Inside Print)":
When the leading edge of the 1st fold paper is buckled with the default "0", set it to "+1" or "+2".
2. Face down paper exit
"Simplex (Except Tri-Fold Print Side=Front)":
Paper tends to be curled convexly When the convexly curled amount is too much on the main tray with the default "0",
set it to "+1" or "+2".
"Simplex (Print Side=Back)":
With the default "+2", paper tends to be curled concavely. When the concavely curled amount is too much on the main
tray, set it to "+1" or "0".
"Duplex":
I -187
When the concavely curled amount is too much on the main tray with the default "+1", set it "0". When the convexly
curled amount is too much, set it "+2".
5.9.47 Recall Standard Data

(1) Functions
Reset various setting values of the finisher adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the various change in the finisher adjustment items by CE.
Note
Adjustment data of "Stacker Adjustment (LS)", "Trimmer Receiver Adj. (SD)", "Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adj. (PK)", "Post
Inserter Tray Size (PI)", and "Output Quantity Limit (FS-531/FS-612)" are not restored.
(3) Procedure
Press [09/08 Recall Standard Data].
Note
conducted.
5.10 Firmware Version

(1) Usage
Display the firmware version of the main body and options.
Note
Confirm the need to enhance or not to enhance the security function with the administrator of this machine. If administrator
wants to enhance, check the firmware version number and the checksum value. Refer to J.3.1 Usage of the USB memory ISW
for the method of how to re-write the firmware. Refer to J.2.3.1 Firmware checksum check for the method of checking the
checksum value.
When the administrator wants to enhance the security, check that the firmware version of the image control I1 is the version
(A1DU0Y0-00I1-G00-10) which is certificated by ISO/IEC15408. If not, rewrite the firmware version to the certificated one.
When installing the machine or upgrading the firmware, confirm that the current firmware version of the machine is the same as
that identification number of the User Guide. If the identification number of the User's Guide is not the same, provide the
machine administrator with the User's Guide having the firmware version that corresponds to that of the machine.
[Image control] that is displayed on the touch panel represents the firmware version of the overall control board (OACB).
(2) Procedure
Press [08 Firmware Version].
2. "Firmware Version menu screen"
3. "Indication of Firmware Version screen"
Each firmware version is displayed.
5.11 CS Remote Care

5.11.1 Outline
The CS Remote Care is a system that manages the main body by sending and receiving various kinds of the management data of the main
body between the main body and the CS Remote Care center computer through the phone line, E-mail, or WebDAV server.
It enables the main body to call the center computer, and the center computer to inquire regularly the main body for various data.
The data handled by the CS Remote Care can be classified into the 3 following groups.
a. Data that allow you to grasp the use conditions of the main body, such as the total count and the PM count.
b. Data that give us the general information of when and how often an abnormality occurred with the main body.
c. All sorts of adjustment data
Note
When the security enhanced mode is set to ON, the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.
5.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using E-mail)

Note
Select one of main body NIC or IC-601 controller NIC to use. CSRC cannot be used for the IC-306/IC-307/413 controller NIC.
Pay attention to the mail account and the DIPSW setting when selecting NIC to be used or using E-mail CS Remote Care and the
mail remote notification system at the same time. For the detail, refer to "I.5.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care
and Mail remote notification system."
Conduct the settings of the mail address and the mail server to be used for E-mail system of CS Remote Care beforehand. The
setting methods differ depending on the used NIC as follows.
Controller NIC: [Utility Menu] [Administrator Setting] [Network Setting] [E-mail Initial Setting]. Or set from [E-mail Initial
Setting] on [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. (Refer to I.5.11.6 Mail initial setting (In the case of the main body NIC))
I -188
Controller NIC: Set [Utility Menu] [Administrator Setting] [Controller] [Controller NIC Setting] [CSRC Setting].
[CSRC Send]/[CSRC Receive]. (Refer to I.5.11.7 E-mail Initial Setting (In the case of controller NIC))
Conduct RAM clear for CS Remote Care first and then setup again when conducting the setup again for the main body that has
been done CS Remote Care setup once. (Refer to I.5.11.16 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care)
(1) When using E-mail (Duplex)

1. Device registration on CS Remote Care center
Pre-register the device with the application on the center side. (This step can be skipped when sending the initial connection mail from the
machine to the center.) After the initial connection, in this case, register the device at the center side.)
For the device registration method at the center side, refer to the user's guide on CS Remote Care center application.
2. I/O check mode, data collection clear valid
Set [03-6] to "On (1)" from [Service Mode] [System Setting] [Software DIPSW Setting].
3. CS Remote Care memory initialization
1. Press [Service Mode] [Machine Condition] [I/O Check Mode].
2. Enter "15" with numeric keys and confirm that "015-00" appears on the screen.
3. Press the [Access] button.
5. Press [Start] button and confirm that the output check display switches to "FIN".
4. CS Remote Care function ON
5. Select the NIC that is used for CSRC
1. Press [Service Mode] [System Setting] [Software DIPSW Setting] and enter [14-7].
2. Specify the NIC that is used.
On (1): Main body NIC
Off (0): Controller NIC
6. CS Remote Care system selection
Press [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [CS Remote Care] and then [E-mail].
7. Communication method selection
Press [Duplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
8. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
2. Enter the 7-digit serviceman ID with numeric keys and press [ID code] again.
9. Press [Detail Setting] to display [E-mail (Duplex) Setting Menu] screen.
10. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Center ID] and enter the center ID (5 digits).
The serial number that is input from [Service Mode] [System Setting] [Serial Number Setting] appears on [Device ID].
3. Press [Encrypt] to make a selection to decide whether it is encrypted or not. (Default: Use Encryptogram).
4. Press [OK].
11. Date and time setting for the CS Remote Care
1. Press [Date and Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Setting Time] to enter the year, month, day, and time.
Press [Set] to move the cursor among the year/month/day/hour/minute fields.
3. Press [Time Zone] to enter the time zone.
Press [ +/- ] to switch plus/minus of the time zone.
4. Press [OK].
12. Response Timeout Setting
1. Press [Response Timeout Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the response timeout (10 minute to 1440 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
3. Press [OK].
13. Turn on and off the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
14. Initial connection
Conduct the initial connection in one of the following steps.
Initial connection from the center side
Send the initial connection mail from the center side to the mail address of the machine. The initial connection completes when the
machine receives the initial connection mail.
Initial connection from the machine
Send the initial connection mail from the machine to the center. In this case, set the E-mail address of the center on the [E-mail
(Duplex) Setting Menu] [Basic Setting] [E-mail] and press [First Call]. In case the device pre-registration at the center side is
skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status by center receiving the initial connection mail. The initial connection is
completed when the device is registered at the center side.
Note
When the CS Remote Care related window is opened while receiving the initial connection mail from the center, the
information being created is destroyed and the CS Remote Care setting screen is displayed.
For the method of sending the initial connection mail from the center side, refer to the user's guide on CS Remote Care
center application.
Mail transmission is possible only between the center and the main body that the initial connection has been established.
After when the initial registration is done, the center mail address is displayed on [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care]
[CS Remote Care] [Detail Setting] [Basic Setting] [E-mail].
When the transmission error occurs against the center, check the error code that appears. (Refer to I.5.11.17 CS Remote
Care error code list)
(2) When using E-mail (Simplex (from machine to center))

Pre-register the device with the application on the center side. The pre-registration of the device at the center side can be skipped. After
the initial connection, in this case, register the device at the center side.)
I -189
Press [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [CS Remote Care] and then [E-mail].
Press [Simplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
8. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
9. Press [Detail Setting] to display [E-mail (Simplex) Setting Menu] screen.
10. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Press [E-mail] and enter the mail address of the center.
4. Press [Encrypt] to make a selection to decide whether it is encrypted or not. (Default: Use Encryptogram).
5. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date and Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
12. Regular send setting
1. Press [Periodical Transmission Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Set the regular send schedule to the center.
Every month: Send it regularly to the center on the same date. Sent date is set at the end of the month by [End of Month].
Every week: Send it regularly to the center on the same time and the same day of the week.
Every day: Send it regularly to the center on the same time everyday.
Reference:
To distribute the access to the center, the default time of the periodical transmission setting after the RAM clear is calculated from
the serial number.
3. Press [OK].
13. Fixed Date/Time Setting
1. Press [Fixed Date/Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the fixed date/time.
3. Press [OK].
14. Collecting Data Setting
1. Press [Collecting Data Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Select data to be collected.
Basic data
Account track data
Machine adjustment data
Coverage data
3. Press [OK].
16. Initial connection
1. Press [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [CS Remote Care] [Detail Setting] [Basic Setting].
2. Press [First Call] to send the initial connection mail to the center.
3. Once the mail sending completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the mail sending to the SMTP server
normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
4. The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection mail. In case the device pre-registration at the center
side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status by center receiving the initial connection mail. The initial connection is
completed when the device is registered at the center side.
Note
I -190
5.11.3 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using phone line modem)
Conduct the following procedure to set up when using phone line modem as CR Remote Care system.
Note
Use the Data modem of ITU-T V.34/V.32 bis/V.32 compliance, AT command compliance.
(1) When using the phone line modem

2. Modem connection
Turn off the power of the modem, connect the main body and the modem with a modem cable, and the modem and the wall outlet with a
modular cable.
For the connection of a modular cable, refer to the instructions of the modem to be used.
Press [Modem] on [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [CS Remote Care].
7. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
8. Press [Detail Setting] to display the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
9. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
3. Press [Center Telephone Number] to enter the center phone number.
Use [P], [T], [W], [-], and so on as needed.
4. Press [Machine Phone Number] to enter the machine phone number.
Use [P], [T], [W], [-], and so on as needed.
5. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
11. Modem initialization AT command entry
Note
Change the initialization AT command of the modem as needed. (Normally no need to change.)
For the detail of AT command, refer to the instruction of the modem used.
1. Press [AT command] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Press [Initial command] to enter AT command.
3. Press [OK].
12. DIPSW setting for the CS Remote Care
Note
Normally no need to change the setting, but conduct the setting as needed according to the connection environment.
1. Press [DIP-SW Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Specify DIP-SW as needed. (Refer to I.5.11.10 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care.)
14. First call execution
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Press [First Call] to start the initial transmission.
When the connection to the center completes successfully, the CS Remote Care setting screen appears.
When the transmission error occurs against the center, check the error code that appears. (Refer to I.5.11.17 CS Remote Care
error code list)
In case the device pre-registration at the center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status by center receiving
the initial call. The initial connection is completed when the device is registered at the center side.
5.11.4 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using WebDAV server)
Conduct the following procedure to set up when using http communication as CR Remote Care system.
Note
Select one of main body NIC or IC-601 controller NIC to use. CSRC cannot be used for the IC-306/IC-307/413 controller NIC.
I -191
Set the proxy beforehand when using http proxy server. The setting methods differ depending on the used NIC as follows.
Controller NIC: [Utility Menu] [Administrator Setting] [Network Setting] [http Communication Setting]. Or set from
[CSRC http Communication Setting] on [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. (Refer to I.5.11.8 http communication
setting (In the case of the main body NIC))
Controller NIC: Set [Utility Menu] [Administrator Setting] [Controller] [Controller NIC Setting] [CSRC Setting]. [http
Communication Setting]. (Refer to I.5.11.9 http Communication Setting (In the case of controller NIC))
(1) When using http (Duplex)

Press [http] on [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [CS Remote Care].
Press [Duplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
8. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
9. Press [Detail Setting] to display [http (Duplex) Setting Menu] screen.
10. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Press [Web Server] and enter the URL of the Web server (Less than 255 one-byte characters)
4. Press [Cryptogram] to make a selection to decide whether it is encrypted or not. (Default: Use Encryptogram).
5. Press [OK].
11. Heart Beat setting *1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press [Heart Beat Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
Press [Heart Beat Setting] to make a selection to decide whether the Heart Beat function is made valid or invalid. (Default: Enable)
Press [Heart Beat Interval] to enter the transmission interval of the Heart Beats (1 minute to 256 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
Press [Heart Beat Send] to make a selection to decide whether the fixed time transmission of the Heart Beat is made valid or invalid.
(Default: Enable)
5. Press [Heart Beat Fix Send Time] to enter the time for the Heart Beat transmission at the fixed time.
6. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
13. Turn on and off the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Once the initial call completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the initial connection file is stored in the Web
server normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection file. In case the device pre-registration at the
center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status. The initial connection is completed when the device is
registered at the center side.
Note
15. Turn OFF/ON the sub power switch of the main body (SW2).*2
*1 Heart Beat function is a function to notify that the machine being active by uploading the Heart Beat file to the registered Web server
periodically. Heart Beat file contains the information of the total counter and the status.
*2 The Heart Beart function does not work when SW2 of the main body is not turned OFF/ON after the First Call finishes.
I -192
(2) When using http (Simplex (from machine to center))

Press [http] on [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [CS Remote Care].
Press [Simplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
8. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
9. Press [Detail Setting] to display [http (Simplex) Setting Menu] screen.
10. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Press [Web Server] and enter the URL of the Web server (Less than 255 one-byte characters)
4. Press [Cryptogram] to make a selection to decide whether it is encrypted or not. (Default: Use Encryptogram).
5. Press [OK].
11. Heart Beat setting *1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press [Heart Beat Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
Press [Heart Beat Setting] to make a selection to decide whether the Heart Beat function is made valid or invalid. (Default: Enable)
Press [Heart Beat Interval] to enter the transmission interval of the Heart Beats (1 minute to 256 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
Press [Heart Beat Send] to make a selection to decide whether the fixed time transmission of the Heart Beat is made valid or invalid.
(Default: Enable)
5. Press [Heart Beat Fix Send Time] to enter the time for the Heart Beat transmission at the fixed time.
6. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
13. Regular send setting
1. Press [Periodical Transmission Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Set the regular send schedule to the center.
Every month: Send it regularly to the center on the same date. Sent date is set at the end of the month by [End of Month].
Every week: Send it regularly to the center on the same time and the same day of the week.
Every day: Send it regularly to the center on the same time everyday.
Reference:
To distribute the access to the center, the default time of the periodical transmission setting after the RAM clear is calculated from
the serial number.
3. Press [OK].
14. Fixed Date/Time Setting
1. Press [Fixed Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the fixed date/time.
3. Press [OK].
15. Collecting Data Setting
1. Press [Collecting Data Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Select data to be collected.
Basic data
Account track data
Machine adjustment data
Coverage data
3. Press [OK].
16. Turn on and off the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
I -193

3. Once the initial call completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the initial connection file is stored in the Web
server normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection file. In case the device pre-registration at the
center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status. The initial connection is completed when the device is
registered at the center side.
Note
18. Turn OFF/ON the sub power switch of the main body (SW2).*2
*1 Heart Beat function is a function to notify that the machine being active by uploading the Heart Beat file to the registered Web server
periodically. Heart Beat file contains the information of the total counter and the status.
*2 The Heart Beart function does not work when SW2 of the main body is not turned OFF/ON after the First Call finishes.
5.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system
To change a combination of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system, refer to this table to configure the DIPSW setting or
the mail account setting.
Case
Mail remote
notification
system
Notification
system
E-mail CS Remote
Care using the
machine NIC
E-mail used
CS Remote Care
E-mail CS Remote
Care using the
controller NIC
E-mail used
Setting item
"Use the mail remote notification

system" of the main body NIC Web
utility
1
"Service Mode - Software DIPSW": 14-7

(*2)

(*2)

(*2)

(*2)

(*2)
*1 Service Mode - Software DIPSW: 15-5 (CS Remote Care function ON, 0=OFF, 1=ON)
*2 Service Mode - Software DIPSW: 14-7 (NIC selection of E-mail CS Remote Care, 0=controller NIC, 1=main body NIC)
*3 Mail remote notification system and CS Remote Care using the main body NIC share the same mail account.
*4 Mail remote notification system and CS Remote Care using the controller NIC use separate mail accounts.
*5 Even when the mail remote notification system is not used, set it to "Yes" and conduct the mail initial setting.
5.11.6 Mail initial setting (In the case of the main body NIC)
I -194
OFF

(*1)
Set the mail address and the mail server for the machine NIC.
ON (*5)

(*1)

utility
(*4)
ON

(*1)

utility
(*3)
ON

(*1)

utility
Remark
ON

(*1)

utility
2
Set value
Note
E-mail initial setting can be set in the [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. For the detail of Web Utilities, refer to E.1.3.4
Initial setting.
1. Press the [Utility/Counter].
2. Press [Administrator Setting] [Network Setting] [E-mail Initial Setting].
3. Conduct the following settings.
[Use E-mail System]: Select [ON].
[Time Zone]: Set the time zone.
[Trans(SMTP) Mail Server]: Set the host name of the AMTP server or IP address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on
[Machine NIC Setting].
[SMTP port number]: Set the port number of the SMTP server.
[Trans Mail Server Timeout]: Set the timeout period (sec).
[New-arrival Check Interval]: Set the interval (min) for checking the new-arrivals.
[Receive mail server]: Set the IP address of the receiving mail server. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on [Machine
NIC Setting].
[Receive Mail Server Type]: Set the type of the receive mail server (POP3/IMAP).
[POP3/IMAP Port Number]: Set the port number of the receive mail server.
[Receive Mail Account]: Set the account name.
[Receive Mail Password]: Set the account password.
[E-mail Address for Machine]: Set the E-mail address for machine NIC.
[POP (IMAP) before SMTP Authentication]: Make a setting to decide whether the POP (IMAP) before SMTP Authentication is used.
[SSL Encryption of SMTP]: Set whether to encrypt the SMTP communication.
[SSL Encryption of POP (IMAP)]: Set whether to encrypt the POP (IMAP) communication.
4. Press [Test] and press [Yes] on the confirmation screen to conduct the sending and receiving test.
5. Press [OK].
5.11.7 E-mail Initial Setting (In the case of controller NIC)

Set the mail address and the mail server for the controller NIC.
2. Press [Administrator Setting] [Controller] [Controller NIC Setting] [CSRC Setting] [CSRC Send].
[CSRC Send]: Select [Enable].
[SMTP Server Address]: Select the address specifying method (IPv4/IPv6/host name) and press [SMTP Server Address] to set the
server address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on [TCP/IP Setting] in [Controller NIC Setting].
[Port Number]: Set the port number of the SMTP server.
[Administrator From Address]: Set the E-mail address for the controller NIC used for CSRC.
[Connection Timeout]: Set the time-out period (sec).
[Authentication Setting]: Set the enable/disable of POP before SMTP or SMTP Authentication.
[POP before SMTP Time]: Set the time period from connecting to the POP server with the POP before SMTP Authentication to
connecting to the SMTP server.
4. Press [Next] to conduct the following settings.
[SMTP Authentication Setting]: Set the User ID, Password, and realm for the SMTP Authentication.
5. Press [CSRC Receive Setting] on [CSRC Setting] screen to conduct the following settings.
[CSRC Receive Setting]: When using E-mail duplex, select [Enable].
[POP Server Address]: Select the address specifying method (IPv4/IPv6/host name) and press [POP Server Address] to set the server
address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on [TCP/IP Setting] in [Controller NIC Setting].
[Login Name]: Set the account name.
[Password]: Set the account password.
[APOP Authentication]: Set the enable/disable of APOP Authentication.
[Port Number]: Set the port number of the POP server.
[Connection Timeout]: Set the time-out period (sec).
[Auto Receive Check]: Select [Enable] normally. Select [Disable] to stop the auto receive check temporally when the POP server is
down and so on. When [Disable] is selected, the mail cannot be received manually.
[Polling Interval]: Set the polling interval (min).
6. Press [CSRC Communication Test] on [CSRC Setting] screen to conduct the test.
7. Press [OK].
5.11.8 http communication setting (In the case of the main body NIC)
Set the following settings when using http proxy server.
Note
http communication setting can be set in the [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. For the detail of Web Utilities, refer to E.
1.3.4 Initial setting.
2. Press [Administrator Setting] [Network Setting] [http Communication Setting].
[Enable Proxy Server]: Select [ON].
[Proxy Server Address]: Set the host name of the proxy server or IP address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on
[Machine NIC Setting].
When the proxy server authentication is required, follow the procedures below.
(Ex.) When the proxy server name: www.example.com, user name: user and password: password, enter
"user:password@www.example.com."
Proxy Server Port: Set the port number of the proxy server.
[Enable SSL]: Set whether to use SLL or not.
[Enable Authentication]: Set whether to use the Web server authentication or not.
[Authentication User Name]: Set the user name of the Web Server authentication.
[Authentication Password]: Set the password of the Web Server authentication.
I -195
4. Press [OK].
5.11.9 http Communication Setting (In the case of controller NIC)

Set the following settings when using http proxy server.
2. Press [Administrator Setting] [Controller] [ControllerSetSet] [http Communication Setting].
[Proxy Server Setting]: Select [Enable].
[Proxy Server Address]: Select the address specifying method (IPv4/IPv6/host name) and press [Proxy Server Address] to set the
server address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on [TCP/IP Setting] in [Controller NIC Setting].
When the proxy server authentication is needed, set as following.
(Example) In the case of Proxy Server Name: www.example.com, User Name: user, Password: password, enter
"user:password@www.example.com".
[Proxy Server Port Number]: Set the port number of the proxy server.
[SSL Setting]: Set the enable/disable of SSL Encryption.
[Enable Authentication]: Set whether to use Web Server authentication or not.
[Authentication User Name]: Set the user name of the Web Server authentication.
[Authentication Password]: Set the password of the Web Server authentication.
4. Press [OK].
5.11.10 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care

Note
DIPSW bits data are written into the NVRAM board (NRB) every time a change is made. In case you changed bit data by accident,
be sure to restore the previous state.
Input procedure
2. Press [CS Remote Care] [CS Remote Care] on [Service Mode menu] screen.
3. Press [ID Code] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
5. Press [Detail setting].
6. Press [Software DIPSW Setting] on the Utility menu screen.
7. Select the DIPSW number on "Software DIPSW Setting."
Use the left arrow key or the numeric keys.
8. Select the DIPSW bit number.
Use the left arrow key or the numeric keys.
9. Select [ON (1)] or [OFF (0)].
10. Press [Return] to return to the "Setting menu screen."
Note
About functions of each switch, refer to I.5.11.11 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care.
5.11.11 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Dial mode
Inch
Metric
0: Pulse dial
1: Tone dial
Modem reception
0: Receive (Issue ATA by RING

delivery)
1: Not receive (Not issue ATA
by RING delivery)
Reservation
0: 1: -
Baud rate
1200bps: 01-7=0, 01-6=0,

01-5=1, 01-4=1
2400bps: 01-7=0, 01-6=1,
01-5=0, 01-4=0
4800bps: 01-7=0, 01-6=1,
01-5=0, 01-4=1
9600bps: 01-7=0, 01-6=1,
01-5=1, 01-4=0
19200bps: 01-7=0, 01-6=1,
01-5=1, 01-4=1
38400bps: 01-7=1, 01-6=0,
01-5=0, 01-4=0
57600bps: 01-7=1, 01-6=0,
01-5=0, 01-4=1
0: OFF
1: ON
5
6
7
Default setting
Japan
3
4
Set value
Auto call on SC occurrence
Auto call on date specification
Auto call on the part replacement
Auto call on the drum replacement
Auto call on the periodic maintenance (PM)
I -196

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Set value
Inch
Metric
ORU-M start/finish notification
0: Not notify
1: Notify
Reservation
0: 1: -
Automatic calling when reset fixed replacement

parts
0: OFF
1: ON
Reservation
0: 1: -
Auto call on the toner supply
Auto call on frequent JAM occurrence
0: OFF
1: ON
Notification of waste toner box full
Call on fusing cleaning web count over
Call on Toner collection filter count over
Call on fusing external heating count over
Reservation
0: 1: -
CS Remote Care communication mode
Reservation
0: OFF
1: ON
Data modem: 04-1=0, 04-0=0

FAX (not used): 04-1=0, 04-0=1
E-mail: 04-1=1, 04-0=0
http: 04-1=1, 04-0=1
0: 1: -
1 minute: 05-3=0, 05-2=0,

05-1=0, 05-0=1
2 minutes: 05-3=0, 05-2=0,
05-1=1, 05-0=0
3 minutes: 05-3=0, 05-2=0,
05-1=1, 05-0=1
4 minutes: 05-3=0, 05-2=1,
05-1=0, 05-0=0
5 minutes: 05-3=0, 05-2=1,
05-1=0, 05-0=1
6 minutes: 05-3=0, 05-2=1,
05-1=1, 05-0=0
7 minutes: 05-3=0, 05-2=1,
05-1=1, 05-0=1
8 minutes: 05-3=1, 05-2=0,
05-1=0, 05-0=0
9 minutes: 05-3=1, 05-2=0,
05-1=0, 05-0=1
10 minutes: 05-3=1, 05-2=0,
05-1=1, 05-0=0
0: 1: -
Modem redial interval
2
3
Reservation
5
6
7
0
Modem redial times
1
2
Japan
Default setting
0 to 9: 000 0000 to 000 1001

10: 000 1010
11 to 99: 000 1011 to 110 0011
Reservation
0: 1: -
Redial for response time out
0: Not redial
1: Redial
Reservation
0: 1: -
2
3
I -197

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Set value
Inch
Metric
0 minute: 08-3=0, 08-2=0,

08-1=0, 08-0=0
10 minutes: 08-3=0, 08-2=0,
08-1=0, 08-0=1
20 minutes: 08-3=0, 08-2=0,
08-1=1, 08-0=0
30 minutes: 08-3=0, 08-2=0,
08-1=1, 08-0=1
40 minutes: 08-3=0, 08-2=1,
08-1=0, 08-0=0
50 minutes: 08-3=0, 08-2=1,
08-1=0, 08-0=1
60 minutes: 08-3=0, 08-2=1,
08-1=1, 08-0=0
70 minutes: 08-3=0, 08-2=1,
08-1=1, 08-0=1
80 minutes: 08-3=1, 08-2=0,
08-1=0, 08-0=0
90 minutes: 08-3=1, 08-2=0,
08-1=0, 08-0=1
100 minutes: 08-3=1, 08-2=0,
08-1=1, 08-0=0
110 minutes: 08-3=1, 08-2=0,
08-1=1, 08-0=1
120 minutes: 08-3=1, 08-2=1,
08-1=0, 08-0=0
0: 1: -
Retransmission interval on E-mail delivery error
1
2
3
Reservation
6
7
9
Retransmission times on E-mail delivery error
1
2
0 to 9: 000 0000 to 000 1001

10: 000 1010
11 to 99: 000 1011 to 110 0011
10
Reservation
0: 1: -
Time zone setting
-12 to -1: 1111 0100 to 1111

1111
0: 0000 0000
1 to 12: 0000 0001 to 0001100
1
2
11
0
1
Timer 1
RING receive CONNECT receive
2
3
0 to 31sec: 0000 0000 to 0001

1111
32sec: 0010 0000
33 to 255sec: 0010 0001 to
1111 1111
7
12
Default setting
Japan
0
1
2
3
Timer 2
Dial calling complete CONNECT receive
0 to 63sec: 0000 0000 to 0011

1111
64sec: 0100 0000
65 to 255sec: 0100 0001 to
1111 1111
I -198

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Set value
Inch
Metric
7
13
0
1
14
Timer 3
Not used
0: 1: -
Timer 4
Connection Start request telegram delivery
0 to 31 (x 100msec): 0000 0000

to 0001 1111
32 (x 100msec): 0010 0000
33 to 255 (x 100msec): 0010
0001 to 1111 1111
0
1
Timer 5
Wait time for the response from other side
0 to 29sec: 0000 0000 to 0001

1101
30sec: 0001 1110
31 to 255sec: 0001 1111 to
1111 1111
2
3
0
1
Retry data, timer 6

Initialization OK Dial request
0 to 254 (x 5msec): 0000 0000

to 1111 1110
255 (x 5msec): 1111 1111
Call on frequent JAM occurrence (main body)

Number of enabled copy
3000 copies: 17-1=0, 17-0=0

6000 copies: 17-1=0, 17-0=1
9000 copies: 17-1=1, 17-0=0
12000 copies: 17-1=1, 17-0=1
Call on frequent JAM occurrence (ADF)

Number of enabled original feed
600 copies : 17-3=0, 17-2=0

1200 copies : 17-3=0, 17-2=1
1800 copies : 17-3=1, 17-2=0
2400 copies : 17-3=1, 17-2=1
Call on frequent JAM occurrence (main body)

MCBJ setting
500: 17-5=0, 17-4=0

1000: 17-5=0, 17-4=1
2000: 17-5=1, 17-4=0
3000: 17-5=1, 17-4=1
Call on frequent JAM occurrence (ADF)

MOBJ setting
100: 17-7=0, 17-6=0

200: 17-7=0, 17-6=1
400: 17-7=1, 17-6=0
600: 17-7=1, 17-6=1
Attention display
0: OFF
1: ON
Reservation
0: 1: -
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
18
0
0
17
0
0
16
0
0
15
Default setting
Japan
I -199

DIPSW
Bit
19
E-mail/http communication mode
Reservation
Function
Set value
Inch
Metric
0: Duplex
1: Simplex
0: 1: -
20
http Heart Beat function
0: ON
1: OFF
http Heart Beat Fix send
0: Off
1: ON
Reservation
0: 1: -
3
4
21
Auto sending of the JAM history when call on

frequent JAM occurrence occurs
Sending frequent paper JAM alert
Sending frequent original JAM alert
Threshold of sending frequent paper JAM alert
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
22
Threshold of sending frequent original JAM alert
1
2
3
4
23
0
1
24
25
Default setting
Japan
Reservation
0: OFF
1: ON
00000001: Once
00000010: Twice
00000011: 3 times
00000100: 4 times
00000101: 5 times
00000110: 6 times
00000111: 7 times
00001000: 8 times
00001001: 9 times
00001010: 10 times
00001011: 11 times
00001100: 12 times
00001101: 13 times
00001110: 14 times
00001111: 15 times
Other: Invalid (regarded as 5
times)
0: 1: -
I -200

DIPSW
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Bit
Function
Set value
Default setting
Japan
Inch
Metric
I -201

DIPSW
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Bit
Function
Set value
Default setting
Japan
Inch
Metric
I -202

DIPSW
Bit
40
Function
Set value
Default setting
Japan
Inch
Metric
5.11.12 Setup confirmation

3. Make sure that only selected item "E-Mail", "Modem", or "http" is displayed on the "CS Remote Care setting screen".
5.11.13 Maintenance call

As the CE starts the maintenance, enter the ID code of CE (7-digit number with which each CE is identified, managed by a distributor.) to notify
the center the start of maintenance. After the maintenance, pressing [Maintenance Comp] notifies the center the completion of maintenance.
At the start of maintenance

* During the maintenance, [Start] button blinks until the completion of the maintenance.
At the end of maintenance

3. Press [Maintenance Comp] on the "CS Remote Care setting screen."
5.11.14 Center call from administrator

If the setup of CS Remote Care is completed, the manager can call the center of CS Remote Care.
1. Press [Utility/Counter] button.
2. Press [Administrator Setting] [System Connection] [Administrator Call] on [Utility] screen.
3. Press [Start] on [Administrator Call] screen.
If the setup is not completed, or if other call is made, [Start] is grayed out, disabling to make a call.
About how to call the center and send various data of the main body on the specified date and time, refer to the manual of CS Remote Care
center.
5.11.15 Confirm communication log

You can output and confirm the communication log.
2. Press [List Output] on the "Service Mode menu" screen.
3. Press [Communication Log List] on the "List Output screen."
5. Press start button to output the selected list.
For details of the log, refer to "I.5.12 List Output."
5.11.16 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care

Initializing the RAM for CS Remote Care enables you to perform the setup again.
5. Press [Detail setting].
6. Press [RAM Clear] button on Utility screen.
7. Press [Execute] on "RAM Clear Setting" screen.
8. Press [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
9. The RAM is cleared, and the "CS Remote Care setting screen" is displayed.
10. Perform the setup again if necessary.
5.11.17 CS Remote Care error code list

Classificatio
n
Connection
via modem
Error Code
K-0000
Description
Troubleshooting procedure
Connection NG (Cannot connect from the Redial.

modem, timed out).
I -203

Classificatio
n
Error Code
Description
K-0001
Error code that may occur when a

Redial and wait for re-reception.
transmission is made from the main body
to the center.
No response (After connection, no start
telegram from the center detected).
K-0002
Copying. Could not be written in nonvolatile memory, and line disconnected.
K-0003

Confirm the center ID.
to the center.
Center ID mismatch.
K-0004
Serial number mismatch.
K-0005

Redial.
to the center.
Syntax error (when receiving undefined
commands or parameters)
K-0006
Received a write order for an unwritable

item.
K-0007
Unread item error.
K-0008

Redial.
to the center.
Signal reception time out after a
response detection (after the start
telegram shuttled).
K-0009

to the center.
Already registered serial number.
K-0010

Redial.
to the center.
Communication error occurred because
of the carrier OFF (NO CARRIER
detected in the modem).
K-0011

to the center.
Dial tone (NO DIALTONE) detected in
the modem.
K-0012

to the center.
Busy signal (BUSY) detected in the
modem.
K-0013

to the center.
NO ANSWER detected in the modem.
K-0014

Retry standard times, and redial.
to the center.
Telegram error (irregular telegram
received in response to the telegram you
sent).
K-0015
Serial number not registered in the center

(4 x 40 telegrams received).
K-0016
Redial.
to the center.
Errors not defined in K-0000 to 0015.
K-0017

to the center.
Telephone number you must call was not
registered.
Confirm the serial number.
I -204

Classificatio
n
Connection
via E-mail/
http
Error Code
Description
K-0100

to the center.
DSR turned OFF or remains turned OFF.
K-0101
Error on creating a message queue.
K-0102
Error on generating a task.
K-0103

to the center.
Error on sending a message.
K-0104

to the center.
Error on receiving a message.
K-0105

to the center.
Received an error (NG) from the timer
task.
K-0201

to the center.
Modem initialization NG.
K-0300

to the center.
Center call evacuation buffer is full.
Cannot evacuate any more.
K-0590
Because of (E-mail/http) memory

shortage, unable to secure enough area
for sending a mail.
K-0592
(E-mail/http) Controller in operation:

unable to send a mail because the
controller is in operation.
In the manual transmission, retry when the controller is idling. In the

auto transmission, an automatic retry is performed after 1minute.
K-0593
Sending error:
(E-mail) Error comes back from the mail
server.
(http) Storing mail to Web server fails.
In the auto transmission, an automatic retry is performed after the

specified time. Check if there is no fault in the network environment
and the network settings.
K-0594
(E-mail/http) Machine in operation:

machine is in operation.
In the manual transmission, retry when the machine is idling. In the

auto transmission, an automatic retry is performed after 1minute.
K-0595
(E-mail/http) Controller not connected:

controller is not connected.
Check the connection between the controller and the main body.
K-0596
(E-mail/http) Controller-driven SC: unable If there is the controller-driven SC, a mail cannot be sent through the
to send a mail because of a controllercontroller. Use a telephone. This error does not occur with the main
driven SC (49-xx).
body NIC.
K-0597
(E-mail/http) No reply from controller
K-0600
(http) Fails to make the directory on Web

server
5.11.18 TROUBLESHOOTING
Check the followings when the main body does not receive the initial connection mail or does not return a response.
1. The center ID or the machine ID are not set in the main body.
2. The center ID or the machine ID are different (A machine ID error is not returned at the initial connection).
3. CS Remote Care function is disabled, or the phone line is selected in the CS Remote Care function selection.
4. Communication between the main body and the mail server is not proper (Check it with a transmission test).
5.12 List Output

(1) Usage
Output various lists.
(2) Procedure
Press [10 List Output].
2. "List Output screen"
The list output mode menu includes the following items.
I -205

Coverage data list
Parameter List
Font Pattern
Communication Log List *1
Maintenance History
Memory Dump List
Note
When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, the Font Pattern, Communication Log List and Memory Dump List are displayed.
When setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, the Maintenance History and ORU-M Maintenance History are displayed.
Do not use the parameter list and the memory dump list in the field because they are for development.
When outputting to the USB memory, press [Output All to USB].
4. [USB Memory Connection screen]
Connect the USB memory to the service port and press [OK].
Note
The following data are stored; Counter List, Mode Memory List, User Management List, Use Management List, Audit Log
Report, Machine Management List, Adjustment Data List, Coverage Data List and Maintenance History.
When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, the Parameter List and the Communication Log List are also stored.
When setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, the ORU-M Maintenance History is also stored.
File Type
tab-delimited text file
Save directory
Root directory
File naming convention
listprint<Machine code> + <Destination code> + <Serial No.>_<YMD>_<Time>.txt
Example:
listprint505A000123456_20100107_1010.txt
To print on paper, press [Print Mode].
Press [Print Mode].
7. Press the Start key to output the selected list.
To output other lists, repeat steps 2 to 8.
*1 Prints out the latest 30 items of the sending and receiving history of the CS Remote Care. The start time of communications, the time
period of communications (modem only), the communication modes, the results of communications, and the senders (mail only) are printed.
The communication modes and the results of communications are displayed in the numbers of 4 digit number. For the meaning of them, refer
to the following table.
Communication mode
Results of communication
0000
Transmitted successfully
0001
Initial transmission
Connection time out when

transmitting
0002
Emergency transmission
0004
Emergency recovery transmission
Received successfully
0005
Reception failed
0008
Transmission for warning
0010
Warning recovery transmission
0020
Maintenance start transmission
0040
Maintenance completion
transmission
0080
Administrator transmission
0100
Fixed date transmission
0200
Response transmission
0***
Transmission failed
1000
Enquiry
2000
Data rewrite
4000
Response reception
8000
Test mail
The SMTP reply codes (200 to 554) prescribed in the RFC1846, 2554 and 2821 are displayed in this place of ***.
I -206
5.13 Test Mode

5.13.1 Running Test Mode
(1) Usage
Conduct a test while in the continuous print operation.
In this mode, the following items can be selected:
Intermittent copy
After completion of the printing operation for the set print count, the machine changes into the ready state and waits for 0.5sec. before
resuming the same operation.
Paperless running mode
Without feeding paper and detecting paper or jam, the printing operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal operation.
In the same manner as the intermittent copy, after completion of the printing operation for the set print count, the machine changes into
the ready state and waits for 0.5sec. before resuming the same operation.
Paperless Mode
In the same manner as the paperless mode, without detecting paper or jam, the printing operation is made nearly at the same timing as
the normal operation.
Paperless endless mode
The machine operates with the print count infinitely set automatically. In the same manner as the paperless mode, without feeding paper
and detecting paper or jam, the printing operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal operation.
Running Mode
The printing operation is made in the paperless endless mode plus the scanning operation and the auto paper feed tray switching.
(2) Procedure
Press [11 Test Mode].
2. "Test Mode menu screen"
Select the mode to be adjusted and press [Print Mode].
3. Press the Start button to start the running test.
4. Press the STOP button to stop the running test.
5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode

(1) Usage
Output various test patterns to use them for troubleshooting.
Note
Do not use any test pattern number not described in the service manual.
(2) Procedure
Press [11 Test Mode].
2. "Test Mode menu screen"
Press [02 Test Pattern Output Mode ].
3. "Test Pattern screen"
Press any of the keys [Test Pattern], [Gradation-Y], [Gradation-M], [Gradation-C] or [Gradation-K]. Enter the test pattern number to output
through the numeric buttons and then press [SET].
When selecting the screen, press any of the keys [Line1], [Line2], [Dot1], [Dot2], [Stochastic] or [Contone].
When specifying arbitrary density, press [SET] and proceed to step 4. In other cases, proceed to step 6.
4. "Density Setting Display screen"
Specify the coverage or the background density.
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting Range
Coverage-Y/M/C/K: 0% (low) to 100% (high)
Background-Y/M/C/K: 0 (light) to 255 (dark)
5. Press [Return].
7. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern.
8. To output another test pattern, press [Exit PrintMode] and repeat steps 3 to 7.
5.13.3 Test Pattern No.11 Beam check

(1) [Check item 1]
Check the solid black pattern to see if there is uneven density found in the main scan and sub scan directions.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, developing unit, intermediate transfer unit, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof glass
(2) [Check item 2]

Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern at the leading/trailing edge of the test pattern in the sub scan
direction.
[Recommended checkpoints]: 2nd transfer unit
I -207
(3) Test pattern
[1]
[2]
8050fs1020
[1]
Solid black pattern
[2]
Gradation pattern
5.13.4 Test Pattern No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern

(1) [Check item]
Judge from this test pattern whether the scanner system or the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include main scan magnification, sub scan magnification, image skew, and leading edge timing of the printer
system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
(2) Test pattern

[1]
31mm
20mm
237mm
205.7mm
28
0m
190mm
[1]
190mm
0m
28
190mm
[1]
8050fs1021
Storage of image data
5.13.5 Test Pattern No.40 Image skew check pattern (Full-bleed print of Test Pattern No.16)
(1) [Purpose]
The pattern is printed 1mm over of the rear edge in the sub scan direction and the both side edges in the main scan direction. It is
effective to check the image skew.
Note
The printable range in the main scan direction is 299mm, therefore the 297mm or shorter paper in the main scan direction can
be used for this Test Pattern.
I -208
(2) Test pattern
5.13.6 Test Pattern No.49 RU color sensor gamma correction (Output paper density adjustment chart i1-iSis/i1-Pro)
(1) [Purpose]
Used by "Output Paper Density Adj." in the user's mode.
A test pattern used for registering the paper category in "Output Paper Density Adj.."
Note
This test pattern has 3 sizes.
(2) Test pattern
5.13.7 Test Pattern No.51 Gradation evaluation pattern (Main scan)

(1) [Check item]
If there are image stripes or the uneven density, check if the write system or the process system operates normally.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, charging corona, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof glass
I -209
(2) Test pattern
a03uf3c002ca
5.13.8 Test Pattern No.52 Gradation evaluation pattern (Sub scan)

(1) [Check item]
If there are image stripes or the uneven density, check if the write system or the process system operates normally.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, charging corona, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof glass
(2) Test pattern
a03uf3c003ca
5.13.9 Test Pattern No.53 Overall halftone

(1) [Check item]
Check the image quality of each screen. (No.1 can print only with Contone)
When density is set to 70 (halftone)
If there are image stripes, determine whether the fault is with the write system or the process system.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, intermediate transfer unit, charging corona, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof
glass
When the density is set to 0 (white)
If image fogging occurs,check whether the printer system operates normally.
Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona and high voltage contact.
When the density is set to 255 (Y, M, C, K)
If the density is light check whether the printer system operates normally.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit
*Refer to "I.5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode" for adjusting density.
I -210
(2) Test pattern
8050fs1019
[1]
When the density is set to 70
[3]
[2]
5.13.10 Test Pattern No.54 Gradation evaluation pattern

(1) [Purpose]
Check gradation reproducibility of each screen.
For details on procedures to select screens, refer to "I.5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode"
Screen
Purpose
Check item
Line1
Check the gradation reproducibility of each screen used

by the copier from primary color to secondary color.
Make sure that the gradation of each color is smooth and

even with no tone jump.
[Recommended checkpoint]: Conduct Printer Gamma
Sensor Adj. and Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
Check the gradation reproducibility of the screen used in

the character area when the screen mentioned above is
selected by the copier.
Make sure that the density increases in incremental step

from the high light side, and the density in the shadow
section of each color is dark enough.
Sensor Adj.
Line2
Dot1
Dot2
Stochastic
Contone
(2) Test pattern

[2]
[1]
a03uf3c004ca
[1]
Primary color
[2]
I -211
Secondary color
5.13.11 Test Pattern No.55 5% coverage

(1) [Purpose]
When making test prints continuously in order to check the paper feed performance or etc., use this 5% coverage test pattern to protect
developer, drums, cleaners etc. from burden.
(2) Test pattern
a03uf3c005ca
5.13.12 Test Pattern No.58 Stripe check pattern

(1) [Usage]
Use to locate the causes of sub-scan direction stripes which occur on the image.
(2) [Checking procedure]

1.
2.
3.
4.
Select [Test Pattern] and set the density of each color M, C and K to "120".
Select [Dot1] for screen.
Press [Print Mode] and set a sheet of A3 or 11 x 17 paper.
Check whether the sub-scan direction stripes occur on area [1] or [2].
(3) [Recommended checkpoints]

In the case of [1] : Intermediate transfer unit, 2nd transfer roller /Lw
In the case of [2] : Drum cartridge
(4) Test pattern
[2]
[1]
a03uf3c034ca
5.13.13 Test Pattern No.62 Uneven density check pattern

(1) [Usage]
After the periodic maintenance, check uneven density and density difference between right and left side by each gradation of YMCK, RBG
and process Bk.
Check uneven density with both edges [1] and [2] of Y, M, C and process Bk.
(2) [Checking procedure]

1. Select [Test Pattern] and set the density of each color M, C and K to "255".
2. Select [Dot1] (default of controller) and [Line1] (default of copier) for screen.
3. Press [Print Mode] and set 8 sheets of A4 or 8 1/ x 11 paper.
2
I -212
(3) [Recommended checkpoints]

Charging corona, write unit
(4) Test pattern

[1]
[2]
a03uf3c035ca
5.13.14 Test Pattern No.75 Density correction pattern i1-iSis XL

(1) [Purpose]
A test pattern output by the density balance adjustment chart of the user's mode.
(2) Test pattern
5.13.15 Test Pattern No.76 Density correction pattern i1-Pro (Type1/Type2)

(1) [Purpose]
A test pattern output by the density balance adjustment chart of the user's mode.
(2) Test pattern

Type1
I -213
Type2
5.13.16 Test Pattern No.77 Density correction pattern Manual

(1) [Purpose]
A test pattern output by "Output Paper Density Manual Adj." in the user's mode.
I -214
(2) Test pattern
5.13.17 Test Pattern No.80 Print peculiarity evaluation pattern

(1) [Purpose]
Check gradation reproducibility of each screen.
For details on procedures to select screens, refer to "I.5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode".
Screen
Purpose
Check item
Line1
Check the gradation reproducibility of each screen used

by the copier from primary color to tertiary color.
Make sure that the gradation of each color is smooth and

even with no tone jump.
Sensor Adj. and Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
Check the gradation reproducibility of the screen used in

the character area when the screen mentioned above is
selected by the copier.
Make sure that the density increases in incremental step

from the high light side, and the density in the shadow
section of each color is dark enough.
Sensor Adj.
Line2
Dot1
Dot2
Stochastic
Contone
(2) Test pattern

a
b
c
a
b
c
a03uf3c024ca
A: Primary color
B: Secondary color
C: Tertiary color
5.13.18 Test Pattern No.88 Chart file output

(1) Usage
Prints a chart (TIFF image) stored in the USB media.
Note
USB media stands for USB memory or USB HDD.
Only USB media in FAT32 format is supported.
The service port is designed for low-power devices. When using a high-power device such as HDD, connect the external power
source to the device.
I -215
(2) Preparation:
1. Set the service port device setting to [ON].
(3) How to use

When using this function, contact the service manager of the authorized distributor to confirm its handling.
5.14 Setting Data

5.14.1 Load from external memory
(1) Outline
Stores each setting information stored in NVRAM board (NRB) from the machine to the USB memory and writes it from the USB memory to
the machine. However, the setting data cannot be edited since it is encrypted.
(a) Setting information which is able to store/write

Data items
Data content
Paper setting data
Tray setting
Paper Setting Register/
Delete
Register/Delete custom
size
Utility data
Utility
Software DIPSW setting data
Software DIPSW
CSRC setting data
CSRC setting
(2) Preparation:
Connect the USB memory to the main body connection port.
(3) Procedure
Press [13 Setting Data].
2. "Setting Data menu screen"
Press [01 Read from external memory].
Note
If the USB memory is not connected to the connection port, the error message appears not to go on to the file selection
screen.
3. "Setting Data Scan File Selection screen"
Press [Next] or [Back] to select the file to be read and press [OK].
Note
By pressing [Limit], only the file corresponded to the serial number of the machine appears.
4. "Setting Data Scan Item Selection screen"
Select the data to be read from [Paper Setting Data]/[Utility data]/[Software DIPSW Setting Data]/[CSRC Setting Data] and press [Start
Reading].
5. "Pop-up screen"
Press [Yes] to start reading the setting data.
I -216
Note
Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) until the reading file completes.
6. "Setting Data Scan Complete screen"
To read another setting data, press [Continue]. To finish the procedure, press [Exit].
Note
By pressing [Exit], the machine restarts automatically.
5.14.2 Store to external memory

(1) Functions
Store the setting data from NRB to the USB memory.
(2) Preparation:
Connect the USB memory to the main body connection port.
(3) Procedure
Press [13 Setting Data].
2. "Setting Data menu screen"
Press [02 Store to external memory].
3. "Setting Data Start to Store screen"
Press [Start Storing].
Note
Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) until the storing file completes.
4. "Setting Data Store Complete screen"
Press [OK], to go back to "Setting Data <Store to external memory> screen".
(4) Folder structure of USB memory

When storing data to the USB memory and the folder is not created, it creates the next folder automatically.
C7000
NOVRAM
(5) Error list

If the error occurs for reading from the external memory or for storing to the external memory, the error message appears. Confirm the
following contents and the causes when the error message appears.
Message
Cause of occurrence
Connection of an external memory device

cannot be recognized.
1) The initialization of the USB device is not completed.
It cannot store to the external memory device.
3) Prohibit to write to the USB memory
2) The USB memory is not connected to the connection port.

4) Capacity shortage of the USB memory
5) Unable to execute the compression from the binary data to
the ZLIB compressed data.
6) Unable to encrypt AES.
It cannot read from the external memory

device.
7) Data error on the header (2nd line)

8) Checksum abnormality
9) Unable to execute the replacement from the BASE64 data
to the AES encrypt data.
10) Unable to execute the compounding of AES.
11) Unable to execute the extension from the ZLIB
compressed data to the binary data.
5.15
Log Store
5.15.1 Log Store Setting

(1) Usage
Set the log storing method for troubleshooting.
(2) Procedure
Press [14 Log Store].
2. "Log Store menu screen"
Press [01 Log Store Setting].
3. "Log Store Setting screen"
Set each item.
I -217
"Store To"
Press [USB Memory] or [HDD].
Note
The "Service Port Device" must be set to [ON] in the utility mode of the "User Setting-System Setting-Service Port
Device Setting", or the USB memory cannot be used.
When DIPSW2-0: 0 or DIPSW18-7: 1, the storage to HDD is not available.
"Encryption Password" setting
Note
When [USB Memory] is selected on "Store To", only [ON] can be selected for "Encryption Password".
1. Press [ON].
2. "Encryption Password Input screen"
Input the password and press [OK].
Note
The default password is "0000".
Input the password within 16-digit.
"Auto Log Store"
When "Auto Log Store" is set to "ON", the log is automatically stored when SC (except for HDD related SC) occurs.
Note
File name rule
With the file name created from the date, time, and SC number, the log is stored (encrypt zip) in the Log directory.
Example:
/Log/201001070925SC_48_50.zip
100 logs can be stored at the maximum. Be sure to clear the log file when the number exceeds 100. (Refer to I.5.15.2
Execute Log Storing)
When "USB Memory" is selected on "Store To" and the USB memory is not connected to the service port, the log is not
stored automatically.
"Manual Log Store"
When "Manual Log Store" is set to "ON", the log can be stored manually by I.5.15.2 Execute Log Storing.
Note
When "Manual Log Store" is set to [ON], [Log Store] button is displayed on "System Information" screen of Utility. User can collect
the log with this button.
5.15.2 Execute Log Storing

(1) Usage
Store the log for trouble shooting manually.
Note
The "Service Port Device" must be set to [ON] in the utility mode of the "User Setting-System Setting-Service Port Device
Setting", or the USB memory cannot be used.
When DIPSW2-0: 0 or DIPSW18-7: 1, the storage to HDD is not available.
100 logs can be stored at the maximum. Be sure to clear the log file when the number exceeds 100.
With the file name created from the date and time, the log is stored (encrypt zip) in the Log directory.
(2) Procedure
Press [14 Log Store].
2. "Log Store menu screen"
Press [02 Execute Log Storing].
3. "Execute Log Storing screen"
The operation differs depending on the "Store To" setting in I.5.15.1 Log Store Setting.
When USB memory is set as destination to which log is stored
[Manual Log Store]: Stores the log in the USB memory.
1. Press [Manual Log Store].
[Transfer to USB Memory]: Cannot be selected.
[Clear Log File]: Clears the log in the USB memory.
1. Press [Clear Log File].
When HDD is set as destination to which log is stored
[Manual Log Store]: Stores the log in HDD.
1. Press [Manual Log Store].
[Transfer to USB Memory]:
Transfers the log stored in the HDD to the route directory of the USB memory.
1. Press [Transfer to USB Memory].
[Clear Log File]: Clears the log in the HDD.
1. Press [Clear Log File].
2. "Clear Log File screen"
Press [OK].
I -218
5.16 ORU-M Setting

5.16.1 ORU-M object/Life setting
(1) OUTLINE
Set the ORU-M target unit and the life.
Note
ORU-M has to be enabled to select this setting. (The default is disabled.) To enable ORU-M, set DIPSW15-0: 1.
(2) Procedure
Press [15 ORU-M Setting].
2. "ORU-M Setting screen"
Press [01 ORU-M object/Life setting].
3. "ORU-M object/Life Setting screen"
Press "" or "" to select the unit to be set.
To set to the ORU-M target, press the button on the left of the unit to be registered and set it to "Enable".
4. To change the setting, select the replacement unit.
Setting Range
Standard Life
Setting Range
Intermediate transfer unit
Replacement Unit
300,000 prints
66 to 333%
Developing Unit (Yellow)
600km
50 to 120%
Developing Unit (Magenta)
600km
50 to 120%
Developing Unit (Cyan)
600km
50 to 120%
Developing Unit (Black)
600km
50 to 120%
Developer Unit (Yellow)
200km
50 to 120%
Developer Unit (Magenta)
200km
50 to 120%
Developer Unit (Cyan)
200km
50 to 120%
Developer Unit (Black)
200km
50 to 120%
450,000 prints
50 to 120%
Drum Unit (Yellow)
102km
80 to 113%
Drum Unit (Magenta)
102km
80 to 113%
Drum Unit (Cyan)
102km
80 to 113%
Drum Unit (Black)
102km
80 to 113%
Fusing unit
Charging Corona (Yellow)
70 hours
57 to 143%
Charging Corona (Magenta)
70 hours
57 to 143%
Charging Corona (Cyan)
70 hours
57 to 143%
Charging Corona (Black)
70 hours
57 to 143%
Dust proof filter (A, B)
600,000 prints
50 to 120%
Dust-proof filter(3) Right
600,000 prints
50 to 120%
600,000 prints
50 to 120%
Separation Rubber (Tray1)
400,000 prints
50 to 120%
400,000 prints
50 to 120%
400,000 prints
50 to 120%
Feed Roller (Tray1)
2,400,000 prints
50 to 120%
Feed Roller (Tray2)
2,400,000 prints
50 to 120%
Feed Roller (Tray3)
2,400,000 prints
50 to 120%
5.16.2 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting

(1) Usage
Set whether to display the ORU-M object unit in the ORU-M modeby the life value. When the ORU-M object unit is set to "Enable", the units
whose life value reaches the display threshold setting are displayed in the ORU-M mode.
Note
(2) Procedure
Press [02 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting].
3. "ORU-M Life Threshold Setting screen"
1 step = 1%
Note
Default is 0%.
I -219
5.16.3 ORU-M Password Setting

(1) Usage
Set the password to enter the ORU-M mode.
Note
(2) Procedure
Press [03 ORU-M Password Setting].
3. "ORU-M Password Setting screen"
Press [New Password], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter new password (4 digits) using the alphanumeric keys and then press
[OK].
4. Press [Input Confirmation], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter new password (4 digits) using the alphanumeric keys again and then
press [OK].
I -220
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. IC-601 SERVICE MODE
6. IC-601 SERVICE MODE

6.1 IC Service Mode List
This machine is provided with a service mode for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set with this mode is stored in HDD.
01 System Setting
01 Software DIPSW Setting
02 Firmware Version
03 ISW
01 Internet ISW
02 USB Memory ISW
04 IC HDD format
05 CSV File Import/Export
06 Font Backup
99 Log File Check
6.2 Start/exit of Service Mode

6.2.1 Method to activate IC service mode
To access to the IC service mode, activate from the main body service mode.
You can access the main body service mode while the power is both turned ON and OFF.
In either way, the started main body service mode is the same, but how to exit differs.
(1) Start-up from power ON

2. "Utility screen"
Stop 0 0 Stop 0 1
3. Main body "Service Mode menu screen"
Press [Controller].
4. IC "Service Mode menu screen"
IC service Mode menu screen appears.
(2) Start-up from power OFF

1. While pressing [Utility/Counter] button, turn ON the sub power switch (SW2).
When the CE password has been set, entering the password is required to enter the main body service mode.
Press [Controller].
IC service Mode menu screen appears.
6.2.2 Method to exit IC service mode

Exit methods differ according to the condition of power switch, ON or OFF.
(1) When the power is ON

Press [Close] to return to the main body "Utility screen".
Press [Exit] to back to "Utility screen".
(2) When the power is OFF

Press [Close] to return to the main body "Utility screen".
Turn OFF the SW2.
3. After the reboot, the new settings become effective.
6.3 System Setting

6.3.1 IC software DIPSW setting procedures
(1) Outline
Set the software DIPSW.
Note
Do not change any switch not described in the service manual.
(2) Procedure
I -221
Press [01 Software DIPSW Setting].

Press [<] / [>] or numeric buttons after pressing the "DIPSW number" and "Bit number" buttons.
4. Press [On] (1) or [Off] (0) to set the selected bit number ON/OFF.
Press [OK] to fix the change.
Note
When [OK] is not pressed but [Cancel] or [Close] is pressed, the change is not fixed.
(3) Software DIPSW setting screen
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
DIPSW number
[2]
Bit number (0 to 7)
[3]
Bit data: 1:ON, 0:OFF
[4]
Numeric buttons
6.3.2 IC software DIPSW list

DIPSW
Bit
Function
Change of the scanner compression method
Updating interval of the count information
Set value
Default setting
Japan
Inch
Metric
0: MMR
1: MH
10 minutes: 6-1=0, 6-0=0

1 minute: 6-1=0, 6-0=1
0 minute: 6-1=1, 6-0=0
60 minutes: 6-1=1, 6-0=1
6.4 Firmware Version

(1) Functions
Check the version of each setting information in the IC firmware and HDD.
(2) Usage
To compare the DB versions of the IC firmware and HDD and check the mismatch.
(3) Procedure
1. Enter the IC service mode.
3. "Firmware Version screen"
The following versions are displayed.
ROM Version:
DB version of IC firmware
HDD Version:
DB version such as setting information in HDD
PS Version:
Version of PS module itself
TIFF Version:
Version of TIFF module itself
PPML Version:
Version of PPML module itself
PCL-5e Version:
Version of PCL-5e module itself
I -222
PCL-XL Version:
Version of PCL-XL module itself
XPS Version:
Version of XPS module itself
6.5 Firmware Version Up

6.5.1 ISW outline
Execute the firmware version up with ISW. ISW has 2 types; USB Memory ISW and Internet ISW.
(1) USB Memory ISW

Connect the USB memory in which the firmware file is saved to the Serial port (TypeA) of IC, specify the firmware in the USB memory using
the operation panel, and rewrite the IC firmware program.
(2) Internet ISW

Download the firmware file from the program server on the internet using FTP or HTTP protocol and rewrite the IC firmware program. Operate
the Internet ISW on the operation panel of the main body.
6.5.2 Method of the USB memory ISW

(1) Procedure
Note
Since the font information is taken over after executing ISW of the IC, there is no need to back up the font information.
1. Save the firmware to the USB memory in the following folder structure.
C7000
C8000
P
xxxxxx.BIN
xxxxxx.BIN
xxxxxx.sum
xxxxxx.sum
In case of bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
In case of bizhub PRESS C8000
Note
Create the C7000/8000 folder directly under the USB memory route.
Several firmware can be saved to a folder. However, 30 files is the maximum it can display on the touch panel. Also, 2 byte
font cannot be displayed.
Maximum 25 letters for a file name.
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the connector cover [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Connect the USB memory to the IC Serial port [1].
I -223
[1]

Press [03 ISW].
6. "ISW screen"
Press [02 USB Memory ISW].
7. "USB Memory ISW screen"
The file in the USB memory applicable folder is displayed. (Maximum 30 files)
Select the version of the file to be rewritten, and press [OK].
8. Press [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
I -224
9. After the message "ISW Mode Now downloading program", the message "ISW Mode Ready to update." appears. Then, press [OK].
Note
When the preparation for updating failed, the message "Download error occurred" is displayed. Check the details of the
error. (Refer to I.6.5.4 ISW error list)
Press [Close] to return to "USB Memory ISW screen".
10. IC is updated by pressing [OK], and "Service Mode menu screen" is displayed. [Controller] cannot be selected during updating IC.
I -225
11. When updating IC completes, [Controller] in "Service Mode menu screen" can be selected.
12. Check the firmware version in the IC service mode to see if the ISW is completed successfully. (Refer to I.6.4 Firmware Version)
Note
When updating IC failed, "Service Call screen" which shows the SC code is displayed by pressing [Controller].
Press [Continue] to enter the IC service mode.
(When updating IC failed, "SC 30-003" which means the failure of updating is displayed. (Refer to I.6.5.4 ISW error list))
6.5.3 Method of Internet ISW

After setting the program server, download the firmware from the program server by executing ISW and rewrite the firmware program.
(1) Check the operation environment

(a) Condition to use the Internet ISW function
To use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must to be met.
The main body must be connected to the network environment that allows the download of firmware from the Internet by using ftp or
http protocol.
(b) When the Internet ISW does not operate

In the following cases, the "Internet ISW" does not operate on the IC.
When the main power switch (SW1) is off
When the IC power switch is OFF.
During print operation, or various JOB (including reserve JOB) exists, or suspended JOB exists during main body idling.
Using modes other than normal mode.
Paper JAM has occurred.
Image file exists in the image memory.
Program and board do not match.
(2) Proxy Server setting

Proxy server which is provided on the inside of the fire wall is the generic name of a mail server that serves the proxy of a client who
receives an access demand (HTTP and FTP) from the client.
When using the proxy server, conduct the following procedure to set up.
(a) Procedure
I -226

Press [02 ISW].
3. "ISW screen"
Press [01 Internet ISW].
4. "Internet ISW screen"
Press "01 Proxy Server Setting".
5. "Proxy Server Setting screen"
Press [IPv4 Change]/[IPv6 Change]/[Host Name] for Proxy Server Address, and press [Change]for Proxy Server Port, Authentication
Use Name, and Authentication Password to input with the screen keyboard.
Enable Proxy Server
Select an incoming server (FTP, HTTP) to be used.
Proxy Server Address
Input the IP address of the proxy server or Host Name.

(Maximum 256 single-byte characters for Host Name)
Proxy Server Port
Input the port number of the proxy server.

(1 to 65565)
Enable Authentication
When using the HTTP proxy, select whether to authenticate or

not.
Authentication User Name
Input Authentication User Name. (Maximum 31 single-byte

characters)
Authentication Password
Input Authentication Password. (Maximum 31 single-byte

characters)

Press [OK] to display "Internet ISW screen".
(3) Program server setting

(a) Procedure
Press [03 ISW].
3. "ISW screen"
Press [01 Internet ISW].
Press [02 Program server set].
5. "Program Server Setting screen"
Set the program server.
Press [Change] to input the server URL, server account, and server account with the screen keyboard.
I -227
Receiving protocol
Select the protocol that receives the firmware file.
Server URL
Set the URL of the server into which the program to download is
stored. (File name is not included.)
Server account
Enter the account name of the program server.
Server password
Enter the password of the program server.
PASV mode
Set enable/disable the PASV mode.

Select "Enable" when the access is limited by firewall.
FTP receiving time out
Set the FTP receiving time out from 1 to 60 minutes. When the
time is out, the download of the firmware file forcibly comes to an
end, and the system returns to the normal mode without
conducting the ISW.
HTTP/HTTPS receiving time out
Set the HTTP/HTTPS receiving time out from 30 to 600 seconds.

When the time is out, the download of the firmware file forcibly
comes to an end, and the system returns to the normal mode
without conducting the ISW.

Press "OK" to display "Internet ISW screen".
(4) Execute Internet ISW

(a) Procedure
Note
Since the font information is taken over after executing ISW of the IC, there is no need to back up the font information.
1. Display IC "Internet ISW screen".
Press [03 Internet ISW Mode].
3. "Internet ISW mode screen"
Press [Direct Setting] and then press [Change] of [File Name].
Note
When [Auto Setting] is pressed, the file name is set to "bootP1.bin" automatically. Therefore, be sure to set the file name
by pressing [Direct Setting].
4. "File Name screen"

Input the file name of the firmware and press [OK].
I -228
5. "Internet ISW mode screen"

Confirm the file name and press [Start].
6. After the message "ISW Mode Now downloading program", the message "ISW Mode Ready to update." appears. Then, press [OK].
I -229
Note
When the preparation for updating failed, the message "Download error occurred" is displayed. Check the details of the
error. (Refer to I.6.5.4 ISW error list)
Press [Close] to return to "USB Memory ISW screen".
7. IC is updated by pressing [OK], and "Service Mode menu screen" is displayed. [Controller] cannot be selected during updating IC.
I -230
8. When updating IC completes, [Controller] in "Service Mode menu screen" can be selected.
9. Check the firmware version in the IC service mode to see if the ISW is completed successfully. (Refer to I.6.4 Firmware Version)
Note
When updating IC failed, "Service Call screen" which shows the SC code is displayed by pressing [Controller].
Press [Continue] to enter the IC service mode.
(When updating IC failed, "SC 30-003" which means the failure of updating is displayed. (Refer to I.6.5.4 ISW error list))
6.5.4 ISW error list

When an error occurs during ISW operation, the malfunction code is displayed on the operation panel.
Error message
Description
Recovery method
Data error (Invalid file)
Program of another board is under ISW.

Or program data is broken.
Acquire the correct program file and execute ISW

again.
Data error (Program)
Program data is broken.
Acquire the correct program file and execute ISW

again.
I/O error
Error occurs during rewriting program.
Execute ISW again.
HDD I/O error
Execute ISW again.
HDD is full
Since HDD full occurs, rewriting program is

unavailable.
Reboot the IC-601 and execute ISW again.
System is busy.
Since print JOB or scan JOB is during operation, Wait until the process in progress completes and
ISW cannot be executed.
execute ISW again.
ISW is executed from the panel during CSRC
Internet ISW operation.
CSRC Internet ISW is executed during ISW
operation from the panel.
System error
Internal error or unexpected error occurs.
Execute ISW again.
Download error occurred.
Failed to download program file.
In case of Internet ISW, check the connection of the

program server.
In case of USB ISW, acquire the program file and
execute ISW again.
I -231

SC Code 30-003

The power of the IC-601 is turned OFF during
rewriting program.
On the SC screen of [Controller] in the service mode,

press the [Continue] button to enter the service mode
menu
and execute ISW again.
6.6 IC HDD Format

(1) Functions
Format the HDD/2 (HDD2) of IC.
(2) Usage
To maintain the HDD area, delete the internal data.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 IC HDD Format].
3. "IC HDD Format screen"
Press the item you want to format.
[All]
Formats all areas of the hard disk.
This operation is equal to performing the following 4 operations at once. Conduct this operation on such occasions as replacing the
hard disk /2 (HDD2).
[Document]
Formats the document storage area. Conduct this operation when deleting the Scan to HDD job.
[Parameter]
Formats the storage area for the controller setting information.
Conduct this operation when deleting the whole setting information on the print controller (the network setting and default settings of
each port, and so on).
[Font]
Formats the font data storage area.
Conduct this operation when deleting downloaded external font data.
[Spool]
Formats the spool area.
Normally, there is no need to format this area alone.
Note
Be sure to output the settings information list before formatting parameters.
By formatting font, all downloaded external fonts are deleted.
4. "Format confirmation screen"
"Execute Format Yes/No?" is displayed. Then, press [Yes].
"executing", and "Completed" is displayed once it completes.
6.7 CSV File Import/Export

6.7.1 Outline
To use the language other than the 9 originally set languages, the language can be switched by inputting/outputting the CSV file.
6.7.2 Procedure
Perform the import/export using the USB memory in the same way as the USB memory ISW.
Note
Before connecting the USB memory, be sure to check that the USB memory does not have a Key file for controller log acquisition.
When the Key file is in the memory, the log acquisition is executed first.
(1) Import
Import the csv file stored in the USB memory to SSD.
1. Save the csv file into the USB memory in the following folder structure.
I -232
lang
ic601_MachineSetting_***.csv (For displaying Machine Settings)
ic601_AdminSetting_***.csv (For displaying Administrator Setting)
ic601_CeSetting_***.csv (For Service Mode)
ic601_SMBBrowsing_***.csv (For displaying SMB browsing)
Note) "***" represents the abbreviated form of the language with three letters.
Note
Only the 4 types of csv file shown above can be imported.
[2]
[1]
[1]

Press [05 CSV File Import/Export].
6. "CSV File Import/Export screen"
Press [Import].
7. A confirmation screen asking "Execute Import Yes/No?" appears. Press [Yes].
8. After completion of the import, disconnect the USB memory from the Serial port once the message "Completed" is displayed.
(2) Export
Export the csv file from SSD to the USB memory.
I -233
[2]
[1]
[1]

Press [05 CSV File Import/Export].
5. "CSV File Import/Export screen"
Press [Export].
6. A confirmation screen asking "Execute Export Yes/No?" appears. Press [Yes].
7. After completion of the export, disconnect the USB memory from the Serial port once the message "Completed" is displayed.
The csv file is saved in the [lang] folder that is created automatically.
The saved file will be the 9 languages that have been registered in the factory or the other languages that have been imported
beforehand.
6.8 Font Backup

6.8.1 Outline
Back up the PS font/form data saved in IC to the PC which is connected to the network.
6.8.2 Preparation of backup/restore

Since the ftp protocol of network is used for backup/restore, confirm that the ftp setting of IC is set to "Enable".
(1) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press [Utility/Counter] on the operation panel.

Press [03 Administrator Setting].
Press [Controller].
Press [01 Controller NIC Setting Menu].
Press [04 FTP Setting].
Confirm that "FTP Server Setting" is set to "Enable".
I -234
6.8.3 Backup method

Create the backup file in the HDD/1 (HDD/2) of IC once, and then download the created backup file to the PC via ftp.
(1) Procedure to create backup file in HDD

Press [06 Font Backup].
3. "Font Backup screen"
Press [Backup].
4. "Pop-up screen"
Press [Yes] to start the backup.
5. When the backup file (file name: fontbackup) is created in the HDD/1 (HDD/2) of IC, the message is changed from "backup is being
executed" to "Complete".
Note
Do not turn OFF the main body main power switch (SW1), sub power switch (SW2), and IC power switch until the backup
completes.
(2) Backup procedure to PC via ftp

Example: Download the backup file to the folder "TEMP" of PC.
1. Display the command input screen with the PC that can connect to ftp.
2. Specify the directory [1] to download to.
3. Input the IP address [2] of IC.
4. Input the user name "fontbackup" [3].
Note
The user name "fontbackup" is fixed
5. Input the password "sysadm" [4].
Note
The password "sysadm" is fixed.
6. Input "get fontbackup" [5] to start downloading the backup file.
When the downloading completes, "Transfer complete" [6] is displayed.
7. Input "bye" [7] to disconnect from ftp.
Command Prompt
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[1]
Directory to save
[2]
IP address of IC
[3]
User name
[4]
Password
[5]
Downloading start
[6]
Downloading complete
[7]
Disconnect from ftp
6.8.4 Method to restore

Restore the backup file of the PS font/form data downloaded in PC into IC.
(1) Procedure
Example: Restore the backup file which is saved in the "TEMP" folder right under the route directory of C drive from PC to IC.
Press [06 Font Backup].
3. "Font Backup screen"
Press [Restore].
A message "Font restoration data wait" appears.
4. Display the command input screen with the PC in which the backup file is saved.
5. Input "cd c:\temp" [1] to specify the directory in which the backup file is saved.
I -235
6. Input the addres [3] with restore command option "-s" of "lpr" command [2], and the printer name "printer" [4] and the restore file name
[5]with printer name specify command option "-p".
The message on the operation panel is changed from "Font restoration data wait" to "Font restoration is being executed".
7. When the restoring completes normally, "Completed normally" appears.
Note
Do not turn OFF the main body main power switch (SW1), sub power switch (SW2), and IC power switch until the restore
completes.
Command Prompt
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
6.9 Log File Check

(1) Function
Check the file name of the controller log.
(2) Usage
To prevent sending the wrong file, check the file name of the controller log when sending the controller log file to KMBT.
(3) Procedure
1. Collect the controller log. (Refer to E.1.9 Controller log collection)
Press [99 Log File Check].
The file name of the collected controller log file is displayed on the upper left of the screen. Check the file name.
I -236
I -237
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 7. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY

SETTING
7. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY SETTING

7.1 CE/Administrator Security Setting List
Adjustment/setting item
CE/Administrator Security Setting
01 CE Authentication
02 Authentication Password
03 Admin. Authentication
04 Machine Manager Password
Important
The setting [03 Enhanced Security Mode] in [10 Security Setting] in [03 Administrator Setting] is available only when HD-514 and
PH-102 are connected.
The setting [03 Enhanced Security Mode] in [10 Security Setting] in [03 Administrator Setting] is available only when the CE
Authentication and Admin. Authentication are set to [ON].
7.2 Start/exit
(1) Usage
The CE/Administrator Security Setting can be set on the "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" in the CE/Administrator security
mode.
(2) Procedure
Before selecting any item in the service mode, press the hard keys in the order shown below.
Stop 0 C
2. "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen"
The CE/Administrator security mode starts up and the CE/Administrator Security Setting becomes available.
Select the item to be set to display the setting screen of each item.
Press [Close] to return to the "Service Mode screen."
Important
The setting [03 Enhanced Security Mode] in [10 Security Setting] in [03 Administrator Setting] is available only when the CE
Authentication and Admin. Authentication are set to [ON].
7.3 CE Authentication
(1) Usage
To strengthen security of the service mode, configure the setting so that a password is required to enter the service mode.
Note
To set the security enhance mode ON, this setting has to be "ON".
(2) Procedure
Press [01 CE Authentication].
2. "CE Authentication ON/OFF screen"
Press [ON] or [OFF].
3. When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" is displayed.
4. Press [Cancel] to cancel updating.
7.4 CE Auth. Password

(1) Usage
Configure a password to enter the service mode.
Note
Do not use anything easily guessed by others such as your name, birthday.
CE should not inform other people of the password.
The selection of the [CE Authentication Password] key is limited to only when the CE authentication setting is set to [ON].
(2) Procedure
Press [02 CE Authentication Password].
2. "CE Authentication Password screen"
Press [Current Password], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter the current password (8 digits) using the alphanumeric keys and then
press [OK].
Default is "92729272."
When entering wrong password, the message "Password is incorrect" is displayed.
3. Press [New Password], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter new password (8 digits) using the alphanumeric keys and then press
[OK].
press [OK].
5. "CE Authentication Password screen"
When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" is displayed.
I -238
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 7. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY

SETTING
7.5 Admin. Authentication

(1) Usage
To strengthen security of the machine manager setting of the setting menu mode, configure the setting so that a password is required to enter
the machine manager setting.
Note
To set the security enhance mode ON, this setting has to be "ON".
(2) Procedure
Press [03 Admin. Authentication].
2. "Admin. Authentication ON/OFF Setting screen"
Press [ON] or [OFF].
3. When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" is displayed.
7.6 Administrator Password

(1) Usage
Configure a password to enter the Administrator Setting of the Utility.
The administrator password can also be set in the Administrator Setting of the Utility.
Note
When setting or changing the administrator password, CE must ask the administrator of the customer to change the
administrator password promptly.
Do not use anything easily guessed by others such as your name, birthday.
The selection of the [Administrator Password] key is limited only when the Admin. Authentication setting is set to [ON].
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Administrator Password].
2. "Administrator Password screen"
3. Press [New Password], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter new password (8 digits) using the alphanumeric keys and then press
[OK].
Press [OK].
press [OK].
5. "Administrator Password screen"
When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" is displayed.
I -239
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 8. FEE COLLECTION SETTING
8. FEE COLLECTION SETTING

8.1 Fee Collection Setting List
Adjustment/Setting Item
Fee Collection Setting
01 Management Function
02 Billing Counter Coefficient Setting*
* DIPSW33-7 needs to be set to 1 to display the setting.
8.2 Start/exit
(1) Usage
Set up the various settings concerning the fee collection setting from the "Fee Collection Setting" screen.
(2) Procedure
Before selecting any item in the service mode, press the hard keys in the order shown below.
Stop 9
2. "Fee Collection Setting screen"
Fee collection setting mode is activated. Set the various settings concerning fee collection setting.
3. "Fee Collection Setting menu screen"
Select the item to be set to display the setting screen of each item.
Press [Close] to return to the "Service Mode screen."
8.3 Management Function

(1) Usage
Set the various settings concerning management equipment of the main body.
(2) Procedure
Press [01 Management Function].
2. "Fee Collection < Management Setting > screen"
Select the options for each item of the management setting.
3. Press [OK] to activate the setting, and the "Fee Collection Setting menu screen" is displayed.
8.4 Billing Coefficient Setting

(1) Usage
Set the count coefficient for each coverage and size of the billing counter.
The counting method differs depending on the customer. In order to cope with this situation, change the coefficient.
(2) Functions
Set the calculation of the billing counter that is displayed on Web Utilities and the coefficient to display the counter.
Note
Set DIPSW33-7=1 to display this screen.
When the coefficient setting value is changed, the total value of the Web Utilities and the billing total counter value differ because of
the following approach.
For the display on the Web Utilities, since the main body sends each counter and calculates on Web Utilities, new coefficient is
used for the counter before changing the coefficient to calculate.
Since the display on the main body panel is calculated and accumulated for each output page, the coefficient after the change is
used only for the output after the change when the coefficient is changed. (The counter before changing the coefficient is not
changed.)
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Billing Counter Coefficient Setting].
2. "Billing Counter Coefficient Setting screen"
Press the number of the printing coefficient or size coefficient to select.
3. Enter a value with the numeric buttons.
Setting Range
: 0.1 to 4.0
4. To set other coefficient, repeat steps 2 to 3.
5. Press [OK] to activate the setting, and the "Fee Collection Setting menu screen" is displayed.
I -240
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD
9. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD

9.1 Process Adjustment
9.1.1 Outline
This adjustment shows the directions of each adjustment of [Process Adjustment] in the [Paper Setting] which are displayed when the
DIPSW1-0 "Process adjustment user screen display" is set to "1." When adjusting each item, check the problem, the paper on which it tends to
occur, the paper weight and the environment in which it tends to occur to make a proper adjustment.
Separate setting can be set for each tray by setting offset to the adjustment value set in this setting. However be careful not to make excessive
adjustment. Otherwise image trouble may occur.
9.1.2 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front)

(1) Measure taken according to cause
1. poor transfer
Poor transfer is an uneven color problem which occurs on the area with multiple colors put. It is caused when the transfer electric field is
insufficient.
1. Paper on which it tends to occur
Plain paper (rough surface, with high resistance)
2. Paper weight
Unidentified
3. Environment in which it tends to occur
Unidentified
After continuous low coverage printing
4. Adjustment method
1. Adjust to the negative side
2. Adjust negatively by 10steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
5. Precaution related to other adjustments
When too much steps are moved, the noise of white dots or rough image on the half-tone area may occur.
9.1.3 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back)

1. poor transfer
insufficient.
Plain
Fine (rough surface, with high resistance)
2. Paper weight
Unidentified
Low humidity environment
After continuous low coverage printing
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
When too much steps are moved, the noise of white dots or rough image on the half-tone area may occur.
2. noise of white spot
Plain
Fine (rough surface, with high resistance)
2. Paper weight
Unidentified
1. Adjust to the positive side
2. Adjust positively by 10steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
When too much steps are moved, the poor transfer may occur. In this case, adjust it by 5 steps.
9.1.4 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Front)

1. Poor transfer on lead edge area
Poor transfer stands for color unevenness phenomenon on the color overlay portion in image, due to the insufficient transfer electric field.
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
Unidentified
I -241

Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
Conduct this adjustment when the poor transfer occurs especially on the paper lead edge area. To entirely adjust, conduct I.9.1.2
2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front).
9.1.5 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Back)

1. Poor transfer on lead edge area
Poor transfer stands for color unevenness phenomenon on the color overlay portion in image, due to the insufficient transfer electric field.
Coated
2. Paper weight
Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
Conduct this adjustment when the poor transfer occurs especially on the paper lead edge area. To entirely adjust, conduct I.9.1.3
2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back).
9.1.6 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Front)

1. Paper rear edge poor transfer, transfer jitter
insufficient.
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
Unidentified
Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
None
2. Paper rear edge transfer repelling
Transfer repelling is a problem which the toner is repelled due to the discharge of the paper when the electric field is too strong.
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
257g/m2 to300 g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
None
9.1.7 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Back)

1. Paper rear edge poor transfer, transfer jitter
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
Unidentified
Unidentified
I -242

Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
None
2. Paper rear edge transfer repelling
Transfer repelling is a problem which the toner is repelled due to the discharge of the paper when the electric field is too strong.
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
None
9.1.8 Separation AC
1. Paper wrapping to the intermediate transfer belt
Coated
Fine
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
Conduct this adjustment when the problem still occurs even after conducting the Separation DC adjustment.
2. Transfer charge leak trails, blurred
Blurred is a problem which the toner scatters around the text area or line cross point to blurred the image.
Plain
Fine
2. Paper weight
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
9.1.9 Separation AC
Coated
Fine
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
I -243
Conduct this adjustment when the problem still occurs even after conducting the de-curler adjustment. Conduct this adjustment
when the problem still occurs even after conducting the de-curler adjustment + Separation DC adjustment.
Plain
Fine
2. Paper weight
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
9.1.10 Separation DC(Front)

Coated
Fine
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 30 to + 30
None
Plain
Fine
2. Paper weight
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
2. Adjust positively by 5 steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: - 30 to + 30
None
9.1.11 Separation DC(Back)

Coated
Fine
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 30 to + 30
None
I -244

Plain
Fine
2. Paper weight
64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Setting Range
: - 30 to + 30
None
9.1.12 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Idling)

1. Rough gloss
Rough gloss is a problem which the entire image looks white depending on the brightness condition.
Coated
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
High temperature and high humidity environment
2. Adjust negatively by 5 steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
It is better to change this adjustment and I.9.1.13 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Printing) at the same time.
2. Insufficient fusing
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Around temperature 20C
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
It is better to change the this adjustment and I.9.1.13 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Printing) at the same time.
9.1.13 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Printing)

1. Rough gloss
Coated
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
It is better to change this adjustment and I.9.1.14 Temperature of fusing lower roller (Idling) at the same time.
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
I -245

Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
It is better to change the I.9.1.12 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Idling) and I.9.1.13 Temperature of fusing upper roller
(Printing) at the same time.
9.1.14 Temperature of fusing lower roller (Idling)

1. Rough gloss
Coated
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
2. Set to -10 step.
Setting Range
: - 20 to + 20
It is better to change the I.9.1.14 Temperature of fusing lower roller (Idling) and I.9.1.15 Temperature of fusing lower roller
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
2. Set to +10 step.
Setting range
: - 20 to + 20
9.1.15 Temperature of fusing lower roller (Printing)

1. Rough gloss
Coated
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
2. Set to -10 step.
Setting Range
: - 20 to + 20
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
I -246

2. Set to +10 step.
Setting range
: - 20 to + 20
9.1.16 Temperature to turn OFF the upper edge heater forcibly / Paper width: less than 261mm
1. Rough gloss
Coated
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
When different size of paper is fed
Setting Range
: - 20 to + 20
None
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Setting Range
: - 20 to + 20
None
9.1.17 Temperature to turn OFF the upper edge heater forcibly / Paper width: 261mm or more
1. Rough gloss
Coated
2. Paper weight
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
Setting Range
: - 20 to + 20
None
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Setting Range
: - 20 to + 20
None
I -247
9.1.18 Speed Down

Unidentified
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
1. Set to [ON] from [OFF] (default).
When this setting is set to [ON], the productivity is reduced. Change this setting when the fusing is not enough after changing I.
9.1.12 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Idling), I.9.1.13 Temperature of fusing upper roller (Printing), I.9.1.14 Temperature of
fusing lower roller (Idling), I.9.1.15 Temperature of fusing lower roller (Printing), I.9.1.16 Temperature to turn OFF the upper edge
heater forcibly / Paper width: less than 261mm, I.9.1.17 Temperature to turn OFF the upper edge heater forcibly / Paper width:
261mm or more.
9.1.19 2nd transfer pressure

1. Transfer jitter on Bk thick paper
Thick
2. Paper weight
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Unidentified
1. Change from [Auto] (default) to [Low].
Change this setting only when the transfer jitter occurs on feeding thick paper.
9.1.20 CPM Down

1. The brightness change during continuous print is large
Coated
2. Paper weight
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Low temperature environment
1. Set to [Down] from [Normal] (default)
When this setting is set to [Down], the productivity is reduced.
9.1.21 Fusing Air Separation Air Level Setting

1. Fusing jam
Unidentified
2. Paper weight
64g/m2 to 105g/m2
High humidity environment
1. Lower side wrapping jam in the fusing paper exit section: Change to [Weak] side.
Upper side wrapping jam in the fusing paper exit section: Change to [Strong] side.
Fusing alarm tends to occur depending on the paper type and environment.
I -248
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT

bizhub PRESS C7000...
10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000

10.1 Centering adjustment of the paper feed trays /1 to /3
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a miscentering that cannot be adjusted in the service mode occurs.
(2) Procedure
[1]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
[2]
[3]
Pull out the paper feed tray.

Loosen 3 screws [2] under the up/down plate [1].
Move the guide plate [3] to adjust the center position.
Tighten 3 screws [2].
Output the test pattern (No.16).
a052f3c004ca
6. Hold the output paper at the center of the sub scan direction and
check that the miscentering amount [3] between the centers of
paper [1] and the image [2] is within the standard value.
Standard value: within 3mm
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 until the miscentering amount turns to be
within the standard value.
[2]
[3]
[1]
8050fs1056
10.2 Separation pressure adjustment of the paper feed trays /1 to /3

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when no feed or double feed occurs. Affected by the paper type and the operating environment (the no feed is likely
in the low temperature environment and the double feed is likely in the high temperature environment). Excess adjustment may reverse the
symptom.
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the paper feed tray.
2. Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to F.5.8.3 Replacing the paper
feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch)
3. Change the position to hook the spring [1] on the bottom of the
paper feed unit.
Weak [2]: A double feed is improved.
Strong [3]: A no feed jam is improved.
4. Install the paper feed unit and then set the paper feed tray.
[1]
[3]
[2]
a03uf3c006ca
I -249

DF-622
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-622

11.1 Hinge angle adjustment (70 degrees and 40 degrees)
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment to change the maximum opening angle of DF.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and 2 hinge adjustment brackets [2].
There are 2 types of the bracket installed in the DF; one for 70
degrees and the other for 40 degrees, and they can be
distinguished by the scratched number on each surface.
2. Install 2 new hinge adjustment brackets [2] and tighten them with 4
screws [1] securely.
[1]
[2]
11.2 Hinge angle adjustment (90 degrees)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when removing DF or scanner part.
Note
When removing the DF or removing any parts from the scanner section with the DF opened, be sure to secure the hinge
adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. Without this operation, it deforms the metal frame in the DF installation section.
(2) Procedure
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
1. To secure the hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees, follow

either of the steps below. There are 2 types of the bracket installed
in the DF; one for 70 degrees and the other for 40 degrees, and
they can be distinguished by the scratched number on each
surface.
Brackets for 70 degrees:
Loosen 4 screws [1] and slide 2 brackets [2] downward, and then
secure them with 4 screws [1] again.
Brackets for 40 degrees:
Remove 4 screws [1]. Turn 2 brackets [2] upside down and
reinstall them to DF and secure 4 screw [1] again.
2. When completed, be sure to put the brackets back to the original
state.
a052f3c002ca
I -250

PF-602
12. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PF-602

12.1 Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment
(1) Usage
When a no feed condition occurs repeatedly while feeding paper, conduct the paper feed pick-up amount adjustment.
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the tray.
2. If any paper remaining, remove it.
3. Turn to loosen the knob [1], slide the projection [2] toward the rear
side of the tray, and fasten the knob [1] to secure the projection [2].
Note
After the completion of the adjustment, loosen the knob
[1], put the projection [2] back to the original position, and
fasten the knob [1] to secure the projection [2].
4. Set the tray. After confirm that the paper lift finished its elevation to
the top by hearing the sound of the paper lift motor, pull out the
tray again.
5. Remove the rail stopper, and pull out the tray further. (Refer to G.
4.2.6 Tray)
[2]
[1]
a03xf3c001ca
[1]
6. Remove the 2 screws [1], bend the stopper [2] in the direction of
the arrow, and remove the paper feed cover [3].
Note
To easily remove the paper feed cover [3], expand the
metal plate [4] of the paper feed cover in the direction of
the arrow, and lift the cover straight up.
[3]
7. Put the tray back to the position where the stopper [2] is pushed in
the paper feed cover [3], and make the pick-up roller assy [7]
placed horizontally (paper feed position).
[7]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
a03xf3c002ca
I -251

PF-602

[5]
[1]
[6]
8. Pull the plunger [2] of the pick-up solenoid [1] and measure the
clearance between the pick-up roller [3] and the lift plate [4] with a
feeler gauge.
Measured value A = 0.5 to 1.0 mm
If it is not within the standard value, follow step 9 and after.
Note
Before loosening the screw, be sure to mark off the
position of the pick-up solenoid by drawing a line [6].
[2]
10. With the plunger [2] pulled, adjust the position of the pick-up
solenoid [1] so that the gap between the pick-up roller [3] and the
lift plate [4] becomes to the specified value.
11. Tighten the screw [5] to fix the pick-up solenoid [1].
12. Insert a paper, and set the tray.
13. Perform copying/printing to confirm that the no feed does not
occur.
[3]
A
[4]
a03xf3c003ca
12.2 Pick-up roller height adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform the adjustment under the following conditions: no feed occurs frequently; printed page is often folded; paper jam occurs at short
intervals; feeding paper with a large amount of curl.
According to the pick-up roller height adjustment, the height of the upper most paper and the paper through height of the paper feed roller are
decided.
Note
Pick-up roller height adjustment changes paper feed pick-up amount accordingly. When the adjustment is completed, perform
the paper feed pick-up amount adjustment to check the pickup amount.
(2) Procedure
Note
[2]
tray again.
5. Remove the rail stopper, and pull out the tray further. (Refer to G.
4.2.6 Tray)
[1]
a03xf3c004ca
I -252

PF-602

[1]
6. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the paper feed cover [3].
Note
To easily remove the paper feed cover [3], expand the
metal plate [4] of the paper feed cover in the direction of
the arrow, and lift the cover straight up.
[3]
7. Put the tray back to the position where the stopper [2] is pushed in
the paper feed cover [3], and make the pick-up roller assy [7]
placed horizontally(paper feed position).
[7]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[4]
[5]
a03xf3c005ca
[2]
8. Check if the actuator [1] of the pick-up roller assy meets the center
[3] of the upper limit sensor/1 (PS1) and /2 (PS9) [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
a03xf3c006ca
[3]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[7]
a03xf3c007ca
9. Mark off the position of the upper limit sensor mounting plate [1] by
drawing a line [2].
10. Loosen the screw [3] to release the upper limit mounting plate [1].
11. Loosen or tighten the screw [4] to adjust the height of the upper
limit sensor mounting plate [1].
Note
The upper limit sensor mounting plate [1] goes up by
tightening the screw [4], and it goes down by loosening
the screw.
Reference:
Raising the position of the upper limit sensor brings down
the pick-up roller [5] (resulting in the increased difference
[7] of elevation between the paper feed roller [6] and the
pick-up roller [5]).
Lowering the position of the upper limit sensor brings up
the pick-up roller [5] (resulting in the reduced difference
[7] of elevation between the paper feed roller [6] and the
pick-up roller [5]).
When the printed page is folded, when paper jam occurs
frequently, or when feeding paper with a large amount of
curl, raise the upper limit sensor mounting plate.
When feeding convexly curled paper, lower the upper limit
sensor mounting plate.
12. After the completion of the adjustment, fasten the screw [3] to
secure the upper limit mounting plate [1].
13. Insert a paper, and set the tray.
I -253

PF-602
14. Make a copy/print to confirm that papers are fed properly. If the
problem is not solved, repeat steps 9 to 14.
15. Check the paper feed pick-up amount. (Refer to I.12.1 Paper feed
pick-up amount adjustment)
12.3 Separation pressure adjustment

(1) Usage
When a no feed or double feed condition occurs repeatedly, conduct the separation pressure adjustments.
Note
The no-feed or multi-feed error is most likely to occur due to paper type or operating environment. No feed tends to occur in low
temperature environment, whereas high temperature environment results in a higher rate of multi-feed.
Do not make an excessive adjustment. Doing so may reverse the respective symptoms.
(2) Procedure
2. Change the position of the spring adjustment lever [1]. The
separation pressure is strengthened when the lever moves to the
direction [2] and is weakened when the lever moves to the
direction [3].
Weak: A double feed jam is improved.
Strong: A no feed jam is improved.
Reference:
The pressure applied to the spring increases/decreases
by about 10% increment.
3. Make a copy/print with the tray set, and check to see if a no feed
or double feed condition occurs.
4. In case either of no feed or double feed occurs, repeat steps 2 to
3.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a03xf3c008ca
12.4 Lift plate horizontal adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct the paper lift plate horizontal adjustment when a paper feed jam occurs repeatedly or when the lift wire has been changed.
(2) Procedure
Note
tray again.
[2]
[1]
a03xf3c009ca
I -254

PF-602

[3]
[1]
5. Check if the lift plate [3] is placed horizontally using the engraved
lines on the near side [1] and the far side [2] of the tray. If the plate
is not horizontal, perform step 6 and the steps that follow.
6. Loosen the 2 screws [4] on the far side, and align the lift plate [3]
with the engraved lines on the front side [1] and the far side [2] so
that the lift plate is placed horizontally.
Note
Do not loosen the screws on the near side of the tray.
7. After the completion of the adjustment, tighten the 2 screws [4].
[4]
[2]
a03xf3c010ca
12.5 Horizontal adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the device cannot be placed in a horizontal position or when any discrepancy in height and/or tilt is found
between the device and the main body.
Note
Horizontal adjustment may displace the unit position relative to the main body. When the adjustment is completed, be sure to
make a test copy/print to see if papers are properly fed from the PF.
(2) Procedure
outlet.
2. Turn the 4 nuts [2] of the adjusters [1] with a wrench to adjust the
levelness of the unit.
Note
Be sure to take the height against the main body into
account when making the adjustment.
Note
If there are adjuster(s) that are off the ground, turn the nut
[2] with a wrench to extend the adjuster(s) until you feed
the adjuster(s) are securely grounded.
[1]
[2]
a03xf3c011ca
I -255

PF-602
3. Pull out the tray/4, and make sure that the gap Abetween the PF
plate [1] and the tray guide plate [2] is 3 1 mm. Adjust it with the
adjuster on the right rear side of PF to move up when the
clearance is too tight, adjust it with the adjuster on the right front
side of PF to move up when the clearance is too wide.
[1]
[2]
a03xf3c012ca
I -256

LU-202
13. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LU-202

13.1 Separation pressure adjustment
(1) Usage
Conduct the separation pressure adjustment when there occurs a no feed or double feed condition repeatedly.
Note
Do not make an excessive adjustment. Doing so may reverse the symptoms.
Paper type and ambient temperature/humidity can be a major cause of the no-feed or multi-feed jam. For example, no-feed jam
tends to occur in low temperature, and multi-feed jam does in high temperature. Make sure to carry out this adjustment with that
in mind.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the LU from the main body.
2. Disconnect the hooked end [1] of the spring from the tab, and
attach it to another tab on the left [2] or right [3] side of the center
tab to raise or reduce the separation pressure.
Note
The 5 tabs correspond to 5 pressure levels. Attach the
hooked end of the spring to a tab on the [2] side to raise
the pressure, or attach it to a tab on the [3] side to reduce
the pressure.
Reducing pressure: lowers multi-feed jam rate.
Raising pressure: lowers no-feed jam rate.
The spring force changes in increments of about 10%.
[1]
[2]
3. Reinstall the LU to the main body.

Note
Make some test prints to check to see that no-feed or
multi-feed jam does not occur.
[3]
a03wf3c001ca
13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct the paper lift plate horizontal adjustment when a paper feed jam occurs repeatedly or when the lift wire has been changed.
I -257

LU-202
(2) Procedure
[2]
1. Remove the paper from the LU and close the upper door.
4. Remove the right cover. (Refer to G.5.2.5 Right cover)
5. Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.5.2.6 Front cover)
6. Loosen the 2 screws on the front side [1].
7. Adjust the levelness of the paper lift plate [4] with the adjustment
screw [5] aligning its both end surfaces with the marking-off line [2]
and [3].
Note
Before adjusting with the screw [5], push down the lift
plate lightly to take up any slack in the wires.
[3]
8. Tighten the 2 screws [1].

Note
[5]
[4]
[1]
a03wf3c002ca
13.3 Paper centering adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when images are not printed on the center of paper, which fed from LU, even after performing the "Printer centering
adjustment (tray4)" (adjustment range: 4 mm) in service mode.
I -258

LU-202
(2) Procedure
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[7]
1. Load about 100 sheets of paper in the LU. (less than 100 may
cause the paper becoming warped when the guide plate is
pressed against it.)
2. Feed paper from the tray4 (LU) and print the test pattern No. 16.
3. Fold the printed sheet in half in main scan direction to see how
much the printed pattern is offcentered.
4. Close the upper door. And turn off the main power switch (SW1)
and the sub power switch (SW2) after the paper lift plate stops at
its uppermost position (listen to the sound of the paper lift motor to
figure out the stop status).
5. Open the upper door and remove paper.
6. Loosen the 2 screws [2] of the guide plate /Fr [1] and the 2 screws
[4] of the guide plate /Rr [3].
7. Loosen the 2 screws [6] of the centering bracket [5].
8. Slide the centering bracket [5] aligning the line on the both ends of
the bracket with the marking-off line [7], and tighten the 2 screws
[6].
Note
When sliding the centering bracket, make sure to slide its
both ends simultaneously (not tilt it) so that the line on the
both ends align with one of the marking off lines at the
same position.
9. Load paper and press the guide plate /Fr [1] and /Rr [3] against the
paper, and tighten the 2 screws [2] and the 2 screws [4].
Note
When pressing the guide plates against paper, make sure
not to press them too much, or a paper jam may occur.
Note
Make some test prints to check to see that the offcentered amount falls within the allowable range.
[6]
[7]
[5]
a03wf3c003ca
13.4 Paper skew adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is a difference in the inclination found with the main body tray and the paper skew. However, this method
has a limited effect since all of the paper supplied is adjusted at the registration section.
An adjustment is made at a different place according to the case in which there occurs a skew of the same inclination in all of the paper
supplied from the LU or in which there occurs a skew at random for each sheet of paper.
(2) Preparation
1. Make the continuous print of the test pattern (No. 16) to check the skew.
2. Depending on the inclination of a skew, conduct either of the following adjustment B and C.
Skew in the same inclination for the entire LU: Adjustment procedure B
Skew at random: Adjustment procedure C
I -259

LU-202
(3) Adjustment procedure of all the paper skew regularly

3. Slide the positioning bracket [3] referring to the marking-off line [2].
Note
When sliding the positioning bracket [3], move its both
edges by the same amount so that they align with the
making-off line [2] at the same position.
4. Print the test pattern (No. 16) continuously to check to see that no
skew of paper occur.
[1] [3]
[2]
a03wf3c004ca
(4) Adjustment procedure of each paper skew irregularly

[2]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[6]
a03wf3c005ca
1. Load about 100 sheets of paper in the LU. (less than 100 may
cause the paper becoming warped when the guide plate is
pressed against it.)
Note
3. Open the upper door and loosen the 2 screws [2] of the guide
plate /Fr [1], the 2 screws [4] of the guide plate /Rr [3] and the 2
screws [6] of the guide plate /Rt [5].
4. Press the guide plate /Fr [2], /Rr [4] and /Rt [6] against the paper
and tighten a total of 6 screws [2], [4], and [6].
Note
The paper size indications on the guide plates are marked
2 mm larger than the actual size. The 2 mm gap may cause
the paper skew depending on the paper type.
5. Print the test pattern (No. 16) continuously to check to see that no
skew of paper occur.
13.5 (Maximum) Paper feed height adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the following conditions occur.
No feed
Leading edge of printed page is folded
No-feed jam of thick paper; it gets stuck with the entrance guide plate (the guide plate of the separation roller section).
Double feed
When feeding tightly curled papers
Note
Be sure to carry out the pick-up roller separation adjustment after performing this adjustment, since this adjustment changes
the distance between the pick-up roller surface and paper when the roller moved away from the paper. (Refer to I.13.6 Pick-up
roller separation adjustment)
I -260

LU-202
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
a03wf3c006ca
cover)
5. Loosen the screw [1] and adjust the position of the mounting plate
[3] of the upper limit sensor (PS109) [2] while holding it horizontally
referring to the marking-off line [4], and tighten the screw [1].
Note
Be sure to install the sensor mounting plate [3]
horizontally.
Move the sensor mounting plate [3] downward to raise the
paper feed level, or move the plate upward to lower the
paper feed level.
When no-feed occurs or convexly curled paper needs to
be fed, move sensor mounting plate [3] downward to raise
the paper feed level.
When multi-feed occurs or the paper edge is folded, or
when convexly curled paper needs to be fed, move sensor
mounting plate [3] upward to lower the paper feed height
level.
13.6 Pick-up roller separation adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there occurs a no feed jam repeatedly and when the paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment is made.
I -261

LU-202
(2) Procedure
[2]
[1]
cover)
5. With the moving part [2] of the pick-up solenoid (SD100) [1] pulled
in the direction of the arrow, measure the gap [5] between the pickup roller [3] and the paper lift plate [4].
Standard value: 0.5mm or more (0.5 to 2.5 mm)
6. Loosen a screw [6] and move the SD100 [1] back and forth
reffering to the marking-off line [7] to adjust its position, and tighten
the screw [6].
Note
[6]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a03wf3c006ca
I -262

MB-504
14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MB-504

14.1 Paper feed roller /BP load adjustment
(1) Usage
Executes when no feed occurs at the bypass paper feed.
(2) Procedure
[1]

2. Install the weight plate [3] on the top of the paper feed roller /BP [2]
with 2 screws [1].
3. Move back the duplex section.
4. Execute printing to check the feedability.
5. Increase the number of the weight plate and repeat steps 1 to 4
when no feed is not solved.
Note
Weight plate (P/N: 13FG4062*) is a supplied part. Purchase
separately for using the plate.
Use the weight plate up to 4.
When the weight plate is installed, be sure to execute "I.
14.3 Pick-up shift amount adjustment (bypass)".
[3] [2]
a052f3c003ca
14.2 (Maximum) Paper feed height adjustment (bypass)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when no feed or edge folding occurs or for feeding tightly curled paper.
Note
Since this adjustment infects on the Pick-up shift amount, be sure to conduct "I.14.3 Pick-up shift amount adjustment (bypass)"
after the adjustment.
(2) Procedure
[2]
[1]
8050fs1052

2. Remove the paper feed solenoid cover. (Refer to F.9.2.1
Replacing the pick-up roller /BP and the paper feed roller rubber /
BP)
3. Loosen the screw [1], and then adjust the installation position of
the upper limit sensor /BP (PS25) [2].
Note
Be sure to mark off the initial mark.
1. When the value is not within the standard value
Adjust the position of the sensor mounting plate up and
down so that the heights of the entrance guide and the up/
down plate are balanced out to be within the standard
value.
To raise the height of the up/down plate: Lower the
To lower the height of the up/down plate: Raise the
2. When any trouble occurs
When the paper edge is folded: Raise the sensor
mounting plate.
When concavely curled paper is being fed: Raise the
When convexly curled paper is being fed: Lower the
4.
5.
6.
7.
14.3 Pick-up shift amount adjustment (bypass)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when no feed jam occurs frequently.
I -263
Install the paper feed solenoid cover.

Move back the duplex section.
Execute printing to check the feedability.
When the trouble is not solved, repeat the steps 1 to 6 to readjust
the installation position of PS25.

MB-504
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the paper feed solenoid cover. (Refer to F.9.2.1
Replacing the pick-up roller /BP and the paper feed roller rubber /
BP)
3. Loosen the screw [1], and then adjust the installation position of
the pick-up solenoid /BP (SD5) [2].
Note
Be sure to mark off the initial mark.
4.
5.
6.
7.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1054
I -264
Install the paper feed solenoid cover.

Move back the duplex section.
Execute printing to check the feedability.
When the no feed jam is not solved, repeat the steps 1 to 6 to
readjust the installation position of SD5.

RU-509
15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-509

15.1 Height adjustment
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and other optional devices.
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the height adjustment by rotating the screw [1] at each of
4 positions. It goes up when rotating the screw [1] to the right, and
goes down when rotating to the left.
Note
Be sure to make adjustments while considerate the height
between other optional devices.
[1]
15.2 Position adjustment of the shutter solenoid (SD5)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the shutter solenoid (SD5) or C-1297 occurs.
I -265

RU-509
(2) Procedure
[3]
[5]
[4]
A

2. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the shutter solenoid (SD5) [1].
3. Measure the gap A [5] between the solenoid installation plate [3]
and the framework [4]. Adjust it so that it obtains the standard
value, and then tighten the screw [2].
Standard value: A = 0mm to 0.5mm
4. After adjusting, Turn ON the main body to enter the service mode
and select [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check Mode]. Conduct the
output code 69-50 to check that there is no gap between the
shutter [6] and the stopper [7].
[2]
[1]
[6]
[7]
I -266

FS-521
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-521

16.1 Adjusting the flat-stapling stopper position
(1) Usage
In the flat-stapling mode, adjustments are made when the distance from the edge of paper to the stapling position is not within the standard
value, or when it is on a slant.
Note
When making adjustments, be sure not to move the stapler by hand. (It causes the teeth of the belt and the gear to jump.)
(2) Procedure
[2]
[1]
1. Conduct the following in the output check of the I/O check mode in
the service mode.
72-31 (Stapler movement motor home position search)
72-78 (Alignment motors /Fr and /Rr home position search)
72-42 (Rear stopper motor stopper release)
2. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch
outlet.
3. Open the front door and remove the screw [1] of the wire [2].
a0gyt3c015ca
4. Pull out the stacker unit, remove the rail stopper screws [1], 1
each, in front and rear and pull the stacker unit further out.
[1]
[1]
fs503fs3002c
I -267

FS-521
[4]
5. Loosen the screws [2], 1 each, of 4 flat-stapling stopper [1] and

make adjustments of the positions of the 4 flat-stapling stoppers.
Note
With the paper [3] inserted, be sure to check to see if the
paper is on a slant and that all of 4 flat-stapling stoppers
are in contact with the edge [4] of paper.
When the stopper is not seen clearly, be sure to adjust it
after removing the guide plate assembly [5].
[3]
[1]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
fs503fs3009c
[1]
fs503fs3004c
6. Conduct flat-stapling to check to see if it is within the standard

value.
Standard value: a = 9.5 2mm
The line [1] connecting 2 staples is parallel to the edge of
paper.
When the value is not within the standard value or the line is
not parallel to the edge of paper, repeat the above steps 1 to
6.
16.2 Adjusting the alignment plate position

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment operation when the slippage in the bundle of paper while in stapling and the uneven paper exit while in non-stapling
cannot be adjusted by conducting "Staple Center Position", "Paper Width Adj.(Staple)" and "Paper Width Adj.(Straight)" in the service mode.
Note
After conducting this adjustment, be sure to conduct "I.5.9.1 Staple Center Position (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)", "I.
5.9.2 Paper Width Adj.(Staple) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)" and "I.5.9.3 Paper Width Adj.(Straight) (Staple Finisher
Position Adjustment)" again.
I -268

FS-521
(2) Procedure
[2]
1. Reset the setting values of "Staple Center Position", "Paper Width

Adj.(Staple)" and "Paper Width Adj.(Straight)" to "0".
2. Conduct the alignment motors /Fr and /Rr home position
movement in the output check 72-78 of the I/O check mode in the
service mode.
3. Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) of the main body, and
unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
4. Open the front door and remove the screw [1] of the wire [2].
[1]
a0gyt3c015ca
5. Pull out the stacker unit, remove the rail stopper screws [1], 1
each, in front and rear and pull the stacker unit further out.
[1]
[1]
B
fs503fs3005c
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
fs503fs3006c
6. Loosen 2 screws [1] and check to see if the distance from the front
side of the side plate [2] in the rear to the paper side of the
alignment plate /Rr [3] is within the standard value A, and then
tighten the screws [1].
Standard value A = 17.9 + 1.0/ - 0.0mm
7. Check the alignment plate /Rr to see if it is on a slant. Loosen 2
screws [4] and check to see if the distance between the alignment
plate /Rr [3] and the inner face on the paper side of the alignment
plate /Fr [5] is within the standard value B, and then tighten the
screws [4].
Standard value: B = 376mm + 0/- 0.5mm
8. Move the staple home position using I/O check mode 72-31 in
service mode, insert a thick paper or similar sheet, and check the
angle of the rear end stopper and the alignment plate.
Note
Move the alignment plates with your hand until the paper
width space is created between them, and make sure
I -269

FS-521
there is no improper gap at the upper and lower side of

the alignment plates.

(1) Usage
Adjustments are made when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and other optional devices.
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the horizontal adjustment by inserting the driver to the
holes [2] and [3] on each of 4 ratchet material [1] and moving it
back and forth. It goes up with the hole [2] and goes down with the
hole [3].
Note
between the main body and other optional devices.
Be sure not to go it up too much, otherwise the bolt
comes off. (max. 5mm)
Be sure that the caster is contacting installation surface,
otherwise the ratchet does not work. In this case, adjust
the casters which are on the ground first to get the
casters spinning to be on the ground.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a0gyf3c001ca
I -270

FS-531

17.1 Adjustment the bypass gate
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a JAM occurs in the bypass gate.
(2) Procedure
3. Remove 2 screws [2] of the rail stopper and pull the stacker unit
frontward further.
Note
To prevent FS from falling, put something to hold [3]
under the stacker unit pulled out.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
15jkf3c001na
4. Open the bypass conveyance guide plate [1].

5. Check that the distance between the bypass gate [2] and the
bypass conveyance plate [3] is within the standard value when the
bypass gate solenoid (SD5) is OFF.
Standard value: A = 3.2mm 0.5mm
When the value is not within the standard value, perform the
following procedure.
[2]
[1]
mm
3.2
A=
[3]
0.5
[2]
15jkf3c002na
[3]
[2]
[4]

(Refer to G.8.2.5 Rear cover)
7. Disconnect all connectors [2] connected to the FNS control board
(FNSCB) [1] and then remove the wiring harness from the clamp
[3].
8. Release 8 board supports [4] and remove FNSCB [1] from the
[1]
[4]
[5]
a04df2c002ca
[2]
[1]
9. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the board mounting plate [2].
a04df2c003ca
I -271

FS-531
[4]
A=
3.2
10. Loosen [2 screws [2] of the bypass gate solenoid (SD5) [1] and
adjust the position of SD5 while checking the engraved line [5] so
that the distance between the bypass gate [3] and the bypass
conveyance plate [4] is within the standard value when SD5 is
OFF.
0.5
mm
[3]
[2]
[5]
[1]
15jkf3c005na
17.2 Adjusting the shift position

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the shift amount of the paper exited to the main tray is not within a standard value (30 mm).
(2) Procedure
[4]
[3]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[4]

Upper cover /1
(Refer to G.8.2.2 Upper cover /1)
Upper cover /2
2. Turn ON the main body to enter the service mode and select
[State Confirmation]- [I/O Check Mode]. Perform the output code
72-03 : Shift roller motor (M2).
3. Turn OFF the main body.
4. Both in the home position and the shift position, check to see if the
edge of the actuator [5] of the slide gear [4] is in the notch [3] of
the slide stay [2] of the shift unit [1].
When the edge of the actuator is in the notch of the slide stay,
perform the following adjustment.
15jkf3c006na
[1]
5. Loosen the screw [2] on the mounting plate [4] of the shift roller
home sensor (PS18) [1], and then adjust the position of the
mounting plate [4] by referring to the engraved line [3].
6. After completing the adjustment, tighten the screw [2].
15jkf3c007na
17.3 Adjusting the paper exit opening solenoid

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper exited to the main tray is misaligned.
I -272

FS-531
(2) Procedure
[1]
A=6.5 0.5mm
[2]
[3]
15jkf3c008na

Upper cover /1 (Refer to G.8.2.2 Upper cover /1) or the option
PI (when PI is connected)
Upper cover /2
Rear cover
[State Confirmation]- [I/O Check Mode]. Turn the output code
72-45 : Paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) to ON.
4. Check to see if the gap between the plunger [2] of the solenoid
and the stopper [3] of the mounting plate is within a standard value
when SD4 [1] is OFF.
following adjustment.
5. Remove 2 screws [1] from the solenoid mounting plate [3], and
then remove the solenoid [2] together with the mounting plate [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
15jkf3c009na
6. Loosen 2 screws [1] on the solenoid, and then adjust the position
of the solenoid [2] and tighten the screws.
[2]
A=6.5 0.5mm
[1]
15jkf3c010na
I -273

FS-531

[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
7. Reinstall the solenoid and the mounting plate [1], and then install
the solenoid mounting plate at the position where the paper exit
guide [2] contacts with the stopper (rubber) [4] of the paper exit
guide stay [3] with 2 screws [5].
Note
Check that there is 1 mm or larger gap between the paper
exit guide [2] and the paper guide stay [3].
[4]
[2]
[2]
[3]
15jkf3c011na
17.4 Adjusting the mounting position of the paper exit arm

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is problem with the paper exit during the stapling operation.
(2) Procedure
2. Rotate the belt detection gear to align the edge of the actuator [2]
of the belt detection gear [1] with the notch [3] of the panel /Rr.
[3]
[2]
[1]
15jkf3c012na
I -274

FS-531
3. Check to see if the paper exit arm [1] is within the extent shown in
the illustration [2].
When the position is not within the extent, perform the following
adjustment.
4. Remove screws [2] provided on the rail stopper, and then pull out
the stacker unit [2] further. (Refer toI.17.1 Adjustment the bypass
gate)
Note
To prevent FS from falling, put something to hold under
the stacker unit pulled out.
45
[2]
[1]
15jkf3c013nc
5. Remove the screw [2] from the belt detection gear [1] and adjust
the position of the paper exit arm to the standard position, and
then adjust the position of the belt detection gear [1] to the position
in step 2 and secure it.
[1]
[2]
15jkf3c014na
17.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Up

(1) Usage
To adjust the misalignment of the stapled paper.
(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the main body, and then turn OFF the main body after the
FS initial operation.
3. Remove screws provided on the rail stopper, and then pull out the
stacker unit further. (Refer to I.17.1 Adjustment the bypass gate)
Note
4. Check that the actuator [2] of the alignment home sensor /Up
(PS8) [1] is on its home position.
[2]
[1]
15jkf3c015na
I -275

FS-531
A 41.2 0.5mm
[1]
[2]
15jkf3c016nb
[3]
A=335.5
[5]
[4]
1.5
0.5
mm
[1]
[2]
5. Check that the gap A between the adjustment plate /Up [1] and the
panel /Rr [2] is within the specified value.
Standard value: A = 41.2 0.5mm (within)
6. Loosen the screw [1], fix the gap between the adjustment plate /
UpRr [2] and the panel /Rr [3], and then secure the screw.
7. Loosen the screw [4], fix the gap between the adjustment plate /
UpRr [2] and the adjustment plate /UpFr [5].
Standard value: A=335mm to 337mm (within)
15jkf3c017nb
17.6 Staple position adjustment

(1) Usage
When the stapling position is not at the standard, conduct this adjustment.
Note
Be sure not to move the stapler unit in the horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it may cause the belt and gear tooth
skipping.
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
A=8.5 3mm
B=8.5 3mm
1. Perform stapling to check that the stapling position is within the

standard.
Standard value for 1-corner staple at rear [1]: A = 8.5mm
3mm
Standard value for 1-staple at front [2]: B = 8.5mm 3mm
Standard value for flat-staple [3]: C = 8.5mm 3mm
(In the case of flat-staple, make sure that the line [4]
connecting 2 staples is parallel to the edge of paper.)
When the value is not within the standard value or the line is not
parallel to the edge of paper, conduct the following procedure.
[3]
C=8.5 3mm
[4]
15jkf3c018na
3. Remove 2 screws provided on the rail stopper, and then pull out
the stacker unit further. (Refer to I.17.1 Adjustment the bypass
gate)
Note
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
15jkf3c019na
4. Loosen the adjustment screws [1], 2 each, of the flat-stapling

stoppers /Fr and /Rr and the adjustment screw [2], 1 each, of the
assist stoppers /Fr and /Rr to adjust the positions of the flatstapling stoppers /Fr and /Rr and the assist stoppers /Fr and /Rr.
Note
Be sure to make the heights of 4 stoppers same.
I -276

FS-531
5. Loosen the adjustment screw [3] of the fixing stopper and adjust
the position of the fixing stopper within 0 to -0.5mm against the
heights of the other stoppers.
standard.
I -277

FS-612

18.1 Adjustment the bypass gate
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a JAM occurs in the bypass gate.
(2) Procedure
3. Remove 2 screws [2] of the rail stopper and pull the stacker unit
frontward further.
Note
To prevent FS from falling, put something to hold [3]
under the stacker unit pulled out.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
15jkf3c001na
4. Open the bypass conveyance guide plate [1].

5. Check that the distance between the bypass gate [2] and the
bypass conveyance plate [3] is within the standard value when the
bypass gate solenoid (SD5) is OFF.
[2]
[1]
mm
3.2
A=
[3]
0.5
[2]
15jkf3c002na
[3]
[2]
[4]

7. Disconnect all connectors [2] connected to the FNS control board
(FNSCB) [1] and then remove the wiring harness from the clamp
[3].
8. Release 8 board supports [4] and remove FNSCB [1] from the
[1]
[4]
[5]
a04df2c002ca
[2]
[1]
9. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the board mounting plate [2].
a04df2c003ca
I -278

FS-612
[4]
A=
3.2
10. Loosen [2 screws [2] of the bypass gate solenoid (SD5) [1] and
adjust the position of SD5 while checking the engraved line [5] so
that the distance between the bypass gate [3] and the bypass
conveyance plate [4] is within the standard value when SD5 is
OFF.
0.5
mm
[3]
[2]
[5]
[1]
15jkf3c005na
18.2 Adjusting the shift position

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the shift amount of the paper exited to the main tray is not within a standard value (30 mm).
(2) Procedure
[4]
[3]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[4]

Upper cover /1
Upper cover /2
72-03 : Shift roller motor (M2).
4. Both in the home position and the shift position, check to see if the
edge of the actuator [5] of the slide gear [4] is in the notch [3] of
the slide stay [2] of the shift unit [1].
When the edge of the actuator is in the notch of the slide stay,
15jkf3c006na
[1]
5. Loosen the screw [2] on the mounting plate [4] of the shift roller
home sensor (PS18) [1], and then adjust the position of the
mounting plate [4] by referring to the engraved line [3].
6. After completing the adjustment, tighten the screw [2].
15jkf3c007na
18.3 Adjusting the paper exit opening solenoid

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper exited to the main tray is misaligned.
I -279

FS-612
(2) Procedure
[1]
A=6.5 0.5mm
[2]
[3]
15jkf3c008na

Upper cover /1 (Refer to G.8.2.2 Upper cover /1) or the option
PI (when PI is connected)
Upper cover /2
Rear cover
[State Confirmation]- [I/O Check Mode]. Turn the output code
72-45 : Paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) to ON.
4. Check to see if the gap between the plunger [2] of the solenoid
and the stopper [3] of the mounting plate is within a standard value
when SD4 [1] is OFF.
following adjustment.
5. Remove 2 screws [1] from the solenoid mounting plate [3], and
then remove the solenoid [2] together with the mounting plate [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
15jkf3c009na
6. Loosen 2 screws [1] on the solenoid, and then adjust the position
of the solenoid [2] and tighten the screws.
[2]
A=6.5 0.5mm
[1]
15jkf3c010na
I -280

FS-612

[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
7. Reinstall the solenoid and the mounting plate [1], and then install
the solenoid mounting plate at the position where the paper exit
guide [2] contacts with the stopper (rubber) [4] of the paper exit
guide stay [3] with 2 screws [5].
Note
Check that there is 1 mm or larger gap between the paper
exit guide [2] and the paper guide stay [3].
[4]
[2]
[2]
[3]
15jkf3c011na
18.4 Adjusting the mounting position of the paper exit arm

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is problem with the paper exit during the stapling operation.
(2) Procedure
2. Rotate the belt detection gear to align the edge of the actuator [2]
of the belt detection gear [1] with the notch [3] of the panel /Rr.
[3]
[2]
[1]
15jkf3c012na
I -281

FS-612

[2]
3. Check to see if the paper exit arm [1] is within the extent shown in
the illustration [2].
When the position is not within the extent, perform the following
adjustment.
the stacker unit [2] further. (Refer to I.18.1 Adjustment the bypass
gate)
Note
[1]
15jmf3c001na
5. Remove the screw [2] from the belt detection gear [1] and adjust
the position of the paper exit arm to the standard position, and
then adjust the position of the belt detection gear [1] to the position
in step 2 and secure it.
[1]
[2]
15jkf3c014na
18.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Up

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is misalignment in the flat-stapled paper bundle.
(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the main body, and then turn OFF the main body after the
FS initial operation.
the stacker unit [2] further. (I.18.1 Adjustment the bypass gate)
Note
[1]
[2]
4. Check that the actuator of the alignment home sensor /Up (PS2) is
on its home position.
15jmf3c002na
A=49.75
B=335.5
1.5
0.5
0.5mm
mm
[1]
[3]
5. Check that the distance between the front surface of the rear plate
[1] and the paper side surface of the alignment plate /UpRr [2] is
within a standard value A, and also check that the gap between
the alignment plate /UpRr [2] and the alignment plate /UpFr [3] is
within a standard value B.
Standard value: B = 335.5mm + 1.5/- 0.5mm
[2]
I -282

FS-612

[4]
[1]
6. Loosen 2 screws [1] and adjust the position of the alignment plate /
UpRr [2] referring to the marking line [3] so that the misalignment
amount is within the a standard value A, and then fix it. Then
adjust the position of the alignment plate /UpFr [4] with reference
to the alignment plate /UpRr so that the standard value B is
obtained.
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
15jmf3c004na
18.6 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Lw

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is an uneven edge found with the bundle of paper in the saddle stitching mode.
(2) Procedure
1. Check that "I.18.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment
plate /Up" has been conducted.
72-41: Saddle stitching stopper motor (M18).
gate)
Note
[1]
[2]
[3]
15jmf3c005na
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
B=335.5
6. Remove the stapler unit cover.

(Refer to F.13.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover)
7. Check that the actuator of the alignment home sensor /Up (PS8) is
on its home position.
8. Check that the actuator [3] of the alignment home sensor /Lw
(PS24) [2] of the alignment plate /Lw [1] is on its home position.
9. Put the paper larger than A4S on the stacker section and check
that the paper [3] is vertical by putting it against the alignment
plates /UpRr [1] and /LwRr [2]. Check that the distance between
the front surface of the rear plate [4] and the paper side surface of
the alignment plate /LwRr [2] is within a standard value A, and also
check that the gap between the alignment plate /LwRr [2] and the
alignment plate /LwFr [5] is within a standard value B.
Standard value: B = 335.5mm + 1.5/- 0.5mm (within)
[2]
1.5
0.5
mm
A=49.75
0.5mm
I -283

FS-612
10. Check point for the adjustment

Note
When putting the paper in the stacker, press the flatstapling stopper release lever [2] with fingers so that the
paper does not cover the flat-stapling stopper [1].
[1]
[2]
[4]
15jmf3c007na
[4]
[2]
11. Loosen the screws [1] and [2] to adjust the alignment plate /LwRr
[3] so that the standard value A is obtained, and then tighten the
screw [1].
Note
When it is hard to check the standard value A, press the
paper against the alignment plates /UpRr and /LwRr and
fix the alignment plate /LwRr at the position at which the
paper is vertical.
[3]
[1]
12. Adjust the alignment plate /LwFr [4] with reference to the alignment
plate /LwRr [3] so that the standard value B is obtained, and then
[2]

(1) Usage
When the stapling position is not at the standard, conduct this adjustment.
Note
skipping.
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
A=8.5 1.5mm
B=8.5 1.5mm

standard.
Standard value for 1-coner staple at rear [1]: A = 8.5mm
1.5m
Standard value for 1-staple at front [2]: B = 8.5mm 1.5m
Standard value for flat-staple [3]: C = 8.5mm 1.5mm
(In the case of flat-staple, make sure that the line [4]
connecting 2 staples is parallel to the edge of paper.)
When the value is not within the standard value or the line is not
parallel to the edge of paper, conduct the following procedure.
[3]
C=8.5 1.5mm
[4]
I -284

FS-612
72-32 : Stapler movement motor (M11) (A4,1-stapling position).
Then turn OFF the main body.
gate)
Note
[1]

6. Loosen 2 adjustment screws [1] of the flat-stapling stopper /Fr and
2 adjustment screws [2] of the flat-stapling stopper /Rr, and adjust
the position of the flat-stapling stoppers referring to the engraved
lines [3] and [4].
standard.
[3]
[2]
[4]
15jmf3c010na
18.8 Staple position adjustment (Saddle stitching)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the center-stapling positions are not parallel to the paper edge.
Note
skipping.
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
1. Perform stapling to check that the line [2] connecting 2 staples [1]
is parallel to the edge of paper and also check that the gap amount
L is within a standard value.
Standard value: Gap amount L = 1mm or less
[3]
L
15jmf3c011na
I -285

FS-612
2. Check that "I.18.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment

plate /Up" and "I.18.6 Adjusting the mounting position of the
alignment plate /Lw" have been conducted.
gate)
Note
[1]

(Refer to F.13.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover)
6. Loosen 3 screws [2] of the alignment plate /Lw [1].
7. Adjust the position of the alignment plate /Lw frontward in the case
of [4] and backward in the case of [5], with reference to the
engraved line [3].
8. After adjustment, tighten 3 screws and perform stapling to check
that the center-stapling position is at the standard.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
15jmf3c012na
18.9 Staple up/down position adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is a problem in clinching of the stapler.
Note
skipping.
(2) Procedure
1. Perform the stapling operation and check to see if there is one of
the following clinching problems.
There is the buckling [1] of the staple.
The floating of the staple [2] is more than the standard value (L
= 1 mm).
The bending height of the staple [3] is more than the standard
value (L = 0.5 mm).
When there is any trouble, perform the following procedure.
[1]
[2]
L=1mm
[3]
L=0.5mm
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
15jmf3c015na
2. Turn ON the main body and enter the service mode to select
72-32 to move the stapler unit to the position for A4 and 1 staple,
and then turn OFF the main body.
gate)
Note
6. Remove the cartridge.
7. Remove the flat-stapling stopper release units /Fr and /Rr.
(Refer to F.13.4.2 Replacing the stapler unit)
8. Loosen the screws [3], 4 each, of the clinchers /Fr [1] and /Rr [2].
I -286

FS-612
9. Install the stapler positioning jig [1] to the cartridge set section.
[1]
15jmf3c016na
10. Rotate the gears [1] of the staplers downward and adjust the
clinchers to the positions where 2 pins [2] of the stapler positioning
jigs are inserted into the positioning holes [4] of the clinchers [3],
and then rotate the gears [1] downward further to fully insert the
pins into the positioning holes.
Note
Be sure to rotate the gears of the staplers carefully
because the pins of the stapler positioning jigs may be
clogged if they are inserted forcibly.
[1]
[3]
11. Tighten 4 screws on each clincher. (Refer to step 8.)

12. Rotate the gears of the staplers upward to pull out the pins of the
jig from the positioning holes of the clinchers, and then lift up and
remove the jig.
13. Reinstall the cartridge.
14. Check the stapling operation.
[4]
[2]
15jmf3c017na
18.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is misalignment in the edges of the fold paper.
Note
skipping.
Never loosen the screw [1] of the folding stopper. It is prohibited to be removed.
For ease of understand, the position of the folding stopper is shown lower than the actual position in the illustration.
I -287

FS-612
[1]
15jmf3c018na
(2) Procedure
1. Perform the folding operation on A3 paper and check to see if the
misalignment amount is within the standard value.
Standard value: A = 1mm or less
15jmf3c019na
gate)
Note
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
15jmf3c020na

5. Loosen 5 screws [2] on the folding stopper [1], and then adjust the
tilt of the folding stopper by referring to the engraved line [3].
Note
Never loosen the screw [4] of the folding stopper. It is
prohibited to be removed.
For ease of understand, the position of the folding stopper
is shown lower than the actual position in the illustration.
6. Tighten 5 screws [2], and then perform the folding operation and
check to see if the misalignment amount is within the standard
value.
18.11 Folding pressure adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment to change the power of the pressure of the folding roller.
I -288

FS-612
(2) Procedure
3. Remove the stacker unit cover.
(Refer to G.9.3.9 Stacker unit cover)
4. Change the mounting position of each 2 of pressure springs [3] at
the front [1] and the rear [2].
The folding pressure is:
A: Weak B: Normal C: Strong
Note
Hook each 4 of pressure springs [3] on the hook holes
with the same mark.
[1]
A
[3]
B
C
C
B
A
C
B
A
C
B
A
[2]
[3]
15jmf3c021na
18.12 Tri-folding position adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the 1st folding position or the 2nd folding position is not within the standard value.
(2) Procedure
1. Check that "I.18.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment" has been
conducted.
2. Perform the tri-folding operation and check to see if the tri-folding
positions are within the standard values.
When the tri-folding positions are not within the standard values,
c
a
15jmf3c022na
Standard value
A4S
81/2 x 11S
Standard
95mm
89mm
2mm
101mm
95mm
2mm
101mm
95mm
2mm
3. Turn ON the main body, adjust the 1st folding position (standard
"a") with the "Tri-Fold Position Adj." in "Finisher Adjustment" in the
service mode, and then perform the tri-folding operation.
4. If the 1st folding position "a" is within the standard, open the front
door and then pull out the stacker unit.
5. Open the tri-folding guide plate [1] and loosen 2 screws [2] of the
tri-folding stopper, and then adjust the positions of the tri-folding
stoppers [4] by referring to the engraved line [3].
6. Tighten 2 screws [2], and then perform the tri-folding operation and
check to see if the 2nd folding position "b" is within the standard.
[3]
[2]
[4]
[2]
Folding
position
[1]
15jmf3c023na
I -289

PK-512/513
19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-512/513

19.1 Punch hole position skew adjustment
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment if the edge of the paper and the punch hole position of the paper fed from PI is not in parallel.
(2) Procedure
1. Check the tilt by using the platen copy or Service Mode after
aligning paper in the main body paper feed tray with the side guide
plate and the rear guide plate.
2. Conduct the paper skew adjustment when too much tilt is checked.
3. As a sample for checking the tilt of the punch hole position,
conduct 3 sheets of punch mode printing for each simplex mode
and duplex mode.
4. Measure the punch hole positions on 3 sheets of printed paper to
check the tilt.
Tilt of the punch hole position (%) = (A-B)/C
15kjf3c001na
5. Open the front door of FS.

6. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the punch unit cover [1].
[1]
[2]
15kjf3c002na
7. Loosen the 4 adjustment screws [1] of PK.

8. Based on the division [2] of the mark, move the punch unit [3] to
the right and left only for the tilt amount of the punch hole position.
1 division : 0.5%
9. Tighten the 4 adjustment screws [1].
10. Install the punch unit cover.
11. Repeat step 3 to 10 until the tilt of the punch holes is corrected.
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15kjf3c003na
I -290

PI-502
20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PI-502

20.1 PI tilt adjustment (When PK is connected)
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment if the edge of the paper and the punch hole position of the paper fed from PI is not in parallel.
(2) Procedure
[1]
1. Set 3 sheets of paper in the tray of the PI, and then feed them in
the punch mode as samples.
2. Fold the sheets in half and check the tilt of the punch holes.
[1]: The front is wider
[2]: The back is wider
[2]
15jff3c004na
3. Open the front door of FS, and then loosen the screw [2] of the
guide plate [1].
4. Adjust the guide plate [1] in accordance with the misalignment of
the punch holes by referring to the markings [3].
The back is wider: Move to [4]
The front is wider: Move to [5]
5. Tighten the screw [2].
6. Repeat step 1 to 5 until the tilt of the punch holes is corrected.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
15jff3c005na
I -291

LS-505
21. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LS-505

21.1 Adjusting the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6)
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when uneven stack occurs.
Note
Before starting this operation, be sure to bring the stacker tray down to the bottom in advance.
(2) Procedure
1. With the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) turned on by hand, check
to see if the A section in the drawing left is 1.5mm to 3mm.
Rear end retaining

part motor (M2)
A
Paper exit guide plate
2. When not in the range of adjustment, remove the spring, loosen

the fixing screw of the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6), and make
adjustment by moving it from side to side so that the range of the
SD stroke becomes 6 0.5mm.
rOO

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when uneven stack occurs with the B4 or larger paper.
(2) Procedure
1. With the paper press solenoid /2 (SD7) turned OFF by hand, check
to see if the A section in the drawing left is 66 2mm.
ls502to3004c
2. When not in the range of adjustment, loosen the fixing screw of the
paper press solenoid /2 (SD7) and make adjustments by sliding it
up and down.
ls502to3005c

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when uneven stack occurs.
I -292

LS-505
(2) Procedure
1. With the paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) turned OFF by hand, check
to see if the A section in the drawing left is 50.1 1mm.
ls502fs3006c
paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) and make adjustments by sliding it
from side to side.
ls502fs3007c
21.4 Adjusting the job partition solenoid (SD2)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when uneven stack occurs with the shift paper and non-shift paper in the sort mode.
(2) Procedure
NG
1. With the job partition solenoid (SD2) turned ON by hand, check to

see if the job partition blade [1] in the drawing left does not
protrude from the metal frame [2].
OK
[1]
[2]
ls502to3009c
job partition solenoid (SD2) and make adjustments by sliding it
from side to side.
ls502fs3008c

(1) Usage
Adjustments are made when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and other optional devices.
I -293

LS-505
(2) Procedure
hole [3].
Note
[1]
[2]
[3]
a0h1f3c001ca
21.6 Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the grip standby position on the grip belt is improper to receive the paper or when the shift unit drive
abnormality occurs.
Note
When the shift unit drive abnormality (C-1204: 1st tandem, C-1214: 2nd tandem) occurs after replacing the LS control board
(LSCB), conduct the following adjustment.
(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the power of the main body.
2. Move the grip belt by hand and stop it at the position in which the
leading edge of the grip [1] is about 4mm from the stack exit guide
plate [2].
a: approx. 4mm
[2]
[1]
ls502fs3010c
3. Rotate VR1 [1] on the LS control board (LSCB) fully to the left.
[1]
ls502fs3011c
I -294

LS-505
4. Rotate VR1 [1] to the right and stop it at the position in which LED2
[2] turns ON from flashing.
Note
When LED2 is rotated too much from the turn-on position
to the flashing position, repeat the procedure starting at
Step2.
5. After completion of adjustment, turn off and on the power of the
main body and check if the interval "a" between the edge of the
grip and the stack exit guide plate is 8 2mm.
[2]
[1]
ls502fs3012c
6. When the interval is not within the standard value, change the
position of the sensor mounting plate [1]. Loosen 2 screws [2] and
slide the sensor mounting plate to the right [3] to widen the interval
"a". Slide the plate to the left [4] to narrow the interval.
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
I -295

FD-503
22. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FD-503

22.1 Roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position adjustment
(1) Usage
When the roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7), /4 (SD8) are changed, be sure to conduct this adjustment.
Note
The following adjustment steps show the steps for the roller solenoid /2 (SD6). The steps for the roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /3
(SD7) and /4 (SD8), are the same as the steps for the roller solenoid /2.
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the roller solenoid /2 (SD6) [1].
2. Measure the distance A [5] between the end face of the vertical
conveyance roller /Lt [3] and the right side (the opposite of the
paper through side) of the guide plate [4] when the roller solenoid /
2 (SD6) [1] is turned ON, and then tighten the screw [2] after
adjusting the distance so that it becomes the standard value.
Standard value: A = 0mm to 1.5mm
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
A
[5]
[4]
fd501fs3001c
22.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18).
I -296

FD-503
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 3 screws [2] on the 2nd folding roller solenoid mounting
plate [1].
2. Measure the gap A which the vertical conveyance roller /Lt [4] is
out from the guide plate [5] when the 2nd folding roller solenoid
(SD18) [3] is ON.
3. Adjust the mounting position so that the gap A is within the
standard value shown in the following table, and then loosen 3
screws [2].
Standard value: A = 4mm to 5mm
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[4]
A
[5]
[4]
a0h0f3c002ca
22.3 Punch Centering Adjustment

(1) Usage
When the front to rear position of the punch holes cannot be adjusted up to the specification in the paper width adjustment, be sure to conduct
this adjustment. (Refer to I.5.9.6 Paper Width Adjustment (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.))
(2) Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector [1] and 4 screws [2], and then remove
the cord support board /A [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs3002c
2. With the alignment plate /Fr [1] and the alignment plate /Rr [2]
moved to the center, loosen the 2 screws [3].
3. Measure the distances A and B using a ruler and adjust the
positions of the alignment plate /Fr [1] and the alignment plate /Rr
[2] so that the distances A and B become equal, and then tighten 2
screws [3].
fd501fs3003c
I -297

FD-503

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and other optional devices.
(2) Procedure
hole [3].
Note
[1]
[2]
[3]
a0h0f3c001ca
22.5 Paper feed control gear position adjustment (PI tray)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper size detection of PI does not work properly.
(2) Procedure
1. Install the regulation plate rack A [1] and the regulation rack B [2]
so that they are aligned with the reference hole of the detection
gear [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
fd501fs3008c
I -298

FD-503

[3]
2. Check the paper size VR [2] to ensure it is held by the 2 bosses on

the paper size VR mounting plate [1].
3. Install the paper size VR [2] so that the notch of its center hole is
set to the notch of the detection gear [3].
[1]
[2]
fd501fs3009c
[1]
4. Check to see if the regulation plate rack A [1], the regulation plate
rack B [2], the hole position of the detection gear [3] and the notch
position of the paper size VR [4] are in the correct position
respectively.
[2]
[3]
[4]
fd501fs3010c
22.6 Paper feed pick-up volume adjustment (PI tray)

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when multi-feed or paper jam occurs when feeding paper from the PI.
(2) Procedure
1. Slide 2 papers feed arm fixing levers [1] to inside, and insert the
shafts [2] into the holes [3] in the paper feed arm to secure the
paper feed arm [4].
[4]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs3011c
I -299

SD-506
23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-506

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when SD is not in a horizontal position.
(2) Procedure
hole [3].
Note
[1]
[2]
[3]
a0h2f3c001ca
23.2 Folding skew adjustment

(1) Usage
Adjust the skew in the center folding.
(2) Procedure
1. Perform the center folding operation for 5 sheets of A3 or 11 x 17
paper and check their skew "a".
Standard value a = 1.5mm
15anf3c002na
I -300

SD-506

[3]
[6]
[2]
[1]
2. Open the front door /Rt and pull out the folding unit.
3. Loosen the screw [1], adjust the alignment stopper /Rr2 [3] back
and forth by sliding the adjusting bracket [2] to right and left, and
Note
If the folding pattern on paper exited to the direction of
bundle exit tray front side [4] is [5], slide the adjusting
bracket [2] in the arrowed direction [6].
If the folding pattern is [7], slide the adjusting bracket [2]
in the arrowed direction [8].
By sliding the adjusting bracket [2] to 1mm right and left,
the alignment stopper /Rr2 [3] moves 1/3mm back and
forth.
[8]
4. Return the folding unit to the original position and repeat the steps
1 through 3 until the standard value can be obtained.
[5]
[7]
[4]
a0h2f3c002ca
23.3 Second folding position stabilization adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjustment is for adjusting the misalignment of the second folding position in tri-folding.
Note
This adjustment is to adjust the variation per each folding. Adjust the second folding position by following "I.5.9.22 Tri-Fold
Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)"
Be sure that the adjusting position is vary from the number of folding sheets.
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the tri-folding with A4S or 8 1/ x 11S, and check if the
2
interval "A" between the first folding and the second folding is
within the standard value.
Standard value A = 102.0mm 3mm (A4S)
Standard value A = 96.1mm 3mm (81/2 x 11S)
A
a0h2f3c003ca
I -301

SD-506

[2]
2. Open the front door /Rt and pull out the folding unit.
3. Loosen 2 screws [1] and move the stopper [2] in parallel back and
forth referring to the mark [3].
Note
Moving to the front side [4] makes the length between the
foldings longer.
Moving to the back side [5] makes the length between the
foldings shorter.
[1]
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until the standard value is obtained.
[4]
[3]
[5]
a0h2f3c004ca

(1) Usage
Adjust the misalignment between the staple position and the folding position.
(2) Procedure
1. Perform the saddle stitching operation for 25 to 30 sheets of A3 or
11 x 17 paper and check the misalignment "a" between the staple
position and the folding position.
Standard value a = 1mm
When the value is not within the standard value, conduct "(2).
Adjustment Procedure /1" then "(3). Adjustment Procedure /2" in
this order.
a
15anf3c005na
(3) Adjustment Procedure /1

Note
Be sure not to adjust over the allowable value since only the saddle stitching hold /Up is adjusted but the saddle stitching hold /
Lw is not.
When it cannot be adjusted by this simple adjustment (fine adjustment), be sure to conduct "(3). Adjustment Procedure /2".
1. Open the front door /Lt.
2. Install the M4 screw [1] obtained from the exterior and so on into
[2]
the adjustment screw hole [3] of the saddle stitching hold /Up [2]
[1]
with your fingers and tighten it slightly until it is contacted.
Note
Do not tighten the screw [1] too tight. Stop tightening
when it is contacted.
[4]
[5]

4. Rotate the screw [1] to move the position of the saddle stitching
hold /Up [2] on both of the stapler /Rt and /Lt for the length of the
misalignment "a".
Note
Rotating the screw [1] 1 revolution moves the saddle
stitching hold /Up 0.7mm (same width with staple).
When the screw [1] is tightened, the staple position moves
forward. When the screw [1] is loosened, the staple
position moves backward.
[3]
a0h2f3c005ca
5. While pushing the saddle stitching hold /Up [2] to the allowed
direction [5] and contacting it to the screw [1], tighten the screw [4].
6. Remove the screw [1] and return it to the original position.
7. Conduct a test print in procedure A, and repeat steps 2 to 6 until
the standard value is obtained.
I -302

SD-506
(4) Adjustment Procedure /2

1. Pull out the saddle stitching unit.
(Refer to F.17.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit)
[2] contact with the staplers and lock the clinchers [2].
[1]
[10] [4]
[2]
[2]
[3]
15anf3c006na
3. Install the M4 screw [1] obtained from the exterior and so on into
the adjustment screw hole [3] of the saddle stitching hold /Up [2]
with your fingers and tighten it slightly until it is contacted.
Note
[1]
4. Loosen the screws [4], [5] and [6].

5. Rotate the screw [1] to move the position of the saddle stitching
hold /Up [2] for the length of the misalignment "a".
Note
Rotating the screw [1] 1 revolution moves the saddle
stitching hold /Up 0.7mm (same width with staple).
[9]
[8] [7]
[6]
[5]
a0h2f3c006ca
6. While pushing the mounting plate [7] to the arrow-marked direction

[9] and contacting the saddle stitching hold /Up [2] to the screw [1],
tighten the screws [5].
7. While pushing the saddle stitching hold /Up [2] to the arrowmarked direction [10] and contacting the saddle stitching hold /Up
to the screw [1], tighten the screw [4], and then tighten the screw
[6].
8. Remove the screw [1] and return it to the original position.
9. Return the saddle stitching unit, and then repeat steps 2 to 8 until
the standard value can be obtained.
23.5 Stapler position adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a broken staple, a bent staple, or a defective staple occurs in stapling.
This adjustment adjusts the phase lag with the clincher at front and rear.
(2) Procedure
[4]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[1]
[2]
a0h2f3c007ca
1. Carry out stapling operation to check that the broken staple, the
bent staple, or the defective staple does not occur. If the defective
occurs, conduct the following procedure.
3. Install the M3 screw about 20mm long [3] into the adjustment
screw hole [2] of the stapler mounting bracket [1] with fingers and
tighten it slightly until it is contacted to the supporting bracket [4].
Note
5. Rotate the screw [3] and move the anteroposterior position of the
stapler to adjust the phase lag with the clincher.
Note
Rotating the screw [3] 1 revolution moves the stapler
0.5mm.
6. While pushing the stapler mounting bracket [1] to the back side [6]
and contacting the screw [3] to the supporting bracket [4], tighten
the screw [5].
I -303

SD-506
8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 until the defective staple does not occur.
23.6 Tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the staple break through the paper by stapling a few pages of booklet.
(2) Procedure
[3]
1. Carry out stapling operation with 2 sheets of papers, and check if

the staple break through the paper. If the paper is broken through,
perform the following steps.
2. Pull out the saddle stitching unit.
(Refer to F.17.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit)
3. Tilt the bundle arm [1] to the front.
4. Remove the staple cartridges [2] to the front.
5. Rotate the stapler move gear [3] to move the stapler assy inward,
then move them outward by approx. 30mm (the interval between
the stapler becomes approx. 60mm).
Note
Rotate the stapler move gear [3] to move the stapler assy
inward, then move them outward by approx. 30mm (the
interval between the stapler becomes approx. 60mm).
[2]
[1]
15anf3c009na
[1]
6. Remove the screw [1] and remove the sensor cover [2].
[2]
15anf3c010na

Note
When reinstalling the saddle stitching unit, be careful not
to let the connector [1] make contact with the main body.
[3]
8. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the saddle stitching guide
plate [3].
[1]
[2]
15anf3c011na
I -304

SD-506

[3]
[2] contact with the staplers [3] and lock the clinchers [2]. At the
moment the clinchers are locked, check if the clinchers do not roll
from side to side and the gap between the staplers and the
clinchers equals to the standard value.
Standard value "a": 0.3 0.1mm (2 sheets of 64g/m2 papers can
pass through the gap while 3 sheets cannot.)
10. When the gap is out of the standard value, loosen the screw [1]
counterclockwise and lower the clinchers once. Then perform the
adjustment the following procedure.
[2]
[1]
15anf3c012ca
[3]
[5]
[1]
11. Loose the 4 screws [1].

12. Adjust the gap between the staplers and the clinchers so that the
gap equals the standard value while loosening (gap becomes
narrower) /tightening (gap becomes wider) the adjusting screw/Rt
[2] and /Lt [3] in the same manner.
Note
Be sure to perform the adjustment for both left and right
side of each clincher/Rt [4] and /Lt [5] so that the stapler
and the clinchers are parallel to each other.
When the adjustment is completed, be sure to tighten the
fixing screws [1].
[2]
[4]
13. Put the saddle stitching unit back. Then carry out stapling
operation with 2 sheets of papers, and check if the staple does not
break through the paper.
[2] [3]
15anf3c013ca
23.7 Roller cutter skew adjustment

(1) Usage
Adjust the skew when it occurs at trimming.
I -305

SD-506
(2) Procedure
1. Check the trimming parallelism by trimmng center folded or senter
stitched paper if it is within the standard value.
Standard value:
"a" = 1.0mm or less (2 to 15 sheets)
"a" = 1.5mm or less (16 to 50 sheets)
Note
Remove the staple to check it for 2 sheets to 15 sheets.
a0h2f3c008ca
[1]

3. Loosen the screw [2] of the registration claw.
4. Turn the gear flange [4] with holding the shaft [3], adjust the
registration claw /Rt [1] back and forth, and then tighten the screw
[2].
[2]
[4]
[3]
a0h2f3c009ca
5. Check point for the adjustment

Note
Move the registration claw /Rt to the front side in case the
skew is [2] to the paper exit direction [1], or move the claw
to the rear side in case the skew is [3].
[2]
6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the standard value is obtained.
[1]
[3]
a0h2f3c010ca
23.8 Trimming adjustment

(1) Usage
Adjust the gap when a large gap occurs at trimming thick books.
Note
This adjustment is effective for the thick book more than 30 pages.
I -306

SD-506
(2) Procedure
1. Check the trimming gap a by trimming the center folded or senter
stitched book which has 31 pages or more.
Conduct the following steps if the gap is large.
Note
There is no standard value of trimming gap for 31 pages
or more. Refer to the standard value for 16 pages to 30
pages, which is 1.5mm.
a0h2f3c011ca
[3]
[1]
[2]

3. Remove the slope unit. (Refer to F.17.3.2 Replacing the slope unit)
4. Loosen the 2 screws [2] each of the registration claw /Rt and /Lt
[1], move the fold retaining bracket [3] down to the bottom, and
then tighten the screws [2].
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 until the allowable value can be obtained.
a0h2f3c012ca
I -307

PB-503
24. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PB-503

24.1 Clamp sub scan direction alignment adjustment
(1) Usage
Carry out the adjustment when the following conditions occur.
The fore edges near the top or the bottom of the book do not line up perfectly.
The pages come off from the cover paper near the top or the bottom of the book due to insufficient gluing to the spine of inside papers.
An improper gap between the reference plate and the sub scan alignment plate causes misalignment of the pages in the sub scan direction.
To correct the misalignment, perform "I.5.9.35 Clamp FD Position Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)" from Service Mode Finisher
Adjustment Perfect Binder Adjustment.
(2) Procedure
[2]
[5]
[3]
1. Remove the SC cover /Fr. (Refer to G.15.2.11 SC cover /Fr)

3. Adjust the position of the sub scan alignment plate by moving the
clamp entrance assy [2] in the direction of the arrow [4] or [5] to
change the installation position of the clamp entrance assy against
the coupling bracket [3].
Note
Be sure to hold down the coupling bracket [3] when
moving the clamp entrance assy, as the assy is heavy and
hard to move.
[6] shows the book exit direction;
a. A misalignment occurs near the bottom side (front side
when inside paper alignment is performed)
[7]: Move the clamp entrance assy [2] in the direction of
the arrow [4] to make the gap at the front side narrower.
b. A misalignment occurs near the top side (back side
when inside paper alignment is performed)
[8]: Move the clamp entrance assy [2] in the direction of
the arrow [5] to make the gap at the front side wider.
When moving the clamp entrance assy [2] in the direction
of the arrow [5], the misalignment of the inside papers
occurs at both the top and bottom sides. To correct the
misalignment, perform "I.5.9.35 Clamp FD Position Adj.
(Perfect Binder Adjustment)" from Service Mode
Finisher Adjustment Perfect Binder Adjustment after
this adjustment.
[1]
[4]
[7]
4. After performing the adjustment, make a test print and binding to

check that the inside papers are perfectly lined up in the sub scan
direction.
[8]
Top
[6]
Bottom
a075f3e014ca
24.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment

(1) Usage
The top and bottom edges of inside papers do not line up and it cannot be corrected even after performing "Clamp section CD alignment
width adjustment" and "SC section CD alignment width adjustment" in the service mode.
The cover and the inside papers are not aligned.
Note
The misalignment of cover and inside papers can also be adjusted in "I.24.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment" and "I.
24.12 Cover paper table positioning"
I -308

PB-503
(2) Procedure
[2]
[4]
1. Pull out the clamp unit.

2. Move the clamp alignment plates /Fr [1] and /Rr [2] inward as far
as they go [3].
Note
Be sure to hold both clamp alignment plates/Fr [1] and /Rr
[2], and move them slowly to maintain the proper
engagement of the belt and the pulleys.
[1]
3. Loosen 2 screws [4] and adjust the position of the clamp alignment
plates/Fr [1] and /Rr [2] by moving them back and forth.
Note
a. When top edge of cover paper runs off that of inside
papers [6]: Move the clamp alignment plates/Fr [1] and /Rr
[2] backward by the same distance.
b. When bottom edge of cover paper runs off that of inside
papers [7]: Move the clamp alignment plates/Fr [1] and /Rr
[2] forward by the same distance.
When moving 2 clamp alignment plates in the same
direction, always move them by the same distance.
[3]
[6]
[7]
[5]
a075f3c015ca

check that the top and bottom edges of inside papers are perfectly
lined up and the cover edges neatly align with edges of inside
papers.
24.3 Pellet supply arm angle adjustment

(1) Usage
The pellet is supplied to the tank improperly and it spills out of the tank.
The pellet supply arm contacts with the other parts when the arm is in its home position.
Note
Be sure to turn Off the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1) of the main body in advance.
(2) Procedure
[4]
[1]
[3]
[8]
[2]
[5] [12]
[10]
[13]
[14]
[11]
[9]
[6]
1. Remove the rear cover /Rt.

(Refer to G.15.2.5 Rear cover /Rt)
3. Adjust the home position of the pellet supply arm by moving the
mounting plate [3] of the pellet supply arm home sensor (PS39) [2]
referring to the engraved lines [4] on the mounting plate [3].
a. Move the mounting plate in the direction of the arrow [5] to make
the pellet supply arm [6] home position become closer to the glue
tank [7].
b. Move the mounting plate in the direction of the arrow [8] to make
the pellet supply arm [6] home position become further from the
glue tank [7].
Note
Adjust the position of the pellet supply arm so that the
distance between the arm and the edge of the metal frame
is 0mm to 3mm: A when the arm comes to the home
position.
Do not move the mounting plate excessively or it contacts
with the other parts.
[15]
[7]
a15xf3c001ca

5. Adjust the pellet supply position by moving the mounting plate [11]
of the pellet supply arm upper limit sensor (PS38) [10] referring to
the engraved lines [12] on the mounting plate.
a. Move the mounting plate in the direction of the arrow [13] to
make the angle range of the pellet supply arm [6] become
narrower.
b. Move the mounting plate in the direction of the arrow [14] to
make the angle range of the pellet supply arm [6] become wider.
Note
Adjust the position of the pellet supply arm so that the
distance between the arm and the edge of the metal frame
is +2mm to -4mm: B when the arm comes to the home
position.
Do not move the mounting plate excessively or it contacts
with the other parts.
6. Turn on the main power switch (SW1) and the power switch
(SW2).
I -309

PB-503
a15xf3c002ca
7. Carry out the output check "77-43" of I/O check in the service
mode to detect the home position of the pellet supply arm and
check if the home position is appropriate.
8. Move the pellet supply arm to the pellet supply position using the
output check "77-44" of I/O check in the service mode and check if
the pellet supply position is appropriate.
Note
For restrictions or cautions of the output check "77-44",
refer to the I/O check mode.
When it is hard to check the supply position, turn OFF the
sub power switch (SW) and the main power switch (SW1)
and remove the suction unit [15].
(Refer to G.15.2.20 Glue tank unit)
9. When the test result is not good, turn off the sub power switch
(SW2) and the main power switch (SW1) and repeat steps 2 to 8.
a15xf3c003ca
24.4 Glue apply roller gap adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the gap between the metal surface of the glue apply roller and the spine of inside papers.
Changing the gap allows you to adjust the amount of glue applied to the spine.
Note
Reference values: The thickness of glue layer formed on the roller is about 2mm with the gap of 1.8mm.
CAUTION
The glue tank unit is extremely hot immediately after turning off the main power switch (SW1) or the power switch (SW2) of the
main body.
To prevent burn injuries, make sure to leave the unit until it cools enough before performing the adjustment.
(2) Procedure
[2]
[4]
3. Adjust the stopper [4] position by moving it up and down with 2
screws [3] referring to the engraved lines [2], then tighten the
screws [1].
Note
The stopper [4] moves down 0.5mm by tightening the
screws [3] for 1 rotation and it moves up by loosening the
screws.
Raising the stopper brings the glue apply roller upward
making the gap become smaller, which decreases the
amount of glue applied.
Lowering the stopper brings the glue apply roller down
making the gap become larger, which increases the
amount of glue applied.
Do not lower the stopper excessively. Too much gap
causes the glue application to fail.
When raising or lowering the stopper, be sure to adjust 2
screws [3] for the same amount and maintain the
horizontal state of the stopper.
[1]
[3]
a15xf3c004ca

check that the amount of glue applied to the book spine is
appropriate.
24.5 Cover paper glue gap adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjustment is to adjust the gap between the surface of the cover paper glue material (scraper /Fr) and the spine of inside paper.
Adjust the glue amount applied to the book spine by changing the gap.
There are 2 types of gap, one is for the thick coat mode and the other is for the thin coat mode. *1
I -310

PB-503
Note
The gap between the scraper /Fr and the spine is 2.5mm in the thin coat mode and 2.5mm in the thick coat mode. *1
When the gap in the thick coat mode is adjusted, the gap in the thin coat mode is changed. Therefore, be sure to adjust the gap
in the thin coat mode also after adjusting the gap in the thick coat mode.
*1 The thick coat mode is not used for 1200/1200P/1051.
CAUTION
The glue tank unit is extremely hot immediately after turning off the main power switch (SW1) or the power switch (SW2) of the
main body.
To prevent burn injuries, make sure to leave the unit until it cools enough before performing the adjustment.
(2) Gap adjustment procedure in thin coat mode

[6]
[3]
[5]
Note
Be sure to hold the right arm [2] of the glue tank unit to
move it.
[4]
2. Loosen 1 screw [3].

3. Adjust the thin coat stopper [6] position by moving it up and down
with the screw [5] referring to the engraved line [4], then tighten the
screw [3] hitting it against the screw [5].
Note
The thin coat stopper has a scale marked at 1mm interval.
The thin coat stopper [6] moves down 0.5mm by
tightening the screw [5] for 1 rotation and it moves up by
loosening the screw.
Raising the thin coat stopper brings the cover paper glue
part closer to the book spine and it makes the scraped-off
glue amount larger, which reduces the glue amount
applied to the book spine.
If the applied glue is thin and the cover does not stick to
the book body, lowering the thin coat stopper (increasing
the gap between the cover paper glue part and the book
spine) increases the amount of glue applied to the book
spine.
If the applied glue is thick and the glue comes out too
much, lifting the thin coat stopper (decreasing the gap
between the cover paper glue part and the book spine)
reduces the amount of glue applied to the book spine.
[1]
[2]
a15xf3c005ca

check that the glue amount applied to the book spine is
appropriate.
(3) Gap adjustment procedure in thick coat mode

Note
Be sure to hold the right arm [2] of the glue tank unit to
move it.
[4]
[1]
[5]
[6]

3. Adjust the thick coat stopper [6] position by moving it up and down
with the screw [5] referring to the engraved line [4], then tighten the
screw [3] hitting it against the screw [5].
Note
The thick coat stopper [6] moves down 0.5mm by
tightening the screws [5] for 1 rotation and it moves up by
loosening the screws.
The thick coat stopper has a scale marked at 1mm
interval. The right and left scales shift 0.5mm vertically.
When adjusting it, be sure to move it by 1mm and check
the position.
When raising or lowering the thick coat stopper, be sure
to maintain its horizontal state.
Raising the thick coat stopper brings the cover paper glue
part closer to the book spine and it makes the scraped-off
glue amount larger, which reduces the glue amount
applied to the book spine.
If the applied glue is thin and the cover does not stick to
the book body, lowering the thick coat stopper (increasing
the gap between the cover paper glue part and the book
spine) increases the amount of glue applied to the book
spine.
If the applied glue is thick and the glue comes out too
much, lifting the thick coat stopper (decreasing the gap
[3]
[2]
a15xf3c006ca
I -311

PB-503
between the cover paper glue part and the book spine)
reduces the amount of glue applied to the book spine.
check that the glue amount applied to the book spine is
appropriate.
5. Conduct the gap adjustment in the thin coat mode.
24.6 Glue tank movement rail tilt adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the parallelism between the glue tank movement rail and the spine of inside papers.
Perform this when glue is not applied uniformly on the spine, especially when amount of glue applied is different between the top and bottom
side of the book.
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 3 screws [2] of the bracket /Rt [1].
2. Loosen 2 screws [4] of the bracket /Lt [3].
3. Move the brackets /Rt [1] and /Lt [3] up and down by turning the
screws [7] and [8] to adjust the height of the glue tank movement
rails/Rt [9] and /Lt [10] referring to the engraved lines [5] and [6] on
the brackets /Rt and /Lt.
Note
Be sure to turn the screws [7] and [8] by the same amount
so that the brackets/Rt [1] and /Lt [2] move the same
amount.
When the glue applied to the spine gets lower toward the
bottom side, lower the brackets/Rt [1] and /Lt [2].
[1]
[5]
[2]
[9]

check that the glue is applied to the book spine uniformly.
[3]
[7]
[10]
[4]
[6]
[8]
a075f3c020ca
24.7 Cover paper folding plate nipping adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the position of the cover paper folding plate/Lt to apply pressure to the cover paper.
Perform this adjustment when the cover paper is not folded at the right angle (when the book spine inclines).
I -312

PB-503
(2) Procedure
[3]
[6]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[5]
1. Turn the knob [1] to move the cover paper alignment plate/Fr [2]
backward.
2. Loosen the screw [3] and adjust the actuator [6] position of the
cover paper folding plate HP sensor /Lt (PS49) [5] by moving the
actuator right and left referring to the engraved lines [4].
Note
a. When the book spine inclines as [8]: Move the actuator
[6] to the left.
b. When the book spine inclines as [9]: Move the actuator
[6] to the right.
check that the book spine ends form right angle and no inside
papers come off from the cover paper.
Note
At the test print, print more than 50 sheets, or you cannot
check the book spine.
[8]
[7]
[9]
a075f3c021ca
24.8 Cover paper folding plate parallel adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the parallelism between the cover paper folding plate/Rt and /Lt.
Perform the adjustment when the book spine corners are not uniformly formed from the top and the bottom.
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
1. Remove the cover paper tray. (Refer to G.15.2.28 Cover paper

tray)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the cover /Rt [2].
[1]
a075f3c022ca
I -313

PB-503

[9]
[8]

4. Put a hand from under the cover paper tray section and turn the
knob [2] to move the cover paper folding plate /Rt [3] and /Lt [4] so
that the gap between them becomes a few millimeters [5].
5. Slowly turn the knob [2] in reverse until the cover paper folding
plate/Rt [3] and /Lt [4] contact each other without any gap at both
front side [6] and rear side [7].
Note
Make sure that the pressure drive plate/Rt [8] does not run
on the pressure assist plate [9].
Do not turn the knob [2] too much. Doing so brings the
plates into pressure-applying state making the position
adjustment impossible.
[1]
[7]
6. Tighten 4 screws [1].

check that the book spine ends are forming right angle from the
top and the bottom.
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
a075f3c023ca
24.9 Cover paper table up down belt adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform the adjustment when the following conditions occur.
The cover paper table up down drive system does not synchronize successfully.
The front and rear cover paper table belts do not synchronize smoothly.
(2) Check point

Check that the pin [1] is placed on the center of the central sector of the gear [2].
When the pin is out of the center, perform the following adjustment.
[2]
[1]
a075f3c030ca
I -314

PB-503
(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.15.2.5 Rear cover /Rt)

Move the gear [2] to the right [3] and remove the pin [4].
Move the gear [2] to the left [6] and install the E-ring [1].
Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
(SW2) to let the system perform the initial operation.
7. Insert the pin [4], adjust the gear [2] so that it aligns with the gear
inside, and slide the gear [2] to the right.
8. Install the E-ring [5] Install the rear cover
9. Install the rear cover.
[5] [4]
[6]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
a075f3c024cb
24.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the position of the cover paper alignment plate/Fr in the main scan direction and its perpendicularity against the main scan
direction.
Perform the adjustment when the cover paper and the inside papers are vertically or relatively misaligned.
Note
The misalignment of cover and inside paper can also be adjusted in "I.24.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment"
and "I.24.12 Cover paper table positioning".
I -315

PB-503
(2) Procedure
[8]
[7]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[2] [6]
[4]
[8]
[7]
1. Loosen the screw [1] and [2].

2. Adjust the position and angle of the cover paper alignment plate /
Fr [9] by moving the mounting brackets /Rt [5] and /Lt [6] to the
front [7] and to the back [8] referring to the engraved lines [3] and
[4].
Note
Do not move the mounting bracket /Lt [6] excessively, or
the plate contacts with the gear [10].
a. When the cover paper runs off the top edge of inside
paper [12]: Move the mounting brackets /Rt [5] and /Lt [6]
forward [7] by the same distance.
b. When the cover paper runs off the bottom edge of
inside paper [13]: Move the mounting brackets /Rt [5] and /
Lt [6] backward [8] by the same distance.
c. When 3 edges of cover paper misalign with the edges of
inside paper [14]: Move the mounting bracket /Rt [5]
backward [8] and move the mounting bracket /Lt [6]
forward [7].
d. When 3 edges of cover paper misalign with the edges of
inside paper [15]: Move the mounting bracket /Rt [5]
forward [7] and move the mounting bracket /Lt [6]
backward [8].
check that the cover paper is neatly aligned with the inside papers.
[10]
[9]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[11]
a075f3c025ca
24.11 Cover paper cutting skew adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform the adjustment when the roller cutter trims the cover paper askew.
(2) Procedure
[2]
[1]
1. Remove the scraps box.

a075f3c026ca
I -316

PB-503

[5]
[2]
3. Loosen the screw [1] and adjust the position of the roller cutter
assy [3] by moving it to the right [4] and the left [5] referring to the
engraved lines [2].
Note
When the length of the back cover is shorter than the
length of the front cover at the bottom side:
Move the roller cutter assy [3] to the right side [4].
When the length of the back cover is longer than the
length of the front cover at the bottom side:
Move the roller cutter assy [3] to the left side [5].
[4]
[1]
[3]

check that the cover paper is trimmed correctly.
a075f3c027ca
24.12 Cover paper table positioning

(1) Usage
This adjusts the relative position between the clamp unit and the cover table unit in the main scan direction.
Perform the adjustment when the cover paper is vertically misaligned with the inside papers.
Note
The misalignment of cover and inside paper can also be adjusted in "I.24.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment"
and "I.24.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment."
(2) Procedure
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]

2. Adjust the position of the positioning pin/Fr [3] by moving it forward
[4] and backward [5] referring to the engraved lines [2].
Note
a. When the cover paper runs off the top edge of inside
paper [7]: Move the positioning pin /Fr [3] to the back [5].
b. When the cover paper runs off the bottom edge of
inside paper [8]: Move the positioning pin /Fr [3] to the
front [4].
check that the cover paper is neatly aligned with the inside paper.
[1]
[7]
[8]
[6]
a075f3c028ca
24.13 Cover paper tray pick-up adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform the adjustment when no feed from the cover paper tray occurs frequently.
I -317

PB-503
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pull out the cover paper tray.

Remove all remaining cover papers from the cover paper tray.
Loosen a screw [1].
Push the stopper [3] in the direction of the arrow with the release
lever [2] retracted, and secure the stopper [3] with the screw [1].
Note
After performing the adjustment, loosen the screw [1] and
retighten it after releasing the stopper [3].
5. Install the cover paper tray, and pull out the tray again after the
cover paper lift plate has lifted to the upper limit, which can be
judged by the operating sound of the cover paper lift motor.
rails and pull the cover paper tray further out. (Refer to G.15.2.28
Cover paper tray)
[2]
[1]
[3]
a075f3c001ca
7. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the paper feed cover [2].

[1]
[2]
a075f3c002ca
I -318

PB-503

[1]
[5]
8. Pull the plunger [2] of the pick-up solenoid [1] and measure the
gap between the pick-up roller [3] and the cover paper lift plate [4]
with a thickness gauge.
Measured value A = 0.1mm to 1.5mm
If it is not within the standard value, follow step 9 and after.
Note
Before loosening the screw, be sure to mark off the
position of the pick-up solenoid [1] by drawing a line [6].
[2]
10. With the plunger [2] pulled, adjust the position of the pick-up
solenoid [1] so that the gap between the pick-up roller [3] and the
cover paper lift plate [4] falls into the specified range.
11. Tighten the screw [5] to fix the pick-up solenoid [1].
12. Load cover paper on the cover paper tray and close the tray.
13. Make a test print and binding selecting the perfect binding as the
binding method and the PB cover paper tray as the cover feeder.
Check that the no feed error does not occur.
[6]
[3]
[4]
a075f3c003ca
24.14 Cover paper tray pick-up roller height adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when no-feed, crimp of leading edge, or paper jam occurs frequently when feeding the cover papers from the cover
paper tray, or when curled cover papers need to be used.
This adjusts the vertical position of the cover paper pick-up roller. Changing the roller position changes the vertical gap between the top paper
surface on the tray and the bottom surface of the cover paper feed roller.
Note
With this adjustment, cover paper pick-up ability changes accordingly. When the adjustment is completed, make sure to
perform the cover paper feed pick-up amount adjustment to check the pick-up amount.
I -319

PB-503
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
[2]
[1]

Loosen a screw [1].
Note
[3]
a075f3c004ca
[1]
[2]
[1]
rails and pull the cover paper tray further out. (Refer to G.15.2.28
Cover paper tray)
7. Pull out the tray again. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the paper
feed cover [2].
a075f3c005ca
8. Check that the actuator [1] of the pick-up roller assy is aligned with
the center [3] of the cover paper tray upper limit sensor (PS74) [2].
9. Remove the pick-up roller section [4]. (Refer to F.18.3.1
Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation
roller assy)
[2]
[3]
[4]
a075f3c006ca
I -320

PB-503

[2]
[3]
[4]
10. Mark off the position of the cover paper tray upper limit sensor
mounting plate [1] by drawing a line [2].
11. Remove 2 screws [3] and temporarily install the cover paper upper
limit sensor mounting plate [1] with the screws through the
elongated screw holes [4].
12. Make vertical adjustments of the cover paper upper limit sensor
mounting plate [1] and fasten it with the screws [3].
Note
Be sure to install the cover paper tray upper limit sensor
mounting plate [1] so that it keeps in a horizontal position.
Reference:
Raising the position of the cover paper tray upper limit
sensor brings the pick-up roller [5] down (It increases the
vertical gap [7] between the paper feed roller [6] and the
pick-up roller [5].)
Lowering the position of the cover paper tray upper limit
sensor brings up the pick-up roller [5] (reduces the
vertical gap [7] between the cover paper feed roller [6] and
the pick-up roller [5]).
When crimp of leading edge or paper jam occurs, or when
curled cover paper (concave curl) need to be used, raise
the cover paper tray upper limit sensor mounting plate.
When feeding warped cover paper (convex curl), lower the
cover paper tray upper limit sensor mounting plate.
[1]
[1]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[7]
a075f3c007ca
13. Reinstall the pick-up roller assembly.

Note
Be sure to install the cover paper tray upper limit sensor
mounting plate [1] so that it keeps in a horizontal position.
binding method and PB cover paper tray as the cover feeder.
Check that the errors do not occur. If the errors still occur, repeat
steps 9 to 15.
16. Check the cover paper tray paper feed pick-up adjustment. (Refer
to I.24.13 Cover paper tray pick-up adjustment)
24.15 Cover paper tray separation pressure adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when no-feed or multi-feed from the cover paper tray occurs frequently.
Note
A no-feed error tends to occur in low temperature environment, while a multi-feed error does in high temperature environment.
Perform this adjustment with this in mind.
Do not make an excessive adjustment. Doing so may reverse the respective symptoms.
I -321

PB-503
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the cover paper tray.
2. Change the position of the spring adjustment lever [1]. The
separation pressure is strengthened when the lever moves to the
direction [2] and is weakened when the lever moves to the
direction [3].
Weak: A double feed jam is improved.
Strong: A no feed jam is improved.
Reference:
The spring load changes in increments of about 10%.
3. Set the cover paper tray.
Check that no-feed errors or multi-feed errors do not occur.
5. If the errors still occur, repeat steps 1 to 4.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075f3c008ca
24.16 Cover paper tray Centering Adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the deviation between the cover paper and the inside papers is out of spec.
Standard value: 0 1mm or less (aligned edges), 0 1.5mm or less (trimmed edges)
(2) Procedure
Check how much the cover paper misaligns with the inside papers.
2. Pull out the cover paper tray.
3. Remove all remaining cover papers from the cover paper tray.
4. When the cover paper guides [1] are set at the small-size position,
extend them.
6. Move the cover paper guides [1] and adjust the center position
based on the misalignment amount checked at step1, referring to
the marking-off line [3].
7. Tighten 2 screws [2].
Check that the misalignment amount falls into the specified range.
Standard value:
0 1mm or less (aligned edges)
0 1.5mm or less (trimmed edges)
10. If the value falls outside the range, repeat the steps 2 to 9.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075f3c009ca
24.17 Cover paper tray lift plate horizontal adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the jam, no feed, or the folded paper occurs in the cover paper tray.
I -322

PB-503
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Loosen a screw [1].
Note
[2]
[1]
[3]
a075f3c010ca
[2]
[1]
6. Check if the cover paper lift plate [3] is placed horizontally using
the engraved lines on the near side [1] and the far side [2] of the
tray. If the plate is not horizontal, perform step7 and the steps that
follow.
[3]
a075f3c011ca
I -323

PB-503
7. Remove 6 screws [1] of the cover paper tray front cover [3].
8. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the cover paper tray
front cover [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
a075f3c012ca
I -324

PB-503
9. Lift up the pick-up roller [1].

10. Move the cover paper guides [2] to the positions for the smallest
paper size.
11. Remove the screw [3] and tighten it through the elongated screw
hole [4] temporarily.
12. Loosen the screw [5] while supporting the pulley mounting plate [6]
by hand, and correct the tilt of the cover paper lift plate [8] referring
to the engraved lines [7].
13. Check that the cover paper lift plate [8] is placed horizontally, and
secure the plate with the screw [5] and [9].
Note
When tightening the screws [5] and [9], check that the
wire [10] has not come off the pulley or not crossed.
[9]
[5]
[3]
14. Pull down the pick-up roller [1].

16. Make a test and binding selecting the perfect binding as the
Check that cover papers are fed normally without any jam.
[4]
[8]
[7]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[6]
a075f3c013ca
24.18 Height adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the PB is not in a horizontal position or when the height of PB is not equal to the main body and the other
options.
I -325

PB-503
(2) Procedure
[2]
[3]
1. Loosen the nut [2] of the caster /B [1] at 2 places.

2. Rotate the screw [3] at 2 places for adjusting the height of the PB
left side.
3. Conduct the height adjustment by inserting the driver to the holes
[6] and [7] on each of 4 ratchet section [5] of the casters /A [4] and
moving it back and forth. It goes up with the hole [6] and goes
down with the hole [7].
Note
comes off.
When the caster /A [4] is not on the ground, fix the caster
so that the ratchet does not spin out.
Be sure to adjust so that every casters /A and /B are on
the ground.
[1]
4. Secure the screw [3] of the caster /B [1] at 2 places and tighten the
nut [2].
[6]
[7]
[5]
[4]
a15xf3c007ca
I -326

RU-506
25. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-506

25.1 Straight gate solenoid (SD1) position adjustment
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the straight gate solenoid (SD1).
(2) Procedure
[1]
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
1. Turn OFF the straight gate solenoid (SD1) manually and check
that its edge [1] is above the guide plate [2]. At the same time turn
ON the plunger and check the edge [3] of the straight is below the
guide plate [4].
a0get3c021ca
[2]
2. When it is not within the adjustment range, loosen 2 fixing screws

[2] and slide upward/downward the SD1 [1] to adjust the position.
a0gef3c001ca
25.2 Position adjustment of the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2).
I -327

RU-506
(2) Procedure
[2]
[3] [6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[7]
a0get3c024ca

[2] and slide SD2 [1] to left/right to adjust the position.
[1]
[2]
1. Turn ON the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2) [2] manually and
check that its edge [3] is inside the folded area [6] of the guide
plate [5] of the paper re-feed roller[4].
Note
a0gef3c002ca
25.3 Position adjustment of the stack switching solenoid (SD3)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the stack switching solenoid (SD3).
I -328

RU-506
(2) Procedure
[2]
[3]
1. Turn OFF the plunger [1] of the stack switching solenoid (SD3)
manually and check that the driven roller [2] is in contact with the
paper re-feed roller [3]. Then turn ON to check that the gap
between them is same as or lager than the standard value "a".
Standard value "a": The gap between the driven roller [2] and the
re-feed roller [3] is 2mm or more.
Note
[1]
[4]
[2]
a0get3c027ca

[2] and slide SD3 [1] to left/right to adjust the position.
[1]
a0gef3c003ca
25.4 Position adjustment of the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4)
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid.
I -329

RU-506
(2) Procedure
[5]
[6]
[2]
1. Be sure to fix the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid assy at the
position where the roller [4] installed to the drive shaft [3] of the
solenoid starts pushing the mounting bracket [6] of the stacker
entrance roller [5] with the plunger [1] touching with the mounting
bracket [2].
Note
[4]
[3]
[1]
[7] a0get3c030ca

[2] and slide upward/downward the SD4 [1] to adjust the position.
[2]
[1]
a0gef3c004ca
I -330
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 1. OUTLINE
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE
1. OUTLINE
1.1 Precautions on rewriting the firmware
(1) ISW execution procedures
When executing the ISW over the entire system, be sure to execute it in the order given below. (To minimize the occurrence of malfunction
resulting from the mismatch of the firmware version)
Step
Type of programs
FD(H), FS-521(N1), FS-531(N2), FS-612(N2), SD(B), LS 1st tandem (S1), LS 2nd tandem (S2), RU-509(R1), RU-506(R2),
PB(J), DF(F) ,GP (G)
Printer control (C)
Overall control (I)
Note
After replacing the OACB, be sure to conduct the ISW of the image control (Collective (I0)) first. The main body turns ON
abnormally if the overall control firmware is not in the OACB.
Rewriting firmware of IC should be conducted by I.6.4 Firmware version of IC
(2) DIPSW and toggle SW setting on the boards

Note
Whenever the FNSCB (FS-521), FDCB, SDCB, LSCB, or PBCB is replaced, be sure to make the main body model setting using
the DIPSW (FD, FS, SD, PB) (Refer to L.2.12.1 FD control board (FDCB), L.2.6.1 FNS control board (FNSCB), L.2.13.1 SD control
board (SDCB), L.2.14.1 PB control board (PBCB)) or using the LS toggle SW (Refer to G.12.2.4 Caution when setting models
using toggle SW) then execute the ISW.
(3) Connecting short connector when rewriting firmware

Be sure to connect the jumper connector to the post-processing option by following the table below.
Machine
type
GP-501
Short
connector
connection
RU-506
RU-509
LS-505
FD-503
SD-506
PB-503
FS-521
FS-531 /
FS-612
Not required When using Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required
Not
GP-501 +
required*1
RU-506,
Required *2
remove the
connector B
(CN6) and
connect the
blue
connector to
the board.
*1 Not required when RU-509 is connected.

*2 Required when FS-531, FS-612 is directly connected to the main body.
(4) Checksum check

The firmware data is supplied in sets with the execution program and the sum check file.
When rewriting the firmware, the error detection can be performed by calculating the file checksum using the dedicated tool ISWTrans_G.
When conducting the ISW regarding the image process (Collective(I0)), be sure to perform the checksum check in advance.
1.2 Firmware data flow

The following shows the flow of the ISW data.
USB memory

GP controller PCB
1.3 Main body setting for ISW

There are the following 2 ways for settings on the main body side.
(1) Type of setting

Power ON mode
J -1
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 1. OUTLINE
This mode is used when the firmware is not installed to the overall control board (OACB) or when it is damaged. In this condition, ISW of
the OACB is possible when sub power switch (SW2) is turned ON.
Service Mode
This mode is used when the firmware of the OACB is installed properly.
(2) When in the version up of the program

Target board
Display when the power is turned ON
Mode
Overall control board
Normal
Service mode
Other boards
Normal
Service mode
(3) When writing new firmware (When replacing board and rewriting firmware failed)
Target board
Display when the power is turned ON

Power save LED blinks in orange
Mode
Power ON mode
No display on touch panel

Other boards
Error code display
Service Mode
(1) For the overall control board (OACB), when something is wrong with the firmware or no firmware is written, the normal start-up cannot be
made. In this condition, the power save LED blinks in orange when power switch is turned ON and placed in the ISW stand-by mode.
Note
Firmware can only be written in Boot USB memory ISW.
(2) For other boards, when the firmware of the overall controller is normal and something is wrong with other firmware, a malfunction code is
shown on the touch panel when the power is turned ON. In that case, enter the service mode and perform ISW normally.
1.4 Type
(1) USB MEMORY ISW
Directly connect the USB memory to the service port of the main body, and use the program stored in the USB memory to rewrite the
firmware. For the USB memory ISW, the following methods are available depending on the start up method.
USB memory ISW from service mode
Rewrite the firmware using the operation panel.
Boot USB memory ISW when turning ON the power
Conduct when replacing the overall control board (OACB) or failed in rewriting a firmware.
(2) Internet ISW

Use the main body NIC to connect the main body to network environment, and use the FTP or the HTTP protocol to rewrite firmware via the
program server on the Internet. For the internet ISW, the following methods are available.
Internet ISW using the Web Utilities
Rewrite the firmware by accessing the Web Utilities of the main body from the Web browser of the PC.
However, a network connected PC with the main body is required.
Internet ISW using the operation panel
Rewrite the firmware using the operation panel.
Internet ISW using the CS Remote Care
J -2
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 2. ISWTRNS_G
2. ISWTRNS_G
2.1 Specifications
2.1.1 ISWTrns_G (PC software)
(1) Operating environment of the software
OS: Windows95/98/98SE/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP/Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/Enterprise
CPU: Pentium 75MHz or above
Memory: 32MB or above
Free space in hard disk: 100MB or more
Others: PC provided with USB interface (TypeA)
The operation environment of the hardware is pursuant to the specification of each OS.
(2) Requirements for checking the check sum

Personal computer (PC): 1
PC provided with USB interface
ISWTrns_G program
Firmware
2.2 Installation of the ISWTrns_G

Install the ISWTrns_G program to the PC.
(1) Procedure
1. Start the PC.
2. Copy the setup files to the PC and double click the [Setup.exe] icon to start the install program.
Note
When there remains the ISWTrns_G.exe of the old version, uninstall the old version first, and then install the new version.
3. "ISWTrns setup screen"
Following the instructions on the screen, check the folder to which an installation is made, and then click [Next].
Note
"C:\Program Files\KONICA MINOLTA\ISWTrns_G" has been set as a folder to be installed in default.
When changing the folder to which an installation is made, click [Reference] and specify one as you please.
4. Following the instructions on the screen, check the folder to which the ISWTrns program is stored and then click [Next].
J -3
Note
For default, "ISWTrns" is set as a folder to which an installation is made.
When changing the folder to which an installation is made, enter a folder name directly, or select one from the existing
folder displayed.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Following the instructions on the screen, click [Completed].

The installation of the ISWTrns_G program is automatically completed.
Select "ISWTrns_G" from the start menu or double click the "ISWTrns_G" icon on the desk top to start up the "ISWTrns program_G."
"ISWTrns dialog screen"
Click [OK] to set the storage folder of the firmware.
Note
This screen is shown only when the program is started for the first time after installing the ISWTrns_G.
9. "Option screen"
Click [Make Folder].
Note
A folder (C:\Program Files\KONICA MINOLTA\ISWTrns_G) on which the ISWTrns_G program is installed has been set as a
storage folder in default.
When changing a storage folder, click [Browse] and specify the folder, or make an entry directly in the editor box in full path.
Clicking [Make Folder] creates hierarchical folders with the storage folder set above as a route.
10. "Option screen"
J -4
Click [OK].
Note
This operation stores the data folder created in the step9 into the INI file of the ISWTrns program.
2.3 Usage of the ISWTrns_G

2.3.1 Firmware checksum check
(1) Details on the operation panel display
When the ISWTrns_G program starts up, the main screen of the ISWTrns_G is displayed. On the main screen, perform selecting of the file
(firmware), information display and checksum. For detailed information of the functions, refer to the following.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[1]: Select Folder (File storage folder edit box)

A folder name is displayed in full path from the information of the data folder set and the INI file. When the firmware is in a folder other than
the specified data folder, click [Browse] [2] to specify the file location or entering directly the file location.
[2]: [Browse]
This key is used when the firmware is in a folder other than the specified data folder. Display the folder selection screen to select the folder of
[1].
[3]: File Status (File detail information)
View detailed information about the version file when select firmware.
[4]: Checksum Information frame
Display the firmware to be used based on the information selected in the frames [1], and click [File Check] [6] to display the checksum of the
file and the consistency (OK, NG, ??) of the checksum.
[5]: File information display frame
Display the file version selected.
Click [File Check] at [6] to calculate the checksum of the entire displayed files. Compare the obtained value with the checksum value stored in
the checksum file (*.sum) attached to the firmware to display the result.
[6]: [File Check]
With a file used in "Checksum Information" of [4] displayed, press this key to calculate the file checksum (checksum of the entire file) of the
displayed file and show a result beside the file. Also, compare the result of the checksum with the checksum file attached to the firmware and
display the obtained result in the following form.
"OK": accord
"NG": Not accord
"??": Checksum file (*.sum) not found
2.4 Error list

(1) ISWTrns_G error list
The ISWTrns_G displays messages when an error is shown or the operation is completed. The following table shows the contents of the
message and the status of the ISWTrns_G.
Message
Status of the ISWTrns_G
The opening of the file the checksum

of which is to be taken is not
available.
The opening of the checksum file failed. The file is in use or damaged.
The opening of the file the checksum

of which is to be taken cannot be
read.
The reading of the checksum file failed. The memory is insufficient or the OS is in trouble.
The folder name is illegal.
The name of the input folder is illegal. Be sure to enter the whole path from the drive name such as
"C:."
The default folder has not been set.

Set the folder correctly.
The data folder setting has not been set to the ISWtrns.INI.
Displays at the first startup only.
Some files cannot be copied.
1. The folder to be stored in does not exist.

2.When a file is copied into the folder in which a file of the same name is contained with "O/W
(overwrite check box)" not checked.
3.When overwriting is made on an overwrite prohibited file.
4.Another application is using the file. OS trouble.
J -5

The transferred file is not found, or a
file with an illegal name is found in
the folder. Make sure of it.
The number of divisions of the transferred file written in the checksum file does not correspond with
the number of files that actually exist.
1.When a file with an illegal name is in the data folder, or a file name that seems to be illegal is
displayed in the folder list.
2.The number of divided files is insufficient. Check the insufficient number of files in the folder list
and copy them again.
3.When the checksum file is damaged, copy it again to the folder.
(2) ISWTrns_G troubleshooting

When an error occurs while in the execution of the ISWTrns_G program, take the measures shown in the following table.
Condition
1
The ISWTrns_G does not start

up.
When an item in the combo box

is selected, the file is not
displayed.
Cause
Countermeasures
The IswTrns_G.EXE file is

damaged
Set it up again.
The setup file itself is damaged.
Check the setup file and set it up again.
The file is not stored in the

relevant folder.
Check to see if the relevant file is stored in the folder

displayed in the "Select Folder" text box. When a folder into
which a file is stored is not found, use the "File copy" function.
The Data Folder in the Option

screen is set incorrectly.
Check the setting of the Data Folder.

When a folder into which a file is stored is not found, use the
"File copy" function.
The file name is illegal (or has

been changed.)
The file name must be used with no change made. When the
file name is changed, the display or selection of the file
becomes unavailable. When the file name is changed, return
it to former state.
The folder name is illegal (or has

been changed.)
When the folder name created by the [Make Folder] button in

the Option screen has been changed, it cannot be found.
Return it to former state and check it again.
Copy the firmware and check it again. When "NG" still recurs,
contact the supplier of the firmware.
"NG" is displayed in the File

Check.
The firmware using is damaged.
"??" is displayed while in the File

Check.
When the firmware was copied to Copy the checksum file to the folder same as the firmware at
the PC, the copying of the
the same time. (When using the data copying function, a copy
checksum file (*.sum) was
is made automatically.)
forgotten.
J -6
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 3. USB MEMORY ISW
3. USB MEMORY ISW

3.1 Usage of the USB memory ISW
Note
The "Service Port Device" must be set to [ON] in the settings menu mode of the "User Setting-System Setting-Service Port Device
Setting", or the USB memory ISW cannot be used.
(1) Board to be rewritten and firmware

Item
Specifications
Board to be rewritten
Overall control board (OACB), Printer control board (PRCB), DF control board (DFCB), FNS
control board (FNSCB), FD control board (FDCB), SD control board (SDCB), LS control
board (LSCB), RU control board (RUCB), PB control board (PBCB), GP controller PCB
Rewritable firmware
Image control
Collective (I0), I1 to I5, T
Printer system
C1
ADF
Stapler (FS-521)
N1
Stapler FS-531 /FS-612)
N2
Multi folder (FD-503)
Saddle stitcher (SD-506)
Stacker (LS-505)
S1 (1st tandem), S2 (2nd tandem)
RU (RU-509)
R1
RU (RU-506)
R2
Perfect binder (PB-503)
Multi puncher (GP-501)
(2) Procedure
C7000
I
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
T
C
H
B
N
N1
N2
S
R
F
J
G
Note
Create the C7000 folder directly under the USB memory route.
Several firmware can be saved to a folder. However 24 files is the maximum it can display on the touch panel. Also, 2 byte
font cannot be displayed.
Maximum 40 letters for a file name.
The file name is the same for S1 and S2. When S1 is selected on the rewriting screen, the file is written in the 1st tandem.
When S2 is selected, the file is written in the 2nd tandem of LS.
2. Connect the USB memory [1] to the main body service port [2].
J -7
[2]
[1]

4. "Service mode menu screen"
Press [12 ISW].
5. "ISW Menu screen"
Press [01 ISW].
6. "Board Type Selection screen"
Press [USB Memory ISW] and confirm that the message "Connection of a USB memory has been recognized." is displayed, then press
the button that corresponds to the firmware to be rewritten.
7. Example) <Image Control> Collective (I0)

The file in the USB memory applicable folder is displayed. (Maximum 24 files)
Select the version of the file to be rewritten, and press [OK].
Note
From the file name, the file availability is judged and the result is shown by text color.
White: File effective as ISW.
Yellow: Special ROM file.
Red: File other than ISW or file for different destination.
Press [Limit] to display only the effective files. Press [File Name], [Date]or [Size (byte)] to sort the files by that order.
J -8
8. "External Memory Device ISW Mode" screen

Check the type and name of file to conduct ISW, and press [Start].
Note
Press [File Select] to return to the file name selection screen.
Press [ROM Selection] to return to the board type selection screen.
J -9
9. The following screen is displayed when ISW is completed.
10. Press [Continue] when conducting the ISW successively.

To end the ISW, pull out the USB memory from the service port, then press [End].
The main body automatically restarts when [End] is pressed.
11. Check the firmware version in the service mode to see if the ISW is completed successfully.
3.2 Boot USB memory ISW

(1) Board to be rewritten and firmware
Item
Board to be rewritten
Specifications
J -10

Rewritable firmware

Image control
Batch rewrite (I0)
(2) Procedure
C7000
I
I0
Note
Create the C7000 folder directly under the USB memory route.
The file name is recover.bin.
2. Start the main body.
3. "Start screen"
The power save LED blinks in orange displaying "PLEASE WAIT STARTING SYSTEM" on the touch panel.
4. Connect the USB memory [1] to the main body service port [2] and ISW starts automatically.
The condition of the process can be checked according to the status of the power save LED.
Lighting in green: Reading file from USB memory/Deleting flash
Blinks in green: Writing
Note
When the power save LED starts blinking in green, the USB memory can be pulled out from the service port.
[2]
[1]
5. The main body automatically restarts when ISW finishes.

3.3 Error list

When an error occurs during USB memory ISW operation, the malfunction code is displayed on the touch panel.
(1) Overall control board firmware abnormality

When the main body detects an overall control board firmware abnormality after turning ON the power switch, the power save LED turns ON
with nothing displayed on the LCD of the operation panel (ISW stand-by condition). For details of the power save LED display, refer to the
table below.
No.
Operation
Power save LED status
CPU in initialization when the power is turned on
OFF
Flush memory in checking
OFF
When an error is detected while in memory check (ISW standby

status)
Blinks in orange
Reading file from USB memory
Lighting in green
ISW processing (deleting flash memory and writing firmware)
Lighting in green (deleting flash memory)

Blinks in green (writing)
When abnormality is detected while in data transmission
Flashing alternately in red and green
The type name of transferred data is abnormal
Blinks in red
When an error is detected while in writing firmware
Blinks in red
Memory check successfully completed: while in rebooting
OFF
(2) Error list

The following table shows error codes.
Error code
Description
41
Input data format abnormality
42
Input data model name abnormality
Applicable program
Common
J -11

43
Input data board name abnormality
64
Rewritten address error
F (DFCB)
81
Input device abnormality, such as input time-out
Common
C1
Flash ROM deletion failure
I (OACB)
C2
Flash ROM writing error
C3
Checksum abnormality
C4
Output device abnormality, such as output time-out
Common
E0
No completion of writing the Flush ROM
F (DFCB)
E1
Program SUM check error

Flash ROM deletion failure
E2
E3
Flash ROM writing error
C (PRCB) /H (FDCB) /B (SDCB) /N

(FNSCB) /S (LSCB)
Blanc check error
F (DFCB)
Communication error
C (PRCB) /H (FDCB) /B (SDCB) /N

(FNSCB) /S (LSCB)
F6
Output device abnormality, such as output time-out
Common
100
Network/USB memory connection error
101
Network/USB memory file error
102
Communication error with the USB memory
4xx
HTTP error (protocol regulations error, was able to connect to network, but
an error was returned from the server)
5xx
FTP error (protocol regulations error, was able to connect to network, but
an error was returned from the server)
J -12
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 4. INTERNET ISW
4. INTERNET ISW
4.1 Outline
"Internet ISW" is a system to operate the ISW by the main body automatically receiving firmware from the program server, using Web browser,
main body operation panel, or Internet mail (E-mail) to direct the ISW. ISW can be operated at the customer facility without carrying the program
by using the Internet ISW from the main body operation panel or Web browser.

To use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must to be met.
The main body must be connected to the network environment that allows the download of firmware from the Internet by using ftp or http
protocol.
In the following 9 cases, the "Internet ISW" does not operate on the main body.
When the main power switch (SW1) is off
When the sub power switch (SW2) is off
When the "Security Strengthen Set" is set to ON (The main body NIC other than the CS Remote Care cannot be used)
During print operation, or various JOB (including reserve JOB) exists, or suspended JOB exists during main body idling.
Using modes other than normal mode.
Paper JAM has occurred.
Image file exists in the image memory.
Program type, board do not match.
4.3 Initial setting

To make use of the Internet ISW, it is necessary to set in advance the network parameter, program server address, the fire wall address and so
on, of the main body.
(1) Setting from the operation panel

To introduce the copier main body into the network, set the IP address of the copier from the operation panel.
When this setting has been already made, proceed to "J.4.3.(2) Setting from the Web browser."
(a) Procedure
2. Press [03 Administrator Setting].
6. Turn OFF and ON the sub power switch (SW2) to restart the main body.
Note

Enter the setting of the program server from the Web browser. At this time, in order to use the Web browser, make preparations of the PC that
can be introduced into the network.
Note
No "space" is allowed in all set items.
When an incorrect setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to correct it following the error message. When no correction of
input error is made, program download error occurs.
(a) Procedure
When the proxy is set on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web.
For particulars, contact the network administrator. Be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
2. Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "J.4.3.(1) Setting from the operation panel".
Access the Web Utilities of the main body to display the "Main page screen".
J -13

4. Enter the user name and the CE password in the "Extension for maintenance" and then press [OK].
Password: Enter the CE password. (Default: "92729272")

Click [Internet ISW].

Click [Initial Setting].

Set the proxy server.
When using no proxy server (fire wall), proceed to the step 9.
J -14
Enable Proxy
When using no proxy: "Connect to the program server."

When using ftp proxy: "Use ftp proxy."
When using ftp proxy: "Use ftp proxy."
Select one of the above.
Proxy Server Type
When selecting "Use ftp proxy" in "Enable Proxy", select the

Proxy Server Type from the followings.
Type1: "User user@host name"
Type2: "OPEN host name"
Type 3: FW user => FW password => SITE host name
Type 4: "FW user name => FW password => User user@host"
Note
Types 2, 3 and 4 are unsupported.
For authentication of proxy server,J.4.7 Authentication of the
proxy server in Internet ISW".
Proxy Server IP Address
When using the proxy server, set the IP address of the proxy
server.
Port Number
When using the proxy server, set the number of the port that uses
the proxy server.
User name on the proxy server
When selecting the type1 or type2 in "Type of proxy server"

shown above, set the account of the proxy server.
Password for the proxy server
When selecting the type 1 or type 2 in "Type of proxy server"

above set the password of the proxy server.
8. After completion of entry, click [Next] and then after checking the set items in the setting check screen, click [Next]. However, if there is
an input error, follow the message shown in red and click [Back] to re-set the item.
Set the program server. (When using the proxy)
Program Server Address
Set the address of the server into which the program to download is stored. Select
the protocol to be used from the pull-down menu on the left and enter the following
address in the text box on the right. In the case of ftp, it is a relative path from the
home directory.
User name on the program server
Password for the program server
Receiving time out
Set the receiving time-out of the program. When the time is out, the download of the
program forcibly comes to an end, and the system returns to the normal mode
10. After completion of entry, click [Next]. Then after checking the set items in the setting check screen, click [Complete].
However, if there is an input error, follow the message shown in red and click [Back] to re-set the item.
11. Set the program server. (When not using the proxy)
Protocol
Select the protocol that receives the program.
Program Server IP Address
Set the IP address of the server into which the program to be down loaded is
stored.
J -15
Target directory
In the case of http, set the path after the host domain. In the case of ftp, set the
relative path from the home directory.
User name on the program server
Password for the program server
Receiving time out
Set the receiving time-out of the program. When the time is out, the download of the
firmware forcibly comes to an end, and the system returns to the normal mode
12. After completion of entry, click [Next]. Then after checking the set items in the setting check screen, click [Complete]. However, if there
is an input error, follow the message shown in red and click [Back] to re-set the item.
13. Conduct the Download test.
In the down load test, "test.dat" is down loaded from the program server set in the initialization to check the settings. When the
download test failed, recheck the set items following the error message.
When the download test is successfully completed, the communication speed and the expected download time are displayed as
following. Refer to this information to set the "Receiving time out".
When the download test failed, the response error code from the server is display as following. Since it may be because of a setting
error, recheck the initialization.
4.4 Internet ISW using the Web Utilities

Using the Web Utilities of the main body allows, by just making a click from the browser, to download the programs from the program server
automatically for rewriting.
(1) Procedure
1. Proceed to "Internet ISW" on the Web Utilities.
"Internet ISW screen"
The firmware version of the present board is displayed beside each of the board types.
J -16
2. Select one ISW intended board at the item of "ISW". When specifying a firmware file name to be download, enter it in the [File name] text
box.
When specifying no firmware name, the following files stored in the program server are rewritten.
I0
bootI0.bin
I1
bootI1.bin
I2
bootI2.bin
I3
bootI3.bin
I4
bootI4.bin
I5
bootI5.bin
bootT1.bin
C1
bootC1.bin
F1
bootF1.bin
H1
bootH1.bin
N1
bootN1.bin
N2
bootN2.bin
B1
bootB1.bin
S1
bootS1.bin
S2
bootS2.bin
R1
bootR1.bin
R2
(Not used)
J1
bootJ1.bin
G1
(Not used)
Note
bootN1.bin is for FS-521 and bootN2.bin is for FS-612.
J -17
bootS1.bin is for LS (1st tandem) and bootS2.bin is for LS (2nd tandem).

3. After completion of entry, click the [ISW].
If there is an input error, follow the message shown in red and click [Back] to enter the item again.
4. Checking of the ISW conditions.
The power save LED lights in green during downloading the program. From the Web screen, check the current processing condition to
see if there is any error.
"ISW in communication"
"ISW in rewriting" "Completed successfully":
"Completed normally": Be sure to avoid pressing the "Read again" key of the browser to reboot after successful completion.
"Aborted due to a communication error."
"Aborted due to a communication time error."
"Aborted due to a writing error."
5. When ISW is completed normally, the main body automatically restarts and completes ISW.
6. After restart of the main body, check the firmware version in "Internet ISW main screen" to see if it is being updated successfully.
4.5 Usage precautions

4.5.1 Notice to administrator
When conducting the Internet ISW, be sure to notify the administrator of it and get approval from administrator in advance.
Be sure to execute ISW with the main body not used. However, when the main body is in use (jobs present), the Internet ISW does not operate.
4.5.2 Power cut during writing

While in the ISW rewrite, the operation panel and the power switch (SW2) are locked. However, when the main power source is turned off due
to power cut etc., the main body cannot start up.
However, this is a problem encountered while in the overall control board (OACB) rewrite. As for other errors while in the ISW, they can be
rewritten by the Internet ISW again.
Should the main body be not able to start due to the reason above, go to the actual place and use Boot USB memory ISW to conduct the rewrite
of the program.
4.6 Internet ISW using the operation panel

When using the Internet ISW from the operation panel, with no PC brought with, the main body can download the program from the program
server to conduct the rewrite automatically.
(1) Procedure
Example: When rewrite the overall control board (OACB) firmware (ALL).
1. Display "ISW mode screen".
J -18
2. Press the [Internet ISW] on the screen and then press the [Collective(I0)] of <Image Control>.
3. Press the [Start] and download the latest firmware to start the rewrite.
J -19
In a case in which the download of an old version firmware is required, press the [File Name Input] and enter the file name manually.
J -20
4. The following screen is displayed when ISW is completed.
5. Press [Continue] when conducting the ISW successively.

To end the ISW, press [End].
The main body automatically restarts when [End] is pressed.
(2) Main body error list

When an error occurs while in the execution of the Internet ISW, an error code is displayed on the operation panel. (Refer to J.2.4 Error list)
4.7 Authentication of the proxy server in Internet ISW

(1) Proxy server
Proxy server which is provided on the inside of the fire wall is the generic name of a mail server that serves the proxy of a client who receives
an access demand (HTTP and FTP) from the client.
(2) Authentication of the proxy server

There are 4 types of authentication methods for the proxy server.
The Internet ISW is corresponding to these 4 types.
(3) Authentication type of the proxy server and the command list
(a) Type1: User user name@host name
When accessing the outside through the proxy, authentication to the proxy server is not required.
When accessing the outside through the proxy server, or when the entry of the user name and password of the proxy server is not required,
this proxy authentication is likely to be used.
Command
Command
Parameter
Reply Code
Description
USER
User name@host
name
331
Transmit the user name of the program server and the program server
address
PASS
Password
230
Transmit the password for the user name above
(b) Type2: OPEN host name

This process is almost the same as the type1, except for the exchange of commands while in authentication.
When all the settings are made correctly and no communication is available with type 1 authentication, apply this type.
Command
Command
Parameter
Reply Code
Description
OPEN
Host name
ftp expanded function,

defined for each server
Transmit the user name of the program server
USER
User name
331
PASS
Password
230
(c) Type 3: FW user => FW password => SITE host name

This is a type that requires the authentication to the proxy server itself when accessing the outside.
J -21
The information of the server you want to access, the user name and password of the proxy server (F/W) are necessary. In the case of the
user name and the password of the proxy server are required when accessing the outside through the proxy server, this proxy
authentication is likely to be used.
Command
Command
Parameter
Reply Code
Description
USER
FW user
331
Transmit the user name of the proxy server
PASS
FW password
230
SITE
Host name
ftp expanded function,

defined for each server
USER
User name
331
PASS
Password
230
(d) Type 4: FW user => FW password => USER user@host

This process is almost the same as the type3, except for the exchange of commands while in authentication.
When all the settings are made correctly and no communication is available with type 3 authentication, apply this type.
Command
Command
Parameter
Reply Code
Description
USER
FW user name
331
Transmit the user name of the proxy server
PASS
FW password
230
USER
User name@host
name
331
Transmit the user name of the program server and the program server
address
PASS
Password
230
(4) Remark
For fwtk2.1 (for Unix) and Black Jumbo Dog (for Windows), the type1 authentication is used. For most of the proxy servers, the type 1
authentication is used. When the authentication type of the proxy server is not known, you are recommended to make settings in type1
authentication as a temporary measure.
J -22
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM INDICATION
K TROUBLESHOOTING
1. JAM INDICATION
1.1 Jam code list
Classificatio
n
Bypass
Paper feed
tray/1
Paper feed
tray/2
Paper feed
tray/3
LU
PF
JAM Code
Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
If paper jam occurs during

printing process, main
body stops after paper
exit.
Take out paper from the bypass

tray once and remove the jammed
paper if any.
J-1001
During operation: The paper feed sensor/BP

(PS26) does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the pick-up solenoid/BP
(SD5) turns ON.
J-1002
During operation: The paper lift motor /BP (M35)

does not turn ON within a specified period of
time after the paper empty sensor /BP (PS47)
turns ON.

tray once, reduce the number of
loaded paper, and then set it
again.
J-1003
During operation: The upper limit sensor/BP

period of time after the paper lift motor/BP (M35)
turns ON.

tray once, reduce the number of
loaded paper, and then set it
again.
J-1051
When idling: The paper feed sensor/BP (PS26)

turns ON while in idling.

paper if any.
J-1101
During operation: The paper feed sensor /1

period of time after the pick-up solenoid /1 (SD7)
turns ON.

exit.
Pull out tray 1 and remove

jammed paper if any.
J-1151
When idling: The paper feed sensor /1 (PS29)


J-1201

turns ON.

exit.

J-1251
When idling: The paper feed sensor/2 (PS35)


J-1301

turns ON.

exit.

J-1351


J-1501
During operation: The paper feed sensor

period of time after the pick-up solenoid (SD100)
turns ON.

exit.
Open the LU upper door and

remove jammed paper if any.
J-1502
During operation: The pre-registration sensor

period of time after the pre-registration clutch
(CL102) turns ON.
J-1551
When idling: The paper feed sensor (PS106)

J-1552
When idling: The pre-registration sensor

(PS107) turns ON while in idling.
J-1601

(PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period
of time after the pick-up solenoid /1 (SD1) turns
ON.
J-1602

turns ON.

J-1603
During operation: The vertical conveyance

sensor /1 (PS17) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the paper feed
sensor /1 (PS2) turns ON.
Open the PF front door and the

PF vertical conveyance door, and
J-1604

specified period of time after the vertical
conveyance sensor /1 (PS17) turns ON.

K -1



exit.


Classificatio
n
Paper feed
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
J-1605


J-1606
During operation: The horizontal conveyance

sensor/1 (PS18) does not turn ON within a
conveyance sensor/3 (PS26) turns ON.

J-1607

specified period of time after the paper feed
sensor/2 (PS10) turns ON.

J-1608
During operation: The pre-registration sensor

period of time after the horizontal conveyance
sensor/1 (PS18) turns ON.
Open the PF front door, PF

vertical conveyance door,
horizontal conveyance door /Rt,
and horizontal conveyance door /
Lt and remove jammed paper if
any.
J-1609

specified period of time after the pre-registration
sensor (PS20) turns ON.

any.
J-1610
During operation: The multi feed detection

board /R (MFDTBR) detects the multi feed.
J-1611
During operation: Double fed paper is separated

during conveyance and the latter conveyed
paper turns ON the horizontal conveyance
sensor /2 (PS19).
J-1651

J-1652
When idling: The paper feed sensor/2 (PS10)


J-1653
When idling : The vertical conveyance sensor /1


J-1654


J-1655


J-1656
When idling: The horizontal conveyance sensor /

1 (PS18) turns ON while in idling.

any.
J-1657
When idling: The horizontal conveyance sensor /


any.
J-1658
When idling: The pre-registration sensor (PS20)


any.
J-1701
During operation: The registration sensors

(PS22) do not turn ON within a specified period
K -2
Stops immediately.

any.
any.

exit.

Pull out the ADU and remove


Classificatio
n
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
of time after writing starts during front side

printing.
J-1702
During operation: The registration sensors

(PS22) do not turn ON within a specified period
of time after writing starts during back side
printing.
Stops immediately.

J-1703

sensor (PS50) does not turn ON within a
clutch /3 (CL12) turns ON.

exit.
Open the vertical conveyance

door and remove jammed paper if
any.
J-1704


J-1705

conveyance sensor (PS50) turns ON.

any.
J-1706
During operation: The intermediate conveyance


any.
J-1707

specified period of time after the LU preregistration clutch (CL102) turns ON.
Open the LU front door and

J-1708

specified period of time after the intermediate

J-1709
The intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28)

time after the paper feed sensor /BP (PS26)
turns ON.

paper if any.
J-1710

specified period of time after the horizontal
conveyance sensor/2 (PS19) turns ON.

exit.

any.
J-1751
When idling : The vertical conveyance sensor


any.
J-1752
When idling: The intermediate conveyance

sensor/1 (PS27) turns ON while in idling.

J-1753
When idling: The intermediate conveyance

sensor/2 (PS28) turns ON while in idling.

J-1754
When idling: The registration sensor (PS22)


Others
J-1901
During operation: The vertical conveyance door

open jam. Vertical conveyance door sensor
(PS51) turns OFF during printing.

exit.
LU
J-1902
During operation: The LU upper door open jam

or the LU front door open jam. The upper door
sensor (PS100) or the front door sensor (PS115)
turns OFF during printing.
During feeding paper of

Close the LU upper door or the
LU, the main body stops
LU front door.
after exiting paper. The
main body does not stop in
the case other than LU
paper feeding.
PF
J-1903
During operation: One of PF front door open

jam, PF vertical conveyance door open jam,
horizontal conveyance door /Rt open jam, or
horizontal conveyance door /Lt open jam. One of
the front door open/close sensor (PS23), vertical
conveyance door sensor (PS24), horizontal
conveyance door sensor/1 (PS21), or horizontal
conveyance door sensor/2 (PS22) turns OFF.
During feeding paper of

PF, the main body stops
after exiting paper. The
main body does not stop in
the case other than PF
paper feeding.
Close one of the PF front door,

PF vertical conveyance door,
horizontal conveyance door /Rt or
horizontal conveyance door /Lt.
Registration
J-3101
During operation: The paper leading edge

Stops immediately.

K -3
Close the vertical conveyance

door.

Classificatio
n
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
specified period of time after the registration

motor (M30) turns ON.
J-3102
During operation: The fusing paper exit sensor

period of time after the registration motor (M30)
turns ON.
J-3151
When idling: The leading edge sensor (PS63)

J-3152
When idling: The fusing loop sensor (PS64)

J-3201
During operation: The paper exit sensor (PS13)

time after the fusing paper exit sensor (PS17)
turns ON.
J-3202
During operation: The reverse/exit sensor

period of time after the fusing paper exit sensor
(PS17) turns ON.

J-3203

time after the reverse/exit sensor (PS19) turns
ON.

J-3204
During operation: The fusing paper exit sensor

(PS17) does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after it turns ON.

J-3252

does not turn OFF within a specified period of
time after it turns ON.

J-3206
During operation: The reverse/exit sensor

period of time after the fusing paper exit sensor
(PS17) turns ON.

J-3207


J-3209
During operation: The decurler sensor (PS62)


J-3251
When idling: The fusing paper exit sensor

J-3252
When idling: The paper exit sensor (PS13) turns

ON while in idling.

J-3253
When idling: The de-curler sensor (PS19) turns

ON while in idling.

J-3254
When idling: The de-curler sensor (PS62) turns

ON while in idling.

Others
J-5101
During operation: The front door open jam.

When the front door sensor (PS18) turns OFF
during printing.
DF
J-6101
During operation: The paper feed section cover The DF stops immediately. Close the paper feed section
open jam. The paper feed cover sensor (PS303) If paper jam occurs during cover.
During operation: The paper feed tray open jam. body stops after paper
Close the paper feed tray.
exit.
The tray open/close sensor (PS308) turns OFF
Paper exit
J-6102


Stops immediately.
Stops immediately.


Close the front door.
during printing.
J-6103
During operation: The paper exit section cover

open jam. The paper exit cover sensor (PS307)
Close the paper exit section

cover.
J-6201
During operation: The registration sensor

period of time after the paper feeding starts.
Open the paper feed section

cover and remove jammed paper
if any.
Remove jammed paper if any in
the main body conveyance
section.
K -4

Classificatio
n
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
J-6203
During operation: The timing sensor (PS302)

time after the paper feed motor (M301) turns
reverse rotation ON.

if any.
section.
J-6206
During operation: The timing sensor (PS302)


if any.
section.
J-6209
During operation: The reverse sensor (PS305)

time after the reverse/paper exit motor (M303)
turns ON.
Open the paper exit section cover

and remove jammed paper if any.
section.
J-6301
During operation: The reverse sensor (PS305)


section.
J-6304

time after the simplex original exiting starts.
The paper exit sensor (PS306) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after the reverse
sensor (PS305) turns ON during exiting duplex
original.

section.
J-6305


section.
J-6501
When idling: The registration sensor (PS301)

J-6502
When idling: The reverse sensor (PS305) turns

ON while in idling.

J-6504
When idling: The paper exit sensor (PS306)


J-6508
When idling: The timing sensor (PS302) turns

ON while in idling.

if any.
FS
J-7101
During operation:
The FS and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
(FS-521)
stop immediately.
from the FS/main body.
The FS front door open jam. The door switch
(MS1) turns OFF while in printing.
(FS-531/612)
The front door and the PI upper door are opened
while in printing.
RU
J-7102
During operation:
(RU-506)
RU front door open jam. Interlock switch (MS1)
was turned OFF when printing.
RU/main body stop

immediately.
Remove jammed paper in the RU/

main body, if any.
LS (1st
tandem)
J-7103
During operation: The LS front door open jam.

The door switch (MS1) turns OFF while in
printing.
The LS and the main body

stop immediately.
Remove jammed paper if any

from the LS/main body.
LS (2nd
tandem)
J-7104
During operation: The LS front door open jam.

The door switch (MS1) turns OFF while in
printing.
FD
J-7105
During operation: The FD front door open jam.

The front door switch (MS1) turns OFF while in
the print.
SD
J-7107
During operation: The SD front door/Rt open jam The SD and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
or the SD front door/Lt open jam. During
stop immediately.
from the SD/main body.
printing, either the SD front door switch /Rt
(MS1) or /Lt (MS2) turns OFF.
PB
J-7108
During operation: The PB front door open jam.

During printing, the front door switch (SW2),
K -5

if any.

The FD and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
stop immediately.
from the FD/main body.
The PB and the main body Remove jammed paper if any

stop immediately.
from the PB/main body.

Classificatio
n
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
booklet door switch (SW3), upper door switch

(SW1), and relay conveyance section door
switch (MS3) turn OFF.
GP
J-7109
During operation: The GP front door open jam.

The door switch turns OFF while in the print.
The GP and the main body Remove jammed paper if any

stop immediately.
from the GP/main body.
RU
J-7110
During operation:
(RU-509)
The RU front door open jam. The door switch
(SW1) turns OFF while in printing.
The RU and the main body Remove jammed paper if any

stop immediately.
from the RU/main body.
FS
J-7216
During operation:
(FS-531/612)
The FNS entrance sensor (PS4) does not turn
ON within a specified period of time after the
main body paper exit sensor (PS13) turns ON.
The FS and the main body Remove jammed paper if any

stop immediately.
J-7217
During operation:
(FS-521)
The main tray exit sensor (PS10) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time after the
stacker entrance sensor (PS5) turns OFF.
(FS-531/612)
The main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) does not
turn ON within a specified period of time after
the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) turns ON.

J-7218
During operation: (FS-521)

The stacker entrance sensor (PS5) does not
the paper exit sensor turns ON.
(FS-531/612)
(Staple) The stacker conveyance passage
sensor (PS5) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the FNS entrance

J-7219
During operation: While in stapling, the stacker

entrance sensor (PS5) does not turn OFF within
a specified period of time after the stacker
entrance motor (M13) turns ON.
While in any other operations than stapling, the
PS5 does not turn OFF within a specified period
of time after it turns ON.

J-7220
During operation:
(FS-521)
While in stapling a small-size paper, the main
tray exit sensor (PS10) does not turn ON within
a specified period of time after the paper exit
arm motor (M23) turns ON. Or the stacker empty
sensor (PS20) turns OFF.
(FS-531/612)
tray exit sensor (PS6) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the paper exit
operation starts.

J-7221
During operation:
(FS-521)
While in stapling a large-size paper, the main
tray exit sensor (PS10) does not turn OFF within
a specified period of time after the paper exit
belt motor (M23) turns ON.
(FS-531/612)
While in stapling a large size paper, the main
tray paper exit sensor (PS6) does not turn OFF
within a specified period of time after the start of
exiting paper.

In case of a paper jam at the
stacker entrance, set the
"Simplex" of "Curl Adjustment" to
+2.
J-7222
During operation:
(FS-531/612)
The sub tray exit sensor (PS1) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after the FNS
entrance sensor (PS4) turns ON.
(FS-521)
While in exiting paper in the sub tray, the sub
tray paper exit sensor (PS1) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after the paper
exit sensor of the previous option turns ON.

K -6

Classificatio
n
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
J-7223
During operation: While in exiting paper in the

sub tray, the sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1)
time after the PS1 turns ON.

J-7224
During operation:
(FS-612)
The folding pass-through sensor (PS26) does
not turn ON within a specified period of time
after stapling completes.

J-7225
During operation:
(FS-612)
The folding paper exit sensor (PS25) does not
the folding knife motor (M19) turns ON.

J-7226
During operation:
(FS-612)
The Folding paper exit sensor (PS25) does not
turn OFF within a specified period of time after
PS25 turns ON.

J-7228
During operation:
(FS-521)
While in the straight/shift of the small-size paper,
the main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) does not
the PS10 turns ON.
(FS-531/612)
The stacker entrance sensor (PS5) does not
turn OFF after a specified period of time after it
turns ON at stapling/center folding/saddle
stitching/tri-folding the small size paper.

J-7229
During operation:
(FS-531/612)
The main tray exit sensor (PS6) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time after it
turns ON. (Straight/Shift mode)
The sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1) does not
the PS1 turns ON. (Straight mode)

J-7230
During operation:
(FS-521)
within a specified period of time after the PS10
turns ON.
(FS-531/612)
within a specified period of time after the PS6
turns ON.

PI
J-7235
During operation: The paper passage sensor /

Lw (PS206) does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the conveyance clutch /Lw
(CL202) turns ON.

PK
J-7243
During operation: The punch shift home sensor

period of time after the punch shift motor (M302)
turns ON.

FS
J-7248
During operation:
(FS-612)
The folding pass-through sensor (PS26) does
after the PS26 turns ON.

PI
J-7249
During operation: The paper passage sensor /

Up (PS201) does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the conveyance clutch /Up
(CL201) turns ON.
Open the PI upper door and

J-7250
During operation: The FNS entrance sensor

of time after the paper passage sensor /Up
(PS201) turns ON.

K -7

Classificatio
n
FS
PI
RU
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
J-7251
During operation: The FNS entrance sensor

of time after the paper passage sensor /Lw
(PS206) turns ON.

J-7281
During operation:
(FS-531/612)
The stapler motor home sensor /Fr (PS31) and
the clincher motor home sensor /Fr (PS33) do
after the stapler motor /Fr (M14) and the clincher
motor /Fr (M15) turn ON.

J-7282
During operation:
(FS-531/612)
The stapler motor home sensor /Rr (PS30) and
the clincher motor home sensor /Rr (PS32) do
after the stapler motor /Rr (M9) and the clincher
motor /Rr (M10) turn ON.

J-7283
During operation:
(FS-531/612)
The stapler motor home sensors /Rr, /Fr
(PS30/31) and the clincher motor home
sensors /Rr, /Fr (PS32/33) do not turn ON within
a specified period of time after the stapler
motors /Rr, /Fr (M9/14) and the clincher motors /
Rr, /Fr (M10/15) turn ON.

J-7290
During operation:
(FS-531/612)
FS does not stop within a specified period of
time after the operation stop signal is transmitted
from the main body to the FS.

J-7301
When idling:
(FS-521)
The main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) turns
ON while in idling.
(FS-531/612)
The main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) turns ON
while in idling.
J-7302
When idling: The stacker entrance sensor (PS5)

Open the FS front door and the

jam release lever, and remove
J-7305
When idling : The FNS entrance sensor (PS4)


J-7307
When idling: The sub tray paper exit sensor


J-7308
When idling:
(FS-531/612)
The stacker empty sensor (PS20) turns ON
during exiting jam.
The FS and the main body Open the FS front door and the
stop immediately.
J-7309
When idling:
(FS-612)
The folding pass-through sensor (PS26) turns
ON while in idling.

J-7310
When idling:
(FS-612)
The folding paper exit sensor (PS25) turns ON
while in idling.

J-7314
When idling: The paper passage sensor /Lw

J-7317
When idling: The paper passage sensor /Up


J-7340
When idling:
(RU-506)
The entrance jam sensor (PS6) turns ON while
in idling.
Open the front door and remove

jammed paper, if any.
K -8



Classificatio
n
LS (1st
tandem)
LS (2nd
tandem)
FD
RU
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
J-7341
When idling:
(RU-506)
The stacker jam sensor (PS5) turns ON while in
idling.

J-7342
When idling:
(RU-506)
The paper exit sensor (PS2) turns ON while in
idling.

J-7350
During operation: The entrance sensor (PS4)

Open the LS front door, open then

entrance conveyance jam release
lever and remove jammed paper,
if any.
J-7351

Open the LS sub tray cover, and

remove jammed paper, if any.
J-7352
When idling: Either of the conveyance sensor /1

(PS7), /2 (PS16), or /3 (PS17) turns ON while in
idling.
Open the LS jam door, and

remove jammed paper, if any
J-7353
When idling: The coupling exit sensor (PS18)


the coupling exit jam release lever
and remove jammed paper, if any.
J-7354


entrance conveyance jam release
lever and remove jammed paper,
if any.
J-7355

Open the LS sub tray cover, and

J-7356
When idling: Either of the conveyance sensor /1

(PS7), /2 (PS16), or /3 (PS17) turns ON while in
idling.
Open the LS jam door, and

J-7357
When idling: The coupling exit sensor (PS18)


the coupling exit jam release lever
and remove jammed paper, if any.
J-7358
When idling: Either of the FD entrance sensor

(PS1), the punch conveyance sensor (PS5), or
the punch registration sensor (PS6) turns ON
while in idling.
Open the FD front door, open

then the entrance conveyance
jam release levers /1 and /2 and
the punch conveyance jam
release levers /1 and /2, and then
J-7359
When idling: Either of the intermediate

conveyance sensor (PS13), the sub tray paper
exit sensor (PS16), or the main tray paper exit
sensor (PS18) turns ON while in idling.
Open the FD front door and the

intermediate conveyance jam
lever, and remove the jammed
paper, if any.
J-7360
When idling: Either of the 1st folding

conveyance sensor (PS51), the 2nd folding
conveyance sensor (PS53), the 3rd folding
conveyance sensor (PS54), the S size
conveyance sensor (PS58), the folding entrance
sensor (PS52), or the folding exit sensor (PS2)
Open the FD front door, pull out

the folding conveyance section,
open the folding conveyance jam
release levers /1 to /5, and
J-7361
When idling: Either of the PI conveyance

sensor /Up (PS31), the PI conveyance sensor /
Lw (PS37), or the PI exit sensor (PS4) turns ON
while in idling.
Open the FD upper door and

When jammed paper gets in the
PI exit, open the entrance
conveyance jam release lever /1
and remove the jammed paper.
J-7365
When idling:
(RU-509)
The entrance sensor (PS1) turns ON while in
idling.
Open the front door, and remove

jammed paper, if any
J-7366
When idling:
(RU-509)
Either of the de-curler entrance sensor (PS2) or
the humidification section entrance sensor (PS7)

J-7367
When idling:
(RU-509)
Either of the color density detection timing
sensor (PS3), paper exit conveyance sensor
(PS4) or paper exit sensor (PS12) turns ON
while in idling.

K -9

Classificatio
n
SD
PB
GP
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
J-7368
When idling: The entrance sensor (PS1) turns

ON while in idling.
Open the SD front door /Rt and

J-7369
When idling: Either of the horizontal conveyance

sensor /1 (PS2), the horizontal conveyance
sensor /2 (PS3), or the sub tray exit sensor

J-7370
When idling: The horizontal conveyance exit

sensor (PS4) turns ON while in idling.
Open the SD front door /Lt and

J-7371
When idling: Either of the right angle

conveyance sensor /1 (PS5) or the right angle
conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) turns ON while in
idling.

J-7372
When idling: Either of the folding sensor /1

(PS7), the folding passage sensor (PS8), the trifolding exit sensor (PS9), or the folding sensor /

J-7373
When idling: The saddle stitching paper sensor


J-7374
When idling: Either of the bundle sensor /1

(PS14), /2 (PS15), /4 (PS54), or the bundle exit
sensor /2 (PS57) turns ON while in idling.

J-7380
When idling: Either of the entrance sensor

(PS1), the SC entrance sensor (PS2), the cover
paper entrance sensor (PS3), or the sub tray
paper exit sensor (PS4) turns ON while in idling.
Open the PB front door or the

upper door, and remove jammed
paper, if any.
J-7381
When idling: The SC paper detection sensor

Open the PB upper door, and

J-7382
When idling: The clamp paper sensor (PS28)

Open the PB front door, pull out

the clamp section, and remove
J-7383
When idling: Either of the cover paper

switchback sensor (PS44), the cover paper
sensor /Rt (PS45), or the cover paper sensor /Lt
Open the PB front door, and

J-7384
When idling: The book end fence sensor (PS61)

Open the PB stacker door, and

J-7385
When idling: The cover paper conveyance

sensors /1 (PS75), /2 (PS76), /3 (PS77), /
4(PS78), and /5 (PS79) turn ON while in idling.
Pull out the paper feed tray, and

J-7386
When idling: The relay conveyance entrance

sensor (PS93), the relay conveyance
intermediate sensor (PS91) and the relay
conveyance exit sensor (PS94) turn ON during
idling.
Open the PB relay conveyance

any.
J-7390
When idling: The enter sensor (S1) turns ON

while in idling.
Open the GP front door, the

bypass panel cover, and remove
the jammed paper, if any.
J-7391
When idling: The stepper 1 speed sensor (S2)


entrance aligner panel, and
remove the jammed paper, if any.
J-7392
When idling: The bypass sensor (S8) turns ON

while in idling.

J-7393
When idling: The exit sensor (S7) turns ON

while in idling.

J-7394
When idling: The punch flag sensor (S9) turns

ON while in idling.

entrance aligner panel, the bottom
U-channel, and remove the
J-7395
When idling: The u-channel sensor (S4) turns

ON while in idling.

bottom U-channel, and remove
J-7396
When idling: The backstop sensor (S5) turns ON

while in idling.

bottom U-channel, and remove
K -10

Classificatio
n
LS (1st
tandem)
LS (2nd
tandem)
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
J-7397
When idling: The stepper 2 speed sensor (S6)

Open the GP front door, the exit

aligner panel, and remove the
J-7401

The LS and the main body
stop immediately.
time after the main body paper exit sensor (PS3)
turns ON.

J-7402


J-7403
During operation: The sub tray exit sensor

period of time after the entrance sensor (PS4)
turns ON.

J-7404
During operation: The sub tray paper exit sensor


J-7405
During operation: The conveyance sensor /1

of time after the entrance sensor (PS4) turns
ON.

J-7406


J-7407

period of time after the conveyance sensor /1
(PS7) turns ON.

J-7408


J-7409

(PS16) turns ON.

J-7410


J-7411
During operation: The coupling exit sensor

(PS17) turns ON.

J-7412


J-7431

turns ON.

J-7432


J-7433
During operation: The sub tray exit sensor

period of time after the entrance sensor (PS4)
turns ON.

J-7434


J-7435

ON.

J-7436


K -11

Classificatio
n
FD
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
J-7437

(PS7) turns ON.

J-7438


J-7439

(PS16) turns ON.

J-7440


J-7441

(PS17) turns ON.

J-7442


J-7501
During operation: The FD entrance sensor (PS1) The FD and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
stop immediately.
turns ON.
J-7502

specified period of time after the FD entrance

J-7503
During operation: The main tray exit sensor

period of time after the intermediate conveyance

J-7504
During operation: The main tray exit sensor


J-7505

period of time after the intermediate conveyance

J-7506


J-7507
During operation: The punch conveyance sensor

of time after the FD entrance sensor (PS1) turns
ON.

J-7508
During operation: The 3rd folding conveyance

specified period of time after the punch

J-7509
During operation: The punch registration sensor

of time after the punch conveyance sensor
(PS5) turns ON.

J-7510
During operation: The 1st folding conveyance

specified period of time after the punch
registration sensor (PS6) turns ON.

J-7511
During operation: The 3rd folding conveyance

specified period of time after the 1st folding

J-7512

specified period of time after the 3rd folding

K -12

Classificatio
n
RU
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
J-7513
During operation: While in the folding operation,

the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) does
after the 1st folding motor (M4) starts to
accelerate.

J-7514

the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) does
after the 1st folding motor (M4) starts to
accelerate.

J-7515

after the 2nd folding motor (M5) starts to
accelerate.

J-7516

the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13)
time after the 3rd folding motor (M6) starts to
accelerate.

J-7517

after the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)
turns ON.

J-7518

the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13)
time after the 3rd folding conveyance sensor
(PS54) turns ON.

J-7519
During operation: The PI conveyance sensor /

Up (PS31) does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the PI pick-up solenoid /Up
(SD13) turns ON.

J-7520
During operation: The PI exit sensor (PS4) does

after the PI conveyance sensor /Up (PS31) turns
ON.

J-7521
During operation: The PI conveyance sensor /

Lw (PS37) does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the PI pick-up solenoid /Lw
(SD14) turns ON.

J-7522
During operation: The PI exit sensor (PS4) does

after the PI conveyance sensor /Lw (PS37) turns
ON.

J-7523
During operation: The FD entrance sensor (PS1)

time after the PI exit sensor (PS4) turns ON.

J-7524
During operation: The PI multi feed is detected.

J-7530
During operation:
(RU-506)
The entrance sensor (PS1) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after the exit
sensor of the previous device turns ON.
J-7531
During operation:
(RU-506)
While in the straight pass, the paper exit sensor
ON.

J-7532
During operation:
(RU-506)
The entrance sensor (PS1) does not turn OFF
within a specified period of time after it turns ON.

K -13
The RU and the main body Remove jammed paper if any

stop immediately.

Classificatio
n
SD
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
J-7533
During operation:
(RU-506)
While in the reverse pass, the paper exit sensor
ON.

J-7535
During operation:
(RU-506)
The paper exit sensor (PS2) does not turn OFF

J-7550
During operation:
(RU-509)
The entrance sensor (PS1) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time.

J-7551
During operation:
(RU-509)
The humidification section entrance sensor
of time.

J-7552
During operation:
(RU-509)
The de-curler entrance sensor (PS2) does not
turn ON within a specified period of time in the
bypass path conveyance.

J-7553
During operation:
(RU-509)
The de-curler entrance sensor (PS2) does not
turn ON within a specified period of time in the
lower path conveyance.

J-7554
During operation:
(RU-509)
The color density detection timing sensor (PS3)
time.

J-7555
During operation:
(RU-509)
The paper exit sensor (PS12) does not turn ON

J-7556
During operation:
(RU-509)
The paper exit sensor (PS12) does not turn OFF

J-7561

The SD and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
stop immediately.
turns ON.
J-7562

specified period of time after the entrance

J-7563


J-7564

exit sensor (PS4) does not turn ON within a

J-7565

exit sensor (PS4) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after it turns ON.

J-7566

period of time after the horizontal conveyance
sensor /1 (PS2) turns ON.

J-7567


K -14

Classificatio
n
GP
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
J-7568
During operation: The right angle conveyance

specified period of time after the right angle
conveyance motor (M6) turns ON.

J-7569
During operation: The folding sensor /1 (PS7)

time after the folding entrance motor (M3) turns
ON.

J-7570
During operation: The saddle stitching paper

specified period of time after the folding sub
scan alignment exit motor (M8) turns ON.

J-7571
During operation: The bundle sensor /1 (PS14)

time after the bundle arm rotation motor (M22)
turns ON.

J-7572

time after the bundle clip motor (M11) turns ON.

J-7573

time after the bundle sensor /2 (PS15) turns ON.

J-7574


J-7575
During operation: The right angle conveyance

sensor /2 (PS6) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after it turns ON. Or the
folding entrance sensor (PS60) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time after it
turns ON.

J-7576
During operation: The folding sensor /2 (PS44)


J-7577


J-7578


J-7579
During operation: The folding passage sensor

of time after the folding transfer motor (M4) turns
ON.

J-7580
During operation: The tri-folding exit sensor

of time after the folding transfer motor (M4) turns
ON.

J-7581
During operation: The folding sub scan

alignment exit motor (M8) does not turn OFF

J-7582
During operation: The folding passage sensor


J-7583
During operation: The tri-folding paper exit


J-7584
During operation: The trimming registration

specified period of time after the bundle press
movement motor (M17) turns ON.

J-7585
During operation: The trimming registration

specified period of time after the bundle
registration motor (M12) turns ON.

J-7590
During operation: The enter sensor (S1) does

not turn OFF within a specified period of time
after it turns ON.
K -15
The GP/main body stop

immediately.


Classificatio
n
PB
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
J-7591
During operation: The stepper 1 speed sensor

(S2) does not turn OFF within a specified period

J-7592
During operation: The bypass sensor (S8) does

not turn OFF within a specified period of time
after it turns ON.

J-7593
During operation: The exit sensor (S7) does not

turn OFF within a specified period of time after it
turns ON.

J-7594
During operation: The punch flag sensor (S9)


J-7595
During operation: The u-channel sensor (S4)


J-7596
During operation: The backstop sensor (S5)


J-7597
During operation: The stepper 2 speed sensor

(S6) does not turn OFF within a specified period

J-7660

time after the main body paper exit sensor turns
ON.
The PB and the main body Remove jammed paper if any

stop immediately.
J-7661
During operation: The SC entrance sensor

ON.

J-7662
During operation: The SC entrance sensor


J-7663
During operation: The cover paper entrance

specified period of time after the main body
paper exit sensor turns ON.

J-7664

ON.

J-7665


J-7666
During operation: The SC paper detection

specified period of time after the SC entrance

J-7667


J-7668
During operation: When conveying 2 sheets at a

time, the SC paper detection sensor (PS16)
time after the operation starts.

J-7669
During operation: When conveying 2 sheets at a

time, the SC paper detection sensor (PS16)

J-7670

specified period of time after the SC bundle
conveyance motor (M17) turns ON.

J-7671
During operation: The clamp paper sensor

period of time after the clamp motor (M22) turns
OFF.

K -16

Classificatio
n
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
J-7674
During operation: The cover paper sensor /Rt

period of time after the cover paper feed clutch
(CL71) turns ON.

J-7675
During operation: The relay conveyance

entrance sensor (PS93) does not turn ON within
a specified period of time after the SC entrance

J-7676
During operation: When starting trimming of the

cover paper fed from the PB, the cover paper
switchback sensor (PS44) does not turn ON
within a specified time period after the cover
paper conveyance motor (M45) turns ON.

J-7677
During operation: When finishing trimming of the

cover paper fed from the PB, the cover paper
switchback sensor (PS44) does not turn OFF

J-7678
During operation: When positioning the leading

edge of the cover paper fed from the PB, the
cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) does not turn OFF

J-7679

edge of the cover paper fed from the PB, the
cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) does not turn ON
paper conveyance motor (M45) turns forward
rotation ON.

J-7680
During operation: When cover paper is fed from

the main body, the cover paper sensor/Rt
(PS45) does not turn ON within a specified time
period after the cover paper entrance sensor
(PS3) turns ON.

J-7681
During operation: The relay conveyance

intermediate sensor (PS91) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after the relay
conveyance entrance sensor (PS93) turns ON.

J-7682
During operation: When starting trimming of the

cover paper fed from the main body, the cover
paper switchback sensor (PS44) does not turn
ON within a specified time period after the cover

J-7683
During operation: When finishing trimming of the

cover paper fed from the main body, the cover
paper switchback sensor (PS44) does not turn
OFF within a specified time period after the
cover paper conveyance motor (M45) turns ON.

J-7684

edge of the cover paper fed from the main body,
the cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) does not turn
OFF within a specified time period after the
cover paper conveyance motor (M45) turns ON.

J-7685

edge of the cover paper fed from the main body,
the cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) does not turn
ON within a specified time period after the cover
paper conveyance motor (M45) turns forward
rotation ON.

J-7686
During operation: The booklet end sensor

period of time after the booklet conveyance belt

J-7687
During operation: When loading first book, the

booklet sensor /1 (PS66) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after the booklet
conveyance belt up down motor (M63) turns ON.

J-7688
During operation: When first row of book moves,

the booklet sensor /2 (PS67) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after the booklet
movement motor (M64) turns ON.

K -17

Classificatio
n
ADU
JAM Code

Cause
Resulting operation
Correction
J-7689
During operation: When feeding paper, the

cover paper conveyance sensor /1 (PS75) does
after the cover paper feed clutch (CL71) turns
ON.

J-7690
During operation: The cover paper conveyance

specified period of time after the cover paper

J-7691
During operation: When refeeding paper, the

cover paper conveyance sensor /3 (PS77) does
after the cover paper feed clutch (CL71) turns
ON.

J-7692
During operation: The cover paper conveyance


J-7693
During operation: The multi feed detection

board /2 (MFDBR) turns OFF.

J-7694
During operation: The relay conveyance exit

specified period of time after the relay
conveyance intermediate sensor (PS91) turns
ON.

J-7695
During operation: The relay conveyance exit


J-7696
During operation: The cover paper switchback

feed motor (M74) turns ON.

J-7697
During operation: No paper is detected (paper

has been removed) when restarting the job after
recovery.

J-7698
During operation: A cover paper has not been

conveyed to the cover paper table section when
clamping of inside pages is finished.

J-9201
During operation: The ADU reverse sensor

period of time after the reverse/exit sensor
(PS19) turns ON.
J-9202
During operation: The ADU stop sensor (PS20)

J-9251
When idling : The ADU reverse sensor (PS21)

J-9252
When idling : The ADU stop sensor (PS20) turns

ON while in idling.
J-9301
During operation: The ADU conveyance sensor

period of time after the ADU reverse motor
(M32) turns ON.
Stops immediately.

J-9351
When idling : The ADU conveyance sensor


J-9401
During operation: The ADU pre-registration

specified period of time after the ADU
Stops immediately.

J-9451
When idling: The ADU pre-registration sensor

Pull out thePull out tray and

ADU and remove jammed paper if
any.
K -18
Stops immediately.


-

K TROUBLESHOOTING > 2. MALFUNCTION CODE
2. MALFUNCTION CODE
2.1 Trouble reset method
Turn OFF/ON the power switch (SW2) of the main body when releasing an abnormal condition.
Note
To prevent problems such as toner adhesion due to the temperature rise in the machine, cooling by fan is performed for 5 minutes
after the malfunction code occurs.
When SW2 is turned OFF within 5 minutes after the malfunction code occurs, a message "Cooling in progress. Power will be off
when completed." appears. Do not turn ON SW2 before the message disappears.
Machine cooling is not performed when the malfunction code which has "*" on the malfunction code column occurs. In that case,
the message does not appear even when turning SW2 OFF within 5 minutes after it occurs.
2.2 Function to detach defective sections

When the abnormality occurs on the part for which the faulty part isolation function is available, the defective units can be detached temporarily
to use other control unit manually.
While detached, an error detection is not carried out on these detached units.
There are 2 methods of setting for limited use.
(1) User operation

When a malfunction code occurs, press the HELP key following the message on the operation panel and then turn the sub power switch
(SW2) OFF and ON. This operation allows you to use it temporarily until the SW2 is OFF and ON (including an OFF/ON operation by the
weekly timer) next time.
(2) DIPSW setting

Turning the sub power switch (SW2) OFF and ON after setting the specified software DIPSW bit allows you to make a limited use of it until
the bit setting is released next time (it requires the OFF/ON operation of the SW2).
2.3 Malfunction code list

WARNING
When any malfunction of C1540 to 1562; PB glue tank temperature abnormality or C3501 to 3912, 3914, 3915; fusing temperature
abnormality occurs, be sure to repair defective parts then set the software DIPSW3-1 of service mode to 0. If DIPSW3-1 is set to 0
before defective parts are fixed, it may cause fire.
Classification
Main body:
Communication
error
Malfunction
code
Cause
Resulting
operation
Estimated abnormal parts
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-0001
Communication error
between the printer control
board (PRCB) and the PF
drive board (PFDB) or LU
drive board (LUDB).
C-0002
Communication error
board (PRCB) and the
conveyance drive board
(CDB).
C-0003
Communication error
conveyance drive board
(CDB).
Printer control board

(PRCB)
Conveyance drive board
(CDB)
Main body:
Paper feed
motor
abnormality
C-0101
An error detection signal of

M41 is detected
continuously for a
specified period of time
while the paper feed motor
(M41) is ON.

(PRCB)
Paper feed motor (M41)
LU: LU paper
feed motor
abnormality
C-0102

M1 is detected
continuously for a
(M1) is ON.
LU drive board (LUDB)

Interlock switch /1
(MS1), /2 (MS2)
Upper door sensor
(PS100), front door
sensor (PS115)
DIPSW18-3
LU paper
feed is not
available
PF: PF paper
feed motor
abnormality
C-0103

M1 is detected
continuously for a
(M1) is ON.
PF drive board (PFDB)

switch (SW1)
sensor (PS23)
DIPSW35-0
DIPSW35-1
DIPSW35-2
DIPSW35-3
DIPSW35-4
DIPSW35-5
PF paper
feed is not
available
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
K -19

(PRCB)
(PRCB)
(CDB)

Classification
Main body:
Paper feed tray
abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-0201
The upper limit sensor /1

(PS30) does not turn ON
within a specified period of
time after the paper lift
motor /1 (M38) turns ON.
DIPSW18-0
(PRCB)
Paper lift motor /1 (M38)
(PS30)
Pick-up solenoid /1
(SD7)
Paper feed
in tray 1 is
unavailable
C-0202

DIPSW18-1
(PRCB)
(PS36)
Pick-up solenoid /2
(SD8)
Paper feed
in tray 2 is
unavailable
C-0203

DIPSW18-2
(PRCB)
(PS42)
Pick-up solenoid /3
(SD9)
Paper feed
in tray 3 is
unavailable
C-0204
A lock signal of M100 is

detected while the paper
lift motor (M100) is ON.

Upper limit sensor
(PS109)
Paper lift motor (M100)
C-0205
A lock signal of M100 is

detected while the paper
lift motor (M100) is ON.

Upper limit sensor
(PS109)
C-0208

C-0209
DIPSW18-3
LU paper
feed is not
available

(PS1)
DIPSW21-4
Paper feed
in PF upper
tray is
unavailable
Power supply line fuse for

the paper lift motor /1 (M2)
blows out.

DIPSW21-4
Paper feed
in PF upper
tray is
unavailable
C-0211


(PS9)
DIPSW21-5
Paper feed
in PF lower
tray is
unavailable
C-0212
Power supply line fuse for

the paper lift motor /2 (M3)
blows out.

DIPSW21-5
Paper feed
in PF lower
tray is
unavailable
Main body:
Paper exit
abnormality
C-0213
The paper exit pressure

home sensor (PS10) does
not turn ON within a
after it turns OFF.
AC drive board (ACDB)

(PRCB)
Paper exit motor (M54)
Paper exit pressure
sensor (PS10)
Main body: Fan

abnormality
C-0301*

FM47 is detected
continuously for a
while the main body fan
(FM47) is ON.

(PRCB)
Main body fan (FM47)
C-0302*

any of FM26 or FM28 is
detected continuously for a
while the tucking fan /1
(FM26) and /3 (FM28) are
ON.

(PRCB)
Tucking fan /1 (FM26)
LU: LU lift motor

abnormality
PF: Paper lift

motor
abnormality
K -20

Classification
LU: LU fan
abnormality
PF: PF fan
abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-0303

FM66 is detected
continuously for a
while ADU cooling fan /1
(FM66) is ON.

(CDB)
ADU cooling fan /1
(FM66)
C-0304*

any of FM61, FM62 or
FM63 is detected
continuously for a
while the paper exit
cooling fans /1 (FM61), /2
ON.

(PRCB)
Paper exit fan /1 (FM61)
C-0305*

FM36 is detected
continuously for a
while the deodorization fan
(FM36) is ON.

(PRCB)
Deodorization fan
(FM36)
C-0306

FM1 is detected
continuously for a
while the paper feed assist
fan /Fr (FM1) is ON.

Paper feed assist fan /Fr
(FM1)
C-0307

FM2 is detected
continuously for a
fan /Rr (FM2) is ON.

Paper feed assist fan /Rr
(FM2)
C-0308

FM1 is detected
continuously for a
fan /Fr11 (FM1) is ON.

Fr11 (FM1)
C-0309

FM3 is detected
continuously for a

Fr12 (FM3)
C-0310

FM2 is detected
continuously for a
fan /Rr11 (FM2) is ON.

Rr11 (FM2)
C-0311

FM4 is detected
continuously for a

Rr12 (FM4)
C-0312

FM5 is detected
continuously for a

Fr21 (FM5)
C-0313

FM7 is detected
continuously for a

Fr22 (FM7)
K -21
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-0314

FM6 is detected
continuously for a

Rr21 (FM6)
C-0315

FM8 is detected
continuously for a

Rr22 (FM8)
C-0316

while the dehumidifier
fans /1 (FM11) and /2
(FM12) are ON.

Dehumidifier fan /1
(FM11)
Dehumidifier fan /2
(FM12)
C-0317

while the dehumidifier
(FM14) are ON.

Dehumidifier fan /3
(FM13)
Dehumidifier fan /4
(FM14)
C-0318

while the ventilation fan /1
ON.

Ventilation fan /1 (FM10)
C-0320

FM3 is detected
continuously for a
while the dehumidifier fan /
1 (FM3) is ON.

Dehumidifier fan /1
(FM3)
C-0321

FM4 is detected
continuously for a
while the dehumidifier fan /
2 (FM4) is ON.

Dehumidifier fan /2
(FM4)
Main body: Fan

abnormality
C-0322

FM67 is detected
continuously for a
while ADU cooling fan /2
(FM67) is ON.

(CDB)
ADU cooling fan /2
(FM67)
Main body: Fan

abnormality
C-0323*

FM62 is detected
continuously for a
while the paper exit fan /2
(FM62) is ON.
C-0324*

FM63 is detected
continuously for a
while the paper exit fan /3
(FM63) is ON.
C-0401
24VDC is not supplied to

LU.
C-0402

LU.
LU: LU fan
abnormality
LU: LU power
source
abnormality
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).

(PRCB)

(PRCB)
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
K -22

DC power supply /2
(DCPS/2)
DC power supply /1
(DCPS1)
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
PF: PF power
source
abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-0403

PF.

DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
C-0404

PF.

DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
C-0405

PF.

DC power supply /1
(DCPS1)
C-0406

PF.

DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
PF: PF Tray 1
Heater high
temperature
hardware
detection
abnormality
C-0407
24V power source

abnormal signal is
detected.

(TEMS/3)
in PF
PF: PF Tray 2
Heater high
temperature
hardware
detection
abnormality
C-0408
24V power source

abnormal signal is
detected.

(TEMS/4)
in PF
PF: PF fan
heater
abnormality
C-0409
Fan heater /Up (DH3) high

temperature abnormality
The temperature sensor /3
(TEMS/3) detects the
prescribed or higher value
continuously for a
specified period of time.

AC drive board in PF
(ACDB)
Fan heater /Up (DH3)
(TEMS/3)
Dehumidifier fans /1
(FM11) and /2 (FM12)
C-0410
Fan heater /Lw (DH4) high

continuously for a

(ACDB)
Fan heater /Lw (DH4)
(TEMS/4)
Dehumidifier fans /3
(FM13) and /4 (FM14)
PF: PF fan
heater
abnormality
C-0411
Fan heater /Up (DH3) low

prescribed or lower value
continuously for a

(ACDB)
(TEMS/3)
PF: PF fan
heater
abnormality
C-0412
Fan heater /Lw (DH4) low

continuously for a

(ACDB)
(TEMS/4)
C-0413

temperature rise
abnormality
The temperature detected
by the temperature
sensor /3 (TEMS/3) has
not risen to a prescribed
level within a specified
period of time.

(ACDB)
(TEMS/3)
C-0414

temperature rise
abnormality
by the temperature
sensor /4 (TEMS/4) has
not risen to a prescribed
level within a specified
period of time.

(ACDB)
(TEMS/4)
K -23
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
LU: LU
temperature
sensor
abnormality
C-0415

(TEMS2) detects an error
detection signal
continuously for a
(Hardware detection)

Dehumidification
heater /3 (DH2)
(TEMS2)
AC Drive Assy
Main body AC drive
board (ACDB)
LU: LU
dehumidifier
heater
abnormality
C-0416
Dehumidifier heater /3
(DH2) high temperature
abnormality
(TEMS2) detects the
continuously for a
(Software detection)

Dehumidification
heater /3 (DH2)
(TEMS2)
AC drive assy
Main body AC drive
board (ACDB)
C-0417
(DH2) low temperature
abnormality
The temperature sensor
(TEMS) detects the
continuously for a

AC Drive Assy
Main body AC drive
board (ACDB)
Dehumidification
heater /3 (DH2)
(TEMS2)
C-0418
(DH2) temperature rise
abnormality
by the temperature sensor
(TEMS) has not risen to a
prescribed level within a

Main body AC drive
board (ACDB)
Dehumidification
heater /3 (DH2)
(TEMS2)
AC drive assy
FS: FS
abnormality
C-1005
Communication error.
The main body

and the FS stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).

(PRCB)
FNS control board
(FNSCB)
FD: FD
abnormality
C-1006
The main body

and the FD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).

(PRCB)
FD control board
(FDCB)
SD: SD
abnormality
C-1007
The main body

and the SD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).

(PRCB)
SD control board
(SDCB)
PB: PB
abnormality
C-1009
Communication error
between Main CPU in the
and Sub CPU1.
PB control board
(PBCB)
Control program
C-1010
Communication error
between Main CPU in the
and Sub CPU2.
The main body

and the PB stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
PB control board C-1011

(PBCB)
Paper feed error between

the main body and PB.
GP : GP
abnormality
C-1012
Communication
abnormality.
The main body

and the RU stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).

(PRCB)
Punch Controller PCB
RU: RU-509
abnormality
C-1013
The main body

and the RU stop
immediately to

(PRCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
PB control board
(PBCB)
Control program
PB control board
(PBCB)
Control program
K -24
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
LU paper
feed is not
available

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause
Communication
abnormality.

Resulting
operation
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
RU : RU-506
abnormality
C-1014
FS: FS-531/612
abnormality
C-1101
The shift unit does not get
(FS-531/612 to the shift position or the
home position within a
)
FS: FS-521
abnormality
C-1102
(FS-521)
FS: FS-531/612
abnormality
C-1102
The main tray upper limit
(FS-531/612 sensor (PS2) does not turn
)
ON within a specified
period of time after the
main tray up down motor
(M3) turns ON.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
(M3)
sensor (PS2)
FS: FS-521
abnormality
C-1103
(FS-521)
The alignment home

sensors /Rr (PS8) and /Fr
(PS31) do not turn ON
time after the home
position search operation
of the alignment motors /
Rr (M5) and /Fr (M22)
starts.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
Alignment motor /Rr
(M5)
Alignment motor /Fr
(M22)
Alignment home
sensor /Rr (PS8)
Alignment home
sensor /Fr (PS31)
FS: FS-531/612
abnormality
C-1103
The alignment home
(FS-531/612 sensor /Up (PS8) does not
)
turn ON or OFF within a
after the alignment motor
(M5) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)

Alignment motor /Up
(M5)
Alignment home
sensor /Up (PS8)
FS: FS-521
abnormality
C-1104
(FS-521)
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
(M7)
FS: FS-531/612
abnormality
C-1104
A prescribed speed is not
(FS-531/612 obtained within a specified
)
paper exit roller motor
(M7) turns ON.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
Paper exit roller motor
(M7)
FS: FS-521
abnormality
C-1105
(FS-521)
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
Paper exit opening
motor (M8)
Paper exit opening
home sensor (PS12)
The tray up down motor

(M3) does not turn OFF
even when a specified
period of time elapses
after it starts operations.
Or, it operates for more
than the allowed time at a
speed out of the specified
one.
The main body

and the RU stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).

(PRCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
The main body

and the FS stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
Shift roller motor (M2)
Shift roller home sensor
(PS18)
The main tray paper exit

motor (M7) operates for
more than the allowed time
at a speed out of the
specified one.
The paper exit opening

unit does not get to the
specified opening position
time after the paper exit
opening motor (M8) starts
operations.
K -25
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
DIPSW6-4
FNS control board
(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
(M3)
sensor (PS2)
sensor (PS3)
Control
when
FS main
tray and
stapling are
not available
DIPSW6-4
FS main
tray and
stapling are
not available
DIPSW6-4
FS main
tray and
stapling are
not available
DIPSW6-4
FS main
tray and
stapling are
not available

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
FS: FS-531/612
abnormality
C-1105
The paper exit home
(FS-531/612 sensor (PS12) does not
)
after the paper exit
opening motor (M8) turns
ON.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
Paper exit opening
motor (M8)
(PS12)
FS: FS-521
abnormality
C-1106
(FS-521)
DIPSW6-3
FNS control board
(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
(M11)
sensor (PS11)
FS: FS-531/612
abnormality
C-1106
The Stapler movement
(FS-531/612 home sensor (PS11) does
)
after the stapler movement
Relay board (RB)

(M11)
sensor (PS11)
FS: FS-521
abnormality
(skew rotation)
C-1107
(FS-521)
The stapler rotation home

sensor (PS14) does not
turn ON within a specified
home position search
operation of the stapler
rotation motor (M4) starts.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
(M4)
sensor (PS14)
FS: FS-612
abnormality
C-1107
(FS-612)
The clincher rotation home

after the clincher rotation
Relay board (RB)

(M4)
Clincher rotation home
sensor (PS14)
FS: FS-521
C-1108
abnormality
(FS-521)
(vertical rotation)

operation of the stapler
rotation motor (M4) starts.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
(M4)
sensor (PS14)
FS: FS-612
abnormality
C-1108
(FS-612)

stapler rotation motor (M6)
turns ON.
Relay board (RB)

(M6)
sensor (PS13)
FS: FS-521
abnormality
C-1109
(FS-521)
After the stapler motor /Fr

(M31) starts operations, it
does not complete
operations within a
specified period of time,
and the stapler home
sensor /Fr (PS41) does not
turn ON.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
Stapler board (SB)
Stapler motor /Fr (M31)
Stapler home sensor /Fr
(PS41)
FS: FS-531/612
abnormality
FS: FS-521
abnormality
The stapler movement

after the home position
search operation of the
stapler movement motor
(M11) starts.
Control
when
The use of
staple is
unavailable
DIPSW6-3
The use of
staple is
unavailable
DIPSW6-3
The use of
staple is
unavailable
DIPSW6-3
The use of
staple is
unavailable
C-1109
The stapler motor home
(FS-531/612 sensor /Fr (PS31) does not
)
stapler motor /Fr (M14)
turns ON.
Relay board (RB)

Stapler motor home
sensor /Fr (PS31)
C-1110
(FS-521)
DIPSW6-3
FNS control board
(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
Stapler board (SB)
Stapler motor /Rr (M30)
Stapler home sensor /Rr
(PS40)
The use of
staple is
unavailable
After the stapler motor /Rr

(M30) starts operations, it
does not complete
operations within a
specified period of time,
and the stapler home
sensor /Rr (PS40) does
not turn ON.
K -26

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
FS: FS-531/612
abnormality
C-1110
The stapler motor home
(FS-531/612 sensor /Rr (PS30) does
)
after the stapler motor /Rr
(M9) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)

Stapler motor home
sensor /Rr (PS30)
FS: FS-612
abnormality
C-1111
(FS-612)
The clincher motor home

sensor /Fr (PS33) does not
clincher motor /Fr (M15)
turns ON.
Relay board (RB)

Clincher motor /Fr (M15)
Clincher motor home
sensor /Fr (PS33)
C-1112
(FS-612)
The clincher motor home

sensor /Rr (PS32) does
after the clincher motor /Rr
(M10) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)

Clincher motor /Rr (M10)
Clincher motor home
sensor /Rr (PS32)
FS: FS-521
abnormality
C-1113
(FS-521)
After the home position

rear stopper motor (M26)
starts, the rear stopper
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
Rear stopper motor
(M26)
Rear stopper home
sensor (PS35)
DIPSW6-4
FS main
tray and
stapling are
not available
FS: FS-612
abnormality
C-1113
(FS-612)
After the home position

search operation of saddle
stitching stopper motor
(M18) starts, the saddle
stitching stopper home
period of time.
Relay board (RB)

motor (M18)
home sensor (PS23)
DIPSW18-5
The use of
multi half
folding,
saddle
stitching and
multi trifolding
unavailable
C-1114
(FS-612)
The alignment home

sensor /Lw (PS24) does
after the alignment motor /
Lw (M16) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)

Alignment motor /Lw
(M16)
Alignment home
sensor /Lw (PS24)
DIPSW18-5
The use of
multi half
folding,
saddle
stitching and
multi trifolding
unavailable
C-1115
(FS-612)
The folding knife home

folding knife motor (M19)
turns ON.
Relay board (RB)

Folding knife motor
(M19)
Folding knife home
sensor (PS22)
DIPSW18-5
The use of
multi half
folding,
saddle
stitching and
multi trifolding
unavailable
(FS not
connected)
C-1116
(FS-612)

obtained within a specified
folding transfer motor
(M20) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)

(M20)
DIPSW18-5
The use of
multi half
folding,
saddle
stitching and
multi trifolding
unavailable
(FS not
connected)
C-1124
The tray upper limit

sensor /Lw (PS209) or the
tray lower limit sensor /Lw
time after the Tray lift
motor /Lw (M202) turns
ON.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
Tray lift motor /Lw
(M202)
Tray upper limit sensor /
Lw (PS209)
Tray lower limit sensor /
Lw (PS210)
DIPSW18-6
PI unusable
(PI not
connected)
PI: PI
abnormality
K -27

Classification
PK: PK
abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1125
The tray upper limit

sensor /Up (PS205) or the
tray lower limit sensor /Up
time after the tray lift
motor /Up (M201) turns
ON.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
Traylift motor /Up
(M201)
Tray upper limit sensor /
Up (PS205)
Tray lower limit sensor /
Up (PS204)
DIPSW18-6
PI unusable
(PI not
connected)
C-1126

obtained within a specified
conveyance motor (M203)
turns ON.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
Conveyance motor
(M203)
DIPSW18-6
PI unusable
(PI not
connected)
C-1127
The punch shift home

punch shift motor (M302)
turns ON.
DIPSW19-5
FNS control board
(FNSCB)
Punch drive board
(PDB)
Punch shift motor
(M302)
Punch shift home sensor
(PS303)
PK
unusable
(PK not
connected)
C-1132
The punch home sensor

time after the punch motor
(M301) turns ON.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
Punch drive board
(PDB)
Punch motor (M301)
Punch home sensor
(PS301)
DIPSW19-5
PK
unusable
(PK not
connected)
FS: FS-531/612
abnormality
C-1137
The gate home sensor
(FS-531/612 (PS16) does not turn ON
)
time after the gate motor
(M12) turns ON.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
Gate motor (M12)
Gate home sensor
(PS16)
FS: FS-521
abnormality
C-1140
(FS-521)
After the paper exit arm

motor /Fr (M23) starts
operations, it does not
complete operations within
a specified period of time,
and the paper exit arm
home sensor /Fr (PS9)
does not turn ON. Or, it
operates for more than the
allowed time at a speed
out of the specified one.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
(M23)
Paper exit arm home
sensor (PS9)
DIPSW6-4
FS main
tray and
stapling are
not available
C-1141
(FS-521)
The stack assist home

operation of the stack
assist motor (M24) starts.
DIPSW6-4
FNS control board
(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
(M24)
Stack assist home
sensor (PS32)
FS main
tray and
stapling are
not available
C-1142
(FS-521)
The intermediate roller

not turn ON even after a
after the intermediate roller
open/close motor (M25)
starts the home position
search operation.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
Alignment motor /Fr
(M22)
Alignment motor /Rr
(M5)
Intermediate roller
release solenoid (SD7)
DIPSW6-4
FS main
tray and
stapling are
not available
C-1143
(FS-521)
The conveyance motor

(M1) does not turn ON
when the start button is
turned ON. Or the
does not shift the speed
for each processing.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
Conveyance motor (M1)
Paper exit sensor
(PS37)
FNS entrance sensor
(PS4)
DIPSW6-5
FS unusable
(FS not
connected)
K -28

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1144
(FS-521)
The paper exit alignment

plate home sensor /Fr
alignment motor /Fr (M15)
search operation. Or, even
after a specified period of
time after M15 starts the
operation, it does not stop.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
motor /Fr (M15)
plate home sensor /Fr
(PS18)
DIPSW6-4
FS main
tray and
stapling are
not available
C-1145
(FS-521)

plate home sensor /Rr
alignment motor /Rr (M14)
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
motor /Rr (M14)
plate home sensor /Rr
(PS19)
DIPSW6-4
FS main
tray and
stapling are
not available
C-1146
(FS-521)
The bypass roller release

after the bypass roller
release motor (M12) starts
the home position search
operation. Or, even after a
after M12 starts the
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
motor (M12)
home sensor (PS13)
DIPSW6-4
FS main
tray and
stapling are
not available
C-1147
(FS-521)

plate retraction home
paper exit alignment plate
retraction home motor
(M18) starts the home
position search operation.
Or, even after a specified
period of time after M18
starts the operation, it
does not stop.
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
plate retraction motor
(M18)
plate retraction home
sensor (PS24)
DIPSW6-4
FS main
tray and
stapling are
not available
C-1148
(FS-521)
The stacker entrance roller

release home sensor
time after the stacker
entrance roller release
motor (M16) starts the
FNS control board

(FNSCB)
FNS drive board
(FNSDB)
release motor (M16)
release home sensor
(PS23)
DIPSW6-4
FS main
tray and
stapling are
not available
LS (1st tandem): C-1201

LS abnormality
The stacker tray encoder

sensor (PS2) does not turn
stacker tray up down
motor (M1) turns ON. Or,
the initial operation or the
stacker tray down
operation is not completed
time.
The main body

and the LS stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
K -29
DIPSW6-6
motor (M1)
LS (1st
tandem)
unusable

Classification
LS (2nd
tandem): LS
abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1202
The shift unit home sensor

time after the shift unit
PS11 does not turn ON
time.
DIPSW6-6
Shift unit motor (M5)
LS (1st
tandem)
unusable
C-1203
The alignment plate home

alignment motor (M7) turns
ON. Or, PS12 does not
period of time.
DIPSW6-6
Alignment motor (M7)
LS (1st
tandem)
unusable
C-1204
The grip conveyance

after the grip conveyance

(M4)
DIPSW6-6
LS (1st
tandem)
unusable
C-1205
The stacker tray upper

limit switch (MS2) is ON
when the stacker tray up
down motor (M1) is in the
up operation.

motor (M1)
switch (MS2)
DIPSW6-6
LS (1st
tandem)
unusable
C-1206
The stacker tray lower limit

switch (MS3) is ON when
the stacker tray up down
motor (M1) is in the down
operation.

motor (M1)
switch (MS3)
DIPSW6-6
LS (1st
tandem)
unusable
C-1211
The stacker tray encoder

stacker tray up down
the initial operation or the
stacker tray down
operation is not completed
time.
DIPSW6-6
motor (M1)
LS (1st
tandem)
unusable
C-1212
The shift unit home sensor

time after the shift unit
time.
DIPSW6-6
LS (1st
tandem)
unusable
C-1213

alignment motor (M7) turns
ON. Or, PS12 does not
period of time.
DIPSW6-6
LS (1st
tandem)
unusable
C-1214
The grip conveyance

after the grip conveyance

(M4)
DIPSW6-6
LS (1st
tandem)
unusable
C-1215
The stacker tray upper

limit switch (MS2) is ON
when the stacker tray up
down motor (M1) is in the
up operation.

motor (M1)
switch (MS2)
DIPSW6-6
LS (1st
tandem)
unusable
K -30

Classification
FD: FD
abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause
C-1216
The stacker tray lower limit

switch (MS3) is ON when
the stacker tray up down
motor (M1) is in the down
operation.
C-1221
The 1st folding cam home

period of time after the 1st
folding release motor
(M14) turns ON.
C-1222
The 2nd folding cam home

period of time after the 2nd
(M15) turns ON.
C-1223

Resulting
operation

motor (M1)
switch (MS3)
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
DIPSW6-6
Control
when
LS (1st
tandem)
unusable
1st folding release motor DIPSW6-0

(M14)
Folding drive board
(FDB)
1st folding cam home
sensor (PS55)
The use of
the folding
function and
the punch
section is
unavailable
2nd folding release

motor (M15)
Folding drive board
(FDB)
2nd folding cam home
sensor (PS56)
DIPSW6-0
The use of
the folding
function and
the punch
section is
unavailable
The 3rd folding cam home

period of time after the 3rd
(M16) turns ON.
3rd folding release

motor (M16)
Folding drive board
(FDB)
3rd folding cam home
sensor (PS57)
DIPSW6-0
The use of
the folding
function and
the punch
section is
unavailable
C-1224
The 2 holes punch home

OFF within a specified
period of time after the 2holes punch home position
return operation starts. Or,
after the punch motor
(M10) turns ON, the 2
holes punch home sensor
(PS8) does not turn OFF.
Punch motor (M10)

Punch drive board
(PDB)
2 holes punch home
sensor (PS8)
DIPSW6-0
The use of
the folding
function and
the punch
section is
unavailable
C-1225
The 3 holes/4 holes punch

not turn OFF within a
after the 3 holes/4 holes
punch home position
return operation starts. Or,
after the punch motor
(M10) turns ON, the 3
holes/4 holes punch home
OFF.
Punch motor (M10)

Punch drive board
(PDB)
3 holes/4 holes home
sensor (PS9)
DIPSW6-0
The use of
the folding
function and
the punch
section is
unavailable
C-1226

alignment plate home
position return operation
starts. Or, after the
alignment motor (M12)
turns ON, the alignment
plate home sensor (PS10)
does not turn OFF.

Punch drive board
(PDB)
sensor (PS10)
DIPSW6-0
The use of
the folding
function and
the punch
section is
unavailable
C-1227
The punch registration

after the punch registration
claw home position return
operation starts. Or, after
the punch registration
motor (M13) turns ON, the
punch registration home
turn OFF.
Punch registration motor DIPSW6-0

(M13)
Punch drive board
(PDB)
Punch registration home
sensor (PS11)
The use of
the folding
function and
the punch
section is
unavailable
The main body

and the FD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
K -31

Classification
SD: SD
abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1228
The main tray upper limit

main tray home position
search starts. Or, after the
tray up down motor (M11)
turns ON, the main tray
upper limit sensor (PS20)
does not turn OFF.
Tray up down motor

(M11)
sensor (PS20)
Punch drive board
(PDB)
DIPSW6-1
Main tray
unusable
C-1229
The main tray lower limit

period of time after the tray
up down motor (M11) is in
the down operation.
Tray up down motor

(M11)
Punch drive board
(PDB)
sensor (PS22)
DIPSW6-1
Main tray
unusable
C-1230
After the FD paper lift

motor /Up (M8) is in the
down operation, the PI lift
plate home sensor /Up
time. Or, after the paper lift
motor /Up (M8) is in the up
operation, the PI tray
upper limit sensor /Up
(PS32) does not turn ON.
Paper lift motor /Up (M8) DIPSW6-2

PI lift plate home
sensor /Up (PS34)
PI upper limit sensor /Up
(PS32)
The use of
the PI
section
unavailable
C-1231
After the FD paper lift

motor /Lw (M9) is in the
down operation, the PI lift
plate home sensor /Lw
time. Or, after the paper lift
motor /Lw (M9) is in the up
operation, the PI upper
limit sensor /Lw (PS38)
does not turn ON.
Paper lift motor /Lw (M9) DIPSW6-2

PI lift plate home
sensor /Lw (PS40)
(PS38)
The use of
the PI
section
unavailable
C-1232
An error detection signal is

while the entrance
conveyance motor (M1) is
ON.
Paper lift motor /Lw (M9)

PI lift plate home
sensor /Lw (PS40)
(PS38)
C-1233

M3 is detected
continuously for a
while the intermediate
ON.
Intermediate
Punch drive board
(PDB)
C-1234

M7 is detected
continuously for a
while the PI conveyance
motor (M7) is ON.
PI conveyance motor
(M7)
C-1235

M17 is detected
continuously for a
while the main tray exit
motor (M17) is ON.

(M17)
Punch drive board
(PDB)
C-1241
The scraps press home

bundle exit motor (M5)
search operation.
The main body

and the SD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
K -32
Bundle exit motor (M5)

Scraps press home
sensor (PS48)
SD control board
(SDCB)
SD drive board (SDDB)
DIPSW6-2
The use of
the PI
section
unavailable
DIPSW7-0
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1242
The folding main scan

Fr1 (PS18) does not turn
folding main scan
DIPSW7-0
Folding main scan
Folding main scan
Fr1 (PS18)
SD control board
(SDCB)
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding, multi
tri-folding
and trimmer
unavailable
C-1243
The folding exit home

folding sub scan alignment
exit motor (M8) starts the
after M8 starts to
decelerate, it does not
stop.
Folding sub scan

(M8)
Folding exit home
sensor (PS24)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding, multi
tri-folding
and trimmer
unavailable
C-1244
The saddle stitching

alignment home sensor /Rt
time after the saddle
stitching alignment motor /
Rt (M9) starts the home
does not stop.
DIPSW7-0
Saddle stitching
alignment motor /Rt
(M9)
Saddle stitching
Rt (PS28)
SD control board
(SDCB)
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1245
The bundle arm home

bundle arm motor (M10)
Bundle arm motor (M10) DIPSW7-0

Bundle arm home
sensor (PS32)
SD control board
(SDCB)
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1246
The bundle clip upper limit

bundle clip motor (M11)
Bundle clip motor (M11)

Bundle clip upper limit
sensor (PS33)
Bundle clip lower limit
sensor (PS30)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1247
The bundle registration

after the bundle
registration motor (M12)
Bundle registration
motor (M12)
Bundle registration
home sensor (PS34)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
K -33

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1248
The overlap home sensor

time after the overlap
Overlap motor (M13)

Overlap home sensor
(PS17)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding, multi
tri-folding
and trimmer
unavailable
C-1249
The folding main scan

alignment home sensor /Rr
time after the folding main
scan alignment motor /Rr
does not stop.
DIPSW7-0
Folding main scan
alignment motor /Rr
(M14)
Folding main scan
Rr (PS19)
SD control board
(SDCB)
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding, multi
tri-folding
and trimmer
unavailable
C-1250
The stapler movement

after the home position
stapler movement motor
(M15) starts. Or, even after
a specified period of time
Stapler movement motor DIPSW7-0

(M15)
sensor (PS25)
SD control board
(SDCB)
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1251
The saddle stitching

alignment home sensor /Lt
time after the saddle
stitching alignment motor /
Lt (M16) starts the home
does not stop.
DIPSW7-0
Saddle stitching
alignment motor /Lt
(M16)
Saddle stitching
Lt (PS29)
SD control board
(SDCB)
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1252
The bundle press

movement home sensor
time after the bundle press
movement motor (M17)
Bundle press movement DIPSW7-0

motor (M17)
home sensor (PS36)
SD control board
(SDCB)
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1253
The 1st folding blade

after the 1st folding blade
operation. Or 1st folding
blade home sensor /1
(PS20) does not turned
starts the operation.

(M18)
sensor /1 (PS20), /2
(PS21)
SD control board
(SDCB)
K -34
DIPSW7-0
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding, multi
tri-folding
and trimmer
unavailable

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1254
The 2nd folding blade

home sensor /2 (PS23)
does not turn ON within a
after the 2nd folding blade
operation. Or the 2nd
folding blade home
sensor /1 (PS22) does not
turned ON within a
operation.
2nd folding blade motor

(M19)
sensor /1 (PS22), /2
(PS23)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-2
The use of
the multi trifolding
unavailable
C-1255
The clincher up down

after the clincher up down
home position search. Or,
even after a specified
does not stop.

(M20)
sensor (PS26)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1256
The saddle stitching press

after the saddle stitching
press motor (M21) starts

motor (M21)
home sensor (PS27)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1257
The bundle arm rotation

after the bundle arm
rotation motor (M22) starts
Bundle arm rotation

motor (M22)
Bundle arm rotation
home sensor (PS31)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1258
The bundle press home

bundle press motor (M23)
Bundle press motor

(M23)
Bundle press home
sensor (PS37)
Bundle press lower limit
sensor (PS47)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1259
The bundle press home

bundle press stage up
down motor (M24) starts
operation. Or PS35 or the
bundle press stage up
down upper limit sensor
(PS45) does not turned
ON after a specified period
of time M24 starts the
operation.

down motor (M24)
down home sensor
(PS35)
down limit sensor
(PS45)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
K -35

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1260
The guide shaft home

turn ON even after a
after the guide shaft motor
does not stop.
Guide shaft motor (M25) DIPSW7-0,

DIPSW7-1,
Guide shaft home
sensor (PS46)
DIPSW7-3
SD control board
(SDCB)
C-1261
The stapler home sensor /

Rt (HS1) or the clincher
start sensor /Rt (HS2)
does not turn ON even
time after the stapler
motor /Rt (M29) starts the
operation.
Stapler assembly /Rt

SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0,
DIPSW7-3
The use of
the saddle
stitching and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1262
The stapler home sensor /

Lt (HS3) or the clincher
start sensor /Lt (HS4) does
after the stapler motor /Lt
(M30) starts the operation.
Stapler assembly /Lt

SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0,
DIPSW7-3
The use of
the saddle
stitching and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1263
It does not stop even after

after the trimmer blade
operation.
Trimmer blade motor

(M31)
Trimmer blade home
sensor (PS50)
Trimmer blade upper
limit sensor (PS51)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-3
The use of
the trimmer
unavailable
C-1264

after the trimmer press
operation.
Trimmer press motor

(M32)
Trimmer press home
sensor (PS53)
Trimmer press upper
limit sensor (PS52)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0,
DIPSW7-1,
DIPSW7-3
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1265

after the bundle arm assist
operation.
Bundle arm assist motor DIPSW7-0,

DIPSW7-1,
(M26)
Bundle arm assist home DIPSW7-3
sensor (PS38)
limit sensor (PS39)
SD control board
(SDCB)
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1266
Rotation abnormality is
detected for a specified
period of time in
succession while the
entrance conveyance
motor (M1) is driving.
Entrance conveyance
motor (M1)
SD control board
(SDCB)
C-1267
period of time in
horizontal conveyance
motor (M2)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-4
Sub tray,
paper exit to
subsequent
stage and
FS
unavailable
C-1268
period of time in
folding entrance motor
(M3) is driving.
Folding entrance motor

(M3)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0,
DIPSW7-1,
DIPSW7-2,
DIPSW7-3
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding, multi
tri-folding
and trimmer
unavailable
K -36
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable

Classification
RU : RU-506
abnormality
RU: RU-509
abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1269
period of time in
folding transfer motor (M4)
is driving.

(M4)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0,
DIPSW7-1,
DIPSW7-2,
DIPSW7-3
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding, multi
tri-folding
and trimmer
unavailable
C-1270
period of time in
bundle exit motor (M5) is
driving.

SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0,
DIPSW7-1,
DIPSW7-3
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding and
trimmer
unavailable
C-1271
period of time in
folding sub scan alignment
exit motor (M8) is driving.
Folding sub scan

(M8)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-0,
DIPSW7-1,
DIPSW7-2,
DIPSW7-3
The use of
the saddle
stitching,
multi center
folding, multi
tri-folding
and trimmer
unavailable
C-1272
period of time in
trimmer paddle motor
(M33) is driving.

(M33)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-3
The use of
the trimmer
unavailable
C-1273
The trimmer completion

turn ON even after a
after the trimmer blade
motor (M31) is in the up
operation.
Trimmer blade motor

(M31)
Trimmer completion
sensor (PS62)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-3
The use of
the trimmer
unavailable
C-1275
The wire slack sensor

(PS66) detected the slack
of the trimmer edge drive
wire.
Wire slack prevention

sensor (PS66)
SD control board
(SDCB)
C-1281
FD alignment motor (M3)

drive abnormality. The FD
C-1282
CD alignment motor (M4)

drive abnormality. The CD
C-1290
period of time in
succession while the decurler conveyance motor
(M3) is driving.
Main body and

RU stop
immediately and
main relay (RY1)
is turned OFF.
RU control board
(RUCB)
FD alignment motor
(M3)
FD alignment home
sensor (PS3)
RU control board
(RUCB)
CD alignment motor
(M4)
CD alignment home
sensor (PS4)
The main body

and the RU stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
K -37
De-curler conveyance
motor (M3)
RU control board
(RUCB)

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1291
The home position search

operation of the de-curler
pressure motor /Lw (M5)
does not complete within a
De-curler pressure
motor /Lw (M5)
RU control board
(RUCB)
C-1292

operation of the de-curler
pressure motor /Up (M6)
does not complete within a
De-curler pressure
motor /Up (M6)
RU control board
(RUCB)
C-1293
period of time in
humidification section
driving.
RU control board
(RUCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
DIPSW13-2
Humidificati
on unusable
C-1294

operation of the
(M9) does not complete
time.
DIPSW13-2
(M9)
RU control board
(RUCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
Humidificati
on unusable
C-1295

operation of the
roller pressure motor /Lt
(M10) does not complete
time.
DIPSW13-2
Humidification roller
pressure motor /Lt (M10)
RU control board
(RUCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
Humidificati
on unusable
C-1296
Color density sensor

detection preparation
adjustment value
abnormality
Color density sensor unit DIPSW13-3

Color density control
board (CDCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
Color
density
sensor
cannot be
used
C-1297
Color density sensor

detection start abnormality
DIPSW13-3
Shutter solenoid (SD5)
board (CDCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
Color
density
sensor
cannot be
used
C-1298
EPPROM read out

abnormality in the color
density relay board
(CDRLB)

board (CDCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
DIPSW13-3
Color
density
sensor
cannot be
used
C-1299
The water tank full sensor

(PS13) detects ON
continuously for more than
a specified period of time.
Drain path
Water tank full sensor
(PS13)
RU control board
(RUCB)
DIPSW13-2
Humidificati
on unusable
LS (1st tandem): C-1301

LS abnormality

while the paper cooling fan
motor /Fr (FM1) is ON.
The main body

and the LS stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
An error detection signal is (RL1).
motor /1(FM2) is ON.
Paper cooling fan

motor /Fr (FM1)

motor/Mi (FM3) is ON.
Paper cooling fan

motor /Mi (FM3)
C-1302
C-1303
K -38
Paper cooling fan

motor /1 (FM2)

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1304

FM4 is detected
continuously for a
while the motor cooling fan
motor (FM4) is ON.
Motor cooling fan motor

(FM4)
C-1305

FM5 is detected
continuously for a
motor /Rr (FM5) is ON.
Paper cooling fan

motor /Rr (FM5)
C-1306

motor /Fr (FM1) is ON.
Paper cooling fan

motor /Fr (FM1)
C-1307

motor/1 (FM2) is ON.
Paper cooling fan

motor /1 (FM2)
C-1308

motor /Mi (FM3) is ON.
Paper cooling fan

motor /Mi (FM3)
C-1309

FM4 is detected
continuously for a
while the motor cooling fan
motor (FM4) is ON.

C-1310

FM5 is detected
continuously for a
motor /Rr (FM5) is ON.
Paper cooling fan

motor /Rr (FM5)
SD: SD
abnormality
C-1311
A rotation error detection

signal is detected
continuously for specified
period of time while the
scraps removal fan motor
(FM1) is started or driving.
The main body

and the SD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Scraps removal fan

motor (FM1)
SD control board
(SDCB)
DIPSW7-3
The use of
the trimmer
unavailable
PB: PB
abnormality
C-1330

signal is detected
time period while the cover
paper tray fan /1 (FM71) is
started or driving.
The main body

and the PB stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
PB control board
(PBCB)
PB drive board (PBDB)
(FM71)
DIPSW7-5
Paper feed
from the PB
is
unavailable.
C-1331

signal is detected
time period while the cover
paper tray fan /2 (FM72) is
started or driving.
PB control board
(PBCB)
(FM72)
DIPSW7-5
Paper feed
from the PB
is
unavailable.
C-1332

signal is detected
continuously for a
specified time period while
the exhaust fan /1 (FM80)
is started or driving.
PB control board
(PBCB)
Exhaust fan /1 (FM80)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1333

signal is detected
continuously for a
specified time period while
the exhaust fan /2 (FM81)
is started or driving.

PB control board
(PBCB)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
LS (2nd
tandem): LS
abnormality
K -39

Classification
RU : RU-506
abnormality
RU: RU-509
abnormality
RU: RU-9
abnormality
RU: RU-509
abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-6

PB control board
(PBCB)
Pellet supply cooling fan
(FM4)
Control
when
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1334

signal is detected
period of time while the
pellet supply cooling fan
(FM4) is started or driving.
C-1341
Stack assist fan /Fr (FM1)

rotation abnormality.
Rotation abnormality
detected continuously for
the specified time during
FM1 operation.
C-1342
Stack assist fan /Rr (FM2)

rotation abnormality.
Rotation abnormality
detected continuously for
the specified time during
FM2 operation.
C-1351
Error detection signals of

FM1, FM2 and FM3 are
while the entrance paper
fans /1 (FM1), /2 (FM2)
and /3 (FM3) are ON.
C-1352

FM4 and FM5 are
while the ventilation assist
fans /1 (FM4) and /2 (FM5)
are ON.

(FM4)
(FM5)
RU control board
(RUCB)
C-1353

FM15, FM16 and FM17
are detected continuously
for a specified period of
time while the entrance
paper fans /4 (FM15), /5
ON.
Entrance paper fan /4

(FM15)
(FM16)
(FM17)
RU control board
(RUCB)
C-1354

FM18, FM19 and FM20
are detected continuously
time while the entrance
paper fans /7 (FM18), /8
ON.

(FM18)
(FM19)
(FM20)
RU control board
(RUCB)
C-1355

FM21 is detected
continuously for a
while the ventilation assist
fan /3 (FM21) is ON.
Jumper connector
CN180
(FM21)
RU control board
(RUCB)
C-1356

FM6 is detected
continuously for a
while the humidification
section paper fan /1 (FM6)
is ON.
paper fan /1 (FM6)
RU control board
(RUCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
DIPSW13-2
Humidificati
on unusable
C-1357

FM7 is detected
continuously for a
is ON.
paper fan /2 (FM7)
RU control board
(RUCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
DIPSW13-2
Humidificati
on unusable
The main body

and the RU stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
RU control board
(RUCB)
Stack assist fan /Fr
(FM1)
RU control board
(RUCB)
Stack assist fan /Rr
(FM2)
The main body

and the RU stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
K -40

(FM1)
(FM2)
(FM3)
RU control board
(RUCB)

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1358

FM8 is detected
continuously for a
is ON.
paper fan /3 (FM8)
RU control board
(RUCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
DIPSW13-2
Humidificati
on unusable
C-1359

FM9 is detected
continuously for a
is ON.
paper fan /4 (FM9)
RU control board
(RUCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
DIPSW13-2
Humidificati
on unusable
C-1360

FM10 is detected
continuously for a
section paper fan /5
(FM10) is ON.
paper fan /5 (FM10)
RU control board
(RUCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
DIPSW13-2
Humidificati
on unusable
C-1361

FM11 is detected
continuously for a
section paper fan /6
(FM11) is ON.
paper fan /6 (FM11)
RU control board
(RUCB)
RU control board
(RUCB)
DIPSW13-2
Humidificati
on unusable
C-1364

FM14 is detected
continuously for a
section paper fan (FM14)
is ON.
Power supply fan

(FM14)
DC power supply
(DCPS)
FS: FS
abnormality
C-1402
Non-volatile memory
abnormality.
The main body

and the FS stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
FS control board (LSCB)

FNS control board
(FNSCB)
FD: FD
abnormality
C-1403
Non-volatile memory
abnormality.
The main body

and the FD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
SD: SD
abnormality
C-1404
Non-volatile memory
abnormality.
The main body

and the SD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
PB: PB
abnormality
C-1406
Non-volatile memory
abnormality in the PB
control board (PBCB)
The main body

and the PB stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
PB control board
(PBCB)
Control program
RU: RU-509
abnormality
C-1407
Non-volatile memory
abnormality.
The main body

and the RU stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
RU : RU-506
abnormality
C-1408
Non-volatile memory error. The main body

and the RU stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
K -41

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
SD: SD
abnormality
C-1411
5V power abnormality in
the SD drive board
(SDDB)
FS: FS
abnormality
C-1431
Communication error in FS The main body

and the FS stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Software bug
FD: FD
abnormality
C-1432
Communication error in FD The main body

and the FD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Software bug
SD: SD
abnormality
C-1433
Communication error in
SD
The main body

and the SD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Software bug
PB: PB
abnormality
C-1435
Message queue full or the

control abnormality of Sub
CPU1 in the PB control
board (PBCB)
PB control board
(PBCB)
Control program
C-1436
Message queue full or the

control abnormality of Sub
CPU2 in the PB control
board (PBCB)
The main body

and the PB stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
C-1437
Message queue of the

communication among
tasks in the PB is full.
RU: RU-509
abnormality
C-1438
Communication error in
RU
The main body

and the RU stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Software bug
RU : RU-506
abnormality
C-1439
RU received operation
start from the main body
when unready.
The main body

and the RU stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Software bug
RU: RU-509
abnormality
C-1440
RU SubCPU
The main body
communication error (Main and the RU stop
side)
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
RU SubCPU
C-1441
The main body

and the SD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
PB control board
(PBCB)
Control program
Control program
communication error (Sub

side)
RU control board
(RUCB)
RU program
DIPSW13-3
Color
density
sensor
cannot be
used
RU control board
(RUCB)
RU program
DIPSW13-3
Color
density
sensor
cannot be
used
FD: FD
abnormality
C-1451
When the FD is unready, a

signal to start operations is
received from the main
body.
The main body

and the FD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Software bug
SD: SD
abnormality
C-1452
When the SD is unready, a

body.
The main body

and the SD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Software bug
PB: PB
abnormality
C-1454
PB operation prohibition
abnormality.
The main body

and the PB stop
Control program
K -42

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause
PB received operation
start signal from the main
body when the PB is
unready.

Resulting
operation
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
RU: RU-509
abnormality
C-1455
When RU is unready, a
body.
The main body

and the RU stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Software bug
RU : RU-506
abnormality
C-1456
RU received operation
start signal from the main
body when the RU is
unready.
The main body

and the RU stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Software bug
PB: PB
abnormality
C-1501
The entrance conveyance

has not been completed
time after the entrance
turns ON.
The main body

and the PB stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
PB control board
(PBCB)
Entrance conveyance
motor (M1)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1502

signal is detected for a
specified period of time in
intermediate conveyance
PB control board
(PBCB)
Intermediate
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1504
The SC entrance
conveyance has not been
completed within a
after the SC entrance
turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
SC entrance
conveyance motor
(M11)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1505
The switchback
completed within a
after the SC switchback
turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
SC switchback
conveyance motor
(M12)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1506
The switchback roller

release operation has not
been completed within a
after the SC switchback
release motor (M13) turns
ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
motor (M13)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1507
The SC alignment has not

after SC alignment motor
(M15) turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
SC alignment motor
(M15)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1508
The SC paper bundle

completed within a
after the SC bundle
turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
motor (M17)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1509
The SC roller release

operation has not been
completed within a
after the SC roller release
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M18)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
K -43

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1510
The SC entrance
movement operation has
not been completed within
after the clamp entrance
turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
Clamp entrance
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1511
The clamp entrance roller

release operation has not
after the clamp entrance
roller release motor (M20)
turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
release motor (M20)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1512
The clamp alignment has

after clamp alignment
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M21)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1513
The clamp section open/

close operation has not
after the clamp motor
(M22) turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
Clamp motor (M22)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1514
The clamp rotation

completed within a
after the clamp rotation
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M23)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1515
The glue tank movement

completed within a
after the glue tank
turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
Glue tank movement
motor (M31)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1516

succession while the glue
apply roller motor (M32) is
driving.
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1517
The count of a specified

number of pellets, which is
counted by the pellet
supply passage sensor
(PS37), has not been
reached after the pellet
supply pipe motor (M33)
turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M33)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1518
The operation of the pellet

supply arm has not been
completed within a
after the pellet supply arm
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M34)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1519
The alignment in the cover

paper table up/down
section has not been
completed within a
after the cover paper
alignment motor (M41)
turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
motor (M41)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1520
The booklet exit has not

after the booklet exit motor
(M42) turns ON.
DIPSW7-6
PB control board
(PBCB)
Booklet exit motor (M42)
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
K -44

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1521
The driven arm /Rt swing

operation start has not
conveyance arm motor /Rt
(M43) turns ON
PB control board
(PBCB)
Cover paper
conveyance arm motor /
Rt (M43)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1522
The driven arm /Lt swing

operation start has not
conveyance arm motor /Lt
(M44) turns ON
PB control board
(PBCB)
Cover paper
conveyance arm motor /
Lt (M44)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1523
The cover paper

conveyance start has not
after cover paper
turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
Cover paper
conveyance motor
(M45)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1524
The cover paper table up

or down movement has
after the cover paper table
up down motor /Fr (M46)
turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
Cover paper table up
down motor /Fr (M46)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1525
The cover paper table up

or down movement has
after the cover paper table
up down motor /Rr (M47)
turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
Cover paper table up
down motor /Rr (M47)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1526
The movement of the

cover paper folding plate /
Rt has not been completed
time after the cover paper
folding motor /Rt (M48)
turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
Cover paper folding
motor /Rt (M48)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1527
The movement of the

cover paper folding plate /
Lt has not been completed
time after the cover paper
folding motor /Lt (M49)
turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
Cover paper folding
motor /Lt (M49)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1528
The trimming of the cover

paper has not been
completed within a
after the cutter motor
(M50) turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
Cutter motor (M50)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1530
The booklet movement of

the booklet conveyance
completed within a
after the booklet
conveyance belt motor
(M61) turns ON.
DIPSW7-6
PB control board
(PBCB)
Booklet conveyance belt
motor (M61)
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1531
The size changing

operation of the carriage
completed within a
after the booklet
conveyance belt
turns ON.
DIPSW7-6
PB control board
(PBCB)
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
K -45

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1532
The up/down movement

operation of the carriage
completed within a
after the booklet
conveyance belt up down
DIPSW7-6
PB control board
(PBCB)
up down motor (M63)
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1534
The booklet rear edge

pressing process has not
after the booklet stopper
PB control board
(PBCB)
Booklet stopper motor
(M65)
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting
onto the sub
tray is
possible.
C-1537
The tray moving up

process has not been
completed within a
after the cover paper tray
lift motor (M73) turns ON.
PB control board
(PBCB)
Cover paper tray lift
motor (M73)
DIPSW7-5
Paper feed
from the PB
is
unavailable.
C-1538
The cover paper feed has

after the cover paper feed
PB control board
(PBCB)
Cover paper feed motor
(M74)
DIPSW7-5
Paper feed
from the PB
is
unavailable.
C-1540
After the warm-up is

started, temperature
detected by the glue tank
temperature sensor /Md
(TH3) has not risen to a
specified time period.

Glue tank heater (H1)
(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1541

temperature sensor /Lw

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1542

detected by the glue apply
roller temperature sensor

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
Glue apply roller
temperature sensor
(TH1)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1543
After the pellet supply,

temperature detected by
the glue tank temperature
sensor /Up (TH2) has not
risen to a prescribed level
time.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
K -46

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1544
During standby, after the

glue tank heater (H1) is
turned ON, temperature

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1545
When the prescribed

temperature is obtained
and after the glue tank
heater (H1) is turned ON,
sensor /Lw (TH4) has not
risen to a prescribed level
within a specified time
period.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1546
When the prescribed

temperature is obtained
and after the glue tank
heater (H1) is turned ON,
the glue apply roller
temperature sensor (TH1)
has not risen to a

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
Glue apply roller
temperature sensor
(TH1)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1547
The glue apply roller

detects an abnormal high
temperature.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
Glue apply roller
temperature sensor
(TH1)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1548
The glue tank temperature

sensor /Up (TH2) detects
an abnormal high
temperature.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1549

sensor /Md (TH3) detects
an abnormal high
temperature.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
K -47

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1550

sensor /Lw (TH4) detects
an abnormal high
temperature.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1551

detects an abnormal high
temperature (hardware)
TH1 detects an abnormal
high temperature of the
glue apply roller.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
Glue apply roller
temperature sensor
(TH1)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1552

an abnormal high
temperature (hardware).
glue tank.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1553

an abnormal high
glue tank.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1554

an abnormal high
glue tank.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1555
After warming-up is
completed, the glue apply
roller temperature sensor
(TH1) detects an abnormal
low temperature.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
Glue apply roller
temperature sensor
(TH1)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
K -48

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
C-1556
When glue supply control

temperature is reached,
an abnormal low
temperature.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1557
After warming-up is
completed, the glue tank
low temperature.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1558
After warming-up is
completed, the glue tank
temperature sensor /Lw
low temperature.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1559

detects an abnormal low
After warming-up is
completed, TH1 detects
the glue apply roller error
signal of abnormal low
temperature.
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
Glue apply roller
temperature sensor
(TH1)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1560

an abnormal low
After glue supply control
temperature is reached,
TH2 detects the glue tank
error signal of abnormal
low temperature.
The main body

and the PB stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
C-1561

an abnormal low
After warming-up is
the glue tank error signal
of abnormal low
temperature.

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
DIPSW7-7
The use of
the PB is
unavailable
K -49

Classification
Main body:
Communication
error
Malfunction
code
Resulting
operation
C-1562

an abnormal low
After warming-up is
the glue tank error signal
of abnormal low
temperature.
C-1565

drive abnormality
The main body

and the PB stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
The relay
conveyance
does not start
within the
specified period
of time after M92
turns ON.

(M92)
PB control board
(PBCB)
C-1566

motor drive abnormality
succession while the relay
conveyance exit motor
(M91) is driving.
The main body

and the PB stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).

motor (M91)
PB control board
(PBCB)
C-1567

drive abnormality
The pellet supply pipe has
not completed the
operations within a
after the pellet supply pipe

(M33)
PB control board
(PBCB)
C-2001
Communication error
drum motor /Y (M14).
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
Communication error
between the printer control (RL1).
board (PRCB) and the belt
motor (M18).

(PRCB)
Drum motor /Y (M14)
Drum motor /M (M15)
C-2004
Communication error
drum motors /Y (M14) or /
M (M15).

(PRCB)
Drum motor /Y (M14)
Drum motor /M (M15)
C-2006
Communication error
board (PRCB) and the belt
motor (M18).

(PRCB)
Belt motor (M18)
C-2201*

M20 is detected
continuously for a
while the developing
motor /Y (M20) is ON.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /Y
(M20)
C-2202*

M21 is detected
continuously for a
motor /M (M21) is ON.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /M
(M21)
C-2003
Main body:
Developing
motor
abnormality
Cause

(H2)
PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
K -50

(PRCB)
Belt motor (M18)
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
DIPSW7-7
Control
when
The use of
the PB is
unavailable

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-2203*

M22 is detected
continuously for a
motor /C (M22) is ON.An
error detection signal of
M22 is detected
continuously for a
motor /C (M22) is ON.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /C
(M22)
C-2204*

M23 is detected
continuously for a
motor /K (M23) is ON.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /K
(M23)
Main body:
C-2220
Transfer belt unit
abnormality

M18 is detected
continuously for a
while the belt motor (M18)
is ON.

(PRCB)
Belt motor (M18)
Encoder sensor belt /1
(PS89), /2 (PS90)
DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
unit
Main body: 1st

transfer motor
abnormality
C-2221
While the 1st transfer HP

sensor (PS15) is ON,
PS15 does not turn OFF
time after the 1st transfer
pressure release motor
(M19) turns ON.
While PS15 is OFF, PS15
does not turn ON within a
after M19 turns ON.

(PRCB)
release motor (M19)
1st transfer HP sensor
(PS15)
Main body:
Toner supply
abnormality
C-2222
While one of the toner

supply motors /Y (M49), /M
(M50), /C (M51), /K (M52),
toner bottle motor (M53),
and toner bottle clutches /
Y (CL14), /M (CL15), /C
(CL16) and /K (CL17) are
ON, an error detection
signal of one of them is
period of time.

(PRCB)
Toner supply drive
board (TSDB)
Toner supply motor /Y
(M49)
Toner supply motor /M
(M50)
Toner supply motor /C
(M51)
Toner supply motor /K
(M52)
Toner bottle motor
(M53)
Toner bottle clutch /Y
(CL14)
Toner bottle clutch /M
(CL15)
Toner bottle clutch /C
(CL16)
Toner bottle clutch /K
(CL17)
Main body: Low

drum load
torque
abnormality
C-2223
One of the torque is not

recovered within a
after the low load torque
recovery control of the
drum motors /Y (M14), /M
(M15), /C (M16), /K (M17)
starts.
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
Main body:
Drum motor
abnormality
C-2231*

M14 is detected
continuously for a
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the

(PRCB)
Drum motor /Y (M14)
Encoder sensor /Y1
(PS81), /Y2 (PS82)
K -51
Drum motor /Y (M14)

Drum motor /M (M15)
Drum motor /C (M16)
Drum motor /K (M17)
(PRCB)
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause
while the drum motor /Y
(M14) is ON.
Main body:
Drum motor
abnormality
Main body: Fan

abnormality

Resulting
operation
power relay
(RL1).

DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
Drum Unit /Y
C-2232*

M15 is detected
continuously for a
while the drum motor /M
(M15) is ON.

(PRCB)
Drum motor /M (M15)
Encoder sensor /M1
(PS83), /M2 (PS84)
DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
Drum Unit /M
C-2233*

M16 is detected
continuously for a
while the drum motor /C
(M16) is ON.

(PRCB)
Drum motor /C (M16)
Encoder sensor /C1
(PS85), /C2 (PS86)
DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
Drum Unit /C
C-2234*

M17 is detected
continuously for a
while the drum motor /K
(M17) is ON.

(PRCB)
Drum motor /K (M17)
Encoder sensor /K1
(PS87), /K2 (PS88)
DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
Drum Unit /K
C-2241*

M14 is detected
continuously for a
while the drum motor /Y
(M14) is ON.
C-2242*

M15 is detected
continuously for a
while the drum motor /M
(M15) is ON.

(PRCB)
Drum motor /M (M15)
Encoder sensor /M1
(PS83) and /M2 (PS84)
DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
Drum unit /M
C-2243*

M16 is detected
continuously for a
while the drum motor /C
(M16) is ON.

(PRCB)
Drum motor /C (M16)
Encoder sensors /C1
(PS85) and /C2 (PS86)
DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
Drum unit /C
C-2244*

M17 is detected
continuously for a
while the drum motor /K
(M17) is ON.

(PRCB)
Drum motor /K (M17)
Encoder sensors /K1
(PS87) and /K2 (PS88)
DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
Drum unit /K
C-2301

M48 is detected
continuously for a
while the charge intake fan
(FM48) is ON.
C-2302*

FM12 is detected
continuously for a
while the motor cooling
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).

(PRCB)
Drum motor /Y (M14)
Encoder sensor /Y1
(PS81), /Y2 (PS82)
DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
Drum unit /Y

(PRCB)
Toner supply drive
board (TSDB)
Charge intake fan
(FM48)
(PRCB)
Motor cooling fan /1
(FM12)
K -52
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-2303*

FM11 is detected
continuously for a
while the transfer belt fan
(FM11) is ON.

(PRCB)
Transfer belt fan (FM11)
C-2304*

FM45 is detected
continuously for a
while the developing fan /1
(FM45) is ON.

(PRCB)
Developing fan /1
(FM45)
C-2305*

FM46 is detected
continuously for a
while the developing fan /2
(FM46) is ON.
Main body: Fan

abnormality
C-2306*

FM13 is detected
continuously for a
while the motor cooling
Main body:
Erase lamp
abnormality
C-2401
The erase lamp /Y (EL/Y)

set status cannot be
detected.
C-2402
The erase lamp /M (EL/M)

detected.
C-2403
The erase lamp /C (EL/C)

detected.

(PRCB)
Erase lamp /C (EL/C)
C-2404
The erase lamp /K (EL/K)

detected.

(PRCB)
Erase lamp /K (EL/K)
C-2411
The output of the TCR

sensor /Y (TCRS/Y)
cannot be controlled.

(PRCB)
TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/
Y)
C-2412

sensor /M (TCRS/M)

(PRCB)
TCR sensor /M (TCRS /
M)
C-2413

sensor /C (TCRS/C)

(PRCB)
TCR sensor /C (TCRS /
C)
C-2414

sensor /K (TCRS/K)

(PRCB)
TCR sensor /K (TCRS /
K)
Main body:
C-2421
Developing drive
abnormality
While the developing

motor /Y (M20) is ON or
time from the TCR sensor /
Y (TCRS/Y) initial
adjustment starts, TCRS/Y
detects a value lower than
the prescribed one.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /Y
(M20)
Y)
C-2422

motor /M (M21) is ON or
M (TCRS/M) initial
adjustment starts, TCRS/M
the prescribed one.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /M
(M21)
TCR sensor /M (TCRS/
M)
Main body: TCR

sensor
abnormality
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).

(PRCB)
Developing fan /2
(FM46)

(PRCB)
Drum fan /2 (FM13)
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
K -53

(PRCB)
Erase lamp /Y (EL/Y)
(PRCB)
Erase lamp /M (EL/M)
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Main body: TCR

sensor initial
adjustment
abnormality (low
density)
Main body: TCR

sensor initial
adjustment
abnormality
(high density)
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-2423

motor /C (M22) is ON or
C (TCRS/C) initial
adjustment starts, TCRS/C
the prescribed one.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /C
(M22)
TCR sensor /C (TCRS/
C)
C-2424

motor /K (M23) is ON or
K (TCRS/K) initial
adjustment starts, TCRS/K
the prescribed one.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /K
(M23)
TCR sensor /K (TCRS/
K)
C-2431
While in the initial

adjustment of the TCR
sensor /Y (TCRS/Y),
TCRS/Y detects a value
higher than the prescribed
one with the minimum
control voltage.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /Y
(M20)
Y)
C-2432

sensor /M (TCRS/M),
TCRS/M detects a value
control voltage.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /M
(M21)
M)
C-2433

sensor /C (TCRS/C),
TCRS/C detects a value
control voltage.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /C
(M22)
C)
C-2434

sensor /K (TCRS/K),
TCRS/K detects a value
control voltage.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /K
(M23)
K)
C-2441

sensor /Y (TCRS/Y),
TCRS/Y detects a value
lower than the prescribed
one with the maximum
control voltage.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /Y
(M20)
Y)
C-2442

sensor /M (TCRS/M),
TCRS/M detects a value
control voltage.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /M
(M21)
M)
C-2443

sensor /C (TCRS/C),
TCRS/C detects a value
control voltage.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /C
(M22)
C)
C-2444

sensor /K (TCRS/K),
TCRS/K detects a value
control voltage.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /K
(M23)
K)
K -54
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Main body:
Toner low
density
abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-2451
When the developing

motor /Y (M20) is ON, the
maximum detection value
of TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/
Y) is the specified value
and the difference
between the maximum
detection value and the
minimum detection value
is over the specified value.

(PRCB)
Developing motor /Y
(M20)
Y)
C-2452
When the developing

motor /M (M21) is ON, the
of TCR sensor /M (TCRS/
M) is the specified value
and the difference
between the maximum

(PRCB)
Developing motor /M
(M21)
M)
C-2453
When the developing

motor /C (M22) is ON, the
of TCR sensor /C (TCRS/
C) is the specified value
and the difference
between the maximum

(PRCB)
Developing motor /C
(M22)
C)
C-2454
When the developing

motor /K (M23) is ON, the
of TCR sensor /K (TCRS/
K) is the specified value
and the difference
between the maximum

(PRCB)
Developing motor /K
(M23)
K)
Main body:
Process unit
mount
connection
abnormality
C-2470
Process unit mount is not

connected.

(PRCB)
Process mount
Main body: High

voltage unit /1
abnormality
C-2701

the charging corona /Y is
detected while the
charging corona /Y is ON.
The signal is detected
even after turning OFF/ON
for a prescribed time.

(HV1)
Charging corona /Y
(PRCB)
C-2702

the charging corona /M is
detected while the
charging corona /M is ON.

(HV1)
Charging corona /M
(PRCB)
C-2703

the charging corona /C is
detected while the
charging corona /C is ON.

(HV1)
Charging corona /C
(PRCB)
C-2704

the charging corona /K is
detected while the
charging corona /K is ON.

(HV1)
Charging corona /K
(PRCB)
K -55
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Main body: High
voltage unit /2
abnormality
Main body:
Gamma
correction
abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-2711

the 1st transfer /Y is
detected while the 1st
transfer /Y is ON. The
signal is detected even
after turning OFF/ON for a
prescribed time.

(HV2)
(PRCB)
C-2712

the 1st transfer /M is
transfer /M is ON. The
prescribed time.

(HV2)
(PRCB)
C-2713

the 1st transfer /C is
transfer /C is ON. The
prescribed time.

(HV2)
(PRCB)
C-2714

the 1st transfer /K is
transfer /K is ON. The
prescribed time.

(HV2)
(PRCB)
C-2720

the 2nd transfer is
detected while the 2nd
transfer is ON. The signal
is detected even after
turning OFF/ON for a
prescribed time.

(HV2)
2nd transfer roller
(PRCB)
C-2721

the separation charger is
detected while the
separation charger is ON.

(HV2)
Separation charger
(PRCB)
C-2801
The output voltage of the

IDC sensor (IDCS) is
detected more that the
specified value on the
patch /Y of the developing
DC maximum output.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /Y
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
C-2802

patch /M of the developing
DC maximum output.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /M
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
C-2803

patch /C of the developing
DC maximum output.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /C
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
C-2804

patch /K of the developing
DC maximum output.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /K
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
K -56
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Main body:
Gamma
correction
abnormality
Main body: Dot

diameter
correction
abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-2811
The proper value cannot

be figured out within the
specified time by the
correction of the patch
density correction /Y. Or,
the proper value of the
developing DC output is 0
or lower.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /Y
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
C-2812

density correction /M. Or,
or lower.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /M
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
C-2813

density correction /C. Or,
or lower.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /C
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
C-2814

density correction /K. Or,
or lower.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /K
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
C-2821

patch /Y of the MPC
maximum output.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /Y
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
C-2822

patch /M of the MPC
maximum output.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /M
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
C-2823

patch /C of the MPC
maximum output.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /C
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
C-2824

patch /K of the MPC
maximum output.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /K
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
C-2831

correction of the dot
diameter correction /Y. Or,
the MPC proper value is 0
or lower.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /Y
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
Writing unit /Y
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
K -57
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Main body:
Gamma
correction
abnormality
Main body:
Motor
abnormality
Main body: Fan

abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-2832

diameter correction /M. Or,
or lower.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /M
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
Writing unit /M
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
C-2833

diameter correction /C. Or,
or lower.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /C
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
Writing unit /C
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
C-2834

diameter correction /K. Or,
or lower.

(PRCB)
Developing unit /K
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
Writing unit /K
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
C-2840
The IDC sensor (IDCS)

output value is detected
not within the specified
range on the IDC sensor
(IDCS) base correction
when the rough
adjustment ends.

(PRCB)
IDC sensor (IDCS)
(SD3)
C-2841
The LED applied voltage is

detected not within the
specified range on the IDC
sensor (IDCS) base
correction.

(PRCB)
IDC sensor (IDCS)
C-3101

M29 is detected
continuously for a
while the fusing motor
(M29) is ON.

(CDB)
(PRCB)
Fusing motor (M29)
C-3102
While the fusing release

home sensor (PS16) is
ON, PS16 does not turn
OFF within a specified
fusing motor (M29) turns
ON. While PS16 is OFF,
time after M29 turns ON.

(CDB)
(PRCB)
Fusing motor (M29)
Fusing release home
sensor (PS16)
C-3103
The 2nd transfer pressure

release motor (M34) does
not turn OFF within a
after it turns ON.

(CDB)
release motor (M34)
2nd transfer HP sensor
(PS24)
C-3301*

FM37 is detected
continuously for a
while the fusing ventilation
fan (FM37) is ON.

(PRCB)
Fusing ventilation fan
(FM37)
K -58
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-3302*

FM10 is detected
continuously for a
while the fusing belt
ventilation fan (FM10) is
ON.

(PRCB)
fan (FM10)
C-3303

FM65 is detected
continuously for a
while the fusing cooling fan
(FM65) is ON.

(CDB)
Fusing cooling fan
(FM65)
Main body: Fan

abnormality
C-3304

any of FM7, FM8 or FM9 is
while the fusing separation
fans /1 (FM7), /2 (FM8)
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).

(PRCB)
Fusing separation fan /1
(FM7)
(FM8)
(FM9)
Main body:
Fusing high
temperature
abnormality
C-3501*
Fusing high temperature

abnormality
(TH1) detects 250 C or
higher value continuously
time.
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L2)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH1)
C-3502*

abnormality
time.
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L2)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH3)
C-3503*

abnormality
time.
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L5)
(TH2)
C-3504*

abnormality
time.
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L5)
(TH4)
C-3505*

abnormality
time.
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L2)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH1)
K -59
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-3506*

abnormality
time.
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L5)
(TH2)
C-3508*
Paper is wound around the

fusing roller.
J31-02 occurs 4 times in a
row.
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(CDB)
Registration motor
(M30)
(HV1)
(HV2)
(PS17)
Main body:
Fusing high
temperature
abnormality
C-3509*
Fusing roller /Up

temperature gap
abnormality
When the fusing roller /Up
is higher than the specified
temperature, the gap
detected by the
temperature sensors /1
(TH1) and /3 (TH3)are
larger than the specified
value.
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L2)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH1)
(TH3)
Main body:
Fusing low
temperature
abnormality
C-3801*
Fusing low temperature

abnormality.
While fusing idling or
printing, the temperature
sensor /1 (TH1) detects
lower than the specified
temperature for a specified
period of time.
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L2)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH1)
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
C-3802*

abnormality.
period of time.
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L2)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH3)
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
C-3803*

abnormality.
period of time.
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L5)
(TH2)
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
K -60
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Main body:
Fusing sensor
abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-3804*

abnormality.
period of time.
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L5)
(TH4)
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
C-3805*

abnormality.
period of time.
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L2)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH1)
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
C-3806*

abnormality.
period of time.
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L5)
(TH2)
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
C-3901*

abnormality (hardware
detection).
(TH3) detects an error
detection signal
continuously for a
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L2)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH3)
C-3902*

detection).
detection signal
continuously for a
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L5)
(TH4)
C-3903*

detection)
detection signal
continuously for a
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L2)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH1)
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
K -61
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-3904*

detection)
detection signal
continuously for a
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L2)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH3)
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
C-3905*

detection).
detection signal
continuously for a
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L5)
(TH2)
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
C-3906*

detection).
detection signal
continuously for a
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L5)
(TH4)
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
C-3907*

detection).
detection signal
continuously for a
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L2)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH1)
C-3908*

detection).
detection signal
continuously for a
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L2)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH1)
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
C-3909*

detection).
detection signal
continuously for a
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L5)
(TH2)
K -62
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Main body:
Polygon motor
abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-3910*

detection).
detection signal
continuously for a
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L5)
(TH2)
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
C-3911*
The detected temperature

of the temperature sensor /
1 (TH1) has not reached to
100C within the specified
period of time after the sub
power switch (SW2) turned
ON.
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L2)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH1)
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
C-3912*
The detected temperature

of the temperature sensor /
2 (TH2) has not reached to
100C within the specified
period of time after the sub
power switch (SW2) turned
ON.
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L5)
(TH2)
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
C-3913*
The fusing unit is not set.
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
C-3914*

detection).
detection signal
continuously for a
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L2)
(L3)
(L4)
(TH1)
C-3915*

detection).
detection signal
continuously for a
Fusing unit
(PRCB)
(L5)
(TH2)
C-4101
When the polygon motor /

Y (M70) in the writing unit
starts up or its speed
changes, the lock signal of
M70 is not detected within

(PRCB)
Writing unit
C-4102

M (M71) in the writing unit

(PRCB)
Writing unit
C-4103

C (M72) in the writing unit

(PRCB)
Writing unit
K -63
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-4104

K (M73) in the writing unit

(PRCB)
Writing unit
C-4111
A temperature abnormality
of the polygon motor /Y
(M70) in the writing unit is
detected.

(PRCB)
Writing unit
C-4112
of the polygon motor /M
detected.

(PRCB)
Writing unit
C-4113
of the polygon motor /C
detected.

(PRCB)
Writing unit
C-4114
of the polygon motor /K
detected.

(PRCB)
Writing unit
C-4120
The temperature sensor in

the writing unit /K detects
the temperature
abnormality.

(PRCB)
Writing unit
Main body: Fan

abnormality
C-4301

any of M45 or M46 is
while the developing fans
ON.

(PRCB)
Developing fan /1
(FM45)
Developing fan /2
(FM46)
Main body:
Writing
correction drive
abnormality
C-4501
The tilt correction home

sensor /Y (PS70) turns
OFF while the tilt
correction motor /Y (M74)
in the writing unit is ON.

(PRCB)
Writing unit
C-4502

sensor /M (PS71) turns
OFF while the tilt
correction motor /M (M75)

(PRCB)
Writing unit
C-4503

sensor /C (PS72) turns
OFF while the tilt
correction motor /C (M76)

(PRCB)
Writing unit
C-4504

sensor /K (PS73) turns
OFF while the tilt
correction motor /K (M77)

(PRCB)
Writing unit
C-4511
The tilt correction motor /Y

time after it turns ON. Or,
the installation position of
the tilt correction home
sensor /Y (PS70) is
improper.

(PRCB)
Tilt correction motor /Y
(M74)
Skew correction home
sensor /Y (PS70)
C-4512
The tilt correction motor /Y

sensor /M (PS71) is
improper.

(PRCB)
Tilt correction motor /M
(M75)
Skew correction home
sensor /M (PS71)
K -64
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-4513
The tilt correction motor /C

sensor /C (PS72) is
improper.

(PRCB)
Tilt correction motor /C
(M76)
Tilt correction home
sensor /C (PS72)
C-4514
The tilt correction motor /K

sensor /K (PS73) is
improper.

(PRCB)
Tilt correction motor /K
(M77)
Tilt correction home
sensor /K (PS73)
C-4520
The color registration

correction has terminated
abnormally.

(PRCB)
Color registration
sensor /Fr (PS8)
Color registration
sensor /Rr (PS9)
C-4521
The color registration base

line correction /Fr has
terminated abnormally.

(PRCB)
Color registration
sensor /Fr (PS8)
solenoid (SD2)
C-4522
The color registration base

line correction /Rr has

(PRCB)
Color registration
sensor /Rr (PS9)
solenoid (SD2)
C-4545
The beam interval

correction (Y) has
C-4546
The beam interval

correction (M) has
C-4547
The beam interval

correction (C) has
Writing unit
C-4548
The beam interval

correction (K) has
Writing unit
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Fr (Y)
data undetected
abnormality
C-4601

board /Fr (CRB/Fr) has not
detected any data of Y
toner.

Color registration
sensor /Fr (PS8)
Color registration board /
Fr (CRB/Fr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Fr (M)
data undetected
abnormality
C-4602

detected any data of M
toner.
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Fr (C)
data undetected
abnormality
C-4603

detected any data of C
toner.
Main body:
Color
registration
abnormality
Main body:
Beam interval
correction
abnormality
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
Writing unit
Writing unit

Color registration
sensor /Fr (PS8)
Fr (CRB/Fr)
solenoid (SD2)
Color registration
sensor /Fr (PS8)
Fr (CRB/Fr)
solenoid (SD2)
K -65
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Fr (K)
data undetected
abnormality
C-4604

detected any data of K
toner.

Color registration
sensor /Fr (PS8)
Fr (CRB/Fr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Rr (Y)
data undetected
abnormality
C-4621

board /Rr (CRB/Rr) has
not detected any data of Y
toner.
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).

Color registration
sensor /Rr (PS9)
Rr (CRB/Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Rr (M)
data undetected
abnormality
C-4622

not detected any data of M
toner.
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).

Color registration
sensor /Rr (PS9)
Rr (CRB/Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Rr (C)
data undetected
abnormality
C-4623

not detected any data of C
toner.

Color registration
sensor /Rr (PS9)
Rr (CRB/Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Rr (K)
data undetected
abnormality
C-4624

not detected any data of K
toner.

Color registration
sensor /Rr (PS9)
Rr (CRB/Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Fr (Y)
abnormality
C-4631
The histogram processing

of Y toner has terminated
abnormally on the color
registration board /Fr
(CRB/Fr).

Color registration
sensor /Fr (PS8)
Fr (CRB/Fr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Fr (M)
abnormality
C-4632

of M toner has terminated
(CRB/Fr).

Color registration
sensor /Fr (PS8)
Fr (CRB/Fr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Fr (C)
abnormality
C-4633

of C toner has terminated
(CRB/Fr).

Color registration
sensor /Fr (PS8)
Fr (CRB/Fr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Fr (K)
abnormality
C-4634

of K toner has terminated
(CRB/Fr).

Color registration
sensor /Fr (PS8)
Fr (CRB/Fr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Rr (Y)
abnormality
C-4651

of Y toner has terminated
registration board /Rr
(CRB/Rr).

Color registration
sensor /Rr (PS9)
Rr (CRB/Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
K -66
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Rr (M)
abnormality
C-4652

of M toner has terminated
(CRB/Rr).

Color registration
sensor /Rr (PS9)
Rr (CRB/Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Rr (C)
abnormality
C-4653

of C toner has terminated
(CRB/Rr).

Color registration
sensor /Rr (PS9)
Rr (CRB/Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
board /Rr (K)
abnormality
C-4654

of K toner has terminated
(CRB/Rr).

Color registration
sensor /Rr (PS9)
Rr (CRB/Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
correction
abnormality (Y)
C-4661

correction /Y has

Color registration
sensor /Fr (PS8), /Rr
(PS9)
Fr (CRB/Fr), /Rr (CRB/
Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
correction
abnormality (M)
C-4662

correction /M has

Color registration
(PS9)
Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Color
registration
correction
abnormality (C)
C-4663

correction /C has

Color registration
(PS9)
Rr)
solenoid (SD2)
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality
C-4701
FIFO address abnormality

for the printer. While in the
image write, the expansion
processing of image data
that is read in does not
terminate correctly.
C-4702
An error interrupt occurs

with the compression/
expansion chip FIFO.

(OACB)
Memory control board /1
(MCB1)
C-4703
Image data expansion

abnormality.

(OACB)
(MCB1)
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
K -67

(PRCB)
(OACB)
(MCB1)
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-4705
While in the image write,

the expansion processing
from the memory to the
printer does not terminate
time. The output from the
page memory to the printer
does not terminate within a
The PVV is not detected
time.

(PRCB)
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
(OACB)
C-4706
While in the image write,

despite of no resource
provided, an inappropriate
processing such as
accessing to the
elongation device is made.

(OACB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
control board (OACB)
C-4708
When accessing to the

memory device, a
defective software is
detected.

(OACB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-4709
The expansion processing

from the memory to the
page memory does not
terminate within a
The compression
processing from the page
memory to the memory
The development from the
memory to the page
memory does not
terminate within a
The transmission of the
compressed data from
memory to memory does
not terminated within a

(OACB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-4713
A page memory for

printing cannot be
secured.
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
(OACB)
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality /Y
C-4714
When executing APC, the

Index sensor output does
not change. The index
sensor failed to detect the
laser because the polygon
mirror does not rotate, the
position of the index
sensor is improper, or the
index sensor is defective.
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit /Y
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality /M
C-4715

Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit /M
K -68
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality /C
C-4716

Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit /C
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality /K
C-4717

Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit/K
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality /Y
C-4718
APC abnormality.
The laser does not turn
ON because 12V DC
power source for driving
laser is not fed, MPC is
wrong, or the laser is
defective.
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit /Y
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality /M
C-4719
APC abnormality.
ON because 12V DC
defective.
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit /M
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality /C
C-4720
APC abnormality.
ON because 12V DC
defective.
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit /C
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality /K
C-4721
APC abnormality.
ON because 12V DC
defective.
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit/K
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality /Y
C-4722
Connection abnormality
between the index board /
Y (IDB/Y) or the laser drive
board /Y (LDB/Y) and the
printer image processing
board (PRIPB).
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit /Y
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality /M
C-4723
M (IDB/M) or the laser
drive board /M (LDB/M)
and the printer image
processing board (PRIPB).
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit /M
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality /C
C-4724
C (IDB/C) or the laser
drive board /C (LDB/C)
and the printer image
processing board (PRIPB).
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit /C
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality /K
C-4725
K (IDB/K) or the laser drive
board /K (LDB/K) and the
printer image processing
board (PRIPB).
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit/K
K -69
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality
Main body:
Communication
error
Main body: Fan

abnormality
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-4840
The engine section has

kept driving continuously
time without producing
image or process patch.

(PRCB)
Printer control program
C-4850*
The overall control

software accesses an
illegal address.

(OACB)
C-5001
12V DC abnormality.
An error signal is detected
continuously for a
DC power supply /1
(DCPS1)
(PRCB)
C-5002
24V DC abnormality.
An error signal is detected
continuously for a
after REN/2 turns ON.

(PRCB)
DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
Each loading of PRCB
connection (motor,
solenoid and clutch)
C-5003

(CDB) 24VDC abnormality.
An error signal of 24VDC
for CDB is detected.
DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
(CDB)
C-5004
Laser correction motor

5VDC abnormality
An abnormality of 5VDC
for the tilt correction
motors /Y (M74), /M
(M75), /C (M76), /K (M77)
DC power supply /1
(DCPS1)
C-5005

(CDB) 12VDC abnormality.

(PRCB)
(CDB)
C-5010
A line status error or a

checksum error occured
between the overall control
board (OACB) and the
printer control board
(PRIPB) is detected and it
cannot be recovered by
sending a retransmission
request. Recovery failed
even after the requested
retransmission is
performed. A sufficient
space cannot be obtained
in the circular buffer within

(PRCB)
(OACB)
C-5301

FM1 is detected
continuously for a
while the power supply
cooling fan /1 (FM1) is ON.

(OACB)
Power supply cooling
fan /1 (FM1)
C-5302

FM5 is detected
continuously for a
while the image
processing cooling fan /1
(FM5) is ON.

(OACB)
Image processing
cooling fan /1 (FM5)
C-5303

FM6 is detected
continuously for a
while the image
processing cooling fan /2
(FM6) is ON.

(OACB)
Image processing
cooling fan /2 (FM6)
An error detection signal of The main body

FM81 or FM82 is detected stops
continuously for a
immediately to
turn OFF the
HDD unit cooling fan /1

(FM81)
HDD unit cooling fan /2
(FM82)
Main body: HDD C-5304

unit cooling fan
abnormality
K -70
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause
while the HDD unit cooling
(FM82) are ON.
detected continuously
while retrying power feed
several times.

Resulting
operation
main relay
(RL1).
Main body: Fan

abnormality
C-5305

FM3 or FM4 is detected
continuously for a
while the power supply
cooling fans /3 (FM3) and /
4 (FM4) are ON.
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).

(PRCB)
fan /3 (FM3)
fan /4 (FM4)
Main body:
Scanner
abnormality
C-6101
While in the home position

search operation, the
scanner home sensor
time after the scanner
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).

(PRCB)
Scanner drive board
(SCDB)
Scanner motor (M1)
Scanner home sensor
(PS1)
C-6102
When in optics scan

returning operation, the
scanner home sensor
time after the scanner

(PRCB)
Scanner drive board
(SCDB)
Scanner motor (M1)
Scanner home sensor
(PS1)
Main body: Fan

abnormality
C-6301

FM2 is detected
continuously for a
while the scanner cooling
fan (FM2) is ON.

(PRCB)
Scanner drive board
(SCDB)
Scanner cooling fan
(FM2)
Main body:
Image
processing
C-6701
When processing images,

a filter coefficient cannot
be created normally.
Scanner image processing

board (SCIPB)
C-6702
Address error of the

scanner FIFO. While in the
image read, the
compression processing of
image data that is read in
does not terminate
correctly.

(OACB)
(MCB1)
C-6703
After negation of SW, the

compression of images
that are read in and their
development into the page
memory are not terminated
time.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
(MCB1)
(OACB)
(PRCB)
C-6704
While in the image read,

the compression
processing from the
scanner into the memory
The development from the
scanner into the page
memory does not
terminate within a
The SVV is not detected
time.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
(MCB1)
(OACB)
(PRCB)
K -71
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-6705

despite of no resource
provided, an inappropriate
processing such as
accessing to the
compression device is
made.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
(MCB1)
C-6706

SVV does not turn OFF
time and the preparation
for scanning the next page
cannot be started.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
(MCB1)
(OACB)
(PRCB)
C-6707
Shading correction
abnormality (GA
abnormality).

board (SCIPB)
C-6708
AOC/AGC adjustment
abnormality
The light blocking cover
and the lens cover of the
scanner section are
removed.
The connector of the CCD
board (CCDB) is not
disconnected.
The power cable of CCDB
is disconnected.
The IC protector of the
CCD board (CCDB) is
removed.
Overexposure of the
exposure lamp (L1).
L1 does not light.
CCD board (CCDB)

Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
CCD lens unit
Scanner drive board
(SCDB)
Exposure lamp (L1)
Scanner inverter board
(S_INVB)
C-6709
The adjustment data

evacuated by resolutions
is not available.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-6710
A density conversion
gamma curve cannot be
created normally.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-6711
Pulse width modulation IC

calibration cannot be
started normally.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-6712
Pulse width modulation IC

calibration cannot be
completed normally.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-6713
APC initial sampling is

started before MPC is
completed.
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit
C-6714
MPC is started before APC

is in progress.
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit
K -72
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-6715
Sub scan beam correction

is started before APC or
MPC is completed.
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Program of printer
control board (PRCB)
C-6716
Sub scan beam interval

correction is started with
write clock abnormality
occurred due to
noncompletion of AD9561
initialization.
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Program of printer
C-6717
N-in-1 page area

abnormality. Due to an
image area abnormality of
the memory, images
cannot be expanded on
the memory.
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Program of printer
C-6720
The scan operation starts

before the centering
adjustment is terminated.
Software bug
C-6721
The AGC is retried due to

the decreased light volume
of the exposure lamp (L1).
However, no error occurs.
CCD board (CCDB)

Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
CCD lens unit
Scanner drive board
(SCDB)
Exposure lamp (L1)
C-6722
A PWM gamma curve is

not created properly.
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Writing unit
C-6723
between the CCD board
(CCDB) and the image
processing board (IPB).
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
CCD board (CCDB)
CCD lens unit
Exposure lamp (L1)
Scanner drive board
(SCDB)
C-6724
When the sub power

switch (SW2) turns ON,
connection check of
reading system board
failed.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
CCD board (CCDB)
CCD lens unit
Exposure lamp (L1)
Scanner drive board
(SCDB)
C-6725
The parameter setting

cannot be performed while
preparing for scanning.

board (SCIPB)
Main body:
Communication
error
C-6801
After the sub power switch

(SW2) turns ON, the
communication between
the overall control board
(OACB) and the operation
board /1 (OB1) is not
started within a specified
period of time.

(OACB)
Operation board /1
(OB1)
Main body:
Communication
error
C-7001
The main body

and the post
processing
machine stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).

(PRCB)
DF: DF
communication
error
C-8001
Communication error
between the main body
and DF.
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the

(PRCB)
DF control board
(DFCB)
K -73
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
DF: Paper feed
motor error
Malfunction
code
C-8101
Cause
error

Resulting
operation
main relay
(RL1).

Paper feed motor
(M301)
DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Conveyance C-8102

motor error

error
Conveyance motor
(M302)
DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Reverse/
paper exit motor
error
C-8103

(M303) error.
Reverse/paper exit
motor (M303)
DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Registration
sensor error
C-8401
Registration sensor
(PS301) error
Original registration
sensor (PS301)
DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Timing
sensor error
C-8402

error

DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Reverse
sensor error
C-8403
Reverse sensor (PS305)

error

DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Paper exit

sensor error
C-8404
Paper exit sensor (PS306)

error
Paper exit sensor

(PS306)
DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Size VR
error
C-8405
Size VR (VR301) error.
Size VR (VR301)
DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Non-volatile
memory error
C-8406
Non-volatile memory error
DF: DF
abnormality
C-8407
When the sub power

switch (SW2) is ON, it is
detected that the control
program of the DF control
board (DFCB) is unwritten.
Main body:
Communication
error
C-C101
When the sub power

switch (SW2) turns ON, a
response from the printer
control board (PRCB) has
not received within a
C-C102
Communication error of
the printer control board
(PRCB)

(PRCB)
C-C103
Communication error of
the control panel
Operation board /1
(OB1)
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
(MCB)
(PRCB)
(OACB)
Sub power switch (SW2)
C-C104
When the sub power

ISW unwritten area is
detected in the printer
control program.
Printer control firmware
C-C106
No normal header is
transmitted within a
after ISW is started.
Relay board /U (RBU)

USB memory
Main body: ISW

abnormality
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
K -74

(PRCB)
(OACB)
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
C-C107
While in data transmission

by ISW, a checksum error
or a header error is
detected in the
downloaded error.

USB memory
Program file abnormality
C-C108
While in data transmission

by ISW, data cannot be
written in the flash ROM
properly.

UBS cables
Board to which the
program is transferred
FS: FS ISW
unwritten
C-C109
When the sub power

detected in the FS
firmware.
LS: LS ISW
unwritten
C-C111
When the sub power

detected in the LS
firmware (1st tandem).
C-C112
When the sub power

detected in the LS
firmware (2nd tandem).
LSCB firmware
FD: FD ISW
unwritten
C-C113
When the sub power

detected in the FD
firmware.
FDCB firmware
FD control board
(FDCB)
SD: SD ISW
unwritten
C-C114
When the sub power

detected in the SD
firmware.
SDCB firmware
SD control board
(SDCB)
PB: PB ISW
unwritten
C-C116
When the sub power

detected in the PB
firmware.
PB firmware
PB control board
(PBCB)
GP: GP ISW
unwritten
C-C117
When the sub power

detected in the GP
firmware.
GP firmware
RU: RU-506
ISW unwritten
C-C118
When the sub power

detected in the RU
firmware.
RU-506 firmware
RU control board
(RUCB)
RU: RU-509
ISW unwritten
C-C119
When the sub power

detected in the RU
program.
RU firmware
RU control board
(RUCB)
Main body: ISW

abnormality
C-C120

(PRCB) firmware
abnormality
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
There is HDD to be
initialized.
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Main body: HDD C-D0E0

initialization
abnormality
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
K -75
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
FNSCB firmware
FNS control board
(FNSCB)
LSCB firmware
HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
HDD/M (HDD/M)
HDD/C (HDD/C)
HDD/K (HDD/K)
HDD/A (HDD/A)
HDD/P (HDD/P)
DIPSW18-7
HDD
unusable
(HDD not
connected)
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.

Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause

Resulting
operation
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
Main body: HDD C-D0E1

abnormality (any
of Y, M, C, K or
A)
HDD (Y/M/C/K/A) is not

connected. Or damaged,
or while in initialization.
DIPSW18-7
HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
HDD/M (HDD/M)
HDD/C (HDD/C)
HDD/K (HDD/K)
HDD/A (HDD/A)
(MCB1)
HDD
unusable
(HDD not
connected)
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
Main body:
HDD/P
abnormality
C-D0E2
HDD/P unconnected Or
damaged, or while in
initialization.
DIPSW18-7
HDD/P (HDD/P)
Memory control board /P
(MCB/P)
HDD
unusable
(HDD not
connected)
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
Main body:
HDD/Y read/
write
abnormality
C-D0E3
Writing/reading to the
HDD/Y failed.
HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
DIPSW18-7
HDD
unusable
(HDD not
connected)
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
Main body:
HDD/M read/
write
abnormality
C-D0E4
HDD/M failed.
HDD/M (HDD/M)
DIPSW18-7
HDD
unusable
(HDD not
connected)
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
Main body:
HDD/C read/
write
abnormality
C-D0E5
HDD/C failed.
HDD/C (HDD/C)
DIPSW18-7
HDD
unusable
(HDD not
connected)
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
Main body:
HDD/K read/
write
abnormality
C-D0E6
HDD/K (HDD/K) failed.
HDD/K (HDD/K)
DIPSW18-7
HDD
unusable
(HDD not
connected)
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
Main body:
HDD/A read/
write
abnormality
C-D0E7
HDD/A (HDD/A) failed.
HDD/A (HDD/A)
DIPSW18-7
HDD
unusable
(HDD not
connected)
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.
K -76

Classification
Malfunction
code

Resulting
operation
Cause
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
HDD/P (HDD/P) failed.
DIPSW18-7
HDD/P (HDD/P)
(MCB/P)
Main body: HDD C-D0EF

verify
abnormality
An error is detected while

in HDD verify check.
* SC is not counted.
Main body: HDD C-D0F0

Lock
abnormality
HDD Lock abnormality

while in enhanced security.
HDD is locked due to
incorrect password,
password unset or security
OFF.
Main body:
Security
abnormality
C-DC##
Security abnormality
Contact to Konica Minolta

before carrying on the
action.
Main body:
Image
processing
abnormality
C-E001
The message queue is

insufficient or destroyed.
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
power relay
(RL1).
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-E002
The parameter value is in

excess of the permissible
limits.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-E003
The ID of the task that

sends the message queue
is undefined.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
C-E004
The receiving event of the

message is undefined.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
Program of overall
Main body:
HDD/P read/
write
abnormality
C-D0E8
HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
HDD/M (HDD/M)
HDD/C (HDD/C)
HDD/K (HDD/K)
HDD/A (HDD/A)
HDD/P (HDD/P)
(MCB1)
(MCB/P)
(OACB)
K -77
HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
HDD/M (HDD/M)
HDD/C (HDD/C)
HDD/K (HDD/K)
HDD/A (HDD/A)
HDD/P (HDD/P)
Control
when
HDD
unusable
(HDD not
connected)
However, it
cannot be
detached
when
IC-601 is
connected.

Classification
Malfunction
code

Resulting
operation
Cause
C-E005
Memory access
abnormality.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
(OACB)
C-E006
Header address read out

abnormality.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
(OACB)
C-E007
Header address read out

abnormality.
Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
(MCB1)
(OACB)
Main body:
Output paper
density
automatic
adjustment
abnormality
C-E008
An error is detected while The main body

in the output paper density stops
adjustment.
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Main body:
Printer control
non-volatile
initial value
abnormality
C-E009
Wrong initial value is

detected in the printer
control area.
PRCB firmware
(PRCB)
The main body

stops
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
2.4 Malfunction code caused by connector disconnection

2.4.1 bizhub PRESS C7000
Board name
Printer control
board (PRCB)
Connector
number
Connected to
Malfunction
code
Remark
"Please insert key counter" is displayed
on the operation panel
CN35
Key counter (KCT)
CN36
Coin vendor /2
CN150
Temperature sensor /1 (TH1), /2 (TH2), /3 (TH3), /4

(TH4), Fusing unit set
CN151
Finisher
CN300
Overall control board (OACB) (connector between

boards)
C-C101
It occurs when turning power ON.
CN301
DC power supply /1 (DCPS1) (connector between

boards)
C-C101
CN302

boards)
C-5002
CN303

boards)
CN309
Drum motor /Y (M14), /M (M15), /C (M16), /K (M17),

encoder sensor /Y1(PS81), /Y2(PS82), /M1(PS83), /
M2(PS84), /C1(PS85), /C2(PS86), /K1(PS87), /
K2(PS88)
C-2244
Occurs at feeding paper
CN323
LU/PFU
CN330
Total counter /1 (TCT1), /2 (TCT2), fusing belt

ventilation fan (FM10), transfer belt fan (M11), toner
supply unit open/close sensor (PS14)
C-3913
-
K -78
C-3302

Finisher cannot be recognized. System
configuration display without finisher
LU/PF cannot be recognized. System

configuration display without LU/PF.
The message "Please set replenish toner
unit correctly" is displayed on the
operation panel.
CN339
Power supply cooling fan /3 (FM3), /4(FM4), paper

lift motor /1 (M38), /2 (M39), /3(M40), waste toner
door sensor (PS60)
C-0201
CN340
Developing motor /Y (M20), /M (M21), /C (M22), /K

(M23)
CN353
Belt motor (M18), encoder sensor / belt1 (PS89), /2

(PS90), 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
C-2221
CN357
AC drive board (ACDB) (connector between boards)
C-2221
CN360
TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y), /M (TCRS/M), /C (TCRS/

C), /K (TCRS/K), erase lamp /Y (EL/Y), /M (EL/M), /
C (EL/C), /K (EL/K), belt separation claw solenoid
(SD1), temp/humidity sensor/2 (TEM/HUMS2)
C-2411
CN376
IDC sensor (IDCS), color registration sensor/Fr

(PS8), /Rr (PS9), color registration shutter solenoid
(SD2), IDC shutter solenoid (SD3)
C-4521
Not occur in normal operation. SC occurs

at adjustment.
CN384
Paper exit fan/1 (FM61), /2 (FM62), /3 (FM63)
C-0304
CN393
Developing fan/1 (FM45), /2 (FM46), main body fan

(FM47), deodorization fan (FM36), fusing ventilation
fan (FM37), drum fan/1 (FM12), /2 (FM13), temp/
humidity sensor/1 (TEM/HUMS1)
C-0305
CN400
Tray 1
"Please set tray" is displayed on the

operation panel.
CN414
Tray 2

operation panel.
CN428
Tray 3

operation panel.
CN442
Paper feed motor (M41), intermediate conveyance

clutch/1 (CL13), waste toner full sensor (PS52),
vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51), vertical
conveyance sensor (PS50)
CN464
PF
CN467
Tucking fan/1 (FM26), /3 (FM27), paper exit

pressure sensor (PS10), paper exit sensor (PS13),
paper exit full sensor (PS12), AC drive board
(ACDB) (connector between boards)
C-3911
CN492
Fusing separation fans/1(FM7), /2 (FM8), /3 (FM9)
C-3304
CN500
Conveyance drive board (CDB) (connector between

boards)
C-3102
CN600
Scanner drive board (SCDB) (connector between

boards)
C-6101
CN620
DF, printer image processing board (PRIPB)

(connector between boards)
ADF does not function.
CN650
Tilt correction motor/Y (M74), /M (M75), /C (M76), /

K(M77), tilt correction home sensor/Y (PS70), /M
(PS71), /C (PS72), /K (PS73)
Not occur in normal operation. Color

registration correction error
CN651
Polygon motor /Y (M70), /M (M71), /C (M72), /K

(M73)
C-4101
CN700
Toner drive board (TSDB) (connector between

boards)
C-2301
Closing toner replacement door is not

detected. Occurs at feeding paper.
CN730
High voltage unit /1 (HV1) (connector between

boards)
C-2701
CN736
High voltage unit /2 (HV2) (connector between

boards)
CN908
Status indicator light
C-0101
-
K -79
Opening/closing waste toner cannot be

recognized. Malfunction code occurs
when feeding paper
Image abnormality (no image)

System configuration display without PF.
Image abnormality (no image)

Conveyance
drive board
(CDB)
Toner supply
drive board
(TSDB)
Scanner drive
board (SCDB)
CN503
Printer control board (PRCB) (connector between

boards)
C-3102
CN507
Front door switch (SW1), DC power supply/1

(DCPS1) (connector between boards)
C-3102
CN510
Fusing motor (M29), fusing cooling fan (FM65), ADU

cooling fan/2 (FM67), fusing release home sensor
(PS16), fusing paper exit sensor (PS17), fusing loop
sensor (PS64)
C-3102
CN524
Reverse/exit motor (M33)
CN527
ADU conveyance clutch/1(CL1), /2 (CL2), /3 (CL3),

ADU pre-registration clutch (CL18), paper exit
solenoid (SD4), ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23),
reverse/exit sensor (PS19), decurler sensor (PS62),
registration sensor (PS22), leading edge sensor
(PS63), registration temperature sensor (TEMS1),
2nd transfer HP sensor (PS24)
CN530
ADU centering sensor (PS65), ADU stop sensor

(PS20), ADU conveyance sensor (PS61)
CN534
ADU loop motor (M57), ADU reverse motor (M32)
Jam (J-9202) occurs at feeding paper of

duplex
CN536
Registration motor (M30)
Jam (J-3101) occurs at feeding paper
CN539
Upper limit sensor/BP (PS25), paper feed sensor/BP

(PS26), intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL5),
intermediate conveyance sensor/2 (PS28), pick-up
solenoid/BP (SD5), paper feed clutch/BP (CL6)
CN556
Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27)
CN579
Loop motor (M31)
CN580
C-3103
CN639
Paper lift motor/BP (M35), intermediate conveyance

clutch/2 (CL4), ADU gate solenoid (SD10), ADU
reverse sensor (PS21), ADU cooling fan/1 (FM66)
C-0303
CN702

boards)
C-2301
Closing toner replacement door is not

detected. Occurs at feeding paper.
CN704
DC power supply /1 (DCPS1), /2 (DCPS2)

C-2301
CN705
Toner supply motor /M (M50)
Normal operation is available.

Image getting lighter as it lasts and
damages the drum
CN706
Toner supply motor /K (M49)

damages the drum
CN708
Toner bottle motor (M53)
"No toner/Please add toner" is displayed

on the operation panel and copy is not
available.
CN711
Toner bottle clutch/Y (CL14), /M (CL15), /C (CL16), /

K (CL17), toner bottle door switch (SW4)
"No toner/Please add toner" is displayed

on the operation panel and copy is not
available.
CN724
Remaining toner sensor /Y (PZS/Y), /M (PZS/M), /C

(PZS/C), /K (PZS/K), toner supply door open/close
sensor (PS54), charge intake fan (FM48)
C-2301
CN726
Toner supply motor /C (M51), /K (M52)
CN601

boards)
C-6101
CN602
DC power supply /1 (DCPS1), /2 (DCPS2)

C-6101
CN603
Scanner motor (M1)
C-6101
CN605
Exposure lamp (L1), scanner inverter board

(S_INVB)
C-6708
CN607
Scanner cooling fan (FM2)
C-6301
C-6101
CN609
Scanner home sensor (PS1), APS sensor/1 (PS3), /

2 (PS4), APS timing sensor (PS2), ADF open/close
switch (PS1)
Jam (J-3202, J-3203, J-3209, J-9201)

occurs at feeding paper
K -80
C-3103
Nothing occurs

damages the drum

AC drive
board (ACDB)
CN120
Noise filter (NF), CN121 loop back
CN121
Dehumidifier heater (DH), noise filter (NF), CN120

loop back
CN152

boards)
C-3911
CN153

boards)
C-2221
CN157
Fusing control board/1 (FUSCB1), /2 (FUSCB2: only

for Europe)
C-3911
CN569
Paper exit motor (M54), decurler motor (M55)
C-0213
CN642

boards)
C-2221
C-2221
CN643
Overall control CN13
board (OACB)
C-3911
CN204

boards)
CN215

boards)
C-C101
CN216
Operation board /1 (OB1) (connector between

boards)
CN217
Power supply cooling fan /1 (FM1)
CN218
CN248
IPB fan/1 (FM5), /2 (FM6), HDD unit cooling fan/1

(FM81), /2 (FM82)
CN249
LCD board (LCDB)
CN1501
Memory control board /H3 (MCB/H3)
CN1502
Hard disk /C (HDD /C)
C-D0E1(C)
CN1503
Hard disk /M (HDD /M)
C-D0E1(M)
CN1507

boards)
Memory
CN11
control board / CN12
1 (MCB1)
CN242
Normal start
Operation panel does not turn ON
Operation panel does not turn ON (Power

lamp is OFF)
C-DC20
-
Operation panel does not turn ON
C-5304
-
No image on the operation panel (blank

screen)
C-D0E2
Power is not turned ON
C-D0E2
C-D0E2
Hard disk /Y (HDD /Y)
C-D0E1(Y)
CN246
Hard disk /K (HDD /K)
C-D0E1(K)
CN247
Hard disk /A (HDD /A)
AC-D0E1 (A)
Memory
control board / P(HDD)
P (MCB/P)
Hard disk /P (HDD /P)
Printer image
CN202
processing
board (PRIPB) CN225

boards)
C-4725
Writing unit /Y
C-4718
CN226
Writing unit /Y
C-4722
CN229
Writing unit /M
C-4719
CN230
Writing unit /M
C-4723
CN233
Writing unit /C
C-4720
CN234
Writing unit /C
C-4724
CN237
Writing unit /K
C-4721
CN238
Writing unit /K
C-4725
CN240

boards)
Scanner
image
CN242
processing
board (SCIPB)
Nothing occurs
C-D0E2
Normal start
CCD board (CCDB)

C-6708
2.5 Solution 1 (C-0001_0300)

2.5.1 C-0001
Code
C-0001
Classification
Main body: Communication error
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the PF drive board (PFDB) or LU drive board (LUDB).
K -81
Measures to take when alert occurs

The main body stops immediately to turn OFF the power relay (RL1).
Correction
Turn OFF/ON the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
Note
The message "Please turn on power again" is displayed on the touch panel.
Solution
1. Turn OFF the sub power switch and unplug the power plug. Restart the main body after 10 seconds.
2. Check the connection status of PRCB connector, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection status of PFDB or LUDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRCB
5. Replace PFDB or LUDB
Faulty part isolation DIPSW
Control while detached
2.5.2 C-0002
Code
C-0002
Classification
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the conveyance drive board (CDB).
Conveyance drive board (CDB)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connection status of CDB connector, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRCB.
5. Replace CDB.
2.5.3 C-0003
Code
C-0003
Classification
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the conveyance drive board (CDB).
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connection status of CDB connector, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRCB.
5. Replace CDB.
2.5.4 C-0101
Code
C-0101
Classification
K -82
Main body: Paper feed motor abnormality

Cause
An error detection signal of M41 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper feed motor (M41) is ON.
Correction
Note
"Please call service" is displayed.
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body
(1/3):16-E)
3. Replace M41.
4. Replace PRCB
2.5.5 C-0102
Code
C-0102
Classification
LU: LU paper feed motor abnormality
Cause
Interlock switch /1 (MS1), /2 (MS2)
Upper door sensor (PS100), front door sensor (PS115)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the I/O of the interlock switch and sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality (Wiring diagram: LU: 6-C, 8-B)
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 5-B)
4. Replace M1.
5. Replace LUDB.
DIPSW18-3
LU paper feed is not available
2.5.6 C-0103
Code
C-0103
Classification
PF: PF paper feed motor abnormality
Cause
Front door open/close switch (SW1)
Front door open/close sensor (PS23)
Correction
Note
The message "Please call service" is displayed on the panel.
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the I/O of the interlock switch and sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality (Wiring diagram: PF: 9-U, 10-U)
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 19-U)
4. Replace M1.
5. Replace PFDB
K -83

DIPSW35-0
DIPSW35-1
DIPSW35-2
DIPSW35-3
DIPSW35-4
DIPSW35-5
PF paper feed is not available
2.5.7 C-0201
Code
C-0201
Classification
Main body: Paper feed tray abnormality
Cause
The upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the paper lift motor /1 (M38) turns ON.
Upper limit sensor /1 (PS30)
Pick-up solenoid /1 (SD7)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper loaded condition and the rear end restriction plate condition of the tray 1, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the solenoid and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring
diagram: Main body (1/3):14-E, 15-M)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 14-M)
5. Replace PS30.
6. Replace SD7.
7. Replace M38 and PRCB at a time.
DIPSW18-0
Paper feed in tray 1 is unavailable
2.5.8 C-0202
Code
C-0202
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
diagram: Main body (1/3): 13-E, 18-M)
5. Replace PS36.
6. Replace SD8.
7. Replace M39, SD8 and PRCB at a time.
DIPSW18-1
K -84
2.5.9 C-0203
Code
C-0203
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
diagram: Main body (1/3): 13-E, 21-M)
5. Replace PS42.
6. Replace SD9.
7. Replace M40 and PRCB at a time.
DIPSW18-2
2.5.10 C-0204
Code
C-0204
Classification
LU: LU lift motor abnormality
Cause
A lock signal of M100 is detected while the paper lift motor (M100) is ON.
Upper limit sensor (PS109)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 5-H)
3. Replace PS109.
4. Replace M100.
5. Replace LUDB.
DIPSW18-3
2.5.11 C-0205
Code
C-0205
Classification
LU: LU lift motor abnormality
Cause
A lock signal of M100 is detected while the paper lift motor (M100) is ON.
Correction
K -85
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper loaded condition and the rear end restriction plate condition of the LU tray, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 5-H)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 7-B)
5. Replace PS109.
6. Replace M100.
7. Replace LUDB.
2.5.12 C-0208
Code
C-0208
Classification
PF: Paper lift motor abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper loaded condition and the rear end restriction plate condition of the PF tray, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 6-K)
5. Replace PS1.
6. Replace M2.
7. Replace PFDB.
DIPSW21-4
Paper feed in PF upper tray is unavailable
2.5.13 C-0209
Code
C-0209
Classification
Cause
Power supply line fuse for the paper lift motor /1 (M2) blows out.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace M2 and PFDB at a time
DIPSW21-4
Paper feed in PF upper tray is unavailable
2.5.14 C-0211
Code
C-0211
Classification
K -86

Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper loaded condition and the rear end restriction plate condition of the PF tray, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 14-K)
5. Replace PS9.
6. Replace M3.
7. Replace PFDB.
DIPSW21-5
Paper feed in PF lower tray is unavailable
2.5.15 C-0212
Code
C-0212
Classification
Cause
Power supply line fuse for the paper lift motor /2 (M3) blows out.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace M3 and PFDB at a time
DIPSW21-5
Paper feed in PF lower tray is unavailable
2.5.16 C-0213
Code
C-0213
Classification
Main body: Paper exit abnormality
Cause
The paper exit pressure home sensor (PS10) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after it turns OFF.
Paper exit pressure sensor (PS10)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the de-curler unit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
K -87
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 22-E)
(1/3): 11-B)
7. Replace PS10.
8. Replace M54.
9. Replace ACDB.
10. Replace PRCB
11. Replace M54 and ACDB at a time.
2.6 Solution 2 (C-0301_0400)

2.6.1 C-0301*
Code
C-0301*
Classification
Main body: Fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of FM47 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the main body fan (FM47) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the fun, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 13-D)
3. Replace FM47 and PRCB at a time.
2.6.2 C-0302*
Code
C-0302*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of any of FM26 or FM28 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the tucking fan /1 (FM26)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 22-E)
3. Replace FM26 or FM28 and PRCB at a time
2.6.3 C-0303
Code
C-0303
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM66 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while ADU cooling fan /1 (FM66) is ON.
ADU cooling fan /1 (FM66)
K -88
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 2-P)
3. Replace FM66 and CDB at a time.
2.6.4 C-0304*
Code
C-0304*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of any of FM61, FM62 or FM63 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper exit cooling
fans /1 (FM61), /2 (FM62) and /3 (FM63) are ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 8-D)
3. Replace FM61, FM62 or FM63 and PRCB at a time
2.6.5 C-0305*
Code
C-0305*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM36 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the deodorization fan (FM36) is ON.
Deodorization fan (FM36)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.6 C-0306
Code
C-0306
Classification
LU: LU fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of FM1 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper feed assist fan /Fr (FM1) is ON.
Paper feed assist fan /Fr (FM1)
Correction
K -89
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB and the fun, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 6-H)
3. Replace FM1and LUDB at a time.
2.6.7 C-0307
Code
C-0307
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM2 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper feed assist fan /Rr (FM2) is ON.
Paper feed assist fan /Rr (FM2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 7-H)
3. Replace FM2 and LUDB at a time
2.6.8 C-0308
Code
C-0308
Classification
PF: PF fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of FM1 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper feed assist fan /Fr11 (FM1) is ON.
Paper feed assist fan /Fr11 (FM1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 11-K)
3. Replace FM1 and PFDB at a time.
2.6.9 C-0309
Code
C-0309
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
K -90
Solution
2.6.10 C-0310
Code
C-0310
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM2 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper feed assist fan /Rr11 (FM2) is ON.
Paper feed assist fan /Rr11 (FM2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.11 C-0311
Code
C-0311
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.12 C-0312
Code
C-0312
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
K -91

2.6.13 C-0313
Code
C-0313
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.14 C-0314
Code
C-0314
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.15 C-0315
Code
C-0315
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF : 7-H)
K -92
2.6.16 C-0316
Code
C-0316
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of any of FM11 or FM12 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the dehumidifier fans /1
(FM11) and /2 (FM12) are ON.
Dehumidifier fan /1 (FM11)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 24-D, 25-D)
3. Replace FM11 or FM12 and PFDB at a time
2.6.17 C-0317
Code
C-0317
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of any of FM13 or FM14 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the dehumidifier fans /3
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 23-F)
2.6.18 C-0318
Code
C-0318
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of any of FM10 or FM9 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the ventilation fan /1 (FM10)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 26-U)
K -93
2.6.19 C-0320
Code
C-0320
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM3 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the dehumidifier fan /1 (FM3) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 4-C)
3. Replace FM3 and LUDB at a time.
2.6.20 C-0321
Code
C-0321
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM4 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the dehumidifier fan /2 (FM4) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 4-C)
3. Replace FM4and LUDB at a time
2.6.21 C-0322
Code
C-0322
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM67 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while ADU cooling fan /2 (FM67) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 2-I)
K -94
2.6.22 C-0323*
Code
C-0323*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM62 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper exit fan /2 (FM62) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM62.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.6.23 C-0324*
Code
C-0324*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM63 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper exit fan /3 (FM63) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM63.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.7 Solution 3 (C-0401_0500)

2.7.1 C-0401
Code
C-0401
Classification
LU: LU power source abnormality
Cause
24VDC is not supplied to LU.
DC power supply /2 (DCPS/2)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB and DCPS /2, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace LUDB.
3. Replace DCPS /2.
4. Replace LUDB and DCPS/2 at a time.
K -95
2.7.2 C-0402
Code
C-0402
Classification
LU: LU power source abnormality
Cause
12VDC is not supplied to LU.
DC power supply /1 (DCPS1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB and DCPS1, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace LUDB.
3. Replace DCPS1.
4. Replace LUDB and DCPS1 at a time.
2.7.3 C-0403
Code
C-0403
Classification
PF: PF power source abnormality
Cause
24VDC is not supplied to PF.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and DCPS2, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace PFDB
3. Replace DCPS2.
4. Replace PFDB and DCPS2 at a time.
2.7.4 C-0404
Code
C-0404
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Replace PFDB.
3. Replace DCPS2.
K -96
2.7.5 C-0405
Code
C-0405
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace PFDB
3. Replace DCPS1.
2.7.6 C-0406
Code
C-0406
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Replace PFDB.
3. Replace DCPS2.
2.7.7 C-0407
Code
C-0407
Classification
PF: PF Tray 1 Heater high temperature hardware detection abnormality
Cause
24V power source abnormal signal is detected.
Temperature sensor /3 (TEMS/3)
AC drive board (ACDB) in PF
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and TEMS/3, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the installation condition of TEMS/3, and adjust/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 25-D)
3. Replace TEMS/3.
4. Replace PFDB.
5. Replace ACDB.
K -97
2.7.8 C-0408
Code
C-0408
Classification
PF: PF Tray 2 Heater high temperature hardware detection abnormality
Cause
24V power source abnormal signal is detected.
AC drive board (ACDB) in PF
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and TEMS/4, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the installation condition of TEMS/4, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 24-F)
3. Replace TEMS/4.
4. Replace PFDB
5. Replace ACDB.
2.7.9 C-0409
Code
C-0409
Classification
PF: PF fan heater abnormality
Cause
Fan heater /Up (DH3) high temperature abnormality
The temperature sensor /3 (TEMS/3) detects the prescribed or higher value continuously for a specified period of time.
AC drive board in PF (ACDB)
Dehumidifier fans /1 (FM11) and /2 (FM12)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connection between ACDB and the noise filter of PF.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB, the temperature sensor, and the fan and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the heater, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and ACDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Rotate the fan by I/O or hand, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 24-D, 25-D)
6. Check the temperature and the installation condition of the fan heater and the installation condition of the temperature sensor, and
repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 22-D, 25-D)
7. Replace TEMS/3.
8. Replace DH3.
9. Replace FM11 and FM12.
10. Replace ACDB.
11. Replace PFDB
2.7.10 C-0410
Code
C-0410
Classification
Cause
Fan heater /Lw (DH4) high temperature abnormality
The temperature sensor /4 (TEMS/4) detects the prescribed or higher value continuously for a specified period of time.
K -98

Dehumidifier fans /3 (FM13) and /4 (FM14)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB, the temperature sensor, and the fan and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Rotate the fan by I/O or hand, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 23-F)
repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 21-F, 24-F)
7. Replace TEMS/4.
8. Replace DH4.
10. Replace ACDB.
11. Replace PFDB
2.7.11 C-0411
Code
C-0411
Classification
Cause
Fan heater /Up (DH3) low temperature abnormality
The temperature sensor /3 (TEMS/3) detects the prescribed or lower value continuously for a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and the temperature sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace TEMS3.
7. Replace DH3.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PFDB
2.7.12 C-0412
Code
C-0412
Classification
Cause
Fan heater /Lw (DH4) low temperature abnormality
The temperature sensor /4 (TEMS/4) detects the prescribed or lower value continuously for a specified period of time.
Correction
K -99
Note
Solution
5. Check the temperature and the installation status of the fan heater and of the temperature sensor, and then repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace TEMS /4
7. Replace DH4
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PFDB
2.7.13 C-0413
Code
C-0413
Classification
Cause
Fan heater /Up (DH3) temperature rise abnormality
The temperature detected by the temperature sensor /3 (TEMS/3) has not risen to a prescribed level within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace TEMS/3.
7. Replace DH3.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PFDB
10. Replace ACDB and DH3 at a time.
2.7.14 C-0414
Code
C-0414
Classification
Cause
Fan heater /Lw (DH4) temperature rise abnormality
The temperature detected by the temperature sensor /4 (TEMS/4) has not risen to a prescribed level within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
K -100
repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF: 21-F, 24-F)
6. Replace TEMS/4.
7. Replace DH4.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PFDB
10. Replace ACDB and DH4 at a time.
2.7.15 C-0415
Code
C-0415
Classification
LU: LU temperature sensor abnormality
Cause
The temperature sensor /2 (TEMS2) detects an error detection signal continuously for a specified period of time. (Hardware detection)
Dehumidification heater /3 (DH2)
Temperature sensor /2 (TEMS2)
AC Drive Assy
Main body AC drive board (ACDB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LUDB, the temperature sensor, and AC Drive Assy and repair it if any
abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the main body ACDB and the heater, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the installation position of the temperature sensor and repair/replace it if any abnormality (Wiring diagram: LU: 8-H, 4-C)
4. Replace TEMS2.
5. Replace DH2.
6. Replace AC Drive Assy.
7. Replace LUDB.
8. Replace main body ACDB.
2.7.16 C-0416
Code
C-0416
Classification
LU: LU dehumidifier heater abnormality
Cause
Dehumidifier heater /3 (DH2) high temperature abnormality
The temperature sensor /2 (TEMS2) detects the prescribed or higher value continuously for a specified period of time. (Software detection)
AC drive assy
Correction
Note
Solution
abnormality.
3. Check the temperature and the installation condition of the dehumidifier heater and the installation condition of the temperature
sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LU: 4-B, 8-H, 4-C)
4. Replace TEMS2.
5. Replace DH2.
7. Replace LUDB.
8. Replacing ACDB of the main body.
K -101
2.7.17 C-0417
Code
C-0417
Classification
Cause
Dehumidifier heater /3 (DH2) low temperature abnormality
The temperature sensor (TEMS) detects the prescribed or lower value continuously for a specified period of time.
AC Drive Assy
Correction
Note
Solution
abnormality.
4. Replace TEMS2.
5. Replace DH2.
7. Replace LUDB.
8. Replace main body ACDB.
2.7.18 C-0418
Code
C-0418
Classification
Cause
Dehumidifier heater /3 (DH2) temperature rise abnormality
The temperature detected by the temperature sensor (TEMS) has not risen to a prescribed level within a specified period of time.
AC drive assy
Correction
Note
Solution
abnormality.
4. Replace TEMS2.
5. Replace DH2.
7. Replace LUDB.
8. Replacing ACDB of the main body
K -102
2.8 Solution 4 (C-1001_1126)

2.8.1 C-1005
Code
C-1005
Classification
FS: FS abnormality
Cause
The main body and the FS stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Turn OFF the sub power switch, and then turn OFF the main power switch. Then unplug all the power plug. Restart the main body
after 10 seconds.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the main body and each option, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection of the control board and the drive board in each option, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Rewrite the firmware of the option.
5. Replace the control board of the option corresponds to the malfunction code.
2.8.2 C-1006
Code
C-1006
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The main body and the FD stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Correction
Note
Solution
after 10 seconds.
2.8.3 C-1007
Code
C-1007
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The main body and the SD stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Correction
Note
Solution
after 10 seconds.
K -103
2.8.4 C-1009
Code
C-1009
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Communication error between Main CPU in the PB control board (PBCB) and Sub CPU1.
The main body and the PB stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Turn OFF the sub power switch and then turn OFF the main power switch. Then unplug all the power plug. Restart the main body after
10 seconds.
2. Check the connector connection of the control board and the drive board in PB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rewrite the firmware of PB.
4. Replace PBCB.
2.8.5 C-1010
Code
C-1010
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Communication error between Main CPU in the PB control board (PBCB) and Sub CPU2.
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection of the control board and the drive board in PB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rewrite the firmware of PB.
4. Replace PBCB.
2.8.6 C-1011
Code
C-1011
Classification
Cause
Paper feed error between the main body and PB.
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
K -104
2.8.7 C-1012
Code
C-1012
Classification
GP : GP abnormality
Causes
Communication abnormality.
Resulting operation
The main body and the RU stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Correction
Error conditions are cleared by turning OFF/ON the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
Note
"Please call service" is displayed on the touch panel.
Procedure
1. After turning OFF the sub power switch, turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the all the power plugs. Restart the main body
after 10 seconds.
DipSW
Control during separation
2.8.8 C-1013
Code
C-1013
Classification
RU: RU-509 abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.8.9 C-1014
Code
C-1014
Classification
RU : RU-506 abnormality
Causes
Communication abnormality.
Resulting operation
Correction
Note
K -105
Procedure
1. After turning OFF the sub power switch, turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the all the power plugs. Restart the main body
after 10 seconds.
DipSW
2.8.10 C-1101 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1101 (FS-531/612)
Classification
FS: FS-531/612 abnormality
Cause
The shift unit does not get to the shift position or the home position within a specified period of time.
Shift roller home sensor (PS18)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the shift unit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-612: 2-B)
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-612: 3-B)
5. Replace PS18.
6. Replace M2.
7. Replace FNSCB.
2.8.11 C-1102 (FS-521)

Code
C-1102 (FS-521)
Classification
FS: FS-521 abnormality
Cause
The tray up down motor (M3) does not turn OFF even when a specified period of time elapses after it starts operations. Or, it operates for
more than the allowed time at a speed out of the specified one.
FNS drive board (FNSDB)
Main tray up down motor (M3)
Main tray upper limit sensor (PS2)
Main tray lower limit sensor (PS3)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the tray up/down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and FNSCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the sensor operation, LED emission and light-receiving path, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521:
2-B, 4-B)
6. Replace PS3.
7. Replace LED1 and PS16.
8. Replace M3.
9. Replace FNSDB.
10. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
K -106
FS main tray and stapling are not available
2.8.12 C-1102 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1102 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
The main tray upper limit sensor (PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the main tray up down motor (M3) turns
ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the tray up/down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-612: 5-B)
5. Replace PS2.
6. Replace M3.
7. Replace FNSCB.
2.8.13 C-1103 (FS-521)

Code
C-1103 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The alignment home sensors /Rr (PS8) and /Fr (PS31) do not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search
operation of the alignment motors /Rr (M5) and /Fr (M22) starts.
Alignment motor /Rr (M5)
Alignment motor /Fr (M22)
Alignment home sensor /Rr (PS8)
Alignment home sensor /Fr (PS31)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:4-G)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:3-G, 4-G)
6. Replace PS8 or PS31.
7. Replace M5.
8. Replace M22.
9. Replace FNSDB.
10. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.8.14 C-1103 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1103 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
K -107
The alignment home sensor /Up (PS8) does not turn ON or OFF within a specified period of time after the alignment motor (M5) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Alignment motor /Up (M5)
Alignment home sensor /Up (PS8)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-612: 7-I)
5. Replace PS8.
6. Replace M5.
7. Replace RB.
2.8.15 C-1104 (FS-521)

Code
C-1104 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The main tray paper exit motor (M7) operates for more than the allowed time at a speed out of the specified one.
Main tray exit motor (M7)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M7.
5. Replace FNSDB.
6. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.8.16 C-1104 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1104 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
A prescribed speed is not obtained within a specified period of time after the paper exit roller motor (M7) turns ON.
Paper exit roller motor (M7)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSCB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace M7.
4. Replace FNSCB.
K -108
2.8.17 C-1105 (FS-521)

Code
C-1105 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit opening unit does not get to the specified opening position within a specified period of time after the paper exit opening
motor (M8) starts operations.
Paper exit opening motor (M8)
Paper exit opening home sensor (PS12)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper exit opening section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521:2-C)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:3-B)
6. Replace PS12.
7. Replace M8.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.8.18 C-1105 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1105 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit home sensor (PS12) does not turn ON or OFF within a specified period of time after the paper exit opening motor (M8)
turns ON.
Paper exit home sensor (PS12)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper exit opening section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS12.
6. Replace M8.
7. Replace FNSCB.
2.8.19 C-1106 (FS-521)

Code
C-1106 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The stapler movement home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of
the stapler movement motor (M11) starts.
K -109

Stapler movement motor (M11)
Stapler movement home sensor (PS11)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stapler movement section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521: 5-G)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521: 2-G)
6. Replace PS11.
7. Replace M11.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
The use of staple is unavailable
2.8.20 C-1106 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1106 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
The Stapler movement home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stapler movement motor (M11)
turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-612: 7-I)
5. Replace PS11.
6. Replace M11.
7. Replace RB.
2.8.21 C-1107 (FS-521)

Code
C-1107 (FS-521)
Classification
FS: FS-521 abnormality (skew rotation)
Cause
The stapler rotation home sensor (PS14) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of the
stapler rotation motor (M4) starts.
Stapler rotation motor (M4)
Stapler rotation home sensor (PS14)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stapler rotation section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K -110
6. Replace PS14.
7. Replace M4.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
2.8.22 C-1107 (FS-612)

Code
C-1107 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The clincher rotation home sensor (PS14) does not turn ON or OFF within a specified period of time after the clincher rotation motor (M4)
turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Clincher rotation motor (M4)
Clincher rotation home sensor (PS14)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring betweenRB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS14.
6. Replace M4.
7. Replace RB.
2.8.23 C-1108 (FS-521)

Code
C-1108 (FS-521)
Classification
FS: FS-521 abnormality (vertical rotation)
Cause
The stapler rotation home sensor (PS14) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of the
stapler rotation motor (M4) starts.
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace PS14.
7. Replace M4.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
K -111
2.8.24 C-1108 (FS-612)

Code
C-1108 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The stapler rotation home sensor (PS13) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stapler rotation motor (M6) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring betweenRB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS13.
6. Replace M6.
7. Replace RB.
2.8.25 C-1109 (FS-521)

Code
C-1109 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
After the stapler motor /Fr (M31) starts operations, it does not complete operations within a specified period of time, and the stapler home
sensor /Fr (PS41) does not turn ON.
Stapler board (SB)
Stapler home sensor /Fr (PS41)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and the stapler, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replacing the stapler assy
4. Replace FNSDB.
5. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
2.8.26 C-1109 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1109 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
The stapler motor home sensor /Fr (PS31) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stapler motor /Fr (M14) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Stapler motor home sensor /Fr (PS31)
Correction
K -112
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RB and the stapler, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace RB.
2.8.27 C-1110 (FS-521)

Code
C-1110 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
After the stapler motor /Rr (M30) starts operations, it does not complete operations within a specified period of time, and the stapler home
sensor /Rr (PS40) does not turn ON.
Stapler board (SB)
Stapler home sensor /Rr (PS40)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and the stapler, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace FNSDB.
5. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
2.8.28 C-1110 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1110 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
The stapler motor home sensor /Rr (PS30) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stapler motor /Rr (M9) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Stapler motor home sensor /Rr (PS30)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace RB.
2.8.29 C-1111 (FS-612)

Code
C-1111 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The clincher motor home sensor /Fr (PS33) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the clincher motor /Fr (M15) turns ON.
K -113

Relay board (RB)
Clincher motor home sensor /Fr (PS33)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace RB.
2.8.30 C-1112 (FS-612)

Code
C-1112 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The clincher motor home sensor /Rr (PS32) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the clincher motor /Rr (M10) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Clincher motor home sensor /Rr (PS32)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace RB.
2.8.31 C-1113 (FS-521)

Code
C-1113 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
After the home position search operation of the rear stopper motor (M26) starts, the rear stopper home sensor (PS35) does not turn ON
Rear stopper motor (M26)
Rear stopper home sensor (PS35)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace PS14.
7. Replace M26.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
K -114
2.8.32 C-1113 (FS-612)

Code
C-1113 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
After the home position search operation of saddle stitching stopper motor (M18) starts, the saddle stitching stopper home sensor (PS23)
does not turn ON within a specified period of time.
Relay board (RB)
Saddle stitching stopper motor (M18)
Saddle stitching stopper home sensor (PS23)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the saddle stitching section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS23.
6. Replace M18.
7. Replace RB.
DIPSW18-5
The use of multi-half folding, saddle stitching and multi-tri-folding unavailable
2.8.33 C-1114 (FS-612)

Code
C-1114 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The alignment home sensor /Lw (PS24) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the alignment motor /Lw (M16) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Alignment motor /Lw (M16)
Alignment home sensor /Lw (PS24)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stacker section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS24.
6. Replace M16.
7. Replace RB.
DIPSW18-5
2.8.34 C-1115 (FS-612)

Code
C-1115 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The folding knife home sensor (PS22) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the folding knife motor (M19) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Folding knife motor (M19)
Folding knife home sensor (PS22)
K -115
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS22.
6. Replace M19.
7. Replace RB.
DIPSW18-5
(FS not connected)
2.8.35 C-1116 (FS-612)

Code
C-1116 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
A prescribed speed is not obtained within a specified period of time after the folding transfer motor (M20) turns ON.
Relay board (RB)
Folding transfer motor (M20)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M20.
5. Replace RB.
DIPSW18-5
(FS not connected)
2.8.36 C-1124
Code
C-1124
Classification
PI: PI abnormality
Cause
The tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209) or the tray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after
the Tray lift motor /Lw (M202) turns ON.
Tray lift motor /Lw (M202)
Tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209)
Tray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the PI lower tray section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PIDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PI: 5-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PI: 6-B)
5. Replace M202.
6. Replace PS209.
7. Replace PS210.
K -116
8. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW18-6
PI unusable
(PI not connected)
2.8.37 C-1125
Code
C-1125
Classification
PI: PI abnormality
Cause
The tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS205) or the tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS204) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after
the tray lift motor /Up (M201) turns ON.
Tray lift motor /Up (M201)
Tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS205)
Tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS204)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PI: 4-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PI: 4-B)
5. Replace M201.
6. Replace PS204.
7. Replace PS205.
8. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW18-6
PI unusable
(PI not connected)
2.8.38 C-1126
Code
C-1126
Classification
PI: PI abnormality
Cause
A prescribed speed is not obtained within a specified period of time after the conveyance motor (M203) turns ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PIDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M203.
5. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW18-6
PI unusable
(PI not connected)
K -117
2.9 Solution 5 (C-1127_1230)

2.9.1 C-1127
Code
C-1127
Classification
PK: PK abnormality
Cause
The punch shift home sensor (PS303) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the punch shift motor (M302) turns ON.
Punch shift motor (M302)
Punch shift home sensor (PS303)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the punch kit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PK:7-C)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M302.
6. Replace PS303.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW19-5
PK unusable
(PK not connected)
2.9.2 C-1132
Code
C-1132
Classification
PK: PK abnormality
Cause
The punch home sensor (PS301) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the punch motor (M301) turns ON.
Punch motor (M301)
Punch home sensor (PS301)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the punch kit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PK: 4-C)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M301.
6. Replace PS301.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW19-5
PK unusable
(PK not connected)
2.9.3 C-1137 (FS-531/612)

Code
C-1137 (FS-531/612)
Classification
Cause
The gate home sensor (PS16) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the gate motor (M12) turns ON.
K -118

Gate motor (M12)
Gate home sensor (PS16)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FNSCB.
2.9.4 C-1140 (FS-521)

Code
C-1140 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
After the paper exit arm motor /Fr (M23) starts operations, it does not complete operations within a specified period of time, and the paper
exit arm home sensor /Fr (PS9) does not turn ON. Or, it operates for more than the allowed time at a speed out of the specified one.
Paper exit arm motor (M23)
Paper exit arm home sensor (PS9)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper exit arm section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS9.
7. Replace M23.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.5 C-1141 (FS-521)

Code
C-1141 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The stack assist home sensor (PS32) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of the
stack assist motor (M24) starts.
Stack assist guide motor (M24)
Stack assist home sensor (PS32)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:5-G)
K -119
6. Replace PS32.
7. Replace M24.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.6 C-1142 (FS-521)

Code
C-1142 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The intermediate roller home sensor (PS33) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the intermediate roller open/close
motor (M25) starts the home position search operation.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the intermediate roller open close section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS33.
7. Replace M25.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.7 C-1143 (FS-521)

Code
C-1143 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The conveyance motor (M1) does not turn ON when the start button is turned ON. Or the conveyance motor (M1) does not shift the speed
for each processing.
FNS entrance sensor (PS4)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M1.
6. Replace FNSDB.
7. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-5
FS unusable
K -120
(FS not connected)
2.9.8 C-1144 (FS-521)

Code
C-1144 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit alignment plate home sensor /Fr (PS18) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the paper exit alignment
motor /Fr (M15) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M15 starts the operation, it does
not stop.
Paper exit alignment motor /Fr (M15)
Paper exit alignment plate home sensor /Fr (PS18)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the front side of the paper exit alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS18.
7. Replace M15.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.9 C-1145 (FS-521)

Code
C-1145 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit alignment plate home sensor /Rr (PS19) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the paper exit alignment
motor /Rr (M14) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M14 starts the operation, it does
not stop.
Paper exit alignment motor /Rr (M14)
Paper exit alignment plate home sensor /Rr (PS19)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the rear side of the paper exit alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS19.
7. Replace M14.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.10 C-1146 (FS-521)

Code
K -121
C-1146 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The bypass roller release home sensor (PS13) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bypass roller release motor
(M12) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M12 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Bypass roller release motor (M12)
Bypass roller release home sensor (PS13)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bypass roller section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:5-C)
6. Replace PS13.
7. Replace M12.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.11 C-1147 (FS-521)

Code
C-1147 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit alignment plate retraction home sensor (PS24) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the paper exit
alignment plate retraction home motor (M18) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M18
starts the operation, it does not stop.
Paper exit alignment plate retraction motor (M18)
Paper exit alignment plate retraction home sensor (PS24)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper exit alignment retraction section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521: 7-M)
6. Replace PS24.
7. Replace M18.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.12 C-1148 (FS-521)

Code
C-1148 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
K -122
The stacker entrance roller release home sensor (PS23) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stacker entrance roller
release motor (M16) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M16 starts the operation, it
does not stop.
Stacker entrance roller release motor (M16)
Stacker entrance roller release home sensor (PS23)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stacker entrance roller release section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS23.
7. Replace M16.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.13 C-1201
Code
C-1201
Classification
LS (1st tandem): LS abnormality
Cause
The stacker tray encoder sensor (PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stacker tray up down motor (M1) turns
ON. Or, the initial operation or the stacker tray down operation is not completed within a specified period of time.
The main body and the LS stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stacker tray up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LSCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:LS-505:5-A)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:LS-505:5-A)
5. Replace PS2.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
LS (1st tandem) unusable
2.9.14 C-1202
Code
C-1202
Classification
Cause
The shift unit home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the shift unit motor (M5) turns ON. Or, PS11
Correction
K -123
Note
Solution
1. Check the shift unit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 6-A)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 5-H)
5. Replace PS11.
6. Replace M5.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.15 C-1203
Code
C-1203
Classification
Cause
The alignment plate home sensor (PS12) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the alignment motor (M7) turns ON. Or,
PS12 does not turn ON within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace PS12.
6. Replace M7.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.16 C-1204
Code
C-1204
Classification
Cause
The grip conveyance home sensor (PS5) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the grip conveyance motor (M4) turns
ON.
Grip conveyance motor (M4)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the grip conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS5.
6. Replace M4.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
K -124
2.9.17 C-1205
Code
C-1205
Classification
Cause
The stacker tray upper limit switch (MS2) is ON when the stacker tray up down motor (M1) is in the up operation.
Stacker tray upper limit switch (MS2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LSCB and motor/switch, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the operation of the switch, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 7-A)
5. Replace MS2.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.18 C-1206
Code
C-1206
Classification
Cause
The stacker tray lower limit switch (MS3) is ON when the stacker tray up down motor (M1) is in the down operation.
Stacker tray lower limit switch (MS3)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace MS3.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.19 C-1211
Code
C-1211
Classification
LS (2nd tandem): LS abnormality
Cause
The stacker tray encoder sensor (PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stacker tray up down motor (M1) turns
ON. Or, the initial operation or the stacker tray down operation is not completed within a specified period of time.
Correction
K -125
Note
Solution
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:LS-505:5-A)
5. Replace PS2.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.20 C-1212
Code
C-1212
Classification
Cause
The shift unit home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the shift unit motor (M5) turns ON. Or, PS11
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the shift unit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS11.
6. Replace M5.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.21 C-1213
Code
C-1213
Classification
Cause
The alignment plate home sensor (PS12) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the alignment motor (M7) turns ON. Or,
PS12 does not turn ON within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace PS12.
6. Replace M7.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
K -126
2.9.22 C-1214
Code
C-1214
Classification
Cause
The grip conveyance home sensor (PS5) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the grip conveyance motor (M4) turns
ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the grip conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS5.
6. Replace M4.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.23 C-1215
Code
C-1215
Classification
Cause
The stacker tray upper limit switch (MS2) is ON when the stacker tray up down motor (M1) is in the up operation.
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace MS2.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.24 C-1216
Code
C-1216
Classification
Cause
The stacker tray lower limit switch (MS3) is ON when the stacker tray up down motor (M1) is in the down operation.
Correction
K -127
Note
Solution
5. Replace MS3.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.25 C-1221
Code
C-1221
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 1st folding cam home sensor (PS55) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 1st folding release motor (M14) turns
ON.
1st folding release motor (M14)
Folding drive board (FDB)
1st folding cam home sensor (PS55)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 1st folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 1-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 2-B)
5. Replace PS55.
6. Replace M14.
7. Replace FDB.
DIPSW6-0
The use of the folding function and the punch section is unavailable
2.9.26 C-1222
Code
C-1222
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 2nd folding cam home sensor (PS56) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 2nd folding release motor (M15)
turns ON.
2nd folding release motor (M15)
2nd folding cam home sensor (PS56)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 2nd folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS56.
6. Replace M15.
7. Replace FDB.
DIPSW6-0
K -128

2.9.27 C-1223
Code
C-1223
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 3rd folding cam home sensor (PS57) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 3rd folding release motor (M16) turns
ON.
3rd folding release motor (M16)
3rd folding cam home sensor (PS57)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 3rd folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS57.
6. Replace M16.
7. Replace FDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.28 C-1224
Code
C-1224
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 2 holes punch home sensor (PS8) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after the 2-holes punch home position return
operation starts. Or, after the punch motor (M10) turns ON, the 2 holes punch home sensor (PS8) does not turn OFF.
Punch motor (M10)
2 holes punch home sensor (PS8)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 2-hole punch section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:5-F)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 5-E)
5. Replace PS8.
6. Replace M10.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.29 C-1225
Code
C-1225
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 3 holes/4 holes punch home sensor (PS9) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after the 3 holes/4 holes punch home
position return operation starts. Or, after the punch motor (M10) turns ON, the 3 holes/4 holes punch home sensor (PS9) does not turn
OFF.
K -129

Punch motor (M10)
3 holes/4 holes home sensor (PS9)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 3-hole/4-hole punch section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:5-E)
5. Replace PS9.
6. Replace M10.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.30 C-1226
Code
C-1226
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The alignment plate home sensor (PS10) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the alignment plate home position return
operation starts. Or, after the alignment motor (M12) turns ON, the alignment plate home sensor (PS10) does not turn OFF.
Alignment plate home sensor (PS10)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the punch alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:3-D)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:5-D)
5. Replace PS10.
6. Replace M12.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.31 C-1227
Code
C-1227
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The punch registration home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the punch registration claw home
position return operation starts. Or, after the punch registration motor (M13) turns ON, the punch registration home sensor (PS11) does
not turn OFF.
Punch registration motor (M13)
Punch registration home sensor (PS11)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -130

4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 5-E)
5. Replace PS11.
6. Replace M13.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.32 C-1228
Code
C-1228
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The main tray upper limit sensor (PS20) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the main tray home position search starts.
Or, after the tray up down motor (M11) turns ON, the main tray upper limit sensor (PS20) does not turn OFF.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 3-D)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 6-D)
5. Replace PS20.
6. Replace M11.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-1
Main tray unusable
2.9.33 C-1229
Code
C-1229
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The main tray lower limit sensor (PS22) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the tray up down motor (M11) is in the
down operation.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 3-D)
5. Replace PS22.
6. Replace M11.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-1
Main tray unusable
K -131
2.9.34 C-1230
Code
C-1230
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
After the FD paper lift motor /Up (M8) is in the down operation, the PI lift plate home sensor /Up (PS34) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time. Or, after the paper lift motor /Up (M8) is in the up operation, the PI tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS32) does not
turn ON.
Paper lift motor /Up (M8)
PI lift plate home sensor /Up (PS34)
PI upper limit sensor /Up (PS32)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the PI upper tray section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:9-A)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:8-A, 9-A)
6. Replace M8.
7. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW6-2
The use of the PI section unavailable
2.10 Solution 6 (C-1231_1270)

2.10.1 C-1231
Code
C-1231
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
After the FD paper lift motor /Lw (M9) is in the down operation, the PI lift plate home sensor /Lw (PS40) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time. Or, after the paper lift motor /Lw (M9) is in the up operation, the PI upper limit sensor /Lw (PS38) does not turn
ON.
PI lift plate home sensor /Lw (PS40)
PI upper limit sensor /Lw (PS38)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 9-A)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 7-A, 8-A)
6. Replace M9.
7. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW6-2
2.10.2 C-1232
Code
C-1232
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
K -132
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the entrance conveyance motor (M1) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the entrance conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M1.
5. Replace PDB.
2.10.3 C-1233
Code
C-1233
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M3 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the intermediate conveyance motor (M3) is ON.
Intermediate conveyance motor (M3)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the intermediate conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M3.
5. Replace PDB.
2.10.4 C-1234
Code
C-1234
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M7 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the PI conveyance motor (M7) is ON.
PI conveyance motor (M7)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the PI conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PIDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 9-A)
4. Replace M7.
5. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW6-2
K -133
2.10.5 C-1235
Code
C-1235
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M17 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the main tray exit motor (M17) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the main tray exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M17.
5. Replace PDB.
2.10.6 C-1241
Code
C-1241
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The scraps press home sensor (PS48) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle exit motor (M5) starts the home
Scraps press home sensor (PS48)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and SDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 22-D)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 24-D)
6. Replace PS48.
7. Replace M5.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
The use of the saddle stitching, multi-center folding and trimmer unavailable
2.10.7 C-1242
Code
C-1242
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the folding main scan
alignment motor /Fr (M7) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M7 starts the operation,
it does not stop.
Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7)
K -134
Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18)

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding main scan alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS18.
7. Replace M7.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
The use of the saddle stitching, multi-center folding, multi tri-folding and trimmer unavailable
2.10.8 C-1243
Code
C-1243
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The folding exit home sensor (PS24) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the folding sub scan alignment exit motor
(M8) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M8 starts to decelerate, it does not stop.
Folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8)
Folding exit home sensor (PS24)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding sub scan alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS24.
7. Replace M8.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
The use of the saddle stitching, multi-center folding, multi-tri-folding and trimmer unavailable
2.10.9 C-1244
Code
C-1244
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the saddle stitching
alignment motor /Rt (M9) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M9 starts the operation,
it does not stop.
Saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9)
K -135
Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28)

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the saddle stitching alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS28.
7. Replace M9.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.10 C-1245
Code
C-1245
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The bundle arm home sensor (PS32) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle arm motor (M10) starts the home
position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M10 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Bundle arm motor (M10)
Bundle arm home sensor (PS32)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle arm section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS32.
7. Replace M10.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.11 C-1246
Code
C-1246
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle clip motor (M11) starts the
home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M11 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33)
Bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30)
K -136

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle clip section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:16-D)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:19-D)
6. Replace PS33.
7. Replace M11.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.12 C-1247
Code
C-1247
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The bundle registration home sensor (PS34) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle registration motor (M12)
starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M12 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Bundle registration motor (M12)
Bundle registration home sensor (PS34)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle registration section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS34.
7. Replace M12.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.13 C-1248
Code
C-1248
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The overlap home sensor (PS17) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the overlap motor (M13) starts the home position
search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M13 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Overlap motor (M13)
Overlap home sensor (PS17)
Correction
K -137
Note
Solution
1. Check the overlap section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS17.
7. Replace M13.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
2.10.14 C-1249
Code
C-1249
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the folding main scan
alignment motor /Rr (M14) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M14 starts the
Folding main scan alignment motor /Rr (M14)
Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding main scan alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS19.
7. Replace M14.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
2.10.15 C-1250
Code
C-1250
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The stapler movement home sensor (PS25) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of
the stapler movement motor (M15) starts. Or, even after a specified period of time after M15 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Correction
K -138
Note
Solution
6. Replace PS25.
7. Replace M15.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.16 C-1251
Code
C-1251
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt (PS29) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the saddle stitching
alignment motor /Lt (M16) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M16 starts the
Saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16)
Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt (PS29)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the saddle stitching alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS29.
7. Replace M16.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.17 C-1252
Code
C-1252
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The bundle press movement home sensor (PS36) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle press movement
motor (M17) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M17 starts the operation, it does not
stop.
Bundle press movement motor (M17)
Bundle press movement home sensor (PS36)
Correction
K -139
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle press movement section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS36.
7. Replace M17.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.18 C-1253
Code
C-1253
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The 1st folding blade home sensor (PS21) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 1st folding blade motor (M18) starts
the home position search operation. Or 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) does not turned ON within a specified period of time after
M18 starts the operation.
1st folding blade motor (M18)
1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20), /2 (PS21)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 1st folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS20.
7. Replace M18.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
2.10.19 C-1254
Code
C-1254
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The 2nd folding blade home sensor /2 (PS23) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 2nd folding blade motor (M19)
starts the home position search operation. Or the 2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22) does not turned ON within a specified period of
time after M19 starts the operation.
2nd folding blade motor (M19)
2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22), /2 (PS23)
Correction
K -140
Note
Solution
1. Check the 2nd folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:12-D, 13-D)
6. Replace PS22.
7. Replace M19.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-2
The use of the multi-tri-folding unavailable
2.10.20 C-1255
Code
C-1255
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The clincher up down home sensor (PS26) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the clincher up down motor (M20)
starts the home position search. Or, even after a specified period of time after M20 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Clincher up down motor (M20)
Clincher up down home sensor (PS26)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clincher up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS26.
7. Replace M20.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.21 C-1256
Code
C-1256
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the saddle stitching press motor
(M21) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M21 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Saddle stitching press motor (M21)
Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the saddle stitching press section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K -141
6. Replace PS27.
7. Replace M21.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.22 C-1257
Code
C-1257
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle arm rotation motor (M22)
starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M22 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Bundle arm rotation motor (M22)
Bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle arm rotation section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS31.
7. Replace M22.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.23 C-1258
Code
C-1258
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The bundle press home sensor (PS37) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle press motor (M23) starts the
Bundle press motor (M23)
Bundle press home sensor (PS37)
Bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle press section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K -142
7. Replace M23.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.24 C-1259
Code
C-1259
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The bundle press home sensor (PS35) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle press stage up down motor
(M24) starts the home position search operation. Or PS35 or the bundle press stage up down upper limit sensor (PS45) does not turned
ON after a specified period of time M24 starts the operation.
Bundle press stage up down motor (M24)
Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35)
Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle press stage up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 24-D, 25-D)
7. Replace M24.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.25 C-1260
Code
C-1260
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The guide shaft home sensor (PS46) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the guide shaft motor (M25) starts the
Guide shaft motor (M25)
Guide shaft home sensor (PS46)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the guide shaft, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K -143
6. Replace PS46.
7. Replace M25.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0, DIPSW7-1, DIPSW7-3
2.10.26 C-1261
Code
C-1261
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The stapler home sensor /Rt (HS1) or the clincher start sensor /Rt (HS2) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the
stapler motor /Rt (M29) starts the operation.
Stapler assembly /Rt
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stapler unit /Rt, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and the stapler unit /Rt, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replacing the stapler assy /Rt
4. Replace SDDB.
5. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0, DIPSW7-3
The use of the saddle stitching and trimmer unavailable
2.10.27 C-1262
Code
C-1262
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The stapler home sensor /Lt (HS3) or the clincher start sensor /Lt (HS4) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the
stapler motor /Lt (M30) starts the operation.
Stapler assembly /Lt
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stapler unit /Rt, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and the stapler unit /Rt, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replacing the stapler assy /Rt
4. Replace SDDB.
5. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0, DIPSW7-3
The use of the saddle stitching and trimmer unavailable
2.10.28 C-1263
Code
C-1263
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
K -144
It does not stop even after a specified period of time after the trimmer blade motor (M31) starts the operation.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer blade, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:22-R)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 23-R)
7. Replace M31.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-3
The use of the trimmer unavailable
2.10.29 C-1264
Code
C-1264
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
It does not stop even after a specified period of time after the trimmer press motor (M32) starts the operation.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer press section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:22-R)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:23-R)
7. Replace M32.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
2.10.30 C-1265
Code
C-1265
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
It does not stop even after a specified period of time after the bundle arm assist motor (M26) starts the operation.
Bundle arm assist motor (M26)
Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38)
Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39)
K -145

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle arm assist section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
7. Replace M26.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
2.10.31 C-1266
Code
C-1266
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the entrance conveyance motor (M1) is driving.
Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M1.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
2.10.32 C-1267
Code
C-1267
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the horizontal conveyance motor (M2) is driving.
Horizontal conveyance motor (M2)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the horizontal conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M2.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
K -146

DIPSW7-4
Sub tray, paper exit to subsequent stage and FS unavailable
2.10.33 C-1268
Code
C-1268
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the folding entrance motor (M3) is driving.
Folding entrance motor (M3)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding entrance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M3.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0, DIPSW7-1, DIPSW7-2, DIPSW7-3
2.10.34 C-1269
Code
C-1269
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the folding transfer motor (M4) is driving.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M4.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
2.10.35 C-1270
Code
C-1270
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the bundle exit motor (M5) is driving.
K -147

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M5.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
2.11 Solution 7 (C-1271_1400)

2.11.1 C-1271
Code
C-1271
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) is driving.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding sub scan alignment exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M8.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
2.11.2 C-1272
Code
C-1272
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the trimmer paddle motor (M33) is driving.
Trimmer paddle motor (M33)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer paddle, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K -148
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 11-W)
4. Replace M33.
5. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-3
2.11.3 C-1273
Code
C-1273
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The trimmer completion sensor (PS62) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the trimmer blade motor (M31) is in the
up operation.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer blade upper limit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 22-R)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 10-U)
6. Replace PS62.
7. Replace M31.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-3
2.11.4 C-1275
Code
C-1275
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The wire slack sensor (PS66) detected the slack of the trimmer edge drive wire.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the wire slack, and repair the trimmer blade if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDCB and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 10-U)
4. Replace PS66.
5. Replace SDCB.
2.11.5 C-1281
Code
C-1281
Classification
Causes
K -149
FD alignment motor (M3) drive abnormality. The FD alignment home sensor (PS3) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time
after M3 starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M3 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Resulting operation
Main body and RU stop immediately and main relay (RY1) is turned OFF.
FD alignment home sensor (PS3)
Correction
Note
Procedure
1. Check the FD alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 1-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 5-B)
5. Replace PS3.
6. Replace M3.
7. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.11.6 C-1282
Code
C-1282
Classification
Causes
CD alignment motor (M4) drive abnormality. The CD alignment home sensor (PS4) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time
after M4 starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M4 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Resulting operation
Main body and RU stop immediately and main relay (RY1) is turned OFF.
CD alignment home sensor (PS4)
Correction
Note
Procedure
1. Check the CD alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 2-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 5-B)
5. Replace PS4
6. Replace M4
7. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.11.7 C-1290
Code
C-1290
Classification
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the de-curler conveyance motor (M3) is driving.
De-curler conveyance motor (M3)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the de-curler section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUCB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 11-F)
4. Replace M3.
5. Replace RUCB
K -150

2.11.8 C-1291
Code
C-1291
Classification
Cause
The home position search operation of the de-curler pressure motor /Lw (M5) does not complete within a specified period of time.
De-curler pressure motor /Lw (M5)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace M5.
5. Replace RUCB
2.11.9 C-1292
Code
C-1292
Classification
Cause
The home position search operation of the de-curler pressure motor /Up (M6) does not complete within a specified period of time.
De-curler pressure motor /Up (M6)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace M6.
5. Replace RUCB
2.11.10 C-1293
Code
C-1293
Classification
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the humidification section conveyance motor (M8) is
driving.
Humidification section conveyance motor (M8)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the humidification section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K -151
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUDB and RUCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 13-O)
5. Replace M8.
6. Replace RUDB.
7. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
Humidification unusable
2.11.11 C-1294
Code
C-1294
Classification
Cause
The home position search operation of the humidification section roller pressure motor /Rt (M9) does not complete within a specified
period of time.
Humidification section roller pressure motor /Rt (M9)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M9.
6. Replace RUDB.
7. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.12 C-1295
Code
C-1295
Classification
Cause
The home position search operation of the humidification section roller pressure motor /Lt (M10) does not complete within a specified
period of time.
Humidification roller pressure motor /Lt (M10)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M10.
6. Replace RUDB.
7. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
K -152
2.11.13 C-1296
Code
C-1296
Classification
Cause
Color density sensor detection preparation adjustment value abnormality
Color density control board (CDCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the color density sensor unit, and clean/repair them if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the color density sensor and CDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDCB and RUCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace the color density sensor unit if any abnormality.
5. Replace the color density sensor unit.
6. Replace CDCB.
7. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
Color density sensor cannot be used
2.11.14 C-1297
Code
C-1297
Classification
Cause
Color density sensor detection start abnormality
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the color density sensor and CDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the installation place of the shutter solenoid (SD5) and adjust it when the value is not within the standard value.
5. Turn ON the shutter solenoid (SD5) by I/O to check the shutter position.
6. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace the color density sensor unit if any abnormality.
8. Replace CDCB.
9. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
2.11.15 C-1298
Code
C-1298
Classification
Cause
EPPROM read out abnormality in the color density relay board (CDRLB)
K -153

Correction
Note
Solution
4. Reinstall the RU firmware.
6. Replace CDCB.
7. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
2.11.16 C-1299
Code
C-1299
Classification
Cause
The water tank full sensor (PS13) detects ON continuously for more than a specified period of time.
Drain path
Water tank full sensor (PS13)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the drain path, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of RUDB, the pump motor (1) and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 16-O)
4. Replace PS13.
5. Replace RUDB.
DIPSW13-2
2.11.17 C-1301
Code
C-1301
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1) is ON.
Paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LSCB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 4-A)
3. Replace FM1.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.18 C-1302
Code
C-1302
Classification
K -154

Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /1 (FM2) is ON.
Paper cooling fan motor /1 (FM2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 6-H)
3. Replace FM2 or FM6.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.19 C-1303
Code
C-1303
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor/Mi (FM3) is ON.
Paper cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM3
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.20 C-1304
Code
C-1304
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM4 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the motor cooling fan motor (FM4) is ON.
Motor cooling fan motor (FM4)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM4
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.21 C-1305
Code
C-1305
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM5 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5) is ON.
K -155
Paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM5.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.22 C-1306
Code
C-1306
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM1.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.23 C-1307
Code
C-1307
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor/1 (FM2) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM2 or FM6.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.24 C-1308
Code
C-1308
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3) is ON.
K -156
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM3
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.25 C-1309
Code
C-1309
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM4 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the motor cooling fan motor (FM4) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM4
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.26 C-1310
Code
C-1310
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM5 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM5.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.27 C-1311
Code
C-1311
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for specified period of time while the scraps removal fan motor (FM1) is started or
driving.
Scraps removal fan motor (FM1)
Correction
K -157
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 26-D)
4. Replace FM1.
5. Replace SDDB.
6. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-3
2.11.28 C-1330
Code
C-1330
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for specified time period while the cover paper tray fan /1 (FM71) is started or
driving.
Cover paper tray fan /1 (FM71)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB/PBDB1 and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PB-503: 21-D)
3. Replace FM71.
4. Replace PBDB1.
DIPSW7-5
Paper feed from the PB is unavailable.
2.11.29 C-1331
Code
C-1331
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for specified time period while the cover paper tray fan /2 (FM72) is started or
driving.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM72.
4. Replace PBDB1.
DIPSW7-5
2.11.30 C-1332
Code
C-1332
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
K -158
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified time period while the exhaust fan /1 (FM80) is started or driving.
1. PB control board (PBCB)
2. PB drive board (PBDB)
3. Exhaust fan /1 (FM80)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PB-503: 3-D, 19-U)
3. Replace FM80, FM97 and FM98.
4. Replace PBDB1 and PBDB3.
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting onto the sub tray is possible.
2.11.31 C-1333
Code
C-1333
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified time period while the exhaust fan /2 (FM81) is started or driving.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PB-503:3-D)
3. Replace FM81.
4. Replace PBDB1.
DIPSW7-6
2.11.32 C-1334
Code
C-1334
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for specified period of time while the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) is started or
driving.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM4
4. Replace PBDB1.
DIPSW7-6
K -159
2.11.33 C-1341
Code
C-1341
Classification
Causes
Stack assist fan /Fr (FM1) rotation abnormality. Rotation abnormality detected continuously for the specified time during FM1 operation.
Resulting operation
Correction
Note
Procedure
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUCB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or hand, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 3-B)
3. Replace FM1
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.11.34 C-1342
Code
C-1342
Classification
Causes
Stack assist fan /Rr (FM2) rotation abnormality. Rotation abnormality detected continuously for the specified time during FM2 operation.
Resulting operation
Correction
Note
Procedure
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or hand, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 3-B)
3. Replace FM2
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.11.35 C-1351
Code
C-1351
Classification
Cause
Error detection signals of FM1, FM2 and FM3 are detected continuously for a specified period of time while the entrance paper fans /1
(FM1), /2 (FM2) and /3 (FM3) are ON.
Entrance paper fan /1 (FM1)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair or replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 8-F, 9-F)
K -160
4. Replace RUCB
2.11.36 C-1352
Code
C-1352
Classification
Cause
Error detection signals of FM4 and FM5 are detected continuously for a specified period of time while the ventilation assist fans /1 (FM4)
Ventilation assist fan /1 (FM4)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 9-F, 8-H)
4. Replace RUCB
2.11.37 C-1353
Code
C-1353
Classification
Cause
(FM15), /5 (FM16) and /6 (FM17) are ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 17-L, 18-L)
4. Replace RUCB
2.11.38 C-1354
Code
C-1354
Classification
Cause
(FM18), /8 (FM19) and /9 (FM20) are ON.
Correction
K -161
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 18-L)
4. Replace RUCB
2.11.39 C-1355
Code
C-1355
Classification
Cause
Error detection signals of FM21 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the ventilation assist fan /3 (FM21) is ON.
Jumper connector CN180
Correction
Note
Solution
1. When HM-102 is not connected, check if the jumper connector CN180 is connected. Connect the connector if it is not connected.
3. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 19-L)
4. Replace FM21.
5. Replace RUCB
2.11.40 C-1356
Code
C-1356
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM6 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the humidification section paper fan /1 (FM6)
is ON.
Humidification section paper fan /1 (FM6)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 19-O)
4. Replace FM6.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.41 C-1357
Code
C-1357
Classification
Cause
K -162
is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM7.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.42 C-1358
Code
C-1358
Classification
Cause
is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM8.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.43 C-1359
Code
C-1359
Classification
Cause
is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
K -163
4. Replace FM9.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.44 C-1360
Code
C-1360
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM10 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the humidification section paper fan /5
(FM10) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM10.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.45 C-1361
Code
C-1361
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM11 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the humidification section paper fan /6
(FM11) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM11.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.46 C-1364
Code
C-1364
Classification
K -164

Cause
An error detection signal of FM14 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the humidification section paper fan (FM14)
is ON.
Power supply fan (FM14)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DCPS and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-509: 6-I)
4. Replace FM14.
5. Replace DCPS.
2.12 Solution 8 (C-1401_1500)

2.12.1 C-1402
Code
C-1402
Classification
FS: FS abnormality
Cause
Non-volatile memory abnormality.
FS control board (LSCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of FNSCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstalling FS firmware
4. Replace FNSCB.
2.12.2 C-1403
Code
C-1403
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of FDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstalling FD firmware
4. Replace FDCB.
2.12.3 C-1404
Code
C-1404
K -165
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of SDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstalling SD firmware
4. Replace SDCB.
2.12.4 C-1406
Code
C-1406
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Non-volatile memory abnormality in the PB control board (PBCB)
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of PBCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstalling PB firmware
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.5 C-1407
Code
C-1407
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of RUCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace RUCB
2.12.6 C-1408
Code
C-1408
Classification
Causes
Non-volatile memory error.
Resulting operation
K -166
Correction
Note
Procedure
1. After turning OFF the sub power switch, turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug. Restart the main body after 10
seconds.
3. Reinstalling RU firmware
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.12.7 C-1411
Code
C-1411
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
5V power abnormality in the SD drive board (SDDB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring of SDDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace SDDB.
4. Replace SDCB.
2.12.8 C-1431
Code
C-1431
Classification
FS: FS abnormality
Cause
Communication error in FS
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of FNSCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstall FS-612 firmware
4. Replace FNSCB.
2.12.9 C-1432
Code
C-1432
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
Communication error in FD
Software bug
Correction
K -167
Note
Solution
4. Replace FDCB.
2.12.10 C-1433
Code
C-1433
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Communication error in SD
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace SDCB.
2.12.11 C-1435
Code
C-1435
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Message queue full or the control abnormality of Sub CPU1 in the PB control board (PBCB)
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.12 C-1436
Code
C-1436
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Message queue full or the control abnormality of Sub CPU2 in the PB control board (PBCB)
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
K -168
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.13 C-1437
Code
C-1437
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Message queue of the communication among tasks in the PB is full.
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.14 C-1438
Code
C-1438
Classification
Cause
Communication error in RU
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace RUCB
2.12.15 C-1439
Code
C-1439
Classification
Causes
RU received operation start from the main body when unready.
Resulting operation
Software bug
Correction
Note
Procedure
seconds.
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
K -169
2.12.16 C-1440
Code
C-1440
Classification
Cause
RU SubCPU communication error (Main side)
RU program
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
2.12.17 C-1441
Code
C-1441
Classification
Cause
RU SubCPU communication error (Sub side)
RU program
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
2.12.18 C-1451
Code
C-1451
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
When the FD is unready, a signal to start operations is received from the main body.
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FDCB.
K -170

2.12.19 C-1452
Code
C-1452
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
When the SD is unready, a signal to start operations is received from the main body.
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace SDCB.
2.12.20 C-1454
Code
C-1454
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
PB operation prohibition abnormality.
PB received operation start signal from the main body when the PB is unready.
Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.21 C-1455
Code
C-1455
Classification
Cause
When RU is unready, a signal to start operations is received from the main body.
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace RUCB
K -171
2.12.22 C-1456
Code
C-1456
Classification
Causes
RU received operation start signal from the main body when the RU is unready.
Resulting operation
Software bug
Correction
Note
Procedure
seconds.
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.13 Solution 9 (C-1501_1539)

2.13.1 C-1501
Code
C-1501
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The entrance conveyance has not been completed within a specified period of time after the entrance conveyance motor (M1) turns ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB/PBDB1 and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB/PBDB1 and PBCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PB-503: 1-D)
5. Replace M1.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
The use of the PB is unavailable
2.13.2 C-1502
Code
C-1502
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the intermediate conveyance motor (M2) is
driving.
Correction
Note
Solution
K -172
1. Check the intermediate conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.

4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PB-503:2-D)
5. Replace M2.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.3 C-1504
Code
C-1504
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The SC entrance conveyance has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC entrance conveyance motor (M11)
turns ON.
SC entrance conveyance motor (M11)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC entrance conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M11.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.4 C-1505
Code
C-1505
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The switchback conveyance has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC switchback conveyance motor (M12)
turns ON.
SC switchback conveyance motor (M12)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC switchback conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M12.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.5 C-1506
Code
K -173
C-1506
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The switchback roller release operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC switchback release motor
(M13) turns ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC switchback release section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M13.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.6 C-1507
Code
C-1507
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The SC alignment has not been completed within a specified period of time after SC alignment motor (M15) turns ON.
SC alignment motor (M15)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M15.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.7 C-1508
Code
C-1508
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The SC paper bundle conveyance has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC bundle conveyance motor (M17)
turns ON.
SC bundle conveyance motor (M17)
Correction
Note
K -174
Solution
1. Check the SC bundle conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M17.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.8 C-1509
Code
C-1509
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The SC roller release operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC roller release motor (M18) turns ON.
SC roller release motor (M18)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC roller release section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M18.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.9 C-1510
Code
C-1510
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The SC entrance movement operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the clamp entrance movement motor
(M19) turns ON.
Clamp entrance movement motor (M19)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clamp entrance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M19.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.10 C-1511
Code
K -175
C-1511
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The clamp entrance roller release operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the clamp entrance roller
release motor (M20) turns ON.
Clamp entrance roller release motor (M20)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clamp entrance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M20.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.11 C-1512
Code
C-1512
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The clamp alignment has not been completed within a specified period of time after clamp alignment motor (M21) turns ON.
Clamp alignment motor (M21)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clamp alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M21.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.12 C-1513
Code
C-1513
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The clamp section open/close operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the clamp motor (M22) turns ON.
Clamp motor (M22)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -176
1. Check the clamp section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.

5. Replace M22.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.13 C-1514
Code
C-1514
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The clamp rotation operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the clamp rotation motor (M23) turns ON.
Clamp rotation motor (M23)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clamp section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M23.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.14 C-1515
Code
C-1515
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank movement operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the glue tank movement motor (M31)
turns ON.
Glue tank movement motor (M31)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the glue tank movement section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M31.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.15 C-1516
Code
C-1516
K -177
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the glue apply roller motor (M32) is driving.
Glue apply roller motor (M32)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the glue apply section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M32.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.16 C-1517
Code
C-1517
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The count of a specified number of pellets, which is counted by the pellet supply passage sensor (PS37), has not been reached after the
pellet supply pipe motor (M33) turns ON.
Pellet supply pipe motor (M33)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the pellet supply section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M33.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.17 C-1518
Code
C-1518
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The operation of the pellet supply arm has not been completed within a specified period of time after the pellet supply arm motor (M34)
turns ON.
Pellet supply arm motor (M34)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -178

5. Replace M34.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.18 C-1519
Code
C-1519
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The alignment in the cover paper table up/down section has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper
alignment motor (M41) turns ON.
Cover paper alignment motor (M41)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M41.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.19 C-1520
Code
C-1520
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The booklet exit has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet exit motor (M42) turns ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the booklet exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M42.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.20 C-1521
Code
C-1521
K -179
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The driven arm /Rt swing operation start has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper conveyance arm
motor /Rt (M43) turns ON
Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Rt (M43)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M43.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.21 C-1522
Code
C-1522
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The driven arm /Lt swing operation start has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper conveyance arm
motor /Lt (M44) turns ON
Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Lt (M44)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M44.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.22 C-1523
Code
C-1523
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The cover paper conveyance start has not been completed within a specified period of time after cover paper conveyance motor (M45)
turns ON.
Cover paper conveyance motor (M45)
Correction
Note
K -180
Solution
5. Replace M45.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.23 C-1524
Code
C-1524
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The cover paper table up or down movement has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper table up down
motor /Fr (M46) turns ON.
Cover paper table up down motor /Fr (M46)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper table up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PB-503: 11-D)
5. Replace M46.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.24 C-1525
Code
C-1525
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The cover paper table up or down movement has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper table up down
motor /Rr (M47) turns ON.
Cover paper table up down motor /Rr (M47)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper table up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M47.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
K -181
2.13.25 C-1526
Code
C-1526
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The movement of the cover paper folding plate /Rt has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper folding
motor /Rt (M48) turns ON.
Cover paper folding motor /Rt (M48)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M48.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.26 C-1527
Code
C-1527
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The movement of the cover paper folding plate /Lt has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper folding
motor /Lt (M49) turns ON.
Cover paper folding motor /Lt (M49)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M49.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.27 C-1528
Code
C-1528
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The trimming of the cover paper has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cutter motor (M50) turns ON.
Cutter motor (M50)
Correction
K -182
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M50.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.28 C-1530
Code
C-1530
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The booklet movement of the booklet conveyance section has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet
conveyance belt motor (M61) turns ON.
Booklet conveyance belt motor (M61)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the booklet conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M61.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.29 C-1531
Code
C-1531
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The size changing operation of the carriage section has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet conveyance
belt movement motor (M62) turns ON.
Booklet conveyance belt movement motor (M62)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M62.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
K -183
2.13.30 C-1532
Code
C-1532
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The up/down movement operation of the carriage section has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet
conveyance belt up down motor (M63) turns ON.
Booklet conveyance belt up down motor (M63)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M63.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.31 C-1534
Code
C-1534
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The booklet rear edge pressing process has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet stopper motor (M65)
turns ON.
Booklet stopper motor (M65)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M65.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.32 C-1537
Code
C-1537
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The tray moving up process has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper tray lift motor (M73) turns ON.
K -184
Cover paper tray lift motor (M73)

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper tray section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M73.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-5
2.13.33 C-1538
Code
C-1538
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The cover paper feed has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper feed motor (M74) turns ON.
Cover paper feed motor (M74)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper feed section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M74.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-5
2.14 Solution 10 (C-1540_1567)

2.14.1 C-1540
Code
C-1540
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After the warm-up is started, temperature detected by the glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) has not risen to a prescribed level
within a specified time period.
Glue apply roller heater (H2)
Glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3)
Correction
Be sure to change the software DIPSW3-1 from 1 to 0 and turn OFF/ON the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body after fixing the
defective parts.
WARNING
If DIPSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed, it may cause fire.
Solution
1. Check the glue tank heater, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K -185
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBCB and the temperature sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the installation conditions of the heater and the temperature sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.2 C-1541
Code
C-1541
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After the warm-up is started, temperature detected by the glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) has not risen to a prescribed level
Glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4)
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
If DipSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed, it causes fire.
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.3 C-1542
Code
C-1542
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After the warm-up is started, temperature detected by the glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) has not risen to a prescribed level
Glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1)
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
K -186
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the glue apply heater, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.

Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBCB and the temperature sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the heater, and repair it if any abnormality.
Check the installation conditions of the heater and the temperature sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.4 C-1543
Code
C-1543
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After the pellet supply, temperature detected by the glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) has not risen to a prescribed level within a
Glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2)
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.5 C-1544
Code
C-1544
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
During standby, after the glue tank heater (H1) is turned ON, temperature detected by the glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) has not
risen to a prescribed level within a specified time period.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
K -187
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.6 C-1545
Code
C-1545
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
When the prescribed temperature is obtained and after the glue tank heater (H1) is turned ON, temperature detected by the glue tank
temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) has not risen to a prescribed level within a specified time period.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.7 C-1546
Code
C-1546
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
When the prescribed temperature is obtained and after the glue tank heater (H1) is turned ON, temperature detected by the glue apply
roller temperature sensor (TH1) has not risen to a prescribed level within a specified time period.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
K -188
Solution
1. Check the glue apply heater, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.8 C-1547
Code
C-1547
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) detects an abnormal high temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.9 C-1548
Code
C-1548
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) detects an abnormal high temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
K -189
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.10 C-1549
Code
C-1549
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects an abnormal high temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.11 C-1550
Code
C-1550
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) detects an abnormal high temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
K -190
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the glue tank heater, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.

PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.12 C-1551
Code
C-1551
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) detects an abnormal high temperature (hardware) TH1 detects an abnormal high
temperature of the glue apply roller.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.13 C-1552
Code
C-1552
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) detects an abnormal high temperature (hardware). TH2 detects an abnormal high
temperature of the glue tank.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
K -191
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.14 C-1553
Code
C-1553
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects an abnormal high temperature (hardware). TH3 detects an abnormal high
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.15 C-1554
Code
C-1554
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) detects an abnormal high temperature (hardware). TH4 detects an abnormal high
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
K -192
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.16 C-1555
Code
C-1555
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After warming-up is completed, the glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) detects an abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.17 C-1556
Code
C-1556
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
When glue supply control temperature is reached, the glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) detects an abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
K -193
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.18 C-1557
Code
C-1557
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After warming-up is completed, the glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects an abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.19 C-1558
Code
C-1558
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After warming-up is completed, the glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) detects an abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
K -194
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the glue tank heater, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.

PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.20 C-1559
Code
C-1559
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) detects an abnormal low temperature (hardware). After warming-up is completed, TH1
detects the glue apply roller error signal of abnormal low temperature.
The main body stops immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.21 C-1560
Code
C-1560
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) detects an abnormal low temperature (hardware). After glue supply control temperature is
reached, TH2 detects the glue tank error signal of abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
K -195
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.22 C-1561
Code
C-1561
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects an abnormal low temperature (hardware). After warming-up is completed, TH3
detects the glue tank error signal of abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.23 C-1562
Code
C-1562
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) detects an abnormal low temperature (hardware). After warming-up is completed, TH4
detects the glue tank error signal of abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
K -196
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.24 C-1565
Code
C-1565
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Relay conveyance motor drive abnormality
The relay conveyance does not start within the specified period of time after M92 turns ON.
Relay conveyance motor (M92)
Correction
Solution
1. Check the relay conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB2 and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PB-503: 23-V)
4. Replace M92.
5. Replace PBDB2.
6. Replace PBCB.
2.14.25 C-1566
Code
C-1566
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Relay conveyance exit motor drive abnormality
A rotation error detection signal is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the relay conveyance exit motor (M91) is
driving.
Relay conveyance exit motor (M91)
Correction
Solution
1. Check the relay conveyance paper exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PB-503: 26-W)
5. Replace M91.
6. Replace PBDB2.
7. Replace PBDB1.
8. Replace PBCB.
2.14.26 C-1567
Code
C-1567
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
K -197
Cause
Pellet supply pipe motor drive abnormality
The pellet supply pipe has not completed the operations within a specified period of time after the pellet supply pipe motor (M33) turns ON.
Correction
Solution
4. Replace M33.
5. Replace PBDB1.
6. Replace PBCB.
2.15 Solution 11 (C-2001_2400)

2.15.1 C-2001
Code
C-2001
Classification
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the drum motor /Y (M14).
Drum motor /Y (M14)
Drum motor /M (M15)
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3): 8-P, 7-P)
4. Replace M14 or M15.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.15.2 C-2003
Code
C-2003
Classification
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the belt motor (M18).
Belt motor (M18)
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3):17-O)
4. Replace M18.
5. Replace PRCB
K -198
2.15.3 C-2004
Code
C-2004
Classification
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the drum motors /Y (M14) or /M (M15).
Drum motor /Y (M14)
Drum motor /M (M15)
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/8): 8-P, 7-P)
4. Replace M14 or M15
5. Replace PRCB
2.15.4 C-2006
Code
C-2006
Classification
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the belt motor (M18).
Belt motor (M18)
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3):17-O)
4. Replace M18.
5. Replace PRCB
2.15.5 C-2201*
Code
C-2201*
Classification
Main body: Developing motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M20 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing motor /Y (M20) is ON.
Developing motor /Y (M20)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:Main body (3/3):
18-O)
3. Replace M20 and PRCB.
K -199

2.15.6 C-2202*
Code
C-2202*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M21 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing motor /M (M21) is ON.
Developing motor /M (M21)
Correction
Note
Solution
19-O)
2.15.7 C-2203*
Code
C-2203*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M22 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing motor /C (M22) is ON.An error
detection signal of M22 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing motor /C (M22) is ON.
Developing motor /C (M22)
Correction
Note
Solution
20-O)
2.15.8 C-2204*
Code
C-2204*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M23 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing motor /K (M23) is ON.
Developing motor /K (M23)
Correction
Note
Solution
21-O)
K -200
2.15.9 C-2220
Code
C-2220
Classification
Main body: Transfer belt unit abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M18 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the belt motor (M18) is ON.
Belt motor (M18)
Encoder sensor belt /1 (PS89), /2 (PS90)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the intermediate transfer unit and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
(3/3):17-O)
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DCPS2 and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M18.
6. Replace PS89 and PS90.
7. Replace DCPS2.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.15.10 C-2221
Code
C-2221
Classification
Main body: 1st transfer motor abnormality
Cause
While the 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15) is ON, PS15 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after the 1st transfer pressure
release motor (M19) turns ON.
While PS15 is OFF, PS15 does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M19 turns ON.
1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 1st transfer fusing pressure release section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
(1/3): 10-B)
6. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 16-O)
7. Replace PS15.
8. Replace M19.
9. Replace ACDB.
10. Replace PRCB.
11. Replace M19 and ACDB at a time.
2.15.11 C-2222
Code
C-2222
Classification
Main body: Toner supply abnormality
Cause
While one of the toner supply motors /Y (M49), /M (M50), /C (M51), /K (M52), toner bottle motor (M53), and toner bottle clutches /Y
(CL14), /M (CL15), /C (CL16) and /K (CL17) are ON, an error detection signal of one of them is detected for a specified period of time.
K -201

Toner supply drive board (TSDB)
Toner supply motor /Y (M49)
Toner supply motor /C (M51)
Toner bottle clutch /Y (CL14)
Toner bottle clutch /M (CL15)
Toner bottle clutch /C (CL16)
Toner bottle clutch /K (CL17)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the toner supply section, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between TSDB and motor/clutch, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and TSDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and clutch and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:
Main body (3/3): 17-C, 18-A, 19-A, 17-A, 20-A)
5. Replace CL14, CL15, CL16 or CL17
6. Replace M49, M50, M51, M52 or M53
7. Replace TSDB.
8. Replace PRCB.
9. Replace TSDB and one of M49, M50, M51, M52, M53, CL14, CL15, CL16, CL17 at a time
2.15.12 C-2223
Code
C-2223
Classification
Main body: Low drum load torque abnormality
Cause
One of the torque is not recovered within a specified period of time after the low load torque recovery control of the drum motors /Y
(M14), /M (M15), /C (M16), /K (M17) starts.
Drum motor /Y (M14)
Drum motor /M (M15)
Drum motor /C (M16)
Drum motor /K (M17)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the drum unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
(3/3): 8-P, 7-P, 11-P, 9-P)
4. Replace M14, M15, M16 or M17.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.15.13 C-2231*
Code
C-2231*
Classification
Main body: Drum motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M14 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /Y (M14) is ON.
Drum motor /Y (M14)
Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS81), /Y2 (PS82)
Drum Unit /Y
K -202
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the drum unit and repair/replace it if any abnormality
(3/3):8-P)
6. Replace M14.
7. Replace PRCB.
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.14 C-2232*
Code
C-2232*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M15 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /M (M15) is ON.
Drum motor /M (M15)
Encoder sensor /M1 (PS83), /M2 (PS84)
Drum Unit /M
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3):7-P)
6. Replace M15.
7. Replace PRCB.
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.15 C-2233*
Code
C-2233*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M16 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /C (M16) is ON.
Drum motor /C (M16)
Encoder sensor /C1 (PS85), /C2 (PS86)
Drum Unit /C
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3):11-P)
6. Replace M16.
7. Replace PRCB.
K -203
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.16 C-2234*
Code
C-2234*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M17 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /K (M17) is ON.
Drum motor /K (M17)
Encoder sensor /K1 (PS87), /K2 (PS88)
Drum Unit /K
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3):9-P)
6. Replace M17.
7. Replace PRCB.
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.17 C-2241*
Code
C-2241*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M14 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /Y (M14) is ON.
Drum motor /Y (M14)
Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS81), /Y2 (PS82)
Drum unit /Y
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3): 8-P)
6. Replace M14.
7. Replace PRCB
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.18 C-2242*
Code
C-2242*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M15 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /M (M15) is ON.
K -204
Drum motor /M (M15)
Encoder sensor /M1 (PS83) and /M2 (PS84)
Drum unit /M
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3): 7-P)
6. Replace M15.
7. Replace PRCB
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.19 C-2243*
Code
C-2243*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M16 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /C (M16) is ON.
Drum motor /C (M16)
Encoder sensors /C1 (PS85) and /C2 (PS86)
Drum unit /C
Correction
Note
Solution
(3/3): 11-P)
6. Replace M16.
7. Replace PRCB
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.20 C-2244*
Code
C-2244*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M17 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /K (M17) is ON.
Drum motor /K (M17)
Encoder sensors /K1 (PS87) and /K2 (PS88)
Drum unit /K
Correction
Note
Solution
K -205
(3/3): 9-P)
6. Replace M17.
7. Replace PRCB
8. Replace DCPS2.
2.15.21 C-2301
Code
C-2301
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M48 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the charge intake fan (FM48) is ON.
Charge intake fan (FM48)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between TSDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and TSDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rotate the fan by I/O or by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 22-A)
4. Replace FM48
5. Replace TSDB
6. Replace PRCB
7. Replace FM48 and TSDB at a time.
2.15.22 C-2302*
Code
C-2302*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM12 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the motor cooling fan /1 (FM12) is ON.
Motor cooling fan /1 (FM12)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.15.23 C-2303*
Code
C-2303*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM11 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the transfer belt fan (FM11) is ON.
Correction
K -206
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM11.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.15.24 C-2304*
Code
C-2304*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM45 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing fan /1 (FM45) is ON.
Developing fan /1 (FM45)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.15.25 C-2305*
Code
C-2305*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM46 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing fan /2 (FM46) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM46.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.15.26 C-2306*
Code
C-2306*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM13 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the motor cooling fan /2 (FM13) is ON.
Drum fan /2 (FM13)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -207
3. Replace FM13.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.16 Solution 12 (C-2401_2500)

2.16.1 C-2401
Code
C-2401
Classification
Main body: Erase lamp abnormality
Cause
The erase lamp /Y (EL/Y) set status cannot be detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check that the process unit is correctly installed without looseness, and reinstall/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the EL section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 1-O)
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and EL, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace EL.
5. Replace PRCB.
6. Replace EL and PRCB at a time.
2.16.2 C-2402
Code
C-2402
Classification
Cause
The erase lamp /M (EL/M) set status cannot be detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace EL.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.16.3 C-2403
Code
C-2403
Classification
Cause
The erase lamp /C (EL/C) set status cannot be detected.
Correction
Note
K -208
Solution
4. Replace EL.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.16.4 C-2404
Code
C-2404
Classification
Cause
The erase lamp /K (EL/K) set status cannot be detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace EL.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.16.5 C-2411
Code
C-2411
Classification
Main body: TCR sensor abnormality
Cause
The output of the TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y) cannot be controlled.
TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check TCRS, and clean/repair it if there is sensor dirt or any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 3-O)
3. Check the developing section, and clean/repair it if there is sensor dirt or any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and TCRS, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
7. Replace TCRS and PRCB at a time.
2.16.6 C-2412
Code
C-2412
Classification
Cause
The output of the TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M) cannot be controlled.
TCR sensor /M (TCRS /M)
K -209
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.7 C-2413
Code
C-2413
Classification
Cause
The output of the TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C) cannot be controlled.
TCR sensor /C (TCRS /C)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.8 C-2414
Code
C-2414
Classification
Cause
The output of the TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K) cannot be controlled.
TCR sensor /K (TCRS /K)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.9 C-2421
Code
C-2421
Classification
Main body: Developing drive abnormality
Cause
K -210
While the developing motor /Y (M20) is ON or after a specified period of time from the TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y) initial adjustment starts,
TCRS/Y detects a value lower than the prescribed one.
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the developing motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
6. Rotate the developing motor by I/O, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 18-O)
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M20.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.10 C-2422
Code
C-2422
Classification
Cause
While the developing motor /M (M21) is ON or after a specified period of time from the TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M) initial adjustment starts,
TCRS/M detects a value lower than the prescribed one.
TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M)
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M21.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.11 C-2423
Code
C-2423
Classification
Cause
While the developing motor /C (M22) is ON or after a specified period of time from the TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C) initial adjustment starts,
TCRS/C detects a value lower than the prescribed one.
TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -211
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M22.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.12 C-2424
Code
C-2424
Classification
Cause
While the developing motor /K (M23) is ON or after a specified period of time from the TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K) initial adjustment starts,
TCRS/K detects a value lower than the prescribed one.
TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K)
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M23.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.13 C-2431
Code
C-2431
Classification
Main body: TCR sensor initial adjustment abnormality (low density)
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y), TCRS/Y detects a value higher than the prescribed one with the minimum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M20.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.14 C-2432
Code
C-2432
Classification
K -212

Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M), TCRS/M detects a value higher than the prescribed one with the minimum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M21.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.15 C-2433
Code
C-2433
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C), TCRS/C detects a value higher than the prescribed one with the minimum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M22.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.16 C-2434
Code
C-2434
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K), TCRS/K detects a value higher than the prescribed one with the minimum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
K -213
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M23.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.17 C-2441
Code
C-2441
Classification
Main body: TCR sensor initial adjustment abnormality (high density)
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y), TCRS/Y detects a value lower than the prescribed one with the maximum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M20.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.18 C-2442
Code
C-2442
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M), TCRS/M detects a value lower than the prescribed one with the maximum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M21.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.19 C-2443
Code
K -214
C-2443
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C), TCRS/C detects a value lower than the prescribed one with the maximum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M22.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.20 C-2444
Code
C-2444
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K), TCRS/K detects a value lower than the prescribed one with the maximum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M23.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.21 C-2451
Code
C-2451
Classification
Main body: Toner low density abnormality
Cause
When the developing motor /Y (M20) is ON, the maximum detection value of TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y) is the specified value and the
difference between the maximum detection value and the minimum detection value is over the specified value.
Correction
Note
K -215
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M20.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.22 C-2452
Code
C-2452
Classification
Cause
When the developing motor /M (M21) is ON, the maximum detection value of TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M) is the specified value and the
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M21.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.23 C-2453
Code
C-2453
Classification
Cause
When the developing motor /C (M22) is ON, the maximum detection value of TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C) is the specified value and the
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M22.
9. Replace PRCB.
K -216
2.16.24 C-2454
Code
C-2454
Classification
Cause
When the developing motor /K (M23) is ON, the maximum detection value of TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K) is the specified value and the
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace TCRS.
8. Replace M23.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.16.25 C-2470
Code
C-2470
Classification
Main body: Process unit mount connection abnormality
Cause
Process unit mount is not connected.
Process mount
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the process mount, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the process mount, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.17 Solution 13 (C-2701_2800)

2.17.1 C-2701
Code
C-2701
Classification
Main body: High voltage unit /1 abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the charging corona /Y is detected while the charging corona /Y is ON. The signal is detected even after
turning OFF/ON for a prescribed time.
High voltage unit /1 (HV1)
Charging corona /Y
Correction
Note
Solution
K -217
1. Check the connection of the high voltage contact of the process unit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the charger (charging wire and the grid), and clean/repair it if there is any dirt or abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV1 and the charger, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (2/3): 1-P)
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and HV1, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body
(2/3): 1-M)
5. Replace HV1.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.17.2 C-2702
Code
C-2702
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the charging corona /M is detected while the charging corona /M is ON. The signal is detected even after
Charging corona /M
Correction
Note
Solution
body (2/3): 32-P).
(2/3): 1-M).
5. Replace HV1.
6. Replace PRCB
2.17.3 C-2703
Code
C-2703
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the charging corona /C is detected while the charging corona /C is ON. The signal is detected even after
Charging corona /C
Correction
Note
Solution
body (2/3): 3-P).
(2/3): 1-M).
5. Replace HV1.
6. Replace PRCB
2.17.4 C-2704
Code
C-2704
Classification
K -218
Cause
An error detection signal of the charging corona /K is detected while the charging corona /K is ON. The signal is detected even after
Charging corona /K
Correction
Note
Solution
body (2/3): 4-P).
(2/3): 1-M).
5. Replace HV1.
6. Replace PRCB
2.17.5 C-2711
Code
C-2711
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the 1st transfer /Y is detected while the 1st transfer /Y is ON. The signal is detected even after turning OFF/ON
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV2 and the 1st transfer unit, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
diagram: Main body (2/3): 6-O)
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and HV2, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace HV2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.6 C-2712
Code
C-2712
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the 1st transfer /M is detected while the 1st transfer /M is ON. The signal is detected even after turning OFF/
ON for a prescribed time.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV2.
K -219
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.7 C-2713
Code
C-2713
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the 1st transfer /C is detected while the 1st transfer /C is ON. The signal is detected even after turning OFF/ON
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.8 C-2714
Code
C-2714
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the 1st transfer /K is detected while the 1st transfer /K is ON. The signal is detected even after turning OFF/ON
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.9 C-2720
Code
C-2720
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the 2nd transfer is detected while the 2nd transfer is ON. The signal is detected even after turning OFF/ON for
a prescribed time.
2nd transfer roller
Correction
K -220
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV2 and the 2nd transfer unit, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
4. Replace HV2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.10 C-2721
Code
C-2721
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of the separation charger is detected while the separation charger is ON. The signal is detected even after
Separation charger
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV2 and the separation charger, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
4. Replace HV2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.18 Solution 14 (C-2801_3000)

2.18.1 C-2801
Code
C-2801
Classification
Main body: Gamma correction abnormality
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /Y of the developing DC maximum
output.
Developing unit /Y
IDC sensor (IDCS)
IDC shutter solenoid (SD3)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the installation of developing unit and I/O, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and IDCS, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O of SD3 and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
5. Check the sensor and clean/replace it if any dirt or abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 5-P)
6. Replace IDCS.
7. Replacing the developing unit
8. Replace PRCB.
K -221
2.18.2 C-2802
Code
C-2802
Classification
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /M of the developing DC maximum
output.
Developing unit /M
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Check the sensor, and clean/repair it if any dirt or abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 5-P)
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.3 C-2803
Code
C-2803
Classification
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /C of the developing DC maximum
output.
Developing unit /C
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.4 C-2804
Code
C-2804
Classification
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /K of the developing DC maximum
output.
Developing unit /K
IDC sensor (IDCS)
K -222

Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.5 C-2811
Code
C-2811
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the patch density correction /Y. Or, the proper value of
the developing DC output is 0 or lower.
Developing unit /Y
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.6 C-2812
Code
C-2812
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the patch density correction /M. Or, the proper value
of the developing DC output is 0 or lower.
Developing unit /M
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
K -223
2.18.7 C-2813
Code
C-2813
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the patch density correction /C. Or, the proper value of
Developing unit /C
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.8 C-2814
Code
C-2814
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the patch density correction /K. Or, the proper value of
Developing unit /K
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.9 C-2821
Code
C-2821
Classification
Main body: Dot diameter correction abnormality
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /Y of the MPC maximum output.
Developing unit /Y
K -224
IDC sensor (IDCS)

Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.10 C-2822
Code
C-2822
Classification
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /M of the MPC maximum output.
Developing unit /M
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.11 C-2823
Code
C-2823
Classification
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /C of the MPC maximum output.
Developing unit /C
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
K -225
2.18.12 C-2824
Code
C-2824
Classification
Cause
The output voltage of the IDC sensor (IDCS) is detected more that the specified value on the patch /K of the MPC maximum output.
Developing unit /K
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.13 C-2831
Code
C-2831
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the dot diameter correction /Y. Or, the MPC proper
value is 0 or lower.
Developing unit /Y
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Writing unit /Y
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check that the writing unit is correctly installed without looseness, and reinstall/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the writing unit and PRIPB, and repair it if any abnormality.
8. Replace IDCS.
10. Replace PRIPB.
11. Replace PRCB.
2.18.14 C-2832
Code
C-2832
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the dot diameter correction /M. Or, the MPC proper
K -226
Developing unit /M
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Writing unit /M
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Check the connector connection and the wiring between writing unit and PRIPB, and repair it if any abnormality.
8. Replace IDCS.
10. Replace PRIPB.
11. Replace PRCB.
2.18.15 C-2833
Code
C-2833
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the dot diameter correction /C. Or, the MPC proper
Developing unit /C
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Writing unit /C
Correction
Note
Solution
8. Replace IDCS.
10. Replace PRIPB.
11. Replace PRCB.
2.18.16 C-2834
Code
C-2834
Classification
Cause
The proper value cannot be figured out within the specified time by the correction of the dot diameter correction /K. Or, the MPC proper
Developing unit /K
IDC sensor (IDCS)
K -227

Writing unit /K
Correction
Note
Solution
8. Replace IDCS.
10. Replace PRIPB.
11. Replace PRCB.
2.18.17 C-2840
Code
C-2840
Classification
Cause
The IDC sensor (IDCS) output value is detected not within the specified range on the IDC sensor (IDCS) base correction when the rough
adjustment ends.
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check that the belt cleaner blade on the intermediate transfer section is not curled and reinstall/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace IDCS.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.18.18 C-2841
Code
C-2841
Classification
Cause
The LED applied voltage is detected not within the specified range on the IDC sensor (IDCS) base correction.
IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check that there is no curling-up of belt cleaner blade of the intermediate transfer section, and install/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace IDCS.
6. Replace PRCB.
7. Replace IDCS and PRCB at a time
K -228
2.19 Solution 15 (C-3001_3500)

2.19.1 C-3101
Code
C-3101
Classification
Main body: Motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M29 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing motor (M29) is ON.
Fusing motor (M29)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connection between the rear side connector of the fusing unit and the main body side connector, and repair it if any
abnormality.
2. Check the fusing unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and CDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3-I)
6. Replace M29.
7. Replace CDB.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.19.2 C-3102
Code
C-3102
Classification
Cause
While the fusing release home sensor (PS16) is ON, PS16 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after the fusing motor (M29)
turns ON. While PS16 is OFF, PS16 does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M29 turns ON.
Fusing motor (M29)
Fusing release home sensor (PS16)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check that the front door is closed properly, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the fusing unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3-I)
6. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 2-I)
7. Replace M29.
8. Replace PS16.
9. Replace CDB.
10. Replace PRCB.
11. Replace M29 and CDB at a time.
2.19.3 C-3103
Code
C-3103
Classification
Cause
K -229
The 2nd transfer pressure release motor (M34) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after it turns ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the 2nd transfer intermediate transfer unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 7-O)
10-P)
6. Replace PS24.
7. Replace M34.
8. Replace CDB.
9. Replace M34 and CDB at a time.
2.19.4 C-3301*
Code
C-3301*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM37 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing ventilation fan (FM37) is ON.
Fusing ventilation fan (FM37)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or by hand, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 15-D)
3. Replace FM37.
4. Replace PRCB
5. Replace FM37 and PRCB at a time
2.19.5 C-3302*
Code
C-3302*
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM10 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing belt ventilation fan (FM10) is ON.
Fusing belt ventilation fan (FM10)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM10.
4. Replace PRCB.
K -230
2.19.6 C-3303
Code
C-3303
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM65 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing cooling fan (FM65) is ON.
Fusing cooling fan (FM65)
Correction
Note
Solution
abnormality.
3. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 2-I)
4. Replace FM65.
5. Replace CDB.
2.19.7 C-3304
Code
C-3304
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of any of FM7, FM8 or FM9 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing separation
fans /1 (FM7), /2 (FM8) and /3 (FM9) are ON.
Fusing separation fan /1 (FM7)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
5. Replace FM7, FM8, FM9 and PRCB at a time.
2.20 Solution 16 (C-3501_4000)

2.20.1 C-3501*
Code
C-3501*
Classification
Main body: Fusing high temperature abnormality
Cause
Fusing high temperature abnormality
The temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detects 250 C or higher value continuously for a specified period of time.
Fusing unit
Correction
K -231
WARNING
After replacing the defective parts, be sure to set the DIPSW 3-1 to 0. If DIPSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed,
it may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the temperature sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the fusing heater lamp, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-E)
4. Check the installation condition of the fusing heater lamp and ON/OFF with I/O, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring
diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-D)
5. Check the installation condition of TH1 and temperature of I/O, and adjust/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body
(1/3): 3-F)
6. Replace TH1.
7. ReplaceL2, L3 and L4.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.20.2 C-3502*
Code
C-3502*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
After replacing the defective parts, be sure to set the DIPSW3-1 to 0. If DIPSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed, it
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the fusing heater lamp, and repair/replace it if any abnormality
(Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-E)
4. Check the installation condition of the fusing heater lamp and ON/OFF by the I/O, and repair/replace it if any abnormality (Wiring
5. Check the installation condition of TH3 and the temperature by I/O, and adjust/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (1/3): 3-F)
6. Replace TH3.
7. Replace L2, L3 and L4.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB
2.20.3 C-3503*
Code
C-3503*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
K -232
Correction
WARNING
it may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-G)
(1/3): 3-G)
6. Replace TH2.
7. Replace L5.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.20.4 C-3504*
Code
C-3504*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
(Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-G)
body (1/3): 3-G)
6. Replace TH4.
7. Replace L5.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB
2.20.5 C-3505*
Code
C-3505*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
K -233

Correction
WARNING
Be sure to set the DIPSW3-1 to 0 after replacing the defective parts. If DIPSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed, it
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the fusing heater lamp, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
(1/3): 3-F)
6. Replace TH1.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.20.6 C-3506*
Code
C-3506*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
it may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-E, 3-G)
(1/3): 3-F, 3-G)
6. Replace TH2.
7. Replace L5.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.20.7 C-3508*
Code
C-3508*
Classification
Cause
Paper is wound around the fusing roller.
J31-02 occurs 4 times in a row.
Fusing unit
K -234

Fusing paper exit sensor (PS17)
Correction
WARNING
it may cause fire.
Solution
1. Check the fusing roller, and repair it if any abnormality such as paper wrap.
2. Check the toner on the transfer belt and clean it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3):10-O)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-I)
6. Replace PS17.
7. Replace CDB.
8. Replace HV /1 and /2.
9. Replace PRCB.
10. Replace fusing unit.
2.20.8 C-3509*
Code
C-3509*
Classification
Cause
Fusing roller /Up temperature gap abnormality
When the fusing roller /Up is higher than the specified temperature, the gap detected by the temperature sensors /1 (TH1) and /3 (TH3)are
larger than the specified value.
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
Be sure to set the DIPSW 3-1 to 0 after replacing the defective parts. If DIPSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed, it
may cause fire.
Solution
1. Check that the front door is not opened/closed frequently, and wait for several minutes with the front door closed.
abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring of the heater and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F, 3-G)
4. Check the RL1, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 8-C)
5. Check the conduction of thermostat.
diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-E, 3-G)
8. Check the installation condition of TH1 and TH3 and temperature of I/O, and adjust/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (1/3): 3-F, 3-G)
9. Replace TH1 and TH3.
11. Replace ACDB.
12. Replace PRCB.
2.20.9 C-3801*
Code
C-3801*
Classification
Main body: Fusing low temperature abnormality
Cause
Fusing low temperature abnormality.
While fusing idling or printing, the temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detects lower than the specified temperature for a specified period of time.
K -235

Fusing unit
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Correction
WARNING
it may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
(1/3): 3-F)
9. Replace TH1.
10. Replace TS1 and TS2.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.10 C-3802*
Code
C-3802*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
8. Check the installation condition of TH3 and the temperature of I/O, and adjust/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body
(1/3): 3-F)
9. Replace TH3.
K -236

12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.11 C-3803*
Code
C-3803*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Correction
WARNING
it may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-G)
(1/3): 3-G)
9. Replace TH2.
10. Replace TS3.
11. Replace L5.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.12 C-3804*
Code
C-3804*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Correction
WARNING
it may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
K -237
body (1/3): 3-G)
(1/3): 3-G)
9. Replace TH4.
10. Replace TS3.
11. Replace L5.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.13 C-3805*
Code
C-3805*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
(1/3): 3-F)
9. Replace TH1.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.14 C-3806*
Code
C-3806*
Classification
Cause
K -238
Fusing unit
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of the heater and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality (Wiring diagram: Main
body (1/3): 3-G)
5. Check the conduction of the thermostat
(Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-G)
body (1/3): 3-G)
9. Replace TH2.
10. Replace TS3.
11. Replace L5.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB
2.20.15 C-3901*
Code
C-3901*
Classification
Main body: Fusing sensor abnormality
Cause
Fusing high temperature abnormality (hardware detection).
The temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detects an error detection signal continuously for a specified period of time.
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
(1/3): 3-F)
6. Replace TH3.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.20.16 C-3902*
Code
C-3902*
Classification
K -239

Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
(Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-E, 3-G)
body (1/3): 3-F, 3-G)
6. Replace TH4.
7. Replace L5.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB
2.20.17 C-3903*
Code
C-3903*
Classification
Cause
Fusing low temperature abnormality (hardware detection)
Fusing unit
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
(1/3): 3-F)
9. Replace TH1.
12. Replace ACDB.
K -240
13. Replace PRCB.

2.20.18 C-3904*
Code
C-3904*
Classification
Cause
Fusing low temperature abnormality (hardware detection)
Fusing unit
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
(1/3): 3-F)
9. Replace TH3.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.19 C-3905*
Code
C-3905*
Classification
Cause
Fusing low temperature abnormality (hardware detection).
Fusing unit
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
K -241
body (1/3): 3-G)
(1/3): 3-G)
9. Replace TH2.
10. Replace TS3.
11. Replace L5.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.20 C-3906*
Code
C-3906*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-G)
(1/3): 3-G)
9. Replace TH4.
10. Replace TS3.
11. Replace L5.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.21 C-3907*
Code
C-3907*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
K -242

Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
6. Check the installation condition of TH1, and adjust/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 3-F)
7. Replace TH1.
9. Replace ACDB.
10. Replace PRCB.
2.20.22 C-3908*
Code
C-3908*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
(1/3): 3-F)
9. Replace TH1.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.23 C-3909*
Code
C-3909*
K -243
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
(1/3): 3-G)
6. Replace TH2.
7. Replace L5.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.20.24 C-3910*
Code
C-3910*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-G)
(1/3): 3-G)
9. Replace TH2.
10. Replace TS3.
11. Replace L5.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
K -244
2.20.25 C-3911*
Code
C-3911*
Classification
Cause
The detected temperature of the temperature sensor /1 (TH1) has not reached to 100C within the specified period of time after the sub
power switch (SW2) turned ON.
Fusing unit
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
Correction
WARNING
it may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-E, 3-F)
(1/3): 3-F)
9. Replace TH1.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
14. Replace ACDB and L2, L3, L4 at a time
2.20.26 C-3912*
Code
C-3912*
Classification
Cause
The detected temperature of the temperature sensor /2 (TH2) has not reached to 100C within the specified period of time after the sub
power switch (SW2) turned ON.
Fusing unit
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
body (1/3): 3-G)
K -245
(1/3): 3-G)
9. Replace TH2.
10. Replace TS3.
11. Replace L5.
12. Replace ACDB.
13. Replace PRCB.
2.20.27 C-3913*
Code
C-3913*
Classification
Cause
The fusing unit is not set.
Fusing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check that the fusing unit is properly set and repair it if any abnormality.
abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the fan on the main body side, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.20.28 C-3914*
Code
C-3914*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
6. Replace TH1.
K -246
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.20.29 C-3915*
Code
C-3915*
Classification
Cause
Fusing unit
Correction
WARNING
may cause fire.
Solution
abnormality.
6. Replace TH2.
7. Replace L5.
8. Replace ACDB.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21 Solution 17 (C-4001_5000)

2.21.1 C-4101
Code
C-4101
Classification
Main body: Polygon motor abnormality
Cause
When the polygon motor /Y (M70) in the writing unit starts up or its speed changes, the lock signal of M70 is not detected within a
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the write unit, and replace it if there is any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and write unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace write unit.
4. Replace PRCB.
5. Replace writing unit and PRCB at a time.
2.21.2 C-4102
Code
C-4102
Classification
K -247
Cause
When the polygon motor /M (M71) in the writing unit starts up or its speed changes, the lock signal of M71 is not detected within a
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
5. Replace write unit and PRCB at a time.
2.21.3 C-4103
Code
C-4103
Classification
Cause
When the polygon motor /C (M72) in the writing unit starts up or its speed changes, the lock signal of M72 is not detected within a
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.4 C-4104
Code
C-4104
Classification
Cause
When the polygon motor /K (M73) in the writing unit starts up or its speed changes, the lock signal of M73 is not detected within a
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
5. Replace writing unit and PRCB at a time
2.21.5 C-4111
Code
C-4111
K -248
Classification
Cause
A temperature abnormality of the polygon motor /Y (M70) in the writing unit is detected.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.6 C-4112
Code
C-4112
Classification
Cause
A temperature abnormality of the polygon motor /M (M71) in the writing unit is detected.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.7 C-4113
Code
C-4113
Classification
Cause
A temperature abnormality of the polygon motor /C (M72) in the writing unit is detected.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.8 C-4114
Code
C-4114
Classification
Cause
A temperature abnormality of the polygon motor /K (M73) in the writing unit is detected.
K -249

Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.9 C-4120
Code
C-4120
Classification
Cause
The temperature sensor in the writing unit /K detects the temperature abnormality.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace writing unit /K.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.10 C-4301
Code
C-4301
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of any of M45 or M46 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing fans (FM45)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.11 C-4501
Code
C-4501
Classification
Main body: Writing correction drive abnormality
Cause
The tilt correction home sensor /Y (PS70) turns OFF while the tilt correction motor /Y (M74) in the writing unit is ON.
K -250

Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.12 C-4502
Code
C-4502
Classification
Cause
The tilt correction home sensor /M (PS71) turns OFF while the tilt correction motor /M (M75) in the writing unit is ON.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.13 C-4503
Code
C-4503
Classification
Cause
The tilt correction home sensor /C (PS72) turns OFF while the tilt correction motor /C (M76) in the writing unit is ON.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.14 C-4504
Code
C-4504
Classification
Cause
The tilt correction home sensor /K (PS73) turns OFF while the tilt correction motor /K (M77) in the writing unit is ON.
K -251

Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.21.15 C-4511
Code
C-4511
Classification
Cause
The tilt correction motor /Y (M74) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after it turns ON. Or, the installation position of the tilt
correction home sensor /Y (PS70) is improper.
Tilt correction motor /Y (M74)
Skew correction home sensor /Y (PS70)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor, and replace the write unit if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and replace the write unit if any abnormality.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.21.16 C-4512
Code
C-4512
Classification
Cause
The tilt correction motor /Y (M75) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after it turns ON. Or, the installation position of the tilt
correction home sensor /M (PS71) is improper.
Tilt correction motor /M (M75)
Skew correction home sensor /M (PS71)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace PRCB.
2.21.17 C-4513
Code
C-4513
Classification
K -252
Cause
The tilt correction motor /C (M76) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after it turns ON. Or, the installation position of the tilt
correction home sensor /C (PS72) is improper.
Tilt correction motor /C (M76)
Tilt correction home sensor /C (PS72)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace PRCB.
2.21.18 C-4514
Code
C-4514
Classification
Cause
The tilt correction motor /K (M77) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after it turns ON. Or, the installation position of the tilt
correction home sensor /K (PS73) is improper.
Tilt correction motor /K (M77)
Tilt correction home sensor /K (PS73)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace PRCB.
2.21.19 C-4520
Code
C-4520
Classification
Main body: Color registration abnormality
Cause
The color registration correction has terminated abnormally.
Color registration sensor /Fr (PS8)
Color registration sensor /Rr (PS9)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. When a SC occurs, store the log by the Log Store in the service mode.
2. Report it with that log to KMBT.
2.21.20 C-4521
Code
K -253
C-4521
Classification
Cause
The color registration base line correction /Fr has terminated abnormally.
Color registration shutter solenoid (SD2)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the shutter and around the color registration sensor, and clean/replace if there is any dirt or abnormality.
2. Check the intermediate transfer belt, and clean/replace it if there is any dirt or abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the I/O rate of the sensor by I/O of SD2, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 6-P)
5. Replace PS8.
6. Replace PRCB
7. Replace SD2 and PRCB at a time
2.21.21 C-4522
Code
C-4522
Classification
Cause
The color registration base line correction /Rr has terminated abnormally.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the shutter and around the color registration sensor, and clean/replace if there is any dirt or abnormality.
2. Check the intermediate transfer belt, and clean/replace it if there is any dirt or abnormality.
4. Check the I/O rate of the sensor by I/O of SD2, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 6-P)
5. Replace PS9.
6. Replace PRCB.
7. Replace SD2 and PRCB at a time.
2.21.22 C-4545
Code
C-4545
Classification
Main body: Beam interval correction abnormality
Cause
The beam interval correction (Y) has terminated abnormally.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
K -254
2.21.23 C-4546
Code
C-4546
Classification
Cause
The beam interval correction (M) has terminated abnormally.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
2.21.24 C-4547
Code
C-4547
Classification
Cause
The beam interval correction (C) has terminated abnormally.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
2.21.25 C-4548
Code
C-4548
Classification
Cause
The beam interval correction (K) has terminated abnormally.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
2.21.26 C-4601
Code
C-4601
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (Y) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr) has not detected any data of Y toner.
K -255

Color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the Y toner density or whether white spot occurs.
2. Output the test pattern No.25 to check the registration mark position in main scan direction.
3. When the registration mark is not output properly, check the writing, developing, and transfer relation, and repair/replace it if any
abnormality.
4. When the registration mark is output properly, check the connector connection and wiring between PRCB and the color registration
sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
Check the color registration sensor, color registration shutter solenoid, and color registration board, and repair/replace it is any
abnormality.
5. Check the I/O drive of SD2 and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS8.
8. Replace CRB /Fr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.27 C-4602
Code
C-4602
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (M) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr) has not detected any data of M toner.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the M toner density or whether white spot occurs.
3. When the registration mark is not output properly, check the writing, developing, and transfer relations and repair/replace it if any
abnormality.
4. When the registration mark is output properly, check the connection and wiring harness between PRCB and the color registration
sensor and repair it if any abnormality.
Check the color registration sensor, color registration shutter solenoid, and color registration board and repair/replace it if any
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS8.
8. Replace CRB/Fr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.28 C-4603
Code
C-4603
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (C) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr) has not detected any data of C toner.
Correction
K -256
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the C toner density or whether white spot occurs.
abnormality.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS8.
8. Replace CRB/Fr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.29 C-4604
Code
C-4604
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (K) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr) has not detected any data of K toner.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the K toner density or whether white spot occurs.
abnormality.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS8.
8. Replace CRB/Fr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.30 C-4621
Code
C-4621
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (Y) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr) has not detected any data of Y toner.
Color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr)
Correction
Note
K -257
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the Y toner density or whether white spot occurs.
3. When the registration mark is not output properly, check the writing, developing, and transfer relation, and repair/replace it if any
abnormality.
4. When the registration mark is output properly, check the connector connection and wiring between PRCB and the color registration
sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
Check the color registration sensor, color registration shutter solenoid, and color registration board, and repair/replace it is any
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB /Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.31 C-4622
Code
C-4622
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (M) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr) has not detected any data of M toner.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the M toner density or whether white spot occurs.
abnormality.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB/Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.32 C-4623
Code
C-4623
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (C) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr) has not detected any data of C toner.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the C toner density or whether white spot occurs.
abnormality.
K -258
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB/Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.33 C-4624
Code
C-4624
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (K) data undetected abnormality
Cause
The color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr) has not detected any data of K toner.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check the K toner density or whether white spot occurs.
abnormality.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB/Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.34 C-4631
Code
C-4631
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (Y) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of Y toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on Y toner area.
2. Check the intermediate transfer belt, and clean/replace it if there is toner image or damage.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the color registration sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the color registration sensor, the color registration shutter solenoid and the color registration board, and repair/replace it if any
abnormality.
5. Check the drive of I/O of SD2, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
6. Replace SD2
7. Replace PS8
8. Replace CRB /Fr
K -259
9. Replace PRCB
2.21.35 C-4632
Code
C-4632
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (M) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of M toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on M toner area.
4. Check the color registration sensor, color registration shutter solenoid, and color registration board and repair/replace it if any
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS8.
8. Replace CRB/Fr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.36 C-4633
Code
C-4633
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (C) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of C toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on C toner area.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS8.
8. Replace CRB/Fr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.37 C-4634
Code
C-4634
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Fr (K) abnormality
Cause
K -260
The histogram processing of K toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on K toner area.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS8.
8. Replace CRB/Fr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.38 C-4651
Code
C-4651
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (Y) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of Y toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on Y toner area.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB/Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.39 C-4652
Code
C-4652
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (M) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of M toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr).
Correction
K -261
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on M toner area.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB/Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.40 C-4653
Code
C-4653
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (C) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of C toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on C toner area.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB/Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.41 C-4654
Code
C-4654
Classification
Main body: Color registration board /Rr (K) abnormality
Cause
The histogram processing of K toner has terminated abnormally on the color registration board /Rr (CRB/Rr).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Output the test pattern to check whether the uneven density occurs on K toner area.
abnormality.
6. Replace SD2.
K -262
7. Replace PS9.
8. Replace CRB/Rr.
9. Replace PRCB.
2.21.42 C-4661
Code
C-4661
Classification
Main body: Color registration correction abnormality (Y)
Cause
The color registration correction /Y has terminated abnormally.
Color registration sensor /Fr (PS8), /Rr (PS9)
Color registration board /Fr (CRB/Fr), /Rr (CRB/Rr)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Perform the color registration automatic adjustment.
2. When the error 2 occurs, acquire the log and analyze.
3. When the error 1 occurs, it means that the color registration error level is not abnormal but not good. In this case, the error is cleared
by returning to the normal mode. However it may occur again.
abnormality.
7. Replace SD2.
9. Replace CRB/Fr and CRB/Rr.
10. Replace PRCB.
2.21.43 C-4662
Code
C-4662
Classification
Main body: Color registration correction abnormality (M)
Cause
The color registration correction /M has terminated abnormally.
Correction
Note
Solution
abnormality.
7. Replace SD2.
10. Replace PRCB.
K -263
2.21.44 C-4663
Code
C-4663
Classification
Main body: Color registration correction abnormality (C)
Cause
The color registration correction /C has terminated abnormally.
Correction
Note
Solution
abnormality.
7. Replace SD2.
10. Replace PRCB.
2.21.45 C-4701
Code
C-4701
Classification
Main body: Image processing abnormality
Cause
FIFO address abnormality for the printer. While in the image write, the expansion processing of image data that is read in does not
terminate correctly.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between MCB1 and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between OACB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace MCB1.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.21.46 C-4702
Code
C-4702
Classification
Cause
An error interrupt occurs with the compression/expansion chip FIFO.
Correction
K -264
Note
Solution
2. Replace MCB1.
3. Replace OACB.
2.21.47 C-4703
Code
C-4703
Classification
Cause
Image data expansion abnormality.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Replace MCB1.
3. Replace OACB.
2.21.48 C-4705
Code
C-4705
Classification
Cause
While in the image write, the expansion processing from the memory to the printer does not terminate within a specified period of time.
The output from the page memory to the printer does not terminate within a specified period of time. The PVV is not detected within a
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection between MCB1 and PRIPB/between MCB1 and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between OACB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace MCB1.
5. Replace PRIPB.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.21.49 C-4706
Code
C-4706
Classification
Cause
While in the image write, despite of no resource provided, an inappropriate processing such as accessing to the elongation device is
made.
K -265
Program of overall control board (OACB)

Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rewrite the firmware for image control.
3. Replace MCB1.
4. Replace OACB.
2.21.50 C-4708
Code
C-4708
Classification
Cause
When accessing to the memory device, a defective software is detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace MCB1.
4. Replace OACB.
2.21.51 C-4709
Code
C-4709
Classification
Cause
The expansion processing from the memory to the page memory does not terminate within a specified period of time. The compression
processing from the page memory to the memory does not terminate within a specified period of time. The development from the memory
to the page memory does not terminate within a specified period of time. The transmission of the compressed data from memory to
memory does not terminated within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace MCB1.
4. Replace OACB.
2.21.52 C-4713
Code
C-4713
Classification
Cause
A page memory for printing cannot be secured.
K -266

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRIPB and write unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection on MCB1 and PRIPB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRIPB.
5. Replace MCB1.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.21.53 C-4714
Code
C-4714
Classification
Main body: Image processing abnormality /Y
Cause
When executing APC, the Index sensor output does not change. The index sensor failed to detect the laser because the polygon mirror
does not rotate, the position of the index sensor is improper, or the index sensor is defective.
Writing unit /Y
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the write unit, and repair/replace it if there is any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRIB and write unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.54 C-4715
Code
C-4715
Classification
Main body: Image processing abnormality /M
Cause
Writing unit /M
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.55 C-4716
Code
C-4716
Classification
Main body: Image processing abnormality /C
Cause
K -267
Writing unit /C
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.56 C-4717
Code
C-4717
Classification
Main body: Image processing abnormality /K
Cause
Writing unit/K
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.57 C-4718
Code
C-4718
Classification
Cause
APC abnormality.
The laser does not turn ON because 12V DC power source for driving laser is not fed, MPC is wrong, or the laser is defective.
Writing unit /Y
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.58 C-4719
Code
C-4719
Classification
Cause
APC abnormality.
K -268

Writing unit /M
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.59 C-4720
Code
C-4720
Classification
Cause
APC abnormality.
Writing unit /C
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.60 C-4721
Code
C-4721
Classification
Cause
APC abnormality.
Writing unit/K
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.61 C-4722
Code
C-4722
Classification
Cause
Connection abnormality between the index board /Y (IDB/Y) or the laser drive board /Y (LDB/Y) and the printer image processing board
(PRIPB).
K -269

Writing unit /Y
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.62 C-4723
Code
C-4723
Classification
Cause
Connection abnormality between the index board /M (IDB/M) or the laser drive board /M (LDB/M) and the printer image processing board
(PRIPB).
Writing unit /M
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.63 C-4724
Code
C-4724
Classification
Cause
Connection abnormality between the index board /C (IDB/C) or the laser drive board /C (LDB/C) and the printer image processing board
(PRIPB).
Writing unit /C
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.64 C-4725
Code
C-4725
Classification
Cause
Connection abnormality between the index board /K (IDB/K) or the laser drive board /K (LDB/K) and the printer image processing board
(PRIPB).
K -270
Writing unit/K
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRIPB.
2.21.65 C-4840
Code
C-4840
Classification
Cause
The engine section has kept driving continuously for a specified period of time without producing image or process patch.
Printer control program
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring on PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rewrite the firmware of printer system
3. Replace PRCB.
2.21.66 C-4850*
Code
C-4850*
Classification
Cause
The overall control software accesses an illegal address.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring on OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace OACB.
2.22 Solution 18 (C-5001_6000)

2.22.1 C-5001
Code
C-5001
Classification
Cause
12V DC abnormality.
An error signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time.
Correction
K -271
Note
Solution
1. Start up the main body with CN301 on PRCB disconnected to check the V output of CN301-2.
2. If there is no 12V output, check the connector connection and the wiring of PRCB and DCPS1. Repair it if any abnormality. If no
abnormality exists, replace DCPS1.
3. Replace PRCB if 12V output performed.
4. Replace PRCB and SCPS1 at a time.
2.22.2 C-5002
Code
C-5002
Classification
Cause
24V DC abnormality.
An error signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time after REN/2 turns ON.
Each loading of PRCB connection (motor, solenoid and clutch)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Start up the main body with CN302 on PRCB disconnected to check the 12V output of CN302-2.
3. Replace PRCB if 12V output performed.
4. Check the loading of PRCB connection (motor, solenoid and clutch), and repair/replace if any abnormality.
5. Replace PRCB and DCPS2 at a time.
2.22.3 C-5003
Code
C-5003
Classification
Cause
Conveyance drive board (CDB) 24VDC abnormality.
An error signal of 24VDC for CDB is detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the operation of the front door switch (MS1), and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DCPS2 and CDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace DCPS2.
5. Replace CDB.
6. Replace DCPS2 and CDB at a time.
2.22.4 C-5004
Code
C-5004
Classification
Cause
Laser correction motor 5VDC abnormality
An abnormality of 5VDC for the tilt correction motors /Y (M74), /M (M75), /C (M76), /K (M77)
K -272
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Start up the main body with CN301 on PRCB disconnected to check the 5V output of CN301-1.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and CDB. Repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace DCPS1.
2.22.5 C-5005
Code
C-5005
Classification
Cause
Conveyance drive board (CDB) 12VDC abnormality.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Replace CDB.
3. Replace PRCB
4. Replace CDB and PRCB at a time
2.22.6 C-5010
Code
C-5010
Classification
Cause
A line status error or a checksum error occured between the overall control board (OACB) and the printer control board (PRIPB) is
detected and it cannot be recovered by sending a retransmission request. Recovery failed even after the requested retransmission is
performed. A sufficient space cannot be obtained in the circular buffer within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRIPB and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace PRCB.
3. Replace OACB.
2.22.7 C-5301
Code
C-5301
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM1 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the power supply cooling fan /1 (FM1) is ON.
K -273

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 15-E)
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between OACB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace FM1.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace FM1 and OACB at a time.
2.22.8 C-5302
Code
C-5302
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM5 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the image processing cooling fan /1 (FM5) is
ON.
Image processing cooling fan /1 (FM5)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM5.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace FM5 and OACB at a time
2.22.9 C-5303
Code
C-5303
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM6 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the image processing cooling fan /2 (FM6) is
ON.
Image processing cooling fan /2 (FM6)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM6.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace FM6 and OACB at a time.
2.22.10 C-5304
Code
C-5304
Classification
Main body: HDD unit cooling fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of FM81 or FM82 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the HDD unit cooling fans /1
An error detection signal is detected continuously while retrying power feed several times.
K -274
HDD unit cooling fan /1 (FM81)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM81, FM82 and OACB at a time
2.22.11 C-5305
Code
C-5305
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM3 or FM4 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the power supply cooling fans /3
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (1/3): 14-E)
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2.23 Solution 19 (C-6001_7000)

2.23.1 C-6101
Code
C-6101
Classification
Main body: Scanner abnormality
Cause
While in the home position search operation, the scanner home sensor (PS1) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the
scanner motor (M1) turns ON.
Scanner drive board (SCDB)
Scanner motor (M1)
Scanner home sensor (PS1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor and motor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 5-B, 3B)
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the sensor and motor and SDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCDB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PS1.
5. Replace M1.
6. Replace SCDB.
7. Replace PRCB
8. Replace M1 and SCDB at a time.
K -275
2.23.2 C-6102
Code
C-6102
Classification
Main body: Scanner abnormality
Cause
When in optics scan returning operation, the scanner home sensor (PS1) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the
scanner motor (M1) turns ON.
Scanner motor (M1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor/motor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 5-B, 3-B)
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the sensor/motor and SDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PS1.
5. Replace M1.
6. Replace SCDB.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.23.3 C-6301
Code
C-6301
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM2 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the scanner cooling fan (FM2) is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/3): 6-B)
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace FM2.
5. Replace SCDB.
6. Replace PRCB.
7. Replace FM2 and SCDB at a time.
2.23.4 C-6701
Code
C-6701
Classification
Main body: Image processing
Cause
When processing images, a filter coefficient cannot be created normally.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCIPB and MCB1, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace SCIPB.
K -276

2.23.5 C-6702
Code
C-6702
Classification
Cause
Address error of the scanner FIFO. While in the image read, the compression processing of image data that is read in does not terminate
correctly.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between OACB and MCB1, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace SCIPB.
3. Replace OACB.
2.23.6 C-6703
Code
C-6703
Classification
Cause
After negation of SW, the compression of images that are read in and their development into the page memory are not terminated within a
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCIP and MCB1, between MCB1and OACB, and between OACB and PRCB,
and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace SCIPB.
3. Replace MCB1.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace PRCB
2.23.7 C-6704
Code
C-6704
Classification
Cause
While in the image read, the compression processing from the scanner into the memory does not terminate within a specified period of
time. The development from the scanner into the page memory does not terminate within a specified period of time. The SVV is not
detected within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
K -277
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCIPB and MCB1 /between OACB and PRCB, and repair it if any
abnormality.
2. Replace SCIPB.
3. Replace MCB1.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.23.8 C-6705
Code
C-6705
Classification
Cause
While in the image read, despite of no resource provided, an inappropriate processing such as accessing to the compression device is
made.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Replace SCIPB.
3. Replace MCB1.
2.23.9 C-6706
Code
C-6706
Classification
Cause
While in the image read, SVV does not turn OFF within a specified period of time and the preparation for scanning the next page cannot
be started.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCIPB and MCB1 /between OACB and PRCB, and repair it if any
abnormality.
2. Replace SCIPB.
3. Replace MCB1.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.23.10 C-6707
Code
C-6707
Classification
Cause
Shading correction abnormality (GA abnormality).
Correction
K -278
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between MCB1and SCIPB, between SCIPB and CCDB, and repair it if any
abnormality.
2. Replace SCIPB.
2.23.11 C-6708
Code
C-6708
Classification
Cause
AOC/AGC adjustment abnormality
The light blocking cover and the lens cover of the scanner section are removed.
The connector of the CCD board (CCDB) is not disconnected.
The power cable of CCDB is disconnected.
The IC protector of the CCD board (CCDB) is removed.
Overexposure of the exposure lamp (L1).
L1 does not light.
CCD board (CCDB)
CCD lens unit
Exposure lamp (L1)
Scanner inverter board (S_INVB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the scanner section, and repair it if any abnormality such as cover off.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between L1 and S_INVB, SCDB, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:
Main body (3/3): 4-B)
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CCDB and SCIPB and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (2/3): 13-C)
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring of SCIPB, MCB1, OACB, PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check the I/O of L1 and replace it if any abnormality.
6. Replace S_INVB.
7. Replace SCIPB.
8. Replace SCDB.
9. Replace CCDB and SCIPB at a time.
2.23.12 C-6709
Code
C-6709
Classification
Cause
The adjustment data evacuated by resolutions is not available.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace SCIPB.
4. Replace MCB1.
K -279
2.23.13 C-6710
Code
C-6710
Classification
Cause
A density conversion gamma curve cannot be created normally.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCIPB, MCB1 and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace SCIPB.
4. Replace MCB1.
2.23.14 C-6711
Code
C-6711
Classification
Cause
Pulse width modulation IC calibration cannot be started normally.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SCIPB, MCB1 and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace SCIPB.
4. Replace MCB1.
2.23.15 C-6712
Code
C-6712
Classification
Cause
Pulse width modulation IC calibration cannot be completed normally.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace SCIPB.
4. Replace MCB1.
K -280
2.23.16 C-6713
Code
C-6713
Classification
Cause
APC initial sampling is started before MPC is completed.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring on PRIPB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace PRIPB.
2.23.17 C-6714
Code
C-6714
Classification
Cause
MPC is started before APC is in progress.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace PRIPB.
2.23.18 C-6715
Code
C-6715
Classification
Cause
Sub scan beam correction is started before APC or MPC is completed.
Program of printer control board (PRCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace PRIPB.
2.23.19 C-6716
Code
C-6716
Classification
K -281
Cause
Sub scan beam interval correction is started with write clock abnormality occurred due to noncompletion of AD9561 initialization.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace PRIPB.
2.23.20 C-6717
Code
C-6717
Classification
Cause
N-in-1 page area abnormality. Due to an image area abnormality of the memory, images cannot be expanded on the memory.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace PRIPB.
2.23.21 C-6720
Code
C-6720
Classification
Cause
The scan operation starts before the centering adjustment is terminated.
Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
1. When a SC occurs, store the log by the Log Store in the service mode.
2. Report it with that log to KMBT.
2.23.22 C-6721
Code
C-6721
Classification
Cause
The AGC is retried due to the decreased light volume of the exposure lamp (L1). However, no error occurs.
CCD board (CCDB)
CCD lens unit
K -282
Exposure lamp (L1)

Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CCDB and SCIPB and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (2/3): 13-C)
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring of SCIPB, MCB1, OACB, PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace CCDB.
7. Replace SCDB.
8. Replace SCIPB.
2.23.23 C-6722
Code
C-6722
Classification
Cause
A PWM gamma curve is not created properly.
Writing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Replace PRIPB.
2.23.24 C-6723
Code
C-6723
Classification
Cause
Connection abnormality between the CCD board (CCDB) and the image processing board (IPB).
CCD board (CCDB)
CCD lens unit
Exposure lamp (L1)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CCDB and SCIPB and between SCDB and L1, and repair it if any
abnormality. (Wiring diagram:Main body (2/3): 13-C, (3/3): 4-B)
5. Replace CCDB.
6. Replace SCDB.
7. Replace SCIPB.
2.23.25 C-6724
Code
K -283
C-6724
Classification
Cause
When the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, connection check of reading system board failed.
CCD board (CCDB)
CCD lens unit
Exposure lamp (L1)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CCDB and SCIPB and between SCDB and L1, and repair it if any
abnormality. (Wiring diagram:Main body (2/3): 13-C, (3/3): 4-B)
6. Replace CCDB.
7. Replace SCDB.
8. Replace SCIPB.
2.23.26 C-6725
Code
C-6725
Classification
Cause
The parameter setting cannot be performed while preparing for scanning.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Replace SCIPB.
2.23.27 C-6801
Code
C-6801
Classification
Cause
After the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, the communication between the overall control board (OACB) and the operation board /1
(OB1) is not started within a specified period of time.
Operation board /1 (OB1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring on OACB and OB1, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace OB1.
3. Replace OACB.
K -284
2.24 Solution 20 (C-7001_9999)

2.24.1 C-7001
Code
C-7001
Classification
Cause
The main body and the post processing machine stop immediately to turn OFF the power relay (RL1).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the main body and the post processing machine, and repair it if any
abnormality.
2. Replace PRCB
2.24.2 C-8001
Code
C-8001
Classification
DF: DF communication error
Cause
Communication error between the main body and DF.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DFCB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace DFCB.
3. Replace PRCB.
2.24.3 C-8101
Code
C-8101
Classification
DF: Paper feed motor error
Cause
Paper feed motor (M301) error
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the original feed section, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DFCB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: DF: 7-A)
4. Replace M301.
5. Replace DFCB.
2.24.4 C-8102
Code
K -285
C-8102
Classification
DF: Conveyance motor error
Cause
Conveyance motor (M302) error
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: DF: 7-A)
4. Replace M302.
5. Replace DFCB.
2.24.5 C-8103
Code
C-8103
Classification
DF: Reverse/paper exit motor error
Cause
Reverse/paper exit motor (M303) error.
Reverse/paper exit motor (M303)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: DF: 7-B)
4. Replace M303.
5. Replace DFCB.
2.24.6 C-8401
Code
C-8401
Classification
DF: Registration sensor error
Cause
Registration sensor (PS301) error
Original registration sensor (PS301)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DFCB and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: DF: 1-B)
3. Replace PS301.
4. Replace DFCB
K -286
2.24.7 C-8402
Code
C-8402
Classification
DF: Timing sensor error
Cause
Timing sensor (PS302) error
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: DF: 1-B)
3. Replace PS302.
4. Replace DFCB
2.24.8 C-8403
Code
C-8403
Classification
DF: Reverse sensor error
Cause
Reverse sensor (PS305) error
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: DF: 1-D)
3. Replace PS305
4. Replace DFCB
2.24.9 C-8404
Code
C-8404
Classification
DF: Paper exit sensor error
Cause
Paper exit sensor (PS306) error
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: DF: 1-D)
3. Replace PS306
4. Replace DFCB
K -287
2.24.10 C-8405
Code
C-8405
Classification
DF: Size VR error
Cause
Size VR (VR301) error.
Size VR (VR301)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DFCB and VR301, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace VR301
3. Replace DFCB
2.24.11 C-8406
Code
C-8406
Classification
DF: Non-volatile memory error
Cause
Non-volatile memory error
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring on DFCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Reinstalling DFCB firmware
3. Replace DFCB
2.24.12 C-8407
Code
C-8407
Classification
DF: DF abnormality
Cause
When the sub power switch (SW2) is ON, it is detected that the control program of the DF control board (DFCB) is unwritten.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Reinstalling DFCB firmware
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RBU and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring on DFCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace DFCB
2.25 Solution 20 (C-C001_C200)

2.25.1 C-C101
Code
C-C101
K -288
Classification
Cause
When the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, a response from the printer control board (PRCB) has not received within a specified period
of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring of PRCB and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace PRCB.
3. Replace OACB.
4. Replace PRCB and OACB at a time
2.25.2 C-C102
Code
C-C102
Classification
Cause
Communication error of the printer control board (PRCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace PRCB.
2.25.3 C-C103
Code
C-C103
Classification
Cause
Communication error of the control panel
Memory control board /1 (MCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check SW2 and repair if any abnormality
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of PRIPB, SCIPB, MCB1, PRCB, OACB and OB1, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace OB1.
4. Replace PRIPB.
5. Replace SCIPB.
6. Replace MCB1.
7. Replace PRCB
8. Replace OACB.
K -289
2.25.4 C-C104
Code
C-C104
Classification
Main body: ISW abnormality
Cause
When the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, ISW unwritten area is detected in the printer control program.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Reinstalling PRCB firmware
2. Check the I/F connector connection and the wiring for ISW on RBU, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.25.5 C-C106
Code
C-C106
Classification
Cause
No normal header is transmitted within a specified period of time after ISW is started.
USB memory
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check whether using the USB memory for the low-power device. If not, replace it with one for low-power device.
2. Check whether there is any abnormality on the USB memory. When using an USB memory which has never been used for ISW
before, replace it with one which has been successfully used for ISW.
5. Reinstalling firmware
2.25.6 C-C107
Code
C-C107
Classification
Cause
While in data transmission by ISW, a checksum error or a header error is detected in the downloaded error.
USB memory
Program file abnormality
Correction
Note
Solution
K -290
2.25.7 C-C108
Code
C-C108
Classification
Cause
While in data transmission by ISW, data cannot be written in the flash ROM properly.
UBS cables
Board to which the program is transferred
Correction
Note
Solution
2.25.8 C-C109
Code
C-C109
Classification
FS: FS ISW unwritten
Cause
When the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, ISW unwritten area is detected in the FS firmware.
FNSCB firmware
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Reinstall the FNSCB firmware.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUB and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace FNSCB.
2.25.9 C-C111
Code
C-C111
Classification
LS: LS ISW unwritten
Cause
When the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, ISW unwritten area is detected in the LS firmware (1st tandem).
LSCB firmware
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Reinstall the LSCB firmware.
5. Replace LSCB.
K -291
2.25.10 C-C112
Code
C-C112
Classification
LS: LS ISW unwritten
Cause
When the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, ISW unwritten area is detected in the LS firmware (2nd tandem).
LSCB firmware
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Reinstall the LSCB firmware.
5. Replace LSCB.
2.25.11 C-C113
Code
C-C113
Classification
FD: FD ISW unwritten
Cause
When the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, ISW unwritten area is detected in the FD firmware.
FDCB firmware
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Reinstall the FDCB firmware.
5. Replace FDCB.
2.25.12 C-C114
Code
C-C114
Classification
SD: SD ISW unwritten
Cause
When the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, ISW unwritten area is detected in the SD firmware.
SDCB firmware
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Reinstalling SDCB firmware
K -292
5. Replace SDCB.
2.25.13 C-C116
Code
C-C116
Classification
PB: PB ISW unwritten
Cause
When the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, ISW unwritten area is detected in the PB firmware.
PB firmware
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Reinstalling PBCB firmware
5. Replace PBCB.
2.25.14 C-C117
Code
C-C117
Classification
GP: GP ISW unwritten
Causes
When the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, ISW unwritten area is detected in the GP firmware.
Resulting operation
GP firmware
Correction
Turn OFF/ON the sub power switch of the main body.
Note
Procedure
1. Reinstall the GP firmware.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring of RBU, OB4 and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace punch controller PCB.
DipSW
2.25.15 C-C118
Code
C-C118
Classification
RU: RU-506 ISW unwritten
Causes
When the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, ISW unwritten area is detected in the RU firmware.
Resulting operation
RU-506 firmware
Correction
Turn OFF/ON the sub power switch of the main body.
Note
Procedure
K -293
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring of RBU, OB4 and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace RUCB.
DipSW
2.25.16 C-C119
Code
C-C119
Classification
RU: RU-509 ISW unwritten
Cause
When the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, ISW unwritten area is detected in the RU program.
RU firmware
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace RUCB
2.25.17 C-C120
Code
C-C120
Classification
Cause
Printer control board (PRCB) firmware abnormality
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Reinstall PRCB firmware.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.26 Solution 22 (C-C201_E100)

2.26.1 C-D0E0
Code
C-D0E0
Classification
Main body: HDD initialization abnormality
Cause
There is HDD to be initialized.
HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
HDD/M (HDD/M)
HDD/C (HDD/C)
HDD/K (HDD/K)
HDD/A (HDD/A)
HDD/P (HDD/P)
Correction
K -294
Note
Solution
1. Execute bad sectors check and recovery in the output check I/O 99-03.
2. Replace HDD (Refer to I.5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure)
DIPSW18-7
HDD unusable (HDD not connected)
However, it cannot be detached when IC-601 is connected.
2.26.2 C-D0E1
Code
C-D0E1
Classification
Main body: HDD abnormality (any of Y, M, C, K or A)
Cause
HDD (Y/M/C/K/A) is not connected. Or damaged, or while in initialization.
HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
HDD/M (HDD/M)
HDD/C (HDD/C)
HDD/K (HDD/K)
HDD/A (HDD/A)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HDD and MCB1, MCB/P, OACB, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
diagram: Main body (2/3): 18-F)
3. Replace HDD (Refer to I.5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure)
4. Replace MCB1.
DIPSW18-7
2.26.3 C-D0E2
Code
C-D0E2
Classification
Main body: HDD/P abnormality
Cause
HDD/P unconnected Or damaged, or while in initialization.
HDD/P (HDD/P)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HDD/P and MCB/P, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (2/3): 18-G)
3. Replace HDD/P. (Refer to I.5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure)
4. Replace MCB/P.
DIPSW18-7
2.26.4 C-D0E3
Code
K -295
C-D0E3
Classification
Main body: HDD/Y read/write abnormality
Cause
Writing/reading to the HDD/Y failed.
HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HDD/Y and MCB1, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (2/3): 17-F)
3. Replace HDD/Y. (Refer to I.5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure)
DIPSW18-7
2.26.5 C-D0E4
Code
C-D0E4
Classification
Main body: HDD/M read/write abnormality
Cause
Writing/reading to the HDD/M failed.
HDD/M (HDD/M)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HDD/M and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (2/3): 18-G)
3. Replace HDD/M. (Refer to I.5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure)
DIPSW18-7
2.26.6 C-D0E5
Code
C-D0E5
Classification
Main body: HDD/C read/write abnormality
Cause
Writing/reading to the HDD/C failed.
HDD/C (HDD/C)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HDD/C and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (2/3): 17-G)
3. Replace HDD/C. (Refer to I.5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure)
DIPSW18-7
K -296
2.26.7 C-D0E6
Code
C-D0E6
Classification
Main body: HDD/K read/write abnormality
Cause
Writing/reading to the HDD/K (HDD/K) failed.
HDD/K (HDD/K)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HDD/K and MCB1, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (2/3): 17-G)
3. Replace HDD/K. (Refer to I.5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure)
DIPSW18-7
2.26.8 C-D0E7
Code
C-D0E7
Classification
Main body: HDD/A read/write abnormality
Cause
Writing/reading to the HDD/A (HDD/A) failed.
HDD/A (HDD/A)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HDD/A and MCB1, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (2/3): 17-F)
3. Replace HDD/A. (Refer to I.5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure)
DIPSW18-7
2.26.9 C-D0E8
Code
C-D0E8
Classification
Main body: HDD/P read/write abnormality
Cause
Writing/reading to the HDD/P (HDD/P) failed.
HDD/P (HDD/P)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HDD/P and MCB/P, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (2/3): 18-G)
K -297
3. Replace HDD/P. (Refer to I.5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure)
4. Replace MCB/P.
DIPSW18-7
2.26.10 C-D0EF
Code
C-D0EF
Classification
Main body: HDD verify abnormality
Cause
An error is detected while in HDD verify check.
* SC is not counted.
HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
HDD/M (HDD/M)
HDD/C (HDD/C)
HDD/K (HDD/K)
HDD/A (HDD/A)
HDD/P (HDD/P)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HDD and MCB1, MCB/P, OACB, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
diagram: Main body (2/3): 18-F)
3. Replace HDD. (Refer to I.5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure)
4. Replace MCB/P.
5. Replace OACB.
6. Replace MCB1.
2.26.11 C-D0F0
Code
C-D0F0
Classification
Main body: HDD Lock abnormality
Cause
HDD Lock abnormality while in enhanced security.
HDD is locked due to incorrect password, password unset or security OFF.
HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
HDD/M (HDD/M)
HDD/C (HDD/C)
HDD/K (HDD/K)
HDD/A (HDD/A)
HDD/P (HDD/P)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Set HDD Lock Password to correct value
2. Release the security mode and replace HDD (Refer to I.5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure)
2.26.12 C-DC##
Code
C-DC##
K -298
Classification
Main body: Security abnormality
Cause
Security abnormality
Contact to Konica Minolta before carrying on the action.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the machine condition.
2.26.13 C-E001
Code
C-E001
Classification
Cause
The message queue is insufficient or destroyed.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Reinstall the firmware related to the overall control.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring of SCIPB, PRIPB, MCB1 and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace SCIPB.
6. Replace PRIPB.
7. Replace MCB1.
2.26.14 C-E002
Code
C-E002
Classification
Cause
The parameter value is in excess of the permissible limits.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring of SCIPB, PRIPB, MCB1, and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace SCIPB.
6. Replace PRIPB.
7. Replace MCB1.
K -299
2.26.15 C-E003
Code
C-E003
Classification
Cause
The ID of the task that sends the message queue is undefined.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace SCIPB.
6. Replace PRIPB.
7. Replace MCB1.
2.26.16 C-E004
Code
C-E004
Classification
Cause
The receiving event of the message is undefined.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace SCIPB.
6. Replace PRIPB.
7. Replace MCB1.
2.26.17 C-E005
Code
C-E005
Classification
Cause
Memory access abnormality.
Correction
Note
K -300
Solution
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace SCIPB.
6. Replace PRIPB.
7. Replace MCB1.
2.26.18 C-E006
Code
C-E006
Classification
Cause
Header address read out abnormality.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace OACB.
5. Replace SCIPB.
6. Replace PRIPB.
7. Replace MCB1.
2.26.19 C-E007
Code
C-E007
Classification
Cause
Header address read out abnormality.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check that DIMM on the board is correctly installed, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of PRIPB, MCB1 and OACB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace MCB1.
4. Replace PRIPB.
5. Replace OACB
2.26.20 C-E008
Code
C-E008
Classification
Main body: Output paper density automatic adjustment abnormality
Cause
An error is detected while in the output paper density adjustment.
K -301

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the RU color density sensor unit, and clean/replace it if there is dirt or any abnormality.
2. Make adjustments of the color density sensor unit.
2.26.21 C-E009
Code
C-E009
Classification
Main body: Printer control non-volatile initial value abnormality
Cause
Wrong initial value is detected in the printer control area.
PRCB firmware
Correction
Turn OFF/ON the sub power (SW2) switch of the main body.
Note
Solution
1. Turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and unplug the power plug. Restart the main body after 10 seconds.
2. Reinstall PRCB firmware.
3. Replace PRCB.
K -302
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY

THE MALFUNCTION...
3. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE

3.1 The power of main body does not turn ON
3.1.1 Turn ON the main power switch but the power LED of the operation panel does not light up in red
Target parts for trouble
Noise filter /2 (NF2)
Main power switch (SW1)
Circuit breaker (CBR)
DC power supply /1 (DCPS/1)

Step
Check item
Wiring diagram
location
Result
Action
Disconnect the plug from the outlet.

Ask the administrator on the user side to check the state of the power
of the outlet, and the power has no trouble.
* Be sure not to overuse the power of the outlet including the other
connected machines.
Main body (1/3): 1C
NO
Ask the administrator on the user

side for the repair.
Wiring from the plug to CBR is connected properly.
Main body (1/3): 1C
NO
Repair the wiring.
Wiring from CBR to DCPS/1 is connected properly.
Main body (1/3): 1C
NO
Repair the wiring.
After checking that the plug is not connected to the outlet, scale the
resistance value on both edge of the plug and it is 0.
Main body (1/3): 3C
YES
Check the cause of the short on

the wiring from the plug to the
DC power supply board, and
repair it.
The switch of CBR is OFF.
YES
Go on to step 6.
NO
Go on to step 7.
Turn ON the switch of CBR.
NO
Replace CBR
Connect the plug to the outlet and find that any irregular sound from
the machine or the error on the board does not occur.
NO
Remove the plug from the outlet,

check the cause of the error, and
repair it.
The fuse of DCPS/1 has the conduction.
NO
Replace DCPS/1.
The voltage of CN103-6 to 7 of DCPS/1 is 12VDC.
Main body (1/3):

14-C
NO
Replace DCPS/1.
10
The voltage of CN103-8 to 9 of DCPS/1 is 5VDC.
Main body (1/3):

13-C
NO
Replace DCPS/1.
11
Wiring from DCPS/1 to OACB is connected properly.
NO
Repair the wiring.
12
The voltages of CN216-18 to 19 of OACB is 12VDC.
Main body (2/3):

23-H
NO
Replace OACB
13
The voltages of CN216-8 to 9 of OACB is 5VDC.
Main body (2/3):

23-H
NO
Replace OACB
14
Wiring from OACB to the operation panel is connected properly.
Main body (2/3):

21-G
YES
Replace OACB
NO
Repair the wiring inside the

operation panel.
Replace the board inside the
operation panel.
3.1.2 Turn ON the main power switch and the sub power switch, but the touch panel does not display anything
The power save LED is lighting/blinking, but the main power LED does not light in green (but lights in red).
Step
Check item
Wiring diagram
location
Result
Action
The power save LED blinks in green.
YES
Processing ISW
Do not turn OFF the main power.
The power save LED blinks in orange.
YES
Reinstall the firmware because of

the firmware error of the OACB.
The power save LED blinks in red.
YES
Reinstall the firmware because of

the firmware writing error of the
OACB.
NO
Check "Turn ON the main power

switch but the power LED of the
operation panel does not light up
in red".
3.1.3 Turn ON the sub power switch but the power LED does not switch from red to green
Power switch (SW2)
K -303

THE MALFUNCTION...

Step
Check item
Wiring diagram
location
Result
Action
The power LED is lighting in red.
NO
Refer to the main power switch

related trouble
The terminal voltage of the red wiring of SW2 changes from DC5V to
DC0V by turning ON SW-2 from OFF.
Main body (2/3):

10-D
YES
Replace OACB
NO
Repair the wiring between OACB

and SW2.
Result
Action
YES
Trouble in DF
Confirmation of DFCB connector
Replace DFCB
NO
Repair the wiring from main body

DCPS/1 to DF.
Replace the main body DCPS/1
YES
Trouble in DF
Confirmation of DFCB connector
Replace DFCB
NO

DCPS/2 to DF.
Replace the main body DCPS/2.
Result
Action
3.2 The power is not supplied to DF

DC power supply (DCPS/1: main body)
DF control board (DFCB: DF)
DC power supply /2 (DCPS/2: main body)
Step
1
Check item
Wiring diagram
location
The voltage of CN10-5 and 6 of DFCB is 5V DC.
DF: E-5
The voltage of CN10-1 and 2 of DFCB is 24V DC.
DF: D-5
3.3 The power is not supplied to the paper feed option

3.3.1 PF-602
Main body DC power supply /1 (DCPS/1)
Step
Check item
Wiring diagram
location
The front door of PF is open.
YES
The connector and the power cord are connected
NO
Connect the connector and the

power cord
The voltage of CN800-7 of PFDB is 24V DC.
PF: 4-N
YES
Trouble in PF
Confirmation of PFDB connector
Replace PFDB
NO

DCPS2 to PF
Replace DCPS2 of the main
body
YES
Trouble in PF
Confirmation of PFDB connector
Replace PFDB
NO

DCPS1 to PF
body
Result
Action
The voltage of CN800-5 of PFDB is 24V DC, CN800-3 is 12V DC,

CN800-1 is 5V DC.
PF: 4-O
3.3.2 LU-202
PF drive board (LUDB)
Step
Check item
Wiring diagram
location
Upper door of LU is open.
YES
Close the upper door.
The connector and the power cord are connected
NO
Connect the connector and the

power cord
The voltage of CN800-3 of LUDB is 24V DC.
PF: 2-D
YES
Trouble in LU
Confirmation of LUDB connector
K -304

THE MALFUNCTION...
Replace LUDB.
The voltage of CN800-2 of LUDB is 12V DC. The voltage of CN800-1

of 5V DC.
PF: 2-D
NO

DCPS2 to LU
body
YES
Trouble in LU
Confirmation of LU DB connector
Replace LU DB.
NO

DCPS1 to LU
body
3.4 The power is not supplied to the finishing option

3.4.1 RU-509
DC power supply (DCPS: RU-509)
Step
RU control board (RUCB: RU-509)

Check item
Wiring diagram
location
Result
Action
The front door of RU-509 is open.
YES
The voltage of CN1-3 of RUCB is 5V DC.
RU: 8-I
YES
Trouble in RU
Confirmation of RUCB connector
Replace RUCB
Wiring from the main body to RU is connected properly.
NO
Repair the wiring.
The wiring from RU-509 AC power supply to DCPS and the wiring
switchover have no trouble.
NO
Repair the AC power supply

wiring.
YES
Go on to step 6.
NO
Go on to step 7.
Turn ON CBR.
NO
Replace CBR
The fuse of DCPS has the conduction.
NO
Replace DCPS
Connect the plug of the main body to the outlet and ensure that any
irregular sound inside RU or the error on the board does not occur.
NO

repair it.
The voltage between CN1-1 and CN1-2 of RUCB is DC24V.
RU: 8-I
YES
Replace RUCB.
NO
Replace DCPS
3.4.2 LS-505
DC power supply (DCPS: LS)
Step
LS control board (LSCB: LS)

Check item
Wiring diagram
location
Result
Action
The voltage between CN26-2 and CN26-3 of LSCB is DC5V.
LS: 8-F
NO
Repair the wiring between the

main body and LS.
The wiring from the LS AC power supply to LS DCPS and the wiring
LS: 9-F
NO

wiring.
YES
Go on to step 4.
NO
Go on to step 5.
Turn ON CBR.
NO
Replace CBR
NO
Replace DCPS
Connect the plug of the LS to the outlet and find that any irregular
sound inside LS or the error on the board does not occur.
NO

repair it.
The voltage of CN27-1 and 2 of LSCB is DC24V.
LS: 8-F
YES
Replace LSCB
NO
Replace DCPS
NO

board and the relay.
The voltage among the relay board, CN2-1 and CN2-2 is DC5V.
LS-9:-H
3.4.3 FD-503
Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1: FD)
Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2: FD)
DC power supply (DCPS: FD)

FD control board (FDCB: FD)
K -305

THE MALFUNCTION...

Step
Check item
Wiring diagram
location
Result
Action
The front door of FD is open.
YES
The voltage between CN20-1 and CN20-3 of FDCB is DC5V.
FD: 5-G
NO

main body and FD.
The wiring from the FD AC power supply to FD DCPS and the wiring
FD: 1-H
NO

wiring.
The switches of CBR1 and CBR2 are OFF.
FD: 2-H
YES
Go on to step 5.
NO
Go on to step 6.
Turn ON the switches of CBR1 and CBR2 from OFF.
NO
Replace CBR1 or CBR2
NO
Replace DCPS
Connect the plug of the FD to the outlet and find that any irregular
sound inside FD or the error on the board does not occur.
NO

repair it.
The voltage of CN2051 and 2 or 3 and 4 of FDCB are DC24V.
FD: 7-F
YES
Replace FDCB
NO
Replace DCPS
3.4.4 FS-521
Step
FNS drive board (FNSDB: FS-521)
Check item
Wiring diagram
location
Result
Action
The front door of FS is open.
YES
CN70-1 voltage of FNSDB is DC24V.
FS-521: 5-D
YES
Trouble in FS
Confirmation of FNSCB
connector
Replace FNSCB.
Check the wiring between the main body and FS and repair it.
YES
Repair the wiring.
The voltage of CN74-5 of DCPS/2 is DC24V.
YES
Repair the wiring from DCPS/2 to

the finishing option connecting
terminal.
NO
Replace DCPS/2
3.4.5 FS-531 /FS-612

Step
FNS control board (FNSCB:FS-531 / FS-612)
Check item
Wiring diagram
location
Result
Action
The front door of FS is open.
YES
CN1-1 voltage of FSCB is DC24V.
FS-531: 2-D
FS-612: 9-E
YES
Trouble in FS
Confirmation of FNSCB
connector
Replace FNSCB.
Check the wiring between the previous device and FS and repair it.
YES
Repair the wiring.
The voltage of CN74-5 of DCPS/2 is DC24V.
YES
Repair the wiring from DCPS/2 to

the finishing option connecting
terminal.
NO
Replace DCPS/2
3.4.6 SD-506
Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1: SD)
Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2: SD)
Step
DC power supply /1 (DCPS1: SD)

SD control board (SDCB: SD)
SD drive board (SDDB: SD)
Check item
Wiring diagram
location
Result
Action
The front door of SD is open.
YES
The voltage between CN20-1 and CN20-3 of SDCB is DC5V.
SD: 5-D
NO

main body and SD.
The wiring from the SD AC power supply to SD DCPS and the wiring
SD: 12-T
NO

wiring.
The switches of CBR1 and CBR2 are OFF.
SD: 13-T
YES
Go on to step 5.
K -306

THE MALFUNCTION...
NO
Go on to step 6.
Turn ON the switches of CBR1 and CBR2 from OFF.
NO
Replace CBR1 or CBR2
The fuses of DCPS1, DCPS2 and DCPS3 have the conduction.
NO
Replace the DC power supply

without conduction of the fuse.
Connect the plug of the SD to the outlet and find that any irregular
sound inside SD or the error on the board does not occur.
NO

repair it.
The voltage of CN101-1 to CN101-3 of SDDB is DC24V.
SD: 19-M
NO
Replace DCPS1
SD: 20-M
NO
Replace DCPS2
10
SD: 21-M
YES
Replace SDDB
NO
Replace DCPS3
3.4.7 PB-503
Circuit breaker (CBR: PB-503)
DC power supply /1 (DCPU/1: PB-503)
Step
PB drive board /1 (PBDB1: PB-503)

PB control board (PBCB: PB-503)
AC drive board (ACDB: PB-503)
Check item
Wiring diagram
location
Result
Action
The front door of PB is open.
YES
The voltage between CN1-1 and CN1-3 of PBCB is DC5V.
PB:25-N
NO

main body and PB.
Wiring from the plug of PB to CBR is connected properly.
PB:24-B
NO

wiring.
PB:25-B
YES
Go on to step 5.
NO
Go on to step 6.
Turn ON CBR.
NO
Replace CBR
The fuses of DCPU/1, DCPU/2 and DCPU/3 have the conduction.
NO
Replace the DC power supply

without conduction of the fuse.
The wiring from PBDB1 to DCPU/1, DCPU/2 and DCPU/3 has no

trouble.
PB:24-F
NO
Repair the wiring.
There is power output of DC 24V for CN45-2 and 3 of PB ACDB.
PB:28-M
NO
Check the wiring.

Replace ACDB (PB).
Connect the plug of the main body to the outlet and find that any
irregular sound inside the main body or the error on the board does
not occur.
NO

repair it.
10
The voltage of CN51-1 and CN51-2 of PBDB1 is DC24V.
PB: 25-J
NO
Repair the wiring from DCPU /1

to PBDB1.
Replace DCPU/1
11
The voltage of CN51-1 to CN52-3 of PBDB1 is DC24V.
PB:24-J
NO

to PBDB1.
Replace DCPU 2
12
The voltage of CN50-1 and CN50-2 of PBDB1 is DC5V.
PB:26-J
YES
Replace PBDB1
NO

to PBDB1.
Replace DCPU/3
K -307
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 4. IMAGE TROUBLE
4. IMAGE TROUBLE
4.1 Initial check point
4.1.1 Initial check items
Initial check item 1
Note
The following sample images on each procedures are when printing in A3. Also, A3 paper is basically used for the test print.
Judge whether the cause of the image trouble is from the scanner system, the printer system, or the controller system.
Scanner system
CCD
SCIPB
Controller system
Image
controller
MCB1
PRIPB
Lan I/F
PH
Printer system
* Judge method
Cause of image
trouble
Printer system
Controller system
Action
Result
Cause
Next step
Select [Service Mode] [Test Mode] [Test Pattern Output Mode]

and enter "75" to print out. Then the image trouble occurs.
YES
Engine
Printer system
procedure
Print out the test image from the controller and the image trouble
occurs.
YES
Controller
NO
Scanner
Scanner system
Check the service

manual of the
controller
Scanner system
procedure
(1) Occurrence location of the printer system image trouble

In a case of the image trouble from the printer system, the cause has 2 patterns; in 1 color or in 4 colors. Since the judgement differs
according to the image trouble, judge the occurrence position by each trouble shooting procedure.
K -308
1 Color
4 Color
4.2 Printer system procedure

4.2.1 Printer system: White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in sub scan direction
(1) Typical faulty images
White lines in sub
scan direction
White bands in
sub scan direction
Colored line in the

sub scan direction
Colored band in the

sub scan direction
a02ef4e507da
(2) Initial troubleshooting procedure

Step
Check item
Result
Paper Setting
Section
Paper settings such as type, size, weight, and both sides adjustment
of the machine match to those of paper to be printed.
NO
Check the paper type setting of

the machine, and fix it
Action
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Select [Service Mode] [Process Adjustment] [Drum Peculiarity

Adj.] [Gamma Automatic Adjustment] for several times and the
image trouble is eliminated.
NO
Go on to the next step.
Check the half tone Select [Service Mode] [Test Mode] [Test Pattern Output Mode]
image
and enter "53". Set the density of each color Y, M, C, and K to 120
and print out.
Check each image after printing and the image trouble occurs only
on 1 color.
YES
Check the 1-color trouble

shooting procedure
NO

shooting procedure
(3) 1-color trouble shooting procedure

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Sharp white line
Dust proof glass or laser writing path has foreign materials.
YES
Cleaning
Meandering white
line
Drum or process mount has foreign materials.
YES
Cleaning
Write section
YES
Cleaning
Photo conductor
section
Drum has the damage or the stripe.
YES
Replace the drum unit
K -309

5
Photo conductor
section
Drum has the dirt or the stripe of toner. (Cleaning fault)
YES
Replace the drum unit
Developing section Toner around the developing roller is not covered evenly and there
are stripes or bands.
YES
Replace the developing unit
Charging section
Charging wire has dirt or foreign materials.
YES
Clean the charging corona
Charging section
Charging grid has dirt or foreign materials.
YES
Clean the grid
Connector, wiring,
contact
Connector, wiring, or terminal related to the memory control board /1,

printer image processing board, or HV1/2 has a problem.
YES
Reconnect the connector

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
10
Recall Standard
Data
Print out the adjustment list and there is a big difference between the
Default value and the Setting value of the Image adjustment.
YES
Readjust the adjustment item

which has a difference
Recall to the standard data
The problem has been eliminated through the checks of above steps.
NO
Replace the charging corona

Replace the drum cartridge
Replace HV1.
Replace HV2.
Replace the printer image
processing board
Replace the write unit

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
White line
Line occurs on the one side or both sides in duplex printing.
YES
Check the paper path from the

intermediate transfer section to
the paper exit section
One side line in

duplex printing
Line occurs only on the one side in duplex printing.
YES
Check/Clean the paper path of

the ADU path
Intermediate
transfer section
Intermediate transfer belt has the stripe which can be eliminated by

cleaning. (Cleaning blade fault)
YES
Transfer belt cleaning unit check

and repair
Intermediate
transfer section
Intermediate transfer belt has dirt or foreign materials.
YES
Cleaning
Intermediate
transfer section
Intermediate transfer belt has damage.
YES
Check the transfer belt

separation claw
Intermediate Transfer
Beltreplacement
2nd transfer
section
2nd transfer roller has dirt or foreign materials.
YES
Cleaning
2nd transfer
section
2nd transfer roller has damage.
YES
2nd transfer roller replacement
Fusing section
Paper path for fusing has dirt or foreign materials.
YES
Cleaning
Fusing section
Fusing roller /Lw has damage.
YES
Fusing roller /Lw replacement
10
Fusing section
Fusing belt has damage.
YES
Fusing belt replacement
11
Reverse/exit
Paper path forreverse /paper exit has dirt or foreign materials.
YES
Cleaning
12
Connector, wiring,
contact

printer image processing board, writing unit, or HV1/2 has a problem.
YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
13
Recall Standard
Data
YES

Recall the standard data
NO
Replace HV2.
Replace HV1.
processing board
K -310
4.2.2 Printer system : White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in main scan direction
White lines in main
scan direction
White bands in
main scan direction
Colored line in the

main scan direction
Colored band in the

main scan direction
a02ef4e508da

Step
Check item
Result
Paper Setting
Section
NO

Repair.
Action
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

NO
Check the half tone Select [Service Mode] [Test Mode] [Test Pattern Output Mode]
image
and print out.
on 1 color.
YES

shooting procedure
NO

shooting procedure

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
White line at
251mm interval
Drum periodic unevenness is caused by the photo conductor

memory.
Adj.] [Gamma Automatic Adjustment].
NO
Change the setting of

DIPSW26-7 when the trouble
occurs frequently
Write section
YES
Cleaning
Photo conductor
section
YES
Photo conductor
section
YES
Developing section Toner around the developing roller is not covered evenly and there
are stripes or bands.
YES
Charging section
YES
Charging section
YES
Clean the grid
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Select [Service Mode] [Machine Adjustment] [Drum Peculiarity

NO
Connector, wiring,
contact

YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
Recall Standard
Data
YES

NO

Replace HV1.
Replace HV2.
processing board

Step
1
Section
White line
Check item
Line occurs on the one side or both sides in duplex printing.
K -311
Result
YES
Action
Check the paper path from the
intermediate transfer section to
the paper exit section
One side line in

duplex printing
Line occurs only on the one side in duplex printing.
YES
Check/Clean the paper path of

the ADU path
Intermediate
transfer section

YES
Check/Repair the transfer belt

cleaning unit
Intermediate
transfer section
YES
Cleaning
Intermediate
transfer section
YES

separation claw
Replace the intermediate
transfer belt
2nd transfer
section
YES
Cleaning
2nd transfer
section
YES
Replace the 2nd transfer roller
Fusing section
YES
Cleaning
Fusing section
Fusing roller /Lw has damage or foreign materials.
YES
Replace the fusing roller /Lw
10
Fusing section
Fusing belt has damage or foreign materials.
YES
Replace the fusing Belt
11
REVERSE/EXIT
SECTION
Paper path for paper reverse/exit has dirt or foreign materials.
YES
Cleaning
12
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

NO
13
Connector, wiring,
contact

YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
14
Recall Standard
Data
YES

NO
Replace HV2.
Replace HV1.
processing board
4.2.3 Printer system: Image memory, Size memory

Image memory
Size memory
(2) Trouble shooting procedure

Step
Check item
Result
Paper Setting
Section
NO

Check the
occurrence
It occurs right after printing the image with vertical band continuously
(image memory) or printing small size paper continuously (size
memory).
NO
Go on to the step of white line,

white band, color line, color band
in the sub scan direction
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

NO
NO
K -312
Action
4.2.4 Printer system: Uneven density in sub scan direction

A02EF4C520DA

Step
Check item
Result
Paper Setting
Section
NO

Action
After replacing
developer
The following step is not adjusted right after replacing developer.

[Service Mode] [Process Adjustment] [Drum Peculiarity Adj.]
[Toner Density Sensor Init.]
YES
Execute Toner Density Sensor

Init.
Image correction
unit
IDC sensor and color registration sensor are not dirty.

The sensor shutter moves smoothly.
NO
Clean the sensor

Clean/Repair the sensor shutter
Select screen
The trouble is eliminated by using another screen.
NO
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

Adj.] [Gamma Automatic Adjustment] and the image trouble is
eliminated.
NO
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.
Select [Service Mode] [Machine Adjustment] [Quality

Adjustment] [Printer Gamma Adjustment] [Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.] and the image trouble is eliminated.
NO
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.
Select [Service Mode] [Machine Adjustment] [Printer

Adjustment] [Color Registration Auto.Adj.] and the image trouble
is eliminated.
NO
Toner Density
Sensor Speed
The image trouble occurs only when the line speed is 3/4 or 1/2.
Adj.] [Toner Density Sensor Speed] and the image trouble is
eliminated.
NO
Image check

and enter "62" to set the density of each Y, M, C and K to 255.
Select the screen with the image trouble and print out.
on 1 color.
YES

shooting procedure
NO

shooting procedure

Step
Section
Toner Density
Revert
2
3
Check item
Result
Action

Adj.] [Toner Density Sensor Init.].
NO
Write section
Dust proof glass is dirty or tarnished.
YES
Cleaning
Photo conductor
section
YES
Replacing the drum cartridge
Photo conductor
section
YES
Developing section Toner covers around the developing roller evenly.
NO
Charging section
YES
Charging section
YES
Clean the grid
Connector, wiring,
contact

YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
Develop AC Bias
Fine Adj.
Select [Service Mode] [Process Adjustment] [Process Fine

Adjustment] [Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.] and the image trouble is
eliminated.
* After the adjustment, execute [Gamma Automatic Adjustment]
[Printer Gamma Offset Adjustment].
NO
10
Develop AC
Frequency

Adjustment] [Develop AC Frequency] and the image trouble is
eliminated.
NO
K -313

11
Toner Density Fine Select [Service Mode] [Process Adjustment] [Process Fine
Adj.
Adjustment] [Toner Density Fine Adj.] and the image trouble is
eliminated.
NO
12
Recall Standard
Data
YES
Recover to the installation initial

data or the factory initial data.
NO

Replace HV1.
Replace HV2.
processing board

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Intermediate
transfer section

YES

and repair
Intermediate
transfer section
YES
Cleaning
Intermediate
transfer bias
Connecting terminal of the 1st transfer bias has dirt or bad

connection.
YES
Clean, Repair
2nd transfer
section
YES
Cleaning
2nd transfer
section
YES
2nd transfer bias
Connecting terminal of the 2nd transfer bias has dirt or bad

connection.
YES
Clean, Repair
Connector, wiring,
contact

printer image processing board, or HV1/2 has problem.
YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
Develop AC Bias
Fine Adj.

eliminated.
NO
Develop AC
Frequency

eliminated.
NO
Adj.
eliminated.
NO
10
Recall Standard
Data
YES
Recover to the installation initial

data or the factory initial data.
NO
Replace HV2.
Replace HV1.
processing board
11
K -314
4.2.5 Printer system: Uneven density in main scan direction

A02EF4C521DA

Step
Section
Check item
Resul
t
Action
Paper Setting
Paper settings such as type, size, weight, and both sides

adjustment of the machine match to those of paper to be printed.
NO
Check the paper type setting

of the machine, and fix it
After replacing
developer

YES
Execute Toner Density

Sensor Init.
Image correction
unit

NO
Clean the sensor

Clean/Repair the sensor
shutter
Select screen
NO
Gamma
Automatic
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
Color Registration Select [Service Mode] [Machine Adjustment] [Printer

Auto.Adj.
is eliminated.
NO
Toner Density
Sensor Speed
eliminated.
NO
Image check
Select [Service Mode] [Test Mode] [Test Pattern Output

Mode] and enter "62" to print out.
on 1 color.
YES

shooting procedure
NO

shooting procedure

Step
Section
Check item
Resul
t
Action
Toner Density
Revert

Adj.] [Toner Density Revert] and the image trouble is eliminated.
NO
Write section
YES
Cleaning
Photo conductor
section
YES
Photo conductor
section
YES
Developing
section
Toner covers around the developing roller evenly.
NO
Charging section
YES
Charging section
YES
Clean the grid
Connector,
wiring, contact
Connector, wiring, or terminal related to the memory control board /

1, printer image processing board, writing unit, or HV1/2 has a
problem.
YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
Develop AC Bias
Fine Adj.

Adjustment] [Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.] and the image trouble
is eliminated.
NO
K -315
10
Develop AC
Frequency

eliminated.
NO
11
Toner Density
Fine Adj.

eliminated.
NO
12
Recall Standard
Data
Print out the adjustment list and there is a big difference between
the Default value and the Setting value of the Image adjustment.
YES

The problem has been eliminated through the checks of above

steps.
NO

Replace the developing
unit
Replace HV1
Replace HV2
processing board

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Intermediate
transfer section

YES

cleaning unit
Intermediate
transfer section
YES
Cleaning
Intermediate
transfer bias

connection.
YES
Clean, Repair
2nd transfer
section
2nd transfer belt has dirt or foreign materials.
YES
Cleaning
2nd transfer
section
YES
Replacethe 2nd transfer roller
2nd transfer bias

connection.
YES
Clean, Repair
Connector, wiring,
contact

YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
Develop AC Bias
Fine Adj.

eliminated.
NO
Develop AC
Frequency

eliminated.
NO
10
Adj.
eliminated.
NO
11
Recall Standard
Data
YES

NO
Replace HV2
Replace HV1
processing board
K -316
4.2.6 Printer system: Light density (ID lowering)

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
A02EF4C516DA

Step
Check item
Result
Paper Setting
Section
NO

Action
After replacing
developer

YES
Execute Toner Density Sensor

Init.
Image correction
unit

NO
Clean the sensor

Select screen
The image trouble is eliminated by using another screen.
NO
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.

is eliminated.
NO
Toner Density
Sensor Speed
eliminated.
NO
Image check

and enter "62" to print out.
on 1 color.
YES

shooting procedure
NO

shooting procedure

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Toner Density
Revert

Adj.] [Toner Density Revert] and the image trouble is eliminated.
NO
Write section
YES
Cleaning
Photo conductor
section
YES
Photo conductor
section
YES
NO
Charging section
YES
Charging section
YES
Clean the grid
Connector, wiring,
contact

YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
Develop AC Bias
Fine Adj.

eliminated.
NO
10
Develop AC
Frequency

eliminated.
NO
K -317

11
Adj.
eliminated.
NO
12
Recall Standard
Data
YES

Recall Standard Data
NO

Replace HV1
Replace HV2
processing board

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Intermediate
transfer section

YES

cleaning unit
Intermediate
transfer section
YES
Cleaning
Intermediate
transfer bias

connection.
YES
Clean, Repair
2nd transfer
section
YES
Cleaning
2nd transfer
section
YES
2nd transfer bias

connection.
YES
Clean, Repair
Connector, wiring,
contact

printer image processing board, or HV1/2 does not have a problem.
NO

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
Develop AC Bias
Fine Adj.

eliminated.
NO
Develop AC
Frequency

eliminated.
NO
10
Adj.
eliminated.
NO
11
Recall Standard
Data
YES

Recall Standard Data
NO
Replace HV2
Replace HV1
processing board
K -318
4.2.7 Printer system: Pitch unevenness

A02EF4C525DA

Step
Check item
Result
Paper Setting
Section
NO

Action
Image correction
unit

NO
Clean the sensor

Select screen
NO
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
Image check

and print out.
on 1 color.
YES

shooting procedure
NO

shooting procedure

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Pitch unevenness
at 53mm interval
Developer conveyance trouble of developing sleeve
YES
Pitch unevenness
at 188mm interval
Drum surface is scratched.
YES
Write section
YES
Cleaning
Photo conductor
section
YES
Photo conductor
section
YES
NO
Charging section
YES
Charging section
YES
Clean the grid
Connector, wiring,
contact

YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
Recall Standard
Data
YES

NO

Replace HV1
Replace HV2
processing board

Step
1
Section
Pitch unevenness
at 95mm interval
Check item
2nd transfer roller is dirty or scratched.
K -319
Result
YES
Action
Cleaning
Pitch unevenness
at 251mm interval
Fusing belt is deformed or scratched.
YES
Replace the fusing belt
Intermediate
transfer section

YES
Check and repair the transfer

belt cleaning unit
Intermediate
transfer section
YES
Cleaning
Intermediate
transfer section
YES

separation claw
transfer belt
2nd transfer
section
YES
Cleaning
2nd transfer
section
2nd transfer roller is scratched.
YES
Fusing section
YES
Cleaning
Connector, wiring,
contact

YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
Recall Standard
Data
YES

NO
Replace HV2
Replace HV1
4.2.8 Printer system: Gray background

ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
A02EF4C510DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Paper Setting
NO

Image correction
unit

NO
Clean the sensor

Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.

is eliminated.
NO
Toner Density
Sensor Speed
eliminated.
NO
Image check

Check the color of toner which has a image trouble.
YES
Check the occurrence location of

the image trouble
Write section
YES
Cleaning
Charging section
YES
10
Charging section
YES
Clean the grid
11
Connector, wiring,
contact

YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
K -320

12
Develop AC
Frequency
13

eliminated.
Change the setting value to the positive side for the adjustment.
* After the adjustment, execute [Gamma Automatic Adjustment].
NO
Background Margin Select [Service Mode] [Process Adjustment] [Process Fine

Fine Adj.
Adjustment] [Background Margin Fine Adj.] and the image trouble
is eliminated.
NO
14
Adj.
eliminated.
Change the setting value to the negative side for the adjustment.
NO
15
Recall Standard
Data
YES

NO

Replace HV2
Replace HV1
processing board
4.2.9 Printer system: Void areas, White spots

Void areas
White spots
a02ef4e523da

Step
Check item
Result
Paper Setting
Section
NO

Action
Double-sided print
Trouble occurs only in double-sided printing.

*Trouble occurs at the point 210mm or more far from the edge.
YES
Cleaning the ADU guide board

and intermediate board
Toner refresh
Select [Administrator Setting] [System Setting] [Expert

Adjustment] [Execute Adjust Operation] [Toner Refresh Mode]
and the image trouble is eliminated.
NO
Front & Back

Density

Adjustment] [Process Adjustment] [Front & Back Density] and
the image trouble is eliminated.
NO
Image correction
unit

NO
Clean the sensor

Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
Image check

on 1 color.
YES

shooting procedure
NO

shooting procedure

Step
1
Section
Write section
Check item
Result
YES
K -321
Action
Cleaning
Photo conductor
section
YES
Photo conductor
section
YES
NO
Charging section
YES
Charging section
YES
Clean the grid
Connector, wiring,
contact

YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
1st transfer output

setting

Change the setting value of the 1st transfer Y, M, C, and K to the
positive side for the adjustment.
NO
Develop AC Bias
Fine Adj.

eliminated.
NO
10
Develop AC
Frequency

eliminated.
NO
11

Fine Adj.
eliminated.
NO
12
Adj.
eliminated.
NO
13
Recall Standard
Data
YES

NO

Replace HV1.
Replace HV2.
processing board

Step
Result
Action
Intermediate
transfer section
Section

Check item
YES

and repair
Intermediate
transfer section
YES
Cleaning
Intermediate
transfer bias

connection.
YES
Clean, Repair
2nd transfer
section
YES
Cleaning
2nd transfer
section
YES
2nd transfer bias

connection.
YES
Clean, Repair
Connector, wiring,
contact

NO

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
2nd transfer output

setting
(Set in total)

Change the setting value of the 2nd transfer front and back to the
NO
2nd transfer output

setting
(Set by each tray)
When the image trouble occurs on the particular paper, change the
2nd transfer output setting of the target tray.
Change DIPSW1-0 (process adjustment user screen operation) to
"1" (enable).
NO
K -322
Select [Paper Setting] [Change IndividualSet] [Process

Adjustment] [2nd Transfer Output Adj.(Front), (Back)] and the
10
Develop AC Bias
Fine Adj.

eliminated.
NO
11
Develop AC
Frequency

eliminated.
NO
12
Adj.
eliminated.
NO
13
Recall Standard
Data
YES

NO
Replace HV2.
Replace HV1.
processing board
4.2.10 Printer system : Color spots

AA
A02EF4C524DA

Step
Check item
Result
Paper Setting
Section
NO

Action
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
Image check

on 1 color.
YES

shooting procedure
NO

shooting procedure

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Write section
YES
Cleaning
Photo conductor
section
YES
Photo conductor
section
YES
NO
Charging section
YES
Charging section
YES
Clean the grid
Process mount
Process mount has dirt of toner.
YES
Cleaning
K -323

Fine Adj.
Adjustment] [Background Margin Fine Adj.].
Change the setting value to the negative side and the image trouble
is eliminated.
NO
Adj.
Adjustment] [Toner Density Fine Adj.].
Change the setting value to the positive side or negative side and the
NO
10
Recall Standard
Data
YES

NO

Replace HV1
Replace HV2

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Intermediate
transfer section

YES

cleaning unit
Intermediate
transfer section
YES
Cleaning
Intermediate
transfer section
YES

separation claw
transfer belt
2nd transfer
section
YES
Cleaning
2nd transfer
section
YES
Fusing section
YES
Cleaning
Fusing section
Fusing roller has damage or foreign materials.
YES
Fusing section
YES
Paper exit
Paper path for paper exit has dirt or foreign materials.
YES
Cleaning
10

Fine Adj.
is eliminated.
NO
11
Adj.
Change the setting value to the positive side or negative side and the
NO
12
Recall Standard
Data
YES

NO
Replace HV2
Replace HV1
4.2.11 Printer system: Moire

A02EF4C513DA
K -324

Step
Check item
Result
Paper Setting
Section
NO

Action
Select screen

* It tends to occur when using the line screen. Therefore, change to
another screen.
NO
Skew Initial
Position Memory

Adjustment] [Writing Initial Pos. Memory] [Skew Initial Position
Memory] and the image trouble is eliminated.
NO
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.

is eliminated.
NO
Beam Pitch
Adjustment

Adjustment] [Beam Pitch Adjustment] and the image trouble is
eliminated.
NO
Moire Adjustment

Adjustment] [Moire Adjustment] and the image trouble is
eliminated.
NO
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
Write section
YES
Cleaning
10
Charging section
YES
11
Charging section
YES
Clean the grid
12
Connector, wiring,
contact

YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
13
Recall Standard
Data in printer
adjustment
YES

NO

Replace HV1
Replace HV2
processing board
4.2.12 Printer system: Gradation error

A02EF4C522DA

Step
Check item
Result
Paper Setting
Section
NO

Image correction
unit

NO
Clean the sensor

Select screen
NO
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
K -325
Action
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.

Adjustment] [Color Registration Auto.Adj.].
NO
Toner Density
Sensor Speed
eliminated.
NO
Image check

Check the color of toner which has a gradation error.
YES
Check the occurrence location of

the image trouble
Write section
YES
Cleaning
10
Charging section
YES
11
Charging section
YES
Clean the grid
12
Connector, wiring,
contact

YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
13
Develop AC Bias
Fine Adj.

eliminated.
NO
14
Develop AC
Frequency

eliminated.
NO
15
Adj.
eliminated.
NO
16
Recall Standard
Data
YES

NO

Replace HV1
Replace HV2
processing board
17
4.2.13 Printer system: Image blurring

A02EF4C511DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Write section
YES
Cleaning
Write section
Write unit is installed properly.
NO
Repair
Photo conductor
Drum has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Skew Initial
Position Memory

NO
K -326
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.

is eliminated.
NO
Beam Pitch
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
Moire Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
10
Connector, wiring,
contact
Connector, wiring, or terminal related to the printer image processing

board or write unit has a problem.
YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
11
Recall Standard
Data in printer
adjustment
YES

NO

processing board
4.2.14 Printer system: Color reproducibility error

A02EF4C527DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
NO

Paper Setting
Select screen
NO
Image correction
unit

NO
Clean the sensor

Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.

is eliminated.
NO
Write section
YES
Cleaning
Charging section
YES
Charging section
YES
Clean the grid
10
Intermediate
transfer section
YES
Cleaning
11
Intermediate
transfer section
YES

separation claw
transfer belt
12
2nd transfer
section
YES
Cleaning
K -327
13
2nd transfer
section
YES
14
Connector, wiring,
contact

YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
15
Recall Standard
Data in printer
adjustment
YES

NO

Replace HV1
Replace HV2
processing board
4.2.15 Printer system: Color registration error

AA
A02EF4C512DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
NO

Select screen
NO
Image correction
unit

NO
Clean the sensor

Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.

is eliminated.
NO
Write section
YES
Cleaning
Write section
NO
Repair
Paper Setting
2
3
Action
Charging section
YES
10
Charging section
YES
Clean the grid
11
Intermediate
transfer section

YES

cleaning unit
12
Intermediate
transfer section
YES
Cleaning
13
Intermediate
transfer section
YES

separation claw
transfer belt
14
2nd transfer
section
YES
Cleaning
15
2nd transfer
section
YES
16
Skew Initial
Position Memory

NO
17
Color Registration
Manual

Adjustment] [Color Registration Manual] and the image trouble is
eliminated.
NO
K -328
18
Beam Pitch
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
19
Connector, wiring,
contact

YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
20
Recall Standard
Data in printer
adjustment
YES

NO

processing board
Replace HV1
Replace HV2
4.2.16 Printer system: Brush effect, Image bleeding

Brush effect
Image bleeding
a02ef4e529da

Step
Check item
Result
Paper Setting
Section
NO

Select screen
NO
Fusing temperature When the image trouble occurs on the particular paper, change the
setting
fusing temperature of the target tray.
(Set by each tray)
"1" (enable).
Adjustment] [Fusing Temperature] and the image trouble is
eliminated.
NO
Image correction
unit

NO
Clean the sensor

Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
Color Registration
Auto.Adj.

is eliminated.
NO
Intermediate
transfer section

YES

cleaning unit
Intermediate
transfer section
YES
Cleaning
10
Intermediate
transfer section
YES

separation claw
transfer belt
11
2nd transfer
section
YES
Cleaning
12
2nd transfer
section
YES
13
Fusing section
YES
Cleaning
14
Fusing section
YES
K -329
Action
15
Fusing section
YES
16
Connector, wiring,
contact

printer image processing board, HV1/2, or fusing has a problem.
YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
17
Recall Standard
Data in printer
adjustment
YES

NO

processing board
Replace HV1
Replace HV2
4.2.17 Printer system: Inky backside

AA
A02EF4C530DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
NO

NO
YES
Cleaning
YES
Fusing section
YES
Cleaning
Fusing section
YES
Fusing section
YES
Paper exit section
Paper path for paper exit has dirt or foreign materials.
YES
Cleaning
Paper Setting
Select screen
2nd transfer
section
2nd transfer
section
5
6
Action
Duplex section
Paper path in the duplex section has dirt or foreign materials.
YES
Cleaning
10
Image correction
unit

NO
Clean the sensor

11
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

eliminated.
NO
12
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
13
Connector, wiring,
contact

YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
NO
Replace HV2
processing board
K -330
4.2.18 Printer system: Poor fusing performance, Offset

Poor fusing
Offset
CF
CF
CF
a02ef4e528da

Step
Section
Check item
Result
NO

setting
(Set by each tray)
"1" (enable).
eliminated.
NO
Fusing section
YES
Cleaning
Fusing section
YES
Fusing section
YES
Connector, wiring,
contact

printer image processing board, HV1/2, or fusing has a problem.
YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
NO
Replace HV2
processing board
Paper Setting
Action
4.2.19 Printer system: Blank print, Black print

Blank print
Black print
a02ef4e518da

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Write section
NO
Repair
Charging section
Charging wire is installed properly.
YES
Repair
Intermediate
transfer section
Intermediate transfer unit is installed properly.
YES
Repair
2nd transfer
section
2nd transfer section is installed properly.
YES
Repair
2nd transfer
section
YES
Cleaning
Connector, wiring,
contact

printer image processing board, writing unit, HV1/2, photo conductor
section, developing section, charging section, 1st transfer, or 2nd
transfer has a problem.
YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
K -331
NO

processing board
Replace HV1.
Replace HV2.
4.2.20 Printer system: Uneven gloss, Rough gloss


Step
Check item
Result
Paper Setting
Section
NO

Action
20mm gloss
unevenness at
50mm interval in
the center
Execute the fusing paper exit roller pressure adjustment of the

mechanical adjustment and the image trouble is eliminated.
* Trail of the fusing paper exit roller
NO
setting
(Set by each tray)
"1" (enable).
eliminated.
NO
Fusing section
YES
Cleaning
Fusing section
YES
Fusing section
YES
NO
Replace the fusing heater
4.2.21 Printer system: Darker at trailing edge of paper


Step
Section
Check item
Result
NO

Select screen
NO
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

NO
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
Develop AC Bias
Fine Adj.

Adjustment] [Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.].
Change the setting value to the positive side and the image trouble is
eliminated.
NO
Develop AC
Frequency

Adjustment] [Develop AC Frequency].
NO
Paper Setting
2
3
K -332
Action
is eliminated.
7

Fine Adj.
is eliminated.
NO
Adj.
is eliminated.
NO
NO
4.2.22 Printer system: Ripple unevenness (solid section of red and blue)

Step
Check item
Result
Paper Setting
Section
NO

Action
Front & Back

Density

Adjustment] [Process Adjustment] [Front & Back Density].
Change the setting value of the 1st transfer to the positive side and
for the adjustment.
NO
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

NO
Printer Gamma
Offset Auto.

NO
Intermediate
transfer section
Transfer belt has the stripe which can be eliminated by cleaning.
YES

cleaning unit
Intermediate
transfer section
Transfer belt has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Connector, wiring,
contact
Connector, wiring, or terminal related to the printer image processing

board, or HV1/2 has a problem.
YES

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
NO
Replace HV2
Replace HV1
4.2.23 Printer system: Image erasure at trailing edge of thick paper


Step
1
Section
Paper Setting
Check item
Result
NO
K -333
Action
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment

Adjustment] [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] [Gamma Automatic
Adjustment] for several times and the image trouble is eliminated.
NO
2nd transfer
section
2nd transfer roller has dirt, foreign materials or damage.
YES
Cleaning
2nd transfer bias

connection.
YES
Clean, Repair
Connector, wiring,
contact

NO

Clean the terminal
Replace the wiring
2nd transfer output

setting
(Set in total)

Change the setting value of the 2nd transfer front and back to the
NO
2nd transfer output

setting
(Set by each tray)
When the image trouble occurs on the particular paper, change the
2nd transfer output setting of the target tray.
"1" (enable).
Adjustment] [2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Front), (Back)] and the
NO
Recall Standard
Data
YES

NO
Replace HV2.
processing board
4.3 Scanner system procedure

4.3.1 Scanner system: White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in sub scan direction
White lines in sub
scan direction
White bands in
sub scan direction
Colored line in the

sub scan direction
Colored band in the

sub scan direction
a02ef4e507da
(2) Troubleshooting procedure

1. When using original glass
Ste
p
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Check the following step to see that the setting of original matches
the setting of the machine.
[Copy] [Original Setting]
NO
Check the original setting of the

machine, and fix it.
Original Setting
Quality Adjustment Check the following step to see that the setting of the copy quality
is proper.
[Copy] [Image Quality Setting]
NO
Check the quality setting of the

Original
Original has the damage or dirt.
YES
Original change
ADF
There is a dirt on the original pad.
YES
Cleaning
Original glass
Original glass has dirt.
YES
Clean with the soft cloth
Shading plate
Shading plate has dirt.
YES
Mirror/Lens/
Exposure lamp/
Reflect mirror
Mirror has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Lens has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Exposure lamp has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Reflective mirror has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Select [Service Mode] [Machine Adjustment] [Scan

Adjustment] [Centering Adjustment] and the image trouble is
eliminated.
NO
Readjust
Centering
adjustment
K -334

steps.
NO
Replace exposure unit

Replace CCD unit
2. When the ADF is in use

Ste
p
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Original
YES
Original change
ADF read section
Glass has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
ADF read guide

section
ADF read guide has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Shading plate
YES
Clean with the soft cloth.
Mirror/Lens/
Exposure lamp/
Reflect mirror
Mirror has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Lens has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
YES
Cleaning
YES
Cleaning
Service mode
ADF adjustment
Original stop
position
The adjustment value of [ADF Orig. Stop Position] [Main Scan]

is within a standad value.
NO
Readjust
Glass movement
Unit
Step sheet
Step sheet is tilted.
YES
Readjust
ADF read position
It occurs when reading original from ADF.
YES
Readjust

steps.
NO

Replace CCD unit
4.3.2 Scanner system: White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in main scan direction
White lines in main
scan direction
White bands in
main scan direction
Colored line in the

main scan direction
Colored band in the

main scan direction
a02ef4e508da

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Original
YES
Original change
ADF
YES
Cleaning
Original glass
YES
Restart Timing
Adjustment
Select [Service Mode] [Machine Adjustment] [Scan Adjustment]

[Restart Timing Adjustment] and the image trouble is eliminated.
NO
Readjust
NO

Replace CCD unit
K -335
4.3.3 Scanner system: Color spots

AA
A02EF4C509DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Original Setting
NO

Quality Adjustment
Check the following step to see that the setting of the copy quality is
proper.
NO

Original
YES
Original change
ADF
YES
Cleaning
Original glass
YES
NO

Replace CCD unit
4.3.4 Scanner system: Gray background

ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
A02EF4C510DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Original Setting
NO

Quality Adjustment
proper.
NO

Original
YES
Original change
ADF
YES
Cleaning
ADF
ADF has bumps.
YES
If the ADF is deformed or the

hinge is damaged, replace the
ADF
Original glass
YES
Shading plate
YES
Mirror
Mirror has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Lens
Lens has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
10
Exposure lamp
YES
Cleaning
11
Reflect mirror
YES
Cleaning
12
Scan Gradation/
Color Adj.

[Scan Gradation/Color Adj.] and the image trouble is eliminated.
NO
K -336
NO

Replace CCD unit
4.3.5 Scanner system: Blurred image, brush effect

A02EF4C511DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Original Setting
NO

Quality Adjustment
proper.
NO

Original
Original has bumps.
YES
Original change
ADF
ADF has bumps.
YES

ADF.
Original glass
Original glass is tilted.
YES
Set the original glass at the

correct position.
Check the original set position.
Slider
The exposure unit and the 2nd/3rd mirror assy are tilted.
YES
Perform the mirror unit horizontal

position adjustment and the
scanner positioning adjustment.
NO

Replace CCD unit
4.3.6 Scanner system: Color registration error, out of synchronization (Stripe in main scan direction)
AA
A02EF4C512DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Original Setting
NO

Quality Adjustment
proper.
NO

Original
YES
Original change
ADF
ADF has bumps.
YES

ADF.
K -337
Scanner rail
Rail has foreign materials.
YES
Clean or lubricate.
Scanner drive wire
Wire is twisted or damaged.
YES
Repair or replace.
Exposure unit
Scanner moves smoothly.
NO
Scanner motor belt adjustment

Replace the bush.
Replace the scanner motor
Replace the scanner relay
board
NO
Replace CCD unit
4.3.7 Scanner system: Moire

A02EF4C513DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Original Setting
NO

Quality Adjustment
proper.
NO

Original
Moire still occurs even after changing the original set direction.
NO
Original set direction change
Enhance Mode
Select [Copy] [Original Setting] [Original Type], change the

setting to Text mode or Photo mode, and then the image trouble is
eliminated.
NO
Scan Gradation/
Color Adj.

[FD-Mag. Adjustment] and the image trouble is eliminated.
NO
NO
Replace CCD unit
4.3.8 Scanner system: Leaning image

AA
A02EF4C514DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Original Setting
NO
Original
Original is leaning.
YES
Reset the original.
ADF
The original glass is not tilted and it contacts the plate spring
correctly.
NO
Reset the original glass.

Check the original set position.
Slider
YES

K -338

NO

Replace CCD unit
4.3.9 Scanner system: Image distortion

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
A02EF4C515DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Original Setting
NO

Quality Adjustment
proper.
NO

Set condition
The main body is installed on the horizontal place.
NO
Re-install
Slider
YES

NO

Replace CCD unit
4.3.10 Scanner system: Low image density, Rough image

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
A02EF4C516DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Original Setting
NO

Quality Adjustment
proper.
NO

Original
YES
Shading plate
YES
Mirror
Mirror has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Lens
Lens has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Exposure lamp
YES
Cleaning
Reflect mirror
YES
Cleaning
AE(AES)
Adjustment
Adjust the following step if the density of the auto copy density
selection for the copy differs from that of the original.
NO
K -339

Adjustment] [Density Adjustment] [AE(AES) Adjustment] and
10
Copy Density
Adjustment
Adjust the following step if the density for the copy differs from that
for the original.
Adjustment] [Density Adjustment] [Copy Density Adjustment]
NO
11
Background
Removal
Adjust the following step if the density of the highlight section for the
copy differs from that of the original.
Adjustment] [Density Adjustment] [Background Removal] and
NO
12
Bleed Prevention
Adjust the following step if there is a bleed on the back side for the
copy.
Adjustment] [Density Adjustment] [Bleed Prevention] and the
NO
NO
Clean the exposure lamp.

Replacing exposure unit
Replacing CCD unit
4.3.11 Scanner system: ACS malfunction

AA
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Color original area
Black-and-white original area
a02ef4e517da

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Original Setting
NO

Quality Adjustment
proper.
NO

ACS Adjustment
Adjust the following step for the color/black and white original.
Adjustment] [ACS Adjustment] and the image trouble is
eliminated.
NO
NO
Change the original set direction

(When the original has a color
area on its corner, the color area
may not be detected.)
4.3.12 Scanner system: Blank copy, black copy

A02EF4C518DA
K -340

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Memory control
board /1
(MCB1)
Connector on the memory control board /1 is surely set.
NO
Reinsert the connector.
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
Connector on the scanner image processing board is surely set.
NO
CCD unit
Connector of CCD unit is surely set.
NO
Connector, wiring,
contact
Connector or wiring related to the memory control board /1 or

scanner image processing board has a problem.
YES

Replace the wiring
NO

board replacement
Replace CCD unit
processing board
4.3.13 Scanner system: Image abnormality

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
AA
A02EF4C519DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Memory control
board /1
(MCB1)
Memory control board /1 is surely set.
NO
Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
Connector on the scanner processing board is surely set.
NO
CCD unit
Connector of CCD unit is surely set.
NO
Connector, wiring,
contact
Connector or wiring related to the memory control board /1 or

scanner image processing board has a problem.
YES

Replace the wiring
NO
Replace scanner image

processing board
Replace CCD unit
processing board
4.3.14 Scanner system: Uneven density

A02EF4C520DA

Step
Section
Check item
K -341
Result
Action
Original Setting
NO

Quality Adjustment
proper.
NO

Original
YES
Shading plate
YES
Mirror
Mirror has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Lens
Lens has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Exposure lamp
YES
Cleaning
Reflect mirror
YES
Cleaning
AE(AES)
Adjustment
NO
10
Copy Density
Adjustment
for the original.
NO
11
Background
Removal
NO
12
Bleed Prevention
copy.
NO
13
Slider
YES

14
Scanner motor
section
Scanner motor rotates smoothly.
NO
Scanner motor belt adjustment

Replace the scanner motor
NO

Replacing CCD unit
4.3.15 Scanner system: Faulty density difference between original and copy output
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
A02EF4C516DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Original
YES
Shading plate
YES
Mirror
Mirror has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Lens
Lens has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Exposure lamp
YES
Cleaning
Reflect mirror
YES
Cleaning
AE(AES)
Adjustment
NO
K -342

8
Copy Density
Adjustment
for the original.
NO
Background
Removal
NO
10
Bleed Prevention
copy.
NO
NO

Replacing CCD unit
4.3.16 Scanner system: Tone difference between original and copy output
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
A02EF4C516DA

Step
Section
Check item
Result
Action
Original Setting
NO

Quality Adjustment
proper.
NO

Original
YES
Shading plate
YES
Mirror
Mirror has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Lens
Lens has dirt.
YES
Cleaning
Exposure lamp
YES
Cleaning
Reflect mirror
YES
Cleaning
Tone adjustment Red
Adjust the following step if the tone of red on the copy differs from
the original.
Adjustment] [Tone Adjustment] [Red] and the image trouble is
eliminated.
NO
10
Tone adjustment Green
Adjust the following step if the tone of green on the copy differs from
the original.
Adjustment] [Tone Adjustment] [Green] and the image trouble
is eliminated.
NO
11
Tone adjustment Blue
Adjust the following step if the tone of blue on the copy differs from
the original.
Adjustment] [Tone Adjustment] [Blue] and the image trouble is
eliminated.
NO
12
Recall Standard
Data
YES

K -343
K -344
NO

Replacing CCD unit
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 5. TROUBLESHOOTING (IC-601)
5. TROUBLESHOOTING (IC-601)
5.1 IC malfunction code list
Classification
Malfunction
code
Cause
Resulting
operation
SSD abnormality C-00-001
Controller SSD cannot be

recognized.
Unmatched
spec.
C-00-002
Spec. settings do not

match between SSD,
HDD /1 (HDD1), and /2
(HDD2).
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
Unmatched
version
C-00-003
Version information does

not match between SSD,
HDD /1 (HDD1), and /2
(HDD2).
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
HDD
abnormality
C-00-004
HDD/1 (HDD1) and /2

(HDD2) cannot be
recognized.
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
C-00-005
One of the HDD/1 (HDD1)

or HDD/2 (HDD2) cannot
be recognized.
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
C-00-010
Serial numbers of both of

HDD/1 (HDD1) and /2
(HDD2) do not match.
HDD1 and HDD2 are
replaced.
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
C-00-011
Serial number of HDD/1

(HDD1) does not match.
HDD1 is replaced.
HDD/1 (HDD1)
C-00-012
Serial number of HDD/2

(HDD2) does not match.
HDD2 is replaced.
HDD/2 (HDD2)
C-00-013
Partition structure
abnomality or file system
abnormality of both of
HDD/1 (HDD1) and /2
(HDD2).
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
C-00-014
Partition structure
abnormality or file system
abnormality of HDD/1
(HDD1).
HDD/1 (HDD1)
C-00-015
Partition structure
abnormality or file system
abnormality of HDD/2
(HDD2).
HDD/2 (HDD2)
C-00-017
One of the HDD cannot be

recognized, and the serial
number of the other HDD
does not match.
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
C-00-020
Failed to start the RAID

structure.
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
C-00-021
HDD access abnormality.

Failed to access to one of
the partition of HDD.
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
C-30-003
Firmware version up of the

controller failed.
SSD
ISW failed
IC stops
immediately.
5.2 IC solution
5.2.1 C-00-001
Code
C-00-001
Classification
SSD abnormality
Cause
Controller SSD cannot be recognized.
IC stops immediately.
SSD
K -345
SSD
System control board
(SCB)
Faulty part
isolation DIPSW
Control
when
Correction
Turn OFF/ON the power switch of IC.
Note
Solution
1. Turn OFF the power switch of IC, and then restart after 10 seconds.
2. Check the connection between SSD and the system control board (SCB), and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
5.2.2 C-00-002
Code
C-00-002
Classification
Unmatched spec.
Cause
Spec. settings do not match between SSD, HDD /1 (HDD1), and /2 (HDD2).
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Format the HDD by IC Format HDD "ALL."
5.2.3 C-00-003
Code
C-00-003
Classification
Unmatched version
Cause
Version information does not match between SSD, HDD /1 (HDD1), and /2 (HDD2).
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
Correction
Note
Solution
5.2.4 C-00-004
Code
C-00-004
Classification
HDD abnormality
Cause
HDD/1 (HDD1) and /2 (HDD2) cannot be recognized.
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
Correction
Note
Solution
K -346
2. Check the SATA wiring harness connection of HDD/1 (HDD1), HDD/2 (HDD2), and the system control board (SCB), and repair it if any
abnormality.
3. Replace HDD1 and HDD2 to new HDDs and format them by selecting IC HDD format "ALL".
5.2.5 C-00-005
Code
C-00-005
Classification
HDD abnormality
Cause
One of the HDD/1 (HDD1) or HDD/2 (HDD2) cannot be recognized.
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the SATA wiring harness connection of HDD/1 (HDD1), HDD/2 (HDD2), and the system control board (SCB), and repair it if any
abnormality.
3. Connect only HDD1, replace the HDD1 to new HDD once "00-004" is displayed. Then, format by IC HDD format "ALL".
4. Connect only HDD2, replace the HDD2 to new HDD once "00-004" is displayed. Then, format by IC HDD format "ALL".
5.2.6 C-00-010
Code
C-00-010
Classification
HDD abnormality
Cause
Serial numbers of both of HDD/1 (HDD1) and /2 (HDD2) do not match. HDD1 and HDD2 are replaced.
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check that the HDD/1 (HDD1) and the HDD/2 (HDD2) are what should be connected or a new HDD, and replace it if any abnormality.
3. If it is what should be connected or a new one, format by the IC HDD format ''ALL''.
5.2.7 C-00-011
Code
C-00-011
Classification
HDD abnormality
Cause
Serial number of HDD/1 (HDD1) does not match.
HDD1 is replaced.
HDD/1 (HDD1)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check that the HDD/1 (HDD1) is what should be connected or a new HDD, and replace it if any abnormality.
K -347
5.2.8 C-00-012
Code
C-00-012
Classification
HDD abnormality
Cause
Serial number of HDD/2 (HDD2) does not match.
HDD2 is replaced.
HDD/2 (HDD2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check that the HDD/2 (HDD2) is what should be connected or a new HDD, and replace it if any abnormality.
5.2.9 C-00-013
Code
C-00-013
Classification
HDD abnormality
Cause
Partition structure abnomality or file system abnormality of both of HDD/1 (HDD1) and /2 (HDD2).
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Format both of the HDD/1 (HDD1) and HDD/2 (HDD2) by selecting IC HDD format "ALL".
3. When it is not recovered, replace it to new HDD and format it by selecting IC HDD format "ALL".
5.2.10 C-00-014
Code
C-00-014
Classification
HDD abnormality
Cause
Partition structure abnormality or file system abnormality of HDD/1 (HDD1).
HDD/1 (HDD1)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. When it is not recovered, replace HDD/1 (HDD1) to a new HDD and format by IC HDD format ''ALL''.
K -348
5.2.11 C-00-015
Code
C-00-015
Classification
HDD abnormality
Cause
Partition structure abnormality or file system abnormality of HDD/2 (HDD2).
HDD/2 (HDD2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Format the HDD/2 (HDD2) byIC Format HDD "ALL"
3. When it is not recovered, replace it to a new HDD and format by IC HDD format ''ALL''
5.2.12 C-00-017
Code
C-00-017
Classification
HDD abnormality
Cause
One of the HDD cannot be recognized, and the serial number of the other HDD does not match.
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Connect one of the HDD and check the HDD that shows 00-004 is the one what should be connected, then replace it to correct HDD if
any abnormality.
3. When it still occurs with the correct HDD, replace it to new HDD.
4. Format both of the HDD byIC Format HDD "ALL".
5.2.13 C-00-020
Code
C-00-020
Classification
HDD abnormality
Cause
Failed to start the RAID structure.
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Format the HDD/1 (HDD1) and HDD/2 (HDD2) by selecting IC HDD format "ALL".
5.2.14 C-00-021
Code
C-00-021
K -349
Classification
HDD abnormality
Cause
HDD access abnormality.
Failed to access to one of the partition of HDD.
HDD/1 (HDD1)
HDD/2 (HDD2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Format the HDD/1 (HDD1) and HDD/2 (HDD2) by selecting IC HDD format "ALL".
5.2.15 C-30-003
Code
C-30-003
Classification
ISW failed
Cause
Firmware version up of the controller failed.
SSD
Correction
Note
Solution
2. If it still occurs, execute ISW again. And if it is not solved, replace SSD.
K -350
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 6. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP)
6. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP)
6.1 TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501)
Also called Repair Analysis Procedures, this section contains the basic troubleshooting information that a technician needs to isolate the root
cause of a specific symptom.
6.2 Troubleshooting
6.2.1 Troubleshooting
The tables that follow are arranged in order of the normal operational sequence.
6.2.2 General
One of the first rules of troubleshooting is to first understand the normal operating sequence of the machine (Refer to PQ THEORY OF
OPERATION GP-501). Then carefully listen to the key operator's description of the problem or complaint. Follow this by your own visual
observation. The cause of the problem can be determined by noting at which point in the operating cycle the problem occurred. To pinpoint the
problem to a defective electrical component or mechanical part, use the Troubleshooting Guide and the OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM. During
any service call, it is a good practice to check the cable connections for fit and alignment.
Table 4.1General Troubleshooting
Symptom
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
No indication of power (None of the three

green LED's on Punch controller PCB or
illuminated)
Not plugged in
Ensure that power cord is properly connected

to the machine as well as the supply voltage.
Power from outlet not correct
Check the power supplied from the outlet.
No indication of power, unit is plugged in.
Punch controller PCB, a minimum of 2 of the

Replace Punch controller PCB.
3 LEDs on this board should be lit, if not, PCB
is bad.
Display panel or cable.
Inspect or replace.
Door not making interlocks.
Inspect or replace.
Die Set not making switch.
Inspect or replace.
Communication cables between GP- 501 and

Printer
Check communication cables between printer

and GP-501
5V from printer is not received at GP- 501
Connect all required communication cables

from GP-501 to upstream device. The check
to see if all LED's are illuminated.
Door is not closed
Close door, then check to see if all LED's are

illuminated. If door is closed, make sure door
switch is being actuated.
24V power supply is not functioning or not

connected
Check to make certain AC is applied to power

supply. Also check to make sure 24V is
outputed from power supply.
AC is not connected correctly
See above.
Check Power supply board LED, if not lit,

board is bad.
Inspect cable connections, replace Power

supply board as needed.
Check Punch controller PCB LEDs, if a

minimum of two of the three are not lit, board
is bad.
Inspect cable connections, replace Punch

controller PCB as needed.
Door is not closed or properly making the

interlock.
Inspect and correct.
LED's not illuminated on GP-501 Punch

controller PCB.
See above.
Communication cables between printer and

upstream device not connected or faulty
Connect all required communication cables

from GP-501 to upstream device.
Firmware version not correct
Upgrade to the latest firmware for both the

printer and GP-501
Paper misfeed is shown on printer interface

screen, customer or operator has been
unable to locate the misfeed.
Small piece of paper has become torn and is

blocking sensor in paper path.
Check each sensor to make certain that they

are not blocked.
Paper misfeed, not able to find any large

sheets, removed sheets are torn.
Suspect a small piece of paper is hidden

somewhere in the paper path.
Run a heavy cover stock through the system

by hand. This process may drive any small
torn pieces out of the paper path.
Punch does not cycle.
Punch clutch out of adjustment or defective.
Adjust or replace.
Indication of power, yet GP-501 does not

function (One or two LED's on the Punch
controller PCB are illuminated, yet all three
not illuminated.
Machine will not start, GP-501 is shown on

printer interface screen
GP-501 does not appear on printer interface

screen
Punch controller PCB.

Punch motor.
Paper misfeed and/or punch shaft does not
return to the home position.
Punch brake is not performing properly.
Adjust or replace.
Paper misfeed and/or punch continues to

cycle.
Punch Flag sensor (S9) is broken or

misaligned.
Adjust or replace.
Paper will not enter the punch area, runs

through bypass only.
Divert solenoid malfunction.
Adjust or replace.
K -351
Paper is punched in the middle of the sheet.
Back Gauge solenoid is malfunctioning.
Punch paper path is not operable, system will

only bypass.
Transport motor not functioning.
Adjust or replace.
Adjust or replace.
Main control board not functioning properly.
Check connections, replace.
Exit stepper motor or Entrance stepper motor

is not functioning correctly.
Adjust or replace.
Exit stepper motor or Entrance stepper motor Check connections, replace.

controller boards are not functioning correctly.
Punched holes are not centered.
Die Set positioning bracket is out of

adjustment.
Inspect and adjust as required, see

adjustment procedure.
Punched holes are not parallel to the edge of

the paper.
Back Gauge is not functioning properly.
Inspect and adjust as required, see

adjustment procedure.
6.2.3 Back Gauge

Table 4.2Back Gauge Troubleshooting
Symptom
Deep punch or angled deep punch from
leading edge of the paper.
Cannot remove the Die Set.
Punches occur 2 to 4" into the sheet.
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Broken weld on paper stop, Back Gauge

paddle.
Replace the unit. (Refer to F.20.3.30 Solenoid

Spring Replacement)
Broken or missing Back Gauge linkage

springs.
Replace the springs. (Refer to F.20.3.30

Solenoid Spring Replacement)
Back Gauge paddle is not in the fully opened

position and is contacting the Die Set.
Turn the Punch Cycle Knob to ensure the

punch drive indicator is lined up with the
position indicator.
Broken weld on paper stop, Back Gauge

paddle.
Replace the unit. (Refer to F.20.3.30 Solenoid

Spring Replacement)
Broken or missing linkage spring or springs.
Replace the spring. (Refer to F.20.3.30

Solenoid Spring Replacement)
Solenoid plunger stuck.
Clean the solenoid. (Refer to F.20.3.12

Cleaning and Checking the Back Gauge
Solenoid)
Solenoid plunger worn.
Replace Back Gauge. (Refer to F.20.3.28

Replacing the back gauge mechanism)
One or more broken or missing linkage

springs.
Replace springs. (Refer to F.20.3.30 Solenoid

Spring Replacement)
Back Gauge paddle is not fully closing,

leaving a gap that the paper can slip through
especially when using paper with heavy curl.
Adjust Back Gauge adjustment. (Refer to F.

20.3.32 Back Gauge Assembly Adjustment)
6.2.4 Die Set

Under normal conditions, the GP-501 punch may experience one mis-feed in 5000. Excessive mis-feeding, such as one in every 1000, requires
servicing. The cause may be the Die Set.
Symptom
Excessive mis-feeding.
Paper does not exit after being punched.
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Worn Die Set.
Replace Die Set if it is worn out, greater than

500K cycles.
Defective Die Set.
Replace.
Excessive oil on punch pins. Chad and paper

dust sticks to the punch pin tip.
Clean pins to remove excess oil.

Lubricate with approved lubricants only.
(Refer to F.20.2.5 Checking and lubricating
the Die Set pins and Die Set shoulder bolts)
Floating pressure bar not retracting.
Replace pressure bar springs when

applicable. (Refer to F.20.2.3.(5) Floating
Pressure Bar Spring Replacement)
6.3 Initial Service Action

6.3.1 Initial Service Action
At the start of every service call, you should perform the following.
1. If called for a problem, determine the exact nature of the service complaint.
2. Estimate the cycle life on the Die Sets. Determine if any of the Die Set life cycles have exceeded 500k sheets (cycles).
3. Determine if the customer uses only one Die Set pattern (style) or if they switch between different patterns.
4. Determine the last time the Die Set was lubricated.
5. Determine the date of the last preventative maintenance performed on the punch system.
6. Determine the paper type and quality, especially as it relates to curl and identify if any media changes correlate with the emergence of the
customer issue.
K -352
6.4 Mis-Feed Service Action

6.4.1 Mis-Feed Service Action
To clear a misfeed, first check the printer screen to see the area of the misfeed.
To clear a mis-feed in the punch:
1. Open the punch cabinet door.
2. Ensure the Chip Bin is not overflowing.
3. Turn punch knob [1] clockwise until the punch is in its home position [2].
4. Open the Bypass panel cover [1] and check for obstructions in the Bypass [2].
5. Ensure the Entrance Guide is clear [3].
6. Ensure the Diverter is clear [4].
7. Open the entrance paper Aligner panel latch [1] and clear obstructions in the Aligner.
8. Open the exit paper Aligner panel latch [2] and clear obstructions in each Aligner.
K -353
9. Open the bottom U-channel by pressing the lever in [1] and lower the U-channel [2] and clear the path.
10.
11.
12.
13.
When all the paper is cleared, close the U-channel, Aligner Panels, and Bypass.
Shut the cabinet door.
Verify on the printer screen that the misfeed has been cleared. If not, repeat the above steps.
Press the Start button on the printer. The printing operation should resume.
K -354
6.5 Final Service Action

6.5.1 Final Service Action
This section explains the actions a technician should take at the end of every service call. With each step, verify that the system runs smoothly
and misfeed free.
1. Inspect each Die Set visually and lubrication as needed. (Refer to F.20.2.5 Checking and lubricating the Die Set pins and Die Set shoulder
bolts)
2. Using the customers primary Die Set pattern, run 200 simplex printed test sheets through the punch mode and examine the output for clean
hole quality and even hole alignment.
3. Using the customers primary Die Set pattern, run 200 duplex printed test sheets through the punch mode and examine the output for clean
hole quality and even hole alignment.
4. Using any of the customers secondary Die Set pattern, run 100 simplex printed test sheets through the punch mode and examine the
output for clean hole quality and even hole alignment.
5. Run 100 sheets simplex and 100 sheets duplex through the punch bypass mode.
6. Clean out all paper chips (chad) and paper dust from the chip tray, the bottom of the machine and from the floor around the bottom of the
machine. (Refer to F.20.3.6 Cleaning the base)
7. Explain to the customer the service work that was performed and ensure they are satisfied before you close the call.
K -355
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT

DRAWING
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.1.1 Main body rear side 1
[1]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[4]
[8] [7]
[6]
[5]
[1]
Encoder sensor /belt 1 (PS89)
[2]
Belt motor (M18)
[3]
[4]
Encoder sensor /belt 2 (PS90)
[5]
[6]
[7]
Drum fan /1 (FM12)
[8]
Drum fan /2 (FM13)
[9]
Scanner motor (M1)
[10]

[12]
[13] [14][15][16] [17][18]
[19][20][21][22]
[6]
[23][24][25][26]
[5][4][3][2]
[1]
[7]
[11]
[10] [9]
[8]
[1]
1st transfer pressure release motor 1 (M19)
[2]
Drum motor /Y (M14)
[3]
Drum motor /M (M15)
[4]
Drum motor /C (M16)
[5]
Drum motor /K (M17)
[6]
[7]
[8]
Waste toner full sensor (PS52)
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
Waste toner door sensor (PS60)
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
Encoder sensor /Y2 (PS82)
[20]
Encoder sensor /M2 (PS84)
[21]
Encoder sensor /C2 (PS86)
[22]
Encoder sensor /K2 (PS88)
[23]
Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS81)
[24]
Encoder sensor /M1 (PS83)
[25]
Encoder sensor /C1 (PS85)
[26]
Encoder sensor /K1 (PS87)
L -1

DRAWING

[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[6]
[7]
[3]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
IPB fan /2 (FM6)
[4]
NVRAM board (NRB)
[5]
Memory control board /H3 (MCB/H3) (Optional)
[6]
[7]
[8]
Memory control board /P (MCB/P) (Optional)
[9]
IPB fan /1 (FM5)
[10]
[11]
[12]
[9]
[10]
[7]
[6]
[8]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
Dehumidifier heater switch (SW3)
[3]
Noise filter (NF2)
[4]
L -2

DRAWING

[5]
Power relay /1 (RL1)
[6]
[7]
[8]
Fusing control board /2 (FUSCB2) (Only for Europe)
[9]
[10]
Fusing control board /1 (FUSCB1) (Only for Europe)
1.1.5 Main body right side

[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Key counter (KCT) (Optional)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Temp/humidity sensor /1 (TEM/HUMS1)
1.1.6 Main body left side

[11]
[12]
[13]
[10]
[9]
[7]
[8]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
Fusing separation fan/1 (FM7)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
De-curler motor (M55)
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
L -3

DRAWING
1.1.7 Main body upper surface

[10]
[11]
[12]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[7]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
CCD board (CCDB)
[5]
ADF open/close switch (RS1)
[6]
Toner supply unit open/close sensor (PS14)
[7]
Exposure lamp (L1)
[8]
[9]
APS timing sensor (PS2)
[10]
APS sensor /1 (PS3)
[11]
APS sensor /2 (PS4)
[12]
Scanner inverter board (S_INVB)
1.1.8 Main body front side

[6]
[7]
[8]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
[2]
Front door sensor (PS18)
[3]
Front door switch (MS1)
[4]
Dehumidifier heater (DH)
[5]
[6]
Total counter /2 (TCT2)
[7]
[8]
L -4

DRAWING
1.1.9 Write section

[17][18][19][20]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[12][11][10][9]
[1]
Tilt correction motor /Y (M74)
[2]
Tilt correction motor /M (M75)
[3]
Tilt correction motor /C (M76)
[4]
Tilt correction motor /K (M77)
[5]
Tilt correction home sensor /Y (PS70)
[6]
Tilt correction home sensor /M (PS71)
[7]
Tilt correction home sensor /C (PS72)
[8]
Tilt correction home sensor /K (PS73)
[9]
Index board /Y (IDB/Y)
[10]
Index board /M (IDB/M)
[11]
Index board /C (IDB/C)
[12]
Index board /K (IDB/K)
[13]
Polygon motor /Y (M70)
[14]
Polygon motor /M (M71)
[15]
Polygon motor /C (M72)
[16]
Polygon motor /K (M73)
[17]
Laser drive board /Y (LDB/Y)
[18]
Laser drive board /M (LDB/M)
[19]
Laser drive board /C (LDB/C)
[20]
Laser drive board /K (LDB/K)
1.1.10 Process unit
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Belt separation claw solenoid (SD1)
[6]
Temp/humidity sensor /2 (TEM/HUMS2)
L -5

DRAWING
1.1.11 Developing section
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a03uf5c007ca
[1]
TCR sensor /Y (TCRS /Y)
[2]
TCR sensor /M (TCRS /M)
[3]
TCR sensor /C (TCRS /C)
[4]
TCR sensor /K (TCRS /K)
1.1.12 Image correction unit section
[7]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
IDC sensor (IDCS)
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
1.1.13 Toner supply section

[12]
[13]
[14] [15]
[16]
[17]
[1]
[2]
[11]
[10]
[9] [8]
[7] [6] [5]
[4] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Remaining toner sensor /K (PZS/K)
[9]
Remaining toner sensor /C (PZS/C)
[10]
[11]
Toner supply door open/close sensor (PS54)
[12]
Toner bottle door switch (SW4)
L -6

DRAWING

[13]
Remaining toner sensor /M (PZS/M)
[14]
Remaining toner sensor /Y (PZS/Y)
[15]
[16]
[17]
1.1.14 Paper feed tray

[22] [23] [24]
[25] [26] [27]
[28] [29] [30]
[19] [20] [21]
[9] [8] [7]

[18] [17] [16]
[15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10]
[6] [5] [4]
[3] [2] [1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Paper feed sensor /1 (PS29)
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Paper near empty sensor /1 (PS32)
[11]
[12]
[13]
Paper size sensor /Fr1 (PS33)
[14]
[15]
[16]
Paper size sensor /Rr1 (PS34)
[17]
[18]
[19]
Paper size VR/1 (VR1)
[20]
[21]
[22]
Paper feed clutch /1 (CL7)
[23]
[24]
[25]
Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL8)
[26]
[27]
[28]
Paper empty sensor /1 (PS31)
[29]
[30]
L -7

DRAWING
1.1.15 Vertical conveyance section

[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50)
[2]
[3]
Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (CL13)
Vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51)
1.1.16 Duplex section 1

[11]
[12]
[13]
[8]
[10]
[9]
[7]
[6] [5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
L -8
[1]

DRAWING

[1]
[2]
[3]
ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23)
[4]
ADU reverse sensor (PS21)
[5]
ADU centering sensor (PS65)
[6]
ADU stop sensor (PS20)
[7]
ADU conveyance sensor (PS61)
[8]
[9]
Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)
[10]
Decurler sensor (PS62)
[11]
Leading edge sensor (PS63)
[12]
[13]
Registration temperature sensor (TEMS1)
1.1.17 Duplex section 2

[16]
[17]
[18]
[15]
[1]
[2]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10] [9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5] [4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Loop motor (M31)
[7]
ADU pre-registration clutch (CL18)
[8]
ADU lock solenoid (SD6)
[9]
ADU conveyance clutch /3 (CL3)
[10]
[11]
CPU cooling fan /2 (FM67)
[12]
ADU gate solenoid (SD10)
[13]
[14]
[15]
Paper exit solenoid (SD4)
[16]
ADU fan /1 (FM66)
[17]
ADU reverse motor (M32)
[18]
ADU loop motor (M57)
1.1.18 Fusing section1

[3] [2] [1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a03uf5c025ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Fusing motor (M29)
[6]
L -9

DRAWING
1.1.19 Fusing section2
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2]
[1]
a03uf5c013ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Fusing loop sensor (PS64)
[4]
Thermostat /3 (TS3)
[5]
Fusing release home sensor (PS16)
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
[10]
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
1.1.20 Operation panel section
[8]
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[7]
[5]
[6]
a0g6f5c056ca
[1]
LCD board (LCDB)
[2]
Backlight /1
[3]
Backlight /2
[4]
Operation touch panel (OTP)
[5]
[6]
[7]
Operation inverter board (O_INVB)
[8]
Speaker (SP)
L -10

DRAWING
1.1.21 OT
[1]
a03uf5c014ca
[1]
Paper exit full sensor (PS12)
1.1.22 HD-514
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Hard disk /P (HDD /P)
[3]
Hard disk /Y (HDD /Y)
[4]
Hard disk /M (HDD /M)
[5]
[6]
Hard disk /K (HDD /K)
[7]
Hard disk /C (HDD /C)
[8]
Hard disk /A (HDD /A)
L -11

DRAWING
1.2 DF-622
[9]
[10]
[7] [8]
[6]
[11] [12] [13] [14] [15][16] [17]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[18]
[19]
[1]
a052f5c001ca
[1]
[2]
Paper feed cover sensor (PS303)
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Paper exit cover sensor (PS307)
[7]
[8]
[9]
Exit solenoid (SD301)
[10]
Reverse solenoid (SD302)
[11]
Size sensor /Rt (PS310)
[12]
Size sensor /Lt (PS309)
[13]
Size sensor board (SSB)
[14]
Size VR (VR301)
[15]
Tray open/close sensor (PS308)
[16]
Registration clutch (CL301)
[17]
No paper sensor (PS304)
[18]
[19]
1.3 PF-602/HT-504/505
1.3.1 Configuration front side
(1) Configuration front side
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
a03xf5c001ca
[1]
Dehumidifier heater/1 (DH1)
[2]
[3]
Tray lock solenoid /2 (SD8)
[4]
Front door open/close sensor (PS23)
L -12

DRAWING

[5]
Front door open/close switch (SW1)
[6]
Tray lock solenoid /1 (SD4)
1.3.2 Configuration rear side

[1]
[2]
[16] [17]
[3]
[18]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[15]
[11]
[14]
[13]
[12]
a03xf5c002ca
[1]
Ventilation fan/1 (FM10)
[2]
[3]
Vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL7)
[4]
[5]
Temp/humidity sensor (TEM/HUMS)
[6]
[7]
[8]
Horizontal conveyance clutch /1 (CL10)
[9]
[10]
Horizontal conveyance clutch /2 (CL11)
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]

[16]

[17]

[18]

1.3.3 Vertical conveyance section
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a03xf5c003ca
[1]
[2]
L -13
Vertical conveyance sensor/1 (PS17)

DRAWING

[3]
[4]
1.3.4 Horizontal conveyance section
[1]
[8]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[6]
a03xf5c004ca
[1]
Horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS18)
[2]
Pre-registrations sensor (PS20)
[3]
Centering sensor (PS25)
[4]
Multi feed detection board /R (MFDBR)
[5]
Multi feed detection board /S (MFDBS)
[6]
[7]
[8]
1.3.5 Tray section 1

[1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
a03xf5c005ca
[1]

[2]

[3]
Remaining paper VR/1 (VR2)

Remaining paper VR/2 (VR4)
[4]

[5]

[6]
Separation clutch /1 (CL2)

[7]

L -14

DRAWING
1.3.6 Tray section2

[13]
[1]
[2]
[12]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[10]
[14]
[9]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
a03xf5c006ca
[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]
Shutter solenoids /Rr1 (SD3)

Shutter solenoids /Rr2 (SD7)
[5]

[6]

[7]
Paper size sensor /Lt1 (PS6)

Paper size sensor /Lt2 (PS14)
[8]

[9]
Tray lock release sensor /1 (PS4)

Tray lock release sensor /2 (PS12)
[10]

[11]

[12]
Shutter solenoids /Fr1 (SD2)

Shutter solenoids /Fr2 (SD6)
13]

[14]
Front side direction
L -15

DRAWING
1.4 LU-202/HT-503
1.4.1 Paper feed/up/down section
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18] [19]
[20]
[21]
[1]
[2]
[14]
[3]
[13]
[12]
[4]
[11]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[10]
a03wf5c001ca
[1]
[2]
Paper feed sensor (PS106)
[3]
Pre-registration sensor (PS107)
[4]
Paper empty sensor (PS108)
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
HT-503
[10]
Remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105)
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
Interlock switch /2 (MS2)
[16]
Upper door sensor (PS100)
[17]
Tray down switch (SW100)
[18]
Pick-up solenoid (SD100)
[19]
Interlock switch /1 (MS1)
[20]
Front door sensor (PS115)
[21]
1.4.2 Inside the machine

[7]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a03wf5c002ca
[1]
Paper feed assist fan /Rr (FM2)
[2]
Dehumidifier heater /1 (DH1)
[3]
Paper size sensor /Rr (PS110)
[4]
Paper size sensor /Fr (PS111)
[5]
[6]
Paper feed assist fan /Fr (FM1)
[7]
Paper size VR (VR1)
L -16

DRAWING
1.4.3 HT-503
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a03wf5c003ca
[1]
Dehumidifier heater/3 (DH/2)
[2]
Temperature sensor/2 (TEMS2)
[3]
[4]
Dehumidifier fan/1 (FM3)
[5]
1.5 MB-504
1.5.1 Paper feed section
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Upper limit sensor/BP (PS25)
[2]
Paper feed sensor/BP (PS26)
[3]
Pick-up solenoid/BP (SD5)
[4]
Paper feed clutch/BP (CL6)
[5]
Paper lift motor/BP (M35)
1.5.2 Tray section
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6610
[1]
Paper size sensor /BP2 (PS49)
[2]
Paper empty sensor /BP (PS47)
[3]
paper size VR/BP (VR4)
[4]
L -17

DRAWING
1.6 RU-509/HM-102
1.6.1 Right side
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[1]
Entrance sensor (PS1)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
De-curler entrance sensor (PS2)
[9]
Door switch (SW1)
[10]
[11]
[12]
L -18

DRAWING
1.6.2 Left-side view
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
Jam indication board (JAMIB)
[2]
[3]
Paper exit conveyance sensor (PS4)
L -19

DRAWING
1.6.3 Rear side 1

[10]
[1]
[9]
[8]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2)
[5]
[6]
[7]
Relay (RL)
[8]
[9]
[10]
L -20

DRAWING
1.6.4 Rear side2

[11]
[12]
[13]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
De-curler gate solenoid /1 (SD2)
[5]
HM drive board (HMDB)
[6]
Humidification section gate solenoid (SD1)
[7]
[8]
[9]
De-curler pressure motor /Lw (M5)
[10]
De-curler pressure motor /Up (M6)
[11]
De-curler pressure home sensor /Up (PS6)
[12]
De-curler pressure home sensor /Lw (PS5)
[13]
L -21

DRAWING
1.6.5 Humidification section front side

[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Humidification section entrance sensor (PS7)
[2]
Humidification section roller pressure motor /Rt (M9)
[3]
Humidification roller pressure motor /Lt (M10)
[4]
[5]
[6]
1.6.6 Humidification section rear side

[8]
[9]
[10]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
Humidification section roller pressure home sensor /Lt

(PS10)
[3]
Humidification section roller pressure home sensor /Rt

(PS9)
[4]
Pump motor (P1)
[5]
[6]
Water tank empty sensor (PS8)
L -22

DRAWING

[7]
Humidification entrance conveyance motor (M7)
[8]
[9]
[10]
1.6.7 Output paper density detection section
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Color density LED /K (CDLEDK)
[2]
Color density detection timing sensor (PS3)
[3]
Color density LED /C (CDLEDC)
[4]
Color density LED /M (CDLEDM)
[5]
Color density LED /Y (CDLEDY)
[6]
Color density detection board /Y (CDDBY)
[7]
Color density detection board /M (CDDBM)
[8]
Color density detection board /C (CDDBC)
[9]
Color density detection board /K (CDDBK)
[10]
Color density relay board (CDRLB)
[11]
L -23

DRAWING
1.7 FS-521
1.7.1 Rear side 1
[1]
[14]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[13]
[5]
[6]
[12]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
a0gyf5c001ca
[1]
Sub tray paper full sensor (PS30)
[2]
Main tray paper exit sensor (PS10)
[3]
Tray upper limit LED (LED1)
[4]
[5]
Tray upper limit sensor (PS16)
[6]
Paper empty LED (LED2)
[7]
Counter reset sensor (PS15)
[8]
Tray quarter position sensor (PS17)
[9]
Tray middle position sensor (PS6)
[10]
Tray lower limit sensor (PS3)
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
Sub tray exit sensor (PS1)
1.7.2 Rear side2

[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
fs503fs5002c
[1]
[2]
Paper exit opening solenoid (SD9)
[3]
[4]
Bypass solenoid (SD5)
L -24

DRAWING

[5]
Gate solenoid (SD2)
[6]
[7]
[8]
Sub tray exit motor (M6)
1.7.3 Front side
[9]
[2]
[1]
[8]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
a0gyf5c002ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Staple scraps box set sensor (PS34)
[5]
Door switch (MS1)
[6]
[7]
Stacker entrance sensor (PS5)
[8]
[9]
Operation board (OB)
1.7.4 Stacker inside 1

[9]
[10]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[6]
fs503fs5004c
[1]
Intermediate roller open close motor (M25)
[2]
Stacker entrance motor (M13)
[3]
[4]
Paddle motor (M2)
[5]
Intermediate roller home sensor (PS33)
[6]
[7]
Stacker empty sensor (PS20)
[8]
Alignment plate home sensor /Fr (PS31)
L -25

DRAWING

[9]
[10]
Alignment plate home sensor /Rr (PS8)
1.7.5 Stacker inside2

[12]
[11]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[10]
[9]
a0gyf5c003ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Stack assist motor (M24)
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
1.7.6 Stapler
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fs503fs5006c
[1]
Staple ready sensor /Rr (PS46)

Staple ready sensor /Fr (PS47)
[2]
Stapler home sensor /Rr (PS40)

Stapler home sensor /Fr (PS41)
[3]
Cartridge set sensor /Rr (PS42)

Cartridge set sensor /Fr (PS43)
[4]
Stapler board (STB)
[5]
Staple empty sensor /Rr (PS44)

Staple empty sensor /Fr (PS45)
[6]

L -26

DRAWING
1.7.7 Paper exit alignment
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
a0gyf5c004ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
1.8 FS-531
1.8.1 Front side
[17]
[16]
[1]
[2]
[15]
[3]
[14]
[12]
[13]
[11]
[10]
[4]
[9]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
FRONT
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Door switch (MS1)
[6]
[7]
[8]
Paper assist solenoid (SD51)
[9]
[10]
Paper exit belt home sensor (PS9)
[11]
[12]
Paper assist motor (M51)
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
L -27

DRAWING
1.8.2 Rear side

[11]
[12]
[13]
[10]
[1]
[9]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[6]
[1]
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7)
[2]
[3]
[4]
Bypass gate solenoid (SD5)
[5]
[6]
[7]
Relay board (RB)
[8]
[9]
Gate motor (M12)
[10]
FNS conveyance motor (M1)
[11]
[12]
[13]
1.8.3 Stacker section rear side
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
L -28

DRAWING
1.8.4 Stapler section
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Staple empty switch /Rr (SW2)/staple empty switch /Fr

(SW4)
[2]
Cartridge set switch /Rr (SW1)/cartridge set switch /Fr

(SW3)
[3]
Stapler motor /Rr (M9)/stapler motor /Fr (M14)
[4]
Stapler motor home sensor /Rr (PS30)/stapler motor home

sensor /Fr (PS31)
1.9 FS-612
1.9.1 Front side
[29]
[1]
[28]
[2]
[27]
[3]
[26]
[25]
[24]
[4]
[23]
[22]
[5]
[21]
[20]
[6]
[7]
[8]
FRONT
[19]
[9]
[18]
[10]
[11]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14] [13] [12]
[1]
Sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Door switch (MS1)
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
Flat stitching stopper release solenoid /Rr (SD8)
[13]
[14]
[15]
Folding pass-through sensor (PS26)
[16]
[17]
Flat stitching stopper release solenoid /Fr (SD7)
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
L -29

DRAWING
1.9.2 Rear side

[12]
[13]
[14]
[11]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[3]
[9]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
a04df5c002ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Relay board (RB)
[9]
[10]
Gate motor (M12)
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
1.9.3 Folding section
[8]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
Folding paper exit sensor (PS25)
[3]
Folding full LED (PS28)
[4]
Folding full sensor (PS29)
[5]
[6]
Tri-folding gate solenoid (SD6)
[7]
[8]
L -30

DRAWING
1.9.4 Stapler section
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
Clincher motor /Rr (M10)/clincher motor /Fr (M15)
[2]
Clincher motor home sensor /Rr (PS32)/clincher motor

home sensor /Fr (PS33)
[3]
Stapler motor /Rr (M9)/stapler motor /Fr (M14)
[4]
Stapler motor home sensor /Rr (PS30)/stapler motor home

sensor /Fr (PS31)
[5]
Cartridge set switch /Rr (SW1)/cartridge set switch /Fr

(SW3)
[6]
Staple empty switch /Rr (SW2)/staple empty switch /Fr

(SW4)
1.10 PK-512/513
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
FRONT
[7]
[6]
15kjf5c001na
[1]
Punch motor (M301)
[2]
[3]
Punch scraps box full sensor (PS302)
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Punch scraps box set sensor (PS304)
L -31

DRAWING
1.11 PI-502
[1] [2] [3]
[24]
[4]
[23]
[5]
[6]
[22]
[7]
[21]
[8]
[20]
[9]
[10]
[19]
[11]
[12]
[18]
[17]
[16] [15]
[14]
[13]
FRONT
15jff5c001na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Conveyance clutch /Lw (CL202)
[4]
[5]
Paper empty sensor /Up (PS202)
[6]
Paper size VR /Up (VR201)
[7]
Paper pass-through sensor /Up (PS201)
[8]
[9]
Paper pass-through sensor /Lw (PS206)
[10]
PI operation board (PIOB)
[11]
Pick-up solenoid /Lw (SD202)
[12]
Pick-up solenoid /Up (SD201)
[13]
Upper door open/close switch (MS201)
[14]
[15]
Paper empty sensor /Lw (PS207)
[16]
Paper size VR /Lw (VR202)
[17]
Paper set sensor /Lw (PS212)
[18]
Paper set sensor /Up (PS203)
[19]
L size sensor /Lw (PS208)
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
Conveyance clutch /Up (CL201)
1.12 LS-505
1.12.1 Front side
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19] [20]
[21]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[10]
[13]
[12]
[9]
[8]
[11]
a0h1f5c001ca
[1]
Entrance conveyance lock solenoid (SD5)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Front door lock solenoid (SD4)
[8]
Front door switch (MS1)
[9]
Hand cart set switch (RS1)
[10]
Stacker tray set LED (LED1)
[11]
Stacker tray upper limit sensor (PS3)
[12]
Paper detection sensor (PS19)
[13]
Grip conveyance home sensor (PS5)
[14]
Relay board /1 (RLB/1)
[15]
Shift unit home sensor (PS11)
[16]
Stacker tray set sensor (PS1)
L -32

DRAWING

[17]
[18]
Coupling conveyance lock solenoid (SD11)
[19]
[20]
[21]
2nd gate solenoid (SD10)
1.12.2 Upper surface

[9]
[8]
[10] [11]
[7]
[12]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
ls502fs5002c
[1]
Conveyance sensor /3 (PS17)
[2]
[3]
Coupling exit sensor (PS18)
[4]
JAM door switch (RS2)
[5]
Subtray door sensor (PS8)
[6]
[7]
[8]
Stacker tray operation board (TOB)
[9]
[10]
Sub tray full sensor (PS9)
[11]
[12]
1.12.3 Rear side

[21]
[20]
[1]
[19]
[2]
[18]
[3]
[4]
[17]
[16]
[5]
[6]
[15]
[7]
[14]
[8]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Coupling conveyance motor (M6)
[5]
[6]
[7]
Relay board (RLB)
[8]
[9]
Outlet
[10]
Stacker tray arm release sensor (PS15)
[11]
5,000 sheets stacked sensor (PS14)
[12]
2,000 sheets stacked sensor (PS13)
L -33

DRAWING

[13]
Inlet
[14]
[15]
Stacker tray encoder sensor (PS2)
[16]
[17]
1st gate solenoid (SD1)
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
Job partition solenoid (SD2)
1.12.4 Shift unit

[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
ls502fs5004c
[1]
Front stopper solenoid (SD9)
[2]
Relay board /2 (RLB/2)
[3]
[4]
1.13 FD-503
1.13.1 Conveyance section front side/right side
[9]
[10]
[11]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
a0g6f5c084ca
[1]
Multi-feed detection board /1 (MFDB1)
[2]
FD entrance sensor (PS1)
[3]
Roller solenoid /1 (SD5)
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Door switch (MS1)
[8]
[9]
[10]
PI exit sensor (PS4)
[11]
FD operation board (FDOB)
L -34

DRAWING
1.13.2 Major boards in the power source section

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[11]
[7]
[10]
[9]
[8]
fd501fs5002c
[1]
[7]
[2]
[8]
Inlet
[3]
[9]
[4]
[10]
[5]
[11]
Relay (RL1)
[6]
Outlet
1.13.3 Conveyance section rear side/left side

[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[13]
[8]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
a0h0f5c001ca
[1]
Sub tray folding paper full sensor (PS46)
[2]
[3]
[4]
Subtray exit sensor (PS16)
[5]
[6]
[7]
Sub tray gate solenoid (SD9)
[8]
Main tray empty sensor (PS23)
[9]
Main tray folding paper full sensor (PS7)
[10]
[11]
[12]
L size gate solenoid (SD4)
[13]
S size gate solenoid (SD3)
[14]
[15]
Punch conveyance motor (M2)
[16]
[17]
Entrance gate solenoid (SD1)
[18]
[19]
L -35

DRAWING
1.13.4 PI rear side

[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
fd501fs5004c
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
PI registration clutch /Lw (CL2)
[6]
PI conveyance sensor /Up (PS31)
[7]
[8]
PI registration clutch /Up (CL1)
1.13.5 PI upper surface

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[13]
[12]
[11] [10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
fd501fs5005c
[1]
PI paper set sensor /Up (PS44)
[2]
S size sensor /Up (PS36)
[3]
PI max paper size sensor /Up (PS47)
[4]
L size sensor /Up (PS35)
[5]
[6]
PI cover open/close sensor (PS43)
[7]
PI paper empty sensor /Up (PS33)
[8]
PI paper empty sensor /Lw (PS39)
[9]
PI conveyance sensor /Lw (PS37)
[10]
[11]
[12]
PI pick-up solenoid /Lw (SD14)
[13]
PI pick-up solenoid /Up (SD13)
1.13.6 PI lower tray
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs5006c
[1]
PI paper set sensor /Lw (PS45)
[2]
[3]
S size sensor /Lw (PS42)
[4]
[5]
PI max paper size sensor /Lw (PS48)
L -36

DRAWING
1.13.7 Punch section

[1]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
fd501fs5007c
[1]
Punch registration home sensor (PS11)
[2]
Punch motor (M10)
[3]
3 holes/4 holes home sensor (PS9)
[4]
2 holes home sensor (PS8)
[5]
[6]
Punch registration sensor (PS6)
[7]
Punch conveyance sensor (PS5)
[8]
[9]
[10]
Punch scraps full sensor (PS26)
[11]
Folding exit sensor (PS2)
[12]
Intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13)
1.13.8 Folding unit front side/right side
[1]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
fd501fs5008c
[1]
S size conveyance sensor (PS58)
[2]
2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18)
[3]
Folding entrance sensor (PS52)
[4]
1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51)
[5]
1st folding cam home sensor (PS55)
[6]
[7]
[8]
2nd folding cam home sensor (PS56)
[9]
[10]
3rd folding cam home sensor (PS57)
L -37

DRAWING
1.13.9 Folding unit rear side/left side

[2]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501fs5009c
[1]
[2]
[3]
1st folding motor (M4)
[4]
2nd folding motor (M5)
[5]
Folding gate solenoid (SD15)
[6]
3rd folding motor (M6)
1.14 SD-506
1.14.1 Horizontal conveyance section
(1) Entrance conveyance
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
15anf5c001na
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Right-side direction
(2) Horizontal conveyance

[5]
[6] [7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
15anf5c002na
[1]
[2]
Horizontal conveyance exit sensor (PS4)
[3]
[4]
Horizontal conveyance gate solenoid (SD3)
[5]
[6]
L -38

DRAWING

[7]
[8]
[9]
1.14.2 Right angle conveyance section
[1]
[9]
[7] [8]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
15anf5c003na
[1]
[2]
Right angle conveyance sensor /1 (PS5)
[3]
Right angle conveyance motor (M6)
[4]
Overlap motor (M13)
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]

(1) Top side /1
[10]
[1]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
15anf5c004na
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Folding sensor /2 (PS44)
[8]
2nd folding blade home sensor /2 (PS23)
[9]
[10]
Folding passage sensor (PS8)
L -39

DRAWING
(2) Top side /2

[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15anf5c005na
[1]
Folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56)
[2]
[3]
[4]
(3) Bottom side
[12]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[5] [4]
15anf5c006na
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21)
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
L -40

DRAWING
(4) Tri-folding exit

[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
15anf5c007na
[1]
Tri-folding exit sensor (PS9)
[2]
Tri-folding paper full sensor (PS10)
[3]
[4]
Tri-folding exit clutch (CL1)
(5) Others
[1]
[2]
15anf5c008na
[1]
Folding unit lock solenoid (SD8)
[2]
L -41

DRAWING
1.14.4 Saddle stitching section

(1) Bundle clip
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
15anf5c009na
[1]
Bundle sensor /1 (PS14)
[2]
[3]
[4]
(2) Front side

[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
15anf5c010na
[1]
Clincher solenoid /Rt (SD9)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Saddle stitching paper sensor (PS13)
[6]
[7]
Clincher solenoid /Lt (SD10)
L -42

DRAWING
(3) Rear side /1
[10]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[9]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[7]
15anf5c011na
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Back side direction
[8]
[9]
[10]
(4) Rear side /2

[3]
[1]
[2]
15anf5c012na
[1]
Saddle stitching hold home sensor (PS27)
[2]
[3]
(5) Stapler
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15anf5c013na
[1]
Stapler empty switch /Rt (SW1), /Lt (SW2)
[2]
L -43
Stapler motor /Rt (M29), /Lt (M30)

[3]

DRAWING
Stapler home sensor /Rt (HS1), /Lt (HS3)
[4]
Clincher start sensor /Rt (HS2), /Lt (HS4)
1.14.5 Bundle processing section

(1) Bundle press stage/bundle press bottom side
[10]
[9]
[8]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
15anf5c014na
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Bottom side view
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Trimmer registration sensor (PS55)
(2) Bundle exit

[7]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
15anf5c015na
[1]
Bundle tray set sensor (PS58)
[2]
Trimmer scraps full sensor (PS41)
[3]
Bundle tray paper full sensor (PS61)
[4]
Bundle exit sensor /2 (PS57)
[5]
Scraps box set sensor (PS40)
[6]
[7]
Bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16)
L -44

DRAWING
1.14.6 Trimmer section

(1) Previous trimmer unit
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a0h2t3c050ca
[1]
[2]
Trimmer board solenoid (SD11)
[3]
[4]
Trimmer board replacement sensor (PS59)
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
SD drive board /2 (SDDB/2)
[11]
Brake solenoid (SD12)
[12]
[13]
(2) New trimmer unit

[8]
[7]
[9]
[6]
[5]
[10]
[11]
[4]
[12]
[13]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
SD drive board /2 (SDDB/2)
[11]
[12]
[13]
L -45

DRAWING
1.14.7 Left-side view
[1]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
15anf5c017na
[1]
[2]
Bundle press stage up down upper limit sensor (PS45)
[3]
[4]
[5]
Left-side view
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
1.14.8 Front side
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
15anf5c018na
[1]
Front door sensor /Rt (PS42)
[2]
Front door switch /Rt (MS1)
[3]
Jam indication board /1 (JAMIB/1)
[4]
Jam indication board /2 (JAMIB/2)
[5]
Front door sensor /Lt (PS43)
[6]
Front door switch /Lt (MS2)
L -46

DRAWING
1.14.9 Rear side
[1]
[9]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[7]
15anf5c019nb
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Noise filter (NF1)
[7]
Power relay /1 (RL1)
[8]
[9]
1.15 PB-503
1.15.1 SC section
(1) Front side / Top side
[8]
[9]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a075f5c001ca
[1]
SC alignment plate home sensor (PS14)
[2]
SC paper detection sensor (PS16)
[3]
[4]
[5]
SC roller release sensor (PS17)
[6]
SC stopper solenoid (SD12)
[7]
[8]
SC switchback spring pressure detection sensor (PS13)
[9]
[10]
SC switchback arm pressure detection sensor (PS12)
L -47

DRAWING
(2) Rear side/Bottom side

[8]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
a075f5c002ca
[1]
[2]
Clamp entrance movement HP sensor (PS18)
[3]
[4]
[5]
Clamp entrance roller release sensor (PS19)
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
1.15.2 Clamp section

(1) Top side
[8]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a075f5c003ca
[1]
[2]
Clamp rotation HP sensor (PS24)
[3]
Clamp rotation pressure sensor (PS25)
[4]
Cover paper table upper limit sensor /Rr (PS27)
[5]
Clamp paper sensor (PS28)
[6]
Clamp paper LED (LED21)
[7]
Cover paper table upper limit sensor /Fr (PS26)
[8]
Clamp motor (M22)
[9]
Clamp alignment HP sensor (PS21)
L -48

DRAWING
(2) Left side
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
a075f5c004ca
[1]
Booklet thickness sensor (PS29)
[2]
Clamp pressure sensor (PS23)
[3]
Clamp HP sensor (PS22)
[4]
1.15.3 Pellet supply section

[11]
[12]
[1]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
a15xf5c009ca
[1]
Pellet remaining LED (LED32)
[2]
Pellet supply pipe upper limit sensor (PS95)
[3]
Pellet supply passage sensor (PS37)
[4]
[5]
Pellet supply pipe home sensor (PS96)
[6]
[7]
Pellet supply arm upper limit sensor (PS38)
[8]
Pellet supply arm home sensor (PS39)
[9]
[10]
Pellet supply remaining sensor (PS36)
[11]
Pellet supply door sensor (PS40)
[12]
Pellet supply door switch (MS1)
L -49

DRAWING
1.15.4 Glue tank section

(1) Glue tank
[1]
[10]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[5]
[3]
a15xf5c010ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Glue tank up solenoid /2 (SD33)
[6]
[7]
[8]
Cover paper glue up solenoid (SD32)
[9]
[10]
(2) Glue tank unit movement motor
[1]
a15xf5c020ca
[1]
Glue tank HP sensor (PS33)
L -50

DRAWING
1.15.5 Cover paper supply section

(1) Inside
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
a075f5c019ca
[1]
Cover paper tray upper limit sensor (PS74)
[2]
Cover paper conveyance sensor /1 (PS75)
[3]
Cover paper pick up solenoid (SD71)
[4]
Cover paper tray knob sensor (PS82)
[5]
[6]
Cover paper empty sensor (PS71)
[7]
(2) Rear side
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a075f5c020ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
L -51

DRAWING
1.15.6 Cover paper table section

(1) cover paper table unit
[16]
[15]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[1]
[14]
[2]
[3]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a075f5c008cb
[1]
Cover paper switchback sensor (PS44)
[2]
Cover paper sensor /Rt (PS45)
[3]
Cover paper lift solenoid (SD41)
[4]
[5]
Cover paper folding pressure sensor (PS52)
[6]
[7]
Cover paper folding plate encoder sensor (PS50)
[8]
[9]
Cover paper folding plate home sensor /Lt (PS49)
[10]
[11]
Cover paper folding plate position sensor (PS51)
[12]
Cover paper sensor /Lt (PS46)
[13]
[14]
Cover paper alignment home sensor (PS41)
[15]
Cover paper conveyance arm home sensor /Lt (PS43)
[16]
[17]
[18]
Cover paper folding plate home sensor /Rt (PS48)
[19]
Cover paper conveyance arm home sensor /Rt (PS42)
(2) Roller cutter assy

[2]
[3]
[1]
a075f5c009ca
[1]
Cutter home switch (SW41)
[2]
[3]
Cutter motor (M50)
L -52
Cutter end switch (SW42)

DRAWING
1.15.7 Book stock section

(1) Rear side
[1]
[19]
[2]
[18]
[17]
[3]
[4]
[16]
[5]
[15]
[14]
[6]
[13]
[12]
[8]
[7]
[9]
[11]
[10]
a15xf5c011ca
[1]
Booklet conveyance belt movement home sensor (PS62)
[2]
[3]
Booklet upper limit sensor (PS65)
[4]
[5]
[6]
Booklet conveyance belt lower limit sensor (PS64)
[7]
[8]
Booklet stopper HP sensor (PS68)
[9]
Cart set sensor (PS69)
[10]
Hand cart set switch (MS2)
[11]
Booklet sensor /2 (PS67)
[12]
[13]
[14]
Booklet end sensor (PS61)
[15]
Booklet upper limit LED (LED61)
[16]
Booklet conveyance belt home sensor (PS63)
[17]
Booklet door sensor (PS57)
[18]
Booklet door switch (SW3)
[19]
Booklet door lock solenoid (SD61)
L -53

DRAWING
1.15.8 Conveyance section and framework section

(1) Rear side
[10]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
a075f5c012cb
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Cover paper entrance sensor (PS3)
[5]
Waste box full sensor (PS80)
[6]
Multi-feed detection board /R (MFDBR)
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
(2) Right side
[9]
[1]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a15xf5c019ca
[1]
Upper door switch /2 (SW4)
[2]
Multi-feed detection board /S (MFDBS)
[3]
[4]
[5]
Cover paper tray solenoid (SD72)
[6]
[7]
Front door switch (SW2)
[8]
SC entrance sensor (PS2)
[9]
L -54

DRAWING
(3) Rear side

[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[1]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[2]
[11]
[3]
[10]
[4]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
a15xf5c012ca
[1]
PB drive board /1 (PBDB1)
[2]
[3]
DC power supply /4 (DCPU/4)
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
(4) Inside
[3]
[2]
[1]
a075f5c015ca
[1]
Cover paper table home sensor /Fr (PS47)
[2]
[3]
Waste box set sensor (PS81)
L -55

DRAWING
(5) External section
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a15xf5c013ca
[1]
Manual operation board (OB1)
[2]
Jam indication board /1 (JAMB1)
[3]
Jam indication board /2 (JAMB2)
[4]
Booklet stock operation board (OB2)
(6) Deodorant unit
[1]
[2]
[3]
a15xf5c014ca
[1]
Deodorant fan /1 (FM97)
[2]
[3]
1.15.9 Relay conveyance section

(1) Relay conveyance unit
[6]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a15xf5c015ca
[1]
[2]
Relay conveyance door sensor (PS92)
[3]
Relay conveyance door switch (MS3)
[4]
Relay conveyance paper exit motor (M91)
L -56

DRAWING

[5]
Relay conveyance paper exit sensor (PS94)
[6]
[7]
Relay conveyance entrance sensor (PS93)
Relay conveyance intermediate sensor (PS91)
1.16 IC-601
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
SSD (SSD)
[3]
HDD/1 (HDD1)
[4]
HDD/2 (HDD2)
[5]
[6]
FPGA fan (FM2)
[7]
BOX ventilation fan (FM1)
[8]
Video interface board (VIB)
[9]
[10]
CPU fan (FM4)
[11]
DIMM (DIMM)
1.17 RU-506
1.17.1 Stacker section (front side)
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
a0g6f5c250ca
[1]
Stacker jam sensor (PS5)
[2]
[3]
[4]
Interlock switch (MS1)
[5]
[6]
[7]
1.17.2 Stacker section (front side)
L -57

DRAWING
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
a0g6f5c251ca
[1]
[2]
Entrance jam sensor (PS6)
[3]
[4]
[5]
1.17.3 Rear side
[7]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a0g6f5c252ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
L -58

DRAWING
1.18 GP-501
1.18.1 Rear side 1/Right side 1
[1]
[2]
Power Supply
[3]
Power Inlet
[4]
Chip Tray Full Sensor
[5]
Back Gauge Solenoid
[6]
Punch Flag Sensor (S9)
1.18.2 Rear side 2/Left side
[1]
Punch Motor
[2]
Exit Stepper Motor
[3]
Entrance Stepper Motor
[4]
Transport Motor
[5]
Die Set Switch
[6]
Divert Solenoid
[7]
Punch Clutch
L -59

DRAWING
1.18.3 Right side 2
[1]
Chip Tray Switch
1.18.4 Front side
[1]
Door Switch
1.18.5 Bypass conveyance section
[1]
Enter Sensor (S1)
[2]
[3]
Exit Sensor (S7)
L -60
Bypass Sensor (S8)

DRAWING
1.18.6 Punch conveyance section
[1]
Stepper 1 Speed Sensor (S2)
[1]
[1]
Back Gauge Sensor (S5)
L -61

DRAWING
[1]
U-Channel Sensor (S4)
[1]
Punch Module Sensor (S3)
[2]
L -62
Punch Brake
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR

LAYOUT DRAWING IN B...
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING IN BOARD

2.1.1 Color registration board /Fr, /Rr (CRB/Fr, /Rr)
379 (4 pin)
498 (4 pin)
2.1.2 High voltage unit /1 (HV1)
91 (19 pin)
90 (2 pin)
92 (19 pin)
L -63

2.1.3 High voltage unit /2 (HV2)

737(12pin)
738(10pin)
739(3pin)
N.C.
N.C.
2.1.4 DC power supply /1 (DCPS1)

106 (24 pin)
108 (10 pin)
107 (5 pin)
103 (10 pin)
105 (8 pin)
104 (6 pin)
102 (5 pin)
101 (3 pin)

111 (6 pin) 115 (20 pin)
114 (8 pin) 113 (9 pin)
112 (10 pin)
110 (3 pin)
L -64

2.1.6 AC drive board (ACDB)

643 (6 pin)
569 (12 pin)
153 (4 pin)
642 (18 pin)
152 (9 pin)
155 (3 pin)
157 (8 pin)
121 (10 pin)
120 (3 pin)
2.1.7 Toner supply drive board (TSDB)

704 (6 pin)
724 (18 pin)
702 (26 pin)

711 (8 pin)
726 (12 pin)

706 (6 pin)
705 (7 pin)
708 (11 pin)
2.1.8 Conveyance drive board (CDB)

579 (6 pin)
539 (15 pin)
534 (12 pin)
556 (3 pin)
510 (32 pin)
536 (7pin)
N.C.
639 (13 pin)
N.C.
580 (6 pin)
503 (26 pin)
524 (6 pin)
507 (6 pin)
527 (34 pin)
530 (16 pin)
L -65

2.1.9 Printer control board (PRCB)

360 (40 pin)
651 (20 pin)
650 (32 pin)
393 (28 pin) 700 (26 pin)
376 (22 pin)
309 (40 pin)

35 (5 pin)
340 (28 pin)
908 (6 pin)
620 (10 pin)

353 (16 pin)
N.C.
300 (22 pin)
330 (15 pin)
600 (20 pin)

N.C.
384 (12 pin)
302 (4 pin)
492 (13 pin)
303 (6 pin)
N.C.
N.C.
400 (30 pin)

N.C.
464 (16 pin)
323 (15 pin)

467 (30 pin)
151 (9 pin)
SW2
414 (30 pin)
736 (24 pin)

N.C.
N.C.
459 (12 pin)
N.C.
357 (18 pin)
442 (18 pin)
428 (30 pin)
339 (15 pin) 301 (4 pin)
730 (38 pin)
500 (26 pin)
150 (16 pin)
L -66

2.1.10 Overall control board (OACB)

1000 (8 pin)
1506 (16 pin)
218 (2 pin)
215 (22 pin)
216 (19 pin)
219 (10 pin)

249 (20 pin)
220 (9 pin)
13 (15 pin)
1 (20 pin)
10 (6 pin)
11 (3 pin)
4 (2 pin)
2 (40 pin)
248 (19 pin)
217 (14 pin)
1508 (100 pin)

1502 (7 pin)
1504 (73 pin)
1503 (7 pin)
1505 (73 pin)
1507 (10 pin)
1500 (20 pin)
204 (5 pin)
2.1.11 Fusing control board /1 (FUSCB1) (Only for Europe)
158 (3 pin)
2.1.12 Fusing control board /2 (FUSCB2) (Only for Europe)
159 (5 pin)
L -67

2.1.13 CCD board (CCDB)
551 (50 pin)
2.1.14 Printer image processing board (PRIPB)

207 (60 pin)
208 (80 pin)
209 (60 pin)
202 (7 pin)
240 (3 pin)
226 (41 pin)
225 (31 pin)
230 (41 pin)
229 (31 pin)
234 (41 pin)
233 (31 pin)
238 (41 pin)
237 (31 pin)
2.1.15 Scanner image processing board (SCIPB)

N.C.
242 (50pin)
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
214 (40 pin)
215 (120 pin)
L -68

2.1.16 Memory control board /1 (MCB1)
242 (7 pin)
11 (200 pin)
206 (73 pin)
205 (100 pin)
246 (7 pin)
247 (7 pin)
212 (40 pin)
213 (120 pin)
223 (68 pin)

12 (200 pin)
201 (8 pin)
9 (16 pin)
207 (60 pin)
208 (80 pin)
209 (60 pin)
2.1.17 NVRAM board (NRB)
142 (20 pin)
141 (40 pin)
2.1.18 Relay board /U (RBU)
3 (4 pin)
2 (4 pin)
1 (4 pin)
4 (16 pin)
L -69

2.1.19 Scanner drive board (SCDB)

607 (3 pin)
609 (14 pin)
N.C.
601 (20 pin)

603 (3 pin)
602 (4 pin) 605 (3 pin)
2.1.20 Scanner inverter board (S_INVB)
606 (3 pin)
604 (4 pin)
2.1.21 Operation board /1
705 (6 pin)
712 (2 pin)
702 (19 pin)
706 (4 pin)
L -70

701 (4 pin)
703 (4 pin)
191 (50 pin)
190 (51 pin)
192 (4 pin)
L -71

2.1.24 Operation inverter
2 (3 pin)
1 (7 pin)
3 (3 pin)
2.1.25 LCD board (LCDB)

716 (20 pin)
2.1.26 Memory control board /P (MCB/P)
211 (73 pin)
247 (7 pin)
210 (20 pin)
L -72

2.2 DF-622
2.2.1 DF control board (DFCB)
14 (W : 9 pin)
13 (W : 15 pin)
3 (W : 7 pin)
12 (W : 5 pin)
2 (W : 6 pin)
1 (N.C.)
5 (W : 5 pin)
8 (N.C.)
7 (W : 9 pin) 10 (W : 8 pin)
4 (W : 6 pin)
6 (W : 2 pin)
8050fs6102
2.2.2 Size sensor board (SSB)

10 (W : 5 pin)
11 (W : 6 pin) 12 (W : 3 pin)
a052f5c002ca
2.3 PF-602/HT-504/505
2.3.1 PF drive board (PFDB)
(1) PF drive board
931 (W : 3 pin)
930 (W : 4 pin)
925 (W : 6 pin)
N.C.
928 (BN : 32 pin)
800 (W : 8 pin)
927 (BN : 36 pin)
801 (BN : 32 pin)
852 (BN : 40 pin)
N.C.
N.C.
962 (BN : 5 pin)
853 (BN : 40 pin)
937 (BN : 24 pin)
933 (BN : 7 pin)
934 (BN : 8 pin)
a03xf5c008ca
L -73

2.4 LU-202/HT-503
2.4.1 LU drive board (LUDB)
802 (W : 10 pin)
3 (N.C.)
2 (N.C.)
836 (W : 11 pin)
805 (W : 11 pin)
804 (W : 28 pin)
4 (N.C.)
800 (W : 6 pin)
808 (W : 2 pin)
962 (W : 5 pin)
801 (W : 32 pin)
803 (W : 6 pin)
a03wf5c004ca
806 (W : 15 pin) 835 (W : 12 pin) 1 (N.C.)
963 (GY : 7 pin)
850 (W : 3 pin)
969 (W : 6 pin)
a03wf5c005ca
2.5 RU-509/HM-102
2.5.1 RU control board (RUCB)
5 (11 pin)
3 (12 pin)
95 (30 pin)
2 (24 pin)
N.C.
N.C. N.C. N.C.
6 (10 pin)
N.C.
7 (11 pin)
4 (3 pin)
SW1
N.C.
12 (32 pin)
N.C.
VR1
VR2
VR3
VR4
13 (4 pin)
8 (14 pin)
N.C.
15 (8pin)
11 (4 pin)
14 (9 pin)
9 (12 pin)
97 (10pin)
1 (6 pin)
SW1
1
2
3
4
N.C. 19 (7 pin)
N.C.
10 (6 pin)
98 (7pin)
SW1
ON
When HM
is connected
1
2
3
4
ON
When HM
is not connected
L -74

2.5.2 HM drive board (HMDB)

CN58 (2 pin)
N.C.
CN50 (11 pin)
CN54 (9 pin)
VR 1
CN56 (32 pin)
CN53 (18 pin)
CN57 (4 pin)
CN52 (15 pin)
CN51 (6 pin)

N.C. N.C.
PJ005 (12 pin)
N.C.
PJ008 (14 pin)
PJ012 (8 pin)
PJ010 (10 pin)
PN205 (2 pin)
N.C.
PN201 (3 pin)
PN202 (8 pin)
PN102 (8 pin)
PN105 (2 pin)
PJ001 (2 pin)
PN101 (5 pin)
N.C.
2.5.4 Color density detection board /Y, /M, /C, /K (CDDBY, CDDBM, CDDBC, CDDBK)
431 (4 pin)
433 (4 pin)
435 (4 pin)
437 (4 pin)
L -75

2.5.5 Color density control board (CDCB)

N.C.
157 (6 pin)
N.C.
156 (15 pin)
155 (4 pin)
151 (2 pin)
152 (7 pin)
153 (9 pin)
154 (5 pin)
2.5.6 Color density relay board (CDRLB)
428 (15 pin)
429 (4 pin)
424 (6 pin)
427 (14 pin)
426 (10 pin)
2.5.7 Jam indication board (JAMIB)
370 (6 pin)
L -76

2.6 FS-521
2.6.1 FNS control board (FNSCB)
9 (N.C.) 7 (GY : 24pin)
19 (W : 4 pin)
16 (W : 7 pin)
8 (GY : 34pin)
10 (GY : 3 pin) 12 (N.C.)

22 (N.C.)
20 (W : 4 pin)
23 (N.C.)
SW3
21 (N.C.)
2 (GY : 40 pin)
1 (GY : 32 pin)
14 (GY : 18 pin)
3 (GY : 16 pin)
ON
1 : ON
2 : ON
3 : ON
4 : ON
SW3
1
a0gyf5c005ca
2.6.2 FNS drive board (FNSDB)

62 (GY : 16 pin)
73 (W : 9 pin) 53 (W : 8 pin)
71 (GY : 6 pin)
52 (W : 18 pin)
70 (W : 8 pin)
55 (GY : 15 pin)
61 (GY : 40 pin)
51 (W : 26 pin)
68 (GY : 19 pin)
72 (N.C.)
74 (GY : 9 pin)
67 (W : 18 pin)
56 (W : 22 pin)
65 (GY : 3 pin)
64 (GY : 18 pin)
76 (GY : 4 pin)
69 (GY : 4 pin)
57 (GY : 40 pin)
75 (N.C.)
60 (W : 4 pin)
66 (GY : 34 pin)
50 (GY : 12 pin)
58 (GY : 30 pin)
63 (GY : 32 pin)
54 (W : 15 pin)
59 (GY : 14 pin)
a0gyf5c006ca
2.6.3 Stapler board (STB)

4 (R : 3 pin)
2 (O : 3 pin)
3 (W : 3 pin)
5 (O : 3 pin)
1 (W : 7 pin)
fs503fs5009c
L -77

2.6.4 Operation board (OB)
48 (GY : 4 pin)
a0gyf5c007ca
370 (6 pin)
a0gyf5c008cb
2.7 FS-531
9 (6 pin)
1 (5 pin)
19 (4 pin)
17(8 pin)
18 (34 pin)
35 (4 pin)
20 (30 pin)
3 (4 pin)
2 (7 pin)
7 (36 pin)
8 (12 pin)
10 (18 pin)
14 (5 pin)
16 (11 pin)
12 (36 pin)
11 (10 pin)
N.C.
2.7.2 Relay board (RB)

29(W : 4 pin)
27 (BN : 24 pin)
28 (W : 6 pin)
25 (GY : 22 pin)
23 (W : 10 pin)
N.C.
26 (BN : 6 pin)
22 (BN : 36 pin)
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
L -78

2.8 FS-612
9 (W : 6 pin)
1 (W : 5 pin)
19 (W : 4 pin)
17(W : 8 pin)
18 (BN : 34 pin)
35 (BN : 4 pin)
20 (BN : 30 pin)
2 (W : 7pin)
7 (BN : 36 pin)
8 (GY : 12 pin)
10 (GY : 18pin)
14 (W : 5 pin)
16 (BN : 11 pin)
12 (BN : 36 pin)
11 (W : 10 pin)
13 (BN : 38 pin)
2.8.2 Relay board (RB)

29(W : 4 pin)
27 (BN : 24 pin)
28 (W : 6 pin)
25 (GY : 22 pin)
23 (W : 10 pin)
34 (BN : 13 pin)
26 (BN : 6 pin)
22 (BN : 36 pin)
32 (W : 6 pin)
24 (BN : 38 pin)
31 (GY : 20 pin)
30 (W : 17 pin)
33 (GY : 28 pin)
2.9 PK-512/513
2.9.1 Punch drive board (PDB)
44 (W : 6 pin)
41 (BN : 34 pin)
40 (W : 8 pin)
45 (W : 3 pin)
48 (BN : 11 pin)
47 (BN : 6 pin)
46 (BN : 9 pin)
a04ef5c001ca
2.9.2 Paper size sensor board

25 (BN : 11 pin)
a04ef5c002ca
L -79

2.10 PI-502
2.10.1 PI drive board (PIDB)
53 (BN : 30 pin)
56 (W : 6 pin)
58 (BN : 12 pin)
52 (BN : 38 pin)
54 (W : 8 pin)
57 (BN : 11 pin) 55 (BN : 24 pin)

a04hf5c001ca
2.10.2 PI operation board (PIOB)
1 (BN : 12 pin)
a04hf5c002ca
2.11 LS-505
2.11.1 LS control board (LSCB)
22 (W : 2 pin) 5 (W : 9 pin)
21 (W : 4 pin)
11 (W : 6 pin)
24 (W : 12 pin)
2 (W : 15 pin)
6 (W : 3 pin)
1 (W : 13 pin)
4 (W : 12 pin)
3 (W : 5 pin)
23 (W : 11 pin)
30 (BL : 10 pin)
28 (W : 2 pin)
29 (W : 7 pin)
9 (W : 11 pin)
(N.C.) (N.C.)
26 (W : 5 pin)
8 (W : 8 pin)
27 (W : 4 pin)
12 (W : 6 pin)
25 (W : 6 pin)
13 (W : 7 pin)
14 (W : 2 pin)
10 (W : 10 pin)
20 (W : 4 pin)
18 (W : 7 pin)
19 (W : 3 pin)
15 (W : 12 pin) 17 (W : 6 pin)
7 (W : 14 pin)
16 (W : 13 pin)
ls502fs5005c
2.11.2 Relay board /1 (RLB/1)

4 (W : 17 pin)
1 (W : 3 pin)
2 (W : 2 pin)
3 (W : 4 pin)
ls502fs5006c
2.11.3 Relay board /2 (RLB/2)

4 (W : 17 pin)
1 (W : 3 pin)
2 (W : 2 pin)
3 (W : 4 pin)
ls502fs5007c
L -80

51 (W : 6 pin)
1 (W : 5 pin)
52 (W : 2 pin)
ls502fs5008c
2.11.5 Relay board (RLB)
2 (3 pin)
1 (3 pin)
2.12 FD-503
2.12.1 FD control board (FDCB)
18 (2 pin)
17 (8 pin)
13 (9 pin)*1
N.C.
11 (6 pin)*1
19 (4 pin)
N.C.
16 (7 pin)
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
20 (4 pin)
15 (7 pin)*1
SW3
N.C.
5 (40 pin)
2 (40 pin)
6 (16 pin)*1
1 (32 pin)
14 (18 pin)*1
3 (16 pin)*1
4 (32 pin)
ON
SW3
1
a0h0f5c002cb
*1 The connector of the wiring harness side is blown.
L -81

2.12.2 Punch drive board (PDB)

224 (20 pin)*1 210 (28 pin)
203 (18 pin)*1
201 (40 pin)
220 (24 pin)

219 (26 pin)
208 (9 pin)*1
222 (12 pin)
202 (32 pin)
206 (4 pin)*1
221 (22 pin)
204 (40 pin)
223 (11 pin)*1
209 (34 pin)
215 (8 pin)
N.C.
217 (9 pin)
207 (6 pin)
216 (12 pin)
205 (5 pin)
a0h0f5c003cb
2.12.3 Folding drive board (FDB)

500 (4 pin) 508 (36 pin) 507 (15 pin)*1
501 (34 pin)
503 (16 pin)*1
506 (6 pin)
505 (12 pin)
a0h0f5c004ca
2.12.4 PI drive board (PIDB)

309 (4 pin)
311 (26 pin)
314 (15 pin)*1
313 (8 pin)*1
306 (18 pin)*1
305 (16 pin)*1
318 (7 pin)*1
315 (6 pin)*1
307 (20 pin)*1
308 (3 pin)
N.C.
300 (2 pin)
303 (6 pin)*1
304 (28 pin)
301 (16 pin)*1
302 (32 pin)
fd501fs5013c
L -82

2.12.5 FD operation board (FDOB)
361 (26 pin)
a0h0f5c005ca
370 (6 pin)*1
a0h0f5c006ca

51 (8 pin)
N.C.
1 (3 pin)
a0h0f5c007ca
2.12.8 Multi feed detection board /1, /2 (MFDB1, 2)
490 (3 pin)
a0h0f5c008ca
L -83

2.13 SD-506
2.13.1 SD control board (SDCB)
19 (4 pin)
18 (2 pin)
17 (8 pin)
12 (8 pin)
10 (3 pin)*1
7 (24 pin)
16 (7 pin)
13 (9 pin)
20 (4 pin)
SW3
N.C.
24 (2 pin)
N.C.
5 (40 pin)*2
2 (40 pin)
3 (16 pin)*1
4 (32 pin)*2
14 (18 pin)*1
6 (16 pin)*2
1 (32 pin)
ON
SW3
1 2 3 4
1 : OFF
2 : ON
3 : ON
4 : ON
15anf5c020nd

*2 The connector of the wiring harness side is blue.
2.13.2 SD drive board (SDDB)

101 (6 pin)
153 (36 pin)
144 (30 pin)
164 (8 pin)
148 (6 pin)
143 (6 pin)
141 (15 pin)*1

154 (12 pin)*1
165 (14 pin)*1
162 (6 pin)
147 (8 pin)
155 (8 pin)
142 (11 pin)

146 (22 pin)
157 (12 pin)*1
145 (36 pin)
140 (40 pin)
120 (32 pin)
170 (12 pin)*1
156 (14 pin)*2

152 (12 pin)*2
158 (6 pin)
150 (4 pin)
169 (4 pin)
167 (2 pin)
122 (34 pin)

110 (18 pin)*1
168 (15 pin)*1
121 (40 pin)
166 (4 pin)
163 (6 pin)
126 (40 pin)

127 (30 pin)
100 (4 pin)
125 (32 pin)
151 (40 pin)
149 (30 pin)

15anf5c021nb

*2 The connector of the wiring harness side is gray.
L -84

2.13.3 SD drive board /2 (SDDB/2)

129 (4 pin)
364 (2 pin)
a0h2f5c008ca
180 (8 pin)
N.C.
183 (5 pin)
a0h2f5c009ca
181 (8 pin)
N.C.
184 (5 pin)
a0h2f5c010ca
182 (8 pin)
N.C.
185 (5 pin)
a0h2f5c011ca
2.13.7 Jam indication board /1 (JAMIB/1)
370 (6 pin)*1
a0h2f5c012ca
L -85


2.13.8 Jam indication board /2 (JAMIB/2)
370 (6 pin)*1
a0h2f5c013ca
2.14 PB-503
2.14.1 PB control board (PBCB)
19(34 pin)
16(38 pin)
15(40 pin)
17(36 pin)
20(24 pin)
21(6 pin)*1
62(4 pin)*1
18(36 pin)
36(40 pin)
31(24 pin)
VR2
37(18 pin)*1
32(28 pin)
53(7 pin)*1
30(30 pin)
35(38 pin)
SW2
7(N.C.)
8(N.C.)
5(N.C.)
23(N.C.)
33(20 pin)*1
6(N.C.)
10(N.C.)
11(N.C.)
14(N.C.)
SW1
34(9 pin)
VR4
9(N.C.)
12(N.C.)
4(12 pin)*1
39(3 pin)
22(2 pin)
13(N.C.)
3(2 pin)
2(7 pin)
29(4 pin) 24(8 pin)
38(5 pin)
44(4 pin)
1(3 pin)
ON
1 : ON
2 : OFF
3 : OFF
4 : OFF
DipSW
1
4
a15xf5c001ca
41(7 pin)
45(6 pin)
40(3 pin)
43(3 pin)
46(2 pin)
42(5 pin)
a15xf5c003ca
L -86

2.14.3 PB drive board /1 (PBDB1)

71(12 pin)
83(17 pin)*1
72(13 pin)
85(16 pin)*2 69(5 pin)
79(N.C.)
78(7 pin)
261(2 pin)
260(2 pin)
81(22 pin)*2
73(6 pin)
68(6 pin)
61(4 pin)
51(4 pin)
70(12 pin)
87(24 pin)*2
80(26 pin)*2
86(15 pin)
82(8 pin)
84(12 pin)
52(6 pin)
77(13 pin)
89(11 pin)
74(6 pin)
88(12 pin)*1
76(13 pin)
50(4 pin)
75(12 pin)
57(36 pin)
54(40 pin)
60(N.C.)
55(38 pin)
59(24 pin)
58(34 pin)
56(36 pin)
a15xf5c002ca


305(6 pin)
302(6 pin)*1
303(7 pin)
307(6 pin)
301(7 pin)
306(6 pin)
300(12 pin)
304(10 pin)
a15xf5c004ca

314 (2 pin)
316 (6 pin)
312 (4 pin)
315 (6 pin)
313 (4 pin)
a15xf5c005ca
L -87

2.14.6 Jam indication board /1 (JAMB1)
370 (6 pin)*1
a075f5c021ca
2.14.7 Jam indication board /2 (JAMB2)
370 (6 pin)*1
a075f5c021ca
2.14.8 Manual operation board (OB1)
48 (4 pin)*1
49 (7 pin)*1
a15xf5c018ca
2.14.9 Booklet stock operation board (OB2)
48 (4 pin)*1
49 (7 pin)*1
a15xf5c018ca
2.14.10 DC power supply /1 (DCPU/1)
2 (6 pin)
3 (2 pin)
1 (5 pin)
a15xf5c008ca
L -88

2 (6 pin)
3 (2 pin)
1 (5 pin)
a15xf5c008ca
2 (4 pin)
1 (2 pin)
a15xf5c007ca
2 (6 pin)
3 (2 pin)
1 (5 pin)
a15xf5c008ca
2 (4 pin)
1 (2 pin)
a15xf5c007ca
L -89

2.15 IC-601
2.15.1 System control board (SCB)
1301 (15pin)
2301 (4pin)
2304 (4pin)
3102 (4 pin)
N.C.
3101 (20 pin)
N.C.
2302 (9 pin)
1201 (240 pin)
2101 (4 pin)
2102 (4 pin)
2103 (7 pin)
2104 (7 pin)
2001 (8 pin)
2105 (7 pin)
1101 (240 pin)
2501 (4 pin)
1401 (141pin)
1401 (141pin)
2.15.2 Video interface board (VIB)

701 (3 pin)
N.C.
501 (141 pin)
501 (68 pin)
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
2.16 RU-506
2.16.1 RU control board (RUCB)
1 (3 pin)
7 (4 pin)
22 (4 pin)
5 (6 pin)
N.C.
8 (12 pin)
15 (12 pin)
N.C.
N.C.
11 (13 pin)
6 (4 pin)
4 (19 pin)
SW1
N.C.
9 (7 pin)
10 (9 pin)
21 (11 pin)
SW1
3 (6 pin)
ON
1
2
a0gef5c001ca
L -90

370 (6 pin)
a0gef5c002ca
2.17 GP-501
2.17.1 Punch Controller PCB
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
*2
N.C.
81/2 / A4
Jumper connector *1
*1 Only for A4 base. On A4 base unit, jumper shorts 2 pins to designate A4 paper size to processor.
*2 1200/1200P/1051/950: Use 4-pin connector (Default)
C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000: Use 2-pin connector
L -91
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 3. RELAY

CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWIN...
3. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

3.1.1 Main body front side
750 (BK : 12pin)
696 (W : 6pin)
697 (W : 6pin)
170 (W : 2pin)
698 (W : 6pin)
699 (W : 6pin)
L -92

3.1.2 Main body upper surface
161 (B/W : 3pin)
703 (W : 6pin)
701 (W : 26pin)
615 (W : 6pin)
3.1.3 Main body right side -1

470 (W : 10pin)
443 (W : 12pin)
828 (W : 5pin)
830 (BK : 8pin)
831 (W : 5pin)
833 (BK : 8pin)
834 (W : 5pin)
836 (BK : 8pin)
837 (W : 5pin)
839 (BK : 8pin)
L -93

3.1.4 Main body right side -2
465 (W : 32pin)
466 (W : 10pin)
145 (W : 6pin)
452 (W : 8pin)
479 (W : 3pin)
3.1.5 Main body left side -1

778 (BK : 12pin)
598 (W : 6pin)
L -94

3.1.6 Main body left side -2

751 (W : 12pin)
688 (W : 3pin)
468 (BK : 6pin)
469 (W : 6pin)
592 (BL : 7pin)
588 (W : 6pin)
599 (W : 6pin) 483 (BL : 30pin)
3.1.7 Main body rear side -1

493 (BK : 4pin)
617 (W : 9pin)
614 (W : 3pin)
495 (BK : 6pin)
341 (BK : 7pin)

345 (W : 4pin)
342 (BK : 7pin)

346 (W : 4pin)
343 (BK : 7pin)

347 (W : 4pin)
344 (BK : 7pin)

348 (W : 4pin)
456 (W : 7pin)
457 (W : 4pin)
744 (W : 4pin)
L -95

3.1.8 Main body rear side -2

622 (W : 4pin)
621 (B/W : 7pin)
623B (W : 12pin)
304 (BK : 6pin)
623A (W : 10pin)
292 (BK : 10pin)
293 (W : 4pin)
496 (W : 22pin)
354 (W : 7pin)
355 (W : 4pin)
312 (W : 4pin)
311 (W : 10pin)
294 (BK : 10pin)

295 (W : 4pin)
319 (W : 4pin)
318 (W : 10pin)
296 (BK : 10pin)

297 (W : 4pin)
291 (BK : 3pin)
326 (W : 4pin)
325 (W : 10pin)
298 (BK : 10pin)

299 (W : 4pin)
333 (W : 4pin)
332 (W : 10pin)
504 (W : 8pin)
147 (W : 4pin)
146 (W : 2pin)
1186 (BK : 4pin)
3.1.9 Process unit
377 (W : 22pin)
361 (BK : 60pin)
L -96

3.1.10 Duplex section

649 (W : 10pin)
502 (W : 26pin)
552 (B/W : 3pin) 554 (BK : 3pin)
505 (W : 8pin)
630 (W : 12pin)
521 (W : 32pin)
551 (BK : 3pin)
557 (W : 3pin) 555 (W : 6pin)
648 (B/W : 3pin) 509 (W : 3pin)
693 (B/W : 8pin)
508 (W : 4pin)
3.1.11 Fusing unit

516 (B/W : 6pin)
130 (BK : 25pin)
131 (BK : 17pin)

514 (BK : 30pin)
L -97

3.1.12 Tray
409/423/437 (W : 5pin)
402/416/430 (W : 13pin)
410/415/429 (BK : 44pin)
566/567/568 (W : 2pin)
L -98

3.1.13 HD-514
533 (W : 8pin)
1188 (BK : 8pin)
L -99

3.2 SD-506
3.2.1 Right side
2 (W : 11pin)
1 (W : 7pin)
46 (W : 6pin)
9 (W : 3pin)
5 (W : 6pin)
107 (W : 5pin)
6 (W : 9pin)
10 (W : 2pin)
38 (W : 5pin)
103 (W : 6pin)
104 (W : 6pin) 111 (W : 2pin)

40 (W : 3pin)
a0h2f5c001ca
L -100

3.2.2 Left side

43 (W : 3pin)
45 (W : 6pin)
106 (W : 6pin)
108 (W : 5pin) 105 (W : 6pin)
48 (W : 5pin)
51 (B : 2pin)
36 (W : 6pin)
17 (W : 3pin)
112 (W : 2pin)
37 (W : 9pin)
35 (BK : 2pin)
34 (W : 12pin)
a0h2f5c002ca
L -101

3.2.3 Rear side-1

19 (W : 3pin)
8 (W : 8pin)
50 (W : 2pin) (N.C)
50 (W : 2pin)
20 (B : 3pin)
3 (W : 6pin)
a0h2f5c003ca
3.2.4 Rear side-2

23 (W : 22pin)
39 (W : 11pin)
25 (BK : 8pin)
24 (W : 12pin)
22 (W : 36pin)
16 (W : 6pin)
350 (W : 12pin)
351 (W : 12pin)
a0h2f5c004ca
L -102


21 (W : 6pin)
14 (W : 9pin)
11 (W : 6pin)
12 (W : 3pin)
15 (W : 6pin)
a0h2f5c005ca
L -103

3.2.6 Saddle stitching section-1

13 (W : 3pin)
44 (W : 3pin)
41 (W : 2pin)
40 (W : 2pin)
31 (W : 9pin)
7 (W : 3pin)
27 (W : 3pin)
a0h2f5c006ca
3.2.7 Saddle stitching section-2
33 (W : 10pin)
26 (W : 13pin)
28 (W : 63pin)
32 (W : 14pin) 29 (W : 12pin)
30 (W : 8pin)
a0h2f5c007ca
L -104

3.3 PB-503
3.3.1 Rear side-1
114(B:11pin:LB)
113(B:6pin)
115(B:14pin)
101(B:2pin:LB)
100(B:5pin:W)
109(BK:3pin N.C.)
102(W:7pin)
103(W:12pin)
93(B:6pin:LB)
38(W:6pin)
107(B:5pin)
106(W:5pin)
104(B:5pin)
116(BK:6pin N.C.)
134(W:4pin)
135(W:7pin)
35(W:14pin)
36(W:15pin)
133(W:12pin)
37(W:8pin)
61(BN:15pin)
L -105

3.3.2 Rear side 2

8(BN:4pin)
105(W:8pin)
112(B:5pin:W)
132(BN:14pin)
110(B:11pin:LB)
131(W:3pin)
130(W:6pin)
111(W:5pin)
145(BN:3pin)
CN5(for service)
62(BN:12pin)
7(W:6pin)
117(W:8pin)
L -106

3.3.3 Rear side 3

26(W:13pin)
28(GY/B:24pin)
25(W:12pin)
29(GY:12pin)
41(BN:18pin)
47(W:4pin)
48(BN:6pin)
23(W:9pin)
95(W:12pin)
94(W:13pin)
96(W:6pin)
91(W:9pin)
90(B/W:38pin:LB/W)
57(BN:18pin)
70(W:2pin)
123(W:8pin)
122(W:3pin)
121(W:4pin)
120(BN:15pin)
L -107

3.3.4 Rear side 4

CN28(W:2pin)
43(W:8pin)
42(BN:22pin)
44(BN:6pin)
CN25(W:6pin)
CN27(W:6pin)
CN26(W:5pin)
74(W:4pin)
75(B:3pin)
77(W:3pin)
71(W:9pin)
73(BK:24pin)
L -108

3.3.5 Rear side 5

16(BN:7pin)
19(BN:11pin)
2(W:4pin)
10(BN:20pin)
L -109

3.3.6 Front side
6(GY:11pin)
126(GY:11pin)
5(BN:12pin)
3.3.7 Sub compile (SC) section
24(W:3pin)
20(W:10pin)
21(W:2pin)
27(W:3pin)
L -110

3.3.8 Clamp section
32 (W : 3pin)
33 (W : 2pin)
34 (W : 4pin)
3.3.9 Cover paper supply section
84 (W : 3pin)
82 (W : 3pin)
81 (W : 3pin)
80 (W : 6pin)
83 (W : 3pin)
L -111

3.3.10 Cover paper table section

53 (W : 9pin:GY)
58 (W : 3pin)
52 (W : 3pin)
59 (W : 3pin)
3.3.11 Book stock section
65 (W : 3pin)
L -112

3.3.12 Conveyance section
17 (W : 6pin)
10 (BN : 20pin) 11 (W : 3pin)
12 (BN : 3pin)
3.3.13 Pellet supply section
49 (W : 2pin)
3.3.14 Relay conveyance section
127 (W : 5pin)
L -113
M TIMING CHART > 1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
M TIMING CHART
1.1 Time chart when turning ON the power (in the morning)
[1]
[2][3] [4]
[5]
[6] [7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Item
Scanner motor
(M1)
Forward
Reverse
Exposure lamp (L1)

Fusing heater lamp/1 (L2)
Fusing motor (M29)
Drum motor/Y (M14)
Drum motor/M (M15)
Drum motor/C (M16)
Drum motor/K (M17)
Transfer belt motor (M18)
Polygon motor/Y (M70)
Polygon motor/M (M71)
Polygon motor/C (M72)
Polygon motor/K (M73)
Paper lift motor/1 (M38)
Upper limit sensor/1 (PS30)
[1]
Sub power switch (SW2) ON
[2]
Initial communication between the overall control board

(OACB) and the printer control board (PRCB)
[3]
Home position search of the exposure unit
[4]
Move the exposure unit to the shading correction position1
[5]
Shading correction
[6]
[7]
Move the exposure unit to the home position
[8]
Warming-up completed
[9]
Image stabilization start
[10]
Keep heating till the fusing temperature reaches a

prescribed value
M -1
1.2 Time chart when turning ON the power (not in the morning)
[1]
[2][3] [4]
[5]
[6] [7]
[8]
[9]
Item
Scanner motor
(M1)
Forward
Reverse
Exposure lamp (L1)

Fusing motor (M29)
Drum motor/Y (M14)
Drum motor/M (M15)
Drum motor/C (M16)
Drum motor/K (M17)
Transfer belt motor (M18)
Polygon motor/Y (M70)
Polygon motor/M (M71)
Polygon motor/C (M72)
Polygon motor/K (M73)
[1]
Sub power switch (SW2) ON
[2]
Initial communication between the overall control board

(OACB) and the printer control board (PRCB)
[3]
Home position search of the exposure unit
[4]
[5]
Shading correction
[6]
[7]
Move the exposure unit to the home position
[8]
Warming-up completed
[9]
Fusing temperature reaches a prescribed value
M -2
Item
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
M -3
Reverse/exit motor
(M33)
Reverse
Forward
ADU conveyance clutch/2 (CL2)
ADU reverse motor

(M32)
ADU loop motor

(M57)
Paper exit solenoidSD4
Fusing motor (M29) /R
Fusing motor (M29) /F
Loop motor (M31)
V TOP
Intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL5)
Intermediate conveyance sensor/2 (PS28)
Intermediate conveyance sensor/1 (PS27)
Paper feed sensor/1 (PS29)
Pre-registration clutch/1 (CL8)
Paper feed clutch/1 (CL7)
Print start signal ON

1.3 Full color, full size, DF 1-sided 2 sheets of original, duplex print, paper tray 1 paper feed
M TIMING CHART > 2. DF-622
2. DF-622
2.1 Timing chart of the simplex mode (Reverse exit)
2.1.1 Operation condition
A4, life size, simplex original, 3 sheets of original, reversing exit
2.1.2 Timing chart

L
F
H
Paper feed
motor (M301)
L
R

F
Conveyance
motor (M302)
L
R
H

F
L
H
Reverse/exit
motor (M303)
L
R

Print start signal
a052f5c003ca
2.2 Timing chart of the duplex mode

A4, life size, duplex original, 3 originals
M -4
M TIMING CHART > 2. DF-622
2.2.2 Timing chart

L
F
H
Paper feed
motor
(M301)
L
R
H

F
Conveyance motor
R
(M302)
L
H

L
F
H
Reverse/
exit motor
(M303)
L
R

Print start signal
a052f5e004ca
M -5
M TIMING CHART > 3. PF-602
3. PF-602
3.1 Tray5, A4, 2 sheets of original
Time (sec)
Item

Separation clutch /2 (MC5)
Paper feed clutch /2 (MC4)
Horizontal conveyance clutch /1 (MC10)
Pre-registration clutch (MC12)
Horizontal conveyance clutch /2 (MC11)
Main body: Paper exit sensor (PS13)
Print start signal
a03xf5e007ca
M -6
M TIMING CHART > 4. LU-202
4. LU-202
4.1 A4, simplex, 2 sheets
Paper feed clutch (MC101)
Intermediate conveyance sensor /

1 (PS27)
2 (PS28)
V-TOPsignal
Print start signal

a03wf5e800ca
4.2 A3, simplex, 2 sheets

1 (PS27)
2 (PS28)
V-TOPsignal
Print start signal

a03wf5e801ca
M -7
M TIMING CHART > 5. RU-509/HM-102
5. RU-509/HM-102
5.1 Timing chart of the humidifier OFF mode (bypass conveyance)
Bypass conveyance, humidifier OFF, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, 1 side (face down)
5.1.2 Timing chart

De-curler pressure motor/Lw (M5)
De-curler pressure motor/Up (M6)
Main body paper exit sensor
Print start signal
5.2 Timing chart of the humidification mode

With humidification, A4, original6 pages, 1 copy, duplex
5.2.2 Timing chart

Humidification section entrance conveyance motor (M7)
De-curler pressure motor/Lw (M5)
De-curler pressure motor/Up (M6)
Humidification section roller pressure motor/Rt (M9)
Humidification section roller pressure motor/Lt (M10)
Humidification section gate solenoidt (SD1)
Pump motor (M1)
Print start signal
M -8
M TIMING CHART > 6. FS-521
6. FS-521
6.1 Timing chart of the sort mode
Sort, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, simplex
6.1.2 Timing chart
Item
Signal while in FS operation
Paper exit alignment motor /Fr
(M15)
Paper exit alignment motor /Rr
(M14)
Paper exit alignment plate retraction
motor (M18)
Intermediate roller release solenoid
(SD7)
Paper exit sensor of previous
device
Main tray exit sensor (PS10)
a0gyf5e801ca

Start button ON
6.2 Timing chart of the sub tray mode

Sub tray, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, simplex
M -9
6.2.2 Timing chart

Item
H
L
Paper exit sensor of previous device

fs503fs5011e

6.3 Timing chart of the staple mode

Staple, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, simplex
M -10
6.3.2 Timing chart
Item
Bypass roller release motor
(M12)
Paper exit sensor of previous
device
a0gyf5e802ca

Start button ON
M -11
7. FS-531
7.1.2 Timing chart
Item
FNS conveyance 1000 mm/s
drive motor (M1) 600 mm/s
Paper exit roller 253 mm/s

motor (M7)
600 mm/s
Main tray up down UP
motor (M3)
DOWN
Copy 1 Page 1
Copy 1 Page 2
Copy 2 Page 1
Item
1000 mm/s FNS conveyance
600 mm/s drive motor (M1)
253 mm/s Paper exit roller
600 mm/s motor (M7)

Main tray up down
UP
DOWN motor (M3)
Copy 2 Page 2
Copy 3 Page 1
Copy 3 Page 2
7.2 Timing chart of the flat-stapling mode

2 position flat-staple, A4, 11 originals, 2 copies, simplex
M -12
7.2.2 Timing chart

Item
Close
Alignment motor /
Up (M5)
Open
Stapler, clincher motor /Fr (M14)
Stapler, clincher motor /Rr (M9)
High speed (H)
Paper exit roller
Medium speed (M)
motor (M7)
Low speed (L)
UP
Main tray up down
motor (M3)
DOWN
Print start signal
Copy 1 Page 1
Copy 1 Page 2
Copy 1 Page 3 Copy 1 Page 9
Copy 1 Page 10
Copy 1 Page 11
Copy 2 Page 3
Copy 2 Page 4
Item
Close
Alignment motor /
Up (M5)
Open
Stapler, clincher motor home sensor /Fr (M14)
Stapler, clincher motor home sensor /Rr (M9)
High speed (H)
Paper exit roller
Medium speed (M) motor (M7)
Low speed (L)
UP
Main tray up down
motor (M3)
DOWN
Copy 2 Page 9
Copy 2 Page 10
M -13
Copy 2 Page 11
8. FS-612
8.1.2 Timing chart
Item
FNS conveyance 1000 mm/s
drive motor (M1) 600 mm/s
Paper exit roller 253 mm/s

motor (M7)
600 mm/s
Main tray up down UP
motor (M3)
DOWN
Copy 1 Page 1
Copy 1 Page 2
Copy 2 Page 1
Item
1000 mm/s FNS conveyance
600 mm/s drive motor (M1)
253 mm/s Paper exit roller
600 mm/s motor (M7)

Main tray up down
UP
DOWN motor (M3)
Copy 2 Page 2
Copy 3 Page 1
Copy 3 Page 2
8.2 Timing chart of the flat-stapling mode

2 position flat-staple, A4, 11 originals, 2 copies, simplex
M -14
8.2.2 Timing chart

Item
Close
Alignment motor /
Up (M5)
Open
Stapler, clincher motor /Fr (M14, M15)
Stapler, clincher motor /Rr (M9, M10)
High speed (H)
Paper exit roller
Medium speed (M)
motor (M7)
Low speed (L)
UP
Main tray up down
motor (M3)
DOWN
Print start signal
Copy 1 Page 1
Copy 1 Page 2
Copy 1 Page 10
Copy 1 Page 11
Copy 2 Page 3
Copy 2 Page 4
Item
Close
Alignment motor /
Up (M5)
Open
Stapler, clincher motor home sensor /Fr (M14, M15)
Stapler, clincher motor home sensor /Rr (M9, M10)
High speed (H)
Paper exit roller
Medium speed (M) motor (M7)
Low speed (L)
UP
Main tray up down
motor (M3)
DOWN
Copy 2 Page 9
Copy 2 Page 10
8.3 Timing chart of the saddle stitching mode

Saddle stitching, A4S, 3originals, simplex
M -15
Copy 2 Page 11
8.3.2 Timing chart
Item
Stacker entrance High speed (H)
motor (M13)
Low speed (L)
Close
Alignment motor
/Up (M5)
Open
Close
Alignment motor
/Lw (M16)
Open
Down
Stopper motor
(M18)
Up
Folding transfer High speed (H)
motor (M20)
Low speed (L)
Flat stitching stopper release solenoid (SD7, SD8)
Print start signal
Copy 1 Page 2
Copy 1 Page 1
Copy 1 Page 3
Item
High speed (H) Stacker entrance
Low speed (L) motor (M13)
Alignment motor
Close
/Up (M5)
Open
Alignment motor
Close
/Lw (M16)
Open
Down
Stopper motor
(M18)
Up
High speed (H) Folding transfer

Low speed (L) motor (M20)
Copy 2 Page 1
Copy 2 Page 2
Copy 2 Page 3
8.4 Timing chart of the tri-folding mode

Tri-folding, A4S, 3 originals, simplex
M -16
8.4.2 Timing chart

Item
Gate motor (M12)
Close
Open
Close
Alignment motor /Lw (M16) Open
High speed (H)
Stacker entrance motor (M13) Low speed (L)
Down
Stopper (M18)
Up
Tri-folding gate solenoid (M20)
Print start signal
Item
Gate motor (M12)
Close
Open
Close
Open
High speed (H)
Low speed (L)
Down
Stopper (M18)
Up
Tri-folding gate solenoid (M20)
M -17
M TIMING CHART > 9. PK-512
9. PK-512
9.1 Punch, 2 flat stitching staples, A4, 2 originals, 3 copies, Single side
Item
Main body paper exit sensor (PS37)
Gate motor (M12)
Registration shutter motor (M303)
Registration shutter home sensor (PS307)
Punch motor (M301)
Close
Alignment motor
/Up (M5)
Open
Print start signal
15knf5e800na
M -18
M TIMING CHART > 10. PK-513
10. PK-513
10.1 Punch, 2 flat stitching staples, A4, 2 originals, 3 copies, Single side
Item
Gate motor (M12)
Registration shutter motor (M303)
Registration shutter home sensor (PS307)
Fr
Punch shift motor
(M302)
Rr
Punch motor (M301)
Close
Alignment motor
/Up (M5)
Open
Stapler motor /Fr (M14) clincher motor /Fr (M15)
Stapler motor /Rr (M9) clincher motor /Rr (M10)
Print start signal
15kjf5e800na
M -19
M TIMING CHART > 11. PI-502
11. PI-502
11.1 Timing chart of the PI automatic paper feed mode
PI automatic paper feed (lower step), 2 position flat-staple, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, simplex
11.1.2 Timing chart
Item
Conveyance motor L
(M203)
H
Transfer clutch /Lw (CL202)
PI paper feed pre-require
PI paper feed require
Paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206)
Close
Alignment motor /Up (M5) Open
Gate motor (M12)
Print start signal
15jff5e800nb
M -20
M TIMING CHART > 12. LS-505
12. LS-505
12.1 Timing chart of the straight mode
A4, straight mode, 3 originals, 1 copy setting
12.1.2 Timing chart
Item
Conveyance motor
(M2)
1000 mm/s
L
1000 mm/s
Sub tray exit motor
(M3)
L
H
Grip conveyance
1000 mm/s
motor (M4)
L
Latch ON
Latch OFF
Latch ON
Latch OFF
Latch ON
Job partition
solenoid (SD2)
Latch OFF
Front stopper
solenoid (SD9)
Rear stopper
solenoid (SD3)

Paper exit sensor of previous device ON
ls502fs5009e
12.2 Timing chart of the shift mode

A3, shift mode, 2 originals, 2copies setting
M -21
12.2.2 Timing chart
Item
Conveyance motor
(M2)
1000 mm/s
L
1000 mm/s
Sub tray exit motor
(M3)
L
H
Grip conveyance
1000 mm/s
motor (M4)
L
Latch ON
Front stopper
Latch OFF
solenoid (SD9)
Latch ON
Rear stopper
solenoid (SD3)
Latch OFF
Latch ON
Job partition
solenoid (SD2)
Latch OFF
ls502fs5010e

A4, sub tray mode, 3 originals, 1 copy setting
M -22
12.3.2 Timing chart
Item
Conveyance motor
(M2)
1000 mm/s
L
1000 mm/s
L
H
Grip conveyance
1000 mm/s
motor (M4)
L
Sub tray exit motor
(M3)

Latch ON
Front stopper
Latch OFF
solenoid (SD9)
Latch ON
Rear stopper
solenoid (SD3)
Latch OFF
Latch ON
Job partition
solenoid (SD2)
Latch OFF
ls502fs5011de
12.4 Timing chart of the coupling mode

A4, coupling mode, 3 originals, 1 copy setting
M -23
12.4.2 Timing chart
Item
Conveyance motor
1000 mm/s
(M2)
L
1000 mm/s
Sub tray exit motor
L
(M3)
H
Grip conveyance
1000 mm/s
motor (M4)
L
Latch ON
Front stopper
Latch OFF
solenoid (SD9)
Rear stopper
Latch ON
solenoid (SD3)
Latch OFF
Job partition
Latch ON
solenoid (SD2)
Latch OFF
ls502fs5012de
M -24
M TIMING CHART > 13. FD-503
13. FD-503
13.1 Timing chart of the letter fold-in mode
Tri-folding in, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
13.1.2 Timing chart

Item
Alignment plate motor (M12) F
R
Punch drive motor (M10)
Main tray paper exit motor (M17)

fd501fs5017de
13.2 Timing chart of the letter fold-out mode

Tri-folding out, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
M -25
13.2.2 Timing chart

Item
Alignment plate motor (M12) F
R

fd501fs5018de
13.3 Timing chart of the double parallel mode

Double parallel, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
M -26
13.3.2 Timing chart

Item
F
Alignment plate motor (M12) R

fd501fs5019de
13.4 Timing chart of the half-folding mode

Half-folding, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
M -27
13.4.2 Timing chart

Item
F

fd501fs5020de
13.5 Timing chart of the gate fold mode

Gate folding, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
M -28
13.5.2 Timing chart

Item
Alignment plate motor (M12) FR

fd501fs5021de
13.6 Timing chart of the Z-fold mode

Z-folding, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
M -29
13.6.2 Timing chart

Item
Alignment plate motor (M12)
F
R


fd501fs5022de
13.7 Timing chart of the PI cover paper insertion mode

PI cover insertion, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
M -30
13.7.2 Timing chart

Item
F

fd501fs5023de
Start button ON
13.8 Timing chart of the punch mode

Punch, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
M -31
13.8.2 Timing chart

Item
F

fd501fs5024de
M -32
M TIMING CHART > 14. SD-506
14. SD-506
14.1 Timing chart of the straight mode
Coupling conveyance, A4, 3 originals, 2 copies
14.1.2 Timing chart
Item
sensor /1 (PS2)
sensor /2 (PS3)
exit sensor (PS4)
Main body start signal
15anf5e800nb

Sub tray paper exit, A4, 3 originals, 2 copies
M -33
14.2.2 Timing chart
Item

Horizontal conveyance gate
solenoid (SD3)
sensor /1 (PS2)
15anf5b801nb
14.3 Timing chart of the overlap tri-folding mode

Multi-tri-folding, A4S, 3 originals, 3 copies
M -34
14.3.2 Timing chart
Item
Entrance conveyance
motor (M1)
Right angle
conveyance motor
(M6)
F
R
F
Overlap motor (M13)

R
Right angle conveyance gate
solenoid (SD2)
sensor /1 (PS5)
sensor /2 (PS6)
H
Folding conveyance
motor (M4)
L
R
Folding main scan

alignment motor /Fr
(M7)
Folding sub scan

(M8)
Folding main scan

alignment motor /Rr
(M14)

(M18)
1st
folding
R
2nd folding blade
motor (M19)
2nd
folding

Exit
Folding main scan alignment

home sensor /Fr1 (PS18)
home sensor /Rr (PS19)
sensor /1 (PS20)
sensor /2 (PS21)
sensor /1 (PS22)
sensor /2 (PS23)
(PS24)
Folding sub scan alignment
home sensor (PS56)
15anf5e802nb
M -35
Item
F
R
Right angle
conveyance motor
(M6)
F
Overlap motor (M13)
R
solenoid (SD2)
sensor /1 (PS5)
sensor /2 (PS6)
H
L
Folding conveyance
motor (M4)
R
F
R
F
R
F
R
F
1st
1st
folding
folding
Folding main scan

alignment motor /Fr
(M7)
Folding sub scan
(M8)
Folding main scan
alignment motor /Rr
(M14)
(M18)
R
F
2nd
folding
2nd
folding
2nd folding blade

motor (M19)
R
Exit
Exit

sensor /1 (PS20)
sensor /2 (PS21)
sensor /1 (PS22)
sensor /2 (PS23)
(PS24)
home sensor (PS56)
15anf5e803nb
14.4 Timing chart of the saddle stitching (trimmer) mode

Saddle stitching (with trimming), A3, 5 originals, 2 copies
M -36
14.4.2 Timing chart
Item
Right angle
Overlap motor (M13)
F
R
F
R
Folding conveyance
motor (M4)
F
R
F
R
Folding sub scan

(M8)
H
L
R
F
R
1st folding blade

motor (M18)
F
Folding
Folding
Folding
Folding

Bundle arm motor

(M10)
R
R
F
R

(M20)
Bundle arm rotation

motor (M22)
R
R
Bundle arm assist
motor (M26)
F
R
Stapler motors /Rt (M29), /Lt (M30)
Staple
Clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10)

F
R
Bundle registration
motor (M12)
Bundle press
Bundle press
motor (M23)

down motor (M24)


Trimmer blade motor
(M31)
Trimmer press motor

(M32)
15anf5e804nb
M -37
Item
F
R
F
Overlap motor (M13)
R
F
R
F
R
H
L
R
F
R
F
Folding
Folding conveyance
motor (M4)
Folding sub scan
(M8)
1st folding blade
motor (M18)

F
R
F

R
F
R
F
R
F
R

(M20)

F
R
F
R
Staple
Bundle arm rotation

motor (M22)
Bundle arm assist
motor (M26)
Stapler motors /Rt (M29), /Lt (M30)

Clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10)
F
R
F
R
F
R
F
R
F
R
Bundle registration
motor (M12)
Bundle press
Bundle press
motor (M23)
down motor (M24)

Exit
Exit

F
Trim
Trim
R
F
R
Trimmer blade motor

(M31)
Trimmer press motor
(M32)
15anf5e805nb
M -38
M TIMING CHART > 15. PB-503
15. PB-503
15.1 Timing chart of the sub tray paper exit mode
Sub tray paper exit, A4, 3 originals, simplex
15.1.2 Timing chart
Item
Sub tray exit solenoid (SD4)
15anf5e806ca
15.2 Timing chart of the perfect binding mode (PB cover paper supply)
Perfect Binding, A4, 40 originals, 2 copies, single side, PB cover paper supply
M -39
15.2.2 Timing chart
First book
Next book
Item
(1)
(40)
(10)
(1)
(20)
(30)

F
R
F
R
Open
Close

Clamp motor (M22)
Open
Close
Open
Close
L
R
Booklet Release
Clamp
Upright
Rotation

Forward
F
B
F
B
Backward

Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Rt
(M43)
Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Lt
(M44)
Cover paper table up down motor
/Fr (M46)

Positioning (alignment)
to be trimmed
Open
Close
Down
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Cover paper folding operation
Up
Down
5 seconds waiting
Backward
Cutter motor (M50)
Forward
Cover paper sensor/Rt (PS45)

Positioning
(alignment)

Close
Booklet conveyance belt movement motor (M62) Open
Down of booklet
Down
Booklet conveyance belt up down motor (M63) Up

a15xf5e800ca
(40)
Booklet Release
Clamp
Upright
Rotation
Forward
Backward
to be trimmed
Positioning
(alignment)
Returning to HP
Open
Down
Up
Down
5 seconds waiting
Positioning
(alignment)
Down of booklet
a15xf5e801ca
15.3 Timing chart of the perfect binding mode (Main body cover paper supply)
Perfect Binding, A4, 40 originals, 2 copies, single side, main body cover paper supply
M -40
15.3.2 Timing chart
First book
Next book
Item
(1)
(40)
Change
Cover paper path
(1)
(10)


Clamp entrance movement
motor (M19)
F
R
Open
Close
Up
Down

Clamp motor (M22)
Open
Close
Open
Close
L
R
Booklet Release
Clamp
Rotation
Upright

F
B
F
B
Backward
Forward

Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Rt
(M43)
Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Lt
(M44)
Cover paper table up down motor
/Fr (M46)

Cutter motor (M50)
Open
Close
Down
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Open
Close
Open
Close
Backward
Forward
Returning to HP
Positioning
(alignment)
Down
Open
5 seconds waiting
Cover paper sensor/Rt (PS45)

Booklet conveyance belt movement
motor (M62)
Booklet conveyance belt up down
motor (M63)
Positioning
(alignment)
Close
Open
Down
Up
a15xf5e802ca
Two pages
Change
Cover paper path
(40)
A
Returning
to HP
to be trimmed
Down
a15xf5e803ca
15.4 Timing chart of the relay conveyance mode

Relay conveyance, A3, 2 originals, simplex
* C8000/1200/1200P
M -41
Down
15.4.2 Timing chart
Item
1000mm/s
Entrance
conveyance
motor (M1)
Main body line

speed
Intermediate
conveyance
motor (M2)
Main body line

speed
1000mm/s

SC entrance
conveyance
motor (M11)
SC switchback
conveyance
motor (M12)
1000mm/s
Main body line
speed
1000mm/s
Main body line
speed

Relay conveyance exit sensor (PS94)
1000mm/s
Relay conveyance
Main body line
motor (M92)
speed
Relay conveyance exit motor (M91)
a15xf5e804ca
M -42
M TIMING CHART > 16. RU-506
16. RU-506
16.1 Timing chart of the punch mode (GP-501)
Punch (GP-501), A4, 3 sheets of paper, 2 copies, simplex print
16.1.2 Timing chart

Item
plate solenoid (SD4)
FD alignment
motor (M3)
Up
Down

CD alignment
motor (M4)
Close
Open

Entrance conveyance
motor (M1)
1,250mm/s
Low speed

M -43
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/

C6000
N WIRING DIAGRAM
1.1 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 (1/3)
Main body (1/3)_ A1DUM0NE201CA


1.4 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 (1/3-1)

Main body (1/3-1)_ A1DUM0NE211CA











N -1
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 2. DF-622
2. DF-622
DF-622_A1TWM0NE201CA
N -2
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 3. PF-602
3. PF-602
PF-602_ A0U4M0NE201CA
N -3
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 4. LU-202
4. LU-202
LU-202_ A03WM0NE201CA
N -4
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 5. RU-509/HM-102
5. RU-509/HM-102
RU-509/HM-102_ A2A2M0NE201CA
N -5
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 6. FS-521
6. FS-521
FS-521_A0GYM0NE201CA
N -6
7. FS-531
FS-531_ A2A4M0NE201CA
N -7
8. FS-612
FS-612_A1TVM0NE201CA
N -8
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 9. PK-512/513
9. PK-512/513
PK-512/513_ A04EM0NE201CA
N -9
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 10. PI-502
10. PI-502
PI-502_A04HM0NE201CA
N -10
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 11. LS-505
11. LS-505
LS-505_A0H1M0NE201CA
N -11
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 12. FD-503
12. FD-503
FD-503_A0H0M0NE201CA
N -12
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 13. SD-506
13. SD-506
13.1 SD-506
SD-506_A0H2M0NE201CA
13.2 SD-506 (1/4)

SD-506 (1/4)_A0H2M0NE211CA
13.3 SD-506 (2/4)

SD-506 (2/4)_A0H2M0NE212CA
13.4 SD-506 (3/4)

SD-506 (3/4)_A0H2M0NE213CA
13.5 SD-506 (4/4)

SD-506 (4/4)_A0H2M0NE214CB
N -13
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 14. PB-503
14. PB-503
14.1 PB-503
PB-503_A15XM0NE201CA
14.2 PB-503 (1/4)

PB-503 (1/4)_A15XM0NE211CA
14.3 PB-503 (2/4)

PB-503 (2/4)_A15XM0NE212CA
14.4 PB-503 (3/4)

PB-503 (3/4)_A15XM0NE213CA
14.5 PB-503 (4/4)

PB-503 (4/4)_A15XM0NE214CA
N -14
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 15. IC-601
15. IC-601
IC-601_A213M0NE201CA
N -15
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 16. RU-506
16. RU-506
RU-506_A0GEM0NE201CA
N -16
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 17. GP-501
17. GP-501
GP-501_A0N9M0NE201CA
N -17
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/

C6000 > 1. IN...
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000

1. INTERFACE SECTION
1.1 Configuration
1.1.1 Main body right side
[1]
[2]
[3]
Item
Specifications
[1]
RJ45 Ethernet connector
For Internet ISW, Mail remote notification system
[2]
Serial port (RS-232C)
For CS Remote Care
[3]
Connector for image controller
For IC-306, IC-307, IC-413, IC-601
1.1.2 Main body upper side
[1]
Item
[1]
Specifications
Service port (USB TypeA)
For connecting mouse, key board, USB memory

For ISW of main body, option
O -1

C6000 > 2. SC...
2. SCANNER SECTION
2.1 Configuration
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
CCD board (CCDB)
[2]
CCD unit
[3]
Mirror unit
[4]
Shading correction plate
[5]
Exposure unit
2.2 Drive
[5]
[4]
[1]
FRONT
[3]
[2]
a03ut2c015ca
[1]
Exposure unit
[2]
Scanner wire /Fr
[3]
V-mirror unit
[4]
Scanner wire /Rr
[5]
Scanner motor (M1)
2.3 Operation
2.3.1 Control when the sub power is turned ON
(1) Home position search of the exposure unit
When the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, the exposure unit starts to search the home position after the specified time passed.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a03ut2c016ca
[1]
Home position
[2]
[3]
Platen APS position
(2) Reading of shading correction
After searching the home position, the exposure unit performs shading correction.
The white standard board attached to the rear side of the platen glass is used for the shading correction.
There are 2 types of shading correction: white correction (2 times) and black correction (1 time).
The white correction is performed by reading the white standard board with the exposure lamp (L1) turned ON.
The black correction is performed by reading the brightness with the L1 turned OFF.
To acquire the white correction data, the brightness of each pixel is compared between the first time correction and the second time
correction, and the brighter one is used as a white correction data.
O -2

C6000 > 2. SC...

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
*1
*2
[7]
a03ut2c017ca
[1]
Home position
[2]
[3]
Platen APS position
[4]
White correction (1st time)
[5]
White correction (2nd time)
[6]
Black correction
[7]
Returning the amount moved
*1 DF is closed: The exposure unit stops at the home position.

*2 DF is opened: The exposure unit stops at the platen APS position.
2.3.2 Control when the start button is turned ON

After finishing the movement for the shading correction, the exposure unit shifts to scanning operation automatically.
The other movements of the exposure unit are the same as when the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON.
(1) Original scan mode

There are 2 original reading modes; original cover mode and DF mode.
Whether the density setting is set to manual or AE, the 2 modes differ in movement of the exposure unit.
(a) When in the manual density selection

[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
a03ut2c018ca
[1]
Home position
[2]
[3]
Platen APS position
[4]
[5]
[6]
Exposure scan
[7]
Home position search
(b) When in the AE density selection

[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
a03ut2c019ca
[1]
Home position
[2]
[3]
Platen APS position
[4]
[5]
[6]
AE scan
[7]
Exposure scan
[8]
(2) Original scan control

The light reflected off the original goes to the CCD sensor through the lens.
O -3

C6000 > 2. SC...
The CCD sensor outputs an electric signal (analog) corresponding to the amount of light.
The CCD sensor includes 3 separate photo receivers corresponding to each color R, G and B.
The R, G and B analog signals are individually converted to a digital signal (A/D convert) in the CCD board (CCDB).
The A/D convert is executed by the command of the main body overall control board (OACB).
(3) Original scan timing

When AE/ACS is not set, the exposure unit movement is the same in the original cover mode and the DF.
When AE/ACS is set, the exposure unit movement differs between the original cover mode and the DF.
(a) When AE/ACS not set

[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
a03ut2c020ca
[1]
Home position
[2]
[3]
Platen APS position
[4]
[5]
[6]
Exposure scan (270mm/s)
[7]
(b) When in the AE/ACS setting (original cover mode)

[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
a03ut2c021ca
[1]
Home position
[2]
[3]
Platen APS position
[4]
[5]
[6]
AE/ACS scan (409mm/s)
[7]
Exposure scan (270mm/s)
[8]
O -4

C6000 > 2. SC...
(c) When in the AE/ACS setting (DF mode)

[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
a03ut2c022ca
[1]
Home position
[2]
[3]
Platen APS position
[4]
[5]
[6]
1st sheet AE/ACS scan (409mm/s)
[7]
1st sheet exposure scan (270mm/s)
[8]
Timing of the original replacement
[9]
2nd sheet AE/ACS scan (409mm/s)
[10]
2nd sheet exposure scan (270mm/s)
[11]
Timing of the original replacement
[12]
Last original AE/ACS scan (409mm/s)
[13]
Last original exposure scan (270mm/s)
[14]
2.3.3 Original reading area

The scanning size specified in the user setting menu "Non-Image Area Erase" equals to the original reading area.
Setting for Non-Image Area Erase
Mode
Scanning size
ON
All mode
Original size
APS/AMS mode
APS/AMS mode
Original size
Manual setting
Paper size
Life-size
Paper size
Other than life-size
Original size
Except original glass
2.3.4 Original size detection control

(1) Detection method
The detection method differs between the original cover mode and DF mode.
(a) Original cover mode

Main scanning direction: CCD sensor
Sub scanning direction: Turning ON/OFF of the APS sensors /1 (PS3) and /2 (PS4)
Original size
CCD sensor
(Length of detection: mm)
PS3
(ON/OFF)
PS4
(ON/OFF)
Smallest
102
OFF
OFF
B5S
182
ON
OFF
B5
257
OFF
OFF
B4
257
ON
ON
A4S
210
ON
OFF
A4
297
OFF
OFF
A3
297
ON
ON
81/2 x 11S
215. 9
ON
OFF
O -5

C6000 > 2. SC...

8 1/2 x 11
279. 4
OFF
OFF
81/2 x 14
215. 9
ON
ON
11 x 17
279. 4
ON
ON
(b) DF mode
Refer to DF-622.
(2) Detection timing

(a) Original cover mode
The original size in the main scanning direction is detected twice and the larger one is regarded as the original size.
[1]
[2]
APS sensor/1 (PS3)

APS sensor/2 (PS4)
Exposure lamp (L1)
APS timing sensor (PS2)
ADF open/close switch (RS1)
[1]
First original size detection (Main scanning/Subscanning direction)
[2]
Second original size detection (Main scanning direction)
(b) DF mode
Refer to DF-622.
2.3.5 AE/ACS control

When AE/ACS is selected, the density of the original is detected, and the print density is automatically adjusted.
When ACS is selected, the color of the original is detected, and color or black-and-white print is selected automatically.
(1) AE/ACS sampling area

The original density sampling area for both in original cover mode and DF mode is same as the original reading area.
2.3.6 Image processing

There are following items for the image processing. For details, refer to "O.17.Image processing section."
Photoelectric conversion
A/D conversion
Shading correction
RGB gap correction
Chroma aberration correction
Scanner gamma correction
Area discrimination
Image distinction
ACS processing
Magnification processing
AE processing
Color conversion
O -6

C6000 > 3. WR...
3. WRITING SECTION
3.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[21]
[6]
[20]
[7]
[19]
[8]
[18]
[17]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[16]
[15]
[13]
[14]
[1]
Writing unit /Y
[2]
Writing unit /M
[3]
Writing unit /C
[4]
Writing unit /K
[5]
M1 mirror
[6]
Collimator lens unit
[7]
CY1 lens
[8]
M2 mirror
[9]
Laser drive board (LDB)
[10]
G4 lens
[11]
Skew correction home sensor
[12]
G5 lens
[13]
Tilt correction motor
[14]
Dust-proof glass
[15]
Index mirror
[16]
V-mirror unit
[17]
Index board (IDB)
[18]
G3 lens
[19]
G2 lens
[20]
G1 lens
[21]
Polygon mirror
O -7

C6000 > 3. WR...
3.2 Operation
3.2.1 Exposure path
[1]
[16]
[2]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[3]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[4]
[8]
[7]
[5]
[6]
[1]
M2 lens
[2]
CY1 lens
[3]
G4 lens
[4]
V-mirror unit
[5]
Index board (IDB)
[6]
G5 lens
[7]
Index mirror
[8]
Dust-proof glass
[9]
Drum
[10]
G1 lens
[11]
G2 lens
[12]
Polygon mirror
[13]
G3 lens
[14]
M1 lens
[15]
Collimator lens
[16]
Laser diode
3.2.2 Writing control

The read data converted into digital data in the CCD board (CCDB) is sent to the scanner image processing board (SCIPB).
Image data of the printer operation is sent from the external interface to the overall control board (OACB).
O -8

C6000 > 3. WR...
The read data input in SCIP and the image data input in OACB is sent to the printer image processing board (PRIPB) via the memory
control board/1 (MCB1).
RGB signal is converted into YMCK signal by PRIP and it is divided into the laser drive board of each writing unit /Y, /M, /C and /K.
Each laser drive writes to each drum with the laser beam.
Each laser emits 8 beams with a single laser diode and writes 8 lines in 1 scan.
To prevent the miss-centering of writing images, the writing unit use the INDEX signal which each index board detects to control the writing
start position in the direction of the drum shaft (main scan direction).
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Polygon mirror
[2]
[3]
Drum
Laser beam
3.2.3 Writing area

The available size to write in the main scan direction is up to 321 mm.
321mm
3.2.4 Color registration control

In this machine, the color image is divided into 4 colors; yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K), and each image is formed on
each drum.
These images are combined (intermediate transfer) on the intermediate transfer belt, then transferred (2nd transfer) from the intermediate
transfer belt to paper.
The intermediate transfer positions of each color have to be aligned to prevent the misalignment. The control to prevent the misalignment of
color is referred to as "color registration control."
(1) Type of color registration control

There are following 5 color registration controls.
The 5 controls are carried out for each color correcting yellow (Y), magenta (M), and cyan (C) with reference to black (K).
Correction type
Correction method
O -9

C6000 > 3. WR...
Drift in the main scanning direction
Adjusts the write start timing in the main

scan direction
Drift in the sub scanning direction
Adjusts the write start timing in the sub

scan direction
Entire horizontal magnification
Adjusts the clock frequency for the wire

units
Inclination
Adjusts the angle of the G5 lens (G5 lens

is driven by the laser correction motor)
Partial horizontal magnification
Writing unit Position Adj. (parallelism

adjustment of the writing unit against the
drum)
* Refer to the Timing Adj. of the image
adjustment in the service mode.
Note
To show the symptoms plainly, the sample figures in the table indicate the positions of only 2 colors.
The gap between the upper and lower lines in the sample figures for "Drift in the main scanning direction", "Entire horizontal
magnification" and "Partial horizontal magnification" is not a misalignment. Just for showing the symptoms clearly.
(2) Overview of color registration control

In the color registration control, the color registration marks of each color are formed on the transfer belt (outside of the largest paper
area). The color registration sensors /Fr (PS8) and /Rr (PS9)detect the marks to know how much they are shifted from each other.
If the shift amount falls outside the prescribed range, the image write timing, the clock frequency and the angle of the G5 lens for the
corresponding color are adjusted as necessary.
[13]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[12]
[4]
[11]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[10]
[8]
[9]
a03ut2c108ca
[1]
Drum /Y
[2]
Writing unit /Y
[3]
Drum /M
[4]
Writing unit /M
[5]
Drum /C
[6]
Writing unit /C
[7]
Drum /K
[8]
Writing unit /K
[9]
[10]
Transferring direction
[11]
[12]
[13]
Data processing
(3) Operation procedure of color registration control

(a) Intermediate transfer of color registration mark
The color registration mark like "7" of each black (K), cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y) colors are transferred on the intermediate
transfer belt in that order.
The marks are transferred 2 marks per line, one each on the front and back sides on the belt. The positions of the marks on the belt
correspond to the positions of the color registration sensors /Fr (PS8) and /Rr (PS9).
O -10

C6000 > 3. WR...
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
a03ut2c109ca
[1]
Color registration mark /K
[2]
Color registration mark /C
[3]
Color registration mark /M
[4]
Color registration mark /Y
[5]
[6]
[7]
Transferring direction
(b) The detection method of the color registration mark

PS8 and PS9 detect the edges of the color registration mark like "7" of each color and convert the detected result into digital signals.
The edge detection is performed at 4 points (edges) per mark.
[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
a03ut2c110ca
[2]
[1]
Detecting direction (transferring direction)
[2]
Binarized digital signals
[3]
Detection signal of the color registration sensor /Fr (PS8)

and /Rr (PS9) (analog signal)
[4]
Color registration sensor /Fr (PS8) and /Rr (PS9)
[5]
Color registration mark
(c) Calculation and correction of color misalignment

The interval between the detection of 1 edge of the registration mark and the next edge is recorded rotating the intermediate transfer
belt.
As shown below, each time interval between the edge detections is determined with the counts of clock signal.
Detection signals of the color registration sensors /Fr (PS8) and /Rr (PS9) are recorded separately.
[1]
[5]
0
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
[2]
[4]
150 300
180 330
[3]
a03ut2c111ca
[1]
Detecting direction (transferring direction)
[2]
Address number of the detected edge
[3]
Counts of clock signal corresponding to the address for

each detected edge
[4]
Clock signal
O -11

[5]

C6000 > 3. WR...
Binarized digital signals
The color registration error amount in the main/sub scan direction is calculated by measuring the time difference from the edge
detection of black (K) to the edge detection of other color.
The color registration error amount of the entire horizontal magnification and the skew is calculated by comparing the edge detection
time intervals of black by PS8 and PS9 with the edge detection intervals for each color.
The color registration error amount of the partial horizontal magnification is calculated by comparing the edge detection intervals for
black (K) by PS8 and PS9 with the edge detection interval for each color.
According to the obtained drift amounts, the registration control is performed.
(4) Operation condition of color registration correction control

The color registration control is performed when:
Operation condition 1
The color registration automatic correction is executed in the service mode.
Be sure to perform the above operation when replacing components listed in "4. Adjustment list" in "I Adjustment/Setting".
During warm-up. However, it is not performed if the specified value or higher of fusing temperature is detected when starting the warm-up.
The prescribed number of pages are copied/printed.
A copy/print job is received after the specified time passed.
Changes in temperature detected by the temperature sensor /2 (TEM/HUMS2) fall outside the prescribed range.
Note
One of the operation condition 3 or 5 is selected by the DIPSW26-0 in the service mode.
In the case of the Operation condition 3, the registration control is performed interrupting the copy/print job. This can be
changed with DIPSW in service mode to carry out the control after finishing a copy/print job.
The operation condition 5 is executed when the temperature rises during printing. At this time the JOB is suspended.
In the case of the Operation condition 4 and 5, the color registration correction control is performed at the beginning of the first
copy/print after unity of the operating condition.
The operation condition 5 is executed when the temperature goes down while no printing operated. At this time it is executed
for the first printing.
In the case one of the operation condition 3, 4 or 5 occurs during printing in the black-and-white mode, the color registration
control is not executed. The control is executed if the operation conditions meet when printing in color mode next time.
3.2.5 Front/back sides skew correction in main scan direction

If a image written on the intermediate transfer belt by the write unit /K is skewed in the main scan direction when performing duplex printing,
the image finally printed on front and back sides of paper will be skewed in opposite way.
To correct this skew, adjust the skew of the G5 lens of the write unit /K.
Perform this adjustment manually using the following menus.
"Both Sides Adj." "Chart Adjustment" of the user mode
"Machine Adjustment", "Printer Adjustment", "CD-Mag. Skew Adjustment" of Service Mode
3.2.6 Back side magnification adjustment in sub scan direction

When the back side mag. adjustment is enabled with the utility, the back side magnification adjustment in the sub scan direction is carried
out by changing the number of revolutions of the polygon motor.
To reduce magnification rate in sub scan direction, the number of revolutions of the polygon motor is increased lowering the drive clock rate
which drives the laser.
Set the adjustment value manually using the following menus.
"Both Sides Adj." "Chart Adjustment" of the user mode
"Machine Adjustment", "Printer Adjustment", " FD-Mag. Adjustment" of Service Mode
3.2.7 Image stabilization control

To achieve stable image quality, the following controls are provided. For details, refer to O.16. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL.
MPC (maximum power control)
APC (automatic power control)
Vm adjustment control
Color registration control
Output density correction control
O -12

C6000 > 4. PH...
4. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION

4.1 Configuration
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Drum
[2]
Developing unit
[3]
Erase lamp
[4]
Cleaning blade
[5]
Toner collection screw
[6]
Lubricant
[7]
Lubricant applying roller
[8]
[9]
Drum /K
[10]
Drum /C
[11]
Drum /M
[12]
Drum /Y
4.2 Drive
[2]
[1]
[1]
a03ut2c026ca
Drum motor /Y (M14), /M (M15), /C (M16), /K (M17)
[2]
Drum
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Erase lamp (EL) control
(1) Purpose
Removes the potential remains on the drum.
Uniformizes the potential on the drum.
Lights on at the position of the drum before charging.
(2) Execution timing

Turns ON/OFF synchronizing with the drum motor of each color.

To achieve stable image quality, the following controls are provided. For details, refer to "O.16. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL".
O -13

C6000 > 4. PH...
Drum rotation control

Vm adjustment control
O -14

C6000 > 5. CH...
5. CHARGING SECTION
5.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Charging wire
[2]
Charging plate
[3]
Charging corona /K
[4]
Charging corona /C
[5]
Charging corona /M
[6]
Charging corona /Y
5.2 Operation
5.2.1 Charging control
(1) Charging wire
The high voltage unit /1 (HV1) uses 24V DC to create a negative charge current to the charging wire to charge the drum.
Charging output range: -600A to -1100A
(2) Charging grid

To make the discharge of the charging wire uniform, a minus (-) high voltage is sent from the high voltage unit /1 (HV1) to the charging
grid.
Charging grid voltage output range: -250V to -1000V
O -15

C6000 > 6. DE...
6. DEVELOPING SECTION
6.1 Configuration
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[3]
[4] [5] [6] [7]
[1]
Developer conveyance guide
[2]
Supplying roller
[3]
Agitator screw
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Conveyance screw
[9]
Developing roller
[10]
Developing unit /K
[11]
Developing unit /C
[12]
Developing unit /M
[13]
Developing unit /Y
6.2 Drive
[6]
[7]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a03ut2c102ca
[1]
Agitator screw
[2]
Developing coupling /2
[3]
Developing motor /Y (M20), /M (M21), /C (M22), /K (M23)
[4]
Conveyance screw
[5]
Developing coupling /1
[6]
Developing roller
[7]
Supplying roller
6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Developer conveyance
The developer in the developing unit is agitated by the agitator screw [1] and conveyed to the conveyance screw [2].
The developer around the conveyance screw is conveyed to the developing roller [4] by the feed roller [7] and the developer conveyance
guide [6].
The developer on the developing roller is spread uniformly by the developing regulation plate [5].
O -16

C6000 > 6. DE...
After transferring the developer onto the drum [3], the remained developer on the developing roller is sent back to the conveyance screw
and the agitator screw.
[5]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
a03ut2c039ca
[1]
Agitator screw
[2]
Conveyance screw
[3]
Drum
[4]
Developing roller
[5]
Developing restriction plate
[6]
Developer conveyance guide
[7]
Supplying roller
6.3.2 Developing bias control

(1) Purpose
The developing bias is applied to the developing roller in order to attract toner to the drum surface.
(2) Timing
For details, refer to "D.6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL" in "D OVERALL COMPOSITION".
6.3.3 Developing suction control

To collect the scattering toner around the developing unit, the filter box is equipped.
The main body fan (FM47) [1] is equipped on the exhaust side of the filter box, and the scattering toner is collected in the filter box by being
suctioned.
Cyclonic system is adopted for the suction path in the filter box and it provides more powerful suction power.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Filter box
6.3.4 Developing cooling control

Air is taken to enhance the cooling efficiency around the developing unit
To cool the developing unit, the developing fans /1 (FM45) [1] and /2 (FM46) [2] are provided. Air taken in by FM45 and FM46 is sent to the
developing unit via the attachment of the writing unit [3].
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
O -17

[3]

C6000 > 6. DE...
Writing unit
6.3.5 Toner density detection control

The toner density in each developing unit is read by the TCR sensors /Y (TCRS /Y), /M (TCRS /M), /C (TCRS /C) and /K (TCRS /K).
The toner densities are read constantly at a fixed time interval while the sub power switch (SW2) is ON.
Reading of the toner density is performed at the same time for each color.

To achieve stable image quality, the following controls are provided. For details, refer to "O.16. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL"
Toner density detection control
O -18

C6000 > 7. TO...
7. TONER SUPPLY SECTION

7.1 Configuration
[15]
[14]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[1]
Remaining toner sensor /Y (PZS/Y)
[2]
Remaining toner sensor /M (PZS/M)
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
Remaining toner sensor /K (PZS/K)
[13]
Remaining toner sensor /C (PZS/C)
[14]
Toner supply door open/close sensor (PS54)
[15]
Toner bottle door switch (SW4)
O -19

C6000 > 7. TO...
7.2 Drive
[1]
[11]
[2]
[12]
[10]
[3]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[13]
A
a03ut2c042ca
[1]
Toner supply gear /A (same shaft as C)
[2]
[3]
Toner bottle clutch /M (CL 15)
[4]
[5]
Toner supply gear /A (same shaft as D)
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Bottle motor (M53)
[10]
[11]
[12]
Toner bottle drive gear
[13]
Toner conveyance screw
[14]
Toner supply screw
7.3 Operation
7.3.1 Toner conveyance control
(1) Toner supply control to the toner hopper
When toner level in the toner hopper becomes about 50g, toner bottle motor (M53) and the toner bottle clutches /Y (CL14), /M (CL15), /C
(CL16), /K (CL17) turn ON. With this operation, the toner bottle rotates to replenish new toner.
(2) Toner supply control to the developing unit

(a) When turning ON the power
After a specified period of time since the sub power switch (SW2) turns ON, the TCR sensors /Y (TCRS/Y), /M (TCRS/M), /C (TCRS/C),
and /K (TCRS/K) detect the toner density in each developing unit.
When the detected density is below the reference toner density that is stored in the CPU on the printer control board (PRCB), the toner
supply motors /Y (M49), /M (M50), /C (M51) and /K (M52) are turned ON to supply toner up to the specified density.
(b) While in the print

While in the print operation, each of the TCRS /Y, /M, /C and /K monitors the toner density.
When output voltage of the TCRS /Y, /M, /C, /K is below the reference value, the toner supply motors are turned on to supply toner up
to the specified density.
7.3.2 Remaining toner amount detection control

(1) Remaining toner amount detection control
The remaining toner sensors /Y (PZS/Y), /M (PZS/M), /C (PZS/C), and /K (PZS/K) detect the remaining toner in each toner hopper.
(2) Detection timing

When the sub power switch (SW2) is turned ON
At all times when the printing.
When the front door sensor (PS18) is turned OFF/ON by opening/closing the front door
O -20

C6000 > 7. TO...
(3) No toner display on operation panel

When the value output from the remaining toner sensor still indicates the "no-toner" status even after the toner is supplied to the toner
hopper, it is judged that the toner bottle has run out of toner and the message "Please replace toner bottle" is displayed on the touch
panel.
7.3.3 Stop control of printing without toner

When a message to inform no toner is displayed on the operation panel, the consumption of 50g of toner remains in toner hopper is
detected by the drive time of the toner supply motors/Y (M49), /M (M50), /C (M51), and /K (M52).
When it judges that the 50g of toner is consumed, the printing operation is stopped according to the setting of software DIPSW 1-2, 1-3.
When the toner density in the developing unit gets lower than the specified value while the above operation is enabled, the printing is
immediately stopped right after ejecting paper during printing.
O -21

C6000 > 8. IN...
8. INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER SECTION

8.1 Configuration
[11]
[1]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[2]
[3]
[10]
[9]
[15]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
Belt cleaning blade
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Transfer belt
[8]
Separation claw unit
[9]
[10]
IDC sensor shutter
[11]
Color registration sensor shutter /Fr
[12]
Color registration sensor shutter /Rr
[13]
Toner guide roller
[14]
Toner collection screw
[15]
O -22

C6000 > 8. IN...
8.2 Drive
8.2.1 Transfer belt conveyance /pressure drive
[9]
[8]
[1]
A
[2]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[5]
[11]
[10]
a03ut2c033ca
[1]
[2]
Drum
[3]
[4]
1st transfer roller/C
[5]
1st transfer roller/K
[6]
[7]
Transfer belt
[8]
Belt motor (M18)
[9]
Belt drive roller
[10]
Standby (all released)
[11]
Black-and-white mode (only the 1st transfer roller /K is

pressed)
[12]
Full color mode (all pressed)
[13]
1st transfer roller /K pressure release arm
[14]
Drive coupling
[15]
1st transfer roller /K pressure release cam
[16]
1st transfer roller/Y /M /C pressure release cam
8.2.2 2nd transfer pressure/release mechanism

[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a03ut2c026ca
[1]
[2]
Pressure arm
[3]
[4]
Transfer belt
O -23

C6000 > 8. IN...
8.3 Operation
8.3.1 1st transfer roller pressure/release mechanism
During 1st transfer, the transfer belt [9] is pressed against and released from the drums /Y [8], /M [10], /C [11] and /K [12] by the 1st transfer
roller.
The three first transfer rollers /Y [18], /M [17] and /C [14] are included in the color 1st transfer roller Assy [16] and driven simultaneously.
The 1st transfer pressure/releasemotor (M19) [15] drives the color 1st transfer roller Assy via the 1st transfer roller /C pressure release cam
[7].
M19 drives the 1st transfer roller /K [13] via the 1st transfer roller /K pressure release arm [4] and the 1st transfer roller /K pressure release
cam [6].
The 2 cams rotate synchronously. The difference in shape between the 2 cams enables to move the color first transfer roller Assy between
the 3 positions according to the print mode.
In full color mode, both of the color 1st transfer roller Assy and the 1st transfer roller /K are pressed [3].
In black-and-white mode, only the 1st transfer roller /K is pressed [2].
The rotating position of the cam is detected by the 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15).
The rotation amount of the cam is controlled by the drive force of the M19 that starts to rotate when the PS15 turns OFF.
[18]
[8]
[9]
[17]
[10]
[16]
[15]
[11]
[7]
[6]
[14]
[5]
[12]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[13]
a03ut2c035ca
[1]
In standby mode
[2]
In black-and-white mode
[3]
In full color mode
[4]
1st transfer roller /K pressure /release arm
[5]
Drive coupling
[6]
1st transfer roller /K pressure /release cam
[7]
1st transfer roller /C pressure /release cam
[8]
Drum /Y
[9]
Transfer belt
[10]
Drum /M
[11]
Drum /C
[12]
Drum /K
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
Color 1st transfer roller Assy
[17]
[18]
8.3.2 1st transfer control

(1) 1st transfer operation
Toner on the drum is transferred onto the transfer belt by a DC bias applied to the 1st transfer roller that presses the transfer belt from its
inside.
(2) 1st transfer roller DC bias

The DC bias for the 1st transfer roller changes depending on the following conditions:
Process speed
Black-and-white mode/color mode
Humidity
Number of counts of the use of the 1st transfer roller
Number of counts of the use of the developer
(3) Operation timing

For details, refer to "D.6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL" of "D OVERALL COMPOSITION."
8.3.3 2nd transfer mechanism

The 2nd transfer pressure release motor (M34) rotates the cam [5].
Once the cam pushes the pressure arm [6], the 2nd transfer roller /Lw [7] is pushed up and pressed to the transfer belt unit [4].
The pressure can be switched to "Normal [2]" or "Weak [3]."
(When an image trouble (transfer trouble) occurs on thick paper, set it to "Weak.")
The pressure can be switched on the paper setting screen by setting DIPSW 1-0 to "1."
When the cam rotates more, the pressure to the pressure arm is released and the 2nd transfer roller /Lw lowers to release [1] the pressure
with the transfer belt unit.
O -24

C6000 > 8. IN...

[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a03ut2c036ca
[1]
Release
[2]
Pressure (normal)
[3]
Pressure (weak)
[4]
Transfer belt unit
[5]
Cam
[6]
Pressure arm
[7]
8.3.4 2nd transfer control

(1) 2nd transfer operation
The toner on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper side when paper is conveyed between the transfer belt and the 2nd transfer
roller /Lw.
(2) 2nd transfer roller /Up DC bias

The DC bias for the 2nd transfer roller /Up changes depending on the following conditions:
Process speed
Black-and-white mode/color mode
Humidity
Type of paper
Front/back of paper

For details, refer to "D.6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL" of "D OVERALL COMPOSITION".
8.3.5 Image correction unit shutter mechanism

The image correction unit is provided with a shutter mechanism that covers the sensors while they are not used to prevent them from
contamination.
Color registration shutter solenoid (SD2) [2] drives the color registration sensor shutters /Fr [6] and /Rr [7] which protect the color registration
sensors /Fr (PS8) [5] and /Rr (PS9) [8].
Also, the IDC shutter solenoid (SD3) [1] drives the IDC sensor shutter [3] which protects the IDC sensor (IDCS) [4].
[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[2]
[8]
[1]
a03ut2c037ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
IDC sensor shutter
[4]
IDC sensor (IDCS)
[5]
[6]
Color registration sensor shutter /Fr
[7]
Color registration sensor shutter /Rr
[8]
8.3.6 Belt cleaning blade curling-up prevention control

Creates the toner band on the transfer belt periodically to prevent the belt cleaning blade curling-up and the white line on the print image.
8.3.7 Belt filming prevention control

Once the lubricant in toner attaches to the transfer belt, it causes the image trouble such as white line.
It saves toner between the belt cleaning blade and the toner guide roller. Then it polishes the transfer belt with this toner to prevent the
lubricant adhesion.

To achieve stable image quality, the following controls are provided. For details, refer to O.16. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL.
O -25

C6000 > 9. TO...
9. TONER COLLECTION SECTION

9.1 Configuration
[8]
[9]
[7]
[10]
[11]
[6]
[12]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Waste toner door sensor (PS60)
[2]
Waste toner outlet
[3]
Toner collect box
[4]
Waste toner full sensor (PS52)
[5]
[6]
[7]
Belt collection pipe
[8]
Belt waste toner inlet
[9]
Drum /Y waste toner inlet
[10]
Drum /M waste toner inlet
[11]
Drum /C waste toner inlet
[12]
Drum /K waste toner inlet
O -26

C6000 > 9. TO...
9.2 Drive
[7]
[8]
A
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
a03ut2c044ca
[1]
Drum waste toner inlet
[2]
Horizontal conveyance screw
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Belt collection screw
[7]
Belt motor (M18)
[8]
Belt collection cam
9.3 Operation
9.3.1 Toner collection control
The belt motor (M18) and the paper feed motor (M41) drive the toner collection section.
The transfer belt drive by M18 and the paper feed drive by M41 drive the toner collection.
9.3.2 Detection control of the toner collection box

The waste toner door sensor (PS60) detects the presence of the toner collection box by its ON/OFF.
9.3.3 Toner collection box full detection control

Warning is displayed on the touch panel when the waste toner full sensor (PS52) turns ON.
NVRAM board has a box full counter and starts counting after turning ON PS52.
For the operation conditions, refer to the following table.
PS60
PS52
Box full counter

-
Operation
ON
OFF
Print available
ON
ON
Less than 2500
Warning is displayed on the operation panel when PS52 turns ON.

When the value counted from turning ON of PS52 is less than 2500,
printing is available.
ON
ON
2500 or more
The new job is not accepted.

The job in progress is continued until the counted value reaches
3000.
Printing is stopped at 3000 counts.
O -27

C6000 > 10. P...
10. PAPER FEED SECTION

10.1 Configuration
[1]
[8]
[2]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Paper feed roller
[2]
Separation roller
[3]
Tray1
[4]
Tray 3
[5]
Tray 2
[6]
Lift plate
[7]
Pick-up roller
[8]
10.2 Drive
[17]
[15]
[14]
[23]
[22]
[16]
[13] [12][11] [9] [10]
[27] [21][20]
[19][18]
[8]
[24]
[6]
[4]
[7] [5]
[26]
[25]
[3] [1]
[2]
a03ut2c046ca
O -28

C6000 > 10. P...
[1]
Pre-registration roller /3
[2]
[3]
Drive coupling /3
[4]
[5]
Separation roller /3
[6]
Paper feed roller /3
[7]
Paper feed clutch /3 (CL 11)
[8]
Pick-up roller
[9]
[10]
[11]
Pick-up roller /2
[12]
[13]
[14]
Lift plate
[15]
Lift wire
[16]
[17]
Pick-up roller /1
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
Drive coupling /2
[25]
[26]
[27]
Drive coupling /1
10.3 Operation
10.3.1 Up/down control
(1) Up operation
The lift plate [7] of each tray lies on the both left and right shaft [6].
The lift wires [8] are connected to each shaft and the plate is kept in a horizontal position by the drive pulley [4], one for each of the lift
drive shaft [5] via each pulley [9].
When each lift drive shaft of the trays is rotated by the paper lift motors /1 (M38) [1], /2 (M39) [2] and /3 (M40) [3], each drive pulley winds
up the wire to lift the plate up.
[9]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[4]
[6]
a03ut2c047ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Drive pulley
[5]
Lift drive shaft
[6]
Shaft
[7]
Lift plate
[8]
Lift wire
[9]
Pulley
(2) Down operation

Once each tray is pulled out, the couplings and the lift drive shafts of the paper lift motors /1 (M38), /2 (M39), and /3 (M40) are separated.
The disengagement cuts off the drive force from M38, M39 and M40 to the lift plate shaft, and the plate goes down by its own weight.

When the tray is set, the paper lift motors /1 (M38), /2 (M39), and /3 (M40) turn ON to move the lift plate up.
When the upper limit sensors /1 (PS30), /2 (PS36) and /3 (PS42) are turned ON by the top sheet, M38, M39 and M40 turn OFF.
When PS30, PS36, and PS42 turn OFF by the paper feed, M38, M39, and M40 turn ON again and lift the lift plate until each sensor turns
ON.
10.3.2 Paper size detection control

(1) Size detection in the main scan direction
Paper size is detected by the resistance value of the paper size VR /1 (VR1), /2 (VR2) and /3 (VR3).
The resistance value of VR1, VR2 and VR3 vary depending on the position of the guide plate.
O -29

C6000 > 10. P...
(2) Size detection in the sub scan direction

It is detected by the combination of the ON/OFF status of the paper size sensors /Fr1 (PS33) and /Rr1 (PS34), /Fr2 (PS39) and /Rr2
(PS40), /Fr3 (PS45) and /Rr3 (PS46).
Paper size
Paper size sensors /Fr1 (PS33),

Fr2 (PS39), /Fr3 (PS45)
Paper size sensors /Rr1 (PS34), /

Rr2 (PS40), /Rr3 (PS46)
(VR1), /2 (VR2), /3 (VR3)*1
Paper size VR/1
13 x 19
ON
ON
333.2
SRA3
ON
ON
317.0
SRA4
OFF
OFF
317.0
12 x 18
ON
ON
292.8
A3
ON
OFF
280.4
A4
OFF
OFF
280.4
11 x 17
ON
OFF
252.4
8 1/2 x 11
OFF
OFF
252.4
8K
ON
OFF
237.4
16K
OFF
OFF
237.4
B4
ON
OFF
216.7
B5
OFF
OFF
216.7
8 1/2 x 14
ON
OFF
151.3
8 1/2 x 11S
OFF
OFF
151.3
A4S
OFF
OFF
141.9
8 1/2 x 13
ON
OFF
151.3
B5S
OFF
OFF
97.3
A5S
OFF
OFF
43.2
8 1/2 x 5 1/2 S
OFF
OFF
30.0
*1 Means the VR angle.
10.3.3 Paper feed control

(1) Pick-up control
The paper feed motor (M41) turns ON upon receiving a print start signal [1].
A specified period of time after the start signal is received [1], the pick-up solenoids /1 (SD7), /2 (SD8) and /3 (SD9) and the paper feed
clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL9), and /3 (CL 11) are turned ON [2].
When SD7, SD8 and SD9 turn ON, the pick-up roller descends and presses the paper with its own weight.
The pick-up roller rotates to feed the top sheet to the paper feed roller by using the M41 drive force transmitted by the turning ON of the
CL7, CL9, andCL11.
The subsequent feeding by the pick-up roller is made when the paper feed sensors /1 (PS29), /2 (PS35), and /3 (PS41) detect the rear
end of the previous paper and turn OFF [3].
[1] [2]
[3]

Pick-up solenoid /1 (SD7), /2 (SD8), /3 (SD9)
Paper feed clutch/1 (CL7), /2 (CL9), /3 (CL11)
Paper feed sensor/1 (PS29), /2 (PS35), /3 (PS41)
[1]
Print start signal
[2]
[3]
2nd sheet pick-up
1st sheet pick-up
(2) Separation mechanism

The separation roller [4] is driven in the opposite direction [2] to the paper feed direction [10] via the torque limiter [1].
The separation roller is pressed against the paper feed roller [8] by means of the spring [3] force [9] and the pressure applied from the
torque limiter.
The friction force between the separation roller and the paper feed roller is limited by the torque limiter in order to prevent multi-feed.
When no paper exists between the separation roller and the paper feed roller or when just one sheet of paper is present, the separation
roller is driven by the paper feed roller in the direction of arrow [5] since the torque is over the limit.
When multiple sheets of paper are fed, the separation roller reverses the direction of rotation [2] since the paper friction force is not over
the limit.
When the separation roller rotates in the reverse direction, the lower sheet of paper [7] contacting the separation roller is pushed back
toward the tray [6] and separated.
O -30

C6000 > 10. P...

[8]
[7]
[6]
[9]
[10]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a03ut2c049ca
[1]
Torque limiter
[2]
Rotation in separation direction
[3]
Spring
[4]
Separation roller
[5]
Driven rotation
[6]
Tray direction
[7]
2nd paper
[8]
Paper feed roller
[9]
Pressure
[10]
Paper feed direction
(3) Loop mechanism

The paper passed between the paper feed roller [5] and the separation roller [3] is conveyed to the pre-registration roller [7].
The conveyed paper pushes the actuator [1] and the actuator turns ON the paper feed sensors /1 (PS29), /2 (PS35) and /3 (PS41) [6].
A specified period of time after the paper feed sensors /1 (PS29), /2 (PS35) and /3 (PS41) turn ON, the paper feed roller stops to form a
loop [2] before the pre-registration roller. In this way, a paper skew is adjusted.
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[1]
[3]
[2]
a03ut2c050ca
[1]
Actuator
[2]
Loop
[3]
Separation roller
[4]
Pick-up roller
[5]
Paper feed roller
[6]
Paper feed sensor /1 (PS29), /2 (PS35), /3 (PS41)
[7]
(4) Pre-registration control

The pre-registration roller is driven by the paper feed motor (M41) via the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL8), /2 (CL10) and /3 (CL12).
When paper feeding is started with the pick-up roller, CL8, CL10 and CL12 are turned OFF not to drive the pre-registration roller.
The fed paper is conveyed to the pre-registration roller which is stopped and hits against it to create a loop [2]. In this way, a paper skew
is adjusted.
A specified period of time after the loop is created and the paper feed sensors /1 (PS29), /2 (PS35) and /3 (PS41) turn ON, CL8, CL10
and CL12 turn ON [3] and the pre-registration roller starts to rotate to convey the paper.
The paper feed clutches /1 (CL7), /2 ( CL9) and /3 (CL11) are kept being ON for a specified period of time after CL8, CL10 and CL12 turn
ON to assist the paper conveyance with the paper feed roller so that the pre-registration roller nips the paper completely.
When pre-registration operation [5] for the second and subsequent papers is performed, CL8, CL10 andCL12 turn OFF [6] after the
specified period of time passed from when the PS29, PS35, and PS41 turn ON so that the operation does not interrupt feeding of the
previous paper.
When the intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) turns ON upon detecting the leading edge of the previous paper,CL8, CL10
andCL12 turn ON again [7] and restart the pre-registration.
[1]
[2]
[4][6] [7]

Pick-up solenoid/1 (SD7), /2 (SD8),/3 (SD9)
Paper feed clutch/1 (CL7), /2 (CL9),/3 (CL11)
Pre-registration clutch/1 (CL8), /2 (CL10), /3 (CL12)
Paper feed sensor/1 (PS29), /2 (PS35), /3 (PS41)
Intermediate conveyance sensor/1
[3]
[5]
[1]
Print start signal
[2]
Loop formation of the 1st sheet of paper
[3]
1st sheet pre-registration
[4]
Loop formation of the 2nd sheet of paper
O -31

C6000 > 10. P...

[5]
2nd sheet pre-registration
[6]
[7]
2nd sheet pre-registration restarted
2nd sheet pre-registration paused
10.3.4 Remaining paper detection control
Remaining amount of paper in the tray is detected by the paper near empty sensors /1 (PS32), /2 (PS38) and /3 (PS44) [2].
As the papers get lower, the actuator [6] on the front side of the tray is gradually rotated.
PS32, PS38 and PS44 turn ON/OFF each time the slits [3], [4] and [5] of the actuator passes through.
The main body control section counts the number of ON/OFF switching of PS32, PS38 and PS44 to detect the paper remaining amount in 4
levels.
Slit count
Paper remaining amount
Remaining indication on the touch panel
100 to 75%
4 lit
75 to 50%
3 lit
50 to 25%
2 lit
25 to 0%
1 lit
[2]
[1]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
Rotation direction when lift plate goes up
[2]
Paper near empty sensor /1(PS32), /2 (PS38), /3 (PS44)
[3]
Slit
[4]
Slit
[5]
Slit
[6]
Actuator
O -32

C6000 > 11. V...
11. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION

11.1 Configuration
[1]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
11.2 Drive
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
a03ut2c057ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Coupling
[4]
11.3 Operation
11.3.1 Vertical conveyance control
The vertical conveyance section conveys paper fed from the tray 1, 2, 3 to the intermediate transfer section of the duplex section.
The pre-registration roller /1 conveys paper fed from the tray 1 directly to the intermediate conveyance roller /2 of the intermediate
conveyance section (duplex section).
The intermediate conveyance roller /1 assists the conveyance of paper fed from the tray 2 and 3 since the distance to the intermediate
conveyance roller /2 is long.
The paper feed motor (M41) drives the intermediate conveyance roller /1 via the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (CL13).
CL13 turns ON at the same time as paper feed clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL9) and /3 (CL11).
CL13 turns OFF after a specified period of time since the intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) turns ON.
O -33

C6000 > 12. R...
12. REGISTRATION SECTION

12.1 Configuration
[6]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[1]
Loop roller
[2]
[3]
Registration driven roller
[4]
Registration temperature sensor (TEMS1)
[5]
Registration roller
[6]
12.2 Drive
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
a03ut2c059ca
[1]
Loop motor (M31)
[2]
Loop roller
[3]
Registration roller
[4]
12.3 Operation
12.3.1 Loop control
All papers are passed through the loop roller, and conveyed to the registration roller.
Loop motor (M31) that drives the loop roller stops after specified time passed from when the registration sensor (PS22) turns ON upon
detecting the leading edge of paper.
Because the registration motor (M30) is OFF at that time, the leading edge of paper is pressed against the registration roller that is not
moving. The paper forms a small loop before M31 turns OFF.
Making paper form a loop enables to correct skew of the paper.
[6] [7] [8]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[9]
[2]
[1]
a03ut2c060ca
[1]
[2]
O -34
Loop roller

C6000 > 12. R...

[3]
Registration loop
[4]
Registration roller
[5]
[6]
Transfer belt unit
[7]
[8]
[9]
12.3.2 Registration operation
After a specified period of time when receiving a print job [1], the loop motor (M31) turns ON to rotate the loop roller.
Paper conveyed from the intermediate transfer section or the duplex section is conveyed to the registration roller by the loop roller.
When the registration sensor (PS22) detects the leading edge of paper and turns ON, M31 turns OFF after a specified period of time.
Because the registration motor (M30) is OFF at that time, the leading edge of paper is pressed against the registration roller that is not
moving. The paper forms a registration loop [2] before M31 turns OFF.
In this way, a paper skew is adjusted.
Once the transfer belt pressure of the image process section completes, V_TOP signal is created.
After a specified period of time since the V_TOP signal turns ON, M30 and M31 turn ON to execute the registration.
[1]
Loop motor (M31)
V TOP
[2]
[3]
a03ut2e093ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
2nd sheet registration loop
1st sheet registration loop
12.3.3 Paper leading edge timing adjustment control

The time period from when the registration motor (M30) starts to rotate until the leading edge sensor (PS63) detects the leading edge of
paper is counted.
Based on the counted time, the time when the paper gets to the 2nd transfer section is estimated.
If the estimated arrival time is earlier/later than the proper arrival time, the deceleration timing of the registration roller and the loop roller line
speed is adjusted to meet the arrival timing.
The timing correction control is carried out for every sheet of paper.
12.3.4 Registration speed control

When restarting registration, the registration roller and loop roller conveyance speed are adjusted according to the ambient temperature
detected by the registration temperature sensor (TEMS1).
The TEMS1 measures the temperature at regular intervals.
The speed of the registration speed correction control is the same as normal line speed when TEMS1 detection temperature is 25 C.
O -35

C6000 > 13. F...
13. FUSING SECTION

13.1 Configuration
[1]
[7]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Fusing lamp assy /Up (L2, L3, L4)
[2]
[3]
[4]
Fusing roller /Lw
[5]
Fusing roller /2
[6]
Fusing roller /1
[7]
Fusing belt
13.2 Drive
[5]
[1]
[6]
[4]
[7]
[8]
[2]
[3]
a03ut2c078ca
[1]
Fusing motor (M29)
[2]
Cam (for pressing fusing roller /Lw)
[3]
Same gear
[4]
Fusing paper exit roller /Lw
[5]
Fusing Roller/1
[6]
Fusing Belt
[7]
Fusing roller /2
[8]
Fusing roller /Lw
13.3 Operation
13.3.1 Fusing roller drive control
(1) Fusing process speed table
The process speed of the fusing section of C7000/C7000P/C70hc has 5 types; 315mm/s and 300mm/s (high speed), 225mm/s and
207.7mm/s (middle speed), 150mm/s (low speed).
For C7000/C7000P/C70hc, each of the high speed and middle speed has 2 types of process speed. The types are switched automatically
depending on the environment temperature.
The process speed of the fusing section of C6000 has 3 types; 300mm/s (high speed), 207.7mm/s (middle speed), 150mm/s (low speed).
The process speed of fusing differs depending on the selected speed per weight and the gloss per paper type.
Paper weight
Paper type
Plain, Fine, Color
64g/m2 to 135g/m2
Coated-GL, Coated-GO, Coated-ML, Coated-MO
No gloss
Glossed
No gloss
Glossed
High
Middle
O -36

C6000 > 13. F...

75g/m2 to 80g/m2
High
Middle
81g/m2 to 105g/m2
High
Middle
High
Middle
106g/m2 to 135g/m2
User select
Low
User select
Low
136g/m2 to 162g/m2
Middle
Low
Middle
Low
163g/m2 to 209g/m2
Middle
Low
Middle
Low
210g/m2 to 300g/m2
Low
Low
Low
Low
(2) Fusing process speed correction control

This control is for keeping the proper loop of paper between the 2nd transfer section and the fusing unit.
The loop amount of paper increases when the paper conveyed from the 2nd transfer roller /Lw [4] is nipped [1] with the fusing roller /Lw
[8] and the process speed changes between the 2nd transfer and fusing.
The fusing loop sensor (PS64) [5] is equipped between the 2nd transfer roller /Lw and the fusing roller /Lw, and the paper which forms a
loop by the process speed change turns ON PS64.
When PS64 is OFF, the fusing process speed is normal. However, the speed is corrected to the higher speed for the specified range
when PS64 turns ON.
The correction control of the fusing process speed is applied to all of high speed, middle speed, and low speed.
[10]
[1]
[9]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a03ut2c079ca
[1]
Proper loop
[2]
Transfer belt
[3]
[4]
[5]
Fusing loop sensor (PS64)
[6]
Actuator
[7]
Large loop
[8]
Fusing roller /Lw
[9]
Fusing roller /2
[10]
Fusing belt
13.3.2 Pressure/release control

Normally, the fusing roller /Lw and the fusing belt are pressed.
Once the fusing operation completes, the pressure between the fusing roller /Lw and the fusing belt is released right after the last paper
passes the fusing paper exit sensor (PS17).
The pressure/release is executed by moving the fusing roller /Lw up and down with the drive assy.
The cam driven by the fusing motor (M29) moves the fusing roller /Lw and the drive assy up and down.
The actuator is provided on the drive shaft of the cam, and the fusing release home sensor (PS16) decides the home position of the cam
with this actuator.
The one-way clutch is provided on the drive transmission path from M19 to the drive gear, and the drive force when M29 rotates in reverse
is transmitted only to the cam.
[5]
[1]
[6]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a03ut2c080ca
[1]
Release
[2]
O -37
Drive gear for pressure/release

C6000 > 13. F...

[3]
Cam
[4]
Fusing roller /Lw
[5]
Gear for driving fusing roller /Lw
[6]
Pressure
13.3.3 Fusing temperature control

(1) Fusing temperature detection
The fusing heater lamps /1 (L2), /2 (L3) and /3 (L4) heat the fusing roller /1.
The fusing belt is heated by heat transferred from the fusing roller /1.
The fusing heater lamp /4 (L5) heats the fusing roller /Lw.
The temperature sensors /1 (TH1) and /3 (TH3) detect the surface temperature of the fusing belt.
The temperature sensors /2 (TH2) and /4 (TH4) detect the surface temperature of the fusing roller /Lw.
Each temperature sensor monitors the surface temperatures of the fusing belt and the fusing roller /Lw on the specified interval and turns
ON/OFF L2, L3, L4, and L5 per AC drive board (ACDB) so that the temperatures are within the specified value.
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
a03ut2c081ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
(2) Fusing heater control

Turning ON/OFF the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2), /2 (L3), /3 (L4) and /4 (L5) differs depending on the mode.
L2
L3
L4
L5
In warm-up
Mode
ON
ON
OFF
*2
In standby
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Mode change
ON
ON
OFF
ON
In printing
ON
*1
OFF
ON
Low-power mode
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Return from low-power

mode
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Shut-OFF mode
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
*1 Turning ON/OFF L3 in printing differs depending on the paper size in the main scan direction and the temperature detected by the
temperature sensor /3 (TH3).
*2 Turning ON/OFF L5 in warm-up differs depending on the temperature detected by the temperature sensor /2 (TH2).
13.3.4 Malfunction protection

When the fusing temperature sensors /1 (TH1), /2 (TH2), /3 (TH3) and /4 (TH4) detect the temperature higher than the specified
temperature continuously for a specified period of time, it is judged as a high temperature abnormality, turn OFF the power relay (RL1) and
stop the machine after releasing the intermediate transfer, the 2nd transfer and the fusing pressure.
When the fusing temperature sensors /1 (TH1), /2 (TH2), /3 (TH3) and /4 (TH4) detect the temperature lower than the specified temperature
continuously for a specified period of time, it is judged as a high temperature abnormality, turn OFF the power relay (RL1) and stop the
machine after releasing the intermediate transfer, the 2nd transfer and the fusing pressure.
When the thermostat /1 (TS1) and /2 (TS2) reach to the specified temperature, it cut off the power line to the fusing heater lamp /1 (L2), /2
(L3) and /3 (L4).
When the thermostat /3 (TS3) reaches to the specified temperature, it cut off the power line to the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5).
When the fusing temperature abnormalities occur, the system gets into an SC latch condition and the message is displayed on the operation
panel.
After identifying the cause of the error and repairing, it is necessary to make the release and recovery operations of SC latch with the
software DIPSW 3-1.
O -38

C6000 > 13. F...
RL1
CBR
NF
FUSCB1
AC
drive
section
RL
drive
section
L2
TS1 TS2
L3
FUSCB2
L4
TS3
L5
ACDB
PRCB
TEMS/4
TEMS/3
TEMS/2
TEMS/1
Control section
13.3.5 Fusing roller /Lw cooling control

When the temperature of the fusing roller /Lw [2] detected by the temperature sensor /2 (TH2) is higher than the set temperature and the
gap is more than the specified value, the fusing cooling fan (FM65) [4] turns ON and cools the fusing roller /Lw.
When FM65 is ON, turn OFF the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5).
Air is taken from the front side by the fusing cooling fan (FM65) and cools the fusing roller /Lw via the duct [3].
Air which passed the fusing roller /Lw is exhausted to the rear side via the duct [1].
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a03ut2c083ca
[1]
Duct
[2]
Fusing roller /Lw
[3]
Duct
[4]
13.3.6 Fusing recovery control

When a jam that has a possibility to leave the paper in the fusing section occurs, a piece of blank paper is fed to remove the dirt on the
fusing belt after cleaning the jam.
The fusing recovery control is executed when the SoftwareDIPSW 5-4 is set to ON.
When the SoftwareDIPSW 5-4 is set to ON and a jam occurs, the selection screen that asks whether to execute the fusing recovery control
appears on the control panel after cleaning the jam.
The process speed on the fusing recovery control is 200mm/s.
The fusing recovery control can be selected for the jam that has a possibility to leave the paper in the fusing section.
13.3.7 Fusing air separation control
The fusing air separation mechanism is provided to prevent the wrapping jam to the fusing belt which occurs when printing thin paper.
The fusing separation fans /1 (FM7), /2 (FM8), and /3 (FM9) on the fusing unit execute the fusing air separation control.
FM7, FM8, and FM9 blow air to the paper which passes through the fusing belt to separate paper from the fusing belt.
The execution of the fusing air separation control and the air speed (7 steps) of FM8, FM9, and FM7 can be selected on the operation
panel.
When the fusing air separation control is set to be executed, FM7, FM8, and FM9 are turned ON after the specified time since the print start
signal turns ON. Then, they are turned OFF when the fusing paper exit sensor (PS17) detects the trailing edge of the last paper or when the
fusing release home sensor (PS16) detects other than the home position.
O -39

C6000 > 13. F...

[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
O -40

C6000 > 14. D...
14. DUPLEX SECTION

14.1 Configuration
[15]
[1]
[3]
[13]
[16]
[4]
[2]
[14]
[6]
[12]
[10]
[7]
[8]
[11]
[5]
[9]
[1]
ADU pre-registration roller
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
ADU loop roller
[8]
[9]
ADU reversal roller
[10]
ADU gate
[11]
ADU centering sensor (PS65)
[12]
[13]
ADU conveyance roller /1
[14]
[15]
[16]
14.2 Drive
[14] [15]
[16][17]
[18]
[19][20]
[21]
[1][2]
[13] [12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7] [6]
[5] [4]
[3]
a03ut5c062ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
ADU loop roller
[9]
Belt
[10]
ADU reversal roller
[11]
Belt
[12]
ADU loop motor (M57)
[13]
ADU reverse motor (M32)
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
Belt
[19]
[20]
[21]
Coupling
14.3 Operation
14.3.1 Paper reverse control
(1) Paper conveyance
During paper conveyance, the ADU gate [1] is open.
O -41

C6000 > 14. D...
Paper conveyed from the reverse roller /Lw [2] is conveyed to the ADU reverse roller [3] through the ADU gate.
Paper conveyed to the ADU reverse roller is then conveyed to the ADU loop roller [4].
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
a03ut2c063ca
[1]
ADU gate
[2]
Reverse roller /Lw
[3]
ADU reversal roller
[4]
ADU loop roller
(2) Loop creation

When the ADU stop sensor (PS20) [3] detects the trailing edge of paper and turns OFF, ADU loop roller [5] stops after the specified time
passed.
While the paper is stopped with its leading edge nipped by the ADU loop roller, the ADU reverse roller [4] continues to rotate.
The ADU reverse roller stops after the trailing edge of the paper passed through. (after the specified time passed from when the ADU loop
roller stops.)
The above operation of 2 rollers makes the paper form a loop [1] between the ADU loop roller and the ADU reverse roller.
When the paper is forming the loop, its rear edge is pressed against the ADU reverse roller. This enables to correct skew of the paper
before starting the reverse paper conveyance.
[3]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[1]
a03ut2c064ca
[1]
Loop
[2]
ADU gate
[3]
[4]
ADU reversal roller
[5]
ADU loop roller
(3) Reverse paper

When the ADU reverse roller [6] stops, the ADU gate [4] closes.
After the specified time passed from when the ADU reverse roller stops, the ADU loop roller [8] and ADU reverse roller rotate reversely at
the same time.
Paper is conveyed in the reverse direction keeping the loop [3], and because the ADU gate is closed, it is conveyed to the ADU
conveyance roller /1 [5].
By means of the above operations, the paper is turned upside down.
Then, paper is conveyed to the ADU conveyance rollers /2 [7] and /3 [3], ADU pre-registration roller [1], and loop roller [9] and printed on
the back side.
[5]
[6]
[4]
[7]
[3]
[8]
[9]
[2]
[1]
a03ut2c065ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Loop
[4]
ADU gate
[5]
[6]
ADU reversal roller
[7]
[8]
ADU loop roller
[9]
Loop roller
O -42

C6000 > 14. D...
14.3.2 ADU conveyance control

When the front side of the first sheet is fixed [2], after receiving a print start signal [1], the ADU loop motor (M57) and the ADU reverse motor
(M32) start to rotate in the forward direction.
When the ADU stop sensor (PS20) detects the trailing edge [3] of the first sheet while the paper is conveyed to the reverse paper exit
section, the M57 stops to stop the ADU loop roller.
The M32 turns OFF after the M57 turns OFF. The above operation of 2 rollers makes the paper form a loop [4] between the ADU loop roller
and the ADU reverse roller.
After a specified period of time since PS20 turns OFF [3], ADU gate solenoid (SD10) turns ON [5] and close the ADU gate.
At the same time, the M57 and M32 start to rotate in reverse direction to convey the paper reversely.
When the ADU conveyance sensor (PS61) employed in the conveyance section by the reverse conveyance detects the trailing edge of the
paper [6], M57 and M32 changes from reverse to forward. SD10 also turns OFF to open the ADU gate again, and prepare for the 2nd sheet
conveyance.
[1]
[2]
[3] [6]
[9]

V TOP
ADU loop motor
(M57)
Forward
ADU reverse motor

(M32)
Forward
Reverse
Reverse

[4][5] [7][8]
[1]
[2]
Fusing completion of 1st sheet front side
[3]
Detection of 1st sheet trailing edge
[4]
Loop formation of the 1st sheet
[5]
Close ADU gate
[6]
Detection of 2nd sheet trailing edge
[7]
Loop formation of the 2nd sheet of paper
[8]
Close ADU gate
[9]
Fusing completion of 1st sheet back side
14.3.3 Back side centering correction control

The ADU centering sensor (PS65) detects the edges of the paper that has been reverse conveyed from the ADU reverse roller for back side
printing.
Depending on the detected value of PS65, the distance from the center to the edge of paper is calculated, and the laser writing position is
adjusted so that the image is precisely centered on the printed page.
O -43

C6000 > 15. R...
15. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION

15.1 Configuration
[1]
[1]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Reverse gate
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Exit roller
[6]
Reverse roller /Lw
[7]
Small size roller
[8]
[9]
15.2 Drive
15.2.1 Reverse/exit drive
[7]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a03ut2c070ca
[1]
De-curler motor (M55)
[2]
[3]
Small size roller
[4]
Reverse roller /Lw
[5]
[6]
[7]
Reverse gate
O -44

C6000 > 15. R...
15.2.2 Paper exit drive/OT-502 drive

[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a03ut2c071ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Cam
[4]
OT-502
[5]
OT paper exit roller
[6]
Exit roller
15.3 Operation
15.3.1 Conveyance control
(1) Reverse/exit switching control
The paper exit path for the paper conveyed from the fusing section is switched by the paper exit gate.
The paper exit solenoid (SD4) drives the paper exit gate.
The switching of the paper exit gate differs depending on the print mode and the paper exit type.
(2) Conveyance path

(a) Straight paper exit
The straight paper exit is applied to the face up exit in both of the simplex print mode and the duplex print mode after printing the back
side.
[6]
[5]
[7]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a03ut2c072ca
[1]
Fusing section
[2]
[3]
Reverse gate
[4]
[5]
OT-502 (option)
[6]
Exit roller
[7]
(b) Duplex section conveyance path

The duplex section conveyance path is applied after the face down exit in the simplex print mode and the front side print in the duplex
print mode.
O -45

C6000 > 15. R...
[5]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a03ut2c073ca
[1]
Fusing section
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
OT-502 (option)
[6]
Reverse gate
(3) Reversing exit

The reversing exit is applied to the face down exit in both of the simplex print mode and the duplex print mode after printing the back side.
[11]
[10]
[12]
[13]
[1]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
a03ut2c074ca
[1]
Fusing section
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Small size roller
[6]
Reverse roller /Lw
[7]
De-curler sensor (PS62)
[8]
[9]
[10]
OT-502 (option)
[11]
Exit roller
[12]
[13]
Reverse gate
15.3.2 Reverse/exit timing control

In the face down paper exit, paper conveyed from the fusing section is conveyed to the reverse de-curler roller via the lower side of the
reverse gate.
With the forward rotation of the de-curler motor (M55), the reverse de-curler roller conveys paper to the small size roller.
With the forward rotation of the reverse/exit motor (M33), the small size roller and the reverse roller /Lw convey paper to the duplex section
reverse section.
When the decurler sensor (PS62) detects the trailing edge of paper and turns OFF [2], M55 and M33 switch to reverse rotation.
Each roller rotates in reverse and conveys paper in reverse. However, paper is conveyed not to the reverse gate side but to the paper exit
roller because of the guide shape of the conveyance path.
With this operation, paper is exited with its front side and back side switched.
When the paper exit sensor (PS13) detects the trailing edge of paper and turns OFF [3], M55 and M33 switch to forward rotation again and
performs reverse/exit for succeeding paper.
O -46

C6000 > 15. R...

[1]
Decurler motor
(M55)
(QTYCTF
Reverse paper
exit motor (M33)
(QTYCTF
4GXGTUG
4GXGTUG

Reverse paper exit sensor (PS19)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a03ut2e075ca
[1]
[2]
Reverse conveyance of 1st sheet
[3]
Paper exit of 1st sheet
[4]
Reverse conveyance of 2nd sheet
[5]
Paper exit of 2nd sheet
15.3.3 Paper exit de-curler roller pressure control

(1) Paper exit de-curler roller pressure mechanism
The paper exit de-curler roller [1] which is the pair of the paper exit roller is pressed by the rotation of the cam [2].
The paper exit motor (M54) drives the cam.
The forward rotation of M54 exits paper, and the reverse rotation of M54 presses the cam.
The encoder [3] is provided on the same shaft of the cam. The home position is judged when the paper exit pressure sensor (PS10) [4]
detects the slit of the encoder.
Depending on the position of the cam, the pressure amount of the paper exit de-curler roller has 4 steps; release [8], weak pressure [7],
middle pressure [6], strong pressure [5]. These pressure powers are controlled by the rotation time of M54 which starts from turning OFF
of PS10.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
a03ut2c076ca
[1]
[2]
Cam
[3]
Encoder
[4]
[5]
Pressure power: Strong
[6]
Pressure power: Middle
[7]
Pressure power: Weak
[8]
Release
(2) Print mode and paper exit de-curler roller pressure amount
The pressure power of the paper exit de-curler roller differs depending on the print mode.
Print mode
Pressure power
In standby, in processing jam
Release
Straight paper exit mode
Pressure power: Weak
Duplex mode
Pressure power: Middle
Reversing exit mode
Pressure power: Strong
15.3.4 Reverse de-curler roller rotation control

(1) Purpose
Minimize the roller shape deformation caused by leaving the reverse de-curler roller to prevent the rotation unevenness, etc.
Minimize the temperature unevenness of the de-curler roller front side after the continuous printing to prevent the color unevenness.

Turn the de-curler motor (M55) in the following condition and rotate the reverse de-curler motor.
O -47

C6000 > 15. R...

Device condition
Paper remaining amount
Rotation speed
rotation direction
While in standby
While the stabilization operation

is in progress
High speed
Reverse
After the printing ends
For 5 minutes
High speed
Reverse
Note
When the printing operation starts during the operation after printing ends, printing operation takes priority.
After the printing ends, whether to operate or not can be selected by the software DIPSW3-2.
Default setting does not operate.
15.3.5 Paper exit full detection control

When OT-502 (option) is installed to the paper exit section, paper exit full detection control operates.
While the paper exit full sensor (PS12) of OT-502 is ON and prints a specified sheet of paper or when the ON mode is continued for a
specified period of time, the sensor judges as OT-502 tray is full, stops the printing operation and display the message on the operation
panel.
O -48

C6000 > 16. I...
16. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL

16.1 Outline
16.1.1 Outline
In order to realize the top quality print images at all times, this machine conducts various types of control for image stabilization.
The image stabilization control is divided roughly into 2 types; the image stabilization control performed when the sub power switch (SW2) is
turned ON and one performed after SW2 has been turned ON.
The image stabilization control after turning ON SW2 has 2 types; image stabilization batch correction control and stabilization control
between images.
16.1.2 Image stabilization control when the power switch (SW2) is ON

(1) Purpose
Set each condition to execute printing.
Acquire each type of basic information required for each control.
(2) Operation condition

(3) Control
Environmental decision control
MPC/APC control
Note
For details on each control, refer to "O.16.2 Image stabilization control when the power switch (SW2) is ON".
16.1.3 Image stabilization batch correction control

(1) Purpose
It is performed to correct the image density change caused by such as the long downtime, the change of the environmental temperature/
humidity or the change of materials and process peculiarity due to the large amount of continuous printing.

1. When the sub power switch (SW2) is not turned ON for a specified period of time. However, when any of the developer count value of Y,
M, C, or K is less than the specified value, the time is the half of the specified time.
2. When the difference between the value detected by the humidity sensor at a constant interval and the value detected after the image
stabilization control is performed last time is larger than a specified value.
3. When a prescribed number of prints has been made since the previous image stabilization control was performed. However, when any of
the developer count value of Y, M, C, or K is less than the specified value, the print number is the half of the specified number.
4. When the initial adjustments of TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y), /M (TCRS/M), /C (TCRS/C) and /K (TCRS/K) are performed.
5. When the adjustment values of process system are changed.
6. When the execution of Gamma Automatic Adjustment is mentioned in the manual.
Note
When any of 1 to 4 conditions above is met while in warm-up, the image stabilization batch correction control is performed.
While in idling or in warm-up and any of 1 to 5 conditions above is met after the specified time since any of the button on the
operation panel is pushed, the image stabilization batch correction control is performed.
When any of 1 to 5 conditions above is met at starting the printing after the above condition, the image stabilization batch
correction control is performed.
When the number of printing exceeds the specified number of the condition 3 during the continuous printing, stop the printing
once and perform the image stabilization batch correction control. Then, restart the printing.
(3) Contents of the control

TCR sensor process speed correction
Base line correction
Maximum density correction
V0 correction
Dot diameter correction
Gamma correction
Note
The TCR sensor process speed correction is performed only when the sub power switch (SW2) is not turned ON for a specified
period of time.
For details on each control, refer to "O.16.3 Image stabilization batch correction control".
16.1.4 Stabilization control between images

(1) Purpose
It is performed to guarantee the image stability more when the stability priority mode is selected.

It is performed between the papers while printing.
O -49

C6000 > 16. I...
Note
Because the image stabilization control between images is performed between the papers during continuous print, the
productivity is not decreased.

Dot diameter correction between images
Stabilization priority periodic adjustment
Short gamma correction
Note
For details on each control, refer to "O.16.4 Stabilization control between images".
16.1.5 Other image stabilization controls

Other image stabilization controls are as follows.
Charge potential automatic adjustment
Pre-agitation when left unused
Note
For details on each control, refer to "O.16.5 Other image stabilization controls".
16.2 Image stabilization control when the power switch (SW2) is ON

16.2.1 Image stabilization control flow with SW2 ON
The following shows the flow of the operation of the image stabilization control when the power switch (SW2) is turned ON.
This control is performed at the time when the SW2 is turned ON. After that, the Image stabilization batch correction control and the
Stabilization control between images are performed depending on the operation conditions. However when the operation conditions are not
met, no control is performed.
Environmental decision control
MPC/APC
16.2.2 Drum rotation control

(1) Purpose
To prevent drum charge dissipation such as an image running at a high humidity.
When left unused at a low or normal humidity, to prevent an uneven density due to the difference in sensitivity between the cleaning unit
area and the developing unit area on the drum.
(2) Method
(a) When the fusing temperature is lower than the prescribed value when the sub power switch (SW2) is turned
ON.
The drum is rotated for a specified period of time while in warm-up.
(b) The fusing temperature at the sub power switch (SW2) turned ON is higher than the prescribed value.
When at a high humidity, a specified period of time after the SW2 turns ON, check the machine if it is in the fusing warm-up condition.
When it is not in the Ready condition, rotate the drum for a specified period of time.
When the fusing warm-up condition is completed within a specified period of time after the SW2 turns ON, the machine is considered to
be in the Ready condition at that time and no rotation of the drum is made.
Under low/normal humidity conditions, the drum is rotated slightly at constant intervals based on the humidity and the period of time that
the product is left to stand.
16.2.3 Environmental decision control

(1) Purpose
To achieve high print quality, the temp/humidity sensor /1 (TEM/HUMS1) detects the environmental temperature and humidity and feed
back the findings to the various types of controls to maintain the image at a fixed quality.

After the SW2 has been turned ON, detection is made constantly at a specified interval.
16.2.4 Color registration control

(1) Purpose
It is performed in order to correct the misalignment in main or sub scanning direction, misalignment in entire or partial horizontal
magnification or skew misalignment.
O -50

C6000 > 16. I...
(2) Method
The color registration sensors /Fr (PS8) and /Rr (PS9) read a patch image created on the intermediate transfer belt.

(a) When the sub power switch (SW2) is turned ON
When the fusing temperature is lower than the prescribed value when the sub power switch (SW2) is turned ON.
(b) In ready
When no print operation is performed for a specified period of time.
When a specified period of time elapses after completion of the previous correction.
(c) While in the print

After every specified number of prints or when the temperature-humidity sensor /2 (TEM/HUMS2) detects a value which differs more
than a specified value from the previous value (select either one with the software DIPSW26-0).
(d) Others
When adjusting in the service mode.
Note
Therefore the color registration control is performed at times other than turning ON the sub power switch (SW2).
The correction made by control differs depending on the performed timing.
16.3 Image stabilization batch correction control

16.3.1 Image stabilization batch correction control operation flow
Image stabilization batch correction control operation flow is shown below.
TCR sensor process speed adjustment
Base line correction
Maximum density correction
V0 correction
Dot diameter correction
Gamma correction
16.3.2 TCR sensor process speed adjustment

(1) Purpose
To adjust the variation of the toner density control between the process speeds that is changed by the part degradation caused by the
environment or the durability.
To prevent the photo conductor charge dissipation such as an image running at a high humidity.
To stabilize the characteristic of the developer in the morning.
(2) Method
Performs the pre-agitation of the developing unit for a specified time and sets the standard Vc for the standard speed.
Performs the agitation at 3 process speeds 300mm/s, 207.7mm/s, and 150mm/s. Then detects the gap between the Vc and the standard
Vc at each process speed to correct the speed of the developing unit by itself.
Calculates the Vc correct values for the process speeds at 315mm/s and 225mm/s from the correct values of 3 speeds mentioned above
and correct them.
In this way, the stable toner density control that is not based on the process speed is performed.
Note
TCR sensor process speed adjustment is performed only in the morning.
16.3.3 Base line correction

(1) Purpose
Preliminary preparation for the maximum density correction, dot diameter correction and gamma correction.
To correct the sensitivity of the IDC sensor (IDCS) which measures the density of the toner transferred on the intermediate transfer belt to
keep it constant considering of the dirt on the sensor, the degradation of the intermediate transfer belt, and the environmental change.
(2) Method
While driving the intermediate transfer belt, turns ON the LED of the IDC sensor (IDCS) and corrects the applied voltage to the LED so
that the reflect light volume from the intermediate transfer belt becomes the specified volume.
O -51

C6000 > 16. I...
For the accuracy enhancement and time crunch, it has 2 steps to correct; rough adjustment and fine adjustment.
16.3.4 Maximum density correction

(1) Purpose
To maintain the maximum density of the image at a fixed condition at all times without being influenced by the environmental conditions
and the number of prints.
(2) Method
Creates the patch of each color; Y, M, C, and K with the developing DC bias which is currently set, and measures the patch density with
the IDC sensor (IDCS).
Calculates the proper developing DC bias value of each color based on the proportional relation of toner adhesion to the intermediate
transfer belt of each color that is guessed from the developing DC bias value and measured value of the IDC sensor (IDCS) at creating
the patch.
16.3.5 V0 correction
(1) Purpose
To charge the drums appropriately compensating for deterioration of related parts, and the effects of ambient conditions.
(2) Method
Determines the V0 potential target value based on the developing DC bias, background margine fixed value, environmental humidity, and
slide distance of the developer.
Calculates the grid voltage Vg as the V0 potential target value for each process speed by color based on the process speed, external
temperature, and slide distance of the photo conductor .
16.3.6 Dot diameter correction

(1) Purpose
It is performed for each sheet while in the continuous print to keep the reproducibility of the halftone or thin lines at a prescribed level,
regardless of the sensitivity change of the drum or dirt on the write system
(2) Method
Changes the laser light volume (MPC) and creates the pattern for the dot diameter correction of each color.
Calculates the laser light volume (MPC) as the standard density based on the laser ON time for creating the above pattern and the
detected density of the IDC sensor (IDCS).
16.3.7 Gamma correction

(1) Purpose
The input/output data is corrected to obtain the prescribed gradation peculiarity on each screen.
(2) Method
Creates the patch on the intermediate transfer belt and reads it with the IDC sensor (IDCS).
The sensor output level read is checked against a predetermined output level with respect to print density, and the gamma is corrected
16.4 Stabilization control between images

16.4.1 Image stabilization control between images operation flow
Image stabilization batch correction control operation flow is shown below.
Dot diameter correction between images
Stabilization priority periodic adjustment
Short gamma correction
16.4.2 Dot diameter correction between images

(1) Purpose
To keep the density variation between images constant for the continuation print in the image stability priority mode.
To perform the 2nd transfer cleaning at the same time and collect the toner adhered on the 2nd transfer roller.
(2) Method
Creates the patches of Y, M, C, and K between paper in the continuation print while applying the reverse bias to the 2nd transfer.
Reads the above patches with the IDC sensor (IDCS) and corrects the laser light volume (MPC).
Calculates the line width overlapped voltage with each type of parameters and adds it to the grid voltage for printing.
O -52

C6000 > 16. I...
16.4.3 Stabilization priority periodic adjustment

(1) Purpose
To perform the adjustment of each item to recover it to the normal condition, when the correction of the grid voltage by the dot diameter
correction between images exceeds the limit.
(2) Method
Releases the 2nd transfer and then performs the base line correction, maximum density correction, and dot diameter correction to recover
the grid voltage which is corrected through the dot diameter correction between images to the center value.
16.4.4 Short gamma correction

(1) Purpose
To keep the density variation between images constant for the continuation print in the image stability priority mode.
Perform the dot diameter correction between images at the same time to keep the density variation more constant.
(2) Method
Creates the patches of Y, M, C, and K between paper in the continuation print while applying the reverse bias to the 2nd transfer.
Reads the above patches with the IDC sensor (IDCS) and uploads the gamma data.
16.5 Other image stabilization controls

16.5.1 Pre-agitation when left unused
(1) Purpose
To agitate the toner in the developing unit automatically when the idling status persists for more than a prescribed period of time.

The idling status persists for more than a prescribed period of time.
When restarting the print after a specified time passed since the last printing ended.

Performs the developer pre-agitation.
The speed is 300mm/s.
O -53

C6000 > 17. I...
17. IMAGE PROCESSING SECTION

17.1 Image processing in the scanner section
17.1.1 Image processing flow in the scanner section
The image process flow of the scanner section is shown below. (C7000, C6000 only)
3 lines CCD sensor
R G B
Photoelectric conversion
A/D conversion
Shading correction
RGB gap correction
(Correction between lines)
Chroma aberration correction
Gradation adjustment
(Scanner gamma correction)
ACS process
Area discrimination
Magnification processing
Image distinction
AE control
Image distinction signal
Color convertion
M
C
K
600dpi/8bit
17.1.2 Photoelectric conversion

The condensed color CCD sensor converts the reflection from the original into the digital signal.
17.1.3 A/D conversion

It combines the analog signal outputted from CCD into the 10bit digital signal.
17.1.4 Shading correction

This is a measure to obtain an even distribution from light of the CCD. It corrects the reading unevenness caused by the uneven sensitivity
of each pixel of the CCD sensor or the uneven lighting of the exposure lamp.
17.1.5 RGB gap correction

Corrects the position difference of each RGB chip of the CCD sensor.
17.1.6 Chroma aberration correction

It corrects the chroma aberration of the lens used by scanner.
17.1.7 Gradation adjustment

Selects the density curve corresponding to the density value set in the quality adjustment on the operation panel.
Set the proper density curve corresponding to the setting value of the text/photo distinction and color text distinction.
17.1.8 Area discrimination

To make a copy of the original under the correct condition (to make a correct filter processing), check the read section to see if it is a
character or a dot picture, and use the results at the control section of the unit at the later stage.
17.1.9 Image distinction

A scanned image type is classified as text, dots, solid or chroma and the result is used for later control process.
17.1.10 ACS processing

Judges whether the original is color or black-and-white.
O -54

C6000 > 17. I...
17.1.11 Magnification processing

The main scan direction magnification is made by processing images electrically.
The sub scan direction magnification is roughly made by processing images electrically, and precise magnification is made by changing the
scan speed of the exposure unit (original glass mode).
17.1.12 AE control
The output density is automatically corrected to the value suited to the original density by the AE control.
17.1.13 Color conversion

Converts the RGB data into each density data in YMCK.
17.2 Image processing in the write section

17.2.1 Image processing flow in the write section
The image process flow of the write section is shown below.
Scanner
600dpi/8bit
Image controller
Y M C
600dpi/8bit Y
Compressing the image data
M C
1200dpi/8bit
Compressing the image data
600dpi/8bit
600dpi/8bit
DRAM/HDD
Image expansion
Image expansion
1200dpi/8bit
600dpi/8bit
Cell average
600dpi/8bit
Noise addition
1200dpi/8bit
600dpi/8bit
Skeletonization/Reversed text enhancement
1200dpi/8bit
600dpi/8bit
Smoothing
600dpi/8bit
Outline emphasis
1200dpi/8bit
600dpi/8bit
Density balance
600dpi/8bit
1200dpi/8bit
Gradation correction gamma
1200dpi/8bit
600dpi/8bit
600dpi
1200dpi conversion
1200dpi/8bit
Screen processing
1200dpi
Delay control between drums
1200dpi
PWM gamma
PWM gamma
PWM gamma
PWM gamma
PWM conversion
PWM conversion
PWM conversion
PWM conversion
Writing
unit /Y
Writing
unit /M
Writing
unit /C
Writing
unit /K
17.2.2 Image compressing (Image controller)

To secure the output productivity, it shorten the handling time of the image memory (DRAM, HDD) by compressing the image data of
1200dpi (to be equivalent to 600dpi) using our unique circuit built in the image controller.
17.2.3 Image compressing (Scanner)

To secure the output productivity, it shorten the handling time of the image memory (DRAM, HDD) by compressing each image data.
O -55

C6000 > 17. I...
17.2.4 DRAM, HDD

Stores each image data in the memory.
17.2.5 Image expansion (Scanner)

Expands the data which is compressed to equivalent to 600dpi to 600dpi, 8bit.
17.2.6 Cell average (Scanner)

Prevents moire caused by frequency interference between the original and the screen process while in screen output.
17.2.7 Image expansion (Image controller)

The image data equivalent to 600dpi degenerated and compressed by the image controller is expanded to 1200dpi, 8bit.
17.2.8 Noise addition

Prevents the texture pattern from occurring on the repeated pattern.
17.2.9 Skeletonization/Outline letter emphasis

(1) Making line weight thinner
To reduce the letter growing due to the dot gain or the toner spillage at printing, the pixel output level of the text or thin lines is decreased.
(2) Outline letter emphasis

When processing the outline letters, the letters are slimmed down by the surrounding dots due to the dot gain at printing. To prevent this
condition, it outputs the lines thicker by decreasing the output pixel level of the text edge.
17.2.10 Smoothing (Scanner)

To smooth the edges of the texts, diagonal lines and curve, half tone color is put on the outline of the texts.
17.2.11 Outline emphasis

By outlining the edge of dither texts, stair-like jaggy is reduced.
17.2.12 Density balance

It adjusts the density difference on the image data to balance the density in printing.
17.2.13 Gradation correction gamma

The densities of the input image data and the printed image are not proportionate due to the peculiarity of the drum or developing section.
Therefore this correction is performed to make the printed gradation smooth.
17.2.14 Screen processing

Various screens (15 types) are provided for 1200 dpi to improve the print quality (gradation and granularity).
Data conversion from 600dpi into 1200dpi is performed before this process.
17.2.15 Delay control between drums

Output delay control is performed for Y/M/C/K drum installation distance by storing image data in the DRAM for drum distance delay control.
17.2.16 PWM gamma

Sets the pulse width in accordance with the image density.
17.2.17 PWN conversion

It controls the light emission of the laser of the write unit in accordance with the pulse width.
17.2.18 Write unit /Y, /M, /C, /K

The drum is exposed by 8 beams from the laser diode under light emission control.
O -56

C6000 > 18. P...
18. POWER SOURCE SECTION

18.1 Operating parts with the connection of the power cord
RL1
CBR
SW1
SW3
NF2
18.1.2 Operation
The AC line is provided with a circuit breaker (CBR) which cuts off the AC line by itself immediately when the power plug is set and an
excessive current flows due to a short circuit.
Also, it reduces the noise which comes from the power line with the noise filter (NF2).
18.2 Operating parts with the main power switch (SW1) ON

RL1
DCPS2
SW2
SW1
CBR
DCPS1
5VDC
OACB
18.2.2 Operation
When turning ON the main power switch (SW1), the AC power source is supplied to the DC power supply/1 (DCPS1).
DCPS1 generates 5VDC and supplies it to the over all control board (OACB). In this way, OACB waits for the sub power switch (SW2)
turned ON.
Since the DC power for driving RL1 is not supplied to the AC drive board (ACDB), the power relay (RL1) is turned OFF and the AC power is
not supplied to the DC power supply/2 (DCPS2).
The AC line is provided with a circuit breaker (CBR) which cuts off the AC line by itself immediately when an excessive current flows due to
a short circuit while in SW1 ON.
O -57

C6000 > 18. P...
18.3 Operating parts with the sub power switch (SW2) ON

SW2
SW1
5VDC
CBR
DCPS/1
MCB1
OACB
12VDC
24VDC
12VDC
PRCB
5VDC
GP
PK
RL1
DCPS/2
24VDC
NF2
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
PF
LU
FS
RU
PI
DF
RL1
L2, L3, L4, L5

AC drive
section
RL3
FUSCB1
FUSCB2
SW3
DH
RL2
LU/PF (OPTION)
DH1
D2H
ACDB
18.3.2 Operation
When turning ON the sub power switch (SW2), the over all control board (OACB) sends the control signal to the DC power supply/1
(DCPS1).
DCPS1 supplies the power; 5VDC, 12VDC, 15VDC, or 24VDC to each control board such as the printer control board (PRCB).
DCPS1 sends the control signal to the AC drive board (ACDB) to drive the power relay (RL1) and turns ON the RL1.
In this way, AC power is supplied to the DC power supply/2 (DCPS2) and 24VDC power is supplied to all drive boards and optional devices.
Supply the AC power operated for flicker by the fusing control board /1 (FUSCB1) and /2 (FUSCB2) to the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2), /2
(L3), /3 (L4) and /4 (L5), and start the initial operation.
The sub relay (RL2) is turned OFF and AC power supply to the dehumidifier heater (DH), the dehumidifier heater/1 (DH1) in the PF/LU, or
the dehumidifier heater/2 (DH2) (only for PF) is cut off.
18.4 Power cord

[3]
[2]
[1]
O -58

C6000 > 18. P...

[1]
230V 24A (Europe, AP, etc.)
[2]
[3]
200V 24A (Japan)
208V to 240V 24A (North America, etc.)
18.5 Operating parts with the dehumidification heater switch (SW3) ON

SW1
CBR
SW3
NF2
RL2
DH
LU/PF (OPTION)
DH1
DH2
ACDB
18.5.2 Operation
The dehumidifier heater switch (SW3) supplies the AC power line to the sub relay (RL2) in the AC drive board (ACDB).
RL2 is connected to the dehumidifier heater (DH), the dehumidifier heater/1 (DH1) in the LU (option), or the dehumidifier heater/2 (DH2)
(only for PF) while the main power switch (SW1) is OFF.
In this way, when SW3 is turned ON while SW1 is OFF, the AC power is supplied to DH and DH1/DH2.
When SW1 and the sub power switch (SW2) are turned ON, 24VDC is supplied to ACDB and RL2 is turned OFF. Therefore, the AC power
line to DH and DH1/DH2 is cut off even when SW3 is ON.
O -59

C6000 > 19. F...
19. FAN CONTROL

19.1 Configuration
[18]
[19]
[20] [21] [22] [23] [24]
[25] [26] [27] [28]
[29]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14] [13] [12] [11]
[10]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
HDD unit cooling fan /2 (FM82) (Option)
[7]
HDD unit cooling fan /1 (FM81) (Option)
[8]
IPB fan /2 (FM6)
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
Paper exit cooling fan /2 (FM62)
[22]
Paper exit cooling fan /3 (FM63)
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
IPB fan /1 (FM5)
[29]
19.2 Operation
19.2.1 Power supply cooling fans /1 (FM1), /3 (FM3), and /4 (FM4) control
(1) Purpose
To cool the DC power supply /1 (DCPS1) and /2 (DCPS2).
(2) Low speed/high speed switch timing

Rotates at low speed during standby
Switches to high speed upon starting of printing.
Switches to low speed a specified period of time after printing is finished.
19.2.2 Scanner cooling fan (FM2) control

(1) Purpose
To cool the scanner section.
(2) ON timing
Starts to operate upon starting of scanning
However, always ON during DF scanning
(3) OFF timing

Stops to operate upon finishing of scanning
19.2.3 IPB fans /1 (FM5) and /2 (FM6) control

(1) Purpose
To cool around the main board unit.
O -60

C6000 > 19. F...
(2) ON timing

Starts to operate upon starting of printing
Starts to operate upon starting of scanning
Starts to operate upon starting of HDD
(3) OFF timing

Stops to operate upon starting of printing
Stops to operate upon starting of scanning
Stops to operate upon starting of HDD
19.2.4 Fusing separation fans /1 (FM7), /2 (FM8), and /3 (FM9) control

(1) Purpose
To prevent the wrapping jam to the fusing belt when printing on thin paper
(2) ON timing
After a specified period of time when receiving a print job
(3) OFF timing

When the fusing paper exit sensor (PS17) detects the trailing edge of the last paper
When the fusing release home sensor (PS16) detects other than the home position
19.2.5 Fusing belt ventilation fan (FM10) control

(1) Purpose
To cool around fusing section on the paper exit side.

Rotates at low speed during standby.
19.2.6 Transfer belt fan (FM11) control

(1) Purpose
To cool around the transfer belt.
(2) ON timing
(3) OFF timing

Stops to operate a specified period of time after finishing of printing
19.2.7 Drum fans /1 (FM12) and /2 (FM13) control

(1) Purpose
To exhaust the heat around the drum motor/developing motor.
(2) ON timing
(3) OFF timing

19.2.8 Tucking fans /1 (FM26), and /3 (FM28) control

(1) Purpose
To cool around the reversing exit section and paper.
(2) ON timing
OFF during printing on the front side of duplex print
Starts to operate upon starting of printing on the back side of simplex and duplex print
(3) OFF timing

Stops to operate when the simplex counter reaches the specified condition during job.
19.2.9 Deodorization fan (FM36) control

(1) Purpose
To cool around the fusing section.
O -61

C6000 > 19. F...

19.2.10 Fusing ventilation fan (FM37) control

(1) Purpose
To cool around the fusing section.

19.2.11 Developing fans /1 (FM45) and /2 (FM46) control

(1) Purpose
To cool around the developing section.
(2) ON timing
Starts to operate upon starting of developing motor /Y (M20), developing motor /M (M21), developing motor /C (M22), and developing
motor /K (M23)
(3) OFF timing

The time to stop differs depending on the environmental humidity. (Maximum. 5 minutes 30 seconds)
19.2.12 Main body fan (FM47) control

(1) Purpose
To cool around the drum.
(2) ON timing
Starts to operate upon starting of developing motor /Y (M20), developing motor /M (M21), developing motor /C (M22), and developing
motor /K (M23)
(3) OFF timing

The time to stop differs depending on the environmental humidity. (Maximum. 5 minutes 30 seconds)
19.2.13 Charge intake fan (FM48) control

(1) Purpose
To cool around the charging corona.
(2) ON timing
Starts to operate upon starting of charging
Starts to operate upon starting of image stabilization control
(3) OFF timing

Stops to operate a specified period of time after finishing of image stabilization control
19.2.14 Paper exit cooling fans /1 (FM61), /2 (FM62), and /3 (FM63) control
(1) Purpose
To cool the exited paper to prevent the wax unevenness.
(2) ON timing
(3) OFF timing

When FS is connected: Stops to operate after a specified period of time since the paper exit sensor of FS turns OFF
When FS is not connected: Stops to operate after a specified period of time since the paper exit sensor (PS13) of the main body turns
OFF
19.2.15 Fusing cooling fan (FM65) control

(1) Purpose
To cool the fusing roller /Lw.
O -62

C6000 > 19. F...
(2) ON timing
Starts to operate when the temperature of the fusing roller /Lw is higher than the regulated control temperature and the gap is more than
the specified gap.
FM65 and the fusing heater lamp /4 (L5) do not turn ON at the same time.
(3) OFF timing

Stops to operate when the temperature of the fusing roller /Lw reaches to the specified temperature.
19.2.16 ADU cooling fan /1 (FM66) control

(1) Purpose
To cool the ADU.
(2) ON timing
Starts to operate upon starting of printing in the duplex mode/reversing exit mode.
(3) OFF timing

19.2.17 ADU cooling fan /2 (FM67) control

(1) Purpose
To cool the ADU loop motor (M57) and the ADU reverse motor (M32).
(2) ON timing
Starts to operate upon starting of printing in the duplex mode/reversing exit mode.
(3) OFF timing

19.2.18 HDD unit cooling fans /1 (FM81) and /2 (FM82) control (option)
(1) Purpose
To cool down the HDD/Y, /M, /C, /K, /A and /P in the HD-514 (option).
(2) ON/OFF timing

Turns ON/OFF in accordance with the ON/OFF of the sub power switch (SW2).
O -63

C6000 > 20. C...
20. COUNTER CONTROL

20.1 Configuration
TCT1
PRCB
TCT2
KCT
LCDB
OACB
OB3
20.2 Operation
Item
Specification/mechanism
Displays the cumulative number of prints in all print modes.

Mechanical counter driven by the electronic signal.
Counts up for each paper exit signal.
Displays the cumulative number of prints in black-and-white print modes.

Counts up for each paper exit signal.
Electronic counter
Displays the total printed number and etc. on the LCD board (LCDB).
Data collection*1
Counts up by paper exit signal, and stores the data in NVRAM board (NRB).
Key counter (KCT)

Option
Counter that disables the copy operation when the specified number of prints is made. (removable)
*1 Refer to I.5.6 Counter/Data.
[3]
[2]
[1]
a03ut2c097ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Key counter (KCT)
O -64

C6000 > 21. A...
21. ACS CONTROL

21.1 Switching from color mode to black and white mode
21.1.1 Outline
When the original (color and black and white mixed) set in DF switches from color to black and white and the black and white original
continues for more than 5 sheets, the pressure of the 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, and /C is released and it switches to the black and white
mode.
Since the switching is executed during the job, it causes a time loss between the color print and black and white print.
21.1.2 Sequence of switching from color mode to black and white mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
2nd transfer of the foregoing print paper (color) completed

Press the 1st transfer roller /K (1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, /C are released)
Writing /K started
The operations of the drum units /Y, /M, /C, developing units /Y, /M, /C, and toner supply units /Y, /M, /C are paused
21.1.3 Sequence of switching from black and white mode to color mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Command of color print

2nd transfer of the foregoing print paper (black and white) completed
The operations of the drum units /Y, /M, /C, developing units /Y, /M, /C, and toner supply units /Y, /M, /C are started
MPC, APC of the writing units /Y, /M, /C
Press the 1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C, /K
Writing /Y started
21.2 Count at ACS

Print count at ACS has following 2 patterns.
21.2.1 Black and white mode (1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C released)
Black and white original
Total count
Black and white count
Developer count
21.2.2 Color mode (1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C, /K pressed)
Color original
Black and white original
Total count
Color count
Developer count
Color count
Color count *1
*1 It is black and white when the original is black and white. However, the drum unit and the developing unit are activated and the developing
counter is counted as color. Also, the total counter is counted as black and white.
O -65

C6000 > 22. A...
22. AUTHENTICATION UNIT

22.1 Authentication unit (IC card type: AU-201)
A non-contact IC card, such as an employee ID card, is used for personal identification.

The system supports the communications protocol in compliance with Type A, Type B, and Felica (Type C) of ISO14443.
Only Felica and Type A cards can be used for C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 machines.
Simply placing the IC card on the authentication unit will let the unit read the data from the card.
Abcde Fgdhi
ABCDE_Co.
Non-contact IC card
Authentication unit (AU-201)
O -66
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-622 > 1. OUTLINE
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-622

1. OUTLINE
1.1 Unit configuration
[3]
[1]
[2]
a052t1c001ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Paper feed section
Conveyance section
1.2 Paper path

1.2.1 Simplex mode
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a052t1c003ca
[1]
Reversing exit
[2]
Conveys to the reverse stacker
[3]
Swing back
[4]
Paper feed
1.2.2 Duplex mode

(1) Duplex mode (front side scan)
[3]
[1]
[2]
a052t1c004ca
[1]
Back side reverse conveyance
[2]
[3]
Paper feed
PA -1
Front side scanning position movement (swing back)
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-622 > 1. OUTLINE
(2) Duplex mode (back side scan)
[1]
[2]
[1]
a052t1c005ca
Paper exit
[2]
PA -2
Conveyance to back side scanning position
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-622 > 2. PAPER FEED SECTION

2.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a052t2c001ca
[1]
Pick-up roller
[2]
Paper feed roller
[3]
[4]
Separation roller
[5]
Registration roller
2.2 Drive
[5]
[6]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a052t2c002ca
[1]
[2]
Registration roller
[3]
[4]
Separation roller (with torque limiter)
[5]
Paper feed roller (with one-way clutch)
[6]
Pick-up roller
2.3 Operation
2.3.1 Original feed control
Paper feed motor (M301) drives the pick up roller [7], the paper feed roller [6] and the registration roller [3].
M301 drives in both directions, forward and reverse. When it drives in forward, the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller rotate to transfer
papers, while the registration roller does not rotate.
When M301 drives in reverse, only the registration roller rotates to feed papers while the pick-up roller goes up to the shelter, and one-way
clutch keeps the paper feed roller from rotating.
The separation roller, which is not driven by the motor, is provided with a torque limiter. When a piece of paper is transferred, the separation
roller moves in synchronization with the paper feed roller. On the other hand, when 2 or more papers are fed, the separation roller remains
stationary and separates the papers.
The registration clutch (CL301) functions as the brake to stop the registration roller, not to turn ON or OFF the drive force transmission.
The registration sensor (PS301) [4] and the timing sensor (PS302) [2] detect the timing of the original.
[6]
[7]
[8]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2]
[1]
[1]
a052t2c003ca
Conveyance belt
[2]
PA -3
[3]
Registration roller
[4]
[5]
Separation roller
[6]
Paper feed roller
[7]
Pick-up roller
[8]
(1) Simplex mode

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The paper feed motor (M301) switches to high speed [1] and the pick-up roller is pressed against the originals set to the original feed tray.
The pick-up roller conveys the originals to the paper feed roller and the separation roller.
The paper feed roller conveys a piece of original at the top, and the separation roller keeps the rest of the originals from being transferred.
The original is conveyed until it hits the registration roller, and the original forms a loop to correct skew [2].
M301 pauses after the specified time, and the registration clutch (CL301) turns OFF to release the registration roller [3].
After the specified time, M301 rotates in reverse at low speed and the registration roller nips the original [4].
After the specified time has elapsed from when the timing sensor (PS302) has turned ON, M301 is turned OFF once [5] and starts rotating
again in reverse at high speed [6] at the same time as the conveyance motor (M302) is turned ON. Then the original is conveyed to the
conveyance belt of the conveyance section.
8. After the specified time has elapsed from when PS302 has turned ON, M301 turns OFF [7].
9. The rest of the originals are conveyed in the same manner.
[2]
[5] [6]
[7]

Paper feed motor

(M301)
For- High
ward
Low
Reve Low
rse
High

Conveyance motor
(M302)
Forward
Reve Low
rse
High
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Paper feed motor high-speed ON
[2]
Loop creation
[3]
Registration roller released
[4]
Nipping by the registration roller
[5]
Pause (M301)
[6]
Start conveying the original to the conveyance section
[7]
Conveyance to the conveyance section completed
(2) Duplex mode

1. The first sheet of original is conveyed in the same manner as in simplex mode [1].
2. While front side of the first sheet is being scanned [2], the second sheet is conveyed from the tray and is formed a loop to corrected its
skew [3], and the registration roller nips the original [4].
3. When paper exit operation starts [6] after the back side scan [5] of the first sheet is completed, the second sheet on standby at the
registration roller is conveyed to the conveyance section by the paper feed motor (M301) [7] and the conveyance motor (M302) [8].
[1]
[3][4]
[7]

Paper feed
motor (M301)
High
Forward Low
Reve Low
rse
High

Forward
Conveyance
motor (M302) Reve Low
rse
High
[2]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[1]
Conveyance of the 1st sheet
[2]
Front side scanning of 1st sheet
[3]
Loop formation of the 2nd sheet
[4]
Nipping by the registration roller
PA -4
[5]
Back side scanning of 1st sheet
[6]
Start conveying of the 1st sheet for paper exit
[7]
Conveyance of the 2nd sheet (M301)
[8]
Conveyance of the 2nd sheet (M302)
2.3.2 Original size detection

Original size detection signal is detected by scanning in the main direction and sub direction.
The original size detection method differs between normal copy mode and mixed original copy mode.
(1) Normal mode

Main scan direction is detected by the resistance value of the size VR (VR301) interlocked with the guide plate position on the paper feed
tray.
Sub scan direction is detected by the combination of ON/OFF of the size sensor /Lt (PS309) and size sensor /Rt (PS310).
(2) Mixed original copy mode

Maximum original size in main scan direction is detected by the resistance value of the size VR (VR301) interlocked with the guide plate
position on the paper feed tray.
Sub scan direction is detected by the time when the original passes by the timing sensor (PS302).
Allowed size combinations are as shown in the table below.
For metric area
Other
originals
Standard originals (max. original size detected by guide plate)

B4
B5
A4S
A5
B5S
A5S
B6S
A3
A3
A4
A4
B4
Thick
paper
Thick
paper
B5
A4S
Thick
paper
Thick
paper
Thick
paper
Thick
paper
A5
B5S
Thick
paper
A5S
*1
*1
B6S
*2
*2
Thick
paper
For inch area

Other
Standard originals (max. original size detected by guide plate)
originals
B4
B5
A4S
A5
11 x 17
A3
A4
81/2 x 11
81/2 x 14
Thick
paper
Thick
paper
81/2 x 11S
Thick
paper
Thick
paper
81/2 x 51/2
Thick
paper
paper
*1
*1
81/2 x 51/2S
: same size,
performance),
Thick
: same series,
: different series,
: different series (out of guaranteed paper through
: no mixed loading, : not supported
*1 Detects not as an error but as A4

*2 Detects not as an error but as B5
2.3.3 Original empty detection

No paper detection signal is detected by the no paper sensor (PS304).
PA -5
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-622 > 3. CONVEYANCE

SECTION
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION
3.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
a052t2c006ca
Conveyance belt
[2]
Conveyance roller
3.2 Drive
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
a052t2c007ca
[1]
Conveyance belt
[2]
[3]
Conveyance roller
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 Original scan and conveyance control
The conveyance belt is driven by the conveyance motor (M302).
In simplex mode, a swing-back to position the original for scanning is performed after the original is conveyed from the paper feed section to
the conveyance belt.
In duplex mode, the original returned from the reverse/paper feed section is conveyed at low speed, and is positioned for scanning.
Thin paper mode is provided in the original size setting as the positioning control method differs between thin paper and the other papers
(plain and thick).
(1) Simplex mode

(a) Swing back operation
1. The original is conveyed from the paper feed section [2].
2. The original is conveyed [3] to the point that the trailing edge of the original comes over the positioning plate [1].
3. The conveyance motor (M302) rotates in reverse at low speed and returns the original [4], and the original is stuck against the
positioning plate [5].
4. The original is scanned.
PA -6

SECTION
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
a052t2c008ca
[1]
Stuck position
[2]
Original conveyance
[3]
Stops after going through the stuck position
[4]
Swing back
[5]
Positioning completed
(b) Control
1. After the registration roller nips the original [1], the original is conveyed [2] from the paper feed section.
2. After the specified time has elapsed from when the timing sensor (PS302) has turned OFF (trailing edge detection), M302 is turned
OFF and the original is conveyed to the point that the trailing edge of the original comes over the positioning plate, and then the
conveyance stops [3].
3. After the specified time, M302 rotates in reverse at low speed and returns the original [4], and the original is stuck against the
positioning plate (swing-back).
4. The scanning is performed in the main body [5].
5. After scanning the second sheet (small size paper) or the first sheet (large size paper), the reverse/paper exit motor (M303) is turned
ON at the same time as M302. Then the scanned original is conveyed to the reverse/paper exit section [6] while the next original is
conveyed to the conveyance section.
6. When the scanning of the last page is completed and after the specified time has elapsed from when the reverse sensor (PS305) is
turned ON, M302 is turned OFF [7].
[1]
Paper feed
motor (M301)
[7]
High
Forwar Low
Reve Low
rse High

Forwared
Conveyance
High
motor (M302) Rev
erse High
[2] [3][4]
[5]
[6]
a052t2e009ca
[1]
Nipping the original
[2]
Conveyance from the paper feed section
[3]
Pausing for swing-back
[4]
Swing back
[5]
Scanning the original
[6]
Conveyance from the paper feed section and paper

exit
[7]
Conveyance to the reverse/paper exit section

completed
(2) Duplex mode

(a) Operation
The paper path of the reverse paper exit section is created by the paper exit gate [1] and the reverse gate [8]. Both gates are set by
turning OFF the paper exit solenoid (SD301) and turning ON the reverse solenoid (SD302).
1. The front side scan is performed in the same operating method as in the simplex mode.
2. The original is conveyed to the reverse/paper exit section [5] to perform back side scan by driving the reverse/paper exit motor (M303)
and the conveyance motor (M302). At this time, the leading edge of the original (back side) that is conveyed in reverse [7] overlaps with
the trailing edge of the original (front side) [4] on the right side of the conveyance belt [6] near the reverse/paper exit section.
PA -7

SECTION

[7]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a052t2c010ca
[1]
Paper exit gate
[2]
[3]
Reverse roller
[4]

Trailing edge of the original (Front side)
[5]
Conveyance direction to the reverse/paper exit section
[6]
Conveyance belt
[7]
Pushing direction of the scanning section (Back side)
[8]
Reverse gate
3. While operating the reverse conveyance [2], the original is conveyed at low speed [4] after a short pause [3] and the original is stuck [5]
against the positioning plate [1].
4. The back side scan is performed.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
a052t2c011ca
[1]
Stuck position
[2]
Reverse/paper exit from the reverse section
[3]
A pause before being stuck against the positioning

plate
[4]
Pushing at low speed (Reverse conveyance)
[5]
Positioning completed
(b) Control
1. The front side scan is performed in the same operating method as in the simplex mode.
2. M302 starts driving forward at the same time as M303 is turned ON. Then the original is conveyed to the reverse/conveyance section
[2].
3. After the specified time has elapsed from when the reverse sensor (PS305) has turned ON, M302 and M303 turn OFF [3]. Then only
M302 starts rotating again in reverse at high speed [4], and the original is conveyed toward the stuck position (leftward) by the
conveyance belt.
4. M302 pauses [3] after the specified time has elapsed from when M302 has turned ON (in reverse at high speed) and switches speed to
low speed [5]. Then the original is conveyed to the stuck position against the positioning plate.
5. After the positioning is completed, the scanner (main body side) performs scanning.
6. After the back side scan [6] is completed, the paper exit is performed [7] in the same operating method as in duplex mode.
7. When there are any originals that follow, the paper feed motor (M301) keeps operating to continue the conveyance [9].
[3]
[8]
For- High
Paper feed war Low
motor (M301) Rev Low
erse High
Forwared
Conveyance
motor (M302) Rev Low
erse High
Reverse/paper For- High
exit motor (M303) war Low
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
a052t2e012ca
PA -8

SECTION

[1]
Front side scanning
[2]
Conveyance to the reverse/paper exit section
[3]
A pause to reverse
[4]
Reverse
[5]
Pushing at low speed (Reverse conveyance)
[6]
Back side scanning
[7]
Paper exit
[8]
Conveyance of the following originals from the paper

feed section
[9]
Continued action (paper feeding and exiting operation)

of M302
PA -9
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-622 > 4. REVERSE/EXIT

SECTION
4. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION
4.1 Configuration
[7]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a052t2c013ca
[1]
[2]
Paper exit gate
[3]
[4]
Reverse roller
[5]
Reverse gate
[6]
Reverse stacker
[7]
Paper exit stacker
[8]
Exit roller
4.2 Drive
[5]
[6]
[7]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a052t2c014ca
[1]
Paper exit gate
[2]
[3]
Reverse gate
[4]
Reverse roller
[5]
[6]
Paper exit roller (with one-way clutch)
[7]
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Outline
The reverse roller and the paper exit roller are driven by the reverse/paper exit motor (M303).
One-way clutch rotates the paper exit roller only in the paper exit direction when M303 drives both forward and reverse.
The paper exit gate and the reverse gate switch the path of the reverse paper exit.
The paper exit gate [1] is driven by the paper exit solenoid (SD301). The path is switched to the reverse path [2] when SD301 is turned OFF
while the path is switched to the straight paper exit path [6] when SD301 is turned ON.
The reverse gate [3] is driven by the reverse solenoid (SD302). The path is switched to the reverse stacker path [5] when SD302 is turned
OFF while the path is switched to the back side reverse path [4] when SD302 is turned ON.
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[1]
Paper exit gate
[3]
[2]
a052t2c015ca
[2]
PA -10
Reverse path

SECTION

[3]
Reverse gate
[4]
Back side reverse path
[5]
Reverse stacker path
[6]
Straight paper exit path
4.3.2 Paper exit control

(1) Straight paper exit
(a) Operation
When the paper exit solenoid (SD301) is turned ON, the paper exit gate [1] is set in the straight paper exit path [3].
The original [5] is detected by the reverse sensor (PS305) [2] and the paper exit sensor (PS306) [4].
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
a052t2c016ca
[1]
Paper exit gate (ON)
[2]
[3]
Paper exit conveyance path
[4]
[5]
Original
(b) Control
1. When the paper exit solenoid (SD301) is turned ON [2] after the scanning [1] is completed, the paper exit gate is set in the straight
paper exit path.
2. The reverse/paper exit motor (M303) is turned ON [3] at the same time as the conveyance motor (M302), and the original conveyed by
the conveyance belt is conveyed to the paper exit roller of the reverse/paper exit section.
3. After the specified time has elapsed from when the reverse sensor (PS305) is turned OFF, M303 slows down [4] to make the original
aligned when it is ejected and the original is ejected to the paper exit stacker at low speed.
4. After the specified time has elapsed from when the paper exit sensor (PS307) is turned OFF, M303 stops [5].
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Forward
Conveyance motor
(M302)
Reve Low
rse
High

High
Forward Low
Reverse/paper exit
motor (M303)
Reve
rse
Low
High

[2]
a052t2e017ca
[1]
Scan
[2]
Sets the paper exit gate in the straight paper exit path
[3]
M302 and M303 starts operating for paper exit
[4]
M303 switching to low speed
[5]
Paper exit completed
(2) Reversing exit

(a) Operation
The exit solenoid (SD301) and the reverse solenoid (SD302) are OFF in this mode.
1. The original [4] from the conveyance section is fed around the reverse roller [3] through the paper exit gate [1], and conveyed to the
reverse stacker [5] by the reverse gate [7].
2. The original stops proceeding with its trailing edge nipped by the reverse roller [8].
PA -11

SECTION

[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a052t2c018ca
[1]
Paper exit gate (OFF)
[2]
[3]
Reverse roller
[4]
Original
[5]
Reverse stacker
[6]
Conveyance direction
[7]
Reverse gate (OFF)
[8]
Nipping trailing edge of the original
3. The reverse roller stops rotating once, then starts reverse rotating and feed the original to the reverse paper exit conveyance path.
4. The paper exit roller slows down when feeding the rear end of the original, and ejects the original with no skew.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a052t2c019ca
[1]
Original
[2]
[3]
Paper exit roller
Reversing exit
(b) Control
1. The original from the conveyance section is conveyed to the path of the reverse stacker [1] that is set by paper exit gate and the
reverse gate.
2. When the reverse sensor (PS305) detects the trailing edge of the original [2] and turns OFF, M303 reduces its speed.
3. After the specified time, the original stops proceeding [3] with its trailing edge nipped by the reverse roller.
4. M303 rotates in reverse and the original is conveyed to the reverse paper exit path [4].
5. After the specified time has elapsed from when the paper exit sensor (PS306) has turned ON, M303 slows down [5] and the original is
ejected in reverse at low speed to the paper exit stacker.
6. After the specified time from when PS306 has turned OFF, M303 is turned OFF [6].
[2] [3] [4]
[5]
[6]
Forward

High
Forward
Low

(M303)
Low
Forward
High
[1]
[1]
a052t2e020ca
Conveyance to the reverse stacker
[2]
PA -12
Slowing down (M303)

SECTION

[3]
Stops with trailing edge nipped
[4]
Reverse paper exit (with reverse rotation at high

speed)
[5]
Slowing down to align original
[6]
Reverse paper exit completed
4.3.3 Reverse conveyance control

(1) Operation
In reverse conveyance mode, the exit solenoid (SD301) is set to OFF while the reverse solenoid (SD302) is set to ON.
The original [3] from the conveyance section wraps around the reverse roller [2] by the paper exit gate [1]. Then through the reverse gate
that is turned ON [6], the original slides under [5] the conveyance belt [4] and is returned to the conveyance section.
[5]
[6]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a052t2c021ca
[1]
Paper exit gate (OFF)
[2]
Reverse roller
[3]
Original
[4]
Conveyance belt
[5]
Sliding under the conveyance belt
[6]
Reverse gate (ON)
(2) Control
1. After the front side scan is performed [1], the conveyance motor (M302) [2] conveys the original from the conveyance section, and then
the reverse motor (M303) conveys it to the reverse path that is set the exit solenoid (SD301) OFF and the original is fed around the
reverse roller [3].
2. When the reverse solenoid (SD302) is turned ON [4], the reverse gate sets the conveyance direction toward the conveyance belt. Then
the original starts returning [5] to the conveyance section while sliding under the conveyance belt.
3. After the specified time from when the reverse sensor (PS305) has turned ON, M302 and M303 stop rotating once at the same moment.
Then M302 switches to rotate in reverse [6] while M303 rotates forward [7] and the original is returned further toward the scanning
position.
4. After the specified time from PS305 has turned OFF, M303 stops [8]. However, the belt keeps conveying [9]. [9]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[4] [5][7]

Forward
Conveyance
Low
motor (M302) Reve
rse
High
Reverse/paper
exit motor
(M303)
Forward
Reve
rse
High
Low
Low
High

[8]
[9]
a052t2e022ca
[1]
Front side scanning
[2]
Conveyance to the reverse paper exit section (M302)
[3]
Conveyance to the reverse paper exit section (M303)
[4]
Reverse gate setting
[5]
Sliding under the conveyance belt
[6]
Reverse conveyance of the belt
[7]
Conveyance toward the reverse conveyance
[8]
Conveyance completed (M303)
[9]
Reverse conveyance by the conveyance belt
PA -13
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-602/HT-504/505 > 1. OUTLINE
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-602/HT-504/505

1. OUTLINE
[1]
[3]
[2]
a03xt1c001ca
[1]
Paper feed section
[2]
[3]
HT-504/505 ( Option)
PB -1
Conveyance section
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-602/HT-504/505 > 1. OUTLINE
1.2 Paper path

[1]
[2]
[3]
a03xt1c002ca
[1]
From tray/4
[2]
[3]
From tray/4 and /5 to the main body
PB -2
From tray/5
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-602/HT-504/505 > 2. PAPER

FEED SUCTION SE...
2. PAPER FEED SUCTION SECTION

2.1 Configuration
[10]
[1]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[3]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Paper feed roller
[2]
Separation roller
[3]
Paper size VR/1 (VR1) and VR/2 (VR3) (Main scan

direction)
[4]
Remaining paper VR/1 (VR2) and VR/2 (VR4)
[5]
Paper up/down assist mechanism
[6]
Paper size sensors /Rt1 (PS5), /Lt1 (PS6), /Rt2 (PS13),

and /Lt2 (PS14) (Sub scan direction)
[7]
Paper lift plate
[8]
Paper feed assist fan
[9]
Paper empty sensor /1 (PS3), /2 (PS11)
[10]
Pick-up roller
PB -3

FEED SUCTION SE...
2.2 Drive
2.2.1 Tray lift drive
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
a03xt2c002ca
[1]
Lift wires /Fr2 and /Rr2
[2]
Lift wires /Fr1, /Rr1
[3]
Paper lift plate
[4]
Paper lift motor/1 (M2) and /2 (M3)
2.2.2 Paper feed drive

[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[4]
[3]
[11]
a03xt2c003ca
[1]
Paper feed roller
[2]
Pick-up roller
[3]
Separation roller
[4]
Torque limiter
[5]
[6]
Coupling (transmission of driving force to the tray/4)
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
PB -4

FEED SUCTION SE...
2.2.3 Pick-up drive
[2]
[1]
a03xt2c004cb
[1]
Pick-up solenoid/1 (SD1) and /2 (SD5)
[2]
Pick-up roller
2.3 Operation
(1) Plate-up mechanism
The paper lift motors/1 (M2) and /2 (M3) drive the pulley to wind up the lift wires in order to lift the paper lift plate.
(2) Plate-down mechanism

The paper lift plate [1] goes down by the down button [2].
Loading papers on the paper lift plate presses the plate-down button [2] on the side of the tray, and release lever [4] releases the coupling
in the torque limiter [5]. The pulley drive shaft [6] keeps rotating while the plate-down button is pressed.
When the paper lift plate [1] is at its uppermost position, the tray-down stopper [7] is on the rear side [8] of the tray, and the gear [9]
prevents the paper lift plate from going down.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[8] [9]
[7]
a03xt2c005ca
[1]
Paper lift plate
[2]
Down button
[3]
Paper
[4]
Release lever
[5]
Torque limiter
[6]
Shaft
[7]
Tray-down stopper
[8]
Rear side of the tray
[9]
Gear

(a) When tray is set
The paper lift motors/1 (M2) and /2 (M3) are activated and lift the paper lift plate.
The M2 and M3 motors are stopped when the upper limit sensors/1 (PS1) and /2 (PS9) detect the uppermost status of the paper lift
plate.
(b) During printing

When the PS1 and PS9 sensors turn off, the M2 and M3 motors are activated.
When the PS1 and PS9 sensors turn on upon detection of the upper most status of the paper lift plate (with the paper lift plate up), M2
and M3 are stopped.
PB -5

FEED SUCTION SE...
2.3.2 Size detection control

(1) Main scan/Sub scan direction detection
The detection methods differ between main scanning direction and sub-scanning direction.
(a) Main scan direction

The size in the main scan direction is detected by the paper size VR/1 (VR1) and /2 (VR3) that move together with the paper guide. The
detected size is sent to the main body within a fixed time period after the tray is set.
(b) In the direction of the sub-scan

The size detection in the sub scan direction is made by the following each pair of the sensors: the paper size sensors/Rt1 (PS5) [3]
and /Lt1 (PS6) [4] for tray /4, /Rt2 (PS13) [3] and /Lt2 (PS14) [4] for tray /5.
When the paper rear guide [6] is moved, the detection cams /Up [1] and /Lw [2] that are different in shape are pressed by the knob [5].
Depends on the position of the paper rear guide, the paper size sensors/Rt1 [4], /Rt2 [4] and /Lt1 [3], /Lt2 [3] are turned on and off.
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a03xt2c006ca
[1]
Detection cam/Up
[2]
Detection cam/Lw
[3]
Paper size sensors/Rt1 (PS5) and /Rt2 (PS13)
[4]
Paper size sensors/Lt1 (PS6) and /Lt2 (PS14)
[5]
Knob
[6]
Paper trailing edge guide
Paper size
Paper size sensors

/Lt1 (PS6) and /Lt2 (PS14)
/Rt1 (PS5) and /Rt2 (PS13)
A6S, B6S, A4S, B5, A3,

11 x 17, 13 x 19
OFF (light blocking)
OFF
81/2 x 11S, 8K, 16KS
OFF
ON
A5S, B5S, A4, SRA4, B4,

51/2 x 81 /2S, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 14
ON (exposure)
ON
A5, SRA4S, SRA3, 81/4x 13,

8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 x 13,
12 x 18, 16K
ON
OFF
*For the paper sizes below, it is necessary to set the paper size on the touch panel.
Make a selection among SRA4, A5S, 8x13, 81/ x 131/ , 81/ x 13 and 81/ x 13
8
4
4
2
Make a selection among A5S and 51/ x 81/ S
2
2
Select from "A6S" and "Postcard"
Make a selection among B4, B5S, B5, 11x17, 81/ x 11 and 8K, 16KS, 16K
2
(2) Assist guide detection control

The paper size sensors /Fr1 (PS7), /Fr2 (PS15) [2], /Rr1 (PS8), and /Rr2 (PS16) [3] detect opening or closing of the auxiliary guide [1]
when A6S size paper are set.
When the auxiliary guide [1] is in use, PS15 and PS16 are turned off.
Tray/4 does not support A6S paper.
PB -6

FEED SUCTION SE...
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
a03xt2c007ca
[1]
Auxiliary paper guide
[2]
[3]
Paper size sensors /Rr1 (PS8), and /Rr2 (PS16)
Paper size sensors /Fr1 (PS7), and /Fr2 (PS15)
2.3.3 Pick-up mechanism

Paper is picked up when the pick-up solenoids/1 (SD1) and /2 (SD5) are turned off.
When the solenoids SD1and SD5 are turned off, the pick-up roller goes down to press paper by its own weight.
When the paper feed clutches /1 (CL1) and /2 (CL4) turn on, the pick-up roller starts to rotate and feed paper to the paper feed roller.
[3]
[5]
Paper feed sensor/1 (PS2) and /2 (PS10)

Paper feed clutch/1 (MC1) and /2 (MC4)
Pick-up solenoid/1 (SD1) and /2 (SD5)
[1]
[2]
[4]
a03xt2e008ca
[1]
Start button ON
[2]
Pick-up of the 1st sheet of paper
[3]
Conveyance of the 1st sheet of paper
[4]
Pick-up of the 2nd sheet of paper
[5]
Conveyance of the 2nd sheet of paper
2.3.4 Separation mechanism

Papers are separated by the separation roller [5].
The separation roller [5] rotates in the direction [10] opposite to the paper conveyance direction [9] by means of the torque limiter [8]. The
roller is pressed against the paper feed roller by force exerted by the spring [7] and the torque limiter.
When no paper exists between the separation roller and the paper feed roller or when the only one sheet of paper is present, the separation
roller is driven by the paper feed roller in the direction of arrow [4] since the torque is over the limit.
When multiple sheets of paper are fed, the separation roller reverses the direction of rotation [10] (opposite to the paper feed roller) and
feeds the lower paper [2] that contacts with the separation roller back to the tray [3]. The drop in frictional force between the two rollers due
to the multiple sheets causes the counter rotating of the separation roller.
[10]
[9]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a03xt2c009ca
[1]
Paper feed roller
[2]
PB -7
2nd paper

FEED SUCTION SE...

[3]
Tray direction
[4]
Driven rotation
[5]
Separation roller
[6]
Pressure
[7]
Spring
[8]
Torque limiter
[9]
[10]
2.3.5 Air assist mechanism

The paper feed assist fans that are provided on the paper guides in the trays/4 and /5 blow air [7] onto paper [9] in order to assist the
separation of paper.
Tray/4 is provided with paper feed assist fans/Fr11 (FM1) [6], /Fr12 (FM3) [5], /Rr11 (FM2) [1] and /Rr12 (FM4) [3]. Tray /5 is provided with
paper feed assist fans/Fr21 (FM5) [6], /Fr22 (FM7) [5], /Rr21 (FM6) [1], / Rr22 (FM8) [3].
When feeding from the tray specified as a tray for coated paper, the assist fans of the tray start to operate.
[7]
[8]
[9]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a03xt2c010ca
[1]
Paper feed assist fans /Rr11 (FM2) and / Rr21 (FM6)
[2]
Shutter solenoids /Rr1 (SD3) and / Rr2 (SD7)
[3]
Paper feed assist fans /Rr12 (FM4) and / Rr22 (FM8)
[4]
Shutter
[5]
Paper feed assist fans /Fr12 (FM3) and / Fr22 (FM7)
[6]
Paper feed assist fans /Fr11(FM1) and /Fr21 (FM5)
[7]
Blow-out of air
[8]
Shutter solenoids /Fr1 (SD2) and /Fr2 (SD6)
[9]
Paper

When the coated paper is selected in the paper setting, the paper feed assist fans/Fr11 (FM1), /Fr12 (FM3), /Rr11 (FM2) and /Rr12 (FM4)
or the paper feed assist fans/Fr21 (FM5), /Fr22 (FM7), /Rr21 (FM6) and /Rr22 (FM8) of corresponding tray start to operate when the
START button is pressed.
(2) Open/close shutter control

Amount of air blow is adjusted by the shutter solenoids /Fr1 (SD2) [8], /Rr1 (SD3) [2], /Fr2 (SD6) [8], and / Rr2 (SD7) [2]. When the SD2/
SD3/ SD6/ SD7 turn on, the shutters are closed to increase the air blow.
The SD2/SD3/SD6/SD7 keep turning off and on for a specified period of time after the start button is turned on.
Air blow operation is performed once between turning on of the start button and start of paper feed [2].
The SD2, SD3, SD6 and SD7 can be forced off using DipSW4-0.
Paper feed assist fans /Fr11
(FM1), /Fr12 (FM3), /Rr11
(FM2), /Rr12 (FM4), /Fr21
(FM5), /Fr22 (FM7), /Rr21
(FM6), /Rr22 (FM8)
Shutter solenoids /Fr1 (SD2),/
Rr1 (SD3), /Fr2 (SD6), /Rr2
(SD7)
[1]
[2]
a03xt2e011ca
[1]
Start button ON
[2]
PB -8
Start feeding

FEED SUCTION SE...
2.3.6 Paper empty detection control

Paper empty detection on the tray is made according to on/off statuses of the upper limit sensors/1 (PS1) and /2 (PS9) [6], and the paper
empty sensors/1 (PS3) and /2 (PS11) [1].
When the paper lift plate [4] goes up while paper is on the tray, the paper pushes up the actuator [2] and then the PS3 and PS11 [1] are
turned off. When the paper lift plate further goes up, the pick-up roller section [5] is pushed up to turn off the PS1 and PS9 [6].
When there is no paper, the actuator is inserted in the hole [3] in the paper lift plate and is not lifted up. On the other hand, the pick-up roller
section[5] is lifted up to turn off the PS1/ PS9 [6]. If PS1/PS9 turn off when the paper lift plate is being lifted, the product detects that paper is
empty and shows the message on the touch panel.
While feeding paper, the PS3 and PS11 are switched from OFF to ON while the PS1 and the PS9 is OFF, and paper empty is detected.
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a03xt2c012ca
[1]
Paper empty sensors /1 (PS3) and /2 (PS11)
[2]
Actuator of the paper empty sensors /1 (PS3) and /2

(PS11)
[3]
Hole
[4]
Paper lift plate
[5]
Pick-up roller section
[6]
Upper limit sensors /1 (PS1) and /2 (PS9)

Remaining paper detection is made by the remaining paper VR/1 (VR2) and /2 (VR4) that are interlocked with the up/down operation of the
paper lift plate via the pulley and the gear.
The following 8 levels are detected according to the resistance value, and the detected information is sent to the main body.
[1]
a03xt2c013ca
[1]
Remaining paper VR/1 (VR2) and VR/2 (VR4)
2.3.8 Tray lock control

Each tray is locked by the tray lock lever.
When the tray lock release sensors /1 (PS4) and /2 (PS12) of the either trays /4 or /5 are turned off, the tray lock solenoids /1 (SD4) and /2
(SD8) of the corresponding tray are turned on. This causes the tray lock lever to go up and the tray is unlocked.
In order to avoid pulling multiple trays out at a time, the SD4 and SD8 solenoids other than those which has already been turned on do not
become on even when an off-status of another lock release sensor is detected while PS4 or PS12 sensor is off.
PB -9

FEED SUCTION SE...
When a jammed paper is lying over the tray and the exit conveyance section, the tray remains locked until the jammed paper is removed.
Doing this prevents the paper from being torn.
PB -10

> 3. CONVEYANCE SECTION
3.1 Configuration
[1]
[9]
[8]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
Small size roller
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Multi feed detection board /R (MFDBR), /S (MFDBS)
[7]
[8]
[9]
PB -11

3.2 Drive
[4]
[1]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[14]
[13]
[2]
[12] [11] [10]
[15]
[3]
a03xt2c015ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7)
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10)
[11]
Horizontal conveyance roller/1
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 Pre-registration control
In order to correct skew of paper, paper fed from the tray strikes against the pre-registration roller that is stopping at that time.
The pre-registration clutch (CL12) is turned on, the driving force of the paper feed motor (M1) is transmitted to the pre-registration roller to
feed paper inside the main body.

For the vertical conveyance, the driving force of the paper feed motor (M1) [1] is transmitted by turning on and off the vertical conveyance
clutches /1 (MC7) [4], /2 (MC8) [7], and /3 (MC9) [8].
For the horizontal conveyance, the driving force of paper feed motor (M1) is transmitted by turning on and off the horizontal conveyance
clutches /1 (MC10) [10], /2 (MC11) [14], and the pre-registration clutch (MC12) [12].
Paper fed from tray/4 is conveyed to the vertical conveyance rollers /1 [5], /2 [6], and /3 [9] driven through MC7, MC8, and MC9, and then
conveyed to the horizontal conveyance section.
Paper fed from tray/4 vertically or fed from tray/5 is conveyed to the pre-registration roller [13] by the horizontal conveyance roller/1 [11]
driven via the MC10. Then, the pre-registration control described above is performed and the paper is fed inside the main body.
When the vertical conveyance sensors /2 (PS27) [3] and /3 (PS26) [2] detect the paper trailing edge, the sensors read it twice within the
specified time. The paper trailing edge once passed through the sensors may return to the sensor detection position due to slack in the
paper, and detected by the sensors again unexpectedly. To prevent the mis-detection, the sensors carry out the detection operation twice
every time.
PB -12

[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[3]
[8]
[1]
[9]
[11]
[13]
[2]
[10]
[12]
[14]
a03xt2c021ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Horizontal conveyance roller/1
[12]
[13]
[14]
3.3.3 Multi feed detection control

The multi feed sensor is provided in the horizontal conveyance section to detect multi feed.
The multi feed sensor is a ultrasonic sensor consisted of a sending and receiving section. The ultrasonic waves sent from the multi feed
detection board /S (MFDTBS) are received at the multi feed detection board /R (MFDTBR).
Based on the difference in the amount of ultrasonic waves received when a single sheet of paper and the plural sheets of paper pass
through between the MFDBS and the MFDBR, a check is made to see if paper has been multi fed or not.
When multi feed is detected, the paper feeding operation will stop, however, the next sheet of paper is fed as usual.
The multi feed detection function can be enabled/disabled using DIPSW19-4.
3.3.4 Mis-centering detection control

While paper being fed, centering sensor (PS25) detects the paper edges in the main scan direction.
The detected information is written in the image processing section so that a scanned image is precisely located and printed on the paper as
intended.
In order to increase the life of the PS25, the sensor is not always "On"; it turns off after sending the detected information to the main body
and turns on when it detects the paper reached to the pre-registration sensor.
PB -13
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-602/HT-504/505 > 4. OTHERS
4. OTHERS
4.1 Dehumidification heater control
Dehumidifier heaters /1 (DH1) and /2 (DH2) are provided under the trays /4 and /5, one for each tray, to prevent paper from damping.
When the sub power switch (SW2) is turned off, the DH1 and DH2 are turned on.
[1]
[2]
a03xt2c016ca
[1]
[2]
4.2 Tray damper mechanism

The damper [1] is provided in the tray to prevent the pile of paper from becoming misaligned due to the vibration caused when inserting the
tray.
[1]
a03xt2c017ca
[1]
Damper
4.3 Main body assist mechanism

4.3.1 Filter replacement assy retaining mechanism
When PF is installed to the main body, the filter replacement assy retaining mechanism [1] of PF presses down the filter replacement assy
of the main body to prevent the filter replacement assy from coming loose.
[1]
a03xt2c018ca
[1]
Filter replacement assy retaining mechanism
PB -14
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-602/HT-504/505 > 4. OTHERS
4.3.2 Filter replacement assy ventilation mechanism

When PF is installed to the main body, the ventilation fan/1 (FM10) [1] and /2 (FM9) [2] operate to exhaust heated air around the writing
section of the main body.
When the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body is on, FM10 and FM9 keep turned on.
[1]
[2]
a03xt2c019ca
[1]
[2]
4.3.3 Environment temperature detection assist mechanism

When PF is installed to the main body, the temperature-humidity sensor (TEM/HUMS) of PF is used to check the environment temperature
and humidity instead of the sensor of the main body since the temperature-humidity sensor/1 (TEM/HUMS1) on the right side of the main
body is disabled.
PB -15
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-602/HT-504/505 > 5. HT-504/505

(OPTIONAL)
5. HT-504/505 (OPTIONAL)
5.1 Configuration
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
a03xt2c020ca
[1]
Dehumidifier fan heater unit/Up
[2]
Dehumidifier fan heater unit/Lw
[3]
Power unit
[4]
Dehumidifier fan/1 (FM13) and /3 (FM11)
[5]
Dehumidifier fan/2 (FM14) and /4 (FM12)
[6]
Fan heater/Up (DH3) and /Lw (DH4)
5.2 Operation
5.2.1 Dehumidifier fan heater control
(1) Dehumidifier fan heater preliminary dry control
When the Dryness preparation control is set to [On] in the user settings, preliminary drying operation is performed before printing after
opening/closing the tray.
When the dehumidifier fan heater preliminary drying control is set to [Off] in the user settings, preliminary drying operation is performed
before printing after opening/closing the tray when the amount of remaining papers are changed. In this case, it does not conduct the
preliminary drying only with taking out the tray in and out.
To prevent paper feed jam in the paper feed section, the fan heaters /Up (DH3), /Lw (DH4), dehumidifier fans /1 (FM13), /2 (FM14), /3
(FM11), and /4 (FM12) control dehumidification by circulating warm air.
When the temperature-humidity sensor (TEM/HUMS) of PF detects the environment humidity is more than 56%, DH3, DH4, FM11, FM12,
FM13 and FM14 are turned on.
(2) Start condition of the dehumidification control

When turning the sub power switch (SW2) off with the dehumidifier fan heater setting set to [Automatic] or [On (compulsory)] in the user
settings and coated paper is selected.
When opening/closing the tray with the dehumidifier fan heater setting set to [Automatic] or [On (compulsory)] in the user settings and
coated paper is selected.
When changing the original setting to coated paper from other types with the dehumidifier fan heater setting set to [Automatic] or [On
(compulsory)] in the user settings.
When changing the dehumidifier fan heater setting to [Automatic] or [On (compulsory)] from [Off (compulsory)].
(3) Operation contents

Detects the temperature in the trays with the temperature sensors /1 (TEMS/1) and /2 (TEMS/2) and controls the dehumidification until the
temperature reaches the target level.
During the dehumidification, the printing from the tray is prohibited.
Ambient humidity
Required value for temperature rise in the tray
55% or less
Not controlled
56% to 60%
61% to 65%
66% to 70%
71 to 75%
Higher than 76%
10
(4) Stop condition of the dehumidification control

When the dehumidifier fan heater setting is changed to [Off (compulsory)] during dehumidifier control operation.
The dehumidifier fan heater setting is changed to [Compulsive Off] during the dehumidification control.
PB -16
PC THEORY OF OPERATION LU-202/HT-503 > 1. OUTLINE
PC THEORY OF OPERATION LU-202/HT-503

1. OUTLINE
[1]
[3]
[2]
a03wt1c001ca
[1]
UP/DOWN SECTION
[2]
[3]
Paper feed section
HT-503 (Option)
1.2 Paper path

[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
a03wt1c002ca
[1]
Separation roller
[2]
[3]
Paper feed roller
[4]
Pick-up roller
[5]
Paper lift plate
PC -1
PC THEORY OF OPERATION LU-202/HT-503 > 2. PAPER FEED

SECTION

2.1 Configuration
[9]
[10]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[6]
[1]
Pick-up roller
[2]
Paper feed roller
[3]
[4]
[5]
Paper size detection mechanism (Main scan direction)
[6]
Remaining paper detection mechanism
[7]
Paper size detection mechanism (Sub scan direction)
[8]
Paper feed assist fan
[9]
[10]
Separation roller
2.2 Drive
[1]
[10]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[9]
a03wt2c002ca
[1]
[2]
PC -2

SECTION

[3]
Pick-up roller
[4]
Paper feed roller
[5]
One-way mechanism
[6]
Separation roller
[7]
[8]
Torque limiter
[9]
[10]
2.2.2 Pick-up drive
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
a03wt2c003ca
[1]
Pick-up roller
[2]
[3]
[4]
Paper feed roller
2.3 Operation
(1) Pick-up control
(a) Outline
Paper is picked up when the pick-up solenoid (SD100) is turned off.
The pick-up roller rotates with the paper feed roller.
(b) Operation
1. At the time printing is started [1], SD100 is off and the pick-up roller presses against loaded paper with its own weight.
2. Then the paper feed clutch (CL101) turns on [2] to transmit drive force of the paper feed motor (M1) to the pick-up roller, and the pickup roller starts to rotate and picks up a sheet of paper to be fed by the paper feed roller.
3. When the paper feed sensor (PS106) located just before the pre-registration roller detects the leading edge of the paper [3], SD100
turns ON to make the pick-up roller separate from the paper, and the paper is fed only by the paper feed roller.
4. When the pre-registration sensor (PS107) turns ON [4], CL101 is turned OFF to stop the paper feed roller and the pickup roller.
5. When a predetermined time period has elapsed after PS107 detects the first paper and turns off, SD100 turns off to bring the pick-up
roller into contact with the loaded paper, and at the same time, CL101 becomes on to make the pick-up roller rotate and pick up the
second sheet of paper [5].
[1]
[2] [4]
[3]
[5]

LU exit sensor (PS107)
a03wt2e004ca
[1]
Start button ON
[2]
Pick-up roller presses paper with its own weight.
[3]
Drive force transmission to the pick-up roller and paper

feed roller.
[4]
Pick-up roller separates from loaded paper
[5]
Pick-up roller goes down

The separation roller [5] rotates in the direction [10] opposite to the paper conveyance direction [9] by means of the torque limiter [8].
The separation roller is pressed against the paper feed roller [1] by the force [6] exerted by the spring [7] and the torque generated by the
torque limiter. The friction force between the separation roller and the paper feed roller is limited by the torque limiter in order to prevent
multi-feed.
When no paper exist between the separation roller and the paper feed roller, and when the only 1 sheet of paper is present, the
separation roller is driven by the paper feed roller in the direction of the arrow [4] since the torque is over the limit.
PC -3

SECTION
When multiple sheets of paper are fed, the friction force between the 2 rollers drops causing counterrotating [10] of the separation roller,
and the lower paper [2] that contacts with the separation roller is fed back to the tray [3].
[10]
[1]
[9]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
a03wt2c005ca
[1]
Paper feed roller
[2]
2nd paper
[3]
Tray direction
[4]
Driven rotation
[5]
Separation roller
[6]
Pressure
[7]
Spring
[8]
Torque limiter
[9]
[10]
(3) Pre-registration control

(a) Outline
1. The pre-registration roller [3] is driven by the paper feed motor (M1) via the pre-registration clutch (CL102). M1 drive force is
transmitted/shut off by CL102 to rotate/stop the roller.
2. The pre-registration control for the second and subsequent papers differs depending on the paper size (whether the paper is smallsized or large-sized) because of the difference in interval between papers.
3. This control is carried out mainly by the paper feed sensor (PS106) [4], pre-registration sensor (PS107) [1], the intermediate
conveyance sensor /1 (PS27 in the main body), and the intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28 in the main body).
[3]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[1]
a03wt2c006ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Paper feed roller
(b) Control for small-sized paper

1. Paper fed by the paper feed roller hits against the pre-registration roller that is stopping due to the off-status [1] of CL102, and the skew
of paper is corrected.
2. Then, after a predetermined time period has elapsed, CL102 turns on [2] to rotate the pre-registration roller to convey the paper.
3. When a predetermined time period has elapsed after PS106 detects the rear end of the paper, CL102 turns off to stop the preregistration roller [3].
4. The same operation is carried out for the second and subsequent papers.
PC -4

SECTION
[2]
[3]

[1]
a03wt2e007ca
[1]
Paper skew correction
[2]
[3]
CL102 turns off upon completion of 1st paper

conveyance
Paper conveyance into the main body
(c) Control for large-sized paper

1. The pre-registration for the 1st sheet of paper is carried out in the same manner as that for small-sized paper.
2. CL102 turns on again [1] after the 2nd paper hits against the pre-registration roller, and turns off [2] when a predetermined time period
has elapsed after the pre-registration sensor (PS107) detects the leading edge of paper, then keeps the off-status until the rear end of
the 1st paper is detected by PS27 in the main body.
3. When PS27 detects the rear end of the 1st paper, the CL102 turns on [3] to convey the 2nd paper, and turns off [4] when the leading
edge of the 2nd paper is detected by the PS27.
4. The CL102 turns on again [5] when PS28 detects the rear end of the 1st paper, and turns off [6] when PS28 detects the leading edge of
the 2nd paper.
5. When a predetermined time period has elapsed after a V-TOP signal is issued (when a printing process for the 1st paper is finished),
MC102 turns on again [7] to convey the 2nd paper, and turns off to stop the conveyance when a predetermined time period has
elapsed after PS106 detects the rear end of the paper.
[4] [6] [8]
[1]
[2]
[3] [5] [7]

Pre-registration clutch (PS102)
V-TOP signal of the main body
a03wt2e008ca
[1]
Paper skew correction
[2]
Waits until PS27 detects the 1st paper
[3]
Starts conveyance of the 2nd paper to PS27
[4]
Turns off when the 2nd paper reaches PS27
[5]
Starts conveyance of the 2nd paper to PS28
[6]
Turns off when the 2nd paper reaches PS28
[7]
Restarts conveyance
[8]
CL102 turns off upon completion of 2nd paper

conveyance
(4) Air assist control

The paper feed assist fan/Fr (FM1) and /Rr (FM2) are mounted to the side guide/Fr and /Rr respectively in order to assist the separation
of paper.
When coated paper has been selected at the paper setting, FM1 and FM2 turns on upon receiving a print start signal.
The air-blowing level of the FM1 and FM2 can be selected from Auto, ON (strong), ON (weak), and OFF at the paper setting.
PC -5

SECTION

[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a03wt2c009ca
[1]
Side guide /Rr
[2]
Paper feed assist fan/Rr (FM2)
[3]
Paper
[4]
Paper feed assist fan/Fr (FM1)
[5]
Side guide /Fr
[6]
Airflow

A paper empty status can be detected by on/off statuses of the upper limit sensor (PS109) [6] and the paper empty sensor (PS108) [1].
When paper is loaded on the tray, the paper pushes the actuator [2] up as the paper lift plate [4] moves upward and PS108 [1] turns on.
Further upward movement of the plate pushes the actuator [5] up and turns PS109 [6] on.
When no paper exist on the tray, the actuator [2] of PS108 [1] goes into the hole [3] of the paper lift plate [4] instead of being pushed up, and
only the actuator [5] is pushed up to turn PS109 [6] on. The status (PS108 is off and PS109 is on) is judged as a paper empty status, and an
arrow mark ( ) appears on the tray mark displayed on the touch panel of the main unit.
When the tray runs out of paper while feeding paper, the status is detected when the PS108 becomes off with PS109 kept on.
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
a03wt2c010ca
[1]
[2]
Actuator of PS108
[3]
Hole
[4]
Paper lift plate
[5]
Actuator of PS109
[6]

The remaining amount of paper is detected by the position of the remaining paper detection gear [6] moved together with the shaft [5] of the
paper lift motor (M100) which drives the paper lift plate.
The remaining paper detection gear incorporates the actuator [9], and the actuator position is detected by the 4 remaining paper sensors; /1
(PS102) [1], /2 (PS103) [2], /3 (PS104) [3], and /4 (PS105) [4].
According to on/off statuses of the 4 sensors, the remaining amount of paper can be figured out.
PC -6

SECTION

[8]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
a03wt2c011ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Shaft of the paper lift motor (M100)
[6]
Remaining paper detection gear
[7]
Rotational direction when the paper lift plate goes up
[8]
Rotational direction when the paper lift plate goes down
[9]
Actuator
(1) Sensor detection and remaining paper

The remaining amount of paper is detected in 8 levels according to on/off statuses of the 4 sensors.
The number of horizontal lines, or an arrow mark appear on the tray mark displayed on the touch panel of the main unit in order to
indicate the remaining amount of paper in the tray.
Remaining paper sensor /1, /2, /3, /4 statuses and remaining amount of paper
PS102
PS103
PS104
PS105
1 to 600
Number of sheets (80g/m2)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2 lit
Indication on the touch panel
600 to 850
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
2 lit
850 to 1100
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
3 lit
1100 to 1400
ON
ON
ON
OFF
4 lit
1400 to 1700
ON
ON
ON
ON
5 lines light
1700 to 1950
OFF
ON
ON
ON
6 lines light
1950 to 2250
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
7 lines light
2250 or more
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
7 lines light
Note
The number of sheets shown on the table is approximate values when the paper weight (thickness) is 80g/m2. It varies
depending on the thickness of paper.

(1) Outline
The detection method differs between main scan direction and sub scan direction.
Paper size in main scan direction is detected by the position of the gear of the paper size VR (VR1) [1] which is rotated by the detection
guide plate/Rr [2] mounted on the side guide/Fr [6].
Paper size in sub scan direction is detected by the paper size sensors /Rr (PS110) [7] and /Fr (PS111) [8]. When the paper rear guide [4]
moves, the detection guide plates /1 [5] and /2 [6] are moved upward/downward according to their shape, and the actuators turn PS110
and PS111 on or off.
PC -7

SECTION
[1]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
a03wt2c012ca
[1]
Paper size VR (VR1)
[2]
Detection guide plate/Rr
[3]
Side guide /Rr
[4]
Paper trailing edge guide
[5]
Detection guide plate/1
[6]
Detection guide plate/2
[7]
Paper size sensor/Rr (PS110)
[8]
Paper size sensor/Fr (PS111)
[9]
Side guide /Fr
[10]
Detection guide plate/Fr
(2) Sensor detection and paper size

The tables below lists how paper sizes are detected by the paper size VR (VR1), the paper size sensor/Rr (PS110) and /Fr (PS111).
Main scan direction
VR1
In the direction of the sub-scan

PS110
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PS111
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
SRA4
291.1 or lower
13 x 19
SRA3
SPECIAL
291.0 to 241.5
A3
12 x 18
SPECIAL
A4
241.4 to 200.5
11 x 17
16K
8KS
81/2 x 11S
200.4 to 141.1
B5
16K
8KS
B4S
141.1 to 96.9
SPECIAL
SRA4S
81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 14S
96.9 or more
A4S
SPECIAL
81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 14S
ON: Blocks light of the sensor

OFF: Transmits light of the sensor
2.3.5 Mis-centering detection control

(1) Outline
The position of paper being conveyed is detected by the centering sensor (PS1) [3] and the LU exit sensor (PS107), and the detected
result is used in the image processing section to adjust timing to start printing so that the scanned image is properly centered on the
paper.
PS1 detects the edge of the paper in the main scan direction.
PS107 detects the edge of the paper in the sub scan direction.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
a03wt2c013ca
PC -8

SECTION

[1]
Separation roller
[2]
Pre-registration roller (driven side)
[3]
[4]
Front side
(2) Detection area

The detection range [5] of the centering sensor (PS1) [6] is 216 mm in the main scan direction.
The gap between the center [4] of paper [1] in the main scan direction and the origin point [2] of PS1 is 21.85 mm [3].
The resolution is 0.125 with 1728 dots.
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a03wt2c014ca
[1]
Paper
[2]
Origin point of the sensor
[3]
Gap between sensor origin and paper center
[4]
Center of the paper
[5]
Detection range
[6]
PC -9
PC THEORY OF OPERATION LU-202/HT-503 > 3. UP/DOWN

SECTION
3. UP/DOWN SECTION
3.1 Configuration
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
Lower limit sensor (PS101)
[3]
Lift wire
[4]
[5]
Paper lift plate
3.2 Drive
[10]
[9]
[8]
[1]
[3]
[2]
FRONT
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
a03wt2c016ca
[1]
Lift wire/Rr1
[2]
Lift wire/Rr2
[3]
Lift wire/Rr3
[4]
Drive shaft
[5]
Lift wire/Fr3
[6]
Lift wire/Fr2
[7]
Lift wire/Fr1
[8]
Paper lift plate
[9]
[10]
Remaining paper detection gear
PC -10
PC THEORY OF OPERATION LU-202/HT-503 > 3. UP/DOWN

SECTION
3.3 Operation
(1) Up/down control
Moving the paper lift plate up/down is made by winding/releasing the lift wires with the pulleys driven by the paper lift motor (M100).
Six lift wires are connected to the paper lift plate (three each on front and back). 2 wires each on the front and back of the plate; lift wire/
Fr2, /Fr3, /Rr2, /Rr3, lift the paper lift plate, and the other 2 (one each on front and back); lift wire/Fr1 and /Rr1, pull the plate downward.
The pulling force of the lift wire/Fr1 and /Rr1 is exerted by the springs and it works to stabilize the paper lift plate.
(2) Up operation
When the upper door sensor (PS100) turns on [1] upon closing of the upper door, the paper lift motor (M100) rotates in forward direction
to lift the paper lift plate [2] until the upper limit sensor (PS109) turns on [3].
When the height of paper stacked in the tray becomes lower as the paper is fed, PS109 becomes off [4] and M100 starts to rotate again in
forward direction to lift the paper lift plate until PS109 becomes on [5] again.
[6][7]
Paper lift
motor (M101)
Forward
Reverse
Upper door sensor (PS100)

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4] [5] [4] [5]
a03wt2e017ca
[1]
Closing of upper door
[2]
Paper lift plate goes up
[3]
Paper lift plate stops at the upper limit position
[4]
The height of stacked paper lowers due to paper feeding
[5]
Paper lift plate reaches the upper limit position
(3) Down operation

When the upper door sensor (PS100) turns off upon opening of the upper door, the paper lift motor (M100) starts to rotate in reverse
direction to make the paper lift plate go down by a predetermined amount.
When the tray down switch (SW100) is pressed while PS100 is off, M100 starts to rotate in reverse direction to lower the paper lift plate by
90 mm.
After SW100 is pressed, M100 stops when the lower limit sensor (PS101) turns on (detects that the paper lift plate reaches the lower limit
position). The paper lift plate does not go down while PS101 is on even if SW100 is pressed.
PC -11
PC THEORY OF OPERATION LU-202/HT-503 > 4. OTHERS
4. OTHERS
4.1 Dehumidification heater control
The LU is equipped with the dehumidifier heater/1 (DH1) to reduce the moisture inside the LU.
DH1 is powered with 220 VAC supplied from the main body, and activated by turning on the dehumidifier heater switch (SW3) on the main
body and turning off the sub power switch (SW2)
[1]
a03wt2c018ca
[1]
4.2 Interlock switch control

The interlock switch/1 (MS1) and the front door sensor (PS115) are mounted on the front door, and the interlock switch/2 (MS2) and the
upper door sensor (PS100) are mounted on the upper door.
The power to drive the paper feed motor (M1) is transmitted via MS1 and the MS2. If the front door or the upper door is opened, MS1 and
MS2 turn off to cut the power supply to the paper feed motor (M1).
When PS115 and PS100 turn off while paper being fed, the LU drive board (LUDB) changes M1 drive signal into off in order to stop the
paper feeding.
PC -12
PC THEORY OF OPERATION LU-202/HT-503 > 5. HT-503

(OPTIONAL)
5. HT-503 (OPTIONAL)
5.1 Configuration
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Dehumidifier heater/3 (DH/2)
[4]
[5]
Temperature sensor/2 (TEMS2)
5.2 Operation
5.2.1 Dehumidifier fan heater control
(1) Outline
The dehumidifier heater /3 (DH2) and the dehumidifier fans /1 (FM3) and /2 (FM4) dehumidify inside the LU with the warm air circulation
to prevent the paper feed jam of the coated paper.
The dehumidifier control has 2 processes; a dehumidifier fan heater pre-drying and the temperature limiting dehumidification control. The
first one (pre-drying) is made with DH2, FM3 and FM4. Once the target temperature rise is achieved, the pre-drying process is finished
and further dehumidification control limiting the temperature is carried out only by DH2.
The dehumidification control is carried out according to the temperature inside the tray detected by the temperature sensor /1 (TEMS1),
and continued until the target temperature rise is achieved.
Feeding paper from the LU cannot be made while the dehumidification control being performed. (this can be allowed by changing DIPSW
setting)
(2) Dehumidifier fan heater preliminary dry control

The user setting menu has an option to activate pre-drying with the dehumidifier fan heater before printing every time the upper door is
opened/closed.
When the pre-drying with the dehumidifier fan heater is set not to be activated in the user setting menu, the pre-drying before printing is
carried out if the upper door is opened/closed and a change in remaining amount of paper is detected.
DH2, FM3, and FM4 turn on when 56% or higher ambient humidity is detected by the temp/humidity sensor/ 1 (TEM/HUMS1) of the main
unit.
FM3 and FM4 are turned on at regular intervals, and kept on for a specified time period.
(3) Start condition of the dehumidification control

When the sub power switch (SW2) is turned on with the dehumidifier fan heater setting set to [Automatic] or [On (compulsory)], and with
the paper type set to coated paper.
After the upper door is opened/closed with the dehumidifier fan heater setting set to [Automatic] or [On (compulsory)], and with the paper
type set to coated paper.
When the paper type is changed to coated paper from other paper type with the dehumidifier fan heater setting set to [Automatic] or [On
(compulsory)].
When the dehumidifier fan heater setting is changed to [Automatic] from [Off (compulsory)], or changed to [On (compulsory)].
(4) Temperature limiting dehumidification control

After the pre-drying is finished, the HTR3 is turned on or off to keep the target temperature.
Ambient humidity
Required value for temperature rise in the tray
55% or less
Not controlled
56% to 60%
61% to 65%
66% to 70%
71 to 75%
Higher than 76%
10
PC -13
PC THEORY OF OPERATION LU-202/HT-503 > 5. HT-503

(OPTIONAL)
(5) Stop condition of the dehumidification control

When other than coated paper is selected as the paper type while the control is in progress.
When the dehumidifier fan heater setting is changed to [Off (compulsory)] while the control is in progress.
PC -14
PD THEORY OF OPERATION MB-504 > 1. OUTLINE
PD THEORY OF OPERATION MB-504

1. OUTLINE
[2]
[1]
[1]
Tray section
[2]
1.2 Paper path
[1]
[1]
Bypass tray paper feed
PD -1
Paper feed section
PD THEORY OF OPERATION MB-504 > 2. PAPER FEED SECTION

2.1 Configuration
[6]
[7]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Lift plate
[2]
[3]
Paper empty sensor /BP (PS47)
[4]
[5]
Separation roller
[6]
Paper feed roller
[7]
Pick-up roller
2.2 Drive
[6]
[7]
[2] [8]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[4]
a03ut2c054ca
[1]
Lift gear
[2]
Pick-up roller
[3]
Separation roller
[4]
Paper feed motor (M41)(main body)
[5]
Drive coupling
[6]
Paper feed roller
[7]
Paper feed clutch /BP (CL6)
[8]
Paper lift motor /35 (M)
2.3 Operation
(1) Up operation
The paper lift motor /BP (M35) drives the lift gear and lifts the lift plate.
(2) Down operation

The paper lift motor /BP (M35) drives the lift gear and lowers the lift plate.
PD -2

(a) Up operation
When paper is set in the tray, the paper lift motor /BP (M35) rotates in forward to lift the lift plate.
When the upper limit sensor /BP (PS25) detects the top of the set paper and turns ON as the lift plate moves up, M35 turns OFF and
stops the up operation.
Once PS25 turns OFF from ON with the paper feed operation, M35 turns ON again and lifts the lift plate. Once PS25 turns ON again
with this operation, M35 turns OFF and stops the up operation.
(b) Down operation

When paper in the bypass tray is gone and the paper empty sensor /BP (PS47) turns OFF, M35 rotates in reverse and lowers the lift
plate.
Once paper is removed from the tray, the down operation is executed.
Once the paper supply door of LU is open, the down operation is executed.
M35 turns OFF a specified period of time after starting the reverse rotation and stops the down operation.

(1) Size detection in the main scan direction
Paper size is detected by the resistance value of the paper size VR /BP (VR4).
The resistance value of VR4 varies depending on the position of the guide plate.
(2) Size detection in the sub scan direction

It is detected by the combination of the ON/OFF status of the paper size sensors /BP1 (PS48) and /BP2 (PS49).

(1) Pick-up control
The paper feed motor (M41) of the main body turns ON upon receiving a print start signal [1].
A specified period of time after the start signal is received [1], the pick-up solenoid /BP (SD5) and the paper feed clutch /BP (CL6) are
turned ON [2].
When SD5 turns ON, the pick-up roller descends and presses the paper with its own weight.
The pick-up roller rotates to feed the top sheet to the paper feed roller by using the M41 drive force transmitted by the turning ON of the
CL6.
The subsequent feeding by the pick-up roller is made when the paper feed sensor/BP (PS26) detects the rear end of the previous paper
and turn OFF [3].
[1] [2]
[3]

Pick-up solenoid /BP (SD5)
Paper feed clutch /BP (CL6)
Paper feed sensor /BP (PS26)
[1]
Print start signal
[2]
[3]
2nd sheet pick-up
1st sheet pick-up

The separation roller [4] is driven in the opposite direction [1] to the paper feed direction [8] via the torque limiter [6].
The separation roller is pressed against the paper feed roller [10] by means of the spring [5] force [9] and the pressure applied from the
torque limiter.
When no paper exists between the separation roller and the paper feed roller or when the only one sheet of paper is present, the
separation roller is driven by the paper feed roller in the direction of arrow [3] since the torque is over the limit.
When multiple sheets of paper are fed, the separation roller reverses the direction of rotation [7] since the paper friction force is not over
the limit.
When the separation roller rotates in the reverse direction, the lower sheet of paper [2] contacting the separation roller is pushed back
toward the tray [1] and separated.
[10]
[9]
[8]
[3] [2]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[5]
a03ut2c092ca
PD -3
[1]
Tray direction
[2]
2nd paper
[3]
Driven rotation
[4]
Separation roller
[5]
Spring
[6]
Torque limiter
[7]
[8]
Paper conveyance direction
[9]
Pressure
[10]
Paper feed roller
2.3.4 Paper empty control

The paper empty sensors /BP (PS47) detects the paper empty in the tray.

When the paper empty sensor /BP (PS47) turns OFF, the message that informs that paper is not set in the bypass tray is displayed.
PD -4
PE THEORY OF OPERATION RU-509/HM-102 > 1. OUTLINE
PE THEORY OF OPERATION RU-509/HM-102

1. OUTLINE
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
De-curler section
[2]
Entrance conveyance section
[3]
HT-102 (HM-102 option)
[4]
Paper exit section
[5]
Output paper density detection section
PE -1
PE THEORY OF OPERATION RU-509/HM-102 > 1. OUTLINE
1.2 Paper path

1.2.1 Straight conveyance/de-curler conveyance/humidification conveyance mode
*1
[1]
[2]
[1]
Bypass conveyance path
[2]
Humidification conveyance path
*1 The paper path of the de-curler section differs depending on the operation pattern of the de-curler.
PE -2
PE THEORY OF OPERATION RU-509/HM-102 > 2. ENTRANCE

CONVEYANCE SECTI...
2. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION

2.1 Configuration
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[7]
[2]
[8]
[1]
[1]
Humidification conveyance gate
[2]
Entrance conveyance roller /3
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
2.2 Drive
2.2.1 Conveyance drive
[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[7]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
PE -3

CONVEYANCE SECTI...
2.2.2 Humidification section gate drive

[1]
[1]
[2]
Humidification section gate solenoid (SD1)
[2]
Humidification section gate
2.3 Operation
(1) Mechanism
The entrance conveyance motor (M1) and the intermediate conveyance motor (M2) conduct the conveyance.
M1 drives the entrance conveyance rollers /1, /2 and /3 via the gear and the belt.
The entrance conveyance roller /3 has the one-way clutch and it makes up the conveyance speed gap between the humidification section
entrance conveyance motor (M7) and M1.
M2 drives the intermediate conveyance rollers /1 and /2 via the gear and the belt.
The intermediate conveyance roller /2 receives the paper conveyed from the humidification section and conveys it to the de-curler section.
(2) Entrance conveyance control of humidifier ON Mode

1. When the start button turns ON, the entrance conveyance motor (M1) turns ON at the same line speed as the paper exit from the main
body, and the intermediate conveyance motor (M2) turns ON at 400 mm/s. Controls the speed of M1 only when the paper whose length in
the sub direction is 341mm to 488mm is conveyed at the line speed of 1000 mm/s. In other cases, it drives at the constant speed during
printing.
2. After a specified period of time since the humidification section entrance sensor (PS7) detects the leading edge of paper and turns ON,
M1 switches to 400mm/s [1].
3. After a specified period of time since PS1 turns OFF, M1 returns to the exit line speed of the main body [2].
4. When the paper exit sensor (PS12) detects the trailing edge of the last paper and turns OFF, M1 and M2 turn OFF.
[1]
[2]
Entrance conveyance motor

(M1)
Main body
speed
400mm/s
Intervmediate conveyance motor (M2) 400mm/s
[1]
M1 switches to 400mm/s
[2]
M1 switches to the same line speed as the main body for

the next paper
*The picture shows the case of paper 341mm to 488mm in sub scan direction conveyed at 1000mm/s.
(3) Entrance conveyance control of humidifier OFF Mode

When the start button turns ON, the entrance conveyance motor (M1) and the intermediate conveyance motor (M2) turn ON at the same
line speed as the main body.
Controls the speed of M1 and M2 only when the paper is conveyed from the main body at the line speed of 1000 mm/s. In other cases, it
drives at the constant speed during printing.
When the 140mm to 270mm length of paper in the sub scan direction is conveyed at 1000 mm/s, only M2 reduces its speed to 400 mm/s
after a specified period of time when the de-curler entrance solenoid (PS2) detects the leading edge of paper, and M2 returns to 1000
mm/s after a specified period of time when PS3 detects the trailing edge of the paper.
PE -4

CONVEYANCE SECTI...
When the paper whose length in the sub direction is 271mm to 488mm is conveyed at the line speed of 1000 mm/s, M1 and M2 reduce its
speed to 400 mm/s after a specified period of time since PS2 detects the leading edge of paper. M1 returns to 1000 mm/s after a
specified period of time since the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of paper, and M2 returns to 1000mm/s after a specified
period of time since PS2 detects the trailing edge of paper.
(4) Entrance conveyance control of the output paper density detection mode
(a) When the exit line speed of the main body is low, middle (all paper length) or high (441mm to 488mm length of
paper in the sub scan direction)
1. When the start button turns ON, the entrance conveyance motor (M1) and the intermediate conveyance motor (M2) turn ON at the
same line speed as the main body.
2. When the paper in the sub scan direction is 140mm to 440mm length, M1 and M2 switch to 400 mm/s after the entrance sensor (PS1)
detects the trailing edge of the paper and turns OFF [1].
When the paper in the sub scan directions is 441mm to 488mm length, M1 and M2 switch to 400 mm/s after a specified period of time
when the de-curler entrance sensor (PS2) detects the leading edge of the paper and turns ON.
[1]
[2]
[3]
400mm/s
Entrance conveyance motor
(M1)
Middle
Low
400mm/s
Intermediate conveyance motor

(M2)
Middle
Low
[1]
[2]
[3]

the next paper

the next paper
*The picture is for the case of 140mm to 440mm length of paper in the sub scan directions.
(b) When the exit line speed of the main body is high (140mm to 440mm length of paper in the sub scan direction)
1. When the start button turns ON, the entrance conveyance motor (M1) and the intermediate conveyance motor (M2) turn ON at the
same line speed as the main body.
2. When the paper in the sub scan direction is 140mm to 220mm length, M1 increases its speed to a specified rate after a specified period
of time when the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the leading edge of paper and turns ON, and M2 increases its speed to a specified rate
after a specified period of time when PS1 detects the trailing edge of paper and turns OFF.
When the paper in the sub scan direction is 221mm to 440mm length, M1 and M2 increase its speed to a specified rate after a specified
period of time when the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the leading edge of paper and turns ON.
3. When the paper in the sub scan direction is 140mm to 350mm length, M1 returns to the exit line speed of the main body after a
specified period of time since PS1 detects the trailing edge of paper and turns OFF.
When the paper in the sub scan direction is 351mm to 440mm length, M1 reduces its speed to 400mm/s after a specified period of time
when the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the leading edge of paper and turns ON, and M1 returns to the exit line speed of the main
body after a specified period of time when PS1 detects the trailing edge of paper and turns OFF.
4. M2 switches to 400mm/s after a specified period of time since PS1 turns ON. Also, after a specified period of time since PS2 turns OFF
by detecting the paper trailing edge, M2 returns to the exit line speed of the main body.
2.3.2 Humidification section gate control

(1) Mechanism
The humidification section gate solenoid (SD1) drives the humidification section gate. The gate is set to the bypass route when it is turned
OFF and is set to the conveyance route to the humidification section when it is turned ON.
The conveyance route to the humidification section is selected for humidifying paper.
(2) Humidification section gate control

(a) Humidifier mode
1. A specified period of time after the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the leading edge of the paper and turns ON, the humidification gate
solenoid (SD1) turns ON and switches the path to the humidification section.
2. When the paper exit sensor (PS12) detects the trailing edge of the last paper and turns OFF, SD1 turns OFF.
PE -5

CONVEYANCE SECTI...
(b) Humidifier OFF mode

In the Humidifier OFF mode, SD1 does not turn ON.
PE -6
PE THEORY OF OPERATION RU-509/HM-102 > 3. DE-CURLER

SECTION
3. DE-CURLER SECTION
3.1 Configuration
[12]
[1]
[2]
[11]
[3]
[4]
[10]
[9]
[5]
[8]
[6]
[7]
[1]
De-curler roller /4
[2]
De-curler roller /3
[3]
De-curler belt /Rt
[4]
De-curler gate /2
[5]
De-curler roller /2
[6]
De-curler belt /2
[7]
De-curler conveyance roller /1
[8]
De-curler gate /1
[9]
De-curler roller /1
[10]
De-curler belt /1
[11]
De-curler belt /Lt
[12]
PE -7

SECTION
3.2 Drive
3.2.1 De-curler section conveyance drive
[10]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
De-curler belt /Lt
[2]
De-curler belt /Rt
[3]
De-curler belt /2
[4]
De-curler roller /2
[5]
[6]
De-curler roller /1
[7]
De-curler belt /1
[8]
[9]
PE -8

SECTION
3.2.2 De-curler gates /1 and /2 drive

[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
De-curler gate /1
[4]
De-curler gate /2
3.2.3 De-curlers /3 and /4 pressure drive

[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
De-curler roller /3
[2]
De-curler pressure cam /Lw
[3]
De-curler pressure roller /Lw
[4]
Drive gear of the de-curler pressure motor /Lw (M5) shaft
[5]
[6]
Rear side
[7]
Drive gear of the de-curler pressure motor /Up (M6) shaft
[8]
[9]
De-curler pressure roller /Up
[10]
De-curler pressure cam /Up
PE -9

SECTION

[11]
De-curler roller /4
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 Outline of de-curler
(1) Outline of de-curler
The de-curler section consists of the de-curlers /1 [13], /2 [5], /3 [15] and /4 [17]. The de-curlers /3 and /4 correct the paper curl through
the zigzag path [2] that can change the flexion strength.
The de-curler /1 corrects the large convex curled paper with the de-curler roller /1 [10] of curvature R5 and the de-curler belt /1 [12].
The de-curler /2 corrects the large concave curled paper with the de-curler roller /2 [7] of curvature R5 and the de-curler belt /2 [6].
When the de-curler/1, /2 is not used, the de-curler gate solenoid /1 (SD2), /2 (SD3) drives the de-curler gate/1 [11], /2 [8] and switches to
the bypass path [9], [14].
The de-curler/3, /4 corrects the convex-concave curled paper by changing the shapes of 2 de-curler belts /Rt [3] and /Lt [16] pressing with
the de-curler roller/3 [4], /4 [1].
[17]
[1]
[2]
[16]
[15]
[3]
[14]
[4]
[13]
[5]
[12]
[6]
[11]
[10] [9]
[8]
[7]
[1]
De-curler roller /4
[2]
Zigzag path
[3]
De-curler belt /Rt
[4]
De-curler roller /3
[5]
De-curler /2
[6]
De-curler belt /2
[7]
De-curler roller /2
[8]
De-curler gate /2
[9]
Bypath path
[10]
De-curler roller /1
[11]
De-curler gate /1
[12]
De-curler belt /1
[13]
De-curler /1
[14]
Bypath path
[15]
De-curler /3
[16]
De-curler belt /Lt
[17]
De-curler /4
(2) De-curler /3 mechanism

The de-curler pressure motor /Lw (M5) drives the pressure of the de-curler roller /3 [9] via the de-curler pressure cam /Lw [7].
The de-curler pressure home sensor /Lw (PS5) [3] detects the home position.
When the de-curler pressure cam /Lw is at the home position, the de-curler roller pressure roller is pressed at the position [2]. At this time,
the belt is at the push out position [5], and the wrap angle of the belt of the de-curler roller /3 is 22.5 degrees [1].
When the de-curler pressure cam /Lw presses the de-curler roller pressure roller at the position [6], the de-curler roller /3 is at the position
[8] and the belt is parallel [4].
PE -10

SECTION

[7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
Wrap angle
[2]
Home position
[3]
[4]
De-curler belt /Rt, /Lt parallel
[5]
De-curler belt /Rt, /Lt pressed
[6]
De-curler belt /Rt, /Lt pressing position in parallel
[7]
De-curler pressure cam /Lw
[8]
De-curler roller /3 in parallel
[9]
De-curler roller /3
(3) De-curler /4 mechanism

1. The de-curler pressure motor /Up (M6) drives the pressure [5] of the de-curler roller /4 [2] via the de-curler pressure cam /Up [9].
2. The de-curler pressure home sensor /Up (PS6) [3] detects the home position.
3. The belt exit wrap angle [13] of the belt roller /Up [1] changes depending on the pressing position of the de-curler roller /4. It has 6
patterns of angle; 0 degree, 15 degrees, 22.5 degrees, 30 degrees, 37.5 degrees, 45 degrees.
4. The de-curler pressure roller is pressed when the belt exit wrap angle 30 degrees is the home position and the position of the de-curler
pressure cam /Up [8]. 30 degrees is the angle that paper exits from the de-curl section keeping the correction effect of the de-curler /1, /2.
5. The belt is parallel [4] when the belt exit wrap angle is 0 degree and the pressing position of the de-curler pressure cam /Up is [12].
6. The following list shows the positional relation between the belt exit wrap angle and the de-curler cam/Up.
De-curler pressure cam rotation angle
(from home position)
Belt wrap angle

0 degree (parallel)
- 202.5 degrees [12]
15 degrees
- 100 degrees [11]
22.5 degrees
- 50 degrees [10]
30 degrees (home position)
0 degree [8]
37.5 degrees
50 degrees [7]
45 degrees
100 degrees [6]
7. When the de-curler roller /4 is other than parallel by being pushed out, the de-curler roller /3 is also at the push out position increasing the
flexing number.
PE -11

SECTION

[11]
[12]
[13]
[1]
[10]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Belt roller /Up
[2]
De-curler roller /4
[3]
[4]
Parallel
[5]
Pressed status
[6]
De-curler pressure cam angle 100 degrees
[7]
De-curler pressure cam 50 degrees
[8]
De-curler pressure cam angle 0 degree
[9]
De-curler pressure cam
[10]
De-curler pressure cam angle -50 degree
[11]
De-curler pressure cam angle -100 degree
[12]
De-curler pressure cam angle -202.5 degree
[13]
Belt exit wrap angle
(4) De-curler paper feed pattern
The method to adjust the curl depends on the paper type and weight.
The paper feed pattern has 2 types; the default mode and the individual setting mode.
The de-curlers /1 and /2 which adjust strongly with small curvature are effective for thin paper.
The de-curlers /3 and /4 which adjust to the exit wrap angle after flexing concavity and convexity some times are effective for thick paper.
(a) Default mode

It is the default when "0" is selected on the "Curl Adjustment screen" of the operation panel.
HM
Provided
or not
provided
Paper Size
Not
provided
All Size
Paper weight (g/m2)
Provided
Humidification
De-curler
/1
/2
/3
/4
50 to 162
Pressure
30 degrees
163 to 300
Pressure
30 degrees
301 to 350
Pressure
30 degrees
50 to 162
*1
Pressure
30 degrees
163 to 300
*1
Pressure
30 degrees
301 to 350
*1
Pressure
30 degrees
The following shows the meaning of and .

: Use the function
: Not use the function
*1 No humidification on coated/color paper.
(b) Individual setting mode

The individual setting mode can be set on the "Curl Adjustment screen" of the operation panel.
The following list shows the relationship between "Strength of correction" and "Curl Adjustment screen."
Strength of correction "Strong": Setting value "+2 or -2"
Strength of correction "Weak": Setting value "+1 or -1"
PE -12

SECTION

HM
Not
provided
Paper Size
All Size
Paper
weight (g/
m2)
Direction
Strength of
correction
50 to 135
Convex
Strong
Concave
Weak
Convex
Strong
136 to 162
Curl
Concave
Other than
postcard/A6
163 to 300
Convex
Concave
Postcard/A6
163 to 300
Convex
Concave
Provided
Humidification
De-curler
/1
/2
/3
/4
Parallel
0 degree
(parallel)
Weak
Pressure
30 degrees
Strong
Parallel
0 degree
(parallel)
Pressure
30 degree
Pressure
45 degrees
Weak
Pressure
37.5
degrees
Strong
Pressure
15 degrees
Weak
Pressure
22.5
degrees
Strong
Pressure
45 degrees
Weak
Pressure
37.5
degrees
Strong
Pressure
15 degrees
Weak
Pressure
22.5
degrees
Strong
Pressure
45 degrees
Weak
Pressure
45 degrees
Strong
Pressure
15 degrees
Weak
Pressure
15 degrees
All Size
301 to 350
Pressure
30 degrees
All Size
50 to 135
Convex
Strong
/ *1
Parallel
0 degree
(parallel)
Weak
/ *1
Pressure
30 degrees
Strong
/ *1
Parallel
0 degree
(parallel)
Weak
/ *1
Pressure
30 degree
Strong
Pressure
45 degrees
Weak
Pressure
37.5
degrees
Strong
Pressure
15 degrees
Weak
Pressure
22.5
degrees
Strong
Pressure
45 degrees
Weak
Pressure
37.5
degrees
Strong
Pressure
15 degrees
Weak
Pressure
22.5
degrees
Convex
Strong
Pressure
45 degrees
Weak
Pressure
45 degrees
Concave
Strong
Pressure
15 degrees
Weak
Pressure
15 degrees
Pressure
30 degrees
Concave
136 to 162
Convex
Concave
Other than
postcard/A6
163 to 300
Convex
Concave
Postcard/A6
All Size
163 to 300
301 to 350
The following shows the meaning of and .

: Use the function
: Not use the function
*1 No humidification on coated/color paper.
3.3.2 De-curler section conveyance control

(1) Mechanism
The de-curler conveyance motor (M3) drives the de-curler conveyance rollers /1 and /2, and the de-curler belts /Rt and /Lt.
(2) Conveyance control

1. During the humidification ON mode, the output paper density detection mode, or when the paper is conveyed from the main body at the
speed of 1000mm/s, press the printer start ON to turn ON the de-curler conveyance motor (M3) at the line speed of 400mm/s.
In other than the case above, M3 turns ON at the paper exit line speed of the main body when receiving a print job.
PE -13

SECTION
2. After a specified period of time since the paper exit sensor (PS12) detects the trailing edge of the last paper and turns OFF, M3 turns
OFF.
3.3.3 De-curlers /1 and /2 control

(1) When the de-curler control is not switched during printing
1. When the de-curlers /1 and /2 are the bypass route, the de-curler solenoids /1 (SD2) and /2 (SD3) turn ON with receiving a print job.
2. When the paper exit sensor (PS12) detects the trailing edge of the last paper and turns OFF, SD2 turns OFF, then SD3 turns OFF after a
(2) When the de-curler control is switched during printing

1. After a specified period of time since the humidification section entrance sensor(PS7)(in humidifier ON mode) or the entrance sensor
(PS1) (in humidifier OFF mode)detects the leading edge of the paper and turns ON, the de-curler gate solenoid /1 (SD2) switches ON and
OFF.
2. After a specified period of time since the de-curler entrance sensor (PS2) detects the leading edge of the paper and turns ON, the decurler gate solenoid /2 (SD3) switches ON and OFF.
3. When the paper exit sensor (PS12) detects the trailing edge of the last paper and turns OFF, SD2 turns OFF, then SD3 turns OFF after a
3.3.4 De-curlers /3 and /4 control

1. When receiving a print job, the de-curler pressure motors /Lw (M5) and /Up (M6) turn ON, move the de-curler pressure cams /Up and /Lw to
the prescribed position, and turn OFF.
2. If the de-curl condition changes during printing, M5 and M6 turn ON and move the de-curler pressure cam to the pressing position after a
specified period of time since the color density detection timing sensor (PS3) detects the trailing edge of paper, and turn OFF.
3. After a specified period of time since the paper exit sensor (PS12) detects the trailing edge of the last paper and turns OFF, M5 and M6 turn
ON and start the returning operation to the home position.
4. When the de-curler pressure home sensor /Lw (PS5) and /Up (PS6) turn ON, M5 and M6 turn OFF.
PE -14
PE THEORY OF OPERATION RU-509/HM-102 > 4. OUTPUT

PAPER DENSITY DETE...
4. OUTPUT PAPER DENSITY DETECTION SECTION

4.1 Configuration
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
Color density LED /K (CDLEDK)
[2]
Color density LED /C (CDLEDC)
[3]
[4]
Color density LED /M (CDLEDM)
[5]
Color density LED /Y (CDLEDY)
[6]
Output paper density detection support roller
[7]
Shutter
[8]
Color density detection board /Y (CDDBY)
[9]
Color density detection board /M (CDDBM)
[10]
Color density detection board /C (CDDBC)
[11]
Color density detection board /K (CDDBK)
PE -15

4.2 Drive
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Output paper density detection support roller
4.2.2 Shutter drive

[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
PE -16
Shutter

4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Outline
(1) Function overview
Measures the primary color density of the test pattern (YMCK density patch) printed on paper and feeds back to the gamma correction of
the image stabilization control to stabilize the color.
It is a function instead of the gamma correction of the IDC sensor. To measure the color density on the actual printed test pattern, a
correction can be executed based on the characteristics of the 2nd transfer, fusing, and paper.
(2) Density detection mechanism

Sheds LED light from the color density LEDs /Y (CDLEDY), /M (CDLEDM), /C (CDLEDC), and /K (CDLEDK) [1] to the printed test pattern
[2], collects light with the lens [3], and measures the color density with the color density detection boards /Y (CDDBY), /M (CDDBM), /C
(CDDBC), and /K (CDDBK) [4].
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Color density LED /Y (CDLEDY), /M (CDLEDM), /C

(CDLEDC), /K (CDLEDC)
[2]
Test pattern
[3]
Lens
[4]
Color density detection board /Y (CDDBY), /M

(CDDBM), /C (CDDBC), /K (CDDBK)
3 types of wavelength band are used for the LED light and red LED is used for measuring the black patch.
Emission color
CDLEDY
CDLEDM
CDLEDC, CDLEDK
Blue LED
Green LED
Red LED
(3) Paper feed mechanism

The output paper density detection support roller that is driven by the de-curler conveyance motor (M3) conveys the test pattern (YMCK
density patch).
(4) Shutter mechanism
To protect each color of LED and board from paper dust, the shutter mechanism is provided.
The shutter solenoid (SD5) drives the shutter [1].
The LED light volume is adjusted using the correction plate [2] on the shutter.
The light volume adjustment is executed every time when turning ON the power and before measuring the color density.
[2]
[1]
[1]
Shutter
[2]
PE -17
Correction plate

(5) Data flow

The data about the output paper density detection has following 3 types.
1. Default chart correction data
Data registered in the production process using the standard color chart paper
2. User setting chart correction data
It is the measurement value registered on the "Register Paper Category screen" and has 2 types; the output paper density sensor
value and the color measurement value. It is stored in the non-volatile memory of the main body.
Output paper density sensor value:
It is the value of the test pattern (YMCK density patch) that is printed when registering the paper category and measured by
CDDBY, CDDBM, CDDBC, and CDDBK of RU. It is sent from RU to the main body when registering and stored in the non-volatile
memory of the main body.
Color measurement value:
Value which is obtained by measuring the test pattern that is printed when registering the paper category with the color measure
and is registered in the non-volatile memory of the main body with the USB connection
3. Current sensor value
It is the value of the test pattern that is printed when correcting the output paper density measured by the CDDBY, CDDBM, CDDBC,
and CDDBK of RU. It is sent from RU to the main body when measuring.
When turning ON the main body, the default chart correction data is sent from the EEPROM of RU to the main body [2].
When registering the paper category or executing correction, the output paper density sensor value which measures the printed test
pattern (YMCK density patch) is sent to the main body [1].
LED
CDLEDK
LED
CDDBK
CDLEDC
LED
CDDBC
LED
CDLEDM
CDDBM
CDLEDY
CDDBY
CDRLB
EEPROM
UART
RUCB
RU
UART
CDDB
[1]
C8000
PRCB
[2]
[1]
UART
CBS
When registering paper category, When executing

adjustment
[2]
When the power of the main body is ON
(6) Test pattern (YMCK density patch) output quantity

The number of the output test pattern and the patch differs depending on the paper size.
Classification
Details
Number of
patch
Output
quantity
Large size
SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S

13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2x 14, 81/2x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4x 13, 81/8x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K
Custom paper (271.0mm or more in the sub scan direction)
32
Medium size
SRA4, A4, B5S, ISOB5S

16KS
81/2 x 11
Custom paper (The length in the sub scan direction is 210mm to 270.9mm)
32
Small size
B5, 16K, ISOB5

Custom paper (The length in the sub scan direction is 176mm to 209.9mm or more)
32
Nonapproved
A5S, B6R, A6R

5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
Postcard
Custom paper (175.9mm or less in the sub scan direction, or 168.0mm or less in the
main scan direction)
PE -18
No correction
(Since it is shorter than the
sensor read range.)

4.3.2 Output paper density detection section

(1) When turning ON the power and resuming after JAM
As the initial operation, the color density LEDs /Y(CDLEDY), /M(CDLEDM), /C(CDLEDC), and /K(CDLEDK) turn ON and apply the LED
lights to the correction plate (white reference plate) of the shutter so that the output values of CDLEDY, CDLEDM, CDLEDC, and
CDLEDK come to the specified value.
This LED voltage value is registered and used as the initial value of the LED voltage adjustment when measuring the color density.
(2) When measuring the color density

1. When paper on which the test pattern (YMCK density patch) is printed starts the paper feed operation, the color density LEDs /
Y(CDLEDY), /M(CDLEDM), /C(CDLEDC), and /K(CDLEDK) turn ON [1] with the LED voltage registered at initial operation.
2. The sensors of the color density detection boards /Y(CDDBY), /M(CDDBM), /C(CDDBC), and /K(CDDBK) measure the correction plate of
the shutter and adjust the LED voltage [2].
3. After a specified time, CDLEDY, CDLEDM, CDLEDC, and CDLEDK turn OFF and register the offset voltages of CDDBY, CDDBM,
CDDBC, and CDDBK.
4. After a specified period of time since the de-curler entrance sensor (PS2) detects the leading edge of the test pattern paper and turns ON,
the shutter solenoid (SD5) turns ON and opens the shutter [4].
5. After a specified period of time since the color density detection timing sensor (PS3) detects the leading edge of the test pattern paper
and turns ON [5], LED turns ON [6].
6. A specified period of time after CDDBC detects the start line printed on the leading edge of the test pattern [7], LED turns OFF once.
7. After a specified time, LED turns ON [8] again. Then it turns OFF [10] when each sensor of CDDBY, CDDBM, CDDBC, and CDDBK
measures the YMCK color patch [9] and finishes measuring 1 patch.
8. After a specified time, LED turns ON again. Then it repeats measuring the test pattern for the specified number set per paper size.
9. After the measurement, the YMCK measured data of 1 sheet of the test pattern is sent to the main body.
10. The measurement for the specified number set per paper size is repeated.
11. Turn OFF SD5 [11].
[1]
[4]
[5][6][8][10]
De-curler entrance
sensor (PS2)
timing sensor (PS3)
Color density LED
/Y (CDLEDY), /M (CDLEDM),
/C (CDLEDC), /K (CDLEDK)
Color density detection board
/Y (CDDBY), /M (CDDBM),
/C (CDDBC), /K (CDDBK)
[2][3]
[7] [9]
[11]
[1]
LED ON
[2]
Correction plate measurement
[3]
Offset voltage detection
[4]
Shutter open
[5]
Detection of the leading edge of test pattern by PS3
[6]
LED ON
[7]
Start line (black line) for timing detection
[8]
LED ON
[9]
Density patch measurement
[10]
1 density patch measurement completed
[11]
Measurement completed
PE -19
PE THEORY OF OPERATION RU-509/HM-102 > 5. PAPER EXIT

SECTION
5. PAPER EXIT SECTION

5.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
Paper exit roller /1
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
PE -20

SECTION
5.2 Drive
5.2.1 Paper exit conveyance drive
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
PE -21

SECTION
5.3 Operation
5.3.1 Paper exit conveyance control
(1) Mechanism
The paper exit motor (M4) drives the paper exit rollers /1 [6], /2 [5], /3 [3], and /4 [1].
The paper exit rollers /3 and /4 have the one-way clutch to narrow the conveyance line speed gap.
The color density detection timing sensor (PS3) [7], the paper exit conveyance sensor (PS4) [4], and the paper exit sensor (PS12) [2]
detect the paper.
[6]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
(2) Straight conveyance

The control differs depending on the paper size and the mode of the post processing machine.
When the punch registration is performed in the finishing process, paper exits at 400mm/s. In other cases, paper exits at 1000mm/s.
(a) Paper length 140mm to 216mm (with punch registration by post processing machine)
1. During the humidification ON mode, the paper exit density detection mode, or when the paper is conveyed from the main body at the
speed of 1000mm/s, press the printer start ON to turn ON the paper exit motor (M4) at the speed of 400mm/s [1]. During other modes,
M4 turns ON at the main body line speed. (The figure shows the case when M4 turns ON at 400mm/s.)
2. After a specified period of time since the color density detection timing sensor (PS3) detects the leading edge of paper and turns ON
[2], M4 switches to 1000mm/s [3].
3. After a specified period of time since the paper exit sensor (PS12) detects the leading edge of paper and turns ON [4], M4 switches to
400mm/s [5]. Then after another specified time, M4 decelerates to 200mm/s and exits paper [6]. After those operations, punching
operation is executed by the post processing machine.
PE -22

SECTION
4. After a specified period of time, M4 returns to the conveyance line speed [7].
[1]
[2]
[4]

timing sensor(PS3)
Paper exit conveyance sensor(PS4)
1000 mm/s
400 mm/s
200 mm/s
[3]
[5]
[6][7]
[1]
Print start ON
[2]
Detection of the leading edge by PS3
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
M4 switches to the start speed
(b) Paper length 140mm to 200mm (without punch registration by post processing machine)
M4 turns ON at the line speed. (The figure shows the case when M4 turns ON at 400mm/s.)
[2], M4 switches the line speed to 1000mm/s [3].
3. When the paper exit sensor (PS12) detects the paper trailing edge and turns OFF, M4 switches to the same line speed as the paper
exit from the main body or 400mm/s for the succeeding paper.
[1]
[2]
[4]

timing sensor(PS3)
1000 mm/s
400 mm/s
[3]
[5]
[1]
Print start ON
[2]
[3]
[4]
Paper trailing edge detection by PS12
[5]
M4 switches for the succeeding paper
(c) Paper length 201mm to 488mm (without punch registration by post processing machine)
M4 turns ON at the line speed. (The figure shows the case when M4 turns ON at 400mm/s.)
[2], M4 switches the line speed to 1000mm/s [3].
3. After a specified period of time since the paper exit sensor (PS4) detects the paper trailing edge and turns OFF, M4 switches to the
same line speed as the paper exit from the main body or 400mm/s for the succeeding paper.
PE -23

SECTION

[1]
[2]
[4]

timing sensor(PS3)
1000 mm/s
400 mm/s
[3]
[5]
[1]
Print start ON
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
M4 switches for the succeeding paper
PE -24

> 6. HUMIDIFICATION SECTION (H...
6. HUMIDIFICATION SECTION (HM-102)

6.1 Configuration
[1]
[11]
[2]
[10]
[3]
[9]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
[1]
Humidification section conveyance roller /2
[2]
Humidification section entrance conveyance roller /1
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Water feed tank
[7]
[8]
[9]
Water tank assy
[10]
[11]
Humidification section paper fan /1 to /6 (FM6 to FM11)
PE -25

6.2 Drive
6.2.1 Humidification section entrance conveyance drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Humidification entrance conveyance motor (M7)
6.2.2 Humidification section conveyance drive

[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Back side direction
[4]
[5]
PE -26

6.2.3 Humidification roller pressure drive (HM-101)

[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Pressure roller /FrRt
[2]
Drive gear of the humidification roller pressure motor /Rt

(M9) shaft
[3]
Drive gear of the humidification roller pressure motor /Lt

(M10) shaft
[4]
Pressure roller /FrLt
[5]
Humidification roller pressure home sensor /Rt (PS9)
[6]
Humidification roller pressure home sensor /Lt (PS10)
[7]
Water feed roller /Lt
[8]
[9]
[10]
Water feed roller /Rt
[11]
Humidification pressure cam /FrLt
[12]
Humidification pressure cam /FrRt
Water feed tank
6.2.4 Water feed pump drive

[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
Pump motor (P1)
[2]
[3]
Water tank assy
6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Outline of humidification section
1. In the humidification mode, the pump motor (P1) always feeds water [8] into the water tank [7] for the amount 450cc/min (5 times or more
than the water tank capacity + humidification). Flooded water is flowed back to the water feed tank [9] through the collection groove [6], and
water is kept at the constant depth in the water tank.
2. The water feed roller [4] sunk in the water tank is coated by water. The thickness of coated water is uniformed by the pressed control roller
[5] then transferred to the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt [3].
3. Uniformed water is fed to paper passed through between the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt and the water content of paper is increased
about 2%.
4. After water that is not sank into paper but remains on the surface is removed by the humidification section paper fans /1 to /6 (FM6 to FM11)
[2], paper is conveyed by the humidification section conveyance roller /2 [1].
PE -27


[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[1]
[2]
Humidification section paper fan /1 to /6 (FM6 to FM11)
[3]
Humidification roller /Rt and /Lt
[4]
Water feed roller
[5]
Control roller
[6]
Collection groove
[7]
Water tank
[8]
Water feed
[9]
Reflux
6.3.2 Humidification section conveyance control

(1) Mechanism
The humidification section entrance conveyance motor (M7) and the humidification section conveyance motor (M8) drive the conveyance
in the humidifier section.
M7 drives the humidification section entrance conveyance rollers /1 and /2.
M8 drives the humidification section conveyance rollers /1 and /2 and the humidification roller /Rt.
M8 drives at the constant speed 400mm/s to stabilize the water feed amount to paper.
(2) Humidifier ON mode(270mm or less length of paper)

1. When the start button turns ON, the humidification section entrance conveyance motor (M7) turns ON at the same line speed as the
paper exit of the main body, and the humidification section conveyance motor (M8) turns ON at 400 mm/s.
2. After a specified period of time since the humidification section entrance sensor (PS7) detects the leading edge of paper and turns ON [2],
M7 switches the line speed to 400mm/s [3] to align to the conveyance line speed of M8.
3. After a specified period of time, M7 returns to the exit line speed of the main body[4].
[1]
[2]

Humidification entrance
400mm/s
conveyance motor(M7)
Main body speed
[3][4]
[1]
Print start ON
[2]
Detection of the leading edge of the paper by PS7
[3]
M7 switches the humidifier speed to 400mm/s
[4]
M7 switches to the paper exit speed of the main body
(3) Humidifier ON mode(271mm or more length of paper)

3. After a specified period of time since the entrance sensor (PS1) turns OFF by detecting the paper trailing edge [4], M7 returns to the exit
line speed of the main body[5].
PE -28


[1]
[2][4]

Humidification entrance
conveyance motor(M7)
400mm/s
Main body speed
[5]
[3]
[1]
Print start ON
[2]
Detection of the leading edge of the paper by PS7
[3]
M7 switches the humidifier speed to 400mm/s
[4]
Detection of the trailing edge of the paper by PS1
[5]
(4) Humidifier ON mode (paper exit line speed of the main body is 1000mm/s)
3. After a specified period of time since PS7 turns OFF [4] by detecting the paper trailing edge, M7 returns to the exit line speed of the main
body.
[1]
[2]
[4]
Entrance sensor(PS1)
Humidification section entrance sensor(PS7)
entrance conveyance motor(M7)
Mainbodyspeed
400 mm/s
Humidification section conveyance motor(M8)
[3]
[5]
[1]
Print start ON
[2]
[3]
M7 switches the humidification speed to 400mm/s
[4]
[5]
6.3.3 Humidification roller / water feed roller pressure control

(1) Mechanism
(a) OUTLINE
The springs [1] and [8] on the shafts of the control rollers /Rt [20] and /Lt [15] press the humidification rollers /Rt [18], /Lt [17] and the
water feed rollers /Rt [19], /Lt [16] to the paper path side.
Press the humidification pressure cams /FrRt [4] and /RrRt [13], /FrLt [6] and /RrLt [12] driven by the humidification section roller
pressure motors /Rt (M9) [3] and /Lt (M10) [5] to the pressure rollers /FrRt [2] and /RrRt [14], /FrLt [7] and /RrLt [11] to execute the
press/release.
The humidification section roller pressure home sensors /Rt (PS9) [9] and /Lt (PS10) [10] detect the pressed position.
PE -29

[11][12] [13] [14]
[15] [16] [17] [18]
[19]
[20]
[1]
[10]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
Spring
[2]
Pressure roller /FrRt
[3]
Drive gear of the humidification roller pressure motor /Rt

(M9) shaft
[4]
Humidification pressure cam /FrRt
[5]
Drive gear of the humidification roller pressure motor /Lt

(M10) shaft
[6]
Humidification pressure cam /FrLt
[7]
Pressure roller /FrLt
[8]
Spring
[9]
Humidification roller pressure home sensor /Rt (PS9)
[10]
Humidification roller pressure home sensor /Lt (PS10)
[11]
Pressure roller /RrLt
[12]
Humidification pressure cam /RrLt
[13]
Humidification pressure cam /RrRt
[14]
Pressure roller /RrRt
[15]
Control roller /Lt
[16]
Water feed roller /Lt
[17]
[18]
[19]
Water feed roller /Rt
[20]
Control roller /Rt
(b) Patterns of pressure/release of humidification roller and water feed roller

Depending on the angle of the claws [8] on the humidification pressure cams /Rt [10] and /Lt [9], the status differs between the home
position and humidification ON
Condition
Angle of the humidification

pressure cam
Gap between the

humidification rollers /Rt
and /Lt
Gap between the humidification roller /Rt and the

water feed roller /Rt
Gap between the humidification roller /Lt and the
water feed roller /Lt
Home position
23
Release
Release
Humidification ON
100
Pressure
Pressure (Feed water to the humidification roller)
<Home position>
The angle of the humidification pressure cam is 23 degrees [7].
The humidification pressure cams /Rt [10] and /Lt [9] push each other to release the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt.
The humidification pressure cam /Rt and the pressure roller /Rt [11], the humidification pressure cam /Lt and the pressure roller /Lt [6]
push each other to release the humidification roller /Rt and the water feed roller /Rt, the humidification roller /Lt and the water feed
roller /Lt.
<Humidification ON position>
The angle of the humidification pressure cam is 100 degrees [5].
Since not all humidification pressure cams and the pressure rollers press each other, the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt, the
humidification rollers and the water feed rollers are pressed.
PE -30

[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Home position
[2]
Humidification ON position
[3]
100 degrees
[4]
Pressure roller /Lt
[5]
23
[6]
Claw
[7]
Humidification pressure cam /Lt
[8]
Humidification pressure cam /Rt
[9]
Pressure roller /Rt
(2) Control
(a) With humidification
1. After a specified period of time since the humidification section entrance sensor (PS7) detects the leading edge of the 1st sheet and
turns ON [1], the humidification section roller pressure motors /Rt (M9) and /Lt (M10) turn ON and move from the home position to the
humidification ON position [2]. (The picture is for the case when the main body process speed is not 1000mm/s)
2. When the interval between the paper exit of the main body is long (such as the 4th and 5th sheet of A4 duplex printing, large size) and
the specified time passes since PS7 detects the trailing edge and turns OFF [3], M9 and M10 turn ON and start returning to the home
position [4] to release the humidification rollers.
3. When the humidification section roller pressure home sensors /Rt (PS9) and /Lt (PS10) turn ON, M9 and M10 turn OFF [5].
4. After a specified period of time since the humidification section entrance sensor (PS7) detects the leading edge of the succeeding
paper and turns ON [6], M9 and M10 turn ON again and move to the humidification ON position.
5. A specified period of time after PS7 turns OFF, M9 and M10 turn ON to return to the home position [8].
6. When the paper exit sensor (PS12) detects the trailing edge of the last paper and turns OFF [9], M8 turns OFF.
[1]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[9]
entrance sensor (PS7)
Humidification roller Pressure
direction
pressure motor
Release
/Rt (M9), /Lt (M10)
direction
Humidification section roller
pressure home sensor
/Rt (PS9), /Lt (PS10)
[2]
[4]
[7]
[8]
[1]
Detection of the leading edge of the 1st sheet
[2]
Move to the humidification ON position
[3]
Detection of the trailing edge in the exit interval
[4]
Releasing the humidification roller started (The exit

interval is long.)
[5]
Returning to the home position
[6]
Detection of the leading edge of the succeeding paper
[7]
Move to the humidification ON position
[8]
[9]
Detecting the trailing edge of the last paper
(b) Switch control from humidification ON to humidification OFF

1. After a specified period of time since the de-curler entrance sensor (PS7) detects the trailing edge of the last humidified paper and turns
OFF, the humidification section roller pressure motors /Rt (M9) and /Lt (M10) turn ON to move from the humidification ON position to
the home position
PE -31

2. After a specified period of time since PS1 turns ON, the humidification gate solenoid (SD1) turns OFF and switches to the bypass route.
(c) Switch control from humidification OFF to humidification ON

1. The entrance sensor (PS1)detects the leading edge of the first humidification paper and turns ON. After a specified period of time since
this action, or since the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the leading edge of the paper when the exit line speed of the main body is 1000
mm/s, the humidification gate solenoid (SD1) turns ON and switches the path to the humidification section.
2. After a specified period of time since the humidification section entrance sensor (PS7) detects the leading edge of the paper and turns
ON, the humidification section roller pressure motors /Rt (M9) and /Lt (M10) turn ON and move from the home position to the
humidification ON position.
6.3.4 Water feed control

(1) Pump motor control
As the initial operation, the pump motor (P1) turns ON for the specified time and supplies water for the amount lost due to evaporation to
fill the water tank.
When with the humidifier, P1 turns ON a specified period of time after the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the leading edge of the paper
and turns ON. P1 turns OFF when the paper exit sensor (PS12) detects the trailing edge of paper and turns OFF.
When without the humidifier, P1 does not turn ON.
(2) Water feed tank empty detection control

When the water level in the water feed tank goes down, the coupling bar [2] of the float [3] goes down. Then the actuator [1] turns ON the
water tank empty sensor (PS8) [4] to disable the humidifier function.
When PS8 turns ON in the humidifier ON mode, a message appears on the operation panel of the main body.
When any print is in progress with PS8 turned ON, the main body stops after completion of the exit of up to 10 sheets.
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
Actuator
[2]
Coupling bar
[3]
Float
[4]
(3) Water tank full detection control

When the reflux route from the water tank closes and the collection groove [3] exceeds the specified water level, the float [4] comes up.
Then, the actuator [2] turns OFF the water tank full sensor (PS13) [1] and the pump motor (P1) turns OFF.
When detecting the water tank full, an error code appears on the operation panel of the main body to disable the humidifier function.
PE -32


[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
Actuator
[3]
Collection groove
[4]
Float
PE -33
PE THEORY OF OPERATION RU-509/HM-102 > 7. OTHER

CONTROLS
7. OTHER CONTROLS
7.1 Fan control
7.1.1 Configuration
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[15]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[14]
[6]
[13]
[7]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
7.1.2 Control
(1) Entrance paper fan
(a) Purpose
The entrance paper fans /1 (FM1), /2 (FM2), and /3 (FM3) blow air to the entrance conveyance rollers /1 and /2 and the conveyance
guide plate to cool down.
The entrance paper fans /4 (FM15), /5 (FM16), and /6 (FM17) blow air to the driven roller of the entrance conveyance rollers /1 and /2,
and the conveyance guide plate to cool down.
The entrance paper fans /7 (FM18), /8 (FM19), and /9 (FM20) blow air to the driven roller of the entrance conveyance roller /3, and the
guide plate to cool down.
The equally-spaced rollers which are mounted in the main scan direction area cool paper uniformly to prevent the wax unevenness.
(b) Operation timing

Each fan turns ON when receiving a print job and turns OFF at printing end.
PE -34
PE THEORY OF OPERATION RU-509/HM-102 > 7. OTHER

CONTROLS
(2) Humidification section paper fan

(a) Purpose
In humidifier ON mode, the humidification section paper fans /1 (FM6), /2 (FM7), /3 (FM8), /4 (FM9), /5 (FM10), and /6 (FM11) blow air
to paper to remove water which remains on paper.
In humidifier OFF mode, it cools paper.

(3) Ventilation assist fan

(a) Purpose
The ventilation assist fans /1 (FM4), /2 (FM5), and /3 (FM21) exhaust heat remains in the RU.

(4) Power supply fan

(a) Purpose
The power supply fan (FM14) exhausts heat in the DC power supply (DCPS).

FM14 turns ON when the sub power switch turns ON. It decelerates to 50% during standby and switches to 100% when receiving a
print job.
7.2 Door detection control

When the front door opens and the door switch (SW1) turns OFF, the 24V power source of the RU control board (RUCB) is shut down and
the operation stops.
PE -35
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-521 > 1. OUTLINE
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-521

1. OUTLINE
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
fs503to1001c
[1]
Paper conveyance section
[2]
Stapler section
[3]
Stacker section
[4]
Main tray section
[5]
Sub tray section
PF -1
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-521 > 1. OUTLINE
1.2 Paper path
[1]
[2]
[3]
fs503to1002c
[1]
Sub tray paper path
[2]
[3]
Main tray paper path (only while in stapling)
PF -2
Main tray paper path (straight/sort/staple)
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-521 > 2. PAPER CONVEYANCE

SECTION
2. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION

2.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a0gyt2c001ca
[1]
[2]
Tray gate
[3]
Bypass gate
[4]
Bypass roller /Lw
[5]
2.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[1]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a0gyt2c002ca
[2]
PF -3
Tray gate

SECTION

[3]
Gate solenoid (SD2)
[4]
Bypass gate
[5]
[6]
Bypass roller /Lw
[7]
[8]
2.3 Operation
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching
(1) Tray gate control
The tray gate switches the paper conveyance path between the main tray and the sub tray.
The tray gate is normally specified to the conveyance path to the main tray. When paper is exited to the sub tray, however, the gate is
switched to the path to the sub tray through the drive of the solenoid (SD2).
(2) Bypass gate control

The bypass gate is provided on the paper path to the stacker section. Even while in the staple operation, the bypass gate conveys the next
page to reduce a loss of time for a high productivity.
The drive of the bypass gate [1] is made by the bypass solenoid (SD5) [2]. The operation of SD5 is limited only to the small-size paper (A4,
B5 and, 8 1/2 x 11) except for thick paper in the staple mode.
For the 1st page on and after the 2nd copy, paper is sent to the regular route [3]. SD5 operates only on the 2nd page to send paper to the
bypass route [4]. The 1st and 2nd pages are put upon one another to be conveyed to the stacker simultaneously. On and after the 3rd page,
SD5 is released and paper is sent on the regular route a sheet of paper at a time.
[1]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
fs503to2003c
[1]
Bypass gate
[2]
[3]
Regular route
[4]
Bypass route
(a) For the 1st copy

The bypass solenoid (SD5) does not operate when the paper of the 1st copy is passing through it.
(b) For the 2nd and subsequent copies

A specified period of time after the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the trailing edge of the 1st page of the 2nd copy, the bypass
solenoid (SD5) turns ON to draw the 2nd page of the 2nd copy into the bypass route. A specified period of time after the PS4 detected the
trailing edge of the 2nd page of the 2nd copy, the bypass solenoid turns OFF.
SD5 does not turn on when the 3rd and subsequent pages are being conveyed.
[1]
[2]
[3]

Conveyance motor(M1)
[4]
fs503to2030e
[1]
1st copy
[2]
2nd copy
[3]
3rd copy
[4]
Drawing of the 2nd page of the 2nd copy into the bypass
2.3.2 Bypass roller /Lw pressure release control

The bypass roller is provided after the bypass gate of the paper conveyance path to the stacker section. The nip status of the bypass roller has
3 steps, which are normal pressure, pressure release and high pressure.
The status for normal 1 sheet conveyance is normal pressure.
The pressure of the bypass roller is released for the small-size paper (A4, B5 and 8 1/2 x 11) except thick paper in the staple mode, because 1st
and 2nd paper after the 2nd copy are overlapped on the bypass gate. Paper other than the small-size paper is not overlapped even in the staple
mode, therefore the pressure of the bypass roller is not released in this case.
The status for thick paper is high pressure, because the paper conveyance in bypass gate section has a large curvature.
PF -4

SECTION
The 3 steps of bypass roller /Lw [8] nip status is driven by the bypass roller release motor (M12) [5]. The bypass roller release home sensor
(PS13) [6] detects the home position, and the pressure is normal pressure status by the spring [9].
When M12 rotates in the reverse direction [2], the pressure release lever [4] is driven through the cam [7] and the pressure of the bypass roller /
Lw is released by leverage from the center of the shaft [1].
When M12 rotates in the forward direction [3], the elastically-deformed pressure spring plate [10] presses the shaft of the bypass roller /Lw to be
high pressed.
[10]
[1]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[5]
a0gyt2c021ca
[1]
Shaft
[2]
Reverse
[3]
Forward
[4]
Pressure release lever
[5]
[6]
[7]
Cam
[8]
Bypass roller /Lw
[9]
Spring
[10]
Pressure spring plate
(1) Small-size paper in the staple mode

The bypass roller release motor (M12) does not work while passing the 1st copy.

After a specified period of time when the paper exit sensor of previous devise detects the leading edge of 1st page of 2nd copy, the bypass
roller release motor (M12) turns reverse rotation ON to move the bypass roller /Lw to the pressure release point, and then turns OFF. After
a specified period of time when the paper exit sensor of previous devise detects the leading edge of 2nd page of 2nd copy, M12 turns
forward rotation ON at the timing the 2nd page of 2nd copy drawn into the bypass route passes through on the bypass roller /Up side, and
then M12 turns OFF with turning ON the bypass roller release home sensor (PS13).
M12 does not turn on when the 3rd and subsequent pages are being conveyed.
[1]
[2]
[5]
Conveyance motor(M1)
Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation
Bypass roller release home
sensor (PS13)
Bypass roller
release motor
(M12)
[3]
[4]
a0gyt2e003ca
[1]
1st copy
[2]
2nd copy
[3]
Pressure release
[4]
Pressure (returning to the home position)
[5]
3rd copy
(2) Thick paper control

When the paper exit sensor of previous device detects the leading edge of paper, the bypass roller release motor (M12) turns forward rotation
ON to move the bypass roller /Lw to the high pressure position, and then turns OFF.
PF -5

SECTION
When the print operation completes, M12 turns reverse rotation ON, and then M12 turns OFF with turning ON the bypass roller release home
sensor (PS13).
PF -6
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-521 > 3. SUB TRAY SECTION
3. SUB TRAY SECTION

3.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
fs503to2004c
[1]
Sub tray
[2]
[3]
Sub tray exit roller
3.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
fs503to2005c
[1]
[2]
3.3 Operation
(1) Sub tray paper full detection control
When paper that has been exited into the sub tray gets to the specified thickness, the sub tray paper full sensor (PS30) turns ON to send the
"sub tray paper full" information to the main body. Then, the main body displays the message on its operation panel.
[1]
[2]
fs503to2006c
[1]
Paper exited
[2]
(2) Conveyance speed switching control

Paper conveyed by the conveyance motor (M1) is decelerated for each sheet of paper to be exited into the sub tray, thus preventing paper
from having an uneven edge.
PF -7
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-521 > 3. SUB TRAY SECTION
Sub tray paper exit sensor

(PS1)
Sub tray exit

motor (M6)
Hi-speed
Deceleration
[1]
[1]
fs503to2031e
Deceleration of the sub tray exit motor (M6)
PF -8
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-521 > 4. STACKER SECTION
4. STACKER SECTION
4.1 Configuration
[9]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a0gyt2c004ca
[1]
Stack assist plate
[2]
Paddle
[3]
Swing roller
[4]
Flat-stapling stopper
[5]
Paper exit arm
[6]
Rear stopper
[7]
Stacker entrance belt
[8]
[9]
Alignment plate
4.2 Drive
4.2.1 Stacker entrance roller/paddle drive
[8]
[7]
[5]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[8]
[9]
[7]
a0gyt2c023ca
PF -9
[1]
[2]
[3]
Swing roller
[4]
Paddle
[5]
Paddle motor (M2)
[6]
Stacker entrance belt
[7]
Stacker entrance roller /Lw
[8]
Stacker entrance roller /Up
[9]
4.2.2 Stack assist plate/rear stopper drive

[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
fs503to2009c
[1]
[2]
Stack assist plate
[3]
Rear stopper
[4]
[5]
[6]
Stack assist motor (M24)
4.2.3 Intermediate roller/paper exit arm drive
[10]
[8]
[1]
[9]
[9]
[1]
[9]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
a0gyt2c006ca
PF -10
[1]
[2]
[3]
Eccentric cam
[4]
[5]
Paper exit arm
[6]
[7]
[8]
Intermediate roller /Lw
[9]
Intermediate roller /Up
[10]
Coupling
4.2.4 Alignment drive

[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
fs503to2011c
[1]
Alignment plate /Rr
[2]
[3]
Alignment plate home sensor /Rr (PS8)
[4]
[5]
Alignment plate home sensor /Fr (PS31)
[6]
Alignment plate /Fr
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Stacker conveyance speed control
Paper conveyed by the conveyance motor (M1) is sent to the stacker when the stacker entrance motor (M13) is decelerated a specified period
of time after the stacker entrance sensor (PS5) turns ON and before it runs through the stacker entrance roller.
4.3.2 Stacker entrance roller control

Conduct the stacker entrance roller control to the paper conveyed with being overlapped.
(1) 2 sheets conveyance

For 2 sheets of paper, the cam [4] of the stacker entrance roller release motor (M16) [3] release the pressure of the stacker entrance roller /
Up [1]. At this time, the stacker entrance roller /Up [1] drives at 1040mm/s and the stacker entrance roller /Lw [6] drives at 1000mm/s.
Therefore, the upper paper [8] is sent before the lower paper [7]. The stacker entrance roller release home sensor (PS23) [5] detects the
home position when the stacker entrance roller /Up [1] release the pressure.
[1]
[2]
[8]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a0gyt2c024ca
[1]
Stacker entrance roller /Up
[2]
Holding material
[3]
[4]
Cam
[5]
[6]
Stacker entrance roller /Lw
PF -11

[7]
Lower paper
[8]
Upper paper
(2) 1 sheet conveyance

When paper is 1 sheet, the stacker entrance roller /Up [6] is still pressed. At this time, since the stacker entrance roller /Lw [6] has the torque
limiter, it is driven with the stacker entrance roller /Up [6].
4.3.3 Intermediate roller control

The roller drive of the intermediate roller /Lw is transmitted from the main tray paper exit motor (M7) by the belt and the coupling, and the
transmission of the conveyance power to paper is made by the pressure/release of the intermediate roller /Up.
(1) Non-staple control

While in the non-staple mode, when the start signal is turned ON, the intermediate roller /Up [1] is driven up to the nip standby position by the
cam [2] of the intermediate roller open close motor (M25).
The intermediate roller home sensor (PS33) [3] detects the home position of the intermediate roller /Up open/close operation.
[1]
[2]
[3]
fs503to2039c
[1]
[2]
[3]
Cam of the intermediate roller open close motor (M25)
While in the print operation, the intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7) [3] makes the pressure/release of the intermediate roller /Up [1]
onto the intermediate roller /Lw [2].
When paper is being conveyed to the stacker, SD7 turns ON to release the nip, and paper that passes through the opening between the
intermediate roller /Up [1] and the intermediate roller /Lw [2] is conveyed to the stacker.
When paper is being exited, SD7 turns OFF and the intermediate roller /Up [1] is pressed against the intermediate roller /Lw [2] by the
pressure of the spring. The paper is nipped before being exited.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
fs503to2012c
[1]
[2]
Intermediate roller /Lw
[3]
[4]
Paper
(a) Straight mode

The intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7) turns ON to release pressure with the start signal ON, and stands by for conveying paper to
the stacker.
After the alignment operation completes, SD7 turns OFF, and the intermediate roller /Up and /Lw press paper and eject it. It conducts the
same operation to each paper.
PF -12
[2]

Alignment motors /Fr (M22), /Rr (M5)
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[5]
[5]
fs503to2032e
[1]
Start signal ON
[2]
Movement of the intermediate roller /Up to the nip

standby position
[3]
Nip release of the intermediate roller /Up
[4]
Alignment operation
[5]
Paper nip by the intermediate rollers /Up and /Lw
(b) Shift mode

1st and 2nd pages of 2nd and subsequent copies are overlapped on the stacker for securing time of moving the paper exit alignment plate
to the shift position in the shift mode of small-size (A4, B5, 81/2 x 11) which paper intervals are conveyed within the specified period of time.
SD7 does not turn OFF after 1st page of 2nd and subsequent copies in this case.
When pages are not overlapped on the stacker, it conducts the same operation as straight mode.
(2) Staple control

While in the staple mode operation, through the initial operation made when the start signal turns ON, the intermediate roller /Up [1] is moved
to the evacuation position by the eccentric cam [2] driven by the intermediate roller open close motor (M25).
[1]
[2]
[3]
fs503to2013c
[1]
[2]
[3]
Eccentric cam
4.3.4 Stack assist control

The stack assist plate is a paper pressure plate that is used to increase the speed to put paper in the stacker for an increased productivity.
The stack assist motor (M24) drives the stack assist plate [1]. When being conveyed to the stacker section, each sheet of paper is pressed at
the position near the rear end of the paper [2] to be stacked at a speed faster than a free fall.
The stack assist plate rotates by 65 degrees from the home position in the staple mode and by 80 degrees the shift and straight mode. The
stack assist home sensor (PS32) [3] detects the home position.
[2]
[3]
[1]
fs503to2014c
[1]
Stack assist plate
[2]
[3]
PF -13
Paper

Stack assist guide
motor (M24)
Forward
Reverse
[1]
[2] [3]
fs503to2033e
[1]
Start signal ON
[2]
[3]
Movement of the stack assist plate to the evacuation

position
Paper pressure by the stack assist plate
4.3.5 Rear stopper control

The rear stopper is a paper rear stopper when paper is exited in the non-staple (straight/sort) mode. It shortens the conveyance distance to the
main tray for an improved productivity.
The rear stopper motor (M26) drives and releases the rear stopper in the staple mode. The set state in the non-staple mode (the position at
which the rear stopper stops paper) is the home position of the rear stopper, and the rear stopper home sensor (PS35) detects it.
4.3.6 Alignment control

(1) Horizontal alignment
The horizontal alignment is made by the 2 alignment plates, that is, alignment plate /Fr and alignment plate /Rr. Each of the alignment motor /
Fr (M22) and the alignment motor /Rr (M5) drive these 2 alignment plates independently.
The alignment home sensor /Fr (PS31) detects the home position of the alignment plate /Fr, and the alignment home sensor /Rr (PS8)
detects the home position of the alignment plate /Rr.
(a) Straight mode

In the straight mode, each sheet of paper sent to the stacker is aligned by the alignment plate /Fr and the alignment plate /Rr before being
exited to the straight position.
(b) Shift mode

In the shift mode, each time a sheet of paper is sent to the stacker, the alignment plate /Fr [1] and the alignment plate /Rr [2] shift to the rear
to convey the paper [3] to the shift position before exiting it.
However, the alignment plates make only alignment operation and do not shift for the 1st page of 2nd and subsequent copies when pages
are overlapped in the shift mode. The paper exit alignment plate shifts after 2nd page is conveyed to the stacker.
[3]
[2]
[1]
fs503to2015c
[1]
Alignment plate /Fr
[2]
[3]
Paper
Alignment plate /Rr

[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5]
[6]
fs503to2034e
[1]
Start signal ON
[2]
PF -14
[3]
Move to the size position
[4]
Alignment operation for each sheet of paper
[5]
Move the paper to the shift position in the rear
[6]
Move the paper to the shift position in the front
(c) Staple mode

In the staple mode, the alignment operation is made by the alignment plates /Fr and /Rr for each sheet of paper that has been sent to the
stacker. After the last sheet of paper of the copy is conveyed to the stacker section, the alignment operation for the staple is made for
stapling.
(2) Vertical alignment

In the staple mode, for the vertical alignment of paper, the paper is pushed against the flat-stapling stopper by the paddle driven by the paddle
motor (M2).
The vertical alignment is assisted by the swing roller that is interlocked with the paddle by M2.
[2]

Paddle motor (M2)
Stapler motors /Fr (M31), /Rr (M30)
[1]
[3]
[1]
Start button ON
[2]
[3]
Stapling
fs503to2035e
Stapling of the 1st sheet of paper
4.3.7 Stacker paper exit

In the non-staple mode, the nip of the intermediate rollers /Up and /Lw eject the paper.
(2) Staple control

In the staple mode, the paper exit arm that is driven by the paper exit arm motor (M23) eject the paper. The paper exit arm home sensor
(PS9) detects the home position of the paper exit arm.
[2]

[1]
[3]
[4]
fs503to2036e
[1]
Start signal ON
[2]
Stapling
[3]
Movement to the paper exit arm standby position
[4]
Paper exit operation of paper bundle
PF -15
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-521 > 5. STAPLER SECTION
5. STAPLER SECTION
5.1 Configuration
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
Stapler /Fr
[2]
Stapler /Rr
[3]
Staple scraps box
[4]
5.2 Drive
5.2.1 Stapler movement/rotation
[7]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
fs503to2017c
[1]
Cam
[2]
[3]
[4]
Stapler /Rr
[5]
Stapler /Fr
[6]
[7]
[8]
Belt
PF -16
5.2.2 Stapler
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
fs503to2018c
[1]
Staple cut/bending arm
[2]
Stapler motors /Rr (M30), /Fr (M31)
[3]
Eccentric cam
[4]
Stapling arm
[5]
Pressure plate
5.3 Operation
5.3.1 Stapler movement control
For stapler movements, there are 2 types, that is, the horizontal movement of the stapler intervals and the rotation of the stapler /Rr. Movement
is made according to the staple mode.
The stapler movement motor (M11) makes the horizontal movement of the stapler. The stapler /Rr and the stapler /Fr are fixed on the upper
side and the lower side of a belt that forms a loop and moved respectively in the opposite direction by the motor M11.
The stapler movement home sensor (PS11) detects the home position of the horizontal movement.
The stapler rotation motor (M4) makes the 45 degrees rotational movement of the stapler /Rr for the one-corner stapling at rear.
The stapler rotation home sensor (PS14) detects the home position of the rotational movement.
(1) 1 point staple

(a) 1 point /front staple
When the start signal is turned ON, the stapler movement motor (M11) also turns ON to move the stapler to the position according to the
paper size.
(b) 1 point /one-corner stapling at rear staple size movement

paper size. After a specified period of time, the stapler rotation motor (M4) also turns ON to rotate the stapler /Rr and move it diagonally.
When a staple empty condition of the stapler /Rr is detected at the one-corner stapling at rear, M4 is driven to replace the cartridge and the
stapler is returned to its vertical position.
(2) 2 points staple

paper size.
5.3.2 Staple control

The staple control is made by the stapler motors /Rr (M30) and /Fr (M31) to drive the eccentric cam.
The inside [2] of the eccentric cam [1] has the cam groove [4] of the pressure arm [3] and the pin [6] of the staple cut/clinch arm [5]. The outside
[7] of the eccentric cam also has the cam groove [9] of the stapling arm [8].
Each time when the eccentric cam makes a 1/4 turn, each of the following operations is made: 1. paper pressure, 2. stapling, 3. staple cut/
clinch, and 4. return to the home position. A series of the operations completes in a full turn.
The stapler home sensors /Rr (PS40) and /Fr (PS41) detect the home position.
PF -17

[5]
[1]
[4]
[9]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[8]
[3]
fs503to2019c
[1]
Eccentric cam
[2]
Inside
[3]
Pressure arm
[4]
Cam groove (for pressure arm)
[5]
Staple cut/clinch arm
[6]
Pin (for staple cut/clinch)
[7]
Outside
[8]
Stapling arm
[9]
Cam groove (for stapling arm)
(1) Paper pressure

When the eccentric cam rotates 90 degrees from the home position, the cam groove [1] on the inside drives the pin [3] provided on the
pressure arm [2] in the arrow-marked direction. The pressure arm [2] drives the pressure plate [4] and presses the clinch side hard against the
staple side [5] to press the paper [6].
At the same time, the pin [8] provided in the groove [7] on the outside of the cam drives the stapling arm [9]. The pin [10] at the tip of the
stapling arm moves along the groove [12] of the pressure claw [11], and drives the pressure claw [11] with the lever to press the paper.
The following figure shows an inside cam on the left and an outside cam on the right.
[6]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[11]
[12]
[3]
[1]
[10]
[7]
[2]
[9]
[8]
fs503to2020c
[1]
Cam groove
[2]
Pressure arm
[3]
Pin
[4]
Pressure plate
[5]
Staple side
[6]
Paper
[7]
Cam groove (for stapling arm)
[8]
Pin
[9]
Stapling arm
[10]
Pin
[11]
Pressure claw
[12]
Groove
(2) Staple control

When the eccentric cam rotates from 90 degrees to 180 degrees the cam groove [1] on the outside drives the pin [3] provided on the stapling
arm [2] in the arrow-marked direction. The pin at the tip [4] of the stapling arm pushes up the stapling blade [5] to push out the staple [6],
punch out the paper [7] and staple it.
At the same time, to make preparation for the next stapling, the staple is bent at 90 degrees by the staple bending blade [8].
PF -18

[7]
[6]
[5]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[3]
fs503to2021c
[1]
Cam groove
[2]
Stapling arm
[3]
Pin
[4]
Pin at the tip
[5]
Stapling blade
[6]
Staple
[7]
Paper
[8]
Staple bending blade
(3) Staple cut/clinch control

When the eccentric cam rotates from 180 degrees to 270 degrees the pin [1] provided on the inside drives the staple cut/clinch arm [2] in the
At the start of rotation, the lever operation of the staple cut/clinch arm [2] rotates the coupling metal fitting [3] to pull the pin [4] in the arrowmarked direction and the staple [7] inserted into the round hole [6] of the staple cut blade [5] is cut. Cut staple scraps drop into the duct to be
collected in the staple scraps box.
With the further rotation of the eccentric cam, the tip of the presser metal fitting [8] that is interlocked with the staple cut/clinch arm [2] pushes
down the clinch metal fitting [9] to clinch the staple [7] that has been cut. When the eccentric cam rotates up to 270 degrees the clinch
operation is completed. After completion of clinching, the eccentric cam rotates to the home position to complete a series of operations.
[8]
[8]
[9]
[3]
[9]
[7]
[7]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[5]
[2]
fs503to2022c
[1]
Pin
[2]
Staple cut/clinch arm
[3]
Coupling metal fitting
[4]
Pin
[5]
Staple cut blade
[6]
Round hole
[7]
Staple
[8]
Presser metal fitting
[9]
Clincher plate
(4) Cartridge detection

The cartridge set sensors /Rr (PS42) and /Fr (PS43) detect the presence of a cartridge or the incorrect setting of a cartridge. When there is no
cartridge or the cartridge is set incorrectly, an error message is displayed on the operation section.
(5) Staple detection

When the staples run short, the staple empty sensors /Rr (PS44) and /Fr (PS45) detect this condition and display an error message on the
operation section.
(6) Staple tip detection

The staple ready sensors /Rr (PS46) and /Fr (PS47) detect the tip of the staple.
While in the stapling operation, the staple ready sensors determine that the staples have been clogged when the PS46 and PS47 do not turn
ON within a specified period of time after the staple home sensors /Rr (PS 40), /Fr (PS41) turn OFF, and rotate the stapler motors /Rr (M30), /
Fr (M31) in the reverse direction up to the home position.
PF -19
(7) Staple scraps box detection

The stapler scraps box set sensor (PS34) detects the presence of a staple scraps box or the incorrect setting of a box. When there is no
staple scraps box or it is set incorrectly, an error message is displayed on the operation section.
PF -20
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-521 > 6. MAIN TRAY SECTION
6. MAIN TRAY SECTION

6.1 Configuration
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
Lift wire
[2]
Main tray
[3]
Paper press arm
[4]
[5]
Thin paper holding material
[6]
Main tray paper exit roller
[7]
PF -21
6.2 Drive
6.2.1 Tray up/down drive
[1]
[10]
[11]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a0gyt2c008ca
[1]
Lift pulley /Up
[2]
[3]
Lift pulley /Lw
[4]
Lift wire
[5]
Tray lower limit sensor (PS3)
[6]
Tray middle position sensor (PS6)
[7]
Tray quarter position sensor (PS17)
[8]
[9]
Paper empty sensor (PS39)/Paper empty LED (LED2)
[10]
Main tray
[11]
Tray upper limit sensor (PS16)/Tray upper limit LED

(LED1)
6.2.2 Main tray paper exit drive
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a0gyt2c009ca
[1]
[2]
Coupling
[3]
Paper press arm
[4]
[5]
PF -22
6.2.3 Paper exit opening drive

[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
fs503to2026c
[1]
Cam
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Drive bar
6.2.4 Paper exit alignment plate drive
[8]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a0gyt2c010ca
[1]
Paper exit alignment plate /Rr
[2]
[3]
[4]
Top side view
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Paper exit alignment plate /Fr
PF -23
6.2.5 Paper exit alignment plate retraction drive
[1]
[3]
[2]
a0gyt2c011ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Paper exit opening control
When paper is too long and protruding, the paper exit opening is opened and closed for alignment.
There are 3 opening positions available according to the mode and the paper length.
For paper shorter than the following length, the paper exit opening is not opened in the non-staple mode or the staple mode.
Mode
Angle of the opening
Paper length in the sub scan

direction
Non-staple
Approx. 27 degrees
239mm or more
Staple
Approx. 44 degrees
400mm or more
Staple
Approx. 55 degrees
Between 219mm and 400mm
For the open/close of the paper exit opening, the paper exit motor (M8) rotates and the deformed cam [1] lifts up the entire paper exit opening
unit [2] to open the paper exit opening. The paper exit home sensor (PS12) [3] detects the open/close of the paper exit opening.
[7]
[6]
[6]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fs503to2027c
[1]
Deformed cam
[2]
[3]
[4]
Position at 0 degree
[5]
Position at 27 degrees
[6]
[7]

In the case that the paper length in the sub scan direction is less than 239mm, the paper exit opening closes with the home position search of
the paper exit opening motor (M8) by the start signal ON and then the paper is nipped and exited after the staple operation.
PF -24
In the case that the paper length is 239mm or longer, paper exit unit is opened by 27 degrees after the home position search of M8 by the
start signal ON. While in printing, after the alignment operation, the paper exit opening is closed temporary to nip the paper to be exited.
(2) Staple control

In the case that the paper length in the sub scan direction is less than 219mm, the paper exit opening closes with the home position search of
the paper exit opening motor (M8) by the start signal ON and then the paper is nipped and exited after the staple operation.
In the case that the paper length is 219mm or longer, paper exit unit is opened by 44 degrees (paper length: 400mm or more)/55 degrees
(paper length: 219mm or more and less than 400mm) after the home position search of M8 by the start signal ON. After the staple operation,
it closes the paper exit opening temporary to nip the paper and then exits paper.
6.3.2 Paper press arm control

Paper press arm control avoids exited pages misalignment.
Paper exit solenoid (SD9) drives paper press arm.
Subsequent pages cause a misalignment of pages already exited, so the paper press arm presses exited pages to avoid that misalignment.
[3]
[2]
[1]
a0gyt2c012ca
[1]
Paper
[2]
[3]
Paper press arm
(1) Straight/Shift mode

After a specified period of time when the stacker empty sensor (PS20) detects the trailing edge of paper, the paper exit opening solenoid
(SD9) turns ON to press exited paper and stands by for subsequent exited paper. After a specified period of time when the stacker empty
sensor (PS20) detects the trailing edge of the subsequent paper, SD9 turns OFF and paper press arm releases, right before the trailing edge
of paper passes through the paper exit roller, for the preparation to press paper which is passing through. It repeats the operation for each
paper exit.
[2]

Paper exit opening solenoid
(SD9)
[1]
[3] [4]
a0gyt2e013ca
[1]
Pressure for 1st paper
[2]
2nd paper exit
[3]
Pressure release
[4]
Pressure for 2nd paper
(2) Subset staple mode

The paper press arm presses paper when the inserted paper exits, because the bundle of stapled sheets misaligns paper which is inserted
between the bundle of stapled sheets in the subset staple mode which the number of staple sheets is 10 or more.
After a specified period of time when the main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) detects the trailing edge of inserted paper, the paper exit opening
solenoid (SD9) turns ON and inserted paper is pressed. After a specified period of time when PS10 detects the trailing edge of the bundle of
stapled sheets, SD9 turns OFF and stands by for exiting inserted paper.
[1]
[3]

sensor (PS10)
Paper exit opening solenoid
(SD9)
[2]
[4]
[5]
a0gyt2e014ca
[1]
Trailing edge detection of insert paper
[2]
PF -25
Pressure
[3]
Bundle of staple paper
[4]
[5]
Insert Paper
Pressure release
6.3.3 Main tray up/down control

The driving force of the tray up down motor (M3) rotates the lift pulley by the belt and the gear to wind up the lift wire. The main tray goes up or
down according to the direction in which the up/down wire is wound up. When the lift pulley /Lw rotates clockwise as seen from the front, the
main tray goes up and when it rotates counterclockwise, the tray goes down.
The tray upper limit LED (LED1) [1] and the tray upper limit sensor (PS16) [5] detect the upper surface of paper (the main tray upper surface
when no paper is exited) [3].
The paper empty LED (LED2) [4] and the paper empty sensor (PS39) [2] detect extraction of paper in continuous operation.
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a0gyt2c015ca
[1]
Tray upper limit LED (LED1)
[2]
[3]
Upper surface of paper (Main tray upper surface when no

paper is exited)
[4]
Paper empty LED (LED2)
[5]

With the start signal ON [1] from the main body, the tray up down motor (M3) turns ON to move down the main tray [2], then the paper empty
sensor (PS39) turns OFF, and then M3 turns reverse rotation ON to move up the main tray. The tray upper limit sensor (PS16) turns ON to
rerotate M3 in forward direction, and moves down the main tray to the turning OFF position of PS16 from the paper exit opening. This
operation maintains the distance between the upper surface of the paper exited in the main tray (the surface of the main tray when no paper
exited) and the paper exit opening at a fixed distance to prevent the paper exited from having an uneven edge.
During the print operation, the exited paper turns PS16 ON, and M3 turns ON to move down the main tray to the specified position.
[1]

sensor (PS10)
Tray up down
motor (M3)
Up
Down
[2] [3]
[4]
[5]
a0gyt2e016ca
[1]
Start signal ON
[2]
Main tray moving down
[3]
Main tray moving up
[4]
Main tray moving down to the specified position
[5]
(2) Staple control

(a) When the number of staple sheets is 20 or less.
It conducts same control as non-staple control.
(b) When the number of staple sheet is more than 20.

The stacker empty sensor (PS20) detects the trailing edge of paper, then the tray up down motor (M3) turns ON to move down the main
tray to the position according to the number of staple sheets, and then the motor turns OFF.
PF -26
When the paper empty sensor (PS39) turns OFF unexpectedly with the error caused by the staple sheets, M3 turns ON to move up the
main tray to the position which the tray upper limit sensor (PS16) turns ON, then the rotation is changed over to move down the main tray to
the position which PS16 turns OFF, and then M3 turns OFF.
(3) Main tray paper detection control

The tray quarter position sensor (PS17), the tray middle position sensor (PS6), and the tray lower limit sensor (PS3) detect the maximum
number of loadable sheets on the main tray.
The stopping position of paper full detection varies according to the size of paper for each mode.
PS17 position: About 750 sheets (in the case of 80g/m2)
After it stops by detecting paper full, the paper full detection status is released when the tray up down motor (M3) turns ON to turn the counter
reset sensor (PS15) ON.
(a) Straight/Shift mode

It stops printing when each sensors turn ON and displays the message on the operation panel.
Z-Folding/center folding (weight: less than 130g/m2) stops at 50 main tray paper exit (switchable with DIPSW) by the software counter.
Weight (g/m2)
Large size
(longer side: 320mm or
more)
Small size
(longer side: 250mm to
319mm)
Minimum size
less)
64 to 300
PS6
PS3 (straight mode)

PS6 (shift mode)
PS17
Large size
more)
Small size
(longer side: 250mm to
319mm)
Minimum size
less)
(b) Staple mode

Staple sheet
2 to 5
6 to 9
PS17
PS6
10 to 100
PS6
PS17
PS3
PS6
(4) Detection of paper removal in the continuous print mode

It turns OFF the paper empty sensor (PS39) and detects the removal if the exited paper is removed while in continuous printing.
Once it turns OFF PS39 while in continuous printing, it turns ON the tray up down motor (M3) and raises the main tray until the tray upper limit
sensor (PS16) turns ON, and then by switching the rotation it lowers the main tray until PS16 turns OFF to turn OFF M3.

sensor (PS10)
Tray up down
motor (M3)
Up
Down
[1]
[2]
a0gyt2e017ca
[1]
Lift of the main tray by detecting the paper removal
[2]
(5) Temporary stop button

Exiting paper to the main tray stops temporary by pressing the temporary stop button for more than 1second while in the straight mode or the
shift mode.
Press start key of the main body to restart.
6.3.4 Paper exit alignment control

Paper exit alignment motor /Fr (M15) [4] operates the alignment drive of the paper exit alignment plate /Fr [2] and the paper exit alignment plate
home sensor /Fr (PS18) [3] detects the home position. As well, the paper exit alignment motor /Rr (M14) [5] operates the alignment drive of the
paper exit alignment plate /Rr [1] and the paper exit alignment plate home sensor /Rr (PS19) [9] detects the home position. When the paper exit
alignment plate /Fr, /Rr moves to the paper size or returns to the home position, paper exit alignment plate retraction motor (M18) projects the
rack [7] and pushes up the bottom of the paper exit alignment plate [6] to conduct the retraction of the paper exit alignment plate. Once the rack
is pulled back, the paper exit alignment plate falls down to the alignment position with its weight. Paper exit alignment plate retraction home
sensor (PS24) [8] detects the home position in the retraction.
PF -27
[9]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a0gyt2c018ca
[1]
Paper exit alignment plate /Rr
[2]
Paper exit alignment plate /Fr
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Bottom of the paper exit alignment plate
[7]
Rack
[8]
[9]
(1) Straight mode

In the straight mode, it conducts the alignment operation at the center of the main tray if the paper is over 182mm in the main scan direction.
It turns ON the paper exit alignment motors /Fr (M15) and /Rr (M14) with the start signal ON, and the paper exit alignment plates /Fr and /Rr
move to the paper size standby position which is at the center of the main tray with remaining in the retraction status (lift up), and then it turns
OFF.
Once the movement to the paper size stand by position is completed, it turns ON the paper exit alignment plate retraction motor (M18) and
pulls down the paper exit alignment plates /Fr and /Rr.
After a specified period of time when the stacker empty sensor (PS20) detects the trailing paper edge, it conducts the alignment operation on
the paper exit alignment plates /Fr and /Rr by turning ON M15 and M14 for each paper exit.
After a specified period of time when the last alignment operation is finished, it turns ON M18 to evacuate (lift up) the paper exit alignment
plates /Fr and /Rr and then turns OFF M18 by turning ON the paper exit alignment home sensor (PS24).
At the same time, it turns ON M15 and M14 by turning ON PS24, moves the paper exit alignment plates /Fr and /Rr to the home position, and
turns OFF M15 and M14 by turning ON the paper exit alignment plate home sensors /Fr (PS18) and /Rr (PS19).
[2]
[4]
[7]

Paper exit
alignment
motor /Fr (M15)
Open
Close
Paper exit alignment plate home

sensor /Fr (PS18)
Paper exit
alignment
motor /Rr (M14)
Open
Close

sensor /Rr (PS19)
Paper exit
Down
alignment
plate retraction
Up
motor (M18)

retraction home sensor (PS24)
[1]
[3]
[5]
[6]
a0gyt2e019ca
[1]
Start signal ON
[2]
Move to paper size stand by position
[3]
Paper exit alignment plate retraction release (down)
[4]
Trailing edge of paper detected
[5]
Alignment operation
[6]
Paper exit alignment plate retraction (up)
[7]
Returning to the home position of paper exit alignment

plate
(2) Shift mode

In the shift mode, it conducts the alignment operation at the position 10mm away in front and rear from the center of the main tray (Shift
amount: 20mm) if the paper is over 210mm in the main scan direction.
If the paper is 210mm or less in the main scan direction, it does not conduct the paper exit alignment but conducts the shift operation with the
alignment plate of the stacker.
It conducts the paper exit alignment operation with one paper exit alignment plate while in fixing the other plate, but the operation differs in
small-size and large-size according to the length in the sub scan direction.
PF -28
When shifting to the front side, in a case of small-size, it conducts the alignment operation with the paper exit alignment plate /Fr while in
fixing the paper exit alignment plate /Rr to the position of the paper edge which exited from the stacker. When shifting to the back side, it
conducts the alignment with the paper exit alignment plate /Rr while in fixing the paper exit alignment plate /Fr.
When shifting to the front side, in a case of large-size, it conducts the alignment operation by fixing the paper exit alignment plate /Fr while
shifting the paper exit alignment plate /Rr to the front along with the exiting paper from the stacker. When shifting to the back side as well, it
conducts the alignment operation with the paper exit alignment plate /Fr while in fixing the paper exit alignment plate /Rr.
(a) Small-size (sub-scanning direction length: shorter than 297mm)

It turns ON the paper exit alignment motors /Fr (M15) and /Rr (M14) with the start signal ON, and the paper exit alignment plates /Fr and /Rr
move to the paper size standby position which is 10mm front side from the center paper exit position of the main tray with remaining in the
retraction status (lift up), and then it turns OFF.
After a specified period of time when the stacker empty sensor (PS20) detects the trailing paper edge, it conducts the alignment operation
with the paper exit alignment plate /Fr by turning ON M15 for each paper exit.
Once the last alignment operation of the 1st copy is finished, it turns ON M14 to keep the paper exit alignment plate /Rr from the edge of
paper at the same time as moving back to the paper size stand by position of M15 and then turns OFF at the specified position.
It turns ON M18 by turning OFF M15 and M14 to evacuate (lift up) the paper exit alignment plates /Fr and /Rr and then turns OFF M18 by
turning ON the paper exit alignment home sensor (PS24).
Once the evacuation (lift up) is finished by turning ON PS24, it turns ON M15 and M14, moves to the shift position on the rear side, and
turns OFF M15 and M14. It turns ON M18 by turning OFF M15 which moves longer to pull down the paper exit alignment plate.
It conducts the alignment operation on the paper exit alignment plate /Rr for each paper exit after a specified period of time when PS20
detects the trailing edge of paper.
After completion of the job, as well as the straight mode, once the last alignment operation is finished, it evacuates (lifts up) the paper exit
alignment plate and goes back to the home position.
[2]
[4]
[6]
[9]
[11]

Paper exit
alignment
motor /Fr (M15)
Open
Close

sensor /Fr (PS18)
Paper exit
alignment
motor /Rr (M14)
Open
Close

sensor /Rr (PS19)
Paper exit
Down
alignment
plate retraction
Up
motor (M18)
[1]
[3]
[5]
[7] [8]
[10]
[12]
a0gyt2e022ca
[1]
Start signal ON
[2]
Movement to the paper size
[3]
[4]
[5]
Alignment operation by the paper exit alignment plate /Fr
[6]
Trailing edge of the last page detection of the 1st copy
[7]
Move away from the edge of paper
[8]
[9]
Shift movement to the rear side
[10]
[11]
Conveyance of 2 pages with the 1st and the 2nd page of

the 2nd copy
[12]
Alignment operation by the paper exit alignment plate /

Rr
(b) Large-size (sub-scanning direction length: 298mm or longer)

It turns ON the paper exit alignment motors /Fr (M15) and /Rr (M14) with the start signal ON, and the paper exit alignment plate /Fr moves
to the paper size standby position which is 10mm front side from the center paper exit position of the main tray with remaining in the
retraction status (lift up), and the paper exit alignment plate /Rr moves to the center paper exit position of the main tray with remaining in the
retraction status (lift up), and then it turns OFF.
It turns ON M14 with the paper trailing edge detection of FNS entrance sensor (PS4), assists the shift by moving the paper exit alignment
plate /Rr forward along with the timing of the stacker alignment plate shift, and turns OFF once, then conducts the alignment operation on
the paper exit alignment plate /Rr by turning ON M14 again after a specified period of time when the stacker empty sensor (PS20) detects
the trailing paper edge.
Once the last alignment operation of the 1st copy is finished, it turns ON M15 to keep the paper exit alignment plate /Fr from the edge of
paper at the same time as moving back to the paper size stand by position of M14 and then turns OFF at the specified position.
It turns ON M18 by turning OFF M15 and M14 to evacuate (lift up) the paper exit alignment plates /Fr and /Rr and then turns OFF M18 by
turning ON the paper exit alignment home sensor (PS24).
Once the evacuation (lift up) is finished by turning ON PS24, it turns ON M15 and M14, moves to the shift position on the rear side, and
turns OFF M15 and M14. It turns ON M18 by turning OFF M14 which moves longer to pull down the paper exit alignment plate.
PF -29
It turns ON M15 by the PS4 detection of the trailing edge of paper, assists the shift to the rear side at the paper exit alignment plate /Fr, and
conducts the alignment operation at the paper exit alignment plate /Fr by turning ON M15 again after a specified period of time when PS20
detects the trailing edge of paper.
After completion of the job, as well as the straight mode, once the last alignment operation is finished, it evacuates (lifts up) the paper exit
alignment plate and goes back to the home position.
[2]
[6]
[8]
[10]

Paper exit
alignment
motor /Fr (M15)
Open
Close

sensor /Fr (PS18)
Paper exit
alignment
motor /Rr (M14)
Open
Close

sensor /Rr (PS19)
Paper exit
Down
alignment
plate retraction
Up
motor (M18)

[1]
[3]
[4][5]
[7]
[9]
[11]
a0gyt2e020ca
[1]
Start signal ON
[2]
[3]
[4]
Movement to the paper size

Paper exit alignment plate /Rr shift assist operation
[5]
Alignment operation by the paper exit alignment plate /Rr
[6]
Move away from the edge of paper
[7]
[8]
Shift movement to the rear side
[9]
[10]
1st page conveyance of the 2nd copy
[11]
Paper exit alignment plate /Fr shift assist operation
(3) Staple mode

Conduct the paper exit alignment only in the case of the staple mode with 20 sheets or less of minimum-size (the main scan direction 182mm
to 249mm). Control sequence is the same as the straight mode of nonstaple.
The paper exit alignment does not work in the other staple modes.
PF -30
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-531 > 1. OUTLINE
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-531

1. OUTLINE
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
Stacker section
[2]
Stapler section
[3]
Main tray section
[4]
Conveyance section
PG -1
1.2 Paper path

1.2.1 None sort/sort/group mode
[6]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Paper through from the PI (when PI-502 is mounted)
[2]
Paper through from the previous device
[3]
Gate
[4]
Main tray
[5]
[6]
Shift unit (Sort/group mode only)
1.2.2 Sub tray mode
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
PG -2
[1]
[2]
[3]
Gate
[4]
Sub tray
1.2.3 Staple mode
[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Gate
[4]
Stapler
[5]
Main tray
[6]
PG -3
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-531 > 2. CONVEYANCE

SECTION
2.1 Configuration
[14]
[15]
[1]
[13]
[2]
[12]
[3]
[11]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[10]
[9]
[8]
a04dt2c005ca
[1]
[2]
Gate
[3]
PI conveyance roller
[4]
Entrance roller
[5]
[6]
Conveyance roller /A
[7]
Conveyance roller /B
[8]
Bypass gate
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
Shift roller
[14]
Shift unit
[15]
PG -4

SECTION
2.2 Drive
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19] [20] [21]
[1]
[2]
[14]
[3]
[13]
[4]
[12]
[11]
[5]
[10]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[7]
a04dt2c001ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Entrance roller
[4]
[5]
[6]
Bypass gate
[7]
[8]
[9]
Paper exit belt
[10]
Paper exit arm
[11]
Gate
[12]
Shift roller
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
Gate motor (M12)
2.3 Operation
2.3.1 Punch registration control (Only when PK is installed)
In the punch mode with 216mm or shorter paper, the punch registration control is performed. A specified period of time after the paper exit
sensor of the previous device detects the leading edge of paper, the FNS conveyance motor (M1) stops temporarily. Thus the paper is pressed
against the entrance roller forming a loop to correct the bend. When the specified time has passed, M1 turns ON to restart conveying the paper.
The above operation is not performed when conveying large paper (217 mm or more in the sub scan direction) and in non-punching mode.
When punching on the paper conveyed from PI, the paper skew is corrected by forming a loop on PI and FS does not perform the punch
registration.
PG -5

SECTION

[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
Entrance roller
[2]
[3]
PK
Loop
2.3.2 FS conveyance control

The DC motor of 24V drives the FS conveyance with the control by the FNS control board (FNSCB).
(1) Interlock switch control

The FS paper conveyance drive control starts upon receiving of the start signal from the main body. However when the door switch (MS1) is
OFF, an error information is sent to the main body PRCB and the control does not start.
(2) FS conveyance control

(a) When RU is connected
When the start button turns ON, the FNS conveyance motor (M1) starts to rotate at high speed (1000mm/s).
When exiting paper to the main tray, a specified period of time after FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the paper trailing edge, M1 turns to
rotate at the middle speed (600mm/s) to adopt to the FS paper exit line speed. After another specified period of time, M1 starts to rotate at
high speed again for the next conveyance.
When exiting paper to the sub tray and the paper length is within the range of 140mm to 370mm, turning ON of the sub tray paper exit
sensor (PS1) upon detecting of the paper leading edge switches M1 rotation to low speed (400mm/s). A specified period of time after the
FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the paper leading edge, M1 switches to high speed rotation again. When the paper length is 371mm or
more, M1 switches to low speed rotation upon paper trailing edge detection of PS4 and then after a specified period of time, it returns to the
high speed rotation.
(b) When RU is not connected

When the start button is turned ON, the FNS conveyance motor (M1) turns ON at the paper exit line speed of the main body.
After a specified period of time since the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the leading edge of paper, M1 switches to the high speed
rotation (1000mm/s). Then, it returns to the line speed of the main body after a specified period of time since PS4 detects the trailing edge
of paper.
2.3.3 Gate drive control

The gate is provided for switching the conveyance path to the sub tray, the main tray and the stacker.
(1) Gate operation

The gate motor (M12) [1] drives the gate cam [2], and each of 2 cams of this gate cam (cam /Up [3] and cam /Lw [4]) drives each of 2 gates /
Up [5] and /Lw [6]. The gate home sensor (PS16) [7] detects the home position.
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
15jkt2c004na
[1]
Gate motor (M12)
[2]
Gate cam
[3]
Cam /Up
[4]
Cam /Lw
PG -6

SECTION

[5]
Gate /Up
[6]
[7]
Gate /Lw
(2) Gate control

The FNS control board (FNSCB) performs its control.
It turns ON upon receiving of the FS start signal from the main body and stops at any of the 3 positions; sub tray (home position) [1], stacker
[2] or main tray [3]. However, when exiting paper to the sub tray, the sub tray is set as home position and it does not operate.
When printing is completed, the gate home sensor (PS16) detects its home position to stop it.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Sub tray (home position)
[2]
[3]
Main tray
15jkt2c005na
Stacker
2.3.4 Bypass gate control

The bypass gate is provided on the paper path to the stacker section. Even while in the staple operation, the bypass gate conveys the next page
to reduce a loss of time for a high productivity.
(1) Bypass gate operation

The bypass gate solenoid (SD5) [2] activates the bypass gate [1].
When using small-sized paper (paper length 216mm or less; A4, B5 or 8 1/2 x 11), it operates only for the 1st page of the 2nd and
subsequent copies to convey to the bypass [3]. It conveys the 2nd page of the 2nd and subsequent copies to the normal route [4] and
overlaps the 1st page and the 2nd page to convey them together to the stacker.
However, some small-sized papers such as thick paper which is exited from the main body at low speed are not overlapped.
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
15jkt2c006na
[1]
Bypass gate
[2]
[3]
Bypass route
[4]
Regular route

The bypass gate operates only when using the small-sized paper (paper length 216mm or less; A4, B5, 8 1/2 x 11) in the staple mode. The
FNS control board (FNSCB) controls the bypass gate solenoid (SD5).
The following is a description of the operation when stapling 2 sheets and outputting 3 copies.

The bypass solenoid (SD5) does not operate when the paper of the 1st copy [1] is passing through it.

A specified period of time after the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the trailing edge of the last sheet of the 1st copy [4], the bypass gate
(SD5) turns ON [5] to draw the 1st sheet of the 2nd copy into the bypass side. A specified period of time after PS4 detects the trailing edge
of that paper [6], SD5 turns OFF [7]. A similar control is performed for the 3rd copy.
PG -7

SECTION

[6]
[1] [4]
[2]
[3]

[5]
[7]
[1]
1st copy
[2]
2nd copy
[3]
3rd copy
[4]
Trailing edge of the last sheet of the 1st copy
[5]
Ready for drawing of the 1st sheet of the 2nd copy into
the bypass
[6]
Trailing edge of the 1st sheet of the 2nd copy
[7]
Preparation of the 2nd sheet of the 2nd copy
2.3.5 Shift control

The shift roller driven by the FNS conveyance motor (M1) moves to the rear side to shift the paper during paper conveyance toward the main
tray.
(1) Shift operation

When the shift roller motor (M2) [2] rotates during paper conveyance toward the main tray [1], the whole shift part [5] including the shift roller
[4] moves approximately 30mm backward [6] due to the crank mechanism [3] to shift the paper to exit.
The shift roller home sensor (PS18) [7] detects the shift position.
[2]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
15jkt2c008na
[1]
Main tray direction
[2]
[3]
Crank mechanism
[4]
Shift roller
[5]
Whole shift part
[6]
Back side direction
[7]
(2) Shift control

When in the sort/group mode, the shift roller motor (M2) turns ON [2] after a specified period of time from when the FNS entrance sensor
(PS4) detects the paper trailing edge [1], and with its rotation, the movable shift part starts to shift. The shift roller is rotated by the FNS
conveyance motor (M1). It shifts while conveying papers.
When the shift roller home sensor (PS18) turns ON from OFF [3] to be detected as shift completion, M2 stops.
A specified period of time after PS4 detects the paper trailing edge, M2 turns ON again and then stops at the position at which PS18 turns ON
from OFF [5]. This operation returns the shift part to its original position to be ready for the next sheet.
By repeating this series of operations, each sheet is offset one by one.
Example: Combination of RU and FS
[1]
FNS conveyance
motor (M1)
High speed
Low speed

[2] [3]
[4] [5]
[1]
[2]
Start to shift
[3]
Shift completion
[4]
Start to move to the home
PG -8

SECTION

[5]
Moving to the home completion
2.3.6 Paper exit roller control

The paper exit roller motor (M7) drives the main tray paper exit roller and the paper exit belt of the stacker with the control by the FNS control
board (FNSCB).
(1) None sort/sort/group mode

When the paper exit sensor of the previous device detects the paper leading edge [1], the paper exit roller motor (M7) turns ON at low speed.
When the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the paper trailing edge, it switches to high speed rotation (600mm/s) [2] to exit the paper.
A specified period of time after PS4 detects the paper trailing edge, it switches to low speed rotation again [3] for the next sheet conveyance.
A specified period of time after the main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) detects the last sheet, M7 stops.
High
Paper exit roller

motor(M7)
Low
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Paper leading edge detection
[2]
[3]
Ready for next sheet conveyance
Start of paper exit
(2) Staple mode (with 217mm or longer paper in the sub scan direction)
Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal [1] from the main body, the paper exit roller motor (M7) rotates to drive the paper exit belt on the
stacker section. When the paper exit belt home sensor (PS9) turns ON from OFF [3], M7 stops and the paper exit arm moves its home
position for the staple mode.
When the paper length is 217mm or more in the sub scan direction, the paper exit opening is opened. When the stapling is completed, the
paper exit opening is closed by the paper exit opening motor (M8). When the paper exit home sensor (PS12) detects that the paper exit
opening is closed completely [6], M7 rotates to drive the paper exit arm. The paper exit arm picks up the paper to the paper exit roller and the
paper exit roller exits the paper to the main tray.
When PS9 turns ON from OFF [7], M7 stops.
Paper exit belt home sensor
(PS9)
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5] [6]
[7]
15jkt2e030na
[1]
FNS operation signal ON
[2]
Paper exit opening open operation
[3]
Paper exit arm home position
[4]
Stapling completion
[5]
Paper exit opening close operation
[6]
Paper exit opening close detection
[7]
2.3.7 Paper exit opening solenoid control

Because the rotation speed of the paper exit roller is slower than that of the conveyance roller, it releases nipping except in paper exit. When the
paper reaches the paper exit opening, the nipping part moves to nip the paper.
(1) Paper exit opening solenoid operation

When the paper reaches the paper exit opening, the paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) [1] moves the nipping part [2] to nip the paper by
pressing the nip roller [4] against the main tray paper exit roller [3] and exit the paper toward the main tray [5].
The main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) [6] detects the paper exit.
[1]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[4]
[2]
[6]
[2]
[3]
15jkt2c011na
[1]
[2]
Nipping part
[3]
[4]
Nip roller
PG -9

SECTION

[5]
Main tray direction
[6]
(2) ON timing of paper exit opening solenoid

(a) None sort/sort/group mode
A specified period of time after the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the paper trailing edge, the paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) turns
ON.
(b) Staple mode

A specified period of time after the stapling is completed, the paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) turns ON to nip the paper.
In the case of 2 position staples, temporarily turn OFF SD4 before paper exit completion to correct the paper misalignment and then turn
ON again to exit the paper.
(3) OFF timing of paper exit opening solenoid

In all modes, the paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) turns OFF a specified period of time after the main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) detects
the paper.

In the staple mode (with 217mm or longer paper in the sub scan direction), the paper exit opening is kept open from start of print to finish of
stapling because the paper runs off.
(1) Paper exit opening open/close operation

When the paper exit opening motor (M8) [1] rotates, the paper exit opening unit [3] opens/closes due to the crank mechanism [2]. The paper
exit home sensor (PS12) [4] detects the open/close of the paper exit opening.
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[4]
a04dt2c003ca
[1]
[2]
Crank mechanism
[3]
[4]
(2) Paper exit opening open/close control

Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal [1] from the main body, the paper exit opening motor (M8) starts to rotate [2] to open the paper
exit opening.
M8 turns ON again to close the paper exit opening at the same as the start of the stapling operation, and stops when the paper exit home
sensor (PS12) detects the close position [4]. A specified period of time after the main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) detects the paper trailing
edge, M8 turns ON to open the paper exit opening [6] for the next sheet of paper.
It repeats this series of operations for each bundle of papers stapled.
[5]
Stapler motor/Fr (M14)/Rr(M9)
[1] [2]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[1]
FNS operation start signal ON
[2]
[3]
Start of paper exit opening close operation
[4]
Start of paper exit opening open operation

Paper exit opening closed
[5]
Paper nipping by the paper exit opening solenoid (SD4)
[6]
2.3.9 Sub tray paper exit control

The sub tray paper exit roller is driven by the sub tray exit motor (M21) and is controlled by the FNS control board (FNSCB).
(1) Sub tray exit motor (M21) control

At the same time when the paper exit sensor of the previous device detects the leading edge of paper, the sub tray exit motor (M21) turns
ON with low speed rotation (400mm/s).
When the paper length is within a range of 140mm to 370mm, the paper is exited at that speed.
PG -10

SECTION
When the paper length is within a range of 371mm to 488mm, M21 switches to high speed rotation (1000mm/s) a specified period of time
after the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the paper leading edge. It switches to low speed rotation to exit the paper when PS4 detects
the paper trailing edge.
A specified period of time after sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of the last paper, M21 stops.

When the start button is turned ON, the sub tray exit motor (M21) turns ON at the paper exit line speed of the main body.
of paper.
(2) Sub tray full detection

When the thickness of the papers which are exited to the sub tray reaches a specified value, the sub tray paper full sensor (PS19) turns ON
and an information of "sub tray paper full" is sent to the main body. Then, the main body displays the message on its operation panel.
PG -11
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-531 > 3. MAIN TRAY SECTION

3.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a04dt2c004ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Main tray
[4]
Up/down wire
3.2 Drive
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
15jkt2c015na
[1]
Up/down pulley /Up
[2]
Up/down wire
[3]
[4]
Up/down pulley /Lw
[5]
Main tray
PG -12
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 Tray up down control
(1) Tray up down operation
The driving force of the worm gear mounted on the shaft of the main tray up down motor (M3) [6] winds up the up/down wire.
The main tray [9] goes up or down according to the direction in which the up/down wire is wound up. When the lift pulley /Lw rotates clockwise
as seen from the front, the main tray goes up and when it rotates counterclockwise, the tray goes down.
[1]
[9]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
15jkt2c016na
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Timing belt
[6]
[7]
Up/down pulley /Lw
[8]
Up/down pulley /Up
[9]
Main tray
(2) Paper detection

The main tray upper limit sensor (PS2) [2] and the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7) [1] maintain the distance between the upper
surface of the paper exited in the main tray (the surface of the main tray when no paper exited) and the paper exit opening at a fixed distance
to prevent the paper exited from having an uneven edge.
While in continuous printing, FS counts the number of sheets exited with the software and it stops printing when the counted value reaches
the maximum number of loadable sheets for each paper size.
However, when removing the exited paper from the tray during printing, the tray moves up and the counter reset sensor (PS15) [3] turns ON.
This operation resets the software counter and enables the limitless paper exit.
Main tray lower limit sensor (PS3) [4] detects the lower limit of the tray. While in intermittent printing, the software does not count the total
number of sheets, but PS3 controls the loading amount.
(3) Tray up down control

The main tray moves up/down in accordance with the forward/reverse rotation of the main tray up down motor (M3). The FNS control board
(FNSCB) controls M3.

Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal from the main body, the main tray up down motor (M3) moves up the tray until the main tray
upper limit sensor (PS2) turns ON.
When a sheet passes through the main tray paper exit sensor (PS6), M3 moves the tray down. A specified period of time after PS2 turns
OFF, the tray moves up again and stops upon turning ON of PS2.
It repeats the operation above for each sheet of papers.
[2]
Main tray upper limit sensor
(PS2)
Main tray up
down motor (M3)
UP
DOWN
[1]
[1]
15jkt2e017na
[2]
Paper exit to the main tray
(b) Staple mode

Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal from the main body, the main tray up down motor (M3) moves up the tray until the stapler paper
exit upper limit sensor (PS7) turns ON.
PG -13
A specified period of time after the paper exit roller motor (M7) turns ON, M3 moves the main tray down. A specified period of time after
that, M3 rotates in reverse to move the main tray up until it stops upon turning ON from OFF of the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor
(PS7).
[2]
Paper exit roller

motor (M7)
High speed
Low speed

UP
Main tray
up down motor (M3)
DOWN
[1]
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
Bundle of papers exit to the main tray
[3]
[4]
Main tray moving up
PG -14
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-531 > 4. STACKER SECTION
4. STACKER SECTION
4.1 Configuration
[1]
[11]
[2]
[3]
[10]
[4]
[9]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
[1]
Alignment home sensor (PS8)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Swing belt
[7]
[8]
[9]
Paper exit belt
[10]
Paper exit arm
[11]
Alignment plate /Up
4.2 Drive
[12]
[1]
[2]
[11]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[4]
[5]
[10]
[9] [6]
[6]
[8]
[7]
a0drt2c001cb
[1]
Coupling (from M7)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Paper assist roller
[8]
Paper exit belt
[9]
Swing belt/Lw
[10]
Swing belt/Up
PG -15

[11]
Paper exit arm
[12]
Alignment plate /Up
4.3 Operation
The alignment in the main scan direction of paper conveyed to the stacker is executed by opening/closing the alignment plate /Up while the
alignment motor /Up (M5) rotates in forward/reverse.
[3]
[2]
[1]
FRONT
15jmt2c023na
[1]
Alignment plate motor /Up (M5)
[2]
[3]
Alignment plate /Up
(1) Alignment /Up operation

When the alignment motor /Up (M5) rotates, the alignment plate /Up is opened/closed via the alignment belt.
The alignment home sensor /Up (PS8) detects the home position of the alignment plate.
(2) Alignment /Up control

Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal from the main body, the alignment motor /Up (M5) starts to rotate [1] in the direction for closing
the alignment plate /Up, and stops at the ready position [2] at which it is opened slightly wider than the paper width.
A specified period of time after the stacker entrance sensor (PS5) detects the paper trailing edge, M5 rotates in forward/reverse to swing the
alignment plate /Up for paper alignment. It performs paper alignment for each conveyance of sheet [3].
When the last sheet of paper is conveyed, the alignment plate /Up closes to the paper width after swing operation. When stapling with other
than small-sized paper, the opening/closing by swing operation is performed 2 times more before closing the alignment plate /Up to the paper
width.
Alignment home sensor /Up
(PS8)
Alignment motor
/Up (M5)
CLOSE
OPEN
[1] [2]
[3]
15jmt2e002na
[1]
Start of the alignment plate /Up closing (FNS operation

signal)
[2]
[3]
Alignment operation for each sheet
Alignment plate /Up ready position
4.3.2 Stopper control

The stop position of paper conveyed to the stacker is decided by 5 fixed stoppers. For the oblique stapling, the stapler moves to the front side
and the rear side. Therefore, the stop position is decided by 3 stoppers excluding 2 outer stoppers fixed to the stapler unit.
15jkt2c021na
4.3.3 Stacker entrance conveyance control

The stacker entrance motor (M13) drives the stacker entrance roller, the swing belt /Up and the swing belt /Lw to perform the paper conveyance
to the stacker, alignment of the paper trailing edge and the timing adjustment for stapling.
PG -16
(1) Stacker entrance operation

Adopting of the stacking method with approximately 70 degrees inclination makes the device compact. The corrugation roller is used for the
stacker entrance roller [5] to assist the paper exit to the stacker. The alignment of the paper trailing edge in the stacker is performed by the
paper falling with its own weight, the swing belt /Up [7] and the swing belt /Lw [6].
To assist the alignment of the trailing edge of the paper with curl, the paper assist roller [2] is rotated by the paper assist motor (M51) [1] and
also the paper assist solenoid (SD51) [3] applies pressure.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[6]
a0drt2c002cb
[1]
[2]
Paper assist roller
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Swing belt /Lw
[7]
Swing belt /Up
(2) Stacker entrance conveyance control

(a) Staple mode (other than A4, B5, 8 1/2 x 11 size = without bypass)
Upon receiving of the FNS operation start signal [1] from the main body, the stacker entrance motor (M13) turns ON to start rotating at high
speed. When the stacker entrance sensor (PS5) detects the paper trailing edge, M13 switches to low speed rotation [3] to convey the paper
at low speed [3]. When the paper assist roller is driven, the paper assist motor (M51) and the paper assist solenoid (SD51) are also
activated to assist the paper stacking. M13 starts to rotate at high speed again a specified period of time after M13 starts low speed
rotation, and enters standby for the next paper conveyance.
After the last sheet of the copy passes through, M13 stops upon starting of the stapling operation [5]
At the same time the paper exit opening motor (M8) completes closing operation, M13 turns ON [6] to start high speed rotation again to
enter standby for the next paper conveyance.
[2]
[7]
[4]

Stacker entrance
motor (M13)
High speed
Low speed

Stapler motors (M9 and M14)
[6]
[1]
[3]
[5]
15jkt2e023na
[1]
[2]
1st to 9th sheet of paper
[3]
Paper conveyance to the stacker by low speed rotation
[4]
Paper assist roller operation
[5]
Stapling operation
[6]
[7]
Standby for the next copy
(b) Staple mode (A4, B5, 8 1/2 x 11 size = with bypass)

The papers of the 1st copy are conveyed by the same operation as that for the papers other than the size of A4, B5 or 8 1/2 x 11.
When conveying the 1st or 2nd sheet of the 2nd and subsequent copies, the stacker entrance motor (M13) stops after a specified period of
time from when the stacker entrance sensor (PS5) detects the trailing edge of the last sheet of the 1st copy [3]. In this way, the 1st sheet of
the 2nd copy stops at the bypass path so that the sheets of the 1st copy are not conveyed to the stacker until the stapling of 1st copy is
completed.
A specified period of time after the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the leading edge of the 2nd sheet [5], the stacker entrance motor
(M13) turns ON to rotate at high speed. In this way, the 1st sheet and the 2nd sheet are overlapped to be conveyed to the stacker together.
PG -17

[3] [4]
[5]

Stacker entrance
motor (M13)
High speed
Low speed

[1]
[2]
[6]
15jkt2e024na
[1]
[2]
Paper conveyance to the stacker at low speed
[3]
[4]
1st sheet of the 2nd copy
[5]
2nd sheet of the 2nd copy
[6]
Simultaneous conveyance of the 1st and 2nd sheets of

the 2nd copy
The 3rd and subsequent sheets of the 2nd and subsequent copies are conveyed to the stacker in order by the same operation as that for
the 1st copy.
4.3.4 Stacker paper exit control

The paper exit roller motor (M7) drives the paper exit belt of the stacker via the coupling gear with the control by the FNS control board
(FNSCB).
(1) Paper exit belt operation

The paper exit arm [2] installed on the paper exit belt [1] performs the paper exit to the main tray in the stapling mode. The paper exit roller
motor (M7) [4] drives the paper exit belt [1] via the joint of the coupling pin [3].
The paper exit belt home sensor (PS9) [5] detects the home position of the paper exit arm.
[4]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[1]
a0drt2c003cb
[1]
Paper exit belt
[2]
Paper exit arm
[3]
Coupling pin
[4]
[5]
(2) Paper exit arm control

(a) Staple mode (with 216mm or less in the sub scan direction)
When the stapling operation is completed, the paper exit roller motor (M7) rotates to drive the paper exit belt on the stacker section. The
paper exit arm picks up the paper to the paper exit roller and the paper exit roller exits the paper to the main tray. When the paper exit belt
home sensor (PS9) turns ON from OFF, M7 stops.
(b) Staple mode (other than the above mentioned)

When the stapling is completed and the paper exit home sensor (PS12) detects that the paper exit opening is closed by the paper exit
opening motor (M8), the paper exit roller motor (M7) rotates to drive the paper exit arm on the stacker section. The paper exit arm picks up
the paper to the paper exit roller and the paper exit roller exits the paper to the main tray.
When the paper exit belt home sensor (PS9) turns ON from OFF, M7 stops.
PG -18
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-531 > 5. STAPLER SECTION
5. STAPLER SECTION
5.1 Configuration
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
a0drt2c002ca
[1]
Stapler /Rr
[2]
[3]
[4]
Stapler /Fr
5.2 Drive
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
15jkt2c026na
[1]
Stapler /Rr
[2]
Stapler rotation shaft /Rr
[3]
Rack installation board
[4]
Stapler spring /Rr
[5]
Parallel stapling position
[6]
Diagonal stapling position
[7]
Stapler drive rack /Rr
[8]
[9]
[10]
Stapler drive rack /Fr
[11]
Stapler spring /Fr
[12]
Stapler rotation shaft /Fr
[13]
Stapler /Fr
[14]
Pinion gear
5.3 Operation
(1) Stapler movement operation
The following is for the explanation of the stapler /Rr [1] because the stapler /Fr [11] and the stapler /Rr operate symmetrically,
The stapler movement motor (M11) [9] makes the movement of the stapler. When M11 rotates to the [10] direction, the stapler drive rack [8]
drives to the rear side with the stapler via the pinion gear [12].
The power to rotate to the [7] direction is always applied to the stapler with the stapler spring [6], but in the home position, the stapler does not
rotate because the stapler guide roller [3] is restricted to the same height as the rotation shaft on the rack installation board [4].
When the stapler moves to the rear side, it rotates for the amount of gap between the stapler rotation shaft [2] and gets to the one-corner
stapling position. This happens because the guide roller is pressured by the stapler spring and gets onto the grooves [5] provided on the rack
installation board.
PG -19

[11]

[12]
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
15jkt2c029na
[1]
Stapler /Rr
[2]
Stapler rotation shaft /Rr
[3]
Guide roller
[4]
Rack installation board
[5]
Groove
[6]
Stapler spring /Rr
[7]
Pressure by the spring
[8]
Stapler drive rack /Rr
[9]
[10]
Rotation direction in one-corner stapling
[11]
Stapler /Fr
[12]
Pinion gear
(2) Stapler movement control

(a) 1-stapling position size movement
Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal, the stapler movement motor (M11) turns ON to extend the gap of the stapler and it stops at the
specified position.
(b) 2-stapling position

In 2-stapling position, the stapler does not move because the stapling is processed in the home position.
5.3.2 Stapler control

Stapling is proceeded with the stapler motors /Rr and /Fr (M9 and M14).
(1) Stapling operation

In the stapling operation, the stapler motors /Rr and /Fr (M9 and M14) [3] inside the staplers /Rr and /Fr drive to the clincher side [2] and press
the paper [1]. Then the staple is pushed out from the stapler side [4] and bended at the clincher side.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
15jkt2c027na
[1]
Paper
[2]
Stapler (clincher side)
[3]
Stapler motor /Rr, /Fr (M9, M14)
[4]
Stapler (stapler side)
(2) Staple control

(a) Staple
After the alignment operation by the alignment plate is completed, the stapler motors /Rr and /Fr (M9 and M14) start sticking of staple.
When the stapler motor home sensors /Rr and /Fr (PS30 and PS31) inside the staplers /Rr and /Fr detect the home position (turning ON
from OFF), stapling operation completes.
PG -20
(b) Clogged stapler detection

When the stapler motor home sensors /Rr and /Fr (PS30, PS31) do not turn ON within the specified period of time after turning OFF, the
sensor determine that the stapler is clogged, and turn OFF the stapler motors /Rr and /Fr (M9, M14).
(c) Cartridge detection

The cartridge set switches /Rr and /Fr (SW1 and SW3) detect the condition of no cartridge or the cartridge is set incorrectly.
When there is no cartridge or the cartridge is set incorrectly, an error message is displayed on the LCD of the main body.
(d) Staple detection control

When running out of staple, the non-staple switches /Rr and /Fr (SW2 and SW4) turn ON to display an error message on the LCD of the
main body.
PG -21
PH THEORY OF OPERATION FS-612 > 1. OUTLINE
PH THEORY OF OPERATION FS-612

1. OUTLINE
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
Stacker section
[2]
Half-fold/saddle stitching/tri-folding section
[3]
Stapler section
[4]
Main tray section
[5]
Conveyance section
PH -1
1.2 Paper path

1.2.1 None sort/sort/group mode
[6]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Gate
[4]
Main tray
[5]
[6]
Shift unit (Sort/group mode only)
[2]
1.2.2 Sub tray mode

[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
PH -2

[3]
Gate
[4]
Sub tray
1.2.3 Staple mode

[8]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Gate
[4]
Clincher
[5]
[6]
Stapler
[7]
Main tray
[8]
1.2.4 Center folding/saddle stitching mode
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
15jmt1c001na
PH -3
[1]
[2]
[3]
Gate
[4]
Clincher
[5]
Folding knife
[6]
[7]
Booklet tray
[8]
Stapler
1.2.5 Tri-folding mode
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[5]
15jmt1c002na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Gate
[4]
Folding knife
[5]
[6]
Booklet tray
[7]
Tri-folding stopper
PH -4
PH THEORY OF OPERATION FS-612 > 2. CONVEYANCE

SECTION
2.1 Configuration
[14]
[15]
[1]
[13]
[2]
[12]
[3]
[11]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[10]
[9]
[8]
a04dt2c005ca
[1]
[2]
Gate
[3]
[4]
Entrance roller
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Bypass gate
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
Shift roller
[14]
Shift unit
[15]
PH -5

SECTION
2.2 Drive
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19] [20] [21]
[1]
[2]
[14]
[3]
[13]
[4]
[12]
[11]
[5]
[10]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[7]
a04dt2c001ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Entrance roller
[4]
[5]
[6]
Bypass gate
[7]
[8]
[9]
Paper exit belt
[10]
Paper exit arm
[11]
Gate
[12]
Shift roller
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
Gate motor (M12)
2.3 Operation
2.3.1 Punch registration control (Only when PK is installed)
In the punch mode with 216mm or shorter paper, the punch registration control is performed. A specified period of time after the paper exit
sensor of the previous device detects the leading edge of paper, the FNS conveyance motor (M1) stops temporarily. Thus the paper is pressed
against the entrance roller forming a loop to correct the bend. When the specified time has passed, M1 turns ON to restart conveying the paper.
The above operation is not performed when conveying large paper (217 mm or more in the sub scan direction) and in non-punching mode.
When punching on the paper conveyed from PI, the paper skew is corrected by forming a loop on PI and FS does not perform the punch
registration.
PH -6

SECTION

[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
Entrance roller
[2]
[3]
PK
Loop
2.3.2 FS conveyance control

The DC motor of 24V drives the FS conveyance with the control by the FNS control board (FNSCB).
(1) Interlock switch control

The FS paper conveyance drive control starts upon receiving of the start signal from the main body. However when the door switch (MS1) is
OFF, an error information is sent to the main body PRCB and the control does not start.
(2) FS conveyance control

When the start button turns ON, the FNS conveyance motor (M1) starts to rotate at high speed (1000mm/s).
When exiting paper to the main tray, a specified period of time after FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the paper trailing edge, M1 turns to
rotate at the middle speed (600mm/s) to adopt to the FS paper exit line speed. After another specified period of time, M1 starts to rotate at
high speed again for the next conveyance.
When exiting paper to the sub tray and the paper length is within the range of 140mm to 370mm, turning ON of the sub tray paper exit
sensor (PS1) upon detecting of the paper leading edge switches M1 rotation to low speed (400mm/s). A specified period of time after the
FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the paper leading edge, M1 switches to high speed rotation again. When the paper length is 371mm or
more, M1 switches to low speed rotation upon paper trailing edge detection of PS4 and then after a specified period of time, it returns to the
high speed rotation.

When the start button is turned ON, the FNS conveyance motor (M1) turns ON at the paper exit line speed of the main body.
of paper.
2.3.3 Gate drive control

The gate is provided for switching the conveyance path to the sub tray, the main tray and the stacker.
(1) Gate operation

The gate motor (M12) [1] drives the gate cam [2], and each of 2 cams of this gate cam (cam /Up [3] and cam /Lw [4]) drives each of 2 gates /
Up [5] and /Lw [6]. The gate home sensor (PS16) [7] detects the home position.
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
15jkt2c004na
[1]
Gate motor (M12)
[2]
Gate cam
[3]
Cam /Up
[4]
Cam /Lw
PH -7

SECTION

[5]
Gate /Up
[6]
[7]
Gate /Lw
(2) Gate control

The FNS control board (FNSCB) performs its control.
It turns ON upon receiving of the FS start signal from the main body and stops at any of the 3 positions; sub tray (home position) [1], stacker
[2] or main tray [3]. However, when exiting paper to the sub tray, the sub tray is set as home position and it does not operate.
When printing is completed, the gate home sensor (PS16) detects its home position to stop it.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Sub tray (home position)
[2]
[3]
Main tray
15jkt2c005na
Stacker
2.3.4 Bypass gate control

The bypass gate is provided on the paper path to the stacker section. Even while in the staple operation, the bypass gate conveys the next page
to reduce a loss of time for a high productivity.
(1) Bypass gate operation

The bypass gate solenoid (SD5) [2] activates the bypass gate [1].
When using small-sized paper (paper length 216mm or less; A4, B5 or 8 1/2 x 11), it operates only for the 1st page of the 2nd and
subsequent copies to convey to the bypass [3]. It conveys the 2nd page of the 2nd and subsequent copies to the normal route [4] and
overlaps the 1st page and the 2nd page to convey them together to the stacker.
However, some small-sized papers such as thick paper which is exited from the main body at low speed are not overlapped.
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
15jkt2c006na
[1]
Bypass gate
[2]
[3]
Bypass route
[4]
Regular route

The bypass gate operates only when using the small-sized paper (paper length 216mm or less; A4, B5, 8 1/2 x 11) in the staple mode. The
FNS control board (FNSCB) controls the bypass gate solenoid (SD5).
The following is a description of the operation when stapling 2 sheets and outputting 3 copies.

The bypass solenoid (SD5) does not operate when the paper of the 1st copy [1] is passing through it.

A specified period of time after the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the trailing edge of the last sheet of the 1st copy [4], the bypass gate
(SD5) turns ON [5] to draw the 1st sheet of the 2nd copy into the bypass side. A specified period of time after PS4 detects the trailing edge
of that paper [6], SD5 turns OFF [7]. A similar control is performed for the 3rd copy.
PH -8

SECTION

[6]
[1] [4]
[2]
[3]

[5]
[7]
[1]
1st copy
[2]
2nd copy
[3]
3rd copy
[4]
Trailing edge of the last sheet of the 1st copy
[5]
Ready for drawing of the 1st sheet of the 2nd copy into
the bypass
[6]
Trailing edge of the 1st sheet of the 2nd copy
[7]
Preparation of the 2nd sheet of the 2nd copy
2.3.5 Shift control

The shift roller driven by the FNS conveyance motor (M1) moves to the rear side to shift the paper during paper conveyance toward the main
tray.
(1) Shift operation

When the shift roller motor (M2) [2] rotates during paper conveyance toward the main tray [1], the whole shift part [5] including the shift roller
[4] moves approximately 30mm backward [6] due to the crank mechanism [3] to shift the paper to exit.
The shift roller home sensor (PS18) [7] detects the shift position.
[2]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
15jkt2c008na
[1]
Main tray direction
[2]
[3]
Crank mechanism
[4]
Shift roller
[5]
Whole shift part
[6]
Back side direction
[7]
(2) Shift control

When in the sort/group mode, the shift roller motor (M2) turns ON [2] after a specified period of time from when the FNS entrance sensor
(PS4) detects the paper trailing edge [1], and with its rotation, the movable shift part starts to shift. The shift roller is rotated by the FNS
conveyance motor (M1). It shifts while conveying papers.
When the shift roller home sensor (PS18) turns ON from OFF [3] to be detected as shift completion, M2 stops.
A specified period of time after PS4 detects the paper trailing edge, M2 turns ON again and then stops at the position at which PS18 turns ON
from OFF [5]. This operation returns the shift part to its original position to be ready for the next sheet.
By repeating this series of operations, each sheet is offset one by one.
Example: Combination of RU and FS
[1]
FNS conveyance
motor (M1)
High speed
Low speed

[2] [3]
[4] [5]
[1]
[2]
Start to shift
[3]
Shift completion
[4]
Start to move to the home
PH -9

SECTION

[5]
Moving to the home completion
2.3.6 Paper exit roller control

The paper exit roller motor (M7) drives the main tray paper exit roller and the paper exit belt of the stacker with the control by the FNS control
board (FNSCB).
(1) None sort/sort/group mode

When the paper exit sensor of the previous device detects the paper leading edge [1], the paper exit roller motor (M7) turns ON at low speed.
When the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the paper trailing edge, it switches to high speed rotation (600mm/s) [2] to exit the paper.
A specified period of time after PS4 detects the paper trailing edge, it switches to low speed rotation again [3] for the next sheet conveyance.
A specified period of time after the main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) detects the last sheet, M7 stops.
High
Paper exit roller

motor(M7)
Low
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Ready for next sheet conveyance
Start of paper exit
(2) Staple mode (with 217mm or longer paper in the sub scan direction)
Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal [1] from the main body, the paper exit roller motor (M7) rotates to drive the paper exit belt on the
stacker section. When the paper exit belt home sensor (PS9) turns ON from OFF [3], M7 stops and the paper exit arm moves its home
position for the staple mode.
When the paper length is 217mm or more in the sub scan direction, the paper exit opening is opened. When the stapling is completed, the
paper exit opening is closed by the paper exit opening motor (M8). When the paper exit home sensor (PS12) detects that the paper exit
opening is closed completely [6], M7 rotates to drive the paper exit arm. The paper exit arm picks up the paper to the paper exit roller and the
paper exit roller exits the paper to the main tray.
When PS9 turns ON from OFF [7], M7 stops.
Paper exit belt home sensor
(PS9)
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5] [6]
[7]
15jkt2e030na
[1]
FNS operation signal ON
[2]
Paper exit opening open operation
[3]
[4]
Stapling completion
[5]
[6]
Paper exit opening close detection
[7]
2.3.7 Paper exit opening solenoid control

Because the rotation speed of the paper exit roller is slower than that of the conveyance roller, it releases nipping except in paper exit. When the
paper reaches the paper exit opening, the nipping part moves to nip the paper.
(1) Paper exit opening solenoid operation

When the paper reaches the paper exit opening, the paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) [1] moves the nipping part [2] to nip the paper by
pressing the nip roller [4] against the main tray paper exit roller [3] and exit the paper toward the main tray [5].
The main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) [6] detects the paper exit.
[1]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[4]
[2]
[6]
[2]
[3]
15jkt2c011na
[1]
[2]
Nipping part
[3]
[4]
Nip roller
PH -10

SECTION

[5]
Main tray direction
[6]
(2) ON timing of paper exit opening solenoid

A specified period of time after the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the paper trailing edge, the paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) turns
ON.
(b) Staple mode

A specified period of time after the stapling is completed, the paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) turns ON to nip the paper.
In the case of 2 position staple or 1 position staple with the 217mm or longer paper in the sub scan direction, SD4 temporarily turns OFF
before paper exit completion to correct the paper misalignment and then turns ON again to exit the paper.
(3) OFF timing of paper exit opening solenoid

In all modes, the paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) turns OFF a specified period of time after the main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) detects
the paper.

In the staple mode (with 217mm or longer paper in the sub scan direction) or center folding/saddle stitching/tri-folding mode, the paper exit
opening is kept open from start of print to finish of stapling because the paper runs off.
(1) Paper exit opening open/close operation

When the paper exit opening motor (M8) [1] rotates, the paper exit opening unit [3] opens/closes due to the crank mechanism [2]. The paper
exit home sensor (PS12) [4] detects the open/close of the paper exit opening.
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[4]
a04dt2c003ca
[1]
[2]
Crank mechanism
[3]
[4]
(2) Paper exit opening open/close control

(a) Staple mode (with 217mm or longer paper in the sub scan direction)
Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal [1] from the main body, the paper exit opening motor (M8) starts to rotate [2] to open the paper
exit opening.
M8 turns ON again to close the paper exit opening at the same as the start of the stapling operation, and stops when the paper exit home
sensor (PS12) detects the close position [4]. A specified period of time after the main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) detects the paper trailing
edge, M8 turns ON to open the paper exit opening [6] for the next sheet of paper.
It repeats this series of operations for each bundle of papers stapled.
[5]
Clincher motor /Fr (M15), Rr (M10)
[1] [2]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

[5]
Paper nipping by the paper exit opening solenoid (SD4)
[6]
(b) Half-folding/saddle-stitching/tri-folding mode

Upon receiving of the start button ON [1] from the main body, the paper exit opening motor (M8) rotates [2] to open the paper exit opening.
A specified period of time after the folding paper exit sensor (PS25) or the folding full sensor (PS29) detects the trailing edge of the last
paper, M8 turns ON [3] again to close the paper exit opening. It stops when the paper exit home sensor (PS12) detects the close position
[4].
PH -11

SECTION

[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
15jkt2e014na
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

The sub tray paper exit roller is driven by the sub tray exit motor (M21) and is controlled by the FNS control board (FNSCB).
(1) Sub tray exit motor (M21) control

At the same time when the paper exit sensor of the previous device detects the leading edge of paper, the sub tray exit motor (M21) turns
ON with low speed rotation (400mm/s).
When the paper length is within a range of 140mm to 370mm, the paper is exited at that speed.
When the paper length is within a range of 371mm to 488mm, M21 switches to high speed rotation (1000mm/s) a specified period of time
after the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the paper leading edge. It switches to low speed rotation to exit the paper when PS4 detects
the paper trailing edge.
A specified period of time after sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of the last paper, M21 stops.

When the start button is turned ON, the sub tray exit motor (M21) turns ON at the paper exit line speed of the main body.
of paper.
(2) Sub tray full detection

When the thickness of the papers which are exited to the sub tray reaches a specified value, the sub tray paper full sensor (PS19) turns ON
and an information of "sub tray paper full" is sent to the main body. Then, the main body displays the message on its operation panel.
PH -12
PH THEORY OF OPERATION FS-612 > 3. MAIN TRAY SECTION

3.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a04dt2c004ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Main tray
[4]
Up/down wire
3.2 Drive
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
15jkt2c015na
[1]
Up/down pulley /Up
[2]
Up/down wire
[3]
[4]
Up/down pulley /Lw
[5]
Main tray
PH -13
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 Tray up down control
(1) Tray up down operation
The driving force of the worm gear mounted on the shaft of the main tray up down motor (M3) [6] winds up the up/down wire.
The main tray [9] goes up or down according to the direction in which the up/down wire is wound up. When the lift pulley /Lw rotates clockwise
as seen from the front, the main tray goes up and when it rotates counterclockwise, the tray goes down.
[1]
[9]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
15jkt2c016na
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Timing belt
[6]
[7]
Up/down pulley /Lw
[8]
Up/down pulley /Up
[9]
Main tray
(2) Paper detection

The main tray upper limit sensor (PS2) [2] and the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7) [1] maintain the distance between the upper
surface of the paper exited in the main tray (the surface of the main tray when no paper exited) and the paper exit opening at a fixed distance
to prevent the paper exited from having an uneven edge.
While in continuous printing, FS counts the number of sheets exited with the software and it stops printing when the counted value reaches
the maximum number of loadable sheets for each paper size.
However, when removing the exited paper from the tray during printing, the tray moves up and the counter reset sensor (PS15) [3] turns ON.
This operation resets the software counter and enables the limitless paper exit.
Main tray lower limit sensor (PS3) [4] detects the lower limit of the tray. While in intermittent printing, the software does not count the total
number of sheets, but PS3 controls the loading amount.
(3) Tray up down control

The main tray moves up/down in accordance with the forward/reverse rotation of the main tray up down motor (M3). The FNS control board
(FNSCB) controls M3.

Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal from the main body, the main tray up down motor (M3) moves up the tray until the main tray
upper limit sensor (PS2) turns ON.
When a sheet passes through the main tray paper exit sensor (PS6), M3 moves the tray down. A specified period of time after PS2 turns
OFF, the tray moves up again and stops upon turning ON of PS2.
It repeats the operation above for each sheet of papers.
[2]
Main tray upper limit sensor
(PS2)
Main tray up
down motor (M3)
UP
DOWN
[1]
[1]
15jkt2e017na
[2]
(b) Staple mode

Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal from the main body, the main tray up down motor (M3) moves up the tray until the stapler paper
exit upper limit sensor (PS7) turns ON.
PH -14
A specified period of time after the paper exit roller motor (M7) turns ON, M3 moves the main tray down. A specified period of time after
that, M3 rotates in reverse to move the main tray up until it stops upon turning ON from OFF of the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor
(PS7).
[2]
Paper exit roller

motor (M7)
High speed
Low speed

UP
Main tray
up down motor (M3)
DOWN
[1]
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
Bundle of papers exit to the main tray
[3]
[4]
Main tray moving up
PH -15
PH THEORY OF OPERATION FS-612 > 4. STACKER SECTION
4. STACKER SECTION
4.1 Configuration
[1]
[18]
[2]
[3]
[17]
[4]
[16]
[15]
[5]
[6]
[14]
[13]
[7]
[12]
[8]
[11]
[10]
[9]
a04dt2c006ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Alignment plate /Lw
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
Swing belt
[14]
[15]
[16]
Paper exit belt
[17]
Paper exit arm
[18]
Alignment plate /Up
PH -16
4.2 Drive
[12]
[11]
[13]
[14] [15]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[10]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[8]
15jmt2c001na
[1]
Coupling (from M7)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Flat-stapling stopper /Fr, /Rr
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Alignment plate /Lw
[10]
Flat stitching stopper release solenoid /Rr (SD8),

Flat stitching stopper release solenoid /Fr (SD7)
[11]
Paper assist roller
[12]
[13]
Paper exit arm
[14]
[15]
Alignment plate /Up
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Alignment /Up control
When in the stapling, the center folding, the saddle stitching and the tri-folding modes, the alignment in the main scan direction for the papers
conveyed to the stacker is performed by the open/close of the alignment plate /Up in accordance with the forward/reverse rotation of the
alignment motor /Up (M5).
[3]
[2]
[1]
FRONT
15jmt2c023na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Alignment plate /Up
(1) Alignment /Up operation

When the alignment motor /Up (M5) rotates, the alignment plate/Up is opened/closed via the alignment belt.
The alignment home sensor /Up (PS8) detects the home position of the alignment plate.
PH -17
(2) Alignment /Up control

Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal from the main body, the alignment motor /Up (M5) starts to rotate [1] in the direction for closing
the alignment plate /Up, and stops at the ready position [2] at which it is opened slightly wider than the paper width.
alignment plate /Up for paper alignment. It performs paper alignment for each conveyance of sheet [3].
When the last sheet of paper is conveyed, the alignment plate /Up closes to the paper width after swing operation. When stapling with other
than small-sized paper, the opening/closing by swing operation is performed 2 times more before closing the alignment plate /Up to the paper
width.
Alignment home sensor /Up
(PS8)
Alignment motor
/Up (M5)
CLOSE
OPEN
[1] [2]
[3]
15jmt2e002na
[1]
Start of the alignment plate /Up closing (FNS operation

signal)
[2]
[3]
Alignment plate /Up ready position
4.3.2 Alignment /Lw control

In the saddle stitching, the center folding and the tri-folding modes, the alignment plate /Up and the alignment plate /Lw performs paper
alignment in the main scan direction by swing operation.
The forward/reverse rotation of the alignment motor /Lw (M16) [2] swings the alignment plate /Lw [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
FRONT
15jmt2c024na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Alignment plate /Lw
(1) Alignment /Lw operation

When the alignment motor /Lw (M16) rotates, the alignment plate is opened/closed via the alignment belt.
The alignment home sensor /Lw (PS24) detects the home position of the alignment plate.
(2) Alignment /Lw control

In the saddle stitching, the center folding and the tri-folding modes, upon receiving of the FNS operation signal from the main body, the
alignment motor /Lw (M16) starts to rotate [1] in the direction for closing the alignment plate /Lw, and stops at the ready position [2] at which it
is opened slightly wider than the paper width.
alignment plate /Lw for paper alignment. It performs paper alignment for each conveyance of sheet [3].
When the last sheet of paper is conveyed, the alignment plate /Lw closes to the paper width after swing operation.
Alignment plate home sensor
/Lw (PS24)
Alignment motor
/Lw (M16)
CLOSE
OPEN
[1][2]
[3]
15jmt2e003na
[1]
Start of the alignment plate /Lw closing (FNS operation

signal)
[2]
[3]
Alignment plate /Lw ready position
4.3.3 Stopper control

The vertical position at which the paper conveyed to the stacker stops differs among modes of stapling, center folding, saddle stitching and trifolding modes.
2 stoppers (saddle stitching stopper and flat stitching stopper) control the paper stop position.
PH -18
(1) Stopper operation

In the stapling mode, the flat stitching stopper [1] is set to the paper path by the pressure applied by the spring [2]. The position of the leading
edge of the fallen down paper is determined by the flat stitching stopper [1].
In the saddle stitching, center folding and tri-folding modes, the flat stitching stopper release solenoids /Fr and /Rr (SD7, SD8) [4] turn ON to
retract the flat stitching stopper [1] of the paper path. In this way, the paper does not contact the flat stitching stopper but falls down until it
contact the saddle stitching stopper [3].
The saddle stitching stopper driven by the saddle stitching stopper motor (M18) [5] moves up and down in accordance with the paper size.
The saddle stitching stopper home sensor (PS23) [6] detects the home position.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[3]
15jmt2c004na
[1]
[2]
Spring
[3]
[4]
Flat stitching stopper release solenoids /Fr and /Rr (SD7,

SD8)
[5]
[6]
(2) Stopper control

(a) Half-Fold mode
Upon receiving of the FNS operation start signal [1] from the main body, the saddle stitching stopper motor (M18) drives [2] to move the
saddle stitching stopper down to the stop position suited for the paper size.
For the 11th and subsequent sheets, after a specified period of time from when the stacker entrance sensor (PS5) detects the paper trailing
edge, M18 drives to swing the saddle stitching stopper up and down for paper alignment [3].
After the alignment of the last sheet is completed [4], M18 drives [5] to move down the saddle stitching stopper further to the folding
position.
After the center folding operation is completed and the folding paper exit sensor (PS25) detects the trailing edge of the bundle of papers,
M18 drives [6] to move the saddle stitching stopper up to the alignment position suited for the paper size for the next copy.
[4]

home sensor (PS23)
Saddle stitching
Up
stopper motor
Down
(M18)

[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
Moving to the alignment position suited for the paper

size
[3]
Vertical alignment by the saddle stitching stopper
[4]
Alignment operation for last sheet of current copy
[5]
Moving to the folding position suited for the paper size
[6]
Moving to the alignment position for the next copy
(b) Saddle stitching mode

Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal [1] from the main body, the saddle stitching stopper motor (M18) drives [2] to move the saddle
stitching stopper down to the stop position suited for the paper size.
For the 11th and subsequent sheets, after a specified period of time from when the stacker entrance sensor (PS5) detects the paper trailing
edge, M18 drives to swing the saddle stitching stopper up and down for paper alignment [3].
At the same time as the completion of the stapling operation [4], the alignment plate is opened by the alignment motors /Up (M5) and /Lw
(M16) and M18 drives [5] to move down the saddle stitching stopper further so that the paper comes down to the folding position.
After the center folding operation is completed and the folding paper exit sensor (PS25) detects the trailing edge of the bundle of papers,
M18 drives [6] to move the saddle stitching stopper up to the saddle stitching position suited for the paper size for the next copy.
PH -19

[4]


home sensor (PS23)
Saddle stitching
Up
stopper
Down
motor (M18)

[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
Moving to the saddle stitching position suited for the

paper size
[3]
Vertical alignment by the saddle stitching stopper
[4]
Stapling operation
[5]
Moving to the folding position suited for the paper size
[6]
Moving to the saddle stitching position for the next copy
(c) Tri-folding mode

Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal [1] from the main body, the saddle stitching stopper motor (M18) drives [2] to move it down to
the stop position suited for the paper size.
After the alignment of the last sheet is completed [3], M18 drives [4] to move down the saddle stitching stopper further to the 1st folding
position of tri-folding.
After the folding operation is completed and the folding paper exit sensor (PS25) detects the trailing edge of the bundle of papers, M18
drives [5] to move the saddle stitching stopper up to the alignment position suited for the paper size for the next copy.
[3]
home sensor (PS23)
UP
Saddle stitching
stopper motor (M18)
DOWN
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
15jmt2e007na
[1]
[2]
Moving to the alignment position suited for the paper

size
[3]
[4]
Moving to the 1st folding position for the next copy
[5]
Moving to the alignment position for the next copy
(d) Stitching mode

The saddle stitching stopper motor (M18) does not operate in the flat stitching mode.
4.3.4 Stacker entrance conveyance control

The stacker entrance motor (M13) drives the stacker entrance roller and the swing belt to perform the paper conveyance to the stacker,
alignment of the paper trailing edge and the timing adjustment for stapling.
(1) Stacker entrance operation

Adopting of the stacking method with approximately 70 degrees inclination makes the device compact. The corrugation roller is used for the
stacker entrance roller [5] to assist the paper exit to the stacker. The alignment of the paper trailing edge in the stacker is performed by the
paper falling with its own weight and the swing belt [6].
To assist the alignment of the trailing edge of the paper with curl, the paper assist roller [2] is rotated by the paper assist motor (M51) [3] and
also the paper assist solenoid (SD51) [1] applies pressure.
PH -20
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
15jmt2c008na
[1]
[2]
Paper assist roller
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Swing belt
[7]
(2) Stacker entrance conveyance control

(a) Staple mode (other than A4, B5, 8 1/2 x 11 size = without bypass)
speed.
When the stacker entrance sensor (PS5) detects paper trailing edge, M13 switches to low speed rotation [3] and the paper assist roller
starts to rotate to convey the paper to the stacker at low speed. When the paper assist roller is driven, the paper assist motor (M51) and the
paper assist solenoid (SD51) are also activated to assist the paper stacking. M13 starts to rotate at high speed again a specified period of
time after M13 starts low speed rotation, and enters standby for the next paper conveyance.
After the last sheet of the copy passes through, M13 stops upon starting of the stapling operation [5].
A specified period of time after the paper exit opening motor (M8) completes closing operation, M13 turns ON [6] to start high speed
rotation again to enter standby for the next paper conveyance.
[2]
[7]
[4]

Stacker entrance
motor (M13)
High speed
Low speed

Stapler motor /Rr (M9), /Fr (M14)
[1]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
1st to 9th sheet of paper
[3]
Paper conveyance to the stacker by low speed rotation
[4]
Paper assist roller operation
[5]
Stapling operation
[6]
[7]
(b) Staple mode (A4, B5, 8 1/2 x 11 size = with bypass)

The papers of the 1st copy are conveyed by the same operation as that for the papers other than the size of A4, B5 or 8 1/2 x 11.
When conveying the 1st or 2nd sheet of the 2nd and subsequent copies, the stacker entrance motor (M13) stops after a specified period of
time from when the stacker entrance sensor (PS5) detects the trailing edge of the last sheet of the 1st copy [3]. In this way, the 1st sheet of
the 2nd copy stops at the bypass path so that the sheets of the 2nd copy are not conveyed to the stacker until the stapling of the 1st copy is
completed.
A specified period of time after the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the leading edge of the 2nd sheet [5], the stacker entrance motor
(M13) turns ON to rotate at high speed. In this way, the 1st sheet and the 2nd sheet are overlapped to be conveyed to the stacker together
[6].
PH -21

[3] [4]
[5]

Stacker entrance
motor (M13)
High speed
Low speed
Stapler motors /Fr (M14)

[1]
[2]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
1st sheet of the 2nd copy
[5]
2nd sheet of the 2nd copy
[6]
Simultaneous conveyance of the 1st and 2nd sheets of

the 2nd copy
The 3rd and subsequent sheets of the 2nd and subsequent copies are conveyed to the stacker in order by the same operation as that for
the 1st copy.
(c) Center folding/saddle stitching mode

speed.
When the stacker entrance sensor (PS5) detects the paper trailing edge, M13 switches to low speed rotation [2] to convey the paper at low
speed. It starts to rotate at high speed again a specified period of time after it starts low speed rotation, and enters standby for the next
paper conveyance.
When the paper alignment [4] for the last sheet of the copy [3] is completed, M13 stops.
When the folding paper exit sensor (PS25) detects the leading edge of the bundle of papers [5], M13 turns ON to start high speed rotation
again and enters standby for the next paper conveyance.
[3]
[6]

Stacker entrance
motor (M13)
High speed
Low speed
Alignment motor /Up (M5), /Lw(M16)

[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Last paper of the set
[4]
[5]
Center folding paper exit operation
[6]
(d) Tri-folding mode

Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal [1] from the main body, the stacker entrance motor (M13) turns ON to start rotating at high
speed.
When the stacker entrance sensor (PS5) detects the paper trailing edge, M13 switches to low speed rotation [2] to convey the paper at low
speed. It starts to rotate at high speed again a specified period of time after it starts low speed rotation, and enters standby for the next
paper conveyance.
[3]
Stacker entrance
motor (M13)
High speed
Low speed

[1]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Tri-folding exit
4.3.5 Stacker paper exit control

The paper exit roller motor (M7) drives the paper exit belt of the stacker via the coupling gear with the control by the FNS control board
(FNSCB).
(1) Paper exit belt operation

The paper exit arm [2] installed on the paper exit belt [1] performs the paper exit to the main tray in the stapling mode. The paper exit roller
motor (M7) [4] drives the paper exit belt via the joint of the coupling pin [3].
The paper exit belt home sensor (PS9) [5] detects the home position of the paper exit arm.
PH -22
[4]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[1]
15jmt2c013na
[1]
Paper exit belt
[2]
Paper exit arm
[3]
Coupling pin
[4]
[5]
(2) Paper exit arm control

(a) Staple mode (with 216mm or less in the sub scan direction)
When the stapling operation is completed, the paper exit roller motor (M7) rotates to drive the paper exit belt on the stacker section. The
paper exit arm picks up the paper to the paper exit roller and the paper exit roller exits the paper to the main tray. When the paper exit belt
home sensor (PS9) turns ON from OFF, M7 stops.
(b) Staple mode (other than the above mentioned)

When the stapling is completed and the paper exit home sensor (PS12) detects that the paper exit opening is closed by the paper exit
opening motor (M8), the paper exit roller motor (M7) rotates to drive the paper exit arm on the stacker section. The paper exit arm picks up
the paper to the paper exit roller and the paper exit roller exits the paper to the main tray.
When the paper exit belt home sensor (PS9) turns ON from OFF, M7 stops.
(c) Center folding, saddle stitching mode

After completion of stapling, the saddle stitching stopper motor (M18) drives the saddle stitching stopper to convey the paper to the center
folding position. It does not rotate the paper exit arm. It is because the paper exit arm contacts the papers stopping at the center folding
position.
(d) Tri-folding mode

When the paper alignment is completed, the paper exit roller motor (M7) rotates in reverse to assist the paper conveyance to the tri-folding
position. When the paper exit belt home sensor (PS9) turns ON from OFF, M7 stops.
PH -23
PH THEORY OF OPERATION FS-612 > 5. STAPLER SECTION
5. STAPLER SECTION
5.1 Configuration
[10]
[1]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
a04dt2c007ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Clincher /Rr
[5]
[6]
Clincher /Fr
[7]
[8]
Stapler /Fr
[9]
[10]
Stapler /Rr
5.2 Drive
[9]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[2]
[10]
[11]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[3]
15jmt2c014na
[1]
[2]
Timing belt upper side
[3]
[4]
Clincher /Rr
[5]
Clincher /Fr
[6]
Timing belt lower side
[7]
Stapler /Fr
[8]
[9]
Stapler /Rr
[10]
[11]
Timing belt
PH -24
5.3 Operation
For stapler movements, there are 2 types, that is, the horizontal movement of the stapler intervals and the rotation of the stapler /Rr. Movement
is made according to the staple mode.
(1) Stapler horizontal movement operation

The stapler movement motor (M11) [1] makes the horizontal movement of the stapler.
The stapler /Rr [8] and the clincher /Rr [3] are secured to the upper side [2] of each timing belt [9], and the stapler /Fr [6] and the clincher /Fr
[4] are fixed to the lower side [5].
The stapler movement home sensor (PS11) [7] detects the positions of the stapler and the clincher.
[5]
[7] [8]
[6]
[9]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
15jmt2c015na
[1]
[2]
Timing belt upper side
[3]
Clincher /Rr
[4]
Clincher /Fr
[5]
Timing belt lower side
[6]
Stapler /Fr
[7]
[8]
Stapler /Rr
[9]
Timing belt
(2) Stapler rotating movement operation

The stapler /Rr and the clincher /Rr rotate 45 degrees for the one-corner stapling at rear.
The stapler rotation motor (M6) [10] rotates the stapler /Rr [9] and the clincher rotation motor (M4) [5] rotates the clincher /Rr [7].
They are locked securely at 0 degree or rotation angle of 45 degrees by the ball lock mechanism which consists of the ball [1] and the spring
[2].
[3] shows locked, and [4] shows unlocked.
[10]
[9]
[5]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[6]
[3]
[4]
15jmt2c016na
[1]
Ball
[2]
Spring
[3]
Locked
[4]
Unlocked
[5]
[6]
[7]
Clincher /Rr
[8]
[9]
Stapler /Rr
[10]
(3) Stapler movement control

(a) 1 point /front staple, 2 points staple size movement
Upon receiving of the FNS operation signal, the stapler movement motor (M11) turns ON to extend the distance between the stapler and
the clincher and stops at the specified position.
A specified period of time after the main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) turns ON detecting the last sheet, M11 turns ON and it stops at the
position at which the stapler movement home sensor (PS11) turns ON.
PH -25
(b) 1 point /one-corner stapling at rear staple size movement

Upon receiving of the FNS operation start signal [1] from the main body, the stapler movement motor (M11) turns ON to extend the distance
between the stapler and the clincher [2]. A specified period of time after turning ON of M11, the stapler rotation motor (M6) and the clincher
rotation motor (M4) turn ON to rotate the stapler /Rr and the clincher /Rr and move them obliquely [3].
A specified period of time after the trailing edge of the last sheet passes through the main tray paper exit sensor (PS6), M4 and M6 turn ON
to rotate the stapler /Rr and the clincher /Rr in the home position direction [5] and stops when the stapler rotation home sensor (PS13) and
the clincher rotation home sensor (PS14) turn ON. At the same time, M11 turns ON [6] and it stops when the stapler movement home
[2]
[6]
Stapler movement
motor (M11)
CLOSE
OPEN

Stapler rotation
motor (M6)
Forward
Reverse

Clincher rotation
motor (M4)
Forward
Reverse

[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
15jmt2e017na
[1]
[2]
Horizontal movement of the stapler /Rr and the clincher /

Rr for paper size
[3]
45 degrees obliquely rotated position of the stapler /Rr

and the clincher /Rr
[4]
Stapling operation
[5]
Movement to the rotation home position of the stapler /Rr

and the clincher /Rr
[6]
Horizontal position movement of the stapler /Rr and the

clincher /Rr to home

The stapler motors /Rr and /Fr (M9 and M14) and the clincher motors /Rr and /Fr (M10 and M15) conduct stapling.
(1) Stapling operation

The stapler motors /Rr and /Fr (M9 and M14) in the staplers /Rr and Fr [6] push out the paper press section [4] toward the clincher [2] side to
press the paper [1] via the cam mechanism [5] and then push out a staple [3]. Then the clincher motors /Rr and /Fr (M10 and M15) in the
clinchers /Rr and /Fr bend the staple.
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[6]
15jmt2c018na
[1]
Paper
[2]
Clincher
[3]
Staple
[4]
Paper press section
[5]
Cam mechanism
[6]
Stapler /Rr, /Fr
PH -26
(2) Staple control

(a) Staple
After the alignment operation by the alignment plate is completed, the stapler motors /Rr and /Fr (M9 and M14) start sticking of staple. After
a specified period of time, the clincher motors /Rr and /Fr (M10 and M15) start bending of staple.
When the clincher motor home sensors /Rr and /Fr (PS32 and PS33) and the stapler motor home sensors /Rr and /Fr (PS30 and PS31)
detect the home position (turning ON from OFF), stapling operation is completed.
(b) Clogged stapler detection

While in the stapling operation, it is detected that the staples have been clogged when the stapler motor home sensors /Rr and /Fr (PS30
and PS31) and the clincher motor home sensors /Rr and /Fr (PS32 and PS33) do not turn ON within a specified period of time after they
have turned OFF, and rotate the stapler motors /Rr and /Fr (M9 and M14) and the clincher motors /Rr and /Fr (M10 and M15) in the reverse
direction up to the home position.
(c) Cartridge detection

The cartridge set switches /Rr and /Fr (SW1 and SW3) detect the condition of no cartridge or the cartridge is set incorrectly.
When there is no cartridge or the cartridge is set incorrectly, an error message is displayed on the operation section of the main body.
(d) Staple detection control

When running out of staple, the staple switches /Rr and /Fr (SW2 and SW4) turn ON to display an error message on the operation section
of the main body.
PH -27
PH THEORY OF OPERATION FS-612 > 6. HALF-FOLDING/

SADDLE-STITCHING/TR...
6. HALF-FOLDING/SADDLE-STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING SECTION
6.1 Configuration
[12]
[10]
[13]
[11]
[14]
[9]
[8]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
Folding knife
[3]
[4]
[5]
Folding full LED (PS28)
[6]
Tri-folding roller
[7]
Folding roller
[8]
Tri-folding stopper
[9]
Folding full sensor (PS29)
[10]
[11]
Tri-folding gate
[12]
[13]
[14]
6.2 Drive
[6]
[7]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
15jmt2c019na
[1]
Folding knife
[2]
[3]
[4]
Tri-folding roller
[5]
[6]
Tri-folding gate
[7]
Folding roller
PH -28

6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Folding knife control
(1) Folding knife control
The folding knife motor (M19) drives the folding knife. It is used in the center folding, saddle stitching and tri-folding modes. In the tri-folding
mode, it is used for the 1st folding.
(a) Folding knife operation

The folding knife motor (M19) gives the crank shaft a half turn via the gear to press the paper [2] to the nipping section with the folding knife
[5].
The folding roller [4] draws in the paper and press it to fold.
The folding position is controlled by the stop position of the saddle stitching stopper [6].
[4]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[6]
15jmt2c020na
[1]
[2]
Paper
[3]
[4]
Folding roller
[5]
Folding knife
[6]
(b) Folding knife control

A specified period of time after the folding pass-through sensor (PS26) [3] detects the paper and the saddle stitching stopper stops at the
folding position, the folding knife motor (M19) turns ON to push the folding knife toward the paper.
It stops when the folding knife goes and returns once and the folding knife home sensor (PS22) [1] turns OFF from ON.
6.3.2 Folding conveyance control

The folding transfer motor (M20) drives the folding roller. The tri-folding roller is driven by the folding roller.
(1) Folding conveyance control

A specified period of time after the folding pass-through sensor (PS26) detects the paper and the saddle stitching stopper stops at the folding
position, the folding knife motor (M19) turns ON [2]. When the folding knife home sensor (PS22) turns ON via M19 rotation, the folding
transfer motor (M20) turns ON [3] and the folding roller performs the 1st folding. While in the tri-folding mode, the tri-folding roller performs the
2nd folding. Then the paper is exited in the booklet tray [4].
A specified period of time after the folding paper exit sensor (PS25) detects the trailing edge of the bundle of papers, M20 stops.
[5]
Saddle stitching
stopper motor (M18)
Up
Down

High speed
Folding transfer
motor (M20)
Medium
speed
Low speed
[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
PH -29


[1]
Saddle stitching stopper size shift
[2]
Pressing the paper into the folding roller by the folding

knife
[3]
Folding pressure
[4]
Paper conveyance
[5]
Folding knife retraction position
(2) Booklet full detection

The folding full sensor (PS29) which consists of the LED emitting part and the LED receiving part detects the full of the booklet tray.
The paper full is detected when the sensor is interrupted for more than a specified period of time.
6.3.3 Tri-folding gate control

The tri-folding gate is provided for switching between 2 paths; the center folding/saddle stitching path and the tri-folding path. The tri-folding gate
solenoid (SD6) drives the tri-folding gate.
(1) Tri-folding 2nd folding operation

The tri-folding gate solenoid (SD6) [5] drives the tri-folding gate [6] and switches the paper path to the tri-folding path to introduce the paper
[7] exited from the folding roller [1] to the tri-folding stopper [4].
A loop [2] which is formed on the paper when contacting the tri-folding stopper is drawn into between the folding roller and the tri-folding roller
[3] to be performed the 2nd folding, and then the paper is exited in the booklet tray [8].
The 2nd folding position is determined in accordance with the position of the tri-folding stopper.
[1]
[5]
[6]
[9]
[7]
[2]
[4]
[8]
[3]
[3]
15jmt2c022na
[1]
Folding roller
[2]
Loop
[3]
Tri-folding roller
[4]
Tri-folding stopper
[5]
[6]
Tri-folding gate
[7]
Paper
[8]
Booklet tray
[9]
(2) Tri-folding gate control

After the saddle stitching stopper stops at the tri-folding position, the tri-folding gate solenoid (SD6) [5] turns ON and drives the tri-folding gate
[6] to switch the paper path toward the tri-folding stopper.
A specified period of time after the folding paper exit sensor (PS25) [9] detects the trailing edge of the bundle of papers, SD6 turns OFF.
PH -30
PI THEORY OF OPERATION PK-512/513 > 1. OUTLINE
PI THEORY OF OPERATION PK-512/513

1. OUTLINE
[1]
[2]
[1]
Punch section
[2]
Punch scraps box section
1.2 Paper path
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Paper path from PI
[2]
Punch unit
[3]
[4]
Punch scraps box
PI-1
PI THEORY OF OPERATION PK-512/513 > 2. PUNCH SECTION
2. PUNCH SECTION
2.1 Composition
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a04et2c001ca
[1]
[2]
Entrance roller
[3]
Punch blade
[4]
Punch blade
[5]
Punch unit
2.2 Drive
2.2.1 Punch shift drive
[6]
[7]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
15kjt2c002na
[1]
Punch unit
[2]
Guide shaft
[3]
Belt
[4]
Front
[5]
[6]
Rack
[7]
PI-2
2.2.2 Punch drive

(1) PK-512 (2 to 3 holes)
[3]
[1]
[1]
[12]
[13]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[10]
[11]
[3]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
15kjt2e007nb
[1]
Punch motor (M301)
[2]
Eccentric cam
[3]
Slide link
[4]
Switching cam
[5]
When the punch blade is driven
[6]
When the punch blade is not driven
[7]
Switching cam shaft
[8]
Groove of the switching cam
[9]
Projection of the punch blade
[10]
Projection of the switching cam
[11]
Punch blade
[12]
Punch blade of the 3-hole punch
[13]
PI-3
(2) PK-512 (2 to 4 holes)

[3]
[1]
[1]
[12]
[13]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[5]
a04et2f002ca
[1]
Punch motor (M301)
[2]
Eccentric cam
[3]
Slide link
[4]
Switching cam
[5]
When the punch blade is driven
[6]
When the punch blade is not driven
[7]
Switching cam shaft
[8]
Groove of the switching cam
[9]
Projection of the punch blade
[10]
Projection of the switching cam
[11]
Punch blade
[12]
[13]
Punch blade of the 2-hole and 4 hole punch
(3) PK-513
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
15kjt2c003nb
[1]
Eccentric cam
[2]
PI-4
Drive arm

[3]
Punch blade
[4]
Punch motor (M301)
2.3 Operation
2.3.1 Punch standby position movement control
Turning ON the device, the punch shift motor (M302) rotates to move the punch unit [6] to the home position until the punch shift home sensor
(PS303) turns ON.
Selecting the punch mode, M302 rotates to move the punch unit [6] so that the paper size sensor (PS305) [1] of the punch unit [6] comes to the
side edge position [2] of paper.
PS305 consists of 5 sensors. Each sensor detects the following paper.
Sensor
Paper size
A5S, 51/2 x 81/2S
B5S, ISO-B5S, 16KS
A4S, A5, SRA4S, 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 14S, 51/2 x 81/2, 81/2x 13,
81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
B4, B5, ISO-B4, ISO-B5, 8K, 16K
A3, A4, 11 x 17, 81/2, x 11
* The sensors are numbered 1 to 5 from the front side.

The punch unit returns to the home position at the end of the job.
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
The paper edge
[3]
Paper transfer direction
[4]
Paper
[5]
Punch blade
[6]
Punch unit
Note
In the model PK-512, the paper size sensor (PS305) is positioned on the front side and its operation is contrary to that in the above
illustration on the right and left sides.
2.3.2 Punch position correction control

For the punch unit positioned from the side edge of the paper to the inside PI.2.3.1 Punch standby position movement control, the punch
position is adjusted in the following procedure so that punching is madesymmetrically to the center of paper at all times. The punch position
correction is operated by moving the punchunit back and forth while conveying the paper.
When the specified sensor [14] which is for the paper size in the paper size sensor (PS305) [13] detects paper and turns ON after the
specified time since FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the leading edge of paper, it judges that paper side edge is on the rear side than
the sensor. When the sensor remains being OFF without detecting paper, it judges that the paper side edge is on front side than the sensor.
If you conduct the punch operation on the paper conveyed from PI, it is started when the paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201) or /Lw
(PS206) detects the leading edge of the paper.
When it judges that the paper side edge is on the rear side than the sensor [1], the punch shift motor (M302) rotates in reverse to move the
punch unit [11] to the rear side [8]. After the specified time since PS305 turns OFF, M302 turns OFF. Then, M302 turns forward rotation ON
to move back the punch unit to the front side [9] for the specified distance. When PS305 turns ON from OFF, it detects as the side edge [3]
and is the side edge reference position.
When it judges that the paper side edge is on the front side than the sensor, M302 rotates in forward to move the punch unit to the front
side. When PS305 turns ON from OFF, it detects the side edge. It is the side edge reference position.
Once it detects the side edge reference position [3], the punch unit is moved further [11] so that the center of the punch blade [12] is
positioned to the center of the paper [5]. The moving distance and its direction are depending on the paper size. It is stopped temporarily at
the side edge reference position if the moved distance is short.
PI-5
[2]
[1]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[1]
When side edge is on rear side
[2]
When side edge is on front side
[3]
Detecting side edge reference position
[4]
Paper
[5]
Center of the paper
[6]
Paper transfer direction
[7]
Punch unit moving direction
[8]
Rear side
[9]
Front side
[10]
Punch blade
[11]
Punch unit
[12]
Center of the punch blade
[13]
[14]
Sensor for paper size
Note
In the model PK-512, the paper size sensor (PS305) is positioned on the front side and its operation is contrary to that in the above
illustration on the right and left sides.
2.3.3 Punch control

(1) Registration loop control
The FNS conveyance motor (M1) turns OFF temporarily to stop conveyance of paper when the paper exit sensor (PS12) of previous device
detects the paper leading edge. Thus the paper is pressed against the entrance roller forming a loop to correct the bend. When the specified
time has passed, M1 turns ON to restart conveying the paper.
The above operation is not performed when conveying a large paper (217 mm and longer in the sub scan direction) and in the non-punching
mode.
When punching the paper conveyed from PI, the loop is formed on the PI's side. For details, refer to PI-502 SHB.
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Previous device
[3]
Loop
[2]
Entrance roller
[4]
PK
(2) Punch control (PK-512)

The FNS conveyance motor (M1) is driven by the main body start signal.
In the punching mode, the motor M1 stops temporarily after the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the rear edge of paper.
At the same time, the punch motor (M301) [3] rotates in the direction according to the number of punched holes. Number of punched holes of
PK-512 is switched between 2 to 4 and 2 to 3 holes depending on the country. The motor M301 drives the slide link in the main scanning
PI-6
direction through the eccentric cam. As a result, the projection of the switching cam is pushed in the slide link moving direction and the
switching cam is rotated around its axis. And then the punching blade [7] lowers to punch a hole. The projection of the punch
blade is fitted into the groove of the switching cam.
Moving distance of the slide link [5] is controlled by detecting the eccentric cam actuator [4] with the punch home sensor (PS301) [1]. When
the actuator rotates 180 degrees, first punching is completed. In the second punching, M301 is reversed. When the actuator reverses 180
degrees, punching is completed. Forward and reverse rotations are repeated alternately.
The rotating speed of M301 is controlled by detecting the rotation of the punch encoder plate [6] fixed to the axis of M301 with the punch
encoder sensor (PS306) [2].
Then, M301 reverses and the punch home sensor (PS301) [1] returns to ON and the M301 stops finally.
When a specified time elapsed after M1 stops temporarily, M1 resumes rotating and paper is transferred.
[1]
[2]
[7]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[8]
[1]
[9]
15kjt2e008na
[1]
[2]
Punch encoder sensor (PS306)
[3]
Punch motor (M301)
[4]
Actuator
[5]
Slide link
[6]
Punch encoder plate
[7]
Punching blade
[8]
Operation of 3-hole punching in the 2 to 3 hole

mode and 4- hole punching in the 2 to 4 hole mode
[9]
Operation of 2-hole punching in the 2 to 3 hole

mode and 2-hole punching in the 2 to 4 hole mode
(a) 2 to 3 holes mode

In the 2 to 3 punched hole mode, the groove of the switching cam of the 3-hole punching blade is shaped so that the rear side is concentric
with the rotating axis and the front side is curved toward the rotating axis. For this reason, when the switching cam is rotated clockwise, the
punching blade is driven downward and when the cam is rotated counterclockwise, the punching blade is not driven. The shape of the
groove of the punching blade for 2 holes is contrary to it on the right and left sides. When the switching cam is rotated counterclockwise, the
punching blade is driven.
(b) 2 to 4 holes mode

In the 2 to 4 holes mode, the 2 punching blades at both ends are driven only when the switching cam is rotated clockwise in the same way
as in the 2 to 3 hole mode. As the 2 punching blades at the center should be driven in both cases of 2 or 4 hole punching, shape of the
groove of the switching cam is symmetrical on the right and left sides and both the front and rear sides are curved in the rotating axis
direction.
(3) Punch control (PK-513)

Transmitting the start signal from the main body, the FNS conveyance motor (M1) rotates.
In the punch mode, M1 stops temporarily a specified period of time after the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the trailing edge of the
paper.
At the same time, the punch motor (M301) [9] drives the shaft [10] to rotate a full circle. The eccentric cams [2] rotate in sync with the shaft to
move down the punch blade [1] to conduct the punch operation. M301 stops and the punch operation is completed when the punch home
sensor (PS301) [3] turns ON.
M1 rotates again to convey the paper a specified period of time after it stops temporarily.
PI-7
[2]
[11]
[1]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[6]
[7]
15kjt2c001na
[1]
Punch blade
[2]
Eccentric cam
[3]
[4]
Punch blade at the lower position
[5]
Drive arm
[6]
Paper
[7]
Punch blade at the upper position
[8]
Front side
[9]
Punch motor (M301)
[10]
Shaft
PI-8
PI THEORY OF OPERATION PK-512/513 > 3. PUNCH SCRAPS

BOX SECTION
3. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION

3.1 Composition
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
15kjt2c007nb
[1]
Punch scraps box full sensor (PS302)
[2]
Punch scraps box
[3]
Front side
[4]
3.2 Drive
The punch scraps box section comprises no moving parts.
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 Punch scraps box control
(1) Punch scraps box full detection
The punch scraps generated by the punch operation falls in the punch scraps box [3]. The punch scraps box full
sensor (PS302) [1] turns ON and transmits the "no punch scraps box" information to the main body when the
punch scraps box becomes full of punch scraps.
(2) Punch scraps box detection

The punch scraps box set sensor (PS304) detects whether the punch scraps box is set or not. PS304 turns
OFF and transmits the "no punch scraps box" information to the main body if the punch scraps box is not set.
PI-9
PJ THEORY OF OPERATION PI-502 > 1. OUTLINE
PJ THEORY OF OPERATION PI-502

1. OUTLINE
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
15jft2c001na
[1]
Pick-up /Up section
[2]
Separation /Up section
[3]
Conveyance section
[4]
Separation /Lw section
[5]
Pick-up /Lw section
[6]
Tray /Lw section
[7]
Tray /Up section
1.2 Paper path

1.2.1 Automatic sheet feed (Online operation)
[1]
[2]
[1]
15jft1c002na
Paper through from the tray /Up
[2]
Paper through from the tray /Lw
1.2.2 Manual sheet feed (Offline operation)
[1]
15jft1c003na
[1]
Paper through from the tray /Lw
PJ -1
PJ THEORY OF OPERATION PI-502 > 2. PAPER FEED SECTION

2.1 Configuration
[10]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[8]
[7]
a04ht2c001ca
[1]
Pick-up roller /Up
[2]
[3]
[4]
Conveyance roller /Up
[5]
[6]
Conveyance roller /Lw
[7]
[8]
Pick-up roller /Lw
[9]
Tray /Lw
[10]
Tray /Up
2.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[14]
[13]
[11]
[12]
[18]
[17]
[15]
[16]
15jft2c002nb
[1]
Pick-up roller /Lw
[2]
Pick-up roller /Up
[3]
[4]
[5]
Conveyance clutch /Up (CL201)
[6]
[7]
Conveyance clutch /Lw (CL202)
[8]
Conveyance roller /Up
[9]
[10]
[11]
Conveyance roller /Lw
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
Pick-up solenoid /Up (SD201), /Lw (SD202)
[16]
Front side
[17]
Pick-up roller /Up, /Lw
[18]
Paper feed roller /Up, /Lw
PJ -2
[3]
[1]
[2]
15jft2c003nb
[1]
Front side
[2]
[3]
2.3 Operation
2.3.1 Tray lift mechanism
The tray lift motors /Up (M201) [2] and /Lw (M202) [7] move up and down the trays /Up and /Lw by rotating in the forward and reverse direction
to drive the lift arms /Up [10] and /Lw [4] and move up and down the lift plates /Up [8] and /Lw [6], respectively.
At the upper limit positions, the tray upper limit sensors /Up (PS205) [1] and /Lw (PS209) [3] detect the actuators lifted up by the lift plates.
At the lower position of the tray, the tray lower limit sensors /Up (PS204) [9] and /Lw (PS210) [5] detect the actuators coupled with the lift arms /
Up and /Lw.
[9]
[8]
[10]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
15jft2c004na
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Lift arm /Lw
[5]
[6]
Tray lift plate /Lw
[7]
[8]
Tray lift plate /Up
[9]
[10]
Lift arm /Up

The pick-up solenoids /Up (SD201) and /Lw (SD202) [2] turn ON to pick up the paper. The release arm [5] held upward by the spring [1] lifts up
the pick-up roller mounting plate [4] to release the pick-up roller [3]. When SD201 and SD202 turn ON, the release arm moves backward, and
then the pick-up roller mounting plate and the pick-up roller fall down by their own weight. The pick-up roller driven by the transfer motor (M203)
presses the paper and picks it up to transfer it to the separation section.
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15jft2c005nb
Spring
[2]
PJ -3
[3]
Pick-up roller
[4]
[5]
Release arm
Pick-up roller mounting plate

The separation roller [4] is driven to rotate in the opposite direction from the paper transfer direction [2]. However, when no paper is conveyed or
only 1 sheet of paper is conveyed, the frictional force generating between the paper feed roller [1]/paper and the separation roller [4] is greater
than the frictional force of the torque limiter [3]. Accordingly, the separation roller [4] rotates in the direction of the paper conveyance [2] to
convey paper to the vertical conveyance section.
When 2 or more sheets of paper are conveyed, the frictional force between these sheets of paper is smaller than the frictional force of the
torque limiter [3] and the separation roller rotates in the reverse direction to prevent the lower most paper from being conveyed.
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
15jft2c006na
[1]
Paper feed roller
[2]
[3]
Torque limiter
[4]
Separation roller
[5]
2nd sheet of paper
[6]
1st sheet of paper
[7]
Pick-up roller
2.3.4 Registration control

Transmitting the FS start signal [1], the transfer motor (M203) rotates in low speed and the pick-up solenoids /Up (SD201) and /Lw (SD202) turn
ON. At the time, the tray lift motors /Up (M201) and /Lw (M202) rotate in the forward direction to lift up the trays /Up and /Lw.
M201 and M202 stop when the tray upper limit sensors /Up (PS205) and /Lw (PS209) turn ON [2], and after a specified period of time, the
transfer clutch /Up (CL201) and /Lw (CL202) turn ON and the paper is picked up from the tray. Only 1 sheet of paper is transferred by the
transfer roller because of the separation roller.
M203 rotates in high speed when the paper reaches the paper passage sensors /Up (PS201) and /Lw (PS206) [3]. At the time, the paper is
pressed against the transfer roller and forms a loop because the registration clutch (CL203) is OFF. After a specified period of time, CL203 turns
ON [4] and M203 drives the paper to FS.
M203 switches to rotate in low speed to feed the subsequent paper since the paper passed PS201/PS206 [5], and then CL203 turns OFF after
Transfer motor
(M203)
Low speed
High speed
Transfer clutch /Lw (CL202)

Tray upper limit sensor
/Lw (PS209)
Pick-up solenoid /Lw
(SD202)
Paper passage sensor
/Lw (PS206)
[1]
[2]
[3] [4] [5]
15jft2e007na
[1]
FS operation start signal ON
[2]
Tray reached at the upper limit
[3]
Paper reached the paper passage sensors /Up (PS201)

and /Lw (PS206)
[4]
Registration clutch (CL203) ON
[5]
Trailing edge of the paper passed the paper passage

sensors /Up (PS201) and /Lw (PS206)

The paper size VRs /Up (VR201) [1] and /Lw (VR202) [3] coupled with the side guide [2] detects the paper size in the main scan direction.
The paper set sensors /Up (PS203) [5] and /Lw (PS212) [4] and the L size sensor /Lw (PS208) [6] detects the paper size in the sub scan
direction.
PJ -4

[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
15jft2c008na
[1]
[2]
Side guide plate
[3]
[4]
Paper set sensor /Lw (PS212)
[5]
Paper set sensor /Up (PS203)
[6]
PJ -5
PK THEORY OF OPERATION LS-505 > 1. OUTLINE
PK THEORY OF OPERATION LS-505

1. OUTLINE
[8]
[9]
[10]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
ls502to1001c
[1]
Conveyance unit
[2]
1st gate
[3]
[4]
Stacker tray
[5]
Hand cart
[6]
Stacker tray conveyance section
[7]
Coupling conveyance section
[8]
Sub tray
[9]
Sub tray conveyance section
[10]
2nd gate
PK -1
PK THEORY OF OPERATION LS-505 > 1. OUTLINE
1.2 Paper path

[3]
[2]
[1]
ls502to1002c
[1]
Stacker tray non-sort/sort mode
[2]
[3]
Sub tray mode
PK -2
Coupling mode
PK THEORY OF OPERATION LS-505 > 2. COUPLING

CONVEYANCE SECTION
2. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION

2.1 Configuration
[1]
[3]
[2]
ls502to2001c
[1]
[2]
[3]
2.2 Drive
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
ls502to2002c
[1]
[2]
Entrance jam release lever
[3]
Coupling jam release lever
[4]
2.3 Operation
2.3.1 Door open/close mechanism
While the LS is in operation, the front door lock solenoid (SD4) locks the front door, thus making it impossible to open and close it. However,
while in the coupling conveyance (coupling mode) or while exiting paper into the sub tray (sub tray mode), the front door can be opened and
closed.
Pressing the paper removing switch on the stacker tray operation board (TOB) brings down the stacker tray. When the stacker tray arm release
sensor (PS15) is turn ON, SD4 turns OFF immediately.
The lock is released due to SD4 being turned off and the front door can be opened and closed.
2.3.2 Jam release lever lock mechanism

The entrance guide plate and the coupling guide plate are provided with a jam release lever to release jams. The entrance conveyance lock
solenoid (SD5) and the coupling conveyance lock solenoid (SD11) operate each of the jam release levers.
ON/OFF timing of SD5 and SD11
Operation timing
ON
(Lock)
When the stacker tray goes up, and while in printing
OFF
While in standing by, when the stacker tray goes down after
(Release) completion of printing, and when the front door is open
(except in coupling mode and in sub tray mode)
PK -3
PK THEORY OF OPERATION LS-505 > 3. ENTRANCE

CONVEYANCE SECTION
3. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION

3.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
ls502to2003c
[1]
[2]
2nd gate
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
1st gate
[7]
[8]
3.2 Drive
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
a0h1t2c002ca
[1]
[2]
Coupling conveyance roller /2
[3]
[4]
[5]
Entrance roller
[6]
1st gate
[7]
[8]
2nd gate
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 Path switching
The path along which paper conveyed to the entrance guide plate is conveyed varies according to the operation mode. The 1st gate and the
2nd gate switch the conveyance path.
PK -4

CONVEYANCE SECTION
(1) 1st gate

The switching of the conveyance path is made between the stacker tray output (stacker tray non-sort mode and stacker tray sort mode) and
the sub tray paper exit (sub tray mode) and the coupling conveyance (coupling mode).
[1]
[3]
[1]
Sub tray mode/coupling mode
[3]
Stacker tray non-sort mode/stacker tray sort mode
[2]
ls502to2005c
[2]
1st gate
(2) 2nd gate

The conveyance path is switched between the sub tray paper exit (sub tray mode) and the coupling conveyance (coupling mode).
[2]
[3]
[1]
ls502to2006c
[1]
Coupling mode
[2]
[3]
2nd gate
PK -5
Sub tray mode

CONVEYANCE SECTION
3.3.2 Conveyance line speed control

The conveyance process speed of the entrance roller and the coupling conveyance rollers 1/ and /2 that are driven by the conveyance motor
(M/2) varies according to the exit line speed of the previous device (main body or post processing machine). These operations are common to
all the modes.
(1) When the exit line speed of the previous device is 1000mm/s
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

Conveyance motor
(M2)
1000mm/s
Low speed
[1]
[2]
1st sheet of paper
[3]
2nd sheet of paper
[4]
3rd sheet of paper
(2) When the exit line speed of the previous device is other than 1000mm/s
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

Conveyance motor 1000mm/s
(M2)
Low speed
[1]
[2]
1st sheet of paper
[3]
2nd sheet of paper
[4]
3rd sheet of paper
3.3.3 Paper cooling mechanism

Paper conveyed to the LS is likely to curl up due to fusing heat.
Heat storage accumulated in paper stacked during continuous printing causes tacking (sheets of paper sticking hard each other by toner) when
toner that has been fused is refused and adheres. So, fresh air is blown on the paper from under the entrance guide plate and above the path
guide of the upper surface of the paper stack section, thus cooling down the paper to correct curling and prevent tacking.
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[1]
ls502to2028c
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
PK -6
PK THEORY OF OPERATION LS-505 > 4. CONVEYANCE

SECTION
4.1 Configuration
[11]
[1]
[12]
[5]
[6]
[13]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[14]
[10]
[7]
[8]
[9]
ls502to2009c
[1]
De-curler roller
[2]
Paddler
[3]
Job partition plate
[4]
Paper empty detection actuator
[5]
Paper press arm /1
[6]
Grip belt
[7]
Paper detection sensor (PS19)
[8]
Guide plate
[9]
Hand cart
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
PK -7

SECTION
4.2 Drive
4.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
a0h1t2c003ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Entrance roller
[4]
[5]
One-way clutch
4.2.2 Stacker tray conveyance drive (M3 reverse)

[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a0h1t2c004ca
[1]
One-way clutch
[2]
[3]
De-curler roller
[4]
Paddler
PK -8

SECTION
4.2.3 Sub tray conveyance drive (M3 forward)

[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a0h1t2c005ca
[1]
One-way clutch
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
4.2.4 Coupling conveyance/grip belt/paper press arm drive

[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a0h1t2c006ca
[1]
Paper press arm /1
[2]
Stacker tray paper empty detection actuator
[3]
Grip belt
[4]
[5]
[6]
Coupling paper exit roller
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
Paper press arm /2
[13]
[14]
[15]
PK -9

SECTION
4.2.5 Stacker tray up down drive

[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
ls501t2c001a
[1]
Wire
[2]
Belt
[3]
[4]
Stacker tray
[5]
Stacker tray up down arm
4.2.6 Shift unit/alignment plate drive

LS drawing as seen from above. On the right-side is the main body.
[5]
[6]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
ls502to2013c
[1]
Guide rail
[2]
Alignment plate
[3]
[4]
Conveyance unit
[5]
[6]
Guide rail
PK -10

SECTION
4.2.7 Rear stopper/job partition plate drive
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Rear stopper
[2]
Job partition plate
[3]
[4]
Job partition solenoid (SD2)
4.2.8 Front stopper/paper press arm drive

[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[4]
[1]
Spring
[2]
[3]
Paper press arm /3
[4]
Spring
[5]
Front stopper
[6]
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Stacker tray conveyance
While in the stacker tray non-sort mode and the stacker tray sort mode, paper is conveyed into the stacker tray.
(1) De-curler
Paper that has passed through the 1st gate is conveyed to the grip belt by the de-curler roller. At this time, the de-curler roller corrects the
curled paper.
(2) Grip conveyance

Paper conveyed by the de-curler roller enters and is help by the grip provided on the grip belt. The paper held by the grip is conveyed to the
section above the stacker tray by the rotation of the grip belt.
2 grips are provided on the grip belt and each one of them conveys paper one after the other. The grip conveyance home sensor (PS5)
controls the position where the grip is waiting for paper from the de-curler roller.
PK -11

SECTION

[5]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
ls502to2016c
[1]
Paper
[2]
De-curler roller
[3]
Grip
[4]
Stacker tray
[5]
Grip
[6]
Grip belt
[7]
(3) Front stopper control

Paper conveyed by the grip strikes against the front stopper equipped to the shift unit and is released from the grip. At this time, the shift unit
has been moved to the position specified in advance for each paper size.
2 types of the front stoppers, more specifically, a movable type and a stationary type, are employed. In stacker tray non-sort mode, only the
movable type front stopper is employed. A distance of 20mm is kept between the position where the movable type front stopper stops and the
position in which the stationary type front stopper is, which is the shift distance.
When stacking tab paper, paper is aligned by either stationary type front stopper or movable type front stopper. Therefore, it is impossible to
shift tab paper for stacking.
For the front stopper solenoid (SD9) that drives the movable type front stopper, a latch-type solenoid is employed that is not required to be
energized to maintain the ON state. However, a latch-type solenoid requires a different control signal for each ON and OFF action.
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[9]
[4]
[10]
[3]
[2]
[1]
ls502to2017c
[1]
[2]
Paper
[3]
Movable type front stopper
[4]
20mm
[5]
Stationary type front stopper
[6]
Grip
[7]
Stacker tray
[8]
Grip belt
[9]
Conveyance unit
[10]
Grip
(a) Stacker tray non-sort mode

Example: A4 4 sheets, 1 set
[1]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[7]

Latch ON
Front stopper signal

solenoid (SD9) Latch OFF
signal
[8]
[2]
[4]
ls502to2018e
[1]
[2]
The conveyance unit starts to move
[3]
1st sheet of paper
[4]
Movable type front stopper ON
[5]
2nd sheet of paper
[6]
3rd sheet of paper
[7]
Last sheet of paper
[8]
Movable type front stopper OFF
PK -12

SECTION
(b) Stacker tray sort mode

Example: A4 2 sheets, 2 sets
[1]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[9]

Latch ON
Front stopper signal

signal
[10]
[2]
[4]
ls502to2019e
[1]
[2]
The conveyance unit starts to move
[3]
Shift of the 1st sheet of paper
[4]
Movable type front stopper ON
[5]
Shift of the 2nd sheet of paper
[6]
Non-shift of the 1st sheet of paper
[7]
Movable type front stopper OFF
[8]
Non-shift of the 2nd sheet of paper
[9]
Movable type front stopper OFF secured
[10]
Movable type front stopper OFF secured
(4) Job partition plate

In stacker tray sort mode, the trailing edge of the shift paper is restricted by the job partition plate and the paper is exited onto the stacker tray
20mm shifted from the non-shift paper. At this time, the upper surface of the non-shift paper does not come to the same level as the lower
edge of the job partition plate and the 1st sheet of the shift paper is in possibility of getting into the lower side of the job partition plate. To
prevent this, the job partition plate is attached to the upper surface of the non-shift paper that has been exited to restrict the entry of the paper.
For the job partition solenoid (SD2) that drives the job partition plate, a latch-type solenoid is employed that is not required to be energized to
maintain the ON state. However, a latch-type solenoid requires a different control signal for each ON and OFF action.
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
ls502to2023c
[1]
[2]
Job partition plate
[3]
Non-shift paper
[4]
Stacker tray
[5]
Shift paper

[1]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[8]

Latch ON
signal
Job partition
Solenoid (SD2) Latch OFF
signal
[9]
ls502to2021e
[1]
[2]
1st sheet of paper
[3]
Job partition plate close
[4]
2nd sheet of paper
[5]
[6]
3rd sheet of paper
[7]
[8]
Last sheet of paper
[9]
PK -13

SECTION

[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
[8]

Latch ON
signal
Job partition
Solenoid (SD2) Latch OFF
signal
[3]
ls502to2022e
[1]
[2]
[3]
Job partition plate open (shift amount: 20mm)
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
(5) Rear stopper control

While in the stacker tray sort mode is in shifting, the rear stopper is left open and this plays as a guide for the trailing edge of paper.
To assist the separation of paper released from the grip, the paddle is rotated at a high speed.
For the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) that drives the rear stopper, a latch-type solenoid is employed that does not need to be energized to
maintain the ON state. However, a latch-type solenoid requires a different control signal for each ON and OFF action.
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
ls502to2020c
[1]
Paddler
[2]
[3]
Rear stopper
[4]
Paper position while in the stacker tray sort mode
[5]
Paper position while in the stacker tray non-sort mode

[1]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[8]

Latch ON
Rear stopper signal

signal
[9]
[1]
[2]
1st sheet of paper
[3]
Rear stopper close
[4]
2nd sheet of paper
[5]
Rear stopper close
[6]
3rd sheet of paper
[7]
Rear stopper close
[8]
Last sheet of paper
[9]
Rear stopper close

PK -14

SECTION

[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[7]

Latch ON
Rear stopper signal

signal
[3]
[6]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Rear stopper open
[4]
[5]
[6]
Rear stopper close
[7]
[8]
Rear stopper close
(6) Paper press arm

The paper that has been released from the grip is pressed one at a time onto the stacker tray by the paper pressure arms /1, /2 and /3 to be
loaded on the stacker tray. However, the operation of the paper pressure arm /2 is limited only to the paper size larger than B4.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

ls502to2025e
[1]
[2]
1st sheet of paper
[3]
2nd sheet of paper
[4]
Last sheet of paper
(7) Alignment plate control

The alignment plate aligns each sheet of paper loaded on the stacker tray.
[1]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[9]

sensor (PS12)
[10] [11]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[8]
ls502to2026e
[1]
[2]
Movement to a position specified for each paper size
[3]
1st sheet of paper
[4]
Alignment of the 1st sheet of paper
[5]
2nd sheet of paper
[6]
Alignment of the 2nd sheet of paper
[7]
3rd sheet of paper
[8]
Alignment of the 3rd sheet of paper
[9]
Last sheet of paper
[10]
Alignment of the last sheet of paper
[11]
(8) Stacker tray up down control

The paper empty sensor (PS6) detects the upper surface of paper loaded on the stacker tray through the paper press arm /3. When PS6 is
turned off by loading exited paper, the stacker tray up down motor (M1) turns on to lower the stacker tray down to the position at which PS6
turns on. The stacker tray is thus held at a fixed height when paper is being exited.
The number of sheets of paper loaded on the stacker tray is detected by the 2,000 sheets stacked sensor (PS13) and the 5,000 sheets
stacked sensor (PS14) provided on the up down path of the stacker tray and displayed on the operation panel. (The main unit makes 3,000
sheets stacked detection.)
When the hand cart once pulled out is put back to its original position, the stacker tray moves up to return to its home position. If the paper
detection sensor (PS19) detects that paper is loaded on the stacker tray, the tray stops moving up in order to prevent the uplifted paper from
damaging the alignment plate.
(9) Hand cart detection mechanism

The hand cart set switch (RS1) detects the set condition of the hand cart. The set condition of the stacker tray is detected by checking to see
if the light from the stacker tray set LED (LED1) gets to the stacker tray set sensor (PS1).
PK -15

SECTION
4.3.2 Coupling conveyance

In coupling mode, paper is conveyed to the device connected to the subsequent stage of the LS through the coupling conveyance section.
(1) Line speed switching

When paper is conveyed from the main body, the conveyance motor (M2) at the entrance conveyance section is rotated at the same speed
as the conveyance speed of the main body. When paper is conveyed to the LS, the speed of rotation of M2 is increased up to 1,000mm/s to
convey paper.
4.3.3 Sub tray conveyance

In sub tray mode, paper is exited into the sub tray.

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

1,000mm/s
Sub tray exit

motor (M3)
Medium speed
Low speed
ls502to2027e
[1]
[2]
1st sheet of paper
[3]
2nd sheet of paper
[4]
Last sheet of paper
(2) Paper full control

When the number of the sheets of paper discharged on the sub-tray gets to 200, the sub tray full sensor (PS9) turns ON to give indication of
"paper full" on the operation panel.
PK -16
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 > 1. OUTLINE
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503

1. OUTLINE
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
fd501to1001c
[1]
PI section
[2]
Conveyance section
[3]
Punch section
[4]
[5]
Main tray section
[6]
Sub tray section
PL -1
1.2 Paper path

(1) Straight mode
[1]
[2]
fd501to1002c
[1]
Paper through from the PI
[2]
PL -2
(2) Sub tray mode
[1]
[2]
fd501to1003c
[1]
[2]
PL -3
(3) Punch mode (L and S sizes)
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
For L size
[4]
For S size
[5]
Paper exit to the main tray, paper through to the next

option
PL -4
(4) Z-Fold mode
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
1st folding
[4]
2nd folding
[5]

option
PL -5
(5) Letter fold-out mode
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1006c
[1]
[2]
[3]
1st folding
[4]
2nd folding
[5]
[6]
Paper exit to the sub tray
PL -6
(6) Tri-Fold-in/double parallel mode
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1007c
[1]
[2]
[3]
1st folding
[4]
2nd folding
[5]
[6]
PL -7
(7) Gate fold mode
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1008c
[1]
[2]
[3]
1st folding
[4]
2nd folding
[5]
3rd folding
[6]
[7]
PL -8
(8) Half-Fold mode
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
fd501to1009c
[1]
[2]
[3]
Folding
[4]

option
[5]
PL -9
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 > 2. CONVEYANCE

SECTION
2.1 Configuration
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
fd501to2001c
[1]
Entrance gate
[2]
Alignment plate /Fr, /Rr
[3]
S size gate
[4]
L size gate
[5]
Sub tray gate
PL -10

SECTION
2.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
fd501to2002c
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
PL -11

SECTION
2.2.2 Gate drive
[18]
[1]
[17]
[16]
[2]
[3]
[15]
[4]
[14]
[5]
[6]
[13]
[7]
[12]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
fd501to2003c
[1]
Entrance gate
[2]
[3]
Vertical conveyance roller /Rt
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
L size gate
[13]
S size gate solenoid (SD3)
[14]
S size gate
[15]
[16]
Sub tray gate
[17]
Sub tray paper exit roller
[18]

[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
fd501to2004c
[1]
[2]
Belt
[3]
Alignment plate /Rr
[4]
Alignment plate /Fr
PL -12

SECTION
2.3 Operation
The conveyance path of the paper that has been conveyed to the entrance guide plate varies according to the presence of a punch or folding,
the tray into which paper is exited, and the paper size. The entrance gate, the sub tray gate, the S size gate, the L size gate and the folding gate
make the switching of the conveyance path. (For details of the folding gate, refer to PL.4. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION)
(1) Entrance gate

The entrance gate solenoid (SD1) switches between the straight conveyance and the punch/folding conveyance by. In the straight mode, the
SD1 remains OFF.
When conveying the 1st sheet of paper for punching/folding operation, SD1 is energized a specified period of time after the start button is
turned ON.
For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper, SD1 is energized in accord with the conveyance direction of the succeeding page after the
preceding page passes through the FD entrance sensor (PS1).
[3]
[1]
[2]
fd501to2005c
[1]
Entrance gate
[2]
[3]
Straight mode
Punch mode or folding mode
(2) Sub tray gate

The sub tray gate solenoid (SD9) switches between the main tray paper exit and the sub tray paper exit. In the mode of the main tray paper
exit, the SD9 remains OFF.
When exiting the 1st sheet of paper into the sub tray, switch the SD9 a specified period of time after the start button is turned ON.
For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper, SD9 is energized in accord with the paper exit direction of the succeeding page after the
preceding page passes through the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13).
[1]
[3]
[2]
fd501to2006c
PL -13

SECTION

[1]
Sub tray gate
[2]
[3]
Sub tray exit
Main tray exit
(3) S size gate

Switching is made according to the paper size and the presence of folding. S size gate solenoid (SD3) makes the drive of the gate. In the
punch mode with no folding and in the case of the S size paper, SD3 remains OFF.
When conducting the folding operation or when feeding the 1st sheet of large-size paper, switch SD3 a specified period of time after the start
button is turned ON.
For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper, switch the sub tray gate solenoid (SD9) in accord with the paper exit direction of the
succeeding page after the preceding page passes through the punch conveyance sensor (PS5).
S size paper: The length in the sub scan direction is 216mm or less.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2007c
[1]
S size gate
[2]
For the folding mode (regardless of the presence of a

punch)
[3]
[4]
For the S size paper with a punch only
(4) L size gate

When folding the paper, the conveyance path is switched back and forth for each paper conveyance to prevent the succeeding paper from
coming into contact with the trailing edge of the L size paper that is in folding process.
L size gate solenoid (SD4) makes the drive of the gate.
L size paper: The length in the sub scan direction is 217mm or more.
PL -14

SECTION
[1]
[2]
fd501to2008c
[1]
L size gate (SD4-OFF position)
[2]
For the control of the L size gate, SD4 stands by at the OFF position (outer path) for the 1st sheet of paper to pass through.
The 1st sheet of paper turns ON SD4 a specified period of time after the punch registration sensor (PS6) turns ON, and makes the switch to
the inner path.
When the 2nd sheet of paper turns ON PS6, SD4 turns OFF after a specified period of time to make the switch to the outer path.
The above operations are repeated for each sheet of paper.
Paper passes
through the L
size gate
Outside
Inside

fd501to2039e
2.3.2 Conveyance line speed control

The conveyance line speed of each conveyance section varies according to the type of paper and paper weight.

The following list shows each of conveyance sections and the range of the conveyance line speed.
Conveyance section
Conveyance line speed
290mm/s to 1000mm/s
section
800mm/s to 1000mm/s
Punch conveyance section
490mm/s to 1000mm/s
Main tray paper exit section
205mm/s to 1000mm/s
Sub tray paper exit section
500mm/s

On paper conveyed to the punching position, the 2 alignment plates make a alignment operation to improve the accuracy of the punch hole
positioning and the folding. The forward and reverse rotation of the alignment motor (M12) drives the alignment plate. The alignment plate home
sensor (PS10) detects its home position.
When the start button is turned ON, M12 rotates in the forward direction to move the alignment plates /Fr and /Rr to the standby position of the
paper size.
When the paper is conveyed to the punch position in a specified number of steps after it passes through the FD entrance sensor (PS1), the
roller solenoid /1 (SD5), the roller solenoid /2 (SD6), the roller solenoid /3 (SD7) and the roller solenoid /4 (SD8) release the pressure of each
roller and M12 conducts the alignment operation.
The roller solenoids that release each of the rollers from pressure are modified according to the size and the direction of paper aligned.
A specified period of time after completion of punching the last paper, M12 rotates in the reverse direction to bring the alignment plate back to
the home position.
PL -15

SECTION

Punch conveyance motor
(M2)
Forward
Alignment
motor (M12)
Reverse
Roller solenoid
(SD5, 6, 7, 8)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
fd501to2040e
[1]
Start button ON
[2]
Move to the standby position
[3]
Alignment operation
[4]
Move to the home position
2.3.4 Gap recovery control

When conveying 2 pages at a time, conduct the gap recovery control after alignment.
Note
The gap recovery control is only for 1200/1200P/1051.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
a0h0t2c005ca
[1]
Vertical conveyance roller /Lt
[2]
Vertical conveyance roller /Rt
[3]
Drive shaft
[4]
[5]
[6]
One-way clutch
(1) Small-size paper

Once the roller solenoid /1 (SD5) turns OFF after the alignment and presses each roller, the punch conveyance motor (M2) [4] rotates in the
reverse.
The drive of the punch conveyance motor (M2) [4] is passed to the vertical conveyance roller /Rt [2] to rotate it in the reverse. At this time, the
vertical conveyance roller /Lt [1] does not rotate in the reverse but keeps stopping since it has the one-way clutch [6]. According to this
operation, only the vertical conveyance roller /Rt [2] side of the overlapped paper is returned to adjust the gap of paper.

Punch conveyForward
ance motor (M2)
Reverse
Alignment motor Forward
(M12)
Reverse
a0h0t2e006ca
(2) Large-size paper

Once the roller solenoid /1 (SD5) turns OFF after the alignment and presses each roller, the punch conveyance motor (M2) [4] rotates in the
reverse.
The drive of the punch conveyance motor (M2) [4] is passed to the vertical conveyance roller /Rt [2] to rotate it in the reverse. At this time, the
vertical conveyance roller /Lt [1] does not rotate in the reverse but keeps stopping since it has the one-way clutch [6]. According to this
operation, only the vertical conveyance roller /Rt [2] side of the overlapped paper is returned to adjust the gap of paper.
At the same time as the punch conveyance motor (M2) [4] stops, the roller solenoids /2 and /3 (SD6/SD7) turn OFF and press each roller.
PL -16

SECTION

Punch conveyForward
ance motor (M2)
Reverse
Alignment motor Forward
(M12)
Reverse
Roller solenoids
/2 and /3 (SD6, SD7)
Punch registration
sensor (PS6)
a0h0t2e007ca
PL -17
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 > 3. PUNCH SECTION
3. PUNCH SECTION
3.1 Configuration
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
Punch hole switching mechanism
[2]
[3]
Punch rear claw
Punch scraps box
3.2 Drive
3.2.1 Rear registration drive
(1) Rear registration drive
[1]
[3]
[2]
fd501to2010c
[1]
[2]
[3]
Punch rear claw
PL -18
Paper
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 > 3. PUNCH SECTION
3.2.2 Punch drive

[8]
[9]
[10]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
a0h0t2c001ca
[1]
Rotation when punching 3 holes (as seen from the front)
[2]
Rotation when punching 2 holes (as seen from the front)
[3]
Punch motor (M10)
[4]
2-hole punch edge
[5]
One-way clutch (2-hole punch)
[6]
Eccentric cam
[7]
[8]
3-hole punch edge
[9]
Eccentric cam
[10]
One-way clutch (3-hole punch)
3.3 Operation
(1) Punch control
The punch registration motor (M13) drives the punch rear claw to hold down the trailing edge of paper, and the punch motor (M10) drives the
eccentric cam for punching.
After alignment operations, the roller solenoids /1 to /4 are turned ON to let paper be placed in the unfixed condition. The paper, however, is
held by the curvature of the conveyance section. Then, the punch registration motor (M13) rotates a specified number of steps and the punch
rear claw holds the trailing edge of paper to move it to the punching position. After a specified period of time, the punch motor (M10) drives for
punching. After completion of punching, M13 returns the punch rear claw to the home position. The position of the home position is detected
by the punch registration home sensor (PS11).
(2) Punch hole switching control

The punch hole is switched according to the rotational direction of the punch motor (M10).
For 2-hole, M10 rotates counterclockwise to drive the 2-hole punch edge. For 3-hole, M10 rotates clockwise to drive the 3-hole punch edge.
The 2-hole punch home sensor (PS8) detects the position of the 2-hole punch edge, and the 3-hole/4-hole punch home sensor (PS9) detects
the position of the 3-hole punch edge.
(3) Punch-hole scraps box control

The punch scraps box set sensor (PS12) detects the setting of the punch scraps box, and the punch scraps full sensor (PS26) detects the full
condition of the punch scraps box.
PL -19
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 > 4. FOLDING

CONVEYANCE SECTION
4. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION

4.1 Configuration
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
fd501to2012c
[1]
1st folding mechanism
[2]
Registration roller
[3]
Folding gate
[4]
2nd folding mechanism
[5]
3rd folding mechanism
4.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
M6
M5
[4]
[3]
M4
fd501to2013c
[1]
Coupling
[2]
The pulley operates as an idler due to the bearing
[3]
Folding gate
[4]
PL -20

CONVEYANCE SECTION
4.2.2 Folding drive
[1]
M16
[2]
[3]
M15
[4]
[5]
M14
[6]
fd501to2014c
[1]
3rd folding roller /1 mounting board
[2]
3rd folding guide
[3]
2nd folding roller /1 mounting board
[4]
2nd folding guide
[5]
1st folding roller /1 mounting plate
[6]
1st folding guide
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Registration control
The paper that has passes through the punch registration sensor (PS6) and arrives at the folding conveyance section is pressed against the
registration roller to make adjustments for skew. A specified period of time after the PS6 turns ON, the 1st folding motor (M4) resumes the
conveyance of paper. When no folding operation is made, no registration control is made.
However, no folding is made on the paper that has entered the folding conveyance section from the folding entrance sensor side. The paper is
conveyed vertically as is and exited to the main tray or the sub tray.
[3]
[1]
[2]
fd501to2015c
[1]
[2]
PL -21
Registration roller

CONVEYANCE SECTION

[3]

The folding gate solenoid (SD15) switches the conveyance path between the 2nd folding and the 3rd folding.
Except for the Z-Fold mode, a specified period of time after the 1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51) turns ON, SD15 turns ON to convey the
paper to the 2nd folding after the 1st folding. In the Z-Fold mode, SD15 remains OFF and the paper is conveyed to the 3rd folding after the 1st
folding.
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501to2016c
[1]
Except for the Z-Fold mode
[2]
[3]
In the Z-Fold mode
Folding gate
It shows the time chart of the 1st folding roller /1, but the other folding rollers are controlled as well.
Punch registration
sensor (PS6)
1st folding conveyance
sensor (PS51)
Convey1st folding roller /1 ance
Folding
1st folding release
motor (M14)
[1]
[1]
[2]
Change of the 1st folding roller /1 to the folding position
fd501to2041e
[2]
Change of the 1st folding roller /1 to the conveyance

position
4.3.3 1st folding control

(1) Conveyance/folding switching control
The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 1st folding roller /1. The 1st folding release motor (M14) drives the
eccentric cam for this switching.
After the 1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51) turns ON, the paper is conveyed by a specified number of steps. While the paper is being
conveyed, the 1st folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] rotate in the same direction since these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the
idle gear [2].
After conveying the paper by the prescribed number of steps, M14 rotates until it gets to a specified number of steps. It rotates the eccentric
cam [5] to allow the idle gear arm [3] to separate the idle gear [2] from the 1st folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4]. At the same time, when
M14 starts up, the cam provided on the inside of the 1st roller gear /2 [4] rotates to allow the 1st roller /1 and 1st roller /2 to contact each other
closely to rotate 1st roller /1. get the gears engaged.
The phases of the 1st folding roller gears /1 [1] and the 1st folding roller gears /2 [3] are not aligned in the depth direction. Therefore, they do
not engage with each other the idle gear [2] has been separated.
PL -22

CONVEYANCE SECTION

[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
fd501to2017c
[1]
1st folding roller gear /1
[2]
Idle gear
[3]
Idle gear arm
[4]
1st folding roller gear /2
[5]
Eccentric cam
[6]
Seen from the FD side
In parallel with this, when the 1st folding release motor (M14) starts up, the winding-up of the wire that pulls the folding guide [2] to the right
side is loosened to allow the folding guide [2] to push out the paper in the clearance between the 1st folding rollers /1 [1] and /2 [3]. As a
result, the paper gets caught in the rollers to be folded.
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2018c
[1]
1st folding roller /1
[2]
[3]
1st folding roller /2
Folding guide
4.3.4 2nd folding control

The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 2nd folding roller /1. The 2nd folding release motor (M15) drives the
After the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) turns ON, the paper is conveyed by a specified number of steps. While the paper is being
conveyed, the 2nd folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] rotate in the same direction since these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the
idle gear [2].
cam [5] to allow the idle gear arm [3] to separate the idle gear [2] from the 2nd folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4]. At the same time, when
M14 starts up, the cam provided on the inside of the 2nd roller gear /2 [4] rotates to allow the 2nd roller /1 [1] and 2nd roller /2 to contact each
other closely to rotate the 2nd roller /1.
The phases of the 2nd folding roller gears /1 [1] and the 2nd folding roller gears /2 [3] are not aligned in the depth direction. Therefore, they do
PL -23

CONVEYANCE SECTION
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
fd501to2019c
[1]
2nd folding roller gear /1
[2]
Idle gear
[3]
Idle gear arm
[4]
2nd folding roller gear /2
[5]
Eccentric cam
[6]
In parallel with this, when the 2nd folding release motor (M15) starts up, the winding-up of the wire that pulls the folding guide [2] to the right
side is loosened to allow the folding guide [2] to push out the paper in the clearance between the 2nd folding rollers /1 [1] and /2 [3]. As a
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2020c
[1]
2nd folding roller /1
[2]
Folding guide
[3]
2nd folding roller /2
[4]
Direction of paper exit
(2) Gate fold assist control

In the Gate fold mode, the 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) turns ON a specified period of time after the 1st folding motor (M4) starts folding.
When SD18 starts up, the 2nd roller is pressed firmly. This is a measure taken to avoid a multiple fold that is apt to occur at the folding section
of paper when the 2nd folding is made.
PL -24

CONVEYANCE SECTION
fd501to2021c
4.3.5 3rd folding control

The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 3rd folding roller /1. The 3rd folding release motor (M16) drives the
After the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) turns ON, the paper is conveyed by a specified number of steps. While the paper is being
conveyed, the 3rd folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] rotate in the same direction since these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the
idle gear [2].
cam [5] to allow the idle gear arm [3] to separate the idle gear [2] from the 3rd folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4]. At the same time, when
M16 starts up, the cam provided on the inside of the 3rd roller gear /2 [4] rotates to allow the 3rd roller /1 [1] and 3rd roller /2 to contact each
other closely to rotate the 3rd roller /1.
The phases of the 3rd folding roller gears /1 [1] and the 3rd folding roller gears /2 [4] are not aligned in the depth direction. Therefore, they do
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
fd501to2022c
[1]
3rd folding roller gear /1
[2]
Idle gear
[3]
Idle gear arm
[4]
3rd folding roller gear /2
[5]
Eccentric cam
[6]
In parallel with this, when the 3rd folding release motor (M16) starts up, the winding-up of the wire that pulls the folding guide [2] to the left
side is loosened to allow the folding guide [2] to push out the paper in the clearance between the 3rd folding rollers /1 [1] and /2 [3]. As a
PL -25

CONVEYANCE SECTION
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
fd501to2023
[1]
3rd folding roller /1
[2]
Folding guide
[3]
3rd folding roller /2
[4]
Direction of paper exit
PL -26
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 > 5. MAIN TRAY SECTION

5.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
fd501to2035c
[1]
Main tray
[2]
[3]
[4]
Main tray folding paper full sensor (PS7)
[5]
PL -27
5.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2036c
[1]
Main tray
[2]
[3]
Up/down wire
5.3 Operation
5.3.1 Main tray up/down control
The up/down operation of the main tray is controlled by rotating the tray up/down motor (M11) in the normal or reverse direction.
(1) Main tray paper detection

A specified period of time after the main tray paper exit sensor (PS18) turns ON, M11 starts up to bring down the main tray until the main tray
upper limit sensor (PS20) turns OFF, and then bring it up again until PS20 turns ON.
After the paper is exited, PS20 maintains the distance between the upper surface of the paper exited in the main tray (the surface of the main
tray when no paper exited) and the paper exit opening at a fixed distance to prevent the paper exited from having an uneven edge.
(2) Switching the operation of the main tray

The main tray is set so that it normally does not operate.
When letting the main tray operate, insert the short connector [2] into the CN90 [1].
CAUTION
Letting the main tray operate with the next option connected has a risk of damaging the machine. Be sure not to connect the
short connector.
PL -28
[2]
[1]
fd501to2037c
PL -29
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 > 6. SUB TRAY SECTION
6. SUB TRAY SECTION

6.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
a0h0t2c002ca
[1]
[2]
6.2 Drive
[1]
[3]
M3
[2]
a0h0t2c003ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Sub tray paper exit roller (driven)
Sub tray paper exit roller (drive)
6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Sub tray full-status detection control
The plate of the sub tray (with folding tray) has lift structure, so it moves down with its left edge as the axis of the movement when the paper is
exited to the sub tray. When paper that has been exited into the sub tray gets to the specified thickness, the sub tray paper full sensor (PS17)
[2] turns ON to send the "sub tray paper full" information to the main body. Then, the main body displays the message on its operation panel.
When the folded paper on the sub tray is unfolded and the sub tray paper full sensor (PS46) [1] turns ON, the "sub tray paper full" information is
also sent to the main body.
PL -30
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 > 6. SUB TRAY SECTION
[1]
[2]
a0h0t2c004ca
[1]
[2]
6.3.2 Line speed switching

Paper conveyed by the intermediate conveyance motor (M3) is decelerated for each sheet of paper to be exited into the sub tray.
Sub tray paper exit
sensor (PS16)
Intermediate
conveyance
Hi-speed
Deceleration
[1]
[1]
Deceleration of the intermediate conveyance motor (M3)
fd501to2042e
PL -31
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 > 7. PI SECTION
7. PI SECTION
7.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
fd501to2027c
[1]
Paper pick-up mechanism
[2]
Manual operation
[3]
Paper separation mechanism
[4]
Paper set sensor
[5]
Paper size VR (main scan direction)
[6]
Paper size sensor (sub scan direction)
[7]
Lift plate
[8]
Multi-feed sensor
7.2 Drive
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501to2028c
[1]
[2]
[3]
PI lift plate /Lw
[4]
PI lift plate /Up
PL -32

[10]
[11]
[1]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to2029c
[1]
[2]
PI registration clutch /Up (CL1)
[3]
PI registration clutch /Lw (CL2)
[4]
[5]
Rotational direction of separation roller /Lw
[6]
[7]
Pick-up roller /Lw
[8]
[9]
Rotational direction of separation roller /Up
[10]
Pick-up roller /Up
[11]
7.2.3 Pick-up drive

[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
fd501to2030c
[1]
Spring
[2]
Direction of the spring load
[3]
Release arm
[4]
PI pick-up solenoid /Up (SD13), /Lw (SD14)
[5]
7.3 Operation
For the size detection of a paper, there are the following 2 directions for each of the tray /Up and the tray /Lw: that is, the main scan direction
and the sub scan direction.
The following 3 sensors: PI maximum size sensors /Up (PS47) and /Lw (PS48) [1], L size sensors /Up (PS35) and /Lw (PS41) [2] and S size
sensors /Up (PS36) and /Lw (PS42) [3], detect the size in the sub scan when the PI paper set sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw (PS45) [6] turn ON.
When the PS44 and PS45 are OFF, the tray is judged "paper empty."
The paper size VR /Up (VR31) and /Lw (VR32) [4] which are interlocked with the paper regulation plate [5] detect the size in the main scan.
PL -33

[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
fd501to2031c
[1]
PI maximum size sensor /Up (PS47), /Lw (PS48)
[2]
L size sensor /Up (PS35), /Lw (PS41)
[3]
S size sensor /Up (PS36), /Lw (PS42)
[4]
Paper size VR /Up (VR31), /Lw (VR32)
[5]
Paper regulation plate
[6]
PI paper set sensor /Up (PS44), /Lw (PS45)

For the up/down of the tray, when the paper lift motors /Up (M8) [1] and /Lw (M9) [7] rotate in the normal and reverse directions, the lift arms /Up
[11] and /Lw [9] start up to bring up and down the PI lift plates /Up [12] and /Lw [10]. The PI lift plate home sensors /Up (PS34) [2] and /Lw
(PS40) [8] detect the lower limit position. The PI upper limit sensors /Up (PS32) [4] and /Lw (PS38) [6] detect the upper limit position at the
position to which the actuators /Up [3] and /Lw [5] are pushed up by the PI lift plate.
When the PI paper set sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw (PS45) are ON with the main body start button ON, M8 and M9 turn ON to bring up the PI
lift plate. When PS32 and PS38 turn ON, M8 and M9 stop.
While in the copy/print operation, when PS32 and PS38 turn OFF from ON, M8 and M9 turn ON again to bring up the plate until PS32 and PS38
turn ON.
When PS44 and PS45 turn OFF with no paper left, M8 and M9 make a reverse rotation to move down the PI lift plate until PS34 and PS40 turn
ON.
[1]
[12]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[5]
[10]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[7]
fd501to2032c
[1]
[2]
[3]
Actuator /Up
[4]
[5]
Actuator /Lw
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Lift arm /Lw
[10]
PI lift plate /Lw
[11]
Lift arm /Up
[12]
PI lift plate /Up

The picking-up of the paper [6] is made when the PI pick-up solenoids /Up (SD13) and /Lw (SD14) [5] turn ON. The release arm that is pressed
down by the spring [1] in the direction of [2] presses down the paper feed arm [4] to place the pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw [7] in the release
PL -34
condition. When SD13 and SD14 [5] turn ON, the release arm is released upward and the pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw [7] go down by their own
weight. The pick-up roller that is rotated by the PI conveyance motor (M7) presses down the paper to pick it up.
[6]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
fd501to2033c
[1]
Spring
[2]
Direction of the spring load
[3]
Release arm
[4]
Paper feed arm
[5]
PI pick-up solenoid /Up (SD13), /Lw (SD14)
[6]
Paper
[7]
Paper feed arm retaining lever [1] is provided in the pick-up roller section to prevent multi-feed. By moving the paper feed arm retaining levers
[1] on the front and back to inside, the pick-up rollers on the front and back are secured while the roller in the middle presses against paper.
Multi-feed is prevented by reducing the pressure against paper when feeding papers.
[1]
[2]
fd501to2044c

The separation roller [4] is driven in the direction opposite to the paper conveyance [2]. However, when no paper is conveyed or only 1 sheet of
paper is conveyed, the frictional force generating between the paper feed roller [1] and the separation roller [4] or the paper and the separation
roller is greater than the frictional force of the torque limiter [3]. Accordingly, the separation roller [4] rotates in the direction of the paper
conveyance [2] to convey paper to the vertical conveyance section.
When 2 or more sheets of paper are conveyed, the frictional force between these sheets of paper is smaller than the frictional force of the
torque limiter [3] and the separation roller [4] rotates in the reverse direction to prevent the lower most paper from being conveyed.
When the PI registration clutches /Up (CL1) and /Lw (CL2) turn ON according to the PI paper feed demand signal, the paper feed roller [1], the
separation roller [4] and the pick-up roller [7] rotate to convey the paper one at a time.
[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
fd501to2034c
[1]
Paper feed roller /Up, /Lw
[2]
[3]
Torque limiter
[4]
Separation roller /Up, /Lw
[5]
2nd sheet of paper
[6]
1st sheet of paper
[7]
PL -35
7.3.5 Multi feed detection control

To detect a multi-feed while in the PI paper feed, the PI conveyance path is provided with the multi-feed sensor.
The multi-feed sensor is an ultrasonic sensor made up of a pair of a sender and a receiver. This sensor receives ultrasonic waves sent from the
multi-feed detection board /1 (MFDB1) [1] by the multi-feed detection board /2 (MFDB2) [2].
Based on the difference in the amount of ultrasonic waves received when a single sheet of paper [1] and the plural sheets of paper [4] pass
through between the sender and the receiver, a check is made to see if paper has been multi-fed or not.
The multi-feed detection function turns ON (operates) when the LED on the lower side is turned on by the multi-feed detection function selection
button on the FD operation board (FDOB) and when no selection is made. It turns OFF (does not operate) when the LED on the upper side is
turned on.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
fd501to2038c
[1]
[2]
[3]
1 sheet of paper
[4]
More than 1 sheet of paper
[5]
Layer of air

The PI empty sensors /Up (PS33) and /Lw (PS39) detect the presence of paper in the tray section while in the print stop.
PI set sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw (PS45) detect the paper empty while in the print to stop the paper feed from the trays /1 to /5 when PS44
and PS45 detect the trailing edge of the last paper.
PL -36
PM THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506 > 1. OUTLINE
PM THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506

1. OUTLINE
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
15ant1c001na
[1]
Folding section
[2]
Right angle conveyance section
[3]
Bundle processing section
[4]
Left-side view
[5]
Trimmer section
[6]
Saddle stitching section
[7]
Horizontal conveyance section
PM -1
1.2 Paper path

(1) Coupling exit/subtray exit mode
[3]
[2]
[1]
15ant1c002na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Coupling exit
Sub tray exit
(2) Overlap tri-folding mode
[1]
[4] [5]
[7]
[6]
[8]
[3]
[2]
[10]
[9]
15ant1c003na
[1]
Stack to the angle conveyance section
[2]
[3]
Conveyance to the folding section
[4]
1st folding
[5]
2nd folding
[6]
Paper exit
[7]
Stack movement of the paper exit
[8]
Front side view
PM -2

[9]
Top side view
[10]
Right-side view
(3) Center folding/saddle stitching mode

(a) From the paper exit from the main body to the center folding
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[8]
[7]
15ant1c004na
[1]
Stack to the angle conveyance section
[2]
[3]
Conveyance to the folding section
[4]
Center folding (1st folding)
[5]
Release from the folding roller
[6]
Front side view
[7]
Top side view
[8]
Right-side view
PM -3
(b) From the center folding to the paper exit

[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[8]
15ant1c005na
[1]
Conveyance from the folding section to the saddle

stitching section
[2]
Movement by the bundle arm
[3]
Movement by the clip
[4]
Conveyance to the trimmer section (only for saddle

stitching mode)
[5]
Paper exit
[6]
Stack movement of the paper exit
[7]
Front side view
[8]
Left-side view
PM -4
PM THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506 > 2. HORIZONTAL

CONVEYANCE SECTION
2. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION

2.1 Configuration
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
15ant2c001nb
[1]
Sub tray
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Entrance conveyance
[6]
Entrance gate
2.2 Drive
2.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c002nb
[1]
Entrance roller
[2]
[3]
Overlap assist roller
[4]
Front side view
[5]
Conveyance roller
2.2.2 Horizontal conveyance drive

[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[1]
15ant2c003na
[1]
Front side view
[2]
Exit roller
[3]
Conveyance roller
[4]
PM -5

CONVEYANCE SECTION

[5]
2.2.3 Gate drive/sub tray pressure release drive

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
15ant2c004na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Horizontal conveyance gate solenoid (SD3)
[4]
[5]
[6]
Entrance gate
2.3 Operation
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching control
(1) Entrance gate solenoid control
The entrance gate switches the path to the horizontal conveyance section and one to the right angle conveyance section. The entrance gate
solenoid (SD1) switches them. The right angle conveyance path is selected when SD1 turns OFF and the horizontal conveyance path is
selected when it turns ON.
In the coupling exit mode and the sub tray exit mode, SD1 turns ON and sets the entrance gate to the horizontal conveyance section when
the main body print signal turns ON. SD1 turns OFF after the paper exit.
(2) Horizontal conveyance gate control

The horizontal conveyance gate switches the path to the sub tray section and the coupling conveyance path to the succeeding device. The
horizontal conveyance gate solenoid (SD3) switches them. The coupling conveyance path is selected when SD3 turns OFF and the sub tray
path is selected when it turns ON.
2.3.2 Conveyance line speed switch control

The entrance conveyance motor (M1) and the horizontal conveyance motor (M2) convey them.
M1 and M2 turn ON when the main body start signal [1] turns ON. M1 switches its rotational speed in accordance with the main body line speed
[2] when the main body paper exit sensor turns ON [3]*1. Then it switches its rotational speed to high speed [4] to convey the paper when it
receives the paper trailing edge signal (when the paper trailing edge passes through the fusing).
*1 C6501/C6501P only. For C8000/1200/1200P/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, the speed is not switched.
[2]
Paper exit sensor
High
Entrance
speed
conveyance
motor
Low
(M1)
speed
motor (M2)
[1]
[1]
[3]
[4]
15ant2e005na
Main body print signal
[2]
PM -6
Main body exit sensor ON

CONVEYANCE SECTION

[3]
M1 switching to low speed
[4]
Main body paper trailing edge signal

When exiting the paper to the sub tray, the paper misalignment is prevented by releasing the nipping of the sub tray exit roller by the roller
release solenoid /4 (SD4) to nip the paper only at the trailing edge and slowing down the paper by the sub tray exit roller that is rotating in low
speed for every paper. The horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS2) [1] and the sub tray exit sensor (PS11) [2] detect the paper exited to the sub
tray.
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
15ant2c006na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Roller release solenoid (SD4)
[4]
The roller release solenoid /4 (SD4) turns ON [2] to release the nipping of the sub tray exit roller [3] after a specified period of time since the
horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS2) detects the leading edge of paper [1]. SD4 turns OFF [5] and the subtray exit roller nips the trailing edge
of paper [6] after a specified period of time since PS2 detects the trailing edge of paper [4]. This control is conducted for every paper exited to
the sub tray.
[4]
sensor /1 (PS2)
(SD4)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5] [6]
15ant2e007na
[1]
Detection of the leading edge of paper
[2]
SD4 ON
[3]
Releasing nip
[4]
Detection of the trailing edge of paper
[5]
SD4 OFF
[6]
Nipping the trailing edge of paper
2.3.4 Sub tray paper full detection control

The sub tray paper full sensor (PS12) detects the sub tray paper full via the actuator.
PS12 turns ON under normal circumstances. The sub tray paper full condition is detected and the sub tray paper full signal is transmitted to the
main body when stacked paper presses the actuator and PS12 turns OFF. Then, the main body displays the message on its operation panel.
PM -7
PM THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506 > 3. RIGHT ANGLE

CONVEYANCE SECTION
3. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION

3.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[8]
15ant2c008nb
[1]
[2]
Alignment claws
[3]
Alignment section
[4]
[5]
[6]
Overlap section
[7]
Overlap stopper
[8]
Right angle conveyance roller /3 (driven)
[9]
Right angle conveyance roller /1 (driven)
3.2 Drive
3.2.1 Right angle conveyance drive/alignment drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[4]
[5]
15ant2c009na
[1]
Alignment claws
[2]
Torque limiter
[3]
[4]
[5]
Top side view
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
PM -8

CONVEYANCE SECTION
3.2.2 Overlap drive

[7]
[8]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c010nb
[1]
Overlap stopper
[2]
Overlap motor (M13)
[3]
Right-side view
[4]
[5]
Front side view
[6]
[7]
[8]
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 Paper overlap control
(1) Overlap mechanism
When the folding operation is conducted for more than 1 sheet of paper, they are overlapped in the right angle conveyance section, and then
conveyed to the folding section.
The overlap mechanism is the mechanism to overlap the paper in adequate paper conveyance order. The right angle conveyance gate [1]
driven by the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) [7] and the overlap stopper [5] driven by the overlap motor (M13) [3] conduct the
operation. The overlap home sensor (PS17) [4] detects the home position of the overlap stopper.
The overlap stopper [5] is positioned at the position where the trailing edge of paper [2] is positioned 20mm under from the right angle
conveyance gate [1] in accordance with the paper size when it stands by for the paper.
The paper from the main body is conveyed into between the right-angle conveyance gate [1] and the overlap assist roller [8]. Then the paper
is conveyed further by the overlap assist roller [8] driven by the entrance conveyance motor (M1) and stopped by the overlap stopper.
PM -9

CONVEYANCE SECTION
[1]
[2]
[7]
[8]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
15ant2c011nb
[1]
[2]
Position of the trailing edge of paper
[3]
Overlap motor (M13)
[4]
[5]
Overlap stopper
[6]
Front side view
[7]
[8]
The first stacked sheet of paper [5] is conveyed while the overlap stopper is located at the standby position [4].
Before conveying the second paper, right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) turns ON to move the right angle conveyance gate [6] to the
right [7]. At the time, overlap motor (M13) moves the overlap stopper 30mm upward [3]. It transfers the stacked paper to the left-side of the
right angle conveyance gate. The right angle conveyance gate is replaced [9] to clear the conveyance path. The subsequent paper [8] passes
the right-side of the right angle conveyance gate and the paper is overlapped in adequate order. Then, M13 moves the overlap stopper
downward [1].
The same as the second sheet is conducted until all of sheets are stacked.
[7]
[8]
[9]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
15ant2c012nb
[1]
Overlap stopper descending 30mm down
[2]
Front side view
[3]
Overlap stopper moving 30mm upward
[4]
Standby position of the overlap stopper
[5]
1st paper
[6]
PM -10

CONVEYANCE SECTION

[7]
Movement of the right angle conveyance gate
[8]
[9]
Replacement of the right angle conveyance gate
2nd paper
(2) Overlap control

(a) Overlap tri-folding mode control
In the overlap tri-folding mode, up to 5 sheets are stacked in the right angle conveyance section and conveyed to the folding section. The
overlap tri-folding is available only with paper of 50g/m2 to 91g/m2 in weight and is unavailable with others.
The overlap motor (M13) turns ON when the main body start signal [1] turns ON and moves the overlap stopper upward to its standby
position.
Turning ON the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) [3] after a specified period of time since the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the
trailing edge of the paper, the right angle conveyance gate is switched, M13 moves the paper upward [4], and isolate the paper from the
conveyance gate by transferring it to the left-side of the right angle conveyance gate. Turning OFF SD2 [5], the conveyance gate opens and
waits for the subsequent paper.
Conveying the subsequent paper through the right-side of the right angle conveyance gate [6] and detecting the trailing edge of paper by
the entrance sensor (PS1) [7], M13 descends the overlap stopper down [8]. When the trailing edge of paper passes under the right angle
conveyance gate, SD2 turns ON [9] to switch the right angle conveyance gate and M13 moves up the overlap stopper [10] to send the
conveyed sheets of paper to the left-side of the right angle conveyance gate. Then, SD2 turns OFF [11] and stands by for the subsequent
paper.
The overlap stopper moves down to the standby position and stands by for the 1st paper of the subsequent set [12] after a specified period
of time since PS1 detects the trailing edge of last paper of the set.
[4]
[7] [10]

Overlap motor
(M13)
Up
Down

gate solenoid (SD2)
[12]
[1] [2]
[3] [5]
[6] [8] [9] [11]
15ant2e074na
[1]
[2]
Movement to the standby position
[3]
Switching the right conveyance gate
[4]
Separating paper
[5]
Securing conveyance path
[6]
Conveyance of the subsequent paper
[7]
Trailing edge of the subsequent paper detected
[8]
Descent of paper
[9]
Switching the right conveyance gate
[10]
Separating paper
[11]
Securing conveyance path
[12]
(b) Center folding/saddle stitching mode control

In the center folding/saddle stitching mode, 1, 2, or 3 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section. The number of the
stacked sheets is different depending on its paper weight and the conveyance pattern.
Plain paper (less than 131g/m2): up to 3 sheets are stacked and conveyed to the folding section.
Thick paper (131g/m2 or more): due to the limit of the folding performance, up to 2 sheets are stacked and conveyed to the folding section.
Plain paper
The first 3 sheets of paper of the set are stacked before being conveyed to the folding section. After that, 2 sheets of paper are stacked
before being conveyed to the folding section. The number of sheets conveyed together at the last conveyance for that set is one of the
followings; 3 sheets (when the total number of sheets is 6 or more even number), 2 sheets (when the total number of sheets is odd) or
1 sheet (when the total number of sheets is 4).
Thick paper
Up to 2 sheets of paper can be stacked for the thick paper.
For every set, 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section at first. Similarly, 2 sheets of paper are stacked and
conveyed to the folding section for the subsequent sheets. At the final conveyance, 2 sheets are conveyed (if the total number of the
paper is even) or 1 sheet is conveyed (if the number is odd).
Using PI function
The same as the thick paper control is conducted because the paper type information cannot be obtained in the print job using PI.

(1) Alignment mechanism
The alignment is conducted by driving the alignment claws [2] by the right angle conveyance motor (M6) [5] through the belt [3] and the torque
limiter [4].
The alignment claws move to the rear of the shelter direction [7] and stops at the mechanical stoppers [1] through the torque limiter when M6
is rotating toward the paper conveyance direction. Rotating M6 in the reverse direction, the alignment claws push the edge of paper to
conduct the alignment [6].
PM -11

CONVEYANCE SECTION

[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
15ant2c013na
[1]
Mechanical stoppers
[2]
Alignment claws
[3]
Belt
[4]
Torque limiter
[5]
[6]
Aligning direction
[7]
Shelter direction
(2) Alignment control

The right angle conveyance motor (M6) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON and the alignment claws
move to the standby position [2] in accordance with the paper size.
No alignment operation is conducted for the 1st paper. M6 rotates in the reverse direction to align paper with the alignment claws [3] after a
specified period of time since the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of 2nd paper. Then, M6 rotates in the forward direction to
replace the alignment claws to the standby position [4].
M6 rotates to convey the paper to the folding section [6] and evacuate the alignment claws to the home position after a specified period of
time after the alignment operation [5] for the last paper of the set. After a specified period of time after the right angle conveyance sensor /2
(PS6) detects the leading edge of paper, M6 rotates in the reverse direction to move the alignment claws to the standby position [7] for the
subsequent copy.
[7]
Right angle
Forward
conveyance
motor
Reverse
(M6)
sensor /2 (PS6)
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
15ant2e075na
[1]
[2]
Standby position movement
[3]
Alignment operation
[4]
Return to the standby position
[5]
Alignment operation
[6]
Paper conveyance to the folding section
[7]
Return to the standby position
3.3.3 Right angle conveyance control

(1) Right angle conveyance mechanism
In the right angle conveyance, the right angle conveyance motor (M6) and the roller release solenoids /1 (SD5) [5] and /2 (SD6) [10] convey
the paper.
When conveying the paper to the overlap section, the paper falls vertically [6] to the overlap stopper [7] by its own weight after conveyed by
the overlap assist roller. At the time, the press by the right angle conveyance roller /1 [3] is released by default since the conveyance direction
is not the rotational direction of the right angle conveyance roller /1 [3] but the axial direction of the right angle conveyance roller /1.
After stacking and aligning the specified number of papers, the roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) [5] turns ON to nip the paper and convey the
paper to the position rotated 90 degrees from the right side to the front side [8]. The roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) [14] is OFF to release the
pressure of the folding entrance roller by default since the upper edge of the paper [1] passes over the folding entrance roller [13].
When conveying the paper from the right angle conveyance section to the folding section [12], the roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) [10] turns
ON to release the pressure of the right angle conveyance roller /4 [9] and convey the paper to the folding section by nipping the paper with the
folding entrance roller [13].
PM -12

CONVEYANCE SECTION

[14]
[1]
[2]
[13]
[3]
[12]
[4]
[11]
[10]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[8]
[7]
15ant2c014na
[1]
Upper edge of the paper path
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Paper conveyance to the overlap section
[7]
Overlap stopper
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
Paper conveyance to the folding section
[13]
Folding entrance roller
[14]
(2) Conveyance control

The roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) turns ON to press the right angle conveyance roller /1 [2] after a specified period of time since the
entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of last paper of the set [1]. After the alignment operation [3], the right angle conveyance motor
(M6) rotates in the forward direction to convey the paper to the front side [4] by rotating 90 degrees. At this time, the roller release solenoid
(SD7) turns OFF a specified period of time after the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of paper and releases the pressure of the
folding entrance roller /1 [5].
A specified period of time after the right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) detects the leading edge of paper, SD7 turns ON to pressure the
folding entrance roller /1 and nip [6] the upper section of paper that has been conveyed to the front side. Also, a specified period of time after
that, when the roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) turns ON [7] to release the right angle conveyance roller /4 and convey the paper to the folding
section.
[1] [3]
[4]

Right angle
Forward
conveyance
motor
Reverse
(M6)
(SD5)
(SD6)
(SD7)
sensor /2 (PS6)
[2]
[5]
[6]
[7]
15ant2e076na
[1]
Trailing edge of the last paper of the set detected
[2]
Right angle conveyance roller /1 pressure
[3]
Paper alignment
[4]
Paper conveyance
[5]
Folding entrance roller pressure release
[6]
Folding entrance roller pressure
[7]
Right angle conveyance roller /4 pressure release
PM -13
PM THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506 > 4. FOLDING SECTION
4. FOLDING SECTION
4.1 Configuration
[1]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[7]
[12]
[10]
[11]
[8]
[9]
15ant2c015nc
[1]
Alignment claw /Fr (main scan)
[2]
Conveyance belt (tri-folding)
[3]
2nd folding stopper
[4]
2nd folding blade
[5]
Folding roller /3
[6]
Folding roller /2
[7]
Alignment stopper /Rr (main scan)
[8]
1st folding blade
[9]
Folding alignment stopper /Rt (sub scan)
[10]
Folding exit claws (same as for sub scan alignment)
[11]
Guide shaft (folding exit)
[12]
Folding roller /1
4.2 Drive
4.2.1 Folding entrance drive
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
15ant2c016na
[1]
[2]
Right-side view
[3]
[4]
PM -14
4.2.2 Folding conveyance drive

[7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
15ant2c017na
[1]
One-way clutch
[2]
Oscillation connecting gear
[3]
[4]
Folding roller /2
[5]
Folding roller /1
[6]
Right-side view
[7]
Paper exit belt
[8]
Folding roller /3
[9]
4.2.3 Folding blade drive

[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
15ant2c018na
[1]
[2]
Folding roller /2
[3]
[4]
[5]
1st folding blade
[6]
Folding roller /1
[7]
Right-side view
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
2nd folding blade
[12]
Folding roller /3
[13]
Spring (Connect folding rollers /2 and /3)
[14]
PM -15
4.2.4 Folding main scan alignment drive

[1]
[8]
[2]
[6]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c019na
[1]
[2]
Alignment stopper /Rr
[3]
Right-side view
[4]
Alignment claw /Fr
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
4.2.5 Folding sub scan alignment/center folding exit drive

[7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c020na
[1]
Folding alignment stoppers /Rt
[2]
Home position stoppers /Rt
[3]
[4]
Torque limiter
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Folding exit claws
[9]
Alignment stoppers /Lt
PM -16
4.2.6 Guide shaft drive

[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
15ant2c021na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Front side view
[4]
Guide shaft
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Folding entrance conveyance control
(1) Mechanism
The folding entrance motor (M3) and the roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) [5] conduct the folding entrance conveyance operation.
The paper [1] conveyed from the right angle conveyance section is conveyed to the folding entrance with the pressure of the folding entrance
roller /1 [7] released. Once the right angle conveyance is completed, SD7 [5] turns ON to pressure the nipping of the folding entrance roller /1
and the roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) [3] turns ON to release the right angle conveyance roller /4, M3 convey the paper to the folding
section.
The folding entrance sensor (PS60) [6] detects the paper at the folding entrance.
[5]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
15ant2c022na
[1]
Paper
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
(2) Control
The roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) turns ON to nip the paper with the folding entrance roller [2] after a specified period of time since the right
angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) detects the leading edge of paper [1], and then the roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) turns ON to release the
nip of the right angle conveyance roller /4 after a specified period of time. Then the folding entrance motor (M3) turns ON and conveys the
paper to the folding section [4].
At the time, the folding transfer motor (M4) rotates in the reverse direction [5] to prevent the paper from being caught between the folding
rollers /1 and /2.
PM -17
SD7 turns OFF to release the pressure of the folding entrance roller [7] after a specified period of time since the entrance sensor (PS1)
detects the trailing edge of last paper of the subsequent set [6] and it stands by for the paper of the subsequent set being conveyed to the
front side of the right angle conveyance section.
[1]
[4]
[6]

sensor /2 (PS6)
Folding entrance
motor (M3)
(SD6)
(SD7)
Folding convey- Forward
ance
motor (M4)
Reverse
[2][3]
[5]
[7]
15ant2e078na
[1]
Last paper of the 1st set
[2]
Folding entrance roller nipped
[3]
Nip of the right angle conveyance roller /4 released
[4]
Folding entrance conveyance
[5]
Caught-protection to the folding section
[6]
Last paper of the subsequent set
[7]
Nip of the folding entrance roller released
4.3.2 Folding main scan alignment control

(1) Mechanism
In the folding main scan alignment, the alignment stoppers /Rr [5] driven by the folding main scan alignment motor /Rr (M14) stop at the
appropriate position in accordance with the paper size, and then the alignment claws /Fr [2] driven by the folding main scan alignment motor /
Fr (M7) conduct the alignment operation. The folding main scan alignment home sensors /Fr1 (PS18) [8] and /Fr2 (PS49) [7] detect the home
position of the alignment claws /Fr and the folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) [4] detects the home position of the
alignment stopper /Rr.
The alignment claws /Fr [2] convey [6] the paper by pushing its trailing edge once the paper passes through the folding entrance roller /3 [3]
and until the leading edge of paper contacts with the alignment stopper /Rr because there is no conveyance roller between the folding
entrance conveyance roller /3 [3] and the alignment stopper /Rr [5].
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
15ant2c023na
[1]
[2]
Alignment claw /Fr
[3]
[4]
[5]
Alignment stopper /Rr
[6]
Paper conveyance
[7]
[8]
(2) Control
The folding main scan alignment motor /Rr (M14) drives the alignment stoppers /Rr to the appropriate position in accordance with the paper
size [2] when the main body start signal [1] turns ON.
The folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) rotates in the forward direction [3] to let the alignment claws /Fr push the trailing edge of
paper for conveyance after a specified period of time since the folding entrance sensor (PS60) detects the trailing edge of paper, and then M7
stops after a specified period of time [4]. The alignment stoppers /Rr push the leading edge of paper to conduct the alignment. M7 rotates in
the reverse direction [5], and after a specified period of time it rotates in the forward direction to conduct the alignment again [6].
M7 rotates in the reverse direction to replace the alignment claws to the home position [7] when the 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20)
detects the completion of the folding operation. M7 starts rotating to replace the alignment claws to the home position for subsequent set
when PS21 detects the completion of the folding operation since the 1st folding blade conducts the reciprocal operation in which the 1st
folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) and the 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) counter changes their positions at each folding
operation. M7 stops rotating when the folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18) detects the home position of the alignment
claw /Fr.
Transmitting the print termination signal from SD, M14 rotates to move the alignment stoppers to the home position [8]. It stops rotating when
the folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) detects the home position of the alignment stoppers.
PM -18

[2]

[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[8]
Folding main
Forward
scan
alignment motor /
Reverse
Fr (M7)
Folding main
Forward
scan
alignment motor /
Reverse
Rr (M14)
Folding entrance
sensor (PS60)
sensor /1 (PS20)
sensor /2 (PS21)
[1]
15ant2e079na
[1]
[2]
Alignment stopper /Rr moved for appropriate paper size
[3]
Paper conveyance of the alignment claws /Fr
[4]
Alignment
[5]
Alignment claws /Fr shelter operation
[6]
Realignment operation
[7]
Alignment claws /Fr home position movement
[8]
Alignment stoppers /Rr moved to the home position
4.3.3 Folding control

(1) Mechanism
Folding has the 1st folding and 2nd folding.
The 1st folding is conducted in the overlap tri-folding mode, the overlap tri-folding mode, and the saddle stitching mode.
In the 1st folding operation, the 1st folding blade [7] pushes and inserts the paper between the folding rollers /1 [8] and /2 [3].
The folding rollers /1 and /2 are pressured each other by the spring [2]. The 1st blade motor (M18) [4] drives the 1st folding blade via the
crank mechanism [5].
In the 2nd folding operation, as well, the 2nd folding blade [14] pushes and inserts the paper between the folding rollers /2 [3] and /3 [15]. The
2nd folding operation has an adjustable stopper [12] which defines the fold from the 1st folding and accurizes the 2nd folding position.
The folding rollers /2 and /3 are pressured each other by the spring [16]. The 2nd blade motor (M19) [10] drives the 2nd folding blade via the
crank mechanism [11].
The folding sensors /2 (PS44) [9], /1 (PS7) [1], and the folding passage sensor (PS8) [13] detect paper.
[10]
[12]
[11]
[13] [14]
[15]
[16]
[1]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c024nb
[1]
[2]
[3]
Folding roller /2
[4]
[5]
Crank mechanism
[6]
Right-side view
[7]
1st folding blade
[8]
Folding roller /1
[9]
[10]
[11]
Crank mechanism
[12]
2nd folding stopper
[13]
[14]
2nd folding blade
[15]
Folding roller /3
[16]
PM -19
(2) Tri-folding control

(a) Operation
After the initial operation, the 1st folding blade [8] is at the standby position /1 [5]. In the actuator [7], the 1st folding blade home sensor /2
(PS21) [3] turns ON and the 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) [6] turns OFF. When paper [9] is conveyed to the folding section and
the 1st folding blade motor (M18) is rotated [2], the crank [4] rotates 90 degrees to project the 1st folding blade to the paper and push the
paper [12] between the folding roller /1 [10] and /2 [11] with its edge. At the time, the actuator also rotates 90 degrees so that PS21 [3] turns
OFF and PS20 [6] turns ON.
M18 keeps rotating in the same direction [13], and then the crank [4] stops when it reaches at the standby position /2 [1] (PS20 turns OFF)
where is 180 degrees opposite from the standby position /1. In the 1st folding operation for the subsequent set, M18 rotates in the reverse
direction [14] and the crank [4] also rotates 180 degrees in the reverse direction to conduct the 1st folding operation.
The 2nd folding operation is operated as in the 1st folding operation.
[11]
[12]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[14]
[7]
[13]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
15ant2c025na
[1]
Standby position /2
[2]
Projecting position
[3]
[4]
Crank
[5]
Standby position /1
[6]
[7]
Actuator
[8]
1st folding blade
[9]
Paper
[10]
Folding roller /1
[11]
Folding roller /2
[12]
Insert paper
[13]
Rotational direction to the standby position /2
[14]
1st folding for the subsequent set
(b) Control
When the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) stops rotating at the completion of the paper alignment operation, the 1st folding
blade motor (M18) turns ON and starts rotating in the reverse direction [1]. The 1st folding blade folds and inserts the paper between the
folding rollers /1 and /2. When the 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) turns ON, the folding transfer motor (M4) turns ON [2] to
conduct the 1st folding. M18 stops when PS20 turns OFF [3]. Then, M4 turns OFF and the 1st folding operation is completed [4] after a
specified period of time since the folding passage sensor (PS8) detects the leading edge of paper.
After a specified period of time since PS8 turns ON, the 2nd folding blade motor (M19) turns ON and rotates in the reverse direction to start
the 2nd folding operation.
When the 2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22) turns ON, M4 rotates [5] in high speed to perform the 2nd folding, and then the trifolded paper is conveyed to the tri-folding exit. M19 stops when PS22 turns OFF [6].
The 1st folding operation for the subsequent set, M18 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the 1st folding [7] and stops rotating [8]
when the 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) turns ON. In the 2nd folding operation, M19 rotates in the forward direction to conduct
the 2nd folding [9] and stops rotating when the 2nd folding blade home sensor /2 (PS23) turns ON [10].
PM -20

[1] [2]
Folding conveyance
motor (M4)
Folding main
scan alignment
motor /Fr (M7)
[4]
[5]
[7]
[9]
High
speed
Low
speed
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
1st folding blade Forward

motor (M18)
Reverse
sensor /1 (PS20)
sensor /2 (PS21)
2nd folding
Forward
blade
motor (M19)
Reverse
sensor /1 (PS22)
sensor /2 (PS23)
Folding passage
sensor (PS8)
[3]
[6]
[8]
[10]
15ant2e080na
[1]
Paper alignment operation completed
[2]
1st folding
[3]
1st folding blade motor (M18) stopped
[4]
1st folding completed
[5]
2nd folding
[6]
2nd folding blade motor (M19) stopped
[7]
1st folding by M18 rotating the forward direction
[8]
M18 stopped
[9]
2nd folding by M19 rotating the forward direction
[10]
M19 stopped
(3) Tri-folding exit control

(a) Operation
In the multi-letter folding exit, the driving force of the folding transfer motor (M4) is transmitted via the tri-folding exit clutch (CL1). CL1 turns
ON and the exit belt [4] is driven approximately 7mm to convey the paper to the front side for every paper exit. The tri-folding paper full
sensor (PS10) [3] detects the paper when it is reached at the front, and then the main body displays the message on the operation panel.
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
15ant2c081na
[1]
[2]
Right-side view
[3]
Tri-folding paper full sensor (PS10)
[4]
Paper exit belt
(b) Control
The tri-folding exit clutch (CL1) turns ON and drives the exit belt [1] and stops it [2] after a specified period of time when the tri-folding exit
sensor (PS9) detects the leading edge of paper.
The folding transfer motor (M4) stops [3] after a specified period of time since PS9 detects the trailing edge of paper.
(M4)
[1]
[2] [3]
15ant2e082na
[1]
Exit belt drive
[2]
[3]
Folding transfer motor (M4) stopped
PM -21
Exit belt stop
(4) Center folding control

When the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) stops at the completion of the paper alignment operation, the 1st folding blade motor
(M18) turns ON and rotates in the reverse direction [1] to let the 1st folding blade insert the paper between the folding rollers /1 and /2. When
the 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) turns ON, the folding transfer motor (M4) rotates in the reverse direction [2] to rotate the folding
rollers /1 and /2 in the reverse direction to release the paper. When PS20 turns OFF, M18 and M4 stop rotating [3].
The folding operation for the subsequent set, M18 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the folding [4] and stops rotating [8] when the 1st
folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) turns ON.
[1]
Folding conveyance
motor (M4)
Forward
Folding main
scan alignment
motor /Fr (M7)
Forward
[2]
[4]
Reverse
Reverse
Forward
1st folding blade
motor (M18)
Reverse
sensor /1 (PS20)
sensor /2 (PS21)
[3]
[5]
15ant2e083na
[1]
1st folding blade is projected with the paper
[2]
Folding transfer motor (M18) rotating the reverse direction
[3]
M18 and M4 stopped
[4]
M18 rotating the forward direction
[5]
M18 stopped
4.3.4 Folding sub scan alignment control

(1) Mechanism
The folding sub scan alignment operation is conducted in the multi letter folding mode and is conducted with the folding exit claws [13] and the
folding alignment stoppers /Rt [3] driven by the folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) [8].
The folding exit claws move to the right [14] and the folding alignment stoppers /Rt move to the left [2] when M8 rotates in the reverse
direction [9]. The folding alignment stoppers /Rt are contacted with the alignment stopper [1] and stopped by the torque limiter [7]. The folding
exit claws move to the positions for the paper width of A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S and conduct the folding sub scan alignment operation, and then the
folding is conducted.
In the multi center folding mode and the saddle stitching mode, M8 rotates in the forward direction to move the folding exit claws to the left
[11] after the folding operation. Once the folding exit claws make a round, they conduct the paper exit operation to the saddle stitching
section. At the time, the folding alignment stoppers /Rt moving to the right [4] are contacted with the alignment stopper [5] and stopped by the
torque limiter [7].
The folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56) [12] detects the home position of the folding exit claws in the alignment operation. The
folding exit home sensor (PS24) [6] detects the initial position and the center folding exit operation.
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[10]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[7]
15ant2c026na
[1]
Alignment stopper
[2]
Alignment direction (Left)
[3]
Folding alignment stoppers /Rt
[4]
Movement in the center folding exit operation (Right)
[5]
Home position stopper
[6]
[7]
Torque limiter
[8]
[9]
M8 rotated in the reverse direction
[10]
[11]
Direction at the center folding exit operation
[12]
[13]
Folding exit claws
[14]
Alignment direction (Right)
PM -22
(2) Folding sub scan alignment control

The folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) rotates in the reverse direction to conduct the alignment operation in the sub scan direction [2]
after a specified period of time since the right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) detects the trailing edge of paper and the alignment
operation in the main scan direction is conducted [1]. When the folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56) detects the folding exit claws,
M8 conducts the alignment by pressing the side of the paper, and then it stops [3]
The M8 conducts the shelter operation and stops [4] after a specified period of time since PS6 detects the trailing edge of paper.
[1]
sensor /2 (PS6)
Folding main
scan alignment
motor /Fr (M7)
Forward
Reverse
Folding sub scan Forward

alignment exit
Reverse
motor (M8)
home sensor (PS56)
[2]
[3]
[4]
15ant2e084na
[1]
Alignment operation in the main scan direction
[2]
Alignment operation in the sub scan direction
[3]
M8 stopped
[4]
Shelter operation
(3) Center folding exit operation

The folding sub scan alignment operation is conducted in the multi-letter folding mode and is conducted with the folding exit claws [13] and
the folding alignment stoppers /Rt [3] driven by the folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) [8].
The folding exit claws move to the right [14] and the folding alignment stoppers /Rt move to the left [2] when M8 rotates in the reverse
direction [9]. The folding alignment stoppers /Rt are contacted with the alignment stopper [1] and stopped by the torque limiter [7]. The folding
exit claws move to the positions for the paper width of A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S and conduct the folding sub scan alignment operation, and then the
folding is conducted.
In the multi-center folding mode and the saddle stitching mode, M8 rotates in the forward direction to move the folding exit claws to the left
[11] after the folding operation. Once the folding exit claws make a round, they conduct the paper exit operation to the saddle stitching
section. At the time, the folding alignment stoppers /Rt moving to the right [4] are contacted with the alignment stopper [5] and stopped by the
torque limiter [7].
The folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56) [12] detects the home position of the folding exit claws in the alignment operation. The
folding exit home sensor (PS24) [6] detects the initial position and the center folding exit operation.
[1]
Folding main
scan alignment
motor /Fr (M7)
[2]
[3]
[4]
Forward
Reverse
High
speed
Folding sub scan Low
alignment exit
speed
motor (M8)
Reverse
(PS24)
15ant2e085na
[1]
Realignment operation in the main scan direction
[2]
Paper exit operation started
[3]
Switched to the low speed
[4]
Stopped at home position
4.3.5 Guide shaft control

(1) Mechanism
The guide shaft [2] holds the fold line [4] from the bottom and makes certain of the stack [3] in the saddle stitching section when the folding
exit claws [7] exit the folded paper [1] to the saddle stitching section.
The guide shaft is projected [5] in sync with the paper exit only when the first folded paper for each set is exited and put away immediately to
the folding section [6]. In the subsequent paper exit, the guide shaft does not operate because the paper [3] stacked in the saddle stitching
section works as the guide.
PM -23

[4]
[5]
[6]

[7]
[1]
[3]
[2]
15ant2c027na
[1]
Folded paper
[2]
Guide shaft
[3]
Stacked paper
[4]
Fold line
[5]
Projection direction of the guide shaft
[6]
Storage direction of the guide shaft
[7]
Folding exit claws
(2) Guide shaft control

The guide shaft motor (M25) turns ON [2] and the guide shaft is projected after a specified period of time since the folding main scan
alignment motor /Fr (M7) completes the realignment operation in the main scan direction [1] (after the center folding operation). The guide
shaft conducting the back and forth operation by the belt rotation stops when the guide shaft home sensor (PS46) turns ON [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
Folding main scan Forward

alignment motor /
Reverse
Fr (M7)
Guide shaft home sensor
(PS46)
15ant2e086na
[1]
Realignment operation in the main scan direction
[2]
[3]
Guide shaft motor (M25) stopped
Guide shaft projecting started
(3) Folding unit lock control

During the print operation, the folding unit lock solenoid (SD8) locks the folding unit to prevent the guide shaft or the folding exit claws from
damage due to pulling out the folding unit by mistake.
When the paper gets jammed, the positions of the guide shaft and the folding exit claws are monitored. SD8 turns OFF and releases the lock
only when both the folding exit home sensor (PS24) and the guide shaft home sensor (PS46) detect the home position.
PM -24
PM THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506 > 5. SADDLE STITCHING

SECTION
5. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION

5.1 Configuration
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
15ant2c028nb
[1]
Saddle stitching alignment plate
[2]
Clip
[3]
Bundle arm
[4]
Clincher
[5]
Bundle arm assist plate
[6]
Stapler
[7]
Saddle stitching hold /Up
[8]
Saddle stitching hold /Lw
5.2 Drive
5.2.1 Saddle stitching alignment drive
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c029na
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Front side view
[5]
[6]
[7]
Saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt
[8]
Saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt
PM -25

SECTION
5.2.2 Saddle stitching hold drive

[8]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[3]
15ant2c030na
[1]
[2]
Arm
[3]
Left-side view
[4]
Spring
[5]
Eccentric cam
[6]
[7]
[8]
Stapler
5.2.3 Clincher up down drive
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c031na
[1]
Left-side view
[2]
Roller
[3]
Eccentric cam
[4]
[5]
[6]
Spring
[7]
Clincher /Rt, /Lt
[8]
PM -26

SECTION
5.2.4 Stapler/clincher movement drive
[1]
[2]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[1]
15ant2c032na
[1]
Top side view
[2]
Stapler /Rt
[3]
Clincher /Rt
[4]
Front side view
[5]
[6]
[7]
Clincher /Lt
[8]
Stapler /Lt
5.2.5 Stapler/clincher drive

[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[6]
15ant2c077na
[1]
Stapling arm
[2]
Staple bending arm
[3]
Clincher plate
[4]
Clincher solenoid /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10)
[5]
Staple
[6]
Left-side view
[7]
Eccentric cam
[8]
PM -27

SECTION
5.2.6 Bundle arm rotation drive

[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
15ant2c033na
[1]
Bundle arm
[2]
Slide guide
[3]
Left-side view
[4]
[5]
Guide shaft
[6]
Fulcrum shaft
[7]
5.2.7 Bundle arm movement drive

[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[5]
15ant2c034na
[1]
Bundle arm
[2]
Guide shaft
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Fulcrum shaft
PM -28

SECTION
5.2.8 Bundle arm assist drive
[1]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[4]
15ant2c035na
[1]
[2]
Left-side view
[3]
[4]
[5]
5.2.9 Bundle clip drive

[10]
[9]
[1]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c036nb
[1]
[2]
[3]
Left-side view
[4]
[5]
Release plate /Lw
[6]
Release roller
[7]
Wire
[8]
Spring
[9]
Release plate /Up
[10]
Clip
5.3 Operation
5.3.1 Saddle stitching alignment control
(1) Mechanism
In the saddle stitching alignment, the saddle stitching alignment plates /Lt [2] and /Rt [8] align the center folded paper [5] in the sub scan
direction.
The saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16) [3] drives the saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt [2] in the sub scan direction via the belt by
rotating in the forward and reverse directions. The saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt moves to the position for the appropriate paper size
when the main body start signal turns ON, and it does not move during the print operation. It return to the position at the saddle stitching
alignment home sensor /Lt (PS29) [4] after the print operation.
The saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9) [7] drives the saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt [8] in the sub scan direction via the belt by
rotating in the forward and reverse directions. The alignment operation is conducted by M9 by rotating in the forward/reverse directions every
PM -29

SECTION
time the center folded paper is conveyed. It return to the position at the saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28) [6] after the print
operation.
[7]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
15ant2c037na
[1]
[2]
Saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt
[3]
[4]
[5]
Paper
[6]
[7]
[8]
Saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt
(2) Control
The saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON and the saddle
stitching alignment plate /Lt moves to the position for the appropriate paper size [2].
The saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9) rotates in the forward direction and the saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt conducts the
preliminary alignment operation [4] when the folding sensor /2 (PS44) at the exit of the folding section detects the trailing edge of the paper
[3]. Then, M9 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the alignment operation [5] when the paper is stacked at the stapler position. After a
specified period of time, M9 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the saddle stitching alignment plate to its home position and stands by
for the subsequent set [6].
For the last paper of the set [7], M9 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the saddle stitching alignment plate to its home position when
the saddle stitching press motor (M21) is completed with holding the paper [8].
[7]
Saddle stitching Forward
alignment
motor /Rt
Reverse
(M9)
alignment
motor /Lt
Reverse
(M16)
motor (M21)
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[9]
15ant2e087na
[1]
[2]
Moved for appropriate paper size
[3]
Detected the trailing edge of paper
[4]
Preliminary alignment operation
[5]
Alignment operation
[6]
Moved to the home position
[7]
[8]
Held the paper with the saddle stitching hold
[9]
Moved to the home position
5.3.2 Stapler/clincher movement control

(1) Mechanism
The staplers/clinchers move to the stapling position in accordance with the paper size.
The stapling position is different for every paper size to make the stapling distance half of the paper size.
The staplers /Rt [10] and /Lt [8] are fixed to the belt /Up [9] and the clinchers /Rt [2] and /Lt [4] to the belt /Lw [1]. The stapler movement motor
(M15) [5] moves them in the sub scan direction via the connecting shaft [6].
To prevent the tooth skipping of the belts /Up and /Lw at the maintenance, the gear-shaped rotating knob [7] is provided on the connecting
shaft [6]. By rotating the knob manually, the staplers /Rt and /Lt and the clinchers /Rt and /Lt move simultaneously.
PM -30

SECTION

[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
15ant2c038na
[1]
Belt /Lw
[2]
Clincher /Rt
[3]
[4]
Clincher /Lt
[5]
[6]
Connecting shaft
[7]
Rotating knob
[8]
Stapler /Lt
[9]
Belt /Up
[10]
Stapler /Rt
(2) Control
The stapler movement motor (M15) rotates in the forward direction when the main body start signal turns ON and moves the staplers and the
clinchers to the position for the appropriate paper size. They go back to their home position at the end of the printing operation.
5.3.3 Saddle stitching hold control

(1) Mechanism
The saddle stitching hold is the mechanism to prevent the paper misalignment at stapling. The saddle stitching hold /Up [1] moves down to
the saddle stitching hold /Lw [2] at its lower position and hold the center folded paper [3] at the fold line from both up and down. The eccentric
cam [5] moves the saddle stitching hold /Up [1] up and down via the arm [6].
[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
15ant2c039na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Center folded paper
[4]
Left-side view
[5]
Eccentric cam
[6]
Arm
The spring [3] enforces the saddle stitching hold /Up [6] toward the saddle stitching hold /Lw [5]. When the saddle stitching press motor (M21)
rotates the eccentric cam [2] via the gear [1], the arm [4] moves along with the shape of the eccentric cam and the spring [3] lowers the saddle
stitching hold /Up.
The saddle stitching hold /Up [6] holding the center folded paper at its lower position is pushed up to its upper position by the saddle stitching
hold /Lw [5] during the stapling operation. This allows the paper to be moved from the lower position to the upper position without any
misalignment.
PM -31

SECTION
The saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27) [8] detects the home position of the eccentric cam.
[8]
[6]
[7]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
15ant2c040na
[1]
Gear
[2]
Eccentric cam
[3]
Spring
[4]
Arm
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
(2) Control
(a) Saddle stitching mode
At the end of the paper alignment operation [1], the saddle stitching press motor (M21) rotates to move the saddle stitching hold /Up
downward [2] and hold the paper between the saddle stitching holds /Up and /Lw. Then, the clincher up down motor (M20) starts rotating
and the saddle stitching hold /Up is pushed up by the saddle stitching hold /Lw while holding the paper [3]. M20 rotates in the reverse
direction and lowers the saddle stitching hold /Lw [5] when the clinching operation [4] is started. Also the spring lowers The saddle stitching
hold /Up. M21 turns ON and go back the saddle stitching hold /Up to its standby position [6] after a specified period of time since the
clinching operation is started.
[1]
[5]

alignment motor
Reverse
/Rt
Clincher up
down
motor (M20)
Forward
Reverse
Clincher solenoids /Rt

(SD9), /Lt (SD10)
motor (M21)
home sensor (PS27)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
15ant2e088na
[1]
Alignment operation
[2]
Saddle stitching hold /Up moved down
[3]
Saddle stitching hold /Lw moved up
[4]
Clinching operation
[5]
Saddle stitching hold /Lw moved down
[6]
Saddle stitching hold /Up moved up
(b) Multi-center folding mode

At the end of the paper alignment operation [1], the saddle stitching press motor (M21) rotates to move the saddle stitching hold /Up
downward [2] and stack the paper securely. Then, M21 keeps rotating to move the saddle stitching hold /Up upward to its standby position
[3].
[1]
alignment motor
/Rt (M9)
Reverse
motor (M21)
home sensor (PS27)
[2]
[3]
15ant2e089na
[1]
Alignment operation
[2]
[3]
Saddle stitching hold /Up moved up
Saddle stitching hold /Up moved down
5.3.4 Clincher up down control

(1) Mechanism
The clincher shelters at the lower position to obtain space between the stapler and the clincher when the paper is conveyed between them.
PM -32

SECTION
After the alignment operation, the saddle stitching hold /Up [7] moves down and holds the center folded paper [6]. Then the eccentric cam [4]
drives the saddle stitching hold /Lw [2] and the clincher [3] to push up the saddle stitching hold /Up [7] to the position where the stapler [1] is
positioned while holding the center folded paper.
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
15ant2c041na
[1]
Stapler
[2]
[3]
Clincher
[4]
Eccentric cam
[5]
Left-side view
[6]
Center folded paper
[7]
The clincher [7] moves down to the lower position by its own weight and moves upward by the clincher up down motor (M20).
The roller [2] attached to the arm [5] is pushed up and the clincher is contacted with the stapler when M20 rotates the eccentric cam [3]. The
paper between the clincher and the stapler is held securely by the spring [6].
Once the stapling operation is completed, M20 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the eccentric cam, and then the clincher moves
down by its own weight.
[8]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[9]
[5]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2]
15ant2c042na
[1]
Left-side view
[2]
Roller
[3]
Eccentric cam
[4]
[5]
Arm
[6]
Spring
[7]
Clincher /Rt, /Lt
[8]
[9]
(2) Control
The clincher moves up or down only in the saddle stitching mode.
Once the saddle stitching press motor (M21) moves down the saddle stitching hold /Up [1], the clincher up down motor (M20) rotates in the
forward direction to move up the clinchers /Rt and /Lt and the saddle stitching hold /Lw [2]. M20 is stopped when the clincher up down home
M20 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the clinchers /Rt and /Lt and the saddle stitching hold /Lw when the clincher solenoids /Rt
(SD9) and /Lt (SD10) starts the clinching operation [4]. They are stopped at the lower position [5] when PS26 turns OFF.
PM -33

SECTION

[2]
Clincher up
down motor
(M20)
[3]
[5]
Forward
Reverse

sensor (PS26)
(SD9), /Lt (SD10)
motor (M21)
[1]
[4]
15ant2e090na
[1]
Saddle stitching hold /Up moving down stopped
[2]
Clinchers /Rt and /Lt moved up
[3]
Clinchers /Rt and /Lt stopped at the upper position
[4]
Clinching operation
[5]
Clinchers /Rt and /Lt stopped at lower position

(1) Mechanism
The stapler motors /Rt (M29) and /Lt (M30) [10] and the clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10) [5] operate the stapler operation.
The stapler home sensors /Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3) [8] and the clincher start sensors /Rt (HS2) and /Lt (HS4) [11] detect the stapler operation.
HS1, HS2, HS3, and HS4 are hall element sensors and control the position of the magnet [12] of the rotating eccentric cam [9].
M29 and M30 [10] drive the staple bending arm [3] and the stapling arm [2] via the eccentric cam [9]. The staple bending arm bends the rolled
staple [6] into the U-shape and the stapling arm staples it toward the clincher. Then the clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10) bend the
staple by driving the clincher plate [4]. The stapling operation is completed with these operations.
The staple empty switches /Rt (SW1) and /Lt (SW2) [7] detect whether the staple or cartridge is set or not.
[11]
[10]
[12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
15ant2c091na
[1]
[2]
Stapling arm
[3]
Staple bending arm
[4]
Clincher plate
[5]
Clincher solenoid /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10)
[6]
Staple
[7]
Stapler empty switch /Rt (SW1), /Lt (SW2)
[8]
Stapler home sensor /Rt (HS1), /Lt (HS3)
[9]
Eccentric cam
[10]
[11]
Clincher start sensor /Rt (HS2), /Lt (HS4)
[12]
Magnet
(2) Control
(a) Staple control
The stapler motors /Rt (M29) and /Lt (M30) start the stapling operation [2] when the clincher up down home sensor (PS26) detects that the
clinchers /Rt and /Lt are contacted with the stapler assy [1].
The clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10) bend the staple and the stapling operation is completed when the clincher start sensors /Rt
(HS1) and /Lt (HS3) in the stapler assy turn ON [3]. M29 and M30 stop and return to the home position [4] when the stapler home sensors /
Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3) detects the home position.
PM -34

SECTION

[1]
sensor (PS26)
Stapler motors /Rt
(M29), /Lt (M30)
(SD9), /Lt (SD10)
Stapler home sensors
/Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3)
Clincher start sensor /Rt
(HS2) and /Lt (HS4)
[2] [3]
[4]
15ant2e092na
[1]
Clincher contacted
[2]
Stapling operation
[3]
Clinching operation
[4]
(b) Staple and cartridge detection

When the remaining amount of the staple becomes 20 or the cartridge is not set, the staple empty switches /Rt (SW1) and /Lt (SW2) turn
ON and the main body displays the message on its operation panel.
5.3.6 Bundle arm control

The bundle arm [4] rotates and moves in the sub scan direction.
It rotates to convey the paper from the stapling section to the bundle clip section and moves in the sub scan direction to catch/release the paper.
In the multi center folding mode, the bundle arm rotates to the stapling position after the last paper of the set is conveyed. In the saddle stitching
mode, it rotates after the stapling operation.
By moving the bundle arm, the tip of the bundle arm is inserted under the fold line of the paper and the paper is caught [1].
The caught paper is conveyed to the bundle clip section [2] by the rotation of the bundle arm. The bundle arm moves in the outside of the sub
scan direction and releases the paper [3] when the bundle clip holds the paper at the folding side.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
15ant2c043na
[1]
Paper caught
[2]
Conveyance
[3]
Paper released
[4]
Bundle arm
(1) Bundle arm movement mechanism

The bundle arm motor (M10) [6] drives the bundle arm [5] to catch/release the paper [4] in the sub scan direction via the belt.
The bundle arm home sensor (PS32) [1] detects the home position of the bundle arm.
PM -35

SECTION

[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
15ant2c044na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Guide shaft
[4]
Paper
[5]
Bundle arm
[6]
(2) Bundle arm rotation mechanism

The bundle arm rotation motor (M22) [2] drives the bundle arm [8] via the belt, slide guide [5], and guide shaft [6].
When M22 drives the slide guide [5] in the main scan direction, the guide shaft [6] passing through the long hole of the slide guide is rotated,
and then the bundle arm [8] is rotated around the fulcrum. When it is driven to the paper [3] side, M22 stops where the ring [7] is contacted
with the guide plate [4].
The bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31) [9] detects the home position of the bundle arm.
[9]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[1]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[5]
15ant2c045na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Paper
[4]
Guide plate
[5]
Slide guide
[6]
Guide shaft
[7]
Ring
[8]
Bundle arm
[9]
In the rotation drive of the bundle arm [8], the slide guide [5] has to be overrun to be sure to make the ring [7] of the bundle arm contact with
the guide plate [6]. To prevent any parts from damage due to the overrun, the guide shaft [3] is movable with the shock absorbing guide [4]
and the spring [2].
PM -36

SECTION

[8]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
15ant2c046na
[1]
[2]
Spring
[3]
Guide shaft
[4]
Shock absorbing guide
[5]
Slide guide
[6]
Guide plate
[7]
Ring
[8]
Bundle arm
(3) Bundle arm control

The bundle arm motor (M10) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON and moves the bundle arm to the
appropriate position in accordance with the paper size.
The bundle arm rotation motor (M22) rotates in the forward direction to rotate the bundle arm to the stapling section [3] after a specified period
of time since the folding sensor /2 (PS44) detects the trailing edge of paper of the last set. It stops the bundle arm in an upright position [4]
when the bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31) turns OFF.
Then, M22 rotates again [5] to drive the bundle arm until it is contacted with the guide plate on the stapling section [6]. The timing for M22 to
restart the rotation [5] is different between in the multi-center folding mode and in the saddle stitching mode. (The picture shows the time chart
of the saddle stitching mode)
Multi center folding mode: When the saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27) detects the saddle stitching hold /Up has been moved to
its upper position.
Saddle stitching mode: After a specified period of time since the clincher up down home sensor (PS26) detects that the clinchers are
contacted with the staplers.
M10 inserts the tip of the bundle arm under the fold line of the paper [7] when the bundle arm assist motor (M26) starts the assisting operation
by pushing up the trailing edge of paper at the back side and M10 stops after a specified period of time [8].
M22 rotates in the reverse direction to convey the paper to the bundle clip section when M10 stops [8]. It stops after a specified period of time
since PS31 turns ON.
M10 rotates in the forward direction to pull out the bundle arm from the paper and take shelter it from the conveyance path [11] after a
specified period of time since the bundle clip motor (M11) starts to catch the paper [10]. M10 stops when the bundle arm home sensor (PS32)
turns ON [12].
M10 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the bundle arm to its standby position [13] for the subsequent set after a specified period of
time since it stops.
PM -37

SECTION
[9]
[11] [12][13]
Folding sensor /2
(PS44)
Bundle arm assist
motor (M26)
Clincher up down
home sensor (PS26)
Forward
Bundle arm
motor (M10)
Reverse
Bundle arm
rotation motor
(M22)
Forward
Reverse
Bundle arm rotation

home sensor (PS31)
Bundle arm home
sensor (PS32)
Bundle clip
motor (M11)
Forward
Reverse
[1][2]
[3]
[4] [5]
[6][7] [8]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Bundle arm started to rotate
[4]
Bundle arm stopped in an upright position
[5]
Bundle arm restarted to rotate
[6]
Bundle arm contacted with the guide plate
[7]
Bundle arm inserted under the fold line
[8]
Insertion completed and conveyance started
[9]
Conveyance completed
[10]
Paper clip caught paper
[11]
Bundle arm shelter operation
[12]
Shelter completed
[13]
Bundle arm moved for the subsequent set
* The picture shows the time chart of the saddle stitching mode
5.3.7 Bundle arm assist control

(1) Mechanism
The bundle arm assist mechanism is the mechanism to assist the paper conveyance of the bundle arm rotation drive to be conducted without
fault. It pushes up the fore edge side of the paper [6] with the bundle arm assist plate [4] to tilt it to the front.
The bundle arm assist motor (M26) [2] drives the bundle arm plate [4] via the belt.
The bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) [1] detects the upper home position and the bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38) [3]
detects the lower home position.
The bundle arm assist plate [4] waits at the position5mm below the fore edge side of the paper during standby. To keep the error to a
minimum, the small-size paper (less than 314mm) and the large-size paper (314mm or more) are moved to the standby position from the
position of PS39 and PS38 respectively since the driving time of M26 (DC brush motor) positions the standby position for the paper.
In the bundle arm assist operation, the fore edge side of the paper is pushed up 35mm (or until PS39 turns ON).
[6]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c065na
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Paper
(2) Control
(a) Small-size paper (less than 314mm)
For the small-size paper, the bundle arm assist motor (M26) rotates in the forward direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON to
drive the bundle arm assist plate at the home position to the position at the bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) [2]. After a specified
period of time, M26 rotates in the reverse direction to drive the bundle arm assist plate from the upper limit position to the standby position
in accordance with the paper size [3] and stands by for the paper.
PM -38

SECTION
Then, M26 rotates in the forward direction to push up the fore edge side of the paper [6] for assisting the bundle arm to be inserted under
the fold line of the paper. The operation timing [6] of M26 is different between in the multi center folding mode and in the saddle stitching
mode. (The picture shows the time chart of the saddle stitching mode)
Multi-center folding mode: When the bundle arm is contacted with the guide plate of the stapler section [4] by the bundle arm rotation
motor (M22).
Saddle stitching mode: When the clincher moves downward [5] at the end of the stapling operation.
M26 rotates in the forward direction to assist the bundle arm to convey the paper [7] after a specified period. Then the bundle arm assist
plate goes back to the standby position and stands by for the subsequent set [8].
[2]
Bundle arm
assist
motor (M26)
[3]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Forward
Reverse

sensor (PS38))
limit sensor (PS39)
Clincher up
Forward
down motor
(M20)
Reverse
Bundle arm
rotation motor
(M22)
Forward
Reverse
[1]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
Movement to the upper limit
[3]
[4]
[5]
Clincher moved down
[6]
Assist of the insertion of the bundle arm
[7]
Assist of the bundle arm conveyance
[8]
(b) Large-size paper (314mm or more)

For the large-size paper, the bundle arm assist motor (M26) rotates in the forward direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON to
drive the bundle arm assist plate to the standby position in accordance with the paper size [2] and stands by for the paper.
The subsequent operation is conducted in the same manner as for the small-size paper.
[2]
Bundle arm
assist
motor (M26)
[5]
[6]
[7]
Forward
Reverse

sensor (PS38)
limit sensor (PS39)
Forward
Clincher up
down motor
(M20)
Reverse
Bundle arm
rotation motor
(M22)
Forward
Reverse
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Clincher moved down
[5]
Assist of the insertion of the bundle arm
[6]
Assist of the bundle arm conveyance
[7]
5.3.8 Bundle clip control

(1) Mechanism
The bundle clip is the mechanism to hold the paper that the bundle arm conveyed to the slope and convey the paper to the bundle press
stage with its fore edge side to the trimmer section.
The bundle clip catches, releases, and conveys the paper. It catches the paper at the upper limit position [1], conveys it [2], and then release
it at the lower limit position [3].
PM -39

SECTION
[1]
[2]
[3]
15ant2c047na
[1]
Catching
[2]
[3]
Releasing
Conveyance
The bundle clip motor (M11) [5] drives the bundle clip [1] up [8] and down [7] via the gear and belt.
The spring [9] provides the bundle clip the force to catch the paper, and the wire [2] and the winding shaft [3] open the bundle clip to release
the paper.
The bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) [4] detects the upper limit of the bundle clip and the bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30) [6] detects
the lower limit.
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
15ant2c048na
[1]
Clip
[2]
Wire
[3]
Winding shaft
[4]
[5]
[6]
PM -40

SECTION

[7]
Down
[8]
[9]
Spring
Up
The bundle clip is closed all the time except when it is located at the upper and lower limit position. When the bundle clip moves up [1], the
release roller /Up [6] gets onto [7] the release plate /Up [8]. Then the wire winding shaft [4] rotates [3] and takes up the wire [5] to open the
bundle clip.
In the same way, when the bundle clip moves down [2], the release roller /Lw [10] gets onto [12] the release plate /Lw [11] and then the wire
winding shaft [4] rotates [9] and takes up the wire [5] to open the bundle clip.
[5]
[1]
[10]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[8]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[4]
[9]
15ant2c049na
[1]
Up
[2]
Down
[3]
Wire winding rotation
[4]
Wire winding shaft
[5]
Wire
[6]
Release roller /Up
[7]
Getting over at up
[8]
Release plate /Up
[9]
Wire winding rotation
[10]
Release roller /Lw
[11]
Release plate /Lw
[12]
Getting over at down
(2) Control
The bundle clip motor (M11) rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle clip until the bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) turns
ON [2] after a specified period of time since the bundle assist motor (M26) starts the assisting operation [1]. Then, the bundle clip stops with
its clip opened.
The bundle arm conveys the paper from the stapling section to the bundle clip section, and then the bundle arm rotation motor (M22) stops
[3]. After a specified period of time, M11 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle clip and close the bundle clip to catch the
paper, and then M11 stops after a specified period of time [4]
When the bundle arm motor (M10) completes the shelter operation [5], M11 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle clip [6].
The bundle clip opens the clip to release the paper [7] and M11 stops when the bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30) turns ON.
M11 rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle clip after a specified period of time since M11 stops. Then, M11 stops to move the
bundle clip at the standby position for the subsequent set after a specified period of time since PS30 turns OFF [8].
PM -41

SECTION

[3]
Bundle arm
motor (M10)
[5]
[8]
Forward
Reverse
Bundle arm
rotation motor
(M22)
Forward
Reverse
Bundle arm assist

motor (M26)
Bundle clip
Forward
motor (M11)
Reverse
Bundle clip upper
limit sensor (PS33)
Bundle clip lower
limit sensor (PS30)
[1]
[2]
[4]
[6] [7]
15ant2e099na
[1]
Assisting operation by the bundle arm
[2]
Bundle clip opened
[3]
Paper conveyance by the bundle arm completed
[4]
Paper caught
[5]
Bundle arm shelter operation
[6]
Conveyed by the bundle clip
[7]
Paper released
[8]
Returned to the standby position
PM -42
PM THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506 > 6. BUNDLE PROCESSING

SECTION
6. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION

6.1 Configuration
[12]
[11]
[13]
[14]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[5]
15ant2c050nb
[1]
Exit claws
[2]
[3]
Bundle exit tray
[4]
Bundle exit conveyance belt
[5]
Scraps box
[6]
Registration claw
[7]
[8]
Trimmer scraps press plate
[9]
Shutter
[10]
[11]
Trimmer scraps removal fan (FM1)
[12]
Lift wire
[13]
Bundle press stage
[14]
Bundle press plate
6.2 Drive
6.2.1 Bundle press stage lift drive
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[1]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
15ant2c051na
[1]
[2]
Bundle registration plate wire
[3]
Lift wire
[4]
Bundle press stage
[5]
[6]
Bundle exit auxiliary roller
[7]
Knob
[8]
[9]
[10]
PM -43

SECTION

[11]
Over-winding-prevention stopper
[12]
[13]
Wire winding shaft
6.2.2 Bundle press movement drive

[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
15ant2c052na
[1]
Bundle press
[2]
[3]
Bundle press stage
[4]
Left-side view
[5]
6.2.3 Bundle registration drive
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
15ant2c053na
[1]
Exit claws
[2]
Left-side view
[3]
Bundle press stage
[4]
Registration claws
[5]
[6]
PM -44

SECTION
6.2.4 Bundle press drive
[9]
[1]
[8]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[6]
15ant2c054nb
[1]
Press plate
[2]
Release wire /Rt
[3]
Wire winding shaft
[4]
[5]
Release wire /Lt
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Spring
6.2.5 Bundle exit drive
[13]
[1]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c055nb
[1]
[2]
Left-side view
[3]
Bundle exit drive belt
[4]
Actuator
[5]
Belt
[6]
[7]
One-way clutch (for the bundle exit conveyance belt)
[8]
Trimmer scraps press plate
[9]
[10]
Trimmer scraps press claws
PM -45

SECTION

[11]
Pin
[12]
[13]
One-way clutch (for pressing the trimmer scraps)
Shutter
6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Bundle press stage up down control
The bundle press stage conducts the up and down operation to convey and exit the paper by the switch back method.
The bundle press stage is moved up [7] to decrease the angle difference when receiving the paper [8] conveyed by the bundle clip from the
slope [1]. The bundle press stage exits the paper [5] to the bundle exit tray at the horizontal position [4] at the paper exit.
The bundle registration plate [6] and the bundle exit auxiliary roller [3] move up and down together with the up and down operation of the bundle
press stage.
[8]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
15ant2c057na
[1]
Slope
[2]
[3]
[4]
Bundle press stage (horizontal position)
[5]
Paper path at the paper exit
[6]
[7]
Bundle press stage (upper position)
[8]
Paper path to the bundle press stage
The registration claws [3] push in the paper to make sure that the paper is conveyed to the bundle press stage when the bundle press stage [4]
receives the paper from the bundle clip [6].
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c061na
[1]
Slope
[2]
[3]
Registration claws
[4]
Bundle press stage
[5]
Paper conveyance
[6]
Bundle clip
(1) Mechanism
The bundle press stage up down motor (M24) [12] rotates the wire winding shaft [14] and winds up the lift wire [3]. During the initial phase, the
wire is tightened and the wire arm [4] comes to the horizontal position but the bundle press stage [5] does not move up. At the time, as the
wire arm comes horizontal, the bundle registration plate wire [2] is loosened and the bundle registration plate [1] moves down and works as
the stopper against the registration operation.
Then, the bundle press stage moves up as the wire winding shaft [14] rotates and winds up the up down wire [3] and it stops when the bundle
press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) [11] turns ON.
The bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16) [15] detects the home positions (shelter position) for the bundle registration plate, and the
bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) [10] detects the home position of the bundle press stage.
The over-winding-prevention stopper [13] prevents the over winding since you can move up and down the bundle press stage manually by
rotating the knob [9].
PM -46

SECTION

[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[1]
[11]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[8]
[6]
15ant2c056na
[1]
[2]
Bundle registration plate wire
[3]
Lift wire
[4]
Wire arm
[5]
Bundle press stage
[6]
Bundle exit auxiliary roller arm
[7]
[8]
[9]
Jam clearing knob
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
Over-winding-prevention stopper
[14]
Wire winding shaft
[15]
(2) Control
(a) Trimming mode
The bundle press stage up down motor (M24) rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle press stage [2] when the main body
start signal [1] turns ON. M24 stops while holding the bundle press stage in slanting position when the bundle press stage up down limit
sensor (PS45) turns ON [3].
M24 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle press stage [5] after the bundle clip releases the paper, the bundle
registration motor (M12) assists the paper conveyance operation, and the bundle press movement motor (M17) conveys the paper to the
paper conveyance position [4]. M24 stops when the bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) turns ON [6].
M24 starts to rotate in the forward direction and moves up the bundle registration plate [8] to open the paper path to the trimmer section
when the bundle press motor (M23) completes the paper press operation [7] after the registration operation.
M24 moves up the bundle press stage [10] for the subsequent set when M12 completes the paper exit [9].
[7]
Bundle press
movement
motor (M17)
Bundle press
motor (M23)
Bundle registration motor
(M12)
[9]
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Bundle press stage Forward

up down motor
(M24)
Reverse
Bundle press stage
up down home sensor (PS35)
Bundle press stage
up down limit sensor (PS45)
Bundle registration
plate home sensor (PS16)
[1] [2] [3]
[4][5][6]
[8]
[10]
15ant2e100na
[1]
[2]
Bundle press stage moved up
[3]
Stopped at the upper limit
[4]
Paper conveyance assisting operation completed
[5]
Bundle press stage moved down
[6]
[7]
Paper press operation completed
[8]
Bundle registration plate moved up
PM -47

SECTION

[9]
[10]
* Only for paper of 297mm or more (before folding)
(b) No trimming mode

The bundle press stage up down motor (M24) rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle press stage [2] when the main body
start signal [1] turns ON. M24 stops while holding the bundle press stage in slanting position when the bundle press stage up down upper
limit sensor (PS45) turns ON [3].
M24 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle press stage [5] after the bundle clip releases the paper, the bundle
registration motor (M12) assists the paper conveyance operation, and the bundle press movement motor (M17) conveys the paper to the
paper conveyance position [4]. M24 stops when the bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) turns ON [6].
M24 moves up the bundle press stage [8] for the subsequent set when M12 completes the paper exit [7].
[7]
Bundle press
movement
motor (M17)
Bundle press
motor (M23)
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Bundle registra- Forward

tion motor
Reverse
(M12)
Forward
Bundle press
stage up down
motor (M24)
Reverse
down home sensor (PS35)
down limit sensor (PS45)
home sensor (PS16)
[1] [2] [3]
[4][5][6]
[8]
15ant2e101na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Stopped at the upper limit
[4]
Paper conveyance assisting operation completed
[5]
Bundle press stage moved down
[6]
[7]
[8]
6.3.2 Bundle press movement control

The bundle press movement is the mechanism to convey the paper to the trimmer section by pressing the paper with the press section to
prevent the trimming skew at the trimmer operation after the paper registration operation.
(1) Mechanism
The bundle press movement motor (M17) drives the bundle press section [9] in the main scan direction.
When receiving the paper with the bundle press stage [2], the bundle press section [9] moves 100mm backward from the home position to
obtain the paper conveyance path.
When conducting the bundle registration operation, the bundle press section moves to the appropriate position in accordance with the paper
size.
The bundle press movement home sensor (PS36) [3] detects the home position of the bundle press section.
When the bundle press section moves to the home position, the metal plate [7] gets down the actuator [6] for the trimmer registration sensor
(PS55) [8] and obtains the paper conveyance path.
The bundle sensor /4 (PS54) [10] is for the paper jam detection.
[9]
[8]
[10]
[1]
[8]
[6]
[5]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[4]
[3]
15ant2c058na
[1]
Actuator
[2]
Bundle press stage
[3]
[4]
Actuator
PM -48

SECTION

[5]
[6]
[7]
Metal plate
[8]
Actuator
[9]
Bundle press section
[10]
(2) Control
(a) Trimming mode
The bundle press movement motor (M17) rotates in the reverse direction to move the bundle press section to the paper conveyance
position [2] after specified period of time since the bundle clip motor (M11) starts conveying the paper [1]. Then M17 rotates in the forward
direction to move the bundle press section to the appropriate press standby position in accordance with the paper size [3].
M17 rotates in the reverse direction and searches for the press position [6] for the paper when the bundle press stage up down home
sensor (PS35) detects that the bundle press stage has been moved down [5]. M17 stops the bundle press section at the appropriate
position in accordance with the paper size [7] after a specified period of time since the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) turns OFF.
M17 searches the home position [8] and then moves the bundle press section to the paper trimming position [9] after a specified period of
time since the bundle press motor (M23) completes the paper press operation.
The bundle press section is returned to the home position [10] after a specified period of time since the trimming operation is completed.
[1]
Bundle clip
motor (M11)
[2] [3] [4][6] [7]
[8] [9]
[10]
Forward
Reverse
Bundle press
movement
motor (M17)
Bundle press
motor (M23)
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse

home sensor (PS36)
Trimmer registration sensor
(PS55)
Bundle press stage up down
home sensor (PS35)
[5]
15ant2e102na
[1]
[2]
Moved to the paper conveyance position
[3]
Moved to the press standby position
[4]
Home position detected
[5]
Bundle press stage moving down completed
[6]
Searching the press position
[7]
Press position stop
[8]
[9]
Moved to the trimming position
[10]
(b) No trimming mode

The bundle press movement motor (M17) rotates in the reverse direction to move the bundle press section to the paper conveyance
position [2] after a specified period of time since the bundle clip motor (M11) starts conveying the paper [1]. Then M17 rotates in the forward
direction to move the bundle press section to the appropriate press position in accordance with the paper size [3].
M17 rotates in the forward direction to return the bundle press section to the home position [5] when the bundle press stage up down home
sensor (PS35) detects that the bundle press stage has been moved down [4].
[1]
Bundle clip
motor (M11)
Bundle press
movement
motor (M17)
[2]
[3]
[5]
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse

home sensor (PS36)
Bundle press stage up down
home sensor (PS35)
[4]
15ant2e103na
[1]
[2]
Moved to the shelter position
[3]
Moved to the press position
[4]
Bundle press stage up down home position
[5]
Returning operation to the home position
6.3.3 Bundle press control

The bundle press is the mechanism to hold the paper during trim operation to prevent the trimming skew after the paper registration operation.
PM -49

SECTION
(1) Mechanism
The bundle press plates /Up [1] and /Lw [15] hold the paper. The bundle press plate /Up is pulled to the bundle press plate /Lw [15] (to the
direction to hold and press the paper) by the spring [13] via the press wires /Rt [2] and /Lt [12]. The bundle press plate /Up [1] moves down
with the force of the spring [13] when the bundle press motor (M23) [5] rotates the wire winding shaft [4] and releases the release wires /Rt [3]
and /Lt [6]. The force of the spring presses the paper.
When M23 keeps rotating, the press wire /Lt [6] is loosened and the bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47) [8] turns OFF by the actuator [9]
due to the spring [10], and then the paper press position is detected.
The wire winding shaft [4] winds the release wires /Rt [3] and /Lt [6] to move up the bundle press plate /Up [1] for releasing the press the
paper [16] when M23 rotates in reverse.
The bundle press home sensor (PS37) [11] detects the home position of the bundle press plate /Up [1].
[12]
[13]
[1]
[11]
[10]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[14]
[16]
[15]
15ant2c059nb
[1]
Bundle press plate /Up
[2]
Press wire /Rt
[3]
Release wire /Rt
[4]
Wire winding shaft
[5]
[6]
Release wire /Lt
[7]
[8]
[9]
Actuator
[10]
Spring
[11]
[12]
Press wire /Lt
[13]
Spring
[14]
Bundle press plate /Up (down)
[15]
Bundle press plate /Lw
[16]
Bundle press plate /Up (up)
(2) Control
The bundle press motor (M23) rotates in the forward direction to conduct the paper press operation [2] to press the paper properly when the
bundle press movement motor (M17) completes the press position search [1]. M23 rotates in the reverse direction to move up the bundle
press plate /Up slightly to prevent the paper from becoming loose [4] when the bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47) detects the lower limit
[3] and turns OFF.
M23 rotates in the forward direction to press the paper [5] after a specified period of time since the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) detects
the completion of the registration operation.
M23 rotates in the reverse direction to return the bundle press plate /Up to the home position [7] when the trimmer blade motor (M31)
completes the paper trimming operation [6].
[1][2]
Bundle press
movement
motor (M17)
Bundle press
motor (M23)
[5]
[7]
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
sensor (PS55)
Bundle press home
sensor (PS37)
Bundle press lower
limit sensor (PS47)
[3][4]
[1]
[6]
Searching the press position completed
15ant2e105na
[2]
PM -50
Press operation

SECTION

[3]
Lower limit detected
[4]
Press release
[5]
Press
[6]
Trimming completed
[7]
6.3.4 Bundle registration control

The paper registration operation reforms the skew at trimming.
(1) Mechanism
The bundle registration motor (M12) drives the registration claws [4].
2 registration claws [4] conduct the registration by making the paper [14] contact [3] with the bundle registration plate [13] from the gutter side.
In the registration operation, the bundle press section [7] conducts the pressing by moving to the appropriate position in accordance with the
paper size. To conduct the bundle registration, the registration claws [4] press the paper until the actuator [2] on the bundle press section
comes in the upright position and the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) [1] turns ON.
The bundle exit claws [9] are located at the 180 degrees opposite to the registration claws on the belt. M12 rotates in the reverse direction
[10] to exit the paper at the paper exit.
The home position of the registration claws [4] is detected when the registration claws push the actuator [11] and turns ON the bundle
registration home sensor (PS34) [12].
[14]
[1]
[2]
[13]
[3]
[4]
[12]
[11]
[5]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
15ant2c060na
[1]
[2]
Actuator
[3]
Registration direction
[4]
Registration claws
[5]
Left-side view
[6]
[7]
Bundle press section
[8]
[9]
Bundle exit claws
[10]
Drive direction of the bundle exit tabs
[11]
Actuator
[12]
[13]
[14]
Paper
(2) Control
The bundle registration motor (M12) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal turns ON [1] and the registration claws
move to the standby position in accordance with the paper size [2].
The bundle registration motor (M12) rotates in the reverse direction to conduct the paper conveyance assisting operation [4] and the preregistration operation [5] after a specified period of time since the bundle clip motor (M11) starts conveying the paper [3]. Then M12 stops
when the registration claws reach at the specified position.
M12 rotates in the reverse direction and conducts the registration operation [7] with the registration claws when the bundle press motor (M23)
completes the press releasing operation [6]. The registration claws stop when the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) turns ON [8].
M12 rotates in the forward direction to move the registration claws to the specified shelter position [10] when M23 completes the press
operation [9].
M12 rotates in the forward direction to let the bundle exit claws push the paper to conduct the paper exit operation [12] after a specified period
of time since the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes the trimming operation [11]. M12 stops when the bundle registration home sensor
(PS34) turns ON [13]. M12 rotates in the reverse direction to move the bundle exit claws to the standby position [14] after a specified period of
time. Then it stands by for the subsequent set.
PM -51

SECTION

[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[9][10]
[12]
[14]
Forward
Bundle clip
motor (M11)
Reverse
Forward
Bundle press
motor (M23)
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
sensor (PS55)
Bundle registration
home sensor (PS34)
[1]
[7] [8]
[13]
[11]
15ant2e106 na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Conveyance by the bundle clip started
[4]
Assist of the paper conveyance
[5]
Pre-registration
[6]
Press release
[7]
Registration
[8]
Registration operation completed
[9]
[10]
Shelter operation
[11]
Trimming completed
[12]
Paper exit operation
[13]
[14]
6.3.5 Bundle exit control

(1) Mechanism
(a) Bundle exit mechanism
The paper is exited to the bundle exit tray [12].
The paper exited to the bundle exit tray is conveyed to the front by the bundle exit conveyance belt [1] and stacked.
The bundle exit motor (M5) [5] drives the bundle exit conveyance belt [1] via the bundle exit drive belt [4] and the bundle exit belt drive shaft
[3].
M5 drives the bundle exit conveyance belt for a specified period of time to convey the paper to the front [13] for every paper exit. The
bundle exit tray is expandable.
The bundle tray set sensor (PS58) [9] detects whether the bundle exit tray is stored or not.
M5 also drives the scrap press plate [11]. In each drive path from M5 to the bundle exit drive belt and the scraps press plate, there is a oneway clutch respectively that switches the rotational direction of M5. Therefore, the bundle exit drive and the scraps press plate are not
driven simultaneously.
[12]
[13]
[1]
[2]
[11]
[3]
[10]
[4]
[9]
[5]
[8]
[6]
[7]
15ant2c062na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Bundle exit belt drive shaft
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Scraps box set sensor (PS40)
[8]
Scraps press claws
[9]
Bundle tray set sensor (PS58)
[10]
[11]
Scraps press plate
[12]
Bundle exit tray
PM -52

SECTION

[13]
(b) Bundle exit tray expanding mechanism

The bundle exit tray is expandable. The folded bundle exit conveyance belt [6] is also expanded [1] when the bundle exit tray is expanded.
At the time, it also moves the bundle exit conveyance belt drive shaft [5] for the bundle exit conveyance belt [1] and [6].
[5]
[6]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15ant2c063na
[1]
Bundle exit conveyance belt (expanded)
[2]
Folding stand
[3]
Drive shaft
[4]
[5]
Bundle exit conveyance belt drive shaft
[6]
Bundle exit conveyance belt (folded)
(c) Trimmer scraps press mechanism

Trimmer scraps press is executed by driving the bundle exit motor (M5). M[5 drives the pins [10] via the scraps press claws [4] on the belt
[5] to move the scraps press plate [2] forward [1], then the plate presses the trimmer scraps. The spring [11] pushes the scraps press plate
to put it back.
The trimmer scraps press is carried out when the actuator [8] turns ON the scraps press home sensor (PS48) [9] with the press position [3]
of the scraps press plate is at the home position
The maximum displacement of the scraps press plate is 200mm.
The trimmer scraps press is carried out when the trim is performed 5 times or when the total trimmed number of sheets becomes 60 sheets
(30 sheets before folding) or more.
[11]
[10]
[9]
[1]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
15ant2c064nb
[1]
[2]
Scraps press plate
[3]
Press position
[4]
Scraps press claws
PM -53

SECTION

[5]
Belt
[6]
Scraps press plate home position (trimming position)
[7]
Backmost position
[8]
Actuator
[9]
[10]
Pin
[11]
Spring
(d) Shutter mechanism

When the bundle exit motor (M5) moves the scraps press claw [5] backward and the spring [10] pushes the scraps press plate [2] to its
backmost position [4], the shutter arm [6] is pushed up and the shutter [9] is opened. On the other hand, the shutter is closed when the
scraps press plate is moved forward from the back most position to the position [3] by the spring of the shutter arm.
Opening the shutter allows the guide sheet [7], which is attached to the shutter, to be straightened [8] due to the tension. Closing the shutter
allows slack in the guide sheet to widen the dropping path of scraps.
Before trimming, the scraps press plate moves 50mm [3] from the backmost position and stops to be ready for trimming.
The shutter repeats opening/closing operation by shuttling the scraps press plate 50mm back and forth in each trimming operation. This
shutter operation creates vibration with the guide sheet to shake off the trimmer scraps.
[8]
[9]
[10]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
15ant2c117na
[1]
[2]
Scraps press plate
[3]
Shutter closing position
[4]
Shutter opening position
[5]
Scraps press claws
[6]
Shutter arm
[7]
Guide sheet
[8]
Guide sheet (straightened)
[9]
Shutter
[10]
Spring
(2) Trimmer scraps removal control

The scraps removal fan motor (FM1) [3] blows air [4] to make sure to put the trimmer scraps to the scraps box.
[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[1]
15ant2c115na
[1]
Left-side view
[2]
[3]
[4]
Air
[5]
Bundle press
[6]
Bundle clip
PM -54

SECTION
The trimmer scraps removal fan (FM1) operates only in the trimmer mode.
When the main body start signal [1] turns ON, FM1 is rotated and the bundle clip releases [2] the paper, FM1 stops for a time to prevent the
paper from having the uneven edge. When the bundle press motor (M23) completes the paper press [3], FM1 is rotated again to send air so
that sheet trimming scraps get in the scraps box without fail.
Bundle press
motor (M23)
Forward
Reverse
Scraps removal fan

motor (FM1)
Bundle clip lower
limit sensor (PS30)
[1]
[2]
[3]
15ant2c116na
[1]
[2]
[3]
Bundle clip released the paper
(3) Bundle exit control

The bundle exit motor (M5) rotates in the forward direction and the bundle exit conveyance belt conveys the exit paper [2] after a specified
period of time since the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes the trimming [1]. M5 stops after a specified period of time since the bundle exit
sensor /2 (PS57) detects the trailing edge of paper [3].
[2]
Bundle exit
motor (M5)
Forward
Reverse

[1]
[3]
15ant2e107na
[1]
Trimming completed
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
Bundle exit conveyance
15ant2c114na
Bundle paper exit sensor /2 (PS57)
(4) Shutter/trimmer scraps press control

When the trimming is executed with the shutter closed, the bundle exit motor (M5) starts rotating forward to exit paper [1]. Then the scraps
press plate moves backward to drop the trimmer scraps with the shutter opened [2]. After a specified period of time since the paper exit is
finished [3], the M5 motor rotates in reverse to move the scraps press plate frontward 50mm and stops [4] with the shutter closed. Then the
next trimming is excused in this condition.
After a specified period of time from paper exit when the trimming is performed 5 times or when the total trimmed number of sheets becomes
60 sheets or more after the previous scraps press operation [5], the M5 motor starts rotating in reverse to start the press operation [6]. When
the press operation is started, the shutter opened by the paper exit operation is closed again [7]. When the scraps press home sensor (PS48)
is ON (at the position where pressing trimmer scraps), the M5 motor stops [8] and next operation of the trimming and paper exit [9] is
performed.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Bundle exit
motor (M5)
[5][6][7]
[9]
Forward
Reverse
Scraps press home

sensor (PS48)
[8]
15ant2e118na
[1]
Start of paper exit
[2]
Shutter is opened
[3]
Finish of paper ejection
[4]
Shutter is closed
PM -55

SECTION

[5]
Finish of paper ejection
[6]
Start of press operation
[7]
Shutter is closed
[8]
Press position stop
[9]
Paper exit
(5) Bundle exit paper full control

The bundle tray paper full sensor (PS61) [1] detects the bundle exit paper full. The main body displays the message on its operation panel
when the paper full is detected.
[1]
[1]
15ant2c109na
(6) Trimmer scraps full control

The trimmer scraps full sensor (PS41) detects the paper scraps full of the scraps box. When the PS 41 is turned ON for 3 seconds after the
paper exit operation driven by the bundle exit motor (M5) is finished, the scraps are detected as full. The main body displays the message on
its operation panel when the scrap full is detected.
(7) Trimmer scraps tray set detection

The scraps box set sensor (PS40) detects whether the scraps box is set or not. The main body displays the message on its operation panel
when the scraps box is not set.
PM -56
PM THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506 > 7. TRIMMER SECTION
7. TRIMMER SECTION
7.1 Configuration
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
a0h2t2c001ca
[1]
Trimmer press plate
[2]
Trimmer board
[3]
Trimmer blade
[4]
Trimmer paddle
7.2 Drive
7.2.1 Trimmer press drive
[11]
[1]
[10]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a0h2t2c002ca
[1]
Trimmer brake
[2]
Planetary gear
[3]
Slide guide shaft
[4]
Nut
[5]
Press drive screw
[6]
Trimmer press plate
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Planetary gear
7.2.2 Trimmer blade drive

Previous trimmer unit
PM -57
[17]
[16]
[1]
[15]
[14]
[2]
[3]
[13]
[4]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7] [6]
[5]
a0h2t2c003ca
New trimmer unit
[16]
[14]
[17]
[15]
[1]
[2]
[13]
[3]
[12]
[4]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7] [6]
[5]
[1]
[2]
Trimmer blade
[3]
Guide shaft
[4]
Guide hole
[5]
Trimmer blade retaining plate
[6]
Spring
[7]
[8]
[9]
Movable pulley
[10]
[11]
[12]
Wire
[13]
Torque limiter
[14]
[15]
Planetary gear
[16]
Winding pulley
[17]
Planetary gear
PM -58
7.2.3 Trimmer board drive

[1]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[5]
a0h2t2c004ca
[1]
[2]
One-way clutch
[3]
Pinion
[4]
Feed rack
[5]
Trimmer board
[6]
[7]
Actuator
[8]
7.2.4 Paddle drive
[1]
[3]
[2]
a0h2t2c005ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Trimmer paddle
7.3 Operation
7.3.1 Trimmer press control
(1) Mechanism
The trimmer press is the mechanism to hold the paper at its fore-edge side to prevent the trimming misalignment.
It opens about 6mm at the home position and drives the planetary gears [2] and [11] by the driving of the trimmer press motor (M32) [7]. The
output shaft of the planetary gear rotates the press drive screw (trapezoidal screw) [5] and drives the nut [4] up and down. By this operation,
the trapezoidal nut drives the trimmer press retaining plate [6] along the shaft [3] and presses paper. M32 detects the completion of the paper
press via overcurrent.
M32 rotates in the reverse direction to widen the opening to approximately 20mm before conveying the paper to the trimmer section, in case
the number of the print paper is 16 or more (32 or more for the saddle stitched paper).
The trimmer press home sensor (PS53) [8] and the trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) [9] detect the home position and 20mm of
opening respectively.
The brake solenoid (SD12) [10] drives the trimmer brake [1]. It presses the timing belt from M32 with ON to prevent the inverse rotation
caused by the pushing of the trimmer blade.
PM -59
[11]
[1]
[10]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a0h2t2c006ca
[1]
Trimmer brake
[2]
Planetary gear
[3]
Slide guide shaft
[4]
Nut
[5]
Press drive screw (trapezoidal screw)
[6]
Trimmer press plate
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Planetary gear
When changing the trimming position of the trimmer board or replacing the trimmer board via the I/O check mode, M32 rotates in the reverse
direction to move up the trimmer press section higher than the position of the trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) and release the trimmer
board [3] by pushing the shaft [1] of the trimmer board fixing plate [2] to the upper plate. At the time, the opening is approximately 23mm. The
position is detected via overcurrent.
[3]
[1]
[2]
a0h2t2c007ca
[1]
Shaft
[2]
[3]
Trimmer board
Trimmer board fixing plate
(2) Control
(a) The number of the print paper is 16 or more (32 or more for the saddle stitched paper)
The trimmer press motor (M32) rotates in the reverse direction [2] when the bundle clip motor starts conveying the paper [1]. When the
trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) [3] detects upper limit position of the trimmer board, M32 opens the opening to 20mm and is
stopped to wait for the paper.
When the conveyance of the bundle press movement motor (M17) completes [4], M32 rotates in the forward direction to press paper and
stops when detecting the over current of M32 [5]. The brake solenoid (SD12) turns ON when M32 stops, and keeps the belt to prevent the
trimmer press board from being pushed up by the trimmer blade.
When the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes trimming [6], SD12 turns OFF [7] and M32 rotates in the reverse direction to start opening
[8]. When the print is completed, the returning operation to the home position [9] of M32 stops by PS53 ON.
PM -60
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[8]

Forward
Bundle press
movement
motor (M17)
Reverse
Forward
Trimmer press
motor (M32)
Reverse
Forward
Trimmer blade
motor (M31)
Reverse
Trimmer press upper

limit sensor (PS52)
Trimmer press
home sensor (PS53)
[3]
[6] [7]
[9]
a0h2t2e008ca
[1]
Conveyance by the bundle clip started
[2]
Opening operation
[3]
Stopped when the opening is approx. 20mm
[4]
Conveyance of the trimmed paper completed
[5]
Trimmer press completed
[6]
Trimming completed
[7]
Brake release
[8]
Opening operation started
[9]
(b) The number of the print paper is 15 or less (30 for the saddle stitched paper)
The trimmer press motor (M32) rotates in the forward direction to press the paper without widening the opening when the paper is
conveyed to the opening.
7.3.2 Trimmer blade control

(1) Mechanism
The trimmer blade [3] driven by the trimmer blade motor (M31) [15] conducts the trimming while trimmer press presses the paper.
When the trimmer blade [3] goes up, M31 drives the winding pulley [18] in the direction of winding [17] to wind up the wire [13]. The planetary
gears [16] and [19] are between M31 and the winding pulley [18] and it enables the high output by high gear ratio.
Once the wire [13] is winded up, the trimmer blade retaining plate [6] goes up in a slanting direction since the movable pulley is pulled and the
guide hole [5] is controlled by the guide shaft [4]. It trims the paper with the trimmer blade [3] attached on the trimmer blade retaining plate [6].
The completion of the trimming is detected when the upper surface of the trimmer blade retaining plate [6] pushes up the actuator [2] and the
trimmer completion sensor (PS62) [1] turns ON. When PS62 cannot detect it, the overcurrent of M31 detects the completion of the trimming. If
the overcurrent of M31 is not detected even if the trimmer blade keeps moving up, the trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) [9] detects the
upper limit.
For moving down the trimmer blade, M31 rotates in the reverse direction to loosen the wire and the spring [7] lowers the trimmer blade
retaining plate [6]. The trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) [8] detects the lower limit. The torque limiter is equipped to prevent the wire from
being slacking inertially when moving down. Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) [11] detects the slack of the wire.
Previous trimmer unit
[19]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[1]
[15]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[14]
[5]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8] [7]
[6]
a0h2t2c009ca
New trimmer unit
PM -61
[18]
[19]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[14]
[4]
[13]
[5]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8] [7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
Actuator
[3]
Trimmer blade
[4]
Guide shaft
[5]
Guide hole
[6]
Trimmer blade retaining plate
[7]
Spring
[8]
[9]
[10]
Movable pulley
[11]
[12]
[13]
Wire
[14]
Torque limiter
[15]
[16]
Planetary gear
[17]
Winding direction
[18]
Winding pulley
[19]
Planetary gear
(2) Control
The trimmer blade motor (M31) starts trimming when the trimmer press motor (M32) completes the press and stops [1]. M31 stops when the
trimming completes with the trimmer completion sensor (PS62) ON [2].
M31 starts the returning operation to the home position [4] when the bundle press motor (M17) starts releasing the press [3]. M31 stops when
the trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) turns ON [5].
[1]
Bundle press
movement
motor (M17)
Trimmer press
motor (M32)
Trimmer blade
motor (M31)
[3]
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Trimmer completion
sensor (PS62)
Trimmer blade
home sensor (PS50)
[2]
[4]
[5]
a0h2t2e010ca
[1]
Trimming started when trimmer press completed
[2]
Trimming completed
[3]
Paper exit operation started
[4]
[5]
PM -62
7.3.3 Trimmer board control

(1) Mechanism
If the trimmer board gets the trimmer blade to the same position many times, the trimmer operation is carried out improperly due to the
damage on the board. For this reason, the trimmer board is slid 1mm backward for sheet cutting each time a job of 700 times trimming is
completed.
The trimmer board solenoid (SD11) [6] slides the trimmer board [5] to backward with its fixing released by the trimmer press motor (M32).
The pinion [3] pushes the feed rack [4] 0.5mm every time SD11 turns ON. The rotation of the pinion [3] is transmitted to the rack by the oneway clutch [2] and pushes the trimmer board when SD2 turns ON. The pinion [3] does not rotate and push the trimmer board when SD11
turns OFF by the one-way clutch.
Each time a job of 700 times trimming is completed, SD11 is turned on twice to move the trimmer board 1mm. The trimmer board can be slid
up to approximately 26mm. The main body displays the message on its operation panel when the trimmer board replacement sensor (PS59)
[8] is turned ON by the actuator [7]. The trimmer operation is prohibited when the trimming is conducted 700 times since PS59 turns ON.
Note
The operation timing of the trimmer board solenoid can be selected among 500/300/700 (700 by default), and the travel distance
can be selected among 1.0/1.5/2.0mm (1.0 by default) from "Finisher Adjustment" in service mode.
If 1050, if the DIPSW22-5 setting in service mode is changed to 1, the operation timing of the trimmer board solenoid becomes
selectable among 700/500/300 (700 by default) on the adjustment screen in the user mode.
The burr occurs on the trimmed edge of the paper before the movement cycle of the trimmer board and that depends on the
paper type.
[1]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[5]
a0h2t2c011ca
[1]
[2]
One-way clutch
[3]
Pinion
[4]
Feed rack
[5]
Trimmer board
[6]
[7]
Actuator
[8]
(2) Control
The trimmer press motor (M32) starts the returning operation [2] to the home position when the 700th trimmer operation [1] is completed. M32
does not stop by defection of the trimmer press home sensor (PS53) [3]. The opening keeps widening until the overcurrent of M32 is detected
[4]. When M32 stops, the trimmer board solenoid (SD11) turns ON/OFF twice [5] to move the trimmer board 1mm. Then, M32 starts the
returning operation to the home position [6].
[4] [5]
[6]

(SD11)
Trimmer press
motor (M32)
Trimmer blade
motor (M31)
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Trimmer press upper limit

sensor (PS52)
Trimmer press home
sensor (PS53)
[1]
[2]
[3]
15ant2e113na
[1]
700th trimmer operation
[2]
Opening operation of the trimmer press
[3]
[4]
Overcurrent of M32 detected
[5]
Trimmer board moved 1mm
[6]
7.3.4 Trimmer paddle control

(1) Mechanism
The trimmer paddle [2] is provided to prevent the saddle-stitched paper from creating trails with scraps by getting into the paper during the
press operation, and to drop the scraps forcibly. The trimmer paddle motor (M33) drives the trimmer paddle.
PM -63
Trimming amount is 15mm or less: M33 rotates forward [1] to drop [3] the trimming scraps with the trimming paddle. Trimming amount is more
than 15mm: The M33 motor rotates in the reverse direction [5] to rake and to drop the scraps to the wider dropping path [4].
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
a0h2t2c012ca
[1]
Trimmer paddle motor (M33) forward direction
[2]
Trimmer paddle
[3]
Dropping path (Trimming amount is 15mm or less)
[4]
Dropping path (Trimming amount is more than 15mm)
[5]
Trimmer paddle motor (M33) reverse direction
(2) Control
In trimming mode, the trimmer paddle motor (M33) starts forward/reverse rotation after the bundle clip motor (M11) operates paper clipping,
and then the M33 motor stops when the trimming JOB is finished.
If the trimming amount value is specified by the "Trimming adjustment" in service mode, the forward/reverse rotation of motor is controlled by
the trimming amount that adds the adjusted value. (Edges of standard-sized paper are trimmed by 3mm even when the adjustment value is
specified to 0.)
PM -64
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 > 1. OUTLINE
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503

1. OUTLINE
[7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
a15xt1c001ca
[1]
Conveyance section
[2]
Cover paper table section
[3]
Cover paper supply section
[4]
Book stock section
[5]
Glue tank section
[6]
[7]
Pellet supply section
[8]
Sub compile (SC) section
[9]
Clamp section
PN -1
1.2 Paper path

1.2.1 Sub tray exit
[1]
[2]
a15xt1c002ca
[1]
Sub tray exit
[2]
Exit from the FD sub tray
1.2.2 Perfect binding mode

(1) Conveyance of inside papers to the clamp section and conveyance of cover paper
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a15xt1c003ca
[1]
Conveyance of inside paper
[2]
Conveyance of cover paper from the main body
[3]
Conveyance of cover paper from the PB tray
[4]
Switchback conveyance
PN -2
(2) Clamping and glue application
[2]
[1]
a15xt1c004ca
[1]
[2]
Bypass conveyance
(3) Glue application to cover paper and cover paper folding operation
[1]
a15xt1c005ca
[1]
PN -3
(4) Book stock
[2]
[1]
[1]
a15xt1c006ca
Moving to the second row
[2]
Paper exit of the book
1.2.3 Relay conveyance mode
[1]
a15xt1c007ca
[1]
Coupling exit
PN -4
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 > 2. CONVEYANCE

SECTION
2.1 Configuration
[16]
[18]
[15]
[17]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[14]
[5]
[13]
[6]
[12]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[11]
[10]
a075t2c001ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Sub tray gate
[4]
[5]
Entrance gate
[6]
Cover paper entrance sensor (PS3)
[7]
[8]
Cover paper multi-feed detection board /1 (MFDTB71)
[9]
Cover paper multi-feed detection board /2 (MFDTB72)
[10]
[11]
Cover paper feed roller
[12]
Cover paper conveyance roller
[13]
Entrance conveyance roller
[14]
[15]
Bypass gate
[16]
[17]
Sub tray
[18]
PN -5

SECTION
2.2 Drive
2.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive/Intermediate conveyance drive/Cover paper conveyance drive
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a075t2c002ca
[1]
[2]
Registration roller (to the cover paper supply section)
[3]
Paper feed roller (to the cover paper supply section)
[4]
[5]
2.2.2 Entrance gate drive/Bypass gate drive/Sub tray gate drive/Sub tray exit and separation drive
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a075t2c003ca
PN -6

SECTION

[1]
[2]
[3]
Sub tray gate
[4]
[5]
Entrance gate
[6]
[7]
Bypass gate
[8]
Paper exit driven roller
2.3 Operation
2.3.1 Gate control
(1) Entrance gate control
The entrance gate switches the paper path for the cover paper used for perfect binding so that the paper conveyed from the main body,
PI-PFU *1 or the PI of FD is conveyed to the cover paper table section.
The entrance gate solenoid (SD1) activates the gate. When the SD1 turns OFF, the gate is opened to convey the cover paper toward the
sub tray gate, and when the SD1 turns ON, the gate is changed to make a paper path toward the cover paper table section.
The SD1 turns OFF while the inside paper for perfect binding is conveyed, relay conveyed, or exited on the sub tray. It turns ON while
cover paper is conveyed from the main body, PI-PFU*1, or PI of FD.
*1 1200/1200P only.
(a) When cover paper being conveyed from the main body
1. When a print job is received, the entrance gate solenoid (SD1) turns OFF [1] to open the entrance gate toward the sub tray gate.
2. Cover paper is conveyed through the entrance gate [2].
3. When the paper exit sensor of the previous device (main body or post processing machine)detects the leading edge of the cover paper,
the SD1 turns ON to switch the entrance gate direction toward the cover table section [4].
4. Once a prescribed time period has elapsed after the cover paper entrance sensor (PS3) detects the trailing edge of cover paper [4], the
SD1 turns OFF to switch the entrance gate direction toward the sub tray gate for conveying paper to the SC section.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Paper exit sensor

Cover paper entrance
sensor (PS3)
[4]
[1]
[2]
Paper conveyance
[3]
Cover paper leading edge detection
[4]
Cover paper trailing edge detection
(2) Sub tray gate control

The sub tray gate is provided for switching the path to the SC section which conveys the inside paper for the perfect binding and the relay
conveyance paper and the path to the sub tray paper exit.
The sub tray gate solenoid (SD3) activates the sub tray gate. When the SD3 is OFF, the gate is opened toward the SC section, and when
the SD3 becomes ON, the gate direction is switched toward the sub tray to exit inside papers.
While inside papers are exit on the sub tray, the SD3 turns ON upon receiving a print job, and turns OFF when the job is finished.

The SC section is designed to stack a certain number of inside papers (n) of the subsequent book while the pages of previous book is
glued at the clamp section. The bypass gate [3] operates to lay next 2 sheets of inside paper ("n+1"th and "n+2"th) one on top of another
and keep them until the stacked "n"th sheet of inside paper at the SC section is conveyed to the clamp section [1]. It saves time for
conveying the inside paper and increases productivity.
The bypass gate solenoid (SD2) activates the bypass gate.
The bypass gate is not driven in the relay conveyance mode.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
a075t2c005ca
PN -7

SECTION

[1]
Paper bundle from the first page to the "n"th page of the
2nd and subsequent copies
[2]
"n+1"th paper of subsequent book
[3]
Bypass gate
[4]
"n+2"th paper of subsequent book
(a) Control
1. The bypass gate solenoid (SD2) turns ON when a specified period of time has elapsed after the SC entrance sensor (PS2) detects the
trailing edge [1] of the "n+1"th inside paper of subsequent book.
2. The solenoid turns OFF when a prescribed time period has elapsed after the n+2th inside paper is laid over the "n+1"th inside paper,
and the SC entrance sensor (PS2) detects the trailing edge of the "n+2"th inside paper [2].
[1]
[2]

a075t2e006ca
[1]
Detection of trailing edge of n+1th paper of

subsequent book
[2]
Detection of trailing edge of "n+2"th paper
2.3.2 Entrance conveyance control

The entrance conveyance motor (M1) drives the entrance conveyance roller, sub tray conveyance roller, main body cover paper
conveyance roller, and the cover paper conveyance roller. The drive force is transmitted via the gear and the timing belt.
(1) Perfect binding mode

(a) When feeding cover paper from the PB cover paper tray
The entrance conveyance motor (M1) starts to turn at high speed upon receiving a print job.
The M1 stops when the JOB is finished.
(b) When feeding cover paper from the main body

1. When detecting that the print start signal turns ON, the entrance conveyance motor (M1) turns ON [1] (starts to turn at high speed).
2. When the main body paper exit sensor is turned ON [4] by the leading edge of the cover paper, the M1 starts to turn at the same speed
as the main unit. *1
3. Upon detection of the trailing edge of the cover paper by the main body paper exit sensor, the M1 starts to turn at high speed [5] to
convey the paper.
*1 1051 only. The speed of M1 is not switched for C8000/1200/1200P/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[5]

Cover paper entrance sensor
(PS3)
High speed
Entrance conveyance
Main body
motor (M1)
speed
[3]
[1]
[2]
Paper
[3]
Change of main body process speed
[4]
Change to the same speed as the main unit
[5]
Change to high speed rotation
(2) Sub tray paper exit mode/Relay conveyance mode

(a) Large-size double-sided mode, single-sided main body straight mode (320mm or longer in the sub scan
direction)
1. The entrance conveyance motor (M1) starts to turn at high speed [1] upon receiving a print job, and starts to decelerate [2] in
accordance with the main body process speed when the main body exit sensor detects the leading edge of paper. *1
2. After turning OFF the fusing exit sensor, switches M1 to the high speed rotation.
[1]
[2]

High speed
Entrance conveyance
Main body
motor (M1)
speed
[1]
[2]
PN -8
Change to the main body process speed

SECTION
(b) Small-size all modes, large-size main body reverse paper exit mode (320mm or shorter in the sub scan
direction)
When detecting that the print start signal turns ON, the entrance conveyance motor (M1) turns ON (starts to turn at high speed).
2.3.3 Intermediate conveyance control

The intermediate conveyance roller is driven by the drive force of the intermediate conveyance motor (M2) transmitted via the gear and the
timing belt.
(1) Perfect binding mode

The intermediate conveyance motor (M2) starts to rotate when a print job is received.
(2) Sub tray paper exit mode

The intermediate conveyance motor (M2) does not work.
(3) Relay conveyance mode

The intermediate conveyance motor (M2) starts to rotate when a print job is received.
2.3.4 Cover paper conveyance control

The cover paper conveyance section and the cover paper conveyance roller are driven by the drive force of the cover paper feed motor
(M74) transmitted via the gear, timing belt, and the coupling.
The M74 stops when a prescribed time period has elapsed after the cover paper conveyance sensor /4 (PS78) detects the trailing edge of
the cover paper.
For details of the feeding operation, refer to PN.7. COVER PAPER SUPPLY SECTION.
2.3.5 Sub tray paper exit release control

The sub tray release operation is performed to align edges of papers exit onto the sub tray.
The sub tray exit solenoid (SD4) activates the operation. The sub tray exit roller separates from the spring when the SD4 becomes On, and
the roller moves to push the spring when the SD4 turns Off.
(1) Large-size (320mm or longer in the sub scan direction)

1. When a prescribed time period has elapsed after the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the leading edge of paper [1], the sub tray exit
solenoid (SD4) turns ON to release the sub tray exit roller from the spring [2].
2. The SD4 turns OFF to make the roller push the spring [3] when a prescribed time period has elapsed after the PS1 detects the trailing
edge of the paper.
[1]
[3]

[2]
a075t2e009ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
The sub tray exit roller pushes against the spring
The sub tray exit roller separates from the spring
(2) Small-size (320mm or shorter in the sub scan direction)

1. After the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of paper, the sub tray exit solenoid (SD4) turns ON to make the sub tray exit
roller separate from the spring [1].
2. The SD4 turns OFF to make the roller push the spring [2] when a prescribed time period has elapsed after the PS1 detects the trailing
edge of the paper.
[1]
[2]

a075t2e010ca
[1]
The sub tray exit roller separates from the spring
[2]
The sub tray exit roller pushes against the spring
2.3.6 Sub tray full-status detection control

When the sub tray becomes full, the sub tray full sensor (PS5) detects the full-status.
2.3.7 Cover paper multi feed detection control

When multiple papers are conveyed from the PB cover paper tray at a time, the supersonic sensors; multi-feed detection board /S (MFDBS)
[2] and /R (MFDBR) [1] detect the error. The MFDBS transmits a supersonic wave and the MFDBR receives it.
PN -9

SECTION
[1]
[2]
a075t2c011cb
[1]
MFDBR
[2]
PN -10
MFDBS
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 > 3. SUB COMPILE (SC)

SECTION
3. SUB COMPILE (SC) SECTION

3.1 Configuration
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[17]
[6]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[16]
[15]
[11]
[12]
[14]
[13]
a075t2c021ca
[1]
Switchback roller
[2]
SC alignment plate
[3]
SC entrance roller
[4]
Pressure arm
[5]
[6]
FD alignment plate
[7]
Straight gate
[8]
Switchback roller
[9]
SC entrance roller
[10]
[11]
Pressure arm
[12]
[13]
FD alignment plate
[14]
SC stopper
[15]
SC roller
[16]
SC alignment plate
[17]
Straight gate
PN -11

SECTION
3.2 Drive
3.2.1 SC entrance conveyance drive/Switchback conveyance drive/Paper bundle conveyance drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
a075t2c022ca
[1]
[2]
SC switchback roller
[3]
[4]
SC entrance roller
[5]
SC roller
[6]
[7]
3.2.2 Switchback release drive

[12]
[13]
[1]
[11]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
a075t2c023ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
One-way clutch
[4]
Press cam
[5]
[6]
Pressure bracket
[7]
Pressure spring
[8]
Pressure plate
[9]
Switchback spring
[10]
Switchback cam
[11]
Switchback arm
[12]
One-way clutch
[13]
PN -12

SECTION
3.2.3 SC roller release drive/Clamp entrance release drive

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
a075t2c024ca
[1]
SC roller cam
[2]
[3]
Clamp entrance roller cam
[4]
[5]
Clamp entrance driven roller
[6]
SC driven roller
3.2.4 Clamp entrance movement drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
a075t2c025ca
[1]
[2]
SC roller
[3]
[4]
FD alignment plate
[5]
PN -13

SECTION
3.2.5 SC main scan alignment drive

[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
a075t2c026ca
[1]
SC alignment plate home sensor (PS14)
[2]
[3]
SC alignment plate /Fr
[4]
SC alignment plate /Rr
3.2.6 Sub scan alignment drive
[1]
[2]
a075t2c027ca
[1]
FD alignment plate
[2]
3.2.7 SC stopper drive/SC pressure arm drive/Straight gate drive

[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a075t2c028cb
[1]
[2]
SC pressure arm
[3]
SC stopper
[4]
PN -14

SECTION

[5]
Straight gate
[6]
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 SC section operation overview
The SC section is provided to stack a certain number of paper for subsequent book while papers for the previous book being glued at the
clamp section and the glue tank section.
The number of papers stacked in the SC section varies depending on the print mode and paper size.
In the relay conveyance mode, the straight gate is driven and the paper is conveyed to the relay conveyance section.
(1) Perfect binding mode overview

1. A page [2] for the first book [3] goes to the SC section and then goes to the clamp section. Once the paper [2] is set in the SC section, the
SC stopper [6] is released, and the paper is conveyed to the clamp section by the SC switchback roller [1], SC roller [5] and the clamp
entrance roller [4]. All inside papers for the first book are conveyed to the clamp section in this manner one by one.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
a15xt2c038ca
[1]
Switchback roller
[2]
Paper
[3]
Page for the first book
[4]
[5]
SC roller
[6]
SC stopper
2. When the last page of the first book reaches the clamp section, the SC stopper [5] moves back to its original position, and the SC driven
roller [2] and the clamp entrance driven roller [3] move away from their paper-feed position. A certain number of papers (n) for the next
book are stacked in the SC section by the SC switchback roller [1].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a15xt2c039ca
[1]
Switchback roller
[2]
SC driven roller
[3]
[4]
All inside papers for the first book
[5]
SC stopper
[6]
Page for the next book
3. When binding of the first book is finished, the clamp unit inclines from its upright position to receive paper for the next book. At the same
time, the SC stopper [7] moves to open the path, and the SC driven roller [1] and clamp entrance driven roller [5] go into the position to
convey the paper (n) [6] stacked in the SC section. During the above operation, the 2nd paper (n+1th [4] and n+2th [2]) are set in the
bypass gate [3].
4. The 2 sheets of paper are conveyed to the clamp section at a time.
5. The rest of the papers for the book are conveyed to the clamp section one by one in the same manner as for the first book.
PN -15

SECTION
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
a075t2c030ca
[1]
SC driven roller
[2]
"n+2"th page
[3]
Bypass gate
[4]
"n+1"th page
[5]
[6]
Paper bundle "n"
[7]
SC stopper
(2) Relay conveyance mode

1. The conveyed paper [4] is switched to the path to the relay conveyance section by the straight gate [2] and conveyed to the relay
conveyance section one by one by the switchback roller [3] that is in the high pressing mode.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
a15xt2c001ca
[1]
[2]
Straight gate
[3]
Switchback roller
[4]
Paper
PN -16

SECTION
3.3.2 Gate control of the relay conveyance

The straight gate solenoid (SD91) drives the straight gate.
The perfect binding mode keeps SD91 being OFF and does not switch the straight gate.
In the relay conveyance mode, SD91 turns ON upon receiving a print job and switches the straight gate to the path to the relay conveyance
section.
3.3.3 SC entrance conveyance control

The SC entrance roller is driven by the drive force of the SC entrance conveyance motor (M11) transmitted via the belt.
(1) Control
(a) Perfect binding mode
1. The SC entrance conveyance motor (M11) starts to turn at low speed [1] upon receiving a print job.
2. The M11 speed changes to high speed when the SC entrance sensor (PS2) detects the trailing edge of paper [2].
3. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the M11 acceleration, the M11 returns to low speed [3] before the paper goes through the SC
entrance roller.
4. The above conveyance operation is carried out for the last paper of the first book [4] and the first page [5] to the "n"th page [6] of the
next book (n=37 to 38 when the papers are A4 sized and one-side printed).
5. The M11 stops to stop the SC entrance roller when the PS2 detects [7] the trailing edge of "n+1"th page.
6. When the PS2 detects [8] "n+2"th paper trailing edge, the M11 starts to turn at high speed [9] to convey the "n+1"th and "n+2"th papers
at a time.
7. The rest of the papers for the second book are conveyed in the same manner as for the first book, and the papers for the subsequent
books are conveyed in the same manner as for the second book.
[1]
[2] [3]
[4] [5]
[6]
[7]
[8]

High
SC entrance conveyance speed
Medium
motor (M11)
speed
[9]
a075t2e031ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Change M11 to low speed
[4]
Last page of the first book
[5]
First page of the second book
[6]
"n"th page of the second book
[7]
Trailing edge detection of "n+1"th page of second book
[8]
Trailing edge detection of "n+2"th page of second book
[9]
M11 turns at high speed
(b) Relay conveyance mode

1. The SC entrance conveyance motor (M11) starts to turn at high speed upon receiving a print job [1].
2. Once the SC entrance sensor (PS2) detects [2] the leading edge of the 1st sheet, M11 switches to the speed of the main body paper
exit. *1
[1]
[2]

SC entrance
conveyance
motor (M11)
High speed
Main body paper
exit speed
a15xt2e002ca
[1]
[2]
3.3.4 SC switchback conveyance control

The SC switchback conveyance motor (M12) drives the SC switchback roller. The SC switchback release motor (M13) drives the releasing
operation of the roller.
(1) SC switchback roller release mechanism

The SC switchback release motor (M13) drives the pressure cam [3] and the switchback cam [5]. The forward rotation of the motor drives
the pressure cam [3] and the reverse rotation of the motor drives the switchback cam [5].
The SC switchback roller [4] has 3 preset positions for releasing (kept away from the driven roller), pressing strongly or slightly against the
driven roller.
The "pressing strongly" status of the SC switchback roller [4] is used when conveying inside paper to the clamp section and for the relay
conveyance, and the roller becomes the "pressing slightly" status when conveying inside paper to the SC section so that the SC stopper
stops the papers properly.
The SC switchback arm pressure detection sensor (PS12) [2] detects the pressure cam position, and the SC switchback spring pressure
detection sensor (PS13) [6] detects the position of the switchback cam. The PS12 is ON when the pressure cam is at its home position,
and the PS13 is OFF when the switchback cam is at its home position.
PN -17

SECTION

PS12
PS13
SC switchback roller status (position)
ON
OFF
Release
OFF
OFF
Press strongly
ON
ON
Press slightly
OFF
ON
Not used (press strongly status)

[6]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
a075t2c032ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Pressure cam
[4]
[5]
Switchback cam
[6]
(a) Switchback cam drive (light pressure)

The switchback cam [1] rotates counterclockwise [5] to switch the SC switchback roller [4] position between releasing and light pressing
while the pressure cam [3] is at its home position.
While the SC switchback spring pressure detection sensor (PS13) is OFF, the SC switchback roller is in the release position (kept away
from the driven roller).
When the PS13 is ON [2], the SC switchback roller moves to press slightly against the driven roller.
The PS13 is kept OFF while the switchback cam is at its home position.
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
a075t2c033ca
[1]
Switchback cam (home position)
[2]
Switchback cam (press slightly)
[3]
Pressure cam
[4]
[5]
Rotating direction of the switchback cam
(b) Pressure cam drive (strong pressure)

The pressure cam [2] rotates clockwise [4] to switch the SC switchback roller [5] position between releasing and strong pressing. The
switch operation of the pressure cam is made while the switchback cam [1] is at its home position.
While the SC switchback arm pressure detection sensor (PS12) is ON, the SC switchback roller is in the release position (kept away
from the driven roller).
When the PS12 is OFF [3], the SC switchback roller moves to press strongly against the driven roller.
PN -18

SECTION
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a075t2c034ca
[1]
Switchback cam (home position)
[2]
Pressure cam (home position)
[3]
Pressure cam (PS12 turns OFF)
[4]
Rotation direction of the pressure cam
[5]
(2) SC switchback roller control (Perfect binding mode)

Inside papers of the first book are conveyed to the clamp section one by one without being stacked at the SC section.
When conveying inside papers to the clamp section without stacking them in the SC section, the SC switchback roller position is switched
between releasing and strong pressing. The rotation direction of the roller is also switched between forward and reverse.
When conveying inside papers of the next and subsequent books, a certain number of papers (n) are first stacked in the SC section, and
the stacked inside papers are conveyed to the clamp section at a time. "n+1"th paper and the subsequent papers are conveyed to the
clamp section one by one without being stacked at the SC section.
When stacking papers in the SC section, the SC switchback roller position is switched between releasing and light pressing. During the
stacking, the SC switchback roller rotates in the reverse direction.
(a) First book

1. The SC switchback conveyance motor (M12) starts to turn in the reverse direction [1] when detecting that the print start signal turns ON.
The switchback roller is in its release position to make paper go to the SC section.
2. The M12 reverses the direction of rotation (starts to turn in the forward direction) after the SC entrance sensor (PS2) detects the trailing
edge of paper [2]. At the same time, the SC switchback release motor (M13) starts to rotate in the forward direction. When the SC
switchback arm pressure detection sensor (PS12) turns OFF, the M13 stops and the switchback roller is strongly pressed against the
driven roller [4].
3. The inside papers are nipped between the switchback roller and the driven roller strongly [4] and conveyed to the SC section by the
forward rotation of the roller.
4. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the PS2 detects the trailing edge of the paper, the M12 reverses the direction of rotation [5]
to convey inside papers to the clamp section.
5. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the PS2 detects the trailing edge of the paper, the M13 starts to turn in the forward direction
again to move the switchback roller away from the driven roller [6], and when the PS12 turns On, the motor stops.
6. The above operations are repeated until the last page [7] of the first book reaches the clamp section.
[1]
[7]
[2] [3]

SC switchback
SC switchback
release motor (M13)
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
SC switchback arm pressure

detection sensor (PS12)
[4]
[6]
[5]
a075t2e035ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
M12 forward rotation and strong pressure
[4]
Strong pressure status
[5]
Switchback conveyance start
[6]
Release
[7]
PN -19

SECTION
(b) The second and subsequent books

1. The SC switchback conveyance motor (M12) continues to turn in the reverse direction after the last page [1] of the previous book is
conveyed to the clamp section [2].
2. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the SC entrance sensor (PS2) detects the trailing edge of the first page of the next book [3],
the SC switchback release motor (M13) starts to rotate in the reverse direction [4].
3. When the SC switchback spring pressure detection sensor (PS13) turns ON, the M13 stops and the switchback roller is lightly pressed
against the driven roller. The inside papers are then conveyed to the SC section and stopped by the SC stopper.
4. After the PS2 detects the trailing edge of the paper, the M13 reverses the direction of rotation again. Then the switchback roller is
moved away from the driven roller to accept the next page.
5. The above operations are repeated until a certain number of papers (n) are stacked in the SC section. (every books)
6. While the next 2 papers ("n+1"th page [5] and "n+2"th page [6]) are set in the bypass gate, the stacked n papers are conveyed to the
clamp section at a time.
7. When the PS2 detects the trailing edge of the "n+2"th page, the M12 starts to turn in the forward direction. At the same time, the M13
also starts to turn in the forward direction to push strongly the switchback roller against the driven roller. After the "n+1"th page and the
"n+2"th page are conveyed to the clamp section through the SC section at a time,
the following papers are conveyed to the clamp section one by one in the same manner as for the first book.
[1]
[5]
[3]
[6]

SC switchback
conveyance
motor (M12)
Forward
Reverse
SC switchback
release motor (M13)
Forward
Reverse
SC switchback arm pressure

SC switchback spring pressure
[2]
[4]
a075t2e036ca
[1]
The last page of the previous book
[2]
Conveyance of the last page of the first book
[3]
Detection of the first page of the next book
[4]
Light pressing start
[5]
"n+1"th page
[6]
"n+2"th page
(3) SC switchback roller control (Relay conveyance mode)

The SC switchback roller is set to "pressing strongly" and the release operation is not conducted.
The SC switchback roller rotates reverse and it conducts the deceleration control to the line speed of the main body paper exit. *1
*1 1051 only. The speed is not switched for C8000/1200/1200P/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000.
(a) Control
1. The SC switchback conveyance motor (M12) starts to turn in the reverse direction at high speed [1] upon receiving of a print job. At the
same time, the SC switchback release motor (M13) starts to rotate in the forward direction.
2. When the SC switchback arm pressure detection sensor (PS12) turns OFF, the M13 stops and the switchback roller is strongly pressed
against the driven roller [2].
3. Once the SC entrance sensor (PS2) detects [3] the leading edge, M12 decelerates [3] to the speed of the main body paper exit.
4. Paper is conveyed to the relay conveyance section.
[1]
[3]
SC switchback
conveyance
motor(M12)
SC switchback
release motor (M13)
Reverse
(high speed)
Reverse (main body
paper exit speed)
Forward
Reverse
SC switchback arm pressure detection

sensor (PS12)
[2]
a15xt2e003ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Press strongly
3.3.5 SC main scan alignment control

The SC alignment motor (M15) drives the SC alignment plates /Fr and /Rr via the belt to move them by 9mm as they are oscillated. This
movement aligns the edges of the papers stacked in the SC section in the main scan direction.
The alignment operation is carried out every time a page is stacked in the SC section when stacking a certain number of papers of the
second or subsequent books.
PN -20

SECTION
While inside papers are conveyed to the clamp section without being stacked in the clamp section, this alignment operation is not
performed.
(1) Control
1. Upon receiving of a print job, the SC alignment motor (M15) starts to turn in the reverse direction to shift the SC alignment plates /Fr and /
Rr to the position 9mm outer the paper edges [1].
2. After the SC entrance sensor (PS2) detects the trailing edge of the first page of the second or subsequent book, the M15 starts to turn in
the reverse direction to carry out the main scan direction alignment with the SC alignment plates /Fr and /Rr.
3. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the PS2 detection, the M15 starts to turn in the forward direction to move the SC alignment
plates /Fr and /Rr back to their standby positions.
4. Every time a page is stacked in the SC section, this alignment operation is performed.
Note
The set positions of the 2 alignment plates (the distance between the 2 plates) can be adjusted in the service mode.
[1]
Forward
(open)
Reverse
(close)
SC alignment motor
(M15)
SC alignment HP sensor (PS14)

a075t2e037ca
[1]
3.3.6 Sub scan alignment control

The FD alignment solenoid (SD11) drives the FD alignment plate [4] so that the inside papers [2] are hit against the reference plate [3] of the
clamp section to be aligned in the sub scan direction.
The SC paper detection sensor (PS16) detects the timing of the movement.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
a075t2c038ca
[1]
[2]
Paper
[3]
Reference plate
[4]
FD alignment plate
(1) Control
1. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the PS16 detects the trailing edge of the first page of the first book [1], if the clamp alignment
plate /Fr and /Rr are closed for alignment operation, the SD11 turns ON.
2. The SD11 turns OFF after a prescribed time has passed since it became ON, and waits for the next page.
3. Until the last page [2] reaches the clamp section, the sub-scan-direction alignment is performed every time a page comes to the section.
4. After the PS16 detects trailing edge of n paper (from the first page to the "n"th page) of the second book [3], the alignment operation is
performed.
5. The alignment operation is also carried out for the 2 papers ("n+1"th and "n+2"th page) laid one on top of another at the bypass gate.
[1]
[2]
[3]

(PS16)
(SD11)
a075t2e039ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Paper set
PN -21

SECTION
3.3.7 SC paper bundle conveyance control

The SC bundle conveyance motor (M17) [9] drives the SC roller and the clamp entrance roller.
The SC roller release motor (M18) [5] drives the SC driven roller [7] via the cam [8] to move the roller away from (release) or contact with
(press) the opposite roller.
The SC roller release sensor (PS17) [6] detects the press/release operation of the roller. While the roller is pressed against the opposite
roller, the PS17 is kept ON.
The clamp entrance roller release motor (M20) [1] drives the cam [3] and the clamp entrance roller [4] to move them away from (release) or
contact with (press) the opposite roller.
The clamp entrance roller release sensor (PS19) [2] detects the press/release operation of the roller. While the roller and the cam are in the
pressed status, the PS19 is kept ON.
[7]
[8]
[9]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a075t2c040ca
[1]
[2]
Clamp entrance roller release sensor (PS19)
[3]
Cam
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
SC driven roller
[8]
Cam
[9]
(1) Control
1. Upon receiving of a print job, the SC bundle conveyance motor (M17) starts to rotate [1], and the inside paper are conveyed to the clamp
section one by one with the SC roller and the clamp entrance roller.
2. When the SC paper detection sensor (PS16) detects the trailing edge of the last paper [2], the SC roller release motor (M18) starts to
rotate to start stacking paper in the SC section. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the M18 starts to rotate, the M17 stops to stop
conveying paper to the clamp section. The clamp entrance roller release motor (M20) also starts to rotate to release the clamp entrance
roller [3].
3. The M18 stops when the PS17 becomes OFF, and the M20 stops when the PS19 becomes OFF. The next bundle of paper is kept
stacked in the SC section until the clamp section is ready for them.
4. The M18 turns ON and starts to rotate again [5] after a specified period of time after the SC entrance sensor (PS2) detects [4] the trailing
edge of the last page of the stacked paper in the SC section.
5. When the pressing of the SC roller is finished after the PS17 turns ON, the M17 turns ON and starts to convey the stacked paper.
6. When the leading edges of the paper go through the clamp entrance, the M20 starts to rotate to convey the paper to the clamp section.
7. Then the next 2 pages set in the bypass gate are conveyed to the clamp section at a time. All the above operations are repeated for the
subsequent books.
[1]
[4]
[2]

(PS16)
motor (M17)
(M18)
SC roller release sensor
(PS17)
release motor (M20)
release sensor (PS19)
[3]
[5]
a075t2e041ca
[1]
[2]
Trailing edge of the last page of each book detection
[3]
Clamp entrance roller moves away from the paper

conveyance position
[4]
Trailing edge of nth page detection
PN -22

SECTION

[5]
The SC roller is set in the position for paper conveyance
3.3.8 Clamp entrance movement control

The clamp entrance movement motor (M19) drives the clamp entrance assy [4] via the belt.
The clamp entrance assy consists of the clamp entrance roller [2], FD alignment plate [3], SC pressure arm [1], and the SC paper detection
sensor (PS16) [5].
The clamp entrance assy movement moves the FD alignment plate in accordance with the paper size.
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
a075t2c042ca
[1]
SC pressure arm
[2]
[3]
FD alignment plate
[4]
Clamp entrance assy
[5]
(1) Control
1. When the clamp rotation pressure sensor (PS25) turns ON [1] and the clamp section is set at the compiling position, the clamp entrance
movement motor (M19) reverses its rotation direction to lower the clamp assy. The motor stops [2] when the clamp assy is set at the
position corresponding to the paper size, and the clamp assy becomes ready for accepting the next paper.
2. When the clamp motor (M22) initiates clamping operation [3], the M19 starts to turn in the forward direction to lift the clamp entrance assy
until the assy reaches the position out of way of the clamping operation. The clamp entrance movement HP sensor (PS18) detects that
the assy reaches the position (the sensor becomes ON, and the M19 is stopped [5].
3. The above operations are repeated for each book.
[1] [2]
Clamp entrance movement motor
(M19)
[4]
Forward
Reverse

Clamp motor (M22)
[3]
a075t2e043ca
[1]
Clamp section is set at the compiling position
[2]
Movement of clamp entrance assy in accordance with

paper size
[3]
Clamping starts
[4]
Clamp entrance assy home position
3.3.9 SC stopper control

In order to stack paper in the SC section, the SC stopper is activated by the SC stopper solenoid (SD12) and closes the paper feed path
toward the clamp section.
(1) Control
1. When detecting that the print start signal turns ON [1], the SC stopper solenoid (SD12) turns ON to release the SC stopper.
2. When the SC paper detection sensor (PS16) detects the trailing edge of the last page of each book, the SD12 turns OFF to set the SC
stopper to close the path [2].
3. When the SC roller release sensor (PS17) becomes ON and the SC roller holds down a bundle of paper, the SD12 turns ON to move the
SC stopper out of the path [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]

a075t2e044ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Move SC stopper out of the paper path
PN -23
Set SC stopper

SECTION
3.3.10 SC pressure arm control

The SC pressure arm [2] presses paper [3] conveyed from the SC section to stack paper neatly in the clamp section. The SC pressure arm
assists to stack paper to the clamp section.
The SC paper detection sensor (PS16) [1] detects the timing of the movement.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075t2c045ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Paper
SC pressure arm
(1) Control
1. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the SC paper detection sensor (PS16) detects the paper trailing edge [1], the SC pressure arm
solenoid (SD13) turns ON to make the SC pressure arm press paper [2].
2. The SD13 becomes OFF to move the SC pressure arm back to its original position [3] after a prescribed time has passed since the PS2
detected the trailing edge of the paper.
3. The above operations are also performed when a bundle of paper [4] or 2 sheets of paper [5] are conveyed to the clamp section.
[1]
[4]
[5]

(PS16)
SC pressure arm solenoid
(SD13)
[2] [3]
a075t2e046ca
[1]
[2]
Pressure arm presses paper
[3]
SC pressure arm goes back to its original position
[4]
Conveyance of a bundle of paper
[5]
Conveyance of 2 pages at a time
PN -24
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 > 4. CLAMP SECTION
4. CLAMP SECTION
4.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[9]
[7]
[5]
[6]
[4]
a075t2c047ca
[1]
Clamp rotation assy
[2]
Reference plate
[3]
Clamp alignment plate /Rr
[4]
Clamp paper LED (LED21)
[5]
Clamp pressure plate
[6]
Clamp alignment plate /Fr
[7]
[8]
[9]
Clamp fixing plate
4.2 Drive
4.2.1 Clamp drive
[7]
[8]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a075t2c048ca
PN -25
[1]
[2]
[3]
Clamp fixing plate
[4]
Pressure drive plate
[5]
Front side
[6]
Clamp motor (M22)
[7]
[8]
4.2.2 Clamp rotation drive

[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
a075t2c049ca
[1]
Clamp rotation assy
[2]
Reference plate
[3]
Clamp rotation HP sensor (PS24)
[4]
[5]
4.2.3 Clamp alignment drive

[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
a075t2c050ca
[1]
Clamp alignment HP sensor (PS21)
[2]
Clamp alignment plate /Rr
[3]
Clamp alignment plate /Fr
[4]
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Clamp alignment control
In order to line up edges of paper stacked in the clamp section in the main scan direction, the clamp alignment motor (M21) drives the clamp
alignment plates /Fr and /Rr via the belt.
The main-scan-direction alignment operation is performed when the following paper are set in the clamp section; all inside paper of the first
book, npaper of the subsequent books stacked in the SC section, the next 2 pages (n+1th and n+2th paper) of the subsequent books,
and n+3th and the subsequent page.
(1) Control
1. Upon receiving a print job, the clamp alignment motor (M21) starts to turn in the reverse direction to shift the clamp alignment plates /Fr
and /Rr offset 9mm from the paper edges [1].
PN -26
2. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the SC paper detection sensor (PS16) detects [2] the trailing edge of the first page of the first
book, the M21 starts reverse rotation again to perform the main-scan-direction alignment [3] with the clamp alignment plates /Fr and /Rr.
3. Then, while the FD alignment solenoid (SD11) turns ON and paper edges in the sub scan direction are lined up [4], the M21 turns in the
forward direction to move the clamp alignment plates /Fr and /Rr away from the paper [5].
4. The SD11 is kept ON until the sub-scan-direction alignment for the last page of the first book [6] is finished. When the SD11 turns OFF
and the pressure toward the papers is released, the M21 starts to turn in the reverse direction to press the bundle of paper from its front
and back sides [8].
5. When the clamp pressure sensor (PS23) turns ON and clamping the paper is finished, the M21 starts to turn in the forward direction to
release the paper [9].
6. After a prescribed time has passed since the PS16 detects the trailing edge of the "n"th paper [10] stacked in the SC section, the
alignment operations are performed.
7. The alignment operation is also carried out for the 2 sheets of paper ("n+1"th and "n+2"th page) laid one on top of another [11] at the
bypass gate.
[1]
[2] [4]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[10]
[11]

(PS16)
(SD11)
Clamp alignment
motor (M21)
Forward
(open)
Reverse
(close)
Clamp alignment HP sensor

(PS21)
(PS23)
[3][5]
[8]
a075t2e051ca
[1]
Movement of clamp plates in accordance with paper

size
[2]
Trailing edge of the first page
[3]
Line up edges in main scan direction
[4]
Alignment in sub scan direction is in progress
[5]
[6]
[7]
Alignment in sub scan direction is in progress
[8]
[9]
A bundle of npaper
[10]
2 sheets of paper
4.3.2 Clamp control

The clamp fixing plate and the clamp pressure plate clamp a bundle of paper stacked in the clamp section.
(1) Mechanism
1.
2.
3.
4.
The gap between the clamp fixing plate [7] and the clamp pressure plate [1] is 45mm when the clamp HP sensor (PS22) [6] is ON [2].
Before applying pressure by the clamp motor (M22), the pressure drive plate [5] is move to the left side.
The clamp pressure plate moves together with the pressure drive plate [5].
When the clamp pressure sensor (PS23) [4] becomes ON after applying pressure to the papers, the clamping operation is finished [3].
PN -27
[6]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
a075t2c052ca
[1]
[2]
Home position
[3]
Finish of clamping
[4]
[5]
Pressure drive plate
[6]
[7]
Clamp fixing plate
(2) Control
1. When alignment of the last page is finished [1] by the clamp alignment motor (M21), the clamp motor (M22) starts to turn in the reverse
direction to close the clamp pressure plate.
2. Upon completion of clamping, the clamp pressure sensor (PS23) turns ON and the M22 stops [2].
3. After the spine edges of the compressed inside paper is evened up, the cover paper table up down motors /Fr (M46) and /Rr (M47) lift the
cover paper table, and the M22 starts to turn in the forward direction. Then, the clamp pressure plate opening operation is started [3].
4. M22 stops when the clamp home sensor (PS22) becomes ON.
[1]
Clamp alignment
motor (M21)
Clamp motor (M22)
[3]
[4]
Forward
(open)
Reverse
(close)
Forward
(open)
Reverse
(close)

(PS23)
Cover paper table up Forward
down motors /Fr
(up)
(M46)
Reverse
and /Rr (M47)
(down)
[2]
a075t2e053ca
[1]
Start to close of the clamp pressure plate
[2]
Completion of clamping
[3]
Start to open
[4]
4.3.3 Clamp rotation control

A bundle of inside papers of a book is clamped and rotated to be glued on its spine.
(1) Clamp assy angle change /fixing mechanism

The drive force of the clamp rotation motor (M23) rotates the clamp rotation assy.
There are 3 preset tilt angles of the clamp rotation assy as following.
PN -28

Home position
45
degr
ees
Clamped
50
degr
ees
Glue applied
90
degr
ees
(a) Angle change mechanism

The tilt angle of the clamp assy is changed for clamping and gluing as following.
When the clamp rotation assy is in its home position and the clamp pressure plate [7] is also in its home position [3], the tab [6] of the
pressure plate presses [2] the release cover [4], and the pin [1] of the switch arm [12] is inserted in the clamp angle stopper notch [11]
to stop the rotation of the clamp rotation assy at the angle for clamping.
When the clamp rotation assy is in its home position, and the clamp pressure plate is not [5], the switch arm drops by its own weight as
the tab of the clamp pressure plate is not pressing the release cover. For this reason, the switch arm pin is not inserted in the clamp
angle stopper notch, and the clamp rotation assy keeps rotating until the glue angle stopper notch [10] is inserted over the shaft [8] [9].
The tilt angle of the clamp assy cannot be changed directly between the clamping angle and the gluing angle. To change the angle, the
assy first must go back to the home position to release the stoppers.
[11]
[10]
[12]
[1]
[9]
[8]
[2]
[5]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[4]
a075t2c124ca
[1]
Pin
[2]
Release
[3]
Clamp pressure plate is at its home position
[4]
Release bar
[5]
Clamp pressure plate is out of its home position
[6]
Tab of the clamp pressure plate
[7]
[8]
Regulation shaft
[9]
Engaging of notch and shaft to stop at gluing angle
[10]
Glueing angle stopper notch
[11]
Clamping angle stopper notch
[12]
Switch arm
(b) Fixing of the clamp rotation assy

While clamping or glueing is performed, the corresponding stopper locks the clamp rotation assy. Moreover, in order to reinforce the
fixing state of the assy, the clamp rotation motor (M23) [5] rotates the gear [1] 10 degrees [2] to pull the spring [4] applying the spring
load to the assy. The operations fix the clamp rotation assy securely.
The clamp rotation pressure sensor (PS25) detects that the prescribed pressure is applied to the clamp rotation assy and becomes ON.
PN -29

[3]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[1]
a075t2c125ca
[1]
Gear
[2]
Gear rotates 10 degrees to apply spring load to the

assy
[3]
[4]
Spring
[5]
(2) Reference plate opening/closing mechanism

(a) Opening/closing of the reference plate
The reference plate [5] opens/closes in synchronization with the rotation of the clamp rotation assy [1].
1. When the clamp rotation assy stops at the angle for glueing, the release arm [8] presses down the reference plate mounting bracket [6],
and the reference plate is separated from a bundle of inside papers. The separation of the reference plate prevents the plate from
damaging the paper edges when the clamp rotation assy is upstanding.
2. Further rotation [3] of the reference plate mounting bracket [6] makes the pin [7] go down [2], and the reference plate is released [4]
from the spring [9].
3. The reference plate goes back to its home position with the reference mounting bracket [6] which pushes up the pin [7].
4. While clamping operation is in progress, the reference plate is fixed at the upper position with the spring [10].
5. When the clamp pressure plate returns to its home position, the release arm [8] is pushed up by the tab [11] of the clamp pressure plate
and moved back to its standby position.
[7]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[8]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[8]
[7]
[9]
a075t2c126ca
[1]
Clamp rotation assy
[2]
Pin of the reference plate goes down
[3]
Rotation of the reference plate mounting bracket
[4]
Release of the reference plate
[5]
Reference plate
[6]
Reference plate mounting bracket
[7]
Pin
[8]
Release arm
[9]
Spring (for release)
[10]
Spring (for applying pressure)
[11]
Tab of the clamp pressure plate
[12]
Pin
PN -30
(b) Paper guard tabs mechanism for clamping

The reference plate [6] has paper guard tabs [2] to prevent inside papers [4] from going off the reference plate while they are clamped
[1].
While the reference plate contacts with the stopper, the paper guard tabs are protruding.
When the reference plate is opened [3], the paper guard tabs are retracted [5] so as not to damage the paper edges.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
a075t2c127ca
[1]
Clamped
[2]
Paper guard tabs
[3]
When the reference plate is opened
[4]
Inside paper
[5]
Paper guard tabs retracted
[6]
Reference plate
(3) Control
1. When detecting that the print start signal turns ON [1], the clamp rotation motor (M23) starts to turn in the reverse direction.
2. The M23 stops when the clamp rotation pressure sensor (PS25) becomes ON, and the clamp rotation assy is set at the compiling position
[2].
3. When clamping of the inside papers by the clamp motor (M22) is finished [3], the M23 starts to turn in the forward direction to rotate the
clamp rotation assy 15 degrees counterclockwise.
4. The M23 stops [4] when the clamp rotation home sensor (PS24) becomes ON. The tilt angle of the gear is 15 degrees when the assy
returns to the home position, however, the clamp rotation assy rotates 5 degrees as the gear has rotated 10 degrees more separately for
fixing the assy. As the result, the clamp rotation assy tilt angle changes from 50 degrees for clamping to 45 degrees (home position). At
this time, since the clamp pressure plate is out of the home position, the pin is free from the clamp angle stopper notch, which allows the
clamp rotation assy to rotate to the gluing angle.
5. After a prescribed time has elapsed, the M23 starts to turn in the reverse direction to rotate the clamp rotation assy clockwise [5].
6. When the PS25 turns ON, the spring fixes the assy, and the M23 stops [6]. At this time, the gear has rotated 55 degrees, however, in
order to secure the assy, it has rotated 10 degrees more than the clamp rotation assy, the clamp rotation assy rotates 45 degrees
clockwise from its home position and becomes upright state (90 degrees).
7. When the clamp paper sensor (PS28) detects [7] that the bundle of paper is released from the clamp, the M23 starts to turn in the forward
direction to return the clamp rotation assy to the home position.
8. The M23 stops [8] when the PS24 becomes ON, and the clamp rotation assy stops at its home position (tilt angle of 45 degrees). At this
time, since the clamp pressure plate is in the home position, the pin is engaged with the clamp angle stopper notch, which allows the
clamp rotation assy to rotate to the clamping angle.
9. Then, the M23 starts to turn in the reverse direction [9] to move the clamp rotation assy to the clamping position [10] and stops when the
PS25 becomes ON.
[1] [2]
[3] [4][5]
[7] [8] [9] [10]

Forward
(open)
Clamp motor (M22)
Reverse
(close)
Forward
Clamp rotation motor (release)
(M23)
Reverse
(pressure)
Clamp rotation HP sensor

(PS24)
Clamp rotation pressure sensor
(PS25)
[6]
a075t2e128ca
[1]
[2]
Set at the compiling position
[3]
Completion of clamp
[4]
M23 stopped
[5]
M23 starts to apply pressure
[6]
Upright state completion
[7]
Paper release
[8]
Home position
[9]
M23 starts to apply pressure
[10]
Clamp position
PN -31
4.3.4 Book thickness detection control

The booklet thickness sensor (PS29) detects the book thickness.
The detected thickness is used to determine the trimming amount of the cover paper.
(1) Mechanism
The clamp pressure plate [1] is moved by winding up the wire[6].

When the wire [6] is wound up, the encoder plate [4] rotates.
The booklet thickness sensor (PS29) [5] detects and counts how much the encoder scale is rotated.
The sensor continue the counting until the clamp pressure sensor (PS23) [2] turns ON.
[5]
[6]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a075t2c054ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Encoder scale
[5]
[6]
Wire
(2) Control
1. When the clamp home sensor (PS22) switches to ON from OFF, pulse count by the booklet thickness sensor (PS29) is started [1].
2. The pulse count is stopped [2] when the clamp pressure sensor (PS23) turns ON.
3. During the initial operation at power-ON, the no paper status data is detected and memorized as an initial data. The book thickness is
determined according to the difference.
Clamp motor (M22)
Forward
(open)
Reverse
(close)

[2]
[1]
[1]
Count start
[2]
PN -32
a075t2e055ca
Count end
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 > 5. PELLET SUPPLY

SECTION
5. PELLET SUPPLY SECTION

5.1 Configuration
[11]
[10]
[1]
[9]
[2]
[12]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
a15xt2c004ca
[1]
Agitator blade /1
[2]
Agitator blade /3
[3]
Pellet remaining LED (LED32)
[4]
[5]
Exhaust fan /1
[6]
Pellet supply arm
[7]
Agitator blade /2
[8]
Pellet supply remaining sensor (PS36)
[9]
Pellet supply pipe
[10]
Hopper
[11]
Fixed measure
[12]
Front side
5.2 Drive
5.2.1 Pellet supply drive
[11]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[6]
a15xt2c005ca
[1]
Measure bottom plate
[2]
Agitator blade /2
[3]
Agitator blade cam
[4]
[5]
Pellet supply pipe upper limit sensor (PS95)
[6]
[7]
Pellet supply pipe shutter
[8]
Pellet supply pipe
PN -33

SECTION

[9]
Agitator blade /3
[10]
[11]
Fixed measure
Agitator blade /1
5.2.2 Pellet supply arm drive
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a15xt2c006ca
[1]
Pellet supply arm upper limit sensor (PS38)
[2]
[3]
Pellet supply arm
[4]
5.3 Operation
5.3.1 Pellet supply operation overview
The pellet supply arm [3] is moved above the glue tank [4] to supply pellets [2]. Next, it moves up the pellet supply pipe and scoop the fixed
amount of pellet with the fixed measure [7] on the top. Then, it opens the measure bottom plate [1] and the pellet supply pipe shutter [6] to
drop the pellet.
The glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) provided in the glue tank unit determines the timing to supply pellets into the glue tank. As the
molten glue inside the glue tank decreases, the TH2 surface not soaked in the glue becomes wider. It finally causes the TH2 temperature
lower than a prescribed level, and it is judged that the glue is getting low and another pellets must be supplied.
Checking the TH2 temperature is carried out in the following timing.
a. When the glue tank HP sensor (PS33) turns ON after gluing operation.
The interval of the pellet supply changes since the amount of glue depends on the thickness of the book. However, the forced supply
operation is conducted if the temperature of TH2 does not turn to be under the specified temperature even the expected amount of glue is
much.
The maximum stacking capacity of the hopper is 1.2kg.
To prevent the overflowing of glue from the glue tank, pellet supply is forbidden for 2 minutes after the pellet supply is conducted.
PN -34

SECTION

[7]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
a15xt2c007ca
[1]
[2]
Pellet
[3]
Pellet supply arm
[4]
Glue tank
[5]
Pellet supply pipe
[6]
[7]
Fixed measure
5.3.2 Pellet supply arm control

The pellet supply arm motor (M34) activates the pellet supply arm. Once the pellet supply arm moves to the top of the glue tank, the pellet
supply pipe motor (M33) conducts the pellet supply operation.
In order to prevent the arm from the evaporated glue or radiant heat rose from the glue tank, the arm is kept at its home position except
when supplying pellets.
(1) Control
1. When the glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) detects temperature lower than the set temperature, the pellet supply arm motor (M34)
starts to turn in the reverse direction [1].
2. When the pellet supply arm reaches the pellet supply position (above the glue tank) and the pellet supply arm upper limit sensor (PS38)
becomes ON, the M34 stops [2].
3. Once the pellet supply pipe home sensor (PS96) detects that the pellet supply pipe returns to the home position after the pellet is supplied
[3], M34 turns in the forward direction and starts the shelter operation [4].
4. When the pellet supply arm home sensor (PS39) turns ON and the pellet supply arm reaches the home position, M34 turns OFF.
[1] [2]
[4] [5]
Over set
Glue tank temperature sensor value
/Up (TH2)
Under set
value
Forward
Reverse
Pellet supply arm upper limit

sensor (PS38)
[3]
a15xt2e008ca
[1]
Pellet supply arm motor (M34) ON
[2]
Pellet supply position stop
[3]
Pellet supply
[4]
Start to evacuate
[5]
Evacuation complete
PN -35

SECTION
(2) Stop operation during pellet supply

When all the inside papers have stacked up, while the pellet supply arm motor (M34) is turning in the reverse direction, the M34 reverses
the rotation direction to the forward to move the pellet supply arm back to the home position.
5.3.3 Pellet supply amount control

(1) Mechanism
It scoops the pellet in the hopper with the fixed measure on the top of the pellet supply pipe and supplies the specified amount of pellet.
19g of pellet is supplied by 1 scoop with the fixed measure.
The pellet supply pipe motor (M33) drives the pellet supply pipe and the agitator blade.
(a) Pellet supply pipe

The pellet supply pipe has the fixed measure on the top and the supply pipe shutter on the bottom.
The measure bottom plate [2] and the pellet supply pipe shutter [4] of the fixed measure are driven via the plate cam [6] and operate the
opening operation.
The plate cam is driven between the position 10mm lower from the upper limit of the pellet supply pipe (ON position of the pellet supply
pipe upper limit sensor (PS95)) and the upper limit position.
Once the pellet supply pipe [6] moves up upper than the position 10mm lower from the upper limit, the pin [1] of the measure bottom
plate [2] moves along the guide hole [7] of the plate cam and opens the measure bottom plate [2]. It opens fully at the upper limit
position.
The pin [3] of the pellet supply pipe shutter [4] moves along the guide hole [5] and is set to the path to the pellet supply arm.
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
a15xt2c009ca
[1]
Pin of measure bottom plate
[2]
[3]
Pin of pellet supply pipe shutter
[4]
[5]
Guide hole
[6]
Plate cam
[7]
Guide hole
(b) Agitator blade

There are 3 types of agitator blade; /1, /2 and /3. They are pushed out from the bottom of the hopper and agitate and separate the stuck
pellet.
There are 4 agitator blades /1 in total; 2 each [1] and [5] on the bottom of 2 hoppers. They are pushed when the pellet supply pipe
moves up to the top.
There is 1 agitator blade /2 [3] and the agitator blade cam [4] drives it. The agitator blade cam rotates 5 times while the pellet supply
pipe moves up to the top and swings the agitator blade /2 for 5 laps.
There are 8 agitator blades /3 [2] in total; 2 each on 2 each of brackets [6] on the bottom of 2 hoppers. They swing by being pushed by
the shaft [7] installed on the agitator blade /1.
PN -36

SECTION
[6]
[1]
[5]
[7]
[2]
[4]
[3]
a15xt2c010ca
[1]
Agitator blade /1
[2]
Agitator blade /3
[3]
Agitator blade /2
[4]
Agitator blade cam
[5]
Agitator blade /1
[6]
Bracket of agitator blade /2
[7]
Shaft
(2) Control
(a) Supply control
1. When the pellet supply arm moves to the pellet supply position and the pellet supply arm upper limit sensor (PS38) turns ON, the pellet
supply pipe motor (M33) turns forward rotation ON [1] and lifts the pellet supply pipe.
2. When the pellet supply pipe upper limit sensor (PS95) detects that it reaches to the upper limit, M33 turns OFF.
3. To swing the pellet supply pipe, M33 turns reverse rotation ON a specified period of time after M33 turns OFF. It stops again when
PS95 turns OFF and turns forward rotation ON to move up again. It conducts this swing operation twice.
4. After conducting this swing operation twice, it waits [5] for the pellet dropping [4]. M33 turns reverse rotation ON after a specified period
of time and starts the home position return operation [6].
5. M33 turns OFF [7] when the pellet supply pipe home sensor (PS96) turns ON.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[7]
Pellet supply arm upper limit

sensor (PS38)
Pellet supply pipe
motor (M33)
Forward
Reverse
Pellet supply pipe upper

limit sensor (PS95)
Pellet supply pipe home
sensor (PS96)
Pellet supply passage
sensor (PS37)
[4]
[5]
a15xt2j011ca
[1]
Starting lifting the pellet supply pipe
[2]
Reaching to the upper limit of the pellet supply pipe
[3]
Swing of the pellet supply pipe
[4]
Pellet supply
[5]
Standby for the pellet dropping
[6]
Starting home position return operation
[7]
Completing home position return operation
PN -37

SECTION
(b) Pellet passage detection

The pellet supply passage sensor (PS37) monitors the passage of the pellet on the pellet supply path. It monitors it for the period
between when the pellet supply pipe motor (M33) starts the supply operation turning ON the pellet supply pipe upper limit sensor
(PS95) for the first time and when the supply operation finishes with turning ON the pellet supply pipe home sensor (PS96) by the home
position search of the M33. When PS37 detects the glue passage without turning ON once, it displays the glue supply alarm. When
PS37 detects the glue passage without turning ON more than twice, it displays C-1517.
5.3.4 Pellet remaining amount detection control

The pellet remaining LED (LED32) and the pellet supply remaining sensor (PS36) detect the remaining amount of the pellet.
While the pellet supply arm is in the home position turning the pellet supply arm lower limit sensor (PS39) ON, the detection of remaining
number of pellets inside the pellet supply hopper is carried out.
When the remaining amount of pellet becomes 150g or less, the pellet supply hopper is detected as empty.
When 1 second has elapsed after the pellet supply remaining sensor (PS36) switches to OFF from ON, a message to notify the empty
status appears on the main body touch panel.
5.3.5 Pellet supply door opening/closing detection control

The pellet supply door switch (MS1) [1] and the pellet supply door sensor (PS40) [2] detect the open/close of the pellet supply door.
When the MS1 is turned OFF, 24VDC supplied to the pellet supply motor (M33) is shut off to stop the motor.
When the PS40 detects the above status, a message appears on the main body touch panel.
PN -38
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 > 6. GLUE TANK SECTION
6. GLUE TANK SECTION

6.1 Configuration
[10]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[9]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[7]
a15xt2c012ca
[1]
Scrape plate /Rr
[2]
Glue apply roller
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Timing belt
[8]
Glue tank
[9]
[10]
Scrape plate /Fr
6.2 Drive
6.2.1 Drive
[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
a15xt2c041ca
[1]
Front side
[2]
Glue tank unit
[3]
[4]
[5]
Timing belt
PN -39
6.2.2 Glue apply roller drive

[3]
[1]
[2]
a15xt2c013ca
[1]
Front side
[2]
[3]
Glue apply roller
6.2.3 Tank up drive

[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
a15xt2c014ca
[1]
Arm
[2]
Front side view
[3]
[4]
[5]
Left-side view
[6]
Glue apply roller
[7]
Glue tank
6.2.4 Cover paper glue lifting drive
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a15xt2c015ca
[1]
Front side view
[2]
Glue tank base plate
[3]
[4]
Left-side view
[5]
Glue apply roller
PN -40
6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Glue tank unit movement control
(1) Mechanism
The glue tank unit is moved by the drive force of the glue tank movement motor (M31) transmitted via the timing belt. The gap [3] between
the glue tank HP sensor (PS33) and the center [5] of the inside papers [4] is 322.5mm.
It conducts the gluing operation by shuttling (going back and forward).
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
a15xt2c016ca
[1]
Front side
[2]
[3]
322.5mm
[4]
Inside paper
[5]
Center of the inside papers
(2) Control
1. When the upright movement of the clamp section finishes turning the clamp rotation pressure sensor (PS25) ON, the glue tank movement
motor (M31) starts to turn in the forward direction at low speed to move the glue tank forward [1].
2. M31 switches [2] to the high speed when the glue tank HP sensor (PS33) turns OFF and conducts the gluing operation to the inside paper
during forward movement.
3. After a specified period of time since the gluing operation during forward movement completes, M31 switches to the low speed and stops
[3].
4. After a specified period of time, M31 turns ON (turns in reverse at low speed) [4] and starts going back.
5. After a specified period of time, it switches to the high speed drive [5] and conducts the gluing operation during going back.
6. After a specified period of time, M31 stops [6] at the position where the glue tank HP sensor (PS33) turns ON and passes 2mm after it
switches to the low speed at the timing of the completing of gluing.
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
Glue tank movement motor

(M31)
Forward
Reverse
High
speed
Low
speed
High
speed
Low
speed

a15xt2e017ca
[1]
Clamp rotation assy is upright
[2]
Switch to high speed
[3]
Stop going forward
[4]
Start going back
[5]
Switch to high speed
[6]
Stop at the position where 2mm over from home

position
6.3.2 Glue apply roller control

(1) Mechanism
The glue apply roller motor (M32) drives the glue apply roller via the gear.
As the glue apply roller rotates, a layer of molten glue is formed on the roller metal surface due to the viscosity of the glue.
The thickness of glue layer can be changed by changing the rotation number of the glue apply roller. The glue layer turns to be thicker by
rotating at high speed. *1
*1 The standard glue layer of the glue apply roller is about 2.0mm.
(2) Control
(a) Operation during printing
1. After a specified period of time since the glue tank movement motor (M31) moves forward, conducts the gluing operation for the
outward and switches to the low speed, the glue apply roller motor (M32) which has turned ON turns OFF [1] and the glue apply roller
stops.
PN -41
2. After a specified period of time since it turns OFF, it turns reverse rotation ON [2] before M31 starts going back.
3. When M31 turns ON to start going back, the gluing operation during the glue tank going back for return. After a specified period of time
since M31 turns ON, M32 turns OFF [3].
4. After a specified period of time since M32 turns OFF, M32 turns forward rotation ON preparing for the next book.
Glue tank
movement
motor
(M31)
Glue apply
roller motor
(M32)
High
For- speed
ward Low
speed
High
Re- speed
Low
verse
speed
Forward
Reverse
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a15xt2e018ca
[1]
Forward rotation OFF by the completion of the gluing

for outward
[2]
Reverse rotation ON for return
[3]
Reverse rotation OFF for return
[4]
Forward rotation ON of the next book
(b) Operation during warming up

1. Once the glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) reaches to the specified temperature (100 C), the glue apply roller motor (M32)
turns forward rotation ON and turns OFF after a specified period of time (3 seconds).
2. After a specified period of time (3 seconds) since it turns OFF, it turns forward rotation ON again.
3. It repeats the above mentioned interval operation until TH3 reaches to the specified temperature *1.
4. Once TH3 reaches to the specified temperature, M32 turns ON at all times (forward rotation).
5. When the glue applying mode is switched to standby mode, the M32 stops.
*1 Default setting: 145 C (It can be changed by "Glue Tank -Mid" of "I.5.9.31 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment).")
6.3.3 Glue tank lifting control

(1) Mechanism
When the glue tank up solenoids /1 (SD31) [3] and /2 (SD33) [4] turn ON, the arm [5] lifts the roller [2] and the glue tank [1] moves up.
Then, the glue apply roller moves up to the glue apply position.
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
a075t2c072ca
[1]
Glue tank
[2]
Roller
[3]
[4]
[5]
Arm
When the glue tank up solenoids /1 (SD31) and /2 (SD33) are ON, the gap between the level tangent line [5] of the metal surface [1] of
the glue apply roller and the spine surface [7] of inside paper [6] is the gap of the glue apply roller. *1
The scrape plates /Fr [2] and /Rr [4] scrape off excess glue from the spine of inside papers.
When SD31, SD33 and the cover paper glue up solenoid (SD32) are ON, the scrape plate /Fr is placed 1.5mm under the spine surface
[7], and 2.5mm when SD32 turns OFF. *2
When SD31, SD33 and SD32 are ON, the scrape plate /Rr is placed 1.0mm *2 under the spine surface [7].
*1 The standard of the glue apply roller gap is 1.8mm and it can be changed by the mechanical adjustment "I.24.4 Glue apply roller gap
adjustment".
*2 The mechanical adjustment "I.24.5 Cover paper glue gap adjustment" can adjust the scraped-off glue amount.
PN -42
[7]
[6]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a15xt2c019ca
[1]
Metal surface of the glue apply roller
[2]
Scrape plate /Fr
[3]
Front side
[4]
Scrape plate /Rr
[5]
Level tangent line
[6]
Inside paper
[7]
Spine surface
[8]
Layer of molten glue
(2) Control
1. When the upright movement of the clamp section finishes [1] by turning the clamp rotation pressure sensor (PS25) ON, the glue tank
movement motor (M31) turns ON and the glue tank assy starts moving forward.
While the glue tank assy is moving, the glue tank up solenoids /1 (SD31) and /2 (SD33) turn ON to lift the glue apply roller to apply glue to
the spine of inside paper [2] after a specified period of time since M31 turns ON.
2. When the glue has applied along the inside paper spine by a length of 5mm longer than the paper length after a specified period of time
since M31 has turned to high speed, SD31 and SD33 turn OFF to lower the glue apply roller [3].
3. After a specified period of time since the going back starts by the reverse rotation ON of M31, SD31 and SD33 turn ON at the timing when
the glue apply roller passes the paper edge 4mm and conduct the gluing operation for going back [4].
4. After a specified period of time, SD31 and SD33 turn OFF [5] at the position the glue apply roller passed trailing edge of the inside paper
through by 4mm.
Note
The sensors ON/OFF timing can be changed in the service mode.
High
Forward speed
Low
speed
Low
speed
Reverse
High
speed
Glue tank up solenoid /1
SD31,
/2
SD33
Glue tank
movement motor
M31
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a15xt2j020ca
[1]
Clamp rotation assy is upright
[2]
Glue application during frontward movement
[3]
Completion of glue application
[4]
Glue application during backward movement
[5]
6.3.4 Cover paper glue control

(1) Mechanism
The cover paper glue up solenoid (SD32) [5] lifts the scrape plate /Fr side [9] of the glue tank base plate [2].
The glue tank up solenoid /1 (SD31) [4] and /2 (SD33) [3], which lift the glue apply roller [8] side of the glue tank, are also attached to the
glue tank base plate, and as the result, the whole glue tank assy is lifted.
Changing the height of the scrape plate with SD32 turning ON/OFF controls the thickness of the glue layer. Switches the thick coat mode
and the thin coat mode. The thick coat mode is for keeping the book strength. *1
Thin coat mode (SD32: ON)
Thickness of paper is less than 7mm: The glue apply thickness is 0.8mm
Thick coat mode (SD32: OFF)
Thickness of paper is 7mm or more: The glue apply thickness is 1.2mm
*1 In the case of 1200/1200P/1051, only the thin coat mode is used no matter how thick the paper bundle is.
PN -43

[8]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
a15xt2c021ca
[1]
Glue tank
[2]
Glue tank base plate
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Fulcrum shaft
[7]
Left-side view
[8]
Glue apply roller
[9]
Scrape plate /Fr
(2) Control
The control differs depending on the glue apply thickness mode. *1
Thin coat mode
The cover paper glue up solenoid (SD32) turns ON a specified time before turning ON the tank up solenoids /1 (SD31) and /2 (SD33)
and turns OFF at the same time when SD31 and SD33 turn OFF.
Thick coat mode
Always OFF.
*1 In the case of 1200/1200P/1051, only the thin coat mode is used no matter how thick the paper bundle is.
6.3.5 Glue temperature control

(1) Mechanism
The glue tank heater (H1) heats the glue tank bottom to melt the pellets.
The glue apply roller heater (H2) heats the glue apply roller to keep the glue adhered to the roller surface at a constant viscosity.
(2) Temperature detection

The glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) [7] detects the temperature of the glue apply roller [8], and the glue tank temperature sensor /
Up (TH2) [6], /Md (TH3) [3], and /Lw (TH4) [2] detects the temperature of the glue tank [5].
(a) TH1
Detects temperature of the center portion of the glue apply roller, and the glue apply roller heater (H2) [9] is controlled according to the
detected temperature.
The target temperature is 165 C. *1
*1 It can be changed by "Adjustment screen" or "Apply Roller" of Service Mode "I.5.9.31 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder
Adjustment)."
(b) TH2
This sensor is provided on the inner surface of the glue tank, at the position 29mm above the bottom of the tank, in order to detect glue
level.
When the glue runs low, the glue surface becomes lower, and finally the TH2 comes out of the glue. It causes a sudden drop in
temperature of the TH2.The temperature drop is detected as a low glue level, and activates the pellet supply operation.
*1 It can be changed by "Glue Tank -Top" of Service Mode "I.5.9.31 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment)."
(c) TH3
This sensor is also provided on the inner surface of the glue tank, at the position 15.4mm above the tank bottom, to detect the viscosity
of the molten glue. According to the detected result, rotating or not rotating the glue apply roller is determined.
*1 It can be changed by "Glue Tank -Mid" of Service Mode "I.5.9.31 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment)."
(d) TH4
The glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) is provided on the inner bottom surface of the glue tank and detects temperature of the
glue tank heater (H1) [3] to control the heater.
*1 It can be changed by "Adjustment screen" or "Glue Tank -Low" of Service Mode "I.5.9.31 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder
Adjustment)."
PN -44

[5]
[6]

[7]
[8]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
a075t2c076cb
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Glue tank
[6]
[7]
[8]
Glue apply roller
(3) Control
(a) Glue apply roller heater (H2) control
During warming up, H2 turns ON so that the glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) is 180 C. It lowers to 165 C when the
warming up completes.
After the completion of the warming up, it controls ON/OFF of H2 so that the glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) is 165 C.
When the temperature drops/rises 1 C from the target temperature, the H1 turns ON/OFF.
(b) Glue tank heater (H1) control

The H1 is turned ON/OFF according to a temperature detected by the glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) in order to keep 185 C.
When the temperature drops/rises 1 C from the target temperature, the H1 turns ON/OFF.
PN -45
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 > 7. COVER PAPER

SUPPLY SECTION
7. COVER PAPER SUPPLY SECTION

7.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
a075t2c012ca
[1]
Cover paper empty sensor (PS71)
[2]
Pick-up roller
[3]
Conveyance roller
[4]
Paper feed roller
[5]
Separation roller
[6]
Cover paper tray lift plate
[7]
Cover paper tray fan
7.2 Drive
7.2.1 Cover paper tray lift drive
[1]
[2]
[7]
[8]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a075t2c013ca
[1]
Cover paper tray lift wire /Fr1, /Rr1
[2]
Cover paper tray lift wire /Fr2, /Rr2
[3]
Cover paper tray lift plate
[4]
Pulley
PN -46

SUPPLY SECTION

[5]
[6]
One-way clutch
[7]
Lift release coupling gear
[8]
Torque restriction gear (oil damper)

[4]
[1]
[5]
[7]
[6]
[2]
[8]
[10]
[3]
[9]
[13]
[12]
[11]
a075t2c014ca
[1]
PB backside
[2]
Backside of cover paper tray
[3]
Center of cover paper tray
[4]
[5]
Coupling
[6]
[7]
Coupling
[8]
[9]
Pick-up roller
[10]
Paper feed roller
[11]
Conveyance roller
[12]
Torque limiter
[13]
Separation roller
7.2.3 Pick-up drive

[2]
[1]
a075t2c015ca
[1]
Cover paper pick up solenoid (SD71)
[2]
PN -47
Pick-up roller

SUPPLY SECTION
7.3 Operation
(1) Up operation
The cover paper tray lift plate is lifted with the cover paper tray lift wire wound up around the pulley by the drive force of the cover paper
tray lift motor (M73) [1].
(2) Down operation

When the cover paper tray is pulled out, the release lever [5] separates the coupling gear [4] that transmits the motor drive force from the
motor shaft [2] to the pulley [3]. (goes down by its own weight)
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[5]
a075t2c016ca
[1]
[2]
Motor shaft
[3]
Pulley
[4]
Coupling gear
[5]
Release lever
In order to lower the plate slowly by its own weight, the torque limiting gear [1] works only when lowering the cover paper tray lift plate.
[1]
a075t2c017ca
[1]
Torque restriction gear

(a) When cover paper is set
When cover papers are loaded on the tray, the cover paper tray lift motor (M73) starts to rotate to lift the cover paper lift plate.
The M73 stops when the cover paper tray upper limit sensor (PS74) turns ON.
(b) While feeding cover paper

While cover papers being fed, the PS74 turns OFF due to a decrease in stacking height of papers, and the M73 starts to rotate again.
The M73 keeps rotating to lift the cover paper lift plate until the PS74 turns ON again.
[1]
a075t2c132ca
[1]
Cover paper tray upper limit sensor (PS74)
PN -48

SUPPLY SECTION

Picking up the cover paper is activated when the cover paper pick-up solenoid (SD71) turns OFF.
(1) Control
1. With cover paper feed signal, cover paper feed motor (M74), cover paper feed clutch (CL71) and cover paper separation clutch (CL72)
turn ON, and rotate the pick-up roller which is pressing down the cover paper with its own weight, and starts the paper feeding of the
cover paper [1].
2. When the cover paper conveyance sensor /1 (PS75) is turned ON by the leading edge of the cover paper, M74, CL71, CL72 are
temporary turned OFF, and cover paper feeding is stopped [2].
3. After the specified time, M74, CL71, CL72 are turned back ON, and the leading edge of the cover paper is sent to the cover paper
conveyance sensor /2 (PS76), then M74, CL71 are turned OFF again [3].
4. After the specified time, M74, CL71, CL72 are turned back ON, and the leading edge of the cover paper is sent to the cover paper
conveyance sensor /3 (PS77), then M74, CL71, and CL72 are turned OFF again [4].
5. After the specified time, M74, CL71, CL72 and the cover paper pick up solenoid (SD71) are turned ON, the pick up roller is put back to its
original position, and the cover paper is conveyed by only the paper feed roller and the conveyance roller [5].
6. When the leading edge of the cover paper turns ON the cover paper conveyance sensor /4 (PS78), M74, CL71, CL72, SD71 turn OFF [6].
7. After the specified time, M74 rotates at high speed, cover paper is conveyed by only the conveyance roller while CL72 turns ON and the
next cover paper is sent to the reverse direction to be separated [7].
8. After the back edge of the cover paper has passed the PS76, CL72 and SD71 turn OFF, and the paper feeding of the first sheet of cover
paper completes [8].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4] [5]
[6] [7] [8]
High
Cover paper feed motor speed
Low
(M74)
speed
Cover paper pick up clutch
(CL71)
Cover paper separation clutch
(CL72)
Cover paper pick up solenoid
(SD71)
Cover paper conveyance sensor
/1 (PS75)
/2 (PS76)
/3 (PS77)
/4 (PS78)
[1]
Cover paper supply signal on
[2]
Conveyed to PS75
[3]
Conveyed to PS76
[4]
Conveyed to PS77
[5]
Pick up roller goes back to its original position
[6]
Conveyed to PS78
[7]
Conveyance of conveyance roller only
[8]
Pick up paper feeding of first sheet of cover paper

complete

The drive force of the cover paper feed motor (M74) is transmitted to the separation roller [4] via the torque limiter [3] when the cover paper
separation clutch (CL72) [2] is ON/OFF.
The separation roller [4] is driven in the direction opposite to the cover paper feeding direction. However, the roller rotates in the same
direction with the paper feed direction as long as 1 sheet of cover paper or no paper is fed because the friction force between the cover
paper feed roller [1] and separation roller [4], or paper and the separation roller is larger than the torque limited by the torque limiter [3].
When multi-feed occurs, the separation roller reverses the rotation direction to feed the lower sheet that contacts with the roller back to the
tray because the friction force drops due to the multi-feed and becomes lower than the torque limited by the torque limiter.
[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
a075t2c019ca
[1]
Paper feed roller
[2]
[3]
Torque limiter
[4]
Separation roller
[5]
Second sheet of cover paper
[6]
First sheet of cover paper
[7]
Pick-up roller
PN -49

SUPPLY SECTION
7.3.4 Paper feed mechanism

The cover paper feed motor (M74) drives the conveyance roller. Cover papers fed from the feeding section are conveyed to the conveyance
section by the conveyance roller.
7.3.5 Air assist mechanism

The cover paper tray is equipped with the cover paper tray fan/1 (FM71) and /2 (FM72), which blow air [4] to the cover paper [3] from the
front and back cover paper guides.
Using the tray fans is effective especially when feeding heavy paper or coated paper. However, in the case of plain paper, it may not be fed
smoothly.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075t2c020ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Cover paper
[4]
Blow-out of air

When receiving a print job, cover paper tray fans /1 (FM71) and /2 (FM72) turn ON, and after the specified time, cover paper feed motor
(M74) turns ON.
7.3.6 Cover paper empty detection control

The cover paper empty sensor (PS71) detects an empty status of the cover paper tray.
7.3.7 Paper feed assist plate

(1) Purpose
The paper feed assist plate (P/N: 56UA4070) can be attached to the pick-up roller to adjust the pressure to cover paper applied from the
roller. By changing the number of plates to be attached to the roller depending on the cover paper type, paper feed accuracy can be
improved.
Using the plates is effective especially when feeding coated cover paper or similar type that is likely to stick tightly causing no-feed trouble.
The paper feed assist plate weighs about 10g and up to 4 plates can be attached to 1 pick-up roller in normal condition. When the surface of
the cover paper is powdery, up to 8 plates can be attached. Increase or decrease the number of plates according to paper type or condition to
improve cover paper feed accuracy.
(2) Configuration
The package contains the following as a set.
[1] Paper feed assist
plate
4 plates
[2] Screws
2 screws (M3
x 8)
It can be purchased as the service part if necessary.
PN -50

SUPPLY SECTION
[1]
[2]
1050to2312c
PN -51
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 > 8. COVER PAPER TABLE

SECTION
8. COVER PAPER TABLE SECTION

8.1 Configuration
[18]
[20]
[17]
[21]
[19]
[1]
[22]
[16]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[15]
[14]
[11]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[9]
[13]
[10]
[12]

[11]
a075t2c077ca
[1]
[2]
Cover paper lift plate /Rt
[3]
Cover paper conveyance arm /Rt
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Cutter
[8]
Cover paper alignment plate /Fr
[9]
Cover paper table up down belt /Fr_Rr
[10]
Cover paper table up down belt/Fr_Lt
[11]
Front side
[12]
Cover paper table up down belt /Rr_Lt
[13]
Cover paper table up down belt /Rr_Rt
[14]
Cover paper folding plate /Rt
[15]
Cover paper folding plate /Lt
[16]
[17]
Cover paper conveyance arm /Lt
[18]
Cover paper lift plate /Lt
[19]
Cover paper conveyance roller /Lt
[20]
Book exit belt /Fr
[21]
Book exit belt /Rr
[22]
Cover paper alignment plate /Rr
PN -52

SECTION
8.2 Drive
8.2.1 Cover paper table up down/Fr and /Rr drive
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
a075t2c078ca
[1]
[2]
Cover paper table up down belt /Fr_Rt
[3]
[4]
Cover paper table up down belt /Fr_Lt
[5]
[6]
8.2.2 Cover paper alignment drive

[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
a075t2c079ca
[1]
[2]
Cover paper alignment home sensor (PS41)
[3]
[4]
PN -53

SECTION
8.2.3 Cover paper conveyance drive

[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
a075t2c080ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
8.2.4 Book exit drive

[1]
[2]
[1]
a075t2c081ca
Book exit belt /Fr, /Rr
[2]
8.2.5 Cover paper folding plate /Rt and /Lt drive
[8]
[9]
[8]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a075t2c082ca
[1]
[2]
Cover paper folding plate home sensor /Rt (PS48)
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Cover paper folding plate home sensor /Lt (PS49)
[7]
Cover paper folding plate position sensor (PS51)
[8]
[9]
PN -54

SECTION
8.2.6 Cover paper conveyance arm /Rr and /Lt drive

[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a075t2c083ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
8.2.7 Cover paper lift drive

[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
a075t2c084ca
8.2.8 Cutter drive

[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
a075t2c085ca
[1]
Cutter
[2]
Cutter home switch (SW41)
[3]
[4]
Cutter motor (M50)
8.3 Operation
8.3.1 Cover paper table section operation overview
1. The cover paper conveyance arms /Rt [4] and /Lt [10] are activated when detecting that the print start signal turns ON, and they are pressed
against the cover paper conveyance rollers /Rt [5] and /Lt [8].
2. When a cover paper is fed [7], alignment operation is carried out by the cover paper alignment plate /Rr and /Fr [6].
3. After the thickness of inside papers [11] is detected by clamping operation made by the clamp pressure plate [12], the cover paper is fed
backward (switchback) [2].
4. The backward feeding is made to feed the cover paper to the roller cutter assy so that the paper edge protrudes away from the cover paper
switchback sensor (PS44) [3] by the trimming amount.
5. The roller cutter [1] trims the cover paper edge and then the paper is conveyed to the left side again.
6. Alignment operation to attach the cover paper to the inside papers is carried out.
PN -55

SECTION
7. The cover paper is moved to left and right by the reverse/forward rotation of the cover paper conveyance rollers /Rt and /Lt for positioning
properly with reference to the cover paper sensor /Lt (PS46) [9] as starting point.
[11]
[12]
[1]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a075t2c086ca
[1]
Roller cutter
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Cover paper alignment plate /Rr, /Fr
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Bundle of inside papers
[12]
8. When the alignment operation of the cover paper completes and CD alignment plate returns to home position, the cover paper folding
plates /Rt [3] and /Lt [5] are opened [4].
9. When the cover paper on the lifted unit attaches to the spine of inside papers [8], the book spine backing plate [1] presses against the spine
to attach the cover paper securely.
10. The cover paper folding plates /Rt and /Lt are moved inward to press [6] both edge surfaces of the spine to create the perfect corners.
During up and down operation of the cover paper table unit, the cover paper conveyance arms /Rt [9] and /Lt [7] are moved away from the
cover paper so as not to let the paper pulled by the arms.
11. The pressures to the spine are applied for 3 seconds for the glue to harden fully.
[7]
[8]
[9]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
a075t2c087ca
[1]
[2]
Lift of cover paper table unit
[3]
[4]
Opening
PN -56

SECTION

[5]
[6]
Pressurize
[7]
[8]
Bundle of inside papers
[9]
12. The cover paper folding plates /Rt and /Lt are opened, and the cover paper table unit is lowered [3].
13. While the cover paper table is going down, the inside papers of the book [7] are held by the clamp pressure plate [8]. Since both sides of the
cover paper [9] bow, the cover paper lift plate /Lt [5] integrated with the cover paper conveyance arm /Lt [6] supports the left-side of the
cover paper. The right-side of the paper triggers the cover lift plate /Rt [2] and supports the cover. The cover paper conveyance arm /Rt [1]
is moved away from the cover paper lift plate /Rt.
14. The book exit belt [4] is moved to the position to receive the book.
[7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a075t2c088ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Down
[4]
Book exit belt
[5]
[6]
[7]
Book
[8]
[9]
Cover paper
15. When the book exit belt is set at the receiving position, the cover paper table unit is lifted again.
16. When lifting the unit is started, the cover paper conveyance arms /Rt [2] and /Lt [3] are folded [1] [4] to keep them from contact with the
clamp section.
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
a075t2c089ca
[1]
The arm is folded
[2]
[3]
[4]
The arm is folded
PN -57

SECTION
17. When the book (inside papers) [8] is released from the clamp pressure plate [9], the cover paper table unit is lowered.
18. At the start of the unit lowering operation, the cover paper conveyance arm /Rt [2], /Lt [7], and the cover paper folding plate /Rt [3], /Lt [4] are
returned to their home positions. When the cover paper lift plate /Lt [6] returns to its home position, it flips up the left-side of the cover paper
toward the inside papers.
19. The book exit belt [5] is activated after a prescribed time has elapsed since the table unit lowering operation is started so that the belt starts
to move at the same time the book contacts with the belt and the book is laid down on the belt.
[8]
[9]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a075t2c090ca
[1]
Book exit belt
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Book exit belt
[6]
[7]
[8]
Book
[9]
20. The cover paper table unit goes down to its home position, and then goes up until the book exit belt surface becomes horizontal to the book
conveyance belt [3] surface.
21. The book exit belt [1] starts to move again to convey the book [3] on it to the book stock section.
[3]
[2]
[1]
a075t2c091ca
[1]
Book exit belt
[2]
[3]
Book
PN -58
Book conveyance belt

SECTION
8.3.2 Cover paper conveyance control

(1) Mechanism
The cover paper conveyance motor (M45) drive force transmitted via the gear and the belt drives the cover paper table entrance roller [3],
the cover paper conveyance rollers /Rt [5] and /Lt [6].
A cover paper is conveyed being nipped between the driven rollers [9] and [10] provided on the tips of the cover paper conveyance
rollers /Rt and /Lt and the cover paper conveyance arms /Rt [1] and /Lt [8].
On the cover paper conveyance path, the cover paper sensor /Rt (PS45) [4], /Lt (PS46) [7] and the cover paper switchback sensor (PS44)
[2] are provided.
The PS44 is used to position the cover paper for trimming.
PS45 is the starting point of when carrying in cover paper to the up/down cover paper section. Cover paper is carried in after specified
time from when PS45 detected the leading edge of the paper, cover paper stops and alignment operation is carried out.
The PS46 is used to position the cover paper to be attached to the spine of inside papers.
[9]
[10]
[8]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a075t2c092ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Driven roller /Rt
[10]
Driven roller /Lt
(2) Control
(a) When conveying cover paper from the PB cover paper tray
1. Upon receiving of a print job, the cover paper conveyance motor (M45) starts to turn in the forward direction [1].
2. The M45 stops [2] when a prescribed time has elapsed after the cover paper sensor /Rt (PS45) detects the leading edge of the cover
paper.
3. When clamping the inside papers is finished, the booklet thickness sensor (PS29) detects the last pulse and the book thickness
information is obtained. Then the M45 starts reverse rotation [3] to convey the cover paper toward the roller cutter assy.
4. The cover paper moves until it reaches the position to be trimmed off by the amount determined according to the paper size setting and
the book thickness information, and the M45 stops [4].
5. When the cutter end position switch (SW42) detects the finish of the cutting operation [5], the M45 starts forward rotation to convey the
cover paper to the left-hand for the alignment.
6. The M45 stops [6] when a prescribed time has elapsed after the PS44 detects the trailing edge of the cover paper.
7. When the alignment operation by the cover paper alignment motor (M41) is finished [7], the cover paper is conveyed to the right-hand
by the M45 reverse rotation for the next positioning operation.
8. The M45 keeps rotating to position the cover paper properly to be attached to the inside papers until the cover paper sensor /Lt (PS46),
the reference sensor for the positioning, turns OFF [8].
9. After a prescribed time has elapsed, the M45 starts forward rotation to convey the cover paper to the left hand [9] and stops [10] after
the PS46 detects the leading edge of the cover paper.
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
[6]
[7] [9] [10]

(PS23)
ForCover paper
alignment Forward ward
Remotor (M41)
verse
ForCover paper
ward
conveyance
Remotor (M45)
verse
Cover paper sensor /Rt
(PS45)
Cover paper sensor /Lt
(PS46)
Cover paper switchback
sensor (PS44)
[5]
[8]
PN -59
a075t2e093ca

SECTION

[1]
[2]
Cover paper conveyance to the cover paper table is

finished
[3]
Starting conveyance toward the roller cutter assy
[4]
Stop after conveying trimming amount
[5]
Trimming is completed
[6]
Cover paper stops for alignment
[7]
Cover paper alignment is completed
[8]
Cover paper positioning reference search
[9]
Starting cover paper positioning
[10]
Cover paper positioning is completed
8.3.3 Cover paper trimming control

(1) Mechanism
The cutter motor (M50) drives the roller cutter via the pulley and the wire.
The front side is the home position and the trimming is carried out when the cover paper is moved to the back side from the front side.
(2) Control
1. When the cover paper is conveyed to the roller cutter assy by the cover paper conveyance motor (M45), the motor stops [1] and the cutter
motor (M50) starts forward rotation to start the trimming operation.
2. When the cutter blade cut the paper and reaches the limit position, the cutter end position switch (SW42) turns ON and the M50 stops. At
the same time, the M45 starts forward rotation to convey the cover paper.
3. When the conveyance by the M45 is finished [3], the M50 starts to rotate again to make the cutter return to its home position.
4. When the cutter is set in its home position [4], the cutter HP switch (SW41) becomes ON and the M50 stops.
[3]
[1]
Cover paper
conveyance
motor (M45)
Cutter motor (M50)
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Cutter HP switch (SW41)

[2]
[4]
a075t2e094ca
[1]
Start of cutting
[2]
Trimming is completed
[3]
Starting home position return operation
[4]
Cutter is set in its home position
8.3.4 Cover paper alignment drive

(1) Mechanism
The cover paper alignment motor (M41) drives the cover paper alignment plates /Fr [2] and /Rr [5], the book exit belts /Fr [3] and /Rr [4]
for changing their positions.
The cover paper alignment plate /Rr presses the cover paper against the cover paper alignment plate /Fr to position the cover paper
properly, and the cover paper alignment /Fr judges the alignment accuracy.
PN -60

SECTION
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
a075t2c095ca
[1]
Cover paper
[2]
[3]
Book exit belt /Fr
[4]
Book exit belt /Rr
[5]
(2) Control
(a) Cover paper trimming mode
1. When detecting that the print start signal turns ON [1], the cover paper alignment motor (M41) starts forward rotation to set the
alignment parts in the positions for the alignment operation, and stops [2].
2. After the conveyance arms /Rt and /Lt move away from the cover paper conveyance rollers /Rt and /Lt by the cover paper conveyance
arm motors /Rt (M43) and /Lt (M44), and the arms stops, the M41 starts forward rotation to position the cover paper to be trimmed [3].
3. When the cover paper is set at the trimming position with the cover paper alignment plates /Rr and /Fr holding down both sides of the
paper, the M41 stops [4].
4. The conveyance arms /Rt and /Lt are pressed against the cover paper conveyance rollers /Rt and /Lt [5] by the M43 and M44 drive
force. Then the M41 starts reverse rotation to move the cover paper alignment plates /Rr and /Fr away from the cover paper, and stops.
5. When the cover paper trimming is finished, the cover paper alignment operation [6] to be attached to the inside papers is performed in
the same manner as for the trimming.
6. When positioning the cover paper by the cover paper conveyance motor (M45) is finished, the M41 starts reverse rotation to perform
preparation operation [7] for the next cover paper table lifting operation.
7. The M41 stops [8] when the cover paper alignment home sensor (PS41) becomes ON.
[1] [2]
[3] [4][5]
[6]
[8]

HP sensor (PS41)
Cover paper
alignment motor
(M41)
Forward
Reverse
Cover paper con- Forward

veyance arm motor
/Rt (M43), /Lt (M44) Reverse
Cover paper conveyance motor
(M45)
Forward
Reverse
[7]
[1]
[2]
Setting the plates and belts ready for the conveyance
[3]
Positioning (alignment) for cover paper trimming
[4]
Stops at the trimming position
[5]
Positioning (alignment) cover paper to be attached to

inside papers
[6]
Starting preparation for cover table lifting operation
[7]
Alignment-related parts return to its home position
[8]
PN -61

SECTION
(b) Cover paper Not trimming mode

When the sub-scanning direction length of inside papers is over 182mm, the first positioning operation for trimming is not performed. Only
the positioning operation for attaching the cover to the inside papers is performed.
However, when the inside paper is smaller than B5 size, alignment is done twice. Once when cover paper is carried in, and once after
leading edge positioning is done.
8.3.5 Cover paper table up down control

(1) Mechanism
The cover paper table up down motor /Fr (M46) drives the cover paper table up down belts /Fr_Rt [9] and /Fr_Lt [5], and the cover paper
table up down motor /Rr (M47) drives the cover paper table up down belts /Rr_Rt [1] and /Rr_Lt [2].
The cover paper table upper limit sensor /Fr (PS26) [3] detects that the front side of the cover paper table that is driven by the M46
reaches the upper limit.
The cover paper table upper limit sensor /Rr (PS27) [4] detects that the rear side of the cover paper table that is driven by the M47
reaches the upper limit.
The cover paper table home sensor /Fr (PS47) [7] detects that the front side of the cover paper table is in its home position, and the cover
paper table home sensor /Rr (PS53) [8] detects that the rear side of the cover paper table is in the home position.
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[9]
[5]
[6]
[2]
[8]
[7]
a075t2c097ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Cover paper table upper limit sensor /Fr (PS26)
[4]
Cover paper table upper limit sensor /Rr (PS27)
[5]
Cover paper table up down belt/Fr_Lt
[6]
Front side
[7]
[8]
Cover paper table home sensor /Rr (PS)
[9]
Cover paper table up down belt /Fr_Rt
(2) Control
1. When applying glue to the spine of inside papers is finished and the glue tank HP sensor (PS33) turns ON, the cover paper table up down
motors /Fr (M46) and /Rr (M47) start forward rotation to lift the cover paper table [1].
2. During a prescribed time period after the cover paper table upper limit sensors /Fr (PS26) and /Rr (PS27) become ON, the cover paper is
pressed against the spine of inside papers, and then M46 and M47 stop [2].
3. After the book spine ends are neatly folded, the cover paper folding motor /Rt (M48) moves the cover paper folding plate /Rt away from
the book and stops, and then the reverse rotation of the M46 and M47 lowers the cover paper table [3].
4. The M46 and M47 keeps rotating until the cover paper table reaches the position to receive the book, and they stop [4].
5. When the cover paper alignment motor (M41) drives the book exit belt (attached to the cover paper alignment plates /Fr and /Rr) to the
position to receive the book, and stops, the M46 and M47 start forward rotation to lift the cover paper table [5].
6. The motors stop [6] when the cover paper table reaches to the position to receive the book.
7. When the clamp home sensor (PS22) turns ON upon completion of opening movement of the clamp pressure plate (the book is released
from the plate), the M46 and M47 starts reverse rotation to lower the cover paper table [7] to receive the book.
8. The M46 and M47 stop when the cover paper table home sensors /Fr (PS47) and /Rr (PS53) detect that the cover paper table reaches its
home position.
9. When the booklet exit motor (M42) drives the book exit belt to convey the book to the predetermined position and stops, the M46 and M47
starts forward rotation to lift the cover paper table [9].
10. In order to align the surface of the book exit belt with that of the book conveyance belt in the book stock section, the cover table is lifted by
60mm and the M46 and M47 stop [10].
PN -62

SECTION
11. When the booklet end sensor (PS61) turns ON detecting that the book has exit to the book stock section [11], the M46 and M47 starts
reverse rotation to lower the cover paper table until the PS47 and PS53 turn ON, and then the motors stop [12].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[8] [9][10]
[12]

Glue tank home sensor (PS33)

motor (M41)
Forward
Reverse
Cover paper table

up down motor/Fr
(M46), /Rr (M47)
Forward
Reverse
Cover paper table upper limit

sensor/Fr (PS26), /Rr (PS27)
Cover paper table HP sensor
/Fr (PS47), /Rr (PS53)
Cover paper folding
motor /Rt (M48)
Forward
Reverse

[4]
[6]
[7]
[11]
a075t2e098ca
[1]
[2]
Completion of pressing the book spine
[3]
Starting to lower the cover paper table for preparing

book receiving operation
[4]
Standby for receiving book
[5]
Book exit belt movement is finished
[6]
Going up and stopping at the position to receive book
[7]
Starting book receiving operation
[8]
Stopped at home position
[9]
Starting lifting to the book exit position
[10]
Lifting by 60mm
[11]
Book exit is finished
[12]
8.3.6 Cover paper folding plate control

(1) Mechanism
(a) OUTLINE
In order to let the book spin ends to form perfect corners, the cover paper folding motors /Rt (M48) and /Lt (M49) move the cover paper
folding plates /Rt [1] and /Lt [3] respectively inward to press the book spine [6] from both left and right side with the spine pressed by the
book spine backing plate [2] on the cover paper [8].
The cover paper folding plate /Lt is used as the reference position [4], and the cover paper folding plate /Rt presses the book against
the plate /Lt with spring load.
The standby position of the cover paper folding plate /Lt is 15mm [5] left from the reference position [4], and that of the cover paper
folding plate /Rt is 15mm [7] right from the right end of the book regardless of the book thickness.
[5]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[7]
[4]
[8]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a075t2c099ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
At the reference position
[5]
15mm
[6]
Book
[7]
15mm
(b) Pressure mechanism

1. The cover paper folding motor /Rt (M48) [5] drives the cover paper folding operation via the gear.
2. The cover paper folding pressure sensor (PS52) [4] detects the pressure applied to the book.
3. The cover paper folding plate encoder sensor (PS50) [6] detects how much the M48 has rotated.
PN -63

SECTION
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
a075t2c100ca
[1]
[2]
Book
[3]
Pressure drive plate /Rt
[4]
[5]
[6]
(2) Control
1. When the cover paper table up down motors /Fr (M46) and /Rr (M47) start to rise to stick the cover paper to the book spine and cover
paper alignment completes, when the CD alignment plate returns to home position, the cover paper folding motors /Rt (M48) and /Lt
(M49) start forward rotation to move the cover paper folding plates /Rt and /Lt outward [1].
2. The M49 stops [2] when a prescribed time has elapsed after the cover paper folding plate position sensor (PS51) turns ON.
3. The M48 stops [3] when the cover paper folding plate encoder sensor (PS50) has count certain pulses correspond to the book thickness.
4. When the M46 and M47 stop upon completion of pressing the cover paper against the spine of inside papers, the M48 and M49 start
reverse rotation to move the cover paper folding plate /Rt and /Lt inward (toward the book) [4].
5. When the cover paper folding plate /Lt has moved to the reference position during a prescribed time period after the cover paper folding
plate home sensor /Lt (PS49) turns ON, the M49 stops [5].
6. When the cover paper folding pressure sensor (PS52) turns ON [6], the PS50 starts to count again until the pressure plate moves 3mm
pressing the book, and then the M48 stops [7].
7. The M48 and M49 start forward rotation to release the book from the pressure [8].
8. The M49 stops [9] when the cover paper folding plate /Lt reaches its standby position after the PS51 turns ON.
9. The M48 stops [10] when the cover paper folding plate /Rt reaches its standby position after the PS50 counted certain pulses.
10. When the M46 and M47 start to rotate to lower the cover paper table, the M48 and M49 start to drive to return the cover paper folding
plates to their home positions [11].
[1]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[8]
[10]
[11]
ForCover paper table

ward
up down motor/Fr
Re(M46), /Rr (M47)
verse
ForCover paper folding ward
motor /Rt (M48)
Reverse
home sensor /Rt (PS48)
encoder sensor (PS50)
Cover paper folding
pressure sensor (PS52)
ForCover paper folding ward
motor /Lt (M49)
Reverse
HP sensor /Lt (PS49)
position sensor (PS51)
[2]
[5] [6]
[9]
a075t2e101ca
[1]
[2]
Cover paper folding plate /Lt stops at the standby

position
[3]
Cover paper folding plate /Rt stops at the standby

position
[4]
Starts to fold cover paper
PN -64

SECTION

[5]
Cover paper folding plate /Lt stops at the reference

position
[6]
Start to apply pressure to the book
[7]
Stops applying a certain pressure to the book
[8]
Releasing book after pressing it for a certain time to

harden the glue
[9]
Cover paper folding plate /Lt stops at the standby

position
[10]
Cover paper folding plate /Rt stops at the standby

position
[11]
8.3.7 Cover paper conveyance arm control

(1) Mechanism
The cover paper conveyance arms /Rt [5] and /Lt [10] press/separate the driven rollers [4] and [11] against/from the cover paper
conveyance rollers /Rt [7] and /Lt [8].
The cover paper conveyance arm /Lt is equipped with the cover paper lift plate /Lt [9] which lifts the left-side of the cover paper to prevent
it from being fold while the cover paper alignment plates (book exit belts) are moved inward to attach the cover paper to the inside papers.
The cover paper conveyance arm motors /Rt (M43) and /Lt (M44) drive the cover paper conveyance arms /Rt and /Lt via the pins [2] and
[14].
While conveying a cover paper, the pins [2] and [14] come off the notches [1] and [12] of the cover paper conveyance arms, and the cover
paper conveyance rollers /Rt and /Lt are pressed against the paper with the spring load [3] and [13].
The cover paper conveyance arm home sensors /Rt (PS42) [6] and /Lt (PS43) [15] detect that the arms are in their home positions. The
upright positions of the paper cover conveyance arm /Lt and /Rt are their home positions.
[1]
[14]
[2]
[13]
[3]
[12]
[15]
[11]
[10]
[4]
[9]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[1]
Notch of cover paper conveyance arm /Rt
[2]
Pin
[3]
Spring
[4]
Driven roller
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Driven roller
[12]
Notch of cover paper conveyance arm /Lt
[13]
Spring
[14]
Pin
[15]
The following table shows the preset angles of the cover paper conveyance arms for each operation.
Operation
Cover paper conveyance arm /

Lt [1]
Cover paper conveyance arm /

Rt [2]
Home position [1] [2]
+90 degrees
+90 degrees
Cover paper conveyance [3]
-30.4 degrees
-8 degrees
Cover paper alignment, attachment [4]
-29.4 degrees
-7 degrees
Temporary lowering of cover paper table

(for book exit belt preparation) [5]
+25.4 degrees
+41.2 degrees
Re-lifting of cover paper table (to receive

book) [6]
-14.1 degrees
+15.3 degrees
PN -65

SECTION
[1]
[5]
[2]
[6]
[4]
[3]
a075t2c103ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Cover paper alignment, attachment
[5]
Temporary lowering of cover paper table (for book exit

belt preparation)
[6]
Re-lifting of cover paper table (to receive book)
(2) Control
(a) Cover paper trimming mode
1. When detecting that the print start signal turns ON [1], the cover paper conveyance arm motors /Rt (M43) and /Lt (M44) start forward
rotating to make the driven rollers provided on the tips of the arms press against the conveyance rollers /Rt and /Lt, and the motors stop
[2].
2. When the cover paper conveyance motor (M45) stops [3] after conveying the cover paper to the cover paper table, the M43 and M44
start reverse rotation to move the driven rollers away from the paper [4].
3. When the cover paper alignment motor (M41) stops [5] after making the arms press against both edges of the cover paper for
alignment, the M43 and M44 start forward rotation to press the conveyance rollers /Rt and /Lt with the driven rollers [6] to prevent the
paper from moving.
4. When the cover paper trimming is finished, the cover paper alignment operation [7] to be attached to the inside papers is performed in
the same manner as for the trimming.
5. When a prescribed time has elapsed after the cover paper table is lifted [8] by the cover paper table up down motors /Fr (M46) and /Rr
(M47), the cover paper folding plates /Rt and /Lt start to move inward to fold the cover paper along the inside papers, and at the same
time, the M43 and M44 start reverse rotation to move the driven rollers away from the paper [9].
6. When the cover paper table starts temporary lowering to prepare for receiving the book with the M46 and M47 drive forces, the M43
and M44 start reverse rotation [10] to support both sides of the cover paper with the cover paper lift plate /Lt and /Rt. It prevents the
cover paper alignment plates /Fr and /Rr from unexpectedly folding the cover paper.
7. When the M41 stops [11] after setting the book exit belt /Fr and /Rr at the book receiving position, the cover paper table starts to move
upward again, and at the same time, the M43 and M44 start forward rotation to move the arms so that they do not contact with the
clamp section.
8. When the cover paper table starts downward movement receiving the book, the M43 and M44 drives the arms to return them to the
home positions [13].
[1] [2]
[3] [5]
[7]
[9]
[11][12][13]
ForCover paper alignment ward

motor (M41)
Reverse
ForCover paper
ward
conveyance
arm motor /Rt (M43)
Reverse
Cover Paper conveyance
arm HP sensor /Rt (PS42)
ForCover paper
ward
conveyance
Rearm motor /Lt (M44)
verse
Cover paper conveyance arm
home sensor /Lt (PS43)
Cover paper
conveyance
motor (M45)
Cover paper table
up down motor/Fr
(M46), /Rr (M47)
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
[4] [6]
[1]
[8]
[10]
a075t2e104ca
[2]
Driven rollers are pressed against the conveyance

rollers
[3]
Cover paper conveyance is completed
[4]
Release
[5]
Completion of positioning (alignment) cover paper for

trimming
[6]
Driven rollers are pressed against the paper
PN -66

SECTION

[7]
Positioning (alignment) cover paper to be attached to

inside papers
[8]
Starting lifting the cover paper table
[9]
Driven rollers release the paper for cover paper folding

operation
[10]
Temporary lowering of the cover paper table
[11]
Book exit belt is set to standby
[12]
Moving the arms to avoid contact with clamp section
[13]
(b) Cover paper Not trimming mode

When the sub-scanning direction length of inside papers is over 182mm, the first positioning operation for trimming is not performed. Only
the positioning operation for attaching the cover to the inside papers is performed. However, when the inside paper is smaller than B5 size,
alignment is done twice. Once when cover paper is carried in, and once after leading edge positioning is done.
8.3.8 Cover paper lifting (supporting) control

(1) Mechanism
The cover paper lift solenoid (SD41) activates the cover paper lift plate /Rt.
The cover paper lift plate /Rt supports the right-side of the cover paper to prevent it from bowing down and being unexpectedly folded
when the cover paper table is temporary lowered for setting the book exit belt at the standby position.
(2) Control
1. When the cover paper table up down motors /Fr (M46) and /Rr (M47) stop after lowering the table for setting the book exit belt at the
standby position, the cover paper lift solenoid (SD41) is activated to move the cover paper lift plate for supporting the right-side of the
cover paper. This operation prevents the right-side of the paper from bowing.
2. The SD41 turns OFF when the cover paper alignment motor (M41) stops after setting the book exit belt at the standby position.
Cover paper alignment motor

(M41)
Cover paper table up down

motor/ Fr (M46), /Rr (M47)
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse

[2]
[1]
a075t2e105ca
[1]
Supporting cover page with the cover lift plate
[2]
Ending supporting cover paper
8.3.9 Book paper exit control

(1) Mechanism
The booklet exit motor (M42) drives the book exit belts /Fr and /Rr.
(2) Control
1. After the cover paper is folded along the inside papers, the cover paper table up down motors /Fr (M46) and /Rr (M47) start reverse
rotation to lower the cover paper table [1].
2. When the book spine corner touches the book exit belt surface (when a prescribed time has elapsed after the table starts to go down), the
booklet exit motor (M42) starts to rotate at low speed so that the book is slowly laid down on the belt [2].
3. When a prescribed time has elapsed after starting the rotation, the M42 stops [3].
4. The M42 starts high-speed rotation to exit the book [4] toward the book stock section when the M46 and M47 have moved the cover
paper table upward by 60mm so that the book exit belt horizontally aligns with the book conveyance belt in the book stock section.
5. The M42 stops [5] when the booklet end sensor (PS61) turns ON detecting that the book has conveyed to the book stock section.
ForCover paper table up ward
down motor/ Fr (M46),
/Rr (M47)
Reverse
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a075t2e106ca
PN -67

SECTION

[1]
Cover paper table goes down to convey the book to the

belt
[2]
Receiving the book
[3]
Temporary stop
[4]
Paper exit of the book
[5]
8.3.10 Waste paper control

The waste box full sensor (PS80) [1] detects a full status of the waste box by receiving a light reflected off the waste paper in the box.
The waste box set sensor (PS81) is provided to detect whether the waste box is properly set or not. The actuator of the waste box activates
the sensor.
[2]
[1]
a075t2c107ca
[1]
Waste box full sensor (PS80)
[2]
PN -68
Waste box set sensor (PS81)
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 > 9. BOOK STOCK

SECTION
9. BOOK STOCK SECTION

9.1 Configuration
[15]
[16]
[14]
[1]
[13]
[2]
[12]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[5]
[10]
[6]
[8]
[9]
[7]
a15xt2c022ca
[1]
Booklet upper limit sensor (PS65)
[2]
Book conveyance arm /Rr
[3]
Book guide /Rr
[4]
[5]
Book stopper
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Book guide /Fr
[12]
Book conveyance arm /Fr
[13]
Booklet upper limit LED (LED61)
[14]
Handcart
[15]
Actuator (for booklet sensor /2)
[16]
9.2 Drive
9.2.1 Book conveyance drive
[11]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[9]
[4]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
a075t2c109ca
[1]
[2]
Book conveyance arm /Rr
[3]
Book guide /Rr
[4]
[5]
[6]
Book guide /Fr
[7]
Book conveyance arm /Fr
[8]
Guide shaft /Rt
[9]
Guide shaft /Lt
[10]
Timing belt
PN -69

SECTION

[11]
Book conveyance belt movement home sensor (PS62)
9.2.2 Book conveyance belt drive

[3]
[1]
[2]
a15xt2c023ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
9.2.3 Book conveyance up down drive

[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
a15xt2c024ca
[1]
[2]
Guide shaft /Rt
[3]
Book lift wire/Rr Book lift wire/Fr
[4]
Book conveyance belt home sensor (PS63)
[5]
Guide shaft /Lt
[6]
Book lift wire /Rr
PN -70

SECTION
9.2.4 Book movement drive
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
a15xt2c025ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Timing belt
9.2.5 Book stopper drive
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a15xt2c026ca
[1]
Book stopper
[2]
Booklet stopper HP sensor (PS68)
[3]
Front side
[4]
9.3 Operation
9.3.1 Book stock section operation overview
1. When detecting that the print start signal turns ON, the book guides /Fr and /Rr [4] and the book stopper [1] are moved to the positions
correspond to the selected paper size.
2. The book conveyance belt [5] is driven in synchronization with the drive of the book exit belt [6] in the cover paper table section, and the
conveyance belt receives the book from the exit belt.
3. The book guides /Fr and /Rr [4] are moved to the positions where they contact with the book side edges to align the book.
4. The book is conveyed downward until it reaches to the position to be stacked.
5. The book conveyance arms /Fr and /Rr are opened to drop the book onto the book movement belt /1 [3].
PN -71

SECTION
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a15xt2c027ca
[1]
Book stopper
[2]
Book conveyance arm /Fr, /Rr
[3]
[4]
Book guide /Fr, /Rr
[5]
[6]
Book exit belt
6. When books have been stacked to the upper limit, the stack of books [1] is moved to the second row [4] by the book movement belts /1 [2]
and /2 [3], and then it keeps stacking the subsequent books in the first row.
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
a15xt2c028ca
[1]
Stack of books at the first row
[2]
[3]
[4]
Second row
9.3.2 Book conveyance and movement control

(1) Mechanism
The booklet conveyance belt movement motor (M62) [1] drives the book movement arms /Fr [8] and /Rr [2] via the timing belt [10].
The book movement arms /Fr and /Rr move in the main scan direction along the guide shaft /Rt [5] and /Lt [9].
The book conveyance belt movement home sensor (PS62) is provided to detect whether the arms in their home position or not.
The guide shafts /Fr and /Rr are moved up or down by the booklet conveyance belt up down motor (M63).
The book movement arms /Fr and /Rr include the book conveyance belts /Fr [6], /Rr [3], and the book guide /Fr [7], /Rr [4].
Registration regulating plate /Fr [7], /Rr [4] slides along the guide shaft /Rt [5], /Lt [9].
PN -72

SECTION

[9]
[10]
[1]
[11]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a075t2c116ca
[1]
[2]
Book movement arm /Rr
[3]
[4]
Book guide /Rr
[5]
Guide shaft /Rt
[6]
[7]
Book guide /Fr
[8]
Book movement arm /Fr
[9]
Guide shaft /Lt
[10]
Timing belt
[11]
Book conveyance belt movement home sensor (PS62)
(a) Operation
1. When receiving a book from the cover paper table section [1], the book movement arms /Fr [6] and /Rr [11] are moved to the positions
correspond to the book size, and the book guides /Fr [7] and /Rr [10] are set at the positions 17mm outer the book edges [9].
2. Then the book guides are moved inward to the positions 2mm away from the book edges to align the book to be stacked.
3. When the book is conveyed downward to the position to be stacked, the book movement arm /Fr [6] and /Rr [10] are moved outward to
drop the book [3].
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[11]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a075t2c118ca
[1]
Standby/receiving book
[2]
Aligning the book and moving down
[3]
Releasing the book
[4]
Book drops
[5]
Gap between the book edge and the guide is 2mm

during alignment
[6]
Book movement arm /Fr
[7]
Book guide /Fr
[8]
Gap between the book edge and the guide is 17mm in

the standby status
[9]
Book
[10]
Book guide /Rr
[11]
Book movement arm /Rr
(2) Control
1. When detecting that the print start signal turns ON [1], the book conveyance belt movement motor (M62) starts forward rotation to move
the book movement arms /Fr and /Rr to the positions correspond to the book size [2].
2. When the booklet end sensor (PS61) turns ON [3], the M62 starts forward rotation again to move the regulation plates /Fr and /Rr inward
until the gap between the regulation plates and book edges become 2mm to perform alignment [4].
PN -73

SECTION
3. When the booklet conveyance belt lower limit sensor (PS64) turns ON [5], the M62 starts reverse rotation to move the arms to home
position and stops [6]. However, when there are subsequent books, book conveyance assy moves the book movement arms to standby
position after returning to the upper limit home position.
4. After releasing the book, the M62 reverse rotation is continued until the arms stop at their home positions [7] turning ON the book
conveyance belt movement home sensor (PS62).
[1] [2]
[6]
[3]

Forward
Reverse
Booklet conveyance belt movement

HP sensor (PS62)
Booklet conveyance belt lower limit
sensor (PS64)
[7]
[4] [5]
a075t2e119ca
[1]
[2]
Stop the arms at the positions correspond to the book

size
[3]
Receiving the book is completed
[4]
Guides stop at the positions for alignment
[5]
Start to move the arms to their standby position
[6]
Stopping at the standby position
[7]
9.3.3 Book conveyance belt control

(1) Mechanism
The booklet conveyance belt motor (M61) drives the book conveyance belt.
The book conveyance belts /Fr [2] and /Rr [1] receive the book conveyed from the cover paper table section.
The booklet presses the book end sensor (PS61) [3] and turns it ON. It detects the completion of the receiving operation.
[3]
[2]
[1]
a15xt2c029ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
(2) Control
1. The booklet conveyance belt motor (M61) starts to drive upon starting of the booklet exit motor (M42) to receive the book [1] conveyed
from the cover paper table section.
2. The M61 stops [2] when the booklet end sensor (PS61) turns ON.

[1]
[2]
a075t2e121ca
[1]
Book conveyance belt drive
[2]
Receiving the book is completed
9.3.4 Book conveyance up down control

(1) Mechanism
The booklet conveyance assy [5] is moved up and down with the book lift wires /Fr [4] and /Rr [3] driven by the booklet conveyance belt
up down motor (M63) [1].
The booklet conveyance belt home sensor (PS63) [6] detects whether the book conveyance assy is at its upper limit home position or not.
The book conveyance belt lower limit sensor (PS64) [2] provided at the bottom of the book movement arm /Rr detects whether the book
conveyance assy is at its lower limit position (top surface of the stacked books or the movement belt position).
PN -74

SECTION
[1]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a15xt2c030ca
[1]
[2]
Booklet conveyance belt lower limit sensor (PS64)
[3]
Book lift wire /Rr
[4]
Book lift wire /Rr Book lift wire /Fr
[5]
Book conveyance assy
[6]
Booklet conveyance belt home sensor (PS63)
(2) Control
1. When the book alignment driven by the booklet conveyance belt movement motor (M62) is finished, the booklet conveyance belt up down
motor (M63) starts forward rotation to lower the book conveyance assy [1].
2. M63 stops when the booklet conveyance belt lower limit sensor (PS64) turns ON [2].
3. When the M62 stops [3], the M63 starts reverse rotation to lift the book conveyance assy.
4. The M63 stops [4] when the book conveyance belt home sensor (PS63) detects that the assy reaches its upper home position.
[1]
Book conveyance belt up
down motor (M63)
[3]
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Book conveyance belt HP sensor

(PS63)
Book conveyance belt lower limit
sensor (PS64)
[2]
[4]
a075t2e123ca
[1]
Book conveyance assy starts to go down
[2]
Stopping at the book release position
[3]
Releasing book is completed
[4]
9.3.5 Book movement control

(1) Mechanism
The booklet movement motor (M64) [1] drives the book movement belts /1 [2] and /2 [3].
It moves the books of the first row stacked on the book movement belt /1 to the book movement belt /2 of the second row.
The shielding plate [5] of the actuator [4] on the handcart turns ON the booklet sensor /2 (PS67) [6] and detects whether there is any book
stacking on the second row.
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
a15xt2c031ca
[1]
[2]
PN -75

SECTION

[3]
[4]
Actuator
[5]
Shielding plate
[6]
[7]
Cart set sensor (PS69)
[8]
Hand cart set switch (MS2)
(2) Control
(a) While in the print
The booklet movement motor (M64) is allowed to drive only when the booklet sensor /2 (PS67) is OFF (no stack of books exist at the
second row).
It allows the driving of M64 only when the cart set sensor (PS69) and the hand cart set switch (MS2) are ON.
When the booklet load limit sensor (PS65) detects that book has been stacked up to the limit at the first row, the M64 starts to drive the
belt and stops after the specified period of time when the PS67 turns ON.
(b) Book manual movement

The booklet movement motor (M64) is allowed to drive only when the booklet sensor /1 (PS66) is ON and the booklet sensor /2 (PS67)
is OFF.
It allows the driving of M64 only when the cart set sensor (PS69) and the hand cart set switch (MS2) are ON.
It drives the M64 with turning ON the book movement button and stops after the specified period of time when the PS67 turns ON.
9.3.6 Book stopper control

(1) Mechanism
The book stopper supports the stacked books to prevent them from falling down.
The booklet stopper motor (M65) drives the book stopper.
The booklet stopper HP sensor (PS68) detects whether the book stopper is at is home position or not.
(2) Control
Upon receiving of a print job, the booklet stopper motor (M65) starts forward rotation to move the stopper to the position correspond to the
book size.
When the job is finished, the M65 starts reverse rotation to return the stopper to its home position, and the motor stops when the booklet
stopper HP sensor (PS68) turns ON.
9.3.7 Book full status detection control

When books have been stacked up to the limit at the first row, the full-status is detected by the booklet load limit sensor (PS65) and notified
by the booklet upper limit LED (LED61).
Since any light to the PS65 is blocked while the book conveyance assy is moving up or down, the PS65 status is checked only while the
book conveyance belt home sensor (PS63) is ON.
Even when the PS65 is not detecting the full-status, continuing stacking books cannot be made under the following conditions.
(1) When the stacked book size is the same

Book thickness is classified into 3 levels; a, b, and c, and allowable number of books to be stacked is determined according to the
combination of a, b, and c as shown in the following table.
Book a: 10 to 30 sheets
Book b: 31 to 150 sheets
Book c: 151 to 300 sheets
Mixing more than 2 among a, b, and c-level books in 1 stack is not allowed.
Books already stacked
Books to be stacked over

Book a
Book b
Book c
Book a
50 copies in total
(30 - a)
(20 - a)
Book b
(35 - b) until detected by

PS65
35 copies in total or until

detected by PS65
(20 - b) copies or
until detected by
PS65
Book c
Until detected by PS65
Until detected by PS65
Until detected by
PS65
*Stacking more books is stopped when the result of the calculations shown in the table become negative value.
*Stacking more books is stopped when the PS65 detects full status even when the result of the calculations is positive.
(2) When the stacked book size is different from each other
It moves the stacked books on the first row to the second row, and then stacks the different size books on the open first row.
When the handcart is not set, bookbinding is stopped.
PN -76
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 > 10. RELAY CONVEYANCE

SECTION
10. RELAY CONVEYANCE SECTION

10.1 Configuration
[9]
[10]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
a15xt2c032ca
[1]
[2]
Relay conveyance roller /1
[3]
[4]
[5]
Relay paper exit roller /2
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
10.2 Drive
10.2.1 Relay conveyance roller drive / Relay paper exit roller drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[9]
[7]
[8]
a15xt2c033ca
PN -77
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 > 10. RELAY CONVEYANCE

SECTION

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Relay conveyance roller /3 (One-way clutch)
[5]
[6]
Relay conveyance roller /5 (One-way clutch)
[7]
[8]
[9]
10.3 Operation
10.3.1 Relay conveyance control
(1) Mechanism
The relay conveyance motor (M92) switches the relay conveyance rollers /1, /2, /3, /4 and /5 between 1000mm/s and the speed of the
main body paper exit, and drives them. *1
The relay conveyance exit motor (M91) drives the relay paper exit rollers /1 and /2 at the constant speed 1000mm/s.
The relay conveyance rollers /3 and /5 have the one-way clutch and it applies for the paper pulling out by the relay conveyance paper exit
rollers /1 and /2.
*1 The speed is switched only for 1051. For C8000/1200/1200P/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, the speed is kept at 1000mm/s and not
switched.
(2) Control
1. Upon receiving a print job, the relay conveyance motor (M92) and the relay conveyance exit motor (M91) turn ON [1] at the speed
1000mm/s.
2. Once the SC entrance sensor (PS2) turns ON and detects the leading edge, M92 decelerates to the speed of the main body paper exit
[2].
3. During the period [3] between when the relay conveyance exit sensor (PS94) turns ON and the relay conveyance intermediate sensor
(PS91) turns OFF, the relay paper exit rollers /2 and /1 pull and convey the paper from the relay conveyance roller.
4. If the speed of the main body paper exit for the next paper changes, it switches to the speed of it [4] after a specified period of time since
the relay conveyance entrance sensor (PS93) turns OFF and detects the trailing edge of paper.
[1]
[2]

1000mm/s
Main body
exit speed 1
Main body
exit speed 2

Relay conveyance intermediate
sensor (PS91)
[3]
[4]
a15xt2e034ca
[1]
[2]
Decelerates to the speed of main body paper exit
[3]
Pull out conveyance by the relay paper exit roller
[4]
Speed switchover
PN -78
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 > 11. OTHERS
11. OTHERS
11.1 Fan control
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a15xt2c035ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
11.1.1
(1) Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4)
(a) Purpose
The fan cools the air above the molten glue surface in the glue tank for the maintenance of a temperature differential to molten glue.
This allows the glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) to detect a drop in temperature precisely when it comes out of the molten glue
that is getting low for the notification that pellets need to be supplied.
(b) ON timing
The M4 turns ON upon completion of warm-up of the glue tank.
The M4 turns ON when the temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects the temperature around the middle in the glue tank is higher than the
preset temperature.
(c) OFF timing

The M4 turns OFF when the temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects the temperature around the middle in the glue tank is lower than the
preset temperature.
(2) Exhaust fan /1 (FM80), /2 (FM81)

(a) Purpose
The fans are provided to prevent an excessive increase in temperature inside the PB-501 exhausting air and deodorize.
(b) ON timing
The FM80 and FM81 turn ON upon completion of warm-up of the glue tank.
The FM80 and FM81 turn ON when the temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects the temperature around the middle in the glue tank is
higher than the preset temperature.
(c) OFF timing

The FM80 and FM81 turn OFF when the temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects the temperature around the middle in the glue tank is
lower than the preset temperature.
(3) Deodorant fan /1 (FM97), /2 (FM98)

(a) Purpose
Exhausts air from the exhaust fans /1 (FM80) and /2 (FM81) to the outside through the deodorant filter.
(b) ON timing
Turns ON FM97 and FM98 with turning ON the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
(c) OFF timing

Turns OFF FM97 and FM98 with turning OFF the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
11.2 Door opening/closing control

When the front door, upper door and the book door are open and the front door switch (SW2) [2], the upper door switch /2 (SW4) [1] and the
booklet door switch (SW3) [5] turn OFF, the DC power supply unit /2 (DCPU/2) is shut down to stop all operations instantly.
When the pellet supply door is opened with the pellet supply door switch (MS1) turned OFF, the pellet supply motor (M33) is stopped
instantly.
PN -79
PN THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 > 11. OTHERS
During initialization and printing operations, the front door lock solenoid (SD80) [3], booklet door lock solenoid (SD61) [6] turn ON, and
disables the front door and the book door to open/close. During idling, jam occurrence or in service mode, SD80 and SD61 turn OFF and
open/close of the front door is enabled.
A message is displayed in the touch panel when the booklet door sensor (PS57) [4], upper door switch /1 (SW1) [9], and relay conveyance
door sensor (PS92) [8] switch from ON to OFF.
When the relay conveyance door is opened with the relay door switch (MS3) [7] turned OFF, the relay conveyance motor (M92) and the
relay conveyance exit motor (M91) are stopped instantly.
[8]
[1]
[9]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a15xt2c036ca
[1]
[2]
Front door switch (SW2)
[3]
[4]
Booklet door sensor (PS57)
[5]
Booklet door switch (SW3)
[6]
Booklet door lock solenoid (SD61)
[7]
Relay conveyance door switch (MS3)
[8]
Relay conveyance door sensor (PS92)
[9]
PN -80
PO THEORY OF OPERATION IC-601 > 1. OUTLINE
PO THEORY OF OPERATION IC-601

1. OUTLINE
[5]
[1]
[1]
DCPS
[3] [4]
SSD
SCB
HDD/1
HDD/2
[4]
FM4
FM3
[5]
FM1
[2]
VIB
FM2
[2]
[3]
[1]
Power source section
[2]
Video interface section
[3]
Interface section
[4]
System control section
[5]
SSD/HDD section
PO -1
PO THEORY OF OPERATION IC-601 > 2. INTERFACE SECTION
2. INTERFACE SECTION
2.1 Configuration
[8]
[7]
[1] [2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
IC main power switch (SW1)
[2]
Power connector
[3]
[4]
Print port (USB TypeB)
[5]
Ethernet connector (RJ-45)
[6]
Service port (USB TypeA)
[7]
[8]
IC sub power switch (SW2)
2.2 Operation
2.2.1 Interface outline
Item
Description
Hard switch
Energizes/cuts off the power of the IC unit.
Power connector
For supplying the power to the IC unit
For connecting to the main body
Print port (Serial TypeB)
For printing with USB connection
Ethernet connector (RJ-45)
For Network connection
Service port (Serial TypeA)
Not used
Not used
IC sub power switch (SW2)
Soft switch
The IC unit is activated by pressing this switch for 1 second while the IC main
power switch (SW1) is ON.
The IC unit is turned to Sleep by pressing this switch for 5 seconds while it is
activated.
PO -2
PO THEORY OF OPERATION IC-601 > 3. SYSTEM CONTROL

SECTION
3. SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION

3.1 Configuration
[13]
[14] [15]
[16]
[12]
[1]
[11]
[2]
[10]
[3]
[4]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[1]
Connector for power source
[2]
Connector for SSD (SSD) SATA
[3]
SATA connector for HDD/1 (HDD1)
[4]
SATA connector for HDD/2 (HDD2)
[5]
DIMM socket (slot B)
[6]
DIMM socket (slot A)
[7]
PCI Express connector
[8]
North bridge
[9]
South bridge
[10]
Backup battery
[11]
EEPROM
[12]
BIOS IC
[13]
CPU cooling fan (FM4)
[14]
CPU (LGA775 socket)
[15]
Connector for FM4
[16]
Connector for HDD cooling fan (FM3)
3.2 Operation
3.2.1 Outline of system control section
(1) Main components
Item
Description
CPU
CPU of LGA775 socket

(only the dedicated CPU can be mounted)
North bridge
GMCH (graphic memory controller hub)

It is one of the chip set that is composed by 2 chips. It is connected to the CPU and mainly
controls the memory and PCI Express.
South bridge
ICH10 (IC controller hub 10)

It is connected to the GMCH north bridge and mainly controls the SSD and HDD.
EEPROM
HDD password is stored.
DIMM
DDR3 DIMM
Only the dedicated DIMM can be mounted.
PO -3
PO THEORY OF OPERATION IC-601 > 4. VIDEO INTERFACE

SECTION
4. VIDEO INTERFACE SECTION

4.1 Configuration
[5]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[7] [8]
[9]
[10]
[4]
[1]
[1]
DDR2 SDRAM
[2]
SDR SDRAM
[3]
ASIC for communication between main body and IC
[4]
Video interface connector
[5]
ASIC for processing scan system image
[6]
Connector for BOX ventilation fan (FM1)
[7]
Connector for FPGA fan (FM2)
[8]
PCI Express connector
[9]
FPGA for processing print system image
[10]
FM2
4.2 Operation
4.2.1 Outline of video interface section
(1) Main components
Item
Description
FPGA for processing print system image Dedicated LSI for processing the print system image
ASIC for processing scan system image
Dedicated LSI for processing the scan system image
ASIC for communication between main

body and IC
Dedicated LSI for controlling the communication between the main body and the IC unit
DDR2 SDRAM
Local memory for FPGA
SDR SDRAM
Local memory for ASIC
PO -4
PO THEORY OF OPERATION IC-601 > 5. SSD/HDD SECTION
5. SSD/HDD SECTION
5.1 Configuration
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[1]
HDD/1 (HDD1)
[2]
HDD/2 (HDD2)
[3]
[4]
SSD (SSD)
5.2 Operation
5.2.1 SSD/HDD section overview
(1) Main components
Item
Description
SSD (SSD)
The following software and data are stored.

Linux OS
IC control software
Preset font
SoftwareDIPSW information
HDD/1 (HDD1), /2 (HDD2)
The following data is stored.

Setting information (Printer Setting, Network Setting)
User install font
Scan data
User profile
Controller HDD Store/Edit job data
PO -5
PO THEORY OF OPERATION IC-601 > 6. POWER SOURCE

SECTION
6. POWER SOURCE SECTION

6.1 Configuration
[4]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Power connector
[3]
CN1 (for controlling the power source unit fan)
[4]
CN2 (for supplying the system control board power +

12VDC, +5VDC, +3.3VDC)
[5]
CN3 (for supplying the SSD/HDD unit power)
[6]
CN4 (for supplying the system control board power +

12VDC)
6.2 Operation
6.2.1 Power source supply
(1) Outline
The DC power supply (DCPS) supplies the DC power to the system control board (SCB), SSD (SSD), HHD /1 (HDD1), and HDD /2
(HDD2).
It supplies the power to the video interface board (VIB) via SCB.
5%$
%0
RKP
%0
RKP
%0
RKP
&%25
%0
RKP
%0
RKP
59
#%
55&
%0
RKP
*&&
%0
RKP
*&&
%0
RKP
%0
RKP
[1]
[2]
[1]
Power source supply
[2]
Signal
(2) Supplied power and signal

(a) Outline of wiring harness color
The following colors are for the power source supply, and the other colors are for +3.3VDC or for the signal.
Black: GND
Red: +5VDC
Yellow: +12VDC
(b) CN1
Pin
Signal
Color of wiring harness
FAN1
White
FAN2
Blue
N.C.
PO -6
PO THEORY OF OPERATION IC-601 > 6. POWER SOURCE

SECTION
(c) CN2
Pin
Signal
SENSE
Orange
+3.3VDC
Orange
GND
Black
+5VDC
Red
GND
Black
+5VDC
Red
GND
Black
N.C.
+5VSB
Purple
10
+12VDC
Yellow
11
N.C.
12
N.C.
13
N.C.
14
N.C.
15
GND
Black
16
PS_ON
Green
17
GND
Black
18
GND
Black
19
GND
Black
20
N.C.
21
+5VDC
Red
22
+5VDC
Red
23
N.C.
24
N.C.
(d) CN3
Pin
Signal
N.C.
+5VDC
Red
GND
Black
GND
Black
+12VDC
Yellow
N.C.
+5VDC
Red
GND
Black
GND
Black
10
+12VDC
Yellow
(e) CN4
Pin
Signal
GND
Black
GND
Black
N.C.
N.C.
+12VDC
Yellow
+12VDC
Yellow
N.C.
N.C.
PO -7
PP THEORY OF OPERATION RU-506 > 1. OUTLINE
PP THEORY OF OPERATION RU-506

1. OUTLINE
[1]
[2]
a0get1c001ca
[1]
Conveyance section
[2]
PP-1
Stacker section
1.2 Paper path

1.2.1 Straight conveyance
[1]
a0get1c002ca
[1]
Straight conveyance path
PP-2
1.2.2 Reverse/exit conveyance
[1]
a0get1c003ca
[1]
Reverse/exit conveyance path
PP-3
PP THEORY OF OPERATION RU-506 > 2. CONVEYANCE SECTION
2.1 Configuration
[1]
[9]
[10]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[1]
[2]
Entrance jam sensor (PS6)
[3]
Entrance roller /1
[4]
Entrance roller /2
[5]
[6]
Paper refeed roller
[7]
Merging section roller
[8]
Exit roller
[9]
[10]
Straight gate
2.2 Drive
[6]
[7]
[8]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
a0get2c002ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Paper refeed roller
PP-4
[5]
Exit roller
[6]
Merging section roller
[7]
Entrance roller /2
[8]
Entrance roller /1
2.2.2 Straight gate drive

[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
a0get2c003ca
[1]
[2]
Rear side
[3]
Straight gate
[4]
2.3 Operation
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching operation
(1) Straight gate solenoid (SD1) control
The straight gate switches the path to the straight conveyance and the path to the reverse/exit conveyance.
The straight gate solenoid (SD1) switches them. When SD1 is OFF, it is set to the reverse/exit conveyance.
When SD1 turns ON, the top of the straight gate goes down and works as the straight conveyance path.
(a) In the straight conveyance mode

When the start button turns ON, the straight gate solenoid (SD1) turns ON to switch the conveyance path to the straight conveyance.
SD1 turns OFF when the job completes.
(b) In the reverse/exit conveyance mode

In the reverse/exit conveyance mode, the straight gate solenoid (SD1) keeps being OFF and the conveyance path is always set to the
reverse/exit conveyance.

(1) Mechanism
The entrance conveyance motor (M1) and the paper exit motor (M2) conduct the conveyance.
M1 drives the entrance rollers /1, /2 and the stacker entrance roller through the timing belt. M2 drives the paper refeed roller, the paper exit
roller, and the merging section roller through the timing belt.
(2) Conveyance line speed switch control

The paper conveyance to RU is conducted in accordance with the conveyance line speed of the previous device, and the paper is exited at
the speed 1000mm/s.
In the simplex mode, the double sheets reverse/exit conveyance is conducted to the paper conveyed at the speed 1250mm/s or 570mm/s (in
case the continuous copy speed of 1200/1200P is 120 sheets/min.).
In the cases other than mentioned above, the straight conveyance or the single sheet reverse/exit conveyance is conducted depending on the
configuration and the mode of the post-process options.
(a) Straight conveyance

When the start button turns ON, the entrance motor (M1) and the paper exit motor (M2) turn ON [1] corresponding to the line speed of
previous devise. A specified period of time after the paper exit sensor of previous devise detects the paper leading edge and turns ON, M1
and M2 accelerate to 1,000mm/s to convey the paper [2]. A specified period of time after the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the paper
trailing edge and turns OFF, M1 slows down in accordance with the paper exit speed from previous devise. A specified period of time after
the paper exit sensor (PS2) detects the paper trailing edge and turns OFF, M2 slows down in accordance with the paper exit speed from
previous devise. A specified period of time after the paper exit sensor of previous devise detects the 2nd paper leading edge, M1 and M2
accelerate to 1,000mm/s again [5]. It repeats these operations until the job completes.
PP-5
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
[5]
1,000mm/s
Entrance
motor (M1) Previous device speed
Paper exit 1,000mm/s

a0get2e004ca
[1]
ON at the speed of previous devise paper exit
[2]
Accelerate to 1,000mm/s
[3]
Slow down to the speed of previous devise paper exit

(M1)
[4]
Slow down to the speed of previous devise paper exit

(M2)
[5]
Accelerate to 1,000mm/s
(b) In the double sheets reverse/exit conveyance (1200/1200P only)

When the start button turns ON, the entrance motor (M1) turns ON at the line speed 570mm/s [1]. After the specified time since the paper
exit sensor (PS3) of the main body detects the paper leading edge, M1 accelerate to 1,250mm/s [2]. A specified period of time after the
entrance sensor (PS1) detects the paper trailing edge and turns OFF, M1 slows down [3]. M1 repeats these operations for each paper.
A prescribed period of time after PS1 detects the trailing edge of the 2nd sheet and turns OFF, the paper exit motor (M2) turns ON [4]. After
a prescribed period of time, M2 turns OFF [5] and at this time the alignment in FD direction is performed. After another prescribed period of
time, M2 turns ON again [6] and refeeds the double sheets of paper and exits them [7].
[1]
Entrance
motor (M1)
Paper exit
motor (M2)
[2]
[3]
[4][5] [6]
1,250mm/s
570mm/s
1,000mm/s
Main body paper exit

sensor (PS3)
[7]
a0get2e005ca
[1]
Start button ON
[2]
Switching to 1,250mm/s
[3]
Deceleration
[4]
M2 ON
[5]
M2 OFF
[6]
M2 ON by paper refeed start
[7]
Paper exit
(c) In the single sheet reverse/exit conveyance

When the start button turns ON, the entrance motor (M1) turns ON corresponding to the line speed of previous devise [1]. After the
specified time since the paper exit sensor of previous devise detects the paper leading edge, M1 accelerate to 1,250mm/s [2]. A specified
period of time after the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the paper trailing edge and turns OFF, M1 slows down [3]. M1 repeats these
operations for each paper.
A prescribed period of time after PS1 detects the paper trailing edge and turns OFF, the paper exit motor (M2) turns ON [4]. After a
prescribed period of time, M2 turns OFF [5] and the alignment in FD direction is performed during the time. After another prescribed period
of time, M2 turns ON again [6]. Then it refeeds and exits the paper [7].
PP-6
[1]
[2]

[4]
[3] [5] [6]
1,250mm/s
Entrance
Paper exit
motor (M2) 1,000mm/s
Paper exit sensor of
previous device
[7]
a0get2e014ca
[1]
Start button ON
[2]
Switching to 1,250mm/s
[3]
Deceleration
[4]
M2 ON
[5]
M2 OFF
[6]
M2 ON by paper refeed start
[7]
Paper exit
PP-7
PP THEORY OF OPERATION RU-506 > 3. STACKER SECTION
3. STACKER SECTION
3.1 Configuration
[10]
[11]
Front side
[1]
[2]
[3]
Front side
Rear side
[9]
Front side
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[1]
Stack switching guide plate
[2]
[3]
[4]
CD alignment plate /Fr
[5]
CD alignment plate /Rr
[6]
FD alignment plate
[7]
[8]
Stack assist fan /Fr (FM1), /Rr (FM2)
[9]
[10]
[11]
PP-8
3.2 Drive
3.2.1 Stacker exit shutter drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[2]
a0get2c007ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
Front side
[4]
Rear side
[5]
PP-9
3.2.2 Stack switching drive

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[4]
a0get2c008ca
[1]
Front side
[2]
[3]
Driven roller
[4]
[5]
Rear side
[6]
3.2.3 Stacker entrance guide plate drive

[1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
a0get2c009ca
[1]
Front side
[2]
Rear side
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Connection roller
PP-10

[7]
[8]
Entrance roller /2

[8]
[7]
[9]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
a0get2c010ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
FD alignment plate
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
3.3 Operation
(1) Alignment in the main scan direction
The CD alignment motor (M4) [8]drives the CD alignment plate /Rr [6] and /Fr [1] via the timing belt to perform the alignment in the main scan
direction. The CD alignment home sensor (PS4) [7] detects the home position.
While the paper entering, the plates stay at 10mm away from each paper edge. The alignment is performed for each stack of paper.
(2) Alignment in the sub scan direction

For the alignment in the sub scan direction, the FD alignment motor (M3) [4] lifts the FD alignment plate [3] via the timing belt to press it
against the stacker exit shutter [9]. The FD alignment home sensor (PS3) [5] detects the home position.
PP-11
[8]
[9]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
a0get2c011ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
FD alignment plate
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
3.3.2 Reverse/exit control

(1) Movement control in the sub scan direction
According to the movement of the FD alignment plate [2], the trailing edge (upper direction) in stacking moves to either of the 3 positions other
than the home position.
Position A [6]: The position at which the paper trailing edge is 50mm lower than the stacker exit shutter [1]. Paper which conveyed to the
stacker is stacked at this position first.
Position B [7]: The position at which the paper trailing edge is 28mm lower than the stacker exit shutter [1] by raising the paper from the
position A [6]. The position of the paper trailing edge is higher than the position of the lower edge of the stack switching guide plate [2]. This
position is used when in the double sheets reverse/exit mode, to feed the paper leading edge of the 1st page into the paper exit path and
stand by for entering of the 2nd page.
Position C [8]: Alignment in the FD direction is conducted at the position where the paper trailing edge touches to the stacker exit shutter [1].
After the alignment, refeeding is conducted.
PP-12
[1]
[8]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
a0get2c012ca
[1]
[2]
[3]
FD alignment plate
[4]
The position of the paper leading edge
[5]
Paper length in the sub scan direction
[6]
Position C (50mm lower than the reference)
[7]
Position B (28mm lower than the reference)
[8]
Position A (stacker exit shutter, reference)
(2) Double sheets reverse/exit conveyance control

When the start button turns ON [1], the FD alignment motor (M3) turns ON to move the FD alignment plate to the position in accordance with
the paper size (position A) and turns OFF. The CD alignment motor (M4) turns ON to move the CD alignment plate /Rr and /Fr to the positions
10mm away from each paper edge and then turns OFF.
A specified period of time after the entrance sensor (PS1) turns OFF and the 1st paper trailing edge is detected, the stack switching solenoid
(SD3) and the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4) turn ON [2] and open the paper exit path.
M3 lifts the FD alignment plate [3] to feed the 1st paper trailing edge into the paper path opened (position B). At this time, M4 performs the
alignment in main scan direction [4].
After the specified time since PS1 detects the leading edge of the 2nd sheet and turns ON, M3 lowers [6] and moves the trailing edge of the
1st and 2nd sheet under the stack switching guide plate (position A).
M3 lifts the double sheets of the paper toward the paper exit path opened again when SD3 and SD4 turn ON [7] and the paper is pressed
against the stacker exit shutter to be aligned in the sub scan direction [8] (position C).
When the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2) turns ON, the stacker exit shutter opens [9] and the conveyance to the paper exit path starts
[10].
[1]
[2] [3]
[6]
[7] [9]

solenoid (SD2)
Stack switching
solenoid (SD3)
FD alignment Up
motor (M3)
Down
CD alignment Close
motor (M4)
Open
sensor (PS3)
[4] [5]
[8]
[10]
a0get2e013ca
[1]
Start button ON
[2]
Opening the paper exit path
[3]
Lifting up of the paper
[4]
CD alignment operation
[5]
Entering 2nd page
[6]
Lowering of the double sheets of paper
[7]
[8]
FD alignment operation
[9]
Opening the stacker exit shutter
[10]
Double sheets reverse/exit conveyance
PP-13
(3) Single sheet reverse/exit control

When the start button turns ON [1], the FD alignment motor (M3) turns ON to move the FD alignment plate to the position in accordance with
the paper size (position A) and turns OFF. The CD alignment motor (M4) turns ON to move the CD alignment plate /Rr and /Fr to the positions
10mm away from each paper edge and then turns OFF.
After the specified time since the entrance sensor (PS1) turns OFF and the trailing edge is detected, the stack switching solenoid (SD3) and
the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4) turn ON [2] and open the paper exit path.
M3 lifts the FD alignment plate to feed the paper trailing edge into the paper path opened. Alignment in the sub scan direction is conducted at
the position where the paper trailing edge touches to the stacker exit shutter [3] (position C). At this time, M4 performs the alignment in the
main scan direction [4].
When the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2) turns ON, the stacker exit shutter opens [5] and the conveyance to the paper exit path starts [6].
Moreover, M3 lowers [8] to the position A for receiving the succeeding paper.
Repeat this operation after the succeeding paper.
[1]
[2][3] [8] [5]

solenoid (SD2)
Stack switching
solenoid (SD3)
FD alignment Up
motor (M3)
Down
CD alignment Close
motor (M4)
Open
sensor (PS3)
[4] [7]
[6]
a0get2e015ca
[1]
Start button ON
[2]
[3]
FD alignment operation
[4]
CD alignment operation
[5]
[6]
Exit conveyance
[7]
Conveyance of the succeeding paper
[8]
Lowering of the FD alignment plate
3.3.3 Stack assist fan control

(1) Control
Stack assist fan /Fr (FM1) and /Rr (FM2) function only in the reverse/exit mode.
When the paper exit sensor (PS3) of the main body detects the 1st paper leading edge and turns ON, FM1 and FM2 turn ON.
PP-14
PQ THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501 > 1. PREFACE
PQ THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501

1. PREFACE
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This service manual is provided for use by an authorized service technician for the repair and maintenance of the GP-501 Punch.
The GP-501 Punch is an innovative, labor saving solution for punching paper in-line and includes the following design features:
Maximum productivity saver with punching in-line at the speed of the printer! Does not slow up or stop the print system.
Quick-change die sets that are self-latching without tools or levers.
GP-501 Punch die sets are available in all of the most common hole patterns and include an Identifying Label providing user with the hole
pattern and name.
Convenient storage area for three extra Die Sets located above the sheet bypass.
Accurate hole punching with consistent alignment.
With each GP-501 Punch, the customer receives a user manual. They are encouraged to keep this manual for future reference.
The information contained in the user manual is also helpful to the service technician.
Please refer to it for detailed information regarding dies sets, operation or specifications.
1.1.1 Setting the Right Expectations

The following excerpts are copied from sales and marketing literature. This customer expectation information is helpful for the service
technician.
1.2 PRODUCT POSITIONING

The GP-501 Punch provides a flexible, cost effective punching solution for light to medium level production oriented customers.
Designed for customers that have the need to punch their documents at a maximum of 60-70% of their overall workflow.
Recommended punching limit to 200K sheets per month. (600k sheets in bypass mode)
Die Sets will decrease in performance over time based on the types of stocks and weights that are being punched.
The expected life of a dieset is 500K punches. However, if paper stock punched is typically 20 lb. bond, then up to 2 million punches can be
achieved.
Should be regarded as a long-term supply item.
1.3 LONG EDGE FEED (LEF) ONLY

The GP-501 Punch is designed to punch LEF only. No exceptions. Attempting to punch a sheet size other than LEF will cause a misfeed.
Use a colored sheet insert (instead of the tab) in the job workflow for easier tab insertion after the job has been run.
PQ-1
PQ THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501 > 2. OUTLINE
2. OUTLINE
2.1 Unit configuration diagram
Figure 1.3 Unit Configuration Diagram
PQ-2
PQ THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501 > 2. OUTLINE
2.2 Paper path
Figure 1.4 Paper Path
PQ-3
PQ THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501 > 3. CONVEYANCE

SECTION
3.1 Configuration
[1]
Diverter
[2]
Aligner Panel
[3]
Punch Module
[4]
Back Gauge Mechanism
[5]
Bypass Assembly
PQ-4
PQ THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501 > 4. PRINCIPLE OF

OPERATION
4. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
4.1 Punch conveyance control
The GP-501 Punch is a machine that punches various die set hole patterns into single sheets of paper. The machine is placed between a printer
and a finisher. The punch has two paper paths.
The punch mode
The bypass mode
The bypass moves the paper from the printer to the finisher without punching holes. The punch path routes the paper from the printer through
the punch to be punched and then routes the paper to the finisher.
1. Communication system alerts the punch machine of the paper entry from the up-stream device.
On receiving the 40 command, AC motors and stepper motor turns on. Diverter gate moves to up position.
2. The paper enters the punch machine through entrance feed section
3. Enter sensor (S1) detects paper and acknowledges transfer of sheet from up-stream device
4. Paper passes through entry guide. Stepper 1 speed sensor (S2) is provided to detect paper jam.
Entrance stepper motor RPM increases to accelerate sheet to aligner path. After trailing edge of sheet leaves S2, entrance stepper motor
slows down in preparation for next sheet.
5. Paper enters aligner panel. Entrance stepper motor accelerates to match sheet speed with aligner speed. Paper is edge aligned in
preparation for punch.
6. Back gauge solenoid is energized and back gauge pedal blocks the paper path. Sheet arrives at Punch module sensor (S3). Punch module
brake disengages and Punch clutch engages. After Punch clutch is engaged punch shaft begin to rotate. Paper punching is done. Leading
edge of flag leaves Punch flag sensor (S9). Then Punch module brake engages and back gauge gate comes down. Trailing edge of sheet
unblocks S3 and back gauge pedal comes up.
7. Paper passes through U-channel. U-channel sensor (S4) and Back gauge sensor (S5) are provided to detect any paper jam
8. Stepper 2 speed sensor (S6) detects paper and triggers exit stepper motor for speed which decelerates sheet
9. Exit sensor (S7) detects paper and determines the paper has passed through completely for other operation or for stacking purpose
[1]
Diverter
[2]
Aligner Panels
[3]
U-Channel
[4]
[5]
Punch Module Sensor (S3)
[6]
U-Channel Sensor (S4)
[7]
Back Gauge Sensor (S5)
[8]
Stepper 2 Speed Sensor(S6)
[9]
Exit Sensor (S7)
[10]
Aligner Drive Belt
PQ-5

OPERATION
[1]
[2]
Exit Stepper Motor
[3]
Punch Motor
[4]
Transport Motor
[5]
Back Gauge Solenoid
4.2 Punch operation

1. Punch motor (AC motor) rotates continually after receiving start commend from printer.
2. Belt turns continually when motor is powered.
3. Punch clutch (Electromagnetic 24V DC clutch) when energized connects Punch motor to the punch mechanism which transmits power.
4. Belt only turns when Punch clutch is energized.
5. Punch module brake is a 24V DC electromagnetic type and is energized when the Punch clutch is not powered.
Punching Operation - Back gauge solenoid is energized and back gauge pedal blocks the paper path. Sheet arrives at Punch module sensor
(S3). Punch module brake disengages and Punch clutch engages. After clutch is engaged punch shaft begin to rotate. Paper punching is done
through cam mechanism which pushes the pins forward. Leading edge of flag leaves flag sensor. Punch module brake engages and back
gauge gate comes down. Trailing edge of sheet unblocks S3 and back gauge pedal comes up.
PQ-6

OPERATION
4.3 Chip tray control

Chip tray switch determines when chip tray is present and informs GP-501 processor that chip tray is present. A signal voltage is communicated
to Punch Controller PCB. If the chip tray is pulled out GP-501 processor notifies printer that chip tray is out. Printer will show the error message
on the screen.
Chip tray full occurs after 5000 punches or is detected by Chip tray full sensor. Clear occurs when chip tray is removed to empty the bin and
GP-501 is powered on.
4.4 Bypass conveyance control

1. Communication system alerts the punch machine of the paper entry from the up-stream device.
Motor starts on receiving 40 command from printer, diverter solenoid goes ON on receiving 15 command from printer.
2. Diverter gate remains in closed position
3. Enter sensor (S1) detects paper and acknowledges transfer of sheet from up-stream device
4. Bypass sensor (S8) is provided in bypass panel to detect jam
5. Exit sensor (S7) detects paper and determines the paper has passed through completely for other operation or for stacking purpose
[1]
Enter Sensor (S1)
[2]
Bypass Sensor (S8)
[3]
Exit Sensor (S7)
[4]
Bypass Panel
[5]
Entrance Roller
[6]
Intermediate Roller
[7]
Exit Roller
[8]
Diverter
PQ-7

OPERATION
[1]
Divert Solenoid
[2]
Entrance Roller
[3]
Intermediate Roller
[4]
Exit Roller
[5]
[6]
Exit Stepper Motor
PQ-8
PQ THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501 > 5. PUNCH MODULE
5. PUNCH MODULE
5.1 Tools Required
Hex wrench, 5/64"
NOTE
5.2 Procedure
Remove the module to lubricate the cams, or to service or replace the following components.
Punch motor
Drive motor belt
Punch module brake
Cams
Flexible drive coupling
Punch Module drive rollers
The clutch can be replaced without removing the module. (refer to F.20.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement).
WARNING
PQ-9
2010 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid

disclosure of confidential information.
CCA1DU-M-E3-0000

Konica Bizhub Press C7000-C7000p-C70hc-C6000 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Konica Bizhub Press C7000-C7000p-C70hc-C6000 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING .....................................................................................A -1

5. SAFETY INFORMATION.........................................................................................................................................A -16

6. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT..............................................................................................A -24

B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS ...............................................................................................B -1

4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS ......................................................................................................................B -4

C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................C -1

Type of paper ..........................................................................................................................................................................C -6

7. MB-504 ....................................................................................................................................................................C -10

Type ......................................................................................................................................................................................C -10

8. HD-514 ....................................................................................................................................................................C -11

Type ......................................................................................................................................................................................C -11

9. PH-102 ....................................................................................................................................................................C -12

Type ......................................................................................................................................................................................C -12

10. RU-509 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -13

Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -13

11. HM-102 .................................................................................................................................................................C -14

Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -14

12. FS-521 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -15

12.6 Note regarding the specifications ........................................................................................................................................C -17

13. FS-531 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -18

14. FS-612 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -20

15. PK-512/513............................................................................................................................................................C -23

16. PI-502 ....................................................................................................................................................................C -24

Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -24

17. LS-505 ...................................................................................................................................................................C -25

18. FD-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -27

19. SD-506 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -30

(1) Straight/sub tray mode ....................................................................................................................................................C -30

20. PB-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................C -34

21. IC-601 ...................................................................................................................................................................C -37

Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................C -37

22. RU-506...................................................................................................................................................................C -39

23. GP-501...................................................................................................................................................................C -40

D OVERALL COMPOSITION .........................................................................................................D -1

2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................................D -4

5.3 Laser exposure process (Step2)..............................................................................................................................................D -8

6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL ..............................................................................................................................D -13

E SERVICE TOOL ..........................................................................................................................E -1

F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................F -1

1.1.11 Periodic maintenance 7 (Every 450,000 prints (C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000)) ........................................................F -3

1.12.3 Spotted replacement (Every 18,900 cuts) .................................................................................................................F -14

2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS LIST ............................................................................................................F -19

3. ORU-M PARTS .......................................................................................................................................................F -25

4. LIFE VALUE ............................................................................................................................................................F -28

5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 ..............................F -29

6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE DF-622 ...........................................................................................F -78

7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PF-602 ...........................................................................................F -84

8. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LU-202 ...........................................................................................F -93

9. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE MB-504 ..........................................................................................F -97

9.2 Paper feed section .................................................................................................................................................................F -97

10. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-509/HM-102 ........................................................................F -100

11. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-521 .......................................................................................F -108

12. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-531 .......................................................................................F -118

13. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-612 .......................................................................................F -122

14. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PI-502 ........................................................................................F -128

15. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LS-505 .......................................................................................F -131

16. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-503 .......................................................................................F -137

16.3.3 Lubricating the punch drive section .........................................................................................................................F -140

17. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-506 ......................................................................................F -149

18. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PB-503 .......................................................................................F -181

19. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-506.......................................................................................F -208